Chapter 1

BEFINITI0NS ANB uENERAL EQ0IRENENTS

1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 SCOPE
The definitions providing meanings of different terms and general requirements for the structural design of
buildings, structures, and components thereof are specified in this chapter. These requirements shall apply to all
buildings and structures or their components regulated by this code. All anticipated loads required for structural
design shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2. Design parameters required for the
structuraldesignoffoundationelementsshallconformtotheprovisionsofChapter3.Designofstructuralmembers
using various construction materials shall comply with the relevant provisions of Chapters 4 through 13. The FPS
equivalentsoftheempiricalexpressionsusedthroughoutPart6arelistedinAppendixA.
ThisCodeshallgoverninallmatterspertainingtodesign,construction,andmaterialpropertieswhereverthisCode
is in conflict with requirements contained in other standards referenced in this Code. However, in special cases
wherethedesignofastructureoritscomponentscannotbecoveredbytheprovisionsofthiscode,otherrelevant
internationallyacceptedcodesreferredinthiscodemaybeused.
1.1.2 DEFINITIONS
Thefollowingdefinitionsshallprovidethemeaningofcertaintermsusedinthischapter.
BASESHEAR:Totaldesignlateralforceorshearatthebaseofastructure.
BASIC WIND SPEED : Threesecond gust speed at 10 metres above the mean ground level in terrain ExposureB
definedinSec2.4.8andassociatedwithanannualprobabilityofoccurrenceof0.02.
BEARINGWALLSYSTEM:Astructuralsystemwithoutacompleteverticalloadcarryingspaceframe.
BRACEDFRAME:Anessentiallyverticaltrusssystemoftheconcentricoreccentrictypewhichisprovidedtoresist
lateralforces.
BUILDINGFRAMESYSTEM:Anessentiallycompletespaceframewhichprovidessupportforloads.
CONCENTRICBRACEDFRAME(CBF):AsteelbracedframedesignedinconformancewithSec10.20.13.or10.20.14.
COLLECTOR : A member or element used to transfer lateral forces from a portion of a structure to the vertical
elementsofthelateralforceresistingelements.
BUILDINGS:Structuresthatencloseaspaceandareusedforvariousoccupancies.
DEADLOAD:Theloadduetotheweightofallpermanentstructuralandnonstructuralcomponentsofabuildingor
astructure,suchaswalls,floors,roofsandfixedserviceequipment.
DIAPHRAGM : A horizontal or nearly horizontal system acting to transmit lateral forces to the vertical resisting
elements.Theterm"diaphragm"includeshorizontalbracingsystems.
PERSONAL COLLECTION OF
ENGR. PRANOY BARUA
BANGLADESH STEEL RE-ROLLING MILLS LTD
pranoy.barua@gmail.com
Part6
2

DUALSYSTEM:AcombinationofMomentResistingFramesandShearWallsorBracedFramestoresistlateralloads
designedinaccordancewiththecriteriaofSec1.3.2.
ECCENTRICBRACEDFRAME(EBF):AsteelbracedframedesignedinconformancewithSec10.20.15.
HORIZONTAL BRACING SYSTEM : A horizontal truss system that serves the same function as a floor or roof
diaphragm.
INTERMEDIATE MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (IMRF) : A concrete moment resisting frame designed in accordance
withSec8.3.10.
LIVELOAD:Theloadsuperimposedbytheuseandoccupancyofabuilding.
MOMENT RESISTING FRAME : A frame in which members and joints are capable of resisting forces primarily by
flexure.
ORDINARY MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (OMRF) : A moment resisting frame not meeting special detailing
requirementsforductilebehaviour.
PRIMARYFRAMINGSYSTEM:Thatpartofthestructuralsystemassignedtoresistlateralforces.
SHEAR WALL : A wall designed to resist lateral forces parallel to the plane of the wall (sometimes referred to as a
verticaldiaphragmorastructuralwall).
SLENDER BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES : Buildings and structures having a height exceeding five times the least
horizontal dimension, or having a fundamental natural frequency less than 1 Hz. For those cases where the
horizontaldimensionsvarywithheight,theleasthorizontaldimensionatmidheightshallbeused.
SOFTSTOREY:Storeyinwhichthelateralstiffnessislessthan70percentofthestiffnessofthestoreyabove.
SPACEFRAME:Athreedimensionalstructuralsystemwithoutbearingwallscomposedofmembersinterconnected
soastofunctionasacompleteselfcontainedunitwithorwithouttheaidofhorizontaldiaphragmsorfloorbracing
systems.
SPECIAL MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (SMRF) : A moment resisting frame specially detailed to provide ductile
behaviourcomplyingwiththerequirementsofChapter8or10forconcreteorsteelframesrespectively.
SPECIAL STRUCTURAL SYSTEM : A structural system not listed in Table 1.3.1 and specially designed to carry the
lateralloads.SeeSec1.3.2.5.
STOREY:Thespacebetweenanytwofloorlevelsincludingtheroofofabuilding.Storeyxisthestoreybelowlevel
x.
STOREYSHEAR,V
x
:Thesummationofdesignlateralforcesabovethestoreyunderconsideration.
STRENGTH:Theusablecapacityofanelementoramembertoresisttheloadasprescribedintheseprovisions.
TERRAIN : The ground surface roughness condition when considering the size and arrangement of obstructions to
thewind.
THREESECONDGUSTSPEED:Thehighestaveragewindspeedovera3seconddurationataheightof10m.The
threesecondgustspeedisderivedusingDurst'smodelintermsofthemeanwindspeedandturbulenceintensity.
TOWER:Atall,slimverticalstructure.
VERTICALLOADCARRYINGFRAME:Aspaceframedesignedtocarryallverticalgravityloads.
WEAKSTOREY:Storeyinwhichthelateralstrengthislessthan80percentofthatofthestoreyabove.
Chapter1
3

1.1.3 SYMBOLSANDNOTATION
The following symbols anu notation shall apply to the piovisions of this chaptei:
D =ueau loau on a membei incluuing self weight anu weight of components, mateiials anu
peimanent equipments suppoiteu by the membei
E =eaithquake loau
Fi =lateial foice applieu at leveli of a builuing
h =height of a builuing oi a stiuctuie above giounu level in meties
hi,hn,hx =height in meties above giounu level to leveli, n oi x iespectively
leveli =ith level of a stiuctuie above the base; i=1 uesignates the fiist level above
the base
leveln =uppei most level of a stiuctuie
levelx =xth level of a stiuctuie above the base; x=1 uesignates the fiist level above the base.
L =live loau uue to intenueu use oi occupancy
l =span of a membei oi component.
Mx =oveituining moment at levelx
V =the total uesign lateial foice oi sheai at the base
Vx =the stoiey sheai at stoiey levelx
R =iesponse mouification oi ieuuction coefficient foi stiuctuial system given in Table 2.S.7 foi
seismic uesign.
S = Snow loau
T = Funuamental peiiou of vibiation in seconus
W = Loau uue to winu piessuie.
W = Weight of an element oi component
Z = Seismic zone coefficient given in Fig 2.S.1 oi Tables 2.S.2 oi 2.S.S
= Stoiey lateial uiift.
1.2 BASICCONSIDERATIONS
1.2.1 GENERAL
All buildings and structures shall be designed and constructed in conformance with the provisions of this section.
Thebuildingsandportionsthereofshallsupportallloadsincludingdeadloadspecifiedinthischapterandelsewhere
inthisCode.Impact,fatigueandselfstrainingforcesshallbeconsideredwheretheseforcesoccur.
1.2.2 BUILDINGSANDSTRUCTURES
A structure shall ordinarily be described as an assemblage of framing members and components arranged to
support both gravity and lateral forces. Structures may be classified as building and nonbuilding structures.
Structuresthatencloseaspaceandareusedforvariousoccupanciesshallbecalledbuildingsorbuildingstructures.
Structuresotherthanbuildings,suchaswatertanks,bridges,communicationtowers,chimneysetc.,shallbecalled
Part6
4

nonbuildingstructures.Whenusedinconjunctionwiththewordbuilding(s),thewordstructure(s)shallmeannon
buildingstructures,e.g.'buildingsandstructures'or'buildingsorstructures'.Otherwisetheword'structures'shall
includebothbuildingsandnonbuildingstructures.
1.2.3 BUILDINGANDSTRUCTUREOCCUPANCYCATEGORIES
Buildingsandotherstructuresshallbeclassified,basedonthenatureofoccupancy,accordingtoTable1.2.1forthe
purposes of applying flood, surge, wind and earthquake provisions. The occupancy categories range from I to IV,
whereOccupancyCategoryIrepresentsbuildingsandotherstructureswithalowhazardtohumanlifeintheevent
of failure and Occupancy Category IV represents essential facilities. Each building or other structure shall be
assignedtothehighestapplicableoccupancycategoryorcategories.Assignmentofthesamestructuretomultiple
occupancy categories based on use and the type of load condition being evaluated (e.g., wind or seismic) shall be
permissible.
Whenbuildingsorotherstructureshavemultipleuses(occupancies),therelationshipbetweentheusesofvarious
partsofthebuildingorotherstructureandtheindependenceofthestructuralsystemsforthosevariouspartsshall
beexamined.Theclassificationforeachindependentstructuralsystemofamultipleusebuildingorotherstructure
shallbethatofthehighestusagegroupinanypartofthebuildingorotherstructurethatisdependentonthatbasic
structuralsystem.
1.2.4 SAFETY
Buildings, structures and components thereof, shall be designed and constructed to support all loads, including
deadloads,withoutexceedingtheallowablestressesorspecifiedstrengths(underapplicablefactoredloads)forthe
materialsofconstructioninthestructuralmembersandconnections.
1.2.5 SERVICEABILITY
Structuralframingsystemsandcomponentsshallbedesignedwithadequatestiffnesstohavedeflections,vibration,
or any other deformations within the serviceability limit of building or structure. The deflections of structural
members shall not exceed the more restrictive of the limitations provided in Chapters 2 through 13 or that
permitted by Table 1.2.2 or the notes that follow. For wind and earthquake loading, story drift and sway shall be
limitedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec1.5.6.
1.2.6 RATIONALITY
Structuralsystemsandcomponentsthereofshallbeanalyzed,designedandconstructedbasedonrationalmethods
whichshallinclude,butnotbelimitedto,theprovisionsofSec1.2.7
1.2.7 ANALYSIS
Analysis of the structural systems shall be made for determining the load effects on the resisting elements and
connections,basedonwellestablishedprinciplesofmechanicstakingequilibrium,geometriccompatibilityandboth
shortandlongtermpropertiesoftheconstructionmaterialsintoaccountandincorporatingthefollowing:
1.2.7.1 MATHEMATICALMODEL
A mathematical model of the physical structure shall represent the spatial distribution of stiffness and other
propertiesofthestructurewhichisadequatetoprovideacompleteloadpathcapableoftransferringallloadsand
forces from their points of origin to the loadresisting elements for obtaining various load effects. For dynamic
analysis, mathematical model shall also incorporate the appropriately distributed mass and damping properties of
Chapter1
5

the structure adequate for the determination of the significant features of its dynamic response. All buildings and
structures shall be thus ananlyzed preferably using a three dimensional computerized model incorporating these
features of mathematical model. It is essential to use three dimensional computer model to represent a structure
havingirregularplanconfigurationsuchasthoselistedinTables1.3.2and1.3.3andhavingrigidorsemirigidfloor
and roof diaphragms. Requirements for twodimensional model and three dimensional models for earthquake
analysisaredescribedinSec.2.5.11to2.5.14.

Table1.2.1 OccupancyCategoryofBuildingsandOtherStructuresforFlood,Surge,WindandEarthquakeLoads

NatureofOccupancy
Occupancy
Category
Buildingsandotherstructuresthatrepresentalowhazardtohumanlifeintheeventoffailure,including,butnotlimited
to:
Agriculturalfacilities
Certaintemporaryfacilities
Minorstoragefacilities
I
AllbuildingsandotherstructuresexceptthoselistedinOccupancyCategoriesI,III,andIV II
Buildingsandotherstructuresthatrepresentasubstantialhazardtohumanlifeintheeventoffailure,including,butnot
limitedto:
Buildingsandotherstructureswheremorethan300peoplecongregateinonearea
Buildingsandotherstructureswithdaycarefacilitieswithacapacitygreaterthan150
Buildingsandotherstructureswithelementaryschoolorsecondaryschoolfacilitieswithacapacitygreaterthan250
Buildingsandotherstructureswithacapacitygreaterthan500forcollegesoradulteducationfacilities
Healthcarefacilitieswithacapacityof50ormoreresidentpatients,butnothavingsurgeryoremergency
treatmentfacilities
Jailsanddetentionfacilities

Buildingsandotherstructures,notincludedinOccupancyCategoryIV,withpotentialtocauseasubstantialeconomic
impactand/ormassdisruptionofdaytodaycivilianlifeintheeventoffailure,including,butnotlimitedto:
Powergeneratingstations
a

Watertreatmentfacilities
Sewagetreatmentfacilities
Telecommunicationcenters

BuildingsandotherstructuresnotincludedinOccupancyCategoryIV(including,butnotlimitedto,facilitiesthat
manufacture,process,handle,store,use,ordisposeofsuchsubstancesashazardousfuels,hazardouschemicals,
hazardouswaste,orexplosives)containingsufficientquantitiesoftoxicorexplosivesubstancestobedangeroustothe
publicifreleased.
III
Buildingsandotherstructuresdesignatedasessentialfacilities,including,butnotlimitedto:
Hospitalsandotherhealthcarefacilitieshavingsurgeryoremergencytreatmentfacilities
Fire,rescue,ambulance,andpolicestationsandemergencyvehiclegarages
Designatedearthquake,hurricane,orotheremergencyshelters
Designatedemergencypreparedness,communication,andoperationcentersandotherfacilitiesrequiredfor
emergencyresponse
Powergeneratingstationsandotherpublicutilityfacilitiesrequiredinanemergency
Ancillarystructures(including,butnotlimitedto,communicationtowers,fuelstoragetanks,coolingtowers,
electricalsubstation structures,firewaterstoragetanksorotherstructureshousingorsupportingwater,orother
firesuppressionmaterialorequipment) requiredforoperationofOccupancyCategoryIVstructuresduringan
emergency
Aviationcontroltowers,airtrafficcontrolcenters,andemergencyaircrafthangars
Waterstoragefacilitiesandpumpstructuresrequiredtomaintainwaterpressureforfiresuppression
Buildingsandotherstructureshavingcriticalnationaldefensefunctions

Buildingsandotherstructures(including,butnotlimitedto,facilitiesthatmanufacture,process,handle,store,use,or
dispose of such substances as hazardous fuels, hazardous chemicals, or hazardous waste) containing highly toxic
substances where the quantity of the material exceeds a threshold quantity established by the authority having
jurisdiction.
IV
a
CogenerationpowerplantsthatdonotsupplypoweronthenationalgridshallbedesignatedOccupancyCategoryII.

1.2.7.2 LOADSANDFORCES
All prescribed loads and forces to be supported by the structural systems shall be determined in accordance with
theapplicableprovisionsofthischapterandChapter2.Loadsshallbeappliedonthemathematicalmodelspecified
inSec.1.2.7.1atappropriatespatiallocationsandalongdesireddirections.

Part6
6

Table1.2.2DeflectionLimits(Exceptearthquakeload)

In the above table l stanus foi span of the membei unuei consiueiation; L stanus foi live loau, W stanus foi
winu loau anu D stanus foi ueau loau.
Notes:
a. Foi stiuctuial ioofing anu siuing maue of foimeu metal sheets, the total loau ueflection shall not exceeu l6u. Foi seconuaiy ioof
stiuctuial membeis suppoiting foimeu metal ioofing, the live loau ueflection shall not exceeu l1Su. Foi seconuaiy wall membeis
suppoiting foimeu metal siuing, the uesign winu loau ueflection shall not exceeu l9u. Foi ioofs, this exception only applies when the
metal sheets have no ioof coveiing.
b. Inteiioi paititions not exceeuing 2m in height anu flexible, foluing anu poitable paititions aie not goveineu by the piovisions of this
section.
c. Foi cantilevei membeis, l shall be taken as twice the length of the cantilevei.
u. Foi woou stiuctuial membeis having a moistuie content of less than 16 peicent at time of installation anu useu unuei uiy conuitions,
the ueflection iesulting fiom L + u.SB is peimitteu to be substituteu foi the ueflection iesulting fiom L + B.
e. The above ueflections uo not ensuie against ponuing. Roofs that uo not have sufficient slope oi cambei to assuie auequate uiainage shall
be investigateu foi ponuing. See Section 1.6.S foi iain anu ponuing iequiiements.
f. The winu loau is peimitteu to be taken as u.7 times the component anu clauuing loaus foi the puipose of ueteimining ueflection limits
heiein.
g. Foi steel stiuctuial membeis, the ueau loau shall be taken as zeio.
h. Foi aluminum stiuctuial membeis oi aluminum panels useu in skylights anu slopeu glazing fiaming, ioofs oi walls of sunioom
auuitions oi patio coveis, not suppoiting euge of glass oi aluminum sanuwich panels, the total loau ueflection shall not exceeu l6u. Foi
continuous aluminum stiuctuial membeis suppoiting euge of glass, the total loau ueflection shall not exceeu l17S foi each glass lite oi
l6u foi the entiie length of the membei, whichevei is moie stiingent. Foi aluminum sanuwich panels useu in ioofs oi walls of sunioom
auuitions oi patio coveis, the total loau ueflection shall not exceeu l12u.
1.2.7.3 SOILSTRUCTUREINTERACTION
Soilstructure interaction effects, where required, shall be included in the analysis by appropriately including the
properlysubstantiatedpropertiesofsoilintothemathematicalmodelspecifiedinSec.1.2.7.1above.
1.2.8 DISTRIBUTIONOFHORIZONTALSHEAR
Thetotallateralforceshallbedistributedtothevariouselementsofthelateralforceresistingsysteminproportion
totheirrigiditiesconsideringtherigidityofthehorizontalbracingsystemsordiaphragms.
Chapter1
7

1.2.9 HORIZONTALTORSIONALMOMENTS
Structural systems and components shall be designed to sustain additional forces resulting from torsion due to
eccentricity between the centre of application of the lateral forces and the centre of rigidity of the lateral force
resisting system. Forces shall not be decreased due to torsional effects. For accidental torsion effects on seismic
forces,requirementsshallconformtoSec2.5.9.6
1.2.10 STABILITYAGAINSTOVERTURNINGANDSLIDING
Everybuildingorstructureshallbedesignedtoresisttheoverturningandslidingeffectscausedbythelateralforces
specifiedinthischapter.
1.2.11 ANCHORAGE
Anchorageoftherooftowallandcolumns,andofwallsandcolumnstofoundations,shallbeprovidedtoresistthe
upliftandslidingforcesresultingfromtheapplicationoftheprescribedloads.Additionalrequirementsformasonry
orconcretewallsshallbethosegiveninSec1.7.3.6.
1.2.12 GENERALSTRUCTURALINTEGRITY
Buildingsandstructuralsystemsshallpossessgeneralstructuralintegrity,thatistheabilitytosustainlocaldamage
caused due to misuse or accidental overloading, with the structure as a whole remaining stable and not being
damagedtoanextentdisproportionatetotheoriginallocaldamage.
1.2.13 PROPORTIONINGOFSTRUCTURALELEMENTS
Structuralelements,componentsandconnectionsshallbeproportionedanddetailedbasedonthedesignmethods
provided in the subsequent chapters for various materials of construction, such as reinforced concrete, masonry,
steeletc.toresistvariousloadeffectsobtainedfromarationalanalysisofthestructuralsystem.
1.2.14 WALLSANDFRAMING
Walls and structural framing shall be erected true and plumb in accordance with the design. Interior walls,
permanent partitions and temporary partitions exceeding 1.8 m of height shall be designed to resist all loads to
whichtheyaresubjected.IfnototherwisespecifiedelsewhereinthisCode,wallsshallbedesignedforaminimum
load of 0.25 kN/m
2
applied perpendicular to the wall surfaces. The deflection of such walls under a load of 0.25
kN/m
2
shallnotexceed
1
/
240
of thespanforwallswith brittle finishesand
1
/
120
ofthe spanfor walls withflexible
finishes. However, flexible, folding or portable partitions shall not be required to meet the above load and
deflectioncriteria,butshallbeanchoredtothesupportingstructure.
1.2.15 ADDITIONSTOEXISTINGSTRUCTURES
Whenanexistingbuildingorstructureisextendedorotherwisealtered,allportionsthereofaffectedbysuchcause
shallbestrengthened,ifnecessary,tocomplywiththesafetyandserviceabilityrequirementsprovidedinSec1.2.4
and1.2.5respectively.
1.2.16 PHASEDCONSTRUCTION
Whenabuildingorstructureisplannedoranticipatedtoundergophasedconstruction,structuralmemberstherein
shallbeinvestigatedanddesignedforanyadditionalstressesarisingduetosuchconstruction.
Part6
8

1.2.17 LOADCOMBINATIONSANDSTRESSINCREASE
Every building, structure, foundation or components thereof shall be designed to sustain, within the allowable
stress or specified strength (under factored load), the most unfavourable effects resulting from various
combinationsofloadsspecifiedinsection2.7.Exceptotherwisepermittedorrestrictedbyanyothersectionofthis
Code,maximumincreaseintheallowablestressshallbe33%whenallowableorworkingstressmethodofdesignis
followed.Forsoilstressesduetofoundationloads,loadcombinationsandstressincreasespecifiedinSec2.7.4for
allowablestressdesignmethodshallbeused.
1.3 STRUCTURALSYSTEMS
1.3.1 GENERAL
Every structure shall have one of the basic structural systems specified in Sec 1.3.2 or a combination thereof. The
structuralconfigurationshallbeasspecifiedinSec1.3.4withthelimitationsimposedinSec2.5.7.4.
1.3.2 BASICSTRUCTURALSYSTEMS
Structuralsystems forbuildingsandother structuresshallbe designatedasoneof thetypesAto Glisted inTable
1.3.1. Each type is again classified as shown in the table by the types of vertical elements used to resist lateral
forces.Abriefdescriptionofdifferentstructuralsystemsarepresentedinfollowingsubsections.
Table1.3.1:BasicStructuralSystems
A.BEARINGWALLSYSTEMS(noframe)
1. Special reinforced concrete shear walls
2. Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
3. Ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls
4. Ordinary plain masonry shear walls
B.BUILDINGFRAMESYSTEMS(withbracingorshearwall)
1. Steel eccentrically braced frames, moment resisting connections at
columns away fromlinks
2. Steel eccentrically braced frames, non-moment-resisting, connections at
columns away fromlinks
3. Special steel concentrically braced frames
4. Ordinary steel concentrically braced frames
5. Special reinforced concrete shear walls
6. Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
7. Ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls
8. Ordinary plain masonry shear walls
C.MOMENTRESISTINGFRAMESYSTEMS(noshearwall)
1. Special steel moment frames
2. Intermediate steel moment frames
3. Ordinary steel moment frames
4. Special reinforced concrete moment frames
5. Intermediate reinforced concrete moment frames
6. Ordinary reinforced concrete moment frames
D.DUALSYSTEMS:SPECIALMOMENTFRAMESCAPABLEOFRESISTINGATLEAST25%OF
PRESCRIBEDSEISMICFORCES(withbracingorshearwall)
1. Steel eccentrically braced frames
2. Special steel concentrically braced frames
3. Special reinforced concrete shear walls
4. Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
E.DUALSYSTEMS:INTERMEDIATEMOMENTFRAMESCAPABLEOFRESISTINGATLEAST25%
OFPRESCRIBEDSEISMICFORCES(withbracingorshearwall)
1. Special steel concentrically braced frames
2. Special reinforced concrete shear walls
3. Ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls
4. Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
F.DUALSHEARWALLFRAMESYSTEM:ORDINARYREINFORCEDCONCRETEMOMENT
FRAMESANDORDINARYREINFORCEDCONCRETESHEARWALLS
G.STEELSYSTEMSNOTSPECIFICALLYDETAILEDFORSEISMICRESISTANCE

Chapter1
9

1.3.2.1 BEARINGWALLSYSTEM
A structural system having bearing walls or bracing systems without a complete vertical load carrying frame to
supportgravityloads.Resistancetolateralloadsisprovidedbyshearwallsorbracedframes.
1.3.2.2 BUILDINGFRAMESYSTEM
A structural system with an essentially complete space frame providing support for gravity loads. Resistance to
lateralloadsisprovidedbyshearwallsorbracedframesseparately.
1.3.2.3 MOMENTRESISTINGFRAMESYSTEM
Astructuralsystemwithanessentiallycompletespaceframeprovidingsupportforgravityloads.Momentresisting
framesalsoprovideresistancetolateralloadprimarilybyflexuralactionofmembers,andmaybeclassifiedasone
ofthefollowingtypes:
a) SpecialMomentResistingFrames(SMRF)
b) IntermediateMomentResistingFrames(IMRF)
c) OrdinaryMomentResistingFrames(OMRF).
The framing system, IMRF and SMRF shall have special detailing to provide ductile behaviour conforming to the
provisions of Sec 8.3 and 10.20 for concrete and steel structures respectively. OMRF need not conform to these
specialductilityrequirementsofChapter8or10.
1.3.2.4 DUALSYSTEM
Astructuralsystemhavingacombinationofthefollowingframingsystems:
a) Momentresistingframes(SMRF,IMRForsteelOMRF),and
b) Shearwallsorbracedframes.
Thetwosystemsspecifiedin(a)and(b)aboveshallbedesignedtoresistthetotallateralforceinproportiontotheir
relativerigiditiesconsideringtheinteractionofthedualsystematalllevels.However,themomentresistingframes
shallbecapableofresistingatleast25%oftheapplicabletotalseismiclateralforce,evenwhenwindoranyother
lateralforcegovernsthedesign.
1.3.2.5 SPECIALSTRUCTURALSYSTEM:
AstructuralsystemnotdefinedabovenorlistedinTable1.3.1andspeciallydesignedtocarrythelateralloads,such
astubeintube,bundledtube,etc.
1.3.2.6 NONBUILDINGSTRUCTURALSYSTEM
AstructuralsystemusedforpurposesotherthaninbuildingsandconformingtoSec1.5.4.8,1.5.4.9,2.4and2.5.
1.3.3 COMBINATIONOFSTRUCTURALSYSTEMS
When different structural systems of Sec 1.3.2 are combined for incorporation into the same structure, design of
thecombinedseismicforceresistingsystemshallconformtotheprovisionsofSec2.5.7.5.
1.3.4 STRUCTURALCONFIGURATIONS
Based on the structural configuration, each structure shall be designated as a regular or irregular structure as
definedbelow:
Part6
10

1.3.4.1 REGULARSTRUCTURES
Regularstructureshavenosignificantphysicaldiscontinuitiesorirregularitiesinplanorverticalconfigurationorin
theirlateralforceresistingsystems.TypicalfeaturescausingirregularityaredescribedinSec1.3.4.2.

1.3.4.2 IRREGULARSTRUCTURES
Irregular structures have either vertical irregularity or plan irregularity or both in their structural configurations or
lateralforceresistingsystems.
1.3.4.2.1 VerticalIrregularity
StructureshavingoneormoreoftheirregularfeatureslistedinTable1.3.2shallbedesignatedashavingavertical
irregularity.
Table1.3.2:VerticalIrregularitiesofStructures
VerticalIrregularity Reference*
Type Definition Section
I StiffnessIrregularity(SoftStorey):
A soft stoiey is one in which the lateial stiffness is less than 7u pei cent of that
in the stoiey above oi less than 8u pei cent of the aveiage stiffness of the
thiee stoieys above.

2.S.7 to 2.S.14
anu 2.S.19
II MassIrregularity:
Nass iiiegulaiity shall be consiueieu to exist wheie the effective mass of any
stoiey is moie than 1Su pei cent of the effective mass of an aujacent stoiey. A
ioof which is lightei than the flooi below neeu not be consiueieu.

2.S.7 to 2.S.14
III VerticalGeometricIrregularity:
veitical geometiic iiiegulaiity shall be consiueieu to exist wheie hoiizontal
uimension of the lateial foiceiesisting system in any stoiey is moie than 1Su
pei cent of that in an aujacent stoiey, onestoiey penthouses neeu not be
consiueieu.

2.S.7 to 2.S.14
Iv InPlaneDiscontinuityinVerticalLateralForceResistingElement:
An inplane offset of the lateial loauiesisting elements gieatei than the
length of those elements.

2.S.7 to 2.S.14
va DiscontinuityinCapacity(WeakStorey):
A weak stoiey is one in which the stoiey stiength is less than 8u pei cent of
that in the stoiey above. The stoiey stiength is the total stiength of all
seismiciesisting elements shaiing the stoiey sheai foi the uiiection unuei
consiueiation.

2.S.7 to 2.S.14
anu 2.S.19
vb ExtremeDiscontinuityinCapacity(VeryWeakStorey):
A veiy weak stoiey is one in which the stoiey stiength is less than 6S pei cent
of that in the stoiey above.

2.S.7 to 2.S.14
anu 2.S.19

1.3.4.2.2 PlanIrregularity
Structures having one or more of the irregular features listed in Table 1.3.3 shall be designated as having a plan
irregularity.

Table1.3.3:PlanIrregularitiesofStructures
PlanIrregularity
Reference
*

Type Definition Section

I Torsional Irregularity (to be considered when diaphragms are not
flexible):
Toisional iiiegulaiity shall be consiueieu to exist when the maximum stoiey
uiift, computeu incluuing acciuental toision, at one enu of the stiuctuie is moie
than 1.2 times the aveiage of the stoiey uiifts at the two enus of the stiuctuie.

2.S.7 to 2.S.14

Chapter1
11

II ReentrantCorners:
Plan configuiations of a stiuctuie anu its lateial foiceiesisting system contain
ieentiant coineis, wheie both piojections of the stiuctuie beyonu a ieentiant
coinei aie gieatei than 1S pei cent of the plan uimension of the stiuctuie in
the given uiiection.

2.S.7 to 2.S.14
III DiaphragmDiscontinuity:
Biaphiagms with abiupt uiscontinuities oi vaiiations in stiffness, incluuing
those having cutout oi open aieas gieatei than Su pei cent of the gioss
encloseu aiea of the uiaphiagm, oi changes in effective uiaphiagm stiffness of
moie than Su pei cent fiom one stoiey to the next.

2.S.7 to 2.S.14
Iv OutofplaneOffsets:
Biscontinuities in a lateial foice path, such as outofplane offsets of the
veitical elements.
2.S.7 to 2.S.14
v NonparallelSystems:
The veitical lateial loauiesisting elements aie not paiallel to oi symmetiic
about the majoi oithogonal axes of the lateial foiceiesisting system.

2.S.7 to 2.S.14

1.4 DESIGNFORGRAVITYLOADS
1.4.1 GENERAL
Design of buildings and components thereof for gravity loads shall conform to the requirements of this section.
Gravity loads, such as dead load and live loads applied at the floors or roof of a building shall be determined in
accordancewiththeprovisionsofChapter2.
1.4.2 FLOORDESIGN
Floorslabsanddecksshallbedesignedforthefulldeadandliveloads asspecified inSec2.2and2.3respectively.
Floor supporting elements such as beams, joists, columns etc. shall be designed for the full dead load and the
appropriately reduced live loads set forth by the provisions of Sec 2.3.13. Design of floor elements shall also
conformtothefollowingprovisions:
a) UniformlyDistributedLoads:Whereuniformfloorloadsareinvolved,considerationmaybe
limitedtofulldeadloadonallspansincombinationwithfullliveloadonadjacentspansand
on alternate spans to determine the most unfavourable effect of stresses in the member
concerned.
b) Concentrated Loads : Provision shall be made in designing floors for a concentrated load as
set forth in Sec 2.3.5 applied at a location wherever this load acting upon an otherwise
unloaded floor would produce stresses greater than those caused by the uniform load
requiredtherefore.
c) Partition Loads : Loads due to permanent partitions shall be treated as a dead load applied
overthefloorasauniformlineloadhavinganintensityequaltotheweightpermetrerunof
thepartitionsasspecifiedinSec2.2.5.Loadsforlightmovablepartitionsshallbedetermined
inaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec2.3.6.
d) Design of Members : Floor members, such as slabs or decks, beams, joists etc. shall be
designedtosustaintheworsteffectofthedeadplusliveloadsoranyotherloadcombinations
asspecifiedinSec2.7.Wherefloorsareusedasdiaphragmstotransmitlateralloadsbetween
various resisting elements, those loads shall be determined following the provisions of Sec
1.7.3.8. Detailed design of the floor elements shall be performed using the procedures
providedinChapters4through13forvariousconstructionmaterials.
Part6
12

1.4.3 ROOFDESIGN
Roofs and their supporting elements shall be designed to sustain, within their allowable stresses or specified
strength limits, all dead loads and live loads as set out by the provisions of Sec 2.2 and 2.3 respectively. Design of
roofmembersshallalsoconformtothefollowingrequirements:
a) Application of Loads : When uniformly distributed loads are considered for the design of
continuousstructuralmembers,loadincludingfulldeadloadsonallspansincombinationwith
fullliveloadsonadjacentspansandonalternatespan,shallbeinvestigatedtodeterminethe
worst effects of loading. Concentrated roof live loads and special roof live loads, where
applicable,shallalsobeconsideredindesign.
b) UnbalancedLoading:Effectsduetounbalancedloadsshallbeconsideredinthedesignofroof
membersandconnectionswheresuchloadingwillresultinmorecriticalstresses.Trussesand
archesshallbedesignedtoresistthestressescausedbyuniformliveloadsononehalfofthe
span if such loading results in reverse stresses, or stresses greater in any portion than the
stressesproducedbythisunitliveloadwhenappliedupontheentirespan.
c) RainLoads:Roofs,wherepondingofrainwaterisanticipatedduetoblockageofroofdrains,
excessive deflection or insufficient slopes, shall be designed to support such loads. Loads on
roofs due to rain shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Sec 2.6.3. In
additiontothedeadloadoftheroof,eithertheroofliveloadortherainload,whicheverisof
higherintensity,shallbeconsideredindesign.
1.4.4 REDUCTIONOFLIVELOADS
The design live loads specified in Sec 2.3,may be reduced to appropriate values as permitted by the provisions of
Sec2.3.13.andSec.2.3.14.
1.4.5 POSTINGOFLIVELOADS
Ineverybuilding,ofwhichthefloorsorpartsthereofhaveadesignliveloadof3.5kN/m
2
ormore,andwhichare
used as library stack room, file room, parking garage, machine or plant room, or used for industrial or storage
purposes, the owner of the building shall ensure that the live loads for which such space has been designed, are
postedondurablemetalplatesasshowninFig1.1,securelyaffixedinaconspicuousplaceineachspacetowhich
theyrelate.Ifsuchplatesarelost,removed,ordefaced,theownershallberesponsibletohavethemreplaced.
1.4.6 RESTRICTIONSONLOADING
The building owner shall ensure that the live load for which a floor or roof is or has been designed, will not be
exceededduringitsuse.
1.4.7 SPECIALCONSIDERATIONS
Intheabsenceofactualdeadandliveloaddata,theminimumvaluesoftheseloadsshallbethosespecifiedinSec
2.2and2.3.Inaddition,specialconsiderationshallbegiventothefollowingaspectsofloadinganddueallowances
shallbemadeindesignifoccurrenceofsuchloadingisanticipatedafterconstructionofabuilding:
a) IncreaseinDeadLoad:Actualthicknessoftheconcreteslabsorothermembersmaybecome
larger than the designed thickness due to movements or deflections of the formwork during
construction.
1.4.8
Structural
deflections
orthatper
effects(e.g
1.5
1.5.1
Everybuild
windorea
1.5.2
Any of the
whichever
shall comp
shallalsoc
1.5.3
Design of
requireme
b) Fut
inst
c) Occ
tha
DEFLECT
systems and
sofstructural
rmittedbyTab
g.creep,shrink
DESIGN
GENERAL
ding,structure
rthquakeforce
SELECTIO
e lateral loads
producesthe
ply with those
conformtoSec
DESIGNF
buildings an
nts:
ure Installatio
tallationsmay
cupancyChang
nthatbeingd
TIONANDC
members the
memberssha
ble1.2.2.orpro
kageorstressr
FORLAT
L
orportionsth
es,incomplian
ONOFLATE
s prescribed in
mostcriticale
prescribed in
c1.3.2.4.
FORWINDL
d their comp
ons: Changes i
increaseactua
ges:Increasein
esignedfor.
Figure1.1:
CAMBER
reof shall be
llnotexceedt
ovisionsofSec
relaxation)sho
TERALLOA
hereofshallbe
ncewiththere
ERALFORC
n Chapter 2, c
effect,shallgov
Sec 1.7.When
LOAD
ponents to re
13
in the numbe
alloadonthef
nliveloadsdue
SampleLiveLo
designed to h
themorerestr
c1.2.5.Incalcu
ouldalsobeco
ADS
designedtor
equirementspr
CEFORDES
considered eit
vernthedesig
n a dual struct
esist wind ind
ers, types and
floorsofabuild
etochangeso
adSign
have adequate
rictiveoftheli
ulatingdeflect
onsidered.
esistthelatera
rescribedinth
SIGN
ther alone or
n.However,th
tural system is
duced forces
positions of
ding.
ofoccupancyin
e stiffness to l
mitationsofC
ionsduetogra
alloadeffects,
issection.
in combinatio
hestructurald
used to resist
shall comply
C
partitions and
nvolvingloads

limit deflectio
Chapters2thro
avityloads,lon
,suchasthose
on with other
etailingrequir
t lateral loads,
y with the fo
hapter1
d other
heavier
ns. The
ough13
ngterm
edueto
forces,
ements
, design
ollowing
Part6
14

1.5.3.1 DIRECTIONOFWIND
Structural design for wind forces shall be based on the assumption that wind may blow from any horizontal
direction.
1.5.3.2 DESIGNCONSIDERATIONS
Designwindloadontheprimaryframingsystemsandcomponentsofabuildingorstructureshallbedeterminedon
thebasisoftheproceduresprovidedinSec2.4consideringthebasicwindspeed,shapeandsizeofthebuilding,and
the terrain exposure condition of the site. For slender buildings and structures, dynamic response characteristics,
such as fundamental natural frequency, shall be determined for calculating the gust response coefficient. Load
effects, such as forces, moments, deflections etc. on various components of the building due to wind shall be
determinedfromastaticanalysisofthestructureasspecifiedinSec1.2.7.1.
1.5.3.3 SHIELDINGEFFECT
Reductions in wind pressure on buildings and structures due to apparent direct shielding effects of the up wind
obstructions,suchasmanmadeconstructionsornaturalterrainfeatures,shallnotbepermitted.
1.5.3.4 DYNAMICEFFECTS
Dynamic wind forces such as that from alongwind vibrations caused by the dynamic windstructure interaction
effects, as set forth by the provisions of Sec 2.4.10, shall be considered in the design of regular shaped slender
buildings.Forotherdynamiceffectssuch ascrosswindortorsionalresponsesas maybeexperiencedby buildings
orstructureshaving unusual geometricalshapes(i.e.verticalor plan irregularitieslistedin Tables1.3.2and1.3.3),
responsecharacteristics,orsitelocations,structuraldesignshallbemadebasedontheinformationobtainedeither
from other reliable references or from windtunnel test specified in Sec 1.5.3.5 below, complying with the other
requirementsofthissection.
1.5.3.5 WINDTUNNELTEST
Properly conducted windtunnel tests shall be required for those buildings or structures having unusual geometric
shapes,responsecharacteristics,orsitelocationsforwhichcrosswindresponsesuchasvortexshedding,galloping
etc. warrant special consideration, and for which no reliable literature for the determination of such effects is
available. This test is also recommended for those buildings or structures for which more accurate windloading
informationisdesiredthanthosegiveninthissectionandinSec2.4.
Testsforthedeterminationofmeanandfluctuatingcomponentsofforcesandpressuresshallbeconsideredtobe
properlyconductedonlyifthefollowingrequirementsaresatisfied:
a) Thenaturalwindhasbeenmodelledtoaccountforthevariationofwindspeedwithheight,
b) The intensity of the longitudinal components of turbulence has been taken into consideration in the
model,
c) The geometric scale of the structural model is not more than three times the geometric scale of the
longitudinalcomponentofturbulence,
d) Theresponsecharacteristicsofthewindtunnelinstrumentationareconsistentwiththemeasurements
tobemade,and
e) The Reynolds number is taken into consideration when determining forces and pressures on the
structuralelements.
Chapter1
15

Tests for the purpose of determining the dynamic response of a structure shall be considered to be properly
conducted only if requirements (a) through (e) above are fulfilled and, in addition, the structural model is scaled
withdueconsiderationtolength,distributionofmass,stiffnessanddampingofthestructure.
1.5.3.6 WINDLOADSDURINGCONSTRUCTION
Buildings, structures and portions thereof under construction, and construction structures such as formwork,
stagingetc.shallbeprovidedwithadequatetemporarybracingsorotherlateralsupportstoresistthewindloadon
themduringtheerectionandconstructionphase.
1.5.3.7 MASONRYCONSTRUCTIONINHIGHWINDREGIONS
Designandconstructionof masonrystructuresin highwindregionsshallconformtotherequirementsofrelevant
sectionsofChapter7.
1.5.3.8 HEIGHTLIMITS
UnlessotherwisespecifiedelsewhereinthisCode,noheightlimitsshallbeimposed,ingeneral,onthedesignand
constructionofbuildingsorstructurestoresistwindinducedforces.
1.5.4 DESIGNFOREARTHQUAKEFORCES
Design of structures and components thereof to resist the effects of earthquake forces shall comply with the
requirementsofthissection.
1.5.4.1 BASICDESIGNCONSIDERATION
Forthepurposeofearthquakeresistantdesign,eachstructureshallbeplacedinoneoftheseismiczonesasgivenin
Sec 2.5.6.2 and assigned with a structure importance category as set forth in Sec 2.5.7.1. The seismic forces on
structuresshallbedeterminedconsideringseismiczoning,sitesoilcharacteristics,structureimportance,structural
systems and configurations, height and dynamic properties of the structure as provided in Sec 2.5. The structural
systemandconfigurationtypesforabuildingorastructureshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththeprovisions
ofSec2.5.7.4.Otherseismicdesignrequirementsshallbethosespecifiedinthissection.
1.5.4.2 REQUIREMENTSFORDIRECTIONALEFFECTS
Thedirectionsofapplicationofseismicforcesusedinthedesignshallbethosewhichwillproducethemostcritical
loadeffects.Earthquakeforcesactinbothprincipaldirectionsofthebuildingsimultaneously.Designprovisionsfor
consideringearthquakecomponentinorthogonaldirectionshavebeenprovidedinSec2.5.15.1.
1.5.4.3 STRUCTURALSYSTEMANDCONFIGURATIONREQUIREMENTS
Seismicdesignprovisionsimposethefollowinglimitationsontheuseofstructuralsystemsandconfigurations:
a) The structural system used shall satisfy requirements of the Seismic Design Category (defined in
Sec.2.5.7.2)andheightlimitationsgiveninSec2.5.7.4.
b) StructuresassignedtoSeismicDesignCategoryDhavingverticalirregularityTypeVbofTable1.3.2
shall not be permitted. Structures with such vertical irregularity may be permitted for Seismic
DesignCategoryBorCbutshallnotbeovertwostoriesor9minheight.
c) Structures having irregular features described in Table 1.3.2 or 1.3.3 shall be designed in
compliancewiththeadditionalrequirementsofthesectionsreferencedintheseTables.
Part6
16

d) Special Structural Systems defined in Sec 1.3.2.5 may be permitted if it can be demonstrated by
analytical and test data to be equivalent, with regard to dynamic characteristics, lateral force
resistance and energy absorption, to one of the structural systems listed in Table 2.5.7, for
obtaininganequivalentRandC
d
valueforseismicdesign.

1.5.4.4 METHODSOFANALYSIS
Earthquake forces and their effects on various structural elements shall be determined by using either a static
analysismethodoradynamicanalysismethodwhicheverisapplicablebasedonthelimitationssetforthinSec2.5.7
through2.5.14andconformingtoSec1.2.7.
1.5.4.5 MINIMUMDESIGNSEISMICFORCE
The minimum design seismic forces shall be those determined in accordance with the Sec 2.5.7 through 2.5.14
whicheverisapplicable.
1.5.4.6 DISTRIBUTIONOFSEISMICFORCES
Thetotallateralseismicforcesandmomentsshallbedistributedamongvariousresistingelementsatanyleveland
alongtheverticaldirectionofabuildingorstructureinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec2.5.7through2.5.14
asappropriate.
1.5.4.7 VERTICALCOMPONENTSOFSEISMICFORCES
DesignprovisionsforconsideringverticalcomponentofearthquakegroundmotionisgiveninSec2.5.15.2
1.5.4.8 HEIGHTLIMITS
Heightlimitationsfor different structuralsystemsaregiveninTable2.5.7ofSec2.5.7.4ofPart6ofthis codeas a
functionofseismicdesigncategory.
1.5.4.9 NONBUILDINGSTRUCTURES
SeismiclateralforceonnonbuildingstructuresshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofChapter15
ofASCE705.However,provisionsofChapter15ofASCE705maybesimplified,consistentwiththeprovisionsof
Section2.5ofPart6ofthiscode.Otherdesignrequirementsshallbethoseprovidedinthischapter.
1.5.5 OVERTURNINGREQUIREMENTS
Everystructureshallbedesignedtoresisttheoverturningeffectscausedbywindorearthquakeforcesspecifiedin
Sec2.4and2.5respectivelyaswellotherlateralforceslikeearthpressure,tidalsurgeetc.Theoverturningmoment
M
x
atanystoreylevelxofabuildingshallbedeterminedas:
H
x
= F

n
=1
(b

-b
x
) (1.S.1)
where,
h
i
,h
x
,h
n
= Heightinmetresatleveli,xornrespectively.
F
i
= Lateralforceappliedatleveli,i=1ton.
Chapter1
17

Atanylevel,theincrementofoverturningmomentshallbedistributedtothevariousresistingelementsinthesame
mannerasthedistributionofhorizontalshearprescribedinSec2.5.9.5.Overturningeffectsoneveryelementshall
becarrieddowntothefoundationlevel.
1.5.6 DRIFTANDBUILDINGSEPARATION
1.5.6.1 STOREYDRIFTLIMITATION
Storeydriftisthehorizontaldisplacementofonelevelofabuildingorstructurerelativetothelevelaboveorbelow
duetothedesigngravity(deadandliveloads)orlateralforces(e.g.windandearthquakeloads).Exceptotherwise
permitted in Sec 1.3.4.2.1 calculated storey drift shall include both translational and torsional deflections and
conformtothefollowingrequirements:
1. Storeydrift,,forloadsotherthanearthquakeloads,shallbelimitedasfollows:
0.005h forT<0.7second.
0.004h forT0.7second.
0.0025h forunreinforcedmasonrystructures.
where,h=heightofthebuildingorstructure.
TheperiodTusedinthiscalculationshallbethesameasthatusedfordeterminingthebaseshear
inSec2.5.9.2.
2. Thedriftlimitssetoutin(1)abovemaybe exceeded whereitcanbe demonstratedthatgreater
driftcanbetoleratedbybothstructuralandnonstructuralelementswithoutaffectinglifesafety.
3. Forearthquakeloads, thestorydrift,,shall be limitedinaccordance withthelimitssetforthin
Sec2.5.16.1
1.5.6.2 SWAYLIMITATION
The overall sway (horizontal deflection) at the top level of the building or structure due to wind loading shall be
limitedto
1
/
500
timesofthetotalheightofthebuildingabovebase.
1.5.7 BUILDINGSEPARATION
Allcomponentsofastructureshallbedesignedandconstructedtoactasanintegralunitunlesstheyareseparated
structurally by a distance sufficient to avoid contact under the most unfavourable condition of deflections due to
lateralloads.Forseismicloads,designguidelinesaregiveninSec2.5.16.3.
1.5.8 PDELTAEFFECTS
TheresultingmemberforcesandmomentsandthestoreydriftsinducedbyPDeltaeffectsneednotbeconsidered
when the stability coefficient () remains within 0.10. This coefficient (described in Sec 2.5.9.9) may be evaluated
foranystoreyastheproductofthe totalvertical deadandliveloadsabovethestoreyandthelateraldriftinthat
storeydividedbytheproductofthestoreyshearinthatstoreyandtheheightofthatstorey.
1.5.9 UPLIFTEFFECTS
Uplifteffectscausedduetolateralloadsshallbeconsideredindesign.Whenallowable(working)stressmethodis
usedfordesign,deadloadsusedtoreduceupliftshallbemultipliedbyafactorof0.85.
Part6
18

1.6 DESIGNFORMISCELLANEOUSLOADS
1.6.1 GENERAL
Buildings, structures and components thereof, when subject to loads other than dead, live, wind and earthquake
loads,shallbedesignedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthissection.Miscellaneousloads,suchasthosedueto
temperature,rain,floodandsurgeetc.onbuildingsorstructures,shallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSec2.6.
Structuralmemberssubjecttomiscellaneousloads,notspecifiedinSec2.6shallbedesignedusingwellestablished
methodsgiveninanyreliablereferences,andcomplyingwiththeotherrequirementsofthisCode.
1.6.2 SELFSTRAININGFORCES
Selfstraining forces such as those arising due to assumed differential settlements of foundations and from
restraineddimensionalchangesduetotemperature,moisture,shrinkage,creep,andsimilareffects,shallbetaken
intoconsiderationinthedesignofstructuralmembers.
1.6.3 STRESSREVERSALANDFATIGUE
Structural members and joints shall be investigated and designed against possible stress reversals caused due to
various construction loads. Where required, allowance shall be made in the design to account for the effects of
fatigue.Theallowablestressmaybeappropriatelyreducedtoaccountforsucheffectsinthestructuralmembers.
1.6.4 FLOOD,TIDAL/STORMSURGEANDTSUNAMI
Buildings, structures and components thereof shall be designed, constructed and anchored to resist flotation,
collapseoranypermanentmovementduetoloadsincludingflood,tidal/Stormsurgeandtsunami,whenapplicable.
Structural members shall be designed to resist both hydrostatic and significant hydrodynamic loads and effects of
buoyancy resulting from flood or surge. Flood and surge loads on buildings and structures shall be determined in
accordance with Sec 2.6.4. Load combination including flood and surge loads shall conform to Sec 2.7. Design of
foundationstosustaintheseloadeffectsshallconformtotheprovisionsofSec1.8.
Stability against overturning and sliding caused due to wind and flood or surge loads simultaneously shall be
investigated,andsucheffectsshallberesistedwithaminimumfactorofsafetyof1.5,consideringdeadloadonly.
1.6.5 RAINLOADS
Roofsofthebuildingsandstructuresaswellastheirothercomponentswhichmayhavethecapabilityofretaining
rainwatershallbedesignedforadequategravityloadinducedbyponding.Roofsandsuchothercomponentsshall
beanalysedanddesignedforloadduetopondingcausedbyaccidentalblockageofdrainagesystemcomplyingwith
Sec.2.6.3.
1.6.6 OTHERLOADS
Buildingsandstructuresandtheircomponentsshallbeanalyzedanddesignedforstressescausedbythefollowing
effects
a. TemparatureEffects(Sec2.6.5).
b. SoilandHydrostaticPressure(Sec2.6.6).
c. ImpactsandCollisions
d. Explosions(Sec2.6.7).
Chapter1
19

e. Fire
f. VerticalForcesonAirRaidShelters(Sec2.6.8).
g. LoadsonHelicopterLandingAreas(Sec2.6.9).
h. ErectionandConstructionLoads(Sec2.6.10).
i. MovingLoadsforCraneMovements
j. CreepandShrinkage
k. DynamicLoadsduetoVibrations
l. ConstructionLoads
Designofbuildingsandstructuresshallincludeloadingandstressescausedbytheaboveeffectsinaccordancewith
theprovisionssetforthinChapter2.
1.7 DETAILEDDESIGNREQUIREMENTS
1.7.1 GENERAL
All structural framing systems shall comply with the requirements of this section. Only the elements of the
designated lateral force resisting systems can be used to resist design lateral forces specified in Chapter 2. The
individualcomponentsshallbedesignedtoresisttheprescribedforcesactingonthem.Designofcomponentsshall
alsocomplywiththespecific requirementsforthematerialscontainedinChapters4through13.Inaddition,such
framingsystemsandcomponentsshallcomplywiththedesignrequirementsprovidedinthissection.
1.7.2 STRUCTURALFRAMINGSYSTEMS
ThebasicstructuralsystemsaredefinedinSec1.3.2andshowninTable1.3.1,andeachtypeissubdividedbythe
typesofframingelementsusedtoresistthelateralforces.Thestructuralsystemusedshallsatisfyrequirementsof
seismic design category and height limitations indicated in Table 2.5.7. Special framing requirements are given in
thefollowingsectionsinadditiontothoseprovidedinChapters4through13.
1.7.3 DETAILINGREQUIREMENTSFORCOMBINATIONSOFSTRUCTURAL
SYSTEMS:
Forcomponentscommontodifferentstructuralsystems,amorerestrictivedetailingshallbeprovided.
1.7.3.1 CONNECTIONSTORESISTSEISMICFORCES
Connections which resist prescribed seismic forces shall be designed in accordance with the seismic design
requirements provided in Chapters 4 through 13. Detailed sketches for these connections shall be given in the
structuraldrawings.
1.7.3.2 DEFORMATIONCOMPATIBILITY
Allframingelementsnotrequiredbydesigntobepartofthelateralforceresistingsystem,shallbeinvestigatedand
showntobeadequateforverticalloadcarryingcapacitywhensubjectedtolateraldisplacementsresultingfromthe
seismic lateral forces. For designs using working stress methods, this capacity may be determined using an
allowablestressincreaseof30percent.PDeltaeffectsonsuchelementsshallbeaccountedfor.
Part6
20

a. Adjoining Rigid Elements : Moment resisting frames may be enclosed or adjoined by more rigid
elementswhichwouldtendtopreventaspaceframefromresistinglateralforceswhereitcanbe
shownthattheactionorfailureofthemorerigidelementswill notimpairtheverticalandlateral
loadresistingabilityofthespaceframe.
b. Exterior Elements : Exterior nonbearing, nonshearwall panels or elements which are attached to
orenclosetheexteriorofastructure,shallbedesignedtoresisttheforcesaccordingtoSec.2.5.17
of Chapter 2, if seismic forces are present, and shall accommodate movements of the structure
resulting from lateral forces or temperature changes. Such elements shall be supported by
structural members or by mechanical connections and fasteners joining them to structural
membersinaccordancewiththefollowingprovisions:
i. Connectionsandpaneljointsshallallowforarelativemovementbetweenstoreysofnotless
than two times the storey drift caused by wind forces or design seismic forces, or 12 mm,
whicheverisgreater.
ii. Connections to permit movement in the plane of the panel for storey drift shall be either
slidingconnectionsusingslottedoroversizedholes,connectionswhichpermitmovementby
bendingofsteel,orotherconnectionsprovidingequivalentslidingandductilitycapacity.
iii. Bodies of connections shall have sufficient ductility and rotation capability to preclude any
fractureoftheanchoringelementsorbrittlefailuresatornearweldings.
iv. Bodies of the connection shall be designed for 1.33 times the seismic force determined by
Sec.2.5.17ofChapter2,orequivalent.
v. All fasteners in the connection system, such as bolts, inserts, welds, dowels etc. shall be
designedfor4timestheforcesdeterminedbySec.2.5.17ofChapter2orequivalent.
vi. Fastenersembeddedinconcreteshallbeattachedto,orhookedaroundreinforcingsteel,or
otherwiseterminatedsoastotransferforcestothereinforcingsteeleffectively.
1.7.3.3 TIESANDCONTINUITY
All parts of a structure shall be interconnected. These connections shall be capable of transmitting the prescribed
lateralforcetothelateralforceresistingsystem.Individualmembers,includingthosenotpartoftheseismicforce
resisting system, shall be provided with adequate strength to resist the shears, axial forces, and moments
determined in accordance with this standard. Connections shall develop the strength of the connected members
andshallbecapableoftransmittingtheseismicforce(F
p
)inducedbythepartsbeingconnected.
1.7.3.4 COLLECTORELEMENTS
Collector elements shall be provided which are capable of transferring the lateral forces originating in other
portionsofthestructuretotheelementprovidingtheresistancetothoseforces.
1.7.3.5 CONCRETEFRAMES
Whenconcreteframesareprovidedbydesigntobepartofthelateralforceresistingsystem,theyshallconformto
thefollowingprovisions:
a) InSeismicZones3and4theseframesshallbedesignedasspecialmomentresistingframes(SMRF).
b) InSeismicZone2theyshall,asaminimum,beintermediatemomentresistingframes(IMRF).
Chapter1
21

1.7.3.6 ANCHORAGEOFCONCRETEANDMASONRYSTRUCTURALWALLS
The concrete and masonry structural walls shall be anchored to supporting construction. The anchorage shall
provide a positive direct connection between the wall and floor or roof and shall be capable of resisting the
horizontal forces specified in Secs 2.4.13 and 2.5.17, or a minimum force of 4.09 kN/m of wall. Walls shall be
designed to resist bending between anchors where the anchor spacing exceeds 1.2 m. In masonry walls of hollow
units or cavity walls, anchors shall be embedded in a reinforced grouted structural element of the wall.
Deformations of the floor and roof diaphragms shall be considered in the design of the supported walls and the
anchorageforcesinthediaphragmsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSec1.7.3.9below.
1.7.3.7 BOUNDARYMEMBERS
Specially detailed boundary members shall be considered for shearwalls and shearwall elements whenever their
designisgovernedbyflexure.
1.7.3.8 FLOORANDROOFDIAPHRAGMS
Deflection in the plane of the diaphragm shall not exceed the permissible deflection of the attached elements.
Permissible deflection shall be that deflection which will permit the attached element to maintain its structural
integrityundertheindividualloadingandcontinuetosupporttheprescribedloads.Designofdiaphragmsshallalso
complywiththefollowingrequirements.
a) DiaphragmForces:DiaphragmsshallbedesignedtoresisttheseismicforcesgiveninSec2.5or
forsimilarnonseismiclateralforces,whicheverisgreater.
b) DiaphragmTies:Diaphragmssupportingconcreteor masonrywallsshallhave continuousties,or
struts between the diaphragm chords to distribute the anchorage forces specified in Sec 1.7.3.6
above.Addedchordsmaybeprovidedtoformsubdiaphragmstotransmittheanchorageforcesto
themaincrossties.
c) Wood Diaphragms : Where wood diaphragms are used to laterally support concrete or masonry
walls,theanchorageshallconformtoSec1.7.3.6above.InseismicZones2,3and4thefollowing
requirementsshallalsoapply:
i. Anchorage shall not be accomplished by use of toe nails or nails subject to withdrawal,
norshallwoodledgersorframingbeusedincrossgrainbendingorcrossgraintension.
ii. The continuous ties required by paragraph (b) above, shall be in addition to the
diaphragmsheathing.
d) Structureshavingirregularities
i) ForstructuresassignedtoSeismicDesignCategoryDandhavingaplanirregularityofType
I,II,III,orIVinTable1.3.3oraverticalstructuralirregularityofTypeIVinTable1.3.2,the
designforcesdeterminedfromSection2.5.9shallbeincreased25percentforconnections
of diaphragms to vertical elements and to collectors and for connections of collectors to
the vertical elements. Collectors and their connections also shall be designed for these
increased forces unless they are designed for the load combinations with overstrength
factor.
ii) For structures having a plan irregularity of Type II in Table 1.3.3, diaphragm chords and
collectorsshallbedesignedconsideringindependentmovementofanyprojectingwingsof
Part6
22

thestructure.Eachofthesediaphragmelementsshallbedesignedforthemoresevereof
thefollowingcases:
1. Motionoftheprojectingwingsinthesamedirection.
2. Motionoftheprojectingwingsinopposingdirections.
Exception:
ThisrequirementmaybedeemedtobesatisfiediftheproceduresofSec2.5.10whenseismicforcesarepresent,in
conjunctionwithathreedimensionalmodel,havebeenusedtodeterminethelateralseismicforcesfordesign.
1.7.3.9 FRAMINGBELOWTHEBASE
Whenstructuralframingscontinuebelowthebase,thefollowingrequirementsshallbesatisfied.
a. FramingbetweentheBaseandtheFoundation:Thestrengthandstiffnessoftheframingbetween
thebaseandthefoundationshallnotbelessthanthatofthesuperstructure.Thespecialdetailing
requirements of Sec 8.3 or 10.20, as appropriate for reinforced concrete or steel, shall apply to
columns supporting discontinuous lateral force resisting elements and to SMRF, IMRF, and EBF
system elements below the base which are required to transmit the forces resulting from lateral
loadstothefoundation.
b. Foundations: The foundation shall be capable of transmitting the design base shear and the
overturning forces from the superstructure into the supporting soil, but the short term dynamic
nature of the loads may be taken into account in establishing the soil properties. Sec 1.8 below
prescribestheadditionalrequirementsforspecifictypesoffoundationconstruction.
1.8 FOUNDATIONDESIGNREQUIREMENTS
1.8.1 GENERAL
The design and construction of foundation, foundation components and connection between the foundation and
superstructure shall conform to the requirements of this section and applicable provisions of Chapter 3 and other
portionsofthisCode.
1.8.2 SOILCAPACITIES
Thebearingcapacityofthesoil,orthecapacityofthesoilfoundationsystemincludingfooting,pile,pierorcaisson
andthesoil,shallbesufficienttosupportthestructurewithallprescribedloads,consideringthesettlementofthe
structure. For piles, this refers to pile capacity as determined by pilesoil friction and bearing which may be
determinedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofChapter3.Fortheloadcombinationincludingearthquake,thesoil
capacity shall be sufficient to resist loads at acceptable strains considering both the short time loading and the
dynamicpropertiesofthesoil.Thestressandsettlementofsoilunderappliedloadsshallbedeterminedbasedon
establishedmethodsofSoilMechanics.
1.8.3 SUPERSTRUCTURETOFOUNDATIONCONNECTION
The connection of superstructure elements to the foundation shall be adequate to transmit to the foundation the
forcesforwhichtheelementsarerequiredtobedesigned.
Chapter1
23

1.8.4 FOUNDATIONSOILINTERFACE
For regular buildings the base overturning moments for the entire structure or for any one of its lateral force
resisting elements, shall not exceed twothirds of the dead load resisting moment. The weight of the earth
superimposedoverfootingsmaybeusedtocalculatethedeadloadresistingmoment.
1.8.5 SPECIALREQUIREMENTSFORFOOTINGS,PILESANDCAISSONSINSEISMIC
ZONES2,3AND4
1.8.5.1 PILESANDCAISSONS
Piles and caissons shall be designed for flexure whenever the top of such members is anticipated to be laterally
displacedbyearthquakemotions.ThecriteriaanddetailingrequirementsofSec8.3forconcreteandSec10.20for
steelshallapplyforalengthofsuchmembersequalto120percentoftheflexurallength.
1.8.5.2 FOOTINGINTERCONNECTION
a. Footings and pile caps shall be completely interconnected by strut ties or other equivalent means
torestraintheirlateralmovementsinanyorthogonaldirection.
b. The strut ties or other equivalent means as specified in (a) above, shall be capable of resisting in
tensionorcompressionaforcenotlessthan10%ofthelargerfootingorcolumnloadunlessitcan
bedemonstratedthatequivalentrestraintcanbeprovidedbyfrictionalandpassivesoilresistance
orbyotherestablishedmeans.
1.8.6 RETAININGWALLDESIGN
Retainingwallsshallbedesignedtoresistthelateralpressureoftheretainedmaterial,underdrainedorundrained
conditions and including surcharge, in accordance with established engineering practice. For such walls, the
minimumfactorofsafetyagainstbaseoverturningandslidingduetoappliedearthpressureshallbe1.5.
1.9 DESIGNANDCONSTRUCTIONREVIEW
Everybuildingorstructuredesignedshallhaveitsdesigndocumentspreparedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsof
Sec1.9.1.Theminimumrequirementsfordesignreviewandconstructionobservationshallbethosesetforthunder
Sec1.9.2and1.9.3respectively.
1.9.1 DESIGNDOCUMENT
The design documents shall be prepared and signed by the engineer responsible for the structural design of any
building or structure intended for construction. The design documents shall include a design report, material
specificationsandasetofstructuraldrawings,whichshallbepreparedincompliancewithSec1.9.2and1.9.3below
forsubmittaltotheconcernedauthority.Forthepurposeofthisprovision,theconcernedauthorityshallbeeither
personsfromthegovernmentapprovalagencyfortheconstruction,ortheownerofthebuildingorthestructure,or
oneofhisrepresentatives.
1.9.2 DESIGNREPORT
The design report shall contain the description of the structural design with basic design information as provided
below,sothatanyotherstructuraldesignengineerwillbeabletoindependentlyverifythedesignparametersand
themembersizesusingthesebasicinformation.Thedesignreportshallinclude,butnotbelimitedto,thefollowing
:
Part6
24

a) Name and governing edition of this Code and other referenced standards, and the specific
portions, stating chapter, section, clause etc. of these Code and standards including any
specialistreportusedforthestructuraldesign.
b) Methods used for the calculation of all applied loads along with basic load coefficients and
other basic information including any assumption or judgment made under special
circumstances.
c) A drawing of the complete mathematical model prepared in accordance with Sec 1.2.7.1 to
represent the structure and showing on it the values, locations and directions of all applied
loads,andlocationofthelateralloadresistingsystemssuchasshearwalls,bracedframesetc.
d) Methods of structural analysis, and results of the analysis such as shear, moment, axial force
etc., used for proportioning various structural members and joints including foundation
members.
e) Methods of structural design including types and strength of the materials of construction
usedforproportioningthestructuralmembers.
f) Reference of the soil report or any other documents used in the design of the structure,
foundationorcomponentsthereof.
g) Statement supporting the validity of the above design documents with date and signature of
theengineerresponsibleforthestructuraldesign.
h) When computer programs are used, to any extent, to aid in the analysis or design of the
structure,thefollowingitems,inadditiontoitems(a)through(g)above,shallberequiredto
beincludedinthedesignreport:
i. A sketch of the mathematical model used to represent the structure in the computer
generatedanalysis.
ii. The computer output containing the date of processing, program identification,
identification of structures being analysed, all input data, units and final results. The
computer input data shall be clearly distinguished from those computed in the
program.
iii. A program description containing the information necessary to verify the input data
and interpret the results to determine the nature and extent of the analysis and to
checkwhetherthecomputationscomplywiththeprovisionsofthisCode.
iv. Thefirstsheetofeachcomputerrunshallbesignedbytheengineerresponsibleforthe
structuraldesign.
1.9.3 STRUCTURALDRAWINGSANDMATERIALSPECIFICATIONS
Thestructuraldrawingsshallinclude,butnotbelimitedto,thefollowing:
a) Thefirstsheetshallcontain:(1)identificationoftheprojecttowhichthebuildingorthestructure,
orportionthereofbelongs,(2)referencetothedesignreportspecifiedinSec1.9.2above,(3)date
ofcompletionofdesign,and(4)identificationandsignaturewithdateoftheengineerresponsible
forthestructuraldesign.
Chapter1
25

b) The second sheet shall contain detail material specifications showing : (1) Specified compressive
strength of concrete at stated ages or stages of construction for which each part of structure is
designed (2) Specified strength or grade of reinforcement (3) Specified strength of prestressing
tendonsorwires(4)Specifiedstrengthorgradeofsteel(5)Specifiedstrengthsforbolts,weldsetc.
(6) Specified strength of masonry, timber, bamboo, ferrocement (7) Minimum concrete
compressivestrengthattimeofposttensioning(8)Stressingsequenceforposttensioningtendons
(9) General notes indicating clear cover, development lengths of reinforcements, or any other
design parameter relevant to the member or connection details provided in drawings to be
followed,asapplicable,and(10)identificationandsignaturewithdateoftheengineerresponsible
forthestructuraldesign.
c) Drawing sheets, other than the first two, shall include structural details of the elements of the
structure clearly showing all sizes, crosssections and relative locations, connections,
reinforcements, laps, stiffeners, welding types, lengths and locations etc. whichever is applicable
for a particular construction. Floor levels, column centres and offset etc., shall be dimensioned.
Camber of trusses and beams, if required, shall be shown on drawings. For bolt connected
members,connectiontypessuchasslip,critical,tensionorbearingtype,shallbeindicatedonthe
drawing.
d) Drawingsshallbepreparedtoascalelargeenoughtoshowtheinformationclearlyandthescales
shall be marked on the drawing sheets.If any variation from the design specifications provided in
sheettwooccurs,the drawingsheetshallbeprovidedadditionallywiththedesignspecifications
including material types and strength, clear cover and development lengths of reinforcements, or
anyotherdesignparameterrelevanttothememberorconnectiondetailsprovidedinthatdrawing
sheet.Eachdrawingsheetshallalsocontainthesignaturewithdateoftheengineerresponsiblefor
thestructuraldesign.
1.9.4 DESIGNREVIEW
ThedesigndocumentsspecifiedinSec1.9.1shallbeavailableforreviewwhenrequiredbytheconcernedauthority.
Review shall be accomplished by an independent structural engineer qualified for this task and appointed by the
concernedauthority.Designreviewshallbeperformedthroughindependentcalculations,basedontheinformation
provided in the design documents prepared and signed by the original structural design engineer, to verify the
design parameters including applied loads, methods of analysis and design, and final design dimensions and other
details of the structural elements. The reviewing engineer shall also check the sufficiency and appropriateness of
thesuppliedstructuraldrawingsforconstruction.
1.9.5 CONSTRUCTIONOBSERVATION
Construction observation shall be performed by a responsible person who will be a competent professional
appointedbytheownerofthebuildingorthestructure.Constructionobservationshallinclude,butnotbelimited
to,thefollowing:
a. Specification of an appropriate testing and inspection schedule prepared and signed with date by
theresponsibleperson;
b. Reviewoftestingandinspectionreports;and
c. Regular site visit to verify the general compliance of the construction work with the structural
drawingsandspecificationsprovidedinSec1.9.3above.
Chapter 2
L0ABS 0N B0ILBINuS ANB STR0CT0RES
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 SCOPE
This chapter specifies the minimum design forces including dead load, live load, wind and earthquake loads,
miscellaneousloadsandtheirvariouscombinations.Theseloadsshallbeapplicableforthedesignofbuildings
andstructuresinconformancewiththegeneraldesignrequirementsprovidedinChapter1.
2.1.2 LIMITATIONS
Provisionsofthischaptershallgenerallybeappliedtomajorityofbuildingsandotherstructurescoveredinthis
code subject to normally expected loading conditions. For those buildings and structures having unusual
geometrical shapes, response characteristics or site locations, or for those subject to special loading including
tornadoes, special dynamic or hydrodynamic loads etc., sitespecific or casespecific data or analysis may be
required to determine the design loads on them. In such cases, and all other cases for which loads are not
specifiedinthischapter,loadinginformationmaybeobtainedfromreliablereferencesorspecialistadvicemay
besought.However,suchloadsshallbeappliedincompliancewiththeprovisionsofotherpartsorsectionsof
thisCode.
2.2 DEADLOADS
2.2.1 GENERAL
Theminimumdesigndeadloadforbuildingsandportionsthereofshall bedeterminedinaccordancewiththe
provisionsofthissection.Inaddition,designoftheoverallstructureanditsprimaryloadresistingsystemsshall
conformtothegeneraldesignprovisionsgiveninChapter1.
2.2.2 DEFINITION
Dead Load is the vertical load due to the weight of permanent structural and nonstructural components and
attachmentsofabuildingsuchaswalls,floors,ceilings,permanentpartitionsandfixedserviceequipmentetc.
2.2.3 ASSESSMENTOFDEADLOAD
Deadloadforastructuralmembershallbeassessedbasedontheforcesdueto:
weightofthememberitself,
weightofallmaterialsofconstructionincorporatedintothebuildingtobesupportedpermanentlyby
themember,
weightofpermanentpartitions,
weightoffixedserviceequipment,and
neteffectofprestressing.

Part6
2

2.2.4 WEIGHTOFMATERIALSANDCONSTRUCTIONS
Inestimatingdeadloads,theactualweightsofmaterialsandconstructionsshallbeused,providedthatinthe
absenceofdefiniteinformation,theweightsgiveninTables2.2.1and2.2.2shallbeassumedforthepurposes
ofdesign.
Table2.2.1:UnitWeightofBasicMaterials

Material

Unitweight
(kN/m
3
) Material
Unit
Weight
(kN/m
3
)
Aluminium
Asphalt
Biass
Bionze
Biick
Cement
Coal, loose
Conciete stone aggiegate (unieinfoiceu)
biick aggiegate (unieinfoiceu)
Coppei
Coik, noimal
Coik, compiesseu
ulass, winuow (soualime)
27.u
21.2
8S.6
87.7
18.9
14.7
8.8
22.8*
2u.4*
86.4
1.7
S.7
2S.S
uianite, Basalt
Iion cast
wiought
Leau
Limestone
Naible
Sanu, uiy
Sanustone
Slate
Steel
Stainless Steel
Timbei
Zinc
26.4
7u.7
7S.4
111.u
24.S
26.4
1S.7
22.6
28.S
77.u
78.7S
S.911.u
7u.u
* foi ieinfoiceu conciete, auu u.6S kNm
S
foi each 1% by volume of main ieinfoicement
2.2.5 WEIGHTOFPERMANENTPARTITIONS
When partition walls are indicated on the plans, their weight shall be considered as dead load acting as
concentratedlineloadsintheiractualpositionsonthefloor.Theloadsduetoanticipatedpartitionwalls,which
arenotindicatedontheplans,shallbetreatedasliveloadsanddeterminedinaccordancewithSec2.3.2.4.
2.2.6 WEIGHTOFFIXEDSERVICEEQUIPMENT
Weights of fixed service equipment and other permanent machinery, such as electrical feeders and other
machinery,heating,ventilatingandairconditioningsystems,liftsandescalators,plumbingstacksandrisersetc.
shallbeincludedasdeadloadwheneversuchequipmentaresupportedbystructuralmembers.
2.2.7 ADDITIONALLOADS
In evaluating the final dead loads on a structural member for design purposes, allowances shall be made for
additional loads resulting from the (i) difference between the prescribed and the actual weights of the
members and construction materials; (ii) inclusion of future installations; (iii) changes in occupancy or use of
buildings;and(iv)inclusionofstructuralandnonstructuralmembersnotcoveredinSec2.2.2and2.2.3.
2.3 LIVELOADS
2.3.1 GENERAL
Theliveloadsusedforthestructuraldesignoffloors,roofandthesupportingmembersshallbethegreatest
appliedloadsarisingfromtheintendeduseoroccupancyofthebuilding,orfromthestackingofmaterialsand
the use of equipment and propping during construction, but shall not be less than the minimum design live
loads set out by the provisions of this section. For the design of structural members for forces including live
loads,requirementsoftherelevantsectionsofChapter1shallalsobefulfilled.
Chapter2
3

Table2.2.2DeadLoad

Nateiial Component Nembei

Weight pei
0nit Aiea
(kNm
2
)
Nateiial
Weight
pei
0nit Aiea
(kNm
2
)
Floor
Asphalt, 2S mm thick
Clay tiling, 1S mm thick
Conciete slab (stone aggiegate)*
soliu, 1uu mm thick
soliu, 1Su mm thick
ualvanizeu steel flooi ueck (excl. topping)
Nagnesium oxychloiiue
noimal (sawuust fillei), 2S mm thick
heavy uuty (mineial fillei), 2S mm thick
Teiiazzo paving 16 mm thick

Roof
Aciylic iesin sheet, coiiugateu
S mm thick, stanuaiu coiiugations
S mm thick, ueep coiiugations
Asbestos cement, coiiugateu sheeting
(incl. lap anu fastenings)
6 mm thick (stanuaiu coiiugations)
6 mm thick(ueep coiiugations)
Aluminium, coiiugateu sheeting
(incl. lap anu fastenings)
1.2 mm thick
u.8 mm thick
u.6 mm thick
Aluminium sheet(plain)
1.2 mm thick
1.u mm thick
u.8 mm thick
Bituminous felt(S ply) anu giavel
Slates
4.7 mm thick
9.S mm thick
Steel sheet, flat galvanizeu
1.uu mm thick
u.8u mm thick
u.6u mm thick
Steel, galvanizeu stu. coiiugateu sheeting
(incl. lap anu fastenings)
1.u mm thick
u.8 mm thick
u.6 mm thick
Tiles
teiiacotta (Fiench pattein)
conciete , 2S mm thick
clay tiles

u.S26
u.268

2.S6u
S.S4u
u.147u.S8S

u.S4S
u.S27
u.4S1



u.u4S
u.u62


u.1S4
u.1S8


u.u48
u.u28
u.u24

u.uSS
u.u24
u.u19
u.4S1

u.SSS
u.671

u.u82
u.u67
u.uSS


u.12u
u.u96
u.u77

u.S7S
u.S27
u.6u.9
WallsandPartitions
Aciylic iesin sheet, flat, pei mm
thickness
Asbestos cement sheeting
4.S mm thick
6.u mm thick
Biick masoniy woik, excl. plastei
buint clay, pei 1uu mm
thickness
sanulime, pei 1uu mm
thickness
Conciete (stone aggiegate)*
1uu mm thick
1Su mm thick
2Su mm thick
Fibie insulation boaiu, pei 1u mm
thickness
Fibious plastei boaiu, pei 1u mm
thickness
ulass, pei 1u mm thickness
Baiuboaiu, pei 1u mm thickness
Paiticle oi flake boaiu, pei 1u mm
thickness
Plastei boaiu, pei 1u mm thickness
Plywoou, pei 1u mm thickness

Ceiling
Fibious plastei, 1u mm thick
Cement plastei, 1S mm thick
Suspenueu metal lath anu plastei
(two faceu incl. stuuuing)

Miscellaneous
Felt (insulating), pei 1u mm thickness
Plastei
cement, pei 1u mm thickness
lime, pei 1u mm thickness
PvC sheet, pei 1u mm thickness
Rubbei paving, pei 1u mm thickness
Teiiacotta Bollow Block Nasoniy
7S mm thick
1uu mm thick
1Su mm thick

u.u12

u.u72
u.1u6

1.91u
1.98u

2.S6u
S.S4u
S.9uu
u.uS4
u.u92
u.269
u.961
u.u7S
u.u92
u.u61


u.u81
u.287
u.48u



u.u19

u.2Su
u.191
u.1SS
u.1S1

u.671
u.99S
1.S88
* foi biick aggiegate, 9u% of the listeu values may be useu.

2.3.2 DEFINITION
Live load is the load superimposed by the use or occupancy of the building not including the environmental
loadssuchaswindload,rainload,earthquakeloadordeadload.
2.3.3 MINIMUMFLOORLIVELOADS
The minimum floor live loads shall be the greatest actual imposed loads resulting from the intended use or
occupancyofthefloor,andshallnotbelessthantheuniformlydistributedloadpatternsspecifiedinSec2.3.4
ortheconcentratedloadsspecifiedinSec2.3.5whicheverproducesthemostcriticaleffect.Theliveloadsshall
beassumedtoactverticallyupontheareaprojectedonahorizontalplane.

Part6
4

Table2.3.1 MinimumUniformlyDistributedLiveLoads,AndMinimumConcentratedLiveLoads
OccupancyorUse Uniform
kN/m
2

Conc.
kN
Apartments(seeResidential)
Accessfloorsystems
Officeuse
Computeruse

2.4
4.79

8.9
8.9
Armoriesanddrillrooms 7.18
Assemblyareasandtheaters
Fixedseats(fastenedtofloor)
Lobbies
Movableseats
Platforms(assembly)
Stagefloors

2.87
4.79
4.79
4.79
7.18
Balconies(exterior)
Ononeandtwofamilyresidencesonly,andnotexceeding19.3m
2

4.79
2.87
Bowlingalleys,poolrooms,andsimilarrecreationalareas 3.59
Catwalksformaintenanceaccess 1.92 1.33
Corridors
Firstfloor
Otherfloors,sameasoccupancyservedexceptasindicated

4.79

Dancehallsandballrooms 4.79
Decks(patioandroof)
Sameasareaserved,orforthetypeofoccupancyaccommodated

Diningroomsandrestaurants 4.79
Dwellings(seeResidential)
Elevatormachineroomgrating(onareaof2,580mm
2
)
1.33
Finishlightfloorplateconstruction (onareaof645mm
2
)
0.89
Fireescapes
Onsinglefamilydwellingsonly
4.79
1.92

Fixedladders SeeSection2.3.11
Garages(passengervehiclesonly)Trucksandbuses
1.92
a,b

Grandstands(seeStadiumsandarenas,Bleachers)
Gymnasiumsmainfloorsandbalconies 4.79
Handrails,guardrails,andgrabbars SeeSection2.3.11
Hospitals
Operatingrooms,laboratories
Patientrooms
Corridorsabovefirstfloor

2.87
1.92
3.83
4.45
4.45
4.45
Hotels(seeResidential)
Libraries
Readingrooms
Stackrooms
Corridorsabovefirstfloor

2.87
7.18
c

3.83

4.45
4.45
4.45
Manufacturing
Light
Heavy

6.00
11.97

8.90
13.40
Marquees 3.59
OfficeBuildings
Fileandcomputerroomsshallbedesignedforheavierloads basedonanticipated
occupancy

Lobbiesandfirstfloorcorridors
Offices
Corridorsabovefirstfloor

4.79
2.40
3.83

8.90
8.90
8.90




Chapter2
5


Table2.3.1 MinimumUniformlyDistributedLiveLoads,AndMinimumConcentratedLiveLoads(Contd.)
PenalInstitutions
Cellblocks
Corridors

1.92
4.79

Residential
Dwellings(oneandtwofamily)
Uninhabitableatticswithoutstorage
Uninhabitableatticswithstorage
Habitableatticsandsleepingareas
Allotherareasexceptstairsandbalconies

Hotelsandmultifamilyhouses
Privateroomsandcorridorsservingthem
Publicroomsandcorridorsservingthem

0.48
0.96
1.44
1.92

1.92
4.79

Reviewingstands,grandstands,andbleachers
4.79
d

Roofs
Ordinaryflat,pitched,andcurvedroofs
Roofsusedforpromenadepurposes
Roofsusedforroofgardensorassemblypurposes
Roofsusedforotherspecialpurposes
Awningsandcanopies
Fabricconstructionsupportedbyalightweightrigidskeletonstructure
Allotherconstruction
Primaryroofmembers,exposedtoaworkfloor
Singlepanelpointoflowerchordofrooftrussesoranypointalongprimary
structuralmemberssupportingroofsovermanufacturing,storage
warehouses,andrepairgarages
Allotheroccupancies
Allroofsurfacessubjecttomaintenance workers

0.96
h

2.87
4.79
i

0.24(nonreduceable)
0.96

8.9

1.33
1.33
Schools
Classrooms
Corridorsabovefirstfloor
Firstfloorcorridors

1.92
3.83
4.79

4.45
4.45
4.45
Scuttles,skylightribs,andaccessibleceilings 0.89
Sidewalks,vehiculardriveways,andyardssubjecttotrucking
11.97
e
35.60
f

Stadiumsandarenas
Bleachers
Fixedseats(fastenedtofloor)

4.79
d

2.87
d

Stairsandexitways
Oneandtwofamilyresidencesonly
4.79
1.92
g
Storageareasaboveceilings 0.96
Storagewarehouses(shallbedesignedforheavierloadsifrequiredfor
anticipatedstorage)
Light
Heavy

6.00
11.97

Stores
Retail
Firstfloor
Upper loors
Wholesale,allfloors

4.79
3.59
6.00

4.45
4.45
4.45
Vehiclebarriers SeeSection2.3.11
Walkwaysandelevatedplatforms(otherthanexitways) 2.87
Yardsandterraces,pedestrian 4.79
a
Floorsingaragesorportionsofabuildingusedforthestorageofmotorvehiclesshallbedesignedfortheuniformly
distributedliveloadsofTable2.3.1orthefollowingconcentratedload:(1)forgaragesrestrictedtopassengervehicles
accommodatingnotmorethanninepassengers,13.35kNactingonanareaof114mmby114mmfootprintofajack;
and(2)formechanicalparkingstructureswithoutslabordeckthatareusedforstoringpassengercaronly,10kNper
wheel.
Part6
6

b
Garagesaccommodatingtrucksandbusesshallbedesignedinaccordancewithanapprovedmethod,whichcontains
provisionsfortruckandbusloadings.
c
Theloadingappliestostackroomfloorsthatsupportnonmobile,doublefacedlibrarybookstackssubjecttothe
followinglimitations:(1)Thenominalbook stackunitheightshallnotexceed2290mm;(2)thenominalshelfdepth
shallnotexceed305mmforeachface;and(3)parallelrowsof doublefacedbookstacksshallbeseparatedbyaisles
notlessthan914mmwide.
d
Inadditiontotheverticalliveloads,thedesignshallincludehorizontalswayingforcesappliedtoeachrowofthe
seatsasfollows:0.350kNperlinearmeterofseatappliedinadirectionparalleltoeachrowofseatsand0.15kNper
linearmeterofseatappliedinadirectionperpendiculartoeachrowofseats.Theparallelandperpendicular
horizontalswayingforcesneednotbeappliedsimultaneously.
e
Otheruniformloadsinaccordancewithanapprovedmethod,whichcontainsprovisionsfortruckloadings,shallalso
beconsideredwhereappropriate.
f
Theconcentratedwheelloadshallbeappliedonanareaof114mmby114mmfootprintofajack.
g
Minimumconcentratedloadonstairtreads(onareaof2,580mm
2
)is1.33kN.
h
Whereuniformroofliveloadsarereducedto lessthan 1.0kN/m
2
in accordancewithSection2.3.14.1andare
appliedto the designof structural membersarrangedsoastocreatecontinuity,thereducedroofliveloadshallbe
appliedtoadjacentspansortoalternatespans,whicheverproducesthegreatest unfavorableeffect.
i
Roofsusedforotherspecialpurposesshallbedesignedforappropriateloadsasapprovedbytheauthorityhaving
jurisdiction.

2.3.4 UNIFORMLYDISTRIBUTEDLOADS
The uniformly distributed live load shall not be less than the values listed in Table 2.3.1, reduced as may be
specified in Sec 2.3.13, applied uniformly over the entire area of the floor, or any portion thereof to produce
themostadverseeffectsinthememberconcerned.
2.3.5 CONCENTRATEDLOADS
The concentrated load to be applied nonconcurrently with the uniformly distributed load given in Sec 2.3.4,
shall not be less than that listed in Table 2.3.1. Unless otherwise specified in Table 2.3.1 or in the following
paragraph,theconcentratedloadshallbeappliedoveranareaof300mmx300mmandshallbelocatedsoas
toproducethemaximumstressconditionsinthestructuralmembers.
Inareaswherevehiclesareusedorstored,suchascarparkinggarages,ramps,repairshopsetc.,provisionshall
bemadeforconcentratedloadsconsistingoftwoormoreloadsspacednominally1.5moncentresinabsence
oftheuniformliveloads.Eachloadshallbe40percentofthegrossweightofthemaximumsizevehicletobe
accommodated and applied over an area of 750 mm x 750 mm. For the storage of private or pleasuretype
vehicles without repair or fuelling, floors shall be investigated in the absence of the uniform live load, for a
minimum concentrated wheel load of 9 kN spaced 1.5 m on centres, applied over an area of 750 mm x 750
mm. The uniform live loads for these cases are provided in Table 2.3.1 The condition of concentrated or
uniformliveloadproducingthegreaterstressesshallgovern.
2.3.6 PROVISIONFORPARTITIONWALLS
When partitions, not indicated on the plans, are anticipated to be placed on the floors, their weight shall be
included as an additional live load acting as concentrated line loads in an arrangement producing the most
severeeffect onthefloor, unless itcan beshownthata morefavourablearrangementof thepartitionsshall
prevailduringthefutureuseofthefloor.
Inthecaseoflightpartitions,whereinthetotalweightpermetrerunisnotgreaterthan5.5kN,auniformly
distributed live load may be applied on the floor in lieu of the concentrated line loads specified above. Such
uniformliveloadpersquaremetreshallbeatleast33%oftheweightpermetrerunofthepartitions,subject
toaminimumof1.2kN/m
2
.
Chapter2
7

2.3.7 MORETHANONEOCCUPANCY
Whereanareaofafloorisintendedfortwoormoreoccupanciesatdifferenttimes,thevaluetobeusedfrom
Table2.3.1shallbethegreatestvalueforanyoftheoccupanciesconcerned.
2.3.8 MINIMUMROOFLIVELOADS
Roofliveloadsshallbeassumedtoactverticallyovertheareaprojectedbytherooforanyportionofitupona
horizontalplane,andshallbedeterminedasspecifiedinthefollowingsections:
2.3.8.1 REGULARPURPOSEFLAT,PITCHEDANDCURVEDROOFS
Liveloadsonregularpurposeroofsshallbethegreatestappliedloadsproducedduringusebymovableobjects
suchasplantersandpeople,andthoseinducedduringmaintenancebyworkers,equipmentandmaterialsbut
shallnotbelessthanthosegiveninTable2.3.2.
2.3.8.2 SPECIALPURPOSEROOFS
For special purpose roofs, live loads shall be estimated based on the actual weight depending on the type of
use,butshallnotbelessthanthefollowingvalues:
a)roofsusedforpromenadepurposes 3.0kN/m
2

b)roofsusedforassemblypurposes 5.0kN/m
2

c)roofsusedforgardens 5.0kN/m
2

d)roofsusedforotherspecialpurposestobedeterminedasperSec2.3.9
2.3.8.3 ACCESSIBLEROOFSUPPORTINGMEMBERS
Rooftrussesoranyotherprimaryroofsupportingmemberbeneathwhichafullceilingisnotprovided,shallbe
capable of supporting safely, in addition to other roof loads, a concentrated load at the locations as specified
below:
a) Inuustiial, Stoiage anu uaiage Builuings Any single panel point of the
lowei choiu of a ioof tiuss, oi any point of othei piimaiy ioof suppoiting
membei

9.u kN
b) Builuing with 0thei 0ccupancies Any single panel point of the lowei choiu
of a ioof tiuss, oi any point of othei piimaiy ioof suppoiting membei

1.S kN
2.3.9 LOADSNOTSPECIFIED
Live loads, not specified for uses or occupancies in Sec 2.3.3, 2.3.4 and 2.3.5, shall be determined from loads
resultingfrom:
a) weightoftheprobableassemblyofpersons;
b) weightoftheprobableaccumulationofequipmentandfurniture,and
c) weightoftheprobablestorageofmaterials.
2.3.10 PARTIALLOADINGANDOTHERLOADINGARRANGEMENTS
The full intensity of the appropriately reduced live load applied only to a portion of the length or area of a
structure or member shall be considered, if it produces a more unfavourable effect than the same intensity
appliedoverthefulllengthorareaofthestructureormember.
Where uniformly distributed live loads are used in the design of continuous members and their supports,
considerationshallbegiventofulldeadloadonallspansincombinationwithfullliveloadsonadjacentspans
andonalternatespanswhicheverproducesamoreunfavourableeffect.
Part6
8


Table 2.S.2 : Ninimum Roof Live Loaus(
1
)
Type anu Slope of Roof Bistiibuteu
Loau, kNm
2

Concentiateu
Loau, kN
I Flat ioof (slope = u) 1.S 1.8

II 1. Pitcheu oi slopeu ioof (u < slope < 1S)
2 Aicheu ioof oi uome (iise < 18 span)

1.u u.9
III 1. Pitcheu oi slopeu ioof (1S slope < 1.u)
2. Aicheu ioof oi uome (18 iise < S8 span)

u.8 u.9
Iv 1. Pitcheu oi slopeu ioof (slope 1.u)
2. Aicheu ioof oi uome (iise S8 span)

u.6 u.9
v uieenhouse, anu agiicultuie builuings

u.S u.9
vI Canopies anu awnings, except those with
cloth coveis
same as given in I thiough Iv
above baseu on the type anu
slope.
Note : (1) uieatei of this loau anu iain loau as specifieu in Sec 2.6.S shall be taken as the uesign live loau
foi ioof. The uistiibuteu loau shall be applieu ovei the aiea of the ioof piojecteu upon a hoiizontal plane
anu shall not be applieu simultaneously with the concentiateu loau. The concentiateu loau shall be
assumeu to act upon a Suu mm x Suu mm aiea anu neeu not be consiueieu foi ioofs capable of lateially
uistiibuting the loau, e.g. ieinfoiceu conciete slabs.

2.3.11 OTHERLIVELOADS
Live loads on miscellaneous structures and components, such as handrails and supporting members, parapets
and balustrades, ceilings, skylights and supports, and the like, shall be determined from the analysis of the
actualloadsonthem,butshallnotbelessthanthosegiveninTable2.3.3.
2.3.12 IMPACTANDDYNAMICLOADS
The live loads specified in Sec 2.3.3 shall be assumed to include allowances for impacts arising from normal
usesonly.However,forcesimposedbyunusualvibrationsandimpactsresultingfromtheoperationofinstalled
machineryandequipmentshallbedeterminedseparatelyandtreatedasadditionalliveloads.Liveloadsdueto
vibration or impact shall be determined by dynamic analysis of the supporting member or structure including
foundations, or from the recommended values supplied by the manufacture of the particular equipment or
machinery.Inabsenceofadefiniteinformation,valueslistedinTable2.3.4forsomecommonequipment,shall
beusedfordesignpurposes.
2.3.13 REDUCTIONOFLIVELOADS
Exceptforroofuniformliveloads,allotherminimumuniformlydistributedliveloads,LoinTable2.3.1,maybe
reducedaccordingtothefollowingprovisions.
2.3.13.1 GENERAL
SubjecttothelimitationsofSections2.3.13.2through2.3.13.5,membersforwhichavalueofK
LL
A
T
is37.16m2
ormorearepermittedtobedesignedforareducedliveloadinaccordancewiththefollowingformula:
I = I
0
_u.2S +
4.57
K
LL
A
T
] (2.3.1)
where,L=reduceddesignliveloadperm
2
ofareasupportedbythemember;L
0
=unreduceddesignliveload
perm
2
ofareasupportedbythemember(seeTable2.3.1);K
LL
=liveloadelementfactor(seeTable2.3.5);A
T
=
tributaryareainm
2
.
Lshallnotbelessthan0.50L
0
formemberssupportingonefloorandLshallnotbelessthan
0.40L
0
formemberssupportingtwoormorefloors.

Chapter2
9

Table2.3.3:MiscellaneousLiveLoads
StructuralMemberorComponent LiveLoad(
1
)
(kN/m)
1. Banuiails, paiapets anu suppoits :
a) Light access staiis, gangways etc.
i) wiuth u.6 m
ii) wiuth > u.6 m

b) Staiicases othei than in (a) above, iamps, balconies :
i) Single uwelling anu piivate
ii) Staiicases in iesiuential builuings
iii) Balconies oi poition theieof, stanus etc. having
fixeu seats within u.SS m of the baiiiei
vi) Public assembly builuings incluuing theaties,
cinemas, assembly halls, stauiums, mosques,
chuiches, schools etc.
vi) Builuings anu occupancies othei than (i) thiough (iv) above



u.2S
u.SS


u.SS
u.SS
1.S

S.u


u.7S
2. vehicle baiiieis foi cai paiks anu iamps :
a) Foi vehicles having gioss mass 2Suu kg

b) Foi vehicles having gioss mass > 2Suu kg

c) Foi iamps of cai paiks etc.

1uu
(2)

16S
(2)

see note (S)
Note : (1) These loaus shall be applieu nonconcuiiently along hoiizontal anu veitical uiiections,
except as specifieu in note (2) below.
(2) These loaus shall be applieu only in the hoiizontal uiiection, unifoimly uistiibuteu ovei
any length of 1.S m of a baiiiei anu shall be consiueieu to act at bumpei height. Foi case
2(a) bumpei height may be taken as S7S mm above flooi level.
(S) Baiiieis to access iamps of cai paiks shall be uesigneu foi hoiizontal foices equal to
Su% of those given in 2(a) anu 2(b) applieu at a level of 61u mm above the iamp.
Baiiieis to stiaight exit iamps exceeuing 2u m in length shall be uesigneu foi
hoiizontal foices equal to twice the values given in 2(a) anu 2(b).





Table2.3.4:MinimumLiveLoadsonSupportsandConnectionsofEquipmentduetoImpact
(1)

EquipmentorMachinery Additionalloadduetoimpactaspercentage
ofstaticloadincludingselfweight
Vertical Horizontal
1. Lifts, hoists anu ielateu opeiating
machineiy
1uu%
2. Light machineiy (shaft oi motoi uiiven) 2u%
S. Recipiocating machineiy, oi powei uiiven
units.
Su%
4. Bangeis suppoiting floois anu balconies SS%
S. Cianes :
a) Electiic oveiheau cianes 2S% of
maximum
wheel loau
i) Tiansveise to the iail :
2u% of the weight of tiolley
anu lifteu loau only, applieu
onehalf at the top of each iail

ii) Along the iail :
1u% of maximum wheel loau
applieu at the top of each iail

b) Nanually opeiateu cianes Su% of the
values in (a)
above

Su% of the
values in (a) above
c) Cabopeiateu tiavelling cianes 2S%

Not applicable

Note : (1)


All these loaus shall be incieaseu if so iecommenueu by the manufactuiei. Foi
machineiy anu equipment not listeu, impact loaus shall be those iecommenueu by
the manufactuieis, oi ueteimineu by uynamic analysis.

Part6
10

2.3.13.2 HEAVYLIVELOADS.

Liveloadsthatexceed4.79kN/m
2
shallnotbereduced.

EXCEPTION:Liveloadsformemberssupportingtwoormorefloorsmaybereducedby20percent.

2.3.13.3 PASSENGERCARGARAGES.

Theliveloadsshallnotbereducedinpassengercargarages.

EXCEPTION:Liveloadsformemberssupportingtwoormorefloorsmaybereducedby20percent.

2.3.13.4 SPECIALOCCUPANCIES.

Liveloadsof4.79kN/m
2
orlessshallnotbereducedinpublicassemblyoccupancies.
Thereshallbenoreductionofliveloadsforcycloneshelters.

2.3.13.5 LIMITATIONSONONEWAYSLABS.

Thetributaryarea,A
T
,foronewayslabsshallnotexceedanareadefinedbytheslabspantimesawidthnormal
tothespanof1.5timestheslabspan.
2.3.14 REDUCTIONINROOFLIVELOADS
Theminimumuniformlydistributedroofliveloads,L
o
inTable2.3.1,arepermittedtobereducedaccordingto
thefollowingprovisions.
2.3.14.1 FLAT,PITCHED,ANDCURVEDROOFS.
Ordinaryflat,pitched,andcurvedroofsarepermittedtobedesignedforareducedroofliveload,asspecified
in Eq.2.3.2 or other controlling combinations of loads, as discussed later in this chapter, whichever produces
the greater load. In structures such as greenhouses, where special scaffolding is used as a work surface for
workmenandmaterialsduringmaintenanceandrepairoperations,alowerroofloadthanspecifiedinEq.2.3.2
shall not be used unless approved by the authority having jurisdiction. On such structures, the minimum roof
liveloadshallbe0.58kN/m
2
.
L
r
=L
o
R
1
R
2
where0.58L
r
0.96 (2.3.2)
where
L
r
=reducedroofliveloadperm
2
ofhorizontalprojectioninkN/m
2

ThereductionfactorsR
1
andR
2
shallbedeterminedasfollows:
R
1
=1forA
t
18.58m
2

=1.20.011A
t
for18.58m
2
<A
t
<55.74m
2

=0.6forA
t
55.74m
2

whereA
t
=tributaryareainm
2
supportedbyanystructuralmemberand
R
2
=1forF4
=1.20.05Ffor4<F<12
=0.6forF12
Chapter2
11

where,forapitchedroof,F=0.12slope,withslopeexpressedinpercentagepointsand,foranarchordome,
F=risetospanratiomultipliedby32.
2.3.14.2 SPECIALPURPOSEROOFS.
Roofsthathaveanoccupancyfunction,suchasroofgardens,assemblypurposes,orotherspecialpurposesare
permittedtohavetheiruniformlydistributedliveloadreducedinaccordancewiththerequirementsofSection
2.3.13.
Table2.3.5LiveLoadElementFactor,K
LL

Element K
LL
Interiorcolumns
Exteriorcolumnswithoutcantileverslabs
4
4
Edgecolumnswithcantileverslabs 3
Cornercolumnswithcantileverslabs
Edgebeamswithoutcantileverslabs
Interiorbeams
2
2
2
Allothermembersnotidentifiedincluding:
Edgebeamswithcantileverslabs
Cantileverbeams
Onewayslabs
Twowayslabs
Memberswithoutprovisionsforcontinuous
sheartransfernormaltotheirspan
1
a
Inlieuoftheprecedingvalues,KLL ispermittedtobecalculated.
2.4 WINDLOADS

2.4.1 GENERAL
Scope: Buildings and other structures, including the Main WindForce Resisting System (MWFRS) and all
componentsandcladdingthereof,shallbedesignedandconstructedtoresistwindloadsasspecifiedherein.
Allowed Procedures: The design wind loads for buildings and other structures, including the MWFRS and
componentandcladdingelementsthereof,shallbedeterminedusingoneofthefollowingprocedures:
(1) Method1Simplified Procedure as specified in Section 2.4.4 for buildings and structures meeting the
requirementsspecifiedtherein;
(2) Method 2Analytical Procedure as specified in Section 2.4.5 for buildings and structures meeting the
requirementsspecifiedtherein;
(3)Method3WindTunnelProcedureasspecifiedinSection2.4.18.
Wind Pressures: Acting on opposite faces of each building surface. In the calculation of design wind loads for
the MWFRS and for components and cladding for buildings, the algebraic sum of the pressures acting on
oppositefacesofeachbuildingsurfaceshallbetakenintoaccount.
2.4.1.1 MINIMUMDESIGNWINDLOADING
Thedesignwindload,determinedbyanyoneoftheproceduresspecifiedinSection2.4.1,shallbenotlessthan
specifiedinthissection.
MainWindForceResistingSystem:Thewindloadtobe usedinthedesignoftheMWFRSfor anenclosedor
partially enclosed building or other structure shall not be less than 0.5kN/m
2
multiplied by the area of the
Part6
12

building or structure projected onto a vertical plane normal to the assumed wind direction. The design wind
forceforopenbuildingsandotherstructuresshallbenotlessthan0.5kN/m
2
)multipliedbytheareaA
f
.
ComponentsandCladding:Thedesignwindpressureforcomponentsandcladdingofbuildingsshallnotbeless
thananetpressureof0.5kN/m
2
actingineitherdirectionnormaltothesurface.
2.4.2 DEFINITIONS
ThefollowingdefinitionsapplyonlytotheprovisionsofSection2.4:
APPROVED:Acceptabletotheauthorityhavingjurisdiction.
BASICWINDSPEED,V:Threesecondgustspeedat10mabovethegroundinExposureB(seeSection2.4.8.3)
havingareturnperiodof50years.
BUILDING, ENCLOSED: A building that does not comply with the requirements for open or partially enclosed
buildings.
BUILDING ENVELOPE: Cladding, roofing, exterior walls, glazing, door assemblies, window assemblies, skylight
assemblies,andothercomponentsenclosingthebuilding.
BUILDING AND OTHER STRUCTURE, FLEXIBLE: Slender buildings and other structures that have a fundamental
naturalfrequencylessthan1Hz.
BUILDING,LOWRISE:Enclosedorpartiallyenclosedbuildingsthatcomplywiththefollowingconditions:
1.Meanroofheighthlessthanorequalto18.3m.
2.Meanroofheighthdoesnotexceedleasthorizontaldimension.
BUILDING,OPEN:Abuildinghavingeachwallatleast80percentopen.Thisconditionisexpressedforeachwall
bytheequationA
o
0.8A
g
where
A
o
=totalareaofopeningsinawallthatreceivespositiveexternalpressure(m
2
).
A
g
=thegrossareaofthatwallinwhichA
o
isidentified(m
2
).
BUILDING,PARTIALLYENCLOSED:Abuildingthatcomplieswithbothofthefollowingconditions:
1.Thetotalareaofopeningsinawallthatreceivespositiveexternalpressureexceedsthesumoftheareasof
openingsinthebalanceofthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof)bymorethan10percent.
2.Thetotalareaofopeningsinawallthatreceivespositiveexternalpressureexceeds0.37m
2
or1percentof
the area of that wall, whichever is smaller, and the percentage of openings in the balance of the building
envelopedoesnotexceed20percent.
Theseconditionsareexpressedbythefollowingequations:
1.A
o
>1.10A
oi

2.A
o
>0.37m
2
or>0.01A
g
,whicheverissmaller,
andA
oi
/A
gi
0.20
where
A
o
,A
g
areasdefinedforOpenBuilding
A
oi
=thesumoftheareasofopeningsinthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof)notincludingA
o
,inm
2
.
A
gi
=thesumofthegrosssurfaceareasofthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof)notincludingA
g
,inm
2
.
Chapter2
13

BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURE, REGULAR SHAPED: A building or other structure having no unusual
geometricalirregularityinspatialform.
BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURES, RIGID: A building or other structure whose fundamental frequency is
greaterthanorequalto1Hz.
BUILDING, SIMPLE DIAPHRAGM: A building in which both windward and leeward wind loads are transmitted
throughfloorandroofdiaphragmstothesameverticalMWFRS(e.g.,nostructuralseparations).
COMPONENTSANDCLADDING:ElementsofthebuildingenvelopethatdonotqualifyaspartoftheMWFRS.
DESIGNFORCE,F:Equivalentstaticforcetobeusedinthedeterminationofwindloadsforopenbuildingsand
otherstructures.
DESIGNPRESSURE,p:Equivalentstaticpressuretobeusedinthedeterminationofwindloadsforbuildings.
EAVE HEIGHT, h: The distance from the ground surface adjacent to the building to the roof eave line at a
particularwall.Iftheheightoftheeavevariesalongthewall,theaverageheightshallbeused.
EFFECTIVE WIND AREA, A: The area used to determine GC
p
. For component and cladding elements, the
effectivewindareainFigs.2.4.11through2.4.17and2.4.19isthespanlengthmultipliedbyaneffectivewidth
thatneednotbelessthanonethirdthespanlength.Forcladdingfasteners,theeffectivewindareashallnotbe
greaterthantheareathatistributarytoanindividualfastener.
ESCARPMENT: Also known as scarp, with respect to topographic effects in Section 2.4.9, a cliff or steep slope
generallyseparatingtwolevelsorgentlyslopingareas(seeFig.2.4.4).
FREEROOF:Roof(monoslope,pitched,ortroughed)inanopenbuildingwithnoenclosingwallsunderneaththe
roofsurface.
GLAZING:Glassortransparentortranslucentplasticsheetusedinwindows,doors,skylights,orcurtainwalls.
GLAZING, IMPACT RESISTANT: Glazing that has been shown by testing in accordance with ASTM E1886 and
ASTM E1996 or other approved test methods to withstand the impact of windborne missiles likely to be
generatedinwindbornedebrisregionsduringdesignwinds.
HILL: With respect to topographic effects in Section 2.4.9, a land surface characterized by strong relief in any
horizontaldirection(seeFig.2.4.4).
HURRICANE PRONE REGIONS: Areas vulnerable to hurricanes; in Bangladesh these areas include the
Sundarbans,southernpartsofBarisalandPatuakhali,Hatia,Bhola,easternpartsofChittagongandCoxsBazar
IMPACT RESISTANT COVERING: A covering designed to protect glazing, which has been shown by testing in
accordance with ASTM E1886 and ASTM E1996 or other approved test methods to withstand the impact of
windbornedebrismissileslikelytobegeneratedinwindbornedebrisregionsduringdesignwinds.
IMPORTANCEFACTOR,I:Afactorthataccountsforthedegreeofhazardtohumanlifeanddamagetoproperty.
MAIN WINDFORCE RESISTING SYSTEM (MWFRS): An assemblage of structural elements assigned to provide
supportandstabilityfortheoverallstructure.Thesystemgenerallyreceiveswindloadingfrommorethanone
surface.
MEAN ROOF HEIGHT, h: The average of the roof eave height and the height to the highest point on the roof
surface,exceptthat,forroofanglesoflessthanorequalto10
o
,themeanroofheightshallbetheroofheave
height.
OPENINGS:Aperturesorholesinthebuildingenvelopethatallowairtoflowthroughthebuildingenvelopeand
thataredesignedasopenduringdesignwindsasdefinedbytheseprovisions.
RECOGNIZEDLITERATURE:Publishedresearchfindingsandtechnicalpapersthatareapproved.
Part6
14

RIDGE:WithrespecttotopographiceffectsinSection2.4.9,anelongatedcrestofahillcharacterizedbystrong
reliefintwodirections(seeFig.2.4.4).
WINDBORNEDEBRISREGIONS:Areaswithinhurricaneproneregionslocated:
1.Within1.6kmofthecoastalmeanhighwaterlinewherethebasicwindspeedisequaltoorgreaterthan180
km/hor
2.Inareaswherethebasicwindspeedisequaltoorgreaterthan200km/h.
2.4.3 SYMBOLSANDNOTATION
ThefollowingsymbolsandnotationapplyonlytotheprovisionsofSection2.4:
A=effectivewindarea,inm
2

A
f
= area of open buildings and other structures either normal to the wind direction or projected on a plane
normaltothewinddirection,inm
2
.
A
g
=thegrossareaofthatwallinwhichA
o
isidentified,inm
2
.
A
gi
=thesumofthegrosssurfaceareasofthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof)notincludingA
g
,inm
2

A
o
=totalareaofopeningsinawallthatreceivespositiveexternalpressure,inm
2
.
A
oi
=thesumoftheareasofopeningsinthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof)notincludingA
o
,inm
2

A
og
=totalareaofopeningsinthebuildingenvelopeinm
2

A
s
=grossareaofthesolidfreestandingwallorsolidsign,inm
2

a=widthofpressurecoefficientzone,inm.
B=horizontaldimensionofbuildingmeasurednormaltowinddirection,inm.
b=meanhourlywindspeedfactorinEq.2.4.14fromTable2.4.3
b
`
=3sgustspeedfactorfromTable2.4.3
C
f
=forcecoefficienttobeusedindeterminationofwindloadsforotherstructures
C
N
=netpressurecoefficienttobeusedindeterminationofwindloadsforopenbuildings
C
p
=externalpressurecoefficienttobeusedindeterminationofwindloadsforbuildings
c=turbulenceintensityfactorinEq.2.4.5fromTable2.4.3
D=diameterofacircularstructureormemberinm.
D=depthofprotrudingelementssuchasribsandspoilersinm.
F=designwindforceforotherstructures,inN.
G=gusteffectfactor
G
f
=gusteffectfactorforMWFRSsofflexiblebuildingsandotherstructures
GC
pn
=combinednetpressurecoefficientforaparapet
GC
p
=productofexternalpressurecoefficientandgusteffectfactortobeusedindeterminationofwindloads
forbuildings
GC
pf
=productoftheequivalentexternalpressurecoefficientandgusteffectfactortobeusedindetermination
ofwindloadsforMWFRSoflowrisebuildings
Chapter2
15

GC
pi
=productofinternalpressurecoefficientandgusteffectfactortobeusedindeterminationofwindloads
forbuildings
g
Q
=peakfactorforbackgroundresponseinEqs.2.4.4and2.4.8
g
R
=peakfactorforresonantresponseinEq.2.4.8
g
v
=peakfactorforwindresponseinEqs.2.4.4and2.4.8
H=heightofhillorescarpmentinFig.2.4.4,inm.
h=meanroofheightofabuildingor heightofotherstructure,exceptthat eaveheightshallbe usedforroof
angleoflessthanorequalto10
o
,inm.
h
e
=roofeaveheightataparticularwall,ortheaverageheightiftheeavevariesalongthewall
I=importancefactor
I
z
=intensityofturbulencefromEq.2.4.5
K
1
,K
2
,K
3
=multipliersinFig.2.4.4toobtainK
zt

K
d
=winddirectionalityfactorinTable2.4.5
K
h
=velocitypressureexposurecoefficientevaluatedatheightz=h
K
z
=velocitypressureexposurecoefficientevaluatedatheightz
K
zt
=topographicfactorasdefinedinSection2.4.9
L=horizontaldimensionofabuildingmeasuredparalleltothewinddirection,inm.
L
h
= distance upwind of crest of hill or escarpment in Fig.2.4.4 to where the difference in ground elevation is
halftheheightofhillorescarpment,inm.
L

=integrallengthscaleofturbulence,inm.
L
r
=horizontaldimensionofreturncornerforasolidfreestandingwallorsolidsignfromFig.2.4.20,inm.
l=integrallengthscalefactorfromTable2.4.3inm.
N
1
=reducedfrequencyfromEq.2.4.12
n
1
=buildingnaturalfrequency,Hz
p=designpressuretobeusedindeterminationofwindloadsforbuildings,inN/m
2

p
L
=windpressureactingonleewardfaceinFig.2.4.9,inN/m
2

P
net
=netdesignwindpressurefromEq.2.4.2,inN/m
2

P
net30
=netdesignwindpressureforExposureAath=9.1mandI=1.0fromFig.2.4.3,inN/m
2
.
P
p
=combinednetpressureonaparapetfromEq.2.4.20,inN/m
2
.

P
s
=netdesignwindpressurefromEq.2.4.1,inN/m
2
.
P
s30
=simplifieddesignwindpressureforExposureAath=9.1mandI=1.0fromFig.2.4.2,inN/m
2
.
P
W
=windpressureactingonwindwardfaceinFig.2.4.9,inN/m
2
.
Q=backgroundresponsefactorfromEq.2.4.6
q=velocitypressure,inN/m
2
.
q
h
=velocitypressureevaluatedatheightz=h,inN/m
2

Part6
16

q
i
=velocitypressureforinternalpressuredetermination,inN/m
2
.
q
p
=velocitypressureattopofparapet,inN/m
2
.
q
z
=velocitypressureevaluatedatheightzaboveground,inN/m
2
.
R=resonantresponsefactorfromEq.2.4.10
R
B
,R
h
,R
L
=valuesfromEq.2.4.13
R
i
=reductionfactorfromEq.2.4.16
R
n
=valuefromEq.2.4.11
s=verticaldimensionofthesolidfreestandingwallorsolidsignfromFig.2.4.20,inm.
r=risetospanratioforarchedroofs.
V= basicwindspeedobtainedfromFig.2.4.1orTable2.4.1,inm/s.Thebasicwindspeedcorrespondstoa3s
gust speed at 10 m above ground in Exposure Category B having an annual probability of occurrence of
0.02.
V
i
=unpartitionedinternalvolumem
3

Z
V =meanhourlywindspeedatheightz,m/s.
W=widthofbuildinginFigs.2.4.12and2.4.14AandBandwidthofspaninFigs.2.4.13and2.4.15,inm.
X=distancetocenterofpressurefromwindwardedgeinFig.2.4.18,inm.
x=distanceupwindordownwindofcrestinFig.2.4.4,inm.
z=heightabovegroundlevel,inm.
z=equivalentheightofstructure,inm.
z
g
=nominalheightoftheatmosphericboundarylayerusedinthisstandard.ValuesappearinTable2.4.3
z
min
=exposureconstantfromTable2.4.3
=3sgustspeedpowerlawexponentfromTable2.4.3
o=reciprocaloffromTable2.4.3
o=meanhourlywindspeedpowerlawexponentinEq.2.4.14fromTable2.4.3
=dampingratio,percentcriticalforbuildingsorotherstructures
e=ratioofsolidareatogrossareaforsolidfreestandingwall,solidsign,opensign,faceofatrussedtower,or
latticestructure
=adjustmentfactorforbuildingheightandexposurefromFigs.2.4.2and2.4.3
e=integrallengthscalepowerlawexponentinEq.2.4.7fromTable2.4.3
=valueusedinEq.2.4.13(seeSection2.4.10.2)
=angleofplaneofrooffromhorizontal,indegrees
v=heighttowidthratioforsolidsign
Chapter2
17

2.4.4 METHOD1SIMPLIFIEDPROCEDURE
2.4.4.1 SCOPE
Abuildingwhosedesignwindloadsaredeterminedinaccordancewiththissectionshallmeetalltheconditions
of Sections 2.4.4.2 or 2.4.4.3. If a building qualifies only under 2.4.4.2 for design of its components and
cladding,thenitsMWFRSshallbedesignedbyMethod2orMethod3.
Limitations on Wind Speeds: Variation of basic wind speeds with direction shall not be permitted unless
substantiatedbyanyestablishedanalyticalmethodorwindtunneltesting.
2.4.4.2 MAINWINDFORCERESISTINGSYSTEMS
ForthedesignofMWFRSsthebuildingmustmeetallofthefollowingconditions:
1.ThebuildingisasimplediaphragmbuildingasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
2.ThebuildingisalowrisebuildingasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
3. The building is enclosed as defined in Section 2.4.2 and conforms to the windborne debris provisions of
Section2.4.11.3.
4.ThebuildingisaregularshapedbuildingorstructureasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
5.ThebuildingisnotclassifiedasaflexiblebuildingasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
6. The building does not have response characteristics making it subject to across wind loading, vortex
shedding,instabilityduetogallopingorflutter;anddoesnothaveasitelocationforwhichchannelingeffectsor
buffetinginthewakeofupwindobstructionswarrantspecialconsideration.
7. The building has an approximately symmetrical crosssection in each direction with either a flat roof or a
gableorhiproofwith45

.
8.ThebuildingisexemptedfromtorsionalloadcasesasindicatedinNote5ofFig.2.4.10,orthetorsionalload
casesdefinedinNote5donotcontrolthedesignofanyoftheMWFRSsofthebuilding.
2.4.4.3 COMPONENTSANDCLADDING
Forthedesignofcomponentsandcladdingthebuildingmustmeetallthefollowingconditions:
1.Themeanroofheighthmustbelessthanorequalto18.3m(h18.3m).
2. The building is enclosed as defined in Section 2.4.2 and conforms to the windborne debris provisions of
Section2.4.11.3.
3.ThebuildingisaregularshapedbuildingorstructureasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
4. The building does not have response characteristics making it subject to across wind loading, vortex
shedding,instabilityduetogallopingorflutter;anddoesnothaveasitelocationforwhichchannelingeffectsor
buffetinginthewakeofupwindobstructionswarrantspecialconsideration.
5.Thebuildinghaseitheraflatroof,agableroofwith45
o
,orahiproofwith27
o
.
2.4.4.4 DESIGNPROCEDURE
1.ThebasicwindspeedVshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.6.Thewindshallbeassumedto
comefromanyhorizontaldirection.
2.AnimportancefactorIshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.7.
3.AnexposurecategoryshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.8.3.
Part6
18

4.Aheightandexposureadjustmentcoefficient,,shallbedeterminedfromFig.2.4.2.
2.4.4.4.1 MainWindForceResistingSystem.
Simplifieddesignwindpressures,p
s
,fortheMWFRSsoflowrisesimplediaphragmbuildingsrepresentthenet
pressures (sum of internal and external) to be applied to the horizontal and vertical projections of building
surfaces as shown in Fig. 2.4.2. For the horizontal pressures (zones A, B, C, D), p
s
is the combination of the
windwardandleewardnetpressures.p
s
shallbedeterminedbythefollowingequation:
p
s
=K
zt
Ip
S30
(2.4.1)
where
=adjustmentfactorforbuildingheightandexposurefromFig.2.4.2
K
zt
=topographicfactorasdefinedinSection2.4.9evaluatedatmeanroofheight,h
I=importancefactorasdefinedinSection2.4.7
p
S30
=simplifieddesignwindpressureforExposureA,ath=9.1m,andforI=1.0,fromFig.2.4.2
MinimumPressures:Theloadeffectsofthedesignwindpressuresfromthissectionshallnotbelessthanthe
minimum load case from Section 2.4.4.1 assuming the pressures, p
s
, for zones A, B, C, and D all equal to +0.5
kN/m
2
,whileassumingzonesE,F,G,andHallequaltozerokN/m
2
.
2.4.4.4.2 ComponentsandCladding
Net design wind pressures, P
net
, for the components and cladding of buildings designed using Method 1
represent the net pressures (sum of internal and external) to be applied normal to each building surface as
showninFig.2.4.3.
p
net
shallbedeterminedbythefollowingequation:
p
net
=K
zt
IP
net30
(2.4.2)
where
=adjustmentfactorforbuildingheightandexposurefromFig.2.4.3
K
zt
=topographicfactorasdefinedinSection2.4.9evaluatedatmeanroofheight,h
I=importancefactorasdefinedinSection2.4.7
p
net30
=netdesignwindpressureforExposureA,ath=9.1m,andforI=1.0,fromFig.2.4.3
Minimum Pressures : The positive design wind pressures, p
net
, from this section shall not be less than +0.5
kN/m
2
,andthenegativedesignwindpressures,p
net
,fromthissectionshallnotbelessthan0.5kN/m
2
.
2.4.4.4.3 AirPermeableCladding
DesignwindloadsdeterminedfromFig.2.4.3shallbeusedforallairpermeablecladdingunlessapprovedtest
data or the recognized literature demonstrate lower loads for the type of air permeable cladding being
considered.
2.4.5 METHOD2ANALYTICALPROCEDURE
2.4.5.1 SCOPESANDLIMITATIONS
A building or other structure whose design wind loads are determined in accordance with this section shall
meetallofthefollowingconditions:
1.ThebuildingorotherstructureisaregularshapedbuildingorstructureasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
Chapter2
19

2. The building or other structure does not have response characteristics making it subject to across wind
loading, vortex shedding, instability due to galloping or flutter; or does not have a site location for which
channelingeffectsorbuffetinginthewakeofupwindobstructionswarrantspecialconsideration.
Theprovisionsofthissectiontakeintoconsiderationtheloadmagnificationeffectcausedbygustsinresonance
with alongwind vibrations of flexible buildings or other structures. Buildings or other structures not meeting
therequirementsofSection2.4.4,orhavingunusualshapesorresponsecharacteristicsshallbedesignedusing
recognized literature documenting such wind load effects or shall use the wind tunnel procedure specified in
Section0.
2.4.5.2 SHIELDING.
There shall be no reductions in velocity pressure due to apparent shielding afforded by buildings and other
structuresorterrainfeatures.
2.4.5.3 AIRPERMEABLECLADDING
DesignwindloadsdeterminedfromSection2.4.5shallbeusedforairpermeablecladdingunlessapprovedtest
dataorrecognizedliteraturedemonstratelowerloadsforthetypeofairpermeablecladdingbeingconsidered.
2.4.5.4 DESIGNPROCEDURE
1. The basic wind speed V and wind directionality factor K
d
shall be determined in accordance with Section
2.4.6.
2.AnimportancefactorIshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.7.
3. An exposure category or exposure categories and velocity pressure exposure coefficient K
z
or K
h
, as
applicable,shallbedeterminedforeachwinddirectioninaccordancewithSection2.4.8.
4.AtopographicfactorK
zt
shallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.9.
5.AgusteffectfactorGorG
f
,asapplicable,shallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.10.
6.AnenclosureclassificationshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.11.
7.InternalpressurecoefficientGC
pi
shallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.12.1.
8. External pressure coefficients C
p
or GC
pf
, or force coefficients C
f
, as applicable, shall be determined in
accordancewithSection2.4.12.2or2.4.12.3,respectively.
9.Velocitypressureq
z
orq
h
,asapplicable,shallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.4.11.5.
10.DesignwindloadporFshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSections2.4.13.
2.4.6 BASICWINDSPEED
Thebasicwindspeed,V,usedinthedeterminationofdesignwindloadsonbuildingsandotherstructuresshall
be as given in Fig.2.4.1 except as provided in Section 2.4.6.1. The wind shall be assumed to come from any
horizontaldirection.
2.4.6.1 SPECIALWINDREGIONS
Thebasicwindspeedshallbeincreasedwhererecordsorexperienceindicatethatthewindspeedsarehigher
than those reflected in Fig. 2.4.1. Mountainous terrain, gorges, and special regions shall be examined for
unusualwindconditions.Theauthorityhavingjurisdictionshall,ifnecessary,adjustthevaluesgiveninFig.2.4.1
to account for higher local wind speeds. Such adjustment shall be based on adequate meteorological
informationandothernecessarydata.
Part6
20

2.4.6.2 LIMITATION
Tornadoeshavenotbeenconsideredindevelopingthebasicwindspeeddistributions.
2.4.6.3 WINDDIRECTIONALITYFACTOR
Thewinddirectionalityfactor,K
d
,shallbedeterminedfromTable2.4.5.Thisfactorshallonlybeappliedwhen
usedinconjunctionwithloadcombinationsspecifiedinChapter2ofPart6ofthiscode.
2.4.7 IMPORTANCEFACTOR
An importance factor, I, for the building or other structure shall be determined from Table 2.4.2 based on
buildingandstructurecategorieslistedinSection1.2.4.
2.4.8 EXPOSURE
Foreachwinddirectionconsidered,theupwindexposurecategoryshallbebasedongroundsurfaceroughness
thatisdeterminedfromnaturaltopography,vegetation,andconstructedfacilities.
2.4.8.1 WINDDIRECTIONSANDSECTORS
Foreachselectedwinddirectionatwhichthewindloads aretobeevaluated, theexposureofthebuildingor
structure shall be determined for the two upwind sectors extending 45
o
either side of the selected wind
direction.
TheexposuresinthesetwosectorsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSections2.4.8.2and2.4.8.3andthe
exposureresultinginthehighestwindloadsshallbeusedtorepresentthewindsfromthatdirection.
2.4.8.2 SURFACEROUGHNESSCATEGORIES
A ground surface roughness within each 45
o
sector shall be determined for a distance upwind of the site as
defined in Section 2.4.8.3 from the categories defined in the following text, for the purpose of assigning an
exposurecategoryasdefinedinSection2.4.8.3.
SurfaceRoughnessA:Urbanandsuburbanareas,woodedareas,orotherterrainwithnumerouscloselyspaced
obstructionshavingthesizeofsinglefamilydwellingsorlarger.
Surface Roughness B: Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights generally less than 9.1 m. This
categoryincludesflatopencountry,grasslands,andallwatersurfacesinhurricaneproneregions.
Surface Roughness C: Flat, unobstructed areas and water surfaces outside hurricane prone regions. This
categoryincludessmoothmudflatsandsaltflats.
2.4.8.3 EXPOSURECATEGORIES
Exposure A: Exposure A shall apply where the ground surface roughness condition, as defined by Surface
Roughness A, prevails in the upwind direction for a distance of at least 792 m or 20 times the height of the
building,whicheverisgreater.
EXCEPTION:Forbuildingswhosemeanroofheightislessthanorequalto9.1m,theupwinddistancemaybe
reducedto457m.
ExposureB:ExposureBshallapplyforallcaseswhereExposuresAorCdonotapply.
Exposure C: Exposure C shall apply where the ground surface roughness, as defined by Surface Roughness C,
prevailsintheupwinddirectionforadistancegreaterthan1,524mor20timesthebuildingheight,whichever
isgreater.ExposureCshallextendintodownwindareasofSurfaceRoughnessAorBforadistanceof200mor
20timestheheightofthebuilding,whicheverisgreater.
Chapter2
21

Forasitelocatedinthetransitionzonebetweenexposurecategories,thecategoryresultinginthelargestwind
forcesshallbeused.
EXCEPTION: An intermediate exposure between the preceding categories is permitted in a transition zone
providedthatitisdeterminedbyarationalanalysismethoddefinedintherecognizedliterature.
2.4.8.4 EXPOSURECATEGORYFORMAINWINDFORCERESISTINGSYSTEM.
Buildings and Other Structures: For each wind direction considered, wind loads for the design of the MWFRS
determinedfromFig.2.4.6shallbebasedontheexposurecategoriesdefinedinSection2.4.8.3.
LowRiseBuildings:WindloadsforthedesignoftheMWFRSsforlowrisebuildingsshallbedeterminedusinga
velocitypressureq
h
basedontheexposureresultinginthehighestwindloadsforanywinddirectionatthesite
whereexternalpressurecoefficientsGC
pf
giveninFig.2.4.10areused.
2.4.8.5 EXPOSURECATEGORYFORCOMPONENTSANDCLADDING
Componentsandcladdingdesignpressuresforallbuildingsandotherstructuresshallbebasedontheexposure
resultinginthehighestwindloadsforanydirectionatthesite.
2.4.8.6 VELOCITYPRESSUREEXPOSURECOEFFICIENT
BasedontheexposurecategorydeterminedinSection2.4.8.3,avelocitypressureexposurecoefficientK
z
orK
h
,
as applicable, shall be determined from Table 2.4.4. For a site located in a transition zone between exposure
categories, that is, near to a change in ground surface roughness, intermediate values of K
z
or K
h
, between
those shown in Table 2.4.4, are permitted, provided that they are determined by a rational analysis method
definedintherecognizedliterature.
2.4.9 TOPOGRAPHICEFFECTS
2.4.9.1 WINDSPEEDUPOVERHILLS,RIDGES,ANDESCARPMENTS
Wind speedup effects at isolated hills, ridges, and escarpments constituting abrupt changes in the general
topography, located in any exposure category, shall be included in the design when buildings and other site
conditionsandlocationsofstructuresmeetallofthefollowingconditions:
i. Thehill,ridge,orescarpmentisisolatedandunobstructedupwindbyothersimilartopographic
featuresofcomparableheightfor100timestheheightofthetopographicfeature(100H)or
3.22km,whicheverisless.Thisdistanceshallbemeasuredhorizontallyfromthepointat
whichtheheightHofthehill,ridge,orescarpmentisdetermined.
ii. Thehill,ridge,orescarpmentprotrudesabovetheheightofupwindterrainfeatureswithina
3.22kmradiusinanyquadrantbyafactoroftwoormore.
iii. ThestructureislocatedasshowninFig.2.4.4intheupperonehalfofahillorridgeornearthe
crestofanescarpment.
iv. H/L
h
0.2.
v. Hisgreaterthanorequalto4.5mforExposuresBandCand18.3mforExposureA.
2.4.9.2 TOPOGRAPHICFACTOR
Thewindspeedupeffectshallbeincludedinthecalculationofdesignwindloadsbyusingthe
factorK
zt
:
Kzt=(1+K1K2KS)
2
(2.4.S)
whereK
1
,K
2
,andK
3
aregiveninFig.2.4.4.
Part6
22

IfsiteconditionsandlocationsofstructuresdonotmeetalltheconditionsspecifiedinSection2.4.9.1thenK
zt
=
1.0.
2.4.10 GUSTEFFECTFACTOR
2.4.10.1 RIGIDSTRUCTURES
ForrigidstructuresasdefinedinSection2.4.2,thegusteffectfactorshallbetakenas0.85orcalculatedbythe
formula:

0 = u.92S
1 +1.7g

I
z

1 +1.7g

I
z

(2.4.4)
I
z
= c _
1u
z
]
1
6
,

(2.4.5)
wheie I
z
= the intensity of tuibulence at height z wheie z = the equivalent height of the stiuctuie uefineu
as u.6h, but not less than zmin foi all builuing heights h. zmin anu c aie listeu foi each exposuie in Table
2.4.S; gQ anu gv shall be taken as S.4. The backgiounu iesponse Q is given by
=
_
1
1 +u.6S [
B + b
I
z

0.63
(2.4.6)
whereB,haredefinedinSection2.4.3;andI
z
=theintegrallengthscaleofturbulenceattheequivalentheight
givenby
I
z
= l _
z
1u
]
c

(2.4.7)
in which l anu e aie constants listeu in Table 2.4.S.
2.4.10.2 FLEXIBLEORDYNAMICALLYSENSITIVESTRUCTURES
Foi flexible oi uynamically sensitive stiuctuies as uefineu in Section 2.4.2 (natuial peiiou gieatei than 1.u
seconu), the gusteffect factoi shall be calculateu by
0
]
= u.92S
`

1 + 1.7I
z
_g

2
+g
R
2
R
2
1 +1.7g

I
z
/

(2.4.8)
gQ anu gv shall be taken as S.4 anu gR is given by
g
R
= 2ln(S6uun
1
) +
u.S77
2ln(S6uun
1
)

(2.4.9)
R,theresonantresponsefactor,isgivenby
R = _
1
[
R
n
R
h
R
g
(u.SS +u.47R
L
)
(2.4.10)
R
n
=
7.47N
1
(1 +1u.SN
1
)
5
3
,

(2.4.11)
Chapter2
23

N
1
=
n
1
I
z
I

z

(2.4.12)
R

=
1
p
-
1
2p
2
(1 -c
-2q
) foi p > u
(2.4.13a)
R

= 1 foi p = u (2.4.1Sb)
wherethesubscriptinEq.2.4.13shallbetakenash,B,andL,respectively,whereh,B,andLaredefinedin
Section2.4.3.
n
1
=buildingnaturalfrequency
R
=R
h
setting=4.6n
1
EBI

R=R
B
setting=4.6n
1
EBI

R=R
L
setting=15.4 n
1
EBI

=dampingratio,percentofcritical
I

z
=meanhourlywindspeedatheightzdeterminedfromEq.2.4.14.
I

z
= b

_
z
1u
]

(2.4.14)
whereb

and areconstantslistedinTable2.4.3andV isthebasicwindspeedinkm/h.

2.4.10.3 RATIONALANALYSIS
InlieuoftheproceduredefinedinSections2.4.10.1and2.4.10.2,determinationofthegusteffectfactorbyany
rationalanalysisdefinedintherecognizedliteratureispermitted.
2.4.10.4 LIMITATIONS
Where combined gusteffect factors and pressure coefficients (GC
p
, GC
pi
, and GC
pf
) are given in figures and
tables,thegusteffectfactorshallnotbedeterminedseparately.
2.4.11 ENCLOSURECLASSIFICATIONS.
2.4.11.1 GENERAL
For the purpose of determining internal pressure coefficients, all buildings shall be classified as enclosed,
partiallyenclosed,oropenasdefinedinSection2.4.2.
2.4.11.2 OPENINGS
Adeterminationshallbemadeoftheamountofopeningsinthebuildingenvelopetodeterminetheenclosure
classificationasdefinedinSection2.4.11.3.
2.4.11.3 WINDBORNEDEBRIS
Glazinginbuildingslocatedinwindbornedebrisregionsshallbeprotectedwithanimpactresistantcoveringor
be impactresistant glazing according to the requirements specified in ASTM E1886 and ASTM E1996 or other
approvedtestmethodsandperformancecriteria.ThelevelsofimpactresistanceshallbeafunctionofMissile
LevelsandWindZonesspecifiedinASTME1886andASTME1996.
EXCEPTIONS:
Part6
24

i. GlazinginCategoryII,III,orIVbuildingslocatedover18.3mabovethegroundandover9.2m
aboveaggregatesurfaceroofslocatedwithin458mofthebuildingshallbepermittedtobe
unprotected.
ii. GlazinginCategoryIbuildingsshallbepermittedtobeunprotected.
2.4.11.4 MULTIPLECLASSIFICATIONS
If a building by definition complies with both the open and partially enclosed definitions, it shall be
classifiedasanopenbuilding.Abuildingthatdoesnotcomplywitheithertheopenorpartiallyenclosed
definitionsshallbeclassifiedasanenclosedbuilding.

2.4.11.5 VELOCITYPRESSURE
Velocitypressure,q
z
,evaluatedatheightzshallbecalculatedbythefollowingequation:
q
z
= u.uuu61SK
z
K
zt
K
d
I
2
I ;(kN/m
2
),Vinm/s (2.4.15)
where K
d
is the wind directionality factor, K
z
is the velocity pressure exposure coefficient defined in Section
2.4.8.6,K
zt
isthetopographicfactor definedinSection2.4.9.2,andq
h
isthevelocitypressure calculated using
Eq. 2.4.15 at mean roof height h. The numerical coefficient 0.000613 shall be used except where sufficient
climaticdataareavailabletojustifytheselectionofadifferentvalueofthisfactorforadesignapplication.

2.4.12 PRESSUREANDFORCECOEFFICIENTS.
2.4.12.1 INTERNALPRESSURECOEFFICIENTS
InternalPressureCoefficient.Internalpressurecoefficients,GC
pi
,shallbedeterminedfromFig.2.4.5basedon
buildingenclosureclassificationsdeterminedfromSection2.4.11.
Reduction Factor for Large Volume Buildings, R
i
: For a partially enclosed building containing a single,
unpartitioned large volume, the internal pressure coefficient, GC
pi
, shall be multiplied by the following
reductionfactor,R
i
:
R

= 1.uor
R

= u.S
`

1 +
1
_1 +
I

69S1A
og
/

1.u (2.4.16)
where
A
og
=totalareaofopeningsinthebuildingenvelope(wallsandroof,inm
2
)
V
i
=unpartitionedinternalvolume,inm
3

2.4.12.2 EXTERNALPRESSURECOEFFICIENTS.
Main WindForce Resisting Systems: External pressure coefficients for MWFRSs C
p
are given in Figs. 2.4.6,
2.4.7,and2.4.8.Combinedgusteffectfactorandexternalpressurecoefficients,GC
pf
,aregiveninFig.2.4.10for
lowrisebuildings.ThepressurecoefficientvaluesandgusteffectfactorinFig.2.4.10shallnotbeseparated.
Chapter2
25

ComponentsandCladding:Combinedgusteffectfactorandexternalpressurecoefficientsforcomponentsand
claddingGC
p
aregiveninFigs.2.4.11through2.4.17.Thepressurecoefficientvaluesandgusteffectfactorshall
notbeseparated.
2.4.12.3 FORCECOEFFICIENTS
ForcecoefficientsC
f
aregiveninFigs.2.4.20through2.4.23.
2.4.12.4 ROOFOVERHANGS
Main WindForce Resisting System: Roof overhangs shall be designed for a positive pressure on the bottom
surface of windward roof overhangs corresponding to C
p
= 0.8 in combination with the pressures determined
fromusingFigs.2.4.6and2.4.10.
Components and Cladding: For all buildings, roof overhangs shall be designed for pressures determined from
pressurecoefficientsgiveninFigs.2.4.11B,C,D.
2.4.12.5 PARAPETS
Main WindForce Resisting System: The pressure coefficients for the effect of parapets on the MWFRS loads
aregiveninSection2.4.14.2
Components and Cladding: The pressure coefficients for the design of parapet component and cladding
elementsaretakenfromthewallandroofpressurecoefficientsasspecifiedinSection2.4.14.3.
2.4.13 DESIGNWINDLOADSONENCLOSEDANDPARTIALLYENCLOSED
BUILDINGS.
2.4.13.1 GENERAL
SignConvention:Positivepressureactstowardthesurfaceandnegativepressureactsawayfromthesurface.
CriticalLoadCondition:Valuesofexternalandinternalpressuresshallbecombinedalgebraicallytodetermine
themostcriticalload.
TributaryAreasGreaterthan65m
2
:Componentandcladdingelementswithtributaryareasgreaterthan65m
2

shallbepermittedtobedesignedusingtheprovisionsforMWFRSs.
2.4.13.2 MAINWINDFORCERESISTINGSYSTEMS
Rigid Buildings of All Heights: Design wind pressures for the MWFRS of buildings of all heights shall be
determinedbythefollowingequation:
p = q0C
p
-q

(0C
p
) (kN m
2
) (2.4.17)
where
q= q
z
forwindwardwallsevaluatedatheightzabovetheground
q= q
h
forleewardwalls,sidewalls,androofs,evaluatedatheighth
q
i
= qh for windward walls, side walls, leeward walls, and roofs of enclosed buildings and for negative internal
pressureevaluationinpartiallyenclosedbuildings
q
i
= q
z
for positive internal pressure evaluation in partially enclosed buildings where height z is defined as the
levelofthehighestopeninginthebuildingthatcouldaffectthepositiveinternalpressure.Forbuildingssitedin
windborne debris regions, glazing that is not impact resistant or protected with an impact resistant covering,
Part6
26

shallbetreatedasanopeninginaccordancewithSection2.4.11.3.Forpositiveinternalpressureevaluation, q
i

mayconservativelybeevaluatedatheighth(q
i
=q
h
)
G= gusteffectfactorfromSection2.4.10
C
p
=externalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.6or2.4.8
(GC
pi
)=internalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.5
qandq
i
shallbeevaluatedusingexposuredefinedinSection2.4.8.3.Pressureshallbeappliedsimultaneously
onwindwardandleewardwallsandonroofsurfacesasdefinedinFigs.2.4.6and2.4.8.
LowRise Building: Alternatively, design wind pressures for the MWFRS of lowrise buildings shall be
determinedbythefollowingequation:
p = q
h
|(0C
p]
) -(0C
p
)] (kN m
2
) (2.4.18)
where
q
h
=velocitypressureevaluatedatmeanroofheighthusingexposuredefinedinSection2.4.8.3
(GC
pf
)=externalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.10
(GC
pi
)=internalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.5
Flexible Buildings: Design wind pressures for the MWFRS of flexible buildings shall be determined from the
followingequation:
p = q0
]
C
p
-q

(0C
p
) (kN m
2
) (2.4.19)
whereq,q
i
,C
p
,and(GC
pi
)areasdefinedinSection2.4.13.2andG
f
=gusteffectfactorisdefinedasinSection
2.4.10.
Parapets:ThedesignwindpressurefortheeffectofparapetsonMWFRSsofrigid,lowrise,orflexiblebuildings
withflat,gable,orhiproofsshallbedeterminedbythefollowingequation:
p
p
= q
p
0C
pn
(kN m
2
) (2.4.20)
where
pp = combined net pressure on the parapet due to the combination of the net pressures from the front and
back parapet surfaces. Plus (and minus) signs signify net pressure acting toward (and away from) the front
(exterior)sideoftheparapet
qp= velocitypressureevaluatedatthetopoftheparapet
GCpn= combinednetpressurecoefficient
= +1.5forwindwardparapet
= 1.0forleewardparapet
2.4.13.3 DESIGNWINDLOADCASES
The MWFRS of buildings of all heights, whose wind loads have been determined under the provisions of
Sections2.4.13.2,shallbedesignedforthewindloadcasesasdefinedinFig.2.4.9.Theeccentricitye forrigid
structures shall be measured from the geometric center of the building face and shall be considered for each
principalaxis(eX,eY ).Theeccentricitye forflexiblestructuresshallbedeterminedfromthefollowingequation
andshallbeconsideredforeachprincipalaxis(eX,eY ):
Chapter2
27

c =
c

+1.7I
z
_
(g

)
2
+(g
R
Rc
R
)
2
1 + 1.7I
z
_
(g

)
2
+ (g
R
R)
2
(2.4.21)
where
eQ= eccentricityeasdeterminedforrigidstructuresinFig.2.4.9
eR= distancebetweentheelasticshearcenterandcenterofmassofeachfloor
I
z
, g
Q
,Q,g
R
,R shallbeasdefinedinSection2.4.3
Thesignoftheeccentricitye shallbeplusorminus,whichevercausesthemoresevereloadeffect.
EXCEPTION: Onestory buildings with h less than or equal to 9.1 m, buildings two stories or less framed with
lightframe construction, and buildings two stories or less designed with flexible diaphragms need only be
designedforLoadCase1andLoadCase3inFig.2.4.9.
2.4.13.4 COMPONENTSANDCLADDING.
LowRise Buildings and Buildings with h 18.3 m: Design wind pressures on component and cladding
elementsoflowrisebuildingsandbuildingswithh 18.3mshallbedeterminedfromthefollowingequation:
p = q
h
|(0C
p
) -(0C
p
)] (k N m
2
) (2.4.22)
where
q
h
= velocitypressureevaluatedatmeanroofheighthusingexposuredefinedinSection2.4.8.5
(GCp)= externalpressurecoefficientsgiveninFigs.2.4.11through2.4.16
(GCpi )= internalpressurecoefficientgiveninFig.2.4.5
Buildingswithh>18.3m:Designwindpressuresoncomponentsandcladdingforallbuildingswithh > 18.3m
shallbedeterminedfromthefollowingequation:
p = q(0C
p
) - q

(0C
p
) (kNm
2
) (2.4.23)
where
q=qzforwindwardwallscalculatedatheightzabovetheground
q=qhforleewardwalls,sidewalls,androofs,evaluatedatheighth
qi = qh for windward walls, side walls, leeward walls, and roofs of enclosed buildings and for negative internal
pressureevaluationinpartiallyenclosedbuildings
qi = qz for positive internal pressure evaluation in partially enclosed buildings where height z is defined as the
levelofthehighestopeninginthebuildingthatcouldaffectthepositiveinternalpressure.Forbuildingssitedin
windborne debris regions, glazing that is not impact resistant or protected with an impactresistant covering,
shallbetreatedasanopeninginaccordancewith Section2.4.11.3.Forpositiveinternalpressureevaluation,qi
mayconservativelybeevaluatedatheighth(qi=qh)
(GCp)=externalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.17.
(GCpi ) = internal pressure coefficient given in Fig. 2.4.5. q and qi shall be evaluated using exposure defined in
Section2.4.8.3.
Part6
28

2.4.13.5 ALTERNATIVEDESIGNWINDPRESSURESFORCOMPONENTSAND
CLADDINGINBUILDINGSWITH18.3M< h < 27.4M
AlternativetotherequirementsofSection2.4.13.2,thedesignofcomponentsandcladdingforbuildingswitha
meanroofheightgreaterthan18.3mandlessthan27.4mvaluesfromFigs.2.4.11through2.4.17shallbeused
only if the height to width ratio is one or less (except as permitted by Note 6 of Fig. 2.4.17) and Eq. 2.4.22 is
used.
Parapets:Thedesignwindpressureonthecomponentsandcladdingelementsofparapetsshallbedesignedby
thefollowingequation:
p = q
p
(0C
p
- 0C
p
) (2.4.24)
where
qp=velocitypressureevaluatedatthetopoftheparapet
GCp=externalpressurecoefficientfromFigs.2.4.11through2.4.17
GCpi=internalpressurecoefficientfromFig.2.4.5,basedontheporosityoftheparapetenvelope.
Twoloadcasesshallbeconsidered.LoadCaseAshallconsistofapplying theapplicable positivewallpressure
from Fig. 2.4.11A or 2.4.17 to the front surface of the parapet while applying the applicable negative edge or
corner zone roof pressure from Figs.2.4.11 through 2.4.17 to the back surface. Load Case B shall consist of
applying the applicable positive wall pressure from Fig. 2.4.11A or 2.4.17 to the back of the parapet surface,
and applying the applicable negative wall pressure from Fig. 2.4.11A or 2.4.17 to the front surface. Edge and
cornerzonesshallbearrangedasshowninFigs.2.4.11through2.4.17.GCpshallbedeterminedforappropriate
roof angle and effective wind area from Figs.2.4.11 through 2.4.17. If internal pressure is present, both load
casesshouldbeevaluatedunderpositiveandnegativeinternalpressure.
2.4.14 DESIGNWINDLOADSONOPENBUILDINGSWITHMONOSLOPE,
PITCHED,ORTROUGHEDROOFS.
2.4.14.1 GENERAL
Sign Convention: Plus and minus signs signify pressure acting toward and away from the top surface of the
roof,respectively.
Critical Load Condition: Net pressure coefficients CN include contributions from top and bottom surfaces. All
loadcasesshownforeachroofangleshallbeinvestigated.
2.4.14.2 MAINWINDFORCERESISTINGSYSTEMS
ThenetdesignpressurefortheMWFRSsofmonoslope,pitched,ortroughedroofsshallbedeterminedbythe
followingequation:
p = q
h
0C
N
(2.4.25)
where
qh = velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof height h using the exposure as defined in Section 2.4.8.3 that
resultsinthehighestwindloadsforanywinddirectionatthesite
G= gusteffectfactorfromSection2.4.10
CN= netpressurecoefficientdeterminedfromFigs.2.4.18Athrough2.4.18D.
Chapter2
29

For free roofs with an angle of plane of roof from horizontal less than or equal to 5
o
and containing fascia
panels,thefasciapanelshallbeconsideredaninvertedparapet.Thecontributionofloadsonthefasciatothe
MWFRSloadsshallbedeterminedusingSection2.4.13.5withqp equaltoqh .
2.4.14.3 COMPONENTANDCLADDINGELEMENTS
Thenetdesignwindpressureforcomponentandcladdingelementsofmonoslope,pitched,andtroughedroofs
shallbedeterminedbythefollowingequation:
p = q
h
0C
N
(2.4.26)
where
qh = velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof height h using the exposure as defined in Section 2.4.8.3 that
resultsinthehighestwindloadsforanywinddirectionatthesite
G= gusteffectfactorfromSection2.4.10
CN= netpressurecoefficientdeterminedfromFigs.2.4.19Athrough2.4.19C.
2.4.15 DESIGNWINDLOADSONSOLIDFREESTANDINGWALLSANDSOLID
SIGNS
Thedesignwindforceforsolidfreestandingwallsandsolidsignsshallbedeterminedbythefollowingformula:
F = q
h
0C
]
A
s
(kN) (2.4.27)
where
q
h
= thevelocitypressureevaluatedatheighth(definedinFig.2.4.20)usingexposuredefinedinSection2.4.8.3
G= gusteffectfactorfromSection2.4.10
C
f
= netforcecoefficientfromFig.2.4.20
A
S
= thegrossareaofthesolidfreestandingwallorsolidsign,inm
2
2.4.16 DESIGNWINDLOADSONOTHERSTRUCTURES
Thedesignwindforceforotherstructuresshallbedeterminedbythefollowing
equation:
F = q
z
0C
]
A
]
(kN) (2.4.28)
where
qz= velocitypressureevaluatedatheightzofthecentroidofareaAfusingexposuredefinedinSection2.4.8.3
G= gusteffectfactorfromSection2.4.10
Cf= forcecoefficientsfromFigs.2.4.21through2.4.23.
A
f
= projectedareanormaltothewindexceptwhereC
f
isspecifiedfortheactualsurfacearea,m
2

Part6
30

2.4.17 ROOFTOPSTRUCTURESANDEQUIPMENTFORBUILDINGSWITHH
18.3M
TheforceonrooftopstructuresandequipmentwithA
f
lessthan(0.1Bh)locatedon buildingswith h18.3m
shallbedeterminedfrom Eq.2.4.28,increasedbyafactorof1.9.Thefactorshallbepermittedtobereduced
linearlyfrom1.9to1.0asthevalueofA
f
isincreasedfrom(0.1Bh)to(Bh).
2.4.18 METHOD3WINDTUNNELPROCEDURE
2.4.18.1 SCOPE
Wind tunnel tests shall be used where required by Section 2.4.5.1. Wind tunnel testing shall be permitted in
lieuofMethods1and2foranybuildingorstructure.
2.4.18.2 TESTCONDITIONS
Wind tunnel tests, or similar tests employing fluids other than air, used for the determination of design wind
loads for any building or other structure, shall be conducted in accordance with this section. Tests for the
determinationofmeanandfluctuatingforcesandpressuresshallmeetallofthefollowingconditions:
i. Thenaturalatmosphericboundarylayerhasbeenmodeledtoaccountforthevariationof
windspeedwithheight.
ii. Therelevantmacro(integral)lengthandmicrolengthscalesofthelongitudinalcomponent
ofatmosphericturbulencearemodeledtoapproximatelythesamescaleasthatusedtomodel
thebuildingorstructure.
iii. Themodeledbuildingorotherstructureandsurroundingstructuresandtopographyare
geometricallysimilartotheirfullscalecounterparts,exceptthat,forlowrisebuildings
meetingtherequirementsofSection2.4.5.1,testsshallbepermittedforthemodeledbuilding
inasingleexposuresiteasdefinedinSection2.4.8
iv. Theprojectedareaofthemodeledbuildingorotherstructureandsurroundingsislessthan8
percentofthetestsectioncrosssectionalareaunlesscorrectionismadeforblockage.
v. Thelongitudinalpressuregradientinthewindtunneltestsectionisaccountedfor.
vi. Reynoldsnumbereffectsonpressuresandforcesareminimized.
vii. Responsecharacteristicsofthewindtunnelinstrumentationareconsistentwiththerequired
measurements.
2.4.19 DYNAMICRESPONSE
Tests for the purpose of determining the dynamic response of a building or other structure shall be in
accordance with Section 2.4.18.2. The structural model and associated analysis shall account for mass
distribution,stiffness,anddamping.

Fig. 2

2.4.1 Basic wwind speed ((V
b
) map of B

31
Bangladesh
Chapterr2

Part6
32
MainWindForceResistingSystem Method1 h 18.3 m
Figure2.4.2 DesignWindPressures Walls&Roofs
EnclosedBuildings

Notes:
1. Piessuies shown aie applieu to the hoiizontal anu veitical piojections, foi exposuie A, at h=9.1m,I=1.u, anu Kzt =
1.u. Aujust to othei conuitions using Equation 2.4.1.
2. The loau patteins shown shall be applieu to each coinei of the builuing in tuin as the iefeience coinei. (See Figuie
2.4.1u)
S. Foi the uesign of the longituuinal NWFRS use = u, anu locate the zone EF, uB bounuaiy at the miulength of the
builuing.
4. Loau cases 1 anu 2 must be checkeu foi 2S < 4S. Loau case 2 at 2S is pioviueu only foi inteipolation between
2S to Su.
S. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the piojecteu suifaces, iespectively.
6. Foi ioof slopes othei than those shown, lineai inteipolation is peimitteu.
7. The total hoiizontal loau shall not be less than that ueteimineu by assuming ps = u in zones B & B.
8. The zone piessuies iepiesent the following:
Boiizontal piessuie zones Sum of the winuwaiu anu leewaiu net (sum of inteinal anu exteinal) piessuies on
veitical piojection of:
A Enu zone of wall C Inteiioi zone of wall
B Enu zone of ioof D Inteiioi zone of ioof
veitical piessuie zones Net (sum of inteinal anu exteinal) piessuies on hoiizontal piojection of:
E Enu zone of winuwaiu ioof G Inteiioi zone of winuwaiu ioof
F Enu zone of leewaiu ioof H Inteiioi zone of leewaiu ioof
9. Wheie zone E oi u falls on a ioof oveihang on the winuwaiu siue of the builuing, use E0B anu u0B foi the piessuie
on the hoiizontal piojection of the oveihang. 0veihangs on the leewaiu anu siue euges shall have the basic zone
piessuie applieu.
1u. Notation:
a: 1u peicent of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.4h, whichevei is smallei, but not less than eithei 4% of least
hoiizontal uimension oi u.9 m.
h: Nean ioof height, in feet (meteis), except that eave height shall be useu foi ioof angles <1u.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Chapter2
33

MainWindForceResistingSystem Method1 h 18.3m

Figure2.4.2(contd) DesignWindpressures
Walls&Roofs
EnclosedBuildings

AdjustmentFactor
forBuildingHeightandExposure,
Mean roof height
(m)
Exposure
A B C
4.6 1.uu 1.21 1.47
6 1.uu 1.29 1.SS
7.6 1.uu 1.SS 1.61
9.1 1.uu 1.4u 1.66
1u.7 1.uS 1.4S 1.7u
12.2 1.u9 1.49 1.74
1S.7 1.12 1.SS 1.78
1S.2 1.16 1.S6 1.81
16.8 1.19 1.S9 1.84
18.S 1.22 1.62 1.87

Part6
34

ComponentsandCladdingMethod1 h 18.3m
Figure2.4.3 DesignWindPressures Walls&Roofs
EnclosedBuildings

Notes:
1. Piessuies shown aie applieu noimal to the suiface, foi exposuie A, at h = 9.1m, I = 1.u, anu Kzt = 1.u. Aujust to
othei conuitions using Equation 2.4.2.
2. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces, iespectively.
S. Foi hip ioofs with 2S, Zone S shall be tieateu as Zone 2.
4. Foi effective winu aieas between those given, value may be inteipolateu, otheiwise use the value associateu
with the lowei effective winu aiea.
S. Notation:
a: 1u peicent of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.4h, whichevei is smallei, but not less than eithei 4% of least
hoiizontal uimension oi u.9 m.
h: Nean ioof height, in feet (meteis), except that eave height shall be useu foi ioof angles <1u.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Chapter2
35

ComponentsandCladdingMethod1 h18.3m
Figure2.4.3(cont'd) NetDesignWindPressures Walls&Roofs
EnclosedBuildings

RoofOverhangNetDesignWindPressure,P
net30
(kN/m
2
)
(ExposureAath=9.1mwithl=1.0)
Zone Effective
Winu
Aiea
(m
2
)
Basic Winu Speeu v (ms)
4u.2S 44.7 49.17 SS.64 S8.11 62.S8 67.uS 7S.99
R
o
o
f


u

t
o

7

u
e
g
i
e
e
s

2 u.9Su 1.uuS 1.2S9 1.Su2 1.78S 2.096 2.431 2.790 3.584
2 1.86u u.986 1.22u 1.47S 1.7S6 2.058 2.388 2.742 3.522
2 4.648 u.962 1.191 1.44u 1.71S 2.010 2.330 2.675 3.436
2 9.296 u.947 1.168 1.412 1.68u 1.971 2.287 2.627 3.373
3 u.9Su 1.6S6 2.u4S 2.47u 2.94S 3.450 4.005 4.594 5.905
3 1.86u 1.297 1.6uS 1.9S8 2.S11 2.708 3.144 3.609 4.632
3 4.648 u.828 1.u24 1.24u 1.474 1.727 2.005 2.302 2.957
3 9.296 u.479 u.S84 u.7u8 u.842 0.986 1.144 1.311 1.684
R
o
o
f

>

7

t
o

2
7

u
e
g
i
e
e
s

2 u.9Su 1.Su2 1.6uS 1.94S 2.S11 2.713 3.144 3.613 4.637
2 1.86u 1.Su2 1.6uS 1.94S 2.S11 2.713 3.144 3.613 4.637
2 4.648 1.Su2 1.6uS 1.94S 2.S11 2.713 3.144 3.613 4.637
2 9.296 1.Su2 1.6uS 1.94S 2.S11 2.713 3.144 3.613 4.637
3 u.9Su 2.187 2.699 S.268 S.88S 4.560 5.292 6.072 7.800
3 1.86u 1.971 2.4S6 2.948 S.Su7 4.115 4.775 5.479 7.039
3 4.648 1.689 2.u86 2.S26 S.uuS 3.526 4.091 4.694 6.034
3 9.296 1.479 1.82S 2.2u6 2.627 3.082 3.574 4.106 5.268
R
o
o
f

>
2
7

t
o

4
S


u
e
g
i
e
e
s

2 u.9Su 1.182 1.46u 1.766 2.1u1 2.464 2.861 3.282 4.216
2 1.86u 1.148 1.416 1.71S 2.uS8 2.393 2.775 3.182 4.091
2 4.648 1.1u1 1.SS9 1.641 1.9S2 2.292 2.660 3.052 3.924
2 9.296 1.u62 1.S11 1.S87 1.89u 2.220 2.574 2.952 3.795
3 u.9Su 1.182 1.46u 1.766 2.1u1 2.464 2.861 3.283 4.216
3 1.86u 1.148 1.416 1.71S 2.uS8 2.393 2.775 3.182 4.091
3 4.648 1.1u1 1.SS9 1.641 1.9S2 2.292 2.660 3.053 3.923
3 9.296 1.u62 1.S11 1.S89 1.89u 2.220 2.574 2.952 3.795
AdjustmentFactor
forBuildingHeightandExposure,
Mean roof
height(m)
Exposure
A B C
4.6 1.uu 1.21 1.47
6.1 1.uu 1.29 1.SS
7.6 1.uu 1.SS 1.61
9.1S 1.uu 1.4u 1.66
1u.7 1.uS 1.4S 1.7u
12.2 1.u9 1.49 1.74
1S.7 1.12 1.SS 1.78
1S.2 1.16 1.S6 1.81
16.8 1.19 1.S9 1.84
18.S 1.22 1.62 1.87
UnitConversion1.0ft=0.3048m;1.0psf=0.0929m
2
;1.0psf=0.0479KN/m



Part6
36



TopographicFactor,K
zt
Method2
Figure2.4.4

Topographic Multipliers for Exposure B
H/L
h

K1 Multiplier
x/L
h

K2 Multiplier
z/L
h

K3 Multiplier
2-D
Ridge
2-D
Escarp.
3-D
Axisym.
Hill
2-D
Escarp.
All
Other
Cases
2-D
Ridge
2-D
Escarp.
3-D
Axisym.
Hill
u.2u u.29 u.17 u.21 u.uu 1.uu 1.uu u.uu 1.uu 1.uu 1.uu
u.2S u.S6 u.21 u.26 u.Su u.88 u.67 u.1u u.74 u.78 u.67
u.Su u.4S u.26 u.S2 1.uu u.7S u.SS u.2u u.SS u.61 u.4S
u.SS u.S1 u.Su u.S7 1.Su u.6S u.uu u.Su u.41 u.47 u.Su
u.4u u.S8 u.S4 u.42 2.uu u.Su u.uu u.4u u.Su u.S7 u.2u
u.4S u.6S u.S8 u.47 2.Su u.S8 u.uu u.Su u.22 u.29 u.14
u.Su u.72 u.4S u.SS S.uu u.2S u.uu u.6u u.17 u.22 u.u9
S.Su u.1S u.uu u.7u u.12 u.17 u.u6
4.uu u.uu u.uu u.8u u.u9 u.14 u.u4
u.9u u.u7 u.11 u.uS
1.uu u.uS u.u8 u.u2
1.Su u.u1 u.u2 u.uu
2.uu u.uu u.uu u.uu
Notes:
1. Foi values of H/Lh, x/Lhanu z/Lhothei than those shown, lineai inteipolation is peimitteu.
2. Foi H/Lh> u.S, assume H/Lh= u.S foi evaluating K1 anu substitute 2H foi Lh foi evaluating K2anu
KS.
S. Nultiplieis aie baseu on the assumption that winu appioaches the hill oi escaipment along the
uiiection of maximum slope.
4. Notation:
H: Beight of hill oi escaipment ielative to the upwinu teiiain, in meteis.
Lh: Bistance upwinu of ciest to wheie the uiffeience in giounu elevation is half the height of
hill oi escaipment, in meteis.
K1: Factoi to account foi shape of topogiaphic featuie anu maximum speeuup effect.
K2: Factoi to account foi ieuuction in speeuup with uistance upwinu oi uownwinu of ciest.
K3: Factoi to account foi ieuuction in speeuup with height above local teiiain.
x: Bistance (upwinu oi uownwinu) fiom the ciest to the builuing site, in meteis.
z: Beight above local giounu level, in meteis.
W: Boiizontal attenuation factoi.
: Beight attenuation factoi.

Chapter2
37

TopographicFactor,K
zt
Method2

Figure2.4.4(contd)

Equation:

K
zt
= (1 + K
1
K
2
K
3
)
2


K
1
determined from table below

K
2
= _1 -
|x|
pI
h
_

K
3
= c
-yzL
h


Paiameteis foi Speeu0p 0vei Bills anu Escaipments
Bill Shape K1/(H/Lh)
Exposuie 0pwinu of
ciest
Bownwinu of
Ciest A B C
2uimensional iiuges
(oi valleys with negative H in
K1/(H/Lh)
1.Su 1.4S 1.SS S 1.S 1.S
2uimensional escaipments u.7S u.8S u.9S 2.S 1.S 4
Suimensional axisym. Bill u.9S 1.uS 1.1S 4 1.S 1.S

MainWindForceRes.Sys./CompandClad. Method2 AllHeight

Figure2.4.5 Internal PressureCoefficient,GC
pi
Walls&Roofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosed,andOpenBuildings
Notes:
1. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the inteinal suifaces,
iespectively.
2. values of GCpi shall be useu with qz oi qhas specifieu in 2.4.1S.
S. Two cases shall be consiueieu to ueteimine the ciitical loau iequiiements foi the appiopiiate
conuition:
(i) a positive value of GCpiapplieu to all inteinal suifaces
(ii) a negative value of GCpiapplieu to all inteinal suifaces.

EnclosureClassification GC
pi
0pen Builuing u.uu
Paitially Encloseu Builuing +u.SS
u.SS
Encloseu Builuing +u.18
u.18

Part6
38

MainWindForceResistingSystem Method2 AllHeights

Figure2.4.6 ExternalPressureCoefficients,C
p
Walls&Roofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

Chapter2
39

MainWindForceResistingSystem Method2 AllHeights

Figure2.4.6(cont) ExternalPressureCoefficients,C
p
Walls&Roofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

WallPressureCoefficients,C
p
Surface L/B C
p
UseWith
WindwardWall Allvalues 0.8 q
z
LeewardWall 01 0.5 q
h
2 0.3
>4 0.2
SideWall Allvalues 0.7 q
h

RoofPressureCoefficients,C
p
,forusewithq
h
Wind
Direction
Windward Leeward
Angle,(degrees) Angle,(degrees)
h/L 10 15 20 25 30 35 45 >60# 10 15 >20
Normal
Toridge
for>10
0

<u.2S
u.7
u.18
u.S
u.u*
u.S
u.2
u.2
u.S
u.2
u.S
u.u*
u.4

u.4

u.u1
u.S
u.S
u.6

u.S
u.9
u.18
u.7

u.18
u.4
u.u*
u.S
u.2
u.2
u.2
u.2
u.S
u.u*
u.4 u.u1
u.S
u.S
u.6

>1.u
1.S**
u.18
1.u

u.18
u.7

u.18
u.S
u.u*
u.S
u.2
u.2
u.2
u.u*
u.S

u.u1
u.7
u.6
u.6
Normal
Toridge
for
<10
o

and
Parallel
Toridge
forall




< u.S
Boiizontal
uistance fiom
Winuwaiu euge
Cp *value is pioviueu foi inteipolation puiposes

** value can be ieuuceu lineaily with aiea
ovei which it is applicable as follows u to h/2 u.9, u.18
h/2 to h u.9, u.18
H to 2h u.S, u.18
> 2h u.S, u.18

> 1.u
u to h/2 1.S**, u.18 Aiea (m
2
) Reuuction Factoi
< 9.S sq m 1.u
> h/2 u.7, u.18 2S,2 sq m u.9
> 92.9 sq m u.8
Notes:
1. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces, iespectively.
2. Lineai inteipolation is peimitteu foi values of L/B,h/L anu othei than shown. Inteipolation shall only be
caiiieu out between values of the same sign. Wheie no value of the same sign is given, assume u.u foi
inteipolation puiposes.
S. Wheie two values of Cp aie listeu, this inuicates that the winuwaiu ioof slope is subjecteu to eithei
positive oi negative piessuies anu the ioof stiuctuie shall be uesigneu foi both conuitions. Inteipolation foi
inteimeuiate iatios of h/L in this case shall only be caiiieu out between Cp values of like sign.
4. Foi monoslope ioofs, entiie ioof suiface is eithei a winuwaiu oi leewaiu suiface.
S. Foi flexible builuings use appiopiiate Gf as ueteimineu by Section 2.4.1u.
6. Refei to Figuie 2.4.7 foi uomes anu Figuie 2.4.8 foi aicheu ioofs.
7. Notation:
B: Boiizontal uimension of builuing, in metei, measuieu noimal to winu uiiection.
L: Boiizontal uimension of builuing, in metei, measuieu paiallel to winu uiiection.
h: Nean ioof height in meteis, except that eave height shall be useu foi e 1u uegiees.
z: Beight above giounu, in meteis.
G: uust effect factoi.
qz,qh: velocity piessuie, in Nm
2
, evaluateu at iespective height.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.
8. Foi mansaiu ioofs, the top hoiizontal suiface anu leewaiu inclineu suiface shall be tieateu as leewaiu
suifaces fiom the table.
9. Except foi NWFRS's at the ioof consisting of moment iesisting fiames, the total hoiizontal sheai shall not
be less than that ueteimineu by neglecting winu foices on ioof suifaces.
#Foi ioof slopes gieatei than 8u, use Cp = u.8
Part6
40

MainWindForceResistingSystem Method2 AllHeights

Figure2.4.7 ExternalPressureCoefficients,C
p
Domed Roofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings andStructures

Note:
1. Two loau cases shall be consiueieu:
Case A. Cp values between A anu B anu between B anu C shall be ueteimineu by lineai
inteipolation along aics on the uome paiallel to the winu uiiection;
Case B. Cp shall be the constant value of A foi 2S uegiees, anu shall be ueteimineu by lineai
inteipolation fiom 2S uegiees to B anu fiom B to C.
2. values uenote Cp to be useu with q
h+]
wheie hD+fis the height at the top of the uome.
S. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces, iespectively.
4. Cp is constant on the uome suiface foi aics of ciicles peipenuiculai to the winu uiiection; foi
example, the aic passing thiough BBB anu all aics paiallel to BBB.
S. Foi values of hD/Dbetween those listeu on the giaph cuives, lineai inteipolation shall be
peimitteu.
6. =u uegiees on uome spiingline, =9u uegiees at uome centei top point. f is measuieu fiom
spiingline to top.
7. The total hoiizontal sheai shall not be less than that ueteimineu by neglecting winu foices ioof
suifaces.
8. Foi f/D values less than u.uS. use Figuie 2.4.6.
Chapter2
41

MainWindForceRes.Sys./CompandClad. Method2 AllHeight

Figure2.4.8 ExternalPressureCoefficients,C
p
ArchedRoofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildingsandStructures

Condition Risetospan
ratio,r
C
p
Windward
quarter
Center
half
Leeward
quarter

Roof on elevateu stiuctuie
u < r< u.2

u.9 u.7 r u.S
u.2 r< u.S*

l.S r u.S u.7 r u.S
0.3r0.6

2.75r u.7 u.7 r u.S

Roof spiinging fiom giounu
level
0<r0.6 1.4 r u.7 r u.S

*When the iisetospan iatio is u.2 r u.S, alteinate coefficients given by 6i 2.1 shall also be useu foi
the winuwaiu quaitei.
Notes:
1. values listeu aie foi the ueteimination of aveiage loau on main winu foice iesisting systems.
2. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces, iespectively.
S. Foi winu uiiecteu paiallel to the axis of the aich, use piessuie coefficients fiom Fig. 2.4.6 with
winu uiiecteu paiallel to iiuge.
4. Foi components anu clauuing: (1) At ioof peiimetei, use the exteinal piessuie coefficients in Fig.
2.4.11 with e baseu on spiingline slope anu (2) foi iemaining ioof aieas, use exteinal piessuie
coefficients of this table multiplieu by u.87.

Part6
42

MainWindForceResistingSystem Method2 AllHeights

Figure2.4.9 DesignWindLoadCases

Case 1. Full uesign winu piessuie acting on the piojecteu aiea peipenuiculai to each piincipal axis
of the stiuctuie, consiueieu sepaiately along each piincipal axis.
Case 2. Thiee quaiteis of the uesign winu piessuie acting on the piojecteu aiea peipenuiculai to
each piincipal axis of the stiuctuie in conjunction with a toisional moment as shown,
consiueieu sepaiately foi each piincipal axis.
Case S. Winu loauing as uefineu in Case 1, but consiueieu to act simultaneously at 7S% of the
specifieu value.
Case 4. Winu loauing as uefineu in Case 2, but consiueieu to act simultaneously at 7S% of the
specifieu value.
Notes:
1. Besign winu piessuies foi winuwaiu anu leewaiu faces shall be ueteimineu in accoiuance
with the piovisions of 2.4.1S as applicable foi builuing of all heights.
2. Biagiams show plan views of builuing.
S. Notation:
Pwx,PwY: Winuwaiu face uesign piessuie acting in the x,y piincipal axis, iespectively.
PLX,PLY: Leewaiu face uesign piessuie acting in the x,y piincipal axis, iespectively.
e(eX+ey): Eccentiicity foi the x,y piincipal axis of the stiuctuie, iespectively.
MT: Toisional moment pei unit height acting about a veitical axis of the builuing.

Chapter2
43

MainWindForceResistingSystem Method2 h 18.3m

Figure2.4.10 ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
pf
LowriseWalls&
Roofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

Part6
44

MainWindForceResistingSystem Method2 h 18.3m
Figure2.4.10(contd) ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
pf
LowriseWalls&
Roofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

Roof
Angle
(uegiees)
BuildingSurface
1 2 3 4 5 6 1E 2E 3E 4E
uS u.4u u.69 u.S7 u.29 u.4S u.4S u.61 1.u7 u.SS u.4S
2u u.SS u.69 u.48 u.4S u.4S u.4S u.8u 1.u7 u.69 u.64
Su4S u.S6 u.21 u.4S u.S7 u.4S u.4S u.69 u.27 u.SS u.48
9u u.S6 u.S6 u.S7 u.S7 u.4S u.4S u.69 u.69 u.48 u.48
Notes:
1. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces, iespectively.
2. Foi values of othei than those shown, lineai inteipolation is peimitteu.
S. The builuing must be uesigneu foi all winu uiiections using the 8 loauing patteins shown. The loau
patteins aie applieu to each builuing coinei in tuin as the Refeience Coinei.
4. Combinations of exteinal anu inteinal piessuies (see Figuie 2.4.S) shall be evaluateu as iequiieu to
obtain the most seveie loauings.
S. Foi the toisional loau cases shown below, the piessuies in zones uesignateu with a T (1T, 2T, ST,
4T) shall be 2S% of the full uesign winu piessuies (zones 1, 2, S, 4).
Exception: 0ne stoiy builuings with h less than oi equal to 9.1m, builuings two stoiies oi less
fiameu with light fiame constiuction, anu builuings two stoiies oi less uesigneu with flexible
uiaphiagms neeu not be uesigneu foi the toisional loau cases.
Toisional loauing shall apply to all eight basic loau patteins using the figuies below applieu at each
iefeience coinei.
6. Except foi momentiesisting fiames, the total hoiizontal sheai shall not be less than that
ueteimineu by neglecting winu foices on ioof suifaces.
7. Foi the uesign of the NWFRS pioviuing lateial iesistance in a uiiection paiallel to a iiuge line oi foi
flat ioofs, use = u anu locate the zone 2S bounuaiy at the miulength of the builuing.
8. The ioof piessuie coefficient GCpf, when negative in Zone 2 oi 2E, shall be applieu in Zone 2/2Efoi
a uistance fiom the euge of ioof equal to u.S times the hoiizontal uimension of the builuing paiallel
to the uiiection of the NWFRS being uesigneu oi 2.S times the eave height, he, at the winuwaiu
wall, whichevei is less; the iemainuei of Zone 2/2E extenuing to the iiuge line shall use the
piessuie coefficient GCpf foi Zone 3/3E.
9. Notation:
a: 1u peicent of least hoiizontal uimension oi 0.4h, whichevei is smallei, but not less than eithei
4% of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.9 m.
h: Nean ioof height, in meteis, except that eave height shall be useu foi 1u.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Chapter2
45

ComponentsandCladdingMethod2 h18.3m
Figure2.4.11.A ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
p
Walls
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

Notes:
1. veitical scale uenotes GCP to be useu with qh
2. Boiizontal scale uenotes effective winu aiea, in squaie meteis.
S. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces,
iespectively.
4. Each component shall be uesigneu foi maximum positive anu negative piessuies.
S. values of GCP foi walls shall be ieuuceu by 1u% when 1u
u
.
6. Notation:
a: 1u peicent of least hoiizontal uimension oi 0.4h, whichevei is smallei, but not less than
eithei 4% of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.9m.
h: Nean ioof height, in meteis, except that eave height shall be useu foi 1u
u
.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Part6
46

ComponentsandCladdingMethod2 h 18.3m
Figure2.4.11.B ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
p
GableRoofs7
0

Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

Notes:
1. veitical scale uenotes GCP to be useu with qh
2. Boiizontal scale uenotes effective winu aiea, in squaie meteis.
S. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces,
iespectively.
4. Each component shall be uesigneu foi maximum positive anu negative piessuies.
S. If a paiapet equal to oi highei than u.9m is pioviueu aiounu the peiimetei of the ioof with
7
u
, the negative values of GC0 in Zone S shall be equal to those foi Zone 2 anu positive
values of GCPin Zones 2 anu 4 shall be set equal to those foi wall Zones 4 anu S iespectively
in figuie 2.4.11A.
6. values of GCP foi ioof oveihangs incluue piessuie contiibutions fiom both uppei anu lowei
suifaces.
7. Notation:
a: 1u peicent of least hoiizontal uimension oi 0.4h, whichevei is smallei, but not less than
eithei 4% of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.9m.
h: Eave height shall be useu foi 1u
u
.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Chapter2
47

ComponentsandCladdingMethod2 h 18.3m
Figure2.4.11.C ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
p
Gable/HipRoofs7
0
<27
0

Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

Notes:
1. veitical scale uenotes GCP to be useu with qh
2. Boiizontal scale uenotes effective winu aiea, in squaie feet (squaie meteis).
S. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces,
iespectively.
4. Each component shall be uesigneu foi maximum positive anu negative piessuies.
S. values of GCP foi ioof oveihangs incluue piessuie contiibutions fiom both uppei anu
lowei suifaces.
6. Foi hip ioofs with 7
u
< 27
u
, eugeiiuge stiips anu piessuie coefficients foi iiuges of
gableu ioofs shall apply on each hip.
7. Foi hip ioofs with 7
u
< 2S
u
, Zone S shall be tieateu as Zone 2.
8. Notation:
a: 1u peicent of least hoiizontal uimension oi 0.4h, whichevei is smallei, but not less than
eithei 4% of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.9m.
h: Nean ioof height, in meteis, except that eave height shall be useu foi 1u
u
.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Part6
48

ComponentsandCladdingMethod2 h 18.3m
Figure2.4.11.D ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
p
GableRoofs27
0
<45
0

Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

Notes:
1. veitical scale uenotes GCP to be useu with qh
2. Boiizontal scale uenotes effective winu aiea, in squaie feet (squaie meteis).
S. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces,
iespectively.
4. Each component shall be uesigneu foi maximum positive anu negative piessuies.
S. values of GCP foi ioof oveihangs incluue piessuie contiibutions fiom both uppei anu lowei
suifaces.
6. Notation:
a: 1u peicent of least hoiizontal uimension oi 0.4h, whichevei is smallei, but not less than
eithei 4% of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.9m.
h: Nean ioof height, in meteis.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Chapter2
49

ComponentsandCladdingMethod2 h 18.3m
Figure2.4.12 ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
p
SteppedRoofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings



Notes:
0n the lowei level of flat, steppeu ioofs shown in Fig. 2.4.12, the zone uesignations anu piessuie
coefficients shown in Fig. 2.4.11B shall apply, except that at the ioofuppei wall inteisection(s), Zone S
shall be tieateu as Zone 2 anu Zone 2 shall be tieateu as Zone 1. Positive values of GCp equal to those foi
walls in Fig. 2.4.11A shall apply on the ciosshatcheu aieas shown in Fig. 2.4.12.
Notation:
b: 1.Sh1 in Fig. 2.4.12, but not gieatei than Su.S m.
h: Nean ioof height, in meteis.
hi: h1 oi h2 in Fig. 2.4.12; h = h1+h2;h1 S.1 m; hi/h= u.S to u.7.
W: Builuing wiuth in Fig. 2.4.12.
Wi:W1oi W2 oi W3 in Fig. 2.4.12. W=W1+W2oi W1+W2+W3; Wi/W= u.2S to u.7S.
e: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Part6
50

ComponentsandCladdingMethod2 h 18.3m
Figure2.4.13 ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
p
MultispanGableRoofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings
Notes:
1. veitical scale uenotes GCP to be useu with qh
2. Boiizontal scale uenotes effective winu aiea, in squaie meteis.
S. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces,
iespectively.
4. Each component shall be uesigneu foi maximum positive anu negative piessuies.
S. Foi 1u
u
values of GCP fiom Fig. 2.4.11 shall be useu.
6. Notation:
a: 1u peicent of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.4h, whichevei is smallei, but not less than
eithei 4% of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.9m.
h: Nean ioof height, in feet (meteis), except that eave height shall be useu foi 1u
u
.
W: Builuing mouule wiuth, in meteis.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Chapter2
51

ComponentsandCladdingMethod2 h 18.3m
Figure2.4.14.A ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
p
MonoslopeRoofs
3
0
<10
0

Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

Notes:
1. veitical scale uenotes GCP to be useu with qh
2. Boiizontal scale uenotes effective winu aiea A, in squaie meteis.
S. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces,
iespectively.
4. Each component shall be uesigneu foi maximum positive anu negative piessuies.
S. Foi Su values of GCP fiom Fig. 2.4.11B shall be useu.
6. Notation:
a: 1u peicent of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.4h, whichevei is smallei, but not less than
eithei 4% of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.9m.
h: Eave height shall be useu foi 1u
u
.
W: Builuing wiuth, in meteis.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Part6
52

ComponentsandCladdingMethod2 h 18.3m
Figure2.4.14.B ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
p
MonoslopeRoofs
10
0
<30
0

Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

Notes:
1. veitical scale uenotes GCP to be useu with qh
2. Boiizontal scale uenotes effective winu aiea A, in squaie feet (squaie meteis).
S. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces, iespectively.
4. Each component shall be uesigneu foi maximum positive anu negative piessuies.
S. Notation:
a: 1u peicent of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.4h, whichevei is smallei, but not less than eithei
4% of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.9m.
h: Nean ioof height in meteis.
W: Builuing wiuth, in meteis.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Chapter2
53

ComponentsandCladdingMethod2 h 18.3m
Figure2.4.15 ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
p
SawtoothRoofs

Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

Notes:
1. VerticalscaledenotesGC
P
tobeusedwithq
h

2. HorizontalscaledenoteseffectivewindareaA,insquarefeet(squaremeters).
3. Plusandminussignssignifypressuresactingtowardandawayfromthesurfaces,respectively.
4. Eachcomponentshallbedesignedformaximumpositiveandnegativepressures.
5. For10
0
ValuesofGC
P
fromFig.2.4.11shallbeused.
6. Notation:
a: 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than
either4%ofleasthorizontaldimensionor0.9m.
h:Meanroofheightinmetersexceptthateaveheightshallbeusedfor0
0
10
0
.
W:Buildingwidth,inmeters.
:Angleofplaneofrooffromhorizontal,indegrees.

Part6
54

ComponentsandCladdingMethod2 AllHeights
Figure2.4.16 ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
p
DomedRoofs

Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings

ExternalPressureCoefficientsforDomeswithacircularBase

, uegiees
NegativePressures PositivePressures PositivePressures
u 9u u 6u 61 9u
uCp u.9 +u.9 +u.S

Notes:
1. values uenote Cp to be useu with q(hD+f)wheie hD+fis the height at the top of the uome.
2. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces,
iespectively.
S. Each component shall be uesigneu foi maximum positive anu negative piessuies.
4. values apply to u hDD u.S, u.2 f/Du.S.
S. =u uegiees on uome spiingline, =9u uegiees at uome centei top point. f is measuieu fiom
spiingline to top.

Chapter2
55

ComponentsandCladdingMethod2
h >18.3m
Figure2.4.17 ExternalPressureCoefficients,GC
p
Walls &Roofs
Enclosed,PartiallyEnclosedBuildings



Notes:
1. veitical scale uenotes GCpto be useu with appiopiiate qzoi qh.
2. Boiizontal scale uenotes effective winu aiea A,in squaie feet (squaie meteis).
S. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaiu anu away fiom the suifaces, iespectively.
4. 0se qzwith positive values of GCpanu qhwith negative values of GCp
S. Each component shall be uesigneu foi maximum positive anu negative piessuies .
6. Coefficients aie foi ioofs with angle 1u. Foi othei ioof angles anu geometiy, use GCpvalues fiom
Fig. 2.4.11 anu attenuant qhbaseu on exposuie uefineu in 2.4.8.
7. If a paiapet equal to oi highei than u.9m is pioviueu aiounu the peiimetei of the ioof with 1u,
Zone S shall be tieateu as Zone 2.
8. Notation:
a:1u peicent of least hoiizontal uimension, but not less than u.9 m.
h:Nean ioof height, in meteis, except that eave height shall be useu foi 1u
o
.
z:height above giounu, in (meteis.
: Angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, in uegiees.

Part6
56

MainWindForceResistingSystem 0.25< h/L<1.0
Figure2.4.18A NetPressureCoefficient,C
N
MonoslopeFreeRoofs
q<45,=0,180
OpenBuildings

Roof
Angle

Loau
Case
WindDirection,=0 WindDirection,=180
ClearWindFlow ObstructedWindFlow ClearWindFlow ObstructedWindFlow
C
NW
C
NL
C
NW
C
NL
C
NW
C
NL
C
NW
C
NL

u A 1.2 u.S u.S 1.2 1.2 u.S u.S 1.2

B 1.1 u.1 1.1 u.6 1.1 u.1 1.1 u.6
7.S A u.6 1 1 1.S u.9 1.S u.2 1.2
B 1.4 u 1.7 u.8 1.6 u.S u.8 u.S
1S A u.S 1.S 1.1 1.S 1.S 1.6 u.4 1.1
B 1.9 u 2.1 u.6 1.8 u.6 1.2 u.S
22.S A 1.S 1.6 1.S 1.7 1.7 1.8 u.S 1
B 2.4 u.S 2.S u.9 2.2 u.7 1.S u
Su A 1.8 1.8 1.S 1.8 2.1 2.1 u.6 1
B 2.S u.6 2.S 1.1 2.6 1 1.6 u.1
S7.S A 1.8 1.8 1.S 1.8 2.1 2.2 u.7 u.9
B 2.4 u.6 2.2 1.1 2.7 1.1 1.9 u.S
4S A 1.6 1.8 1.S 1.8 2.2 2.S u.8 u.9
B 2.S u.7 1.9 1.2 2.6 1.4 2.1 u.4
Notes:
CNW anu CNLuenote net piessuies (contiibutions fiom top anu bottom suifaces) foi winuwaiu anu
leewaiu half of ioof suifaces, iespectively.
Cleai winu flow uenotes ielatively unobstiucteu winu flow with blockage less than oi equal to Su%.
0bstiucteu winu flow uenotes objects below ioof inhibiting winu flow (>Su% blockage).
Foi values of e between 7.S anu 4S, lineai inteipolation is peimitteu. Foi values of e less than 7.S, use
Nonoslope ioof loau coefficients.
Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaius anu away fiom the top ioof suiface, iespectively.
All loau cases shown foi each ioof angle shall be investigateu.
Notation:
L : hoiizontal uimension of ioof, measuieu in the along winu uiiection, m
h : mean ioof height, m
: uiiection of winu, uegiees
: angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, uegiees

Chapter2
57

MainWindForceResistingSystem 0.25h/L1.0
Figure2.4.18B NetPressureCoefficients,C
N PitchedFreeRoofs
45
o
,=0
o
,180
o

OpenBuildings



Roof
Angle,
Loau
Case
Winu Biiection, y=u
o
, 18u
o

Cleai Winu Flow 0bstiucteu Winu Flow
CNW CNL CNW CNL
7.S
o
A 1.1 u.S 1.6 1
B u.2 1.2 u.9 1.7
1S
o
A 1.1 u.4 1.2 1
B u.1 1.1 u.6 1.6
22.S
o
A 1.1 u.1 1.2 1.2
B u.1 u.8 u.8 1.7
Su
o
A 1.S u.S u.7 u.7
B u.1 u.9 u.2 1.1
S7.S
o
A 1.S u.6 u.6 u.6
B u.2 u.6 u.S u.9
4S
o
A 1.1 u.9 u.S u.S
B u.S u.S u.S u.7
Notes:
CNW anu CNL uenote net piessuies (contiibutions fiom top anu bottom suifaces) foi winuwaiu anu leewaiu
half of ioof suifaces, iespectively.
Cleai winu flow uenotes ielatively unobstiucteu winu flow with blockage less than oi equal to Su%.
0bstiucteu winu flow uenotes objects below ioof inhibiting winu flow (>Su% blockage).
Foi values of between 7.S anu 4S, lineai inteipolation is peimitteu. Foi values of less than 7.S, use
monoslope ioof loau coefficients.
Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaius anu away fiom the top ioof suiface, iespectively.
All loau cases shown foi each ioof angle shall be investigateu.
Notation:
L : hoiizontal uimension of ioof, measuieu in the along winu uiiection, m
h : mean ioof height, m
: uiiection of winu, uegiees
: angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, uegiees

Part6
58
MainWindForceResistingSystem 0.25h/L1.0
Figure2.4.18C NetPressureCoefficients,C
N TroughedFreeRoofs
45
o
,=0
o
,180
o

OpenBuildings



Roof
Angle,
Loau
Case
Winu Biiection, =u
o,
18u
o

Cleai Winu Flow 0bstiucteu Winu Flow
CNW CNL CNW CNL
7.S
o
A 1.1 u.S 1.6 u.S
B u.2 1.2 u.9 u.8
1S
o
A 1.1 u.4 1.2 u.S
B u.1 1.1 u.6 u.8
22.S
o
A 1.1 u.1 1.2 u.6
B u.1 u.8 u.8 u.8
Su
o
A 1.S u.S 1.4 u.4
B u.1 u.9 u.2 u.S
S7.S
o
A 1.S u.6 1.4 u.S
B u.2 u.6 u.S u.4
4S
o
A 1.1 u.9 1.2 u.S
B u.S u.S u.S u.4
Notes:
CNW anu CNL uenote net piessuies (contiibutions fiom top anu bottom suifaces) foi winuwaiu anu leewaiu
half of ioof suifaces, iespectively.
Cleai winu flow uenotes ielatively unobstiucteu winu flow with blockage less than oi equal to Su%.
0bstiucteu winu flow uenotes objects below ioof inhibiting winu flow (>Su% blockage).
Foi values of between 7.S anu 4S, lineai inteipolation is peimitteu. Foi values of less than 7.S, use
monoslope ioof loau coefficients.
Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaius anu away fiom the top ioof suiface, iespectively.
All loau cases shown foi each ioof angle shall be investigateu.
Notation:
L : hoiizontal uimension of ioof, measuieu in the along winu uiiection, m
h : mean ioof height, m
: uiiection of winu, uegiees
: angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, uegiees

Chapter2
59

MainWindForceResistingSystem 0.25h/L1.0
Figure2.4.18D NetPressureCoefficients,C
N TroughedFreeRoofs
45
o
,=0
o
,180
o

OpenBuildings


Boiizontal
Bistance fiom
Winuwaiu Euge
Roof
Angle
Loau Case Cleai Winu Flow 0bstiucteu Winu
Flow
CN CN
h All Shapes A u.8 1.2
4S
o
B u.8 u.S
> h, 2h All Shapes A u.6 u.9
4S
o
B u.S u.S
> 2h All Shapes A u.S u.6
4S
o
B u.S u.S
Notes:
CN uenotes net piessuies (contiibutions fiom top anu bottom suifaces).
Cleai winu flow uenotes ielatively unobstiucteu winu flow with blockage less than oi equal to Su%.
0bstiucteu winu flow uenotes objects below ioof inhibiting winu flow (>Su% blockage).
Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaius anu away fiom the top ioof suiface, iespectively.
All loau cases shown foi each ioof angle shall be investigateu.
Foi monoslope ioofs with theta less than S uegiees, CN values shown apply also foi cases wheie gamma = u
uegiees anu u.uS less than oi equal to h/Lless than oi equal to u.2S. See Figuie 2.4.18A foi othei h/Lvalues.
Notation:
L : hoiizontal uimension of ioof, measuieu in the along winu uiiection, m
h : mean ioof height, m
y : uiiection of winu, uegiees
: angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, uegiees

Part6
60
ComponentsandCladding 0.25< h/L< 1.0
Figure2.4.19A NetPressureCoefficient,C
N
MonoslopeFreeRoofs
<45 OpenBuildings

Roof
Angle

Effective
Winu Aiea
CN
Cleai Winu Flow 0bstiucteu Winu Flow
ZoneS Zone2 Zone 1 ZoneS Zone2 Zone 1
u

< a
2
2.4 S.S 1.8 1.7 1.2 1.1 1 S.6 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>a
2
,<4.ua
2
1.8 1.7 1.8 1.7 1.2 1.1 u.8 1.8 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>4.ua
2
1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 u.S 1.2 u.S 1.2 u.S 1.2
7.S < a
2
S.2 4.2 2.4 2.1 1.6 1.4 1.6 S.1 u.S 2.6 u.8 1.7
>a
2
,<4.ua
2
2.4 2.1 2.4 2.1 1.6 1.4 1.2 2.6 1.2 2.6 u.8 1.7
>4.ua
2
1.6 1.4 1.6 1.4 1.6 1.4 u.8 1.7 u.8 1.7 u.8 1.7
1S < a
2
S.6 S.8 2.7 2.9 1.8 1.9 2.4 4.2 1.8 S.2 1.2 2.1
>a
2
,<4.ua
2
2.7 2.9 2.7 2.9 1.8 1.9 1.8 S.2 1.8 S.2 1.2 2.1
>4.ua
2
1.8 1.9 1.8 1.9 1.8 1.9 1.2 2.1 1.2 2.1 1.2 2.S
Su < a
2
S.2 S S.9 S.8 2.6 2.S S.2 4.6 2.4 S.S 1.6 2.S
>a
2
,<4.ua
2
S.9 S.8 S.9 S.8 2.6 2.S 2.4 S.S 2.4 S.S 1.6 2.S
>4.ua
2
2.6 2.S 2.6 2.S 2.6 2.S 1.6 2.S 1.6 2.S 1.6 2.S
4S < a
2
S.2 4.6 S.9 S.S 2.6 2.S 4.2 S.8 S.2 2.9 2.1 1.9
>a
2
,<4.ua
2
S.9 S.S S.9 S.S 2.6 2.S S.2 2.9 S.2 2.9 2.1 1.9
>4.ua
2
2.6 2.S 2.6 2.S 2.6 2.S 2.1 1.9 2.1 1.9 2.1 1.9
Notes:
1. CNuenotes net piessuies (contiibutions fiom top anu bottom suifaces).
2. Cleai winu flow uenotes ielatively unobstiucteu winu flow with blockage less than oi equal to Su%.
winu flow uenotes objects below ioof inhibiting winu flow (>Su% blockage).
S. Foi values of e othei than those shown, lineai inteipolation is peimitteu.
4. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaius anu away fiom the top ioof suiface,
iespectively.
S. Components anu clauuing elements shall be uesigneu foi positive anu negative piessuie
coefficients shown.
6. Notation:
a : 1u% of least hoiizontal uimension oi 0.4h, whichevei is smallei but not less than 4% of least
hoiizontal uimension oi u.9 m
h : mean ioof height, m
L: hoiizontal uimension of builuing, measuieu in along winu uiiection, m
: angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, uegiees

Chapter2
61

ComponentsandCladding 0.25h/L1.0
Figure2.4.19B NetPressureCoefficients,C
N MonoslopeFreeRoofs
45
o

OpenBuildings


Roof
Angle

Effective
Winu Aiea
CN
Cleai Winu Flow 0bstiucteu Winu Flow
Zone S Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone S Zone 2 Zone 1
u
o
a
2
2.4 S.S 1.8 1.7
1.2 1.1 1 S.6 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>a
2
, 4.ua
2
1.8 1.7 1.8 1.7 1.2 1.1 u8 1.8 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>4.ua
2
1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 u.S 1.2 u.S 1.2 u.S 1.2
7.S
o
a
2
2.2 S.6 1.7 1.8
1.1 1.2 1 S.1 u.8 26 u.S 1.7
>a
2
, 4.ua
2
1.7 1.8 1.7 1.8 1.1 1.2 u.8 2.6 u.8 26 u.S 1.7
>4.ua
2
1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2 u.S 1.7 u.S 1.7 as 1.7
1S
o
a
2
2.2 2.2 1.7 1.7
1.1 1.1 1 S.2 u.8 2.4 u.S 1.6
>a
2
, 4.ua
2
1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.1 1.1 u.8 2.4 u.8 2.4 u.S 1.6
>4.ua
2
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 u.S 1.6 u.S 1.6 u.S 1.6
Su
o
a
2
2.6 1.8 2 1.4
1.S u.9 1 2.4 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>a
2
, 4.ua
2
2 1.4 2 1.4 1.3 u.9 u.8 1.8 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>4.ua
2
1.S u.9 1.S u.9 1.S u.9 u.S 1.2 u.S .1.2 u.S 1.2
4S
o
a
2
2.2 1.6 1.7 1.2
1.1 u.8 1 2.4 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>a
2
, 4.ua
2
1.7 1.2 1.7 1.2 1.1 u.8 u.8 1.8 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>4.ua
2
1.1 u.8 1.1 u.8 1.1 u.8 u.S 1.2 u.S 1.2 u.S 1.2
Notes:
1.CNuenotes net piessuies (contiibutions fiom top anu bottom suifaces).
2. Cleai winu flow uenotes ielatively unobstiucteu winu flow with blockage less than oi equal to Su%.
0bstiucteu winu flow uenotes objects below ioof inhibiting winu flow (>Su% blockage).
S. Foi values of othei than those shown, lineai inteipolation is peimitteu.
4. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaius anu away fiom the top ioof suiface,
iespectively.
S. Components anu clauuing elements shall be uesigneu foi positive anu negative piessuie coefficients
shown.
6. Notation:
a : 1u% of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.411, whichevei is smallei but not less than 4% of least
hoiizontal uimension oi u.9 m
h : mean ioof height, m
L : hoiizontal uimension of builuing, measuieu in along winu uiiection, m
: angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, uegiees

Part6
62



ComponentsandCladding 0.25h/L1.0
Figure2.4.19C NetPressureCoefficients,C
N TroughedFreeRoofs
45
o

OpenBuildings


Roof
Angle

Effective
Winu Aiea
CN
Cleai Winu Flow 0bstiucteu Winu Flow
Zone S Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone S Zone 2 Zone 1
u
o
a
2

2.4 S.S 1.8 1.7 1.2 1.1 1 S.6 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>a
2
, 4.ua
2
1.8 1.7 1.8 1.7 1.1 1.1 u.8 1.8 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>4.ua
2
1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 u.S 1.2 u.S 1.2 u.S 1.2
7.S
o
a
2

2.4 S.S 1.8 1.7 1.2 1.1 1 4.8 u.8 2.4 u.S 1.6
>a
2
, 4.ua
2
1.8 1.7 1.8 1.7 1.2 1.1 u.8 2.4 u.8 2.4 u.S 1.6
>4.ua
2
1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2 1.1 u.S 1.6 u.S 1.6 u.S 1.6
1S
o
a
2

2.2 2.2 1.7 1.7 1.1 1.1 1 2.4 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>a
2
, 4.ua
2
1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.1 1.1 u.8 1.8 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>4.ua
2
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 u.S 1.2 u.S 12 u.S 1.2
Su
o
a
2

1.8 2.6 1.4 2 u.9 1.S 1 2.8 u.8 2.1 u.S 1.4
>a
2
, 4.ua
2
1.4 2 1.4 2 u.9 1.S u.8 2.1 u.8 2.1 u.S 1.4
>4.ua
2
u.9 1.S 1.9 1.S u.9 1.S u.S 1.4 u.S 1.4 u.S 1.4
4S
o
a
2

1.6 2.2 1.2 1.7 u.8 1.1 1 2.4 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>a
2
, 4.ua
2
1.2 1.7 1.2 1.7 u.8 1.1 u.8 1.8 u.8 1.8 u.S 1.2
>4.ua
2
u.8 1.1 1.8 1.1 u.8 1.1 u.S 1.2 u.S 1.2 u.S 1.2
Notes:
1.CN uenotes net piessuies (contiibutions fiom top anu bottom suifaces).
2. Cleai winu flow uenotes ielatively unobstiucteu winu flow with blockage less than oi equal to Su%.
0bstiucteu winu flow uenotes objects below ioof inhibiting winu flow (>Su% blockage).
S. Foi values of othei than those shown, lineai inteipolation is peimitteu.
4. Plus anu minus signs signify piessuies acting towaius anu away fiom the top ioof suiface, iespectively.
S. Components anu clauuing elements shall be uesigneu foi positive anu negative piessuie coefficients
shown.
6. Notation:
a: 1u% of least hoiizontal uimension oi u.411, whichevei is smallei but not less than 4% of least
hoiizontal uimension oi u.9 m
h : mean ioof height, m
L : hoiizontal uimension of builuing, measuieu in along winu uiiection, m
: angle of plane of ioof fiom hoiizontal, uegiees

Chapter2
63

OtherStructuresMethod2 AllHeight
Figure2.4.20 ForceCoefficient, C
f
SolidFreestandingWalls&SolidSigns
C
f
, CASE A & CASE B
Clearance
Ratio, s/h
Aspect Ratio, B/s
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 4 5 10 20 30 45
1 1.80 1.70 1.65 1.55 1.45 1.40 1.35 1.35 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30
0.9 1.85 1.75 1.70 1.60 1.55 1.50 1.45 1.45 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40
0.7 1.90 1.85 1.75 1.70 1.65 1.60 1.60 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55
0.5 1.95 1.85 1.80 1.75 1.75 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.75
0.3 1.95 1.90 1.85 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.85 1.85
0.2 1.95 1.90 1.85 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.90 1.95
0.16 1.95 1.90 1.85 1.85 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.85 1.85 1.90 1.90 1.95
Cf, CASE C
Region
(horizontal
distance from
windward edge)
Aspect Ratio, B/s

Region
(horizontal
distance from
windward edge)
Aspect Ratio, B/s

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 45
0 to s 2.25 2.60 2.90 3.10* 3.30* 3.40* 3.55* 3.65* 3.75* 0 to s 4.00* 4.30*
s to 2s 1.50 1.70 1.90 2.00 2.15 2.25 2.30 2.35 2.45 s to 2s 2.60 2.55
2s to 3s 1.15 1.30 1.45 1.55 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.85 2s to 3s 2.00 1.95
3s to 10s 1.10 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.00 0.95 3s to 4s 1.50 1.85


4s to 5s 1.35 1.85
5s to 10s 0.90 1.10
>10s 0.55 0.55

Notes:
1. The teim "signs" in notes below also applies to "fieestanuing walls".
2. Signs with openings compiising less than Su% of the gioss aiea aie classifieu as soliu signs. Foice coefficients foi soliu
signs with openings shall be peimitteu to be multiplieu by the ieuuction factoi (1 (1 )
1.S
).
S. To allow foi both noimal anu oblique winu uiiections, the following cases shall be consiueieu:
Foi s/h < 1:
CASE A: iesultant foice acts noimal to the face of the sign thiough the geometiic centei.
CASE B: iesultant foice acts noimal to the face of the sign at a uistance fiom the geometiic centei towaiu the
winuwaiu euge equal to u.2 times the aveiage wiuth of the sign.
Foi B/s 2, CASE C must also be consiueieu:
CASE C: iesultant foices act noimal to the face of the sign thiough the geometiic centeis of each iegion.
Foi s/h = 1:
The same cases as above except that the veitical locations of the iesultant foices occui at a uistance above the
geometiic centei equal to u.uS times the aveiage height of the sign.
4. Foi CASE C wheie s/h > u.8, foice coefficients shall be multiplieu by the ieuuction factoi (1.8 s/h).
S. Lineai inteipolation is peimitteu foi values of s/h, B/s anu Lr/s othei than shown.
6. Notation:
B: hoiizontal uimension of sign, in meteis;
h: height of the sign, in meteis;
s: veitical uimension of the sign, in meteis;
: iatio of soliu aiea to gioss aiea;
Lr: hoiizontal uimension of ietuin coinei, in meteis


*Values shall be
multiplied by the
following
reduction
factor when a
return
corner is present:

L
r
/s
Reduction
Factor
0.3 0.9
1.0 0.75
2 0.60

Part6
64
OtherStructuresMethod2 AllHeight
Figure2.4.21 ForceCoefficient,C
f
Chimneys,Tanks,Rooftop
Equipment,&SimilarStructures

CiossSection Type of Suiface hB

1 7 2S
Squaie (winu noimal to face) All 1.S 1.4 2.u
Squaie (winu along uiagomal) All 1.u 1.1 1.S
Bexagonal oi octagonal All 1.u 1.2 1.4
Rounu q
z
> S.S, in m,
q
z
in N m
2

Noueiately
smooth
u.S u.6 u.7
Rough
(D/D=u.u2)
u.7 u.8 u.9
veiy iough
(D/D=u.u8)
u.8 1.u u.2
Rounu q
z
S.S, in m,
q
z
in N m
2

All u.7 u.8 1.2
Notes:
The uesign winu foice shall be calculateu baseu on the aiea of the stiuctuie piojecteu on a plane noimal
to the winu uiiection. The foice shall be assumeu to act paiallel to the winu uiiection.
Lineai inteipolation is peimitteu foi h/Dvalues othei than shown.
Notation:
D: uiametei of ciiculai ciosssection anu least hoiizontal uimension of squaie, hexagonal oi octagonal
ciosssection at elevation unuei consiueiation, in meteis;
D: uepth of piotiuuing element such as iibs anu spoileis, in meteis;
H: height of stiuctuie, meteis anu
qz: velocity piessuie evaluateu at height z above giounu, in Nm
2

Chapter2
65

OtherStructuresMethod2 AllHeight
Figure2.4.22 ForceCoefficient,C
f
OpenSigns&Lattice
Frameworks

FlatSiueu
Nembeis
Rounueu Nembeis
(q
z
S.S, ) (q
z
> S.S, )
<u.1 2.u 1.2 u.8
u.1 to u.29 1.8 1.S u.9
u.S to u.7 1.6 1.S 1.1
Notes:
Signs with openings compiising Su% oi moie of the gioss aiea aie classifieu as open signs.
The calculation of the uesign winu foices shall be baseu on the aiea of all exposeu membeis anu elements
piojecteu on a plane noimal to the winu uiiection. Foices shall be assumeu to act paiallel to the winu.
The aiea Af consistent with these foice coefficients is the soliu aiea piojecteu noimal the winu uiiection.
Notation:
: iatio of soliu aiea to gioss aiea;
D: uiametei of a typical iounu numbei, in meteis
qz: velocity piessuie evaluateu at height z above giounu in Nm
2
.

OtherStructuresMethod2 AllHeight
Figure2.4.23 ForceCoefficient,C
f
TrussedTower
OpenStructures

Towei Cioss Section Cf

Squaie 4.u
2
S.9 + 4.u
Tiiangle S.4
2
4.7 + S.4
Notes:
1. Foi all winu uiiections consiueieu, the aiea Af consistent with the specifieu foice coefficients shall be
the soliu aiea of a towei face piojecteu on the plane of that face foi the towei segment unuei
consiueiation.
2. The specifieu foice coefficients aie foi toweis with stiuctuial angles oi similai flatsiueu membeis.
S. Foi toweis containing iounueu membeis, it is acceptable to multiply the specifieu foice coefficients
by the following factoi when ueteimining winu foices on such membeis: u.S1
2
+ u.S7 1.u
4. Winu foices shall be applieu in the uiiections iesulting in maximum membei foices anu ieactions.
Foi toweis with squaie ciosssections, winu foices shall be multiplieu by the following factoi when
the winu is uiiecteu along a towei uiagonal:
1 + u.7S 1.2
S. Winu foices on towei appuitenances such as lauueis, conuuits, lights, elevatois, etc., shall be
calculateu using appiopiiate foice coefficients foi these elements.
6. Loaus uue to ice accietion as uesciibeu in Section 11 shall be accounteu foi.
7. Notation:
: iatio of soliu aiea to gioss aiea of one towei face foi the segment unuei consiueiation.

Part6
66

Table2.4.1:BasicWindSpeedsforSelectedLocationsinBangladesh

Location
BasicWind
Speed(m/s) Location
BasicWind
Speed(m/s)
Angaipota
Bageihat
Banuaiban
Baiguna
Baiisal
Bhola
Bogia
Biahmanbaiia
Chanupui
Chapai Nawabganj
Chittagong
Chuauanga
Comilla
Coxs Bazai
Bahagiam
Bhaka
Binajpui
Faiiupui
Feni
uaibanuha
uazipui
uopalganj
Babiganj
Batiya
Ishuiui
}oypuihat
}amalpui
}essoie
}halakati
}henaiuah
Khagiachhaii
Khulna
Kutubuia
Kishoieganj
Kuiigiam
Kushtia
Lakshmipui
47.8
77.S
62.S
8u.u
78.7
69.S
61.9
S6.7
Su.6
41.4
8u.u
61.9
61.4
8u.u
47.8
6S.7
41.4
6S.1
64.1
6S.6
66.S
74.S
S4.2
8u.u
69.S
S6.7
S6.7
64.1
8u.u
6S.u
S6.7
7S.S
8u.u
64.7
6S.6
66.9
S1.2
Lalmoniihat
Nauaiipui
Naguia
Nanikganj
Neheipui
Naheshkhali
Noulvibazai
Nunshiganj
Nymensingh
Naogaon
Naiail
Naiayanganj
Naisinghui
Natoie
Netiokona
Nilphamaii
Noakhali
Pabna
Panchagaih
Patuakhali
Piiojpui
Rajbaii
Rajshahi
Rangamati
Rangpui
Satkhiia
Shaiiatpui
Sheipui
Siiajganj
Siimangal
St. Naitins Islanu
Sunamganj
Sylhet
Sanuwip
Tangail
Teknaf
Thakuigaon
6S.7
68.1
6S.u
S8.2
S8.2
8u.u
SS.u
S7.1
67.4
SS.2
68.6
61.1
S9.7
61.9
6S.6
44.7
S7.1
6S.1
41.4
8u.u
8u.u
S9.1
49.2
S6.7
6S.S
S7.6
61.9
62.S
Su.6
Su.6
8u.u
61.1
61.1
8u.u
Su.6
8u.u
41.4

Chapter2
67

ImportanceFactor,I(WindLoads)

Table2.4.2

Categoiy oi
Impoitance Class

NonBuiiicane Pione
Regions anu
Buiiicane Pione Regions
with
v = S844 ms
Buiiicane Pione Regions
with v > 44 ms
I u.87 u.77
II 1.u 1.uu
III 1.1S 1.1S
Iv 1.1S 1.1S


Note:
1. The building and structure classification categories are listed in Table 1.2.1

TerrainExposureConstants

Table2.4.3

Exposuie Zg (m) a h

c (m) Zmin(m)*
A 7.u S6S.76 17 u.84 14.u u.4S u.Su 97.S4 1S.u 9.14
B 9.S 274.S2 19.S 1.uu 16.S u.6S u.2u 1S2.4 1S.u 4.S7
C 11.S 21S.S6 111.S 1.u7 19.u u.8u u.1S 198.12 18.u 2.1S

*zmin = minimum height used to ensure that the equivalent height z is
greater of 0.6h or zmin.

For buildings with h zmin, z shall be taken as zmin.

Part6
68

VelocityPressureExposureCoefficients,KhandKz

Table2.4.4

Heightabovegroundlevel,z Exposure(Note1)
A B C
(m) Case 1 Case 2 Case 1 & 2 Case 1 & 2
u4.6 u.7u u.S7 u.8S 1.uS
6.1 u.7u u.62 u.9u 1.u8
7.6 u.7u u.66 u.94 1.12
9.1 u.7u u.7u u.98 1.16
12.2 u.76 u.76 1.u4 1.22
1S.2 u.81 u.81 1.u9 1.27
18 u.8S u.8S 1.1S 1.S1
21.S u.89 u.89 1.17 1.S4
24.4 u.9S u.9S 1.21 1.S8
27.41 u.96 u.96 1.24 1.4u
Su.S u.99 u.99 1.26 1.4S
S6.6 1.u4 1.u4 1.S1 1.48
42.7 1.u9 1.u9 1.S6 1.S2
48.8 1.1S 1.1S 1.S9 1.SS
S4.9 1.17 1.17 1.4S 1.S8
61.u 1.2u 1.2u 1.46 1.61
76.2 1.28 1.28 1.SS 1.68
91.4 1.SS 1.SS 1.S9 1.7S
1u6.7 1.41 1.41 1.64 1.78
121.9 1.47 1.47 1.69 1.82
1S7.2 1.S2 1.S2 1.7S 1.86
1S2.4 1.S6 1.S6 1.77 1.89
Notes:
1. Case 1: a. All components anu clauuing.
b. Nain winu foice iesisting system in lowiise builuings uesigneu using Figuie 2.4.1u.
Case 2: a. All main winu foice iesisting systems in builuings except those in lowiise
builuings uesigneu using Figuie 2.4.1u.
b. All main winu foice iesisting systems in othei stiuctuies.
2. The velocity piessuie exposuie coefficient Kz may be ueteimineu fiom the following foimula:
Foi 4.S7 m zzg: Kz = 2.u1 (z/zg)
2/

Foi z < 4.S7 m: Kz=2.u1 (4.S7zg)
2/a

Note: z shall not be taken less than 9.1 m foi Case 1 in exposuie A.
S. anu zg aie tabulateu in Table 2.4.S.
4. Lineai inteipolation foi inteimeuiate values. of heightz is acceptable.
S. Exposuie categoiies aie uefineu in 2.4.8.S.

Chapter2
69

WindDirectionalityFactor,Kd

Table2.4.5

Stiuctuie Type

Biiectionality Factoi Kd*

Builuings
Nain Winu Foice Resisting System
Components anu Clauuing


0.85
0.85

Aicheu Roofs

0.85

Chimneys, Tanks, anu Similai Stiuctuies
Squaie
Bexagonal
Rounu



0.90
0.95
0.95

Soliu Signs

0.85

0pen Signs anu Lattice Fiamewoik

0.85

Tiusseu Toweis
Tiiangulai, squaie, iectangulai
All othei cioss sections


0.85
0.95


*Biiectionality Factoi Kd has been calibiateu with combinations of loaus specifieu in Section 2.7. This
factoi shall only be applieu when useu in conjunction with loau combinations specifieu in 2.7.4 anu
2.7.S.

Part6
70
2.5 EARTHQUAKELOADS
2.5.1 GENERAL
Minimumdesignearthquakeforcesforbuildings,structuresorcomponentsthereofshallbedeterminedin
accordance with the provisions of section 2.5. Some definitions and symbols relevant for earthquake
resistant design for buildings are provided in Sections 2.5.2 and 2.5.3. Section 2.5.4 presents basic
earthquake resistant design concepts. Section 2.5.5 describes procedures for soil investigations, while
Section 2.5.6 describes procedures for determining earthquake ground motion for design. Section 2.5.7
describesdifferenttypesofbuildingsandstructuralsystemswhichpossessdifferentearthquakeresistant
characteristics. Static analysis procedures for design are described in Sections 2.5.8, 2.5.9 and 2.5.14.
Dynamic analysis procedures are dealt with in Sections 2.5.10 to 2.5.13. Section 2.5.15 presents
combination of earthquake loading effects in different directions and with other loading effects. Section
2.5.16dealswithallowabledriftanddeformationlimits.Section2.5.17addressesdesignofnonstructural
componentsinbuildings.Section2.5.18presentsdesignconsiderationsforbuildingswithseismicisolation
systems.DesignforsoftstoreyconditioninbuildingsisaddressedinSection2.5.19.
2.5.2 DEFINITIONS
ThefollowingdefinitionsoftermsshallbeapplicableonlytotheprovisionsofSection2.5:
BASE:Thelevelatwhichtheearthquakemotionsareconsideredtobeimpartedtothestructuresorthe
levelatwhichthestructureasadynamicvibratorissupported.
BASESHEAR:Totaldesignlateralforceorshearduetoearthquakeatthebaseofastructure.
BEARINGWALLSYSTEM:Astructuralsystemwithoutacompleteverticalloadcarryingspaceframe.
BRACEDFRAME:Anessentiallyverticaltrusssystemoftheconcentricoreccentrictypeprovidedtoresist
lateralforces.
BUILDINGFRAMESYSTEM:Anessentiallycompletespaceframewhichprovidessupportforgravityloads.
CAPACITYCURVE:Aplotofthetotalappliedlateralforce,V
j
,versusthelateraldisplacementofthecontrol
point,j,asdeterminedinanonlinearstaticanalysis.
CONTROL POINT: A point used to index the lateral displacement of the structure in a nonlinear static
analysis.
CRITICALDAMPING:Amountofdampingbeyondwhichthefreevibrationwillnotbeoscillatory.
DAMPING: The effect of inherent energy dissipation mechanisms in a structure (due to sliding, friction,
etc.)thatresultsinreductionofeffectofvibration,expressedasapercentageofthecriticaldampingfor
thestructure.
DESIGN ACCELERATION RESPONSE SPECTRUM: Smoothened idealized plot of maximum acceleration of a
singledegreeoffreedomstructureasafunctionofstructureperiodfordesignearthquakegroundmotion.
DESIGNEARTHQUAKE:Theearthquakegroundmotionconsidered(fornormaldesign)astwothirdsofthe
correspondingMaximumConsideredEarthquake(MCE).
Chapter2
71

DIAPHRAGM:Ahorizontalornearlyhorizontalsystemofstructuresactingtotransmitlateralforcestothe
vertical resisting elements. The term "diaphragm" includes reinforced concrete floor slabs as well as
horizontalbracingsystems.
DUAL SYSTEM : A combination of a Special or Intermediate Moment Resisting Frame and Shear Walls or
BracedFramesdesignedinaccordancewiththecriteriaofSec1.3.2.
DUCTILITY: Capacity of a structure, or its members to undergo large inelastic deformations without
significantlossofstrengthorstiffness.
ECCENTRICBRACEDFRAME(EBF):AsteelbracedframedesignedinconformancewithSec10.20.15.
EPICENTRE:Thepointonthesurfaceofearthverticallyabovethefocus(pointoforigin)oftheearthquake.
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES : Buildings and structures which are necessary to remain functional during an
emergencyorapostdisasterperiod.
FLEXIBLE DIAPHRAGM : A floor or roof diaphragm shall be considered flexible, for purposes of this
provision,whenthemaximumlateraldeformationofthediaphragmismorethantwotimestheaverage
storey drift of the associated storey. This may be determined by comparing the computed midpoint in
plane deflection of the diaphragm under lateral load with the storey drift of adjoining vertical resisting
elementsunderequivalenttributarylateralload.
FLEXIBLE ELEMENT OR SYSTEM : An element or system whose deformation under lateral load is
significantlylargerthanadjoiningpartsofthesystem.
HORIZONTALBRACINGSYSTEM:Ahorizontaltrusssystemthatservesthesamefunctionasafloororroof
diaphragm.
IMPORTANCE FACTOR: It is a factor used to increase the design seismic forces for structures of
importance.
INTENSITYOFEARTHQUAKE:Itisameasureoftheamountofgroundshakingataparticularsiteduetoan
earthquake
INTERMEDIATE MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (IMRF): A concrete or steel frame designed in accordance
withSec8.3or10.20.10respectively.
LIQUEFACTION: State in saturated cohesionless soil wherein the effective shear strength is reduced to
negligible value due to pore water pressure generated by earthquake vibrations, when the pore water
pressureapproachesthetotalconfiningpressure.Inthiscondition,thesoiltendstobehavelikealiquid.
MAGNITUDEOFEARTHQUAKE: The magnitude of earthquake is a number, which is a measure of energy
releasedinanearthquake.
MAXIMUMCONSIDEREDEARTHQUAKE(MCE):Themostsevereearthquakegroundmotionconsideredby
thiscode.
MODALMASS:partofthetotalseismicmassofthestructurethatiseffectiveinmodekofvibration.
MODAL PARTICIPATION FACTOR: Amount by which mode k contributes to the overall vibration of the
structureunderhorizontalandverticalearthquakegroundmotions.
Part6
72
MODAL SHAPE COEFFICIENT: When a system is vibrating in a normal mode, at any particular instant of
time, the vibration amplitude of mass i expressed as a ratio of the vibration amplitude of one of the
massesofthesystem,isknownasmodalshapecoefficient
MOMENTRESISTINGFRAME:Aframeinwhichmembersandjointsarecapableofresistinglateralforces
primarilybyflexure.Momentresistingframesareclassifiedasordinarymomentresistingframes(OMRF),
intermediatemomentresistingframes(IMRF)andspecialmomentresistingframes(SMRF).
NUMBER OF STOREYS (n) : Number of storeys of a building is the number of levels above the base. This
excludes the basement storeys, where basement walls are connected with ground floor deck or fitted
betweenthebuildingcolumns.But,itincludesthebasementstoreys,whentheyarenotsoconnected.
ORDINARYMOMENTRESISTINGFRAME(OMRF):Amomentresistingframenotmeetingspecialdetailing
requirementsforductilebehaviour.
PDELTAEFFECT:Itisthesecondaryeffectonshearsandmomentsofframemembersduetoactionofthe
verticalloadsduetothelateraldisplacementofbuildingresultingfromseismicforces.
PERIOD OF BUILDING: Fundamental period (for 1st mode) of vibration of building for lateral motion in
directionconsidered.
RESPONSEREDUCTIONFACTOR:Itisthefactorbywhichtheactualbaseshearforcethatwoulddevelopif
the structure behaved truly elastic during earthquake, is reduced to obtain design base shear. This
reduction is allowed to account for the beneficial effects of inelastic deformation (resulting in energy
dissipation)thatcanoccurinastructureduringamajorearthquake,stillensuringacceptableresponseof
thestructure.
SEISMICDESIGNCATEGORY:Aclassificationassignedtoastructurebasedonitsimportancefactorandthe
severityofthedesignearthquakegroundmotionatthesite.
SEISMICFORCERESISTING SYSTEM: That part of the structural system that has been considered in the
designtoprovidetherequiredresistancetotheseismicforces.
SHEAR WALL : A wall designed to resist lateral forces acting in its plane (sometimes referred to as a
verticaldiaphragmorastructuralwall).
SOFT STOREY : Storey in which the lateral stiffness is less than 70 per cent of the stiffness of the storey
aboveorlessthan80percentoftheaveragelateralstiffnessofthethreestoreysabove.
SITECLASS:Siteisclassifiedbasedonsoilpropertiesofupper30meters.
SPACE FRAME : A threedimensional structural system without bearing walls composed of members
interconnected so as to function as a complete self contained unit with or without the aid of horizontal
diaphragmsorfloorbracingsystems.
SPECIAL MOMENT RESISTING FRAME (SMRF) : A moment resisting frame specially detailed to provide
ductile behaviour complying with the seismic requirements provided in Chapters 8 and 10 for concrete
andsteelframesrespectively.
STOREY:Thespacebetweenconsecutivefloorlevels.Storeyxisthestoreybelowlevelx.
STOREYSHEAR:Thetotalhorizontalshearforceataparticularstorey(level).
STOREYDRIFT:Thehorizontaldeflectionatthetopofthestoryrelativetobottomofthestorey.
Chapter2
73

STRENGTH : The usable capacity of an element or a member to resist the load as prescribed in these
provisions.
TARGET DISPLACEMENT: An estimate of the maximum expected displacement of the control point
calculatedforthedesignearthquakegroundmotioninnonlinearstaticanalysis.
VERTICALLOADCARRYINGFRAME:Aspaceframedesignedtocarryallverticalgravityloads.
WEAKSTOREY:Storeyinwhichthelateralstrengthislessthan80percentofthatofthestoreyabove.
2.5.3 SYMBOLSANDNOTATION
Thefollowingsymbolsandnotationshallapplytotheprovisionsofthissection:
A
x
= torsionamplificationfactoratlevelx.
C
d
= Deflectionamplificationfactor.
C
s
= Normalizedaccelerationresponsespectrum.
C
t
= numericalcoefficienttodeterminebuildingperiod
e
ai
= Accidentaleccentricityoffloormassatleveli
F
i
,F
n
,F
x
= designlateralforceappliedtoleveli,n,orxrespectively.
= lateralforcesonanelementorcomponentoronequipmentsupports.
g = accelerationduetogravity.
h
i
,h
n
,h
x
= Heightinmetresabovethebasetoleveli,norxrespectively
h
sx
= StoreyHeightofstoreyx(belowlevelx)
I = Importancefactor
Leveli = floor level of the structure referred to by the subscript i, e.g., i = 1 designates
thefirstlevelabovethebase.
Leveln = Uppermostlevelinthemainportionofthestructure.
M
x
= Overturningmomentatlevelx
N
i
= StandardPenetrationNumberofsoillayeri
P
x
= Totalverticaldesignloadatlevelx
R = Responsereductionfactorforstructuralsystems
S = Soilfactor.
S
a
= DesignSpectralAcceleration(inunitsofg)
S
ui
= Undrainedshearstrengthofcohesivelayeri
T = Fundamentalperiodofvibrationofstructure,inseconds,ofthestructureinthe
directionunderconsideration.
T
e
= Effective fundamental period of the structure in the direction under
consideration,asdeterminedfornonlinearstaticanalysis
Part6
74
V = Totaldesignbaseshearcalculatedbyequivalentstaticanalysis
V
1
= Total applied lateral force at the first increment of lateral load in nonlinear
staticanalysis.
V
y
= Effective yield strength determined from a bilinear curve fitted to the capacity
curve
V
rs
= Totaldesignbaseshearcalculatedbyresponsespectrumanalysis
V
th
= Totaldesignbaseshearcalculatedbytimehistoryanalysis
V
si
= Shearwavevelocityofsoillayeri
V
x
= Designstoreyshearinstoreyx
W = Totalseismicweightofbuilding
w
i
,w
x
= PortionofWwhichisassignedtoleveliandxrespectively
Z = Seismiczonecoefficient.

i
= Horizontal displacement at leveli relative to the base due to applied lateral
forces.

j
= Thedisplacementofthecontrolpointatloadincrementj.

T
= Thetargetdisplacementofthecontrolpoint.

1
= Thedisplacementofthecontrolpointatthefirstincrementoflateralload.

y
= Theeffectiveyielddisplacementofthecontrolpointdeterminedfromabilinear
curvefittedtothecapacitycurve

a
= Maximumallowablestoreydrift

x
= Designstoreydriftofstoreyx
= Dampingcorrectionfactor

ik
= Modalshapecoefficientatleveliformodek
= StabilitycoefficienttoassessPdeltaeffects
= Viscousdampingratioofthestructure

2.5.4 EARTHQUAKERESISTANTDESIGNBASICCONCEPTS
2.5.4.1 GENERALPRINCIPLES
Thepurposeofearthquakeresistantdesignprovisionsinthiscodeistoprovideguidelinesforthedesign
andconstructionofnewstructuressubjecttoearthquakegroundmotionsinordertominimizetheriskto
lifeforallstructures,toincreasetheexpected performanceofhigher occupancy structuresascompared
to ordinary structures, and to improve the capability of essential structures to function after an
earthquake. It is not economically feasible to design and construct buildings without any damage for a
major earthquake event. The intent is therefore to allow inelastic deformation and structural damage at
Chapter2
75

preferred locations in the structure without endangering structural integrity and to prevent structural
collapseduringamajorearthquake.
Theexpectedearthquakegroundmotionatthesiteduetoallprobableearthquakesmaybeevaluatedin
deterministic or probabilistic terms. The ground motion at the site due to an earthquake is a complex
phenomenaanddependsonseveralparameterssuchasearthquakemagnitude,focaldepth,earthquake
sourcecharacteristics,distancefromearthquakeepicenter,wavepathcharacteristics,aswellaslocalsoil
conditions at the site. The seismic zoning map divides the country into four seismic zones with different
expected levels of intensity of ground motion. Each seismic zone has a zone coefficient which provides
expected peak ground acceleration values on rock/firm soil corresponding to the maximum considered
earthquake(MCE).Thedesignbasisearthquakeistakenas2/3ofthemaximumconsideredearthquake.
Theeffectsoftheearthquakegroundmotiononthestructureisexpressedintermsofanidealizedelastic
design acceleration response spectrum, which depends on (a) seismic zone coefficient and local soil
conditionsdefininggroundmotionand(b)importancefactorandresponsereductionfactorrepresenting
building considerations. The earthquake forces acting on the structure is reduced using the response
modification/reduction factor R in order to take advantage of the inelastic energy dissipation due to
inherent ductility and redundancy in the structure as well as material overstrength. The importance
factor I increases design forces for important structures. If suitable lateral force resisting systems with
adequate ductility and detailing and good construction are provided, the building can be designed for a
response reduction factor R which may be as high as 5 to 8. Because of this fact, the provisions of this
Code for ductility and detailing need to be satisfied even for structures and members for which load
combinations that do not contain the earthquake effect indicate larger demands than combinations
including earthquake. The elastic deformations calculated under these reduced design forces are
multipliedbythedeflectionamplificationfactor,C
d
,toestimatethedeformationslikelytoresultfromthe
designearthquake.
The seismic design guidelines presented in this section are based on the assumption that the soil
supporting the structure will not liquefy, settle or slide due to loss of strength during the earthquake.
Reinforcedandprestressedconcretemembersshallbesuitablydesignedtoensurethatprematurefailure
due to shear or bond does not occur. Ductile detailing of reinforced concrete members is of prime
importance. In steel structures, members and their connections should be so proportioned that high
ductilityisobtained,avoidingprematurefailureduetoelasticorinelasticbucklingofanytype.
The building structure shall include complete lateral and vertical forceresisting systems capable of
providing adequate strength, stiffness, and energy dissipation capacity to withstand the design ground
motions within the prescribed limits of deformation and strength demand. The design ground motions
shall be assumed to occur along any horizontal direction of a building structure. The adequacy of the
structural systems shall be demonstrated through the construction of a mathematical model and
evaluation of this model for the effects of design ground motions. The design seismic forces, and their
distribution over the height of the building structure, shall be established in accordance with one of the
applicableproceduresindicatedinSection2.5andthecorrespondinginternalforcesanddeformationsin
themembersofthestructureshallbedetermined.Thedeformationofthestructureshallnotexceedthe
prescribedlimitsundertheactionofthedesignseismicforces.
2.5.4.2 CHARACTERISTICSOFEARTHQUAKERESISTANTBUILDINGS
Thedesirablecharacteristicsofearthquakeresistantbuildingsaredescribedbelow:
Part6
76
StructuralSimplicity,UniformityandSymmetry:
Structural simplicity, uniformity and plan symmetry is characterized by an even distribution of mass and
structural elements which allows short and direct transmission of the inertia forces created in the
distributedmassesofthebuildingtoitsfoundation.Themodelling,analysis,detailingandconstructionof
simple (regular) structures are subject to much less uncertainty, hence the prediction of its seismic
behaviourismuchmorereliable.
A building configuration with symmetrical layout of structural elements of the lateral force resisting
system, and welldistributed inplan, is desirable. Uniformity along the height of the building is also
important,sinceittendstoeliminatetheoccurrenceofsensitivezoneswhereconcentrationsofstressor
largeductilitydemandsmightcauseprematurecollapse.
Somebasicguidelinesaregivenbelow:
(i) Withrespecttothelateralstiffnessandmassdistribution,thebuildingstructureshallbe
approximatelysymmetricalinplanwithrespecttotwoorthogonalaxes.
(ii) Boththelateralstiffnessandthemassoftheindividualstoreysshallremainconstantor
reduce gradually, without abrupt changes, from the base to the top of a particular
building.
(iii) All structural elements of the lateral load resisting systems, such as cores, structural
walls, or frames shall run without interruption from the foundations to the top of the
building.
(iv) Anirregularbuildingmaybesubdividedintodynamicallyindependentregularunitswell
separatedagainstpoundingoftheindividualunitstoachieveuniformity.
(v) Thelengthtobreadthratio(=L
max
/L
min
)ofthebuildinginplanshallnotbehigherthan
4, where L
max
and L
min
are respectively the larger and smaller in plan dimension of the
building,measuredinorthogonaldirections.
StructuralRedundancy:
A high degree of redundancy accompanied by redistribution capacity through ductility is desirable,
enabling a more widely spread energy dissipation across the entire structure and an increased total
dissipated energy. The use of evenly distributed structural elements increases redundancy. Structural
systemsofhigherstaticindeterminacymayresultinhigherresponsereductionfactorR.
HorizontalBidirectionalResistanceandStiffness:
Horizontal earthquake motion is a bidirectional phenomenon and thus the building structure needs to
resisthorizontalactioninanydirection.Thestructuralelementsoflateralforceresistingsystemshouldbe
arrangedinanorthogonal(inplan)pattern,ensuringsimilarresistanceandstiffnesscharacteristicsinboth
main directions. The stiffness characteristics of the structure should also limit the development of
excessive displacements that might lead to either instabilities due to second order effects or excessive
damages.
TorsionalResistanceandStiffness
Besides lateral resistance and stiffness, building structures should possess adequate torsional resistance
and stiffness in order to limit the development of torsional motions which tend to stress the different
Chapter2
77

structural elements in a nonuniform way. In this respect, arrangements in which the main elements
resistingtheseismicactionaredistributedclosetotheperipheryofthebuildingpresentclearadvantages.
DiaphragmBehaviour
In buildings, floors (including the roof) act as horizontal diaphragms that collect and transmit the inertia
forces to the vertical structural systems and ensure that those systems act together in resisting the
horizontalseismicaction.Theactionoffloorsasdiaphragmsisespeciallyrelevantincasesofcomplexand
nonuniform layouts of the vertical structural systems, or where systems with different horizontal
deformabilitycharacteristicsareusedtogether.
Floor systems and the roof should be provided with inplane stiffness and resistance and with effective
connectionto thevertical structuralsystems.Particularcareshouldbetaken incases of noncompact or
veryelongatedinplanshapesandincasesoflargeflooropenings,especiallyifthelatterarelocatedinthe
vicinity of the main vertical structural elements, thus hindering such effective connection between the
verticalandhorizontalstructure.
Theinplanestiffnessofthefloorsshallbesufficientlylargeincomparisonwiththelateralstiffnessofthe
vertical structural elements, so that the deformation of the floor shall have a small effect on the
distributionoftheforcesamongtheverticalstructuralelements.
Foundation
The design and construction of the foundation and of its connection to the superstructure shall ensure
that the whole building is subjected to a uniform seismic excitation. For buildings with individual
foundation elements (footings or piles), the use of a foundation slab or tiebeams between these
elementsinbothmaindirectionsisrecommended,asdescribedinChapter3.
2.5.5 INVESTIGATIONANDASSESSMENTOFSITECONDITIONS
2.5.5.1 SITEINVESTIGATION
Appropriate site investigations should be carried out to identify the ground conditions influencing the
seismicaction.
The ground conditions at the building site should normally be free from risks of ground rupture, slope
instability and permanent settlements caused by liquefaction or densification during an earthquake. The
possibility of such phenomena should be investigated in accordance with standard procedures described
inSection3.
TheintentofthesiteinvestigationistoclassifytheSiteintooneoftypes SA,SB,SC, SD, SE,S
1
andS
2
as
definedinSection2.5.5.2.Suchclassificationisbasedonsiteprofileandevaluatedsoilproperties(shear
wavevelocity,StandardPenetrationResistance,undrainedshearstrength,soiltype).Thesiteclassisused
todeterminetheeffectoflocalsoilconditionsontheearthquakegroundmotion.
ForsitesrepresentingspecialsoiltypeS
1
orS
2
,sitespecificspecialstudiesforthegroundmotionshould
be done. Soil type S
1
, having very low shear wave velocity and low material damping, can produce
anomalous seismic site amplification and soilstructure interaction effects. For S
2
soils, possibility of soil
failureshouldbestudied.
ForastructurebelongingtoSeismicDesignCategoryCorD(Section2.5.7.2),siteinvestigationshouldalso
includedeterminationofsoilparametersfortheassessmentofthefollowing:
Part6
78
a. Slopeinstability.
b. PotentialforLiquefactionandlossofsoilstrength.
c. Differentialsettlement.
d. Surfacedisplacementduetofaultingorlateralspreading.
e. Lateral pressures on basement walls and retaining walls due to earthquake ground
motion.
Liquefaction potential and possible consequences should be evaluated for design earthquake ground
motionsconsistentwithpeakgroundaccelerations.AnySettlementduetodensificationofloosegranular
soils under design earthquake motion should be studied. The occurrence and consequences of geologic
hazards such as slope instability or surface faulting should also be considered. The dynamic lateral earth
pressureonbasementwallsandretainingwallsduringearthquakegroundshakingistobeconsideredas
anearthquakeloadforuseindesignloadcombinations
2.5.5.2 SITECLASSIFICATION
Site will be classified as type SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, S
1
and S
2
based on the provisions of this section.
ClassificationwillbedoneinaccordancewithTable2.5.1basedonthesoilpropertiesofupper30meters
ofthesiteprofile.
Aveiage soil piopeities will be ueteimineu as given in the following equations:
I

s
= J

n
=1

d
i
v
si
n
=1
, (2.S.1)

N

= J

n
=1

J

n
=1
_ (2.S.2)

S

u
= J
c
k
=1

J
c
S
u
k
=1
_ (2.S.S)
where,
n=numberofsoillayersinupper30m
d
i
=thicknessoflayeri
V
si
=shearwavevelocityoflayeri
N
i
=Field(uncorrected)StandardPenetrationValueforlayeri
k=numberofcohesivesoillayersinupper30m
d
ci
=thicknessofcohesivelayeri
S
ui
=Undrainedshearstrengthofcohesivelayeri
Thesiteprofileuptoadepthof30misdividedintonnumberofdistinctsoilorrocklayers.Wheresome
ofthelayersarecohesive,kisthenumberofcohesivelayers.Hence J

n
=1
=30m,while J
c
k
=1
<30
Chapter2
79

m if k < n in other words if there are both cohesionless and cohesive layers. The standard penetration
valueNasdirectlymeasuredinthefieldwithoutcorrectionwillbeused.
The site classification should be done using average shear wave velocity I

s
if this can be estimated,
otherwisethevalueofN

maybeused.

Table2.5.1: Siteclassificationbasedonsoilproperties
Site
Class
Descriptionofsoil profile upto30
metersdepth
AverageSoilPropertiesintop30meters
Shear
wave
velocity
F

x
(m/s)
Standard
Penetration
Value,N

(blows/30cm)
Undrained
shear
strength,S

(kPa)
SA Rock oi othei iocklike geological
foimation, incluuing at most S m of
weakei mateiial at the suiface.
> 8uu
SB Beposits of veiy uense sanu, giavel, oi
veiy stiff clay, at least seveial tens of
meties in thickness, chaiacteiiseu by a
giauual inciease of mechanical
piopeities with uepth.
S6u 8uu > Su > 2Su
SC Beep ueposits of uense oi meuium
uense sanu, giavel oi stiff clay with
thickness fiom seveial tens to many
hunuieus of meties.
18u S6u 1S Su 7u 2Su
SB Beposits of loosetomeuium
cohesionless soil (with oi without
some soft cohesive layeis), oi of
pieuominantly softtofiim cohesive
soil.
< 18u < 1S < 7u
SE A soil piofile consisting of a suiface
alluvium layei with vs values of type C
oi B anu thickness vaiying between
about S m anu 2u m, unueilain by
stiffei mateiial with vs > 8uu ms.

S1 Beposits consisting, oi containing a
layei at least 1u m thick, of soft
clayssilts with a high plasticity inuex
(PI > 4u) anu high watei content
< 1uu
(inuicative)
1u 2u
S2 Beposits of liquefiable soils, of
sensitive clays, oi any othei soil
piofile not incluueu in types SA to SE
oi S1

2.5.6 EARTHQUAKEGROUNDMOTION
2.5.6.1 REGIONALSEISMICITY
Bangladeshcanbeaffectedbymoderatetostrongearthquakeeventsduetoitsproximitytothecollision
boundary of the Northeast moving Indian plate and Eurasian Plate. Strong historical earthquakes with
magnitude greater than 7.0 have affected parts of Bangladesh in the last 150 years, some of them had
Part6
80
their epicenters within the country. A brief description of the local geology, tectonic features and
earthquakeoccurrenceintheregionisgiveninAppendixC.

Fig.2.5.1:SeismicZoningMapofBangladesh
2.5.6.2 SEISMICZONING
The intent of the seismic zoning map is to give an indication of the Maximum Considered Earthquake
(MCE)motionatdifferentpartsofthecountry.Inprobabilisticterms,theMCEmotionmaybeconsidered
tocorrespondtohavinga2%probabilityofexceedancewithinaperiodof50years.Thecountryhasbeen
Chapter2
81

dividedintofourseismiczoneswithdifferentlevelsofgroundmotion.Table2.5.2includesadescriptionof
thefourseismiczones.Fig.2.5.1presentsamapofBangladeshshowingtheboundariesofthefourzones.
Each zone has a seismic zone coefficient (Z) which represents the maximum considered peak ground
acceleration(PGA)onverystiffsoil/rock(siteclassSA)inunitsofg(accelerationduetogravity).Thezone
coefficients(Z)ofthefourzonesare:Z=0.12(Zone1),Z=0.20(Zone2),Z=0.28(Zone3)andZ=0.36(Zone
4). Table 2.5.3 lists zone coefficients for some important towns of Bangladesh. The most severe
earthquakepronezone,Zone4isinthenortheastwhichincludesSylhetandhasamaximumPGAvalueof
0.36g. Dhaka city falls in the moderate seismic intensity zone with Z=0.2, while Chittagong city falls in a
severeintensityzonewithZ=0.28.
Table2.5.2DescriptionofSeismicZones
Seismic
Zone
Location
Seismic
Intensity
Seismic
Zone
Coefficient,
Z
1 SouthwesternpartincludingBarisal,
Khulna,Jessore,Rajshahi
Low 0.12
2 LowerCentralandNorthwestern
partincludingNoakhali,Dhaka,
Pabna,Dinajpur,aswellas
Southwesterncornerincluding
Sundarbans
Moderate 0.20
3 UpperCentralandNorthwestern
partincludingBrahmanbaria,
Sirajganj,Rangpur
Severe 0.28
4 NortheasternpartincludingSylhet,
Mymensingh,Kurigram
VerySevere 0.36

Table2.5.3 SeismicZoneCoefficientZforSomeImportantTownsofBangladesh
Town Z Town Z Town Z Town Z
Bagerhat 0.12 Dinajpur 0.20 Kushtia 0.20 Panchagarh 0.20
Bandarban 0.28 Faridpur 0.20 Lalmanirhat 0.28 Patuakhali 0.12
Barguna 0.12 Feni 0.20 Madaripur 0.20 Rajbari 0.20
Barisal 0.12 Gaibandha 0.28 Manikganj 0.20 Rajshahi 0.12
Bhola 0.12 Gazipur 0.20 Mongla 0.12 Rangamati 0.28
Bogra 0.28 Habiganj 0.36 Munshiganj 0.20 Rangpur 0.28
Brahmanbaria 0.28 Jaipurhat 0.20 Mymensingh 0.36 Satkhira 0.12
Chandpur 0.20 Jamalpur 0.36 Narsingdi 0.28 Sirajganj 0.28
Chittagong 0.28 Jessore 0.12 Natore 0.20 Srimangal 0.36
Chuadanga 0.12 Khagrachari 0.28 Naogaon 0.20 Sunamganj 0.36
Comilla 0.20 Khulna 0.12 Netrakona 0.36 Sylhet 0.36
Cox'sBazar 0.28 Kishoreganj 0.36 Noakhali 0.20 Tangail 0.28
Dhaka 0.20 Kurigram 0.36 Pabna 0.20 Thakurgaon 0.20
Part6
82
2.5.6.3 DESIGNRESPONSESPECTRUM
The earthquake ground motion for which the building has to be designed is represented by the design
responsespectrum.Bothstaticanddynamicanalysismethodsarebasedonthisresponsespectrum.This
spectrum represents the spectral acceleration for which the building has to be designed as a function of
the building period, taking into account the ground motion intensity. The spectrum is based on elastic
analysis but in order to account for energy dissipation due to inelastic deformation and benefits of
structural redundancy, the spectral accelerations are reduced by the response modification factor R. For
importantstructures,thespectralaccelerationsareincreasedbytheimportancefactorI.Thedesignbasis
earthquake (DBE) ground motion is selected at a ground shaking level that is 2/3 of the maximum
consideredearthquake(MCE)groundmotion.Theeffectoflocalsoilconditionsontheresponsespectrum
isincorporatedinthenormalizedaccelerationresponsespectrumC
s
.
Thespectralaccelerationforthedesignearthquakeisgivenbythefollowingequation:
s a
C
R
ZI
S
3
2
=
(2.5.4)
where,
S
a
=Designspectralacceleration(inunitsofg),whichshallnotbelessthan2/3*ZI*.
=coefficientusedtocalculatelowerboundforS
a
.Recommendedvalueforis0.2.
Z=Seismiczonecoefficient,asdefinedinSection2.5.6.2
I=Structureimportancefactor,asdefinedinSection2.5.7.1
R = Response reduction factor which depends on the type of structural system given in Table 2.5.7. The
ratioI/Rcannotbegreaterthanone.
C
s
=Normalizedaccelerationresponsespectrum,whichisafunctionofstructure(building)periodandsoil
type(siteclass)asdefinedbyEquations2.5.5ad
( ) (2.S.Sa) T T u foi .
B

+ = 1 S 2 1
B
s
T
T
S C

(2.S.Sb) T T T foi .
C B
= S C
s
S 2
(2.S.Sc) T T T foi .
B C

=
T
T
S C
C
s
S 2

) (2.S.Su sec 4 T T foi .
B

=
2
S 2
T
T T
S C
D C
s


C
s
dependsonSandvaluesofT
B
,T
C
andT
D
,(Fig.2.5.2)whichareallfunctionsofthesiteclass.ConstantC
s

valuebetweenperiodsT
B
andT
C
representsconstantspectralacceleration.
S=SoilfactorwhichdependsonsiteclassandisgiveninTable2.5.4
T=Structure(building)periodasdefinedinSection2.5.9.2
T
B
= Lower limit of the period of the constant spectral acceleration branch given in Table 2.5.4 as a
functionofsiteclass.
T
C
= U
functio
T
D
= L
functio
= D
dampi
where
value

The an
class S
reduct
accele
accele
signific
Upper limit of
onofsiteclass
Lower limit of
onofsiteclass
amping correc
ing.Itisgiven
e,isthevisco
ofcannotbe
Figure2.

Table2.5.4:
nticipated (des
SA) is 2/3*Z.
tionfactorRa
eration respon
eration (obtain
cantinfluence
f the period o
s
the period of
s
ction factor as
bythefollowin
1u( =
ousdampingra
esmallerthan0
.5.2:TypicalSha
Sitedependent
Soilty
S
S
S
S
S
sign basis eart
However, for
ndimportance
se spectrum C
ned by Eq.2.5.
ofsiteclasson
of the constan
f the constant
s a function of
ngexpression:
S u S . ) +
atioofthestru
0.55.
apeoftheElast
tsoilfactorand
ype S
SA 1.
SB 1.
SC 1.1
SD 1.3
SE 1.
thquake) peak
design, the g
efactorI,resul
C
s
for 5% dam
.4) normalized
ntheresponse
83
nt spectral acc
t spectral disp
f damping wit
SS

ucture,express
icResponseSpe
otherparamete
T
B
(s)
.0 0.15
.2 0.15
15 0.20
35 0.20
.4 0.15
ground accele
ground motion
ltinginPGA
rock
mping, which m
d with respect
espectrum.
celeration bran
placement bra
th a reference

sedasaperce
ectrumCoefficie
ersdefiningelas
T
C
(s)
T
D
(s)
0.40 2.0
0.50 2.0
0.60 2.0
0.80 2.0
0.50 2.0
eration (PGA)
n is modified
k
=2/3*Z*I/R.Fi
may be defined
t to PGA
rock
.
nch given in T
nch given in T
e value of =1

entageofcritic

entC
s

sticresponsesp
0
0
0
0
0
for rock or ve
through the u
ig.2.5.3shows
d as the 5% d
This figure de
Chapter
Table 2.5.4 as
Table 2.5.4 as
1 for 5% visco
(2.5.
aldamping.Th
pectrum
ery stiff soil (si
use of respon
sthenormalize
damped spectr
emonstrates th
r2
a
a
us
6)
he
te
se
ed
ral
he
Part6

Design
For sit
obtain
respon
factor
Design
For in
Corres
in Eq.(
spectr
SiteSp
Forsit
projec
Theob
andsit
2.5.7
2.5.7
Buildin
conseq
immed
on oc
Figure2.
nSpectrumfor
te classes SA
ned using Eq.(2
nse spectrum
R/I.
nSpectrumfor
elastic analysis
spondingreald
(2.5.4). The re
rummultiplied
pecificDesignS
teclassS
1
and
cts, sitespecifi
bjectiveofsuc
teconditionsw
7 BUILD
7.1 IMPOR
ngs are classi
quences ofco
diateposteart
cupancy categ
.5.3: Normaliz
rElasticAnalys
to SE, the de
2.5.4) to comp
represents th
rInelasticAnal
s methods, the
designaccelera
eal design acc
dbyR/I.
Spectrum
S
2
,sitespecifi
c studies may
hsitespecific
withhighercon
DINGCATEG
RTANCEFA
fied in four o
llapseforhum
thquakeperiod
gory, buildings
zedDesignAcce
sis
esign accelera
pute S
a
(in unit
he expected g
ysis
e anticipated g
ationresponse
eleration resp
cstudiesaren
y also be carrie
groundmotio
nfidencethan
GORIES
ACTOR
occupancy cat
manlife,onthe
d,andonthes
s may be des
elerationRespon
ation response
ts of g) as a fu
round motion
ground motion
espectrumisu
ponse spectrum
neededtoobta
ed out to dete
nanalysisisto
ispossibleusin
tegories in Ch
eirimportance
socialandeco
igned for high
nseSpectrumfo
e spectrum fo
unction of peri
n (Design Basis
n (Design Basis
used,whichis
m is equal to
aindesignresp
ermine spectru
odeterminegro
ngsimplifiede
hapter 1 (Tab
eforpublicsaf
nomicconsequ
her seismic fo
ordifferentsite
or elastic anal
iod T. The des
s Earthquake)
s Earthquake)
obtainedbyus
design accele
ponsespectrum
um instead of
oundmotions
quations.
ble 1.2.1), dep
fetyandcivilp
uencesofcolla
orces using im

eclasses.
ysis methods
sign acceleratio
divided by th
is directly use
singR=1andI=
eration respon
m.Forimporta
using Eq.(2.5.4
forlocalseism
pending on th
protectioninth
apse.Dependin
mportance fact
is
on
he
ed.
=1
se
nt
4).
mic
he
he
ng
or
Chapter2
85

greater than one. Table 2.5.5 defines different occupancy categories and corresponding importance
factor.
Table2.5.5ImportanceFactorsforBuildingsandStructuresforEarthquakedesign
Occupancy
Category
Importance
factorI
I oi II 1.u
III 1.2S
Iv 1.S

2.5.7.2 SEISMICDESIGNCATEGORY
Buildings shall be assigned a seismic design category among B, C or D based on seismic zone, local site
conditions and importance class of building, as given in Table 2.5.6. Seismic design category D has the
most stringent seismic design detailing, while seismic design category B has the least seismic design
detailingrequirements.
Table2.5.6SeismicDesignCategoryofBuildings

OccupancyCategoryI,IIandIII OccupancyCategoryIV
Site
Class
Zone
1
Zone
2
Zone
3
Zone
4
Zone
1
Zone
2
Zone
3
Zone
4
SA B C C B C B B B
SB B C B B C B B B
SC B C B B C B B B
SB C B B B B B B B
SE, S1, S2 B B B B B B B B

2.5.7.3 BUILDINGIRREGULARITY:
Buildings with irregularity in plan or elevation suffer much more damage in earthquakes than buildings
with regular configuration. A building may be considered as irregular, if at least one of the conditions
givenbelowareapplicable:
2.5.7.3.1 PlanIrregularity
i) Torsionirregularity
To be considered for rigid floor diaphragms, when the maximum storey drift (
max
) as
shown in Fig.2.5.4a, computed including accidental torsion, at one end of the structure is
morethan1.2timestheaverage(
avg
=(
max
+
min
)/2)ofthestoreydriftsatthetwoendsof
the structure. If
max
>1.4
avg
then the irregularity is termed as extreme torsional
irregularity.
ii) Reentrantcorners
Both projectionsofthestructurebeyonda reentrant comer (Fig.2.5.4b) are greater than
15percentofitsplandimensioninthegivendirection.
iii) DiaphragmDiscontinuitv
Part6
86
Diaphragms with abrupt discontinuities or variations in stiffness, including those having
cutout(Fig.2.5.4c)oropenareasgreaterthan50%ofthegrossencloseddiaphragmarea,
orchangesineffectivediaphragmstiffnessofmorethan50%fromonestoreytothenext.
iv) OutOfPlaneOffsets
Discontinuities in a lateral force resistance path, such as out ofplane offsets of vertical
elements,asshowninFig.2.5.4d.
v) NonparallelSystems
The vertical elements resisting the lateral force are not parallel to or symmetric (Fig.
2.5.4e)aboutthemajororthogonalaxesofthelateralforceresistingelements.

Fig.2.5.4aTorsionalIrregularity

Fig.2.5.4bReentrantcorners(A/L>0.15)

Fig.2.5.4cDiaphragmDiscontinuitv
Chapter2
87

Fig.2.5.4dOutOfPlaneOffsetsofShearWall

Fig.2.5.4eNonparallelSystemsofShearWall
2.5.7.3.2 VerticalIrregularity
i) StiffnessIrregularitySoftStorey
Asoftstoreyisoneinwhichthelateralstiffnessislessthan70%ofthatinthestoreyabove
orlessthan80%oftheaveragelateralstiffnessofthethreestoreysaboveirregularity(Fig.
2.5.5a).Anextremesoftstoreyisdefinedwhereitslateralstiffnessislessthan60%ofthat
in the storey above or less than 70% of the average lateral stiffness of the three storeys
above.
ii) MassIrregularity
The seismic weight of any storey is more than twice of that of its adjacent storeys (Fig.
2.5.5b).Thisirregularityneednotbeconsideredincaseofroofs.
iii) VerticalGeometricIrregularity
ThisirregularityexistsforbuildingswithsetbackswithdimensionsgiveninFig.2.5.5c.
iv) VerticalInPlaneDiscontinuityinVerticalElementsResistingLateralForce
An inplane offset of the lateral force resisting elements greater than the length of those
elements(Fig.2.5.5d).
v) DiscontinuityinCapacityWeakStorey
A weak storey is one in which the storey lateral strength is less than 80% of that in the
storeyabove.Thestoreylateralstrengthisthetotalstrengthofallseismicforce resisting
elements sharing the storey shear in the considered direction (Fig. 2.5.5e). An extreme
weakstoreyisonewherethestoreylateralstrengthislessthan65%ofthatinthestorey
above.

Part6
88

Fig.2.5.5aSoftStorey

Fig.2.5.5bMassIrregularity

Fig.2.5.5cVerticalGeometricIrregularity(SetbackStructures)
L
2
>1.3L
1

Chapter2
89

Fig.2.5.5dVerticalInPlaneDiscontinuityinVerticalElementsResistingLateralForce

Fig.2.5.5eWeakStorey
2.5.7.4 TYPEOFSTRUCTURALSYSTEMS
The basic lateral and vertical seismic forceresisting system shall conform to one of the types A to G
indicated in Table 2.5.7. Each type is again subdivided by the types of vertical elements used to resist
lateralseismicforces.AcombinationofsystemsmayalsobepermittedasstatedinSection2.5.7.5.
ThestructuralsystemtobeusedshallbeinaccordancewiththeseismicdesigncategoryindicatedinTable
2.5.6. Structural systems that are not permitted for a certain seismic design category are indicated by
NP. Structural systems that do not have any height restriction are indicated by NL. Where there is
heightlimit,themaximumheightinmetersisgiven.
Theresponsereductionfactor,R,andthedeflectionamplificationfactor,C
d
,indicatedinTable2.5.7shall
beusedindeterminingthedesignbaseshearanddesignstorydrift.
Theselectedseismicforceresistingsystemshallbedesignedanddetailedinaccordancewiththespecific
requirementsforthesystem.
Part6
90
Table2.5.7Responsereductionfactor,deflectionamplificationfactorfordifferentStructuralSystems
andheightlimitations(m)fordifferentseismicdesigncategories
SeismicForceResistingSystem
R
e
s
p
o
n
s
e

R
e
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

F
a
c
t
o
r
,

D
e
f
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

A
m
p
l
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

F
a
c
t
o
r
,

C
d

S
e
i
s
.

D
e
s
i
g
n

C
a
t
e
g
o
r
y

S
e
i
s
.

D
e
s
i
g
n

C
a
t
e
g
o
r
y

S
e
i
s
.

D
e
s
i
g
n

C
a
t
e
g
o
r
y

Heightlimit(m)
A.BEARINGWALLSYSTEMS(noframe)
1. Special reinforced concrete shear walls
5 5 NL NL 50
2. Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
4 4 NL NL NP
3. Ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls
2 1.75 NL 50 NP
4. Ordinary plain masonry shear walls
1.5 1.25 18 NP NP
B.BUILDINGFRAMESYSTEMS(with
bracingorshearwall)

1. Steel eccentrically braced frames,

moment resisting connections at
columns away from links
8 4 NL NL 50
2. Steel eccentrically braced frames,
non-moment-resisting, connections at
columns away from links
7 4 NL NL 50
3. Special steel concentrically braced
frames
6 5 NL NL 50
4. Ordinary steel concentrically braced
frames
3.25 3.25 NL NL 11
5. Special reinforced concrete shear walls
6 5 NL 50 50
6. Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
5 4.25 NL NL NP
7. Ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls
2 2 NL 50 NP
8. Ordinary plain masonry shear walls
1.5 1.25 18 NP NP
C.MOMENTRESISTINGFRAMESYSTEMS
(noshearwall)

1. Special steel moment frames

8 5.5 NL NL P
2. Intermediate steel moment frames
4.5 4 NL NL 35
3. Ordinary steel moment frames
3.5 3 NL NL NP
4. Special reinforced concrete moment frames
8 5.5 NL NL NL
5. Intermediate reinforced concrete moment
frames
5 4.5 NL NL NP
6. Ordinary reinforced concrete moment
frames
3 2.5 NL NP NP
D.DUALSYSTEMS:SPECIALMOMENT
FRAMESCAPABLEOFRESISTINGAT
LEAST25%OFPRESCRIBEDSEISMIC
FORCES(withbracingorshearwall)

1. Steel eccentrically braced frames

8 4 NL NL NL
2. Special steel concentrically braced frames
7 5.5 NL NL NL
Chapter2
91

SeismicForceResistingSystem
R
e
s
p
o
n
s
e

R
e
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

F
a
c
t
o
r
,

D
e
f
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

A
m
p
l
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

F
a
c
t
o
r
,

C
d

S
e
i
s
.

D
e
s
i
g
n

C
a
t
e
g
o
r
y

S
e
i
s
.

D
e
s
i
g
n

C
a
t
e
g
o
r
y

S
e
i
s
.

D
e
s
i
g
n

C
a
t
e
g
o
r
y

Heightlimit(m)

3. Special reinforced concrete shear walls
7 5.5 NL NL

NL
4. Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
6 5 NL NL NP
E.DUALSYSTEMS:INTERMEDIATE
MOMENTFRAMESCAPABLEOF
RESISTINGATLEAST25%OFPRESCRIBED
SEISMICFORCES(withbracingorshear
wall)

1. Special steel concentrically braced frames

6 5 NL NL 11
2. Special reinforced concrete shear walls
6.5 5 NL NL 50
3. Ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls
3 3 NL 50 NP
4. Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
5.5 4.5 NL NL NP
F.DUALSHEARWALLFRAMESYSTEM:
ORDINARYREINFORCEDCONCRETE
MOMENTFRAMESANDORDINARY
REINFORCEDCONCRETESHEARWALLS
4.5 4 NL NP NP
G.STEELSYSTEMSNOTSPECIFICALLY
DETAILEDFORSEISMICRESISTANCE
3 3 NL NL NP
NOTE:
1. Under seismic design category, NL = No height restriction, NP = Not permitted,
Number represents maximum allowable height (m).
2. Dual Systems include buildings which consist of both moment resisting frame
and shear walls (or braced frame) where both systems resist the total design
forces in proportion to their lateral stiffness.
3. See Table 1u.C.S.1 of Sec. 1u foi auuitional values of R anu Cd anu height
limits foi some othei types of steel stiuctuies not coveieu in Table 2.S.7
SeismicforceresistingsystemsthatarenotgiveninTable2.5.7maybepermittedifsubstantialanalytical
and test data are submitted that establish the dynamic characteristics and demonstrate the lateral force
resistanceandenergydissipationcapacitytobeequivalenttothestructuralsystems listedinTable2.5.7
forequivalentresponsemodificationcoefficient,R,anddeflectionamplificationfactor,C
d
,values.
2.5.7.5 COMBINATIONOFSTRUCTURALSYSTEMS
2.5.7.5.1 CombinationsofStructuralSystemsinDifferentDirections:
Different seismic forceresisting systems are permitted to be used to resist seismic forces along each of
the two orthogonal axes of the structure. Where different systems are used, the respective R and C
d
coefficientsshallapplytoeachsystem,includingthelimitationsonsystemusecontainedinTable2.5.7.
2.5.7.5.2 CombinationsofStructuralSystemsintheSameDirection:
Where different seismic forceresisting systems are used in combination to resist seismic forces in the
same direction of structural response, other than those combinations considered as dual systems, the
Part6
92
morestringentsystemlimitationcontainedinTable2.5.7shallapply.ThevalueofRusedfordesigninthat
directionshallnotbegreaterthantheleastvalueofRforanyofthesystemsutilizedinthatdirection.The
deflectionamplificationfactor, C
d
inthe direction under consideration atanystoryshallnotbeless than
thelargestvalueofthisfactorfortheRfactorusedinthesamedirectionbeingconsidered
2.5.8 STATICANALYSISPROCEDURE
Although analysis of buildings subjected to dynamic earthquake loads should theoretically require
dynamic analysis procedures, for certain type of building structures subjected to earthquake shaking,
simplifiedstaticanalysisproceduresmayalsoprovidereasonablygoodresults.Theequivalentstaticforce
methodissuchaprocedurefordeterminingtheseismiclateralforcesactingonthestructure.Thistypeof
analysismaybeappliedtobuildingswhoseseismicresponseisnotsignificantlyaffectedbycontributions
from modes higher than the fundamental mode in each direction. This requirement is deemed to be
satisfiedinbuildingswhichfulfillthefollowingtwoconditions:
a. The building period in the two main horizontal directions is smaller than both 4T
C
(T
C
is
definedinSection2.5.6.3)and2sec.
b. ThebuildingdoesntpossessirregularityinelevationasdefinedinSection2.5.7.3.
2.5.9 EQUIVALENTSTATICANALYSIS
The evaluation of the seismic loads starts with the calculation of the design base shear which is derived
from the design response spectrum presented in Section 2.5.6.3. This section presents different
computationsrelevanttotheequivalentstaticanalysisprocedure.
2.5.9.1 DESIGNBASESHEAR
Theseismicdesignbaseshearforceinagivendirectionshallbedeterminedfromthefollowingrelation:
W S V
a
=

(2.5.7)
where,
S
a
= Lateral seismic force coefficient calculated using Eq.2.5.4 (Section 2.5.6.3). It is the design spectral
acceleration(inunitsofg)correspondingtothebuildingperiodT(computedasperSection2.5.9.2).
W=TotalseismicweightofthebuildingdefinedinSection2.5.9.3
2.5.9.2 BUILDINGPERIOD
The fundamental period T of the building in the horizontal direction under consideration shall be
determinedusingthefollowingguidelines:
a) Structuraldynamicsprocedures(suchasRayleighmethodormodaleigenvalueanalysis),
usingstructuralpropertiesanddeformationcharacteristicsofresistingelements,maybe
used to determine the fundamental period T of the building in the direction under
consideration. This period shall not exceed the approximate fundamental period
determinedbyEquation(2.5.8)bymorethan40%.
b) ThebuildingperiodT(insecs)maybeapproximatedbythefollowingformula:
(2.S.8)
( )
m
n t
h C T =
Chapter2
93

where,
h
n
= Height of building in metres from foundation or from top of rigid basement.
Thisexcludesthebasementstoreys,wherebasementwallsareconnectedwith
the ground floor deck or fitted between the building columns. But it includes
thebasementstoreys,whentheyarenotsoconnected.
C
t
andmareobtainedfromTable2.5.8
Table2.5.8Valuesforcoefficientstoestimateapproximateperiod

c) Formasonryorconcreteshearwallstructures,theapproximatefundamentalperiod,Tin
secsmaybedeterminedasfollows:
n
w
h
C
T
uu62 u.
= (2.5.9)
where,

=

=
2
2
1
8S u 1
1uu
i
i
i
x
i
i
n
B
w
D
h
A
h
h
A
C
.
(2.5.10)
where,
A
B
=areaofbaseofstructure
A
i
=webareaofshearwalli
D
i
=lengthofshearwalli
h
i
=heightofshearwalli
x = number of shear walls in the building effective in resisting lateral forces in the
directionunderconsideration.
2.5.9.3 SEISMICWEIGHT
Seismic weight, W, is the total dead load of a building or a structure, including partition walls, and
applicableportionsofotherimposedloadslistedbelow:
Structuretype Ct m
Concrete moment-resisting frames u.u466 u.9
Steel moment-resisting frames u.u724 u.8
Eccentrically braced steel frame u.u7S1 u.7S
All other structural systems u.u488 u.7S
N0TE:
Consiuei moment iesisting fiames as fiames which iesist
1uu% of seismic foice anu aie not encloseu oi aujoineu by
components that aie moie iigiu anu will pievent the fiames
fiom ueflecting unuei seismic foices.
Part6
94
a) For live load up to and including 3 kN/m
2
, a minimum of 25% of the live load shall be
applicable.
b) Forliveloadabove3kN/m
2
,aminimumof50%oftheliveloadshallbeapplicable.
c) Total weight (100%) of permanent heavy equipment or retained liquid or any imposed
loadsustainedinnatureshallbeincluded.
Where the probable imposed loads (mass) at the time of earthquake are more correctly
assessed,thedesignermaygoforhigherpercentageofliveload.

2.5.9.4 VERTICALDISTRIBUTIONOFLATERALFORCES
In the absence of a more rigorous procedure, the total seismic lateral force at the base level, in other
wordsthebaseshearV,shallbeconsideredasthesumoflateralforcesF
x
inducedatdifferentfloorlevels,
theseforcesmaybecalculatedas:

=
=
n
i
k
i i
k
x x
x
h w
h w
V F
1
(2.5.11)
where,
F
x
=partofbaseshearforceinducedatlevelx
w
i
and w
x
= part of the total effective seismic weight of the structure (W) assigned to
leveliorx
h
i
andh
x
=theheightfromthebasetoleveliorx
k=1forstructureperiod0.5s
=2forstructureperiod2.5s
=linearinterpolationbetween1and2forotherperiods.
n=numberofstories
2.5.9.5 STOREYSHEARANDITSHORIZONTALDISTRIBUTION
Thedesign storey shear V
x
,atanystoreyxis thesum oftheforcesF
x
inthatstoreyandallotherstories
aboveit,givenbyEq.2.5.12:

=
=
n
x i
i x
F V (2.5.12)
where,F
i
=Portionofbaseshearinducedatleveli,asdeterminedbyEq.2.5.11
Ifthefloordiaphragmscanbeconsideredtobeinfinitelyrigidinthehorizontalplane,theshearV
x
shallbe
distributed to the various elements of the lateral force resisting system in proportion to their relative
lateral stiffness. For flexible diaphragms, the distribution of forces to the vertical elements shall account
forthepositionanddistributionofthemassessupported.
Chapter2
95

Allowance shall also be made for the increased shear arising due to horizontal torsional moment as
specifiedinSec2.5.9.6
2.5.9.6 HORIZONTALTORSIONALMOMENTS:
Design shall accommodate increase in storey shear forces resulting from probable horizontal torsional
momentsonrigidfloordiaphragms.Computationofsuchmomentsshallbeasfollows:
2.5.9.6.1 InbuiltTorsionalEffects:
Whenthereisinbuilteccentricitybetweencentreofmassandcentreofrigidity(lateralresistance)atthe
floorlevels,rigiddiaphragmsateachlevelwillbesubjectedtotorsionalmomentM
t
.
2.5.9.6.2 AccidentalTorsionalEffects:
In order to account for uncertainties in the location of masses and in the spatial variation of the seismic
motion, accidental torsional effects need to be always considered. The accidental moment M
ta
is
determinedassumingthestoreymasstobedisplacedfromthecalculatedcentreofmassadistanceequal
to 5% of the building dimension at that level perpendicular to the direction of the force under
consideration.TheaccidentaltorsionalmomentM
tai
atleveliisgivenas:
(2.5.13)
where,
e
ai
= accidental eccentricity of floor mass at level i applied in the same direction at all
floors=0.05L
i

L
i
=floordimensionperpendiculartothedirectionofseismicforceconsidered.
Where torsional irregularity exists (Section 2.5.7.3.1) for Seismic Design Category C or D, the irregularity
effects shall be accounted for by increasing the accidental torsion M
ta
at each level by a torsional
amplificationfactor,A
x
asillustratedinFigure2.5.6determinedfromthefollowingequation:
( ) [ ] u S 2 1
2
. .
avg max
=
x
A (2.S.14)
where,

max
=MaximumdisplacementatlevelxcomputedassumingA
x
=1.

avg
= Average of the displacements at extreme points of the building at levelx computed
assumingA
x
=1.
Theaccidentaltorsionalmomentneednotbeamplifiedforstructuresoflightframeconstruction.Alsothe
torsionalamplificationfactor(A
x
)shouldnotexceed3.0.
2.5.9.6.3 DesignforTorsionalEffects
ThetorsionaldesignmomentatagivenstoreyshallbeequaltotheaccidentaltorsionalmomentM
ta
plus
the inbuilt torsional moment M
t
(if any). Where earthquake forces are applied concurrently in two
orthogonaldirections,therequired5 percentdisplacementofthecenterofmass(foraccidentaltorsion)
neednotbeappliedinbothoftheorthogonaldirectionsatthesametime,butshallbeappliedinonlyone
directionthatproducesthegreatereffect.

i ai tai
F e M =
Part6
96

Figure2.5.6TorsionalamplificationfactorA
x
forplanirregularity.
2.5.9.7 DEFLECTIONANDSTOREYDRIFT:
The deflections (
x
) of level x at the center of the mass shall be determined in accordance with the
followingequation:

I
C
xe d
x

= (2.5.15)
where,
C
d
=DeflectionamplificationfactorgiveninTable2.5.7

xe
=Deflectiondeterminedbyanelasticanalysis
I=ImportancefactordefinedinTable2.5.5
Thedesignstoreydriftatstoreyxshallbecomputedasthedifferenceofthedeflectionsatthecentersof
massatthetopandbottomofthestoryunderconsideration:

1
=
x x x
(2.5.16)
2.5.9.8 OVERTURNINGEFFECTS:
The structure shall be designed to resist overturning effects caused by the seismic forces determined in
Section2.5.9.4.Atanystory,theincrementofoverturningmomentinthestoryunderconsiderationshall
bedistributedtothevariousverticalforceresistingelementsinthesameproportionasthedistributionof
thehorizontalshearstothoseelements.
Theoverturningmomentsatlevelx,M
x
,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
Chapter2
97

( )
x i
n
x i
i x
h h F M =

=
(2.5.17)
where,
F
i
=theportionoftheseismicbaseshear,V,inducedatleveli
h
i
,h
x
=theheightfromthebasetoleveliorx.
The foundations of structures, except inverted pendulumtype structures, shall be permitted to be
designed for threefourths of the foundation overturning design moment, M
o
, determined using above
equation.
2.5.9.9 PDELTAEFFECTS:
The Pdelta effects on story shears and moments, the resulting member forces and moments, and the
story drifts induced by these effects are not required to be considered if the stability coefficient ()
determinedbythefollowingequationisnotmorethan0.10:
d sx x
X
C h V
P
= (2.5.18)
Where,
P
x
=thetotalverticaldesignloadatandabovelevelx;wherecomputingP
x
,noindividualload
factorneedexceed1.0
=thedesignstorydriftoccurringsimultaneouslywithV
x

V
x
=thestoreyshearforceactingbetweenlevelsxandx1
h
sx
=thestoryheightbelowlevelx
C
d
=thedeflectionamplificationfactorgiveninTable2.5.7
Thestabilitycoefficient()shallnotexceed
max
determinedasfollows:
2S u
S u
.
.
max
=
d
C
(2.5.19)
whereistheratioofsheardemandtoshearcapacityforthestorybetweenlevelsxandx1.Thisratio
ispermittedtobeconservativelytakenas1.0.
Where the stability coefficient () is greater than 0.10 but less than or equal to
max
, the incremental
factor related to Pdelta effects on displacements and member forces shall be determined by rational
analysis.Alternatively,itispermittedtomultiplydisplacementsandmemberforcesby1.0/(1).
Whereisgreaterthan
max
,thestructureispotentiallyunstableandshallberedesigned.
WherethePdeltaeffectisincludedinanautomatedanalysis,Eq.2.5.19shallstillbesatisfied,however,
thevalueofcomputedfromEq.2.5.18usingtheresultsofthePdeltaanalysisispermittedtobedivided
by(1+)beforecheckingEq.2.5.19.
Part6
98
2.5.10 DYNAMICANALYSISMETHODS
Dynamicanalysismethodinvolvesapplyingprinciplesofstructuraldynamicstocomputetheresponseof
thestructuretoapplieddynamic(earthquake)loads.
2.5.10.1 REQUIREMENTFORDYNAMICANALYSIS
Dynamicanalysisshouldbeperformedtoobtainthedesignseismicforce,anditsdistributiontodifferent
levelsalongtheheightofthebuildingandtothevariouslateralloadresistingelements,forthefollowing
buildings:
a)Regularbuildingswithheightgreaterthan40minZones2,3,4andgreaterthan90min
Zone1.
b)Irregularbuildings(asdefinedinSection2.5.7.3)withheightgreaterthan12minZones2,
3,4andgreaterthan40minZone1.
For irregular buildings, smaller than 40 m in height in Zone 1, dynamic analysis, even though not
mandatory,isrecommended.
2.5.10.2 METHODSOFANALYSIS
Dynamicanalysismaybecarriedoutthroughthefollowingtwomethods:
(i) Response Spectrum Analysis method is a linear elastic analysis method using modal
analysis procedures, where the structure is subjected to spectral accelerations
correspondingtoadesignaccelerationresponsespectrum.Thedesignearthquakeground
motioninthiscaseisrepresentedbyitsresponsespectrum.
(ii) Time History Analysis method is a numerical integration procedure where design ground
motion time histories (acceleration record) are applied at the base of the structure. Time
historyanalysisprocedurescanbetwotypes:linearandnonlinear.
2.5.11 RESPONSESPECTRUMANALYSIS(RSA)
Aresponsespectrumanalysisshallconsistoftheanalysisofalinearmathematicalmodelofthestructure
todeterminethemaximumaccelerations,forces,anddisplacementsresultingfromthedynamicresponse
to ground shaking represented by the design acceleration response spectrum (presented in Section
2.5.6.3). Response spectrum analysis is also called a modal analysis procedure because it considers
differentmodesofvibrationofthestructureandcombineseffectsofdifferentmodes.
2.5.11.1 MODELING(RSA)
A mathematical model of the structure shall be constructed that represents the spatial distribution of
massandstiffnessthroughoutthestructure.Forregularstructureswithindependentorthogonalseismic
forceresisting systems, independent twodimensional models are permitted to be constructed to
representeachsystem.Forirregular structuresorstructureswithoutindependentorthogonalsystems,a
threedimensional model incorporating a minimum of three dynamic degrees of freedom consisting of
translation in two orthogonal plan directions and torsional rotation about the vertical axis shall be
included at each level of the structure. Where the diaphragms are not rigid compared to the vertical
elements of the lateralforceresisting system, the model should include representation of the
diaphragmsflexibilityandsuchadditionaldynamicdegreesoffreedomasarerequiredtoaccountforthe
Chapter2
99

participation of the diaphragm in the structures dynamic response. The structure shall be considered to
befixedatthebaseor,alternatively,itshallbepermittedtouserealisticassumptionswithregardtothe
stiffnessoffoundations.Inaddition,themodelshallcomplywiththefollowing:
1.Stiffnesspropertiesofconcreteandmasonryelementsshallconsidertheeffectsofcrackedsections
2. The contribution of panel zone deformations to overall story drift shall be included for steel moment
frameresistingsystems.
2.5.11.2 NUMBEROFMODES(RSA)
An analysis shall be conducted using the masses and elastic stiffnesses of the seismicforceresisting
systemtodeterminethenaturalmodesofvibrationforthestructureincludingtheperiodofeachmode,
themodalshapevector,themodalparticipationfactorPandmodalmassM.Theanalysisshallincludea
sufficient numberofmodes toobtaina combinedmodalmassparticipationofatleast90percent ofthe
actualmassineachoftwoorthogonaldirections.
2.5.11.3 MODALSTORYSHEARSANDMOMENTS(RSA)
For each mode, the story shears, story overturning moments, and the shear forces and overturning
moments in vertical elements of the structural system at each level due to the seismic forces shall be
computed.ThepeaklateralforceF
ik
inducedatleveliinmodekisgivenby:
i k ik k ik
W P A F = (2.5.20)
where,
A
k
= Design horizontal spectral acceleration corresponding to period of vibration T
k
of mode k, obtained
fromdesignresponsespectrum(Section2.5.6.3)

ik
=Modalshapecoefficientatleveliinmodek
P
k
=Modalparticipationfactorofmodek
W
i
=Weightoffloori.
2.5.11.4 STRUCTURERESPONSE(RSA)
Intheresponsespectrumanalysismethod,thebaseshearV
rs
;eachofthestoryshear,moment,anddrift
quantities; and the deflection at each level shall be determined by combining their modal values. The
combinationshallbecarriedoutbytakingthesquarerootofthesumofthesquares(SRSS)ofeachofthe
modal values or by the complete quadratic combination (CQC) technique. The complete quadratic
combinationshallbeusedwherecloselyspacedperiodsinthetranslationalandtorsionalmodesresultin
crosscorrelationofthemodes.
The distribution of horizontal shear shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 2.5.9.5. It
should be noted that amplification of accidental torsion as per Section 2.5.9.6 is not required where
accidentaltorsionaleffectsareincludedinthedynamicanalysismodelbyoffsettingthecentreofmassin
eachstorybytherequiredamount.
A base shear, V, shall also be calculated using the equivalent static force procedure in Section 2.5.9.
Where the base shear, V
rs
, is less than 85% of V, all the forces but not the drifts obtained by response
spectrumanalysisshallbemultipliedbytheratio0.85V/V
rs
.
Part6
100
ThedisplacementsanddriftsobtainedbyresponsespectrumanalysisshallbemultipliedbyC
d
/Itoobtain
designdisplacementsanddrifts,asdoneinequivalentstaticanalysisprocedure(Section2.5.9.7).
ThePdeltaeffectsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection2.5.9.9.
2.5.12 LINEARTIMEHISTORYANALYSIS(LTHA)
A linear time history analysis (LTHA) shall consist of an analysis of a linear mathematical model of the
structuretodetermineitsresponse,throughdirect numericalintegrationof thedifferentialequationsof
motion, to a number of ground motion acceleration time histories compatible with the design response
spectrum for the site. The analysis shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of this section.
Forthepurposesofanalysis,thestructureshallbepermittedtobeconsideredtobefixedatthebaseor,
alternatively,itshallbepermittedtouserealisticassumptionswithregardtothestiffnessoffoundations.
The acceleration time history (ground motion) is applied at the base of the structure. The advantage of
thisprocedureisthatthetimedependentbehaviorofthestructuralresponseisobtained.
2.5.12.1 MODELING(LTHA)
MathematicalmodelsshallconformtotherequirementsofmodelingdescribedinSection2.5.11.1.
2.5.12.2 GROUNDMOTION(LTHA)
Atleastthreeappropriategroundmotions(accelerationtimehistory)shallbeusedintheanalysis.Ground
motionshallconformtotherequirementsofthissection.
Twodimensional analysis: Where twodimensional analyses are performed, each ground motion shall
consist of a horizontal acceleration time history selected from an actual recorded event. Appropriate
acceleration histories shall be obtained from records of events having magnitudes, fault distance, and
source mechanisms that are consistent with those that control the maximum considered earthquake.
Where the required number of appropriate ground motion records are not available, appropriate
simulatedgroundmotiontimehistoriesshallbeusedtomakeupthetotalnumberrequired.Theground
motionsshallbescaledsuchthatforeachperiodbetween0.2Tand1.5T(whereTisthenaturalperiodof
the structure in the fundamental mode for the direction considered) the average of the fivepercent
damped response spectra for the each acceleration time history is not less than the corresponding
ordinateofthedesignaccelerationresponsespectrum,determinedinaccordancewithSection2.5.6.3.
Threedimensionalanalysis:Wherethreedimensionalanalysisisperformed,groundmotionsshallconsist
ofpairsofappropriatehorizontalgroundmotionaccelerationtimehistories(intwoorthogonalhorizontal
directions)thatshallbeselectedandscaledfromindividualrecordedevents.Appropriategroundmotions
shall be selected from events having magnitudes, fault distance, and source mechanisms that are
consistent with those that control the maximum considered earthquake. Where the required number of
recordedgroundmotionpairsarenotavailable,appropriatesimulatedgroundmotionpairsshallbeused
to make up the total number required. For each pair of horizontal ground motion components, an SRSS
spectrum shall be constructed by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the fivepercent
damped response spectra for the components (where an identical scale factor is applied to both
components of a pair). Each pair of motions shall be scaled such that for each period between 0.2T and
1.5T (where T is the natural period of the fundamental mode of the structure) the average of the SRSS
spectra from all horizontal component pairs is not less than 1.3 times the corresponding ordinate of the
designresponsespectrum,determinedinaccordancewithSection2.5.6.3.
Chapter2
101

2.5.12.3 STRUCTURERESPONSE(LTHA)
Foreachscaledaccelerationtimehistory,themaximumvaluesofbaseshearandotherstructureresponse
quantitiesshallbeobtainedfromthetimehistoryanalysis.Forthreedimensionalanalysis,orthogonalpair
ofscaledmotionsareappliedsimultaneously.Abaseshear,V,shallalsobecalculatedusingtheequivalent
static force procedure described in Section 2.5.9.1. Where the maximum base shear, V
th
computed by
linear time history analysis, is less than V, all response quantities (storey shear, moments, drifts, floor
deflections, member forces etc) obtained by time history analysis shall be increased by multiplying with
the ratio V/V
th
. If number of earthquake records (or pairs) used in the analysis is less than seven, the
maximumstructuralresponseobtainedcorrespondingtodifferentearthquakerecordsshallbeconsidered
asthedesignvalue.Ifthenumberisatleastseven,thentheaverageofmaximumstructuralresponsesfor
differentearthquakerecordsshallbeconsideredasthedesignvalue.
The displacements and drifts obtained as mentioned above shall be multiplied by C
d
/I to obtain design
displacementsanddrifts,asdoneinequivalentstaticanalysisprocedure(Section2.5.9.7).
2.5.13 NONLINEARTIMEHISTORYANALYSIS(NTHA)
Nonlineartime historyanalysis(NTHA)shall consistofanalysisofamathematical modelofthestructure
which incorporates the nonlinear hysteretic behavior of the structures components to determine its
response, through methods of numerical integration, to ground acceleration time histories compatible
with the design response spectrum for the site. The analysis shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of this section. For the purposes of analysis, the structure shall be permitted to be
consideredtobefixedatthebaseor,alternatively,itshallbepermittedtouserealisticassumptionswith
regardtothestiffnessoffoundations.Theaccelerationtimehistory(groundmotion)isappliedatthebase
ofthestructure.Theadvantageofthisprocedureisthatactualtimedependentbehaviorofthestructural
responseconsideringinelasticdeformationsinthestructurecanbeobtained.
2.5.13.1 MODELING(NTHA)
A mathematical model of the structure shall be constructed that represents the spatial distribution of
mass throughout the structure. The hysteretic behavior of elements shall be modeled consistent with
suitable laboratory test data and shall account for all significant yielding, strength degradation, stiffness
degradation,and hysteretic pinching indicatedbysuch testdata.Strengthofelementsshall bebasedon
expectedvaluesconsideringmaterialoverstrength,strainhardening,andhystereticstrengthdegradation.
As a minimum, a bilinear forcedeformation relationship should be used at the element level. In
reinforced concrete and masonry buildings, the elastic stiffness should correspond to that of cracked
sections.Linearproperties, consistentwiththe provisions ofChapter 5 shallbe permittedtobeusedfor
those elements demonstrated by the analysis to remain within their linear range of response. The
structure shall be assumed to have a fixed base or, alternatively, it shall be permitted to use realistic
assumptions with regard to the stiffness and load carrying characteristics of the foundations consistent
withsitespecificsoilsdataandrationalprinciplesofengineeringmechanics.
For regular structures with independent orthogonal seismicforceresisting systems, independent two
dimensionalmodelsshallbepermittedtobeconstructedtorepresenteachsystem.Forstructureshaving
plan irregularity or structures without independent orthogonal systems, a threedimensional model
incorporatingaminimumofthreedynamicdegreesoffreedomconsistingoftranslationintwoorthogonal
plan directions and torsional rotation about the vertical axis at each level of the structure shall be used.
Part6
102
Where the diaphragms are not rigid compared to the vertical elements of the lateralforceresisting
system,themodelshallincluderepresentationofthediaphragmsflexibilityandsuchadditionaldynamic
degrees of freedom as are required to account for the participation of the diaphragm in the structures
dynamicresponse.
2.5.13.2 GROUNDMOTION(NTHA)
The actual timedependent inelastic deformation of the structure is modeled. For inelastic analysis
method, the real design acceleration response spectrum (Section 2.5.6.3) is obtained using Eq.2.5.4 with
R=1 and I=1. The real design acceleration response spectrum is the true representation of the expected
ground motion (design basis earthquake) including local soil effects and corresponds to a peak ground
acceleration(PGA)valueof2/3*Z*S.
At least three appropriate acceleration time histories shall be used in the analysis. Ground motion shall
conformtotherequirementsofthissection.
Twodimensional analysis: Where twodimensional analyses are performed, each ground motion shall
consist of a horizontal acceleration time history selected from an actual recorded event. Appropriate
acceleration histories shall be obtained from records of events having magnitudes, fault distance, and
source mechanisms that are consistent with those that control the maximum considered earthquake.
Where the required number of appropriate ground motion records are not available, appropriate
simulatedgroundmotiontimehistoriesshallbeusedtomakeupthetotalnumberrequired.Theground
motionsshallbescaledsuchthatforeachperiodbetween0.2Tand1.5T(whereTisthenaturalperiodof
the structure in the fundamental mode for the direction considered) the average of the fivepercent
dampedresponsespectraforeachaccelerationtimehistoryisnotlessthanthecorrespondingordinateof
therealdesignaccelerationresponsespectrum,asdefinedhere.
Threedimensionalanalysis:Wherethreedimensionalanalysisisperformed,groundmotionsshallconsist
ofpairsofappropriatehorizontalgroundmotionaccelerationtimehistories(intwoorthogonalhorizontal
directions)thatshallbeselectedandscaledfromindividualrecordedevents.Appropriategroundmotions
shall be selected from events having magnitudes, fault distance, and source mechanisms that are
consistent with those that control the maximum considered earthquake. Where the required number of
recordedgroundmotionpairsarenotavailable,appropriatesimulatedgroundmotionpairsshallbeused
to make up the total number required. For each pair of horizontal ground motion components, an SRSS
spectrum shall be constructed by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the fivepercent
damped response spectra for the components (where an identical scale factor is applied to both
components of a pair). Each pair of motions shall be scaled such that for each period between 0.2T and
1.5T (where T is the natural period of the fundamental mode of the structure) the average of the SRSS
spectra from all horizontal component pairs is not less than 1.3 times the corresponding ordinate of the
realdesignaccelerationresponsespectrum.
2.5.13.3 STRUCTURERESPONSE(NTHA)
Foreachscaledaccelerationtimehistory,themaximumvaluesofbaseshearandotherstructureresponse
quantities shall be obtained from the nonlinear time history analysis. For three dimensional analysis,
orthogonalpairofscaledmotionsareappliedsimultaneously.Ifnumberofearthquakerecords(orpairs)
used in the analysis is less than seven, the maximum structural response obtained corresponding to
differentearthquakerecordsshallbeconsideredasthedesignvalue.Ifthenumberisatleastseven,then
Chapter2
103

theaverageofmaximumstructuralresponsesfordifferentearthquakerecordsshallbeconsideredasthe
design value. Since real expected earthquake motion input and model incorporating real nonlinear
behaviorofthestructureisused,theresultsasobtainedaredirectlyused(noscalingasinLTHAorRSAis
required)forinterpretationanddesign.
2.5.13.4 STRUCTUREMEMBERDESIGN(NTHA)
The adequacy of individual members and their connections to withstand the design deformations
predicted by the analyses shall be evaluated based on laboratory test data for similar components. The
effects of gravity and other loads on member deformation capacity shall be considered in these
evaluations. Member deformation shall not exceed two thirds of the smaller of: the value that results in
lossofabilitytocarrygravityloadsorthevalueatwhich memberstrengthhas deterioratedtoless than
67%ofpeakstrength.
2.5.13.5 DESIGNREVIEW(NTHA)
Special care and expertise is needed in the use of nonlinear dynamic analysis based design. Checking of
thedesignbycompetentthirdpartyisrecommended.Areviewofthedesignoftheseismicforceresisting
system and the supporting structural analyses shall be performed by an independent team consisting of
design professionals with experience in seismic analysis methods and the theory and application of
nonlinear seismic analysis and structural behavior under extreme cyclic loads. The design review shall
includethefollowing:(i)Reviewofdevelopmentofgroundmotiontimehistories(ii)Reviewofacceptance
criteria (including laboratory test data) used to demonstrate the adequacy of structural elements and
systemstowithstandthecalculatedforceanddeformationdemands(iii)Reviewofstructuraldesign.
2.5.14 NONLINEARSTATICANALYSIS(NSA)
Nonlinear static analysis (NSA), also popularly known as pushover analysis, is a simplified method of
directly evaluating nonlinear response of structures to strong earthquake ground shaking. It is an
alternative to the more complex nonlinear time history analysis (NTHA). The building is subjected to
monotonicallyincreasingstatichorizontalloadsunderconstantgravityload.
2.5.14.1 MODELING(NSA)
Amathematicalmodelofthestructure shallbeconstructedtorepresentthespatial distributionofmass
and stiffness of the structural system considering the effects of element nonlinearity for deformation
levelsthatexceedtheproportionallimit.PDeltaeffectsshallalsobeincludedintheanalysis.
For regular structures with independent orthogonal seismicforceresisting systems, independent two
dimensional models may be used to represent each system. For structures having plan irregularities or
structureswithoutindependentorthogonalsystems,athreedimensionalmodelincorporatingaminimum
of three degrees of freedom for each level of the structure, consisting of translation in two orthogonal
plandirectionsandtorsionalrotationabouttheverticalaxis,shallbeused.Wherethediaphragmsarenot
rigid compared to the vertical elements of the seismicforceresisting system, the model should include
representationofthediaphragmflexibility.
Unless analysis indicates that a element remains elastic, a nonlinear force deformation model shall be
used to represent the stiffness of the element before onset of yield, the yield strength, and the stiffness
properties of the element after yield at various levels of deformation. Strengths of elements shall not
exceed expected values considering material overstrength and strain hardening. The properties of
Part6
104
elements and components after yielding shall account for strength and stiffness degradation due to
softening,buckling,orfractureasindicatedbyprinciplesofmechanicsortestdata.
A control point shall be selected for the model. For normal buildings, the control point shall be at the
centerofmassofthehighestlevel(roof)ofthestructure.
2.5.14.2 ANALYSISPROCEDURE(NSA)
The lateral forces shall be applied at the center of mass of each level and shall be proportional to the
distributionobtainedfromamodalanalysisforthefundamentalmodeofresponseinthedirectionunder
consideration.Thelateralloadsshallbeincreasedincrementallyinamonotonicmanner.
Atthejthincrementoflateralloading,thetotallateralforceappliedtothemodelshallbecharacterized
by the term V
j
. The incremental increases in applied lateral force should be in steps that are sufficiently
smalltopermitsignificantchangesinindividualelementbehavior(suchasyielding,bucklingorfailure)to
be detected. The first increment in lateral loading shall result in linear elastic behavior. At each loading
step,thetotalappliedlateralforce,V
j
,thelateraldisplacementofthecontrolpoint,
j
,andtheforcesand
deformationsineachelementshallberecorded.Theanalysisshallbecontinueduntilthedisplacementof
thecontrolpointisatleast150%ofthetargetdisplacementdeterminedinaccordancewithSec.2.5.14.3.
The structure shall be designed so that the total applied lateral force does not decrease in any load
incrementforcontrolpointdisplacementslessthanorequalto125percentofthetargetdisplacement.
2.5.14.3 EFFECTIVEPERIODANDTARGETDISPLACEMENT(NSA)
A bilinear curve shall be fitted to the capacity curve, such that the first segment of the bilinear curve
coincides with the capacity curve at 60% of the effective yield strength, the second segment coincides
withthecapacitycurveatthetargetdisplacement,andtheareaunderthebilinearcurveequalsthearea
underthecapacitycurve,betweentheoriginandthetargetdisplacement.Theeffectiveyieldstrength,V
y
,
corresponds to the total applied lateral force at the intersection of the two line segments. The effective
yield displacement,
y
, corresponds to the control point displacement at the intersection of the two line
segments.Theeffectivefundamentalperiod,T
e
,ofthestructureinthedirectionunderconsiderationshall
bedeterminedusingEq.2.5.21asfollows:
y y
e
V
V
T T

1 1
1
=
(2.5.21)

whereV
1
,
1
,andT
1
aredeterminedforthefirstincrementoflateralload.
Thetargetdisplacementofthecontrolpoint,
T
,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
g
T
S C C
e
a T
2
1 0
2

(2.5.22)
wherethespectralacceleration,S
a
,isdeterminedattheeffectivefundamentalperiod,T
e
,usingEq.(2.5.4),
gistheaccelerationduetogravity.
ThecoefficientC
0
shallbecalculatedas:
Chapter2
105

=
=
=
n
i
i i
n
i
i i
w
w
C
1
2
1
0

(2.5.23)

where:
w
i
=theportionoftheseismicweight,W,atleveli,and

i
=theamplitudeoftheshapevectoratleveli.
Wheretheeffectivefundamentalperiod,T
e
,isgreaterthanT
C
(definedinSec.2.5.6.3),thecoefficientC
1

shallbetakenas1.0.Otherwise,thevalueofthecoefficientC
1
shallbecalculatedasfollows:
( )

+ =
e
s d
d
T
T R
R
C
1
1
1
1
(2.5.24)
whereR
d
isgivenasfollows:
W V
S
R
y
a
d
=
(2.5.25)
2.5.14.4 STRUCTUREMEMBERDESIGN(NSA)
Foreachnonlinearstaticanalysisthedesignresponseparameters,includingtheindividualmemberforces
andmemberdeformationsshallbetakenasthevaluesobtainedfromtheanalysisatthestepatwhichthe
targetdisplacementisreached.
Theadequacyofindividualmembersandtheirconnectionstowithstandthememberforcesandmember
deformations shall be evaluated based on laboratory test data for similar components. The effects of
gravity and other loads on member deformation capacity shall be considered in these evaluations. The
deformationofamembersupportinggravityloadsshallnotexceed(i)twothirdsofthedeformationthat
results in loss of ability to support gravity loads, and (ii) twothirds of the deformation at which the
member strength has deteriorated to less than 70% of the peak strength of the component model. The
deformationofamembernotrequiredforgravityloadsupportshallnotexceedtwothirdsofthevalueat
whichmemberstrengthhasdeterioratedtolessthan70%ofthepeakstrengthofthecomponentmodel.
2.5.14.5 DESIGNREVIEW(NSA)
Checkingofthedesignbycompetentthirdpartyisrecommended.Anindependentteamcomposedofat
least two members with experience in seismic analysis methods and the theory and application of
nonlinearseismicanalysisandstructuralbehaviorunderearthquakeloading,shallperformareviewofthe
designoftheseismicforceresistingsystemandthesupportingstructuralanalyses.Thedesignreviewshall
include(i)reviewofanysitespecificseismiccriteria(ifdeveloped)employedintheanalysis(ii)reviewof
the determination of the target displacement and effective yield strength of the structure (iii) review of
adequacyofstructuralelementsandsystemstowithstandthecalculatedforceanddeformationdemands,
togetherwithlaboratoryandotherdata(iv)reviewofstructuraldesign.
Part6
106
2.5.15 EARTHQUAKELOADCOMBINATIONS
2.5.15.1 HORIZONTALEARTHQUAKELOADING
Thedirectionsofapplicationofseismicforcesfordesignshallbethosewhichwillproducethemostcritical
loadeffects.Earthquakeforcesactinbothprincipaldirectionsofthebuildingsimultaneously.Inorderto
accountforthat,
(a) ForstructuresofSeismicDesignCategoryB,thedesignseismicforcesarepermittedtobeapplied
independently in each of two orthogonal directions and orthogonal interaction effects are
permittedtobeneglected
(b) StructuresofSeismicDesignCategoryCandDshall,asaminimum,conformtotherequirements
of (a) for Seismic Design Category B and in addition the requirements of this section. The
structure shall be designed for 100% of the seismic forces in one principal direction combined
with30%oftheseismicforcesintheorthogonaldirection.Possiblecombinationsare:
100% in x-direction 30% in y-direction or
30% in x-direction 100% in y-direction
The combination which produces most unfavourable effect for the particular action effect shall
be considered. This approach may be applied to equivalent static analysis, response spectrum
analysisandlineartimehistoryanalysisprocedure.
(c) Wherethreedimensionalanalysisofaspatialstructuremodelisperformedasin3Dtimehistory
analysis,simultaneousapplicationofaccelerationsintwodirectionsshallbeconsideredwheretheground
motionsshallsatisfytheconditionsstatedinSections2.5.12.2or2.5.13.2.
2.5.15.2 VERTICALEARTHQUAKELOADING
Themaximumverticalgroundaccelerationshallbetakenas50%oftheexpectedhorizontalpeakground
acceleration(PGA).TheverticalseismicloadeffectE
v
maybedeterminedas:
E
v
=0.5(a
h
)D (2.5.26)
where,
a
h
=expectedhorizontalpeakgroundacceleration(ing)fordesign=(2/3)ZS
D=effectofdeadload
2.5.15.3 COMBINATIONOFEARTHQUAKELOADINGWITHOTHERLOADINGS
Whenearthquakeeffectisincludedintheanalysisanddesignofabuildingorstructure,theprovisionsset
forth in section 2.7 shall be followed to combine earthquake load effects with other loading effects to
obtaindesignforcesetc.
Chapter2
107

2.5.16 DRIFTANDDEFORMATION
2.5.16.1 STOREYDRIFTLIMIT
The design storey drift () of each storey, as determined in Sections 2.5.9 (equivalent static analysis),
2.5.11(responsespectrumanalysis)or2.5.12(lineartimehistoryanalysis)shallnotexceedtheallowable
storeydrift(
a
)asobtainedfromTable2.5.9foranystory.
Forstructureswithsignificanttorsionaldeflections,themaximumdriftshallincludetorsionaleffects.For
structuresassignedtoSeismicDesignCategoryCorDhavingtorsionalirregularity,thedesignstoreydrift,
shall be computed as the largest difference of the deflections along any of the edges of the structure at
the top and bottom of the storey under consideration. For seismic forceresisting systems comprised
solelyofmomentframesin SeismicDesignCategoriesD,theallowable storeydriftforsuchlinearelastic
analysisproceduresshallnotexceed
a
/whereistermedasastructuralredundancyfactor.Thevalue
ofredundancyfactormaybeconsideredas1.0withtheexceptionofstructureswithverylowlevelof
redundancywheremaybeconsideredas1.3.
Fornonlineartimehistoryanalysis(NTHA),thestoreydriftobtained(Section2.5.13)shallnotexceed1.25
timesthestoreydriftlimitspecifiedaboveforlinearelasticanalysisprocedures.
Table2.5.9AllowableStoreyDriftLimit(
a
)
Structure Occupancy Category
I andII III IV
Structures,otherthanmasonryshearwall
structures,4storiesorlesswithinteriorwalls,
partitions,ceilingsandexteriorwallsystemsthat
havebeendesignedtoaccommodatethestory
drifts.
0.025h
sx
0.020h
sx
0.015h
sx

Masonrycantilevershearwallstructures
0.010h
sx
0.010h
sx
0.010h
sx

Othermasonryshearwallstructures
0.007h
sx
0.007h
sx
0.007h
sx

Allotherstructures
0.020h
sx
0.015h
sx
0.010h
sx

NOTES:
1. hsxisthestoryheightbelowLevelx.
2. Thereshallbenodriftlimitforsinglestorystructureswithinteriorwalls,partitions,ceilings,
andexteriorwallsystemsthathavebeendesignedtoaccommodatethestoreydrifts.
3. Structuresinwhichthebasicstructuralsystemconsistsofmasonryshearwallsdesignedas
verticalelementscantileveredfromtheirbaseorfoundationsupportwhichareso
constructedthatmomenttransferbetweenshearwalls(coupling)isnegligible.
4. OccupancycategoriesaredefinedinTable1.2.1

2.5.16.2 DIAPHRAGMDEFLECTION
Thedeflectionintheplaneofthediaphragm,asdeterminedbyengineeringanalysis,shallnot
exceed the permissible deflection of the attached elements. Permissible deflection shall be
thatdeflectionthatwillpermittheattachedelementtomaintainitsstructuralintegrityunder
theindividualloadingandcontinuetosupporttheprescribedloads.
2.5.16.3 SEPARATIONBETWEENADJACENTSTRUCTURES
Buildings shall be protected from earthquakeinduced pounding from adjacent structures or
between structurally independent units of the same building maintaining safe distance
betweensuchstructuresasfollows:
Part6
108
(i) forbuildings,orstructurallyindependentunits,thatdonotbelongtothesameproperty,
the distance from the property line to the potential points of impact shall not be less
than the computed maximum horizontal displacement (Section 2.5.9.7) of the building
atthecorrespondinglevel.
(ii) for buildings, or structurally independent units, belonging to the same property, if the
distancebetweenthemisnotlessthanthesquarerootofthesumofthesquares(SRSS)
of the computed maximum horizontal displacements (Section 2.5.9.7) of the two
buildingsorunitsatthecorrespondinglevel.
(iii) Ifthefloorelevationsofthebuildingorindependentunitunderdesignarethesameas
those of the adjacent building or unit, the above referred minimum distance may be
reducedbyafactorof0.7
2.5.16.4 SPECIAL DEFORMATION REQUIREMENT FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
CATEGORYD
For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, every structural component not included in the
seismic forceresisting system in the direction under consideration shall be designed to be adequate for
thegravityloadeffectsandtheseismicforcesresultingfromdisplacementtothedesignstorydrift()as
determinedinaccordancewithSection2.5.9.7.Evenwhereelementsofthestructurearenotintendedto
resist seismic forces, their protection may be important. Where determining the moments and shears
inducedincomponentsthatarenotincludedintheseismicforceresistingsysteminthedirectionunder
consideration, the stiffening effects of adjoining rigid structural and nonstructural elements shall be
consideredandarationalvalueofmemberandrestraintstiffnessshallbeused.
2.5.17 SEISMICDESIGNFORNONSTRUCTURALCOMPONENTS
This section establishes minimum design criteria for nonstructural components that are permanently
attachedtostructuresandfortheirsupportsandattachments.
Thefollowingcomponentsareexemptfromtherequirementsofthissection.
1.ArchitecturalcomponentsinSeismicDesignCategoryB,otherthanparapetssupportedby
bearingwallsorshearwalls,wherethecomponentimportancefactor,I
c
,isequalto1.0.
2.MechanicalandelectricalcomponentsinSeismicDesignCategoryB.
3. MechanicalandelectricalcomponentsinSeismicDesignCategoryCwheretheimportance
factor,I
c
,isequalto1.0.
4. MechanicalandelectricalcomponentsinSeismicDesignCategoryDwherethecomponent
importance factor, I
c
, is equal to 1.0 and either (a) flexible connections between the
components and associated ductwork, piping, and conduit are provided, or (b)
componentsaremountedat1.2morlessaboveafloorlevelandweigh1780Norless.
5. Mechanical and electrical components in Seismic Design Category C or D where the
componentimportancefactor,I
c
,isequalto1.0and(a)flexibleconnections betweenthe
components and associated ductwork, piping, and conduit are provided, and (b) the
componentsweigh95Norlessor,fordistributionsystems,whichweigh7N/morless.
Chapter2
109

Where the individual weight of supported components and nonbuilding structures with periods greater
than0.06secondsexceeds25%ofthetotalseismicweightW,thestructureshallbedesignedconsidering
interactioneffectsbetweenthestructureandthesupportedcomponents.
Testingshallbepermittedtobeusedinlieuofanalysismethodsoutlinedinthischaptertodeterminethe
seismiccapacityofcomponentsandtheirsupportsandattachments.
2.5.17.1 COMPONENTIMPORTANCEFACTOR
All components shall be assigned a component importance factor. The component importance factor, I
c
,
shallbetakenas1.5ifanyofthefollowingconditionsapply:
1.Thecomponentisrequiredtofunctionafteranearthquake,
2.Thecomponentcontainshazardousmaterials,or
3.The component is in or attached to a occupancy category IV building and it is needed for
continuedoperationofthefacility.
Allothercomponentsshallbeassignedacomponentimportancefactor,I
c
,equalto1.0.
2.5.17.2 COMPONENTFORCETRANSFER
Components shall be attached such that the component forces are transferred to the structure.
Component attachments that are intended to resist seismic forces shall be bolted, welded, or otherwise
positively fastened without consideration of frictional resistance produced by the effects of gravity. A
continuous load path of sufficient strength and stiffness between the component and the supporting
structureshallbeverified.Localelementsofthesupportingstructureshallbedesignedforthecomponent
forces where such forces control the design of the elements or their connections. In this instance, the
component forces shall be those determined in Section 2.5.17.3, except that modifications to F
p
and R
p

due to anchorage conditions need not be considered. The design documents shall include sufficient
informationconcerningtheattachmentstoverifycompliancewiththerequirementsoftheseProvisions.
2.5.17.3 SEISMICDESIGNFORCE
The seismic design force, F
c
, applied in the horizontal direction shall be centered at the components
centerofgravityanddistributedrelativetothecomponent'smassdistributionandshallbedeterminedas
follows:

+ =
h
z
R
I W a
F
c
c c h c
c
2 1

(2.5.27)
Where,
0.75W
c
I
c
F
c
1.5W
c
I
c

c
=componentamplificationfactorwhichvariesfrom1.0to2.5(Table2.5.10orTable2.5.11).
a
h
=expectedhorizontalpeakgroundacceleration(ing)fordesign=2/3*Z*S
W
c
=weightofcomponent
R
c
=componentresponsereductionfactorwhichvariesfrom1.0to12.0(Table2.5.10orTable2.5.11)
Part6
110
z=heightabovethebaseofthepointofattachmentofthecomponent,butzshallnotbetakenlessthan
0andthevalueofz/hneednotexceed1.0
h=roofheightofstructureabovethebase
TheforceF
c
shallbeindependentlyappliedinatleasttwoorthogonalhorizontaldirectionsincombination
withserviceloadsassociatedwiththecomponent.Inaddition,thecomponentshallalsobedesignedfora
concurrentverticalforceof0.5a
h
W
c
.
Where nonseismic loads on nonstructural components exceed F
c
, such loads shall govern the strength
design,buttheseismicdetailingrequirementsandlimitationsshallapply.
2.5.17.4 SEISMICRELATIVEDISPLACEMENTS
Therelativeseismicdisplacement,D
c
,fortwoconnectionpointsonthesamestructureA,oneataheight
h
x
andotheratheighth
y
,foruseincomponentdesignshallbedeterminedasfollows:
yA xA c
D = (2.5.28)
D
c
shallnotexceedD
cmax
givenby:
( )
sx
aA y x
c
h
h h
D

=
max
(2.5.29)
where,

xA
=DeflectionatlevelxofstructureA

yA
=DeflectionatlevelyofstructureA

aA
=AllowablestorydriftforstructureA

h
x
=Height(abovebase)oflevelxtowhichupperconnectionpointisattached.
h
y
=Height(abovebase)oflevelytowhichlowerconnectionpointisattached.
h
sx
=Storyheightusedinthedefinitionoftheallowabledrift
a

Fortwoconnectionpointsonseparatestructures,AandB,orseparatestructuralsystems,oneatlevelx
andtheotheratlevely,D
c
shallbedeterminedasfollows:
yB xA c
D + =
(2.5.30)

D
c
shallnotexceedD
cmax
givenby:
sx
aB
sx
aA
c
h
Y
h
X
D

+

=
max
(2.5.31)
Where,

yB
=DeflectionatlevelyofstructureB

aB
=AllowablestorydriftforstructureB

The effects of relative seismic relative displacements shall be considered in combination with
displacementscausedbyotherloadsasappropriate.
Chapter2
111

Table2.5.10Coefficients
c
andR
c
forArchitecturalComponents

ArchitecturalComponentorElement
c

a
R
c

Inteiioi Nonstiuctuial Walls anu Paititions

Plain (unieinfoiceu) masoniy walls
All othei walls anu paititions

1.0
1.0

1.5
2.5
Cantilevei Elements (0nbiaceu oi biaceu to stiuctuial fiame belowits centei of mass)
Paiapets anu cantilevei inteiioi nonstiuctuial walls
Chimneys anu stacks wheie lateially biaceu oi suppoiteu by the stiuctuial fiame

2.5
2.5

2.5
2.5
Cantilevei Elements (Biaceu to stiuctuial fiame above its centei of mass) Paiapets
Chimneys anu Stacks
Exteiioi Nonstiuctuial Walls

1.0
1.0

2.5
2.5
Exteiioi Nonstiuctuial Wall Elements anu Connections
Wall Element
Bouy of wall panel connections
F t f th ti t

1.0
1.0

2.5
2.5
veneei
Limiteu uefoimability elements anu attachments
Low uefoimability elements anu attachments

1.0
1.0

2.5
1.5
Penthouses (except wheie fiameu by an extension of the builuing fiame) 2.5 3.5
Ceilings
All

1.0

2.5
Cabinets
Stoiage cabinets anu laboiatoiy equipment

1.0

2.5
Access Floois
Special access floois
All othei

1.0
1.0

2.5
1.5
Appenuages anu 0inamentations 2.5 2.5
Signs anu Billboaius 2.5 2.5
0thei Rigiu Components
Bigh uefoimability elements anu attachments
Limiteu uefoimability elements anu attachments
Low uefoimability mateiials anu attachments
0thei Flexible Components
Bigh uefoimability elements anu attachments
Limiteu uefoimability elements anu attachments
Low uefoimability mateiials anu attachments

1.0
1.0
1.0

2.5
2.5
2.5

3.5
2.5
1.5

3.5
2.5
1.5
a
A lowei value foi c is peimitteu wheie justifieu by uetaileu uynamic analysis. The value foi c shall
not be less than 1.u. The value of c equal to 1.u is foi iigiu components anu iigiuly attacheu
components. The value of c equal to 2.S is foi flexible components anu flexibly attachu components.

Part6
112

Table2.5.11Coefficients
c
andR
c
forMechanicalandElectricalComponents
MechanicalandElectricalComponents
c

a
R
c

Aiisiue BvAC, fans, aii hanuleis, aii conuitioning units, cabinet heateis, aii
uistiibution boxes, anu othei mechanical components constiucteu of sheet metal
f i
2.5 6.0
Wetsiue BvAC, boileis, fuinaces, atmospheiic tanks anu bins, chilleis, watei heateis,
heat exchangeis, evapoiatois, aii sepaiatois, manufactuiing oi piocess equipment,
1.0 2.5
Engines, tuibines, pumps, compiessois, anu piessuie vessels not suppoiteu on skiits 1.0 2.5
Skiitsuppoiteu piessuie vessels 2.5 2.5
Elevatoi anu escalatoi components. 1.0 2.5
ueneiatois, batteiies, inveiteis, motois, tiansfoimeis, anu othei electiical components 1.0 2.5
Notoi contiol centeis, panel boaius, switch geai, instiumentation cabinets, anu othei 2.5 6.0
Communication equipment, computeis, instiumentation, anu contiols. 1.0 2.5
Roofmounteu chimneys, stacks, cooling anu electiical toweis lateially biaceu below 2.5 3.0
Roofmounteu chimneys, stacks, cooling anu electiical toweis lateially biaceu above 1.0 2.5
Lighting fixtuies. 1.0 1.5
0thei mechanical oi electiical components. 1.0 1.5
VIBRATION ISOLATED COMPONENTS AND SYSTEMS
b

Components anu systems isolateu using neopiene elements anu neopiene isolateu
floois with builtin oi sepaiate elastomeiic snubbing uevices oi iesilient peiimetei
2.5 2.5
Spiing isolateu components anu systems anu vibiation isolateu floois closely
iestiaineu using builtin oi sepaiate elastomeiic snubbing uevices oi iesilient
2.5 2.0
Inteinally isolateu components anu systems. 2.5 2.0
Suspenueu vibiation isolateu equipment incluuing inline uuct uevices anu suspenueu 2.5 2.5
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

Piping in accoiuance with ASNE BS1, incluuing inline components with joints maue 2.5 12.0
Piping in accoiuance with ASNE BS1, incluuing inline components, constiucteu of
high oi limiteu uefoimability mateiials, with joints maue by thieauing, bonuing,
2.5 6.0
Piping anu tubing not in accoiuance with ASNE BS1, incluuing inline components,
constiucteu of highuefoimabilitymateiials, with joints maue by weluing oi biazing.
2.5 9.0
Piping anu tubing not in accoiuance with ASNE BS1, incluuing inline components,
constiucteu of high oi limiteuuefoimabilitymateiials, with joints maue by thieauing,
2.5 4.5
Piping anu tubing constiucteu of lowuefoimability mateiials, such as cast iion, glass, 2.5 3.0
Buctwoik, incluuing inline components, constiucteu of highuefoimability mateiials, 2.5 9.0
Buctwoik, incluuing inline components, constiucteu of high oi limiteuuefoimability
mateiials with joints maue by means othei than weluing oi biazing.
2.5 6.0
Buctwoik, incluuing inline components, constiucteu of lowuefoimability mateiials, 2.5 3.0
Electiical conuuit, bus uucts, iigiuly mounteu cable tiays, anu plumbing. 1.0 2.5
Nanufactuiing oi piocess conveyois (nonpeisonnel). 2.5 3.0
Suspenueu cable tiays. 2.5 6.0
a
A lower value for c is permitted where justified by detailed dynamic analysis. The value for c shall not be less than
1.0. The value of c equal to 1.0 is for rigid components and rigidly attached components. The value of c equal to 2.5 is
for flexible components and flexibly attached components.
b
Components mounted on vibration isolators shall have a bumper restraint or snubber in each horizontal direction. The
design force shall be taken as 2Fc if the nominal clearance (air gap) between the equipment support frame and restraint is
greater than 6 mm. If the nominal clearance specified on the construction documents is not greater than 6 mm, the design
force may be taken as Fc.

Chapter2
113

2.5.18 DESIGNFORSEISMICALLYISOLATEDBUILDINGS
Buildings that use special seismic isolation systems for protection against earthquakes shall be called
seismically isolated or base isolated buildings. Seismically isolated structure and every portion thereof
shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of provisions presented in this
section.
2.5.18.1 GENERALREQUIREMENTSFORISOLATIONSYSTEM
Theisolationsystemtobeusedinseismicallyisolatedstructuresshallsatisfythefollowingrequirements:
1. Designofisolationsystemshallconsidervariationsinseismicisolatormaterialproperties
over the projected life of structure including changes due to ageing, contamination,
exposuretomoisture,loadings,temperature,creep,fatigue,etc.
2. Isolatedstructuresshallresistdesignwindloadsatalllevelsabovetheisolationinterface.
At the isolation interface, a wind restraint system shall be provided to limit lateral
displacementintheisolationsystemtoavalueequal tothatrequired betweenfloorsof
thestructureabovetheisolationinterface.
3. The fire resistance rating for the isolation system shall be consistent with the
requirementsofcolumns,walls,orothersuchelementsinthesameareaofthestructure.
4. Theisolationsystemshallbeconfiguredtoproducealateralrestoringforcesuchthatthe
lateral force at the total design displacement is at least 0.025W greater than the lateral
forceat50%ofthetotaldesigndisplacement.
5. Theisolationsystemshallnotbeconfiguredtoincludeadisplacementrestraintthatlimits
lateral displacement due to the maximum considered earthquake to less than the total
maximum displacement unless it is demonstrated by analysis that such engagement of
restraintdoesnotresultinunsatisfactoryperformanceofthestructure.
6. Each element of the isolation system shall be designed to be stable under the design
vertical load when subjected to a horizontal displacement equal to the total maximum
displacement.
7. The factor of safety against global structural overturning at the isolation interface shall
not be less than 1.0 for required load combinations. All gravity and seismic loading
conditionsshallbeinvestigated.Seismicforcesforoverturningcalculationsshallbebased
onthemaximumconsideredearthquakeandtheverticalrestoringforceshallbebasedon
theseismicweightabovetheisolationinterface.
8. Localupliftofindividualunitsofisolationsystemis permittediftheresultingdeflections
do not cause overstress or instability of the isolator units or other elements of the
structure.
9. Accessforinspectionandreplacementofallcomponentsoftheisolationsystemshallbe
provided.
10. The designer of the isolation system shall establish a quality control testing program for
isolatorunits.Eachisolatorunitbeforeinstallationshallbetestedunderspecifiedvertical
andhorizontalloads.
Part6
114
11. After completion of construction, a design professional shall complete a final series of
inspectionsorobservationsofstructureseparationareasandcomponentsthatcrossthe
isolation interface. Such inspections and observations shall confirm that existing
conditions allow free and unhindered displacement of the structure to maximum design
levels and that all components that cross the isolation interface as installed are able to
accommodatethestipulateddisplacements.
12. Thedesigneroftheisolationsystemshallestablishaperiodicmonitoring,inspection,and
maintenanceprogramforsuchsystem.
13. Remodeling,repair,orretrofittingattheisolationinterface,includingthatofcomponents
that cross the isolation interface, shall be performed under the direction of a design
professionalexperiencedinseismicisolationsystems.
2.5.18.2 EQUIVALENTSTATICANALYSIS
The equivalent static analysis procedure is permitted to be used for design of a seismically isolated
structureprovidedthat:
1.ThestructureislocatedonSiteClassSA,SB,SC,SDorSEsite;
2.Thestructureabovetheisolationinterfaceisnotmorethanfourstoriesor20minheight
4.Theeffectiveperiodoftheisolatedstructureatthemaximumdisplacement,T
M
,islessthanorequalto
3.0sec.
5.Theeffectiveperiodoftheisolatedstructureatthedesigndisplacement,T
D
,isgreaterthanthreetimes
theelastic,fixedbaseperiodofthestructureabovetheisolationsystemasdeterminedinSec.2.5.9.2
6.Thestructureabovetheisolationsystemisofregularconfiguration;and
7.Theisolationsystemmeetsallofthefollowingcriteria:
a.Theeffectivestiffnessoftheisolationsystematthedesigndisplacementisgreaterthanonethirdofthe
effectivestiffnessat20%ofthedesigndisplacement,
b.TheisolationsystemiscapableofproducingarestoringforceasspecifiedinSec.2.5.18.1,
c.Theisolationsystemdoesnotlimitmaximumconsideredearthquakedisplacementtolessthanthetotal
maximumdisplacement.
Where the equivalent lateral force procedure is used to design seismically isolated structures, the
requirementsofthissectionshallapply.
2.5.18.2.1 DisplacementofIsolationSystem
Theisolationsystemshallbedesignedandconstructedtowithstandminimumlateralearthquake
displacements that act in the direction of each of the main horizontal axes of the structure and
suchdisplacementsshallbecalculatedasfollows:

=
D
D a
D
B
T g S
D
2
2
4
(2.5.32)

where,
Chapter2
115

S
a
= Design spectral acceleration (in units of g), calculated using Eq.(2.5.4) for period T
D
and
assumingR=1,I=1,=1(Section2.5.6.3)forthedesignbasisearthquake(DBE).
g= accelerationduetogravity
B
D
= damping coefficient related to the effective damping
D
of the isolation system at the
designdisplacement,assetforthinTable2.5.12.
T
D
=effectiveperiodofseismicallyisolatedstructureatthedesigndisplacementinthedirection
underconsideration,asprescribedbyEq.2.5.33:
g k
W
T
D
D
min
2 =
(2.5.33)

where,
W=seismicweightabovetheisolationinterface
k
Dmin
= minimum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design displacement in the
horizontaldirectionunderconsideration.
Table2.5.12DampingCoefficient,B
D

orB
M

EffectiveDamping,
D
or
M
(%)
a,b

B
D
orB
M

2 u.8
S 1.u
1u 1.2
2u 1.S
Su 1.7
4u 1.9
Su 2.u
a
The damping coefficient shall be based on the effective
damping of the isolation system
b

The damping coefficient shall be based on linear interpolation
for effective damping values other than those given.
The maximum displacement of the isolation system, D
M
, in the most critical direction of horizontal
responseshallbecalculatedinaccordancewiththefollowingformula:

=
M
M aM
M
B
T g S
D
2
2
4
(2.5.34)
where:
S
aM
= Maximum spectral acceleration (in units of g), calculated using Eq.(2.5.4) for period T
D
and
assumingR=1,I=1,=1(Section2.5.6.3)forthemaximumconsideredearthquake(MCE).
B
M
= numerical coefficient related to the effective damping
M
of the isolation system at the maximum
displacement,assetforthinTable2.5.12
T
M
= effectiveperiodofseismicisolatedstructureatthemaximum displacementinthe direction under
considerationasprescribedby:
Part6
116
g k
W
T
M
M
min
2 =
(2.5.35)
where,
k
Mmin
=minimumeffectivestiffnessoftheisolationsystematthemaximumdisplacementinthehorizontal
directionunderconsideration.
Thetotaldesigndisplacement,D
TD
,andthetotalmaximumdisplacement,D
TM
,ofelementsoftheisolation
systemshallincludeadditionaldisplacementduetoinherentandaccidentaltorsioncalculatedconsidering
the spatial distribution of the lateral stiffness of the isolation system and the most disadvantageous
locationofeccentricmass.
2.5.18.2.2 LateralSeismicforces
The structure above the isolation system shall be designed and constructed to withstand a minimum
lateralforce,V
s
,usingalloftheappropriateprovisionsforanonisolatedstructure.Theimportancefactor
forallisolatedstructuresshallbeconsideredas1.0,alsotheresponsereductionfactorR
I
consideredhere
(for computing design seismic forces) is in the range of 1.0 to 2.0. V
s
shall be determined in accordance
withEq.2.5.36asfollows:
I
D D
s
R
D k
V
max
= (2.5.36)
where:
k
Dmax
= maximum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design displacement in the horizontal
directionunderconsideration.
D
D
= design displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction under
considerationasprescribedbyEq.2.5.32.
R
I
= response reduction factorrelatedtothetypeof seismicforceresistingsystemabove theisolation
system.R
I
shallbebasedonthetypeofseismicforceresistingsystemusedforthestructureabove
theisolationsystemandshallbetakenasthelesserof3/8*R(Table2.5.7)or2.0,butneednotbe
takenlessthan1.0.
InnocaseshallV
s
betakenlessthanthefollowing:
1.ThelateralforcerequiredbySection2.5.9forafixedbasestructureofthesameweight,W,anda
periodequaltotheisolatedperiod,T
D
;
2.Thebaseshearcorrespondingtothefactoreddesignwindload;and
3. The lateral force required to fully activate the isolation system (e.g., the yield level of a softening
system,theultimatecapacityofasacrificialwindrestraintsystem,orthebreakawayfrictionlevelof
aslidingsystem)multipliedby1.5.
Theisolationsystem,thefoundation,andallstructuralelementsbelow theisolationsystemshallbe
designed and constructed to withstand a minimum lateral force, V
b
, using all of the appropriate
provisions for a nonisolated structure. V
b
shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 2.5.37 as
follows:
Chapter2
117

V
b
=k
Dmax
D
D
(2.5.37)
In all cases, V
b
shall not be taken less than the maximum force in the isolation system at any
displacementuptoandincludingthedesigndisplacement.
2.5.18.2.3 VerticalDistributionofLateralForces
Thetotallateralforceshallbedistributedovertheheightofthestructureabovetheisolationinterfacein
accordancewithEq.2.5.38asfollows:

=
=
n
i
i i
x x
s x
h w
h w
V F
1
(2.5.38)
where:
V
s
=totalseismiclateraldesignforceonelementsabovetheisolationsystem.
h
i
,h
x
=heightabovethebase,toLeveliorLevelx,respectively.
w
i
,w
x
=portionofWthatislocatedatorassignedtoLeveliorLevelx,respectively.
At each Level x the force, F
x
, shall be applied over the area of the structure in accordance with the
distributionofmassatthelevel.Stressesineachstructuralelementshallbedeterminedbyapplyingtoan
analyticalmodelthelateralforces,F
x
,atalllevelsabovethebase.
2.5.18.2.4 StoreyDrift
The storey drift shall be calculated as in Section 2.5.9.7 except that C
d
for the isolated structure shall be
takenequaltoR
I
andimportancefactorequalto1.0.Themaximumstoreydriftofthestructureabovethe
isolationsystemshallnotexceed0.015h
sx
.
2.5.18.3 DYNAMICANALYSIS
Responsespectrumanalysis maybeconductedifthe behaviorofthe isolationsystemcan beconsidered
as equivalent linear. Otherwise, nonlinear time history analysis shall be used where the true nonlinear
behaviour of the isolation system can be modeled. The mathematical models of the isolated structure
includingtheisolationsystemshallbealongguidelinesgiveninSections2.5.11.1and2.5.13.1,andother
requirementsgiveninSection2.5.18.
The isolation system shall be modeled using deformational characteristics developed and verified by
testing.Thestructuremodelshallaccountfor:(i)spatialdistributionofisolatorunits;(ii)considerationof
translation in both horizontal directions, and torsion of the structure above the isolation interface
considering the most disadvantageous location of eccentric mass; (iii) overturning/uplift forces on
individualisolatorunits;and(iv)effectsofverticalload,bilateralload,andtherateofloadingiftheforce
deflectionpropertiesoftheisolationsystemaredependentonsuchattributes.
A linear elastic model of the isolated structure (above isolation system) may be used provided that: (i)
stiffness properties assumed for the nonlinear components of the isolation system are based on the
maximum effective stiffness of the isolation system, and (ii) all elements of the seismicforceresisting
systemofthestructureabovetheisolationsystembehavelinearly.
Part6
118
2.5.18.3.1 ResponseSpectrumAnalysis
Responsespectrumanalysis shall be performedusing amodaldampingvalueforthe fundamentalmode
inthedirectionofinterestnotgreaterthantheeffectivedampingoftheisolationsystemor30percentof
critical,whicheverisless.Modaldampingvaluesforhighermodesshallbeselectedconsistentwiththose
that would be appropriate for response spectrum analysis of the structure above the isolation system
assumingafixedbase.
Response spectrum analysis used to determine the total design displacement and the total maximum
displacement shallincludesimultaneousexcitationofthemodelby100percentofthegroundmotion in
thecriticaldirectionand30percentofthegroundmotionintheperpendicular,horizontaldirection.The
design basis earthquake shall be used for the design displacement, while the maximum considered
earthquake shall be used for the maximum displacement. The maximum displacement of the isolation
systemshallbecalculatedasthevectorialsumofthetwoorthogonaldisplacements.
For the design displacement, structures that do not require sitespecific ground motion evaluation, shall
be analyzed using the design acceleration response spectrum in accordance with Section 2.5.6.3. The
maximumdesignspectrumtobeusedforthemaximumconsideredearthquakeshallnotbelessthan1.5
timesthedesignaccelerationresponsespectrum.
The response spectrum procedure is based on an equivalent linear model, where the effective stiffness
andeffectivedampingisafunctionofthedisplacement,thisformulationisthusaniterativeprocess.The
effective stiffness must be estimated, based on assumed displacement, and then adjusted till obtained
displacementagreewithassumeddisplacement.
Thedesignshearatanystoryshallnotbelessthanthestoryshearresultingfromapplicationofthestory
forces calculated using Eq. 2.5.38 with a value of V
s
equalto the base shear obtained from the response
spectrumanalysisinthedirectionofinterest.
2.5.18.3.2 NonlinearTimeHistoryAnalysis
Whereatimehistoryanalysisprocedureisperformed,notfewerthanthreeappropriategroundmotions
shallbeusedintheanalysisasdescribedbelow.
Ground motions shall consist of pairs of appropriate horizontal ground motion acceleration components
that shall be selected and scaled from individual recorded events. Appropriate ground motions shall be
selectedfrom eventshavingmagnitudes,faultdistance,andsourcemechanismsthatareconsistent with
those that control the maximum considered earthquake. If required number of recorded ground motion
pairs are not available, appropriate simulated ground motion pairs shall be used to make up the total
numberrequired.Foreachpairofhorizontalgroundmotioncomponents,asquarerootofthesumofthe
squares (SRSS) spectrum shall be constructed by taking the SRSS of the 5 percent damped response
spectra for the scaled components (where an identical scale factor is applied to both components of a
pair).Eachpairofmotionsshallbescaledsuchthatforeachperiodbetween0.5T
D
and1.25T
M
(whereT
D

and T
M
are defined in Section 2.5.18.2.1) the average of the SRSS spectra from all horizontal component
pairs doesnotfallbelow1.3timesthecorrespondingordinateofthedesignresponsespectrum(Section
2.5.18.4),bymorethan10percent.
Each pair of ground motion components shall be applied simultaneously to the model considering the
most disadvantageous location of eccentric mass. The maximum displacement of the isolation system
shallbecalculatedfromthevectorialsumofthetwoorthogonaldisplacementsateachtimestep.
Chapter2
119

Theparametersofinterestshallbecalculatedforeachgroundmotionusedforthetimehistoryanalysis.If
at least seven ground motions are used for the time history analysis, the average value of the response
parameterofinterestispermittedtobeusedfordesign.Iffewerthansevengroundmotionsareanalyzed,
themaximumvalueoftheresponseparameterofinterestshallbeusedfordesign.
2.5.18.3.3 StoreyDrift
Maximum story drift corresponding to the design lateral force including displacement due to vertical
deformationoftheisolationsystemshallnotexceedthefollowinglimits:
1.Themaximumstory driftofthestructureabovetheisolationsystemcalculatedbyresponsespectrum
analysisshallnotexceed0.015h
sx
.
2. The maximum story drift of the structure above the isolation system calculated by nonlinear time
historyanalysisshallnotexceed0.020hsx.
Thestoreydriftshall becalculatedasin Section2.5.9.7exceptthatCdfortheisolatedstructureshallbe
takenequaltoRIandimportancefactorequalto1.0.
2.5.18.4 TESTING
The deformation characteristics and damping values of the isolation system used in the design and
analysisofseismicallyisolatedstructuresshallbebasedontestresultsofisolatorunits.Thetestsarefor
establishing and validating the design properties of the isolation system and shall not be considered as
satisfyingthemanufacturingqualitycontroltests.
Thefollowingsequenceoftestsshallbeperformedonisolatorunitsfortheprescribednumberofcyclesat
averticalloadequaltotheaveragedeadloadplusonehalftheeffectsduetoliveloadonallisolatorunits
ofacommontypeandsize:
1.Twentyfullyreversedcyclesofloadingatalateralforcecorrespondingtothewinddesignforce.
2. Three fully reversed cycles of loading at each of the following increments of the total design
displacement0.25D
D
,0.5D
D
,1.0D
D
,and1.0D
M
whereD
D
andD
M
areasdeterminedinSections2.5.18.2.1.
3.Threefullyreversedcyclesofloadingatthetotalmaximumdisplacement,1.0D
TM
.
4.Notlessthantenfullyreversedcyclesofloadingat1.0timesthetotaldesigndisplacement,1.0D
TD
.
For each cycle of each test, the forcedeflection and hysteretic behavior of each isolator unit shall be
recorded.Theeffectivestiffnessisobtainedasthesecantvalueofstiffnessatdesigndisplacementwhile
theeffectivedampingisdeterminedfromtheareaofhystereticloopatthedesigndisplacement.
2.5.18.5 DESIGNREVIEW
Adesignreviewoftheisolationsystemandrelatedtestprogramsshallbeperformedbyanindependent
team of design professionals experienced in seismic analysis methods and the application of seismic
isolation.Isolationsystemdesignreviewshallinclude,butneednotbelimitedto,thefollowing:
1. Review of sitespecific seismic criteria including the development of sitespecific spectra and ground
motiontimehistoriesandallotherdesigncriteriadevelopedspecificallyfortheproject;
2. Review of the preliminary design including the determination of the total design displacement of the
isolationsystemandthelateralforcedesignlevel;
Part6
120
3.Overviewandobservationofprototype(isolatorunit)testing
4.Reviewofthefinaldesignoftheentirestructuralsystemandallsupportinganalyses;and
5.Reviewoftheisolationsystemqualitycontroltestingprogram.
2.5.19 BUILDINGSWITHSOFTSTOREY
Buildings with possible soft storey action at ground level for providing open parking spaces belong to
structures with major vertical irregularity (Fig.2.5.5a). Special arrangement is needed to increase the
lateralstrengthandstiffnessofthesoft/openstorey.Thefollowingtwoapproachesmaybeconsidered:
1. Dynamic analysis of such building may be carried out incorporating the strength and
stiffness of infill walls and inelastic deformations in the members, particularly those in
thesoftstorey,andthemembersdesignedaccordingly.
2. Alternatively, the following design criteria are to be adopted after carrying out the
earthquake analysis, neglecting the effect of infill walls in other storeys. Structural
elements(e.gcolumnsandbeams)ofthesoftstoreyaretobedesignedfor2.5timesthe
storey shears and moments calculated under seismic loads neglecting effect of infill
walls. Shear walls placed symmetrically in both directions of the building as far away
from the centre of the building as feasible are to be designed exclusively for 1.5 times
thelateralshearforcecalculatedbefore.
2.5.20 NONBUILDINGSTRUCTURES
Calculation of seismic design forces on nonbuilding structures (e.g. chimney, self supported overhead
water/fluid tank, silo, trussed tower, storage tank, cooling tower, monument and other structures not
covered in the preceding part of Section 2.5) shall be in accordance with "Chapter 15: Seismic Design
RequirementsforNonBuildingStructures,MinimumDesignLoadsforBuildingsandOtherStructures,ASCE
StandardASCE/SEI705"complyingwiththerequirementsofSection2.5ofthisCode.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUSLOADS
2.6.1 GENERAL
Theproceduresandlimitationsforthedeterminationofselectedmiscellaneousloadsareprovidedinthis
section.Loadsthatarenotspecifiedinthissectionorelsewhereinthischapter,maybedeterminedbased
oninformationfromreliablereferencesorspecialistadvicemaybesought.
2.6.2 DEFINITIONS
Thefollowingdefinitionsandnotationshallapplytotheprovisionsofthissectiononly.
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES: Buildings and structures which are necessary to remain functional during an
emergencyorapostdisasterperiod.
RATIONALANALYSIS:Ananalysisbasedonestablishedmethodsortheoriesusingmathematicalformulae
andactualorappropriatelyassumeddata.
SITESPECIFICDATA:Dataobtainedeitherfrommeasurementstakenatasiteorfromsubstantiatedfield
informationrequiredspecificallyforthestructureconcerned.
Chapter2
121

2.6.3 RAINLOADS
Rainloadsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththefollowingprovisions.
2.6.3.1 BLOCKEDDRAINS
Eachportionofaroofshallbedesignedtosustaintheloadfromallrainwaterthatcouldbeaccumulated
onitiftheprimarydrainagesystemforthatportionisundersizedorblocked.Pondinginstabilityshallbe
consideredinthissituation.
2.6.3.2 CONTROLLEDDRAINAGE
Roofs equipped with controlled drainage provisions shall be designed to sustain all rainwater loads on
them to the elevation of the secondary drainage system plus 0.25 kN/m
2
. Ponding instability shall be
consideredinthissituation.
2.6.4 LOADSDUETOFLOODANDSURGE
For the determination of flood and surge loads on a structural member, consideration shall be given to
bothhydrostaticandhydrodynamiceffects.Requiredloadingshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththe
established principles of mechanics based on site specific criteria and in compliance with the following
provisionsofthissection.Foressentialfacilitieslikecycloneandfloodsheltersandforhazardousfacilities
specifiedinTable1.2.1,valuesofmaximumfloodelevation,surgeheight,windvelocitiesetc.,requiredfor
the determination of flood and surge load, shall be taken corresponding to 100year return period. For
structures other than essential and hazardous facilities, these values shall be based on 50year return
period.
2.6.4.1 FLOODLOADSONSTRUCTURESATINLANDAREAS:
For structures sited at inland areas subject to flood, loads due to flood shall be determined considering
hydrostatic effects which shall be calculated based on the flood elevation of 50year return period. For
riverside structures such as that under Exposure C specified in Sec 2.4.8.3, hydrodynamic forces, arising
duetoapproachingwindgeneratedwavesshallalsobedeterminedinadditiontothehydrostaticloadon
them. In this case, the amplitude of such windinduced water waves shall be obtained from sitespecific
data.
2.6.4.2 FLOODANDSURGELOADSONSTRUCTURESATCOASTALAREAS:
For structures sited at coastal areas, the hydrostatic and hydrodynamic loads shall be determined as
follows:
2.6.4.2.1 HydrostaticLoads
Thehydrostaticloadsonstructuralelementsandfoundationsshallbedeterminedbasedonthemaximum
staticheightofwater,H
m
producedbyfloodsorsurgesasgivenbytherelation:
H
m
=max(h
s
,h
f
) (2.6.1)
where,h
f
=y
T
y
g
and

(2.6.2)
h
s
= Maximumsurgeheightasspecifiedina(i)below.
Part6
122
y
T
= ElevationoftheextremesurfacewaterlevelcorrespondingtoaTyear
returnperiodspecifiedin(ii)below,metres
y
g
= Elevationofgroundlevelatsite,metres.
i) Maximum Surge Height, h
s
: The maximum surge height, h
s
, associated with cyclones, shall be
that corresponding to a 50year or a 100year return period as may be applicable, based on site specific
analysis.Intheabsenceofamorerigoroussitespecificanalysis,thefollowingrelationmaybeused:
h
s
=h
T
(x1)k (2.6.3)
where,h
T
= designsurgeheightcorrespondingtoareturnperiodofTyearsatseacoast,in
metres,giveninTable2.6.1.
x = distanceofthestructuresitemeasuredfromthespringtidehighwaterlimitonthesea
coast,inkm;x=1,ifx<1.
k = rate of decrease in surge height in m/km; the value of k may be taken as 1/2 for
ChittagongCox'sBazarTeknafcoastandas1/3forothercoastalareas.
ii) ExtremeSurfaceWaterLevel,y
T
:Theelevationoftheextremesurfacewaterlevel,y
T
forasite,
which may not be associated with a cyclonic storm surge, shall be that obtained from a site specific
analysiscorrespondingtoa50yearora100yearreturnperiod.Valuesofy
T
aregiveninTable2.6.2for
selectedcoastallocationswhichmaybeusedintheabsenceofanysitespecificdata.
2.6.4.2.2 HydrodynamicLoads:
Thehydrodynamicloadappliedonastructuralelementduetowindinducedlocalwavesofwater,shallbe
determined by a rational analysis using an established method and based on site specific data. In the
absenceofasitespecificdatatheamplitudeofthelocalwave,tobeusedintherationalanalysis,shallbe
taken as h
w
= h
s
/4 1m, where, h
s
is given in Sec 2.6.4.2.1. Such forces shall be calculated based on 50
yearor100yearreturnperiodoffloodorsurge.Thecorrespondingwindvelocitiesshallbe260km/hor
289km/hrespectively.
2.6.4.3 BREAKAWAYWALLS
When nonstructural walls, partitions or other nonstructural elements located below the maximum flood or surge
elevation,arerequiredtobreakawayunderhightidesorwaveaction,suchnonstructuralelementsshallbedesigned
to sustain a maximum uniformly distributed load of 1.0 kN/m
2
but not less than 0.5 kN/m
2
applied on a vertical
projectionofthearea.
2.6.5 TEMPERATUREEFFECTS
Temperatureeffects,ifsignificant,shallbeconsideredinthedesignofstructuresorcomponentsthereof
inaccordancewiththeprovisionofthissection.
Indeterminingthetemperatureeffectsonastructure,thefollowingprovisionsshallbeconsidered:
a) Thetemperaturesindicated,shallbetheairtemperatureintheshade.Therangeofthevariation
intemperatureforabuildingsiteshallbetakenintoconsideration.

Chapter2
123

Table2.6.1:DesignSurgeHeightsattheSeaCoast,h
T
*

CoastalRegion SurgeHeightattheSeaCoast,h
T
(m)

T=50year
(1)
T=100year
(2)

Teknaf to Cox's Bazai

Chakaiia to Anwaia, anu NaheshkhaliKutubuia Islanus

Chittagong to Noakhali

Sanuwip, Batiya anu all islanus in this iegion

Bhola to Baiguna

Saiankhola to Shyamnagai
4.S

7.1


7.9

7.9

6.2

S.S
S.8

8.6


9.6

9.6

7.7

6.4
* values piepaieu fiom infoimation obtaineu fiom AnnexBS, NCSP.
Note:(1)

(2)
These values may be useu in the absence of site specific uata foi stiuctuies othei than essential
facilities listeu in Table 6.1.1.
These values may be useu in the absence of site specific uata foi essential facilities listeu in Table
1.2.1.

b) Effects of the variation of temperature within the material of a structural element shall be
accountedforbyoneofthefollowingmethods.
i) relievethestressesbyprovidingadequatenumbersofexpansionorcontraction
joints,
ii) designthestructuralelementtosustainadditionalstressesduetotemperature
effects.
c) whenthemethodb(ii)aboveisconsideredtobeapplicable,thestructuralanalysisshalltakeinto
accountthefollowing:
i) the variation in temperature within the material of the structural element,
exposureconditionoftheelementandtherateatwhichthematerialabsorbor
radiateheat.
ii) the warping or any other distortion caused due to temperature changes and
temperaturegradientinthestructuralelement.
d) Whenitcanbedemonstratedbyestablishedprincipleofmechanicsorbyanyothermeansthat
neglecting some or all of the effects of temperature, does not affect the safety and serviceability of the
structure,thetemperatureeffectcanbeconsideredinsignificantandneednotbeconsideredindesign.
2.6.6 SOILANDHYDROSTATICPRESSURE
For structures or portions thereof, lying below ground level, loads due to soil and hydrostatic pressure
shall be determinedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthis sectionandappliedin addition toall other
applicableloads.

Part6
124
Table2.6.2:ExtremeSurfaceWaterLevelsDuringMonsoonatSelectedLocationsoftheCoastalArea
abovePWDDatum,y
T
*

CoastalArea
y
T
(m)
Location

Thana T=50years
(1)
T=100
years
(2)

Teknaf
Cox's Bazai
Shaflapui
Lemsikhali
Banigiam

Chittagong
Patenga
Sonapui
Sanuwip
Companyganj

Batiya
Baulatkhan
Bashmina
ualachipa
Patuakhali

Khepupaia
Bamna
Pathaighata
Raenua
Chaiuouni

Nongla
Kobouak
(iivei estuaiy)
Kaikhali
Teknaf
Cox's Bazai
Noheshkhali
Kutubuia
Patiya

Banuai
Banuai
Sonagazi
Sanuwip
Companyganj

Batiya
Baulatkhan
Bashmina
ualachipa
Patuakhali

Kalapaia
Bamna
Pathaighata
Saiankhola
Pathaighata

Nonglapoit
Shyamnagai

Shyamnagai
2.SS
S.84
4.67
4.9S
S.uS

4.72
4.u8
7.u2
6.u9
7.SS

S.SS
4.62
S.6u
S.79
2.87

2.9S
S.S2
S.6S
S.66
4.41

S.2S
S.S1

S.94
2.44
S.88
4.87
S.19
S.24

4.88
4.16
7.11
6.2
7.94

S.76
4.72
S.7S
S.92
S.uS

S.u2
S.S7
S.84
S.7S
4.66

S.S6
S.87

4.12
* values piepaieu fiom infoimation obtaineu fiom Annex BS, NCSP
Note : (1) These values may be useu in the absence of site specific uata foi stiuctuies in Stiuctuie
0ccupancy Categoiy Iv listeu Table 1.2.1.
(2) These values may be useu in the absence of site specific uata foi stiuctuies in Stiuctuie
0ccupancy Categoiies I, II anu III listeu in Table 1.2.1.

2.6.6.1 PRESSUREONBASEMENTWALL:
In the design of basement walls and similar vertical or nearly vertical structures below grade, provision
shallbemadeforthelateralpressureofadjacentsoil.Allowanceshallbemadeforpossiblesurchargedue
tofixedormovingloads.Whenaportionorthewholeoftheadjacentsoilisbelowthesurroundingwater
table,computationsshallbebasedonthesubmergedunitweightofsoil,plusfullhydrostaticpressure.
2.6.6.2 UPLIFTONFLOORS:
Inthedesignofbasementfloorsandsimilarhorizontalornearlyhorizontalconstructionbelowgrade,the
upward pressure of water, if any, shall be taken as the full hydrostatic pressure applied over the entire
area.Thehydrostaticheadshallbemeasuredfromtheundersideoftheconstruction.

Chapter2
125

2.6.7 LOADSDUETOEXPLOSIONS
Loadsonbuildingsorportionsthereof,shallbeassessedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthissection.
2.6.7.1 EXPLOSIONEFFECTSINCLOSEDROOMS:
a) Determination of Loads and Response : Internal overpressure developed from an internal
explosion such as that due to leaks in gas pipes, evaporation of volatile liquids, internal dust explosion
etc., in rooms of sizes comparable to residential rooms and with ventilation areas consisting of window
glass breaking at a pressure of 4 kN/m
2
(34 mm machine made glass) may be calculated from the
followingmethod:
i) The overpressure, q
o
provided in Fig 2.6.1(a) shall be assumed to depend on a factor
A
o
/v, where, A
o
is the total window area in m
2
and v is the volume in m
3
of the room
considered,
ii) Theinternalpressureshallbeassumedtoactsimultaneouslyuponallwallsandfloorsin
oneclosedroom,and
iii) Theactionq
o
obtainedfromFig2.6.1(a)maybetakenasstaticaction.
When a time dependent response is required, an impulsive force function similar to that shown in Fig
2.6.1(b) shall be used in a dynamic analysis, where t
1
is the time from the start of combustion until
maximumpressureisreachedandt
2
isthetimefrommaximumpressuretotheendofcombustion.Fort
1

Fig.2.6.1Magnitudeanddistributionofinternalpressureinabuildingduetointernalgasexplosion

and t
2

the most unfavourable values shall be chosen in relation to the dynamic properties of the
structures.However,thevaluesshallbechosenwithintheintervalsasgiveninFig2.6.1(b).
Thepressuremaybeappliedsolelyinoneroomorinmorethanoneroomatthesametime.Inthelatter
case, all rooms are incorporated in the volume v. Only windows or other similarly weak and light weight
Part6
126
structuralelementsmaybetakenasventilationareaseventhoughcertainlimitedstructuralpartsbreakat
pressureslessthanq
o
.
b) Limitations : Procedure for determining explosion loads given in (a) above shall have the
followinglimitations:
i) Values of q
o
given in Fig 2.6.1(a) are based on tests with gas explosions in room
corresponding to ordinary residential flats, and may be applied to considerably
different conditions with caution after appropriate adjustment of the values
basedonmoreaccurateinformation.
ii) Fig 2.6.1 shall be taken as a guide only, and probability of occurrence of an
explosionshallbecheckedineachcaseusingappropriatevalues.
2.6.7.2 MINIMUMDESIGNPRESSURE:
Walls,floorsandroofsandtheirsupportingmembersseparatingausefromanexplosionexposure,shall
be designed to sustain the anticipated maximum load effects resulting from such use including any
dynamiceffects,butforaminimuminternalpressureorsuctionof5kN/m
2
,inadditiontoallotherloads
specifiedinthischapter.
2.6.7.3 DESIGNPRESSUREONRELIEFVENTS:
When pressurerelief vents are used, such vents shall be designed to relieve at a maximum internal
pressureof1.0kN/m
2
.
2.6.7.4 LOADSDUETOOTHEREXPLOSIONS:
Loads arising from other types of explosions, such as those from external gas cloud explosions, external
explosions due to high explosives (TNT) etc. shall be determined, for specific cases, by rational analyses
basedoninformationfromreliablereferencesorspecialistadviceshallbesought.
2.6.8 VERTICALFORCESONAIRRAIDSHELTERS
For the design of air raid shelters located in a building e.g. in the basement below ground level, the
characteristicverticalloadshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithprovisionsofSec2.6.8.1below.
Table2.6.3:CharacteristicVerticalLoadsforanAirRaidShelterinaBuilding
No.ofStoreys
(1)

AbovetheAirRaidShelter
VerticalLoad
kN/m
2

< 2
S 4
> 4
Builuings of paiticulaily stable constiuction
iiiespective of the numbei of stoieys
28
S4
41
28
(2)

Note :
(1)
(2)
Stoieys shall mean eveiy usable stoiey above the sheltei flooi
Builuings of paiticulaily stable constiuction shall mean builuings
having beaiing stiuctuial elements maue fiom ieinfoiceu insitu
conciete.

Chapter2
127

2.6.8.1 CHARACTERISTICVERTICALLOADS
Buildingsinwhichtheindividualfloorsareacteduponbyatotaldistributedliveloadofupto5.0kN/m
2
,
vertical forces on air raid shelters generally located below ground level, such as a basement, shall be
consideredtohavethecharacteristicvaluesprovidedinTable2.6.3.Inthecaseofbuildingshavingfloors
thatareacteduponbyaliveloadlargerthan5.0kN/m
2
,abovevaluesshallbeincreasedbythedifference
betweentheaverageliveloadsonallstoreysabovetheoneusedastheshelterand5.0kN/m
2
.
2.6.9 LOADSONHELICOPTERLANDINGAREAS
Inadditiontoallotherapplicableloadsprovidedinthischapter,includingthedeadload,theminimumlive
load on helicopter landing or touch down areas shall be one of the loads L
1
, L
2
or L
3
as given below
producingthemostunfavourableeffect:
i)L
1
=W
1
(2.6.4a)
ii)L
2
=kW
2
(2.6.4b)
iii)L
3
=w (2.6.4c)
where,W
1
= ActualweightofthehelicopterinkN,
W
2
= FullyloadedweightofthehelicopterinkN,
w = Adistributedloadof5.0kN/m
2
,

k = 0.75forhelicoptersequippedwithhydraulictypeshock
absorbers,and
= 1.5forhelicopterswithrigidorskidtypelandinggear.
Theliveload,L
1
shallbeappliedovertheactualareasofcontactoflanding.Theload,L
2
shallbeasingle
concentrated load including impact applied over a 300 mm x 300 mm area. The loads L
1
and L
2
may be
appliedanywherewithinthelandingareatoproducethemostunfavourableeffectsofload.
2.6.10 ERECTIONANDCONSTRUCTIONLOADS
All loads required to be sustained by a structure or any portion thereof due to placing or storage of
constructionmaterialsanderectionequipmentincludingthoseduetooperationofsuchequipmentshall
beconsideredaserectionloads.Provisionsshallbemadeindesigntoaccountforallstressesduetosuch
loads.
2.7 COMBINATIONSOFLOADS
2.7.1 GENERAL
Buildings, foundations and structural members shall be investigated for adequate strength to resist the
most unfavourable effect resulting from the various combinations of loads provided in this section. The
combination of loads may be selected using the provisions of either Sec 2.7.4 or 2.7.5 whichever is
applicable. However, once Sec 2.7.4 or2.7.5 is selected for a particular construction material, it must be
used exclusively for proportioning elements of that material throughout the structure. In addition to the
loadcombinationsgiveninSec2.7.4and2.7.5anyotherspecificloadcombinationprovidedelsewherein
thisCodeshallalsobeinvestigatedtodeterminethemostunfavourableeffect.
Part6
128
The most unfavourable effect of loads may also occur when one or more of the contributing loads are
absent, or act in the reverse direction. Loads such as F, H or S shall be considered in design when their
effects are significant. Floor live loads shall not be considered where their inclusion results in lower
stresses in the member under consideration. The most unfavourable effects from both wind and
earthquake loads shall be considered where appropriate, but they need not be assumed to act
simultaneously.
2.7.2 DEFINITIONS
ALLOWABLESTRESS DESIGNMETHOD(ASD): Amethod forproportioningstructural memberssuchthat
themaximumstressesduetoserviceloadsobtainedfromanelasticanalysisdoesnotexceedaspecified
allowablevalue.ThisisalsocalledWorkingStressDesignMethod(WSD).
DESIGNSTRENGTH:Theproductofthenominalstrengthandaresistancefactor.
FACTOREDLOAD:Theproductofthenominalloadandaloadfactor.
LIMIT STATE : A condition in which a structure or component becomes unfit for service and is judged
eithertobenolongerusefulforitsintendedfunction(serviceabilitylimitstate)ortobeunsafe(strength
limitstate).
LOAD EFFECTS : Forces, moments, deformations and other effects produced in structural members and
componentsbytheappliedloads.
LOAD FACTOR : A factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the actual load from the nominal
valueandforuncertaintiesintheanalysisthattransformstheloadintoaloadeffect.
LOADS : Forces or other actions that arise on structural systems from the weight of all permanent
constructions, occupants and their possessions, environmental effects, differential settlement, and
restraineddimensionalchanges.Permanentloadsarethoseloadsinwhichvariationsintimearerareorof
smallmagnitude.Allotherloadsarevariableloads.
NOMINAL LOADS : The magnitudes of the loads such as dead, live, wind, earthquake etc. specified in
Sec2.2through2.6ofthischapter.
NOMINAL STRENGTH : The capacity of a structure or component to resist the effects of loads, as
determined by computations using specified material strengths and dimensions and formulas derived
from accepted principles of structural mechanics or by field tests or laboratory tests of scaled models,
allowingformodellingeffectsanddifferencesbetweenlaboratoryandfieldconditions.
RESISTANCE FACTOR : A factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the actual strength from the
nominal value and the manner and consequences of failure. This is also known as strength reduction
factor.
STRENGTH DESIGN METHOD : A method of proportioning structural members using load factors and
resistance factors satisfying both the applicable limit state conditions. This is also known as Load Factor
DesignMethod(LFD)orUltimateStrengthDesignMethod(USD).
WORKINGSTRESSDESIGNMETHOD(WSD):SeeALLOWABLESTRESSDESIGNMETHOD.
Chapter2
129

2.7.3 SYMBOLSANDNOTATION
D = deadloads,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Deadloadconsistsof:a)weight
of the member itself, b) weight of all materials of construction incorporated into the building to be
permanentlysupportedbythemember,includingbuiltinpartitions,c)weightofpermanentequipment.
E = load effects of earthquake, or related internal moments and forces, For specific
definitionoftheearthquakeloadeffectE,seeSection2.5
F = loadsduetoweightandpressuresoffluidswithwelldefineddensitiesandcontrollable
maximumheightsorrelatedinternalmomentsandforces.
F
a
= loadsduetofloodortidalsurgeorrelatedinternalmomentsandforces.
H = loads due to weight and pressure of soil, water in soil, or other materials, or related
internalmomentsandforces,
L = live loads due to intended use and occupancy, including loads due to movable objects
andmovablepartitionsandloadstemporarilysupportedbythestructureduringmaintenance,orrelated
internalmomentsandforces,.Lincludesanypermissiblereduction.Ifresistancetoimpactloadsistaken
intoaccountindesign,sucheffectsshallbeincludedwiththeliveloadsL.
L
r
= roofliveloads,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,
R = rainload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces
T = selfstrainingforcesandcumulativeeffectoftemperature,creep,shrinkage,differential
settlement,andshrinkagecompensatingconcrete,orcombinationsthereof,orrelatedinternalmoments
andforces.
W = windload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,
2.7.4 COMBINATIONSOFLOADEFFECTSFORALLOWABLESTRESS
DESIGNMETHOD
2.7.4.1 BASICCOMBINATIONS
Provisions of this section shall apply to all construction materials permitting their use in proportioning
structuralmembersbyallowablestressdesignmethod.Whenthismethodisusedindesigningstructural
members,allloadslistedhereinshallbeconsideredtoactinthefollowingcombinations.Thecombination
thatproducesthemostunfavourableeffectshallbeusedindesign.
1. D
2. D+L
3. D+F
4. D+H+F+L+T
5. D+H+F+(L
r
orR)
6. D+H+F+0.75(L+T)+0.75(L
r
orR)
7. D+H+F+(Wor0.7E)
Part6
130
8. D+H+F+0.75(Wor0.7E)+0.75L+0.75(L
r
orR)
9. D+L+(Wor0.7E)
10. 0.6D+W+H
11. 0.6D+0.7E+H
Whenastructureislocatedinafloodzoneorintidalsurgezone,thefollowingloadcombinationsshallbe
considered:
1.InCoastalZonesvulnerabletotidalsurges,1.5F
a
shallbeaddedtootherloadsincombinations(7),(8),
(9),and(10)andEshallbesetequaltozeroin(7),(8)and(9).
2. In noncoastal Zones, 0.75F
a
shall be added to combinations (7), (8), (9), and (10) and E shall be set
equaltozeroin(7),(8)and(9).
2.7.4.2 STRESSINCREASE
UnlesspermittedelsewhereinthisCode,increasesinallowablestressshallnotbeusedwiththeloadsor
loadcombinationsgivenaboveinSection2.7.4.1.
2.7.5 COMBINATIONSOFLOADEFFECTSFORSTRENGTHDESIGN
METHOD
When strength design method is used, structural members and foundations shall be designed to have
strengthnotlessthanthatrequiredtoresistthemostunfavorableeffectofthecombinationsoffactored
loadslistedinthefollowingsections:
2.7.5.1 BASICCOMBINATIONS
1. 1.4(D+F)
2. 1.2(D+F+T)+1.6(L+H)+0.5(L
r
orP)
3. 1.2D+1.6(L
r
orP)+(1.0Lor0.8W)
4. 1.2D+1.6W+1.0L+0.5(L
r
orP)
5. 1.2D+1.0E+1.0L
6. 0.9D+1.6W+1.6H
7. 0.9D+1.0E+1.6H
Exception:
1.TheloadfactoronliveloadLin combinations(3),(4), and(5)ispermitted tobereducedto0.5 forall
occupanciesinwhichminimumspecifieduniformlydistributedliveloadislessthanorequalto5.0kN/m
2
,
withtheexceptionofgaragesorareasoccupiedasplacesofpublicassembly.
2.TheloadfactoronHshallbesetequaltozeroincombinations(6)and(7)ifthestructuralactiondueto
H counteracts that due to W or E. Where lateral earth pressure provides resistance to structural actions
fromotherforces,itshallnotbeincludedinHbutshallbeincludedinthedesignresistance.
Chapter2
131

3.ForstructuresdesignedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofChapter6,Part6ofthisCode(reinforced
concrete structures), where wind load W has not been reduced by a directionality factor, it shall be
permittedtouse1.3Winplaceof1.6Win(4)and(6)above.
Whenastructureislocatedinafloodzoneorintidalsurgezone,thefollowingloadcombinationsshallbe
considered:
1. In Coastal Zones vulnerable to tidal surges, 1.6W shall be replaced by 1.6W+2.0F
a
in
combinations(4)and(6).
2. In Noncoastal Zones, 1.6W shall be replaced by 0.8W+1.0F
a
in combinations (4) and
(6).
2.7.6 LOADCOMBINATIONSFOREXTRAORDINARYEVENTS
Where required by the applicable code, standard, or the authority having jurisdiction, strength and
stabilityshallbecheckedtoensurethatstructuresarecapableofwithstandingtheeffectsofextraordinary
(i.e.,lowprobability)events,suchasfires,explosions,andvehicularimpact.

RelatedAppendix
AppendixA ConversionofExpressionsfromSItoFPSUnits

Part6
StructuralDesign 6151
CBAPTER S
SOILSANDFOUNDATIONS
3.1 INTRODUCTION
TheSoilsandFoundationschapterofthecodeisdividedintothefollowingthreemajorparts:

PartA: GeneralRequirements,MaterialsandFoundationTypes
PartB: ServiceLoadDesignMethodofFoundations
PartC: AdditionalConsiderationsinPlanning,DesignandConstructionofBuildingFoundations.

PartA(GeneralRequirements,MaterialsandFoundationTypes)consistsofthefollowingsections:

Scope
Terminology
SiteInvestigations
Identification,ClassificationandDescriptionofSoils
GeotechnicalInvestigationreport
Materials
TypesofFoundation

PartB(ServiceLoadDesignMethodofFoundations)hasthesectionsasunder:

ShallowFoundations
GeotechnicalDesignofshallowFoundations
GeotechnicalDesignofshallowFoundations
FieldTestsforDrivenPilesandDrilledShafts

Part C (Additional Considerations in Planning, Design and Construction of Building Foundations) deals with the
followingsections:

Excavation
Dewatering
SlopeStabilityofAdjoiningBuildings
Part6
StructuralDesign

6152 Vol.2
Fills
RetainingWallsforFoundations
WaterproofingandDampproofing
FoundationonSlopes
FoundationsonFillandProblematicSoils
FoundationDesignforDynamicForces
GeohazardsforBuildings
PARTA:GENERALREQUIREMENTS,MATERIALSANDFOUNDATIONTYPES(Sections3.2
to3.8)
3.2 SCOPE
The provisions of this chapter shall be applicable to the design and construction of foundations of buildings and
structures for the safe support of dead and superimposed loads without exceeding the allowable bearing stresses,
permissiblesettlementsanddesigncapability.
3.3 TERMINOLOGY
Forthetermsusedinthischapter,thefollowingdefinitionsshallapply.
ALLOWABLE LOAD: The maximum load that may be safely applied to a foundation unit, considering both the
strengthandsettlementofthesoil,underexpectedloadingandsoilconditions.
DESIGNLOAD:Theexpectedunfactoredloadtoafoundationunit.
GROSSPRESSURE:Thetotalpressureatthebaseofafootingduetotheweightofthesuperstructureand
theoriginaloverburdenpressure.
NETPRESSURE:Thegrosspressureminusthesurchargepressurei.e.theoverburdenpressureofthesoilat
thefoundationlevel.
SERVICELOAD:Theexpectedunfactoredloadtoafoundationunit.
BEARING CAPACITY: The general term used to describe the load carrying capacity of foundation soil or rock in
termsofaveragepressurethatenablesittobearandtransmitloadsfromastructure.
BEARING SURFACE: The contact surface between a foundation unit and the soil or rock upon which the
foundationrests.
DESIGNBEARINGCAPACITY:Themaximumnetaveragepressureappliedtoasoilorrockbyafoundation
unitthatthefoundationsoilorrockwillsafelycarrywithouttheriskofbothshearfailureandpermissible
settlement. It is equal to the least of the two values of net allowable bearing capacity and safe bearing
pressure.ThismayalsobecalledALLOWABLEBEARINGPRESSURE.
GROSSALLOWABLEBEARINGPRESSURE:Themaximumgrossaveragepressureofloadingthatthesoilcan
safely carry with a factor of safety considering risk of shear failure. This may be calculated by dividing
grossultimatebearingcapacitywithafactorofsafety.
GROSS ULTIMATE BEARING CAPACITY: The maximum average gross pressure of loading at the base of a
foundationwhichinitiatesshearfailureofthesupportingsoil
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6153
ALLOWABLEBEARINGCAPACITY:Themaximumnetaveragepressureofloadingthatthesoilwillsafelycarry
withafactorofsafetyconsideringriskofshearfailureandthesettlementoffoundation.Thisistheminimum
ofsafebearingcapacityandsafebearingpressure.
NETULTIMATEBEARINGCAPACITY:Theaveragenetincreaseofpressureatthebaseofafoundationdueto
loadingwhich initiates shear failureofthesupportingsoil.Itisequaltothegross ultimatebearing capacity
minustheoverburdenpressure.
PRESUMPTIVE BEARING CAPACITY: The net approximate pressure prescribed as appropriate for the
particulartypeofgroundtobeusedinpreliminarydesignsoffoundations
SAFEBEARINGCAPACITY:Themaximumaveragepressureofloadingthatthesoilwillsafelycarrywithoutthe
riskofshearfailure.Thismaybecalculatedbydividingnetultimatebearingcapacitywithafactorofsafety.
SAFE BEARING PRESSURE: The maximum average pressure of loading that the soil will safely carry without
theriskofpermissiblesettlement.
CAISSON: A deep foundation unit, relatively large section, sunk down (not driven) to the ground. This is also
calledWELLFOUNDATION.
CLAY MINERAL: A small group of minerals, commonly known as clay minerals, essentially composed of hydrous
aluminiumsilicateswithmagnesiumorironreplacingwhollyorinpartsomeofthealuminium.
CLAY SOIL: A natural aggregate of microscopic and submicroscopic mineral grains that are product of chemical
decompositionanddisintegrationofrockconstituents.Itisplasticinmoderatetowiderangeofwatercontents.
DOWNDRAG: The transfer of load (drag load) to a deep foundation, when soil settles in relation to the
foundation.ThisisalsoknownasNEGATIVESKINFRICTION.
DRILLED PIER/DRILLED SHAFT: A deep foundation generally of large diameter shaft usually more than 600 mm
andconstructedbydrillingandexcavatingintothesoil.
EFFECTIVE STRESS/ EFFECTIVE PRESSURE: The pressure transmitted through grain to grain at the contact point
throughasoilmassistermedaseffectivestressoreffectivepressure.
ENDBEARING:Theloadbeingtransmittedtothetoeofadeepfoundationandresistedbythebearingcapacityof
thesoilbeneaththetoe.
EXCAVATION:Thespacecreatedbytheremovalofsoilorrockforthepurposeofconstruction.
FACTOROFSAFETY:Theratiooftheultimatecapacitytothedesign(working)capacityofthefoundationunit.
FILL:Manmadedepositsofnaturalearthmaterials(soil,rock)and/orwastematerials.
FOOTING: A foundation constructed of masonry, concrete or other material under the base of a wall or one or
morecolumnsforthepurposeofspreadingtheloadoveralargerareaatshallowerdepthofgroundsurface.
FOUNDATION: Lower part of the structure which is in direct contact with the soil and transmits loads to the
ground.
DEEPFOUNDATION:Afoundationunitthatprovidessupportforastructuretransferringloadsbyendbearing
and/orbyshaftresistanceatconsiderabledepthbelowtheground.Generally,thedepthisatleastfivetimes
theleastdimensionofthefoundation.
SHALLOWFOUNDATION:Afoundationunitthatprovidessupportforastructuretransferringloadsatasmall
depthbelowtheground.Generally,thedepthislessthantwotimestheleastdimensionofthefoundation.
FOUNDATION ENGINEER: A graduate Engineer with at least five years of experience in civil engineering
particularlyinfoundationdesignorconstruction.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6154 Vol.2
GEOTECHNICALENGINEER:EngineerwithMastersdegreeingeotechnicalengineeringhavingatleastthreeyears
ofexperienceingeotechnicaldesignorconstruction.
GROUND WATER LEVEL/ GROUND WATER TABLE: The level of water at which porewater pressure is equal to
atmosphericpressure.Itisthetopsurfaceofafreebodyofwater(peizometricwaterlevel)intheground.
MATFOUNDATION:SeeRAFT.
NEGATIVESKINFRICTION:SeeDOWNDRAG.
OVERCONSOLIDATIONRATIO(OCR):Theratioofthepreconsolidationpressure(maximumpastpressure)tothe
existingeffectiveoverburdenpressureofthesoil.
PILE: A slender deep foundation unit made of materials such as steel, concrete, wood, or combination thereof
thattransmitstheloadtothegroundbyskinfriction,endbearingandlateralsoilresistance.
BATTERPILE:Thepilewhichis installedat anangletotheverticalinorderto carrylateralloadsalongwith
theverticalloads.ThisisalsoknownasRAKERPILE.
BOREDPILE/CASTINSITUPILE/REPLACEMENTPILE:Apileformedintoapreformedholeofground,usuallyof
reinforcedconcretehavingadiametersmallerthan600mm.
DRIVEN PILE/DISPLACEMENT PILE: A plie foundation premanufactured and placed in ground by driving,
jacking,jettingorscrewing.
LATERALLYLOADEDPILE:Apilethatisinstalledverticallytocarrymainlythelateralloads.
PILECAP:Apilecapisaspecialfootingneededtotransmitthecolumnloadtoagrouporclusterofpiles.
PILEHEAD/PILETOP:Theuppersmalllengthofapile.
PILESHOE:Aseparatereinforcementorsteelformattachedtothebottomend(piletoe)ofapiletofacilitate
driving,toprotectthepiletoe,and/ortoimprovethetoeresistanceofthepile.
PILETOE/PILETIP:Thebottomendofapile.
SCREWPILE/AUGURPILE:Apremanufacturedpileconsistingofsteelhelicalbladesandashaftplacedinto
groundbyscrewing.
POREWATERPRESSURE:Thepressureinducedinthewaterorvapourandwaterfillingtheporesofsoil.Thisis
alsoknownasneutralstress.
RAFT:Arelativelylargespreadfoundationsupportinganarrangementofcolumnsorwallsinaregularorirregular
layout transmitting the loads to the soil by means of a continuous slab and/or beams, with or without
depressionsoropenings.ThisisalsoknownasMATFOUNDATION.
RAKERPILE:SeeBATTERPILE.
ROCK: A natural aggregate of one or more minerals that are connected by strong and permanent cohesive
forces.
ROTATION:Itistheanglebetweenthehorizontalandanytwofoundationsortwopointsinasinglefoundation.
RELATIVEROTATION/ANGULARDISTORTION:Anglebetweenthehorizontalandanytwofoundationsortwo
pointsinasinglefoundation.
TILT:Rotationoftheentiresuperstructureoratleastawelldefinedpartofit.
SETTLEMENT:Thedownwardverticalmovementoffoundationunderload.Whensettlementoccursoveralarge
area,itissometimescalledsubsidence.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6155
CONSOLIDATIONSETTLEMENT:Atimedependentsettlementresultingfromgradualreductionofvolumeof
saturated soils because of squeezing out of water from the pores due to increase in effective stress and
hence pore water pressure. It is also known as primary consolidation settlement. It is thus a time related
processinvolvingcompression,stresstransferandwaterdrainage.
DIFFERENTIALSETTEMENT:Thedifferenceinthetotalsettlementsbetweentwofoundationsortwopoints
inthesamefoundation.
ELASTIC/DISTORTION SETTLEMENT: It is attributed due to lateral spreading or elastic deformation of dry,
moistorsaturatedsoilwithoutachangeinthewatercontentandvolume.
IMMEDIATE SETTLEMENT: This vertical compression occurs immediately after the application of loading
either on account of elastic behaviour that produces distortion at constant volume and on account of
compressionofairvoid.Forsands,eventheconsolidationcomponentisimmediate.
SECONDARY CONSOLDATION SETTLEMENT: This is the settlement speculated to be due to the plastic
deformation of the soil as a result of some complex colloidalchemical processes or creep under imposed
longtermloading.
TOTALSETTLEMENT:Thetotaldownwardverticaldisplacementofafoundationbaseunderloadfromitsas
constructedposition.Itisthesummationofimmediatesettlement,consolidationsettlementandsecondary
consolidationsettlementofthesoil.
SHAFTRESISTANCE:Theresistancemobilizedontheshaft(side)ofadeepfoundation.Upwardresistanceiscalled
positiveshaftresistance.Downwardforceontheshaftiscallednegativeshaftresistance.
SOIL: A loose or soft deposit of particles of mineral and/or organic origin that can be separated by such gentle
mechanicalmeansasagitationinwater.
COLLAPSIBLE SOIL: Consists predominant of sand and silt size particles arranged in a loose honeycomb
structure. These soils are dry and strong in their natural state and consolidate or collapse quickly if they
becomewet.
DISPERSIVE SOIL: Soils that are structurally unstable and disperse in water into basic particles i.e. sand, silt
and clay. Dispersible soils tend to be highly erodible. Dispersive soils usually have a high Exchangeable
SodiumPercentage(ESP).
EXPANSIVESOIL:Theseareclaysoilsexpandwhentheybecomewettedandcontractwhendried.Theseare
formedofclaymineralslikemontmorilloniteandillite.
INORGANIC SOIL: Soil of mineral origin having small amount usually less than 5 percent of organic matter
content.
ORGANIC SOIL: Soil having appreciable/significant amount of organic matter content to influence the soil
properties.
PEATSOIL:Anorganicsoilwithhighorganiccontent,usuallymorethan75%byweight,composedprimarily
of vegetable tissue in various stages of decomposition usually with an organic odor, a dark brown to black
color, a spongy consistency, and a texture ranging from fibrous to amorphous. Fully decomposed organic
soilsareknownasMUCK.
SOILPARTICLESIZE:Thesizesofparticlesthatmakeupsoilvaryingoverawiderange.Soilparticlesaregenerally
gravel,sand,siltandclay,thoughthetermsboulderandcobblecanbeusedtodescribelargersizesofgravel.
BOULDER:Particlesofrockthatwillnotpassa12in.(300mm)squareopening.
Cobbles:Particlesofrockthatwillpassa12in.(300mm)squareopeningandberetainedona3in.(75mm)
sieve.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6156 Vol.2
Clay: A natural aggregate ofmicroscopic and submicroscopic mineral grains less than 0.002 mm in size and
plasticinmoderatetowiderangeofwatercontents.
GRAVEL:Particlesofrockthatwillpassa3in.(75mm)sieveandberetainedonaNo.4(4.75mm)sieve.
SAND:Aggregatesofrounded,subrounded,angular,subangularorflatfragmentsofmoreorlessunaltered
rockormineralswhichislargerthan75mandsmallerthan4.75mminsize.
Silt:SoilpassingaNo.200(75m)sievethatisnonplasticorveryslightlyplasticandthatexhibitslittleorno
strengthwhenairdry.

3.4 SITEINVESTIGATIONS
3.4.1 SubSurfaceSurvey
Dependingonthetypeofprojectthoroughinvestigationshastobecarriedoutforidentification,location,alignment
anddepthofvariousutilities,e.g.,pipelines,cables,seweragelines,watermainsetc.belowthesurfaceoftheexisting
groundlevel.Detailedsurveymayalsobeconductedtoascertainthetopographyoftheexistingground.
3.4.2 SubSoilInvestigations
Subsoilinvestigationshallbedonedescribingthecharacter,nature,loadbearingcapacityandsettlementcapacityof
thesoilbeforeconstructinganewbuildingandstructureorforalterationofthefoundationofanexistingstructure.
Theaimsofageotechnicalinvestigationaretoestablishthesoil,rockandgroundwaterconditions,todeterminethe
properties of the soil and rock, and to gather additional relevant knowledge about the site. Careful collection,
recording and interpretation of geotechnical information shall be made. This information shall include ground
conditions,geology,geomorphology,seismicityandhydrology,asrelevant.Indicationsofthevariabilityoftheground
shallbetakenintoaccount.
An engineering geological study may be an important consideration to establish the physiographic setting and
stratigraphicsequencesofsoilstrataofthearea.Geologicalandagriculturalsoilmapsoftheareamaygivevaluable
informationofsiteconditions.
During the various phases of subsoil investigations, e.g. drilling of boreholes, field tests, sampling, groundwater
measurements,etc.acompetentgraduateengineerhavingexperiencesinsupervisingsubsoilexplorationworksshall
beemployedbythedrillingcontractor.
3.4.2.1 MethodsofExploration
Subsoil exploration process may be grouped into three types of activities such as: reconnaissance, exploration and
detailedinvestigations.Thereconnaissance methodincludesgeophysicalmeasurements,sounding orprobing, while
exploratorymethodsinvolvevariousdrillingtechniques.Fieldinvestigationsshouldcomprise
(i)
drillingand/orexcavations(testpitsincludingexploratoryboreholes)forsampling;

(ii)
groundwatermeasurements;

(iii)
fieldtests.

Examplesofthevarioustypesoffieldinvestigationsare:
(i) field testing (e.g. CPT, SPT, dynamic probing, WST, pressuremeter tests, dilatometer tests, plate load
tests,fieldvanetestsandpermeabilitytests);
(ii)
soilsamplingfordescriptionofthesoilandlaboratorytests;

(iii)
groundwatermeasurementstodeterminethegroundwatertableortheporepressureprofileandtheir
fluctuations

SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6157
(iv) geophysical investigations (e.g. seismic profiling, ground penetrating radar, resistivity measurements
anddownholelogging);
(v) largescaletests,forexampletodeterminethebearingcapacityorthebehaviourdirectlyonprototype
elements,suchasanchors.
Where ground contamination or soil gas is expected, information shall be gathered from the relevant sources. This
information shall be taken into account when planning the ground investigation. Some of the common methods of
exploration,methodsofsamplingandgroundwatermeasurementsinsoilsaredescribedinAppendix6.3.A.

3.4.2.2 NumberandLocationofInvestigationPoints
The locations of investigation points, eg., pits and boreholes shall be selected on the basis of the preliminary
investigations as a function of the geological conditions, the dimensions of the structure and the engineering
problemsinvolved.Whenselectingthelocationsofinvestigationpoints,thefollowingshouldbeobserved:
(i) the investigation points should be arranged in such a pattern that the stratification can be
assessedacrossthesite;
(ii) theinvestigationpointsforabuildingorstructureshouldbeplacedatcriticalpointsrelativetothe
shape, structural behaviour and expected load distribution (e.g. at the corners of the foundation
area);
(iii) forlinearstructures,investigationpointsshouldbearrangedatadequateoffsetstothecentreline,
dependingontheoverallwidthofthestructure,suchasanembankmentfootprintoracutting;
(iv) forstructuresonornearslopesandstepsintheterrain(includingexcavations),investigationpoints
should also be arranged outside the project area, these being located so that the stability of the
slopeorcutcanbeassessed.Whereanchoragesareinstalled,dueconsiderationshouldbegivento
thelikelystressesintheirloadtransferzone;
(v) theinvestigationpointsshouldbearrangedsothattheydonotpresentahazardtothestructure,the
constructionwork,orthesurroundings(e.g.asaresultofthechangestheymaycausetotheground
andgroundwaterconditions);
(vi) the area considered in the design investigations should extend into the neighbouring area to a
distancewherenoharmfulinfluenceontheneighbouringareaisexpected.
Where ground conditions are relatively uniform or the ground is known to have sufficient strength and stiffness
properties,widerspacingor fewerinvestigationpointsmaybe applied.Ineithercase,thischoiceshouldbejustified
bylocalexperience.
The locations and spacing of sounding, pits and boreholes shall be such that the soil profiles obtained will permit a
reasonably accurate estimate of the extent and character of the intervening soil or rock masses and will disclose
importantirregularitiesinsubsurfaceconditions.Forbuildingstructures,thefollowingguidelinesshallbefollowed:
(i) For large areas covering industrial and residential colonies, the geological nature of the terrain will
helpindecidingthenumberofboreholesortrialpits.Thewholeareamaybedividedintogridpattern
withConePenetrationTests(seeAppendix6.3.B)performedatevery100mgridpoints.Thenumber
of boreholes or trial pits shall be decided by examining the variation in penetration curves. At least
67%oftherequirednumberofboringsortrialpitsshallbelocatedwithintheareaunderthebuilding.
(ii) Incompactbuildingsitescoveringanareaof0.4hectare(43,000squarefeet),oneboreholeortrialpit
ineachcornerandoneincentreshallbeadequate.
(iii) Forwidelyspaced buildingscoveringanareaoflessthan 90m
2
(1000squarefeet)andaheightless
thanfourstoreys,atleastoneboreholeortrialpitinthecentreshallbedone.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6158 Vol.2
3.4.2.3 DepthofExploration
The depth of investigations shall be extended to all strata that will affect the project or are affected by the
construction.The depth of exploration shall depend to some extent on the site and type of the proposed structure,
and on certain design considerations such as safety against foundation failure, excessive settlement, seepage and
earth pressure. Cognizance shall be taken of the character and sequence of the subsurface strata. The site
investigationshouldbecarriedtosuchadepththattheentirezoneofsoilorrockaffectedbythechangescausedby
thebuildingor theconstructionwill beadequatelyexplored. Aruleofthumb usedforthis purposeistoextendthe
boringstoadepthwheretheadditionalloadresultingfromtheproposedbuildingislessthan10%oftheaverageload
of the structure, or less than 5% of the effective stress in the soil at that depth. Where the depth of investigation
cannot be related to background information, the following guide lines are suggested to determine the depth of
exploration:
(a) Where substructure units will be supported on spread footings, the minimum depth boring should extend
belowtheanticipatedbearinglevelaminimumoftwofootingwidthsforisolated,individualfootingswhere
length two times width, and four footing widths for footings where length > five times width. For
intermediate footing lengths, the minimum depth of boring may be estimated by linear interpolation as a
functionoflengthbetweendepthsoftwotimeswidthandfivetimeswidthbelowthebearinglevel.Greater
depthmayberequiredwherewarrantedbylocalconditions.
(b) Formoreheavilyloadedstructures,suchasmultistoriedstructuresandforframedstructures,atleast50%of
theboringsshouldbeextendedtoadepthequalto1.5timesthewidthofthebuildingbelowthelowestpart
ofthefoundation.
(c) Normallythedepthofexplorationshallbeoneandahalftimestheestimatedwidthortheleastdimension
of the footing below the foundation level. If the pressure bulbs for a number of loaded areas overlap, the
wholeareamaybeconsideredasloadedandexplorationshallbecarrieddowntooneandahalftimesthe
least dimension. In weak soils, the exploration shall be continued to a depth at which the loads can be
carriedbythestratuminquestionwithoutundesirablesettlementorshearfailure.
(d) Where substructure units will be supported on deep foundations, the depth boring should extend a
minimum of6 mbelowtheanticipated pileofshafttipelevation.Wherepileorshaftgroupswill be used,
the boring should extend at least two times the maximum pile or shaft group dimension below the
anticipatedtipelevation,unlessthefoundationwillbeendbearingonorinrock.
(e) For piles bearing on rock, a minimum of 1.5 m of rock core should be obtained at each boring location to
ensuretheboringhasnotbeenterminatedinaboulder.
(f) For shafts supported on or extending into rock, a minimum of 1.5 m of rock core, or a length of rock core
equal to at least three times the shaft diameter for isolated shafts or two times the maximum shaft group
dimensionforashaftgroup,whicheverisgreater,shouldbeobtainedtoensurethattheboringhadnotbeen
terminated in a boulder and to determine the physical properties of rock within the zone of foundation
influencefordesign.
(g) The depth, to which weathering process affects the deposit, shall be regarded as the minimum depth of
explorationforasite.However,innocaseshallthisdepthbelessthan2m,butwhereindustrialprocesses
affectthesoilcharacteristics,thisdepthmaybemore.
(h) It is good practice to have at least one boring carried to bedrock, or to well below the anticipated level of
influenceofthebuilding.Bedrockshouldbeprovedbycoringintoittoaminimumdepthof3m.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6159
3.4.2.4 SoundingandPenetrationTests
Subsurface soundings are used for exploring soil strata of an erratic nature. They are useful to determine the
presenceofanysoftpocketsbetweendrillholesandalsotodeterminethedensityindexofcohesionlesssoilsandthe
consistency of cohesive soils at desired depths. A field test called Vane Shear Test may be used to determine the
shearingstrengthofthesoillocatedatadepthbelowtheground.
Penetration tests consist of driving or pushing a standard sampling tube or a cone. The devices are also termed as
penetrometers,sincetheypenetratethesubsoilwithaviewtomeasuringtheresistancetopenetratethesoilstrata.
Ifasamplingtubeisusedtopenetratethesoil,thetestisreferredtoasStandardPenetrationTest(orsimplySPT).Ifa
cone is used, the test is called a Cone Penetration Test. If the penetrometer is pushed steadily into the soil, the
procedureisknownasStaticPenetrationTest.Ifdrivenintothesoil,itisknownasDynamicPenetrationTest.Details
ofsoundingandpenetrationstestsarepresentedinAPPENDIX6.3.A.
3.4.2.5 GeotechnicalInvestigationReport
The results of a geotechnical investigation shall be compiled in the Geotechnical Investigation Report which shall
formapartoftheGeotechnicalDesignReport.TheGeotechnicalInvestigationReportshallconsistofthefollowing:
(i) a presentationofall appropriate geotechnical information on field and laboratory testsincluding
geologicalfeaturesandrelevantdata;
(ii) a geotechnical evaluation of the information, stating the assumptions made in the
interpretationofthetestresults.
TheGeotechnical InvestigationReportshallstateknownlimitationsoftheresults,ifappropriate.TheGeotechnical
InvestigationReportshouldproposenecessaryfurtherfieldandlaboratoryinvestigations,withcommentsjustifying
the need for this further work. Such proposals should be accompanied by a detailed programme for the further
investigationstobecarriedout.
The presentation of geotechnical information shall include a factual account of all field and laboratory
investigations.Thefactualaccountshouldincludethefollowinginformation:
thepurposeandscopeofthegeotechnicalinvestigationincludingadescriptionofthesiteanditstopography,
oftheplannedstructureandthestageoftheplanningtheaccountisreferringto;
thenamesofallconsultantsandcontractors;

thedatesbetweenwhichfieldandlaboratoryinvestigationswereperformed;

thefieldreconnaissanceofthesiteoftheprojectandthesurroundingareanotingparticularly:

i) evidenceofgroundwater;
ii)behaviourofneighbouringstructures;
iii) exposuresinquarriesandborrowareas;
iv)areasofinstability;
v) difficultiesduringexcavation;
vi) historyofthesite;
vii)geologyofthesite,
viii)surveydatawithplansshowingthestructureandthelocationofallinvestigationpoints;
ix)localexperienceinthearea;
x) informationabouttheseismicityofthearea.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6160 Vol.2
The presentation of geotechnical information shall include documentation of the methods, procedures and
resultsincludingallrelevantreportsof:
deskstudies;

fieldinvestigations,suchassampling,fieldtestsandgroundwatermeasurements;

laboratorytests.

The results of the field and laboratory investigations shall be presented and reported according to the
requirementsdefinedintheASTMorequivalentstandardsappliedintheinvestigations.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION,CLASSIFICATIONANDDESCRIPTIONOFSOILS
3.5.1 IdentificationofSoil
Samplesandtrialpitsshouldbeinspectedvisuallyandcomparedwithfieldlogsofthedrillingssothatthepreliminary
groundprofilecanbeestablished.Forsoilsamples,thevisualinspectionshouldbesupportedbysimplemanualtests
to identify the soil and to give a first impression of its consistency and mechanical behaviour. A standard visual
manualprocedureofdescribingandidentifyingsoilsmaybefollowed.
Soilclassificationtestsshouldbeperformedtodeterminethecompositionandindexpropertiesofeachstratum.Thesamplesfor
theclassificationtestsshouldbeselectedinsuchawaythatthetestsareapproximatelyequallydistributedoverthecomplete
areaandthefulldepthofthestratarelevantfordesign.
3.5.2 SoilClassification
3.5.2.1 ParticleSizeClassification
Dependingonparticlesizes, main soil types are gravel, sand, silt and clay. However, the larger gravels can be further
classifiedascobbleandboulder.ThesoilparticlesizeshallbeclassifiedinaccordancewithTable6.3.1.
Table6.3.1:ParticleSizeRangesofSoils

3.5.2.2 EngineeringClassification
Soilsaredividedintothree majorgroups, coarsegrained,finegrained and highlyorganic.Theclassification is based
onclassificationtestresultsnamelygrainsizeanalysisandconsistencytest.Thecoarsegrainedsoilsshallbeclassified
usingTable6.3.2.OutlinesoforganicandinorganicsoilseparationsarealsoprovidedinTable6.3.2.Thefinegrained
SoilType
ParticleSize
Range,mm
RetainedonMesh
Size/SieveNo.
Boulder >300 12
Cobble 30075 3
Gravel: Coarse 7519 3/4
Medium 199.5 3/8
Fine 9.54.75 No.4
Sand: Coarse 4.752.00 No.10
Medium 2.000.425 No.40
Fine 0.4250.075 No.200
Silt 0.0750.002
Clay <0.002
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6161
soils shall be classified using the plasticity chart shown in Fig. 6.3.1. For details, reference can be made to ASTM
D2487.Inadditiontotheseclassifications,asoilshallbedescribedbyitscolour,particleangularity(forcoarsegrained
soils)andconsistency.Furthertotheaboveclassificationsoilsexhibitingswellingorcollapsingcharacteristicshallbe
recorded.
For undisturbed soils information on stratification, degree of compactness, cementation, moisture conditions and
drainagecharacteristicsshallbeincluded.
3.5.2.2.1IdentificationandClassificationofOrganicSoils
The presence of organicmatter can haveundesirableeffects onthe engineeringbehaviourofsoil. Forexample, the
bearing capacity is reduced, the compressibility is increased, swelling and shrinkage potential is increased due to
organiccontent.Organiccontenttestsareusedtoclassifythesoil.Insoilwithlittleornoclayparticlesandcarbonate
content,theorganiccontentisoftendeterminedfromthelossonignitionatacontrolledtemperature.Othersuitable
tests can also be used. For example, organic content can be determined from the mass loss on treatment with
hydrogen peroxide (H
2
O
2
), which provides a more specific measure of organics. Organic deposits are due to
decompositionoforganicmattersandfoundusuallyintopsoilandmarshyplace.Asoildepositinorganicoriginissaid
topeatifitisatthehigherendoftheorganiccontentscale(75%ormore),organicsoilatthelowend,andmuckin
between. Peat soil is usually formed of fossilized plant minerals and characterized by fiber content and lower
decomposition. The peats have certain characteristics that set them apart from moist mineral soils and required
special considerations for construction over them. This special characteristic includes, extremely high natural
moisture content, high compressibility including significant secondary and even tertiary compression and very low
undrainedshearstrengthatnaturalmoisturecontent.
However, there are many other criteria existed to classify the organic deposits and it remains still as controversial
issuewithnumerousapproachesavailableforvaryingpurposeofclassification.Soilfromorganicdepositsanditrefers
to a distinct mode of behavior different than traditional soil mechanics in certain respects. A possible approach is
beingconsideredbytheAmericansocietyforTestingandMaterialsforclassifyingorganicsoilshavingvaryingamount
oforganicmattercontents.TheclassificationisgiveninTable6.3.3.
3.5.2.2.2IdentificationandClassificationofExpansiveSoils
Expansive soils are those which swell considerably on absorption of water and shrink on the removal of water. In
monsoonseasons,expansivesoilsimbibewater,becomesoftandswell.Indrierseasons,thesesoilsshrinkorreduce
in volume due to evaporation of water and become harder. As such, the seasonal moisture variation in such soil
depositsaroundandbeneaththestructureresultsintosubsequentupwardanddownwardmovementsofstructures
leading to structural damage, in the form of wide cracks in the wall and distortion of floors. For identification and
classification of expansive soils parameters like free swell, free swell index, linear shrinkage, swelling potential,
swellingpressureandvolumechangeshouldbeevaluatedexperimentallyorfromavailablegeotechnicalcorrelation.
3.5.2.2.2IdentificationandClassificationofCollapsibleSoils
Soildepositsmostlikelytocollapseare;(i)loosefills,(ii)alteredwindblownsands,(iii)hillwashoflooseconsistency,
and(iv)decomposedgraniteorotheracidigneousrocks.
Averysimpletestforrecognizingcollapsiblesoilisthesaugestest.Twoundisturbedcylindricalsamples(sausages)
ofthesamediameterandlength(volume)arecarvedfromthesoil.Onesampleisthenwettedandkneadedtoforma
cylinderoftheoriginaldiameter.Adecreaseinlengthascomparedtotheoriginal,undisturbedcylinderwillconfirma
collapsible grain structure. Collapse is probable when the natural void ratio, e
i
is higher than a critical void ratio, e
c

thatdependsonvoidratiose
L
ande
p
atliquidlimitandplasticlimitsrespectively.

Part6
StructuralDesign

6162 Vol.2
Table6.3.2: EngineeringClassificationofSoils(CriteriaforAssigningGroupSymbolsandGroupNamesusing
LaboratoryTests
A
)
Classification(Forparticlessmaller
than75mmandbasedonestimated
weights)
Group
Symbol

GroupName
B
LaboratoryClassification
Percent
finer than
0.075mm
OtherCriteria

Coarse
grainedsoils
(Morethan50%
ofthematerial
retainedonNo.
200sieve(0.075
mm)

Gravels
(Morethan
50%of
coarse
fraction
retainedon
No.4sieve
(4.75mm)

Clean
gravels

GW
Wellgradedgravels,sandy
gravels,sandgravelmixture,
littleornofines.
D

<5
E

C
u
4and
1C
z
3
C

GP
Poorlygradedgravels,sandy
gravels,Sandgravelmixture,
littleornofines.
D

C
u
<4and/or
1>C
z
>3
C

Gravel
withfines

GM
Siltygravels,siltysandy
gravels.
D,F,G

>12
E

I
P
<4orthe
limitvalues
below'A'lineof
plasticitychart
For4>I
P
>7
andlimit
values
above
'A'line,dual
symbol
required*

GC
Clayeygravels,siltyclayey
gravels..
D,F,G

I
P
>7andthe
limitvalues
above'A'lineof
PlasticityChart

Sands
(over50%of
coarse
fraction
smallerthan
4.75mm)

Clean
Sands

SW
Wellgradedsand,gravelly
sand,littleornofines.
H

<5
E

Cu6and
1Cz3
C

SP
Poorlygradedsands,gravelly
sand,littleornofines.
H

C
u

<6and/or
1>C
z
>3
C

Sandswith
fines

SM
Siltysand,poorlygradedsand
siltmixtures.
F,G,H

>12
E

I
P
<4orthe
limitvalues
below'A'lineof
Plasticitychart
For4>I
P
>7
andlimit
values
aboveA
line,dual
symbols
required.

SC
Clayeysand,sandclay
mixtures.
F,G,H

I
P
>7andthe
limitvalues
above'A'lineof
plasticitychart

Finegrained
soils
(Over
50%ofthe
material
smallerthan
0.075mm)

Silts&
Clays
w
L
<50

Inorganic

ML
Siltoflowtomedium
compressibility,veryfine
sands,rockflour,siltwith
sand.
K,L,M

Limitvaluesonorbelow'A'lineofplasticity
chart&I
P
<4
CL
Claysoflowtomedium
plasticity,gravellyclay,sandy
clay,siltyclay,leanclay.
K,L,M

Limitvaluesabove'A'lineof
plasticitychartand/orI
P
>4

Organic OL
Organicclay
K,L,M,N
and
Organicsilt
K,L,M,O
oflowtomediumplasticity
Liquidlimit(ovendried)
Liquidlimit(undried)
<0.75

Silts&
Clays
w
L
50

Inorganic
MH
Siltofhighplasticity,
micaceousfinesandyorsilty
soil,elasticsilt.
K,L,M

Limitvaluesonorbelow'A'lineofplasticity
chart
CH
Highplasticclay,fatclay.
K,L,
M

Limitvaluesabove'A'lineof
plasticitychart
Organic
OH
Organicclayofhighplasticity.
K,L,M,P

Liquidlimit(ovendried)
Liquidlimit(undried)
<0.75
Soilsofhighorganicorigin
PT
Peatandhighlyorganicsoils.
K,L,M,Q

Identifiedbycolour,odour,fibroustexture
andspongycharacteristics.

SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6163
NOTES:
A
Based on the material passing the 3-in. (75-mm) sieve
B
If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add with cobbles or boulders, or both to group name.
C C
u
= D
60
/D
10
, C
Z
= (D
30
)
2
/ (D
10
D
60
)
D If soil contains 15 % sand, add with sand to group name.
E
Gravels with 5 to 12 % fines require dual symbols:
GW-GM well-graded gravel with silt
GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay
GP-GM poorly graded gravel with silt
GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay
F
If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM, or SC-SM.
G
If fines are organic, add with organic fines to group name.
H If soil contains 15 % gravel, add with gravel to group name.
I Sands with 5 to 12 % fines require dual symbols:
SW-SM well-graded sand with silt
SW-SC well-graded sand with clay
SP-SM poorly graded sand with silt
SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay.
J If Atterberg limits plot in hatched area, soil is a CL-ML, silty clay.
K If soil contains 15 to 29 % plus No. 200, add with sand or with gravel, whichever is predominant.
L
If soil contains 30 % plus No. 200, predominantly sand, add sand to group name.
M
If soil contains 30 % plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add gravelly to group name.
N
PI 4 and plots on or above A line.
O PI < 4 or plots below A line.
P PI plots on or above A line.
Q PI plots below A line.
If desired, the percentages of gravel, sand, and fines may be stated in terms indicating a range of percentages, as follows:
Trace Particles are present but estimated to be less than 5 %
Few 5 to 10 %
Little 15 to 25 %
Some 30 to 45 %
Mostly 50 to 100 %

Fig.6.3.1:PlasticityChart(basedonmaterialspassing425mSieve)
Part6
StructuralDesign

6164 Vol.2
Table6.3.3:ClassificationandDescriptionofOrganicSoils(afterEdil,1997)
OrganicContent
(TestMethod:ASTMD2974)
Description
<5% Littleeffectonbehavior;consideredinorganicsoil.
6~20%
Effectspropertiesbutbehaviorisstilllikemineralsoils;organic
siltsandclays.
21~74%
Organicmattergovernsproperties;traditionalsoilmechanics
maybeapplicable;siltyorclayeyorganicsoils.
>75%
Displaysbehaviordistinctfromtraditionalsoilmechanics
especiallyatlowstress.
Thefollowingformulashouldbeusedtoestimatethecriticalvoidratio.

P L c
e e e 015 85 . 0 + = (6.3.1)
Collapsiblesoils(withadegreeofsaturation,S
r
0.6)shouldsatisfythefollowingcondition:
10 . 0
1

+

i
i L
e
e e
(6.3.2)

A consolidation test is to be performed on an undisturbed specimen at natural moisture content and to record the
thickness,Honconsolidationunderapressurepequaltooverburdenpressureplustheexternalpressurelikelyto
beexertedonthesoil.ThespecimenisthensubmergedunderthesamepressureandthefinalthicknessHrecorded.
Relativesubsidence,I
subs
isfoundas:

H
H H
I
subs

=
(6.3.3)

SoilshavingI
subs
0.02areconsideredtobecollapsible.
3.5.2.2.4IdentificationandClassificationofDispersiveSoils
Dispersivenatureofasoilisameasureoferosion.Dispersivesoilisduetothedispersedstructureofasoilmatrix.An
identificationofdispersivesoilscanbemadeonthebasisofpinholetest.
The pinhole test was developed to directly measure dispersibility of compacted finegrained soils in which water is
made to flow through a small hole in a soil specimen, where water flow through the pinhole simulates water flow
throughacrackorotherconcentratedleakagechannelintheimperviouscoreofadamorotherstructure.Thetestis
rununder50,180,380and1020mmheadsandthesoilisclassifiedasfollowsinTable6.3.4.
Table6.3.4:ClassificationofDispersiveSoilOntheBasisofPinholeTest(Sherardet.al.1976)
TestObservation TypeofSoil ClassofSoil
Failsrapidlyunder50mmhead. Dispersivesoils D
1
andD
2

Erodeslowlyunder50mmor180mmhead Intermediatesoils ND
4
andND
3

Nocolloidalerosionunder380mmor1020mm
head
Nondispersivesoils ND
2
andND
1

AnothermethodofidentificationistofirstdeterminethepHofa1:2.5soil/watersuspension.IfthepHisabove7.8,
thesoilmay containenough sodiumtodispersethemass.Thendetermine:(i) totalexcahangable bases,thatis, K+,
Ca
2
+, Mg
2
+ and Na+ (milliequivalent per 100g of air dried soil) and (ii) cation exchange capacity (CEC) of soil
(milliequivalentper100gofairdriedsoil).TheExchangeableSodiumPercentageESPiscalculatedfromtherelation:
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6165
(%) 100 =
CEC
N
ESP
a
(6.3.4)

Em
g
Pisgivenby:
(%) 100
CEC
Mg
EMgP =
(6.3.5)

IftheESPisabove8percentandESPplusEMgPisabove15,dispersionwilltakeplace.ThesoilswithESP=7to10are
moderatelydispersiveincombinationwithreservoirwatersoflowdissolvedsalts.SoilswithESPgreaterthan15have
serious piping potential. Dispersive soils do not actually present any problems with building structures. However,
dispersive soil can lead to catastrophic failures of earth embankment dams as well as severe distress of road
embankments.
3.5.2.2.5IdentificationandClassificationofSoftInorganicSoils
Nostandarddefinitionexistsforsoftclaysintermsofconventionalsoilparameters,mineralogyorgeologicalorigin.It
is, however, commonly understood that soft clays give shear strength, compressibility and severe time related
settlement problems. In near surface clays, where form a crust, partial saturation and overconsolidation occur
togetherandtheoverconsolidationisaresultofthedryingoutoftheclayduetochangesinthewatertable.
In below surface clays, overconsolidation may have taken place when the clay was previously at, or close to the
ground surface and above the water table, but due to subsequent deposition the strata may now be below the
surface, saturated and overconsolidated. Partial saturation does not in itself cause engineering problems, but may
leadtolaboratorytestingdifficulties.Softclayshaveundrainedshearstrengthsbetweenabout10kPaand40kPa,in
otherwords,fromexudingbetweenthefingerswhensqueezedtobeingeasilymouldedinthefingers.
Softclayspresentveryspecialproblemsofengineeringdesignandconstruction.Foundationfailuresinsoftclaysare
comparativelycommon.Theconstructionofbuildingsinsoftclayshasalwaysbeenassociatedwithstabilityproblems
andsettlement.Shallowfoundationsinevitablyresultsinlargesettlementswhichmustbeaccommodatedforinthe
design, and which invariably necessitate longterm maintenance of engineered facilities. The following relationship
amongNvaluesobtainedfromSPT,consistencyandundrainedshearstrengthofsoftclaysmaybeusedasguides.

Nvalue(blows/300mmofpenetration) Consistency UndrainedShearStrength(kN/m

2
)
Below2 Verysoft Lessthan20
24 Soft 2040
Undrainedshearstrengthishalfofunconfinedcompressivestrengthasdeterminedfromunconfinedcompression
testorhalfofthepeakdeviatorstressasobtainedfromunconsolidatedundrained(UU)triaxialcompressiontest.
3.6 MATERIALS
AllmaterialsfortheconstructionoffoundationsshallconformtotherequirementsofPart5:BuildingMaterials.
3.6.1 Concrete
All concrete materials and steel reinforcement used in foundations shall conform to the requirements specified in
Chapter 5 unless otherwise specified in this section. For different types of foundation the recommended concrete
properties are shown in Table 6.3.5. However, special considerations should be given for hostile environment
(salinity,acidicenvironment).

Part6
StructuralDesign

6166 Vol.2
Table6.3.5:PropertiesofConcreteforDifferentTypesofFoundations
FoundationType Minimumcement
content
(kg/m
3
)
SpecifiedMin.
28daysCylinder
Strength(MPa)
Slump
(mm)
Remarks
Footing/raft 350 20 25to125

Retarderand
plasticizer
recommended.
Drilledshaft/Castinsitupile
(tremieconcrete)
400 18 125to200
Drivenpile 350 25 25to125

3.6.2 Steel
3.7.2.1General
Corrosion in soil, water or moist outdoor environment is caused by electrochemical processes. The process takes
placeincorrosioncellsonthesteelsurface,whichconsistsofananodicsurface(wherethecorrosiontakesplace),a
cathodic surface (where oxygen is reduced) and the electrolyte, which reacts with these surfaces. In the case of
general corrosion, the surface erosion is relatively even across the entire surface. Local corrosion however is
concentrated to a limited surface area. Pronounced cavity erosion is rather unusual on unprotected carbon steel in
soilorwater.
In many circumstances, steel corrosion rates are low and steel piles may be used for permanent works in an
unprotected condition. The degree of corrosion and whether protection is required depend upon the working
environmentwhichcanbevariable,evenwithinasingleinstallation.Undergroundcorrosionofsteelpilesdriveninto
undisturbed soils is negligible irrespective of the soi1 type and characteristics. The insignificant corrosion attack is
attributedtothelowoxygenlevelspresentinundisturbedsoil.Forthepurposeofcalculations,amaximumcorrosion
rate of 0.015 mm per side per year may be used. In recentfill soils or industrial waste soils, where corrosion rates
maybehigher,protectionsystemsshouldbeconsidered.

3.7.2.2AtmosphericCorrosion

AtmosphericcorrosionofsteelintheUKaveragesapproximately0035mm/sideperyearandthisvaluemaybeused
formostatmosphericenvironments.
3.7.2.3CorrosioninFreshWaters

Corrosion losses in fresh water immersion zones are generally lower than for sea water so the effective life of steel
piles is normally proportionately longer. However, fresh waters are variable and no general advice can be given to
quantifytheincreaseinthelengthoflife.

3.7.2.4CorrosioninMarineEnvironments

Marine environments may include several exposure zones with different aggressivity and different corrosion
performance.
(a) Belowthebedlevel:Wherepilesarebelowthebedlevellittlecorrosionoccursandthecorrosionrategiven
forundergroundcorrosionisapplicable,thatis,0.015mm/sideperyear.
(b) Seawaterimmersionzone:Corrosionofsteelpi111nginimmersionconditionsisnormallylow,withamean
corrosionrateof0035mm/sideperyear.
(c) Tidalzones:Marinegrowthsinthiszonegivesignificantprotectiontothepiling,byshelteringthesteelfrom
waveactionbetweentidesandbylimitingtheoxygensupplytothesteelsurface.Thecorrosionrateofsteels
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6167
in the tidal zone is similar to that of immersion zone corrosion, i.e. 0 035 mm/side per year. Protection
shouldbeprovidedwherenecessary,tothesteelsurfacestopreventtheremovalordamageofthemarine
growth.
(d) Low water zone: In tidal waters, the low water level and the splash zone are reasons of highest thickness
losses, where a mean corrosion rate of 0 075 mm/side per year occurs. Occasionally higher corrosion rates
areencounteredatthelowerwaterlevelbecauseofspecificlocalconditions.
(e) Splash and atmospheric zones: In the splash zone, which is a more aggressive environment than the
atmosphericzone,corrosionratesaresimilartothelowwaterlevel,i.e.0.075mm/sideperyear.Inthiszone
thickstratifiedrustlayersmaydevelopandatthicknessesgreaterthan10mmthesetendtospallfromthe
steelespeciallyoncurvedpartsofthepilessuchastheshouldersandtheclutches.Rusthasamuchgreater
volumethanthesteelfromwhichitisderivedsothatthesteelcorrosionlossesarerepresentedbysome10
%to20%oftherustthickness.
The boundary between the splash and atmospheric zones is not well defined, however, corrosion rates
diminish rapidly with distance above peak wave height and the mean atmospheric corrosion rate of 0.035
mm/sideperyearcanbeusedforthiszone.
3.7.2.5MethodsofIncreasingEffectiveLife
Theeffectivelifeofunpaintedorotherwiseunprotectedsteelpilingdependsuponthecombinedeffectsofimposed
stresses and corrosion. Where measures for increasing the effective life of a structure are necessary, the following
shouldbeconsidered;introductionofacorrosionallowance(i.e.oversizedcrosssectionsofpiles,highyieldsteeletc),
anticorrosionpainting,applicationofapolyethylene(PE)coating(onsteeltubepiles),zinccoating,electrochemical
(cathodic)protection,castingincementmortarorconcrete,anduseofatmosphericcorrosionresistantsteelproducts
insteadofordinarycarbonsteelinanyfoundationworkinvolvingsteel.
(a) Use of a heavier section: Effective life may be increased by the use of additional steel thickness as a
corrosion allowance. Maximum corrosion seldom occurs at the same position as the maximum bending
moment.Accordingly,theuseofacorrosionallowanceisacosteffectivemethodofincreasingeffectivelife.
Itispreferabletouseatmosphericcorrosionresistanthighstrengthlowalloysteel.
(b) Useofahighyieldsteel:Analternativetousingmildsteelinaheaviersectionistouseahigheryieldsteel
andretainthesamesection.
(c) Zinc coatings: Steel piles should normally be coated under shop conditions. Paints should be applied to the
cleaned surface by airless spraying and then cured rapidly to produce the required coating thickness in as
few coats as possible. Hot zinccoating of steel piles in soil can achieve normally longlasting protection,
provided that the zinc layer has sufficient thickness. In some soils, especially those with low pHvalues, the
corrosion of zinc can be high, thereby shortening the protection duration. Low pHvalues occur normally in
theaeratedzoneabovethelowestgroundwaterlevel.Insuchacase,itisrecommendedtoapplyprotection
paintontopofthezinclayer.
(d) Concreteencasement:Concreteencasementmaybeusedtoprotectsteelpilesinmarineenvironment.The
useofconcretemayberestrictedtothesplashzonebyextendingtheconcretecopetobelowthemeanhigh
waterlevel,bothsplashandtidalzonesmaybeprotectedbyextendingthecopetobelowthelowestwater
level.Theconcreteitselfshouldbeaquantitysufficienttoresistseawaterattack.
(e) Cathodicprotection:Thedesignandapplicationofcathodicprotectionsystemstomarinepilesstructuresisa
complex operation requiring the experience of specialist firms. Cathodic protection with electric current
applied to steel sheet pile wall. Rodtype anodes are connected directly with steel sheet pile Cathodic
protection is considered to be fully effective only up to the halftide mark. For zones above this level,
Part6
StructuralDesign

6168 Vol.2
including the splash zone, alternative methods of protection may be required, in addition to cathodic
protection.Wherecathodic protection is usedon marinestructures,provision shouldbemadefor earthing
shipsandburiedservicestothequay.
(f) Polyetheline coating: Steel tube piles can be protected effectively by application of a PEcover of a few
millimeter thickness. This cover can be applied in the factory and is usually placed on a coating of epoxy.
Steel tube piles in water, where the mechanical wear is low, can in this way be protected for long time
periods. When the steel tube piles with the PEcover are driven into coarsegrained soil, the effect of
damagingtheprotectionlayermustbetakenintoconsideration.
(g) Properly executed anticorrosion measures, using highquality methods can protect steel piles in soil or
water over periods of 15 to 20 years. PEcover in combination with epoxy coating can achieve even longer
protectiontimes.
3.6.3 Timber
Timbermay beusedonlyforfoundationoftemporary structureandshallconformtothestandardsspecified inSec
2.9ofPart5.Wheretimberisexposedtosoilorusedasloadbearingpileabovegroundwaterlevel,itshallbetreated
inaccordancewithBDS819:1975.
3.7 TYPESOFFOUNDATION
3.7.1 ShallowFoundation
Shallow foundations spread the load to the ground at shallow depth. Generally, the capacity of this foundation is
derivedfrombearing.
3.7.1.1 Footing
Footings are foundations that spread the load to the ground at shallow depths. These include individual column
footings,continuouswallfootings,andcombinedfootings.Footingsshallbeprovidedunderwalls,pilasters,columns,
piers, chimneys etc. bearing on soil or rock, except that footings may be omitted under pier or monolithic concrete
wallsifsafebearingcapacityofthesoilorrockisnotexceeded.
3.7.1.2 Raft/Mat
A foundation consisting of continuous slab that covers the entire area beneath the structure and supports all walls
andcolumnsisconsideredasaraftormatfoundation.Araftfoundationmaybeoneofthefollowingtypes:
(a) Flatplateorconcreteslabofuniformthicknessusuallysupportingcolumnsspaceduniformlyandrestingon
soilsoflowcompressibility.
(b) Flatplatesasin(a)butthickenedundercolumnstoprovideadequateshearandmomentresistance.
(c) Twowayslabandbeamsystemsupportinglargelyspacedcolumnsoncompressiblesoil.
(d) Cellularraftorrigidframesconsistingofslabsandbasementwalls,usuallyusedforheavystructures.
3.7.2 DeepFoundation
A cylindrical/box foundation having a ratio of depth to base width greater than 5 is considered a Deep Foundation.
Generally,itscapacityisderivedfromfrictionandendbearing.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6169
3.7.2.1 Drivenpiles
A slender deep foundation unit made of materials such as steel, concrete, wood, or combination thereof, which is
premanufacturedandplacedbydriving,jacking,jettingorscrewinganddisplacingthesoil.
(a)Driven Precast Concrete Piles: Pile structure capable of being driven into the ground and able to resist
handlingstressesshallbeusedforthiscategoryofpiles.
(b) DrivenCastinsituConcrete Piles:Apileformedbydriving asteelcasingor concreteshell inone ormore
pieces,whichmayremaininplaceafterdrivingorwithdrawn,withtheinsidefilledwithconcrete,fallsinthis
categoryofpiles.Sometimesanenlargedbasemaybeformedbydrivingoutaconcreteplug.
(c) Driven Prestressed Concrete Pile: A pile constructed in prestressed concrete in a casting yard and
subsequentlydriveninthegroundwhenithasattainedsufficientstrength.
(d) Timber Piles: structural timber (see Sec 2.9 of Part 5) shall be used as piles for temporary structures for
directly transmitting the imposed load to soil. When driven timber poles are used to compact and improve
thedeposit.
3.8.2.2 Boredpiles/castinsitupiles
A deep foundation of generally small diameter, usually less than 600 mm, constructed using percussion or rotary
drillingintothesoil.Theseareconstructedbyconcretingboreholesformedbyauguring,rotarydrillingorpercussion
drilling with or without using bentonite mud circulation. Excavation or drilling shall be carried out in a manner that
will not impair the carrying capacity of the foundations already in place or will not damage adjacent foundations.
Thesefoundationsmaybetestedforcapacitybyloadtestorforintegritybysonicresponseorothersuitablemethod.
Underreamingdrilledpierscanbeconstructedincohesivesoilstoincreasetheendbearing.
3.8.2.3 Drilledpier/drilledshafts
Thedrilledpierisatypeofboredpilehavingalargerdiameter(morethan600mm)constructedbyexcavatingthesoil
orsinkingthefoundation.
3.8.2.4 Caisson/well
A caisson or well foundation is a deep foundation of large diameter relative to its length that is generally a hollow
shaft or box which is sunk to position. It differs from other types of deep foundation in the sense that it undergoes
rigid body movement under lateral load, whereas the others are flexible like a beam under such loads. This type of
foundationisusuallyusedforbridgesandmassivestructures.

PARTB:SERVICELOADDESIGNMETHODOFFOUNDATIONS(SECTIONS3.9to3.12)
3.8 SHALLOWFOUNDATION
ShallbeapplicabletoisolatedFootings,CombinedFootingsandRaft/Mats.
3.8.1 DistributionofBearingPressure
Footing shall be designed to keep the maximum imposed load within the safe bearing values of soil and rock. To
preventunequalsettlementfootingshallbedesignedtokeepthebearingpressureasnearlyuniformaspractical.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6170 Vol.2
For raft design, distribution of soil pressures should be consistent with the properties of the foundation materials
(subsoil) and the structure (raft thickness) and with the principles of geotechnical engineering. Mat or raft and
floating foundations shall only be used when the applied load of building or structure is so arranged as to result in
practicallyuniformlybalancedloading,andthesoilimmediatelybelowthematisofuniformbearingcapacity.
3.8.2 FootingsinFillSoil
Footings located in fill are subject to the same bearing capacity, settlement, and dynamic ground stability
considerationsasfootingsinnaturalsoil.Thebehaviorofbothfillandunderlyingnaturalsoilshouldbeconsidered.
3.8.3 SoilandRockPropertySelection
Soilandrockpropertiesdefiningthestrengthandcompressibilitycharacteristicsoffoundationmaterialsarerequired
for footing design. Foundation stability and settlement analysis for design shall be conducted using soil and rock
propertiesbasedontheresultsoffieldandlaboratorytesting.
3.8.4 MinimumDepthofFoundation
Theminimumdepthoffoundationshallbe1.5mforexteriorfootingofpermanentstructuresincohesivesoilsand2
mincohesionlesssoils.Fortemporarystructurestheminimumdepthofexteriorfootingshallbe400mm.Incaseof
expansive and soils susceptible to weathering effects, the above mentioned minimum depths will be not applicable
andmayhavetobeincreased.
3.8.5 Scour
Footings supported on soil shall be embedded sufficiently below the maximum computed scour depth or protected
withascourcountermeasure.
3.8.6 MassMovementofGroundinUnstableAreas
In certain areas mass movement of ground may occur from causes independent of the loads applied to the
foundation. These include mining subsidence, landslides on unstable slopes and creep on clay slopes. In areas of
groundsubsidence,foundationsandstructuresshouldbemadesufficientlyrigidandstrongtowithstandtheprobable
worstloadingconditions.Theconstructionofstructuresonslopeswhicharesuspectedofbeingunstableandsubject
to landslip shall be avoided. Spread foundations on such slopes shall be on a horizontal bearing and stepped. For
foundationsonclayslopes,thestabilityofthefoundationshouldbeinvestigated.
3.8.7 FoundationExcavation
Foundationexcavation belowgroundwatertableparticularlyinsandshall bemadesuchthatthehydraulicgradient
atthebottomoftheexcavationisnotincreasedtoamagnitudethatwouldcasethefoundationsoilstoloosendueto
upwardflowofwater.Further,footingexcavationsshallbemadesuchthathydraulicgradientsandmaterialremoval
do not adversely affect adjacent structures. Seepage forces and gradients may be evaluated by standard flow net
procedures.Dewateringorcutoffmethodstocontrolseepageshallbeusedwhennecessary.
Incaseofsoilexcavationforraftfoundations,thefollowingissuesshouldbeadditionallytakenintoconsideration:
(a) Protectionfortheexcavationusingshoreorsheetpilesand/orretainingsystemwithorwithoutbracing,
anchorsetc.
(b) Considerationoftheadditionalbearingcapacityoftheraftforthedepthofthesoilexcavated.
(c) Considerationofthereductionofbearingcapacityforanyupwardbuoyancypressureofwater.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6171
3.9 GEOTECHNICALDESIGNOFSHALLOWFOUNDATIONS
3.9.1 General
Shallow foundations on soil shall be designed to support the design loads with adequate bearing and structural
capacityandwithtolerablesettlements.Inaddition,thecapacityoffootingssubjectedtoseismicanddynamicloads
shall be appropriately evaluated. The location of the resultant pressure on the base of the footings should be
maintainedpreferablywithinB/6ofthecentreofthefooting.
3.9.2 DesignLoad
Shallowfoundationdesign(consideringbearingcapacityduetoshearstrength)shallconsiderthemostunfavourable
effectofthefollowingcombinationsofloading:
(a) FullDeadLoad+NormalLiveLoad
(b) FullDeadLoad+NormalLiveLoad+WindLoadorSeismicLoad
(c) 0.9(FullDeadLoad)+BuoyancyPressure
Shallow foundation design (considering settlement) shall consider the most unfavourable effect of the following
combinationsofloading:
SAND
(a) FullDeadLoad+NormalLiveLoad
(b) FullDeadLoad+NormalLiveLoad+WindLoadorSeismicLoad
CLAY
FullDeadLoad+0.5NormalLiveLoad
3.9.3 Bearingcapacity
When physical characteristics such as cohesion, angle of internal friction, density etc. are available, the bearing
capacity shall be calculated from stability considerations. Established bearing capacity equations shall be used for
calculating bearing capacity. A factor of safety of between 2.0 to 3.0 (depending on the extent of soil exploration,
qualitycontrolandmonitoringofconstruction)shallbeadoptedtoobtainallowablebearingpressurewhendeadload
andnormalliveloadisused.Thirtythreepercentoverstressingaboveallowablepressureshallbeallowedincaseof
designconsideringwindorseismicloading.Allowableloadshallalsolimitsettlementbetweensupportingelementsto
atolerablelimit.
3.9.4 PresumptiveBearingCapacityforPreliminaryDesign
Forlightlyloadedandsmallsizedstructures(twostoriedorlessinoccupancycategoryA,B,C&D)andforpreliminary
design of any structure, the presumptive bearing values (allowable) as given in Table 6.3.6 may be assumed for
uniformsoilintheabsenceoftestresults.
Table6.3.6:PresumptiveValuesofBearingCapacityforLightlyLoadedStructures
*
SoilType SoilDescription
SafeBearingCapacity,kPa
1 SoftRockorShale 440
2
Gravel,sandygravel,siltysandygravel;verydenseandofferhighresistanceto
penetrationduringexcavation(soilshallincludethegroupsGW,GP,GM,GC)
400
**

Part6
StructuralDesign

6172 Vol.2
SoilType SoilDescription
SafeBearingCapacity,kPa
3
Sand(otherthanfinesand),gravellysand,siltysand;dry(soilshallincludethe
groupsSW,SP,SM,SC)
200
**

4 Finesand;loose&dry(soilshallincludethegroupsSW,SP)
100
**

5
Silt, clayey silt, clayey sand; dry lumps which can be easily crushed by finger (soil
shallincludethegroupsML,,SC,&MH)
150
6
Clay,sandyclay;canbeindentedwithstrongthumbpressure(soilshallincludethe
groupsCL,&CH)
150
7
Softclay;canbeindentedwithmodestthumbpressure(soilshallincludethe
groupsCL,&CH)
100
8
Very soft clay; can be penetrated several centimeters with thumb pressure (soil
shallincludethegroupsCL&CH)
50
9
Organicclay&Peat(soilshallincludethegroupsOH,OL,Pt)
Tobedeterminedafter
investigation.
10
Fills
Tobedeterminedafter
investigation.
* Twostoriesorless(OccupancycategoryA,B,CandDasperBNBC)
** 50% of thesevalues shall beusedwherewater table is abovethebase, orbelow itwithinadistance equal to the
leastdimensionoffoundation
3.9.5 AllowableIncreaseofBearingPressureduetoWindandEarthquakeForces
Theallowablebearingpressureofthesoildeterminedinaccordancewiththissectionmayaybeincreasedby33per
cent when lateral forces due to wind or earthquake act simultaneously with gravity loads. No increase in allowable
bearingpressureshallbepermittedforgravityloadsactingalone.Inazonewhereseismicforcesexist,possibilityof
liquefactioninloosesand,siltandsandysoilsshallbeinvestigated.
3.9.6 SettlementofFoundation
Foundation shall be so designed that the allowable bearing capacity is not exceeded, and the total and differential
settlementarewithinpermissiblevalues.Foundationscansettleinvariouswaysandeachaffectstheperformanceof
the structure. The simplest mode consists of the entire structure settling uniformly. This mode does not distort the
structure. Any damage done is related to the interface between the structure and adjacent ground or adjacent
structures. Shearing of utility lines could be a problem. Another possibility is that one side of the structure settles
much more than the opposite side and the portions in between settle proportionately. This causes the structure to
tilt,butitstilldoesnotdistort.Anominaltiltwillnotaffecttheperformanceofthestructure,althoughitmaycreate
aestheticand publicconfidenceproblems. However,asaresultofdifferenceinfoundationsettlementthestructure
maysettleanddistortcausingcracksinwallsandfloors,jammingofdoorsandwindowsandoverloadingofstructural
members.
3.9.7 TotalSettlement
Totalsettlement()istheabsoluteverticalmovementofthefoundationfromitsasconstructedpositiontoitsloaded
position. Total settlement of foundation due to net imposed load shall be estimated in accordance with established
engineeringprinciple.Anestimateofsettlementwithrespecttothefollowingshallbemadewhereapplicable:
(i) Elasticcompressionoftheunderlyingsoilbelowthefoundationandofthefoundation.
(ii) Consolidationsettlement.
(iii) Secondaryconsolidation/compressionoftheunderlyingsoil.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6173
(iv) Compression and volume change due to change in effective stress or soil migration associated with
loweringormovementofgroundwater.
(v) Seasonalswellingandshrinkageofexpansiveclays.
(vi) Groundmovementonearthslopes,suchassurfaceerosion,creeporlandslide.
(vii) Settlementduetoadjacentexcavation,miningsubsidenceandundergrounderosion.
Innormalcircumstancesofinorganicandorganicsoildepositsthetotalsettlementisattributedduetothefirstthree
factorsasmentionedabove.Theotherfactorsareregarded asspecialcases.Because soilsettlementcan have both
timedepended and noontimedependent components, it is often categorized in terms shortterm settlement (or
immediate settlement) which occurs as quickly as the load is applied, and longterm settlement (or delayed
settlement), which occurs over some longer period. Many engineers associate consolidation settlement solely with
thelongtermsettlementofclay.However,thisisnotstrictlytrue.Consolidationisrelatedtovolumechangedueto
changeineffectivestressregardlessofthetypeofsoilorthetimerequiredforthevolumechange.
3.9.7.1 Elastic/DistortionSettlement
Elastic Settlement (
d
) of foundation soils results from lateral movements of the soil without volume change in
responsetochangesineffectiveverticalstress.ThisisnontimedependentphenomenonandsimilartothePoissons
effectwhereanobjectisloadedintheverticaldirectionexpandslaterally.Elasticordistortionsettlementsprimarily
occur when the load is confined to a small area, such as a structural foundation, or near the edges of large loaded
areasuchasembankments.
3.9.7.2 ImmediateSettlement/ShortTermSettlement
This vertical compression occurs immediately after the application of loading either on account of elastic behaviour
thatproducesdistortionatconstantvolumeandonaccountofcompressionofairvoid.Thisissometimesdesignated
as
i.
forsandysoils,eventheconsolidationcomponentisimmediate.
3.9.7.3 PrimaryConsolidationSettlement
Primaryconsolidationsettlementorsimplytheconsolidationsettlement(c)offoundationisduetoconsolidationof
the underlying saturated or nearly saturated soil especially cohesive silt or clay. The full deal load and 50% of the
totalliveloadshouldbeconsideredwhencomputingtheconsolidationsettlementoffoundationsonclaysoils.
3.9.7.4 SecondaryConsolidationSettlement
Secondary consolidation settlement (
s
) of the foundation is due to secondary compression or consolidation of the
underlyingsaturatedornearlysaturatedcohesivesiltorclay.Thisisprimarilyduetoparticlereorientation,creep,and
decompositionoforganicmaterials.Secondarycompressionisalwaystimedependentandcanbesignificantinhighly
plasticclays,organicsoils,andsanitarylandfills,butitisnegligibleinsandsandgravels.
3.9.7.5 DifferentialSettlementanditsEffectontheStructure
Differential settlement is the difference in total settlement between two foundations or two points in the same
foundation.Itoccursasaresultofrelativemovementbetweentwopartsofabuilding.Therelatedtermsdescribing
the effects of differential settlement on the structural as a whole or on parts of it are tilt, rotation and angular
distortion/relativerotationwhicharedefinedbelow.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6174 Vol.2
3.9.7.6 Tilt
It is rotation of the entire superstructure or a well defined part of it as a result of nonuniform or differential
settlementoffoundationasaresultofwhichonesideofthebuildingsettlesmorethantheotherthusaffectingthe
verticalityofthebuilding.
3.9.7.7 Rotation
It is the angle between the horizontal line and an imaginary straight line connecting any two foundations or two
pointsinasinglefoundation.
3.9.7.8 AngularDistortion/RelativeRotation
Angular distortion or relative rotation is the angle between imaginary straight line indicating the overall tilt of a
structureandtheimaginaryconnectinglineindicatingtheinclinationofaspecificpartofit.Itismeasuredastheratio
ofdifferentialsettlementtothedistancebetweenthetwopoints..
3.9.8 CausesofDifferentialSettlement
Dueconsiderationshallbegiventoestimatethedifferentialsettlementthatmayoccurunderthebuildingstructure
underthefollowingcircumstances:
(i) Nonuniformityinsubsoilformationwithintheareacoveredbythebuildingduetogeologicorman
madecauses,oranomaliesintype,structure,thicknessanddensityoftheformation.
(ii) Nonuniformpressuredistributionduetononuniformandincompleteloading.
(iii) Groundwaterconditionduringandafterconstruction.
(iv) Loadinginfluenceofadjacentstructures.
(v) Unevenexpansionandcontractionduetomoisturemigration,unevendrying,wettingorsoftening.
3.9.9 TolerableSettlement,TiltandRotation
Allowableorlimitingsettlementofabuildingstructurewilldependonthenatureofthestructure,thefoundationand
the soil. Different types of structures have varying degrees of tolerance to settlements and distortions. These
variations depend on the type of construction, use of the structure, rigidity of the structure and the presence of
sensitive finishes. As a general rule, a total settlement of 25 mm and a differential settlement of 20 mm between
columns in most buildings shall be considered safe for buildings on isolated pad footings on sand for working load
(unfactored). A total settlement of 40 mm and a differential settlement of 20 mm between columns shall be
considered safe for buildings on isolated pad footings on clay soil for working load. Buildings on raft can usually
tolerate greater total settlements. Limiting tolerance for distortion and deflections introduced in a structure is
necessarily a subjective process, depending on the status of the building and any specific requirements for
serviceability.Thelimitingvalues,giveninTable6.3.7maybefollowedasguidelines.
3.9.10 DynamicGroundStabilityorLiquefactionAnalysis

Soilliquefactionisaphenomenoninwhichasaturatedsoildepositloosesmost,ifnotall,ofitsstrengthandstiffness
duetothegenerationofexcessporewaterpressureduringearthquakeinducedgroundshaking.Ithasbeenamajor
cause for damage of structures during past earthquakes (e.g., 1964 Niigata Earthquake). Current knowledge of
liquefaction is significantly advanced and several evaluation methods are available. Hazards due to liquefaction are
routinelyevaluatedandmitigatedinseismicallyactivedevelopedpartsoftheworld.

Part6
StructuralDesign 6175
Table6.3.7:PermissibleTotalSettlement,DifferentialSettlementandAngularDistortion(tilt)forShallowFoundationsinSoils(AdaptedfromNBCI,2005)

TypeofStructure IsolatedFoundations RaftFoundation

SandandHardClay PlasticClay SandandHardClay PlasticClay
Maximum
Settlement
(mm)
Differential
Settlement
(mm)
Angular
Distortion
(mm)
Maximum
Settlement
(mm)
Differential
Settlement
(mm)
Angular
Distortion
(mm)
Maximum
Settlement
(mm)
Differential
Settlement
(mm)
Angular
Distortion
(mm)
Maximum
Settlement
(mm)
Differential
Settlement
(mm)
Angular
Distortion
(mm)
SteelStructure 50 0.0033L 1/300 50 0.0033L 1/300 75 0.0033L 1/300 100 0.0033L 1/300
RCCStructures 50 0.0015L 1/666 75 0.0015L 1/666 75 0.0021L 1/500 100 0.002L 1/500
MultistoriedBuilding
(a)RCCorsteelframed
buildingwithpanel
walls
60 0.002L 1/500 75 0.002L 1/500 75 0.0025L 1/400 125 0.0033L 1/300
(b)Loadbearingwalls
(i)L/H=2* 60 0.0002L 1/5000 60 0.0002L 1/5000 Notlikelytobeencountered
(ii)L/H=7* 60 0.0004L 1/2500 60 0.0004L 1/2500 Notlikelytobeencountered
Silos 50 0.0015L 1/666 75 0.0015L 1/666 100 0.0025L 1/400 125 0.0025L 1/400
WaterTank 50 0.0015L 1/666 75 0.0015L 1/666 100 0.0025L 1/400 125 0.0025L 1/400
Note:ThevaluesgivenintheTablemaybetakenonlyasaguideandthepermissibletotalsettlement,differentialsettlementandtilt(angulardistortion)ineachcaseshouldbedecidedasper
requirementsofthedesigner.
Ldenotesthelengthofdeflectedpartofwall/raftorcentretocentredistancebetweencolumns.
Hdenotestheheightofwallfromfoundationfooting.
*ForintermediateratiosofL/H,thevaluescanbeinterpolated.

Part6
StructuralDesign 6176
LiquefactionAnalysis
Liquefaction can be analyzed by a simple comparison of the seismically induced shear stress with the similarly
expressed shear stress required to cause initial liquefaction or whatever level of shear strain amplitude is deemed
intolerableindesign.Usually,theoccurrenceof5%doubleamplitude(DA)axialstrainisadoptedtodefinethecyclic
strengthconsistentwith100%porewaterpressurebuildup.Thecorrespondingstrength(CRR)canbeobtainedby
severalprocedures.
Thus,theliquefactionpotentialofasanddepositisevaluatedintermsoffactorofsafetyF
L
,definedasinEquation
(6.3.6).Theexternallyappliedcyclicstressratio(CSR)canbeevaluatedbyEquations(6.3.7a,6.3.7band6.3.8).

CSR
CRR
F
L
= (6.3.6)
IfthefactorofsafetyF
L
is<1,liquefactionissaidtotakeplace.Otherwise,liquefactiondoesnotoccur.Thefactorof
safety obtained in this way is generally used to identify the depth to which liquefaction is expected to occur in a
futureearthquake.Thisinformationisnecessaryifsomecountermeasureistobeimplementedinaninsitudeposit
ofsands.
Thecyclicshearstressinducedatanypointinlevelgroundduringanearthquakeduetotheupwardpropagationof
shearwavescanbeassessedbymeansofasimpleprocedureproposed.Ifasoilcolumntoadepthzisassumedto
movehorizontallyandifthepeakhorizontalaccelerationonthegroundsurfaceis
max
a ,themaximumshearstress
max
actingatthebottomofthesoilcolumnisgivenby
) / )( (
max max
g z r a
t d
= (6.3.7a)
and, z 015 . 0 1 r
d
= (6.3.7b)
Where
t
isunitweightofthesoil,gisthegravitationalaccelerationandr
d
isastressreductioncoefficienttoallow
for the deformability of the soil column (r
d
<1). It is recommended to use the empirical formula given in Equation
(6.3.7b)tocomputestressreductioncoefficientr
d
,wherezisinmeters.DivisionofbothsidesofEquation(6.3.7a)
bytheeffectiveverticalstress
v
gives

'
max
'
max
v
v
d
v
r
g
a
CSR

= = (6.3.8)
Where,
v
=
t
z is the total vertical stress. Equation (6.3.8) has been used widely to assess the magnitude of shear
stressinducedinasoilelementduringanearthquake.OneoftheadvantagesofEquation(6.3.8)isthatallthevast
amount of information on the horizontal accelerations that has ever been recorded on the ground surface can be
useddirectlytoassesstheshearstressinducedbyseismicshakinginthehorizontalplanewithintheground.

The second step is to determine the cyclic resistance ratio (CRR) of the in situ soil. The cyclic resistance ratio
represents the liquefaction resistance of the in situ soil. The most commonly used method for determining the
liquefactionresistanceistousethedataobtainedfromthestandardpenetrationtest.Acyclictriaxialtestmayalso
beusedtoestimateCRRmoreaccurately.

SiteAmplificationFactor

Site response analysis of a site may be carried out to estimate the site amplification factor. For this purpose,
dynamic parameters such as shear modulus and damping factors need to be estimated. The site amplification
factorisrequiredtoestimatethea
max
foragivensiteproperly.

SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6177
3.9.11 PrinciplesofStructuralDesignofFoundations
3.9.11.1 LoadsandReactions
3.9.11.1.1 DeterminationofLoadsandReactions
Footingsshallbeconsideredasundertheactionofdownwardforces,duetothesuperimposedloads,resistedbyan
upward pressure exerted by the foundation materials and distributed over the area of the footings as determined
by the eccentricity of the resultant of the downward forces. Where piles are used under footings, the upward
reactionofthefoundationshallbeconsideredasaseriesofconcentratedloadsappliedatthepilecenters,eachpile
beingassumedtocarrythecomputedportionofthetotalfootingload.
3.9.11.1.2 IsolatedandMultipleFootingReactions
When a single isolated footing supports a column, pier or wall, the footing shall be assumed to act as a cantilever
element. When footings support more than one column, pier, or wall, the footing slab shall be designed for the
actualconditionsofcontinuityandrestraint.
3.9.11.1.3 RaftFoundationReactions
Fordeterminingthedistributionofcontactpressurebelowaraftitisanalysedeitherasarigidorflexiblefoundation
consideringtherigidityoftheraft,andtherigidityofthesuperstructureandthesupportingsoil.Considerationshall
begiventotheincreasedcontactpressuredevelopedalongtheedgesofraftoncohesivesoilsandthedecreasein
contact pressure along the edges on granular soils. Any appropriate analytical method reasonably valid for the
condition may be used. Choice of a particular method shall be governed by the validity of the assumptions in the
particularcase.Numericalanalysisofraftsusingappropriatesoftwaremaybeusedfordeterminationofreactions,
shearsandmoments.
Analyticalmethods(basedonbeamsonelasticfoundation)andnumericalmethodsrequirevaluesofthemodulus
of subgrade reaction of the soil. For use in preliminary analysis and design, indicative values of the modulus of
subgradereactionforcohesionlesssoilsandcohesivesoilsishowninTable6.3.7andTable6.3.8,respectively.

k = . 5 [
F
x
B
4
FI

1
12
,
F
x
(1-
2
)
1
B
(6.3.9)
Table6.3.7:ModulusofSubgradeReaction(k)forCohesionlessSoils
SoilCharacteristic *ModulusofSubgradeReaction(k)Soil
Characteristic(kN/m
3
)
Relative
Density
StandardPenetrationTest
Value(N)(Blowsper300
mm)
ForDryorMoistState ForSubmergedState

Loose
Medium
Dense
<10
10to30
30andover
15000
15000to47000
47000to180000
9000
9000to29000
29000to108000
*Theabovevaluesapplytoasquareplate300mmx300mmorbeams300mmwide.

Part6
StructuralDesign

6178 Vol.2
Table6.3.8ModulusofSubgradeReaction(k)forCohesiveSoils
SoilCharacteristic ModulusofSubgradeReaction,k
(kN/m
3
)
Consistency UnconfinedCompressiveStrength
(kN/m
2
)
Stiff
VeryStiff
Hard
100to200
200to400
400andover
27000
27000to54000
54000to108000
*Thevaluesapplytoasquareplate300mmx300mm.Theabovevaluesarebasedontheassumption
thattheaverageloadingintensitydoesnotexceedhalftheultimatebearingcapacity.
3.9.11.2 Moment
3.9.11.2.1 CriticalSection
Externalmomentonanysectionofafootingshallbedeterminedbypassingaverticalplanethroughthefootingand
computing the moment of the forces acting over the entire area of the footing on one side of that vertical plane.
Thecriticalsectionforbendingshallbetakenatthefaceofthecolumn,pier,orwall.Inthecaseofcolumnsthatare
not square or rectangular, the section shall be taken at the side of the concentric square of equivalent area. For
footingsundermasonrywalls,thecriticalsectionshallbetakenhalfwaybetweenthemiddleandedgeofthewall.
Forfootingsundermetalliccolumnbases,thecriticalsectionshallbetakenhalfway betweenthecolumnfaceand
theedgeofthemetallicbase.
3.9.11.2.2 DistributionofReinforcement
Reinforcementofsquarefootingsshallbedistributeduniformlyacrosstheentirewidthoffooting.Reinforcementof
rectangular footings shall be distributed uniformly across the entire width of footing in the long direction. In the
shortdirection,theportionofthetotalreinforcementgivenbythefollowingequationshallbedistributeduniformly
overabandwidth(centeredoncenterlineofcolumnorpier)equaltothelengthoftheshortsideofthefooting.

Rcn]occmcnt n bund wdth

1otuI cn]occmcnt n shot dccton
=
2
([+1)
(6.3.10)

Here, is the ratio of the footing length to width. The remainder of reinforcement required in the short direction
shallbedistributeduniformlyoutsidethecenterbandwidthoffooting.
3.9.11.2.3 Shear
3.9.11.2.4 CriticalSection
Computationofshearinfootings,andlocationofcriticalsectionshallbeinaccordancewithrelevantsectionsofthe
structural design part of the code. Location of critical section shall be measured from the face of column, pier or
wall, for footings supporting a column, pier, or wall. For footings supporting a column or pier with metallic base
plates, the critical section shall be measured from the location defined in the critical section for moments for
footings.
3.9.11.2.5 CriticalSectionforFootingsonDrivenPiles/BoredPiles/DrilledPiers
Shearonthecriticalsectionshallbeinaccordancewiththefollowing.Entirereactionfromanydrivenpileorbored
piles,anddrilledpierwhosecenterislocatedd
P
/2(d
P
=diameterofthepile)ormoreoutsidethecriticalsectionshall
be considered as producing shear on that section. Reaction from any driven pile or drilled shaft whose center is
located d
P
/2 or more inside the critical section shall be considered as producing no shear on that section. For the
intermediate position of driven pile or drilled shaft centers, the portion of the driven pile or shaft reaction to be
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6179
considered as producing shear on the critical section shall be based on linear interpolation between full value at
d
P
/2outsidethesectionandzerovalueatd
P
/2insidethesection.
3.9.11.3 ReinforcementandDevelopmentLength
3.9.11.3.1 DevelopmentLength
Computationofdevelopmentlengthofreinforcementinfootingsshallbeinaccordancewiththerelevantsections
ofthestructuraldesignpartofthecode.
3.9.11.3.2 CriticalSection
Criticalsectionsfordevelopmentlengthofreinforcementshallbeassumedatthesamelocationsasdefinedabove
asthecriticalsectionformomentsandatallotherverticalplaneswherechangesinsectionorreinforcementoccur.
3.9.11.4 TransferofForceatBaseofColumn
3.9.11.4.1 TransferofForce
All forces and moments applied at base of column or pier shall be transferred to top of footing by bearing on
concreteandbyreinforcement.
3.9.11.4.2 LateralForce
Lateralforcesshallbetransferredtosupportingfootinginaccordancewithsheartransferprovisionsoftherelevant
sectionsofthestructuraldesignpartofthecode.
3.9.11.4.3 BearingStrengthofConcrete
Bearing on concrete at contact surface between supporting and supported member shall not exceed concrete
bearingstrengthforeithersurface.
3.9.11.4.4 Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be provided across interface between supporting and supported member either by extending
main longitudinal reinforcement into footings or by dowels. Reinforcement across interface shall be sufficient to
satisfyallofthefollowing:
(i) Reinforcement shall be provided to transfer all force that exceeds concrete bearing strength in
supportingandsupportedmember.
(ii) If it is required that loading conditions include uplift, total tensile force shall be resisted by
reinforcement.
(iii) Area of reinforcement shall not be less than 0.005 times gross area of supported member, with a
minimumof4bars.
3.9.11.4.5 DowelSize
Diameterofdowels,ifused,shallnotexceedthediameteroflongitudinalreinforcements.
3.9.11.4.6 DevelopmentLengthandSplicing
Fortransferofforcebyreinforcement,developmentlengthofreinforcementinsupportingandsupportedmember,
requiredsplicingshallbeinaccordancewiththerelevantsections(Part.6,Chapter6)ofthestructuraldesignpartof
thecode.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6180 Vol.2
3.10 GeotechnicalDesignofDeepFoundations
3.10.1 DrivenPiles
The provisions of this article shall apply to the design of axially and laterally loaded driven piles in soil. Driven pile
foundation shall be designed and installed on the basis of a site investigation report that will include subsurface
exploration at locations and depths sufficient to determine the position and adequacy of the bearing soil unless
adequatedataisavailableuponwhichthedesignandinstallationofthepilescanbebased.Thereportshallinclude:
(i) Recommendedpiletypeandcapacities
(ii) Drivingandinstallationprocedure
(iii) Fieldinspectionprocedure
(iv) Pileloadtest,integritytestrequirements
(v) Durabilityandqualityofpilematerial
(vi) Designationofbearingstratumorstrata
Aplanshowingclearlythedesignationofallpilesbyanidentifyingsystemshallbefiledpriortoinstallationofsuch
piles.Alldetailedrecordsforindividualpilesshallbearanidentificationcorrespondingtothatshownontheplan.A
copyofsuchplanshallbeavailableatthesiteforinspectionatalltimesduringtheconstruction.
Thedesignandinstallationofdrivenpilefoundationsshallbeunderthedirectsupervisionofacompetentengineer
whoshallcertifythatthepilesasinstalledsatisfythedesigncriteria
3.10.1.1 Application
Pile driving may be considered when footings cannot be founded on granular or stiff cohesive soils within a
reasonable depth. At locations where soil conditions would normally permit the use of spread footings but the
potential for scour exists, piles may be driven as a protection against scour. Piles may also be driven where an
unacceptableamountofsettlementofspreadfootingsmayoccur
3.10.1.2 Materials
Driven piles may be castinplace concrete, precast concrete, prestressed concrete, timber, structural steel
sections,steelpipe,oracombinationofmaterials.
3.10.1.3 Penetration
Pile penetration shall be determined based on vertical and lateral load capacities of both the pile and subsurface
materials. In general, the design penetration for any pile shall be not less than 3m into hard cohesive or dense
granularmaterial,norlessthan6mintosoftcohesiveorloosegranularmaterial.
3.10.1.4 EstimatedPileLength
Estimatedpilelengthsofdrivenpilesshallbeshownonthedrawingandshallbebaseduponcarefulevaluationof
availablesubsurfaceinformation,axialandlateralcapacitycalculations,and/orpastexperience.
3.10.1.5 DrivenPileTypes
Driven piles shall be classified as "friction" or "end bearing" or a combination of both according to the manner in
which load transfer is developed. The ultimate load capacity of a pile consists of two parts. One part is due to
frictioncalledskinfrictionorshaftfrictionorsideshear,andtheotherisduetoendbearingatthebaseortipofthe
pile.Iftheskinfrictionisgreaterthanabout80%oftheendbearingloadcapacity,thepileisdeemedafrictionpile
and,ifthereverse,anendbearingpile.Iftheendbearingisneglected,thepileiscalledafloatingpile.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6181
3.10.1.6 BatterPiles
When the lateral resistance of the soil surrounding the piles is inadequate to counteract the horizontal forces
transmittedtothefoundation,orwhenincreasedrigidityoftheentirestructureisrequired,batterpilesshouldbe
used in the foundation. Where negative skin friction loads are expected, batter piles should be avoided, and an
alternatemethodofprovidinglateralrestraintshouldbeused.
Freestanding batterpiles are subjecttobendingmomentsdue totheirownweight, or externalforcesfromother
sources. Batter piles in loose fill or consolidating deposits may become laterally loaded due to settlement of the
surroundingsoil.Inconsolidatingclay,specialprecautions,likeprovisionofpermanentcasing,shallbetaken.
3.10.1.7 SelectionofSoilandRockProperties
Soil and rock properties defining the strength and compressibility characteristics of the foundation materials, are
requiredfordrivenpiledesign.
3.10.1.8 DesignofPileCapacity
The design pile capacity is the maximum load that the driven pile shall support with tolerable movement. In
determiningthedesignpilecapacitythefollowingitemsshallbeconsidered:
(i) Ultimategeotechnicalcapacity(axialandlateral).
(ii) Structuralcapacityofpilesection(axialandlateral).
(iii) Theallowableaxialloadonapileshallbetheleastvalueoftheabovetwocapacities.
Indeterminingthedesignaxialcapacity,considerationshallbegiventothefollowing:
(i) Theinfluenceoffluctuationsintheelevationofgroundwatertableoncapacity.
(ii) Theeffectsofdrivingpilesonadjacentstructureandslopes.
(iii) Theeffectsofnegativeskinfrictionordownloadsfromconsolidatingsoilandtheeffectsofliftloads
fromexpansiveorswellingsoils.
(iv) Theinfluenceofconstructiontechniquessuchasaugeringorjettingonpilecapacity.
(v) Thedifferencebetweenthesupportingcapacitysinglepileandthatofagroupofpiles.
(vi) Thecapacityofanunderlyingstratatosupportloadofthepilegroup;
(vii) Thepossibilityofscouranditseffectonaxiallateralcapacity.
3.10.1.9 UltimateGeotechnicalCapacityofDrivenPileforAxialLoad
Theultimateloadcapacity,Q
ult
,ofapileconsistsoftwoparts.Onepartisduetofrictioncalledskinfrictionorshaft
friction or side shear, Q
s
and the other is due to end bearing at the base or tip of the pile, Q
b
The ultimate axial
capacity(Q
ult
)ofdrivenpilesshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththefollowingforcompressionloading.
W Q Q Q
b s ult
+ = (6.3.11)
Forupliftloading;
W Q Q
s ult
+ 7 . 0 (6.3.12)
Theallowableorworkingaxialloadshallbedeterminedas:
FS Q Q
ult allow
/ =
(6.S.1S)

Where,WistheweightofthepileandFSisagrossfactorofsafetyusuallygreaterthan2.5.Often,forcompression
loading,theweighttermisneglectediftheweight,W,isconsideredinestimatingimposedloading.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6182 Vol.2
Theultimatebearingcapacity(skinfrictionand/orendbearing)ofasingleverticalpilemaybedeterminedbyanyof
thefollowingmethods.
(i) Bytheuseofstaticbearingcapacityequations
(ii) BytheuseofSPTandCPT
(iii) Byfieldloadtests
(iv) Bydynamicmethods
3.10.1.10 StaticBearingCapacityEquationsforPileCapacity
Theskinfriction,Q
s
andendbearingQ
b
canbecalculatedas:

S S S
f A Q = (6.3.14a)
and;
b b b
f A Q = (6.3.14b)
Where,
A
s
= skinfrictionarea(perimeterarea)ofthepile=PerimeterLength
f
s
= skin frictional resistance on unit surface area of pile, that depends on soil properties and loading
conditions(drainedorundrained)
A
b
= endbearingareaofthepile=Crosssectionalareaofpiletip(bottom)
f
b
= endbearingresistanceonunittipareaofpile,thatdependsonsoilpropertiestoadepthof2B(Bis
the diameter for a circular pile section or length of sides for a square pile section) from the pile tip
andloadingconditions(drainedorundrained)
For a layered soil system containing n number of layers, end bearing resistance can be calculated considering soil
properties of the layer at which the pile rests, and the skin friction resistance considers all the penetrating layers
calculatedas:

S
= Z

n
=1
(Pcrimctcr)

(
s
)

(6.3.15)
Where,Z
i
representsthethicknessofany(ith)layerand(Perimeter)
i
istheperimeterofthepileinthatlayer.The
manner in which skin friction is transferred to the adjacent soil depends on the soil type.In finegrained soils, the
loadtransferisnonlinearanddecreaseswithdepth.Asaresult,elasticcompressionofthepileisnotuniform;more
compressionoccursonthetoppartthanonthebottompartofthepile.Forcoarsegrainedsoils,theloadtransferis
approximatelylinearwithdepth(higherloadsatthetopandlowerloadsatthebottom).
Inordertomobilizeskinfrictionandendbearing,somemovementofthepileisnecessary.Fieldtestshaverevealed
that to mobilize the full skin friction a vertical displacement of 5 to 10 mm is required. The actual vertical
displacement dependsonthestrengthofthesoiland isindependentofthepilelength and pilediameter.Thefull
end bearing resistance is mobilized in driven piles when the vertical displacement is about 10% of the pile tip
diameter.Forboredpilesordrilledshafts,averticaldisplacementofabout30%ofthepiletipdiameterisrequired.
Thefullendbearingresistanceismobilizedwhensliporfailurezonessimilartoshallowfoundationsareformed.The
endbearingresistancecanthenbecalculatedbyanalogywithshallowfoundations.Theimportantbearingcapacity
factorisN
q
.
Thefullskinfrictionandfullendbearingarenotmobilizedatthesamedisplacement.Theskinfrictionismobilized
ataboutonetenthofthedisplacementrequiredtomobilizetheendbearingresistance.Thisisimportantindecid
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6183
ing on the factor of safety to be applied to the ultimate load. Depending on the tolerable settlement, different
factorsofsafetycanbeappliedtoskinfrictionandtoendbearing.
Generally,pilesdrivenintoloose,coarsegrainedsoilstendtodensitytheadjacentsoil.Whenpilesaredriveninto
dense, coarsegrained soils, the soil adjacent to the pile becomes loose. Pile driving usually remolds finegrained
soilsnearthepileshaft.Theimplicationofpileinstallationisthattheintactshearstrengthofthesoilischangedand
onemustaccountforthischangeinestimationsoftheloadcapacity.
3.10.1.11 AxialCapacityofDrivenPilesinCohesiveSoilusingStaticBearingCapacity
Equations
The ultimate axial capacity of driven piles in cohesive may be calculated from static formula, given by (6.3.14a),
(6.3.14b)and(6.3.15),usingatotalstressmethodforundrainedloadingconditions,oraneffectivestressmethod
fordrainedloadingconditions.Appropriatevaluesofadhesionfactor()andcoefficientofhorizontalsoilstress(k
s
)
for cohesive soils that are consistent with soil condition and pile installation procedure may be used. There are
basicallytwoapproachesforcalculatingskinfriction:
(i) Themethodthatisbasedontotalstressanalysisandisnormallyusedtoestimatetheshorttermload
capacity of piles embedded in fine grained soils. In this method, a coefficient is used to relate the
undrainedshearstrengthc
u
ors
u
totheadhesivestress(f
s
)alongthepileshaft.Assuch,
s u s
A c Q =
(6.3.16)
=1.0 forclayswithc
u
25kN/m
2

=0.5 forclayswithc
u
70kN/m
2

o = 1 - [
c
u
-25
70
forclayswith25kN/m
2
<c
u
<70kN/m
2

Theendbearinginsuchacaseisfoundbyanalogywithshallowfoundationsandisexpressedas:
b b c b u b
A N c Q ) ( ) ( =
(6.3.17)
N
c
isabearingcapacityfactor,usually9.c
u
istheundrainedshearstrengthofsoilatthebaseofthepile.
Thesuffixbsareindicativesofbaseofpile.ThegeneralequationforN
c
is,however,asfollows.
N
c
= 6 j1 +u.2 [
L

b
[ 9 (6.3.18)
ThesymbolD
b
representsthediameteratthebaseofthepile.Theskinfrictionvalue,f
b
=(c
u
)
b
(N
c
)
b
should
notexceed4.0MPa.
(ii) Themethodisbasedonaneffectivestressanalysisandisusedtodetermineboththeshorttermand
long term pile load capacities. The friction along the pile shaft is found using Coulombs friction law,
wherethe frictionstressisgivenby
s
= po
x
i
= o
x
i
ton
i
.Thelateraleffectivestress,
x
is proportional
toverticaleffectivestress,
z
byacoefficient
,
K.Assuch,
z z s
K f = = tan
(6.3.19a)

Where,[ = Kton
i
= K
o
ton
i
= (1 -sin')0CR (6.3.19b)
is the effective angle of internal friction of soil and OCR is the over-consolidation ratio. Fornormally
consolidated clay, varies from 0.25 to 0.29. The value of decreases for very long piles, as such a
correctionfactorisused.
Corrcction octor or [ = log [
180
L
u.S (6.3.19c)
Part6
StructuralDesign

6184 Vol.2
The end bearing capacity is calculated by analogy with the bearing capacity of shallow footings and is
determinedfrom:
b q b v b
N f ) ( ) ( =

(6.3.20)

Where,N
q
isabearingcapacityfactorthatdependsonangleofinternalfriction of the soil at the base
of the pile, aspresentedinFig.6.3.2.Subscriptbdesignatestheparametersatthebasesoil.

Fig.6.3.2:BearingCapacityFactorN
q
forDeepFoundation(AfterBerezantzev,1961)
3.10.1.12 Axial Capacity of Driven Piles in Cohesive Soil and Nonplastic Silt using
SPTValues
Standard Penetration Test Nvalue is a measure of consistency of clay soil and indirectly the measure of cohesion.
The skin friction of pile can thus be estimated from Nvalue. The following relation may be used for preliminary
designofpilesinclayandsiltsoils.TheNvalueusedshouldbecorrectedforoverburden.
Forclayandsilt: kPa kPa in N f
s
70 ) ( 67 . 1 =
(6.3.21)

Forendbearing,therelationshipisasunder.
Forclay: ) ( 45 kPa in N f
b
=
(6.3.22)

Forsilt: kPa and N kPa in

D
L
N f
b
10000 300 ) ( 40

=

(6.3.23)
3.10.1.13 Axial Capacity of Driven Piles in Cohesionless Soil using Static Bearing
CapacityEquations
Piles in cohesionless soils shall be designed by effective stress methods of analysis for drained loading conditions.
The ultimate axial capacity of piles in cohesionless soils may also be calculated using empirical effective stress
10
100
1000
20 25 30 35 40 45 50
B
e
a
r
i
n
g

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

F
a
c
t
o
r
,

N
q
AngleofInternalFriction, (Degree)
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6185
method or from insitu methods and analysis such as the cone penetration or pressure meter tests. Dynamic
formula may be used for driven piles in cohesionless soils such as gravels, coarse sand and deposits where pore
pressuredevelopedduetodrivingisquicklydissipated.
Forpilesincohesionlesssoil,theultimatesideresistancemaybeestimatedusingthefollowingformula:
z s
f =
(6.3.24)

Where,
z
istheeffectiveverticalstressatthelevelunderconsideration.Thevaluesforareasunder.
=0.10 for=33
o

=0.20 for=35
o

=0.35 for=37
o

Foruncementedcalcareoussandthevalueofvariesfrom0.05to0.10.
Thefollowingequation,asusedforcohesivesoil,maybeusedtocomputetheultimateendbearingcapacityofpiles
insandysoilinwhich,themaximum

effectivestress,
v
allowedforthecomputationis240kPa
b q b v b
N f ) ( ) ( =

(6.3.25)
N
q
=8to12 forloose sand
N
q
=12to40 formedium sand
N
q
=40 fordense sand

Fig.6.3.2mayalsobeusedtoestimatethevalueofN
q
.

CriticalDepthforEndBearingandSkinFriction
The vertical effective stress (
v
or
z
) increases with depth. Hence the skin friction should increase with depth
indefinitely. In reality skin friction does not increase indefinitely. It is believed that skin friction would become a
constant at a certain depth. This depth is named critical depth. Pile end bearing in sandy soils is also related to
effective stress. Experimental data indicates that end bearing capacity does not also increase with depth
indefinitely.Duetolackofavalidtheory,Engineersusethesamecriticaldepthconceptadoptedforskinfrictionfor
end bearing capacity as well. Both the skin friction and the end bearing capacity are assumed to increase till the
criticaldepth,d
c
andthenmaintainaconstantvalue.Followingapproximationsmaybeusedforthecriticaldepthin
relationtodiameterofpile,D.
d
c
=10D forloose sand
d
c
=15D formedium dense sand
d
c
=20D fordense sand
3.10.1.14 AxialCapacityofDrivenPilesinCohesionlessSoilusingSPTValues
Standard Penetration Test Nvalue is a measure of consistency of clay soil and indirectly the measure of cohesion.
TheskinfrictionofpilecanthusbeestimatedfromNvalue.Thefollowingrelationmaybeusedforclaysoils.
Forlargedisplacementpiles: ) ( 2 kPa in N f
b
=
(6.3.26a)

Forlargedisplacementpiles: ) ( 1 kPa in N f
b
=
(6.3.26b)
Forendbearing,therelationshipisasunder.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6186 Vol.2
kPa and N kPa in
D
L
N f
b
10000 400 ) ( 400

=

(6.3.27)
3.10.1.15 AxialCapacityofDrivenPileusingPileLoadTest
Generally, the total test load is twice the design load. The pile load test has considered to have failed, if the
settlementintothesoil,thatisthegrosssettlementminuselasticshortening,isgreaterthan25mmatfulltestload
orthesettlementintothesoilisgreaterthan13mm,attheendofthetestafterremovaloftheload.
3.10.1.16 SelectionofFactorofSafety
Afactorofsafetyshallbeappliedtoallestimatesoffailureloadafterconsidering:
i) Thereliabilityofthevalueoftheultimatebearingcapacity,
ii) Controlofthepileinstallationprocedure
ii) Thetypeofsuperstructureandtypeofloading,and
iii) Allowabletotalanddifferentialsettlementofthestructure.
Whenultimatebearingcapacityiscalculatedfromeitherstaticformulaordynamicformula,theabovefactorsshall
be considered. The minimum factor of safety on static formula shall be 3.0. The factor of safety shall actually
dependonthereliabilityoftheformula,dependingonaparticularsiteandthereliabilityofthesubsoilparameters
employed in the calculations. The assumption of a factor of safety shall also consider the load settlement
characteristicsofthestructureasawholeonagivensite.Thedesignpilecapacityshallbespecifiedontheplansso
thefactorofsafetycanbeadjustedifthespecifiedconstructioncontrolprocedureisaltered.Whensafeloadona
drivenpileisassessedbyapplyingafactorofsafetytoloadtestdata,theminimumsafetyfactorshallbe2.
Settlementistobelimitedordifferentialsettlementavoided(i.e.,foraccuratelyalignedmachineryorafragilefinish
ofsuperstructure)
(i) largeimpactorvibratingloadsareexpected
(ii) soilstrengthormodulusmaybeexpectedtodeterioratewithtime
(iii) liveloadonastructurecarriedbyfrictionpilesisaconsiderableportionofthetotalloadand
approximatethedeadloadinduration.
Theallowableaxialloadonapileshallbetheleastvaluepermittedbyconsiderationofthefollowingfactors:
(i) Thecapacityofthepileasastructuralmember.
(ii) Theallowablebearingpressureonsoilstrataunderlyingthepiletip.
(iii) Theresistancetopenetrationofthepile,includingresistancetodriving,resistancetojacking,the
rateofpenetration,orotherequivalentcriteria.
(iv) Thecapacityasindicatedbyloadtest,whereloadtestsarerequired.

Drivenpileinsoilshallbedesignedforaminimumoverallfactorofsafetyof2.0againstbearingcapacityfailure(end
bearing,sideresistanceorcombined)whenthedesignisbasedontheresultsofaloadtestconductedatthesite.
Otherwise, it shall be designed for a minimum overall factor of safety 3.0. The minimum recommended overall
factorofsafetyisbasedonanassumednormalleveloffieldqualitycontrolduringconstruction.Ifanormallevelof
fieldqualitycontrolcannotbeassured,higherminimumfactorsofsafetyshallbeused.Therecommendedvaluesof
overallfactorofsafetyonultimateaxialloadcapacitybasedonspecifiedconstructionControlispresentedinTable
6.3.8.
Partialfactorofsafetymaybeusedindependentlyforskinfrictionandendbearing.Thevaluesofpartialfactorof
safetymaybetakenas1.5and3.0respectivelyforskinfrictionandendbearing.Thedesign/allowableloadmaybe
takenastheminimumofthevaluesconsideringoverallandpartialfactorofsafety.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6187
Table6.3.8:DesignFactorofSafetyforDeepFoundationforDownwardandUpwardLoad
Structure Design
Life(yrs.)
Probability
ofFailure
DesignFactorofSafety

GoodControl NormalControl PoorControl V.PoorControl

Monument >100 10
5
2.30 3.00 3.50 4.00
Permanent 25100 10
4
2.00 2.50 2.80 3.40
Temporary <25 10
3
1.40 2.00 2.30 2.80
Forupliftload,factorofsafetyishigher.Usually1.5to2.0timesofthevaluesinthischartfordownwardloading
3.10.1.17 GroupPilesandGroupCapacityofDrivenPiles
Allpilesshallbebracedtoprovidelateralstabilityinalldirections.Threeormorepilesconnectedbyarigidcapshall
be considered as being braced, provided that the piles are located in a radial direction from the centroid of the
group, not less than 60 degrees apart circumferentially. A two pile group in a rigid cap shall be considered to be
bracedalongtheaxisconnectingthetwopiles.Pilessupportingwallsshallbedrivenalternatelyinlinesatleast300
mm apart and located symmetrically under the centre of gravity of the wall load, unless effective measures are
takentocaterforeccentricityandlateralforces,orthewallpilesareadequatelybracedtoprovidelateralstability.
Grouppilecapacityofdrivenpilesshouldbedeterminedastheproductofthegroupefficiency,numberofpilesin
the group and the capacity of a single pile. In general, a group efficiency value of 1.0 should be used except for
frictionpilesdrivenincohesivesoils.Theminimumcentertocenterpilespacingof2.5Bisrecommended.
3.10.1.17.1 PileCaps
Pilecapsshallbeofreinforcedconcrete.Thesoilimmediatelybelowthepilecapshallnotbeconsideredascarrying
anyverticalload.Thetopsofallpilesshallbeembeddednotlessthan75mmintopilecapsandthecapshallextend
atleast100mmbeyondtheedgeofallpiles.Thetopsofallpilesshallbecutbacktosoundmaterialbeforecapping.
Thepilecapshallberigidenough,sothattheimposedloadcanbedistributedonthepilesinagroupequitably.The
cap shall generally be cast over a 75 mm thick levelling course of concrete. The clear cover for the main
reinforcementinthecapslabundersuchconditionshallnotbelessthan60mm.
3.10.1.18 LateralLoads(Capacity)onDrivenPiles
Thedesignoflaterallyloadedpilesisusuallygovernedbylateralmovementcriteria.Thedesignoflaterallyloaded
piles shall account for the effects of soilstructure interaction between the pile and ground. Methods of analysis
evaluatingtheultimatecapacityordeflectionoflaterallyloadedpilesmaybeusedforpreliminarydesignonlyasa
meanstoevaluateappropriatepilesections.Lateralcapacityofverticalsingle pilesshallbetheleastofthevalues
calculatedonthebasisofsoilfailure,structuralcapacityofthepileanddeflectionofthepilehead.
Deflectioncalculationsrequirehorizontalsubgrademodulusofthesurroundingsoil.Whenconsideringlateralload
on piles, the effect of other coexistent loads, including axial load on the pile, shall be taken into consideration for
checkingstructuralcapacityoftheshaft.
Forestimatingthedepthoffixity,establishedmethodofanalysisshallbeused.Todeterminelateralloadcapacity,
lateralloadtesttoatleasttwicetheproposeddesignworkingloadshallbemade.Theresultingallowableloadshall
notbemorethanonehalfofthetestloadthatproducesagrosslateralmovementof25mmatthegroundsurface.
Lateral load tests shall be performed. All piles standing unbraced in air, water or soils not capable of providing
lateralsupportshallbedesignedascolumnsinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthisCode.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6188 Vol.2
3.10.1.19 VerticalGroundMovement
Thepotentialforexternalloadingonapilebyverticalgroundmovementsshallbeconsideredaspartofthedesign.
Vertical ground movements may result in negative skin friction or downdrag loads due to settlement of
compressible soils or may result in uplift loads due to heave of expansive soils. For design purposes, the full
magnitudeofmaximumverticalgroundmovementshallbeassumed.
3.10.1.19.1 NegativeSkinFriction(DownwardMovement)
Drivenpilesinstalledincompressiblefillorsoftsoilsubjecttocompressionshallbedesignedagainstdownwardload
duetodowndragknownasthenegativefrictionofthecompressiblesoil.Thepotentialforexternalloadingonapile
by negative skin friction/downdrag due to settlement of compressible soil shall be considered as a part of the
design.Evaluationofnegativeskinfrictionshallincludealoadtransfermethodofanalysistodeterminetheneutral
point (i.e., point of zero relative displacement) and load distribution along shaft. Due to the possible time
dependence associated with vertical ground movement, the analysis shall consider the effect of time on load
transfer between the ground and shaft and the analysis shall be performed for the time period relating to the
maximum axial load transfer to the pile. If necessary, negative skin friction loads that cause excessive settlement
may be reduced by application of bitumen or other viscous coatings to the pile surfaces before In estimating
negativeskinfrictionthefollowingfactorsshallbeconsidered:
(i) Relativemovementbetweensoilandpileshaft.
(ii) Relativemovementbetweenanyunderlyingcompressiblesoilandpileshaft.
(iii) Elasticcompressionofthepileundertheworkingload.
(iv) Therateofconsolidationofthecompressiblelayer.
Negative skin friction is mobilized only when tendency for relative movement between pile shaft and surrounding
soilexists.
3.10.1.19.2 ExpansiveSoils(UpwardMovement)
Piles driven in swelling soils may be subjected to uplift forces in the zone of seasonal moisture change. Piles shall
extend a sufficient distance into moisturestable soils to provide adequate resistance to swelling uplift forces. In
addition,sufficientclearanceshallbeprovidedbetweenthegroundsurfaceandtheundersideofpilecapsorgrade
beams to preclude the application of uplift loads at the pile cap. Uplift loads may be reduced by application of
bitumenorotherviscouscoatingstothepilesurfaceintheswellingzone.
3.10.1.20 Dynamic/SeismicDesignofPiles
In case of submerged loose sands, vibration caused by earthquake may cause liquefaction or excessive total and
differentialsettlements.Thisaspectoftheproblemshallbeinvestigatedandappropriatemethodsofimprovements
should be adopted to achieve suitable values of N. Alternatively, large diameter drilled pier foundation shall be
providedandtakentodepthswellintothelayerswhicharenotlikelytoliquefy.
3.10.1.21 ProtectionagainstCorrosionandAbrasion
Where conditions of exposure warrant, concrete encasement or other corrosion protection shall be used on steel
piles and steel shells. Exposed steel piles or steel shells shall not he used in salt or brackish water, and only with
cautioninfreshwater.DetailsaregiveninSection3.7.2.
3.10.1.22 DynamicMonitoring
Dynamic monitoring may be specified for piles installed in difficult subsurface conditions such as soils with
obstructions and boulders to evaluate compliance with structural pile capacity. Dynamic monitoring may also be
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6189
consideredforgeotechnicalcapacityverification,wherethesizeoftheprojectorotherlimitationsdetersstaticload
testing.
3.10.1.23 MaximumAllowableDrivingStresses
Maximumallowabledrivingstressesinpilematerialfortopdrivenpilesshallnotexceed0.9F
y
(compression),0.9F
y

(tension) for steel piles, 0.85f

c
concrete (compression) and 0.7F
y
(steel reinforcement (tension) for concrete piles
and0.85f

c
f
pc
(compression)forprestressedconcretepiles.
3.10.1.24 Buoyancy
The effects of hydrostatic pressure shall be considered in the design of driven piles, where used with foundation
subjectedtobuoyancyforces.
3.10.1.25 ProtectionagainstDeterioration
3.10.1.25.1 SteelPiles
Asteelpilefoundationdesignshallconsiderthatsteelpilesmaybesubjecttocorrosion,particularlyinfillsoilslow
pH soils (acidic) and marine environments. A field electric resistivity survey or resistivity testing and pH testing of
soil and ground water samples should be used to evaluate the corrosion potential. Methods of protecting steel
piling in corrosive environments include use of protective coatings, cathodic protection, and increased pile steel
area.
3.10.1.25.2 ConcretePiles
Aconcretepilefoundationdesignshallconsiderthatdeteriorationofconcretepilescanoccurduetosulfatesinsoil,
groundwater,orseawater;chloridesinsoilsandchemicalwastes;acidicgroundwateranorganicacids.Laboratory
testing of soil and ground water samples for sulfates and ph is usually sufficient to assess pile deterioration
potential. A full chemical analysis of soil and round water samples is recommended when chemical wastes are
suspected. Methods of protecting concrete piling can include dense impermeable concrete, sulfate resisting
portlandcement,minimumcoverrequirementsforreinforcingsteel,anduseofepoxies,resins,orotherprotective
coatings
3.10.1.25.3 TimberPiles
Atimberpilefoundation(usedfortemporarystructures)designshallconsiderthatdeteriorationoftimberpilescan
occur duetodecayfromwettinganddryingcyclesor frominsectsormarineborersMethodsofprotecting timber
pilingincludepressuretreatingwithcreosoteorotherwoodpreservers
3.10.1.26 PileSpacing,ClearanceandEmbedment
3.10.1.26.1 PileSpacing
Endbearingdrivenpilesshallbeproportionedsuchthattheminimumcentertocenterpilespacingshallexceedthe
greaterof750mm or2.5 pilediameters/widths.Thedistancefromtheside ofanypiletothenearestedgeofthe
pile cap shall not be less than 100 mm.The spacing of piles shall be such that the average load on the supporting
strata will not exceed the safe bearing value of those strata as determined by test boring or other established
methods.
Pilesderivingtheircapacityfromfrictionalresistanceshallbesufficientlyaparttoensurethatthezonesofsoilfrom
which the piles derive their support do not overlap to such an extent that their bearing values are reduced.
Generally,insuchcases,thespacingshallnotbelessthan3.0timesthediameteroftheshaft.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6190 Vol.2
3.10.1.26.2 MinimumProjectionofPileintothePileCap
Thetopsofpilesshallprojectnotlessthan100mmintoconcreteafteralldamagedpilematerialhasbeenremoved.
3.10.1.27 StructuralCapacityofDrivenPileSection
The crosssection of driven piles shall be of sufficient size and pile material shall have the necessary structural
strengthtoresistallhandlingstressesduringdrivingorinstallationandthenecessarystrengthtotransmittheload
imposedonthemtotheunderlyingandsurroundingsoil.Pilediameter/crosssectionofapileshaftatanylevelshall
notbelessthanthedesignatednominaldiameter/crosssection.Thestructuraldesignofpilesmustconsidereachof
thefollowingloadingconditions.
Handlingloadsarethoseimposedonthepilebetweenthetimeitisfabricatedandthetimeitisinthe
piledriverleadsandreadytobedriven.Theyaregeneratedbycranes,forklifts,andotherconstruction
equipment.
Drivingloadsareproducedbythepilehammerduringdriving.
Serviceloadsarethedesignloadsfromthecompletedstructures.
The maximum allowable stress on a pile shall not exceed
c
f 33 . 0 for precast concrete piles and
pc c
f f 33 for
prestressed concrete piles and
y
f 25 . 0
for steel Hpiles. The axial carrying capacity of a pile fully embedded in soil
withundrainedshearstrengthgreaterthan10kN/m
2
shallnotbelimitedbyitsstrengthaslongcolumn.Forweaker
soils (undrained shear strength less than 10 kN/m
2
), consideration shall be given to determine whether the shaft
wouldbehaveasalongcolumn.Ifnecessary,suitablereductionsshallbemadeinitsstructuralstrengthconsidering
buckling.Theeffectivelengthofapilenotsecuredagainstbucklingbyadequatebracingshallbegovernedbyfixity
conditionsimposedonitbythestructureitsupportsandbythenatureofthesoilinwhichitisinstalled.

3.10.1.28 DrivenCastinPlaceConcretePiles
Driven castinplace concrete piles shall be in general cast in metal shells driven into the soil that will remain
permanently in place. However, other types of castinplace piles, plain or reinforced, cased or uncased, may be
usedifthesoilconditionspermittheiruseandiftheirdesignandmethodofplacingaresatisfactory.
3.10.1.28.1 Shape
Castinplaceconcretepilesmayhaveauniformcrosssectionormaybetaperedoveranyportion.
3.10.1.28.2 MinimumArea
Theminimumareaatthebuttofthepileshallbe650squarecmsandtheminimumdiameteratthetipofthepile
shallbe200mm.
3.10.1.28.3 GeneralReinforcementRequirements
Dependingonthedrivingandinstallationconditionsandtheloadingcondition,theamountofreinforcementandits
arrangement shall vary. Castinplace piles, carrying axial loads only, where the possibility of lateral forces being
appliedtothepilesisinsignificant,neednotbereinforcedwherethesoilprovidesadequatelateralsupport.Those
portions of castinplace concrete piles that are not supported laterally shall be designed as reinforced concrete
columnsandthe reinforcingsteelshallextend3000mmbelowtheplanewherethe soil providesadequatelateral
restraint.Wheretheshellissmoothpipeandmorethan3mminthickness,itmaybeconsideredasloadcarryingin
theabsenceofcorrosion.Wheretheshell iscorrugatedandisatleast2mm inthickness,itmay beconsideredas
providingconfinementintheabsenceofcorrosion.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6191
3.10.1.28.4 ReinforcementintoSuperstructure
Sufficient reinforcement shall be provided at the junction of the pile with the superstructure to make a suitable
connection.Theembedmentofthereinforcementintothecapshallbeasspecifiedforprecastpiles
3.10.1.28.5 ShellRequirements
The shell shall be of sufficient thickness and strength, so that it will hold its original form and show no harmful
distortionafteritandadjacentshellshavebeendrivenandthedrivingcore,ifany,hasbeenwithdrawn.Theplans
shallstipulatethatalternativedesignsoftheshellmustbeapprovedbytheEngineerbeforeanydrivingisdone.
3.10.1.28.6 Splices
Piles may be spliced provided the splice develops the full strength of the pile. Splices should be detailed on the
contractplans.Anyalternativemethodofsplicingprovidingequalresultsmaybeconsideredforapproval.
3.10.1.28.7 ReinforcementCover
Thereinforcementshallbeplacedacleardistanceofnotlessthan50mmfromthecasedoruncasedsides.When
piles are in corrosive or marine environments, or when concrete is placed by the water or slurry displacement
methods, the clear distance shall not be less than 75 mm for uncased piles and piles with shells not sufficiently
corrosionresistant.Reinforcementsshallextendtowithin100mmoftheedgeofthepilecapReinforcementsshall
extendtowithin100mmoftheedgeofthepilecap.
3.10.1.28.8 Installation
Steel cased piles shall have the steel shell mandrel driven their full length in contact with surrounding soil, left
permanentlyinplaceandfilledwithconcrete.Nopileshallbedrivenwithin4.5timestheaveragepilediameterofa
pilefilledwithconcretelessthan24hoursold.Concreteshallnotbeplacedinsteelshellswithintheheaverangeof
driving
3.10.1.28.9 Concreting
Forboredordrivencastinsitupiles,concreteshallbedepositedinsuchawayastoprecludesegregation.Concrete
shallbedepositedcontinuouslyuntilitisbroughttotherequiredlevel.Thetopsurfaceshallbemaintainedaslevel
aspossibleandtheformationofseamsshallbeavoided.
For underreamed piles, the slump of concrete shall range between 100 mm and 150 mm for concreting in water
free holes. For large diameter holes concrete may be placed by tremie or by drop bottom bucket; for small
diameterboreholesatremieshallbeutilized.
Aslumpof125mmto150mmshallbemaintainedforconcretingbytremie.Incaseoftremieconcretingforpilesof
smaller diameter and length up to 10 m, the minimum cement content shall be 350kg/m
3
of concrete. For larger
diameterand/ordeeperpiles,theminimumcementcontentshallbe400kg/m
3
ofconcrete.
Forconcretingunderwater,theconcreteshallcontainatleast10percentmorecementthanthatrequiredforthe
samemixplacedinthedry.Theamountofcoarseaggregateshallbenotlessthanoneandahalftimes,normore
thantwotimes,thatofthefineaggregate.Thematerialsshallbesoproportionedastoproduceaconcretehavinga
slumpofnotlessthan100mm,normorethan150mm,exceptwhereplasticizingadmixturesisusedinwhichcase,
theslumpmaybe175mm
3.10.1.28.10 StructuralIntegrity
Bored piles shall be installed in such a manner and sequence as to prevent distortion or damage to piles being
installedoralreadyinplace,totheextentthatsuchdistortionordamageaffectsthestructuralintegrityofthepiles.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6192 Vol.2
3.10.1.29 PrestressedConcretePiles
3.10.1.29.1 SizeandShape
Prestressed concrete piles that are generally octagonal, square or circular shall be of approved size and shape..
Concrete in prestressed piles shall have a minimum compressive strength (cylinder), f

c
of 35 MPa at 28 days.
Prestressed concrete piles may be solid or hollow. For hollow piles, precautionary measures should be taken to
preventbreakageduetointernalwaterpressureduringdriving.
3.10.1.29.2 MainReinforcement
Mainreinforcementshallbespacedandstressedsoastoprovideacompressivestressonthepileafterlosses;f
pc
,
generallynotlessthan5MPatopreventcrackingduringhandlingandinstallation.Pilesshallbedesignedtoresist
stressesdevelopedduringhandlingaswellasunderserviceloadconditions.Bendingstressesshallbeinvestigated
forallconditionsofhandling,takingintoaccounttheweightofthepileplus50percentallowanceforimpact,with
tensilestresseslimitedto5f

c
.
3.10.1.29.3 VerticalandSpiralReinforcement
The full length of vertical reinforcement shall be enclosed within spiral reinforcement. For piles up to 600 mm in
diameter,spiralwireshallbeNo.5(U.S.SteelWireGage).Spiralreinforcementattheendsofthesepilesshallhavea
pitchof75mmforapproximately16turns.
Inaddition,thetop150mmofpileshallhavefiveturnsofspiralwindingat25mmpitch.Fortheremainderofthe
pile,theverticalsteelshallbeenclosedwithspiralreinforcementwithnotmorethan150mmpitch.Forpileshaving
diametersgreaterthan600mm.spiralwireshallbeNo.4(U.S.SteelWireGage).Spiralreinforcementattheendof
these piles shall have a pitch of 50 mm for approximately 16 turns. In addition, the top 150 mm of pile shall have
fourturnsofspiralwindingat38mmpitch.Fortheremainderofthepile,theverticalsteelshallbeenclosedwith
spiralreinforcementwithnotmorethan100mmpitch.Thereinforcementshallbeplacedatacleardistancefrom
thefaceoftheprestressedpileofnotlessthan50mm.
3.10.1.29.4 DrivingandHandlingStresses
Aprestressed pile shallnot bedriven beforethe concretehasattained acompressivestrengthofatleast28MPa,
butnotlessthansuchstrengthsufficienttowithstandhandlinganddrivingforces.
3.10.2 BoredPiles
In bored cast in place piles, the holes are first bored with a permanent or temporary casing or by using bentonite
slurry to stabilize the sides of the bore. A prefabricated steel cage is then lowered into the hole and concreting is
carriedbytremiemethod.
3.10.2.1 UltimateGeotechnicalCapacityofBoredPileforAxialLoad
The basic concept of ultimate bearing capacity and useful equations for axial load capacity are identical to that of
drivenpileasdescribedinSection3.11.1.9.
3.10.2.2 AxialCapacityofBoredPilesinCohesiveSoilusingStaticBearingCapacity
Equations
The ultimate axial capacity of bored piles in cohesive may be calculated from the same static formula as used for
drivenpiles,givenbyEquations(6.3.14a),(6.3.14b)and(6.3.15),usingatotalstressmethodforundrainedloading
conditions,oraneffectivestressmethodfordrainedloadingconditions.Theskinfriction(f
s
)maybetakenas0.67
timesthevalueofdrivenpilesandtheendbearing(f
b
)maybetakenas1/3
rd
ofdrivenpile.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6193
3.10.2.3 AxialCapacityofBoredPilesinCohesiveSoilandNonplasticSiltusingSPT
Values
Thefollowingrelationmaybeusedforpreliminarydesignofpilesinclayandsiltsoils.TheNvalueusedshouldbe
correctedforoverburden.
Forclayandsilt: kPa kPa in N f
s
70 ) ( 11 . 1 =
(6.3.28)

Forendbearing,therelationshipisasunder.
Forclay: ) ( 15 kPa in N f
b
=
(6.3.29)

Forsilt: ) ( 0 10 kPa in N f
b
=
(6.3.30)
3.10.2.4 Axial Capacity of Bored Piles in Cohesionless Soil using Static Bearing
CapacityEquations
The ultimate axial capacity of bored piles in cohesive may be calculated from the same static formula as used for
driven piles described section 3.1.11.13. The skin friction (f
s
) may be taken as 0.67 times the value of driven piles
andtheendbearing(f
b
)maybetakenas1/3
rd
ofdrivenpile.

CriticalDepthforEndBearingandSkinFriction
Similartodrivenpiles,followingapproximationsmaybeusedforthecriticaldepthinrelationtodiameterofpile,D.
d
c
=10D forloose sand
d
c
=15D formedium dense sand
d
c
=20D fordense sand
3.10.2.5 AxialCapacityofBoredPilesinCohesionlessSoilusingSPTValues
Standard Penetration Test Nvalue is a measure of consistency of clay soil and indirectly the measure of cohesion.
TheskinfrictionofpilecanthusbeestimatedfromNvalue.Thefollowingrelationmaybeusedforclaysoils.
kPa kPa in N f
s
60 ) ( 33 . 1 =

(6.3.31)
Forendbearing,therelationshipisasunder.
kPa and N kPa in
D
L
N f
b
10000 133 ) ( 133

=

(6.3.32)
3.10.2.6 AxialCapacityofBoredPileusingPileLoadTest
Theproceduresandprinciplesofpileloadtestforultimatecapacityaresimilartothatofdrivenpiles.
3.10.2.7 SelectionofFactorofSafety
Selectionoffactorofsafetyforaxialcapacityofboredpileissimilartothatusedfordrivenpiles.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6194 Vol.2
3.10.2.8 GroupCapacityofBoredPilesandother
The behavior of group bored piles is almost similar to that of driven piles. For the pile cap, lateral load capacity,
vertical ground movement, negative skin friction, piles in expansive soil, dynamic and seismic design, corrosion
protection,dynamicmonitoringandbuoyancy,Sections3.11.1.17shouldbeconsultedastheyaresimilarforboth
drivenandboredpiles.
3.10.3 SettlementofDrivenandBoredPiles
Thesettlementofaxiallyloadedpilesandpilegroupsattheallowableloadsshallbeestimated.Elasticanalysis,load
transferand/orfiniteelementtechniquesmaybeused.Thesettlementofthepileorpilegroupshallnotexceedthe
tolerablemovementlimitsasrecommendedforshallowfoundations(Table6.3.7).
Whenapileisloadedtwothingswouldhappeninvolvingsettlement.
Thepilewouldsettleintothesoil
Thepilematerialwouldcompressduetoload
Thesettlementofasinglepilecanbebrokendownintothreedistinctparts.
Settlementduetoaxialdeformation,S
ax

Settlementatthepiletip,S
pt

Settlementduetoskinfriction,S
sf

Thus, S
t(SngIc)
= S
ux
+S
pt
+S
s]
(6.3.33)
Moreover,pilesactinginagroupcouldundergolongtermconsolidationsettlement.
Settlementduetoaxialdeformationofasinglepilecanbeestimatedas:
S
ux
=
(
p
+u
s
)L
AL
P
(6.3.34)
Where, Q
p
= Loadtransferredtothesoilattiplevel
Q
s
= Totalskinfrictionload
L= Lengthofthepile
A= Crosssectionareaofthepile
E
p
= Youngsmodulusofpilematerial
a= 0.5forclayandsiltsoils
a= 0.67forsandysoil
Piletipsettlement,S
tp
canbeestimatedas:
S
tp
=
C
p

p
q
c
(6.3.35)
Where, Q
p
= Loadtransferredtothesoilattiplevel
D= Diameterofthepile
q
o
= Ultimateendbearingcapacity
C
p
= EmpiricalcoefficientasgiveninTable6.3.9
a= 0.67forsandysoil
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6195
Table6.3.9:TypicalValuesofC
p
forSettlementCalculationofSinglePile
SoilType ValuesofC
P

DrivenPile BoredPile
DenseSand 0.02 0.09
LooseSand 0.04 0.18
StiffClay 0.02 0.03
SoftClay 0.03 0.06
DenseSilt 0.03 0.09
LooseSilt 0.05 0.12

Skin friction acting along the shaft would stress the surrounding soil. Skin friction acts upward direction along the
pile. The force due to pile on surrounding soil would be in downward direction. When the pile is loaded, the pile
wouldslightlymovedown.Thepilewoulddragthesurroundingsoilwithit.Hence,thepilesettlementwouldoccur
duetoskinfrictionasgivenby:
S
s]
=
C
s

s
q
c
(6.3.36)
Where, C
s
= Empiricalcoefficient= [u.9S +u.16
L

C
p

C
p
= EmpiricalcoefficientasgiveninTable6.3.9
Q
s
= Totalskinfrictionload
D= Diameterofthepile
q
o
= Ultimateendbearingcapacity

ShortTermPileGroupSettlement
Shorttermorelasticpilegroupsettlementcanbeestimatedusingthefollowingrelation.
S
g
= S
t(sngIc)
[
B

0.5
(6.3.37)
Where, S
g
= Settlementofthepilegroup
S
t(single)
= Totalsettlementofasinglepile
B

= Smallestdimensionofthepilegroup
D= Diameterofthepile
Interestingly, geometry of the group does not have much of an influence on the settlement. As such, Group
SettlementRatio,R
s
ofapilegroupconsistingofnnumberofpilescanbeapproximatedasfollows.
R
s
=
S
g
S
t(singlc)
= (n)
0.5
(6.3.38)
SettlementofthegroupcanbeestimatedasthehighestvalueasobtainedfromEquations(6.3.37)and(6.3.38).
LongTermSettlementforPileGroup
Forpilegroups,settlementduetoconsolidationismoreimportantthanforsinglepiles.Consolidationsettlementof
pilegroupinclaysoiliscomputedusingthefollowingsimplifiedassumptions.
Thepilegroupisassumedtobeasolidfoundationwithadepth2/3
rd
thelengthofthepiles
Effectivestressatmidpointoftheclaylayerisusedtocomputesettlement
If soil properties are available consolidation settlement may obtained from the following equation. The depth of
significant stress increase (10%) or the depth of bed rock whichever is less should be taken for computation of
settlement.Stressdistributionmaybeconsideredas2verticalto1horizontal.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6196 Vol.2
ConsoliJotion scttlcmcnt, S =
C
c
H
1+c
c
log
ci
c
+ci
p
ci
c
(6.3.39)
Where, C
c
= Compressionindexofsoil
e
o
= initialvoidratio
H

= Thicknessoftheclaylayer

o
= Initialeffectivestressatmidpointoftheclaylayer

p
= Increaseineffectivestressatmidpointoftheclaylayerduetopileload.

Inabsenceofsoilpropertiesthefollowingempiricalequationsmaybeusedtoestimatethelongterm(consolidation
settlementofclaysoils.
Forclay: S =
H
M
Ln [
ci
1
c
c

]
(6.3.40)
Forsand: S =
2H
M
_[
ci
1
c
r

]
- [
ci
c
c
r

]
_ (6.3.41)

Where, H

= Thicknessoftheclaylayer

o
= Initialeffectivestressatmidpointoftheclaylayer

1
= Neweffectivestressatmidpointoftheclaylayerafterpileload.

r
= Referencestress(100kPa)
M= DimensionlessmodulusnumberasobtainedfromTable6.3.10
j= StressexponentasobtainedfromTable6.3.10.
Table6.3.10:SettlementParameters
Soil Density Modulus
Number,M
Stress
Exponent,j
Till V.DensetoDense 1000300 1.0
Gravel 40040 0.5
Sand Dense 400250 0.5
Sand MediumDense 250150 0.5
Sand Loose 150100 0.5
Silt Dense 20080 0.5
Silt MediumDense 8060 0.5
Silt Loose 6040 0.5
SiltyClay Stiff 6040 0.5
SiltyClay MediumStiff 2010 0.5
SiltyClay Soft 105 0.5
MarineClay Soft 205 0.0
OrganicClay Soft 205 0.0
Peat 51 0.0

3.10.4 DrilledShafts/DrilledPiers
3.10.4.1 General
Large diameter (more than 400 mm) bored piles are sometimes classified as drilled shaft or drilled piers. They are
usuallyprovidedwithenlargedbasecalledbell.Theprovisionsofthisarticleshallapplytothedesignofaxiallyand
laterallyloadeddrilledshafts/drilledpiersinsoilorextendingthroughsoiltoorintorock.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6197
3.10.4.2 Application
Drilled shafts may be considered when spread footings cannot be founded on suitable soil within a reasonable
depthandwhenpilesarenoteconomicallyviableduetohighloadsorobstructionstodriving.Drilledshaftsmaybe
used in lieu of spread footings as a protection against scour. Drilled shafts may also be considered to resist high
lateralorupliftloadswhendeformationtolerancesaresmall.
3.10.4.3 Material
Shaftsshall becastinplace concreteand mayinclude deformedbarsteelreinforcement,structuralsteelsections,
and/orpermanentsteelcasingasrequiredbydesign.
3.10.4.4 Embedment
Shaft embedment shall be determined based on vertical and lateral load capacities of both the shaft and sub
surfacematerials.
3.10.4.5 BatterShafts
Theuseofbatteredshaftstoincreasethelateralcapacityoffoundationsisnotrecommendedduetotheirdifficulty
ofconstructionandhighcost.Instead,considerationshouldfirstbegiventoincreasingtheshaftdiametertoobtain
therequiredlateralcapacity.
3.10.4.6 SelectionofSoilProperties
Soil and rock properties defining the strength and compressibility characteristics of the foundation materials are
requiredfordrilledshaftdesign.
3.10.4.7 GeotechnicalDesign
Drilledshaftsshallbedesignedtosupportthedesignloadswithadequatebearingandstructuralcapacity,andwith
tolerable settlements. In addition, the response of drilled shafts subjected to seismic and dynamic loads shall be
evaluated.
Shaftdesignshallbebasedonworkingstressprinciplesusingmaximumunfactoredloadsderivedfromcalculations
ofdead andliveloadsfromsuperstructures,substructures,earth(i.e.,slopingground),wind and traffic.Allowable
axialandlateralloadsmaybedeterminedbyseparatemethodsofanalysis.
The design methods presented herein for determining axial load capacity assume drilled shafts of uniform cross
section, with vertical alignment, concentric axial loading, and a relatively horizontal ground surface. The effects of
anenlargedbase,groupaction,andslopinggroundaretreatedseparately
3.10.4.7.1 BearingCapacityEquationsforDrilledShaft
Theultimateaxialcapacity(Q
ult
)ofdrilledshaftsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewiththeprincipleslaidforbored
piles.
CohesiveSoil
Skinfrictionresistanceincohesivesoilmaybedeterminedusingeitherthemethodorthemethodasdescribed
intherelevantsectionofdrivenpiles.However,forclaysoil,methodhaswidebeenusedbytheengineers.This
methodgives:

s
= os
u
(6.3.42)

Where, f
s
= Skinfriction
s
u
= undrainedshearstrengthofsoilalongtheshaft
Part6
StructuralDesign

6198 Vol.2
= adhesionfactor=0.55forundrainedshearstrength190kPa(4000psf)

For higher values of s

u
the value of may be taken from Fig. 6.3.3 as obtained from test data of previous
investigators. The skin friction resistance should be ignored in the upper 1.5 m of the shaft and along the bottom
one diameter of straight shafts because of interaction with the end bearing. If end bearing is ignored for some
reasons,theskinfrictionalongthebottomonediametermaybeconsidered.Forbelledshaft,skinfrictionalongthe
surfaceofthebellandalongtheshaftforadistanceofoneshaftdiameterabovethetopofbellshouldbeignored.

Fig.6.3.3AdhesionFactorforDrilledShaft(afterCoduto,1994)

Forendbearingofcohesivesoil,thefollowingrelationsgivenbyEquations(6.3.43)and(6.3.44)arerecommended.

kPa s N f
u c b
4000 =
(6.3.43)
N
c
= 6 j1 +u.2 [
L

b
[ 9 (6.3.18)
Where, f
b
= Endbearingstress
s
u
= undrainedshearstrengthofsoilalongtheshaft
N
c
= Bearingcapacityfactor
L= Lengthofthepile(Depthtothebottomoftheshaft)
D
b
= Diameteroftheshaftbase
If the base diameter is more than 1900 mm, the value of f
b
from Equation (6.3.43) could produce settlements
greater than 25 mm, which would be unacceptable for most buildings. To keep settlement within tolerable limits,
thevalueoff
b
shouldbereducedtof
b
bymultiplyingafactorF
r
suchthat:
b r b
f F f =
(6.3.44a)
F

=
2.5
120 o
1

b
B
r
+o
2
1.0 (6.3.44b)

1
= u.uu71 +u.uu21 [
L

b
0.0015 (6.3.44c)
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6199

2
= 1.S9
_
s
u
c
r
0.5
2
1.5 (6.3.44d)
Where, B
r
= Referencewidth=1ft=0.3m=12inch=300mm

r
= Referencestress=100kPa=2000psf
CohesionlessSoil
Skin friction resistance in cohesionless soil is usually determined using the method. The relevant equation is
reproducedagain:
z s
f =
(6.3.45)
S
K tan =
(6.3.46)
Where, f
s
= Skinfriction

z
= Effectiveverticalstressatmidpointofsoillayer
K= Coefficientoflateralearthpressure

s
= Soilshaftinterfacefrictionangle
Thevaluesof Kand
s
can beobtained fromthechartofTables6.3.11, fromthesoil frictionangle, and
preconstruction coefficient of lateral earth pressure K
o
. However, Ko is very difficult to determine. An
alternative is to compute directly using the following empirical relation.
[ = 1.S -u.1SS
_
z
B
r
(6.3.47)
Where, B
r
= Referencewidth=1ft=0.3m=12inch=300mm
z

= Depthfromthegroundsurfacetothemidpointofthestrata

Table6.3.11:Typical
S
/ and K/K
o
ValuesfortheDesignofDrilledShaft
ConstructionMethod
S
/ ConstructionMethod K/K
o

Openholeortemporarycasing 1.0
Dry construction with minimal side wall
disturbanceandpromptconcreting
1
Slurrymethodminimalslurrycake 1.0 Slurryconstructiongoodworkmanship 1
Slurrymethodheavyslurrycake 0.8 Slurryconstructionpoorworkmanship 2/3
Permanentcasing 0.7 Casingunderwater 5/6
Theunitendbearingcapacityfordrilledshaftincohesionlesssoilswillbelessthanthatfordrivenpilesbecauseof
variousreasonslikesoildisturbanceduringaugering,temporarystressreliefwhiletheholeisopen,largerdiameter
anddepthofinfluenceetc.Thereasonsarenotwelldefined,assuchthefollowingempiricalformuladevelopedby
ReeseandONell(1989)maybesuggestedtousetoestimateendbearingstress.

b
= u.6uo

N 4500 kPa (6.3.48)

Where, f
b
= Unitbearingresistance

r
= Referencestress=100kPa=2000psf
N= MeanSPTvalueforthesoilbetweenthebaseoftheshaftandadepthequaltotwotimes
thebasediameterbelowthebase.Nooverburdencorrectionisrequired(N=N
60
)
If the base diameter is more than 1200 mm, the value of f
b
from Equation (6.3.48) could produce settlements
greater than 25 mm, which would be unacceptable for most buildings. To keep settlement within tolerable limits,
thevalueoff
b
shouldbereducedtof
b
bymultiplyingafactorF
r
suchthat:
Part6
StructuralDesign

6200 Vol.2
b r b
f F f =
(6.3.49a)
F

= 4.17
B
r

b
1.0 (6.3.49b)
Where, B
r
= Referencewidth=1ft=0.3m=12inch=300mm
D
b
= Basediameterofdrilledshaft
3.10.4.7.2 OtherMethodsofEvaluatingAxialLoadCapacity
A number of other methods are available to estimate the ultimate axial load capacity of drilled shafts. These
methodsarebasedonNvaluesobtained fromStandard PenetrationTest(SPT)andonangle ofinternalfrictionof
sand. These methods may also be used to estimate the ultimate load carrying capacity of drilled shafts. Three of
thesemethodsareasfollows:
(i) MethodbasedontheStandardPenetrationTest(CanadianFoundationEngineeringManual,1985)
(ii) MethodbasedonTheoryofPlasticity(CanadianFoundationEngineeringManual,1985)
(iii) Tomlinson(1995)Method
ThesemethodsaresummarizedinAppendix6.3.C.
3.10.4.7.3 FactorofSafety

Similartoboredandrivenpiles,drilledshaftsshallbedesignedforaminimumoverallfactorofsafetyof2.0against
bearingcapacityfailure(endbearing,sideresistanceorcombined)whenthedesignisbasedontheresultsofaload
testconductedatthesite.Otherwise,itshallbedesignedforaminimumoverallfactorofsafety3.0.Theminimum
recommended overall factor of safety is based on an assumed normal level of field quality control during
construction.Ifanormalleveloffieldqualitycontrolcannotbeassured,higherminimumfactorsofsafetyshallbe
used. The recommended values of overall factor of safety on ultimate axial load capacity based on specified
constructionControlispresentedinTable6.3.8.
3.10.4.7.4 DeformationandSettlementofAxiallyLoadDrilledShaft
Similar to driven and bored piles, settlement of axially loaded shafts at working or allowable loads shall be
estimated using elastic or load transfer analysis methods. For most cases, elastic analysis will be applicable for
design provided the stress levels in the shaft are moderate relative to Q
ult
. Analytical methods are similar to that
provided in Section 3.11.3 for driven and bored piles. The charts provided in Appendix 6.3.C may also be used to
estimatethesettlementof drilledshaft.
3.10.4.7.5 LayeredSoilProfile
The shortterm settlement of shafts in a layered soil profile may be estimated by summing the proportional
settlementcomponentsfromlayersofcohesiveandcohesionlesssoilcomprisingthesubsurfaceprofile
3.10.4.7.6 TolerableMovement
Tolerable axial displacement criteria for drilled shaft foundations shall be developed by the structural designer
consistent with the function and type of structure, fixity of bearings, anticipated service life, and consequences of
unacceptable displacements on the structure performance. Drilled shaft displacement analyses shall be based on
the results of insitu and/or laboratory testing to characterize the loaddeformation behavior of the foundation
materials.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6201
3.10.4.8 GroupLoadingofDrilledShaft
3.10.4.8.1 CohesiveSoil
Evaluation of group capacity of shafts in cohesive soil shall consider the presence and contact of a cap with the
groundsurfaceandthespacingbetweenadjacentshafts.
Forashaftgroupwithacapinfirmcontactwiththeground,Q
ult
maybecomputedasthelesserof(1)thesumof
theindividualcapacitiesofeachshaftinthegroupor(2)thecapacityofanequivalentpierdefinedintheperimeter
areaofthegroup.Fortheequivalentpier,theshearstrengthofsoilshallnotbereducedbyanyfactor(e.g.,(
1
)to
determine the Q
s
component of Q
ult
, the total base area of the equivalent pier shall be used to determine the Q
T
componentofQ
ult
andtheadditionalcapacityofthecapshallbeignored.
Ifthecapisnotinfirmcontactwiththeground,orifthesoilatthesurfaceislooseorsoft,theindividualcapacityof
eachshaftshouldbereducedtotimesQ
T
foranisolatedshaft,where=0.67foracentertocenter(CTC)spacing
of3B(whereBistheshaftdiameter)and=1.0foraCTCspacingof6B.Forintermediatespacings,thevalueof
maybedeterminedbylinearinterpolation.Thegroupcapacitymaythenbecomputedasthelesserof(1)thesum
ofthemodifiedindividualcapacitiesofeachshaftinthegroup,or(2)thecapacityofanequivalentpierasdescribed
above.
3.10.4.8.2 CohesionlessSoil
Evaluation of group capacity of shafts in cohesion soil shall consider the spacing between adjacent shafts.
Regardlessofcap contactwiththeground,theindividualcapacityofeachshaftshouldbereducedtotimesQ
T
for
anisolatedshaft,where=0.67foracenterlocenter(CTC)spacingof3Band=1.0foraCTCspacingof8B.For
intermediate spacings, the value of may be determined by linear interpolation. The group capacity may be
computed as the lesser of (I) the sum of the modified individual capacities of each shaft in the group or (2) the
capacity of an equivalent pier circumscribing the group including resistance over the entire perimeter and base
areas.
3.10.4.8.3 StrongSoilOverlyingWeakSoil
Ifagroupofshaftsisembeddedinastrongsoildepositwhichoverliesaweakerdeposit(cohesionlessandcohesive
soil),considerationshallbegiventothepotentialforapunchingfailureofthelipintotheweakersoilstrata.Forthis
case,theunittipcapacityoftheequivalentshaft(q
E
)maybedeterminedusingthefollowing:
( )
Up Lo UP
t
E
q q q
HB
q =
10

(6.3.50)
Intheaboveequationq
UP
istheultimateunitcapacityofanequivalentshaftbearinginthestrongerupperlayerand
q
LO
istheultimateunitcapacityofanequivalentshaftbearingintheweakerunderlyingsoillayer.Iftheunderlying
soilunitisaweakercohesivesoilstrata,carefulconsiderationshallbegiventothepotentialforlargesettlementsin
theweakerlayer.
3.10.4.9 LateralLoadsonDrilledShaft
3.10.4.9.1 SoilLayering
The design of laterally loaded drilled shafts in layered soils shall be based on evaluation of the soil parameters
characteristicoftherespectivelayers
3.10.4.9.2 GroundWater
Thehighestanticipatedwaterlevelshallbeusedfordesign
Part6
StructuralDesign

6202 Vol.2
3.10.4.9.3 Scour
The potentialforlossoflateralcapacityduetoscourshallbeconsideredinthedesign. Ifheavy scourisexpected,
consideration shall be given to designing the portion of the shaft that would be exposed as a column. In all cases,
theshaftlengthshallbedeterminedsuchthatthedesignstructuralloadcanbesafelysupportedentirelybelowthe
probablescourdepth.
3.10.4.9.4 GroupAction
There is no reliable rational method for evaluating the group action for closely spaced, laterally loaded shafts.
Therefore,as ageneralguide, drilledshaftwith diameterBinagroup maybe consideredto actindividuallywhen
the centertocenter (CTC) spacing is greater than 2.5B in the direction normal to loading, and CTC > 8B in the
direction parallel to loading.For shaft layout not conforming to thesecriteria, the effects of shaft interaction shall
beconsidered inthe design. As ageneralguide, theeffectsofgroupactionforinline CTC<8Bmaybeconsidered
usingtheratios(CGS,1985)appearingasbelow:

CentretoCentreShaftSpacing
forInlineLoading
RatioofLateralResistanceof
ShaftinGrouptoSingleShaft
8B 1.00
6B 0.70
4B 0.40
3B 0.25
3.10.4.9.5 CyclicLoading
The effects of traffic, wind, and other nonseismic cyclic loading on the loaddeformation behavior of laterally
loadeddrilledshaftsshallbeconsideredduringdesign.Analysisofdrilledshaftssubjectedtocyclicloadingmayhe
consideredintheCOM624analysis(Reese.1984).
3.10.4.9.6 CombinedAxialandLateralLoading
Theeffectsoflateralloadingincombinationwithaxialloadingshallbeconsideredinthedesign.Analysisofdrilled
shaftssubjectedtocombinedloadingmaybeconsideredintheCOM624analysis(Reese.1984)
3.10.4.9.7 SlopingGround
Fordrilledshaftswhichextendthroughorbelowslopingground.thepotentialforadditionallateralloadingshallbe
consideredinthedesign.ThegeneralmethodofanalysisdevelopedbyBordenandGabr(1987)maybeusedforthe
analysisofshaftsinstableslopes.Forshaftsinmarginallystableslopes.Additionalconsiderationshouldbegivenfor
smaller factors of safety against slope failure or slopes showing ground creep, or when shafts extend through fills
overlying soft foundation soils and bear into more competent underlying soil or rock formations. For unstable
ground.detailedexplorations,testingandanalysisarerequiredtoevaluatepotentialadditionallateralloadsdueto
slopemovements
3.10.4.9.8 TolerableLateralMovements
Tolerable lateral displacement criteria for drilled shaft foundations shall be developed by the structural designer
consistentwiththefunctionandtypeofstructure,fixity,anticipatedservicelife,andconsequencesofunacceptable
displacementsonthestructureperformance.Drilledshaftlateraldisplacementanalysisshallbebasedontheresults
ofinsituand/orlaboratorytestingtocharacterizetheloaddeformationbehaviorofthefoundationmaterials.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6203
3.10.4.9.9 UpliftLoadsonDrilledShaft
Upliftcapacityshallrelyonlyonsideresistanceinconformancewithrelatedarticlesfordrivenpiles.Iftheshafthas
anenlargedbase,Q
s
shallbedeterminedinconformancewithrelatedarticlesfordrivenpiles.
3.10.4.9.10 ConsiderationofVerticalGroundMovement
Thepotentialforexternalloadingonashaftbyverticalgroundmovement(i.e.,negativeskinfrictiondowndragdue
tosettlementofcompressiblesoiloruplift duetoheave ofexpansivesoil)shall beconsideredas a partofdesign.
Fordesign purposes, itshall beassumedthatthe fullmagnitudeofmaximumpotential verticalgroundmovement
occurs.
NegativeSkinFriction
Evaluation of negative skin friction shall include a loadtransfer method of analysis to determine the neutral point
(i.e.,pointofzerorelativedisplacement)andloaddistributionalongshaft(e.g.,ReeseandO'Neill,1988).Duetothe
possibletimedependenceassociatedwithverticalgroundmovement,theanalysisshallconsidertheeffectoftime
onloadtransferbetweenthegroundandshaftandtheanalysisshallbeperformedforthetimeperiodrelatingto
the maximum axial load transfer to the shaft. Evaluation of negative skin friction shall include a loadtransfer
method of analysis to determine the neutral point (i.e., point of zero relative displacement) and load distribution
along shaft (e.g., Reese and O'Neill, 1988) Due to the possible time dependence associated with vertical ground
movement, the analysis shall consider the effect of time on load transfer between the ground and shaft and the
analysisshallbeperformedforthetimeperiodrelatingtothemaximumaxialloadtransfertotheshaft..
ExpansiveSoils
Shaftsdesignedforandconstructedinexpansivesoilshallextendtoasufficientdepthintomoisturestablesoilsto
provide adequate anchorage to resist uplift movement In addition; sufficient clearance shall be provided between
thegroundsurfaceandundersideofcapsorbeamsconnectingshaftstoprecludetheapplicationofupliftloadsat
theshaft/capconnectionfromswellinggroundconditions.
3.10.4.9.11 Dynamic/SeismicDesignofDrilledShaft
RefertoSeismicDesignsectionofthiscodeandLamandMartin(1986a;1986b)forguidanceregardingthedesign
ofdrilledshaftssubjectedtodynamicandseismicloads.
3.10.4.10 StructuralDesign,ShaftDimensionsandShaftSpacing
3.10.4.10.1 Design
Drilled shafts shall be designed to resist failure loads to insure that the shaft will not collapse or suffer loss of
serviceabilityduetoexcessivestressand/ordeformation.
3.10.4.10.2 Dimensions
All shafts should be sized in 150 mm increments with a minimum shaft diameter of 450 mm. The diameter of
columnssupportedbyshaftsshallbelessthanorequaltotheshaftdiameterB
3.10.4.10.3 CentertoCenterSpacing
ThecentertocenterspacingofdrilledshaftsofdiameterBshouldbe3Borgreatertoavoidinterferencebetween
adjacentshaftsduringconstruction.Ifcloserspacingisrequired,thesequenceofconstructionshallbespecifiedand
theinteractioneffectsbetweenadjacentshaftsshallbeevaluatedbythedesigner
Part6
StructuralDesign

6204 Vol.2
3.10.4.10.4 ReinforcementSpacing,ClearanceandEmbedment
Reinforcement
Wherethepotentialforlateralloadingisinsignificant,drilledshaftsneedtobereinforcedforaxialloadsonly.Those
portions of drilled shafts that are not supported laterally shall be designed as reinforced concrete columns in
accordance with relevant sections in structural design part of the code and the reinforcing steel shall extend a
minimumof5mbelowtheplanewherethesoilprovidesadequatelateralrestraint.Wherepermanentsteelcasing
isusedandtheshellissmoothpipeandmorethan3mminthickness,itmaybeconsideredasloadcarryinginthe
absenceofcorrosion.
The designof longitudinalandspiralreinforcementshallbeinconformancewiththerequirementsoftherelevant
sections of the structural design part of the code. Development of length of deformed reinforcement shall be in
conformancewiththerelevantsectionsofthestructuraldesignpartofthecode.
LongitudinalBarSpacing
Theminimumcleardistancebetweenlongitudinalreinforcementshallnothelessthan3timesthebardiameternor
3 times the maximum aggregate size. If bars arc bundled in forming the reinforcing cage, the minimum clear
distancebetweenlongitudinalreinforcementshallnotbelessthan3timesthediameterofthebundledbars.Where
heavyreinforcementisrequired,considerationmaybegiventoaninnerandouterreinforcingcage.
Splices
Splices shall develop the full capacity of the bar in tension and compression. The location of splices shall be
staggeredaroundtheperimeterofthereinforcingcagesoasnottooccuratthesamehorizontalplane.Splicesmal
be developed by lapping, welding, and special approved connectors. Splices shall be in conformance with the
relevantsectionsofthestructuraldesignpartofthecode.
TransverseReinforcement
Transversereinforcementshallbedesignedtoresiststressescausedbyfreshconcreteflowingfrominsidethecage
tothesideoftheexcavatedhole.Transversereinforcementmaybeconstructedofhoopsorspiralsteel.
HandlingStresses
Reinforcementcagesshallbedesignedtoresisthandlingandplacementstresses.
ReinforcementCover
The reinforcement shall be placed a clear distance of not less than 50 mm from the permanently cased or 75 mm
from the uncased sides. When shafts are constructed in corrosive or marine environments, or when concrete is
placedbythewaterorslurrydisplacementmethods,thecleardistanceshallnotbelessthan100mmforuncased
shaftsandshaftswithpermanentcasingsnotsufficientlycorrosionresistant.
The reinforcement cage shall be centered in the hole using centering devices. All steel centering devices shall be
epoxycoated.
ReinforcementintoSuperstructure
Sufficient reinforcement shall be provided at tit junction of the shaft with the superstructure to make a suitable
connection.Theembedmentofthereinforcementintothecapshallbeinconformancewithrelevantarticlesofthe
structuraldesignpartofthecode.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6205
3.10.4.10.5 EnlargedBases
Enlargedbasesshallbedesignedtoinsurethatplainconcreteisnotoverstressed.Theenlargedbaseshallslopeata
sideanglenotlessthan30degreesfromtheverticalandhaveabottomdiameternotgreaterthan3timesdiameter
oftheshaft.Thethicknessofthebottomedgeofenlargedbaseshallnotbelessthan150mm.
3.10.4.11 ConstructionandConcretingofDrilledShafts
3.10.4.11.1 MethodofConstruction
Drilled shafts may be constructed using the dry, casing, or wet method of construction, or a combination of
methods.Ineverycase,excavationofhole,placementofconcrete,andallotheraspectsofshaftconstructionshall
beperformedinconformancewiththeprovisionsofthiscode.
Theloadcapacityanddeformationbehaviorofdrilledshaftscanbegreatlyaffectedbythequalityandmethodsof
construction. The effects of construction methods are incorporated in design by application of factor of safety
consistent with the expected construction methods and level of field quality control measures undertaken as
describedintherelevantsectionsfordrivenpiles.
Where the spacing between shafts in a group is restricted, consideration shall be given to the sequence of
constructiontominimizetheeffectofadjacentshaftconstructionoperationsonrecentlyconstructedshafts.
Thefollowingconstructionprocedureshallbefollowed:
(i) Placepermanent/temporarysteelcasinginpositionandembedcasingtoeintofirmstrata.
(ii) Boreandexcavateinsidethesteelcasingdowntocasingtoelevel,ortoalevelapproved,andcontinue
excavation to final pile tip level using drilling mud. The fluid level inside casings shall at all times be at
least2metreshigherthanoutsidethecasings.
(iii) Carefullycleanupallmudorsedimentationfromthebottomofborehole.
(iv) Placereinforcementcage,inspectionpipesetc.
(v) Concretecontinuouslyunderwater,ordrillingfluid,byuseofthetremiemethod.
(vi) Afterhardening,breakoutthetopsectionoftheconcretepiletoreachsoundconcrete.
Indrillingofholesforallpiles,bentoniteandanyothermaterialshallbemixedthoroughlywithcleanwatertomake
asuspensionwhichshallmaintainthestabilityofthepileexcavationfortheperiodnecessarytoplaceconcreteand
complete construction. The control tests shall cover the determination of' density, viscosity, gel strength and pH
values.BentoniteslurryshallmeettheSpecificationsasshowninTable6.3.12.
Table6.3.12SpecificationsofBentoniteSlurry
ItemtobeMeasured RangeofResultsat20C TestMethod
Densityduringdrillingtosupport
excavation
greaterthan1.05g/ml MuddensityBalance
Densitypriortoconcreting lessthan1.25g/ml MuddensityBalance
Viscosity 3090seconds MarshConeMethod
pH 9.5to12
pHindicatorpaperstripsor
electricalpHmeter
Temporarycasingofapprovedqualityoranapprovedalternativemethodshallbeusedtomaintainthestabilityof
pileexcavations,whichmightotherwisecollapse.Temporarycasingsshallbefreefromsignificantdistortion.
Whereaboreholeisformedusingdrillingfluidformaintainingthestabilityofaboring,thelevelofthewaterorfluid
intheexcavationshallbemaintainedsothatthewaterorfluidpressurealwaysexceedsthepressureexertedbythe
Part6
StructuralDesign

6206 Vol.2
soilsandexternalgroundwater.Thewaterorfluidlevelshallbemaintainedatalevelnotlessthan2metresabove
thelevelofgroundwater.
The reinforcement shall be placed as indicated on the Drawings. Reinforcement in the form of a cage shall be
assembledwithadditionalsupport,suchasSpreaderforksandlacings,necessarytoformarigidcage.Hoops,links
orhelicalreinforcementshallfitcloselyaroundthemainlongitudinalbarsandbeboundtothembyapprovedwire,
theendsofwhichshallbeturnedintotheinteriorofthepileorpour.Reinforcementshallbeplacedandmaintained
inposition.Thecovertoallreinforcementforpilecapandboredcastinplacepileshallbenotlessthan75mm.
Jointsinlongitudinalsteelbarsshallbepermittedunlessotherwisespecified.Jointsinreinforcementshallbesuch
that the full strength of the bar is effective across the joint and shall be made so that there is no relative
displacementofthereinforcementduringtheconstructionofthepile.
Jointsinlongitudinalbarsinpileswithtension(forinstancefortestloading)shallbecarriedoutbyweldingorother
approvedmethod.
Concretetobeplacedunderwaterordrillingfluidshallbeplacedbytremieequipmentandshallnotbedischarged
freely into the water or drilling fluid. The tremie equipment shall be designed to minimize the occurrence of
entrappedairandothervoids,sothatitcausesminimalsurfacedisturbance,whichisparticularlyimportantwhena
concretewaterinterfaceexists.Itshallbesodesignedthatexternalprojectionsareminimised,allowingthetremie
topassthroughreinforcingcageswithoutcausingdamage.Theinternalfaceofthepipeofthetremieshallbefree
fromprojections.Thetremiepipesshallmeetthefollowingrequirements:
(i) The tremie pipes shall be fabricated of heavy gage steel pipe to withstand all anticipated handling
stress.Aluminiumpipeshallnotbeusedforplacingconcrete.
(ii) Tremiepipesshouldhaveadiameterlargeenoughtoensurethataggregatescausedblockagewillnot
occur.Thediameterofthetremiepipeshallbe200mmto300mm.
(iii) Thetremiepipesshallbesmoothinternally.
(iv) Since deep placement of concrete will be carried out, the tremie shall be made in sections/lengths
with detachable joints that allow the upper sections/lengths to be removed as the placement
progresses.
(v) Sections may be joined by flanged, bolted connections (with gaskets) or may be screwed together.
Whatever joint technique is selected, joints between tremie sections must be watertight. The joint
systemselectedshallbetestedforwatertightnessbeforebeginningofconcreteplacement.
(vi) ThejointsystemtobeusedshallneedapprovaloftheEngineer.
(vii) Thetremiepipeshouldbemarkedtoallowquickdeterminationofthedistancefromthesurfaceofthe
watertothemouthofthetremie.
(viii) The tremie should be provided with adequately sized funnel or hopper to facilitate transfer of
sufficientconcretefromthedeliverydevicetothetremie.
Before placing concrete, it shall be ensured that there is no accumulation of silt, other material, or heavily
contaminatedbentonitesuspensionatthebaseoftheboring,whichcouldimpairthefreeflowofconcretefromthe
pipe of the tremie. Flushing of boreholes before concreting with fresh drilling fluid/mud is preferred..A sample of
the bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the boring using an approved sampling device. If the
specific gravity of the suspension exceeds 1.25, the placing of concrete shall not proceed. In this event the
Contractorshallmodifythemudquality.
During and after concreting, care shall be taken to avoid damage to the concrete from pumping and dewatering
operations.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6207
The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight throughout. The pipe shall extend to the base of
theboringandaslidingplugorbarriershallbeplacedinthepipetopreventdirectcontactbetweenthefirstcharge
of concrete in the pipe of the tremie and the water or drilling fluid. The pipe shall at all times penetrate the
concrete, which has previously been placed and shall not be withdrawn from the concreteurrtil completion of
concreting. The bottom of the tremie pipe shall be embedded in the fresh concrete at least 2.0 metres and
maintained at that depth throughout concreting. At all times a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained
withinthepipetoensurethatthepressurefromitexceedsthatfromthewaterordrillingfluid.
To ensure the quality of concrete being free from mud, clay lumps or any other undesirable materials mixed with
concreteatthetopportionofthepile,freshconcreteshallbeoverflowedsufficientlyattheendoftheeachpour.
Thelevelofconcretepouredattheendofconcretingoperationshallbeatleast600mmhigherthantheelevation
ofthepileatcutoff.
3.10.4.11.2 Concreting
In drilled shafts/castinsitu bored piles, concrete shall be placed only after excavation has been completed,
inspected and accepted, and steel reinforcement accurately placed and adequately supported. Concrete shall be
placedinonecontinuousoperationinsuchamannerastoensuretheexclusionofanyforeignmatterandtosecure
a full sized shaft. Concrete shall not be placed through water except where tremie methods are approved. When
depositingconcretefromthetopofpile,theconcreteshallnotbechuteddirectlyintothepilebutshallbepoured
inarapidandcontinuousoperationthroughafunnelhoppercentredatthetopofthepile.
Forlargediameterholesconcretemaybeplacedbytremieorbydropbottombucket;forsmalldiameterboreholes
atremieshall beutilized.In tremieconcreting,toeofthe tremieshall besetatamaximumof150mmabovethe
bottom of the borehole. Maximum permissible siltation in bore hole prior to start of concrete operation shall be
75mm.Aslumpof125mmto150mmshallbemaintainedforconcretingbytremie.Incaseoftremieconcretingfor
pilesofsmallerdiameterandlengthupto10m,theminimumcementcontentshallbe350kg/m
3

ofconcrete.For
larger diameter and/or deeper piles, the minimum cement content shall be 400kg/m
3

of concrete. See relevant

sectionsofthecodeforfurtherspecification
For uncased concrete piles, if pile shafts are formed through unstable soil and concrete is placed in an open drill
hole, a steel liner shall be inserted in the hole prior to placing concrete. If the steel liner is withdrawn during
concreting, the level of concrete shall be maintained above the bottom of the liner to a sufficient height to offset
anyhydrostaticorlateralearthpressure.
If concrete is placed by pumping through a hollow stem auger, the auger shall not be permitted to rotate during
withdrawalandshallbewithdrawninasteadycontinuousmotion.Concretepumpingpressuresshallbemeasured
andshallbemaintainedhighenoughatalltimestooffsethydrostaticandlateralearthpressure.Concretevolumes
shall be measured to ensure that the volume of concrete placed in each pile is equal to or greater than the
theoreticalvolumeoftheholecreatedbytheauger.Iftheinstallationprocessofanypileisinterruptedoralossof
concretingpressureoccurs,theholeshallberedrilledtooriginaldepthandreformed.
Auguredcastinsitupileshallnotbeinstalledwithin6pilediameterscentretocentreofapilefilledwithconcrete
lessthan24hoursold.Ifconcretelevelinanycompletedpiledrops,thepileshallberejectedandreplaced.Bored
castinsitu concrete piles shall not be drilled/bored within a clear distance of 3 m from an adjacent pile with
concretelessthan48hoursold.
For underreamed piles, the slump of concrete shall range between 100 mm and 150 mm for concreting in water
freeholes.
3.10.4.11.3 ConcretingunderWater
Forconcretingunderwater,theconcreteshallcontainatleast10percentmorecementthanthatrequiredforthe
samemixplacedinthedry.Theamountofcoarseaggregateshallbenotlessthanoneandahalftimes,normore
Part6
StructuralDesign

6208 Vol.2
thantwotimes,thatofthefineaggregate.Thematerialsshallbesoproportionedastoproduceaconcretehavinga
slumpofnotlessthan100mm,normorethan150mm,exceptwhereplasticizingadmixturesisusedinwhichcase,
theslumpmaybe175mm.
Successful placement of concrete under water requires preventing flow of water across or through the placement
site.Onceflowiscontrolled,thetremieplacementconsistsofthefollowingthreebasicsteps:
i) The first concrete placed is physically separated from the water by using a rabbit or godevil in the
pipe,orbyhavingthepipemouthcappedorsealedandthepipedewatered.
ii) Oncefilledwithconcrete,thepipeisraisedslightlytoallowtherabbittoescapeortobreaktheend
seal.Concretewillthenflowoutanddevelopamoundaroundthemouthofthepipe.Thisistermedas
establishingaseal.
iii) Oncethesealisestablished,freshconcreteisinjectedintothemassofexistingconcrete.
Twomethodsarenormallyusedfortheplacement ofconcreteusingtremiepipe,namely,thecappedtremiepipe
approach and the rabbit plug approach. In the capped tremie approach the tremie pipe should have a seal,
consistingofabottomplateorapprovedequal,thatsealsthebottomofthepipeuntilthepipereachesthebottom
ofexcavation.Thetremiepipeshouldbefilledwithenoughconcretebeforebeingraisedoffthebottom.Thetremie
pipe should then be raised a maximum of 150 mm (6 inch) to initiate flow. The tremie pipe should not be lifted
furtheruntilamoundisestablishedaroundthemouthofthetremiepipe.Initialliftingofthetremieshouldbedone
slowlytominimizedisturbanceofmaterialsurroundingthemouthofthetremie.
Intherabbitplugapproach,opentremiepipeshouldbesetonthebottom,therabbitpluginsertedatthetop
and then concrete should be added to the tremie slowly to force the rabbit downward separating the concrete
fromthewater.Oncethetremiepipeisfullychargedandtherabbitreachesthemouthofthetremie,thetremie
pipeshouldbeliftedamaximumof150mm(6inch)offthebottomtoallowtherabbittoescapeandtostartthe
concreteflowing.Afterthis,atremiepipeshouldnotbeliftedagainuntilasufficientmoundisestablishedaround
themouthofthetremie.
Tremies should be embedded in the fresh concrete a minimum of 1.0 to 1.5 m (3 to 5 ft) and maintained at that
depth throughout concreting to prevent entry of water into the pipe. Rapid raising or lowering of the tremie pipe
shouldnotbeallowed.Allverticalmovementsofthetremiepipemustbedoneslowlyandcarefullytopreventloss
ofseal.Iflossofsealoccursinatremie,placementofconcretethroughthetremiemustbehaltedimmediately.
Thetremiepipemustberemoved,theendplatemustberestartedusingthecappedtremieapproach.Inorderto
prevent washing of concrete in place, a rabbit plug approach must not be used to restart a tremie after loss of
seal.
Means of raising or lowering tremie pipes and of removing pipes smoothly without loss of concrete and without
disturbing placed concrete or trapping air in the concrete Shall be provided. Pipes shall not be moved horizontally
whiletheyareembeddedinplacedconcreteorwhiletheyhaveconcretewithinthem.
Underwater concrete shall be placed continuously for the whole of a pour to its full depth approved by the
Engineer,withoutinterruptionbymealbreaks,changeofshift,movementsofplacingpositions,andthelike.Delays
in placement may allow the concrete to stiffen and resist flow once placement resumes. The rate of pour from
individualtremieshallbearrangedsothatconcretedoesnotriselocallytoalevelgreaterthan500mmabovethe
averagelevelofthesurroundingconcrete.
Tremie blockages which occur during placement should be cleared extremely carefully to prevent loss of seal. If a
blockageoccurs,thetremieshouldbequicklyraised150to600mm(6inchto2ft)andthenloweredinanattempt
todislodgetheblockage.Thedepthofpipeembedmentmustbecloselymonitoredduringallsuchattempts.Ifthe
blockagecannotbeclearedreadily,thetremieshallberemoved,cleared,resealed,andrestarted.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6209
Thevolumeofconcreteinplaceshouldbemonitoredthroughouttheplacement.Underrunsareindicativeoflossof
tremie seal since the washed and segregated aggregates will occupy a greater volume. Overruns are indicative of
lossofconcretefromtheinsideofthesteelpile.
3.11 FIELDTESTSFORDRIVENPILESANDDRILLEDSHAFTS

3.11.1 IntegrityTest

Lowstrainintegritytestingofpilesisatoolforqualitycontroloflongstructuralelementsthatfunctioninamanner
similartofoundationpiles,regardlessoftheirmethodofinstallation,providedthattheyarereceptivetolowstrain
impact testing. The test provides velocity (and optionally force) data, which assists evaluation of pile integrity and
pilephysicaldimensions(i.e.,crosssectionalarea,length),continuityandconsistencyofpilematerial.Thetestdoes
not give any information regarding the pile bearing capacity or about pile reinforcement. Integrity test principles
have been well documented in literature (ASTM 588296; Klingmuller, 1993).There exist two methods of integrity
testing,namely,PulseEcho Method(PEM)andTransient ResponseMethod(TRM).InPulseEchoMethod,thepile
head motion is measured as a function of time. The time domain record is then evaluated for pile integrity. In
Transient Response Method, the pile head motion and force (measured with an instrumented hammer) are
measuredasafunctionoftime.Thedataarethenevaluatedusuallyinthefrequencydomain.
In order to check the structural integrity of the piles Integrity tests shall be performed on the piles in accordance
withtheprocedureoutlinedinASTMD5882.Thetestiscarriedoutbypressingatransducerontoapiletopwhile
striking the pile head with a hand hammer. The Sonic Integrity Testing (SIT)system registers the impact of the
hammerfollowedbytheresponseofthepileandshowsthedisplay.Ifinstructedbytheoperator,thesignalwillbe
stored in the memory of the SITsystem together with other information, such as pile number, date, time, site,
amplication factor, filter length etc. The reflectograms are horizontally scaled and vertically amplified to
compensate external soil friction, which facilitate the interpretation. Consequently, the reflection of the pile toe
matchesthelengthofthepilewhichwillbeconfirmedbytheSITsystem.Incaseofanydefects,theexactlocation
canbedeterminedfromthegraphonthedisplay.
For any project where pile has been installed, integrity tests shall be performed on 100% of the piles. Integrity
testingmaynotidentifyallimperfections,butitcanbeusedinidentifyingmajordefectswithintheeffectivelength.
Inliterature,therearemanyexamplesthathighlightthesuccessoflowstrainintegritytesting(Klingmuller,1993).
3.11.1.1 SomeFactorsInfluencingImplicationofPileIntegrityTest
(a) This sonic echo pile integrity testing or dynamic response method is based on measuring (or observing on an
oscilloscope)thetimeittakesforareflectedcompressionstresswavetoreturntothetopofthepile.Somewaves
willbereflectedbya discontinuityinthepileshaft.When thecompressivestrength is known forthepilematerial
involved,thedepthtothediscontinuityandthepilelengthcanbedetermined.
(b) Ontheotherhand,areaofpileshaftandhenceitsdiameter,isdeterminedfromimpedanceofwaveresponse,
while impedance in any section is a function of elastic modulus of pile material, shaft area and wave velocity
propagating through that section. If the concrete material is uniform throughout the pile length, elastic modulus
andthewavevelocity(provideddisturbancefromothersourceofvibrationnearbyisinsignificant)areconstantfor
thatpile.Inthatcase,changesinimpedanceusuallyindicatechangesofpilecrosssectionalarea.
(c) Whileevaluatingpileintegrity(i.e.,pilelengthandshaftdiameter),thewavevelocityisusuallyassumedtobe
constant throughout pile length. Therefore, the reliability of integrity evaluation entirely depends on the pile
materialanditsuniformitythroughoutshaftlengthwhilecastingwasdone.Thusthelengthanddiameterobtained
frompileintegritytestismerelyanindicationoftheactuallengthanddiameterofthetestedpiles.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6210 Vol.2
(d) Besides, this test can only assess shaft integrity and gives no information for pile bearing capacity
determination.However,ifalargenumberofpilesaretested,itisgenerallyeasytofocusthepileshavingunusual
responses.Therefore,wheneveranintegritytestingiscontemplated,considerationmustbegiventothelimitations
of the various methods/process of pile installation (i.e. pile driving or casting) and the possible need for further
investigation(suchaspileloadtest)tochecktheresultsofsuchtesting.
It should be noted here that pile integrity test is an indicative test about the length and quality of concrete in the
pile. This test does not give any idea about its actual load capacity. It is usually suggestive to substantiate the
findings of integrity test by excavation or pull out of the pile to facilitate decisions about final acceptance or
rejectionofanypile.Becauseofthelargecostinvolvedinapileloadtest,thenecessityofintegritytestinfacilitating
theselectionofpilesforloadtestisarationalapproachforqualityandsafetyassuranceofpiledfoundations.
3.11.2 AxialLoadTests
Whereaccurateestimateofaxialloadcarryingcapacityofapileisrequiredtestsinaccordancewith"StandardTest
Method for Piles Under Static Compressive Load", (ASTM D1143) or equivalent shall be performed on individual
piles. For a major project, at least 2% of piles (test piles plus service piles) shall be tested in each area of uniform
subsoil conditions.Wherenecessary, additionalpilesmaybeloadtestedtoestablish thesafedesigncapacity.The
ultimateloadcarryingcapacityofasinglepilemaybedeterminedwithreasonableaccuracyfromloadtesting.The
loadtestonapileshallnotbecarriedoutearlierthanfourweeksfromthedateofcastingthepile.Aminimumof
onepileateachprojectshallbeloadtestedforboredcastinsitupiles.
Two principal types of test may be used for compression loading on piles the constant rate of penetration (CRP)
test and the maintained load (ML) test. The CRP test was developed by Whitaker (1953). The CRP method is
essentiallyatesttodeterminetheultimateloadonapileandisthereforeappliedonlytopreliminarytestpilesor
researchtypeinvestigationswherefundamentalpilebehaviourisbeingstudied.Inthistestthecompressiveforceis
progressively increased to cause the pile to penetrate the soil at constant rate until failure occurs. The rate of
penetration selected usually corresponds to that of shearing soil samples in unconfined compression tests.
However, rate does not affect results significantly. In CRP test the recommended rates of penetration are 0.75
mm/min for friction piles in clay and 1.55mm/min for piles end bearing in granular soil. The CRP test shall not be
used for checking compliance with specification requirements for the maximum settlement at given stages of
loading.
Maintainedload(ML)testissofarthemostusualoneinpractice.IntheMLtesttheloadisincreasedinstagesto
1.5 times or twice the working load with time settlement curve recorded at each stage of loading and unloading.
Thegeneralprocedureistoapplystaticloadsinincrementsof25%oftheanticipateddesignload.TheMLtestmay
alsobetakentofailurebyprogressivelyincreasingtheloadinstages.IntheMLtest,theloadtestarrangementsas
specifiedin"StandardTestMethodforPilesunderStaticAxialCompressiveLoad",(ASTMD1143),shallbefollowed.
According to ASTM D1143 each load increment is maintained until the rate of settlement is not greater than 0.25
mm/hror2hoursiselapsed,whicheveroccursfirst.Afterthatthenextloadincrementisapplied.Thisprocedureis
followedforallincrementsofload.Afterthecompletionofloadingifthetestpilehasnotfailedthetotaltestloadis
removed any time after twelve hours if the butt settlement over one hour period is not greater than 0.25 mm
otherwise the total test load is kept on the pile for 24 hours. After the required holding time, the test load is
removed in decrement of 25% of the total test load with 1 hour between decrement. If failure occurs, jacking the
pile is continued until the settlement equals 15% of the pile diameter or diagonal dimension. Details of the test
procedurehavebeenoutlinedinASTMD1143.
Selectionofanappropriateloadtestmethodshallbebasedonanevaluationoftheanticipatedtypesandduration
ofloadsduringservice,andshallincludeconsiderationofthefollowing:
(a) Theimmediategoalsoftheloadtest(i.e.,toproofloadthefoundationandverifydesigncapacity)
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6211
(b) Theloadsexpectedtoactontheproductionfoundation(compressiveand/oruplift,deadand/orlive),and
thesoilconditionspredominantintheregionofconcern.
(c) Thelocalpracticeortraditionalmethod
Asaminimum,thewrittentestproceduresshouldincludethefollowing:
(a) Apparatusforapplyingloadsincludingreactionsystemandloadingsystem.
(b) Apparatusformeasuringmovements.
(c) Apparatusformeasuringloads.
(d) Proceduresforloadingincludingratesofloadapplication,loadcyclingandmaximumload.
(e) Proceduresformeasuringmovements.
(f) Safetyrequirements.
(g) Datapresentationrequirementsandmethodsofdataanalysis.
(h) Drawingsshowingtheproceduresandmaterialstobeusedtoconstructtheloadtestapparatus.
3.11.2.1 LoadTestEvaluationMethods
Anumberofarbitraryorempiricalmethodsareusedtoserveascriteriafordeterminingtheallowableandultimate
load carrying capacity from pile load test. Some are based on maximum permissible gross or net settlement as
measuredatthepilebuttwhiletheothersarebasedontheperformanceofthepileduringtheprogressoftesting
(Chellis, 1961; Whitaker, 1976; Poulos and Davis, 1980; Fuller, 1983). It is recommended to evaluate the load
carryingcapacityofpilesanddrilledshaftusinganyofthefollowingmethods:
(a) DavissionOffsetLimit
(b) BritishStandardInstitutionCriterion
(c) IndianStandardCriteria
(d) ButlerHoyCriterion
(e) BrinchHansen90%Criterion
(f) Othermethodsapprovedbyengineer
Therecommendedcriteriatobeusedforevaluatingtheultimateandallowableloadcarryingcapacityofpilesand
drilledshaftaresummarizedbelow.
(a) A very useful method of computing the ultimate failure load has been reported by Davisson (1973). This
methodisbasedonoffsetmethodthatdefinesthefailureload.Theelasticshorteningofthepile,consideredas
point bearing, free standing column, is computed and plotted on the loadsettlement curve, with the elastic
shorteninglinepassingthroughtheorigin.Theslopeoftheelasticshorteninglineis20.Anoffsetlineisdrawn
parallel to the elastic line. The offset is usually 0.15 inch plus a quake factor, which is a function of pile tip
diameter.Fornormalsizepiles,thisfactorisusuallytakenas0.1Dinch,whereDisthediameterofpileinfoot.
Theintersectionoftheoffsetlinewiththegrossloadsettlementcurvedeterminesthearbitraryultimatefailure
load.
(b) Terzaghi(1942)reportedthattheultimateloadcapacityofapilemaybeconsideredasthatloadwhichcausesa
settlement equal to 10% of the pile diameter. However, this criterion is limited to a case where no definite
failure point or trend is indicated by the loadsettlement curves (Singh, 1990). This criterion has been
incorporatedinBS8004:1986ofBritishStandardInstitution(1986)whichrecommendsthattheultimateload
capacityofpileshouldbethatwhichcausesthepiletosettleadepthof10%ofpilewidthordiameter.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6212 Vol.2
(c) AccordingtotheCodeofPractice2004ofBritishStandardsInstitution(1972),theallowableloadcapacity
of pile should be 50% of the final load, which causes the pile to settle a depth of 10% of pile width or
diameter.
(d) AccordingtoIS:2911(PartVI)1979ultimateloadcapacityofpileissmallerofthefollowingtwo:
(i) Load corresponding to a settlement equal to 10% of the pile diameter in the case of normal
uniformdiameterpileor7.5%ofbasediameterincaseofunderreamedorlargediametercastin
situpile.
(ii) Loadcorrespondingtoasettlementof12mm.
(e) AccordingtoIndianStandardCodeofpractice(IS:29111979),allowableloadcapacityofpileissmallerof
thefollowing:
(i) Twothirdsofthefinalloadatwhichthetotalsettlementattainsavalueof12mm.
(ii) Half of the final load at which total settlement equal to 10% of the pile diameter in the case of
normaluniformdiameterpileor7.5%ofbasediameterincaseofunderreamedpile.
(f) ButlerandHoy(1976)statedthattheintersectionofthetangentattheinitialstraightportionoftheload
settlementcurveandthetangentataslopepointof1.27mm/tondeterminesthearbitraryultimatefailure
load.
(g) The Brinch and Hansen (1963) proposed a definition for ultimate load capacity as that load for which the
settlementistwicethesettlementunder90percentofthefulltestload.
(h) Where failure occurs, the ultimate load may be taken to calculate the allowable load using a factor of
safetyof2.0to2.5.
3.11.2.2 SomeFactorsInfluencingInterpretationsofLoadTestResults
Thefollowingfactorsshouldbetakenintoaccountwhileinterpretingthetestresultsfrompileloadtests:
(a) Potentialresidualloads(strains)inthepilewhichcouldinfluencetheinterpreteddistributionofloadalong
thepileshaft.
(b) Possible interaction of friction loads from test pile with downward friction transferred to the soil from
reactionpilesobtainingpartoralloftheirsupportinsoilatlevelsabovethetiplevelofthetestpile.
(c) Changes in pore water pressure in the soil caused by pile driving, construction fill and other construction
operationswhichmayinfluencethetestresultsforfrictionalsupportinrelativelyimpervioussoilssuchas
clayandsilt.
(d) Differences between conditions at time of testing and after final construction such as changes in grade
groundwaterlevel.
(e) Potentiallossofsoilresistancefromeventssuchasexcavation,orscour,orbothofsurroundingsoil.
(f) Possibledifferenceintheperformanceofapileinagrouporofapilegroupfromthatofasingleisolated
pile.
(g) Affect on long term pile performance of factors such as creep, environmental effects on pile material,
frictionloadsfromswellingsoilsandstrengthlosses.
(h) Type of structure to be supported, including sensitivity of structure to movement and relations between
liveanddeadloads.
(i) Special testing procedures which may be required for the application of certain acceptance criteria or
methodsofinterpretation.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6213
(j) Requirement that all conditions for non tested piles be basically identical to those for test pile including
suchthingassubsurfaceconditions, piletype,length,sizeandstiffness,andpileinstallationmethodsand
equipmentsothatapplicationorextrapolationofthetestresultstosuchotherpilesisvalid
3.11.3 UpliftCapacityofPileandDrilledShaft
Where required by the design, the uplift capacity of pile and drilled shaft shall be determined by an approved
method or analysis based on a minimum factor of safety of three or by load tests conducted in accordance with
ASTM D3689 (Standard Test Method for Individual Piles Under Static Axial Tensile Load). The maximum allowable
uplift load shall not exceed the ultimate load capacity as determined using the results of load test conducted in
accordancewithASTMD3689,dividedbyafactorofsafetyof2.0.Whereupliftisduetowindorseismic loading,
the minimum factor of safety shall be 2.0 where capacity is determined by an analysis and 1.5 where capacity is
determinedbyloadtests.
Forgrouppilesubjectedtouplift,theallowableworkingupliftloadforthegroupshallbecalculatedbyanapproved
methodofanalysiswherethepilesinthegroupareplacedatcentretocentrespacingofatleast2.5timestheleast
horizontaldimensionofthelargestpile,theallowableworkingupliftloadforthegroupispermittedtobecalculated
asthelesserofthetwo:
(a) Theproposedindividualworkingloadtimesthenumberofpilesinthegroup.
(b) Twothirds of the effective weight of the group and the soil contained within a block defined by the
perimeterofthegroupandtheembeddedlengthofthepile.
(c) Onehalf the effective weight of the pile group and the soil contained within a block defined by the
perimeter of the group and the embedded pile length plus onehalf the total soil shear on the peripheral
surfaceofthegroup
Upliftortensiontestonpilessubjecttotension/upliftshallbeperformedbyacontinuousrateofuplift(CRU)oran
incrementalloading(i.e.ML)test.Whereupliftloadsareintermittentorcyclicincharacter,asinwaveloadingona
marine structure, it is recommended to adopt repetitive loading on the test pile. The tests shall be performed in
accordancewith"StandardTestMethodforIndividualPilesUnderStaticAxialTensileLoad",(ASTMD3689).
PART C: ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS IN PLANNING, DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF
BUILDINGFOUNDATIONS(SECTIONS3.13to3.22)
3.12 EXCAVATION
Excavationforbuildingfoundationorforotherpurposeshallbedoneinasafemannersothatnodangertolifeand
propertyprevailsatanystageoftheworkoraftercompletion.Therequirementsofthissectionshallbesatisfiedfor
allsuchworksinadditiontothoseofSec3.3ofPart7.
Permanent excavations shall have retaining walls of sufficient strength made of steel, masonry, or reinforced
concretetoretaintheembankment,togetherwithanysurchargeload.
Excavationsforanypurposeshallnotextendwithin300mmunderanyfootingorfoundation,unlesssuchfootingor
foundationisfirstproperlyunderpinnedorprotectedagainstsettlement.
3.12.1 NoticetoAdjoiningProperty
Prior to any excavation close to an adjoining building in another property, a written notice shall be given to the
owner of the adjoining property at least 10 days ahead of the date of excavation. The person undertaking the
excavationshall,wherenecessary,incorporateadequateprovisionsandprecautionarymeasurestoensuresafetyof
the adjoining property and shall supply the details of such measures in the notice to the owner of the adjoining
Part6
StructuralDesign

6214 Vol.2
property.HeshallobtainapprovaloftheAuthorityregardingtheprotectiveprovisions,andpermissionoftheowner
oftheadjoiningpropertyregardingtheproposedexcavationinwriting.
Theprotectivemeasuresshallincorporatethefollowing:
(a) Wherethelevelofthefoundationsoftheadjoiningstructureisatorabovethelevelofthebottomofthe
proposedexcavation,theverticalloadoftheadjoiningstructureshallbesupportedbyproperfoundations,
underpinning,orotherequivalentmeans.
(b) Where the level of the foundations of the adjoining structure is below the level of the bottom of the
proposed excavation, provision shall be made to support any increased vertical or lateral load on the
existingadjoiningstructurecausedbythenewconstruction.
Ifongivingtherequirednotice,incorporatingorproposingtoincorporatetheprotectiveprovisionswhichhaveduly
beenapprovedbytheAuthority,theowneroftheadjoiningpropertyrefusestopermittheproposedexcavationor
toallownecessaryaccessandotherfacilitiestothepersonundertakingtheexcavationforprovidingthenecessary
andapprovedprotectiontotheadjoiningproperty,theresponsibilityforanydamagetotheadjoiningpropertydue
toexcavationshallbethatoftheowneroftheadjoiningproperty.
3.12.2 ExcavationWork
Everyexcavationshallbeprovidedwithsafemeansofentryandexitkeptavailableatalltimes.Whenanexcavation
hasbeencompleted,orpartlycompletedanddiscontinued,abandonedorinterrupted,ortherequiredpermitshave
expired, the lot shall be filled and graded to eliminate all steep slopes, holes, obstructions or similar sources of
hazard. Fill material shall consist of clean, noncombustible substances. The final surface shall be graded in such a
mannerastodrainthelot,eliminatepockets,preventaccumulationofwater,andprecludeanythreatofdamageto
thefoundationsonthepremisesorontheadjoiningproperty.
3.12.2.1 MethodsofProtection
3.12.2.1.1 Shoring,BracingandSheeting
Withtheexceptionofrockcuts,thesides ofallexcavations,includingrelatedorresultingembankments,1.5mor
greater in depth or height measured from the level of the adjacent ground surface to the deepest point of
excavation, shall be protected and maintained by shoring, bracing and sheeting, sheet piling, or other retaining
structures. Alternatively, excavated slopes may be inclined not steeper than 1:1, or stepped so that the average
slope is not steeper than forty five degrees with no step more than 1.5 m high, provided such slope does not
endangeranystructure,includingsubsurfacestructures.Allsidesorslopesofexcavationsorembankmentsshallbe
inspectedafterrainstorms,oranyotherhazardincreasingevent,andsafeconditionsshallberestored.Sheetpiling
and bracingneededintrenchexcavations shall haveadequatestrengthtoresistthepossibleforces resultingfrom
earthorsurchargepressure.DESIGNOFPROTECTIONSYSTEMSHALLBECHECKEDBYAGEOTECHNICALENGINEER.
3.12.2.1.2 GuardRail
Aguardrailorasolidenclosureatleast1mhighshallbeprovidedalongtheopensidesofexcavations,exceptthat
such guard rail or solid enclosure may be omitted from a side or sides when access to the adjoining area is
precluded,orwheresideslopesareoneverticaltothreehorizontalorflatter.
3.12.2.2 PlacingofConstructionMaterial
Excavatedmaterialsandsuperimposedloadssuchasequipment,trucks,etc.shallnotbeplacedclosertotheedge
of the excavation than a distance equal to one and onehalf times the depth of such excavation, unless the
excavationisinrockorthesideshavebeenslopedorsheetpiled(orsheeted)andshoredtowithstandthelateral
force imposed by such superimposed load. When sheet piling is used, it shall extend at least 150 mm above the
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6215
naturalleveloftheground.Inthecaseofopenexcavationswithsideslopes,theedgeofexcavationshallbetaken
asthetoeoftheslope.
3.12.2.3 SafetyRegulations
Wheneversubsurfaceoperationsareconductedthatmayimposeloadsormovementonadjoiningproperty,suchas
driving of piles, compaction of soils, or soil densification, the effects of such operations on adjoining property and
structures shall be considered. The owner of the property that may be affected shall be given 48 hours written
noticeoftheintentiontoperformsuchoperations.Whereconstructionoperationswillcausechangesintheground
water level under adjacent buildings, the effects of such changes on the stability and settlement of the adjacent
foundationshallbeinvestigatedandprovisionmadetopreventdamagetosuchbuildings.Whenapotentialhazard
exists,elevationsoftheadjacentbuildingsshallberecordedatintervalsoftwentyfourhoursorlesstoascertainif
movementhasoccurred.Ifso,necessaryremedialactionshallbeundertakenimmediately.
Wheneveranexcavationorfillistobemadethatwillaffectsafety, stability,orusabilityofadjoiningpropertiesor
buildings,theadjoiningpropertiesorbuildingsshallbeprotectedasrequiredbytheprovisionsofSec3.13.
On excavation, the soil material directly underlying footings, piers, and walls shall be inspected by an
engineer/architect prior to construction of the footing. If such inspection indicates that the soil conditions do not
conform to those assumed for the purposes of design and described on the plans, or are unsatisfactory due to
disturbance,thenadditionalexcavation,reductioninallowablebearingpressure,orotherremedial measuresshall
beadopted.
Exceptincaseswhereaproposedexcavationwillextendlessthan1.5mbelowgrade,allunderpinningoperations
andtheconstructionandexcavationoftemporaryorpermanentcofferdams,caissons,bracedexcavationsurfaces,
orotherconstructionsorexcavationsrequiredfororaffectingthesupportofadjacentpropertiesorbuildingsshall
be subject to controlled inspection. The details of underpinning, and construction of cofferdams, caissons, bracing
or other constructions required for the support of adjacent properties or buildings shall be shown on the plans or
preparedintheformofshopordetaildrawingsandshallbeapprovedbytheengineerwhopreparedtheplans.
3.13 DEWATERING
Allexcavationsshallbedrainedandthedrainagemaintainedaslongastheexcavationcontinuesorremains.Where
necessary, pumping shall be used. No condition shall be created as a result of construction operations that will
interfere with natural surface drainage. Water courses, drainage ditches, etc. shall not be obstructed by refuse,
waste building materials, earth, stones, tree stumps, branches, or other debris that may interfere with surface
drainageorcausetheimpoundmentofsurfacewater.
3.14 SLOPESTABILITYOFADJOININGBUILDINGS
Thepossibilityofoverturningandslidingofthebuildingshallbeconsidered.Theminimumfactorofsafetyagainst
overturningofthestructureasawholeshallbe1.5.Stabilityagainstoverturningshallbeprovidedbythedeadload
ofthebuilding,theallowableupliftcapacityofpiling,anchors,weightofthesoildirectlyoverlyingfootingsprovided
thatsuchsoilcannotbeexcavatedwithoutrecoursetomajormodificationofthebuilding,orbyanycombinationof
thesefactors.
The minimum factor of safety against sliding of the structure under lateral load shall be 1.5. Resistance to lateral
loads shall be provided by friction between the foundation and the underlying soil, passive earth pressure, batter
pilesorbyplumbpiles,subjecttothefollowing:
(a) The resistance to lateral loads due to passive earth pressure shall not be taken into consideration where
theabuttingsoilcouldberemovedinadvertentlybyexcavation.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6216 Vol.2
(b) In case of pile supported structures, frictional resistance between the foundation and the underlying soil
shallbediscounted.
(c) Theavailableresistancetofrictionbetweenthefoundationandtheunderlyingsoilshallbepredictedonan
assumed friction factor of 0.5. A greater value of the coefficient of friction may be used subject to
verificationbyanalysisandtest.
The faces of cut and fill slopes shall be prepared and maintained to control erosion. The control may consist of
effective planting. The protection for slopes shall be installed as soon as practicable. Where cut slopes are not
subjecttoerosionduetoerosionresistantcharacterofthematerials,suchprotectionmaybeomitted.
Wherenecessary,checkdams,cribbing,ripraporotherdevicesormethodsshallbeemployedtocontrolerosion.
3.15 FILLS
3.15.1 QualityofFill
The excavation outside the foundation shall be backfilled with soil that is free of organic material, construction
debris and large rocks. The backfill shall be placed in lifts and compacted in a manner which does not damage
foundation,thewaterproofingordampproofingmaterial.
3.15.2 PlacementofFill
Fillstobeusedtosupportthefoundationofanybuildingorstructureshallbeplacedinaccordancewithestablished
engineering principle. Before placement of the fill, the existing ground surface shall be stripped off all organic
growth, timber, rubbish and debris. After stripping, the ground surface shall be compacted. Materials for fill shall
consist of sand, gravel, crushed stone, crushed earth, or a mixture of these. The fill material shall contain no
particles exceeding 100 mm in the largest dimension. A soil investigation report and a report of satisfactory
placementoffill,bothacceptabletotheBuildingOfficialshallbesubmitted.Inanuncontrolledfill,thesoilwithin
thebuildingareashallbeexploredusingtestpits.Atleastonetestpitpenetratingatleast2mbelowthelevelofthe
bottom of the proposed foundation shall be provided for every 200 m
2
of building area. Wherever such test pits
consistentlyindicatethatthefilliscomposedofmaterialthatisfreeofvoidsandfreeofextensiveinclusionofmud,
organic materials such as paper, garbage, cans, metallic objects, or debris, the fill material shall be acceptable.
Wherethefillshowsvoidsorinclusionsasdescribedabove,eitherthefillshallbetreatedashavingnopresumptive
bearingcapacity,orthebuildingshallincorporateadequatestrengthandstiffnesstobridgesuchvoidsorinclusions
orshallbearticulatedtopreventdamageduetodifferentialorlocalizedsettlementofthefill.
3.15.3 Specifications
Wherefoundationsaretobeplacedoncontrolledfillmaterials,thefillmustbecompactedinlayersnotexceeding
300 mm. Clear specifications shall be provided for the range of water content, the degree of compaction to be
achieved and the method of compaction that shall be followed. Such specifications shall be based on the shear
strengthrequirementforthefillsoilandallowablesettlementestimate.Theminimumdensityofcontrolledfillshall
be95%oftheoptimumdensityobtainedfrom"StandardTestMethodforMoistureDensityRelationofSoilandSoil
AggregateMixtureusing10lb(4.54kg)Rammerand18in(457mm)Drop",(ASTMD1557).
Thedegreeofcompactionachievedinafillshallbeobtainedfrominsitudensitymeasurements.Nonewlayershall
beplacedunlessasatisfactorydensityisattainedineachlayer.
3.16 PROTECTIVERetainingStructuresforFoundations/ShorePiles
A retaining wall is a wall designed to resist lateral earth and/or fluid pressures, including any surcharge, in
accordancewithacceptedengineeringpractice.Retainingwallsforfoundationsshallbedesignedtoensurestability
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6217
againstoverturning,sliding, excessivefoundationpressureandwateruplift;andthattheybedesignedforasafety
factor of 1.5 against lateral sliding and overturning. Generally sheet pile retaining walls are used for construction
raftfoundationsforbuildings.Tallersheetpilesmayneedatiebackanchordrivenandanchoredbehindthesoilof
thesheetpileretainingwall.
3.17 WATERPROOFINGANDDAMPPROOFING
Walls or portions thereof that retain earth and enclose interior spaces, and floors below grade shall be
waterproofedanddampproofed,withtheexceptionofthosespaceswheresuchomissionisnotdetrimentaltothe
building or occupancy. The roof is also required to be waterproofed. The owner shall perform a subsurface
investigationtodeterminethepossibilityofthegroundwatertablerisingabovetheproposedelevationofthefloor
orfloorsbelow gradeunlesssatisfactory data fromadjacentareas demonstratethatgroundwaterhas not beena
problem.
Theremayarisetwosituations:(i)wherenohydrostaticpressureoccursand(ii)wherehydrostaticpressureoccurs.
Wherehydrostaticpressureconditionsexist,floorsandwallsbelowfinishedgroundlevelshall be waterproofed in
accordance with Sec 3.13.1 below. Where hydrostatic pressure conditions do not exist, dampproofing and
perimeter drainage shall be provided in accordance with Sec 3.13.2 below. In addition, the dampproofing and
waterproofingshallalsomeettherequirementsofSec3.13.3.Alldampproofingandwaterproofingmaterialsshall
conformtotherequirementsofSec2.16.7ofPart5.
3.17.1.1 WaterproofingwhereHydrostaticPressureOccurs
Where ground water investigation indicates that a hydrostatic pressure condition exists, or is likely to occur, walls
andfloorsshallbewaterproofedinaccordancewiththissection.
3.17.1.2 FloorWaterproofing
Floors required to be waterproofed shall be of concrete and shall be designed and constructed to withstand the
anticipatedhydrostaticpressure.
Waterproofing of the floor shall be accomplished by placing under the slab a membrane of rubberized asphalt, or
butyl rubber, or polymer modified asphalt, or neoprene, or not less than 0.15 mm polyvinyl chloride or
polyethylene, or other approved materials, capable of bridging nonstructural cracks. Joints in the membrane shall
belappednotlessthan150mmandsealedinanapprovedmanner.
3.17.1.3 WallWaterproofing
Walls required to be waterproofed shall be of concrete or masonry designed to withstand the anticipated
hydrostaticpressureandotherlateral loads.Prior totheapplicationofwaterproofingmaterialsonconcretewalls,
allholesandrecessesresultingfromtheremovalofformtiesshall besealedwitha bituminousmaterialorother
approved methods or materials. Unit masonry walls shall be pargeted on the exterior surface below ground level
withnotlessthan10mmofPortlandcementmortar.Thepargetingshallbecontinuedtothefoundation.Pargeting
ofunitmasonrywallsisnotrequiredwhereamaterialisapprovedfordirectapplicationtothemasonry.
Waterproofingshallbeappliedfromapoint300mmabovethemaximumelevationofthegroundwatertabledown
to the top of the spread portion of the foundation. The remainder of the wall up to a level not less than 150 mm
abovefinishedgradeshallbedampproofed.
Wall waterproofing materials shall consist of twoply hotmopped felts, not less than 0.15 mm polyvinyl chloride,
1.0 mm polymer modified asphalt, 0.15 mm polyethylene or other approved methods or materials capable of
bridging nonstructural cracks. Joints in the membrane shall be lapped not less than 150 mm and sealed in an
approvedmanner.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6218 Vol.2
Jointsinwallsandfloors,jointsbetweenthewallandthefloor,andpenetrationsofthewallandfloorshallbemade
watertightutilizingestablishedmethodsandmaterials.
3.17.1.4 DampproofingwithnoHydrostaticPressure
Where hydrostatic pressure will not occur, floors and walls shall be dampproofed and a subsoil drainage system
shallbeinstalledasdescribedbelow:
3.17.1.5 FloorDampproofing
Forfloors,dampproofingmaterialsshallbeinstalledbetweenthefloorandbasematerials.Thebasematerialshall
not be less than 100 mm in thickness consisting of gravel or crushed stone containing not more than 10 per cent
materialthatpassesa4.76mmsieve.Whereasiteislocatedinwelldrainedgravelorsand/gravelmixture,afloor
base is not required. When the finished ground level is below the floor level for more than 25 per cent of the
perimeter of the building, the base material need not be provided. Where a separate floor is provided above a
concreteslabthedampproofingmaybeinstalledontopoftheslab.
Dampproofingmaterials,whereinstalledbeneaththeslab,shallconsistofnotlessthan0.15mmpolyethylenewith
joints lapped not less than 150 mm, or other approved methods or materials. Where permitted to be installed on
top of the slab, dampproofing shall consist of mopped on bitumen, not less than 0.1 mm polyethylene, or other
approved methods or materials. Joints in membranes shall be lapped not less than 150 mm and sealed in an
approvedmanner.
3.17.1.6 WallDampproofing
For walls, dampproofing materials shall be installed and shall extend from a point 150 mm above grade, down to
thetopofthespreadportionofthefoundation.
Wall dampproofing material shall consist of a bituminous material, acrylic modified cement base coating,
rubberized asphalt, polymermodified asphalt, butyl rubber, or other approved materials capable of bridging
nonstructuralcracks.
3.17.1.7 PerimeterDrain
Adrainshallbeplacedaroundtheperimeterofafoundationthatconsistsofgravelorcrushedstonecontainingnot
morethan10percentmaterialthatpassesthrougha4.76mmsieve.Thedrainshallextendaminimumof300mm
beyond the outside edge of the foundation. The thickness shall be such that the bottom of the drain is not higher
thanthebottomofthebaseunderthefloor,andthatthetopofthedrainisnotlessthan150mmabovethetopof
thefoundation.Thetopofthedrainshallbecoveredwithanapprovedfiltermembranematerial.Whereadraintile
orperforatedpipeisused,theinvertofthepipeortileshallnotbehigherthanthefloorelevation.Thetopofjoints
or the top of perforations shall be protected with an approved filter membrane material. The pipe or tile shall be
placedonnotlessthan50mmofgravelorcrushedstonecomplyingwiththissection,andshallbecoveredwithnot
lessthan150mmofthesamematerial.
The floor base and foundation perimeter drain shall discharge by gravity or mechanical means into an approved
drainagesystem.Whereasiteislocatedinwelldrainedgravelorsand/gravelmixture,adedicateddrainagesystem
isnotrequired.Whenthefinishedgroundlevelisbelowthefloorlevelformorethan25percentoftheperimeter
ofthebuilding,thefoundationdrainneed beprovidedonlyaround thatportionofthebuildingwheretheground
levelisabovethefloorlevel.
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6219
3.17.2 OtherDampproofingandWaterproofingRequirements
3.17.2.1 PlacementofBackfill
The excavation outside the foundation shall be backfilled with soil that is free of organic material, construction
debrisandlargerocks.Thebackfill shall beplacedinliftsandcompactedina mannerwhich does notdamagethe
waterproofingordampproofingmaterialorstructurallydamagethewall.
3.17.2.2 SiteGrading
Thegroundimmediatelyadjacenttothefoundationshallbeslopedawayfromthebuildingataslopenotlessthan
1unitverticalin12unitshorizontal(1:12)foraminimumdistanceof2.5mmeasuredperpendiculartothefaceof
thewalloranalternativemethodofdivertingwaterawayfromthefoundationshallbeused.Considerationshallbe
given to possible additional settlement of the backfill when establishing the final ground level adjacent to the
foundation.
3.17.2.3 ErosionProtection
Where water impacts the ground from the edge of the roof, down spout, scupper, valley or other rainwater
collection or diversion device, provisions shall be used to prevent soil erosion and direct the water away from the
foundation.
3.18 FOUNDATIONONSLOPES
3.18.1 FootingsonSlopes
Where footings are to be founded on a slope, the distance of the sloping surface at the base level of the footing
measuredfromthecentreofthefootingshallnotbelessthantwicethewidthofthefooting.
When adjacent footings are to be placed at different levels, the distance between the edges of footings shall be
suchastopreventundesirableoverlappingofstructuresinsoilanddisturbanceofthesoilunderthehigherfooting
duetoexcavationofthelowerfooting.
On a sloping site, footing shall be on a horizontal bearing and stepped. At all changes of levels, footings shall be
lappedforadistanceofatleastequaltothethicknessoffoundationorthreetimestheheightofstep,whicheveris
greater.Adequateprecautionsshallbetakentopreventtendencyfortheupperlayersofsoiltomovedownhill.
3.19 FOUNDATIONSONFILLSANDPROBLEMATICSOILS
3.19.1 FootingsonFilledupGround
Footings shall not be constructed on loosely filled up ground with non uniform density or consistency, unless
adequatestrengtheningofthesoilismadebyapplyinggroundimprovementtechniques.
3.19.2 GroundImprovement
In poor and weak subsoils, the design of shallow foundation for structures and equipment may present problems
withrespecttobothsizingoffoundationaswellascontroloffoundationsettlements.Aviablealternativeincertain
situations developed over recent years is to improve the subsoil to an extent that the subsoil would develop an
adequate bearing capacity and foundations constructed after subsoil improvement would have resultant
settlementswithinacceptablelimits.Selectionofgroundimprovementtechniquesmaybedoneinaccordancewith
goodpractice.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6220 Vol.2
3.19.3 SoilReinforcement
Use of suitable geosynthetics/geotextiles may be made in an approved manner for ground improvement where
applicablebasedongoodpractice.
3.20 FOUNDATIONDESIGNFORDYNAMICFORCES
3.20.1 EffectofDynamicForces
Wheremachineryoperationsorothervibrationsaretransmittedthroughfoundation,considerationshallbegivenin
thefoundationdesigntopreventdetrimentaldisturbanceofthesoil.
Impact forces shall be neglected in foundation design except for foundations bearing on loose granular soils,
foundationssupportingcranes,heavymachineryandmovingequipment,orwheretheratioofliveloadcausingthe
impacttothedeadloadexceeds50%.
3.20.2 MachineFoundation
Machine foundations are subjected to the dynamic forces caused by the machine. These dynamic forces are
transmitted to the foundation supporting the machine. Although the moving parts of the machine are generally
balanced,thereisalwayssomeunbalance in practicewhich causesaneccentricityof rotating parts.Thisproduces
an oscillating force. The machine foundation must satisfy the criteria for dynamic loading in addition to that for
staticloading.
3.20.2.1 TypesofMachineFoundations
Basically,therearethreetypesofmachinefoundation:
(a) Machineswhichproduceaperiodicunbalancedforce,suchasreciprocatingenginesandcompressors.The
speedofsuchmachinesisgenerallylessthan600rpm.Inthesemachines,therotarymotionofthecrankis
convertedintothetranslatorymotion.Theunbalancedforcevariessinusoidal.
(b) Machineswhichproduceimpactloads,suchasforgehammersandpunchpresses.Inthesemachines,the
dynamic force attains a peak value in a very short time and then dies out gradually. The response is a
pulsating curve. It vanishes before the next pulse. The speed is usually between 60 to 150 blows per
minute.
(c) Highspeedmachines,suchasturbines,androtarycompressors.Thespeedofsuch machinesisveryhigh;
sometimes,itisevenmorethan3000rpm.
Thefollowingfourtypesofmachinefoundationsarecommonlyused.
(a) Block Type: This type of machine foundation consists of a pedestal resting on a footing (Fig. 6.3.3a). The
foundationhasalargemassandasmallnaturalfrequency.
(b) Box Type: The foundation consists of a hollow concrete block (Fig. 6.3.3b). The mass of the foundation is
lessthanthatintheblocktypeandthenaturalfrequencyisincreased.
(c) WallType:Awalltypeoffoundationconsistsofapairofwallshavingatopslab.Themachinerestsonthe
topslab(Fig6.3.3c).
(d) FramedType:Thistypeoffoundationconsistsofverticalcolumnshavingahorizontalframeattheirtops.
Themachineissupportedontheframe(Fig.6.3.3d).
Machines which produce periodical and impulsive forces at low speeds are generally provided with a block type
foundation.Framedtypefoundationsaregenerallyusedforthemachinesworkingathighspeedsandforthoseof
SoilsandFo

the rotatin
withamac
3.20.2.2
For satisfa
avoided, (i
Avoidance
(I)Resonan
less than 3
frequency
machine fo
machine.
(a) Lo
op
(i)
sh
fo
(b) H
of
of
th
de
(2) Types
following t
concreteb
sistingofv
undations
ng types. Some
chinefoundatio
2 Design
actory perform
i) bearing cap
ofresonance
nce: Based on
300 revolution
greater than
oundationsoil
ow speed mac
peratingfrequ
) by increasing
hear rigidity of
oundationstiffn
ighspeedmac
ftheoperating
ffoundation.D
hefoundation.
etermineifthe
Fig.6.3.3.Ty
of foundation
types: (i) box f
block,(iii)wallf
verticalcolumn
e machines wh
on.Suchmach
nConsider
mance, machin
acity and sett
isdiscussedin
theiroperatin
ns per minute
1000 rpm. To
system must
chines (f
1
<30
ency,i.e.,the
g base area or
f the soil by c
ness.
chines(f
1>
100
gvalue,i.e.,fre
Duringstarting
Probableamp
efoundationar
ypesofmachin
ns. Considerin
foundation co
foundationcon
nsandatopho
(a)
(c)
hich induce ve
hinesmaybed
rations
ne foundations
lement are saf
thissection.
ng frequencies
(rpm),(ii) med
avoid resonan
be either very
00 rpm): Provi
frequencyrati
reducing tota
ompaction, gr
0rpm):Provid
equencyratio
gandstopping
plitudeiscomp
rrangementm
nefoundations
ng their struct
nsisting of a p
nsistingofapa
orizontalframe
ery little dynam
irectlyboltedt
s should satis
fe, and (iii) the
s,the machine
dium speed, fr
nce, the natur
y large or very
ide a foundat
ior(=f
1
/f
n
)is
al static weight
routing or inje
deafoundation
r2.Naturalf
g,themachine
putedatbothf
ustbealtered
s(a)BlockType
tural forms, th
pedestal of con
airofwallssup
eworkwhichfo
mic forces, suc
tothefloor.
sfy the follow
ere is an adeq
sareclassified
requency 300
ral frequency
y small compa
ion with a na
lessthan0.5.N
t of the found
ction, (iii) by u
nwithnatural
frequencycan
willoperateb
f
r
andf
1
and
.
e(b)BoxType
he machine fo
ncrete, (ii) box
pportingthem
ormstheseato
ch as lathes, n
ing requireme
quate vibration
das(i)lowspe
to 1000 rpm,
(or the resona
ared to the op
tural frequenc
Naturalfreque
ation, (ii) by in
using piles to
frequencynot
bedecreased
brieflyatreson
comparedwit
(c)WallType(
oundations, in
x foundation c
achine.(iv)fra
ofessentialma
(b)
(d)
Ch
need not be pr
ents: (i) reson
n and shock iso
eedhavingfre
and (iii) high
ant frequency)
perating speed
cy at least tw
encycanbeinc
ncreasing mod
provide the re
thigherthano
dbyincreasing
nantfrequency
hallowableva
(d)FramedTyp
n general, are
consisting of a
amedfoundatio
achinery.
hapter3
rovided
ance is
olation.
equency
speed,
) of the
d of the
wice the
creased
dulus of
equired
onehalf
weight
y(f
r
)of
aluesto

pe.
of the
hollow
oncon
Part6
StructuralDesign

6222 Vol.2
Lowspeedmachines(e.g.,forgehammers,presses,lowspeedreciprocatingenginesandcompressors)aregenerally
supported on block foundation having a large contact area with soil. Medium speed machines (e.g., reciprocating
diesel and gas engines) also have, in general, block foundations resting on springs or suitable elastic pads. High
speed and rotating type of machines (e.g., internal combustion engines, electric motors, and turbo generator
machines) are generally mounted on framed foundations. Other high speed machines are placed on block
foundations.Asfaraspossible,theC.G.ofthewholesystemandthecentroidofthebaseareashouldbeonthesame
verticalaxis.Atthemostaneccentricityof5%couldbeallowed.
(3) Permissible amplitude. Many times the permissible amplitude at operating speed is specified by the
manufactures.Ifnotspecified,thefollowingvaluesmaybeadoptedforguidance(i)lowspeedmachines.(f
1
<500
rpm),horizontalandverticalvibrations,A=0.25run:.(ii)operatingspeedf
1
=5001500rpm,A=0.4mmto
0.6mmforhorizontal,andA=0.7mmto0.9mmforverticalmodeofvibration;(iii)operatingspeedf
1
upto3000
rpm,A=0.2mmforhorizontalandA=0.5mmforverticalvibrations(iv)hammerfoundations,A=10mm.
3.20.2.3 DesignMethods
The various design methods can be grouped as follows: (i) empirical and semiempirical methods, (ii) methods
considering soil as a spring and (iii) methods considering soil as a semiinfinite elastic mass (elastic halfspace
approach)anditsequivalentlumpedparametermethod.Thelumpedparametermethodiscurrentlypreferredand
willbedescribedhere.
Agoodmachinefoundationshouldsatisfythefollowingcriteria.
(a) Like ordinary foundations, it should be safe against shear failure caused by superimposed loads, and also
thesettlementsshouldbewithinthesafelimits.
(b) Thesoilpressureshouldnormallynotexceed80%oftheallowablepressureforstaticloading.
(c) There should be no possibility of resonance. The natural frequency of the foundation should be either
greaterthanorsmallerthantheoperatingfrequencyofthemachine.
(d) Theamplitudesunderserviceconditionshouldbewithinthepermissiblelimitsforthemachine.
(e) The combined centre of gravity of the machine and the foundation should be on the vertical line passing
throughthecentreofgravityofthebaseplane.
(f) Machine foundation should be taken to a level lower than the level of the foundation of the, adjacent
buildingsandshouldbeproperlyseparated.
(g) Thevibrationsinducedshouldneitherbeannoyingtothepersonsnordetrimentaltootherstructures.
(h) Richart(1967)developedaplotforverticalvibrations,whichisgenerallytakenasaguideforvariouslimits
offrequencyandamplitudewhichhasbeenpresentedinFig.6.3.4.
(i) The depth of the groundwater table should be at least onefourth of the width of the foundation below
thebaseplace.
3.20.2.4 VibrationAnalysisofaMachineFoundation:
Although a machine foundation has 6 degree of freedom, it is assumed to have a single degree of freedom for a
simplifiedanalysis.Fig6.3.5showsamachinefoundationsupportedonasoilmass.Inthiscase,themassm
f
lumps
togetherthemassofthemachineandthemassoffoundation.Thetotalmassm
f
actsatthecentreofgravityofthe
system.Themassisunderthesupportingactionofthesoil.Theelasticactioncanbelumpedtogetherintoasingle
elasticspringwithastiffnessk.Likewise;alltheresistancetomotionislumpedintothedampingcoefficientc.Thus
the machine foundation reduces to a single mass having one degree of freedom. The analysis of damped, forced
vibrationis,therefore,applicabletothemachinefoundation.

SoilsandFo

3.20.2.4
For vibratio
determine
(a)

undations
4.1 Determi
on analysis of
dasunder.
Mass (m): W
vibrating soil
system is eq
participatings

Fig.6.3.4.L
Fig.6.3.5
inationofP
a machine fou
When a machi
is known as th
ual to the ma
soil.Thus
m =
imitsoffreque
5.Machinefou
Parameters
undation, the
ne vibrates, s
he participatin
ass of the fou
s f
m m + =
encyandampli
undationsuppo
s
parameters m
some portion
ng mass or inp
undation bloc

itudes(Richart
ortedonasoil
m, c and k are
of the suppo
phase soil mas
ck and machin

tschart)

mass
required. Thes
orting soil mas
ss. Therefore,
ne (m
f
) and th

Ch

se parameters
ss also vibrate
the total mass
he mass (m
s
)
(6.3.51)
hapter3
can be
es. The
s of the
of the
Part6
StructuralDesign

6224 Vol.2
Unfortunately,thereisnorationalmethodtodeterminethemagnitudeofm
s
.Itisusuallyrelatedtothe
mass of the soil in the pressure bulb. The value of m
s
generally varies between zero and m
f
. In other
words,thetotalmass(m)variesbetweenm
f
and2m
f
inmostcases.
(b) Spring stiffness (k): The spring stiffness depends upon the type of soil, embedment of the foundation
block,thecontactareaandthecontactpressuredistribution.Thefollowingarethecommonmethods.
i) Laboratorytest:AtriaxialtestwithverticalvibrationsisconductedtodetermineYoungsmodulus
E. Alternatively, the modulus of rigidity (G) is determined conducting the test under torsional
vibration, and E is obtained indirectly from the relation, ) 1 ( G 2 E + = , where is Poissons
ratio.Thestiffness(k)isdeterminedas

L
AE
k =

(6.3.52)
wheie, A= ciosssectional aiea of the specimen, anu L= length of the specimen.
ii) Barkans method: The stiffness can also be obtained from the value of E using the following
relationgivenbyBarken.
A
E
k

=
1
13 . 1

(6.3.53)
Wheie, A= base aiea of the machine, i.e. aiea of contact.
iii) Plateloadtest:Arepeatedplateloadtestisconductedandthestiffnessofthesoil(k
p
)isfoundas
theslopeoftheloaddeformationcurve.Thespringconstantkofthefoundationisasunder.
Forcohesivesoils:

=
P
P
B
B
k k

(6.3.54)
Forcohesionlesssoil:
2
3 . 0
3 . 0

+
+
=
P
P
B
B
k k

(6.3.55)
Where, B is the width of foundation. Alternatively, spring constant can be obtained
fromthesubgrademodulus(k
s
),as
A K k
s
= (6.3.56)
Where,A=areaoffoundation.
iv) Resonancetest:Theresonancefrequency(f
n
)isobtainedusingavibratorofmassmsetupon
asteelplatesupportedontheground.Thespringstiffnessobtainedfromtherelation

m f m k f
n
n
n
2
4
2
1
2

= = =
(6.S.S7)
II. Damping constant (c): Damping is due to dissipation of vibration energy, which occurs mainly because of
thefollowingreasons.
i) Internalfrictionlossduetohysterisisandviscouseffects.
ii) Radiationallossduetopropagationofwavesthroughsoil.
The damping factor D for an underdamped system can be determined in the laboratory. Vibration response is
plottedandthelogarithmicdecrementisfoundfromtheplot,as
SoilsandFoundations Chapter3

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6225

2
1
2
2
=

= D
D
D
(6.S.S8)
ThedampingfactorDmayalsobeobtainedfromtheareaofthehysteresisloopoftheloaddisplacementcurve,as

W
W
D

= (6.S.S9)
Wheie, W = total woik uone; anu W = woik lost hysteiesis. The value of B foi most soils geneially vaiies
between u.u1 anu u.1.
3.21 GEOHAZARDANALYSISFORBUILDINGS
Geohazard analysis of buildings include design considerations for possible landslides, ground subsidence,
earthquakes and other seismic events, erosion and scour, construction in toxic and/or contaminated landfills,
groundwatercontaminationetc.Apreliminaryreviewoftheselectedsiteshouldbecarriedoutforexistenceofany
oftheabovementionedgeohazardinthearea.Adetailedanalysismaybecarriedoutonlyifthepreliminaryreview
indicatesasignificantthreatforthebuildingwhichmayexistfromanyoftheabovementionedpotentialgeohazard
attheselectedlocationforthebuilding.Seerelevantsectionfordetails.

Part6
StructuralDesign 6227
Chapter 4
BAMBOO
4.1 SCOPE
ThisSectionrelatestotheuseofbambooinconstructionasstructuralelements,nonstructuralelementsandalso
fortemporaryworksinstructuresorelementsofthestructure,ensuringqualityandeffectivenessofdesignand
constructionusingbamboo.Itcoversminimumstrengthdata,dimensionalandgradingrequirements,seasoning,
preservativetreatment,designandjointingtechniqueswithbamboowhichwouldfacilitatescientificapplication
andlongtermperformanceofstructures.Italsocoversguidelinessoastoensureproperprocurement,storage,
precautionsanddesignlimitationsonbamboo.
4.2 TERMINOLOGY
ForthepurposeofthisSection,thefollowingdefinitionsshallapply.
4.2.1 AnatomicalPurposeDefinitions
Bamboo Tall perennial grasses found in tropical and subtropical regions. They belong to the family Poaceae
andsubfamilyBambusoidae.
BambooCulmAsingleshootofbamboousuallyhollowexceptatnodeswhichareoftenswollen.
BambooClumpAclusterofbambooculmsemanatingfromtwoormorerhizomerinthesameplace.
CelluloseAcarbohydrate,formingthefundamentalmaterialofallplantsandamainsourceofthemechanical
propertiesofbiologicalmaterials.
Cell A fundamental structural unit of plant and animal life, consisting of cytoplasm and usually enclosing a
centralnucleusandbeingsurroundedbyamembrane(animal)orarigidcellwall(plant).
Cross Wall A wall at the node closing the whole inside circumference and completely separating the hollow
cavitybelowfromthatabove.
Hemi Cellulose The polysaccharides consisting of only 150 to 200 sugar molecules, also much less than the
10000ofcellulose.
LigninApolymerofphenylpropaneunits,initssimpleform(C6H5CH3CH2CH3).
SliverThinstripsofbambooprocessedfrombambooculm.
TissueGroupofcells,whichinhigherplantsconsistof(a)Parenchymaasoftcellofhigherplantsasfoundin
stempithorfruitpulp,(b)Epidermistheoutermostlayerofcellscoveringthesurfaceofaplant,whenthere
areseverallayersoftissue.
4.2.2 StructuralPurposeDefinitions
BambooMatBoardAboardmadeoftwoormorebamboomatsbondedwithanadhesive.
BeamAstructuralmemberwhichsupportsloadprimarilybyitsinternalresistancetobending.
BreakingStrengthAtermlooselyappliedtoagivenstructuralmemberwithrespecttotheultimateloaditcan
sustainunderagivensetofconditions.
BundleColumn A column consisting of three or more number of cuhu bound as integrated unit with wire or
straptypeoffastenings.
CentreInternodeAtestspecimenhavingitscentrebetweentwonodes.
CharacteristicLoadThevalueofloadswhichhasa95percentprobabilityofnotexceedingduringthelifeofthe
structure.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6228 Vol.2
Characteristic Strength The strength of the material below which not more than 5 percent of the test results
areexpectedtofall.
Cleavability The ease with which bamboo can be split along the longitudinal axis. The action of splitting is
knownascleavage.
Column A structural member which supports axial load primarily by inducing compressive stress along the
fibres.
Common Rafter A roof member which supports roof battens and roof coverings, such as boarding and
sheeting.
CurvatureThedeviationfromthestraightnessoftheculm.
DelaminationSeparationofmatsthroughfailureofglue.
EndDistanceThedistancemeasuredparalleltothefibresofthebamboofromthecentreofthefastenertothe
closestendofthemember.
Flatten Bamboo Bamboo consisting of culms that have been cut and unfolded till it is flat. The culm thus is
finallyspreadopen,thediaphragms(crosswalls)atnodesremovedandpressedflat.
FullCulmThenaturallyavailablecircularsection/shape.
FundamentalorUltimateStressThestresswhichisdeterminedonaspecifiedtype/sizeofculmsofbamboo,in
accordance with standard practice and does not take into account the effects of naturally occurring
characteristicsandotherfactors.
InnerDiameterDiameterofinternalcavityofahollowpieceofbamboo.
InsideLocationPositioninbuildingsinwhichbambooremainscontinuouslydryorprotectedfromweather.
JointAconnectionbetweentwoormorebamboostructuralelements.
JoistAbeamdirectlysupportingfloor,ceilingorroofofastructure.
LengthofInternodeDistancebetweenadjacentnodes.
Loaded End or Compression End Distance The distance measured from the centre of the fastner to the end
towardswhichtheloadinducedbythefasteneracts.
MatchetAlightcuttingandslashingtoolintheformofalargeknife.
MatAwovensheetmadeusingthinslivers.
Mortise and Tenon A joint in which the reduced end (tenon) of one member fits into the corresponding slot
(mortise)oftheother.
NetSectionSectionobtainedbydeductingfromthegrosscrosssection(A),theprojectedareasofallmaterials
removedbyboring,groovingorothermeans.
NodeTheplaceinabambooculmwherebranchessproutandadiaphragmisinsidetheculmandthewallson
bothsidesofnodearethicker.
OuterDiameterDiameterofacrosssectionofapieceofbamboomeasuredfromtwooppositepointsonthe
outersurface.
OutsideLocationPositioninbuildinginwhichbamboosareoccasionallysubjectedtowettinganddryingasin
caseofopenshedsandoutdoorexposedstructures,
PermissibleStressStressobtainedafterapplyingfactorofsafetytotheultimateorbasicstress.
PrincipalRafterAroofmemberwhichsupportspurlins.
PurlinsAroofmemberdirectlysupportingroofcoveringorcommonrafterandroofbattens.
RoofBattensAroofmemberdirectlysupportingtiles,corrugatedsheets,slatesorotherroofingmaterials.
Roof Skeleton The skelton consisting of bamboo truss or rafter over which solid bamboo purlins are laid and
lashedtotherafterortopchordofatrussbymeansofgalvanizedironwire,cane,grass,bambooleaves,etc.
SlendernessRatioTheratioofthelengthofmembertotheradiusofgyrationisknownasslendernessratioof
member.(Thelengthofthememberistheequivalentlengthduetoendconditions).
SplitsThepiecesmadefromquartersbydividingthequartersradiallyandcuttinglongitudinally.
TaperTheratioofdifferencebetweenminimumandmaximumouterdiametertolength.
UnloadedEndDistanceTheenddistanceoppositetotheloadedend
Bamboo Chapter4

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6229
Wall Thickness Half the difference between outer diameter and inner diameter of the piece at any cross
section.
WetLocationPositioninbuildingsinwhichthebamboosarealmostcontinuouslydamp,wetorincontactwith
earthorwater,suchaspilesandbamboofoundations.
4.2.3 DefinitionsRelatingtoDefects
BambooBore/GHOONHoleThedefectcausedbybambooGHOONbeetle(Dinoderusspp.Bostychdae),which
attacksfelledculms.
CrookednessAlocalizeddeviationfromthestraightnessinapieceofbamboo.
DiscolorationAchangefromthenormalcolourofthebamboowhichdoesnotimpairthestrengthofbamboo
orbamboocompositeproducts.
4.2.4 DefinitionsRelatingtoDryingDegrades
CollapseThedefectoccurringonaccountofexcessiveshrinkage,particularlyinthickwalledimmaturebamboo.
Whenthebamboowallshrinks,theouterlayerscontainingalargerconcentrationofstrongfibrovascularbundles
set the weaker interior portion embedded in parenchyma in tension, causing the latter to develop cracks. The
interiorcrackdevelopsintoawidesplitresultinginadepressionontheoutersurface.Thisdefectalsoreducesthe
structuralstrengthofroundbamboo.
EndSplittingAsplitattheendofabamboo.Thisisnotsocommonadefectasdryingoccursbothfromouter
andinteriorwallsurfacesofbambooaswellastheendattheopenends.
Surface Cracking Fine surface cracks not detrimental to strength, However, the cracking which occurs at the
nodesreducesthestructuralstrength.
WrinkledandDeformedSurfaceDeformationincrosssection,duringdrying,whichoccursinimmatureround
bamboosofmostspecies;inthickwalledpieces,besidesthisdeformationtheoutersurfacebecomesunevenand
wrinkled.Veryoftentheinteriorwalldevelopsacrackbelowthesewrinkles,runningparalleltotheaxis.
4.3 SYMBOLS
ForthepurposeofthisSection,thefollowinglettersymbolsshallhavethemeaningindicatedagainsteach,unless
otherwisestated:
A=Crosssectionalareaofbamboo(perpendiculartothedirectionoftheprincipalfibresandvessels),mm
2

( )
2 2
4
d D A =


D=Outerdiameter,mm
d=Innerdiameter,mm
E=Modulusofelasticityinbending,N/mm
2

f
c
=Calculatedstressinaxialcompression,N/mm
2

f
cp
=Permissiblestressincompressionalongthefibres,N/mm
2

I=Momentofinertia,mm
4
= ( )
2 2
64
d D

l=Unsupportedlengthofcolumn
M=Moisturecontent,percent
r=Radiusofgyration= ( ) A I
R=Modulusofrupture,N/mm
2

W=Wallthickness,mm
Z=Sectionmodulus,mm
3

=Deflectionordeformation,mm.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6230 Vol.2
4.4 MATERIALS
4.4.1 SpeciesofBamboo
InBangladesh,fourspeciesarewidelyused,hencestudiedforthemechanicalpropertiesastabulatedinTable
6.4.16.4.4fortop,bottomandmiddlepositions.Table6.4.5furthersummarizetheaveragemechanical
propertiesof21bamboospecies.

Table6.4.1:Moisturecontentandspecificgravityvaluesoffourbamboosspeciesatdifferentheightpositions
(averageoffivebamboospecimens)
Species Moisturecontent(%) SpecificGravity
(basedonovendryweightandatdifferentvolumes) bottom middle top
Greenvolumes Ovendryvolumes
bottom middle top bottom middle top
Kali(Oxytenanthera
nigrociliata)
129 118 104 0.48 0.49 0.51 0.66 0.69 0.74
Mitinga(Bambusa
tulda)
108 92 86 0.54 0.58 0.61 0.75 0.79 0.83
Bethua(Bambusa
polymorpha)
104 93 79 0.55 0.57 0.61 0.79 0.81 0.54
Borak(Bambusa
balcooa)
100 84 66 0.57 0.64 0.74 0.79 0.84 0.85

Table6.4.2:Shrinkagesofwallthicknessandindiameteroffourbamboospeciesatdifferentheightpositions
Species Shrinkageinwallthickness(%) Shrinkageindiameter(%)
Fromgreento12%mc Fromgreentoovendry
condition
Fromgreento12%mc
bottom middle top bottom middle top bottom middle top
Kali(Oxytenanthera
nigrociliata)
9.6 8.1 5.9 13.2 10.7 8.7 4.8 3.0 2.4
Mitinga(Bambusatulda) 11.9 7.3 4.9 14.9 9.6 7.6 3.9 3.5 2.6
Bethua(Bambusa
polymorpha)
10.7 6.5 5.1 12.1 10.1 8.2 7.3 5.5 4.1
Borak(Bambusa
balcooa)
11.1 7.6 4.8 13.7 11.1 8.4 4.2 3.4 2.5
Table6.4.3:Compressivestrengthoffourbamboospeciesatdifferentheightpositions
Species Compressionparalleltothegrain(kg/cm
2
)
green airdry
bottom middle top bottom middle top
Kali(Oxytenanthera
nigrociliata)
257 287 301 346 387 417
Mitinga(Bambusatulda) 403 466 513 529 596 620
Bethua(Bambusa
polymorpha)
320 361 419 452 512 534
Bamboo Chapter4

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6231
Borak(Bambusa
balcooa)
394 459 506 510 536 573
Table 6.4.4: Modulus of elasticity and modulus of rupture values of four bamboo species at different height
positions
Species Modulusofelasticity(1000kg/cm
2
) Modulusofrapture(kg/cm
2
)
green airdry green airdry
bottom middle top bottom middle top bottom middle top bottom middle top
Kali(Oxytenantheranigrociliata) 119 131 169 131 150 224 541 459 415 721 580 530
Mitinga(Bambusatulda) 105 138 147 114 140 168 710 595 542 883 745 671
Bethua(Bambusapolymorpha) 61 65 82 60 70 96 469 426 373 566 468 414
Borak(Bambusa
balcooa)
72 92 103 93 108 127 850 712 624 926 787 696
4.4.2 Grouping
Sixteenspeciesofbambooaresuitableforstructuralapplicationsandclassifiedintothreegroups,namely,Group
A,GroupBandGroupCasgiveninTable6.4.6.
Table6.4.6:SafeWorkingStressesofBamboosforStructuralDesigning
(1)

Sl
No.
Species Extreme
Fibre
Stress
in
Bending
N/mm
2

Modulusof
Elasticity
10
3
N/mm
2

Allowable
Compressive
Stress
N/mm
2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

GROUPA

i)

ii)
iii)
Barnbusaglancescens(syn.
B.nana)
Dendrocalamusstrictus
Oxytenantheraabyssinicia
20.7

18.4
20.9
3.28

2.66
3.31
15.4

10.3
13.3

GROUPB

iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)

xii)
Bambusabalcooa
B.pallida
B.nutans
B.tulda
B.auriculata
B.burmanica
Cephalostachyumpergraci[e
Melocannabaccifera(Syn.
M.bambusoides)
Thyrsotachysoliveri
16.05
13.8
13.2
13.3
16.3
14.9
13.2
13.3

15.5
1.62
2.87
1.47
1.77
3.34
2.45
2.48
2.53

2.16
13.3
15.4
13.0
11.6
10.5
11.4
10.5
15.4

13.4

GROUPC

xiii)

xiv)
Bambusaarundinacea(Syn.
B.bambos)
B.polymorpha
14.6

9.15
1.32

1.71
10.1

8.97
Part6
StructuralDesign

6232 Vol.2
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
B.ventricosa
B.vulgaris
Dendrocalamuslongispathus
Oxytenantheranigrociliata
8.5
10.4
8.3
10.18
0.75
0.64
1.22
2.6
10.3
11.0
12.0
7.2
NOTEThevaluesofstressinN/mm
2
havebeenobtainedbyconvertingthe
valuesinkgf/cm
2
bydividingthesameby10.

1)
Thevaluesgivenpertaintotestingofbambooingreencondition.

ThecharacteristicsofthesegroupsareasgiveninTable6.4.6.
Species of bamboo other than those listed in the Table 6.4.6 may be used, provided the basic strength
characteristics are determined and found more than the limits mentioned therein. However, in the absence of
testingfacilitiesandcompulsionforuseofotherspecies,andforexpedientdesigning,allowablestressesmaybe
arrivedatbymultiplyingdensitywithfactorsasgiveninTable6.4.5.
4.4.3 MoistureContentinBamboo
With decrease of moisture content (M) the strength of bamboo increases exponentially and bamboo has an
intersection point (fibre saturation point) at around 25 percent moisture content depending upon the species.
Maturedculmsshallbeseasonedtoabout20percentmoisturecontentbeforeuse.
Table6.4.7LimitingStrengthValues(inGreenCondition)
ModulusofRupture(R)
N/mm
2

ModulusofElasticity(E)in
Bending
10
3
N/mm
2

(1) (2) (3)

GroupA
GroupB
GroupC
R>70
70R>50
50R>30
E>9
9E>6
6E>3
Table6.4.8AllowableLongTermStress(N/mm2)perUnitDensity(kg/m3)
Condition Axial
Compression
(nobuckling)
Bending

Shear
Green 0.011 0.015
Airdry(12%) 0.013 0.020 0.003
NOTEInthelaboratoryregime,thedensityofbambooisconvenientlydetermined.Havingknown
thedensityofanyspeciesofbamboo,permissiblestressescanbeworkedoutusingfactorsindicated
above. For example, if green bamboo has a density of 600 kg/m3, the allowable stress in bending
wouldbe0.015x600=9N/mm2.
References:IS6874:1973,MethodofTestforRoundBamboo,BureauofIndianStandards,India,1974.
Part6
StructuralDesign 6233
Table6.4.5PhysicalandMechanicalPropertiesofBamboos(inRoundForm)
Sl
No.
Species Properties
InGreenCondition InAirDryConditions
Density
kg/m3
Modulusof
Rupture
N/mm2
Modulusof
Elasticity103
N/mm2
Maximum
Compressive
strengthN/mm2
Density
kg/m3
Modulus
ofRupture
N/mm2
Modulusof
Elasticity103
N/mm2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
xix)
xx)
xxi)
Bambusaauriculata
B.balcooa
B.bambos(Syn.B.atwndinacea)
B.burmanica
B.glancescens(Syn.B.nana)
B.nutans
B.pallida
B.polymorpha
B.tulda
B.ventricosa
B.vulgaris
Cephalostachyumpergracile
Dendrocalamusgiganteous
D.hamiltonii
D.longispathus
D.membranacaus
D.strictus
Melocannabaccifera
Oxytenantheraabyssinicia
Oxytenantheranigrociliata
Thyrsostachysoliveri
594
740
559
570
691
603
731
610
610
626
626
601
597
515
711
551
631
817
688
510
733
65.1
64.2
58.3
59.7
82.8
52.9
55.2
36.6
53.2
34.1
41.5
52.6
17.2
40.0
33.1
26.3
73.4
53.2
83.6
40.70
61.9
15.01
7.06
5.95
11.01
14.77
6.62
12.90
6.0
10.3
3.38
2.87
11.16
0.61
2.49
5.51
2.44
11.98
11.39
14.96
11.7
9.72
36.7
38.6
35.3
39.9
53.9
45.6
54.0
31.4
39.5
36.1
38.6
36.7
35.2
43.4
42.1
40.5
35.9
53.8
46.6
25.2
46.9
670
850
663
672

673

840
830

640

684
664
728
751

830
758
89.1
68.3
80.1
105.0

52.4

40.6
65.8

71.3

47.8
37.8
119.1
57.6

51.98
90.0
21.41
9.12
8.96
17.81

10.72

5.89
11.18

19.22

6.06
3.77
15.00
12.93

12.85
12.15
NOTES
Part6
StructuralDesign

6234 Vol.2
1Asthestrengthofsplitbambooismorethanthatofroundbamboo,theresultsoftestsonromdbarnboCaIIbesafelyusedfordesigningwithspitbamboo.
2ThevaluesofstressinN/mm
2
havebeenobtainedbyconvertingthevaluesinkgf/cm
2
bydividingthesameby10.
Part6
StructuralDesign 6235

4.4.3.1 Air seasoning of split or halfround bamboo does not pose much problem but care has to be taken to
prevent fungal discoloration and decay. However, rapid drying in open sun can control decay due to
fungalandinsectattack.Seasoninginroundformpresentsconsiderableproblemasregardsmechanical
degradeduetodryingdefects.
NOTEAgeneralobservationhasbeenthatimmaturebamboogetsinvariablydeformedincrosssectionduringseasoningandthick
walledimmaturebamboogenerallycollapses.Thickmaturebambootendstocrackonthesurface,withthecracksoriginatingatthe
nodesandatthedecayedpoints.Moderatelythickimmatureandthinandmoderatelythickmaturebamboosseasonwithmuchless
degrade.Bamboohavingpoorinitialconditiononaccountofdecay,borerholes,etcgenerallysuffersmoredryingdegrades.
4.4.3.2 Acceleratedairseasoningmethodgivesgoodresults.Inthismethod,thenodaldiaphragms(septa)are
punctured to enable thorough passage of hot air from one end of the resulting bamboo tube to the
otherend.
References:1. IS6874:1973,MethodofTestforRoundBamboo,BureauofIndianStandards,
India,1974.
2. Salehuddin,A.B.M.,UnnotoPoddhotiteBashShongrokkhonoBabohar,
BangladeshAgricultureResearchInstitute,2004.
4.4.4 GradingofStructuralBamboo
Gradingissortingoutbambooonthebasisofcharacteristicsimportantforstructuralutilizationasunder:
(a) Diameterandlengthofculm,
(b) Taperofculm,
(c) Straightnessofculm,
(d) Internodallength,
(e) Wallthickness,
(f) Densityandstrength,and
(g) Durabilityandseasoning.
Oneoftheabovecharacteristicsorsometimescombinationof2or3characteristicsformthebasisofgrading.The
culmsshallbesegregatedspecieswise.
4.4.4.1 DiameterandLength
4.4.4.1.1 GradationaccordingtotheMeanOuterDiameter
For structural Group A and Group B species, culms shall be segregated in steps of 10 mm of mean
outerdiameterasfollows:
SpecialGrade70mm<Diameter<100mm
GradeI50mm<Diameter<70mm
GradeII30mmeDiameter<50mm
GradeIIIDiameter<30mm
ForstructuralGroupCspeciesculmsshallbesegregatedinstepsof20mmofmeanouterdiameter
GradeI80mm<Diameter<100mm
GradeII60mm<Diameter<80mm
GradeIIIDiameter<60mm
4.4.4.1.2 Theminimumlengthofculmsshallbepreferably6mforfacilitatingclosefittingsatjoints.
4.4.5 Taper
Thetapershallnotbemorethan5.8mmpermetrelength(or0.58percent)ofbambooinanygradeofbamboo.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6236 Vol.2
4.4.5.1 Curvature
Themaximumcurvatureshallnotbemorethan75mminalengthof6mofanygradeofbamboo.
4.4.5.2 WallThickness
Preferablyminimumwallthicknessof8mmshallbeusedforloadbearingmembers.
4.4.5.3 DefectsandPermissibleCharacteristics
4.4.5.3.1 Dead and immature bamboos, bore/GHOON holes, decay, collapse, checks more than 3 mm in
depth,shallbeavoided.
4.4.5.3.2 Protrudedportionofthenodesshallbeflushedsmooth.Bamboo shallbeusedafteratleastsix
weeksoffelling.
References:1. IS9096:1979,CodeofPracticeforPreservationofBambooforStructural
Purposes,BureauofIndianStandards,India,1974.
4.4.5.3.3 Broken,damagedanddiscoloredbambooshallberejected.
4.4.5.3.4 Maturedbambooofatleast4yearsofageshallbeused.
4.4.6 DurabilityandTreatability
4.4.6.1 Durability
The natural durability of bamboo is low and varies between 12 months and 36 months depending on
the species andclimatic conditions.In tropical countries the biodeterioration isverysevere,Bamboos
are generally destroyed in about one to two years time when used in the open and in contact with
groundwhileaservicelifeoftwotofiveyearscanbeexpectedfrombamboowhenusedundercover
and out of contact with ground. The mechanical strength of bamboo deteriorates rapidly with the
onset of fungal decay in the sclerenchymatous fibres. Split bamboo is more rapidly destroyed than
roundbamboo.Formakingbamboodurable,suitabletreatmentshallbegiven.
Treatability
Due to difference in the anatomical structure of bamboo as compared to timber, bamboo behaves
entirely differently from wood during treatment with preservative. Bamboos are difficult to treat by
normal preservation methods in dry condition and therefore treatment is best carried out in green
condition.
BoucherieProcess
In this process of preservative treatment, water borne preservativeis applied to end surface of green
bamboothroughasuitablechamberandforcedthroughthebamboobyhydrostaticorotherpressure.
References:1. Salehuddin,A.B.M.,UnnotoPoddhotiteBashShongrokkhonoBabohar,
BangladeshAgricultureResearchInstitute,2004.
4.4.6.1.1 Performanceoftreatedbamboo
Trials with treated bamboos have indicated varied durability depending upon the actual location of
use.Theperformanceinpartiallyexposedandundercoveredconditionsisbetter.
4.4.6.1.2 For provisions on safetyof bamboo structures against fire, see Part 7 ConstructionalPractices
andSafety.
4.5 PERMISSIBLESTRESSES
4.5.1 FactorofSafety
Thesafetyfactorforderivingstressesofbambooshallbeasunder:
Extremefibrestressinbeams 4
BambooChapter8
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6237

Modulusofelasticity 4.5
Maximumcompressivestressparallel
tograin/fibres
3.5
4.5.2 CoefficientofVariation
Thecoefficientofvariation(inpercent)shallbeasunder:
Property

Mean

Range

Maximum
Expected
Value
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Modulusofrupture 15.9 5.728.3 23.4
Modulusof
elasticity
21.1 12.731.7 27.4
Maximum
compressivestress
14.9 7.622.8 20.0
Themaximumexpectedvaluesofcoefficientofvariationwhicharetheupperconfidencelimitsundernormality
assumption such that with 97.5 percent confidence the actual strength of the bamboo culms will be at least 53
percentoftheaveragereportedvalueofmodulusofruptureinTable6.4..
4.5.3
Solid bamboos or bamboos whose wall thickness (w) is comparatively more and bamboos which are generally
knownasmalebambooshavingnodesverycloserandgrowingonridgesareoftenconsideredgoodforstructural
purposes.
4.5.4
Thesafeworkingstressesfor16speciesofbamboosaregiveninTable6.4..
4.5.5
Forchangeindurationofloadotherthancontinuous(longterm),thepermissiblestressesgiveninTable6.4.shall
bemultipliedbythemodificationfactorsgivenbelow:
Forimposedormediumtermloading 1.25
Forshorttermloading 1.50
4.6 DESIGNCONSIDERATIONS
4.6.1
All structural members, assemblies or framework in a building shall be capable of sustaining, without exceeding
the limits of stress specified, the worst combination of all loadings. A fundamental aspect of design will be to
determinetheforcestowhichthestructure/structuralelementmightbesubjectedto,startingfromtheroofand
working down to the soil by transferring the forces through various components and connections. Accepted
principles of mechanics for analysis and specified design procedures shall be applied (see Part 6 Structural
Design,Chapter11TimberStructures).
4.6.2
Unlike timber, bamboo properties do not relate well to species, being dependent among other factors, on
position of the culm, geographic location and age. The practice in timber engineering is to base designs on safe
working stresses and the same may be adopted to bamboo with the limitations that practical experience rather
thanprecisecalculationsgenerallygovernthedetailing.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6238 Vol.2
4.6.3 NetSection
Itisdeterminedbypassingaplaneoraseriesofconnectedplanestransverselythroughthemembers.Leastnet
sectionalareaisusedforcalculatingloadcarryingcapacityofamember.
4.6.4 Loads
TheloadsshallbeinaccordancewithPart6StructuralDesign,Chapter2Loads.
4.6.5 StructuralForms
4.6.5.1 Main structural components in bamboo may include roof and floor diaphragms, shear walls, wall
panellings,beams,piles,columns,etc.Bothfromthepointofviewofcapacityanddeformation,trusses
andframedskeltonsaremuchbetterapplicationsofbamboo.
4.6.5.2 SchematizationofBambooasaStructuralMaterial
Thisshallbebasedontheprinciplesofengineeringmechanicsinvolvingthefollowingassumptionsand
practices:
(a) Theelasticbehaviourofbamboo,tillfailure;(plasticbehaviourbeingconsideredinsignificant);
(b) Bambooculmsareanalysedonmeanwallthicknessbasisashollowtubestructure(notperfectly
straight)memberonmeandiameterbasis:
(c) Thestructuralelementsofbambooshallbeappropriatelysupportednearthenodesofculmas
andwherethestructuralsystemdemands.Thejointsinthedesignshallbelocatednearnodes;
and
(d) Bamboo structures be designed like any other conventional structural elements taking care of
detailswithregardstosupportsandjoints;theyshallbeconsideredtogenerallyactasahinge,
unlesssubstantiatingdatajustifyafixedjoint.
4.6.6 FlexuralMemders
4.6.6.1 Allflexuralmembersmaybedesignedusingtheprinciplesofbeamtheory.
4.6.6.2 The tendency of bamboo beams to acquire a large deflection under long continuous loadings due to
possible plastic flow, if any shall be taken care of. Permanent load may be doubled for calculation of
deflection under sustained load (including creep) in case of green bamboo having moisture content
exceeding15percent.
4.6.6.3 Themomentofinertia,Ishallbedeterminedasfollows:
(a) The outside diameter and the wall thickness should be measured at both ends, correct up to 1 mm for
diameterofculmand0.1mmforthewallthickness.(Foreachcrosssectionthediametershallbetaken
twice,indirectionperpendiculartoeachotherandsothewallthicknessshallbetakenasfourtimes,in
thesameplacesasthediameterhasbeentakentwice.)
(b) With these values the mean diameter and the mean thickness for the middle of the beam shall be
calculatedandmomentofinertiadetermined.
4.6.6.4 Themaximumbendingstressshallbecalculatedandcomparedwiththeallowablestress.
4.6.6.5 Forshearchecks,conventionaldesignprocedureinaccordancewithPart6StructuralDesign,Chapter
11TimberStructuresshallbefollowed.
NOTEThebasicshearstressvalues(N/mm2)forfivespeciesofbambooinsplitformingreenconditioncanbeassumedasunder:
Bambusapallida 9.77
B.Vulgaris 9.44
Dedroculumusgiganteous 8.86
BambooChapter8
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6239

D.humiltonii 7.77
Oxytenantheraabyssinicia 11.2
4.6.6.6 Forces acting on a beam, being loads or reaction forces at supports, shall act in nodes or as near to
nodesasbyanymeanspossible.
4.6.7 BambooColumn(PredominantlyLoadedinAxialDirection)
4.6.7.1 Columns and struts are essential components sustaining compressive forces in a structure. They
transferloadtothesupportingmedia.
4.6.7.2 Designofcolumnsshallbebasedononeofthefollowingtwocriteria:
(a) Fullscalebucklingtestsonthesamespecies,sizeandotherrelevantvariables.
(b) Calculations,basedonthefollowing:
i) Themomentofinertiashallbeasper6.6.3.
ii) For bamboo columns the best available straight bamboo culms shall be selected.
Structuralbamboocomponentsincompressionshouldbekeptunderaslendernessratio
of50.
iii) Thebendingstressesduetoinitialcurvature,eccentricitiesandinduceddeflectionshallbe
takenintoaccount,inadditiontothoseduetoanylateralload.
4.6.7.3 BucklingcalculationshallbeaccordingtoEuler,withareductionto90percentofmomentofinertia,to
takeintoaccounttheeffectofthetaper,providedthereduceddiameterisnotlessthan0.6percent.
4.6.7.4 For strength and stability, larger diameter thick walled sections of bamboo with closely spaced nodes
shallbeused,Alternatively,smallersectionsmaybetiedtogetherasabundlecolumn.
4.6.8 Assemblies,RoofTrusses
4.6.8.1 Atrussisessentiallyaplanestructurewhichisverystiffintheplaneofthemembers,thatistheplane
in which it is expected to carry load, but very flexible in every other direction. Roof truss generally
consistsofanumberoftriangulatedframes,themembersofwhicharefastenedatendsandthenature
of stresses at joints are either tensile or compressive and designed as pinended joints (see Fig.
6.4.1.(a)). Bamboo trusses may also be formed using bamboo mat board or bamboo matveneer
compositeorplywoodgusset(seeFig.6.4.1.(b)).
4.6.8.2 Trussshallbeanalysedfromprinciplesofstructuralmechanicsforthedetermination ofaxialforcesin
members.Fortheinfluenceofeccentricities,dueallowanceshallbemadeindesign.
4.6.8.3 Thetrussheightshallexceed0.15timesthespanincaseofatriangulartruss(pitchedroofing)and0.10
timesthespanincaseofarectangular(parallel)truss.
4.6.8.4 Formembersincompression,theeffectivelengthforinplanestrengthverificationshallbetakenasthe
distance between two adjacent points of contraflexure. For fully triangulated trusses, effective length
forsimplespanmemberswithoutespeciallyrigidendconnectionshallbetakenasthespanlength.
4.6.8.5 Forstrengthverificationofmembersincompressionandconnections,thecalculatedaxialforcesshould
beincreasedby10percent.
4.6.8.6 Thespacingoftrussesshallbeconsistentwithuseofbamboopurlins(2mto3m).
Part6
StructuralDesign
6240 Vol.2
4.6.8.7 The ends in open beams, joists, rafters, purlins shall be suitably plugged. Bamboo roof coverings shall
be considered as nonstructural in function. The common roof covering shall include bamboo mat
board, bamboo mat corrugated sheet, bamboo tiles/ strings, plastered bamboo reeds, thatch,
corrugatedgalvanizedironsheeting,plainclaytilesorpantiles,etc.
4.7 DESIGNANDTECHNIQUESOFJOINTS
4.7.1 BambooJoints
Round, tubular form of bamboo requires an approach different to that used for sawn timber. Susceptibility to
crushingattheopenends,splittingtendency,variationindiameter,wallthicknessandstraightnessaresomeof
theassociatedissueswhichhavetobetakencareofwhiledesigninganddetailingtheconnectionswithbamboo.
4.7.1.1 TraditionalPractices
Suchjoiningmethodsrevolvearoundlashingortyingbyropeorstringwithorwithoutpegsordowels.
Suchjointslackstiffnessandhavelowefficiency.
4.7.1.1.1 LengtheningJoints(EndJoints)
LapJoint
Inthiscase,endofonepieceofbambooismadetolapoverthatoftheotherinlineandthewholeis
suitablyfastened.Itmaybefulllappingorhalflapping.Fullsectionculmsareoverlappedbyatleast
one internode and tied together in two or three places. Efficiency could be improved by using
bamboo or hardwood dowels. In half lapping, culms shall preferably be of similar diameter and cut
longitudinallytohalfdepthoveratleastoneinternodelengthandfastenedasperfulllapjoint(see
Fig.6.4.2).
ButtJoint
Culms of similar diameter are butted end to end, interconnected by means of side plates made of
quarterroundculmofslightlylargediameterbamboo,fortwoormoreinternodelengths.Assembly
shall be fixed and tied preferably with dowel pins. This joint transfers both compressive and tensile
forcesequallywell(seeFig.6.4.3).

SleevesandInserts
Short length of bamboo of appropriate diameter may be used either externally or internally to join
twoculmstogether(seeFig.6.4.4).

BambooChapter8
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6241

Fig.6.4.1SometypicalconfigurationsforsmallandlargetrussesinBamboo
ScarfJoint
Ascarfjointisformedbycuttingaslopingplane1in4to6onoppositesidesfromtheendsoftwo
similardiameterbambooculmstobejoined.Theyshallbelappedtoformacontinuouspieceandthe
assembly suitably fastened by means of lashings. Using hooked splays adds to the strength and
properlocationofjoints(seeFig.6.4.5).
4.7.1.1.2 BearingJoints
For members which either bear against the other or cross each other and transfer the loads at an
angleotherthanparalleltotheaxis,bearingjointsareformed.

Part6
StructuralDesign
6242 Vol.2

Fig.6.4.2LapjointinBamboo

Fig:6.4.3ButtjointwithsideplatesinBamboo
ButtJoint
Thesimplestformconsistsofahorizontalmembersupporteddirectlyontopofaverticalmember.The
topof thepostmaybecuttoformasaddletoensureproperseatingofbeamforgoodloadtransfer.
Thesaddleshouldbeclosetoanodetoreduceriskofsplitting(seeFig.6.4.6).
TenonJoint
It is formed by cutting a projection (tenon) in walls of one piece of bamboo and filling it into
corresponding holes (mortise) in another and keyed. It is a neat and versatile joint for maximum
strengthandresistancetoseparation(seeFig.6.4.7).
BambooChapter8
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6243

Fig:6.4.4SleevesandinsertsforBamboojoint

Fig:6.4.5Scarfjoint

Fig:6.4.6ButtjointsinBamboo
Part6
StructuralDesign
6244 Vol.2

Fig:6.4.7Tenonjoint
CrossOverJoint
Itisformedwhentwoormorememberscrossatrightanglesanditsfunctionistolocatethemembers
andtoprovidelateralstability.Incaseofthejointconnectingfloorbeamtopost,itmaybeloadbearing
(seeFig.6.4.8).Suchjointsarealsousedtotransmitanglethrust.
AngledJoint
When two or more members meet or cross other than at right angles, angled joints are formed. For
butt joints, the ends of the members may be shaped to fit in as saddle joints. Tenons would help in
strengtheningsuchjoints(seeFig.6.4.9).
4.7.1.2 ModernPractices
Followingaresomeofthemodernpracticesforbamboojointing(seeFig.6.4.10):
(a) Plywood or solid timber gusset plates maybe used at joint assemblies of web and chord
connectioninatrussandfixedwithbamboopinsorbolts.Hollowcavitiesofbambooneedtobe
stuffedwithwoodenplugs.
(b) Use of wooden inserts to reinforce the ends of the bamboo before forming the joints.
Alternativelysteelbandsclampswithintegralbolt/eyemaybefittedaroundbamboosectionsfor
jointing.
BambooChapter8
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6245

Fig:6.4.8Crossoverjoints(Bearingjoints)

Fig:6.4.9Angledjointswithintegraltenons
Part6
StructuralDesign
6246 Vol.2

Fig:6.4.10Gussetplatedjoint
4.7.1.3 FixingMethodsandFasteningDevices
Incaseofbuttjointsthetiemaybepassedthroughapredrilledholeoraroundhardwoodorbamboo
pegsordowelsinsertedintoprefomedholestoactashorns.Pegsaredrivenfromoneside,usuallyat
anangletoincreasestrengthanddowelspassrightthroughthemember,usuallyatrightangles.
4.7.1.3.1 Normally1.60mmdiametergalvanizedironwiremaybeusedfortightlashing.
4.7.1.3.2 WireBoundJoints
Usually galvanized iron 2.00 mm diameter galvanized iron wire is tightened around the joints by
bindingtherespectivepiecestogether.Atleasttwoholesaredrilledineachpieceandwireispassed
throughthemforgoodresults.
4.7.1.3.3 PinAndWireBoundJoints
Generally12mmdiabamboopinsarefastenedtoculmsandboundby2.00mmdiametergalvanized
ironwire.
4.7.1.3.4 FishPlates/GussetPlatedJoints
Atleast25mmthickhardwoodspliceplateor12mmthickstructuralgradeplywoodareused.Solid
bamboopinshelpinfasteningtheassembly.
4.7.1.3.5 HornedJoints
Twotonguesmadeatoneendofculmmaybefastenedwithacrossmemberwithitsmortisegrooves
toreceivehorns,theassemblybeingwirebound.
4.7.1.4 Foranycompletejointalternativeforagivenloadandgeometry,descriptionofallfasteningelements,
theirsizesandlocationshallbeindicated.Datashallbebasedonfullscaletests.
4.7.1.5 Testsonfullscalejointsoroncomponentsshallbecarriedoutinarecognizedlaboratory.
4.7.1.6 In disaster high wind and seismic areas, good construction practice shall be followed taking care of
joints, their damping and possible ductility. Bracings in walls shall be taken care of in bamboo
structures.
4.8 STORAGEOFBAMBOO
Procurement and storage of bamboo stocks are essential for any project work and shall be done in accordance
withPart7ConstructionalPracticesandSafety.

Part6
StructuralDesign 6247
Chapter 5
C0NCRETE NATERIAL
5.1 GENERAL
S.1.1 Scope
Theprovisionsofthischaptershallapplytothedesignofreinforcedandprestressedconcretestructuresspecified
inchapters6,8,9shallbeapplicablefornormalweightaggregateonlyunlessotherwisespecified.
S.1.2 Notation
C
c
= creepcoefficient
Ec = modulusofelasticityofconcrete
Es = modulusofelasticityofreinforcement
Et = modulusofelasticityofconcreteattheageofloadingt

c
i
= specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete

c
i
= requiredaveragecompressivestrengthofconcreteused
asthebasisforselectionofconcreteproportions

y
= specifiedyieldstrengthofreinforcement
K = coefficientofshrinkage
s = standarddeviation
w
c
= unitweightofconcrete

cc
= creepstraininconcrete

sh
= shrinkageofplainconcrete
= areaofsteelrelativetothatoftheconcrete.
5.2 CONSTITUENTSOFCONCRETE
S.2.1 Cement
S.2.1.1 Cementshallconformtooneofthefollowingspecifications:
(a) "BDSEN1971:2003
(b) "SpecificationforPortlandCement"(ASTMC150/C150M09)
(c) "SpecificationforBlendedHydraulicCement"(ASTMC595/C595M10),
(d) "ASTMC1157/C1157M10"
S.2.1.2 Cementusedintheconstructionshallbethesameasthatusedintheconcretemixdesign.
S.2.2 Aggregates
S.2.2.1 ConcreteaggregatesshallconformtothestandardsCoarseandFineAggregatesfromNaturalSources
forConcrete(BDS243:1963);SpecificationforConcreteAggregates(ASTMC33/C33M08).
S.2.2.2 Maximumnominalsizeofcoarseaggregateshallbetheminimumofthefollowing:
(a)

1
5
thenarrowestdimensionbetweensidesofforms,
Part6
StructuralDesign

6248 Vol.2
(b)

1
3
thedepthofslabs,
(c)
3
4
the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars, or bundles of bars, or
prestressingtendonsorducts.
Theabovelimitationsmayberelaxedif,inthejudgmentoftheengineer,workabilityandmethodsof
consolidationaresuchthatconcretecanbeplacedwithouthoneycomborvoids.
S.2.2.S CoarseaggregatemadefromGradeAbricksasspecifiedinBDS208"SpecificationforCommonBuilding
Clay Bricks" may be used in different types slab and non structural elements, except in applications
where the ambient environmental conditions may impair the performance of concrete made of such
aggregates.
S.2.S Water
S.2.S.1 Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis,
salts,organicmaterials,orothersubstancesthatmaybeharmfultoconcreteorreinforcement.
S.2.S.2 For concrete wherein aluminium members will be embedded, mixing water shall not contain harmful
amountsofchlorideionasindicatedinSec5.5.3.
S.2.S.S Nonpotablewatershallnotbeusedinconcreteexceptthefollowingconditions:
(a) Selection of concrete proportions shall be based on concrete mixes using water from the same
source.
(b) Nonpotable water is permitted only if specified comparative mortar test cubes made with
nonpotablewaterproduceatleast90percentofthestrengthachievedwithpotablewater.
S.2.4 Admixtures
S.2.4.1 Prior approval of the engineer shall be required for the use of admixtures in concrete. All admixtures
shallconformtotherequirementsofthissectionandSec2.4.5ofPart5.
S.2.4.2 Admixtureusedintheworkshallbethesameasthatusedintheconcretemixdesign.
S.2.4.S Admixtures containing chloride other than impurities from admixture ingredients shall not be used in
concrete containing embedded aluminium, or in concrete cast against permanent galvanized metal
forms(seeSec5.5.1.2and5.5.2.1).
S.2.4.4 Air entraining admixtures, if used in concrete, shall conform to "Specification for Air entraining
AdmixturesforConcrete"(ASTMC26006).

S.2.4.S Water reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures, water reducing and
retarding admixtures, and water reducing and accelerating admixtures, if used in concrete, shall
conform to "Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete" ( ASTM C494 / C494M 10) or
"SpecificationforChemicalAdmixturesforuseinProducingFlowingConcrete"(ASTMC1017/C1017M
07).
S.2.4.6 Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures shall conform to "Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or
CalcinedNaturalPozzolanforuseasaMineralAdmixtureinPortlandCementConcrete"(ASTMC618
08a).
S.2.4.7 Ground granulated blastfurnace slag used as anadmixture shall conform to "Specification for Ground
IronBlastFurnaceSlagforuseinConcreteandMortar"(ASTMC98909a).
ConcreteMaterialsChapter5

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6249
5.3 STEELREINFORCEMENT
S.S.1 General
S.S.1.1 SteelreinforcementforconcreteshallconformtotheprovisionsofthissectionandthoseofSec2.4.6of
Part5.
S.S.1.2 ModulusofelasticityEsforreinforcementshallbetakenas200kN/mm2.
S.S.1.S Reinforcing bars to be welded shall be indicated on the drawings and welding procedure to be used
shall be specified. Reinforcing bars otherwise conforming to BDS ISO 69352:2006, shall also possess
materialpropertiesnecessarytoconformtoweldingproceduresspecifiedin"StructuralWeldingCode
ReinforcingSteel"(AWSD1.4)oftheAmericanWeldingSociety.
S.S.2 DeformedReinforcement
S.S.2.1 Deformedreinforcingbarsshallconformtooneofthefollowingspecifications:
(a) "SpecificationforSteelBarsandWiresfortheReinforcementofConcrete"(BDS1313),
(b) "Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" ( ASTM
A615/A615M09b),
(c) "Specification for Rail Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" Including
SupplementaryRequirementsS1(ASTMA996/A996M09bincludingS1),
(d) "SpecificationforAxleSteelDeformedandPlainBarsforConcreteReinforcement"(ASTMA996
/A996M09b),
(e) "Specification for Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" ( ASTM A706 /
A706M09b),
(f) "SpecificationforColdWorkedSteelBarsfortheReinforcementofConcrete"(BS4461).
S.S.2.2 Deformedreinforcingbarswithaspecifiedyieldstrength
y
exceeding410N/mm2shallbepermitted,
provided
y
shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent and the bars otherwise
conformtooneoftheASTMspecificationslistedinSec5.3.2.1(AlsoseeSec6.1.2.5).
S.S.2.S Galvanizedreinforcingbarsshallcomplywith"SpecificationforZincCoated(Galvanized)SteelBarsfor
ConcreteReinforcement"(ASTMA767/A767M09).Epoxycoatedreinforcingbarsshallcomplywith
"Specifications for Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars" ( ASTM A775 / A775M 07b). Galvanized or
epoxycoatedreinforcementshallalsoconformtooneofthestandardslistedinSec5.3.2.1above.
S.S.S PlainReinforcement
S.S.S.1 PlainbarsshallconformtooneofthespecificationslistedinSection5.3.2.1(a),(b),(c)or(d).
S.S.S.2 Plainwireshallconformto"SpecificationforSteelWire,Plain,forConcreteReinforcement"(ASTMA82
/A82M07)exceptthatforwirewithaspecifiedyieldstrengthyexceeding410N/mm2,yshallbe
thestresscorrespondingtoastrainof0.0035.
S.S.S.S Plain bars and wire may be used as ties, stirrups and spirals for all structural members and for all
reinforcementinstructuresupto4storeyhigh.
S.S.4 StructuralSteel,SteelPipeorTubing
S.S.4.1 Structural steel used with reinforcing bars in composite compression members meeting the
requirementsofSec6.3.10.8or6.3.10.9shallconformtooneofthefollowingspecifications:
(a) "SpecificationforStructuralSteel"(ASTMA36/A36M08),
Part6
StructuralDesign

6250 Vol.2
(b) "SpecificationforHighStrengthLowAlloyStructuralSteel"(ASTMA242/A242M04(2009)),
(c) "SpecificationforHighStrengthLowAlloyStructuralManganeseVanadiumSteel"(ASTMA572/
A572M07),
(d) "Specification for High Strength Low Alloy ColumbiumVanadium Steels of Structural Quality"
(ASTMA572/A572M07),
(e) "SpecificationofHighStrengthLowAlloyStructuralSteelwith50ksi(345Mpa)MinimumYieldPoint
to4in(100mm)Thick"(ASTMA588/A588M05).
5.3.4.2 Steel pipe or tubing for composite compression members composed of a steel encased
concrete core meeting the requirements of Sec 6.3.10.7 shall conform to one of the following
specifications:
(a) Grade B of "Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and
Seamless"(ASTMA53/A53M07).
(b) "Specification for Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds
andShapes"(ASTMA500/A500M10).
(c) "Specification for Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing " (ASTM
A50107).
5.4 WORKABILITYOFCONCRETE
Concrete mix proportions shall be such that the concrete is of adequate workability and can properly be
compacted.Suggestedrangesofvaluesofworkabilityofconcreteforsomeplacingconditions,aregiveninTable
6.5.1.
Table6.5.1:SuggestedWorkabilityofConcreteforVariousPlacingConditions
PlacingConditions Degreeof
Workability
ValuesofWorkability

Concretingofthinsections
withvibration

Verylow

2010secondsVeeBeetime
or
0.750.80compactingfactor

Concretingoflightly
reinforcedsectionswith
vibration

Low

105secondsVeeBeetime
or
0.800.85compactingfactor

Concretingoflightly
reinforcedsectionswithout
vibrationorheavily
reinforcedsectionwith
vibration

Medium

52secondsVeeBeetime
or
0.850.92compactingfactor
or
2575mmslumpfor20*mm
aggregate

Concretingofheavilyrein
forcedsectionswithout
vibration

High

Above0.92compactingfactor
or
75125mmslumpfor20*mm
aggregate
*Forsmalleraggregatesthevalueswillbelower
ConcreteMaterialsChapter5

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6251
5.5 DURABILITYOFCONCRETE
S.S.1 SpecialExposures
S.S.1.1 Forconcreteintendedtohavelowpermeabilitywhenexposedtowater,thewatercementratioshall
notexceed0.50.
S.S.1.2 Forcorrosionprotectionofreinforcedconcreteexposedtobrackishwater,seawaterorsprayfrom
thesesources,thewatercementratioshallnotexceed0.4.
IfminimumconcretecoverrequiredbySec8.1.8isincreasedby12mm,watercementratiomaybe
increasedto0.45.
S.S.1.S ThewatercementratiorequiredinSec5.5.1.1and5.5.1.2aboveandTable6.5.2shallbecalculated
usingtheweightofcementmeetingtherequirementsofBDSEN1971orASTMC595/C595M10
orC1157/C1157M10,plustheweightofflyashorpozzolansatisfyingASTMC61808aand/orslag
satisfyingASTMC98909a,ifany.
S.S.2 SulphateExposures
S.S.2.1 Concretetobeexposedtosulphatecontainingsolutionsorsoilsshallconformtotherequirements
ofTable6.5.2orbemadewithacementthatprovidessulphateresistancewiththemaximumwater
cementratioprovidedinTable6.5.2.
S.S.2.2 Calciumchlorideshallnotbeusedasanadmixtureinconcreteexposedtosevereorverysevere
sulphatecontainingsolutions,asdefinedinTable6.5.2.
S.S.S CorrosionofReinforcement
S.S.S.1 Forcorrosionprotection,maximumwatersolublechlorideionconcentrationsinhardenedconcrete
atagesfrom28to42dayscontributedfromtheingredientsincludingwater,aggregates,
cementitiousmaterials,andadmixtures,shallnotexceedthelimitsofTable6.5.3.Whentestingis
performedtodeterminewatersolublechlorideioncontent,testprocedureshallconformtoAASHTO
T260,"MethodsofSamplingandTestingforTotalChlorideIoninConcreteandConcreteRaw
Materials".
S.S.S.2 Whenreinforcedconcretewillbeexposedtobrackishwater,seawater,orsprayfromthesesources,
requirementsofSec5.5.1.1and5.5.1.2forwatercementratio,orconcretestrengthandminimum
coverrequirementsofSec8.1.8shallbesatisfied.
S.S.4 MinimumConcreteStrength
Minimum concrete strength for structural use of reinforced concrete shallbe 20N/mm
2
. However,for buildings
upto4storey,theminimumconcretestrengthmayberelaxedto17N/mm
2
.

Table6.5.2:RequirementsforNormalWeightAggregateConcreteExposedtoSulphateContainingSolutions
Sulphate
Exposure

WaterSoluble
Sulphate(SO
4
)
inSoil,percent
byWeight
Sulphate
(SO
4
)
inWater,
(ppm)

CementType
1

Maximum
WaterCement
Ratio,by
Weight

Negligible

0.000.10

0150

Part6
StructuralDesign

6252 Vol.2

Moderate2

0.100.20

1501500

OtherthanCEMI
andBtype

0.50

Severe

0.202.00

1500
10,000

OtherthanCEMI
andBtype

0.45

Very
severe

Over2.00

Over10,000

OtherthanCEMI
andBtype

0.45
Note:
1
FortypesofcementseeASTMC150andC595
2
Seawater
3 Pozzolanthathasbeendeterminedbytestorservicerecordtoimprovesulphate
resistancewhenusedinconcretecontainingTypeVcement.

Table6.5.3:MaximumChlorideIonContentforCorrosionProtection

TypeofMember
MaximumWaterSolubleChlorideIon
(Cl)inConcrete,PerCentbyWeight
ofCement

Prestressedconcrete
Reinforcedconcreteexposedtochloridein
service
Reinforcedconcretethatwillbedryor
protectedfrommoistureinservice
Otherreinforcedconcreteconstruction

0.06
0.15

1.00

0.30
5.6 CONCRETEMIXPROPORTION
S.6.1 General
S.6.1.1 Proportionsofmaterialsforconcreteshallbesuchthat:
(a) Workability and consistency are achieved for proper placement into forms and around
reinforcement,withoutsegregationorexcessivebleeding;
(b) ResistancetospecialexposurestomeetthedurabilityrequirementsofSec5.5areprovided;and
(c) ConformancewithstrengthtestrequirementsofSec5.12isensured.
S.6.1.2 Wheredifferentmaterialsaretobeusedfordifferentportionsoftheproposedwork,eachcombination
shallbeevaluated.
S.6.1.S Concreteproportions,includingwatercementratio,shallbeestablishedonthebasisoffieldexperience
and/or trial mixtures with materials to be employed (Sec 5.6.2) except as permitted in Sec 5.6.3 or
requiredbySec5.5.
S.6.2
ProportioningConcreteMixontheBasisofFieldExperienceand/orTrialMixtures
S.6.2.1 StandardDeviation
ConcreteMaterialsChapter5

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6253
(a) A standard deviation shall be established where test records are available in a concrete production
facility. Test records from which a standard deviation is calculated shall meet the following
requirements:
i) Theseshallrepresentmaterials,qualitycontrolprocedures,andconditionssimilartothose
expected for the proposed work. Deviations in materials and proportions for the proposed
workshallbemorerestrictedthanthosewithinthetestrecords.
ii) Test records shall represent concrete produced to meet a specified strength
c
i
within 7
N/mm
2
ofthatspecifiedfortheproposedwork.
iii) The recordshall consist of at least 30 consecutive tests or two groups of consecutive tests
totalingatleast30testsasdefinedinSec5.12.2.4exceptasprovidedin(b)below.
(b) Where a concrete production facility does not have test records meeting the requirements of (a)
above but does have a record based on 15 to 29 consecutive tests, a standard deviation shall be
establishedastheproductofthecalculatedstandarddeviationandthemodificationfactorspecified
in Table 6.5.4. However, the test records shall meet the requirements (i) and (ii) of (a) above and
represent only a single record of consecutive tests that span a period of not less than 45 calendar
days.
Table6.5.4:ModificationFactorforStandardDeviationwhenLessThan30TestsareAvailable
No.ofTests* ModificationFactorforStandardDeviation**

Lessthan15
15
20
25
30ormore

seeSec5.6.2.2(b)
1.16
1.08
1.03
1.00
* Interpolateforintermediatenumbersoftests
** Modifiedstandarddeviationtobeusedtodeterminetherequiredaveragestrength

f
cr
from
5.6.2.2(a).
S.6.2.2 RequiredAverageStrength
(a) Required average compressive strength
c
i
used as the basis for selection of concrete
proportions shall be the larger of the values given by Eq (5.6.1) and (5.6.2) using a standard
deviationcalculatedinaccordancewithSec5.6.2.1(a)or5.6.2.1(b)above.

s f f
c cr
34 . 1 + =
(S.6.1)

5 . 3 33 . 2 + = s f f
c cr
(S.6.2)
(b) b) Whenaconcreteproductionfacilitydoesnothavefieldstrengthtestrecordsforcalculation
of standard deviation meeting the requirements of Sec 5.6.2.1(a) or 5.6.2.1(b), the required
average strength shall be determined from Table 6.5.5 and documentation of the average
strengthshallbeinaccordancewiththerequirementsofSec5.6.2.3below.

Table 6.5.5 : Required Average Compressive Strength when Data are not Available to Establish a
StandardDeviation
SpecifiedCompressiveStrength
f
c

N/mm
2

RequiredAverageCompressive
Strength,
cr
f

N/mm
2

Part6
StructuralDesign

6254 Vol.2
Lessthan20
20to35
Over35

f
c
+7.0

f
c
+8.5

f
c
+10.0
S.6.2.S DocumentationofAverageStrength
Documentationshallbepreparedtodemonstratethattheproposedconcreteproportionswillproduce
an average compressive strength equal to or greater than the required average compressive strength
(Sec 5.6.2.2). Such documentation shall consist of one or more field strength test records or trial
mixtures.
(a) Whentestrecordsareusedtodemonstratethatproposedconcreteproportionswillproducethe
requiredaveragestrength
c
i
(Sec5.6.2.2)suchrecordsshallrepresentmaterialsandconditions
similar to those expected. Deviations in materials, conditions and proportions within the test
records shall not have been more restricted than those for proposed work. For the purpose of
documentingaveragestrengthpotential,testrecordsconsistingoflessthan30butnotlessthan
10 consecutive tests are acceptable provided the test records encompass a period of time not
less than 45 days. Required concrete proportions shall be permitted to be established by
interpolationbetweenthestrengthsandproportionsoftwoormoretestrecordseachofwhich
meetsotherrequirementsofthissection.
(b) When an acceptable record of field test results is not available, concrete proportions may be
establishedbasedontrialmixturesmeetingthefollowingrestrictions:
i) Combinationofmaterialsshallbethosefortheproposedwork.
ii) Trialmixtureshavingproportionsandconsistenciesrequiredfortheproposedworkshallbe
made using at least three different water cement ratios or cement contents that will
producearangeofstrengthsencompassingtherequiredaveragestrength.
iii) Trial mixtures shall be designed to produce a slump within 20 mm of the maximum
permitted,andforairentrainedconcretetheaircontentshallbewithin0.5percentofthe
maximumallowable.
iv) For each water cement ratio or cement content, at least three test cylinders for each test
age shall be made and cured in accordance with "Method of Making and Curing Concrete
TestSpecimensintheLaboratory"(ASTMC192/C192M07).Cylindersshallbetestedat28
daysorattestagedesignatedforthedeterminationof
c
i
.
v) Fromtheresultsofcylindertests,acurveshallbeplottedshowingtherelationshipbetween
thewatercementratioorcementcontentandthecompressivestrengthatdesignatedtest
age.
vi) Maximum water cement ratio or minimum cement content for concrete to be used in the
proposed work shall be that shown by the above curve to produce the average strength
required by Sec 5.6.2.2 unless a lower water cement ratio or higher strength is required by
Sec5.5.
S.6.S ProportioningbyWaterCementRatio
S.6.S.1 If the data required in Sec 5.6.2 are not available, concrete proportions shall be based on water
cementratiolimitsspecifiedinTable6.5.6whenapprovedbytheengineer.

Table 6.5.6 : Maximum Permissible Water Cement Ratios for Concrete when Strength Data from Field
ExperienceorTrailMixersarenotAvailable
SpecifiedCompressive
Strength*,

f
c

AbsoluteWaterCementRatiobyWeight
ConcreteMaterialsChapter5

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6255
N/mm
2

Concreteotherthan
airentrained
Airentrained
concrete
17
20
25
30
35
0.66
0.60
0.50
0.40
**
0.54
0.49
0.39
**
**
* 28daystrength.Withmostmaterials,watercementratiosshownwillprovideaverage
strengthsgreaterthanthatrequiredinSec5.6.2.2.
** Forstrengthsabove30N/mm
2
(25N/mm
2
forairentrainedconcrete)concrete
proportionsshallbeestablishedbymethodsofSec5.6.2.
S.6.S.2 Table6.5.6shallbeusedonlyforconcretetobemadewithcementsmeetingstrengthrequirementsfor
Types I, IA, II, IIA, III, IIIA, or V of "Specification for Portland Cement" (ASTM C150 / C150M 09), or
Types IS, ISA, IS (MS), ISA(MS), I(SM), I(SM)A, IP, IPA, I(PM), I(PM)A, IP(MS), IPA(MS), or P of
"Specificationfor Blended Hydraulic Cements" (ASTM C595 / C595M 10), and shall notbe applied to
concretecontaininglightweightaggregatesoradmixturesotherthanthoseforentrainingair.
S.6.S.S Concrete proportioned by water cement ratio limits prescribed in Table 6.5.6 shall also conform to
specialexposurerequirementsofSec5.5andtocompressivestrengthtestcriteriaofSec5.12.
S.6.4 AverageStrengthReduction
As data become availableduring construction, amount by which value of
c
i
must exceed specified value of
c
i

maybereduced,provided:
(a) 30 or more test results are available and the average of test results exceeds that required by Sec
5.6.2.2(a)usingastandarddeviationcalculatedinaccordancewithSec5.6.2.1(a),or
(b) 15 to 29 test results are available and the average of test results exceeds that required by Sec
5.6.2.2(a) using a standard deviation calculated in accordance with Sec 5.6.2.1(b), and provided
furtherthatspecialexposurerequirementsofSec5.5aremet.
5.7 PreparationofEquipmentandPlaceofDeposit
Preparationbeforeconcreteplacementshallincludethefollowing:
(a) Allequipmentformixingandtransportingconcreteshallbeclean.
(b) Alldebrisshallberemovedfromspacestobeoccupiedbyconcrete.
(c) Formsshallbeproperlycleanedandcoated.
(d) Masonryfillerunitsthatwillbeincontactwithconcreteshallbesoakedthoroughly.
(e) Reinforcementshallbethoroughlycleanofdeleteriouscoatings.
(f) Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is placed unless a tremie is used or
unlessotherwisepermittedbytheengineer.
(g) Alllaitanceandotherunsoundmaterialshallberemovedbeforeadditionalconcreteisplacedagainst
hardenedconcrete.
5.8 MIXING
S.8.1
All concrete shall be mixed thoroughly until there is a uniform distribution of materials and shall be discharged
completelybeforethemixerisrecharged.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6256 Vol.2
S.8.2
Ready mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the requirements of "Specification for
ReadyMixedConcrete"(ASTMC94)or"SpecificationforConcreteMadebyVolumetricBatchingandContinuous
Mixing"(ASTMC685).
S.8.S
Jobmixedconcreteshallbemixedinaccordancewiththefollowing:
(a) Mixingshallbedoneinabatchmixerofapprovedtype.
(b) Mixershallberotatedataspeedrecommendedbythemanufacturer.
(c) Mixingshallbecontinuedforatleast90secondsafterallmaterialsareinthedrum,unlessashorter
time is shown to be satisfactory by the mixing uniformity tests of "Specification for Ready Mixed
Concrete"(ASTMC94).
(d) Materialshandling,batching,andmixingshallconformtotheapplicableprovisionsof"Specification
forReadyMixedConcrete"(ASTMC94).
(e) Adetailedrecordshallbekepttoidentify:
i) numberofbatchesproduced;
ii) proportionsofmaterialsused;
iii) approximatelocationoffinaldepositinstructure;
iv) timeanddateofmixingandplacing.
5.9 CONVEYING
S.9.1
Concreteshallbeconveyedfromthemixertotheplaceoffinaldepositbymethodsthatwillpreventsegregation
orlossofmaterials.
S.9.2
Conveying equipment shall be capable of providing a supply of concrete to the place of deposit without
segregation of ingredients and without interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between successive
increments.
5.10 DEPOSITING
S.1u.1
Concrete shall be deposited as near its final position as practical to avoid segregation due to rehandling or
flowing.
S.1u.2
Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces
betweenandaroundthereinforcement.
S.1u.S
Concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials shall not be deposited in the
structure.
S.1u.4
Retemperedconcreteorconcretethathasbeenremixedafterinitialsetshallnotbeused.
ConcreteMaterialsChapter5

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6257
S.1u.S
Afterconcretingisstarted,itshallbecarriedonasacontinuousoperationuntil placingofapanelorsection,as
definedbyitsboundariesorpredeterminedjoints,iscompletedexceptaspermittedorprohibitedbySec5.16.4.
S.1u.6
Topsurfacesofverticallyformedliftsshallbegenerallylevel.
S.1u.7
Whenconstructionjointsarerequired,jointsshallbemadeinaccordancewithSec5.16.4.
S.1u.8
Allconcreteshallbethoroughlyconsolidatedbysuitablemeansduringplacementandshallbethoroughlyworked
aroundreinforcementandembeddedfixturesandintocornersofforms.
5.11 CURING
S.11.1
Concrete(otherthanhighearlystrength)shallbemaintainedabove10oCandinamoistconditionforatleastthe
first7daysafterplacement,exceptwhencuredinaccordancewithSec5.11.3.
S.11.2
Highearlystrengthconcreteshallbemaintainedabove10oCandinamoistconditionforatleastthefirst3days,
exceptwhencuredinaccordancewithSec5.11.3.
S.11.S AcceleratedCuring
S.11.S.1 Curing by high pressure steam, steam at atmospheric pressure, heat and moisture or other accepted
processes,shallbepermittedtoacceleratestrengthgainandreducetimeofcuring.
S.11.S.2 Acceleratedcuringshallprovideacompressivestrengthoftheconcreteattheloadstageconsidered,at
leastequaltotherequireddesignstrengthatthatloadstage.
S.11.S.S Curing process shall be such as to produce concrete with a durability at least equivalent to that
obtainedforconcretecuredbythemethodofSec5.11.1or5.11.2.
S.11.4
Whenrequiredbytheengineer,supplementarystrengthtestsinaccordancewithSec5.12.4shallbeperformed
toassurethatcuringissatisfactory.
5.12 EVALUATIONANDACCEPTANCEOFCONCRETE
S.12.1 General
S.12.1.1 ConcreteshallbeproportionedtoprovideanaveragecompressivestrengthasprescribedinSec5.6.2.2
as well as to satisfy the durability criteria of Sec 5.5. Concrete shall be produced to limit frequency of
strengthsbelow
c
i
tothatprescribedinSec5.12.3.3.
S.12.1.2 RequirementsofshallbebasedontestsofcylindersmadeandtestedasprescribedinSec5.12.3.
S.12.1.S Unless otherwise specified,
c
i
shall be based on 28 day tests. Test age for
c
i
shall be indicated in
designdrawingsorspecifications,ifitisdifferentfrom28days.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6258 Vol.2
S.12.1.4 Splittingtensilestrengthtestsshallnotbeusedasabasisforfieldacceptanceofconcrete.
S.12.2 FrequencyofTesting
S.12.2.1 Samplesforstrengthtestsofeachclassofconcreteplacedeachdayshallbetakennotlessthanoncea
day,norlessthanonceforeach60m3ofconcrete,norlessthanonceforeach250m2surfaceareafor
slabsorwalls.
S.12.2.2 On a given project, if the total volume of concrete is such that frequency of testing required by Sec
5.12.2.1abovewouldprovidelessthanthreestrengthtestsforagivenclassofconcrete,testsshallbe
madefromatleastthreerandomlyselectedbatchesorfromeachbatchifthreeorfewerbatchesare
used.
S.12.2.S Whenthetotalquantityofagivenclassofconcreteislessthan20m3,strengthtestsarenotrequired
whenevidenceofsatisfactorystrengthissubmittedtoandapprovedbytheengineer.
S.12.2.4 Astrengthtestresultshallbetheaverageofthestrengthsoftwocylindersmadefromthesamesample
ofconcreteandtestedat28daysoratthetestagedesignatedinaccordancewithSec5.12.1.3.
S.12.S LaboratoryCuredSpecimens
S.12.S.1 Samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with "Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed
Concrete"(ASTMC17208).
S.12.S.2 Cylinders for strength tests shall be moulded and laboratory cured in accordance with "Practice for
Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM C31 / C31M 09) and tested in
accordancewith"TestMethodforCompressiveStrengthofCylindricalConcreteSpecimens"(ASTMC39
/C39M09a).
S.12.S.S Strengthlevelofanindividualclassofconcreteshallbeconsideredsatisfactoryifbothofthefollowing
requirementsaremet:
(a) Averageofthreeconsecutivestrengthtests(seeSec5.12.2.4)equalsorexceeds
c
i

(b) Noindividualstrengthtest(averageoftwocylinders)fallsbelowbymorethan3.5N/mm
2
.
S.12.S.4 IfeitheroftherequirementsofSec5.12.3.3arenotmet,stepsshallbetakentoincreasetheaverageof
thesubsequentstrengthtestresults.RequirementsofSec5.12.5shallbesatisfiediftherequirementof
Sec5.12.3.3(b)isnotmet.
S.12.4 FieldCuredSpecimens
S.12.4.1 Theengineermayrequirestrengthtestsofcylinderscuredunderfieldconditionstocheckadequacyof
curingandprotectionofconcreteinthestructure.
S.12.4.2 Fieldcuredcylindersshallbecuredunderfieldconditionsinaccordancewith"PracticeforMakingand
CuringConcreteTestSpecimensintheField"(ASTMC31/C31M09).
S.12.4.S Fieldcuredtestcylindersshallbemouldedatthesametimeandfromthesamesamplesaslaboratory
curedtestcylinders.
S.12.4.4 Procedures for protecting and curing concrete shall be improved when the strength of field cured
cylinders at the test age designated for determination of
c
i
is less than 85 per cent of that of
companionlaboratorycuredcylinders.The85percentlimitationshallnotapplyiffieldcuredstrength
exceeds
c
i
bymorethan3.5N/mm2.
ConcreteMaterialsChapter5

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6259
S.12.S InvestigationofLowStrengthTestResults
S.12.S.1 If the result of any strength test (Sec 5.12.2.4) of laboratory cured cylinders falls below the specified
value of by more than 3.5 N/mm2 (Sec 5.12.3.3(b)) or if tests of field cured cylinders indicate
deficienciesinprotectionandcuring(Sec5.12.4.4),stepsshallbetakentoassurethattheloadcarrying
capacityofthestructureisnotjeopardized.
S.12.S.2 If the likelihood of low strength concrete is confirmed and computations indicate that load carrying
capacity may have been significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled from the area in question may be
required in accordance with "Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete" (ASTM C42 / C42M 04). In such cases, three cores shall be taken for each strength test
morethan3.5N/mm2belowthespecifiedvalueof
c
i
.
S.12.S.S Ifconcreteinthestructureisexpectedtobedryunderserviceconditions,coresshallbeairdriedfor7
days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the structure is expected to be more than
superficiallywetunderserviceconditions,coresshallbeimmersedinwaterforatleast40hoursandbe
testedwet.
S.12.S.4 Concreteinanarearepresentedbycoretestsshallbeconsideredstructurallyadequateiftheaverage
ofthreecoresisequaltoatleast85percentof
c
i
andifnosinglecoreislessthan75percentof
c
i
.
Additionaltestingofcoresextractedfromlocationsrepresentedbyerraticcorestrengthresultsshallbe
permitted.
S.12.S.S If the criteria of Sec 5.12.5.4 above are not met, and if structural adequacy remains in doubt, the
responsibleauthoritymayorderloadtestsforthequestionableportionofthestructure,ortakeother
appropriateaction.
5.13 PROPERTIESOFCONCRETE
S.1S.1 Strength
Strengthofconcreteshallbebasedon
c
i
determinedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec5.12.1.
S.1S.2 ModulusofElasticity
S.1S.2.1 Modulus of elasticity Ec for stone aggregate concrete may be taken as 44 wc1.5
f
c
(N/mm2) for
values of wc between 15 and 25 kN/m3 and
f
c
in N/mm2. For normal density concrete, Ec may be
takenas4700
f
c
.
S.1S.2.2 ModulusofelasticityEcforbrickaggregateconcretemaybetakenas3750
c
i
.
S.1S.S Creep
Thefinal(30year)creepstraininconcrete

cc
shallbepredictedfrom

c
t
cc
c
E
stress
=
(5.13.1)
where
E
t
isthemodulusofelasticityoftheconcreteattheageofloadingt,
c
c
isthecreepcoefficient.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6260 Vol.2
The creep coefficient may be estimated from Fig 6.5.1. In this figure, for uniform sections, the effective section
thicknessisdefinedastwicethecrosssectionalareadividedbytheexposedperimeter.Ifdryingispreventedby
immersioninwaterorbysealing,theeffectivesectionthicknessshallbetakenas600mm.
Itcanbeassumedthatabout40%,60%and80%ofthefinalcreepdevelopsduringthefirstmonth,6monthsand
30monthsunderloadrespectively,whenconcreteisexposedtoconditionsofconstantrelativehumidity.
S.1S.4 Shrinkage
An estimate of the drying shrinkage of plain concrete may be obtained from Fig 6.5.2. Recommendations for
effectivesectionthicknessandrelativehumidityaregiveninSec5.13.3.
Fig6.5.2relatestoconcreteofnormalworkabilitymadewithoutwaterreducingadmixtures;suchconcretesshall
have an original water content of about 190 l/m3. Where concrete is known to have a different water content,
shrinkageshallberegardedasproportionaltowatercontentwithintherange150l/m3to230l/m3.
The shrinkage of plain concrete is primarily dependent on the relative humidity of the air surrounding the
concrete, the surface area from which moisture can be lost relative to the volume of concrete and on the mix
proportion.Itisincreasedslightlybycarbonationandselfdesiccationandreducedbyprolongedcuring.

Fig.6.5.2DryingShrinkageofNormalWeightConcrete
Anestimateoftheshrinkageofsymmetricallyreinforcedconcretesectionsmaybeobtainedfrom:

K
sh
+ 1

(S.1S.2)
Where

sh

istheshrinkageoftheplainconcrete;

istheareaofsteelrelativetothatoftheconcrete;
ConcreteMaterialsChapter5

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6261
K isacoefficient,takenas25forinternalexposureandas15forexternalexposure.
S.1S.S ThermalStrains
Thermal strains shall be calculated from the product of a suitable coefficient of thermal expansion and a
temperature change. The temperature change can be determined from the expected service conditions and
climaticdata.Externallyexposedconcretedoesnotrespondimmediatelytoairtemperaturechange,andclimatic
temperaturerangesmayrequireadjustmentbeforeuseinmovementcalculations.
The coefficient of thermal expansion of concrete is dependent mainly on the expansion coefficients for the
aggregate and the cement paste, and the degree of saturation of the concrete. The thermal expansion of
aggregateisrelatedtomineralogicalcomposition(SeeTable6.5.7)
Table6.5.7:ThermalExpansionofRockGroupandRelatedConcrete
AggregateType TypicalCoefficientofExpansion(1 106/oC)
Aggregate Concrete
Flint,quartzite 11 12
Granite,basalt 7 10
Limestone 6 8
Cementpastehasacoefficientofthermalexpansionthatisafunctionofmoisturecontent,andthisaffectsthe
concreteexpansionasshowninFig6.5.3.Itmaybeseenthatpartiallydryconcretehasacoefficientofthermal
expansionthatisapproximately2106/oCgreaterthanthecoefficientforsaturatedconcrete.

Fig. 6.5.3 Effect of Dryness upon the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Hardened
CementandConcrete
Part6
StructuralDesign

6262 Vol.2
5.14 CONCRETINGINADVERSEWEATHER
S.14.1
Concretingshallbeavoidedduringperiodsofnearfreezingweather.
S.14.2
During hot weather, proper attention shall be given to ingredients, production methods, handling, placing,
protection, and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation that could impair
requiredstrengthorserviceabilityofthememberorstructure.
S.14.S
Duringrainyweather,properprotectionshallbegiventoingredients,productionmethods,handlingandplacing
of concrete. If required in the opinion of the engineer, the concreting operation shall be postponed and newly
placedconcreteshallbeprotectedfromrainafterformingproperconstructionjointforfuturecontinuation.
5.15 SURFACEFINISH
S.1S.1 TypeofFinish
Awidevarietyoffinishescanbeproduced.Surfacecastagainstformsmaybeleftascast,e.g.plainorprofiled,
theinitialsurfacemayberemoved,e.g.bytoolingorsandblasting,ortheconcretemaybecovered,e.g.bypaint
ortiles;combinationsofthesetechniquesmayalsobeadopted,e.g.aribbedprofilewithbushhammeredribs.
Upper surfaces not cast against forms may be trowelled smooth or profiled, e.g.by tamping; the initial surface
mayberemoved,e.g.byspraying,oritmaybecovered,e.g.byascreedorplasticfloorfinish.Whenselecting
the type of finish, consideration shall be given to the ease of producing a finish of the required standard, the
viewingdistanceandthechangeofappearancewithtime.Inthecaseofexternalsurfaces,accountshallbetaken
of the weather pattern at the particular location, any impurities in the air and the effect of the shape of the
structure upon the flow of water across its surface. Such considerations will often preclude the specification of
surfacesofuniformcolourastheseareverydifficulttoproduceanddeterioratewithtime,particularlyifexposed
totheweather.
S.1S.2 QualityofFinish
Ahighqualityfinishisonethatisvisuallypleasing;itmayincludecolourvariationsandphysicaldiscontinuitiesbut
these are likely to be distributed systematically or randomly over the whole surface rather than being
concentrated inparticularareas.Whendecidingonthequalityof finishtobespecified,considerationshouldbe
giventotheviewingdistanceandtheexposureconditions.
Thereisnomethodwherebythequalityoffinishthatwillbeacceptedcanunequivocallybedefined.Toachieve
the quality required calls for good communication between experienced personnel conversant with the
productionoffinishesandclosecollaborationwiththesite.Thequalityoffinishcanbeidentifiedinthefollowing
verybroadterms:
(a) Class2appliestosurfacesthataretobeexposedtoviewbutwhereappearanceisnotcritical;such
surfacesmightbethewallsoffireescapestairsorplantroomsandcolumnsandbeamsofstructures
thatarenormallyviewedintheshade,e.g.carparksandwarehouses;
(b) Class 1 is appropriate to most surfaces exposed to view including the external walls of industrial,
commercialanddomesticbuildings;
(c) Special class is appropriate to the highest standards of appearance, such as might be found in
prestigiousbuildings,whereitispossibletojustifythehighcostoftheirproduction.
(d) These broad descriptions may be amplified by written descriptions of the method of finish, by
photographs,bysamplesorbyreferencetoexistingstructures.
S.1S.S TypeofSurfaceFinish
Smooth offtheform and board marked finishes are not recommended for external use, but where they are
specified for interior use the following types may be quoted for the guidance of both designers and contractor.
ConcreteMaterialsChapter5

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6263
Designers should appreciate that it is virtually impossible to achieve dense, flat, smooth, even coloured blemish
freeconcretesurfacesdirectlyfromtheformwork.Somedegreeofmakinggoodisinevitable,evenwithprecast
work.
(a) TypeAfinish:Thisfinishisobtainedbytheuseofproperlydesignedformworkormoulds
oftimber,plywood,plastics,concreteorsteel.Smallblemishescausedbyentrappedairor
watermaybeexpected,butthesurfaceshouldbefreefromvoids,honeycombingorother
blemishes.
(b) Type B finish : This finish can only be obtained by the use of high quality concrete and
formwork.Theconcreteshallbethoroughlycompactedandallsurfacesshallbetrue,with
clean arises. Only very minor surface blemishes shall occur, with no staining or
discolorationfromthereleaseagent.
(c) TypeCfinish:ThisfinishisobtainedbyfirstproducingatypeBfinish.Thesurfaceisthen
improvedbycarefullyremovingallfinsandotherprojections,thoroughlywashingdown,
andthen filling the mostnoticeable surface blemishes with a cementand fine aggregate
paste to match the colour of the original concrete. The release agent should be carefully
chosentoensurethattheconcretesurfacewillnotbestainedordiscoloured.Afterthe
concrete has been properly cured, the face shall be rubbed down, where necessary, to
produceasmoothandevensurface.
S.1S.4 Production
Thequalityofasurfacedependsontheconstituentsandproportionsoftheconcretemix,theefficiencyofmixing,
thehandlingandcompactionoftheconcreteanditscuring.Thecharacteristicsoftheformworkandtherelease
agent may also be of critical importance. Requirements may be stated for any aspect of production that might
contributetowardstheachievementoftherequiredtypeofqualityoffinish.
S.1S.S InspectionandMakingGood
The surface of the concrete shall be inspected for defects and for conformity with the specification and, where
appropriate, for comparison with approved sample finishes. Subject to the strength and durability of the
concrete being unimpaired, the making good of surface defects may be permitted but the standard of
acceptance shall be appropriate to the type and quality of the finish specified and ensure satisfactory
performance and durability. On permanently exposed surfaces great care is essential in selecting the materials
andthemixproportionstoensurethatthefinalcolourofthefacedareablendswiththeparentconcreteinthe
finishedstructure.
Voidscanbefilledwithfinemortar,preferablyincorporatingstyrenebutadienerubber(SBR)orpolyvinylacetate
(PVA), while the concrete is still green or when it has hardened. Fine cracks can be filled by wiping a cement
grout, an SBR, PVA or latex emulsion, a cement/SBR or a cement/PVA slurry across them. Fins and other
projectionsshallberubbeddown.
S.1S.6 Protection
Highqualitysurfacefinishesaresusceptibletodamageduringsubsequentconstructionoperationsandtemporary
protection may have to be provided in vulnerable areas. Examples of such protective measures include the
strapping of laths to arrises and the prevention of rust being carried from exposed starter bars to finished
surfaces.
5.16 FORMWORK
S.16.1 DesignofFormwork
S.16.1.1 Formsshallresultinafinalstructurethatconformstoshapes,lines,anddimensionsofthemembersas
requiredbythedesigndrawingsandspecifications.
S.16.1.2 Formsshallbesubstantialandsufficientlytighttopreventleakageofmortar.
S.16.1.S Formsshallbeproperlybracedortiedtogethertomaintainpositionandshape.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6264 Vol.2
S.16.1.4 Formsandtheirsupportsshallbedesignedsoasnottodamagepreviouslyplacedstructure.
S.16.1.S Designofformworkshallincludeconsiderationofthefollowingfactors:
(a) Rateandmethodofplacingconcrete;
(b) Constructionloads,includingvertical,horizontalandimpactloads;
(c) Special form requirements for construction of shells, folded plates, domes, architectural
concrete,orsimilartypesofelements.
S.16.1.6 Formsforprestressedconcretemembersshallbedesignedandconstructedtopermitmovementofthe
memberwithoutdamageduringapplicationofprestressingforce.
S.16.2 RemovalofFormsandShores
S.16.2.1 Noconstructionloadsshallbesupportedon,noranyshoringremovedfrom,anypartofthestructure
under construction except when that portion of the structure in combination with remaining forming
andshoringsystemhassufficientstrengthtosupportsafelyitsweightandloadsplacedthereon.
S.16.2.2 Sufficientstrengthshallbedemonstratedbystructuralanalysisconsideringproposedloads,strengthof
formingandshoringsystem,andconcretestrengthdata.Structuralanalysisandconcretestrengthtest
datashallbefurnishedtotheengineerwhensorequired.
S.16.2.S No construction loads exceeding the combinations of superimposed dead load plus specified live load
shall be supported on any unshored portion of the structure under construction, unless analysis
indicatesadequatestrengthtosupportsuchadditionalloads.
S.16.2.4 Formsshallberemovedinsuchamannerasnottoimpairsafetyandserviceabilityofthestructure.All
concretetobeexposedbyformremovalshallhavesufficientstrengthnottobedamagedthereby.
S.16.2.S Formssupportingprestressedconcretemembersshallnotberemoveduntilsufficientprestressinghas
been applied to enable prestressed members to carry their dead load and anticipated construction
loads.
S.16.S ConduitsandPipesEmbeddedinConcrete
S.16.S.1 Conduits, pipes and sleeves of any materials not harmful to concrete and within the limitations
specified herein shall be permitted to be embedded in concrete with the approval of the engineer,
providedtheyarenotconsideredtoreplacestructurallythedisplacedconcrete.
S.16.S.2 Conduitsandpipesofaluminiumshallnotbeembeddedinstructuralconcreteunlesseffectivelycoated
orcoveredtopreventaluminiumconcretereactionorelectrolyticactionbetweenaluminiumandsteel.
S.16.S.S Conduits, pipes, and sleeves passing through a slab, wall, or beam shall not impair significantly the
strengthoftheconstruction.
S.16.S.4 Conduits and pipes, with their fittings, embedded within a column shall not displace more than 4
percent of the area of crosssection on which strength is calculated or which is required for fire
protection.
S.16.S.S Except when drawings for conduits and pipes are approved by the engineer, conduits and pipes
embedded within a slab, wall or beam (other than those merely passing through) shall satisfy the
following:
(a) Theyshallnotbelargerinoutsidedimensionthan
1
3
theoverallthicknessofslab,wall,orbeam
inwhichtheyareembedded.
ConcreteMaterialsChapter5

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6265
(b) Theyshallnotbespacedcloserthan3diametersorwidthsoncentre.
(c) Theyshallnotimpairsignificantlythestrengthoftheconstruction.
S.16.S.6 Conduits,pipesandsleevesshallbepermittedtobeconsideredasreplacingstructurallyincompression
thedisplacedconcreteprovided:
(a) Theyarenotexposedtorustingorotherdeterioration.
(b) Theyhavenominalinsidediameternotover50mmandarespacednotlessthan3diameterson
centres.
S.16.S.7 Pipesandfittingsshallbedesignedtoresisteffectsofthematerial,pressure,andtemperaturetowhich
theywillbesubjected.
S.16.S.8 Noliquid,gas,orvapour,exceptwaternotexceeding30oCnor0.3N/mm2pressure,shallbeplacedin
thepipesuntiltheconcretehasattaineditsdesignstrength.
S.16.S.9 In solid slabs, piping, unless it is for radiant heating, shall be placed between the top and bottom
reinforcements.
S.16.S.1u Concrete cover for pipes, conduits, and fittings shall be not less than 40 mm for concrete exposed to
earthorweather,nor20mmforconcretenotexposedtoweatherorincontactwithground.
S.16.S.11 Reinforcement with an area not less than 0.002 times the area of concrete section shall be provided
normaltopiping.
S.16.S.12 Piping and conduit shall be so fabricated and installed that cutting, bending, or displacement of
reinforcementwillnotberequired.
S.16.4 ConstructionJoints
S.16.4.1 Surfaceofconcreteconstructionjointsshallbecleanedandlaitanceremoved.
S.16.4.2 Immediatelybeforenewconcrete is placed, all construction joints shall be wetted and standing water
removed.
S.16.4.S Construction joints shall be so made and located as not to impair the strength of the structure.
Provision shall be made for transfer of shear and other forces through construction joints. SeeSec
6.13.3.15(j).
S.16.4.4 Construction joints in floors shall be located within the middle third of spans of slabs, beams and
girders. Joints in girders shall be offset a minimum distance of two times the width of intersecting
beams.
S.16.4.S Beams,girders,orslabssupportedbycolumnsorwallsshallnotbecastorerecteduntilconcreteinthe
columnsorwallsisnolongerplastic.
S.16.4.6 Beams, girders, haunches, drop panels and capitals shall be placed monolithically as part of a slab
systemunlessotherwiseshowninthedesigndrawingsorspecifications.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6266 Vol.2
5.17 SHOTCRETE
S.17.1 General
Shotcreteshallbedefinedasmortarorconcretepneumaticallyprojectedathighvelocityontoasurface.Except
as specified in this section, shotcrete shall conform to the provisions of this Code regarding plain concrete or
reinforcedconcrete.
S.17.2 ProportionsandMaterials
Shotcreteproportionsshallbesuchthatsuitableplacementisensuredusingthedeliveryequipmentselected,and
shallresultinfinishedinplacehardenedshotcretemeetingthestrengthrequirementsofChapter6.
S.17.S Aggregate
Coarseaggregate,ifused,shallnotexceed20mminsize.
S.17.4 Reinforcement
The maximum size of reinforcement shall be 16 mm bars unless it can be demonstrated by preconstruction
teststhatadequateembedmentoflargerbarscanbeachieved.When16mmorsmallerbarsareused,there
shallbeaminimumclearanceof60mmbetweenparallelreinforcingbars.Whenbarslargerthan16mmare
permitted, there shall be a minimum clearance between parallel bars equal to six diameters of the bars used.
When two curtains of steel are provided, the curtain nearest the nozzle shall have a spacing equal to 12 bar
diametersandtheremainingcurtainshallhaveaminimumspacingof6bardiameters.
Lap splices in reinforcing bars shall be by the noncontact lap splice method with at least 50 mm clearance
between bars. The engineer may permit the use of contact lap splices when necessary for the support of the
reinforcement,provideditcanbedemonstratedbymeansofpreconstructiontestingthatadequateembedment
of the bars at the splice can be achieved and provided further that the splices are placed so that the plane
containing the centres of the two spliced bars is perpendicular to the surface of the shotcrete work. Shotcrete
shallnotbeappliedtospirallytiedcolumns.
S.17.S PreconstructionTests
When required by the engineer a test panel shall be shot, cured, cored or sawn, examined and tested prior to
commencement of the project. The sample panel shall be representative of the project and simulate job
conditions asclosely as possible. The panel thicknessand reinforcing shallreproduce thethickest and the most
congestedareaspecifiedinthestructuraldesign.Itshallbeshotatthesameangle,fromasimilardistance,using
thesamenozzlemanandwiththesameconcretemixdesignthatwillbeusedontheproject.
S.17.6 Rebound
Anyreboundoraccumulatedlooseaggregateshallberemovedfromthesurfacestobecoveredpriortoplacing
theinitialoranysucceedinglayersofshotcrete.Reboundshallnotbereusedasaggregate.
S.17.7 Joints
Exceptwherepermitted,unfinishedworkshallnotbeallowedtostandformorethan30minutesunlessalledges
areslopedthin.Beforeplacingadditionalmaterialadjacenttopreviouslyappliedwork,slopingandsquareedges
shallbecleanedandwetted.
S.17.8 Damage
Aninplaceshotcretewhichexhibitssagsorsloughs,segregation,honeycombing,sandpocketsorotherobvious
defectsshallberemovedandreplaced.
S.17.9 Curing
During the curing periods, shotcrete shall be maintained above 5oC and in moist condition. In initial curing,
shotcrete shall be kept continuously moist for 24 hours after placement is complete. Final curing shall continue
for seven days after shotcreting, for three days if high early strength cement is used, or until the specified
strength is obtained. Final curing shall consist of a fog spray or an approved moisture retaining cover or
membrane.Insectionsofadepthinexcessof300mm,finalcuringshallbethesameasthatforinitialcuring.
ConcreteMaterialsChapter5

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6267
S.17.1u StrengthTest
Strength test for shotcrete shall be made by an approved agency on specimens which are representative of the
workandwhichhavebeenwatersoakedforatleast24hourspriortotesting.Whenthemaximumsizeaggregate
is larger than 10 mm, specimens shall consist of not less than three 75 mm diameter cores or 75 mm cubes.
When the maximum size aggregate is 10 mm or smaller, specimens shall consist of not less than three 50 mm
diametercoresor50mmcubes.Specimensshallbetakeninaccordancewithoneofthefollowing:
(a) From the work: taken at least one from each shift but not less than one for each 20 m
3
of
shotcrete;
(b) From test panels: taken not less than once each shift nor less than one for each 20 m
3
of
shotcreteplaced.Whenthemaximumsizeaggregateislargerthan10mm,thetestpanelsshall
haveaminimumdimensionof450mmby450mm.Whenthemaximumsizeaggregateis10mm
orsmaller,thetestpanelsshallhaveaminimumdimensionof300mmby300mm.Panelsshall
be gunned in the same position as the work, during the course of the work and by the same
nozzlemendoingthework.Theconditionunderwhichthepanelsarecuredshallbethesameas
thework.
Theaveragestrengthof threecoresfromasinglepanelshallbe equal toorexceed u.8S
c
i
withnosinglecore
lessthanu.7S
c
i
.Theaveragestrengthofthreecubestakenfromasinglepanelmustequalorexceed
c
i
with
noindividualcubelessthan
c
i
.Tochecktestingaccuracy,locationsrepresentedbyerraticcorestrengthsmaybe
retested.
S.17.11 Inspections
S.17.11.1 InspectionDuringPlacement
Whenshotcreteisusedforcolumnsandbeams,aspecialinspectorisrequired.Thespecialinspector
shall provide continuous inspection to the placement of the reinforcement and shotcreting and shall
submitastatementindicatingcompliancewiththeplansandspecifications.
S.17.11.2 VisualExaminationforStructuralSoundnessofInplaceShotcrete
Completedshotcreteworkshallbecheckedvisuallyforreinforcingbarembedment,voids,rockpocket,
sandstreaksandsimilardeficienciesbyexaminingaminimumofthree75mmcorestakenfromthree
areaschosenbytheengineerwhichrepresenttheworstcongestionofreinforcingbarsoccurringinthe
project. Extra reinforcing bars may be added to noncongested areas and cores may be taken from
these areas. The cores shall be examined by the special inspector and a report submitted to the
engineerpriortofinalapprovaloftheshotcrete.
S.17.12 Equipment
Theequipmentusedinconstructiontestingshallbethesameequipmentusedintheworkrequiringsuchtesting
unlesssubstituteequipmentisapprovedbytheengineer.

Part6
StructuralDesign 61

Chaptei 6
Stiength Besign of Reinfoiceu Conciete
Stiuctuies
6.1 AnalysisandDesignGeneralConsiderations
6.1.1 ConventionandNotation
Unlessotherwiseexplicitlystated,thefollowingunitsshallbeimplicitforthecorrespondingquantitiesin
thedesignandotherexpressionsprovidedinthischapter:
Lengths mm
Areas mm
2

Secondmomentsofarea mm
4

Force(axial,shear) N
Moment,torsion N mm
Stress,strength MPa,N/mm
2
6.1.1.1 Notation
o = Depth of equivalent rectangular stress blockasdefinedin6.3.2.7.1,mm,
o

= Shear span, equal to distance from center ofconcentratedload to either:(a)faceofsupport

for continuous or cantilevered members, or (b) center of support for simply supported
members,mm,Sec6.4,AppendixA
A
b
=
Areaofanindividualbarorwire,mm
2
,Sec6.3,Sec8.2
A
bg
=
Net bearing area of the head of stud, anchorbolt, or headed deformed bar, mm
2
, Sec8.2,
AppendixD
A
c
= Crosssectionalarea of concrete section resisting sheartransfer,mm
2
,Sec6.4,Sec8.3
A
ch
= Crosssectional area of a structural member measured to the outside edges of transverse
reinforcement,mm
2
,
Sec6.3,Sec8.3

A
cp
=
Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross section, mm
2
, see 6.4.4.1, Sec 6.4,
8.3.8.3
A
cs
= Crosssectional area at one end of a strut inastrutandtiemodel,takenperpendiculartothe
axisofthestrut,mm
2
,AppendixA
A
c
= Gross area of concrete section bounded by web thickness and length of section in the
directionofshearforceconsidered,mm
2
,Sec8.3
A
cw
= Area of concrete section of an individual pier, horizontal wall segment, or coupling beam
resistingshear,mm
2
,Sec8.3
A
]
=
Area of reinforcement in bracket or corbelresistingfactoredmoment,mm
2
,see 6.4.7,Sec
6.4
A
g
= Gross area of concrete section, mm
2
For ahollowsection,A
g
istheareaoftheconcreteonly
anddoesnotincludetheareaofthevoid(s), see 6.4.4.1, Secs6.2to6.4,6.6,6.7,6.10,8.3,
A
h
= Total area of shear reinforcement parallel to primary tension reinforcement in a corbel or
bracket,mm
2
,see6.4.7,Sec6.4
A
]
= Effective crosssectional area within a joint in a plane parallel to plane of reinforcement
generating shear in the joint, mm
2
, seeSec8.3
A
I
= Totalareaoflongitudinalreinforcementtoresisttorsion,mm
2
,Sec6.4,8.3
A
I,mn
= Minimumareaoflongitudinalreinforcementtoresisttorsion,mm
2
,see6.4.4.5.3,Sec6.4
Part6
StructuralDesign

62 Vol.2
A
n
= Area of reinforcement in bracket or corbelresisting tensile force N
uc
, mm
2
, see 6.4.7,Sec
6.4
A
nz =
Area of a face of a nodal zone or a sectionthroughanodalzone,mm
2
,AppendixA
A
Nc
= Projected concrete failure area of a single anchor or group of anchors, for calculation of
strengthintension,mm
2
,seeD.5.2.1,AppendixD
A
Nco
= Projected concrete failure area of a single anchor, for calculation of strength in tension if
not limited by edge distance orspacing,mm
2
,seeD.5.2.1,AppendixD
A
o
=
Grossareaenclosedbyshearflowpath,mm
2
,Sec6.4
A
oh
=
Areaenclosedbycenterlineoftheoutermostclosedtransversetorsionalreinforcement,mm
2
,
Sec6.4
A
s
=
Area of nonprestressed longitudinal tensionreinforcement,mm
2
,Sec6.3,6.4,6.6,6.8,
A
s1
= AreaoftensionreinforcementcorrespondingtomomentofresistanceH
n1
,see6.3.15.1(b)
A
s2
= Areaofadditionaltensionsteel,see6.3.15.1(b)
A
s
i
=
Areaofcompressionreinforcement,mm
2
,AppendixA
A
sc
=
Area of primary tension reinforcement in acorbelorbracket,mm
2
,see6.4.7.3.5,Sec6.4
A
sc,N
=
Effective crosssectional area of anchorintension,mm
2
,AppendixD
A
sc,v
=
Effective crosssectional area of anchorinshear,mm
2
,AppendixD
A
s]
= Area of reinforcement required to balance the longitudinal compressive force in the
overhangingportionoftheflangeofaTbeam,see6.3.15.2(b)
A
sh
= Total crosssectional area of transverse reinforcement (including crossties) within spacing s
andperpendicular to dimensionb
c
,mm
2
,Sec8.3
A
s
= Total area of surface reinforcement atspacing s
i

in the ith layer crossing a strut,with

reinforcementatanangleo

totheaxisofthestrut,mm
2
,AppendixA
A
s,mn
=
Minimumareaofflexuralreinforcement,mm
2
,see6.3.5,Sec6.3
A
st
=
Total area of nonprestressed longitudinalreinforcement (bars or steel shapes), mm
2
,Sec
6.3,8.3
A
sx
=
Areaofstructuralsteelshape,pipe,ortubinginacompositesection,mm
2
,Sec6.3
A
t
= Area of one leg of a closed stirrup resistingtorsionwithinspacings,mm
2
,Sec6.4
A
tp
=
Areaofprestressingsteelina tie,mm
2
,
AppendixA
A
t
= Total crosssectional area of all transversereinforcement within spacingsthatcrossesthe
potential plane of splitting through thereinforcement being developed,mm
2
,Sec8.2
A
ts
=
Area of nonprestressed reinforcement in atie,mm
2
,AppendixA
A

= Areaofshearreinforcementspacings,mm
2
,Sec6.4,6.12
A
vc
= Projected concrete failure area of a single anchor or group of anchors, for calculation of
strengthinshear,mm
2
,seeD.6.2.1,AppendixD
A
vco
= Projected concrete failure area of a singleanchor, for calculation of strengthinshear,ifnot
limited by corner influences, spacing, ormemberthickness,mm
2
, see D.6.2.1,AppendixD
A
d
= Total area of reinforcement in each group ofdiagonalbarsinadiagonallyreinforcedcoupling
beam,mm
2
,Sec8.3
A
]
= Areaofshearfrictionreinforcement,mm
2
,Sec6.4,8.3
A
h
= Area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement within spacing s
2
,
mm
2
,Sec6.4
A
,mn =
Minimum area of shear reinforcement within spacing s, mm
2
, see 6.4.3.5.1 and 6.4.3.5.3,
Sec6.4
A
1
=

Loadedarea,mm
2
,Sec6.3
A
2
= Area of the lower base of the largest frustum
of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
containedwhollywithinthesupportandhavingforitsupperbasetheloadedarea,andhaving
sideslopesof1verticalto2horizontal,mm
2
,Sec6.3
b = Width of compression face of member, mm,Sec6.3
b
o
= Perimeter of critical sectionfor shear in slabsand footings, mm, see 6.4.10.1.2,Sec6.4
b
s
= Widthofstrut,mm,AppendixA
b
t
= Width of that part of cross section containing the closed stirrups resisting torsion, mm, Sec
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 63

6.4
b

= Width of cross section at contact surfacebeinginvestigatedforhorizontalshear,mm,Sec

6.12
b
w
= Web width, or diameter of circular section,mm,Sec6.3,6.4,8.2,8.3
b
1
= Dimension of the critical section b
o
measuredinthedirectionofthespanforwhichmoments
aredetermined,mm,Sec6.5
b
2
= Dimensionofthecritical section b
o
measuredin the direction perpendiculartob
1
,mm,Sec6.5
c = Distance from extreme compression fiber toneutralaxis,mm,Sec6.2,6.3,6.6,8.3
c
uc
= Critical edge distance required to develop the basic concrete breakout strength of a post
installed anchor in uncracked concrete without supplementary reinforcement to control
splitting,mm,seeD.8.6,AppendixD
c
u,mux
= Maximumdistancefrom center of an anchorshaft to the edge of concrete,mm,Appendix D
c
u,mn
= Minimum distance from center of an anchorshaft to the edge of concrete,mm,Appendix D
c
u1
= Distance from the center of an anchor shafttotheedgeofconcreteinonedirection,mm.If
shear is applied to anchor, c
u1
is taken in the direction of the applied shear. If tension is
appliedtotheanchor,c
u1
istheminimumedgedistance,appendixd
c
u2
= Distance from center of an anchor shaft to the edge of concrete in the direction perpen
diculartoc
u1
,mm,AppendixD
c
b
= Smaller of: (a) the distance from center of abarorwiretonearestconcretesurface,and(b)
onehalfthecentertocenterspacingofbarsorwiresbeingdeveloped,mm,Sec8.2
c
c
= Clearcoverofreinforcement, mm, see
6.3.6.4,Sec6.3
c
t
= Distancefromtheinterior face of the columnto the slab edge measuredparalleltoc
1
,butnot
exceedingc
1
,mm,Sec8.3
c
1
= Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket
measuredinthe direction ofthespanforwhichmomentsarebeingdetermined,mm,Sec
6.4,6.5,8.3
c
2
= Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket
measured in the direction perpendicular toc
1
,mm,Sec6.5
C = Crosssectional constant to define torsional properties of slab and beam, see 6.5.6.4.2, Sec
6.5
C
m
= Factor relating actual moment diagram to anequivalentuniformmomentdiagram,Sec6.3
J = Distance from extreme compression fiber tocentroidoflongitudinaltensionreinforce ment,
mm,Sec6.26.4,6.6,6.12,8.18.3,
J
i
= Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal compression
reinforcement,mm,Sec6.2
J
u
= Outside diameter of anchor or shaft diameter of headed stud, headed bolt, or hooked bolt,
mm,seeD.8.4,AppendixD
J
u
i
= ValuesubstitutedforJ
u
whenanoversizedanchorisused,mm,seeD.8.4,AppendixD
J
b
= Nominal diameter of bar, wire, or prestressing strand, mm, Sec 8.1-8.3
J
p
= Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressing steel, mm, Sec
6.4
J
pIc
= Diameter of pile at footing base, mm, Sec 6.8
J
t
= Distance from extreme compression fiber tocentroidofextremelayeroflongitudinaltension
steel,mm,Sec6.2,6.3
= Deadloads,orrelated internal moments andforces,Sec6.1,6.2,6.11,8.3
c
h
= Distancefromtheinner surface of the shaft of aJ orLbolttotheoutertipoftheJorLbolt,mm,
AppendixD
c
N
i
= Distance between resultant tension load on a group of anchors loaded in tension and
the
Centroid of the group of anchors loaded in tension, mm; c
n
is always positive,
appendix d
c
v
i
= Distance between resultant shear load on a group of anchors loaded in shear in the
same
Direction, and the centroid of the group of anchors loaded in shear in the same
direction, mm; c
v
i
is always positive, appendix d
E = Loadeffectsofearthquake,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2,8.3
E
c
= Modulusofelasticityofconcrete,mpa,see6.1.7.1,Sec6.16.3,6.6,6.9
Part6
StructuralDesign

64 Vol.2
E
cb
= Modulusofelasticityofbeamconcrete,mpa,Sec6.5
E
cs
= Modulusofelasticityofslabconcrete,mpa,Sec6.5
EI = Flexuralstiffnessofcompressionmember,Nmm2,see6.3.10.6,Sec6.3
E
p
= Modulusofelasticityofprestressingsteel,mpa,see6.1.7.3,Sec6.1
E
s
= Modulusofelasticityofreinforcementandstructuralsteel,mpa,see6.1.7.2,Sec6.1,6.3,6.6

c
i
= Specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete,mpa,Sec6.16.4,6.6,6.9,8.2,8.3,AppendixesA,
D

c
i

= Squarerootofspecifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete,mpa,Sec6.1,6.2,6.4,6.9,8.2,8.3,
AppendixD

cc
= Effective compressive strength of the concrete in a strut or a nodal zone, mpa, Sec 6.8,
AppendixA

ct
= Averagesplittingtensilestrengthoflightweightconcrete,mpa,See6.1.8.1Sec6.1,6.4,8.2.3.4
(d),Sec8.2

d
= Stressduetounfactoreddeadload,atextremefiberofsectionwheretensilestressiscaused
byexternallyappliedloads,mpa,Sec6.4

pc
= Compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for all prestress losses) at centroid of cross
section resisting externally applied loads or at junction of web and flange when the centroid
lieswithintheflange,mpa.(Inacompositemember,
pc
istheresultantcompressivestressat
centroidofcompositesection,oratjunctionofwebandflangewhenthecentroidlieswithin
theflange,duetobothprestressandmomentsresistedbyprecastmemberactingalone),Sec
6.4

pc
= Compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress forces only (after allowance for all
prestress losses) at extreme fiber of section where tensile stress is caused by externally
appliedloads,mpa,Sec6.4

ps
= Stressinprestressingsteelatnominalflexuralstrength,mpa,Sec8.2

pu
= Specifiedtensilestrengthofprestressingsteel,mpa,Sec6.4

= Modulusofruptureofconcrete,mpa,see6.2.5.2.3,Sec6.2,6.6

s
= Calculatedtensilestressinreinforcementatserviceloads,mpa,Sec6.3

s
i
= Stressincompressionreinforcementunderfactoredloads,mpa,AppendixA

sc
= Effective stress in prestressing steel (after allowance for all prestress losses), mpa, Sec 8.2,
AppendixA

utu
= Specifiedtensilestrengthofanchorsteel,mpa,AppendixD

= Specifiedyieldstrengthofreinforcement,mpa,Sec6.26.4,6.6,6.9,6.12,8.18.3,AppendixA

u
= Specifiedyieldstrengthofanchorsteel,mpa,AppendixD

t
= Specifiedyieldstrength

oftransversereinforcement,mpa,Sec6.3,6.4,8.28.3
F = Loads due to weight and pressures of fluids with welldefined densities and controllable
maximumheights,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2
F
n
= Nominalstrengthofastrut,tie,ornodalzone,N,AppendixA
F
nn
= Nominalstrengthatfaceofanodalzone,N,AppendixA
F
ns
= Nominalstrengthofastrut,N,AppendixA
F
nt
= Nominalstrengthofatie,N,AppendixA
F
u
= Factored force acting in a strut, tie, bearing area, or nodal zone in a strutandtie model, N,
AppendixA
b = Overallthicknessorheightofmember,mm,Sec6.26.4,6.6,6.11,6.12,8.2,8.3,AppendixA
b
u
= Thickness of member in which an anchor is located, measured parallel to anchor axis, mm,
AppendixD
b
c
= Crosssectional dimension of member core measured to the outside edges of the trans
versereinforcementcomposingareaA
sh
,mm,Sec8.3
b
c]
= Effectiveembedmentdepthofanchor,mm,seeD.8.5,AppendixD
b
]
= ThicknessofoverhangingportionoftheflangeofaTbeam,see6.3.15.2(b)
b

= Depthofshearheadcrosssection,mm,Sec6.4
b
w
= Height of entire wall from base to top or height of the segment of wall considered, mm, Sec
6.4,8.3
b
x
= Maximum centertocenter horizontal spacing of crossties or hoop legs on all faces of the
column,mm,Sec8.3
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 65

E = Loads due toweight andpressure of soil, water in soil, or other materials, orrelated internal
momentsandforces,Sec6.2
I =
Momentofinertiaofsectionaboutcentroidalaxis,mm
4
,Sec6.3,6.4
I
b
=
Momentofinertiaofgrosssectionofbeamaboutcentroidalaxis,mm
4
,see6.5.6.1.6,Sec6.5
I
c
=
Momentofinertiaofcrackedsectiontransformedtoconcrete,mm
4
,Sec6.2
I
c
=
Effectivemomentofinertiaforcomputationofdeflection,mm
4
,see6.2.5.2.3,Sec6.2
I
g
= Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement,
mm
4
,Sec6.2,6.3,6.6
I
s
= Momentofinertiaofgrosssectionofslababoutcentroidalaxisdefinedforcalculatingo
]
and
[
t
,mm
4
,Sec6.5
I
sc
=
Momentofinertiaofreinforcementaboutcentroidalaxisofmembercrosssection,mm
4
,Sec
6.3
I
sx
=
Momentofinertiaofstructuralsteelshape,pipe,ortubingaboutcentroidalaxisofcomposite
membercrosssection,mm
4
,Sec6.3
k = Effectivelengthfactorforcompressionmembers,Sec6.3,6.6
k
c
= Coefficientforbasicconcretebreakoutstrengthintension,AppendixD
k
cp
= Coefficientforpryoutstrength,AppendixD
K
t
= Transversereinforcementindex,see8.2.3.3,Sec8.2
l = Spanlengthofbeamoronewayslab;clearprojectionofcantilever,mm,Sec6.2
l
u
= Additionalembedmentlengthbeyondcenterlineofsupportorpointofinflection,mm,Sec8.2
l
c
= Length of compression member in a frame, measured centertocenter of the joints in the
frame,mm,Sec6.3,6.6
l
d
= Development length in tension of deformed bar, deformed wire, plain and deformed welded
wirereinforcement,orpretensionedstrand,mm,Sec6.9,8.18.3
l
dc
= Developmentlengthincompressionofdeformedbarsanddeformedwire,mm,Sec8.2
l
dh
= Development length in tension of deformed bar or deformed wire with a standard hook,
measured from critical section to outside end of hook (straight embedment length between
critical section and start of hook [point of tangency] plus inside radius of bend and one bar
diameter),mm,seeSec.8.2and8.3,Sec8.2,8.3
l
dt
= Developmentlengthintensionofheadeddeformedbar,measuredfromthecriticalsectionto
thebearingfaceofthehead,mm,Sec8.2
l
c
= Loadbearinglengthofanchorforshear,mm,seeD.6.2.2,AppendixD
l
n
= Lengthofclearspanmeasuredfacetofaceofsupports,mm,Sec6.16.5,6.10,8.2.9.3, Sec8.2,
8.3
l
o
= Length, measured from joint face along axis of structural member, over which special
transversereinforcementmustbeprovided,mm,Sec8.3
l
t
= Span of member under load test, taken as the shorter span for twoway slab systems, mm.
Span is the smaller of: (a) distance between centers of supports, and (b) clear distance
between supports plus thickness b of member. Span for a cantilever shall be taken as twice
thedistancefromfaceofsupporttocantileverend,Sec6.11
l
u
= Unsupportedlengthofcompressionmember,mm,see6.3.10.1.1,Sec6.3
l

= Lengthofshearheadarmfromcentroidofconcentratedloadorreaction,mm,Sec6.4
l
w
= Lengthofentirewallorlengthofsegmentofwallconsideredindirectionofshearforce,mm,
Sec6.4,6.6,8.3
l
1
= Lengthofspanindirectionthatmomentsarebeingdetermined,measuredcentertocenterof
supports,mm,Sec6.5
l
2
= Length of span in direction perpendicular to l
1
, measured centertocenter of supports, mm,
see6.5.6.2.3and6.5.6.2.4,Sec6.5
I = Liveloads,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.1,6.2,6.11,8.3
I

= Roofliveload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2
H
u
= Maximum moment in member due to service loads at stage deflection is computed, Nmm,
Sec6.2,6.6
H
c
= Factored moment amplified for the effects of member curvature used for design of
compressionmember,Nmm,see6.3.10.6,Sec6.3
H
c
= Crackingmoment,Nmm,see6.2.5.2.3,Sec6.2,6.6
Part6
StructuralDesign

66 Vol.2
H
cc
= Momentcausingflexuralcrackingatsectiondue toexternallyappliedloads,Nmm,Sec6.4
H
m
= Factored moment modified to account for effect of axial compression, Nmm, see 6.4.2.2.2,
Sec6.4
H
mux
= Maximumfactoredmomentatsectionduetoexternallyappliedloads,Nmm,Sec6.4
H
n
= Nominalflexuralstrengthatsection,Nmm,Sec6.4,6.6,8.2,8.3
H
n1
= Nominal flexural strength at section without compression steel, see 6.3.15.1(b), and moment
ofresistancedevelopedbycompressionintheoverhangingportionoftheTflange,see
6.3.15.2(b)
H
n2
= Additional nominal flexural strength at section due to added compression steel A
s
i
and
additionaltensionsteelA
s2
,see6.3.15.1(b),andmomentofresistancedevelopedbytheweb
ofaTbeam,see6.3.15.2(b)
H
nc
= Nominal flexural strength of column framing into joint, calculated for factored axial force,
consistentwiththedirectionoflateralforcesconsidered,resultinginlowestflexuralstrength,
Nmm,Sec8.3
H
o
= Totalfactoredstaticmoment,Nmm,Sec6.5
H
p
= Requiredplasticmomentstrengthofshearheadcrosssection,Nmm,Sec6.4
H
p
= Probable flexural strength of members, with or without axial load, determined using the
propertiesofthememberatthejointfacesassumingatensilestressinthelongitudinalbarsof
atleast1.2S

andastrengthreductionfactor,,of1.0,Nmm,Sec8.3
H
s
= Factoredmomentduetoloadscausingappreciablesway,Nmm,Sec6.3
H
sIub
= Portionofslabfactoredmomentbalancedbysupportmoment,Nmm,Sec8.3
H
u
= Factoredmomentatsection,Nmm,Sec6.36.6,8.3
H
uu
= Momentatmidheightofwallduetofactoredlateralandeccentricverticalloads,notincluding
P
A
effects,Nmm,Sec6.6
H

= Momentresistancecontributedbyshearheadreinforcement,Nmm,Sec6.4
H
1
= Smallerfactoredendmomentonacompressionmember,tobetakenaspositiveifmemberis
bentinsinglecurvature,andnegativeifbentindoublecurvature,Nmm,Sec6.3
H
1ns
= Factored end moment on a compression member at the end at which M
1
acts, due to loads
thatcausenoappreciablesidesway,calculatedusingafirstorderelasticframeanalysis,Nmm,
Sec6.3
H
2,mn
= MinimumvalueofH
2
,Nmm,Sec6.3
H
2ns
= FactoredendmomentoncompressionmemberattheendatwhichM
2
acts,duetoloadsthat
causenoappreciablesidesway,calculatedusingafirstorderelasticframeanalysis,Nmm,Sec
6.3
H
2s
= FactoredendmomentoncompressionmemberattheendatwhichH
2
acts,duetoloadsthat
causeappreciablesidesway,calculatedusingafirstorderelasticframeanalysis,Nmm,Sec6.3
n = Numberofitems,suchasstrengthtests,bars,wires,monostrandanchoragedevices,anchors,
orshearheadarms,Sec6.4,8.2,AppendixD
N
b
= Basic concrete breakout strength in tension of a single anchor in cracked concrete, N, see
D.5.2.2,AppendixD
N
cb
= Nominalconcretebreakoutstrengthintensionofasingleanchor,N,seeD.5.2.1,AppendixD
N
cbg
= Nominalconcretebreakoutstrengthintensionofagroupofanchors,N,seeD.5.2.1,Appendix
D
N
n
= Nominalstrengthintension,N,AppendixD
N
p
= Pullout strength in tension of a single anchor in cracked concrete,N, see D.5.3.4and D.5.3.5,
AppendixD
N
pn
= Nominalpulloutstrengthintensionofasingleanchor,N,seeD.5.3.1,AppendixD
N
su
= Nominal strength of a single anchor or group of anchors in tension as governed by the steel
strength,N,seeD.5.1.1andD.5.1.2,AppendixD
N
sb
= Sidefaceblowoutstrengthofasingleanchor,N,AppendixD
N
sbg
= Sidefaceblowoutstrengthofagroupofanchors,N,AppendixD
N
u
= FactoredaxialforcenormaltocrosssectionoccurringsimultaneouslywithI
u
or I
u
;tobetaken
aspositiveforcompressionandnegativefortension,N,Sec6.4
N
uu
= Factoredtensileforceappliedtoanchororgroupofanchors,N,AppendixD
N
uc
= Factoredhorizontaltensileforceappliedattopofbracketorcorbelactingsimultaneouslywith
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 67

V
u
,tobetakenaspositivefortension,N,Sec6.4
p
cp
= Outsideperimeterofconcretecrosssection,mm,see6.4.4.1,Sec6.4
p
h
= Perimeterofcenterlineofoutermostclosedtransversetorsionalreinforcement,mm,Sec6.4
P
b
= Nominalaxialstrengthatbalancedstrainconditions,N,see6.3.3.2,Sec6.2,6.3
P
c
= Criticalbucklingload,N,see6.3.10.6,Sec6.3
P
n
= Nominalaxialstrengthofcrosssection,N,Sec6.2,6.3,6.6
P
n,mux
= MaximumallowablevalueofP
n
,N,see6.3.3.6,Sec6.3
P
o
= Nominalaxialstrengthatzeroeccentricity,N,Sec6.3
P
s
= Unfactored axial load at the design (midheight) section including effects of selfweight, N, Sec
6.6
P
u
= Factored axial force; to be taken as positive for compression and negative for tension, N, Sec
6.3,6.6,8.3
q
u
= Factoreddeadloadperunitarea,Sec6.5
q
Lu
= Factoredliveloadperunitarea,Sec6.5
q
u
= Factoredloadperunitarea,Sec6.5
= Stabilityindexforastory,see6.3.10.5.2,Sec6.3
r = Radiusofgyrationofcrosssectionofacompressionmember,mm,Sec6.3
R = Rainload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2
s = Centertocenter spacing of items, such as longitudinal reinforcement, transverse
reinforcement, prestressing tendons, wires, oranchors, mm,Sec 6.3, 6.4, 6.9, 6.11, 6.12, 8.2,
8.3,AppendixD
s

= Centertocenter spacing of reinforcement in the ith layer adjacent to the surface of the
member,mm,AppendixA
s
o
= Centertocenterspacingoftransversereinforcementwithinthelengthl
o
,mm,Sec8.3
s
s
= Samplestandarddeviation,mpa,AppendixD
s
2
= Centertocenterspacingoflongitudinalshearortorsionreinforcement,mm,Sec6.4
S = Snowload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2,8.3
S
c
= Moment, shear, or axial force at connection corresponding to development of probable
strength at intended yield locations, based on the governing mechanism of inelastic lateral
deformation,consideringbothgravityandearthquakeloadeffects,Sec8.3
S
n
= Nominalflexural,shear,oraxialstrengthofconnection,Sec8.3
S

= Yieldstrengthofconnection,basedon

,formoment,shear,oraxialforce,Sec8.3
t = Wallthicknessofhollowsection,mm,Sec6.4
I = Cumulative effect of temperature, creep, shrinkage, differential settlement, and shrinkage
compensatingconcrete,Sec6.2
I
n
= Nominaltorsionalmomentstrength,Nmm,Sec6.4
I
u
= Factoredtorsionalmomentatsection,Nmm,Sec6.4
u = Requiredstrengthtoresistfactoredloadsorrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2
:
n
= Nominalshearstress,mpa,see6.4.10.6.2,Sec6.4,8.3
I
b
= Basicconcretebreakoutstrengthinshearofasingleanchorincrackedconcrete,N,seeD.6.2.2
andD.6.2.3,AppendixD
I
c
= Nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyconcrete,N,Sec6.1,6.4,6.5,8.3
I
cb
= Nominalconcretebreakoutstrengthinshearofasingleanchor,N,seeD.6.2.1,AppendixD
I
cbg
= Nominalconcretebreakoutstrengthinshearofagroupofanchors,N,seeD.6.2.1,AppendixD
I
c
= Nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking results from combined
shearandmoment,N,Sec6.4
I
cp
= Nominalconcretepryoutstrengthofasingleanchor,N,seeD.6.3.1,AppendixD
I
cpg
= Nominalconcretepryoutstrengthofagroupofanchors,N,seeD.6.3.1,AppendixD
I
cw
= Nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking results from high
principaltensilestressinweb,N,Sec6.4
I
d
= Shearforceatsectionduetounfactoreddeadload,N,Sec6.4
I
c
= Designshearforcecorrespondingtothedevelopmentoftheprobablemomentstrengthofthe
member,N,Sec8.3
I

= Factoredshearforceatsectiondue toexternallyappliedloadsoccurringsimultaneouslywith
H
mux
,N,Sec8.3
I
n
= Nominalshearstrength,N,Sec6.1,6.3,6.4,8.3,AppendixD
I
nh
= Nominalhorizontalshearstrength,N,Sec6.12
Part6
StructuralDesign

68 Vol.2
I
p
= Verticalcomponentofeffectiveprestressforceatsection,N,Sec6.4
I
s
= Nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyshearreinforcement,N,Sec6.4
I
su
= Nominal strength in shear of a single anchor or group of anchors as governed by the steel
strength,N,seeD.6.1.1andD.6.1.2,AppendixD
I
u
= Factoredshearforceatsection, N,Sec6.4,6.5,6.12,8.2,8.3
I
uu
= Factoredshearforceappliedtoasingleanchororgroupofanchors,N,AppendixD
I
ug
= Factoredshearforceontheslabcriticalsectionfortwowayactionduetogravityloads,N,see
Sec.8.3
I
us
= Factoredhorizontalshearinastory,N,Sec6.3
wl
c
= Density(unitweight)ofnormalweightconcreteorequilibriumdensityoflightweightconcrete,
kg/m3,Sec6.1,6.2
w
u
= Factoredloadperunitlengthofbeamoronewayslab,Sec6.1
w = Windload,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces,Sec6.2
x = Shorteroveralldimensionofrectangularpartofcrosssection,mm,Sec6.5
y = Longeroveralldimensionofrectangularpartofcrosssection,mm,Sec6.5
y
t
= Distancefromcentroidalaxisofgrosssection,neglectingreinforcement,totensionface,mm,
Sec6.2,6.4
o
= Angledefiningtheorientationofreinforcement,Sec6.4,8.3,AppendixA
o
c
= Coefficient defining the relative contribution of concrete strength to nominal wall shear
strength,Sec8.3
o
]
= Ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
laterallybycenterlinesofadjacentpanels(ifany)oneachsideofthebeam,see6.5.6.1.6,Sec
6.2,6.5
o
]m
= Averagevalueofo
]
forallbeamsonedgesofapanel,Sec6.2
o
]1
= A
]
indirectionofl
1
,Sec6.5
o
]2
= A
] indirectionofl
2
,Sec6.5
o

= Anglebetweentheaxisofastrutandthebarsintheithlayerofreinforcementcrossingthat
strut,AppendixA
o
s
= ConstantusedtocomputeI
c
inslabsandfootings,Sec6.4
o

= Ratioofflexuralstiffnessofshearheadarmtothatofthesurroundingcompositeslabsection,
see6.4.10.4.5,Sec6.4
[
= Ratiooflongtoshortdimensions:clearspansfortwowayslabs,see6.2.5.3.3;sidesofcolumn,
concentratedloadorreactionarea,see6.4.10.2.1;orsidesofafooting,see6.8.4.4.2,Sec6.2,
6.4,6.8
[
b
= Ratioofareaofreinforcementcutofftototalareaoftensionreinforcementatsection,Sec8.2
[
dns
= Ratio used to account for reduction of stiffness of columns due to sustained axial loads, see
6.3.10.6.2,Sec6.3
[
ds
= Ratiousedtoaccountforreductionofstiffnessofcolumnsduetosustainedlateralloads,see
6.3.10.4.2,Sec6.3
[
n
= Factortoaccountfortheeffectoftheanchorageoftiesontheeffectivecompressivestrength
ofanodalzone,AppendixA
[
p
= FactorusedtocomputeI
c
inprestressedslabs,Sec6.4
[
s
= Factor to account for the effect of cracking and confining reinforcement on the effective
compressivestrengthoftheconcreteinastrut,AppendixA
[
t
= Ratiooftorsionalstiffnessofedgebeamsectiontoflexuralstiffnessofawidthofslabequalto
spanlengthofbeam,centertocenterofsupports,see6.5.6.4.2,Sec6.5
[
1
= Factorrelatingdepthofequivalentrectangularcompressivestressblocktoneutralaxisdepth,
see6.3.2.7.3,Sec6.3
y
]
= Factor used to determine the unbalanced moment transferred by flexure at slabcolumn
connections,see6.5.5.3.2,Sec6.4,6.5,8.3
y
s
= Factorusedtodeterminetheportionof reinforcementlocated incenterbandoffooting,see
6.8.4.4.2,Sec6.8
y

= Factorusedtodeterminetheunbalancedmomenttransferredbyeccentricityofshearatslab
columnconnections,see6.4.10.7.1,Sec6.4
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 69

o
= Moment magnification factor to reflect effects of member curvature between ends of
compressionmember,Sec6.3
o
s
= Moment magnification factor for frames not braced against sidesway, to reflect lateral drift
resultingfromlateralandgravityloads,Sec6.3
o
u
= Designdisplacement,mm,Sec8.3
A
c
= Computed, outofplane deflection at midheight of wall corresponding to crackingmoment,
H
c
,mm,Sec6.6
A
]p
= Increaseinstressinprestressingsteelduetofactoredloads,mpa,AppendixA
A
n
= Computed, outofplane deflection at midheight of wall corresponding to nominal flexural
strength,H
n
,mm,Sec6.6
A
o
= Relative lateral deflection between the top and bottom of a story due to lateral forces
computed using a firstorder elastic frame analysis and stiffness values satisfying 6.3.10.5.2,
mm,Sec6.3
A

= Differencebetweeninitialandfinal(afterloadremoval)deflectionsforloadtestorrepeatload
test,mm,Sec6.11
A
s
= Computed,outofplanedeflectionatmidheightofwallduetoserviceloads,mm,Sec6.6
A
u
= Computeddeflectionatmidheightofwallduetofactoredloads,mm,Sec6.6
A
1
= Measuredmaximumdeflectionduringfirstloadtest,mm,see6.11.5.2,Sec6.11
A
2
= Maximumdeflectionmeasuredduringsecondloadtestrelativetothepositionofthestructure
atthebeginningofsecondloadtest,mm,see6.11.5.2,Sec6.11
e
t
= Nettensilestraininextremelayeroflongitudinaltensionsteelatnominalstrength,excluding
strainsduetoeffectiveprestress,creep,shrinkage,andtemperature,Sec6.16.3
0
= Anglebetweenaxisofstrut,compressiondiagonal,orcompressionfieldandthetensionchord
ofthemember,Sec6.4,AppendixA
z
= Modification factor reflecting the reduced mechanical properties of lightweight concrete, all
relative to normalweight concrete of the same compressive strength, see 6.1.8.1, 6.4.5.4.3,
8.2.3.4(d),8.2.6.2,8.2.10.2(b),Sec6.2,6.4,6.9,8.2,8.3andAppendixesA,D
z
A
= Multiplierforadditionaldeflectionduetolongtermeffects,see6.2.5.2.5,Sec6.2
p
= Coefficientoffriction,see6.4.5.4.3,Sec6.4,8.3

= Timedependentfactorforsustainedload,see6.2.5.2.5,Sec6.2
p
= RatioofA
s
tobJ,Sec6.4,6.5,8.3
p
i

= RatioofA
s
i
tobJ,see6.3.15.1(b), Sec6.2
p
b
= RatioofA
s
tobJ producingbalancedstrainconditions,see6.3.3.2,Sec6.3,6.5,6.6
p
]
= RatioofA
s]
tob
w
J,see6.3.15.2(b)
p
I
= Ratioofareaofdistributedlongitudinalreinforcementtogrossconcreteareaperpendicularto
thatreinforcement,Sec6.4,6.6,8.3
p
mux
= Maximum reinforcement ratio allowed for beams corresponding to e
t
= u.uu4 , see
6.3.15.1(a)
p
s
= Ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total volume of core confined by the spiral
(measuredouttooutofspirals),Sec6.3,8.3
p
t
= Ratio of area distributed transverse reinforcement to gross concrete area perpendicular to
thatreinforcement,Sec6.4,6.6,8.3
p

= Ratiooftiereinforcementareatoareaofcontactsurface,see6.12.5.3.3,Sec6.12
p
w
= RatioofA
s
tob
w
J,see6.3.15.2(b),Sec6.4

= Strengthreductionfactor,see6.2.3,Sec6.16.6,6.9,6.11,6.12,8.3,AppendixesA&D

c,N
= Factor used to modify tensile strength of anchors based on presence or absence of cracks in
concrete,seeD.5.2.6,AppendixD

c,P
= Factor used to modify pullout strength of anchors based on presence or absence of cracks in
concrete,seeD.5.3.6,AppendixD

c,v
= Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors based on presence or absence of cracks in
concreteandpresenceorabsenceofsupplementaryreinforcement,seeD.6.2.7foranchorsin
shear,AppendixD

cp,N
= Factorusedtomodifytensilestrengthofpostinstalledanchorsintendedforuseinuncracked
concretewithoutsupplementaryreinforcement,seeD.5.2.7,AppendixD

c
= Factorusedtomodifydevelopmentlengthbasedonreinforcementcoating,Sec8.2

cc,N
= Factor used to modify tensile strength of anchors based on eccentricity of applied loads, see
Part6
StructuralDesign

610 Vol.2
D.5.2.4,AppendixD

cc,v
= Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors based on eccentricity of applied loads, see
D.6.2.5,AppendixD

cd,N
= Factor used to modify tensile strength of anchors based on proximity to edges of concrete
member,seeD.5.2.5,AppendixD

cd,v
= Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors based on proximity to edges of concrete
member,seeD.6.2.6,AppendixD

h,v
= Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors located in concrete members with b
u
<
1.Sc
u1
,seeD.6.2.8,AppendixD

s
= Factorusedtomodifydevelopmentlengthbasedonreinforcementsize,Sec8.2

t
= Factorusedtomodifydevelopmentlengthbasedonreinforcementlocation,Sec8.2

w
= Factor used to modify development length for welded deformed wire reinforcement in
tension,Sec8.2
A = Effective tension area of concrete surrounding the flexural tension reinforcement and having
the same centroid as that of the reinforcement, divided by the number of bars. When the
flexural reinforcement consists of different bar sizes the number of bars or wires shall be
computedasthetotalareaofreinforcementdividedbytheareaofthelargestbarused
A
sk

= Areaofskinreinforcementperunitheightinasideface
C
t
=
Factorrelatingshearandtorsionalstressproperties=
b
w
d
x
2

J
c
= Thickness of concrete cover measured from extreme tension fibre to centre of bar or wire
locatedclosestthereto
H
1
= Momentofresistanceofasectionwithoutcompressionsteel
H
2
= Additional moment of resistance due to added compression steel A
s
i
and additional tension
steela
s2

s = Spacingofshearortorsionreinforcementindirectionparalleltolongitudinalreinforcement
I
c
= Torsionalmomentstrengthprovidedbyconcrete
I
s
= Torsionalmomentstrengthprovidedbytorsionreinforcement
x
1
= Shortercentretocentredimensionofclosedrectangularstirrup
y
1
= Longercentretocentredimensionofclosedrectangularstirrup
z = Quantitylimitingdistributionofflexuralreinforcement,seeEq(6.2.35)
o
t

= Coefficientequalto(2 + y
1
x
1
) S butnotmorethan1.5
[
1
= Factordefinedin6.2.3.7
e = Timedependentfactorforsustainedload
p
mn
= Minimumratiooftensionreinforcement










6.1.2 General
6.1.2.1 Members shallbe designed for adequate strength in accordancewith the provisions
ofthischapter,usingloadfactorsspecifiedin2.6.5.1andstrengthreductionfactors
in6.2.3.1.
6.1.2.2 Design of reinforced concrete members using Working Stress Design method
(AppendixB)isalsopermitted.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 611

6.1.2.3 Structures and structural members shall be designed to have design strength at all
sectionsatleastequaltotherequiredstrength(U)calculatedforthefactoredloads
and forces in such combinations as are stipulated in Chapter 2, Loads. The nominal
strength provided for the section multiplied by the strength reduction factor shall
beequaltoorgreaterthanthecalculatedrequiredstrengthU.
6.1.2.4 MembersshallalsomeetalltheotherrequirementsofthisCodetoensureadequate
performanceatserviceloads.
6.1.2.5 Design strength of reinforcement represented by the values of

and
t
used in
design calculations shall not exceed 550 MPa, except for prestressing steel and for
transversereinforcementin6.3.9.3andSec.8.3.

or
t
mayexceed420MPa,only
iftheratiooftheactualtensilestrengthtotheactualyieldstrengthisnotlessthan
1.20,andtheelongationpercentageisnotlessthan16.
6.1.2.6 For structural concrete,
c
i
shall not be less than 17 MPa. No maximum value of
c
i

shallapplyunlessrestrictedbyaspecificCodeprovision.
6.1.S Loading
6.1.3.1 Loadsandtheircombinationsshallbeinaccordancewiththerequirementsspecified
inChapter2,Loads.
6.1.3.2 Structuresshallbedesignedtoresistallapplicableloads.
6.1.3.3 Effects of forces due to prestressing, crane loads, vibration, impact, shrinkage,
temperature changes, creep, expansion of shrinkagecompensating concrete, and
unequalsettlementofsupportsshallbedulyconsidered.
6.1.4 Methodsofanalysis
6.1.4.1 Members of frames or continuous construction (beams or oneway slabs) shall be
designed for the maximum effects of factored loads as determined by the theory of
elastic analysis, except as modified for redistribution of moments in continuous
flexuralmembersaccordingto6.1.5.Designispermittedtobesimplifiedbyusingthe
assumptionsspecifiedin6.1.6&6.1.9through6.1.12.
6.1.4.2 Frame analysis by approximate methods shall be permitted for buildings of usual
typesofconstruction,spans,andstoryheights.
6.1.4.3 Provided (a) through (e) below are satisfied, the approximate moments and shears
given here shall be permitted for design of continuous beams and oneway slabs
(slabs reinforced to resist flexural stresses in only one direction), as an alternate to
frameanalysis:
a) Therearetwoormorespans;
b) Spansareapproximatelyequal,withthelargeroftwoadjacentspansnotgreaterthan
theshorterbymorethan20percent;
c) Loadsareuniformlydistributed;
d) Unfactoredliveload,I,doesnotexceedthreetimesunfactoreddeadload,;and
e) Membersareprismatic.
Forcalculatingnegativemoments,l
n
istakenastheaverageoftheadjacentclearspanlengths.
Positivemoment
Endspans
Part6
StructuralDesign

612 Vol.2
Discontinuousendunrestrained w
u
l
n
2
11
Discontinuousendintegralwithsupport
w
u
l
n
2
14
Interiorspans
w
u
l
n
2
16
Negativemomentsatexteriorfaceoffirstinteriorsupport

Twospans
w
u
l
n
2
9
Morethantwospans
w
u
l
n
2
1u
Negativemomentatotherfacesofinterior
Supports

w
u
l
n
2
11
Negativemomentatfaceofallsupportsfor

Slabswithspansnotexceeding3.048m;

andbeamswhereratioofsumofcolumnstiffnessestobeamstiffnessexceeds8
ateachendofthespan
w
u
l
n
2
12
Negativemomentatinteriorfaceofexteriorsupportformembersbuiltintegrallywith
supports
Wheresupportisspandrelbeam
w
u
l
n
2
24
Wheresupportisacolumn
w
u
l
n
2
16
Shearinendmembersatfaceoffirst
interiorsupport

1.1Sw
u
l
n
2
Shearatfaceofallothersupports
w
u
l
n
2
6.1.4.4 Strutandtiemodels,providedinAppendixA,shallbepermittedtobeusedinthedesignof
structuralconcrete.
6.1.S Redistributionofmomentsincontinuousflexuralmembers
6.1.5.1 Itshallbepermittedtodecreasefactoredmomentscalculatedbyelastictheoryatsectionsof
maximumnegativeormaximumpositivemomentinanyspanofcontinuousflexuralmembers
foranyassumedloadingarrangementbynotmorethan1uuue
t
percent,withamaximumof
20percent,exceptwhereapproximatevaluesformomentsareused.
6.1.5.2 Redistributionofmomentsshallbemadeonlywhene
t
isequaltoorgreaterthan0.0075at
thesectionatwhichmomentisreduced.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 613

6.1.5.3 Atallothersectionswithinthespans,thereducedmomentshallbeusedforcalculating
redistributedmoments.Staticequilibriumshallhavetobemaintainedafterredistributionof
momentsforeachloadingarrangement.
6.1.6 Spanlength
6.1.6.1 Thespanlengthofasimplysupportedbeamshallbetakenasthesmallerofthedistance
betweenthecentresofbearings,orthecleardistancebetweensupportsplustheeffective
depth.
6.1.6.2 Fordeterminationofmomentsinanalysisofframesorcontinuousconstruction,spanlength
shallbetakenasthedistancecentertocenterofsupports.
6.1.6.3 Designonthebasisofmomentsatfacesofsupportshallbepermittedforbeamsbuilt
integrallywithsupports.
6.1.6.4 Itshallbepermittedtoanalyzesolidorribbedslabsbuiltintegrallywithsupports,withclear
spansnotmorethan3m,ascontinuousslabsonknifeedgesupportswithspansequaltothe
clearspansoftheslabandwidthofbeamsotherwiseneglected.
6.1.7 Modulusofelasticity
6.1.7.1 Modulusofelasticity,E
c
,forconcreteshallbepermittedtobetakenasw
c
1.5
u.u4S'
c
(in
MPa)forvaluesofw
c
between1440and2560kg/m
3
.Fornormalweightconcrete,E
c
shallbe
permittedtobetakenas47uu'
c
.
6.1.7.2 Modulusofelasticity,E
s
,forreinforcementshallbepermittedtobetakenas200,000MPa.
Part6
StructuralDesign

614 Vol.2
6.1.8 Lightweightconcrete
6.1.8.1 Toaccountfortheuseoflightweightconcrete,unlessspecificallynotedotherwise,a
modificationfactor appearsasamultiplierof'
c
inallapplicableequationsandsectionsof
thisCode,wherez = u.8S forsandlightweightconcreteand0.75foralllightweight
concrete.Linearinterpolationbetween0.75and0.85shallbepermitted,onthebasisof
volumetricfractions,whenaportionofthelightweightfineaggregateisreplacedwith
normalweightfineaggregate.Linearinterpolationbetween0.85and1.0shallbepermitted,
onthebasisofvolumetricfractions,forconcretecontainingnormalweightfineaggregateand
ablendoflightweightandnormalweightcoarseaggregates.Fornormalweightconcrete,
z = 1.u.Ifaveragesplittingtensilestrengthoflightweightconcrete,
ct
,isspecified,
z =
ct
(u.S6'
c
) 1.u.
6.1.9 Stiffness
6.1.9.1 Forcomputingrelativeflexuralandtorsionalstiffnessesofcolumns,walls,floors,androof
systems,useofanysetofreasonableassumptionsshallbepermitted.Theassumptions
adoptedshallbeconsistentthroughoutanalysis.
6.1.9.2 Bothindeterminingmomentsandindesignofmembers,effectofhaunchesshallbe
considered.
6.1.1u Effectivestiffnessfordetermininglateraldeflections
6.1.10.1 Lateraldeflectionsresultingfromservicelateralloadsforreinforcedconcretebuildingsystems
shallbecomputedbyeitheralinearanalysiswithmemberstiffnessdeterminedusing1.4
timestheflexuralstiffnessdefinedin6.1.10.2and6.1.10.3orbyamoredetailedanalysis.
Memberpropertiesshallnotbetakengreaterthanthegrosssectionproperties.
6.1.10.2 Lateraldeflectionsresultingfromfactoredlateralloadsforreinforcedconcretebuilding
systemsshallbecomputedeitherbylinearanalysiswithmemberstiffnessdefinedby(a)or
(b),orbyamoredetailedanalysisconsideringthereducedstiffnessofallmembersunderthe
loadingconditions:
a) Bysectionpropertiesdefinedin6.3.10.4.1(a)through(c);or
b) 50percentofstiffnessvaluesbasedongrosssectionproperties.
6.1.10.3 Lateraldeflectionsresultingfromfactoredlateralloadsshallbepermittedtobecomputedby
usinglinearanalysis,wheretwowayslabswithoutbeamsaredesignatedaspartofthe
seismicforceresistingsystem.Thestiffnessofslabmembersshallbedefinedbyamodelthat
isinsubstantialagreementwithresultsofcomprehensivetestsandanalysisandthestiffness
ofotherframemembersshallbeasdefinedin6.1.10.2.
6.1.11 ConsiderationsforColumns
6.1.11.1 Columnsshallbedesignedtoresisttheaxialforcesfromfactoredloadsonallfloorsorroof
andthemaximummomentfromfactoredloadsonasingleadjacentspanofthefloororroof
underconsideration.Loadingconditionresultingthemaximumratioofmomenttoaxialload
shallalsobeconsidered.
6.1.11.2 Inframesorcontinuousconstruction,considerationshallbegiventotheeffectofunbalanced
floororroofloadsonbothexteriorandinteriorcolumnsandofeccentricloadingduetoother
causes.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 615

6.1.11.3 Itshallbepermittedtoassumefarendsofcolumnsbuiltintegrallywiththestructuretobe
fixed,whilecomputinggravityloadmomentsincolumns.
6.1.11.4 Resistancetomomentsatanyfloororrooflevelshallbeprovidedbydistributingthemoment
betweencolumnsimmediatelyaboveandbelowthegivenfloorinproportiontotherelative
columnstiffnessesandconditionsofrestraint.
6.1.12 Liveloadarrangement
6.1.12.1 Thefollowingshallbepermittedtoassume:
a) Theliveloadisappliedonlytothefloororroofunderconsideration;and
b) Thefarendsofcolumnsbuiltintegrallywiththestructureareconsideredtobefixed.
6.1.12.2 Arrangementofliveloadshallbepermittedtobeassumedtobelimitedtocombinationsof:
a) Factoreddeadloadonallspanswithfullfactoredliveloadontwoadjacentspans;and
b) Factoreddeadloadonallspanswithfullfactoredliveloadonalternatespans.
6.1.1S ConstructionofTbeam
6.1.13.1 IntheconstructionofTbeam,theflangeandwebshallbebuiltintegrallyorotherwise
effectivelybondedtogether.
6.1.13.2 WidthofslabeffectiveasaTbeamflangeshallnotexceedonequarterofthespanlengthof
thebeam,andtheeffectiveoverhangingflangewidthoneachsideofthewebshallnot
exceed:
a) Eighttimestheslabthickness;and
b) Onehalfthecleardistancetothenextweb.
6.1.13.3 Theeffectiveoverhangingflangewidthforbeamswithaslabononesideonlyshallnot
exceed:
a) Onetwelfththespanlengthofthebeam;
b) Sixtimestheslabthickness;and
c) Onehalfthecleardistancetothenextweb.
6.1.13.4 Isolatedbeams,inwhichtheTshapeisusedtoprovideaflangeforadditionalcompression
area,shallhaveaflangethicknessnotlessthanonehalfthewidthofwebandaneffective
flangewidthnotmorethanfourtimesthewidthofweb.
6.1.13.5 WhenprimaryflexuralreinforcementinaslabthatisconsideredasaTbeamflange
(excludingjoistconstruction)isparalleltothebeam,reinforcementshallbeprovidedinthe
topoftheslabinthedirectionperpendiculartothebeamandinaccordancewiththe
following:
6.1.13.5.1 Transversereinforcementshallbedesignedtocarrythefactoredloadontheoverhanging
slabwidthassumedtoactasacantilever.Forisolatedbeams,thefullwidthofoverhanging
flangeshallbeconsidered.ForotherTbeams,onlytheeffectiveoverhangingslabwidthneed
beconsidered.
6.1.13.5.2 Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall be not farther apart than five times the slab
thickness,norfartherapartthan450mm.
6.1.14 Constructionofjoist
6.1.14.1 Constructionofjoistconsistsofamonolithiccombinationofregularlyspacedribsandatop
slabarrangedtospaninonedirectionortwoorthogonaldirections.
Part6
StructuralDesign

616 Vol.2
6.1.14.2 Widthofribsshallnotbelessthan100mm,andtheribsshallhaveadepthofnotmorethan
31/2timestheminimumwidthofrib.
6.1.14.3 Clearspacingbetweenribsshallnotexceed750mm.
6.1.14.4 Joistconstructionnotmeetingthelimitationsof6.1.14.1through6.1.14.3shallbedesignedas
slabsandbeams.
6.1.14.5 Whenpermanentburnedclayorconcretetilefillersofmaterialhavingaunitcompressive
strengthatleastequalto
c
i
inthejoistsareused:
6.1.14.5.1 Forshearandnegativemomentstrengthcomputations,theverticalshellsoffillersincontact
withtheribsshallbepermittedtoinclude.Otherportionsoffillersshallnotbeincludedin
strengthcomputations.
6.1.14.5.2 Slabthicknessoverpermanentfillersshallbenotlessthanonetwelfththecleardistance
betweenribs,norlessthan40mm.
6.1.14.5.3 Reinforcementnormaltotheribsshallbeprovidedintheslabinonewayjoists,asrequired
by8.1.11
6.1.14.6 Whenremovableformsorfillersareused,whichdonotcomplywith6.1.14.5,then:
6.1.14.6.1 Slabthicknessshallbenotlessthanonetwelfththecleardistancebetweenribs,norlessthan
50mm.
6.1.14.6.2 Reinforcementnormaltotheribsshallbeprovidedintheslabasrequiredforflexure,
consideringloadconcentrations,ifany,butnotlessthanrequiredby8.1.11
6.1.14.7 Whereconduitsorpipesaspermittedbyrelevantprovisionsofembedmentsinconcreteare
embeddedwithintheslab,slabthicknessshallbeatleast25mmgreaterthanthetotaloverall
depthoftheconduitsorpipesatanypoint.Conduitsorpipesshallnotimpairsignificantlythe
strengthoftheconstruction.
6.1.14.8 Forjoistconstruction,I
c
shallbepermittedtobe10percentmorethanthatspecifiedinSec
6.4.
6.1.1S Separatefloorfinish
6.1.15.1 Unlessplacedmonolithicallywiththefloorslabordesignedinaccordancewithrequirements
ofSec.6.12,floorfinishshallnotbeincludedaspartofastructuralmember.
6.1.15.2 Allconcretefloorfinishesshallbepermittedtobeconsideredaspartofrequiredcoveror
totalthicknessfornonstructuralconsiderations.
6.2 STRENGTHANDSERVICEABILITYREQUIREMENTS
6.2.1 General
6.2.1.1 Structuresandstructuralmembersshallbedesignedtohavedesignstrengthsatallsections
atleastequaltotherequiredstrengthscalculatedforthefactoredloadsandforcesinsuch
combinationsasarestipulatedinthisCode.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 617

6.2.1.2 MembersalsoshallmeetallotherrequirementsofthisCodetoensureadequateperformance
atserviceloadlevels.
6.2.2 Requiredstrength
6.2.2.1 Requiredstrengthu shallbeatleastequaltotheeffectsoffactoredloadsinsuch
combinationsasarestipulatedinChapter2,Loads.
6.2.2.2 Ifresistancetoimpacteffectsistakenintoaccountindesign,sucheffectsshallbeincluded
withI.
6.2.2.3 Estimationsofdifferentialsettlement,creep,shrinkage,expansionofshrinkagecompensating
concrete,ortemperaturechangeshallbebasedonarealisticassessmentofsucheffects
occurringinservice.
6.2.S DesignStrength
6.2.3.1 Designstrengthprovidedbyamember,anditsconnectionstoothermembers,intermsof
flexure,axialload,shear,andtorsion,shallbetakenasthenominalstrengthcalculatedin
accordancewiththerequirementsandassumptionsofthischapter,multipliedbyastrength
reductionfactors

asstipulatedin6.2.3.2,6.2.3.3,and6.2.3.4.
6.2.3.2 Strengthreductionfactor shallbeasgivenin6.2.3.2.1through6.2.3.2.6:
6.2.3.2.1 Tensioncontrolledsectionsasdefinedin6.3.3.4...............................................0.90
6.2.3.2.2 Compressioncontrolledsections,asdefinedin6.3.3.3:
Memberswithspiralreinforcementconformingto6.3.9.3........................ 0.75
Otherreinforcedmembers.......................................................................... 0.65
Forsectionsinwhichthenettensilestrainintheextremetensionsteelatnominalstrength,e
t
,isbetween
thelimitsforcompressioncontrolledandtensioncontrolledsections, shallbepermittedtobelinearly
increased from that for compressioncontrolled sections to 0.90 as e
t
increases from the compression
controlledstrainlimitto0.005(AlsoseeFig. 6.2.3.1). While interpolating, it shallbepermittedtoround
toseconddigitafterdecimal.

Fig. 6.2.3.1Variation of with net tensile strain in extreme tension steel,

t
and
c d
t
forGrade420reinforcementandforprestressingsteel(seesec.6.2.3.2.2)
Part6
StructuralDesign

618 Vol.2
6.2.3.2.3 Itshallbepermittedforcompressioncontrolledsections,asdefinedin6.3.3.3,thefollowing
optional, more conservative alternative values of strength reduction factor , where less
controlled construction environment justifies such selection according to engineering
judgmentofthedesigner:
Memberswithspiralreinforcementconformingto6.3.9.3 0.70
Otherreinforcedmembers 0.60
Forsectionsinwhichthenettensilestrainintheextremetensionsteelatnominalstrength,e
t
,isbetween
thelimitsforcompressioncontrolledandtensioncontrolledsections, shallbepermittedtobelinearly
increased from that for compressioncontrolled sections to 0.90 as e
t
increases from the compression
controlledstrainlimitto0.005(AlsoseeFig. 6.2.3.2). While interpolating, it shallbepermittedtoround
toseconddigitafterdecimal.

Fig. 6.2.3.2Variation of with net tensile strain in extreme tension steel, s
t
and c d
t
for Grade 420
reinforcementandforprestressingsteelwithreducedvaluesof(0.6and0.7)forcompression
controlled sections (see sec.6.2.3.2.3, Optional application in case of less controlled
environmentasperengineeringjudgment)
6.2.3.2.4 Shearandtorsion 0.75
6.2.3.2.5 Bearingonconcrete(exceptforposttensionedanchoragezonesandstrutandtiemodels:
0.65
6.2.3.2.6 Strutandtiemodels(AppendixA),andstruts,ties,nodalzones,andbearingareasinsuch
models:0.75
6.2.3.2.7 CalculationofdevelopmentlengthspecifiedinSec8.2doesnotrequirea strengthreduction
factor.
6.2.3.3 ForstructuresrelyingonintermediateprecaststructuralwallsinSeismicDesignCategoryD,
specialmomentframes,orspecialstructuralwallstoresistearthquakeeffects,E, shallbe
modifiedasgivenin(a)through(c):
a) ForanystructuralmemberthatisdesignedtoresistE,ifthenominalshearstrengthof
thememberislessthantheshearcorrespondingtothedevelopmentofthenominal
flexuralstrengthofthemember, forshearshallbe0.60.Thenominalflexuralstrength
shallbedeterminedconsideringthemostcriticalfactoredaxialloadsandincludingE;
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 619

b) Fordiaphragms, forshearshallnotexceedtheminimum forshearusedforthe

verticalcomponentsoftheprimaryseismicforceresistingsystem;
c) Forjointsanddiagonallyreinforcedcouplingbeams, forshearshallbe0.85.
6.2.3.4 Strengthreductionfactor shallbe0.60forflexure,compression,shear,andbearingof
structuralplainconcrete.
6.2.4 Designstrengthforreinforcement
The values of

and
t
used in design calculations shall not exceed 550 MPa, except for transverse
reinforcementin6.3.9.3andSec.8.3.
6.2.S Controlofdeflections
6.2.5.1 Reinforcedconcretememberssubjectedtoflexureshallbedesignedtohaveadequate
stiffnesstolimitdeflectionsoranydeformationsthatmayadverselyaffectstrengthor
serviceabilityofastructure.
6.2.5.2 Onewayconstruction(nonprestressed)
6.2.5.2.1 MinimumthicknessstipulatedinTable6.2.5.1shallapplyforonewayconstructionnot
supportingorattachedtopartitionsorotherconstructionlikelytobedamagedbylarge
deflections,unlesscomputationofdeflectionindicatesalesserthicknesscanbeusedwithout
adverseeffects.
6.2.5.2.2 Where deflections are to be computed, deflections that occur immediately on application of
load shall be computed by usual methods or formulas for elastic deflections, considering
effectsofcrackingandreinforcementonmemberstiffness.
TABLE 6.2.5.1 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF NONPRESTRESSED BEAMS OR ONEWAY SLABS UNLESS
DEFLECTIONSARECALCULATED
Minimumthickness,b
Simplysupported Oneend
continuous
Bothends
continuous
Cantilever

Member
Membersnotsupportingorattachedtopartitionsorother constructionlikelytobe
damagedbylargedeflections
Solidoneway
slabs
l2u l24 l28 l1u
Beamsorribbed
onewayslabs

l16 l18.S l21 l8
Notes:
Values given shall be used directly for members with normalweight concrete and Grade 420
reinforcement.Forotherconditions,thevaluesshallbemodifiedas follows:
a) For lightweight concrete having equilibriumdensity,w
c

, in the range of1440 to1840kg/m

3
, the
valuesshallbemultipliedby(1.6S u.uuuSw
c
) butnot lessthan1.09.
b)For

otherthan420MPa,thevaluesshallbemultipliedby(u.4 +

7uu).
6.2.5.2.3 Ifnotstiffnessvaluesareobtainedbyamorecomprehensiveanalysis,immediatedeflection
shallbecomputedwiththemodulusofelasticityforconcrete,E
c
,asspecifiedin6.1.7.1
(normalweightorlightweightconcrete)andwiththeeffectivemomentofinertia,I
c
,as
follows,butnotgreaterthanI
g

I
c
= [
M
cr
M
c

3
I
g
+ _1 - [
M
cr
M
c

3
_ I
c
(6.2.1)
Part6
StructuralDesign

620 Vol.2
where
H
c
=
]
r
I
g

t
(6.2.2)
anu

= u.62
c
i
(6.2.S)
6.2.5.2.4 I
c
shallbepermittedtobetakenforcontinuousmembersastheaverageofvaluesobtained
fromEq.(6.2.1)forthecriticalpositiveandnegativemomentsections.Forprismatic
members,I
c
shallbepermittedtobetakenasthevalueobtainedfromEq.(6.2.1)atmidspan
forsimpleandcontinuousspans,andatsupportforcantilevers.
6.2.5.2.5 Ifthevaluesarenotobtainedbyamorecomprehensiveanalysis,additionallongterm
deflectionresultingfromcreepandshrinkageofflexuralmembers(normalweightor
lightweightconcrete)shallbedeterminedbymultiplyingtheimmediatedeflectioncausedby
thesustainedloadconsidered,bythefactorz
z

z
z
=
{
1+50p
|
(6.2.4)
wherep
i
shallbethevalueatmidspanforsimpleandcontinuousspans,andatsupportfor
cantilevers.Itshallbepermittedtoassume,thetimedependentfactorforsustainedloads,
tobeequalto:
5yearsormore 2.0
12months 1.4
6months 1.2
3months 1.0
6.2.5.2.6 Thevalueofdeflectioncomputedinaccordancewith6.2.5.2.2through6.2.5.2.5shallnot
exceedlimitsstipulatedinTable6.2.5.2.
6.2.5.3 Twowayconstruction(nonprestressed)
6.2.5.3.1 Theminimumthicknessofslabsorothertwowayconstructiondesignedinaccordancewith
theprovisionsofSec.6.5andconformingwiththerequirementsof6.5.6.1.2shallbegoverned
bySection6.2.5.3.Thethicknessofslabswithoutinteriorbeamsspanningbetweenthe
supportsonallsidesshallsatisfytherequirementsof6.2.5.3.2or6.2.5.3.4.Thethicknessof
slabswithbeamsspanningbetweenthesupportsonallsidesshallsatisfyrequirementsof
6.2.5.3.3or6.2.5.3.4.
6.2.5.3.2 Ifslabsarewithoutinteriorbeamsspanningbetweenthesupportsandhavearatiooflongto
shortspannotgreaterthan2,theminimumthicknessshallbeinaccordancewiththe
provisionsofTable6.2.5.3andshallnotbelessthanthefollowingvalues:
Slabswithoutdroppanelsasdefinedin6.5.2.5 125mm;
Slabswithdroppanelsasdefinedin6.5.2.5 100mm.
TABLE6.2.5.2MAXIMUMALLOWABLECOMPUTEDDEFLECTIONS
Typeofmember Deflectiontobeconsidered Deflection
Flatroofsnotsupportingorattachedto
nonstructuralelementslikelytobedamaged
bylargedeflections
Immediatedeflectionduetoliveload
I
l 18u
-

Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 621

Floorsnotsupportingorattachedto
nonstructuralelementslikelytobedamaged
bylargedeflections
Immediatedeflectionduetoliveload
I
l S6u
Rooforfloorconstructionsupportingor
attachedtononstructuralelementslikelyto
bedamagedbylargedeflections
Thatpartofthetotaldeflection
occurringafterattachmentof
nonstructuralelements(sumofthe
longtermdeflectionduetoall
sustainedloadsandtheimmediate
deflectionduetoanyadditionallive
load)

l 48u


Rooforfloorconstructionsupportingor
attachedtononstructuralelementsnotlikely
tobedamagedbylargedeflections
l /240

*Limit notintendedto safeguardagainstponding.Pondingshouldbecheckedbysuitablecalculations
of deflection, includingaddeddeflectionsduetopondedwater,andconsideringlongtermeffectsofall
sustainedloads,camber,constructiontolerances,andreliabilityofprovisionsfordrainage.

Longtermdeflectionshallbedeterminedinaccordancewith6.2.5.2.5,butmaybereducedbyamount
ofdeflectioncalculatedtooccurbeforeattachmentofnonstructuralelements.Thisamountshallbe
determinedonbasisofacceptedengineeringdatarelatingtotimedeflectioncharacteristicsof
memberssimilartothosebeingconsidered.

Limit maybeexceededifadequatemeasuresaretakentopreventdamagetosupportedorattached
elements.

Limit shallnotbegreaterthantoleranceprovidedfornonstructuralelements.Limitmaybeexceeded
TABLE6.2.5.3MINIMUMTHICKNESSOFSLABSWITHOUTINTERIORBEAMS*

, MPa

Without drop panels

With drop panels

Exteriorpanels Interior
l
Exteriorpanels Interior
l
Without
edgebeams
Withedge
beams

Without
edgebeams
Withedge
beams

280 l
n

SS l
n
S6 l
n
S6 l
n
S6 l
n
4u l
n

4u
420 l
n

Su l
n
SS l
n
SS l
n
SS l
n
S6 l
n

S6
520 l
n

28 l
n
S1 l
n
S1 l
n
S1 l
n
S4 l
n

S4
*
For twoway construction, l
n

is the length of clear span in the long direction,
measured facetofaceofsupportsinslabswithoutbeamsandfacetofaceof beams or
othersupportsinothercases.

For

between the values given in the table, minimum thickness shall be
determinedbylinearinterpolation.

Droppanelsasdefinedin6.5.2.5.

Slabs withbeamsbetweencolumnsalongexterioredges.Thevalueofo
]

fortheedge
beamshallnotbelessthan0.8.
6.2.5.3.3 The minimum thickness,bfor slabs with beams spanning between the supports on all sides,
shallbeasfollows:
a) Foro
]m
equaltoorlessthan0.2,theprovisionsof6.2.5.3.2shallapply;
b) Foro
]m
greaterthan0.2butnotgreaterthan2.0,b shallnotbelessthan
b =

n
_0.8+
]
j
1400
]
36+5[(u
]m
-0.2)
(6.2.5)
Part6
StructuralDesign

622 Vol.2
andnotlessthan125mm;
c) Foro
]m
greaterthan2.0,b shallnotbelessthan
b =

n
_0.8+
]
j
1400
]
36+9[
(6.2.6)
andnotlessthan90mm;
d) An edge beam with a stiffness ratio o
]
not less than 0.80 shall be provided at
discontinuousedges,ortheminimumthicknessrequiredbyEq.(6.2.5)or(6.2.6)shallbe
increasedbyatleast10percentinthepanelwithadiscontinuousedge.
Terml
n
in(b)and(c)islengthofclearspaninlongdirectionmeasuredfacetofaceofbeams.
Term[ in(b)and(c)isratioofclearspansinlongtoshortdirectionofslab.
6.2.5.3.4 WhencomputeddeflectionsdonotexceedthelimitsofTable6.2.5.2,slabthicknesslessthan
the minimum required by 6.2.5.3.1, 6.2.5.3.2, and 6.2.5.3.3 shall be permitted. Deflections
shallbecomputedtakingintoaccountsizeandshapeofthepanel,conditionsofsupport,and
natureofrestraintsatthepaneledges.Themodulusofelasticityofconcrete,E
c
,shallbeas
specified in 6.1.7.1. The effective moment of inertia, I
c
, shall be that given by Eq. (6.2.1);
othervaluesshallbepermittedtobeusediftheyresultincomputeddeflectionsinreasonable
agreement with results of comprehensive tests. Additional longterm deflection shall be
computedinaccordancewith6.2.5.2.5.
6.2.5.4 Compositeconstruction
6.2.5.4.1 Shoredconstruction
Where composite flexural members are supported during construction so that, after removal of
temporarysupports,deadloadisresistedbythefullcompositesection,itshallbepermittedto consider
the composite member equivalent to a monolithically cast member for computation of deflection. For
nonprestressed members, the portion of the member in compression shall determine whether values in
Table6.2.5.1fornormalweightorlightweightconcreteshallapply.Ifdeflectioniscomputed,accountshall
betakenofcurvaturesresultingfromdifferentialshrinkageofprecastandcastinplacecomponents,and
ofaxialcreepeffectsinaprestressedconcretemember.
6.2.5.4.2 Unshoredconstruction
When the thickness of a nonprestressed precast flexural member meets the requirements of Table
6.2.5.1,deflectionneednotbecomputed.Ifthethicknessofanonprestressedcompositemembermeets
the requirements of Table 6.2.5.1, it is not required to compute deflection occurring after the member
becomes composite, but the longterm deflection of the precast member shall be investigated for
magnitudeanddurationofloadpriortobeginningofeffectivecompositeaction.
6.2.5.4.3 The computed deflection in accordance with 6.2.5.4.1 or 6.2.5.4.2 shall not exceed limits
stipulatedinTable6.2.5.2.
6.3 AXIALLOADSANDFLEXURE
6.S.1 Scope
TheprovisionsofSec.6.3shallbeapplicabletothedesignofmemberssubjecttoflexureoraxialloadsor
acombinationthereof.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 623

6.S.2 Designassumptions
6.3.2.1 The assumptions given in 6.3.2.2through 6.3.2.7, and satisfaction of applicable conditions of
equilibriumandcompatibilityofstrainsshallformthebasisofstrengthdesignofmembersfor
flexureandaxialloads.
6.3.2.2 It shall be assumed that strain in reinforcement and concrete is directly proportional to the
distance from the neutral axis, except that,for deep beams as defined in 6.3.7.1,an analysis
that considers a nonlinear distribution of strain shall be used. Alternatively, it shall be
permittedtouseastrutandtiemodel.See6.3.7,6.4.6,andAppendixA.
6.3.2.3 Itshallbeassumedthatthemaximumusablestrainatextremeconcretecompressionfiberis
equalto0.003.
6.3.2.4 For stress in reinforcement below

, it shall be taken as E
s
times steel strain. For strains
greater than that corresponding to

, stress in reinforcement shall be considered

independentofstrainandequalto

.
6.3.2.5 Inaxialandflexuralcalculationsofreinforcedconcrete,thetensilestrengthofconcreteshall
beneglected.
6.3.2.6 The relationship between concrete compressive stress distribution and concrete strain shall
be assumed to be rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic, or any other shape that results in
predictionofstrengthinsubstantialagreementwithresultsofcomprehensivetests.
6.3.2.7 An equivalent rectangular concrete stress distribution defined by 6.3.2.7.1 through 6.3.2.7.3
belowshallsatisfytherequirementsof6.3.2.6.
6.3.2.7.1 Concrete stress of u.8S
c
i
shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an equivalent
compressionzoneboundedbyedgesofthecrosssectionandastraightlinelocatedparallelto
theneutralaxisatadistanceo = [
1c
fromthefiberofmaximumcompressivestrain.
6.3.2.7.2 Distance from the fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis, c, shall be measured in a
directionperpendiculartotheneutralaxis.
6.3.2.7.3 For
c
i
between 17 and 28 MPa, [
1
shall be taken as 0.85. For
c
i
above 28 MPa, [
1
shall be
reducedlinearlyatarateof0.05foreach7MPaofstrengthinexcessof28MPa,but[
1
shall
not be taken less than 0.65. For
c
i
between 28 and 56 MPa, [
1
may be calculated from Eq.
(6.3.1).
[
1
= u.8S -u.uu714S(
c
i
-28) onJ u.6S [
1
u.8S (6.S.1)
Part6
StructuralDesign

624 Vol.2
6.S.S Generalprinciplesandrequirements
6.3.3.1 Stressandstraincompatibilityusingassumptionsin6.3.2shallbethebasisfordesignofcross
sectionssubjecttoflexureoraxialloads,oracombinationthereof.
6.3.3.2 A cross section shall be considered to be in balanced strain conditions when the tension
reinforcementreachesthestraincorrespondingto

justasconcreteincompressionreaches
itsassumedultimatestrainof0.003.
6.3.3.3 Sectionsarecompressioncontrolledifthenettensilestrainintheextremetensionsteel,e
t
,is
equal to or less than the compressioncontrolled strain limit when the concrete in
compression reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003 (Fig.6.3.3.1). The compression
controlled strain limit is the net tensile strain in the reinforcement at balanced strain
conditions. For Grade 420 reinforcement, it shall be permitted to set the compression
controlled strain limit equal to 0.002. For other grades compressioncontrolled strain limit
maybedeterminedbydividingtheyieldstrengthbymodulusofelasticityEandthenrounding
the value obtained to four significant digits after the decimal. For example, for Grade 500
reinforcement,thecompressioncontrolledstrainlimitshallequalto0.0025.

Fig.6.3.3.1Straindistributionandnettensilestrain
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 625

6.3.3.4 Sections are tensioncontrolled if the net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel, e
t
, is
equaltoorgreaterthan0.005whentheconcreteincompressionreachesitsassumedstrain
limit of 0.003. Sections with e
t
between the compressioncontrolled strain limit and 0.005
constitute a transition region between compressioncontrolled and tensioncontrolled
sections.
6.3.3.5 Net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel at nominal strength, e
t
shall not be less than
0.004fornonprestressedflexuralmembersandnonprestressedmemberswithfactoredaxial
compressiveloadlessthanu.1u
c
i
A
g

6.3.3.5.1 Use of compression reinforcement shall be permitted in conjunction with additional tension
reinforcementtoincreasethestrengthofflexuralmembers.
6.3.3.6 Forcompressionmembers,designaxialstrengthP
n
shallnotbetakengreaterthanP
n,mux
,
computedbyEq.(6.3.2)or(6.3.3).
6.3.3.6.1 For nonprestressed members with spiral reinforcement conforming to Sec. 8.1 or composite
membersconformingto6.3.13:
P
n,mux
= u.8S|u.8S
c
i
(A
g
A
st
) +

A
st
] (6.3.2)
6.3.3.6.2 FornonprestressedmemberswithtiereinforcementconformingtoSec.8.1:
P
n,mux
= u.8u|u.8S
c
i
(A
g
A
st
) +

A
st
] (6.3.3)
6.3.3.7 Memberssubjecttocompressiveaxialloadshallbedesignedforthemaximummomentthat
canaccompanytheaxialload.ThefactoredaxialforceP
u
atgiveneccentricityshallnotexceed
that given in 6.3.3.6. The maximum factored moment H
u
shall be magnified for slenderness
effectsinaccordancewith6.3.10.
6.S.4 Spacingoflateralsupportsforflexuralmembers
6.3.4.1 Distancebetweenlateralsupportsforabeamshallnotexceed50timesb,theleastwidthof
compressionflangeorface.
6.3.4.2 Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be taken into account in determining spacing of
lateralsupports.
6.S.S Minimumreinforcementformembersinflexure
6.3.5.1 At every section of a flexural member where tensile reinforcement is required by analysis,
except as provided in 6.3.5.2, 6.3.5.3, and 6.3.5.4, A
s
provided shall not be less than that
givenby
A
s,mn
=
0.25_]
c
|
]
j
b
w
J (6.S.4)
andnotlessthan1.4b
w
J

.
Part6
StructuralDesign

626 Vol.2
6.3.5.2 Forstaticallydeterminatememberswithaflangeintension,A
s,mn
shallnotbelessthanthe
valuegivenbyEq.(6.3.4),exceptthatb
w
isreplacedbyeither2b
w
orthewidthoftheflange,
whicheverissmaller.
6.3.5.3 If,ateverysection,A
s
providedisatleastonethirdgreaterthanthatrequiredbyanalysis,the
requirementsof6.3.5.1and6.3.5.2neednotbeapplied.
6.3.5.4 Forstructuralslabsandfootingsofuniformthickness,A
s,mn
inthedirectionofthespanshall
be the same as that required by 8.1.11. Maximum spacing of this reinforcement shall not
exceedthreetimesthethickness,nor450mm.
6.S.6 Distributionofflexuralreinforcementinonewayslabsandbeams
6.3.6.1 Rules for distribution of flexural reinforcement to control flexural cracking in beams and in
onewayslabs(slabsreinforcedtoresistflexuralstressesinonlyonedirection)areprescribed
inthissection.
6.3.6.2 Distributionofflexuralreinforcementintwowayslabsshallbeasrequiredby6.5.3.
6.3.6.3 As prescribed in 6.3.6.4, flexural tension reinforcement shall be well distributed within
maximumflexuraltensionzonesofamembercrosssection.
6.3.6.4 Thespacingofreinforcementclosesttothetensionface,s,shallbelessthanthatgivenby
s = S8u [
280
]
s
-2.Sc
c
(6.3.5)
but shall not exceed Suu(28u
s
), where c
c
is the least distance from surface of
reinforcement to the tension face. If there is only one bar or wire nearest to the extreme
tensionface,s usedinEq.(6.3.5)isthewidthoftheextremetensionface.
Calculated stress
s
in reinforcement closest to the tension face at service load shall be
computedbasedontheunfactoredmoment.Itshallbepermittedtotake
s
as2S

.
6.3.6.5 Forstructuressubjecttoveryaggressiveexposureordesignedtobewatertight,provisionsof
6.3.6.4 are not sufficient. For such structures, special investigations and precautions are
required.
6.3.6.6 When flanges of Tbeam construction are in tension, part of the flexural tension
reinforcement shall be distributed over an effective flange width as defined in 6.1.13, or a
widthequaltoonetenththespan,whicheverissmaller.Iftheeffectiveflangewidthexceeds
onetenth the span,some longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided in the outer portions
oftheflange.
6.3.6.7 Longitudinal skin reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed along both side faces of a
member(Fig.6.3.6.1),where b ofabeam orjoistexceeds900mm.Skinreinforcementshall
extendforadistanceb 2 fromthetensionface.Thespacings shallbeasprovidedin6.3.6.4,
where c
c
is the least distance from the surface of the skin reinforcement to the side face. It
shall be permitted to include such reinforcement in strength computations if a strain
compatibilityanalysisismadetodeterminestressintheindividualbarsorwires.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 627

Fig.6.3.6.1Skinreinforcementforbeamsandjoistswithh >900mm.
6.S.7 Deepbeams
6.3.7.1 Deep beams are members loaded on one face and supported on the opposite face so that
compressionstrutscandevelopbetweentheloadsandthesupports,andhaveeither:
a) clearspans,l
n
,equaltoorlessthanfourtimestheoverallmemberdepth;or
b) regions with concentrated loads within twice the member depth from the face of the
support.
Deepbeamsshallbedesignedeithertakingintoaccountnonlineardistributionofstrain,orby
AppendixA.(Seealso6.4.6.1and8.2.7.6)Lateralbucklingshallbeconsidered.
6.3.7.2 I
n
ofdeepbeamsshallbeinaccordancewith6.4.6.
6.3.7.3 Minimumareaofflexuraltensionreinforcement,A
s,mn
,shallconformto6.3.5.
6.3.7.4 Minimumhorizontalandverticalreinforcementinthesidefacesofdeepbeamsshallsatisfy
eitherA.3.3or6.4.6.4and6.4.6.5.
6.S.8 Designdimensionsforcompressionmembers
6.3.8.1 Isolatedcompressionmemberwithmultiplespirals
Outerlimitsoftheeffectivecrosssectionofacompressionmemberwithtwoormoreinterlockingspirals
shallbetakenatadistanceoutsidetheextremelimitsofthespiralsequaltotheminimumconcretecover
requiredby8.1.7.
6.3.8.2 Monolithicallybuiltcompressionmemberwithwall
Outerlimitsoftheeffectivecrosssectionofaspirallyreinforcedortiedreinforcedcompressionmember
builtmonolithicallywithaconcretewallorpiershallbetakennotgreaterthan40mmoutsidethespiral
ortiereinforcement.
6.3.8.3 Equivalentcircularcompressionmemberreplacingothershapes
Inlieuofusingthefullgrossareafordesignofacompressionmemberwithasquare,octagonal,orother
shaped cross section, it shall be permitted to use a circular section with a diameter equal to the least
lateraldimensionoftheactualshape.Grossareaconsidered,requiredpercentageofreinforcement,and
designstrengthshallbebasedonthatcircularsection.
6.3.8.4 Limitsofsection
Foracompressionmemberwithacrosssectionlargerthanrequiredbyconsiderationsofloading,itshall
be permitted to base the minimum reinforcement and strength on a reduced effective area A
g
not less
Part6
StructuralDesign

628 Vol.2
thanonehalfthetotalarea.Thisprovisionshallnotapplytospecialmomentframesorspecialstructural
wallsdesignedinaccordancewithSec.8.3.
6.S.9 Limitsofreinforcementforcompressionmembers
6.3.9.1 Fornoncompositecompressionmembers,theareaoflongitudinalreinforcement,A
st
,shallbe
not less than u.u1A
g
or more than u.u6A
g
. To avoid practical difficulties in placing and
compactingofconcreteaswellastodeliverductilitytononcompositecompressionmembers,
areaoflongitudinalreinforcement,A
st
,ispreferrednottoexceedu.u4A
g
unlessabsolutely
essential.
6.3.9.2 Minimum number of longitudinal bars in compression members shall be 4 for bars within
rectangularorcircularties,3forbarswithintriangularties,and6forbarsenclosedbyspirals
conformingto6.3.9.3.
6.3.9.3 Volumetricspiralreinforcementratio,p
s
,shallbenotlessthanthevaluegivenby
p
s
= u.4S [
A
g
A
ch
- 1
]
c
|
]
jt
(6.S.6)
wherethevalueof
t
usedinEq.(6.3.6)shallnotexceed700MPa.For
t
greaterthan420
MPa,lapsplicesaccordingto8.1.9.3(e)shallnotbeused.
6.3.10 Slendernesseffectsincompressionmembers
6.3.10.1 Slendernesseffectsshallbepermittedtobeneglectedinthefollowingcases:
a) forcompressionmembersnotbracedagainstsideswaywhen:
k
u

22 (6.S.7)
b) forcompressionmembersbracedagainstsideswaywhen:
k
u

S4 -12(H
1
H
2
) 4u (6.S.8)
whereH
1
H
2
ispositiveif thecolumnisbentinsinglecurvature,andnegativeifthememberisbentin
doublecurvature.
Compression members may be considered to be braced against sidesway when bracing elements have a
total stiffness, resisting lateral movement of that story, of at least 12 times the gross stiffness of the
columnswithinthestory.
TheJacksonandMorelandAlignmentCharts(Fig.6.3.10.1),whichallowagraphicaldeterminationofk for
acolumnofconstantcrosssectioninamultibayframemaybeusedastheprimarydesignaidtoestimate
theeffectivelengthfactork.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 629

6.3.10.1.1 The unsupported length of a compression member, l

u
, shall be taken as the clear distance
between floor slabs, beams, or other members capable of providing lateral support in the
direction being considered. Where column capitals or haunches are present, l
u
shall be
measuredtothelowerextremityofthecapitalorhaunchintheplaneconsidered.
6.3.10.1.2 It shall be permitted to take the radius of gyration, r, equal to 0.30 times the overall
dimensioninthedirectionstabilityisbeingconsideredforrectangularcompressionmembers
and 0.25 times the diameter for circular compression members. For other shapes, it shall be
permittedtocomputer forthegrossconcretesection.
Fig.6.3.10.1Effectivelengthfactorsk.
Part6
StructuralDesign

630 Vol.2
6.3.10.2 When slenderness effects are not neglected as permitted by 6.3.10.1, the design of
compression members, restraining beams, and other supporting members shall be based on
thefactoredforcesandmomentsfromasecondorderanalysissatisfying6.3.10.3,6.3.10.4,or
6.3.10.5. These members shall also satisfy 6.3.10.2.1 and 6.3.10.2.2. The dimensions of each
membercrosssectionusedintheanalysisshallbewithin10percentofthedimensionsofthe
membersshownonthedesigndrawingsortheanalysisshallberepeated.
6.3.10.2.1 Totalmomentincludingsecondordereffectsincompressionmembers,restrainingbeams,or
otherstructuralmembersshallnotexceed1.4timesthemomentduetofirstordereffects.
6.3.10.2.2 Secondorder effects shall be considered along the length of compression members. It shall
bepermittedtoaccountfortheseeffectsusingthemomentmagnificationprocedureoutlined
in6.3.10.6.
6.3.10.3 Nonlinearsecondorderanalysis
Secondorderanalysisshallconsidermaterialnonlinearity,membercurvatureandlateraldrift,durationof
loads, shrinkage and creep, andinteraction with thesupporting foundation. The analysis procedure shall
have been shown to result in prediction of strength in substantial agreement with results of
comprehensivetestsofcolumnsinstaticallyindeterminatereinforcedconcretestructures.
6.3.10.4 Elasticsecondorderanalysis
Elastic secondorder analysis shall consider section properties determined taking into account the
influenceofaxialloads,thepresenceofcrackedregionsalongthelengthofthemember,andtheeffects
ofloadduration.
6.3.10.4.1 Itshallbepermittedtousethefollowingpropertiesforthemembersinthestructure:
a) Modulusofelasticity......................E
c
from6.1.7.1
b) Momentsofinertia,I
Compressionmembers:
Columns u.7uI
g

WallsUncracked u.7uI
g

Cracked u.SSI
g

Flexuralmembers:
Beams u.SSI
g

Flatplatesandflatslabs u.2SI
g

c) Area 1.uA
g

Alternatively, the moments of inertia of compression and flexural members, I, shall be
permittedtobecomputedasfollows:
Compressionmembers:
I = _u.8u +2S
A
st
A
g
] [1 -
M
u
P
u
h
-u.S
P
u
P
c
I
g
u.87SI
g
(6.3.9)
where P
u
and H
u
shall be determined from the particular load combination under
consideration,orthecombinationofP
u
andH
u
determinedinthesmallestvalueofI.I need
notbetakenlessthanu.SSI
g
.
Flexuralmembers:
I = (u.1u +2Sp) [1.2 -u.2
b
w
d
I
g
u.SI
g
(6.3.10)
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 631

For continuous flexural members, I shall be permitted to be taken as the average of values
obtained fromEq.(6.3.10)forthecriticalpositiveandnegativemomentsections.I neednot
betakenlessthanu.2SI
g
.Thecrosssectionaldimensionsandreinforcementratiousedinthe
above formulas shall be within 10 percent of the dimensions and reinforcement ratio shown
onthedesigndrawingsorthestiffnessevaluationshallberepeated.
6.3.10.4.2 When sustained lateral loads are present, I for compression members shall be divided by
(1 + [
ds
). The term [
ds
shall be taken as the ratio of maximum factored sustained shear
within a story to the maximum factored shear in that story associated with the same load
combination,butshallnotbetakengreaterthan1.0.
6.3.10.5 Procedureformomentmagnification
Columnsandstoriesinstructuresshallbedesignatedasnonswayorswaycolumnsorstories.Thedesign
ofcolumnsinnonswayframesorstoriesshallbebasedon6.3.10.6.Thedesignofcolumnsinswayframes
orstoriesshallbebasedon6.3.10.7.
6.3.10.5.1 A column in a structure shall be permitted to be assumed as nonsway if the increase in
column end moments due to secondorder effects does not exceed 5 percent of the first
orderendmoments.
6.3.10.5.2 Astorywithinastructureispermittedtobeassumedasnonswayif:
=
P
u

c
v
us

c
u.uS (6.3.11)
whereP
u
andI
us
arethetotalfactoredverticalloadandthehorizontalstoryshear,respectively,inthe
storybeingevaluated,andA
o
isthefirstorderrelativelateraldeflectionbetweenthetopandthebottom
ofthatstoryduetoI
us
.
6.3.10.6 ProcedureformomentmagnificationNonsway
Compression members shall be designed for factored axial force P
u
and the factored moment amplified
fortheeffectsofmembercurvatureH
c
where
H
c
= o
ns
H
2
(6.3.12)
where
o
ns
=
C
m
1-
P
u
0.SP
c
1.u (6.3.13)
and
P
c
=
n
2
LI
(k
u
)
2
(6.S.14)
6.3.10.6.1 EI shallbetakenas
EI =
(0.2L
c
I
g
+L
s
I
sc
)
1+[
dns
(6.3.15)
or
EI =
0.4L
c
I
g
1+[
dns
(6.3.16)
As an alternative, EI shall be permitted to be computed using the value of I from Eq. (6.3.9) divided by
(1 + [
dns
).
Part6
StructuralDesign

632 Vol.2
6.3.10.6.2 Theterm[
dns
shallbetakenastheratioofmaximumfactoredaxialsustainedloadto
maximumfactoredaxialloadassociatedwiththesameloadcombination,butshallnotbe
takengreaterthan1.0.
6.3.10.6.3 Theeffectivelengthfactor,k,shallbepermittedtobetakenas1.0.
6.3.10.6.4 Formemberswithnotransverseloadbetweensupports,C
m
shallbetakenas
C
m
= u.6 + u.4
M
1
M
2
(6.3.17)
whereH
1
H
2
ispositiveifthecolumnisbentinsinglecurvature,andnegativeifthememberisbentin
doublecurvature.Formemberswithtransverseloadsbetweensupports,C
m
shallbetakenas1.0.
6.3.10.6.5 Factoredmoment,H
2
,inEq.(6.3.12)shallnotbetakenlessthan
H
2,mn
= P
u
(1S +u.uSb) (6.3.18)
about each axis separately, where 0.6 and b are in mm. For members in which H
2,mn
exceeds H
2
, the
value of C
m
in Eq. (6.3.17) shall either be taken equal to 1.0, or shall be based on the ratio of the
computedendmoments,H
1
H
2
.
6.3.10.7 ProcedureformomentmagnificationSway
MomentsH
1
andH
2
attheendsofanindividualcompressionmembershallbetakenas
H
1
= H
1ns
+ o
s
H
1s
(6.3.19)
H
2
= H
2ns
+o
s
H
2s
(6.3.20)
whereo
s
iscomputedaccordingto6.3.10.7.3or6.3.10.7.4.
6.3.10.7.1 Flexuralmembersshallbedesignedforthetotalmagnifiedendmomentsofthecompression
membersatthejoint.
6.3.10.7.2 The values of E
c
and I given in 6.3.10.4 shall be used for determining the effective length
factork anditshallnotbelessthan1.0.
6.3.10.7.3 Themomentmagnifiero
s
shallbecalculatedas
o
s
=
1
1-
1 (6.3.21)
If o
s
calculated by Eq. (6.3.21) exceeds 1.5, o
s
shall be calculated using secondorder elastic analysis or
6.3.10.7.4.
6.3.10.7.4 Alternatively,itshallbepermittedtocalculateo
s
as
o
s
=
1
1-
P
u
0.SP
c
1 (6.3.22)
whereP
u
isthesummationforallthefactoredverticalloadsinastoryandP
c
isthesummationforall
swayresistingcolumnsinastory.P
c
iscalculatedusingEq.(6.3.14)withk determinedfrom6.3.10.7.2and
EI from6.3.10.6.1.
6.S.11 Axiallyloadedmemberssupportingslabsystem
Axiallyloadedmemberssupportingaslabsystemincludedwithinthescopeof6.5.1shallbedesignedas
providedinSec.6.3andinaccordancewiththeadditionalrequirementsofSec.6.5.
6.S.12 Columnloadtransmissionthroughfloorsystem
If
c
i
ofacolumnisgreaterthan1.4timesthatofthefloorsystem,transmissionofloadthroughthefloor
systemshallbeprovidedby6.3.12.1,6.3.12.2,or6.3.12.3.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 633

6.3.12.1 Concrete of strength specified for the column shall be placed in the floor at the column
location. Top surface of the column concrete shall extend 2 ft into the slab from face of
column.Column concrete shallbe well integrated with floor concrete, and shall be placed in
accordancewithrelevantprovisionsforconstructionjointsofcolumns,wallsetc.withbeams,
slabsetc.Toavoidaccidentalplacingoflowerstrengthconcreteinthecolumns,thestructural
designer shall indicate on the drawing where the high and low strength concretes are to be
placed.
6.3.12.2 Strength of a column through a floor system shall be based on the lower value of concrete
strengthwithverticaldowelsandspiralsasrequired.
6.3.12.3 For columns laterally supported on four sides by beams of approximately equal depth or by
slabs,itshallbepermittedtobasestrengthofthecolumnonanassumedconcretestrengthin
the column joint equal to 75 percent of column concrete strength plus 35 percent of floor
concretestrength.Intheapplicationof6.3.12.3,theratioofcolumnconcretestrengthtoslab
concretestrengthshallnotbetakengreaterthan2.5fordesign.
6.S.1S Compositecompressionmembers
6.3.13.1 All members reinforced longitudinally with structural steel shapes, pipe, or tubing with or
withoutlongitudinalbarsshallbeincludedincompositecompressionmembers.
6.3.13.2 Acomposite memberstrengthshallbecomputedforthesamelimitingconditionsapplicable
toordinaryreinforcedconcretemembers.
6.3.13.3 Any axial load strength assigned to concrete of a composite member shall be transferred to
theconcretebymembersorbracketsindirectbearingonthecompositememberconcrete.
6.3.13.4 Allaxialloadstrengthnotassignedtoconcreteofacompositemembershallbedevelopedby
directconnectiontothestructuralsteelshape,pipe,ortube.
6.3.13.5 Forevaluationofslendernesseffects,radiusofgyration,r,ofacompositesectionshallbenot
greaterthanthevaluegivenby
r = _
(L
c
I
g
5 )+L
s
I
sx
(L
c
A
g
5)+L
s
A
sx
(6.3.23)
and,asanalternativetoamoreaccuratecalculation,EI inEq.(6.3.14)shallbetakeneitherasEq.(6.3.15)
or
EI =
(L
c
I
g
5)
1+[
d
+E
s
I
sx
(6.3.24)
6.3.13.6 Concretecoreencasedbystructuralsteel
6.3.13.6.1 When a composite member is a structural steel encased concrete core, the thickness of the
steelencasementshallbenotlessthanb_
]
j
3L
s
foreachfaceofwidthb norb_
]
j
8L
s
forcircular
sectionsofdiameterb
6.3.13.6.2 WhencomputingA
sx
andI
sx
,longitudinalbarslocatedwithintheencasedconcretecoreshall
bepermittedtobeused.
6.3.13.7 Spiralreinforcementaroundstructuralsteelcore
A composite member with spirally reinforced concrete around a structural steel core shall conform to
6.3.13.7.1through6.3.13.7.4.
Part6
StructuralDesign

634 Vol.2
6.3.13.7.1 Designyieldstrengthofstructuralsteelcoreshallbethespecifiedminimumyieldstrengthfor
thegradeofstructuralsteelusedbutnottoexceed350MPa.
6.3.13.7.2 Spiralreinforcementshallconformto6.3.9.3.
6.3.13.7.3 Longitudinalbarslocatedwithinthespiralshallbenotlessthan0.01normorethan0.06times
netareaofconcretesection.
6.3.13.7.4 LongitudinalbarslocatedwithinthespiralshallbepermittedtobeusedincomputingA
sx
and
I
sx
.
6.3.13.8 Tiereinforcementaroundstructuralsteelcore
Laterally tied concrete around a structural steel core forming a composite member shall conform to
6.3.13.8.1through6.3.13.8.7.
6.3.13.8.1 Designyieldstrengthofstructuralsteelcoreshallbethespecifiedminimumyieldstrengthfor
thegradeofstructuralsteelusedbutnottoexceed350MPa.
6.3.13.8.2 Lateraltiesshallextendcompletelyaroundthestructuralsteelcore.
6.3.13.8.3 Lateral ties shall have a diameter not less than 0.02 times the greatest side dimension of
compositemember,exceptthattiesshallnotbesmallerthan10mmandarenotrequired
tobelargerthan16mm.Weldedwirereinforcementofequivalentareashallbepermitted.
6.3.13.8.4 Vertical spacing of lateral ties shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar diameters, 48 tie bar
diameters,or0.5timestheleastsidedimensionofthecompositemember.
6.3.13.8.5 Longitudinalbarslocatedwithinthetiesshallbenotlessthan0.01normorethan0.06times
netareaofconcretesection.
6.3.13.8.6 A longitudinal bar shall be located at every corner of a rectangular cross section, with other
longitudinal bars spaced not farther apart than onehalf the least side dimension of the
compositemember.
6.3.13.8.7 LongitudinalbarslocatedwithinthetiesshallbepermittedtobeusedincomputingA
sx
and
I
sx
.
6.S.14 Bearingstrength
6.3.14.1 Design bearing strength of concrete shall not exceed (u.8S
c
i
A
1
), except when the
supportingsurfaceiswideronallsidesthantheloadedarea,thenthedesignbearingstrength
of the loaded area shall be permitted to be multiplied by A
2
/ A
1
but by not more than 2
(Fig.6.3.14.1).

Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 635

Fig.6.3.14.1DeterminationorareaA
2
insteppedorslopedsupportsusingfrustum(6.3.14.1).
6.S.1S DesignforFlexure
6.3.15.1 DesignofRectangularBeams
a) Formula for singly reinforced beams : The following equations which are based on the
simplifiedstressblockof6.3.2.7,areapplicabletosinglyreinforcedrectangularbeams
alongwithTbeamswheretheneutralaxislieswithintheflange.

A
s
=
M
n
]
j
(d-u2)
(6.3.25)

where

o =
A
s
]
j
0.85]
c
|
b
(6.3.26)
Loaded area
Loaded area
A
1
A
1
A
2
45 deg
45 deg
Plan
Load
is measured on this plane
Elevation
2
1
Part6
StructuralDesign

636 Vol.2

Byestimatinganinitialvalueofa,Eq(6.3.25)canbeusedtodetermineanapproximate
valueof

A
s
.ThatvaluecanbesubstitutedinEq(6.3.26)togetabetterestimateofoand
henceanew(J -o2)canbedeterminedforsubstitutioninEq(6.3.25).
InEq(6.3.25),nominalflexuralstrengthofsection,H
n
maybetakenasfactoredmoment
at section, H
u
divided by strength reduction factor, = u.9 as a preliminary value. A
s

determined from Eq (6.3.25) shall have to give a reinforcement ratio, p = A

s
bJ not
exceedingp
mox
,where
p
mox
= u.8S[
1

c
'

y

e
u
e
u
+ u.uu4
(6.3.27)
Above,e
u
= u.uuS
Additionally, A
s
determined from Eq (6.3.25) shall have to satisfy the requirements of
minimumreinforcementformembersinflexureasper6.3.5.
Revisedshallbedeterminedfrom6.2.3.2basedoneitherc J
t
= o [
1
J
t
ore
t
,where
e
t
isthenettensilestraininthereinforcementfurthestfromthecompressionfaceofthe
concrete at the depth J
t
. Strain, e
t
may be calculated from Eq. (6.3.27) by replacing
0.004bye
t
andp
mox
byp.

b) Design formulae for doubly reinforced beams: A doubly reinforced beam shall be designed
only when there is a restriction on depth of beam and maximum tensile reinforcement allowed
cannotproducetherequiredmomentH
u
.
Toestablishifdoublyreinforcedbeamisrequiredthefollowingapproachcanbefollowed:
Determine,
p
u.uuS
= u.8S[
1

c
'

y

e
u
e
u
+ u.uuS
(6.3.28)
A
s
= p
u.uuS
bJ
o =
A
s
]
j
0.85]
c
|
b

H
n
= A
s

[J -
u
2
(6.3.29)
If H
n
is less than required moment H
u
with = u.9

, a doubly reinforced beam is needed and

thentakingvaluesofA
s
andH
n
fromabove,put
A
s1
= A
s
and
H
n1
= H
n

Then,thefollowingvaluesaretobeevaluated,
H
n2
= H
u
-H
n1
(6.3.30)
A
s2
=
qM
n2
q]
j
(d-d
|
)

Assumingcompressionsteelyields(needstobecheckedlater),
A
s
i
= A
s2

A
s
= A
s1
+A
s2

Checkp p
c
forcompressionsteelyielding,where
p
c
= u.8S[
1

]
c
|
]
j
d
|
d

s
u
s
u
- s
j
+ p
i
(6.3.31)
Ifp p
c
(i.e.compressionsteelyields),
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 637

find o =
(A
s
- A
s
|
)]
j
0.85]
c
|
b
and find c,e
t
and confirm = u.9 in the aboveequations.Value of shall
be determined from 6.2.3.2 based on either c J
t
= o [
1
J
t
or e
t
, as stated above for
rectangularbeams.
If compression steel does not yield, c is to be found from concrete section force equilibrium
condition,C=Twhichwillresultinaquadraticequationofc.
s
i
needstobecalculatedfromstrain
diagramandA
s
i
revised.
A
s
i
= A
s2

]
j
]
s
|

A
s
= A
s1
+A
s2

e
t
shallbecalculatedfromcforfinding.
6.3.15.2 DesignofTBeams
a) General:
For effective widths and other parameters for T, L or isolated beams, 6.1.13.2 to
6.1.13.4shallapply.

b) FormulaeforTbeams:ATbeamshallbetreatedasarectangularbeamif o b

where
oisobtainedfromEq(6.3.26).InusingEq(6.3.26),ifA
s
isnotknown,itmaybeinitially
assumedas:
A
s
=
M
n
]
j
(d-h
]
2)
(6.3.32)

If o, thus obtained, is greater than b

the beam shall be considered as a Tbeam, in

whichcasethefollowingformulaeshallbeapplicable:

A
s
=
u.8S
c
'
(b-b
w
)b

y
(6.3.33)

H
n1
= A
s

y
(J -b

2 ) (6.3.34)

H
n2
= H
n
-H
n1
(6.3.35)

A
s
- A
s]
=
M
n2
]
j
(d-u2)
(6.3.36)
ando =
(A
s
-A
s]
)]
j
0.85]
c
|
b
w
(6.3.37)

By estimating an initial value of oa, Eq (6.3.36) can be used to obtain an approximate value of
(A
s
-A
s]
).Thatvalueof(A
s
-A
s]
)canbesubstitutedinEq(6.3.37)togetabetterestimateofo.
Net tensile strain requirements will be satisfied as long as depth to neutral axis, c u.429 J
t
.
Thiswilloccurif
p
w
< p
w,mox

Where, p
w
=
A
s
b
w
J
(6.3.38)
And, p
w,mox
= p
mox
+ p

(6.3.39)
Again, p

=
A
s
b
w
J
(6.3.40)
Part6
StructuralDesign

638 Vol.2
And p
mox
is as defined by Eq. (6.3.27). For c J
t
ratios between 0.429 and 0.375, equivalent to p
w

betweenthe p
w,mox
fromEq.(6.3.39)and p
w,mox
calculatedby substitutingpfromEq.(6.3.27)with
0.005 in place of 0.004 and p for p
mox
, the strength reduction factor, must be adjusted for e
t
in
accordancewith6.2.3.2.
6.4 SHEARANDTORSION
6.4.1 Shearstrength
6.4.1.1 ExceptformembersdesignedinaccordancewithAppendixA,designofcrosssectionssubject
toshearshallbebasedon
I
n
I
u
(6.4.1)
where I
u
is the factored shear force at the section considered and I
n
is nominal shear
strengthcomputedby
I
n
= I
c
+I
s
(6.4.2)
whereI
c
isnominalshearstrengthprovidedbyconcretecalculatedinaccordancewith6.4.2,
or 6.4.10, and I
s
is nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement calculated in
accordancewith6.4.3,6.4.8.9,or6.4.10.
6.4.1.1.1 TheeffectofanyopeningsinmembersshallbeconsideredindeterminingI
n
.
6.4.1.1.2 In evaluating I
c
, whenever applicable, effects of axial tension due to creep and shrinkage in
restrained members shall be considered and effects of inclined flexural compression in
variabledepthmembersshallbepermittedtobeincluded.
6.4.1.2 Except as allowed in 6.4.1.2.1, the values of '
c
used in this chapter shall not exceed 8.3
MPa.
6.4.1.2.1 Values of '
c
greater than 8.3 MPa shall be permitted in computing I
c
, I
c
, and I
cw
for
reinforced concrete beams and concrete joist construction having minimum web
reinforcementinaccordancewith6.4.3.5.3,or6.4.4.5.2.
6.4.1.3 ComputationofmaximumI
u
atsupportsinaccordancewith6.4.1.3.1shallbepermittedifall
conditions(a),(b),and(c)aresatisfied:
a) Support reaction, in direction of applied shear, introduces compression into the end
regionsofmember;
b) Loadsareappliedatornearthetopofthemember;
c) No concentrated load occurs between face of support and location of critical section
definedin6.4.1.3.1.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 639

6.4.1.3.1 SectionslocatedlessthanadistanceJ fromfaceofsupportshallbepermittedtobedesigned

forI
u
computedatadistanceJ.
6.4.1.4 Fordeepbeams,bracketsandcorbels,walls,andslabsandfootings,thespecialprovisionsof
6.4.6through6.4.10shallapply.
6.4.2 Contributionofconcretetoshearstrength
6.4.2.1 I
c
shall be computed by provisions of 6.4.2.1.1 through 6.4.2.1.3, unless a more detailed
calculation is made in accordance with 6.4.2.2. Throughout this chapter, except in 6.4.5,
z shallbeasdefinedin6.1.8.1.
6.4.2.1.1 Formemberssubjecttoshearandflexureonly,
I
c
= u.17 '
c
b
w
J (6.4.S)
6.4.2.1.2 Formemberssubjecttoaxialcompression,
I
c
= u.17(1 +
N
u
14A
g
) '
c
b
w
J (6.4.4)
QuantityN
u
A
g
shallbeexpressedinMPa.
6.4.2.1.3 For members subject to significant axial tension, I
c
shall be taken as zero unless a more
detailedanalysisismadeusing6.4.2.2.3.
6.4.2.2 I
c
shall be permitted to be computed by the more detailed calculation of 6.4.2.2.1 through
6.4.2.2.3.
6.4.2.2.1 Formemberssubjecttoshearandflexureonly,
I
c
= (u.16 '
c
+17p
w
v
u
d
M
u
)b
w
J (6.4.S)
but not greater than u.29z
c
i
b
w
J. When computing I
c
by Eq. (6.4.5), I
u
JH
u
shall not be
takengreaterthan1.0,whereH
u
occurssimultaneouslywithI
u
atsectionconsidered.
6.4.2.2.2 For members subject to axial compression, it shall be permitted to compute I
c
using Eq.
(6.4.5)withH
m
substitutedforH
u
andI
u
JH
u
notthenlimitedto1.0,where
H
m
= H
u
- N
u
(4h-d)
8
(6.4.6)
However,I
c
shallnotbetakengreaterthan
I
c
= u.29 '
c
b
w
J
_
1 +
0.29N
u
A
g
(6.4.7)
N
u
A
g
shallbeexpressedinMPa.WhenH
m
ascomputedbyEq.(6.4.6)isnegative,I
c
shallbe
computedbyEq.(6.4.7).
6.4.2.2.3 Formemberssubjecttosignificantaxialtension,
I
c
= u.17(1 +
0.29N
u
A
g
) '
c
b
w
J (6.4.8)
butnotlessthanzero,whereN
u
isnegativefortension.N
u
A
g
shallbeexpressedinMPa.
Part6
StructuralDesign

640 Vol.2
6.4.2.3 For circular members, the area used to compute I
c
shall be taken as the product of the
diameter andeffectivedepthof the concretesection. It shall be permitted to takeJ as 0.80
timesthediameteroftheconcretesection.
6.4.S Shearstrengthcontributionofreinforcement
6.4.3.1 Typesofshearreinforcement
6.4.3.1.1
Thefollowingtypesofshearreinforcementshallbepermitted:
a) Stirrupsperpendiculartoaxisofmember;
b) Weldedwirereinforcementwithwireslocatedperpendiculartoaxisofmember;
c) Spirals,circularties,orhoops.
d) Stirrupsmakinganangleof45degreesormorewithlongitudinaltensionreinforcement;
e) Longitudinalreinforcementwithbentportionmakinganangleof30degreesormore
withthelongitudinaltensionreinforcement;
f) Combinationsofstirrupsandbentlongitudinalreinforcement.
6.4.3.2
Thevaluesof

and
t
usedindesignofshearreinforcementshallnotexceed420MPa,exceptthevalue
shallnotexceed550MPaforweldeddeformedwirereinforcement.
6.4.3.3
Stirrups and other bars or wires used as shear reinforcement shall extend to a distance J from extreme
compressionfiberandshallbedevelopedatbothendsaccordingto8.2.10.
6.4.3.4 Limitsinspacingforshearreinforcement
6.4.3.4.1
Spacing of shear reinforcement placed perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed J 2 , nor 600
mm.
6.4.3.4.2
The spacing of inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement shall be such that every 45degree
line, extending toward the reaction from middepth of member J 2 to longitudinal tension
reinforcement,shallbecrossedbyatleastonelineofshearreinforcement.
6.4.3.4.3
Where I
s
exceeds u.SS
c
i
b
w
J, maximum spacings given in 6.4.3.4.1 and 6.4.3.4.2 shall be reduced by
onehalf.
6.4.3.5 Minimumshearreinforcement
6.4.3.5.1
A minimum area of shear reinforcement, A
,mn
, shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural
members,whereI
u
exceedsu.SI
c
,exceptinmemberssatisfyingoneormoreof(a)through(f):
a) Footingsandsolidslabs;
b) Hollowcore units with total untopped depth not greater than 315 mm and hollowcore
unitswhereI
u
isnotgreaterthanu.SI
cw
;
c) Concretejoistconstructiondefinedby6.1.14;
d) Beamswithb notgreaterthan250mm;
e) Beamintegralwithslabswithb notgreaterthan600mmandnotgreaterthanthelarger
of2.5timesthicknessofflange,and0.5timeswidthofweb;
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 641

f) Beams constructed of steel fiberreinforced, normalweight concrete with

c
i
not
exceeding40MPa,b notgreaterthan600mm,andI
u
notgreaterthanu.17
c
i
b
w
J.
6.4.3.5.2
Minimumshearreinforcementrequirementsof6.4.3.5.1shallbepermittedtobewaivedifshownbytest
that required H
n
and I
n
can be developed when shear reinforcement is omitted. Such tests shall
simulateeffectsofdifferentialsettlement,creep,shrinkage,andtemperaturechange,basedonarealistic
assessmentofsucheffectsoccurringinservice.
6.4.3.5.3
Whereshearreinforcementisrequiredby6.4.3.5.1orforstrengthandwhere6.4.4.1allowstorsiontobe
neglected,A
,mn
shallbecomputedby
A
,mn
= u.u62 '
c
b
w
s
]
jt
(6.4.9)
butshallnotbelessthan(u.SSb
w
s)
t
.
6.4.3.6 Designofshearreinforcement
6.4.3.6.1 Where I
u
exceeds I
c
, shear reinforcement shall be provided to satisfy Eq. (6.4.1) and
(6.4.2),whereI
s
shallbecomputedinaccordancewith6.4.3.6.2through6.4.3.6.9.
6.4.3.6.2 Whereshearreinforcementperpendiculartoaxisofmemberisused,
I
s
=
A

]
jt
d
s
(6.4.1u)
whereA

istheareaofshearreinforcementwithinspacings.
6.4.3.6.3 Where circular ties, hoops, or spirals are used as shear reinforcement, I
s
shall be computed
usingEq.(6.4.10)whereJ isdefinedin6.4.2.3forcircularmembers,A

shallbetakenastwo
times the area of the bar in a circular tie, hoop, or spiral at a spacing s, s is measured in a
direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement, and
t
is the specified yield strength of
circulartie,hoop,orspiralreinforcement.
6.4.3.6.4 Whereinclinedstirrupsareusedasshearreinforcement,
I
s
=
A

]
jt
(sIn+cos )d
s
(6.4.11)
where o is angle between inclined stirrups and longitudinal axis of the member, and s is measured in
directionparalleltolongitudinalreinforcement.
6.4.3.6.5 Whereshearreinforcementconsistsofasinglebarorasinglegroupofparallelbars,allbent
upatthesamedistancefromthesupport,
I
s
= A

sin (6.4.12)
but not greater than u.2S '
c
b
w
J, where is angle between bentup reinforcement and longitudinal
axisofthemember.
Part6
StructuralDesign

642 Vol.2
6.4.3.6.6 Where shear reinforcement consists of a series of parallel bentup bars or groups of parallel
bentupbarsatdifferentdistancesfromthesupport,I
s
shallbecomputedbyEq.(6.4.11).
6.4.3.6.7 Only the center threefourths of the inclined portion of any longitudinal bent bar shall be
consideredeffectiveforshearreinforcement.
6.4.3.6.8 Wheremorethanonetypeofshearreinforcementisusedtoreinforcethesameportionofa
member, I
s
shall be computed as the sum of the values computed for the various types of
shearreinforcement.
6.4.3.6.9 I
s
shallnotbetakengreaterthanu.66 '
c
b
w
J.
6.4.4 Designfortorsion
Design for torsion shall be in accordance with 6.4.4.1 through 6.4.4.6. A beam subjected to torsion is
idealizedasathinwalledtubewiththecoreconcretecrosssectioninasolidbeamneglectedasshownin
Fig.6.4.4.1.

Fig.6.4.4.1(a)Torsionalresistancebythinwalledtube(6.4.4);(b)Ineffectiveinnerareaenclosedbyshear
flowpath(6.4.4)
6.4.4.1 Thresholdtorsion
ItshallbepermittedtoneglecttorsioneffectsifthefactoredtorsionalmomentI
u
islessthan:
a) Formembersnotsubjectedtoaxialtensionorcompression
u.u8S_
i
c
(
A
cp
2
p
cp
)
b) Formemberssubjectedtoanaxialcompressiveortensileforce
Shear flow (q)
T
T
(a) Thin-walled tube
(b) Area enclosed by shear flow path
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 643

u.u8S_
i
c
(
A
cp
2
p
cp
)
_
1 +
N
u
u.SSA
g

i
c

TheoverhangingflangewidthusedincomputingA
cp
andp
cp
formemberscastmonolithicallywithaslab
shall conform to 6.5.2.4. For a hollow section, A
g
shall be used in place of A
cp
in 6.4.4.1, and the outer
boundariesofthesectionshallconformto6.5.2.4.
6.4.4.1.1 For members cast monolithically with a slab and for isolated members with flanges, the
overhangingflangewidthusedtocomputeA
cp
andp
cp
shallconformto6.5.2.4,exceptthat
theoverhangingflangesshallbeneglectedincaseswheretheparameterA
cp
2
p
cp
, calculated
forabeamwithflangesislessthanthatcomputedforthesamebeamignoringtheflanges.
6.4.4.2 Evaluationoffactoredtorsionalmoment
6.4.4.2.1 If the factored torsional moment, I
u
, in a member is required to maintain equilibrium (Fig.
6.4.4.2) and exceeds the minimum value given in 6.4.4.1, the member shall be designed to
carryI
u
inaccordancewith6.4.4.3through6.4.4.6.
6.4.4.2.2 Inastaticallyindeterminatestructurewherereductionofthetorsionalmomentinamember
canoccurduetoredistributionofinternalforcesuponcracking(Fig.6.4.4.3),themaximumI
u

shallbepermittedtobereducedtothevaluesgivenin(a),or(b)asapplicable:
a) Formembers,atthesectionsdescribedin6.4.4.2.4andnotsubjectedtoaxialtensionor
compression
u.SS_
i
c
(
A
cp
2
p
cp
)
b) Formemberssubjectedtoanaxialcompressiveortensileforce
u.SS_
i
c
(
A
cp
2
p
cp
)
_
1 +
N
u
u.SSA
g

i
c

In (a), or (b), the correspondingly redistributed bending moments and shears in the adjoining members
shall be used in the design of these members. For hollow sections, A
cp
shall not be replaced with A
g
in
6.4.4.2.2.
Part6
StructuralDesign

644 Vol.2
6.4.4.2.3 Itshallbepermittedtotakethetorsionalloadingfromaslabasuniformlydistributedalong
themember,ifnotdeterminedbyamoreexactanalysis.
6.4.4.2.4 SectionslocatedcloserthanadistanceJ fromthefaceofasupportshallbedesignedfornot
lessthanI
u
computedatadistanceJ.Ifaconcentratedtorqueoccurswithinthisdistance,
thecriticalsectionfordesignshallbeatthefaceofthesupport.

Fig.6.4.4.2Designtorquemaynotbereduced(6.4.4.2.1)

Fig.6.4.4.3Designtorquemaybereduced(6.4.4.2.2)

6.4.4.3 Torsionalmomentstrength
6.4.4.3.1 Thecrosssectionaldimensionsshallbesuchthat:
a) Forsolidsections
_
[
v
u
b
w
d

2
+_
1
u
P
h
1.7A
ch
2
]
2
[
v
c
b
w
d
+u.66

i
c
(6.4.1S)
b) Forhollowsections
[
v
u
b
w
d
+_
1
u
P
h
1.7A
ch
2
] [
v
c
b
w
d
+ u.66

i
c
(6.4.14)
Designtorque may not be
reducedbecause moment
redistribution is not possible
Designtorquefor this spandrel
beam may bereduced because
moment redistribution ispossible
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 645

Superposition of shear stresses due to shear and torsion in hollow sections given by the left side of the
inequality 6.4.14 is illustrated by Fig. 6.4.4.4(a) and that in solid sections given by the left side of the
inequality6.4.13isillustratedbyFig.6.4.4.4(b).
6.4.4.3.2 If the wall thickness varies around the perimeter of a hollow section, Eq. (6.4.14) shall be
evaluatedatthelocationwherethelefthandsideofEq.(6.4.14)isamaximum.
6.4.4.3.3 If the wall thickness is less than A
oh
p
h
, the second term in Eq. (6.4.14) shall be taken as
_
1
u
1.7A
ch
t
]
where t is the thickness of the wall of the hollow section at the location where the stresses are being
checked.
6.4.4.3.4 Thevaluesof

and
t
usedfordesignoftorsionalreinforcementshallnotexceed420MPa.
6.4.4.3.5 WhereI
u
exceedsthethresholdtorsion,designofthecrosssectionshallbebasedon
I
n
I
u
(6.4.1S)
6.4.4.3.6 I
n
shallbecomputedby
I
n
=
2A
c
A
t
]
jt
s
cot0 (6.4.16)
whereA
o
shallbedeterminedbyanalysisexceptthatit shallbepermittedtotake A
o
equalto u.8SA
oh
;
0 shall not be taken smaller than 30 degrees nor larger than 60 degrees. It shall be permitted to take
equalto45degrees.
6.4.4.3.7 Theadditionalareaoflongitudinalreinforcementtoresisttorsion,A
I
,shallnotbelessthan
A
I
=
A
t
s
p
h
_
]
jt
]
j
] cot
2
0 (6.4.17)
where 0 shall be the same value used in Eq. (6.4.16) and A
t
s shall be taken as the amount computed
from Eq. (6.4.16) not modified in accordance with 6.4.4.5.2 or 6.4.4.5.3;
t
refers to closed transverse
torsionalreinforcement,and

referstolongitudinaltorsionalreinforcement.
Part6
StructuralDesign

646 Vol.2
6.4.4.3.8 Reinforcement required for torsion shall be added to that required for the shear, moment,
andaxialforcethatactincombinationwiththetorsion.Themostrestrictiverequirementsfor
reinforcementspacingandplacementshallbemet.
6.4.4.3.9 It shall be permitted to reduce the area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the flexural
compression zone by an amount equal to H
u
(u.9J

) , where H
u
occurs at the section
simultaneously with I
u
, except that the reinforcement provided shall not be less than that
requiredby6.4.4.5.3or6.4.4.6.2.

Fig.6.4.4.4Superpositionoftorsionalandshearstresses(6.4.4.3.1)
6.4.4.4 Detailsoftorsionalreinforcement
6.4.4.4.1 Torsion reinforcement shall consist of longitudinal bars or tendons and one or more of the
following:
a) Closedstirrupsorclosedties,perpendiculartotheaxisofthemember;
b) A closed cage of welded wire reinforcement with transverse wires perpendicular to the
axisofthemember;
c) Spiralreinforcement.
6.4.4.4.2 Transversetorsionalreinforcementshallbeanchoredbyoneofthefollowing:
a) A135degreestandardhook,orseismichookasdefinedin8.1.1(d),aroundalongitudinal
bar;
b) Accordingto8.2.10.2a,8.2.10.2b,or8.2.10.2cinregionswheretheconcretesurrounding
theanchorageisrestrainedagainstspallingbyaflangeorslaborsimilarmember.
A
B
C
A
B
C
Torsional stresses
Torsional stresses
Shear stresses
Shear stresses
(a) Hollow section
(b) Solid section
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 647

6.4.4.4.3 Longitudinaltorsionreinforcementshallbedevelopedatbothends.
6.4.4.4.4 For hollow sections in torsion, the distance from the centerline of the transverse torsional
reinforcement to the inside face of the wall of the hollow section shall not be less than
u.SA
oh
p
h
.
6.4.4.5 Minimumtorsionreinforcement
6.4.4.5.1 AminimumareaoftorsionalreinforcementshallbeprovidedinallregionswhereI
u
exceeds
thethresholdtorsiongivenin6.4.4.1.
6.4.4.5.2 Where torsional reinforcement is required by 6.4.4.5.1, the minimum area of transverse
closedstirrupsshallbecomputedby
A

+ 2A
t
= u.u62 '
c
b
w
s
]
jt
(6.4.18)
butshallnotbelessthan(u.SSb
w
s)
t
.
6.4.4.5.3 Where torsional reinforcement is required by 6.4.4.5.1, the minimum total area of
longitudinaltorsionalreinforcement,A
I,mn
,shallbecomputedby
A
I,mn
=
0.42]i
c
A
cp
]
j
-(
A
t
s
)p
h
_
]
jt
]
j
] (6.4.19)
where A
t
s shall not be taken less than u.17Sb
w

t
;
t
refers to closed transverse torsional
reinforcement,and

referstolongitudinalreinforcement.
Part6
StructuralDesign

648 Vol.2
6.4.4.6 Spacingoftorsionreinforcement
6.4.4.6.1 Thespacingoftransversetorsionreinforcementshallnotexceedthesmallerofp
h
8 or300
mm.
6.4.4.6.2 Thelongitudinalreinforcementrequiredfortorsionshallbedistributedaroundtheperimeter
of the closed stirrups with a maximum spacing of 300 mm. The longitudinal bars shall be
insidethestirrups.Thereshallbeatleastonelongitudinalbarineachcornerofthestirrups.
Longitudinal bars shall have a diameter at least 0.042 times the stirrup spacing, but not less
than10mm.
6.4.4.6.3 Torsionalreinforcementshallbeprovidedforadistanceofatleast(b
t
+J) beyondthepoint
requiredbyanalysis.
6.4.S Shearfriction
6.4.5.1 Application of provisions of 6.4.5 shall be for cases where it is appropriate to consider shear
transfer across a given plane, such as: an existing or potential crack, an interface between
dissimilarmaterials,oraninterfacebetweentwoconcretescastatdifferenttimes.
6.4.5.2 Designofcrosssectionssubjecttosheartransferasdescribedin6.4.5.1shallbebasedonEq.
(6.4.1),whereI
n
iscalculatedinaccordancewithprovisionsof6.4.5.3or6.4.5.4.
6.4.5.3 A crack shall be assumed to occur along the shear plane considered. The required area of
shearfrictionreinforcementA
]
acrosstheshearplaneshallbedesignedusingeither6.4.5.4
oranyothersheartransferdesignmethodsthatresultinpredictionofstrengthinsubstantial
agreementwithresultsofcomprehensivetests.
6.4.5.3.1 Provisionsof6.4.5.5through6.4.5.10shallapplyforallcalculationsofsheartransferstrength.
6.4.5.4 Designmethodforshearfriction
6.4.5.4.1 Whereshearfrictionreinforcementisperpendiculartotheshearplane,I
n
shallbecomputed
by
I
n
= A
]

p
(6.4.2u)
wherep iscoefficientoffrictioninaccordancewith6.4.5.4.3.
6.4.5.4.2 Where shearfriction reinforcement is inclined to the shear plane, such that the shear force
producestensioninshearfrictionreinforcement(Fig.6.4.5.1),I
n
shallbecomputedby
I
n
= A
]

(p sino + coso) (6.4.21)

whereo isanglebetweenshearfrictionreinforcementandshearplane.
6.4.5.4.3 Thecoefficientoffriction inEq.(6.4.20)andEq.(6.4.21)shallbetakenas:
Concreteplacedmonolithically 1.4z
Concrete placed against hardened concrete with surface
intentionallyroughenedasspecifiedin6.4.5.9
1.uz
Concrete placed against hardened concrete not intentionally
roughened
u.6z
Concreteanchoredtoasrolledstructuralsteelbyheadedstuds
orbyreinforcingbars(see6.4.5.10)
u.7z
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 649

where z = 1.u for normalweight concrete and 0.75 for all lightweight concrete. Otherwise, shall be
determined based onvolumetric proportions of lightweight and normalweight aggregates as specified in
6.1.8.1,butshallnotexceed0.85.
6.4.5.5 Fornormalweightconcreteeitherplacedmonolithicallyorplacedagainsthardenedconcrete
withsurfaceintentionallyroughenedasspecifiedin6.4.5.9,I
n
shallnotexceedthesmallest
ofu.2
c
i
A
c
,(S.S + u.u8
c
i
)A
c
and11A
c
,whereA
c
isareaofconcretesectionresistingshear
transfer.Forallothercases,I
n
shallnotexceedthesmallerofu.2
c
i
A
c
orS.SA
c
. Where
concretesofdifferentstrengthsarecastagainsteachother,thevalueof
c
i
usedtoevaluate
I
n
shallbethatofthelowerstrengthconcrete.
6.4.5.6 Thevalueof

usedfordesignofshearfrictionreinforcementshallnotexceed420MPa.
6.4.5.7 Nettensionacrossshearplaneshallberesistedbyadditionalreinforcement.Permanentnet
compressionacrossshearplaneshallbepermittedtobetakenasadditivetoA
]

,theforce
intheshearfrictionreinforcement,whencalculatingrequiredA
]
.
6.4.5.8 Shearfrictionreinforcementshallbeappropriatelyplacedalongtheshearplaneandshallbe
anchoredtodevelop

onbothsidesbyembedment,hooks,orweldingtospecialdevices.
6.4.5.9 Forthepurposeof6.4.5,whenconcreteisplacedagainstpreviouslyhardenedconcrete,the
interfaceforsheartransfershallbecleanandfreeoflaitance.Ifp isassumedequalto1.uz,
interfaceshallberoughenedtoafullamplitudeofapproximately6mm.
6.4.5.10 Whenshearistransferredbetweenasrolledsteelandconcreteusingheadedstudsorwelded
reinforcingbars,steelshallbecleanandfreeofpaint.

Fig.6.4.5.1Shearfrictionreinforcementatanangletoassumedcrack(6.4.5.4.2).

V
u
Assumed crack
and shear plane
Applied shear
vf
Shear friction
reinforcement, A

Part6
StructuralDesign

650 Vol.2
6.4.6 Deepbeams
6.4.6.1 Theprovisionsof6.4.6shallapplytomemberswithl
n
notexceedingfourtimestheoverall
memberdepthorregionsofbeamswithconcentratedloadswithintwicethememberdepth
fromthesupportthatareloadedononefaceandsupportedontheoppositefacesothat
compressionstrutscandevelopbetweentheloadsandsupports.Seealso8.2.7.6.
6.4.6.2 Deepbeamsshallbedesignedusingeithernonlinearanalysisaspermittedin6.3.7.1,or
AppendixA.
6.4.6.3 I
n
fordeepbeamsshallnotexceedu.8S
c
i
b
w
J.
6.4.6.4 Theareaofshearreinforcementperpendiculartotheflexuraltensionreinforcement,A

,shall
notbelessthanu.uu2Sb
w
s,ands shallnotexceedthesmallerofJS and300mm.
6.4.6.5 Theareaofshearreinforcementparalleltotheflexuraltensionreinforcement,A
h
,shallnot
belessthanu.uu1Sb
w
s
2
,ands
2
shallnotexceedthesmallerofJS and300mm.
6.4.6.6 ItshallbepermittedtoprovidereinforcementsatisfyingA.3.3insteadoftheminimum
horizontalandverticalreinforcementspecifiedin6.4.6.4and6.4.6.5.
6.4.7 Provisionsforbracketsandcorbels
6.4.7.1 Bracketsandcorbels(Fig.6.4.7.1&Fig.6.4.7.2)withashearspantodepthratioo

J less
than2shallbepermittedtobedesignedusingAppendixA.Designshallbepermittedusing
6.4.7.3and6.4.7.4forbracketsandcorbelswith:
a) o

J notgreaterthan1,and
b) subjecttofactoredhorizontaltensileforce,N
uc
,notlargerthanI
u
.
The requirements of 6.4.7.2, 6.4.7.3.2.1, 6.4.7.3.2.2, 6.4.7.5, 6.4.7.6, and 6.4.7.7 shall apply to design of
bracketsandcorbels.EffectivedepthJ shallbedeterminedatthefaceofthesupport.

Fig.6.4.7.1Structuralactionofacorbel
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 651

Fig.6.4.7.2NotationusedinSection6.4.7
6.4.7.2 Depthatoutsideedgeofbearingareashallnotbelessthanu.SJ.
6.4.7.3 Section at face of support shall be designed to resist simultaneously I
u
, a factored moment
|I
u
o

+N
uc
(b J)],andafactoredhorizontaltensileforce,N
uc
.
6.4.7.3.1 Inalldesigncalculationsinaccordancewith6.4.7, shallbetakenequalto0.75.
6.4.7.3.2 Designofshearfrictionreinforcement,A
]
,toresistI
u
shallbeinaccordancewith6.4.5.
6.4.7.3.2.1Fornormalweightconcrete,I
n
shallnotexceedthesmallestofu.2
c
i
b
w
J,(S.S +u.u8
c
i
)b
w
J,
and11b
w
J.
6.4.7.3.2.2Foralllightweightorsandlightweightconcrete,I
n
shallnotbetakengreaterthanthesmaller
of(u.2 u.u7o

J)
c
i
b
w
J and(S.S 1.9o

J)b
w
J.
6.4.7.3.3 Reinforcement A
]
to resist factored moment|I
u
o

+ N
uc
(b J)] shall be computed in
accordancewith6.3.2and6.3.3.
6.4.7.3.4 ReinforcementA
n
toresistfactoredtensileforceN
uc
shallbedeterminedfromA
n

N
uc
.
Factored tensile force, N
uc
, shall not be taken less than u.2I
u
unless provisions are made to
avoidtensileforces.N
uc
shallberegardedasaliveloadeveniftensionresultsfromrestraint
ofcreep,shrinkage,ortemperaturechange.
6.4.7.3.5 AreaofprimarytensionreinforcementA
sc
shallnotbelessthanthelargerof(A
]
+A
n
) and
(2A
]
S + A
n
).
6.4.7.4 Totalarea,A
h
,ofclosedstirrupsortiesparalleltoprimarytensionreinforcementshallnotbe
less than u.S(A
sc
A
n
). Distribute A
h
uniformly within (2S)J adjacent to primary tension
reinforcement.
6.4.7.5 A
sc
bJshallnotbelessthanu.u4(
c
i

).
6.4.7.6 Atfrontfaceofbracketorcorbel,primarytensionreinforcementshallbeanchoredbyoneof
thefollowing:
a) Byastructuralweldtoatransversebarofatleastequalsize;weldtobedesignedto
develop

ofprimarytensionreinforcement;
b) Bybendingprimarytensionreinforcementbacktoformahorizontalloop;or
c) Bysomeothermeansofpositiveanchorage.
6.4.7.7
Bearing area on bracket or corbel shall not project beyond straight portion of primary tension
reinforcement,norprojectbeyondinteriorfaceoftransverseanchorbar(ifoneisprovided).
Part6
StructuralDesign

652 Vol.2
6.4.8 Provisionsforwalls
6.4.8.1 Designofwallsforshearforcesperpendiculartofaceofwallshallbeinaccordancewith
provisionsforslabsin6.4.10.Designforhorizontalinplaneshearforcesinawallshallbein
accordancewith6.4.8.2through6.4.8.9.Alternatively,itshallbepermittedtodesignwalls
withaheightnotexceedingtwotimesthelengthofthewallforhorizontalshearforcesin
accordancewithAppendixAand6.4.8.9.2through6.4.8.9.5.
6.4.8.2 DesignofhorizontalsectionforshearinplaneofwallshallbebasedonEq.(6.4.1)and(6.4.2),
whereI
c
shallbeinaccordancewith6.4.8.5or6.4.8.6andI
s
shallbeinaccordancewith
6.4.8.9.
6.4.8.3 I
n
atanyhorizontalsectionforshearinplaneofwallshallnotbetakengreaterthan
u.8S
c
,
bJ,whereb isthicknessofwall,andJ isdefinedin6.4.8.4.
6.4.8.4 Fordesignforhorizontalshearforcesinplaneofwall,J shallbetakenequaltou.8l
w
.Alarger
valueofJ,equaltothedistancefromextremecompressionfibertocenterofforceofall
reinforcementintension,shallbepermittedtobeusedwhendeterminedbyastrain
compatibilityanalysis.
6.4.8.5 Ifamoredetailedcalculationisnotmadeinaccordancewith6.4.8.6,I
c
shallnotbetaken
greaterthanu.17z '
c
bJ forwallssubjecttoaxialcompression,orI
c
shallnotbetaken
greaterthanthevaluegivenin6.4.2.2.3forwallssubjecttoaxialtension.
6.4.8.6 I
c
shallbepermittedtobethelesserofthevaluescomputedfromEq.(6.4.22)and(6.4.23)
I
c
= u.27'
c
bJ +
N
u
d
4I
w
(6.4.22)
or
I
c
= _u.uS'
c
+
I
w
(0.1_]
|
c
+0.2
N
u
l
w
h
)
M
u
v
u
-
l
w
2
_ bJ (6.4.2S)
wherel
w
istheoveralllengthofthewall,andN
u
ispositiveforcompressionandnegativefor
tension.If(H
u
I
u
l
w
2) isnegative,Eq.(6.4.23)shallnotapply.
6.4.8.7 Sectionslocatedclosertowallbasethanadistancel
w
2 oronehalfthewallheight,
whicheverisless,shallbepermittedtobedesignedforthesameI
c
asthatcomputedata
distancel
w
2 oronehalftheheight.
6.4.8.8 WhereI
u
islessthanu.SI
c
,reinforcementshallbeprovidedinaccordancewith6.4.8.9orin
accordancewithSec.6.6.WhereI
u
exceedsu.SI
c
,wallreinforcementforresistingshear
shallbeprovidedinaccordancewith6.4.8.9.
6.4.8.9 Designofshearreinforcementforwalls
6.4.8.9.1 WhereI
u
exceedsI
c
,horizontalshearreinforcementshallbeprovidedtosatisfyEq.(6.4.1)
and(6.4.2),whereI
s
shallbecomputedby
I
s
=
A

]
j
d
s
(6.4.24)
whereA

is area of horizontal shearreinforcement within spacings, and J is determined in accordance

with6.4.8.4.Verticalshearreinforcementshallbeprovidedinaccordancewith6.4.8.9.4.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 653

6.4.8.9.2 Ratioofhorizontalshearreinforcementareatogrossconcreteareaofverticalsection,p
t
shall
notbelessthan0.0025.
6.4.8.9.3 Spacingofhorizontalshearreinforcementshallnotexceedthesmallestofl
w
S,Sb,and450
mm,wherel
w
istheoveralllengthofthewall.
6.4.8.9.4 Ratioofverticalshearreinforcementareatogrossconcreteareaofhorizontalsection,p
I

shallnotbelessthanthelargerof
p
I
= u.uu2S +u.S [2.S -
h
w
I
w
(p
t
-u.uu2S) (6.4.2S)
and0.0025,Thevalueofp
I
calculatedbyEq.(6.4.25)neednotbegreaterthanp
t
requiredby6.4.8.9.1.
InEq.(6.4.25),l
w
istheoveralllengthofthewall,andb
w
istheoverallheightofthewall.
6.4.8.9.5 Spacingofverticalshearreinforcementshallnotexceedthesmallestofl
w
S,Sb,and450
mm,wherel
w
istheoveralllengthofthewall.
6.4.9 Transferofmomentstocolumns
6.4.9.1 Whengravityload,wind,earthquake,orotherlateralforcescausetransferofmomentat
connectionsofframingelementstocolumns,theshearresultingfrommomenttransfershall
beconsideredinthedesignoflateralreinforcementinthecolumns.
6.4.9.2 Exceptforconnectionsnotpartofaprimaryseismicloadresistingsystemthatarerestrained
onfoursidesbybeamsorslabsofapproximatelyequaldepth,connectionsshallhavelateral
reinforcementnotlessthanthatrequiredbyEq.(6.4.9)withinthecolumnforadepthnotless
thanthatofthedeepestconnectionofframingelementstothecolumns.SeealsoSec.8.1.13.
6.4.1u Provisionsforfootingsandslabs
6.4.10.1 Theshearstrengthoffootingsandslabsinthevicinityofcolumns,concentratedloads,or
reactionsisgovernedbythemoresevereofthefollowingtwoconditions:
6.4.10.1.1 Beamactionwhereeachcriticalsectiontobeinvestigatedextendsinaplaneacrosstheentire
width.Theslaborfootingshallbedesignedinaccordancewith6.4.1through6.4.3forbeam
action.
6.4.10.1.2 Fortwowayaction,eachofthecriticalsectionstobeinvestigatedshallbelocatedsothatits
perimeterb
o
isaminimumbutneednotapproachcloserthanJ2 to:
a) Edgesorcornersofcolumns,concentratedloads,orreactionareas;and
b) Changesinslabthicknesssuchasedgesofcapitals,droppanels,orshearcaps.
Fortwowayaction,theslaborfootingshallbedesignedinaccordancewith6.4.10.2through6.4.10.6.
6.4.10.1.3 Forsquareorrectangularcolumns,concentratedloads,orreactionareas,thecriticalsections
withfourstraightsidesshallbepermitted.
6.4.10.2 Fortwowayaction,thedesignofaslaborfootingisbasedonEq.(6.4.1)and(6.4.2).I
c
shall
becomputedinaccordancewith6.4.10.2.1,or6.4.10.3.1.I
s
shallbecomputedinaccordance
with6.4.10.3.Forslabswithshearheads,I
n
shallbeinaccordancewith6.4.10.4.Where
momentistransferredbetweenaslabandacolumn,6.4.10.6shallapply.
6.4.10.2.1 Forslabsandfootings,I
c
shallbethesmallestof(a),(b),and(c):
a) I
c
= u.17(1 +
2
[
)'
c
b
o
J (6.4.26)
where istheratiooflongsidetoshortsideofthecolumn,concentratedloadorreactionarea;
Part6
StructuralDesign

654 Vol.2
b) I
c
= u.u8S(
u
s
d
b
c
+ 2)'
c
b
o
J (6.4.27)
whereo
s
is40forinteriorcolumns,30foredgecolumns,20forcornercolumns;and
c) I
c
= u.SS'
c
b
o
J (6.4.28)
6.4.10.3 Barsorwiresandsingleormultiplelegstirrupsasshearreinforcementshallbepermittedin
slabs and footings with J greater than or equal to 150 mm, but not less than 16 times the
shearreinforcementbardiameter.Shearreinforcementshallbeinaccordancewith6.4.10.3.1
through6.4.10.3.4.
6.4.10.3.1 For computing I
n
, Eq. (6.4.2) shall be used and I
c
shall not be taken greater than
u.17z'
c
b
o
J,andI
s
shallbecalculatedinaccordancewith6.4.3.InEq.(6.4.10),A

shallbe
taken as the crosssectional area of all legs of reinforcement on one peripheral line that is
geometricallysimilartotheperimeterofthecolumnsection.
6.4.10.3.2 I
n
shallnotbetakengreaterthanu.S'
c
b
o
J.
6.4.10.3.3 The distance from the column face to the first line of stirrup legs that surround the column
shall not exceed J2. The spacing between adjacent stirrup legs in the first line of shear
reinforcement shall not exceed 2J measured in a direction parallel to the column face. The
spacing between successive lines of shear reinforcement that surround the column shall not
exceed J2 measured in a direction perpendicular to the column face. In a slabcolumn
connection for which the moment transfer is negligible, the shear reinforcement should be
symmetrical about the centroid of the critical section (Fig. 6.4.10.1). Spacing limits defined
abovearealsoshowninFig.6.4.10.1forinteriorcolumnandinFig.6.4.10.2foredgecolumn.
At edge columns or for interior connections where moment transfer is significant, closed
stirrupsarerecommendedinapatternassymmetricalaspossible.
6.4.10.3.4 Slabshearreinforcementshallsatisfytheanchoragerequirementsof8.2.10andshallengage
thelongitudinalflexuralreinforcementinthedirectionbeingconsidered.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 655

Fig.6.4.10.1Arrangementofstirrupshearreinforcementaroundinteriorcolumn(6.4.10.3.3).

Fig.6.4.10.1Arrangementofstirrupshearreinforcementaroundedgecolumn(6.4.10.3.3).
6.4.10.4 Shearreinforcement consisting of structural steel I orchannelshaped sections (shearheads)
shall be permitted in slabs. The provisions of 6.4.10.4.1 through 6.4.10.4.9 shall apply where
d/2
d/2
d/2
Plan
d/2
Critical section
through slab shear
reinforcement
(first line of
stirrup legs)
Critical section
outside slab shear
reinforcement
2d <
d/2 < d/2 < s
Slab
d
Elevation
Column
d/2
d/2
Critical section through
slab shear reinforcement
(first line of stirrup legs)
Critical section outside
slab shear reinforcement
2d < d/2 < d/2 < s
d
Elevation
D
C
A
B
Slab
edge
Plan
Part6
StructuralDesign

656 Vol.2
shear due to gravity load is transferred at interior column supports. Where moment is
transferredtocolumns,6.4.10.7.3shallapply.
6.4.10.4.1 Eachshearheadshallconsistofsteelshapesfabricatedbyweldingwithafullpenetrationweld
intoidenticalarmsatrightangles.Shearheadarmsshallnotbeinterruptedwithinthecolumn
section.
6.4.10.4.2 Ashearheadshallnotbedeeperthan70timesthewebthicknessofthesteelshape.
6.4.10.4.3 Theendsofeachshearheadarmshallbepermittedtobecutatanglesnotlessthan30
degreeswiththehorizontal,providedtheplasticmomentstrengthoftheremainingtapered
sectionisadequatetoresisttheshearforceattributedtothatarmoftheshearhead.
6.4.10.4.4 Allcompressionflangesofsteelshapesshallbelocatedwithinu.SJ ofcompressionsurfaceof
slab.
6.4.10.4.5 Theratioo

betweentheflexuralstiffnessofeachshearheadarmandthatofthesurrounding
compositecrackedslabsectionofwidth(c
2
+ J) shallnotbelessthan0.15.
6.4.10.4.6 Plasticmomentstrength,H
p
,requiredforeacharmoftheshearheadshallbecomputedby
H
p
=
v
u
2qn
jb

+ o

[l

-
c
1
2
[ (6.4.29)
where isfortensioncontrolledmembers,n isnumberofshearheadarms,andl

isminimumlengthof
eachshearheadarmrequiredtocomplywithrequirementsof6.4.10.4.7and6.4.10.4.8.
6.4.10.4.7 Thecriticalslabsectionforshearshallbeperpendiculartotheplaneoftheslabandshallcross
eachshearheadarmatthreequartersthedistance|l
u
(c
1
2)] fromthecolumnfacetothe
endoftheshearheadarm.Thecriticalsectionshallbelocatedsothatitsperimeterb
o
isa
minimum,butneednotbecloserthantheperimeterdefinedin6.4.10.1.2(a).
6.4.10.4.8 I
n
shallnotbetakenlargerthanu.SS'
c
b
o
J onthecriticalsectiondefinedin6.4.10.4.7.
Whenshearheadreinforcementisprovided,I
n
shallnotbetakengreaterthanu.S8'
c
b
o
J
onthecriticalsectiondefinedin6.4.10.1.2(a).
6.4.10.4.9 MomentresistanceH

contributedtoeachslabcolumnstripbyashearheadshallnotbe
takengreaterthan
H

=
qu

v
u
2n
[l

-
c
1
2
(6.4.Su)
where is for tensioncontrolled members, n is number of shearhead arms, and l
u
is length of each
shearheadarmactuallyprovided.However,H

shallnotbetakenlargerthanthesmallestof:
a) 30percentofthetotalfactoredmomentrequiredforeachslabcolumnstrip;
b) Thechangeincolumnstripmomentoverthelengthl
u
;
c) H
p
computedbyEq.(6.4.29).
6.4.10.4.10 Whenunbalancedmomentsareconsidered,theshearheadmusthaveadequateanchorageto
transmitH
p
tothecolumn.
6.4.10.5 Headedshearstudreinforcement,placedperpendiculartotheplaneofaslaborfooting,shall
bepermittedinslabsandfootingsinaccordancewith6.4.10.5.1through6.4.10.5.4.The
overallheightoftheshearstudassemblyshallnotbelessthanthethicknessofthemember
lessthesumof:(1)theconcretecoveronthetopflexuralreinforcement;(2)theconcrete
coveronthebaserail;and(3)onehalfthebardiameterofthetensionflexuralreinforcement.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 657

Whereflexuraltensionreinforcementisatthebottomofthesection,asinafooting,the
overallheightoftheshearstudassemblyshallnotbelessthanthethicknessofthemember
lessthesumof:(1)theconcretecoveronthebottomflexuralreinforcement;(2)theconcrete
coverontheheadofthestud;and(3)onehalfthebardiameterofthebottomflexural
reinforcement.
6.4.10.5.1 Forthecriticalsectiondefinedin6.4.10.1.2,I
n
shallbecomputedusingEq.(6.4.2),withI
c

andI
n
notexceedingu.2Sz '
c
b
o
J andu.66 '
c
b
o
J,respectively.I
s
shallbecalculated
usingEq.(6.4.10)withA
u
equaltothecrosssectionalareaofalltheshearreinforcementon
oneperipherallinethatisapproximatelyparalleltotheperimeterofthecolumnsection,
wheres isthespacingoftheperipherallinesofheadedshearstudreinforcement.A

t

(b
o
s) shallnotbelessthanu.17 '
c
.
6.4.10.5.2 Thespacingbetweenthecolumnfaceandthefirstperipherallineofshearreinforcementshall
notexceedJ2.Thespacingbetweenperipherallinesofshearreinforcement,measuredina
directionperpendiculartoanyfaceofthecolumn,shallbeconstant.Forallslabsandfootings,
thespacingshallbebasedonthevalueoftheshearstressduetofactoredshearforceand
unbalancedmomentatthecriticalsectiondefinedin6.4.10.1.2,andshallnotexceed:
a) u.7SJ wheremaximumshearstressesduetofactoredloadsarelessthanorequalto
u.S'
c
;and
b) u.SJ wheremaximumshearstressesduetofactoredloadsaregreaterthanu.S'
c
.
6.4.10.5.3 Thespacingbetweenadjacentshearreinforcementelements,measuredontheperimeterof
thefirstperipherallineofshearreinforcement,shallnotexceed2J.
6.4.10.5.4 Shearstressduetofactoredshearforceandmomentshallnotexceedu.17z'
c
atthe
criticalsectionlocatedJ2 outsidetheoutermostperipherallineofshearreinforcement.
6.4.10.6 Openingsinslabs
If openings in slabs are located at a distance less than 10 times the slab thickness from a concentrated
loadorreactionarea,orwhenopeningsinflatslabsarelocatedwithincolumnstripsasdefinedinSec.6.5,
thecriticalslabsectionsforsheardefinedin6.4.10.1.2and6.4.10.4.7shallbemodifiedasfollows:
Part6
StructuralDesign

658 Vol.2
6.4.10.6.1 Forslabswithoutshearheads,thatpartoftheperimeterofthecriticalsectionthatisenclosed
by straight lines projecting from the centroid of the column, concentrated load, or reaction
area and tangent to the boundaries of the openings shall be considered ineffective (Fig.
6.4.10.3).
6.4.10.6.2 Forslabswithshearheads,theineffectiveportionoftheperimetershallbeonehalfofthat
definedin6.4.10.6.1.

Fig. 6.4.10.3 Effective perimeter (in dashed lines) to consider effect of openings and free edges
(6.4.10.6.1).
6.4.10.7 Transferofmomentinslabcolumnconnections
6.4.10.7.1 Wheregravityload,wind,earthquake,orotherlateralforcescausetransferofunbalanced
momentH
u
betweenaslabandcolumn,y
]
H
u
shallbetransferredbyflexureinaccordance
with6.5.5.3.Theremainderoftheunbalancedmoment,y

H
u
,shallbeconsideredtobe
transferredbyeccentricityofshearaboutthecentroidofthecriticalsectiondefinedin
6.4.10.1.2where
y

= (1 -y
]
) (6.4.S1)
6.4.10.7.2 Theshearstressresultingfrommomenttransferbyeccentricityofshearshallbeassumedto
varylinearlyaboutthecentroidofthecriticalsectionsdefinedin6.4.10.1.2.Themaximum
shearstressduetoI
u
andH
u
shallnotexceed:
n
:
(a)Formemberswithoutshearreinforcement,
I
n
= I
c
(b
o
J) (6.4.S2)
whereI
c
isasdefinedin6.4.10.2.1.
Ineffective
d
2
(Typ.)
Critical
Section
(a) (b)
Opening
Regard
as free
edge
Free corner
(C) (d)
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 659

(b)Formemberswithshearreinforcementotherthanshearheads,
I
n
= (I
c
+I
s
)(b
o
J) (6.4.SS)
whereI
c
andI
x
aredefinedin6.4.10.3.1.Thedesignshalltakeintoaccountthevariationofshearstress
around the column. The shear stress due to factored shear force and moment shall not exceed
(u.17z'
c
) atthecriticalsectionlocatedJ2 outsidetheoutermostlineofstirruplegsthatsurround
thecolumn.

The maximum factored shear stress may be obtained from the combined shear stresses on the left and right
facesofthecolumn(Fig.6.4.10.4),
:
I
=
I
u
A
c
-
y

H
u
c
I
[
c

:

=
I
u
A
c
+
y

H
u
c

[
c

Where, A
c
=areaofconcreteofassumedcriticalsection=2J(c
1
+ c
2
+ 2J)
c
I
,c

= distancesfromcentroidofcriticalsectiontoleftandrightfaceofsectionrespectively
c
1
,c
2
=widthanddepthofthecolumn
[
c
=propertyofassumedcriticalsectionanalogoustopolarmomentofinertia
Foraninteriorcolumn,thequantity[
c
is
[
c
=
2d(c
1
+d)
3
12
+
2(c
1
+d)d
3
12
+ 2J(c
2
+J) [
c
1
+d
2

2
))
Part6
StructuralDesign

660 Vol.2

Fig. 6.4.10.4 Transfer of moment from slab to column: (a) forces resulting from vertical load and
unbalanced moment; (b) critical section for an interior column; (c) shear stress distribution for
an interior column; (d) critical section for an edge column; (e) shear stress distribution for an
edgecolumn(6.4.10.7.2).

T
c
M
V
u
u
(a)
b = c + d
1 1
b = c +
1 1
c
1
c
1
c
l
c
r
c
l
c
r
c
l
c
r
b = c + d c
2 2 2
b = c + d c
2 2 2
c
l
c
r
V
l
V
l
V
r
V
r
(b) (C)
(d) (e)
d
2
d
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 661

6.4.10.7.3 WhenshearreinforcementconsistingofstructuralsteelIorchannelshapedsections
(shearheads)isprovided,thesumoftheshearstressesduetoverticalloadactingonthe
criticalsectiondefinedby6.4.10.4.7andtheshearstressesresultingfrommoment
transferredbyeccentricityofshearaboutthecentroidofthecriticalsectiondefinedin
6.4.10.1.2(a)and6.4.10.1.3shallnotexceedu.SSz '
c
.
6.5 TWOWAY SLAB SYSTEMS: FLAT PLATES, FLAT SLABS AND EDGE
SUPPORTEDSLABS
6.S.1 Scope
The provisions of this section shall apply to all slabs, solid, ribbed or hollow, spanning in more than one
direction, with or without beams between the supports. Flat plate is a term normally attributed to slabs
without beams and without drop panels, column capitals, or brackets. On the other hand, slabs without
beams, but with drop panels, column capital or brackets are commonly known as flat slabs. While this
section coversthe requirements for all types of slabs, the provisions of 6.5.8, Alternative Design of Two
way EdgeSupported slabs, may be used as an alternative for slabs supported on all four edges by walls,
steelbeamsormonolithicconcretebeamshavingatotaldepthnotlessthan3timestheslabthickness.
6.5.1.1 Foraslabsystemsupportedbycolumnsorwalls,dimensionsc
1
,c
2
,andl
n
shallbebasedon
aneffectivesupportareadefinedbytheintersectionofthebottomsurfaceoftheslab,orof
thedroppanelorshearcapifpresent,withthelargestrightcircularcone,rightpyramid,or
taperedwedgewhosesurfacesarelocatedwithinthecolumnandthecapitalorbracketand
areorientednogreaterthan45degreestotheaxisofthecolumn.
6.5.1.2 MinimumthicknessofslabsdesignedinaccordancewithSec.6.5shallbeasrequiredby
6.2.5.3.
6.S.2 General
6.5.2.1 Columnstripisadesignstripwithawidthoneachsideofacolumncenterlineequaltou.2Sl
2

oru.2Sl
1
,whicheverisless.Columnstripincludesbeams,ifany.
6.5.2.2 Middlestripisadesignstripboundedbytwocolumnstrips.
6.5.2.3 Apanelisboundedbycolumn,beam,orwallcenterlinesonallsides.
6.5.2.4 Formonolithicorfullycompositeconstruction,abeamincludesthatportionofslaboneach
sideofthebeamextendingadistanceequaltotheprojectionofthebeamaboveorbelowthe
slab,whicheverisgreater,butnotgreaterthanfourtimestheslabthickness(Fig.6.5.2.1).
6.5.2.5 Whenusedtoreducetheamountofnegativemomentreinforcementoveracolumnor
minimum
requiredslabthickness,adroppanelshall:
a) projectbelowtheslabatleastonequarteroftheadjacentslabthickness;and
b) extendineachdirectionfromthecenterlineofsupportadistancenotlessthanonesixth
thespanlengthmeasuredfromcentertocenterofsupportsinthatdirection.
6.5.2.6 Whenusedtoincreasethecriticalconditionsectionforshearataslabcolumnjoint,ashear
capshallprojectbelowtheslabandextendaminimumhorizontaldistancefromthefaceof
thecolumnthatisequaltothethicknessoftheprojectionbelowtheslabsoffit.
Part6
StructuralDesign

662 Vol.2

Fig.6.5.2.1Portionofslabtobeincludedwiththebeamaccordingto6.5.2.4.
6.S.S Slabreinforcement
6.5.3.1 Areaofreinforcementineachdirectionfortwowayslabsystemsshallbedeterminedfrom
momentsatcriticalsections,butshallnotbelessthanrequiredbySec.8.1.11.2.
6.5.3.2 Spacingofreinforcementatcriticalsectionsshallnotexceedtwotimestheslabthickness,
exceptforportionsofslabareaofcellularorribbedconstruction.Intheslabovercellular
spaces,reinforcementshallbeprovidedasrequiredbySec.8.1.11.
6.5.3.3 Positivemomentreinforcementperpendiculartoadiscontinuousedgeshallextendtothe
edgeofslabandhaveembedment,straightorhooked,atleast150mminspandrelbeams,
columns,orwalls.
6.5.3.4 Negativemomentreinforcementperpendiculartoadiscontinuousedgeshallbebent,
hooked,orotherwiseanchoredinspandrelbeams,columns,orwalls,andshallbedeveloped
atfaceofsupportaccordingtoprovisionsofSec.8.2.
6.5.3.5 Whereaslabisnotsupportedbyaspandrelbeamorwallatadiscontinuousedge,orwherea
slabcantileversbeyondthesupport,anchorageofreinforcementshallbepermittedwithin
theslab.
6.5.3.6 Atexteriorcornersofslabssupportedbyedgewallsorwhereoneormoreedgebeamshavea
valueofo
]
greaterthan1.0,topandbottomslabreinforcementshallbeprovidedatexterior
cornersinaccordancewith6.5.3.6.1through6.5.3.6.4andasshowninFig.6.5.3.1.
b
w
b
w
h
b
h
b
h
b
h
f
4h
f
<
b
w
b
w
2h
b
8h
f
<
+ +
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 663

Fig.6.5.3.1Cornerreinforcementinslabs(6.5.3.6)

6.5.3.6.1 Cornerreinforcementinbothtopandbottomofslabshallbesufficienttoresistamomentper
unitofwidthequaltothemaximumpositivemomentperunitwidthintheslabpanel.
(










)
/
5
( )/5
(










)
/
5
( )/5
LLong
L
S
h
o
r
t
LLong
L
L
o
n
g
B-1
A top per 6.5.3.6
A bottom per 6.5.3.6
B
-
2
Choice-1
Choice-2
LLong
L
S
h
o
r
t
LLong
L
L
o
n
g
B-1
B
-
2
Notes:
1. Applies if B-1or B-2 has >1.0
2. Max. bar spacing 2h, where h = slab thickness
3. Reinforcement same as maximum +ve reinforcement of the panel
s
s
A per 6.5.3.6
top and bottom
s
f
Part6
StructuralDesign

664 Vol.2
6.5.3.6.2 Themomentshallbeassumedtobeaboutanaxisperpendiculartothediagonalfromthe
cornerinthetopoftheslabandaboutanaxisparalleltothediagonalfromthecornerinthe
bottomoftheslab.
6.5.3.6.3 Cornerreinforcementshallbeprovidedforadistanceineachdirectionfromthecornerequal
toonefifththelongerspan.
6.5.3.6.4 Cornerreinforcementshallbeplacedparalleltothediagonalinthetopoftheslaband
perpendiculartothediagonalinthebottomoftheslab.Alternatively,reinforcementshallbe
placedintwolayersparalleltothesidesoftheslabinboththetopandbottomoftheslab.
6.5.3.7 Whenadroppanelisusedtoreducetheamountofnegativemomentreinforcementoverthe
columnofaflatslab,thedimensionsofthedroppanelshallbeinaccordancewith6.5.2.5.In
computingrequiredslabreinforcement,thethicknessofthedroppanelbelowtheslabshall
notbeassumedtobegreaterthanonequarterthedistancefromtheedgeofdroppanelto
thefaceofcolumnorcolumncapital.
6.5.3.8 Detailsofreinforcementinslabswithoutbeams
6.5.3.8.1 Inadditiontotheotherrequirementsof6.5.3,reinforcementinslabswithoutbeamsshall
haveminimumextensionsasprescribedinFig.6.5.3.2.
6.5.3.8.2 Whereadjacentspansareunequal,extensionsofnegativemomentreinforcementbeyondthe
faceofsupportasprescribedinFig.6.5.3.2shallbebasedonrequirementsofthelongerspan.

Fig. 6.5.3.2Minimum extensions for reinforcement in slabs without beams. (See 8.2.8.1 for reinforcement
extensionintosupports
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 665

6.5.3.8.3 Bentbarsshallbepermittedonlywhendepthspanratiopermitsuseofbendsof45degrees
orless.
6.5.3.8.4 Inframeswheretwowayslabsactasprimarymembersresistinglateralloads,lengthsof
reinforcementshallbedeterminedbyanalysisbutshallnotbelessthanthoseprescribedin
Fig.6.5.3.2.
6.5.3.8.5 Allbottombarsorwireswithinthecolumnstrip,ineachdirection,shallbecontinuousor
splicedwithClassBtensionsplicesorwithmechanicalorweldedsplicessatisfyingSec.
8.2.12.3.SplicesshallbelocatedasshowninFig.6.5.3.2.Atleasttwoofthecolumnstrip
bottombarsorwiresineachdirectionshallpasswithintheregionboundedbythe
longitudinalreinforcementofthecolumnandshallbeanchoredatexteriorsupports.
6.5.3.8.6 Inslabswithshearheadsandinliftslabconstructionwhereitisnotpracticaltopassthe
bottombarsrequiredby6.5.3.8.5throughthecolumn,atleasttwobondedbottombarsor
wiresineachdirectionshallpassthroughtheshearheadorliftingcollarasclosetothecolumn
aspracticableandbecontinuousorsplicedwithaClassAsplice.Atexteriorcolumns,the
reinforcementshallbeanchoredattheshearheadorliftingcollar.
6.S.4 Openingsinslabsystems
6.5.4.1 Openings of any size shall be permitted in slab systems if shown by analysis that the design
strength is at least equal to the required strength set forth in 6.2.2 and 6.2.3, and that all
serviceabilityconditions,includingthelimitsondeflections,aremet.
6.5.4.2 Asanalternatetoanalysisasrequiredby6.5.4.1,openingsshallbepermittedinslabsystems
withoutbeamsonly,inaccordancewith6.5.4.2.1through6.5.4.2.4.
6.5.4.2.1 Openings of any size shall be permitted in the area common to intersecting middle strips,
provided total amount of reinforcement required for the panel without the opening is
maintained.
6.5.4.2.2 In the area common to intersecting column strips, not more than oneeighth the width of
column strip in either span shall be interrupted by openings. An amount of reinforcement
equivalenttothatinterruptedbyanopeningshallbeaddedonthesidesoftheopening.
6.5.4.2.3 Intheareacommontoonecolumnstripandonemiddlestrip,notmorethanonequarterof
the reinforcement in either strip shall be interrupted by openings. An amount of
reinforcementequivalenttothatinterruptedbyanopeningshallbeaddedonthesidesofthe
opening.
6.5.4.2.4 Shearrequirementsof6.4.10.6shallbesatisfied.
6.S.S Designprocedures
6.5.5.1 A slab system shall be designed by any procedure satisfying conditions of equilibrium and
geometriccompatibility,ifshownthatthedesignstrengthateverysectionisatleastequalto
the required strength set forth in 6.2.2 and 6.2.3, and that all serviceability conditions,
includinglimitsondeflections,aremet.
6.5.5.1.1 Design of a slab system for gravity loads, including the slab and beams (if any) between
supports and supporting columns or walls forming orthogonal frames, by either the Direct
DesignMethodof6.5.6ortheEquivalentFrameMethodof6.5.7,shallbepermitted.
Part6
StructuralDesign

666 Vol.2
6.5.5.1.2 For lateral loads, analysis of frames shall take into account effects of cracking and
reinforcementonstiffnessofframemembers.
6.5.5.1.3 Combining the results of the gravityload analysis withthe results of the lateral load analysis
shallbepermitted.
6.5.5.2 The slab and beams (if any) between supports shall be proportioned for factored moments
prevailingateverysection.
6.5.5.3 When gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral forces cause transfer of moment
between slab and column, a fraction of the unbalanced moment shall be transferred by
flexureinaccordancewith6.5.5.3.2through6.5.5.3.4.
6.5.5.3.1 The fraction of unbalanced moment not transferred by flexure shall be transferred by
eccentricityofshearinaccordancewith6.4.10.7.
6.5.5.3.2 Afractionoftheunbalancedmomentgivenbyy
]
H
u
shallbeconsideredtobetransferredby
flexure within an effective slab width between lines that are one and onehalf slab or drop
panel thickness (1.Sb) outside opposite faces of the column or capital, where H
u
is the
factoredmomenttobetransferredand
y

=
1
1+(2 3 )b
1
b
2

(6.S.1)
6.5.5.3.3 Forslabswithunbalancedmomentstransferredbetweentheslabandcolumns,itshallbe
permittedtoincreasethevalueofy
]
givenbyEq.(6.5.1)inaccordancewiththefollowing:
a) For edge columns with unbalanced moments about an axis parallel to the edge,
y
]
= 1.uprovidedthatI
u
atanedgesupportdoesnotexceedu.7SI
c
,oratacorner
supportdoesnotexceedu.SI
c
.
b) For unbalanced moments at interior supports, and for edge columns with unbalanced
momentsaboutanaxisperpendiculartotheedge,increasey
]
toasmuchas1.25times
thevaluefromEq.(6.5.1),butnotmorethany
]
= 1.u,providedthatI
u
atthesupport
does not exceed u.4I
c
. The net tensile strain e
t
calculated for the effective slab width
definedin6.5.5.3.2shallnotbelessthan0.010.
ThevalueofI
c
initems(a)and(b)shallbecalculatedinaccordancewith6.4.10.2.1.
6.5.5.3.4 Concentration of reinforcement over the column by closer spacing or additional
reinforcementshallbeusedtoresistmomentontheeffectiveslabwidthdefinedin6.5.5.3.2.
6.5.5.4 Design for transfer of load from slabs to supporting columns or walls through shear and
torsionshallbeinaccordancewithSec.6.4.
6.S.6 Directdesignmethod
6.5.6.1 Limitations
Design of slab systems within the limitations of 6.5.6.1.1 through 6.5.6.1.8 by the direct design method
shallbepermitted.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 667

6.5.6.1.1 Thereshallbeaminimumofthreecontinuousspansineachdirection.
6.5.6.1.2 Panelsshallberectangular,witharatiooflongertoshorterspancentertocenterofsupports
withinapanelnotgreaterthan2.
6.5.6.1.3 Successivespanlengthscentertocenterofsupportsineachdirectionshallnotdifferbymore
thanonethirdthelongerspan.
6.5.6.1.4 Offsetofcolumnsbyamaximumof10percentofthespan(indirectionofoffset)fromeither
axisbetweencenterlinesofsuccessivecolumnsshallbepermitted.
6.5.6.1.5 All loads shall be due to gravity only and uniformly distributed over an entire panel. The
unfactoredliveloadshallnotexceedtwotimestheunfactoreddeadload.
6.5.6.1.6 Forapanelwithbeamsbetweensupportsonallsides,Eq.(6.5.2)shallbesatisfiedforbeams
inthetwoperpendiculardirections
u.2
u
]1

2
2
u
]2

1
2
S.u (6.S.2)
where
o
]1
ando
]2
arecalculatedinaccordancewithEq.(6.5.3).
o
]
=
L
cb
I
b
L
cs
I
s

(6.S.S)
6.5.6.1.7 Momentredistributionaspermittedby8.4shallnotbeappliedforslabsystemsdesignedby
thedirectdesignmethod.See6.5.6.7.
6.5.6.1.8 Variationsfromthelimitationsof6.5.6.1shallbepermittedifdemonstratedbyanalysisthat
requirementsof6.5.5.1aresatisfied.
6.5.6.2 Totalfactoredstaticmomentforaspan
6.5.6.2.1 Totalfactoredstaticmoment,H
o
,foraspanshallbedeterminedinastripboundedlaterally
bycenterlineofpaneloneachsideofcenterlineofsupports.
6.5.6.2.2 Absolutesumofpositiveandaveragenegativefactoredmomentsineachdirectionshallnot
belessthan
H
o
=
q
u

n
2
8
(6.S.4)
wherel
n
islengthofclearspanindirectionthatmomentsarebeingdetermined.
Part6
StructuralDesign

668 Vol.2
6.5.6.2.3 Wherethetransversespanofpanelsoneithersideofthecenterlineofsupportsvaries,l
2
in
Eq.(6.5.4)shallbetakenastheaverageofadjacenttransversespans.
6.5.6.2.4 Whenthespanadjacentandparalleltoanedgeisbeingconsidered,thedistancefromedge
topanelcenterlineshallbesubstitutedforl
2
inEq.(6.5.4).
6.5.6.2.5 Clearspanl
n
shallextendfromfacetofaceofcolumns,capitals,brackets,orwalls.Valueofl
n

usedinEq.(6.5.4)shallnotbelessthanu.6Sl
1
.Circularorregularpolygonshapedsupports
shallbetreatedassquaresupportswiththesamearea.
6.5.6.3 Negativeandpositivefactoredmoments
6.5.6.3.1 Negative factored moments shall be located at face of rectangular supports. Circular or
regularpolygonshapedsupportsshallbetreatedassquaresupportswiththesamearea.
6.5.6.3.2 Inaninteriorspan,totalstaticmoment,H
o
,shallbedistributedasfollows:
Negativefactoredmoment 0.65
Positivefactoredmoment 0.35
6.5.6.3.3 Inanendspan,totalfactoredstaticmoment,H
o
,shallbedistributedasinTable6.5.6.1
below:
Table6.5.6.1DistributionofTotalFactoredStaticMoment,M
u
inanEndSpan
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Exterior
edge
unrestrained
Slabwith
beams
betweenall
supports
Slabwithoutbeamsbetween
interiorsupports
Exterioredge
fullyrestrained
Withoutedge
beam
Withedge
beam
Interiornegative
factoredmoment
0.75 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.65
Positivefactored
moment
0.63 0.57 0.52 0.50 0.35
Exteriornegative
factoredmoment
0 0.16 0.26 0.30 0.65
6.5.6.3.4 Negative moment sections shall be designed to resist the larger of the two interior negative
factoredmomentsdeterminedforspansframingintoacommonsupportunlessananalysisis
made to distribute the unbalanced moment in accordance with stiffnesses of adjoining
elements.
6.5.6.3.5 Edge beams or edges of slab shall be proportioned to resistin torsion theirshareof exterior
negativefactoredmoments.
6.5.6.3.6 Thegravityloadmomenttobetransferredbetweenslabandedgecolumninaccordancewith
6.5.5.3.1shallbeu.SH
o
.
6.5.6.4 Factoredmomentsincolumnstrips
6.5.6.4.1 Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the portions in percent of interior negative
factoredmomentsasshowninTable6.5.6.2below:
Table6.5.6.2PortionsofInteriorNegativeMomentstobeResistedbyColumnStrip
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 669

1
0.5 1.0 2.0
(o
]1

1
) = u 75 75 75
(o
]1

1
) 1 90 75 45
Note:Linearinterpolationsshallbemadebetweenvaluesshown.
Interpolationfunctionfor%ofMoment=7S +Su [
u
]1

1
(1 -

1
)
6.5.6.4.2 Columnstripsshallbeproportionedtoresisttheportionsinpercentofexteriornegative
factoredmomentsasshowninTable6.5.6.3:
Table6.5.6.3PortionsofExteriorNegativeMomentstobeResistedbyColumnStrip

1
0.5 1.0 2.0
(o
]1

1
)
= u
[
t

=0 100 100 100

[
t

2.5 075 075 075

(o
]1

1
)
1
[
t
=0 100 100 100
[
t

2.5 090 075 045

Linearinterpolationsshallbemadebetweenvaluesshown,where [
t
iscalculatedinEq.(6.5.5)and C is
calculatedinEq.(6.5.6).
[
t
=
L
cb
C
2L
cs
I
s
(6.S.S)
C = [1 - u.6S
x

x
3

3
(6.S.6)
TheconstantC forTorLsectionsshallbepermittedtobeevaluatedbydividingthesectionintoseparate
rectangularparts,asdefinedin6.5.2.4,andsummingthevaluesofC foreachpart.
Interpolationfunctionfor%ofMoment=1uu -1u[
t
+ 12[
t
[
u
]1

1
(1 -

1
)
6.5.6.4.3 Wheresupportsconsistofcolumnsorwallsextendingforadistanceequaltoorgreaterthan
(u.7S)l
2
used to compute H
o
, negative moments shall be considered to be uniformly
distributedacrossl
2
.
6.5.6.4.4 Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the portions in percent of positive factored
momentsshowninTable6.5.6.4:
Table6.5.6.4PortionsofPositiveMomenttobeResistedbyColumnStrip
l
2
l
1
0.5 1.0 2.0
(o
]1
l
2
l
1
) = u 60 60 60
(o
]1
l
2
l
1
) 1 90 75 45
Note:Linearinterpolationsshallbemadebetweenvaluesshown.
Interpolationfunctionfor%ofMoment=6u +Su [
u
]1

1
(1.S -

2

1
)
Part6
StructuralDesign

670 Vol.2
6.5.6.4.5 For slabs with beams between supports, the slab portion of column strips shall be
proportionedtoresistthatportionofcolumnstripmomentsnotresistedbybeams.
6.5.6.5 Factoredmomentsinbeams
6.5.6.5.1 Beamsbetweensupportsshallbeproportionedtoresist85percentofcolumnstripmoments
ifo
]1
l
2
l
1
isequaltoorgreaterthan1.0.
6.5.6.5.2 Forvaluesofo
]1
l
2
l
1
between1.0andzero,proportionofcolumnstripmomentsresistedby
beamsshallbeobtainedbylinearinterpolationbetween85andzeropercent.
6.5.6.5.3 In addition to moments calculated for uniform loads according to 6.5.6.2.2, 6.5.6.5.1, and
6.5.6.5.2,beamsshallbeproportionedtoresistallmomentscausedbyconcentratedorlinear
loadsapplieddirectlytobeams,includingweightofprojectingbeamstemaboveorbelowthe
slab.
6.5.6.6 Factoredmomentsinmiddlestrips
6.5.6.6.1 Thatportionofnegativeandpositivefactoredmomentsnotresistedbycolumnstripsshallbe
proportionatelyassignedtocorrespondinghalfmiddlestrips.
6.5.6.6.2 Eachmiddlestripshallbeproportionedtoresistthesumofthemomentsassignedtoitstwo
halfmiddlestrips.
6.5.6.6.3 A middle strip adjacent to and parallel with a wallsupported edge shall be proportioned to
resist twice the moment assigned to the half middle strip corresponding to the first row of
interiorsupports.
6.5.6.7 Modificationoffactoredmoments
Modificationofnegativeandpositivefactoredmomentsby10percentshallbepermittedprovidedthe
totalstaticmomentforapanel,H
o
,inthedirectionconsideredisnotlessthanthatrequiredbyEq.
(6.5.4).
6.5.6.8 Factoredshearinslabsystemswithbeams
6.5.6.8.1 Beamswitho
]1
l
2
l
1
equaltoorgreaterthan1.0shallbeproportionedtoresistshearcaused
by factored loads on tributary areas which are bounded by 45degree lines drawn from the
cornersofthepanelsandthecenterlinesoftheadjacentpanelsparalleltothelongsides(Fig.
6.5.6.1).
6.5.6.8.2 In proportioning beams with o
]1
l
2
l
1
less than 1.0 to resist shear, linear interpolation,
assumingbeamscarrynoloadato
]1
= u,shallbepermitted.
6.5.6.8.3 In addition to shears calculated according to 6.5.6.8.1 and 6.5.6.8.2, beams shall be
proportionedtoresistshearscausedbyfactoredloadsapplieddirectlyonbeams.
6.5.6.8.4 Computation of slab shear strength on the assumption that load is distributed to supporting
beams in accordance with 6.5.6.8.1 or 6.5.6.8.2 shall be permitted. Resistance to total shear
occurringonapanelshallbeprovided.
6.5.6.8.5 ShearstrengthshallsatisfytherequirementsofSec.6.4.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 671

Fig.6.5.6.1Tributaryareaforshearonaninteriorbeam.
6.5.6.9 Factoredmomentsincolumnsandwalls
6.5.6.9.1 Columnsandwallsbuiltintegrallywithaslabsystemshallresistmomentscausedbyfactored
loadsontheslabsystem.
6.5.6.9.2 Ataninteriorsupport,supportingelementsaboveandbelowtheslabshallresistthefactored
moment specified by Eq. (6.5.7) in direct proportion to their stiffnesses unless a general
analysisismade.
H
u
= u.u7|(q
u
+ u.Sq
Lu
)
2

n
2
-q
u
i

2
i
(
n
i
)
2
]
(6.S.7)
Where
u
i
,l
2
i
,andl
n
i
refertoshorterspan.
6.S.7 Equivalentframemethod
6.5.7.1 Designofslabsystemsbytheequivalentframemethodshallbebasedonassumptionsgiven
in 6.5.7.2 through 6.5.7.6, and all sections of slabs and supporting members shall be
proportionedformomentsandshearsthusobtained.
6.5.7.1.1 Where metal column capitals are used, it shall be permitted to take account of their
contributionstostiffnessandresistancetomomentandtoshear.
6.5.7.1.2 Itshallbepermittedtoneglectthechangeinlengthofcolumnsandslabsduetodirectstress,
anddeflectionsduetoshear.
6.5.7.2 Equivalentframe
6.5.7.2.1 Thestructureshallbeconsideredtobemadeupofequivalentframesoncolumnlinestaken
longitudinallyandtransverselythroughthebuilding(Fig.6.5.7.1).
Part6
StructuralDesign

672 Vol.2

Fig.6.5.7.1Definitionsofequivalentframe.
6.5.7.2.2 Each frame shall consist of a row of columns or supports and slabbeam strips, bounded
laterallybythecenterlineofpaneloneachsideofthecenterlineofcolumnsorsupports.
6.5.7.2.3 Columns or supports shall be assumed to be attached to slabbeam strips by torsional
members (see 6.5.7.5) transverse to the direction of the span for which moments are being
determinedandextendingtoboundinglateralpanelcenterlinesoneachsideofacolumn.
6.5.7.2.4 Framesadjacentandparalleltoanedgeshallbeboundedbythatedgeandthecenterlineof
adjacentpanel.
6.5.7.2.5 Analysis of each equivalent frame in its entirety shall be permitted. Alternatively, for gravity
loading, a separate analysis of each floor or roof with far ends of columns considered fixed
shallbepermitted.
6.5.7.2.6 Where slabbeams are analyzed separately, determination of moment at a given support
assuming that the slabbeam is fixed at any support two panels distant therefrom, shall be
permitted,providedtheslabcontinuesbeyondthatpoint.
6.5.7.3 Slabbeams
6.5.7.3.1 Determinationofthemomentofinertiaofslabbeamsatanycrosssectionoutsideofjointsor
columncapitalsusingthegrossareaofconcreteshallbepermitted.
6.5.7.3.2 Variationinmomentofinertiaalongaxisofslabbeamsshallbetakenintoaccount.
6.5.7.3.3 Momentofinertiaofslabbeamsfromcenterofcolumntofaceofcolumn,bracket,orcapital
shallbeassumedequaltothemomentofinertiaoftheslabbeamatfaceofcolumn,bracket,
or capital divided by the quantity (1 - c
2
l
2
)
2
, where c
2
and l
2
are measured transverse to
thedirectionofthespanforwhichmomentsarebeingdetermined.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 673

6.5.7.4 Columns
6.5.7.4.1 Determination of the moment of inertia of columns at any cross section outside of joints or
columncapitalsusingthegrossareaofconcreteshallbepermitted.
6.5.7.4.2 Variationinmomentofinertiaalongaxisofcolumnsshallbetakenintoaccount(Fig.6.5.7.2).
6.5.7.4.3 Moment of inertia of columns from top to bottom of the slabbeam at a joint shall be
assumedtobeinfinite.
6.5.7.5 Torsionalmembers
6.5.7.5.1 Torsional members (see 6.5.7.2.3) shall be assumed to have a constant cross section
throughouttheirlengthconsistingofthelargestof(a),(b),and(c):
a) A portion of slab having a width equal to that of the column, bracket, or capital in the
directionofthespanforwhichmomentsarebeingdetermined;
b) For monolithic or fully composite construction, the portion of slab specified in (a) plus
thatpartofthetransversebeamaboveandbelowtheslab;
c) Thetransversebeamasdefinedin6.5.2.4.
6.5.7.5.2 Where beams frame into columns in the direction of the span for which moments are being
determined,thetorsionalstiffnessshallbemultipliedbytheratioofthemomentofinertiaof
theslabwithsuchabeamtothemomentofinertiaoftheslabwithoutsuchabeam.

Fig.6.5.7.2Equivalent column (column plus torsionalmembers).

6.5.7.5.3 StiffnessK
t
ofthetorsionalmembersshallbecalculatedbythefollowingexpression:
K
t
=
9L
cs
C

2
(1-C
2

2
)
3
(6.S.8)
wherec
2
andl
2
relatetothetransversespanoneachsideofcolumn.
6.5.7.6 Arrangementofliveload
6.5.7.6.1 Whentheloadingpatternisknown,theequivalentframeshallbeanalyzedforthatload.
6.5.7.6.2 When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed threequarters of the
unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that all panels will be loaded
Part6
StructuralDesign

674 Vol.2
simultaneously,itshallbepermittedtoassumethatmaximumfactoredmomentsoccuratall
sectionswithfullfactoredliveloadonentireslabsystem.
6.5.7.6.3 For loading conditions other than those defined in 6.5.7.6.2, it shall be permitted to assume
thatmaximumpositivefactoredmomentnearmidspanofapaneloccurswiththreequarters
ofthefullfactoredliveloadonthepanelandonalternatepanels;anditshallbepermittedto
assumethatmaximumnegativefactoredmomentintheslabatasupportoccurswiththree
quartersofthefullfactoredliveloadonadjacentpanelsonly.
6.5.7.6.4 Factoredmomentsshallbetakennotlessthanthoseoccurringwithfullfactoredliveloadon
allpanels.
6.5.7.7 Factoredmoments
6.5.7.7.1 At interior supports, the critical section for negative factored moment (in both column and
middlestrips)shallbetakenatfaceofrectilinearsupports,butnotfartherawaythanu.17Sl
1

fromthecenterofacolumn.
6.5.7.7.2 At exterior supports with brackets or capitals, the critical section for negative factored
moment in the span perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at a distance from face of
supportingelementnotgreaterthanonehalftheprojectionofbracketorcapitalbeyondface
ofsupportingelement.
6.5.7.7.3 Circularorregularpolygonshapedsupportsshallbetreatedassquaresupportswiththesame
areaforlocationofcriticalsectionfornegativedesignmoment.
6.5.7.7.4 Where slab systems within limitations of 6.5.6.1 are analyzed by the equivalent frame
method,itshallbepermittedtoreducetheresultingcomputedmomentsinsuchproportion
thattheabsolutesumofthepositiveandaveragenegativemomentsusedindesignneednot
exceedthevalueobtainedfromEq.(6.5.4).
6.5.7.7.5 Distribution of moments at critical sections across the slabbeam strip of each frame to
column strips, beams, and middle strips as provided in 6.5.6.4, 6.5.6.5, and 6.5.6.6 shall be
permittediftherequirementof6.5.6.1.6issatisfied.
6.S.8 ALTERNATIVEDESIGNOFTWOWAYEDGESUPPORTEDSLABS
6.5.8.1 Notation
The notations provided below are applicable for Section 6.5.8 only. Also see Section 6.1.1.1 for other
notations.

C
u
, C
b
= Momentcoefficients
l
u
= Lengthofclearspaninshortdirection
l
b
= Lengthofclearspaninlongdirection
H
u
= Momentintheshortdirection
H
b
= Momentinthelongdirection
w = Uniformload
l
1
= Lengthofclearspanindirectionthatmomentarebeingdetermined
l
2
= Lengthofclearspantransversetol
1

o
I
= Ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
laterallybycentrelineofadjacentpanels(ifany)oneachsideofthebeam.See6.4.2.1
o
I1
=
o
I
inthedirectionof l
1
.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 675

6.5.8.2 ScopeandLimitations
6.5.8.2.1 The provisions of this section may be used as alternative to those of 6.5.1 through 6.5.7 for
twoway slabs supported on all four edges by walls, steel beams or monolithic concrete
beamshavingatotaldepthnotlessthan3timestheslabthickness.
6.5.8.2.2 Panelsshallberectangularwitharatiooflongertoshorterspancentretocentreofsupports
notgreaterthan2.
6.5.8.2.3 Thevalueof(o
]1

1
) shallbegreaterthanorequalto1.
6.5.8.3 AnalysisbytheCoefficientMethod
6.5.8.3.1 The negative moments and dead load and live load positive moments in the two directions
shallbecomputedfromTables6.5.8.1,6.5.8.2and6.5.8.3respectively.Shearintheslaband
loadsonthesupportingbeamsshallbecomputedfromTable6.5.8.4.
6.5.8.4 ShearonSupportingBeam
Theshearrequirementsprovidedin6.5.6.8shallbesatisfied.
6.5.8.5 Deflection
Thicknessofslabssupportedonwallsorstiffbeamsonallsidesshallsatisfytherequirementsof6.2.5.3.
Table6.5.8.1CoefficientsforNegativeMomentsinSlabs

H
u,ncg
= C
u,ncg
wl
u
2

H
b,ncg
= C
b,ncg
wl
b
2
wherew=totaluniformdeadplusliveloadperunitarea
Ratio
m =
|
a
|
h

Case1

Case2 Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7

Case8

Case9
C
u,ncg

1.00
C
b,ncg

0.045

0.045

0.076
0.050

0.050
0.075 0.071

0.071
0.033

0.061
0.061

0.033
C
u,ncg

0.95
C
b,ncg

0.050

0.041

0.072
0.055

0.045
0.079 0.075

0.067
0.038

0.056
0.065

0.029
C
u,ncg

0.90
C
b,ncg

0.055

0.037

0.070
0.060

0.040
0.080 0.079

0.062
0.043

0.052
0.068

0.025
C
u,ncg

0.85
C
b,ncg

0.060

0.031

0.065
0.066

0.034
0.082 0.083

0.057
0.049

0.046
0.072

0.021
C
u,ncg

0.80
C
b,ncg

0.065

0.027

0.061
0.071

0.029
0.083 0.086

0.051
0.055

0.041
0.075

0.017
C
u,ncg

0.75
C
b,ncg

0.069

0.022

0.056
0.076

0.024
0.085 0.088

0.044
0.061

0.036
0.078

0.014
Part6
StructuralDesign

676 Vol.2
C
u,ncg

0.70
C
b,ncg

0.074

0.017

0.050
0.081

0.019
0.086 0.091

0.038
0.068

0.029
0.081

0.011
C
u,ncg

0.65
C
b,ncg

0.077

0.014

0.043
0.085

0.015
0.087 0.093

0.031
0.074

0.024
0.083

0.008
C
u,ncg

0.60
C
b,ncg

0.081

0.010

0.035
0.089

0.011
0.088 0.095

0.024
0.080

0.018
0.085

0.006
C
u,ncg

0.55
C
b,ncg

0.084

0.007

0.028
0.092

0.008
0.089 0.096

0.019
0.085

0.014
0.086

0.005
C
u,ncg

0.50
C
b,ncg

0.086

0.006

0.022
0.094

0.006
0.090 0.097

0.014
0.089

0.010
0.088

0.003
Acrosshatchededgeindicatesthattheslabcontinuesacross,orisfixedatthesupport;
anunmarkededgeindicatesasupportatwhichtorsionalresistanceisnegligible.
Table6.5.8.2CoefficientsforDeadLoadPositiveMomentsinSlabs

H
u,pos,dI
= C
u,dI
wl
u
2

H
b,pos,dI
= C
b,dI
wl
b
2

wherew=uniformdeadloadperunitarea
Ratio
m =
|
a
|
h

Case1

Case2

Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7 Case8

Case9
C
u,dI

1.00
C
b,dI

0.036

0.036
0.018

0.018
0.018

0.027
0.027

0.027
0.027

0.018
0.033

0.027
0.027

0.033
0.020

0.023
0.023

0.020
C
u,dI

0.95
C
b,dI

0.040

0.033
0.020

0.016
0.021

0.025
0.030

0.024
0.028

0.015
0.036

0.024
0.031

0.031
0.022

0.021
0.024

0.017
C
u,dI

0.90
C
b,dI

0.045

0.029
0.022

0.014
0.025

0.024
0.033

0.022
0.029

0.013
0.039

0.021
0.035

0.028
0.025

0.019
0.026

0.015
C
u,dI

0.85
C
b,dI

0.050

0.026
0.024

0.012
0.029

0.022
0.036

0.019
0.031

0.011
0.042

0.017
0.040

0.025
0.029

0.017
0.028

0.013
C
u,dI

0.80
C
b,dI

0.056

0.023
0.026

0.011
0.034

0.020
0.039

0.016
0.032

0.009
0.045

0.015
0.045

0.022
0.032

0.015
0.029

0.010
C
u,dI

0.75
C
b,dI

0.061

0.019
0.028

0.009
0.040

0.018
0.043

0.013
0.033

0.007
0.048

0.012
0.051

0.020
0.036

0.013
0.031

0.007
C
u,dI

0.70
C
b,dI

0.068

0.016
0.030

0.007
0.046

0.016
0.046

0.011
0.035

0.005
0.051

0.009
0.058

0.017
0.040

0.011
0.033

0.006
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 677

C
u,dI

0.65
C
b,dI

0.074

0.013
0.032

0.006
0.054

0.014
0.050

0.009
0.036

0.004
0.054

0.007
0.065

0.014
0.044

0.009
0.034

0.005
C
u,dI

0.60
C
b,dI

0.081

0.010
0.034

0.004
0.062

0.011
0.053

0.007
0.037

0.003
0.056

0.006
0.073

0.012
0.048

0.007
0.036

0.004
C
u,dI

0.55
C
b,dI

0.088

0.008
0.035

0.003
0.071

0.009
0.056

0.005
0.038

0.002
0.058

0.004
0.081

0.009
0.052

0.005
0.037

0.003
C
u,dI

0.50
C
b,dI

0.095

0.006
0.037

0.002
0.080

0.007
0.059

0.004
0.039

0.001
0.061

0.003
0.089

0.007
0.056

0.004
0.038

0.002
Acrosshatchededgeindicatesthattheslabcontinuesacross,orisfixedatthesupport;
anunmarkededgeindicatesasupportatwhichtorsionalresistanceisnegligible.

Table6.5.8.3CoefficientsforLiveLoadPositiveMomentsinSlabs

H
u,pos,II
= C
u,II
wl
u
2

H
b,pos,II
= C
b,II
wl
b
2
wherew=uniformliveloadperunitarea
Ratio
m =
|
a
|
h

Case1 Case2 Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7

Case8 Case9
C
u,II

1.00
C
b,II

0.036

0.036
0.027

0.027
0.027

0.032
0.032

0.032
0.032

0.027
0.035

0.032
0.032

0.035
0.028

0.030
0.030

0.028
C
u,II

0.95
C
b,II

0.040

0.033
0.030

0.025
0.031

0.029
0.035

0.029
0.034

0.024
0.038

0.029
0.036

0.032
0.031

0.027
0.032

0.025
C
u,II

0.90
C
b,II

0.045

0.029
0.034

0.022
0.035

0.027
0.039

0.026
0.037

0.021
0.042

0.025
0.040

0.029
0.035

0.024
0.036

0.022
C
u,II

0.85
C
b,II

0.050

0.026
0.037

0.019
0.040

0.024
0.043

0.023
0.041

0.019
0.046

0.022
0.045

0.026
0.040

0.022
0.039

0.020
C
u,II

0.80
C
b,II

0.056

0.023
0.041

0.017
0.045

0.022
0.048

0.020
0.044

0.016
0.051

0.019
0.051

0.023
0.044

0.019
0.042

0.017
C
u,II

0.75
C
b,II

0.061

0.019
0.045

0.014
0.051

0.019
0.052

0.016
0.047

0.013
0.055

0.016
0.056

0.020
0.049

0.016
0.046

0.013
C
u,II

0.70
C
b,II

0.068

0.016
0.049

0.012
0.057

0.016
0.057

0.014
0.051

0.011
0.060

0.013
0.063

0.017
0.054

0.014
0.050

0.011
C
u,II

0.65
C
b,II

0.074

0.013
0.053

0.010
0.064

0.014
0.062

0.011
0.055

0.009
0.064

0.010
0.070

0.014
0.059

0.011
0.054

0.009
Part6
StructuralDesign

678 Vol.2
C
u,II

0.60
C
b,II

0.081

0.010
0.058

0.007
0.071

0.011
0.067

0.009
0.059

0.007
0.068

0.008
0.077

0.011
0.065

0.009
0.059

0.007
C
u,II

0.55
C
b,II

0.088

0.008
0.062

0.006
0.080

0.009
0.072

0.007
0.063

0.005
0.073

0.006
0.085

0.009
0.070

0.007
00.063

0.006
C
u,II

0.50
C
b,II

0.095

0.006
0.066

0.004
0.088

0.007
0.077

0.005
0.067

0.004
0.078

0.005
0.092

0.007
0.076

0.005
0.067

0.004
Acrosshatchededgeindicatesthattheslabcontinuesacross,orisfixedatthesupport;
anunmarkededgeindicatesasupportatwhichtorsionalresistanceisnegligible.
6.5.8.6 Reinforcement
6.5.8.6.1 Areaofreinforcementineachdirectionshallbedeterminedfrommomentsatcriticalsections
butshallnotbelessthanthatrequiredby8.1.11.
6.5.8.6.2 Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall not exceed two times the slab thickness,
exceptforportionsofslabareathatmaybeofcellularorribbedconstruction.Intheslabover
cellularspaces,reinforcementshallbeprovidedasrequiredby8.1.11.
6.5.8.6.3 Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall extend to the
edge of slab and have embedment, straight or hooked, at least 150 mm in spandrel beams,
columns,orwalls.
Table6.5.8.4RatioofTotalLoadwin|
a
and|
h
Directions(w
a
andw
h
)forShearinSlabandLoadon
Supports

Ratio
m =
|
a
|
h

Case1

Case2

Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7 Case8

Case9
w
u

1.00
w
b

0.50

0.50
0.50

0.50
0.17

0.83
0.50

0.50
0.83

0.17
0.71

0.29
0.29

0.71
0.33

0.67
0.67

0.33
w
u

0.95
w
b

0.55

0.45
0.55

0.45
0.20

0.80
0.55

0.45
0.86

0.14
0.75

0.25
0.33

0.67
0.38

0.62
0.71

0.29
w
u

0.90
w
b

0.60

0.40
0.60

0.40
0.23

0.77
0.60

0.40
0.88

0.12
0.79

0.21
0.38

0.62
0.43

0.57
0.75

0.25
w
u

0.85
w
b

0.66

0.34
0.66

0.34
0.28

0.72
0.66

0.34
0.90

0.10
0.83

0.17
0.43

0.57
0.49

0.51
0.79

0.21
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 679

w
u

0.80
w
b

0.71

0.29
0.71

0.29
0.33

0.67
0.71

0.29
0.92

0.08
0.86

0.14
0.49

0.51
0.55

0.45
0.83

0.17
w
u

0.75
w
b

0.76

0.24
0.76

0.24
0.39

0.61
0.76

0.24
0.94

0.06
0.88

0.12
0.56

0.44
0.61

0.39
0.86

0.14
w
u

0.70
w
b

0.81

0.19
0.81

0.19
0.45

0.55
0.81

0.19
0.95

0.05
0.91

0.09
0.62

0.38
0.68

0.32
0.89

0.11
w
u

0.65
w
b

0.85

0.15
0.85

0.15
0.53

0.47
0.85

0.15
0.96

0.04
0.93

0.07
0.69

0.31
0.74

0.26
0.92

0.08
w
u

0.60
w
b

0.89

0.11
0.89

0.11
0.61

0.39
0.89

0.11
0.97

0.03
0.95

0.05
0.76

0.24
0.80

0.20
0.94

0.06
w
u

0.55
w
b

0.92

0.08
0.92

0.08
0.69

0.31
0.92

0.08
0.98

0.02
0.96

0.04
0.81

0.19
0.85

0.15
0.95

0.05
w
u

0.50
w
b

0.94

0.06
0.94

0.06
0.76

0.24
0.94

0.06
0.99

0.01
0.97

0.03
0.86

0.14
0.89

0.11
0.97

0.03
Acrosshatchededgeindicatesthattheslabcontinuesacross,orisfixedatthesupport;
anunmarkededgeindicatesasupportatwhichtorsionalresistanceisnegligible.
6.5.8.6.4 Negative moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall be bent,
hooked,orotherwiseanchored,inspandrelbeams,columns,orwalls,andshallbedeveloped
atfaceofsupportaccordingtoprovisionsofSec8.2.
6.5.8.6.5 CornerReinforcement
a) Cornerreinforcementshallbeprovidedatexteriorcornersinbothbottomandtopofthe
slab,foradistanceineachdirectionfromthecornerequaltoonefifththelongerspanof
thecornerpanelasperprovisionsof6.5.3.6.
6.S.9 RIBBEDANDHOLLOWSLABS
6.5.9.1 General
Theprovisionsofthissectionshallapplytoslabsconstructedinoneofthewaysdescribedbelow:
a) Asaseriesofconcreteribswithtoppingcastonformswhichmayberemovedafterthe
concretehasset;
b) Asaseriesofconcreteribsbetweenprecastblockswhichremainpartofthecompleted
structure; the top of the ribs may be connected by a topping of concrete of the same
strengthasthatusedintheribs;and
c) Slabswithacontinuoustopandbottomfacebutcontainingvoidsofrectangular,ovalor
othershape.
Part6
StructuralDesign

680 Vol.2
6.5.9.2 AnalysisandDesign
Anymethodofanalysiswhichsatisfiesequilibriumandcompatibilityrequirementsmaybeusedforribbed
andhollowslabs.Approximatemomentsandshearsincontinuousonewayribbedorhollowslabsmaybe
obtainedfrom6.1.4.3.Fortwowayslabs,theunifieddesignapproachspecifiedinSec6.5FlatPlates,Flat
SlabsandEdgesupportedSlabs,shallbeused.
6.5.9.3 Shear
6.5.9.3.1 When burnt tile or concrete tile fillers of material having the same strength as the specified
strength of concrete in the ribbed and hollow slabs are used permanently, it is permitted to
include the vertical shells of fillers in contact with the ribs for shear and negativemoment
strengthcomputations,providedadequatebondbetweenthetwocanbeensured.
6.5.9.3.2 Adequate shear strength of slabs shall be provided in accordance with the requirements
of6.4.10.Foronewayribbedandhollowslabconstruction,contributionofconcretetoshear
strengthI
c

ispermittedtobe10percentmorethanthatspecifiedin6.4.2.Itispermittedto
increaseshearstrengthusingshearreinforcementorbywideningtheendsofribs.
6.5.9.4 Deflection
Therecommendationsfordeflectionwithrespecttosolidslabsmaybeappliedtoribbedandhollowslab.
Total depth of oneway ribbed and hollow slabs shall not be less than those required by Table6.2.5.1
in6.2.5.2.Forotherslabstheprovisionsof6.2.5.3shallapply.
6.5.9.5 SizeandPositionofRibs
Insituribsshallbenotlessthan100mmwide.Theyshallbespacedatcentresnotgreaterthan750mm
apartandtheirdepth,excludinganytopping,shallbenotmorethanthreeandhalftimestheirwidth.Ribs
shallbeformedalongeachedgeparalleltothespanofonewayslabs.
6.5.9.6 Reinforcement
The recommendations given in 8.1.6 regarding maximum distance between bars apply to areas of solid
concreteinthisformofconstruction.Thecurtailment,anchorageandcovertoreinforcementshallbeas
specifiedbelow:
a) Atleast50percentofthetotalmainreinforcementshallbecarriedthroughthebottom
ontothebearingandanchoredinaccordancewith8.2.8.
b) Whereaslab,whichiscontinuousoversupports,hasbeendesignedassimplysupported,
reinforcementshallbeprovidedoverthesupporttocontrolcracking.Thisreinforcement
shall have a crosssectional area of not less than one quarter of that required in the
middle of the adjoining spans and shall extend at least onetenth of the clear span into
adjoiningspans.
c) Inslabswithpermanentblocks,thesidecovertothereinforcementshallnotbelessthan
10mm.Inallothercases,covershallbeprovidedaccordingto8.1.7.
6.6 WALLS
6.6.1 Scope
6.6.1.1 Provisions of Sec. 6.6 shall apply for design of walls subjected to axial load, with or without
flexure.
6.6.1.2 CantileverretainingwallsaredesignedaccordingtoflexuraldesignprovisionsofSec.6.3with
minimumhorizontalreinforcementaccordingto6.6.3.3.
6.6.2 General
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 681

6.6.2.1 Walls shall be designed for eccentric loads and any lateral or other loads to which they are
subjected.
6.6.2.2 Wallssubjecttoaxialloadsshallbedesignedinaccordancewith6.6.2,6.6.3,andeither6.6.4,
6.6.5,or6.6.8.
6.6.2.3 Designforshearshallbeinaccordancewith6.4.8.
6.6.2.4 Unless otherwise demonstrated by an analysis, the horizontal length of wall considered as
effective for each concentrated load shall not exceed the smaller of the centertocenter
distancebetweenloads,andthebearingwidthplusfourtimesthewallthickness.
6.6.2.5 Compressionmembersbuiltintegrallywithwallsshallconformto6.3.8.2.
6.6.2.6 Walls shall be anchored to intersecting elements, such as floors and roofs; or to columns
pilasters,buttresses,ofintersectingwalls;andtofootings.
6.6.2.7 Quantity of reinforcement and limits of thickness required by 6.6.3 and 6.6.5 shall be
permittedtobewaivedwherestructuralanalysisshowsadequatestrengthandstability.
6.6.2.8 Transferofforcetofootingatbaseofwallshallbeinaccordancewith6.8.8.
6.6.S Minimumreinforcement
6.6.3.1 Minimumverticalandhorizontalreinforcementshallbeinaccordancewith6.6.3.2and6.6.3.3
unlessagreateramountisrequiredforshearby6.4.8.8and6.4.8.9.
6.6.3.2 Minimumratioofverticalreinforcementareatogrossconcretearea,p
I
,shallbe:
a) 0.0012fordeformedbarsnotlargerthan16mmwith

notlessthan420MPa;or
b) 0.0015forotherdeformedbars;or
c) 0.0012forweldedwirereinforcementnotlargerthanMW200orMD200.
6.6.3.3 Minimumratioofhorizontalreinforcementareatogrossconcretearea,p
t
,shallbe:
a) 0.0020fordeformedbarsnotlargerthan16mmwith

notlessthan420MPa;or
b) 0.0025forotherdeformedbars;or
c) 0.0020forweldedwirereinforcementnotlargerthanMW200orMD200.
6.6.3.4 Walls more than 250 mm thick, except basement walls, shall have reinforcement for each
directionplacedintwolayersparallelwithfacesofwallinaccordancewiththefollowing:
a) One layer consisting of not less than onehalf and not more than twothirds of total
reinforcementrequiredforeachdirectionshallbeplacednotlessthan50mmnormore
thanonethirdthethicknessofwallfromtheexteriorsurface;
b) The other layer, consisting of the balance of required reinforcement in that direction,
shallbeplacednotlessthan20mmnormorethanonethirdthethicknessofwallfrom
theinteriorsurface.
6.6.3.5 Vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall not be spaced farther apart than three times the
wallthickness,norfartherapartthan450mm.
6.6.3.6 Vertical reinforcement need not be enclosed by lateral ties if vertical reinforcement area is
not greater than 0.01 times gross concrete area, or where vertical reinforcement is not
requiredascompressionreinforcement.
6.6.3.7 In addition to the minimum reinforcement required by 6.6.3.1, not less than two 16 mm
barsinwallshavingtwolayersofreinforcementinbothdirectionsandone16mmbarin
Part6
StructuralDesign

682 Vol.2
walls having a single layer of reinforcement in both directions shall be provided around
window, door, and similar sized openings. Such bars shall be anchored to develop

in
tensionatthecornersoftheopenings.
6.6.4 Designofwallsascompressionmembers
Exceptasprovidedin6.6.5,wallssubjecttoaxialloadorcombinedflexureandaxialloadshallbedesigned
as compression members in accordance with provisions of 6.3.2, 6.3.3, 6.3.10, 6.3.11, 6.3.14, 6.6.2, and
6.6.3.
6.6.S Empiricalmethodofdesign
6.6.5.1 Walls of solid rectangular cross section shall be permitted to be designed by the empirical
provisionsof6.6.5iftheresultantofallfactoredloadsislocatedwithinthemiddlethirdofthe
overallthicknessofthewallandalllimitsof6.6.2,6.6.3,and6.6.5aresatisfied.
6.6.5.2 DesignaxialstrengthP
n
ofawallsatisfyinglimitationsof6.6.5.1shallbecomputedbyEq.
(6.6.1)unlessdesignedinaccordancewith6.6.4.
P
n
= u.SS '
c
A
g
_1 - [
KI
c
32h

2
_ (6.6.1)
where shallcorrespondtocompressioncontrolledsectionsinaccordancewith6.2.3.2.2andeffective
lengthfactork shallbe:
Forwallsbracedtopandbottomagainstlateraltranslationand
a) Restrainedagainstrotationatoneorbothends(top,bottom,or 0.8
b) Unrestrainedagainstrotationatbothends 1.0
Forwallsnotbracedagainstlateraltranslation 2.0
6.6.5.3 Minimumthicknessofwallsdesignedbyempiricaldesignmethod
6.6.5.3.1 Thickness of bearing walls shall not be less than 1/25 the supported height or length,
whicheverisshorter,norlessthan100mm.
6.6.5.3.2 Thicknessofexteriorbasementwallsandfoundationwallsshallnotbelessthan190mm.
6.6.6 Nonbearingwalls
6.6.6.1 Thickness of nonbearing walls shall not be less than 100 mm, nor less than 1/30 the least
distancebetweenmembersthatprovidelateralsupport.
6.6.7 Wallsasgradebeams
6.6.7.1 Walls designed as grade beams shall have top and bottom reinforcement as required for
moment in accordance with provisions of 6.3.2 through 6.3.7. Design for shear shall be in
accordancewithprovisionsofSec.6.4.
6.6.7.2 Portionsofgradebeamwallsexposedabovegradeshallalsomeetrequirementsof6.6.3.
6.6.8 Alternativedesignofslenderwalls
6.6.8.1 Whenflexuraltensioncontrolstheoutofplanedesignofawall,therequirementsof6.6.8are
consideredtosatisfy6.3.10.
6.6.8.2 Wallsdesignedbytheprovisionsof6.6.8shallsatisfy6.6.8.2.1through6.6.8.2.6.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 683

6.6.8.2.1 Thewallpanelshallbedesignedasasimplysupported,axiallyloadedmembersubjectedtoan
outofplane uniform lateral load, with maximum moments and deflections occurring at
midspan.
6.6.8.2.2 Thecrosssectionshallbeconstantovertheheightofthepanel.
6.6.8.2.3 Thewallshallbetensioncontrolled.
6.6.8.2.4 ReinforcementshallprovideadesignStrength
H
n
H
c
(6.6.2)
whereH
c
shallbeobtainedusingthemodulusofrupture,

,givenbyEq.(6.2.3).
6.6.8.2.5 Concentrated gravity loads applied to the wall above the design flexural section shall be
assumedtobedistributedoverawidth:
a) Equal to the bearing width, plus a width on each side that increases at a slope of 2
verticalto1horizontaldowntothedesignsection;but
b) Notgreaterthanthespacingoftheconcentratedloads;and
c) Notextendingbeyondtheedgesofthewallpanel.
6.6.8.2.6 VerticalstressP
u
A
g
atthemidheightsectionshallnotexceedu.u6
c
i
.
6.6.8.3 DesignmomentstrengthH
n
forcombinedflexureandaxialloadsatmidheightshallbe
H
n
H
u
(6.6.S)
where
H
u
= H
uu
+ P
u

u
(6.6.4)
H
uu
isthemaximumfactoredmomentatmidheightofwallduetolateralandeccentricverticalloads,not
includingP effects,andA
u
is

u
=
5M
u
I
c
2
(0.75)48L
c
I
cr
(6.6.S)
H
u
shallbeobtainedbyiterationofdeflections,orbyEq.(6.6.6).
H
u
=
M
uc
1-
SP
u
l
c
2
(0.S)48E
c
I
cr
(6.6.6)
where
I
c
=
L
s
L
c
_A
s
+
P
u
]
j
h
2d
] (J -c)
2
+
I
w
c
3
3
(6.6.7)
andthevalueofE
s
E
c
shallnotbetakenlessthan6.
6.6.8.4 Maximumoutofplanedeflection,A
s
,duetoserviceloads,includingP effects,shallnot
exceedl
c
1Su.
IfH
u
,maximummomentatmidheightofwallduetoservicelateralandeccentricverticalloads,including
P effects,exceeds(2S)H
c
,A
s
shallbecalculatedbyEq.(6.6.8)

s
= (2S)
c
+
(M
c
-(23)M
cr
)
(M
n
-(23)M
cr
)
(
n
-(2S)
c
) (6.6.8)
IfH
u
doesnotexceed(2S)H
c
,A
s
shallbecalculatedbyEq.(6.6.9)

s
= [
M
c
M
cr

c
(6.6.9)
where

c
=
5M
cr
I
c
2
48L
c
I
g
(6.6.1u)

n
=
5M
n
I
c
2
48L
c
I
cr
(6.6.11)
I
c
shallbecalculatedbyEq.(6.6.7),andH
u
shallbeobtainedbyiterationofdeflections.
Part6
StructuralDesign

684 Vol.2
6.7 Stairs:
Stairs are the structural elements designed to connect different floors. The stairs shall be designed to
meet the minimum load requirements. The flight arrangements, configuration and support conditions
(Figure6.7.1.1)shallgovernthedesignproceduretofollow.

Figure6.7.1.1:Differentformsofstairsandlandingarrangements
6.7.1 Stairssupportedatlandinglevel
6.7.1.1 Effectivespan
Theeffectivespanofstairswithoutstringerbeamsshallbetakenasthefollowinghorizontaldistances:
a) Centretocentredistanceofbeams,wheresupportedattopandbottomrisersbybeams
spanningparallelwiththerisers,
b) Where supported at the edge of a landing slab, which spans parallel with the risers,
(Figure 6.7.1.2a) a distance equal to the going of the stairs plus at each end either half
the width of the landing or 1.0m whichever is smaller. The going shall be measured
horizontally.
c) Where the landing spans in the same direction of the stairs (Figure 6.7.1.2b), the span
shallbethedistancecentretocentreofthesupportingbeamsorwalls.
d) Wherethelandingslabs,runningatrightangletothedirectionoftheflight,supportedby
walls or beams on three sides (Figure 6.7.1.2c), the effective span shall be going of the
stair measured horizontally. Both positive and negative moments along the direction of
theflightshallbecalculatedaswl
2
8 ,wherewistheintensityofthetotaldeadandlive
loadperunitareaonahorizontalplane.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 685

Figure6.7.1.2:EffectiveSpanforStairsSupportedatEachEndbyLandings

6.7.1.2 Loading
Staircases shall be designed to support the design ultimate load according to the load combinations
specifiedinChapter2,loads.
6.7.1.3 Distributionofloading
6.7.1.3.1 Whereflightsorlandingareembeddedatleast110mmintowallsandaredesignedtospan
inthedirectionof theflight,a150mmstripmaybedeductedfromtheloadedareaandthe
effective breadth of the section may be increased by 75 mm for the purpose of design
(Figure6.7.1.3)
6.7.1.3.2 In the case of stairs with open wells, where spans cross at right angles, the load on areas
commontoanytwosuchspansmaybetakenasonehalfineachdirectionasshowninFigure
6.7.1.4.
Part6
StructuralDesign

686 Vol.2

Figure6.7.1.3:LoadingonstairsBuiltinawall

Figure6.7.1.4:LoadingofStairswithopenwells
6.7.1.4 Depthofsection
The depth of the section shall be taken as the minimum thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the
staircase.
6.7.1.5 Design
6.7.1.5.1 Strength,DeflectionandCrackControl
The recommendations given in Sec 6.1 & 6.2 for beams and oneway slabs shall apply, except for the
span/depthratioofstaircaseswithoutstringerbeamwheretheprovisionof6.7.1.5.2belowshallapply.
6.7.1.5.2 Permissiblespan/effectivedepthratioforstaircasewithoutstringerbeams.Providedthestair
flightoccupiesatleast60%ofthespan,theratiocalculatedinaccordancewith6.2.5.2shallbe
increasedby15%.
6.7.2 Freestandingstair(landingunsupported)
6.7.2.1 EffectiveSpan
TheeffectivespanforflightsandlandingsoffreestandingstairsaregiveninFigure6.7.2.1.Intakingthese
distances, the spans shall be measured as the centre to centre distance between the stinger beams. In
stairswithoutstingerbeams,spanshallbemeasuredinbetweentheedges.

Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 687

Figure6.7.2.1:FreeStandingStairSlabGeometry,(a)Elevation,(b)Plan
6.7.2.2 Loading
Staircases shall be designed to support the design ultimate load according to the load combinations
specifiedinChapter2,loads.
6.7.2.3 DistributionofLoading
Thestairshallbedesignedforuniformlydistributedloading.
6.7.2.4 DepthofSection
The depth of the section shall be taken as the minimum thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the
staircase.
6.7.S DESIGN
6.7.3.1.1 Empirical expressions for deflections, and forces and moments at critical locations of free
standing stairs are given in terms of the various dimensions of the stairway in Table 6.7.3.1.
These expressions, which are explicit and of empirical nature, are valid within the applicable
range of the geometric parameters (see Figure 6.7.2.1) and concrete strength. In these
equations, the unit of force is Kilo Newton (kN) and the unit of length is millimeter (mm).
Thicknessoftheflightandlandingslabsareassumedtobeequal.
6.7.3.1.2 The equations in Table 6.7.3.1 give working values of moments and forces corresponding to
0.48x10
2
MPaliveloadandappropriatedeadloadof slabandstepsbasedonunitweightof
2.356x10
5
N/mm
3
. Forces and moments for other values of live load shall be calculated by
simpleproportioning.
6.7.3.1.3 To convert from working to ultimate design values, the working values of moments and
forces in Table 6.7.1 shall be multiplied by a conversion factor equal to the ratio of factored
ultimateloadandunfactoredserviceload.
6.7.3.1.4 Apart from maintaining the standard code provisions in detailing the reinforcement as
stipulated elsewhere in this code, additional detailing as described below (6.7.3.1.5 through
6.7.3.1.9) shall be done to take care of the important features which are special to the free
standingstairway.
6.7.3.1.5 To account for the nonuniform distribution of the total bending moment at support across
the width of the section, threefourths of the total negative steel shall be distributed across
the outer half of the width of support section and the rest of the negative steel shall be
distributedwithintheinnerhalfofthewidthofsupportsection.
Part6
StructuralDesign

688 Vol.2
6.7.3.1.6 Similarproportioningofreinforcementlayoutasto6.7.3.1.5,butinreverseordershallalsobe
doneatflightlandingjunction(kink).
6.7.3.1.7 Atmidspanofflights,thepositivesteelshallbedistributeduniformlyacrossthesection.
6.7.3.1.8 Of the total steel required to resist the negative bending at midlanding section, 50 percent
shallbeplacedwithintheinneronethirdofthewidthofsection.Therestshallbedistributed
acrossoftheoutertwothirdsofthewidth.
6.7.3.1.9 The suggested bar curtailment scheme for the free standing stairway is shown in Figure
6.7.3.1.HalfofthenegativesteelatsupportmaybeterminatedatadistanceofI4fromthe
support. Another 25 percent may be bent downward at a distance of I4 to provide part of
the flight midspan positive steel. The rest 25 percent is recommended to continue straight
towardstheflightlandingjunction.This25percentmaybemergedwiththenegativesteelat
kink.Fiftypercentoftheflightmidspanpositivesteelshouldspanfromkinkandterminateat
apointISfromthesupportunlesstheyarebentupfornegativesteel.Therestshouldstart
fromapointatadistanceofISfromkinkandwouldterminateatI4fromsupport.Ofthe
totalnegativesteelatmidlandingsection,halfofitwillterminateatadistanceC2fromfree
edgeandtherestwillcoverthewholelengthoflanding.Halfofthenegativesteelatkinkwill
projectintolandinguptothefreeedgeandtherestmaybeterminatedatadistanceofB2.

Figure6.7.3.1:RecommendedBarCurtailmentDetailsforFreeStandingStairs
Part6
StructuralDesign 689

Table6.7.3.1EXPRESSIONSFORDEFLECTION,FORCES&MOMENTSINFREESTANDINGSTAIRS

A=_____mm.
150<A<1000
B=______mm
900<B<1875
C=_______mm.
915<C<1900
I=_______mm.
2030<I<3550
E=_______mm.
2440<E<4320
I=_______mm.
100<I<280
f
c
=________MPa.
14< f
c
<40

Value
Vertical
deflectionat
landing
corner,mm
Consta
nt
1+0.00545(A
125)
0.94

1+0.00114(B
914)
1.1

1+0.00165(C
914)
0.93

17.87x10
6
(L
2030)
119.68x10
6
(H
2440)
10.161(T
100)
0.334

11.074x10
6
( f
c
14)
.93

2.03
Support
negative
moment,kN
m
Consta
nt
1.555+0.000787(
A50)
1.060.00022(B
860)
1.2+0.00276(C
864)
1+0.000748(L
2030)
1+5.9x10
6
(H
2440)
0.39+0.00173(T
90)
1.0
4.712
Flight
midspan
positive
moment,
kNm
Consta
nt
1.131.48x10
6
(A
150)
1.52

170.11x10
6
(B
915)
1.365

1.0 1+0.128x10
6
(L
2030)
2.66

1+0.899x10
9
(H
2440)
2.77

1.00165(T
100)
1.17

1
1.526
Negative
momentat
kink,kNm
Consta
nt
1.23+0.000512(A
125)
1.01+0.00323(B
915)
.85+0.000709(C
915)
1.0 1.0 0.95+0.00447(T
100)
1.03

1
3.447
Negative
momentat
midsectionof
landing,kNm
Consta
nt
1+0.000303(A
150)
1+0.00118(B915) 1+0.00106(C
915)
1+0.000409(L
2030)
1+26.37x10
6
(H
2040)
1+0.00185(T100) 1
6.14
Axialforcein
flights,kN
Consta
nt
1+0.000236(A
125)
1+0.000787(B
915)
1+0.000827(C
915)
1+0.000354(L
2030)
10.000157(H
2440)
1+0.00276(T100) 1
34.69
Part6
StructuralDesign

690 Vol.2
Torsionin
flights,kNm.
Consta
nt
1+0.00177(A125) 1+0.00063(B915) 1+0.00268(C
915)
18.0x10
6
(L
2030)
.75

1.0 1+0.00358(T100) 1
2.312
Inplane
momentin
flights,kNm
Consta
nt
1.1+0.000866(A
150)
1+0.000984(B
915)
1+0.00157(C
915)
1+0.00059(L
2030)
10.000197(H
2440)
1+0.0026(T100) 1
14.35
Lateralshear
inmidsection
oflanding,kN
Consta
nt
10.000276(A
150)
1+0.00138(B915) 1+0.000709(C
915)
1+0.000669(L
2030)
10.00024(H
2440)
1+0.000746(T
100)
1.3

1
30.17
Part6
StructuralDesign 691
6.7.4 Sawtooth(slabless)stair
6.7.4.1 Loading
The stair shall be designed to support the design ultimate load according to the load combinations specified in
Chapter2,Loads.
6.7.4.2 Distributionofloading
Whereflightsorlandingareembeddedatleast110mmintothewallsandaredesignedtospaninthedirectionof
theflight,a150mmstripmaybedeductedfromtheloadedareaandtheeffectivebreadthofthesectionmaybe
increasedby75mmforthepurposeofdesign(Figure6.7.1.3).
6.7.4.3 Effectivespan
Sawtooth stairs shall be supported with stringer beams at landing levels (Figure 6.7.4.1). The effective span for
thestairshallbethegoingofthestairmeasuredhorizontally(Figure6.7.4.1)fromthefaceofthestringerbeams.

Figure6.7.4.1:Elementsofsawtoothstairandtypicalreinforcementarrangements

6.7.4.4 Design
Themidspanmomentsforsawtoothstairsaregivenby:
H
s
=
nI
2
(k
11
+k
0
k
12
)
]
2
(k
13
+k
0
k
14
)

(6.7.1)
Part6
StructuralDesign
692 Vol.2
Where,k
0
=stiffnessoftread/stiffnessofriserandjisthenumberoftreads(Figure6.7.4.1).
If ] is ouu: k
11
=
1
16
]
2
+
1
48
](] -1)(] -2), k
12
=
1
16
(] -1)
2
+
1
48
](] - 1)(] - 2)(] - S),
k
13
=
1
2
], k
14
=
1
2
(] -1).
If ] is even: k
11
=
1
48
](] -1)(] -2), k
12
=
1
48
(] -1)(] -2)(] -S), k
13
=
1
2
(] - 1),
k
14
=
1
2
(] -2)

ThechartonFigure6.7.4.2givesthesupportmomentcoefficientsforvariousratiosofstiffnessoftread/stiffness
ofriserandnumbersoftreads.Havingfoundthesupportmoment,themaximummidspanbendingmomentshall
bedeterminedbyusingtheappropriateexpressionontheFigure6.7.4.2andsubtractingthesupportmoment.

Figure6.7.4.2:Supportmomentcoefficientsforsawtoothstair
6.7.4.5 Detailing
Typical bendingmoment and shearingforce diagrams for a stair are shown on Figure 6.7.4.1 together with
suggestedarrangementsofreinforcement.Thereentrantcornersofthestairprofileshallbedesignedforstress
concentrations.ThishastobefacilitatedbyprovidingtwiceofthereinforcementscalculatedfromEqn.6.7.1and
Figure 6.7.4.2. Fillets or haunchescan also be incorporated in lieu at these junctions. The method of reinforcing
the stair shown in diagram (a) of Figure 6.7.4.1 is very suitable but is generally only practicable if haunches are
provided.Otherwisethearrangementshownindiagram(b)shouldbeadopted.
6.7.S Helicoidalstair
6.7.5.1 Loading
The stair shall be designed to support the design ultimate load according to the load combinations specified in
Chapter2,Loads.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 693

6.7.5.2 Geometry
ThepertinentgeometryoftheHelicoidalstairisgivenatFigure6.7.5.1where:
I
1
,I
2
:secondmomentofareaofstairsectionabouthorizontalaxisandaxisnormaltoslope,respectively
n : totalloadingperunitlengthprojectedalongcentrelineofload
R
1
:
radiusofcentrelineofloading=(2S)(R
o
3
-R

3
)(R
o
2
-R

2
)
R
2

: radius of centreline of steps = (12)(R

+R
o
), where R

and R
o
are the internal and external radii of
thestair,respectively
0

: anglesubtendedinplanbetweenpointconsideredandmidpointofstair
[

: totalanglesubtendedbyhelixinplan
: slopeoftangenttohelixcentrelinemeasuredfromhorizontal

Figure6.7.5.1:Elementsofhelicoidalstair(a)Plan;(b)Elevation
6.7.5.3 Effectivespan
Helicoidal stairs shall be supported with stringer beams at landing levels (Figure 6.7.1.1). The effective span for
thestairshallbethetotalangle, [

subtendedbyhelixinplanmeasuredhorizontally(Figure6.7.5.1)fromtheface
ofthestringerbeams.
6.7.5.4 Depthofsection
The depth of the section shall be taken as the minimum thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the stair unless
otherwise the large geometric dimensions warrant calculating the deflections through a suitable numerical
analysis.
6.7.5.5 Design
The design forces and moments for helicoidal stairs are given in Figure 6.7.5.2. Typical shear force, thrust,
momentandtorsiondiagramsareprovidedinFigure6.7.5.2.Themoments,thrust,torsionandshearforcesshall
beobtainedfromthefollowingequations:
Lateralmoment:
H
n
= H
o
sin 0 sin -ER
2
0ton cos0sin -ER
2
sin0 cos +nR
1
sin (R
1
sin0 -R
2
0) (6.7.2)
Torsionalmoment
I = (H
o
sin 0 -ER
2
0cos0tan +nR
1
2
sin0 - nR
1
R
2
0) cos + ER
2
sin 0 sin (6.7.S)
Verticalmoment:
H

= H
o
cos0 +ER
2
0tan sin 0 -nR
1
2
(1 - cos0) (6.7.4)
Thrust:
N = -Esin0 cos +nR
1
0 sin (6.7.S)
Lateralshearingforceacrossstair:
I
n
= nR
1
0 cos -Esin0sin (6.7.6)
Part6
StructuralDesign
694 Vol.2
Radialhorizontalshearingforce:
I
h
= Ecos0 (6.7.7)
Where,
Reuunuant moment acting tangentially at miuspan: H
o
= k
1
nR
2
2
(6.7.8)
Boiizontal ieuunuant foice at miuspan: E = k
2
nR
2
(6.7.9)
veitical moment at suppoits: H
s
= k
3
nR
2
2
(6.7.1u)
Valuesofcoefficientsk
1
, k
2,
k
3

fordifferent
b
b
, ,
R
1
R
2
, and[,shallbeobtainedfromFigures6.7.5.3ad.

Figure6.7.5.2:Typicalforce,momentandtorsiondiagramsforhelicoidalstair.

Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 695

Figure6.7.5.3a:Designchartsforhelicoidalstairslabs(R
1
/R
2
=1.05;b/h=5)

Figure6.7.5.3b:Designchartsforhelicoidalstairslabs(R
1
/R
2
=1.05;b/h=13)
90 180 270 360
-1.6
-1.2
-0.8
-0.4
0.0
0.4
0.8
1.2
1.6
2.0
2.4
=
=
=
Values of
R
1
/R
2
= 1.05
b/h = 5
Curves for k
3
Curves for k
1
Curves for k
2
30
0
20
0
20
0
30
0
25
0
20
0
V
a
l
u
e
s

o
f

k
90 180 270 360
-1.6
-1.2
-0.8
-0.4
0.0
0.4
0.8
1.2
1.6
2.0
2.4
R
1
/R
2
= 1.05
b/h = 13

=
=
=
Curves for k
3
Curves for k
1
Curves for k
2
20
0
30
0
20
0
30
0
25
0
20
0
V
a
l
u
e
s

o
f

k
Values of
Part6
StructuralDesign
696 Vol.2

Figure6.7.5.3c:Designchartsforhelicoidalstairslabs(R
1
/R
2
=1.1;b/h=5)

Figure6.7.5.3d:Designchartsforhelicoidalstairslabs(R
1
/R
2
=1.1;b/h=13)

90 180 270 360
-1.6
-1.2
-0.8
-0.4
0.0
0.4
0.8
1.2
1.6
2.0
2.4
=
=
=

R
1
/R
2
= 1.1
b/h = 5
Curves for k
3
Curves for k
1
Curves for k
2
20
0 30
0
20
0
30
0
25
0
20
0
V
a
l
u
e
s

o
f

k
Values of
90 180 270 360
-1.6
-1.2
-0.8
-0.4
0.0
0.4
0.8
1.2
1.6
2.0
2.4
=
=
=

R
1
/R
2
= 1.1
b/h = 13
Curves for k
3
Curves for k
1
Curves for k
2
30
0
20
0
30
0
20
0
25
0
30
0
20
0
V
a
l
u
e
s

o
f

k
Values of
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 697

6.8 FOOTINGS
6.8.1 Scope
6.8.1.1 Provisions of Sec. 6.8 shall apply for design of isolated footings and, where applicable, to combined
footingsandmats.
6.8.1.2 Additionalrequirementsfordesignofcombinedfootingsandmatsaregivenin6.8.10.
6.8.2 Loadsandreactions
6.8.2.1 Footingsshallbeproportionedtoresistthefactoredloadsandinducedreactions,inaccordancewith
theappropriatedesignrequirementsofthisCodeandasprovidedinSec.6.8.
6.8.2.2 Baseareaoffootingornumberandarrangementofpilesshallbedeterminedfromunfactoredforces
andmomentstransmittedbyfootingtosoilorpilesandpermissiblesoilpressureorpermissiblepile
capacitydeterminedthroughprinciplesofsoilmechanics.
6.8.2.3 For footings on piles, computations for moments and shears shall be permitted to be based on the
assumptionthatthereactionfromanypileisconcentratedatpilecenter.
6.8.S Equivalentsquareshapesforcircularorregularpolygonshapedcolumnsorpedestalssupported
byfootings
For location of critical sections for moment, shear, and development of reinforcement in footings, it shall be
permittedtotreatcircularorregularpolygonshapedconcretecolumnsorpedestalsassquarememberswiththe
samearea.
6.8.4 Momentinfootings
6.8.4.1 Externalmomentonanysectionofafootingshallbedeterminedbypassingaverticalplanethrough
thefooting,andcomputingthemomentoftheforcesactingoverentireareaoffootingononesideof
thatverticalplane.
6.8.4.2 Maximumfactoredmoment,H
u
,foranisolatedfootingshallbecomputedasprescribedin6.8.4.1at
criticalsectionslocatedasfollows:
a) Atfaceofcolumn,pedestal,orwall,forfootingssupportingaconcretecolumn,pedestal,orwall;
b) Halfwaybetweenmiddleandedgeofwall,forfootingssupportingamasonrywall;
c) Halfwaybetweenfaceofcolumnandedgeofsteelbaseplate,forfootingssupportingacolumn
withsteelbaseplate.
6.8.4.3 Inonewayfootingsandtwowaysquarefootings,reinforcementshallbedistributeduniformlyacross
entirewidthoffooting.
6.8.4.4 Intwowayrectangularfootings,reinforcementshallbedistributedinaccordancewith6.8.4.4.1and
6.8.4.4.2.
6.8.4.4.1 Reinforcementinlongdirectionshallbedistributeduniformlyacrossentirewidthoffooting.
6.8.4.4.2 For reinforcement in short direction, a portion of the total reinforcement, y
s
A
s
, shall be distributed
uniformly over a band width (centered on centerline of column or pedestal) equal to the length of
short side of footing. Remainder of reinforcement required in short direction(1 y
s
)A
s
, shall be
distributeduniformlyoutsidecenterbandwidthoffooting.
y
s
=
2
([+1)

(6.8.1)
Part6
StructuralDesign
698 Vol.2
where isratiooflongtoshortsidesoffooting.
6.8.S Shearinfootings
6.8.5.1 Shearstrengthoffootingssupportedonsoilorrockshallbeinaccordancewith6.4.10.
6.8.5.2 Location of critical section for shear in accordance with Sec. 6.4 shall be measured from face of
column,pedestal,orwall,forfootingssupportingacolumn,pedestal,orwall.Forfootingssupporting
a column or pedestal with steel base plates, the critical section shall be measured from location
definedin6.8.4.2(c).
6.8.5.3 Wherethedistancebetweentheaxisofanypiletotheaxisofthecolumnismorethantwotimesthe
distancebetweenthetopofthepilecapandthetopofthepile,thepilecapshallsatisfy6.4.10and
6.8.5.4. Other pile caps shall satisfy either Appendix A, or both 6.4.10 and 6.8.5.4. If Appendix A is
used, the effective concrete compression strength of the struts,
cc
, shall be determined using
A.3.2.2(b).
6.8.5.4 Computation of shear on any section through a footing supported on piles (Fig. 6.8.5.1) shall be in
accordancewith6.8.5.4.1,6.8.5.4.2,and6.8.5.4.3.
6.8.5.4.1 Entire reaction from any pile with its center located J
pIc
2 or more outside the section shall be
consideredasproducingshearonthatsection.
6.8.5.4.2 ReactionfromanypilewithitscenterlocatedJ
pIc
2ormoreinsidethesectionshallbeconsidered
asproducingnoshearonthatsection.
6.8.5.4.3 For intermediate positions of pile center, the portion of the pile reaction to be considered as
producing shear on the section shall be based on straightline interpolation between full value at
J
pIc
2outsidethesectionandzerovalueatJ
pIc
2insidethesection.

Fig.6.8.5.1Modifiedcriticalperimeterforshearwithoverlappingcriticalperimeters.
6.8.6 Developmentofreinforcementinfootings
6.8.6.1 DevelopmentofreinforcementinfootingsshallbeinaccordancewithSec.8.2.
6.8.6.2 Calculatedtensionorcompressioninreinforcementateachsectionshallbedevelopedoneachside
of that section by embedment length, hook (tension only) or mechanical device, or a combination
thereof.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 699

6.8.6.3 Criticalsectionsfordevelopmentofreinforcementshallbeassumedatthesamelocationsasdefined
in6.8.4.2formaximumfactoredmoment,andatallotherverticalplaneswherechangesofsectionor
reinforcementoccur.Seealso8.2.7.6.
6.8.7 Minimumfootingdepth
Depthoffootingabovebottomreinforcementshallnotbelessthan150mmforfootingsonsoil,norlessthan300
mmforfootingsonpiles.
6.8.8 Forcetransferatbaseofcolumn,wall,orreinforcedpedestal
6.8.8.1 Forcesandmomentsatbaseofcolumn,wall,orpedestalshallbetransferredtosupportingpedestal
orfootingbybearingonconcreteandbyreinforcement,dowels,andmechanicalconnectors.
6.8.8.1.1 Bearing stress on concrete at contact surface between supported and supporting member shall not
exceedconcretebearingstrengthforeithersurfaceasgivenby6.3.14.
6.8.8.1.2 Reinforcement,dowels,ormechanicalconnectorsbetweensupportedandsupportingmembersshall
beadequatetotransfer:
a) Allcompressiveforcethatexceedsconcretebearingstrengthofeithermember;
b) Anycomputedtensileforceacrossinterface.
Inaddition,reinforcement,dowels,ormechanicalconnectorsshallsatisfy6.8.8.2or6.8.8.3.
6.8.8.1.3 Ifcalculatedmomentsaretransferredtosupportingpedestalorfooting,thenreinforcement,dowels,
ormechanicalconnectorsshallbeadequatetosatisfy8.2.15.
6.8.8.1.4 Lateralforcesshallbetransferredtosupportingpedestalorfootinginaccordancewithshearfriction
provisionsof6.4.5,orbyotherappropriatemeans.
6.8.8.2 In castinplace construction, reinforcement required to satisfy 6.8.8.1 shall be provided either by
extendinglongitudinalbarsintosupportingpedestalorfooting,orbydowels.
6.8.8.2.1 Forcastinplacecolumnsandpedestals,areaofreinforcementacrossinterfaceshallbenotlessthan
u.uuSA
g
,whereA
g
isthegrossareaofthesupportedmember.
6.8.8.2.2 Forcastinplacewalls,areaofreinforcementacrossinterfaceshallbenotlessthanminimumvertical
reinforcementgivenin6.6.3.2.
6.8.8.2.3 Atfootings,itshallbepermittedtolapsplice43mmand57mmlongitudinalbars,incompression
only,withdowelstoprovidereinforcementrequiredtosatisfy6.8.8.1.Dowelsshallnotbelargerthan
36 mm bar and shall extend into supported member a distance not less than the larger of l
dc
, of
43mmor57mmbarsandcompressionlapsplicelengthofthedowels,whicheverisgreater,and
intothefootingadistancenotlessthanl
dc
ofthedowels.
6.8.8.2.4 Ifapinnedorrockerconnectionisprovidedincastinplaceconstruction,connectionshallconformto
6.8.8.1and6.8.8.3.
6.8.8.3 In precast construction, anchor bolts or suitable mechanical connectors shall be permitted for
satisfying6.8.8.1.AnchorboltsshallbedesignedinaccordancewithAppendixD.
6.8.8.3.1 Connection between precast columns or pedestals and supporting members shall meet the
requirementsof6.10.5.1.3(a).
6.8.8.3.2 Connection between precast walls and supporting members shall meet the requirements of
6.10.5.1.3(b)and(c).
Part6
StructuralDesign
6100 Vol.2
6.8.8.3.3 Anchor bolts and mechanical connections shall be designed to reach their design strength before
anchorage failure or failure of surrounding concrete. Anchor bolts shall be designed in accordance
withAppendixD.
6.8.9 Steppedorslopedfootings
6.8.9.1 Inslopedorsteppedfootings,angleofslopeordepthandlocationofstepsshallbesuchthatdesign
requirementsaresatisfiedateverysection.(Seealso8.2.7.6.)
6.8.9.2 Slopedorsteppedfootingsdesignedasaunitshallbeconstructedtoensureactionasaunit.
6.8.1u Combinedfootingsandmats
6.8.10.1 Footings supporting more than one column, pedestal, or wall (combined footings or mats) shall be
proportioned to resist the factored loads and induced reactions, in accordance with appropriate
designrequirementsofthecode.
6.8.10.2 ThedirectdesignmethodofSec.6.5shallnotbeusedfordesignofcombinedfootingsandmats.
6.8.10.3 Distributionofsoilpressureundercombinedfootingsandmatsshallbeconsistentwithpropertiesof
thesoilandthestructureandwithestablishedprinciplesofsoilmechanics.
6.8.10.4 Minimum reinforcing steel in mat foundations shall meet the requirements of Sec. 8.1.11.2 in each
principaldirection.Maximumspacingshallnotexceed450mm.
6.9 FOLDED PLATESANDSHELLS
6.9.1 Scopeanddefinitions
6.9.1.1 ProvisionsofSec.6.9shallapplytothinshellandfoldedplateconcretestructures,includingribsand
edgemembers.
6.9.1.2 All provisions of this Code not specifically excluded, and not in conflict with provisions of Sec. 6.9,
shallapplytothinshellstructures.
6.9.1.3 Thinshells
Threedimensionalspatialstructuresmadeupofoneormorecurvedslabsorfoldedplateswhosethicknessesare
smallcomparedtotheirotherdimensions.Thinshellsarecharacterizedbytheirthreedimensionalloadcarrying
behavior,whichisdeterminedbythegeometryoftheirforms,bythemannerinwhichtheyaresupported,andby
thenatureoftheappliedload.
6.9.1.4 Foldedplates
Aclassofshellstructureformedbyjoiningflat,thinslabsalongtheiredgestocreateathreedimensionalspatial
structure.
6.9.1.5 Ribbedshells
Spatialstructureswithmaterialplacedprimarilyalongcertainpreferredriblines,withtheareabetweentheribs
filledwiththinslabsorleftopen.
6.9.1.6 Auxiliarymembers
Ribs or edge beams that serve to strengthen, stiffen, or support the shell; usually, auxiliary members act jointly
withtheshell.
6.9.1.7 Elasticanalysis
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6101

Ananalysisofdeformationsandinternalforcesbasedonequilibrium,compatibilityofstrains,andassumedelastic
behavior,andrepresentingtoasuitableapproximationthethreedimensionalactionoftheshelltogetherwithits
auxiliarymembers.
6.9.1.8 Inelasticanalysis
An analysis of deformations and internal forces based on equilibrium, nonlinear stressstrain relations for
concrete and reinforcement, consideration of cracking and timedependent effects, and compatibility of strains.
The analysis shall represent to a suitable approximation threedimensional action of the shell together with its
auxiliarymembers.
6.9.1.9 Experimentalanalysis
An analysis procedure based on the measurement of deformations or strains, or both, of the structure or its
model;experimentalanalysisisbasedoneitherelasticorinelastic
behavior.
6.9.2 Analysisanddesign
6.9.2.1 Elasticbehaviorshallbeanacceptedbasisfordetermininginternalforcesanddisplacementsofthin
shells.Thisbehaviorshallbepermittedtobeestablishedbycomputationsbasedonananalysisofthe
uncracked concrete structure in which the material is assumed linearly elastic, homogeneous, and
isotropic.Poissonsratioofconcreteshallbepermittedtobetakenequaltozero.
6.9.2.2 Inelasticanalysesshallbepermittedtobeusedwhereitcanbeshownthatsuchmethodsprovidea
safebasisfordesign.
6.9.2.3 Equilibrium checks of internal resistances andexternal loads shall bemade to ensureconsistencyof
results.
6.9.2.4 Experimental or numerical analysis procedures shall be permitted where it can be shown that such
proceduresprovideasafebasisfordesign.
6.9.2.5 Approximate methods of analysis shall be permitted where it can be shown that such methods
provideasafebasisfordesign.
6.9.2.6 The thickness of a shell and its reinforcement shall be proportioned for the required strength and
serviceability,usingeitherthestrengthdesignmethodof6.1.2.1orthedesignmethodof6.1.2.2.
6.9.2.7 Shellinstabilityshallbeinvestigatedandshownbydesigntobeprecluded.
6.9.2.8 Auxiliary members shall be designed according to the applicable provisions of the Code. It shall be
permittedtoassumethataportionoftheshellequaltotheflangewidth,asspecifiedin6.1.13,acts
with the auxiliary member. In such portions of the shell, the reinforcement perpendicular to the
auxiliarymembershallbeatleastequaltothatrequiredfortheflangeofaTbeamby6.1.13.5.
6.9.2.9 Strengthdesignofshellslabsformembraneandbendingforcesshallbebasedonthedistributionof
stressesandstrainsasdeterminedfromeitheranelasticoraninelasticanalysis.
6.9.2.10 Inaregionwheremembranecrackingispredicted,thenominalcompressivestrengthparalleltothe
cracksshallbetakenasu.4
c
i
.
6.9.S Designstrengthofmaterials
6.9.3.1 Specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete
c
i
at28daysshallnotbelessthan21MPa.
6.9.3.2 Specifiedyieldstrengthofreinforcement

shallnotexceed420MPa.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6102 Vol.2
6.9.4 Shellreinforcement
6.9.4.1 Shell reinforcement shall be provided to resist tensile stresses from internal membrane forces, to
resist tension from bending and twisting moments, to limit shrinkage and temperature crack width
andspacing,andasreinforcementatshellboundaries,loadattachments,andshellopenings.
6.9.4.2 Tensilereinforcementshallbeprovidedintwoormoredirectionsandshallbeproportionedsuchthat
its resistance in any direction equals or exceeds the component of internal forces in that direction.
Alternatively, reinforcement for the membrane forces in the slab shall be calculated as the
reinforcement required to resist axial tensile forces plus the tensile force due to shearfriction
required to transfer shear across any cross section of the membrane. The assumed coefficient of
friction,p,shallnotexceedthatspecifiedin6.4.5.4.3.
6.9.4.3 Theareaofshellreinforcementatanysectionasmeasuredintwoorthogonaldirectionsshallnotbe
lessthantheslabshrinkageortemperaturereinforcementrequiredby8.1.11.
6.9.4.4 Reinforcement for shear and bending moments about axes in the plane of the shell slab shall be
calculatedinaccordancewithSec.6.3,6.4and6.5.
6.9.4.5 The area of shell tension reinforcement shall be limited so that the reinforcement will yield before
eithercrushingofconcreteincompressionorshellbucklingcantakeplace.
6.9.4.6 In regions of high tension, membrane reinforcement shall, if practical, be placed in the general
directionsoftheprincipaltensilemembraneforces.Wherethisisnotpractical,itshallbepermitted
toplacemembranereinforcementintwoormorecomponentdirections.
6.9.4.7 If the direction of reinforcement varies more than 10 degrees from the direction of principal tensile
membrane force, the amount of reinforcement shall be reviewed in relation to cracking at service
loads.
6.9.4.8 Wherethemagnitudeoftheprincipaltensilemembranestresswithintheshellvariesgreatlyoverthe
area of the shell surface, reinforcement resisting the total tension shall be permitted to be
concentrated in the regions of largest tensile stress where it can be shown that this provides a safe
basisfordesign.However,theratioofshellreinforcementinanyportionofthetensilezoneshallbe
notlessthan0.0035basedontheoverallthicknessoftheshell.
6.9.4.9 Reinforcementrequiredtoresistshellbendingmomentsshallbeproportionedwithdueregardtothe
simultaneous action of membrane axial forces at the same location. Where shell reinforcement is
required in only one face to resist bending moments, equal amounts shall be placed near both
surfacesoftheshelleventhoughareversalofbendingmomentsisnotindicatedbytheanalysis.
6.9.4.10 Shellreinforcementinanydirectionshallnotbespacedfartherapartthan450mmnorfartherapart
than five times the shell thickness. Where the principal membrane tensile stress on the gross
concreteareadueto factoredloadsexceedsu.SSz
c
i
,reinforcementshallnotbespaced farther
apartthanthreetimestheshellthickness.
6.9.4.11 Shell reinforcement at the junction of the shell and supporting members or edge members shall be
anchored in or extended through such members in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 8.2,
exceptthattheminimumdevelopmentlengthshallbe1.2l
d
butnotlessthan450mm.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6103

6.9.4.12 SplicelengthsofshellreinforcementshallbegovernedbytheprovisionsofSec.8.2,exceptthatthe
minimum splice length of tension bars shall be 1.2 times the value required by Sec. 8.2 but not less
than 450 mm. The number of splices in principal tensile reinforcement shall be kept to a practical
minimum. Where splices are necessary they shall be staggered at least l
d
with not more than one
thirdofthereinforcementsplicedatanysection.
6.9.S Construction
6.9.5.1 When removal of formwork is based on a specific modulus of elasticity of concrete because of
stability or deflection considerations, the value of the modulus of elasticity, E
c
, used shall be
determined from flexural tests of fieldcured beam specimens. The number of test specimens, the
dimensionsoftestbeamspecimens,andtestproceduresshallbespecifiedbytheEngineer.
6.9.5.2 Contract documents shall specify the tolerances for the shape of the shell. If construction results in
deviations from the shape greater than the specified tolerances, an analysis of the effect of the
deviationsshallbemadeandanyrequiredremedialactionsshallbetakentoensuresafebehavior.
6.10 PRECASTCONCRETE
6.1u.1 Scope
6.10.1.1 All provisions of this Code, not specifically excluded and not in conflict with the provisions of Sec.
6.10,shallapplytostructuresincorporatingprecastconcretestructuralmembers.
6.1u.2 General
6.10.2.1 Designofprecastmembersandconnectionsshallincludeloadingandrestraintconditionsfrominitial
fabricationtoenduseinthestructure,includingformremoval,storage,transportation,anderection.
6.10.2.2 When precast members are incorporated into a structural system, the forces and deformations
occurringinandadjacenttoconnectionsshallbeincludedinthedesign.
6.10.2.3 Tolerances for both precast members and interfacing members shall be specified. Design of precast
membersandconnectionsshallincludetheeffectsofthesetolerances.
6.10.2.4 In addition to the requirements for drawings and specifications in Sec. 1.9, (a) and (b) shall be
includedineitherthecontractdocumentsorshopdrawings:
a) Details of reinforcement, inserts and lifting devices required to resist temporary loads from
handling,storage,transportation,anderection;
b) Requiredconcretestrengthatstatedagesorstagesofconstruction.
6.1u.S Distributionofforcesamongmembers
6.10.3.1 Distributionofforcesthatareperpendiculartotheplaneofmembersshallbeestablishedbyanalysis
orbytest.
6.10.3.2 Where the system behavior requires inplane forces to be transferred between the members of a
precastfloororwallsystem,6.10.3.2.1and6.10.3.2.2shallapply.
6.10.3.2.1 Inplaneforcepathsshallbecontinuousthroughbothconnectionsandmembers.
6.10.3.2.2 Wheretensionforcesoccur,acontinuouspathofsteelorsteelreinforcementshallbeprovided.
6.1u.4 Memberdesign
Part6
StructuralDesign
6104 Vol.2
6.10.4.1 Inonewayprecastfloorandroofslabsandinonewayprecast,prestressedwallpanels,allnotwider
than3.7m,andwheremembersarenotmechanicallyconnectedtocauserestraintinthetransverse
direction,theshrinkageandtemperaturereinforcementrequirementsofSec.8.1.11inthedirection
normal to theflexural reinforcement shall be permitted to be waived. This waiver shall not apply to
membersthatrequirereinforcementtoresisttransverseflexuralstresses.
6.10.4.2 For precast, nonprestressed walls the reinforcement shall be designed in accordance with the
provisionsofSec.6.3or6.6,exceptthattheareaofhorizontalandverticalreinforcementeachshall
be not less than u.uu1A
g
, where A
g
is the gross crosssectional area of the wall panel. Spacing of
reinforcementshallnotexceed5timesthewallthicknessnor750mmforinteriorwallsnor450mm
forexteriorwalls.
6.1u.S Structuralintegrity
6.10.5.1 Except where the provisions of 6.10.5.2 govern, the minimum provisions of 6.10.5.1.1 through
6.10.5.1.4forstructuralintegrityshallapplytoallprecastconcretestructures.
6.10.5.1.1 Longitudinal and transverse ties required by Sec. 8.1.12.3 shall connect members to a lateral load
resistingsystem.
6.10.5.1.2 Where precast elements form floor or roof diaphragms, the connections between diaphragm and
those members being laterally supported shall have a nominal tensile strength capable of resisting
notlessthan4.4kNperlinearm.
6.10.5.1.3 VerticaltensiontierequirementsofSec.8.1.12.3shallapplytoallverticalstructuralmembers,except
cladding, and shall be achieved by providing connections at horizontal joints in accordance with (a)
through(c):
a) Precastcolumnsshallhaveanominalstrengthintensionnotlessthan1.4A
g
,inlb.Forcolumns
with a larger cross section than required by consideration of loading, a reduced effective area
A
g
,basedoncrosssectionrequiredbutnotlessthanonehalfthetotalarea,shallbepermitted;
b) Precastwallpanelsshallhaveaminimumoftwotiesperpanel,withanominaltensilestrength
notlessthan44kNpertie;
c) When design forces result in no tension at the base, the ties required by 6.10.5.1.3(b) shall be
permittedtobeanchoredintoanappropriatelyreinforcedconcretefloorslabonground.
6.10.5.1.4 Connectiondetailsthatrelysolelyonfrictioncausedbygravityloadsshallnotbeused.
6.10.5.2 Forprecastconcretebearingwallstructuresthreeormorestoriesinheight,theminimumprovisions
of6.10.5.2.1through6.10.5.2.5shallapply(Fig.6.10.5.1).
6.10.5.2.1 Longitudinal and transverse ties shall be provided in floor and roof systems to provide a nominal
strengthof22kNpermeterofwidthorlength.Tiesshallbeprovidedoverinteriorwallsupportsand
betweenmembersandexteriorwalls.Tiesshallbepositionedinorwithin600mmoftheplaneofthe
floororroofsystem.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6105

Fig.6.10.5.1Typicalarrangementoftensiletiesinlargepanelstructures.
6.10.5.2.2 Longitudinal ties parallel to floor or roof slab spans shall be spaced not more than 3 m on centers.
Provisionsshallbemadetotransferforcesaroundopenings.
6.10.5.2.3 Transversetiesperpendiculartofloororroofslabspansshallbespacednotgreaterthanthebearing
wallspacing.
6.10.5.2.4 Ties around the perimeter of each floor and roof, within 1.2 m of the edge, shall provide a nominal
strengthintensionnotlessthan71kN.
6.10.5.2.5 Vertical tension ties shall be provided in all walls and shall be continuous over the height of the
building. They shall provide a nominal tensile strength not less than 44 kN per horizontal meter of
wall.Notlessthantwotiesshallbeprovidedforeachprecastpanel.
6.1u.6 Connectionandbearingdesign
6.10.6.1 Forces shall be permitted to be transferred between members by grouted joints, shear keys,
mechanical connectors, reinforcing steel connections, reinforced topping, or a combination of these
means.
6.10.6.1.1 Theadequacyofconnectionstotransferforcesbetweenmembersshallbedeterminedbyanalysisor
by test. Where shear is the primary result of imposed loading, it shall be permitted to use the
provisionsof6.4.5asapplicable.
6.10.6.1.2 When designing a connection using materials with different structural properties, their relative
stiffnesses,strengths,andductilitiesshallbeconsidered.
6.10.6.2 Bearingforprecastfloorandroofmembersonsimplesupportsshallsatisfy6.10.6.2.1and6.10.6.2.2.
6.10.6.2.1 Theallowablebearingstressatthecontactsurfacebetweensupportedandsupportingmembersand
betweenanyintermediatebearingelementsshallnotexceedthebearingstrengthforeithersurface
orthebearingelement,orboth.Concretebearingstrengthshallbeasgivenin6.3.14.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6106 Vol.2
6.10.6.2.2 Unlessshownbytestoranalysisthatperformancewillnotbeimpaired,(a)and(b)shallbemet(Fig.
6.10.6.1):
a) Each member and its supporting system shall have design dimensions selected so that, after
considerationoftolerances,thedistancefromtheedgeofthesupporttotheendoftheprecast
memberinthedirectionofthespanisatleastl
n
18u,butnotlessthan:
Forsolidorhollowcoreslabs 50mm
Forbeamsorstemmedmembers 75mm
b) Bearing pads at unarmored edges shall be set back a minimum of 13 mm from the face of the
support,oratleastthechamferdimensionatchamferededges.
6.10.6.2.3 The requirements of 8.2.8.1 shall not apply to the positive bending moment reinforcement for
staticallydeterminateprecastmembers,butatleastonethirdofsuchreinforcementshallextendto
the center of the bearing length, taking into account permitted tolerances in Sec. 8.1.5.2c and
6.10.2.3.

Fig.6.10.6.1Bearinglengthonsupport
6.1u.7 Itemsembeddedafterconcreteplacement
6.10.7.1 When approved by the designer, embedded items (such as dowels or inserts) that either protrude
from the concrete or remain exposed for inspection shall be permitted to be embedded while the
concreteisinaplasticstateprovidedthat6.10.7.1.1,6.10.7.1.2,and6.10.7.1.3aremet.
6.10.7.1.1 Embeddeditemsarenotrequiredtobehookedortiedtoreinforcementwithintheconcrete.
6.10.7.1.2 Embeddeditemsaremaintainedinthecorrectpositionwhiletheconcreteremainsplastic.
6.10.7.1.3 Theconcreteisproperlyconsolidatedaroundtheembeddeditem.
6.1u.8 Markingandidentification
6.10.8.1 Each precast member shall be marked to indicate its location and orientation in the structure and
dateofmanufacture.
6.10.8.2 Identificationmarksshallcorrespondtoplacingdrawings.
6.1u.9 Handling
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6107

6.10.9.1 Memberdesignshallconsiderforcesanddistortionsduringcuring,stripping,storage,transportation,
anderectionsothatprecastmembersarenotoverstressedorotherwisedamaged.
6.10.9.2 Duringerection,precastmembersandstructuresshallbeadequatelysupportedandbracedtoensure
properalignmentandstructuralintegrityuntilpermanentconnectionsarecompleted.
6.1u.1u Evaluationofstrengthofprecastconstruction
6.10.10.1 Aprecastelementtobemadecompositewithcastinplaceconcreteshallbepermittedtobetested
inflexureasaprecastelementaloneinaccordancewith6.10.10.1.1and6.10.10.1.2.
6.10.10.1.1 Test loads shall be applied only when calculations indicate the isolated precast element will not be
criticalincompressionorbuckling.
6.10.10.1.2 Thetestloadshallbethatloadwhich,whenappliedtotheprecastmemberalone,inducesthesame
totalforceinthetensionreinforcementaswouldbeinducedbyloadingthecompositememberwith
thetestloadrequiredby6.11.3.2.
6.10.10.2 Theprovisionsof6.11.5shallbethebasisforacceptanceorrejectionoftheprecastelement.
6.11 EVALUATIONOFSTRENGTHOFEXISTINGSTRUCTURES
6.11.1 StrengthevaluationGeneral
6.11.1.1 IfthereisdoubtthatapartorallofastructuremeetsthesafetyrequirementsofthisCode,astrength
evaluationshallbecarriedoutasrequiredbytheEngineer.
6.11.1.2 If the effect of the strength deficiency is well understood and if it is feasible to measure the
dimensionsandmaterialpropertiesrequiredforanalysis,analyticalevaluationsofstrengthbasedon
thosemeasurementsshallsuffice.Requireddatashallbedeterminedinaccordancewith6.11.2.
6.11.1.3 If the effect of the strength deficiency is not well understood or if it is not feasible to establish the
required dimensions and material properties by measurement, a load test shall be required if the
structureistoremaininservice.
6.11.1.4 If the doubt about safety of a part or all of a structure involves deterioration, and if the observed
response during the load test satisfies the acceptance criteria, the structure or part of the structure
shall be permitted to remain in service for a specified time period. If deemed necessary by the
Engineer,periodicreevaluationsshallbeconducted.
6.11.2 Determinationofmaterialpropertiesandrequireddimensions
6.11.2.1 Dimensionsofthestructuralelementsshallbeestablishedatcriticalsections.
6.11.2.2 Locations and sizes of the reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, or tendons shall be
determined by measurement. It shall be permitted to base reinforcement locations on available
drawingsifspotchecksaremadeconfirmingtheinformationonthedrawings.
6.11.2.3 Ifrequired,concretestrengthshallbebasedonresultsofcylindertestsfromtheoriginalconstruction
or tests of cores removed from the part of the structure where the strength is in question. For
strength evaluation of an existing structure, cylinder or core test data shall be used to estimate an
equivalent
c
i
.ThemethodforobtainingandtestingcoresshallbeinaccordancewithASTMC42M.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6108 Vol.2
6.11.2.4 If required, reinforcement or prestressing steel strength shall be based on tensile tests of
representativesamplesofthematerialinthestructureinquestion.
6.11.2.5 If the required dimensions and material properties are determined through measurements and
testing,andifcalculationscanbemadeinaccordancewith6.11.1.2,itshallbepermittedtoincrease
fromthosespecifiedin6.2.3,but shallnotbemorethan:
Tensioncontrolledsections,asdefinedin6.3.3.4 1.0
Compressioncontrolledsections,asdefinedin6.3.3.3:
Memberswithspiralreinforcementconformingto6.3.9.3 0.9
Otherreinforcedmembers 0.8
Shearand/ortorsion 0.8
Bearingonconcrete 0.8
6.11.S Loadtestprocedure
6.11.3.1 Loadarrangement
Thenumberandarrangementofspansorpanelsloadedshallbeselectedtomaximizethedeflectionandstresses
in the critical regions of the structural elements of which strength is in doubt. More than one test load
arrangementshallbeusedifasinglearrangementwillnotsimultaneouslyresultinmaximumvaluesoftheeffects
(suchasdeflection,rotation,orstress)necessarytodemonstratetheadequacyofthestructure.
6.11.3.2 Loadintensity
Thetotaltestload(includingdeadloadalreadyinplace)shallnotbelessthanthelargerof(a),(b),and(c):
a) 1.1S + 1.SI + u.4(I

or P)
b) 1.1S + u.9I + 1.S(I

or P)
c) 1.S
The load factor on the live load I in (b) shall be permitted to be reduced to 0.45 except for garages, areas
occupied as places of public assembly, and all areas where I is greater than 4.8 kN/m
2
. It shall be permitted to
reduceI inaccordancewiththeprovisionsoftheapplicablegeneralbuildingcode.
6.11.3.3 Aloadtestshallnotbemadeuntilthatportionofthestructuretobesubjectedtoloadisatleast56
days old. If the owner of the structure, the contractor, and all involved parties agree, it shall be
permittedtomakethetestatanearlierage.
6.11.4 Loadingcriteria
6.11.4.1 The initial value for all applicable response measurements (such as deflection, rotation, strain, slip,
crack widths)shall be obtained not more than 1 hourbefore application of the first load increment.
Measurements shall be made at locations where maximum response is expected. Additional
measurementsshallbemadeifrequired.
6.11.4.2 Testloadshallbeappliedinnotlessthanfourapproximatelyequalincrements.
6.11.4.3 Uniformtestloadshallbeappliedinamannertoensureuniformdistributionoftheloadtransmitted
tothestructureorportionofthestructurebeingtested.Archingoftheappliedloadshallbeavoided.
6.11.4.4 A set of response measurements shall be made after each load increment is applied and after the
totalloadhasbeenappliedonthestructureforatleast24hours.
6.11.4.5 Total test load shall be removed immediately after all response measurements defined in 6.11.4.4
aremade.
6.11.4.6 Asetoffinalresponsemeasurementsshallbemade24hoursafterthetestloadisremoved.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6109

6.11.S Acceptancecriteria
6.11.5.1 The portion of the structure tested shall show no evidence of failure. Spalling and crushing of
compressedconcreteshallbeconsideredanindicationoffailure.
6.11.5.2 MeasureddeflectionsshallsatisfyeitherEq.(6.11.1)or(6.11.2):

t
2
20,000h
(6.11.1)

1
4
(6.11.2)
Ifthemeasuredmaximumandresidualdeflections,A
1
andA

,donotsatisfyEq.(6.11.1)or(6.11.2),itshallbe
permittedtorepeattheloadtest.
Therepeattestshallbeconductednotearlierthan72hoursafterremovalofthefirsttestload.Theportionofthe
structuretestedintherepeattestshallbeconsideredacceptableifdeflectionrecoveryA

satisfiesthecondition:

2
5
(6.11.S)
whereA
2
isthemaximumdeflectionmeasuredduringthesecondtestrelativetothepositionofthestructureat
thebeginningofthesecondtest.
6.11.5.3 Structuralmemberstestedshallnothavecracksindicatingtheimminenceofshearfailure.
6.11.5.4 In regions of structural members without transverse reinforcement, appearance of structural cracks
inclined to the longitudinal axis and having a horizontal projection longer than the depth of the
memberatmidpointofthecrackshallbeevaluated.
6.11.5.5 Inregionsofanchorageandlapsplices,theappearancealongthelineofreinforcementofaseriesof
shortinclinedcracksorhorizontalcracksshallbeevaluated.
6.11.6 Provisionforlowerloadrating
If the structure under investigation does not satisfy conditions or criteria of 6.11.1.2, 6.11.5.2, or 6.11.5.3, the
structure shall be permitted for use at a lower load rating based on the results of the load test or analysis, if
approvedbytheEngineer.
6.11.7 Safety
6.11.7.1 Loadtestsshallbeconductedinsuchamannerastoprovideforsafetyoflifeandstructureduringthe
test.
6.11.7.2 Safetymeasuresshallnotinterferewithloadtestproceduresoraffectresults.
6.12 COMPOSITECONCRETEFLEXURALMEMBERS
6.12.1 Scope
6.12.1.1 Provisions of Sec. 6.12 shall apply for design of composite concrete flexural members defined as
precast concrete, castinplace concrete elements, or both, constructed in separate placements but
sointerconnectedthatallelementsrespondtoloadsasaunit.
6.12.1.2 Allprovisionsof theCodeshallapplytocompositeconcreteflexural members,exceptasspecifically
modifiedinSec.6.12.
6.12.2 General
6.12.2.1 Theuseofanentirecompositememberorportionsthereofforresistingshearandmomentshallbe
permitted.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6110 Vol.2
6.12.2.2 Individualelementsshallbeinvestigatedforallcriticalstagesofloading.
6.12.2.3 If the specified strength, unit weight, or other properties of the various elements are different,
propertiesoftheindividualelementsorthemostcriticalvaluesshallbeusedindesign.
6.12.2.4 In strength computations of composite members, no distinction shall be made between shored and
unshoredmembers.
6.12.2.5 All elements shall be designed to support all loads introduced prior to full development of design
strengthofcompositemembers.
6.12.2.6 Reinforcement shall be provided as required to minimize cracking and to prevent separation of
individualelementsofcompositemembers.
6.12.2.7 Compositemembersshallmeetrequirementsforcontrolofdeflectionsinaccordancewith6.2.5.4.
6.12.S Shoring
Whenused,shoringshallnotberemoveduntilsupportedelementshavedevelopeddesignpropertiesrequiredto
supportallloadsandlimitdeflectionsandcrackingattimeofshoringremoval.
6.12.4 Verticalshearstrength
6.12.4.1 Whereanentirecompositememberisassumedtoresistverticalshear,designshallbeinaccordance
withrequirementsofSec.6.4asforamonolithicallycastmemberofthesamecrosssectionalshape.
6.12.4.2 Shearreinforcementshallbefullyanchoredintointerconnectedelementsinaccordancewith8.2.10.
6.12.4.3 Extended and anchored shear reinforcement shall be permitted to be included as ties for horizontal
shear.
6.12.S Horizontalshearstrength
6.12.5.1 Inacompositemember,fulltransferofhorizontalshearforcesshallbeensuredatcontactsurfacesof
interconnectedelements.
6.12.5.2 For the provisions of 6.12.5, J shall be taken as the distance from extreme compression fiber for
entirecompositesectiontocentroidoflongitudinaltensionreinforcement,ifany.
6.12.5.3 Unless calculated in accordance with 6.12.5.4, design of cross sections subject to horizontal shear
shallbebasedon
I
u
I
nh
(6.12.1)
whereI
nh
isnominalhorizontalshearstrengthinaccordancewith6.12.5.3.1through6.12.5.3.4.
6.12.5.3.1 Wherecontactsurfacesareclean,freeoflaitance,andintentionallyroughened,I
nh
shallnotbe
takengreaterthanu.SSb

J0.55.
6.12.5.3.2 Whereminimumtiesareprovidedinaccordancewith6.12.6,andcontactsurfacesarecleanandfree
oflaitance,butnotintentionallyroughened,I
nh
shallnotbetakengreaterthanu.SSb

J.
6.12.5.3.3 Wheretiesareprovidedinaccordancewith6.12.6,andcontactsurfacesareclean,freeoflaitance,
andintentionallyroughenedtoafullamplitudeofapproximately6mm,I
nh
shallbetakenequalto
(1.8 + u.6p

)zb

J,butnotgreaterthanS.Sb

J.Valuesforz in6.4.5.4.3shallapplyandp

is
A

(b

s).
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6111

6.12.5.3.4 WhereI
u
atsectionconsideredexceeds(S.Sb

J),designforhorizontalshearshallbein
accordancewith6.4.5.4.
6.12.5.4 Asanalternativeto6.12.5.3,horizontalshearshallbepermittedtobedeterminedbycomputingthe
actualchangeincompressiveortensileforceinanysegment,andprovisionsshallbemadetotransfer
thatforceashorizontalsheartothesupportingelement.ThefactoredhorizontalshearforceI
u
shall
notexceedhorizontalshearstrengthI
nh
asgivenin6.12.5.3.1through6.12.5.3.4,whereareaof
contactsurfaceshallbesubstitutedforb

J.
6.12.5.4.1 Wheretiesprovidedtoresisthorizontalsheararedesignedtosatisfy6.12.5.4,thetieareatotie
spacingratioalongthemembershallapproximatelyreflectthedistributionofshearforcesinthe
member.
6.12.5.5 Wheretensionexistsacrossanycontactsurfacebetweeninterconnectedelements,sheartransferby
contactshallbepermittedonlywhenminimumtiesareprovidedinaccordancewith6.12.6.
6.12.6 Tiesforhorizontalshear
6.12.6.1 Wheretiesareprovidedtotransferhorizontalshear,tieareashallnotbelessthanthatrequiredby
6.4.3.5.3,andtiespacingshallnotexceedfourtimestheleastdimensionofsupportedelement,nor
exceed600mm.
6.12.6.2 Tiesforhorizontalshearshallconsistofsinglebarsorwire,multiplelegstirrups,orverticallegsof
weldedwirereinforcement.
6.12.6.3 Alltiesshallbefullyanchoredintointerconnectedelementsinaccordancewith8.2.10.
Part6
StructuralDesign 6365
Chapter 7
MASONRYSTRUCTURES
7.1 INTRODUCTION
7.1.1 Scope
ThischapteroftheCodecoversthedesign,constructionandqualitycontrolofmasonrystructures.
7.1.2 SymbolsandNotation
Thefollowingunitsshallbegenerallyimplicitinthischapterforthecorrespondingquantities:
Lengths mm
Areas mm
2

Momentofinertia mm
4

Force N
Moment,torsion Nmm
Stress,strength N/mm
2

a = depthofequivalentrectangularstressblockforstrengthdesign
A
b
= crosssectionalareaofanchorbolt
A
e
= effectiveareaofmasonry
A
g
= grossareaofwall
A
mv
= netareaofmasonrysectionboundedbywallthicknessandlengthofsectioninthedirectionof
shearforceconsidered
A
p
= area of tension (pullout) cone of an embedded anchor bolt projected into the surface of
masonry
A
s
= effectivecrosssectionalareaofreinforcementinaflexuralmember
A
v
= areaofsteelrequiredforshearreinforcementperpendiculartothelongitudinalreinforcement
s
A
= effectivecrosssectionalareaofcompressionreinforcementinaflexuralmember
b = effectivewidthofrectangularmemberorwidthofflangeforTandIsection
b
t
= computedtensionforceonanchorbolt
b
v
= allowableshearforceonanchorbolt
b
w
= widthofwebinTandImember
B
t
= allowabletensionforceonanchorbolt
B
v
= computedshearforceonanchorbolt
c = distancefromtheneutralaxistoextremefibre
C
d
= masonryshearstrengthcoefficient
d = distancefromthecompressionfaceofaflexuralmembertothecentroidoflongitudinaltensile
reinforcement
d
b
= diameterofthereinforcingbar,diameterofbolt
e = eccentricityofP
u

e
mu
= maximumusablecompressivestrainofmasonry
Part6
StructuralDesign

6366 Vol.2
E
m
= modulusofelasticityofmasonry
E
s
= modulusofelasticityofsteel
f
a
= computedaxialcompressivestressduetodesignaxialload
f
b
= computedflexuralstressintheextremefibreduetodesignbendingloadonly
f
md
= computedcompressivestressinmasonryduetodeadloadonly
f
r
= modulusofrupture
f
s
= computedstressinreinforcementduetodesignload
f
y
= tensileyieldstressofreinforcement
f
v
= computedshearstressduetodesignload

f
m
= specifiedcompressivestrengthofmasonryattheageof28days
F = loadsduetoweightandpressureoffluidsorrelatedmomentsandforces
F
a
= allowableaverageaxialcompressivestressforcentroidallyappliedaxialloadonly
F
b
= allowableflexuralcompressivestressifmemberswerecarryingbendingloadonly
F
br
= allowablebearingstress
F
s
= allowablestressinreinforcement
F
sc
= allowablecompressivestressincolumnreinforcement
F
t
= allowableflexuraltensilestressinmasonry
F
v
= allowableshearstressinmasonry
G = shearmodulusofmasonry
h = heightofwallbetweenpointsofsupport
h = effectiveheightofawallorcolumn
H = actualheightbetweenlateralsupports
H' = heightofopening
I = momentofinertiaabouttheneutralaxisofthecrosssectionalarea
I
g,
I
cr
= gross,crackedmomentofinertiaofthewallcrosssection
j = ratioordistancebetweencentroidofflexuralcompressiveforceandcentroidoftensileforces
to
depth,d
k = ratioofdepthofthecompressionzoneinflexuralmembertodepth,d;stiffeningcoefficient
l = lengthofawallorsegment
l
b
= embedmentdepthofanchorbolt
l
be
= anchorboltedgedistance,theleastlengthmeasuredfromtheedgeofmasonrytothesurface
of
theanchorbolt
l
d
= requireddevelopmentlengthofreinforcement
L = actuallengthofwall
M = designmoment
M
c
= moment capacity of the compression steel in a flexural member about the centroid of the
tensile
force
M
cr
= crackingmomentstrengthofthemasonrywall
M
m
= themomentofthecompressiveforceinthemasonryaboutthecentroidofthetensileforcein
thereinforcement
M
n
= nominalmomentstrengthofthemasonrywall
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6367
M
s
= themomentofthetensileforceinthereinforcementaboutthecentroidofthecompressive
forceinthemasonry
M
ser
= servicemomentatthemidheightofthepanel,includingPDeltaeffects
M
u
= factoredmoment
n = modularratio=E
s
/E
m

P = designaxialload
P
a
= allowablecentroidalaxialloadforreinforcedmasonrycolumns
P
b
= nominalbalanceddesignaxialstrength
P
f
= loadfromtributaryfloororroofarea
P
o
= nominalaxialloadstrengthwithbending
P
u
= factoredaxialload
P
uf
= factoredloadfromtributaryfloororroofloads
P
uw
= factoredweightofthewalltributarytothesectionunderconsideration
P
w
= weightofthewalltributarytothesectionunderconsideration
r
b
= ratiooftheareaofbarscutofftothetotalareaofbarsatthesection
s = spacingofstirrupsorbentbarsinadirectionparalleltothatofthemainreinforcement
S = sectionmodulus
t = effectivethicknessofawythe,wallorcolumn
u = bondstressperunitofsurfaceareaofbar
V = totaldesignshearforce
V
n
= nominalshearstrength
V
m
= nominalshearstrengthprovidedbymasonry
V
s
= nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyshearreinforcement

u
= horizontaldeflectionatmidheightunderfactoredload;PDeltaeffectsshallbeincludedin
deflectioncalculation
= steelratio=A
s
/bd

n
= ratioofdistributedshearreinforcementonaplaneperpendiculartotheplaneofA
mv

o
= sumoftheperimetersofallthelongitudinalreinforcement
= strengthreductionfactor.
7.1.3 Definitions
Forthepurposeofthischapter,thefollowingdefinitionsshallbeapplicable.
BED BLOCK : A block bedded on a wall, column or pier to disperse a concentrated load on a masonry
element.
BEDJOINT:Ahorizontalmortarjointuponwhichmasonryunitsareplaced.
BOND : Arrangement of masonry units in successive courses to tie the masonry together both
longitudinallyandtransversely;thearrangementisusuallyworkedouttoensurethatnoverticaljointof
onecourseisexactlyovertheoneinthenextcourseaboveorbelowitandthereismaximumpossible
amountoflap.
BONDBEAM:Ahorizontalgroutedelementwithinmasonryinwhichreinforcementisembedded.
BUTTRESS : A pier of masonry built as an integral part of wall and projecting from either or both
surfaces, decreasing in crosssectional area from base to top and conforming to the requirement of
Sec4.3.3(c)(ii).
CAVITYWALL:Awallcomprisingtwolimbseachbuiltupassingleormultiwytheunitsandseparated
by a 50115 mm wide cavity. The limbs are tied together by metal ties or bonding units for structural
integrity.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6368 Vol.2
CELL:Avoidspacehavingagrosscrosssectionalareagreaterthan1000mm
2
.
COLUMN:Anisolatedverticalloadbearingmemberthewidthofwhichdoesnotexceedthreetimesthe
thickness.
CROSSJOINT:Averticaljointnormaltothefaceofthewall.
CROSSSECTIONAL AREA OF MASONRY UNIT: Net crosssectional area of masonry unit is the gross
crosssectionalareaminustheareaofcellularspace.
CURTAINWALL:Anonloadbearingselfsupportingwallsubjecttotransverselateralloads,andlaterally
supportedbyverticalorhorizontalstructuralmemberwherenecessary.
DIMENSIONS:
Actualdimensionsthemeasureddimensionsofadesignateditem;suchasadesignatedmasonryunit
or wall used in the structures. The actual dimension shall not vary from the specified dimension by
morethantheamountallowedintheappropriatestandardmentionedinSec2.2.4ofPart5.
Nominaldimensions;specifieddimensionsplusthethicknessofthejointwithwhichtheunitislaid.
Specified dimensions the dimensions specified for the manufacture or construction of masonry,
masonryunits,jointsoranyothercomponentsofastructure.Unlessotherwisestated,allcalculations
shallbemadeusingorbasedonspecifieddimensions.
FACED WALL: A wall in which facing and backing of two different materials are bonded together to
ensurecommonactionunderload.
GROUT : A mixture of cementitious materials and aggregate to which water is added such that the
mixturewillflowwithoutsegregationoftheconstituents.
GROUTEDMASONRY:
Groutedhollowunitmasonrythatformofgroutedmasonryconstructioninwhichcertaindesignated
cellsofhollowunitsarecontinuouslyfilledwithgrout.
Groutedmultiwythemasonrythatformofgroutedmasonryconstructioninwhichthespacebetween
thewythesissolidlyorperiodicallyfilledwithgrout.
HOLLOW UNIT: A masonry unit of which net crosssectional area in any plane parallel to the bearing
surfaceislessthan75percentofitsgrosscrosssectionalareameasuredinthesameplane.
JAMB:Sideofanopeninginwall.
JOINTS:
Bedjoints;themortarjointthatishorizontalatthetimethemasonryunitsareplaced.
Collarjoint;thevertical,longitudinal,mortarorgroutedjoints.
Headjoint;themortarjointhavingaverticaltransverseplane.
LATERALSUPPORT:Asupportwhichenablesamasonryelementtoresistlateralloadand/orrestrains
lateraldeflectionofamasonryelementatthepointofsupport.
LIMB:Innerorouterportionofacavitywall.
LOADBEARINGWALL:Awalldesignedtocarryanimposedverticalloadinadditiontoitsownweight,
togetherwithanylateralload.
MASONRY:Anassemblageofmasonryunitsproperlybondedtogetherwithmortar.
MASONRY UNIT : Individual units, such as brick, tile, stone or concrete block, which are bonded
togetherwithmortartoformamasonryelementsuchaswalls,columns,piers,buttress,etc.
PANEL WALL : An exterior non load bearing wall in framed structure, supported at each storey but
subjecttolateralloads.
PARTITIONWALL:Aninteriornonloadbearingwall,onestoreyorpartstoreyinheight.
PIER : A projection from either or both sides of a wall forming an integral part of the wall and
conformingtotherequirementofSec4.4.3.3.c(ii).
PILASTER : A thickened section forming integral part of a wall placed at intervals along the wall, to
increase the stiffness of the wall or to carry a vertical concentrated load. Thickness of a pier is the
overall thickness including the thickness of the wall or, when bounded into a limb of cavity wall, the
thicknessobtainedbytreatingthatlimbasanindependentwall.
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6369
PRISM : An assemblage of masonry units bonded by mortar with or without grout used as a test
specimenfordeterminingpropertiesofmasonry.
REINFORCEDMASONRY:Themasonryconstruction,inwhichreinforcementactinginconjunctionwith
themasonryisusedtoresistforcesandisdesignedinaccordancewithSec4.6.
SHEAR WALL : A load bearing wall designed to carry horizontal forces acting in its own plane with or
withoutverticalimposedloads.
SOLIDUNIT:Amasonryunitwhosenetcrosssectionalareainanyplaneparalleltothebearingsurface
is75percentormoreofthegrosscrosssectionalareainthesameplane.
STACKBOND:Abondinbearingandnonbearingwalls,exceptveneeredwalls,inwhichlessthan75per
cent of the units in any transverse vertical plane lap the ends of the units below a distance less than
onehalftheheightoftheunit,orlessthanonefourththelengthoftheunit.
VENEEREDWALL:Awallinwhichthefacingisattachedtothebackingbutnotsobondedastoresultin
acommonactionunderload.
WALLJOINT:Averticaljointparalleltothefaceofthewall.
WALLTIE:Ametalfastenerwhichconnectswythesofmasonrytoeachotherortoothermaterials.
WYTHE:Portionofawallwhichisonemasonryunitinthickness.
7.2 Materials
7.2.1 General
AllmaterialsusedinmasonryconstructionshallconformtotherequirementsspecifiedinPart5ofthisCode.If
norequirementsarespecifiedforamaterial,qualityshallbebasedongenerallyacceptedgoodpractice,subject
totheapprovalofthebuildingofficial.
7.2.2 MasonryUnits
ThefollowingtypesofmasonryunitswhichconformtothestandardsmentionedinSec2.2.4ofPart5maybe
usedinmasonryconstruction:
(a) Commonbuildingclaybricks
(b) Burntclayhollowbricks
(c) Burntclayfacingbricks
(d) Hollowconcreteblocks
OthertypesofmasonryunitsconformingtoSec2.2.4ofPart5mayalsobeused.
7.2.3 MortarandGrout
Mortar and grout for masonry construction shall conform to the requirements specified in Part 5. Mix
proportionsandcompressivestrengthofsomecommonlyusedmortarsaregiveninTable6.7.1.
7.3 AllowableSTRESSES
7.3.1 General
Stresses in masonry shall not exceed the values given in this section. All allowable stresses for working stress
designmaybeincreasedonethirdwhenconsideringwindorearthquakeforceseitheractingaloneorcombined
withverticalloads.Noincreaseshallbeallowedforverticalloadsactingalone.
7.3.2 SpecifiedCompressiveStrengthofMasonry,
f
m

The allowable stresses for masonry construction shall be based on the value of
f
m

as determinedby Sec7.3.3
below.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6370 Vol.2
Table6.7.1:MixProportionandStrengthofCommonlyusedMortars
Gradeof
Mortar
MixProportionbyVolume1,2 MinimumCompressive
Strengthat28days,
N/mm2
Cement Sand
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6

1
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
7.5
5
3
2
1
1.
Sandandcementshallbemeasuredinloosevolumeandsandshallbewellgradedwitha
minimumF.M.of1.2.
2.
Limetoamaximumof

1
4
thpartbyvolumeofcementmaybeusedtoincreaseworkability.
7.3.3 Compliancewith

Compliancewiththerequirementsforthespecifiedcompressivestrengthofmasonry,
f
m
shallbeinaccordance
withthefollowing:
7.3.3.1 Masonry Prism Testing : The compressive strength of masonry based on tests at 28 days in
accordancewith"StandardTestMethod forCompressiveStrengthofMasonryPrisms",(ASTME447)
foreachsetofprismsshallequalorexceed
f
m
.Verificationbymasonryprismtestingshallmeetthe
following:
(a) Testing Prior to Construction: A set of five masonry prisms shall be built and tested in
accordance with ASTM E447 prior to the start of construction. Materials used for prisms
shallbesameasusedintheproject.Prismsshallbeconstructedundertheobservationof
theengineeroranapprovedagencyandtestedbyanapprovedagency.
(b) Testing During Construction: When full allowable stresses are used in design, a set of
threeprismsshallbebuiltandtestedduringconstructioninaccordancewith(ASTME447)
for each 500 square meters of wall area, but not less than one set of three masonry
prismsforanyproject.Notestingduringconstructionshallberequiredwhen50%ofthe
allowablestressesareusedindesign.
7.3.4 QualityControl
Qualitycontrolshallinclude,butnotbelimitedtoassurethat:
(a) Masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime, aggregate and all other materials meet the
requirements of the applicable standard of quality and that they are properly stored and
preparedforuse.
(b) Mortarandgroutareproperlymixedusingspecifiedproportionsofingredients.Themethodof
measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that proportions of materials are
controlled.
(c) Construction details, procedures and workmanship are in accordance with the plans and
specification.
(d) Placement,splicesandbardiametersareinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthischapterand
theplansandspecifications.
7.3.5 AllowableStressesinMasonry
When the quality control provisions specified in Sec 7.3.4 above do not include requirements for special
inspection,theallowabledesignstressesinthissectionshallbereducedby50percent.
(a) CompressiveStress,Axial
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6371
i) Unreinforcedmasonrywalls,columnsandreinforcedmasonrywall

=
3
42
1
5 t
h f
F
m
a

(7.3.1)
ii) Reinforcedmasonrycolumns

=
3
42
1
5 . 1 5 t
h
F
A
A f
F
sc
e
s m
a

(7.3.2)

(b) CompressiveStress,Flexural

F
b
= 0.33 f
m
10N mm
2

(7.3.3)
(c) TensileStressforWalls,Flexure
The allowable tensile stress for walls in flexure of masonry structures without tensile
reinforcementusingmortarTypeM
1
orM
2
shallnotexceedthevaluesspecifiedinTables
6.7.2and6.7.3.ForTypeM
3
andM
4
mortar,thevalueshallbereducedby25percent.
Notensionisallowedacrossheadjointsinstackbondmasonry.Valuesfortensionnormal
toheadjointsareforrunningbond.Thesevaluesshallnotbeusedforhorizontalflexural
memberssuchasbeams,girdersorlintels.
Table6.7.2:FlexuralTension,F
t

Masonry NormaltoBedJoints
N/mm
2

NormaltoHeadJoints
N/mm
2

SolidUnits
HollowUnits
0.20
0.12
0.40
0.25

Table6.7.3:TensionNormaltoHeadJoints,F
t

Masonry ClayUnits
N/mm2
ConcreteUnits
N/mm2
SolidUnits
HollowUnits
0.35
0.22
0.40
0.25
(d) ReinforcingBondStress,u
PlainBars 0.30N/mm
2
DeformedBars 1.0N/mm
2

(e) ShearStressforFlexuralMembers,F
v

i) Whennoshearreinforcementisused

25 . 0 083 . 0 =
m v
f F

N/mm2 (7.3.4)
ii) Whenshearreinforcementisdesignedtotakeentireshearforce

75 . 0 25 . 0 =
m v
f F

N/mm2 (7.3.5)
(f) ShearStressforShearWalls,F
v

i) Unreinforcedmasonry
Forclayunits:
Part6
StructuralDesign

6372 Vol.2

40 . 0 025 . 0 =
m v
f F

N/mm2 (7.3.6)
Forconcreteunits:
M
1
orM
2
Mortar0.20N/mm
2

M
3
Mortar 0.12N/mm
2

ii) TheallowableshearstressforreinforcedmasonryshearwallsshallbeaccordingtoTable6.7.4.
7.3.6 AllowableStressesinReinforcement
(a) TensileStress
iDeformedbars,

165 , 5 . 0 =
y s
f F
N/mm2 (7.3.7)
ii)Ties,anchorsandplainbars,

135 , 4 . 0 =
y s
f F
N/mm2 (7.3.8)
Table6.7.4:AllowableShearStressforReinforcedMasonryShearWalls,F
v

M/Vd
F
v
,N/mm
2

MaximumAllowable
N/mm
2

Masonry
takingall
shear

<1
m
f
Vd
M

4
36
1

Vd
M
2 . 0 4 . 0

1
m
f 083 . 0

0.17
Reinforceme
nttakingall
shear

<1
m
f
Vd
M

4
24
1

Vd
M
2 . 0 6 . 0

1
m
f 125 . 0

0.37
(b) CompressiveStress
i) Deformedbarsincolumnsandshearwalls,

165 4 . 0 =
y sc
f F
N/mm2 (7.3.9)
ii) Deformedbarsinflexuralmembers

165 5 . 0 =
y sc
f F
N/mm2 (7.3.10)
7.3.7 CombinedCompressiveStress
Members subject to combined axial and flexural stresses shall be designed in accordance with accepted
principlesofmechanicsorinaccordancewiththefollowingformula:

1 +
b
b
a
a
F
f
F
f

(7.3.11)
7.3.8 ModulusofElasticity
The modulus of elasticity of masonry shall be determined by the secant method. The slope of the line
connectingthepoints0.05
f
m
and0.33
f
m
onthestressstraincurveshallbetakenasthemodulusofelasticity
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6373
ofmasonry.Ifrequired,actualvaluesshallbeestablishedbytests.Thesevaluesarenottobereducedby50
percentasspecifiedinSec7.3.5(a).
(a) ModulusofElasticityforMasonry

000 , 15 750 =
m m
f E

N/mm2 (7.3.12)
(b) ModulusofElasticityforSteel

000 , 200 =
s
E

N/mm2 (7.3.13)
(c) ShearModulusofMasonry
m
E G 4 . 0 =

(7.3.14)
7.3.9 ShearandTensiononEmbeddedAnchorBolts
7.3.9.1 Allowable loads and placement requirements for anchor bolts shall be in accordance with the
following:
(a) Bentbaranchorboltsshallhaveahookwitha90degreebendwithaninsidediameterof3db
plusanextensionof1.5dbatthefreeend.
(b) Headedanchorboltsshallhaveastandardbolthead.
(c) Plate anchor bolts shall have a plate welded to the shank to provide anchorage equivalent to
headedanchorbolts.
7.3.9.2 The effective embedment length,
l
b for bent bar anchors shall be the length of embedment
measured perpendicular from the surface of the masonry to the bearing surface of the bent end
minus one anchor bolt diameter. For plate or headed anchor bolts
l
b shall be the length of
embedment measured perpendicular from the surface of the masonry to the bearing surface of the
plate or head of the anchorage. All bolts shall be grouted in place with at least 25 mm of grout
between the bolt and the masonry except that 6 mm diameter bolts may be placed in bed joints
whichareatleasttwiceasthickasthediameterofthebolt.
7.3.9.3 AllowableShearForce
Allowable loads in shear shall be according to Table 6.7.5 or lesser of the value obtained from the
followingformulae:

( )
4 / 1
1070
b m v
A f B =

(7.3.15)

y b v
f A B 12 . 0 =

(7.3.16)
Whenthedistance
l
beislessthan12db,thevalueofBvinEq(7.3.15)shallbereducedtozeroata
distance
l
be equal to 40 mm. Where adjacent anchors are spaced closer than 8db, the allowable
shear of the adjacent anchors determined by Eq (7.3.15) shall be reduced by interpolation to 0.75
timestheallowableshearvalueatacentretocentrespacingof4db.
Table6.7.5:AllowableShear,B
v
forEmbeddedAnchorBoltsforMasonry,kN*

BentBarAnchorBoltDiameter,mm

f
m

N/mm
2

10

12

16

20

22

25

28
10 2.0 3.7 5.9 7.9 8.5 9.1 9.6
12 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.2 8.3 9.5 10.1
13 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 9.2 9.8 10.4
17 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 9.7 10.3 11.0
Part6
StructuralDesign

6374 Vol.2

BentBarAnchorBoltDiameter,mm

f
m

N/mm
2

10

12

16

20

22

25

28
20 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 10.1 10.8 11.5
27 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 10.9 11.6 12.3
*ValuesareforboltsofatleastASTMA307quality.BoltsshallbethosespecifiedinSec
4.3.9.1.
7.3.9.4 AllowableTension
Allowable tension shall be the lesser value selected from Table 6.7.6 and Table 6.7.7 or shall be
determinedfromlesserofthevaluesobtainedfromthefollowingformulae:

m p t
f A B = 04 . 0 (7.3.17)

y b t
f A B 2 . 0 =

(7.3.18)
The area Ap shall be the lesser of the area obtained from Eq (7.3.17) and (7.3.18) and where the
projectedareasofadjacentanchorboltsoverlap,Apofeachanchorboltshallbereducedby50per
centoftheoverlappingarea.

2
b p
A l = (7.3.19)

2
be p
A l =

(7.3.20)
Table6.7.6:AllowableTension,B
t
forEmbeddedAnchorBoltsforMasonry,kN
1,2

EmbedmentLength,l
b
,orEdgeDistance,l
be
,mm

f
m

N/mm2

50

75

100

125

150

200

250
10 1.0 2.4 4.3 6.7 9.7 17.3 27.0
12 1.2 2.6 4.7 7.4 10.6 18.9 29.6
13 1.2 2.8 5.0 7.8 11.2 20.0 31.2
17 1.3 3.1 5.6 8.7 12.6 22.4 35.0
20 1.5 3.4 6.7 9.5 13.8 24.5 38.2
27 1.7 3.9 7.0 11.0 15.9 28.3 44.1
1
Theallowabletensionvaluesarebasedoncompressivestrengthofmasonryassemblages.Whereyield
strengthofanchorboltsteelgoverns,theallowabletensionisgiveninTable6.7.7.
2
ValuesareforboltsofatleastASTMA307quality.BoltsshallbethosespecifiedinSec7.3.9.1.
Table6.7.7:AllowableTension,B
t
forEmbeddedAnchorBoltsforMasonry,kN
1

BentBarAnchorBoltDiameter,mm
6 10 12 16 20 22 25 28
1.5 3.5 6.2 9.8 14.1 19.2 25.1 31.8
1
ValuesareforboltsofatleastASTMA307quality.BoltsshallbethosespecifiedinSec7.3.9.
7.3.9.5 CombinedShearandTension
Anchor bolts subjected to combined shear and tension shall be designed in accordance with the
formulagivenbelow:
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6375
00 . 1 +
v
v
t
t
B
b
B
b

7.3.22
7.3.9.6 MinimumEdgeDistance,
l
be
Theminimumvalueof
l
bemeasuredfromtheedgeofthemasonryparalleltotheanchorbolttothe
surfaceoftheanchorboltshallbe40mm.
7.3.9.7 MinimumEmbedmentDepth,
l
b
Theminimumembedmentdepth
l
bshallbe4dbbutnotlessthan50mm.
7.3.9.8 MinimumSpacingBetweenBolts
Theminimumcentretocentrespacingbetweenanchorsshallbe4db.
7.3.10 LoadTest
Forloadtest,themembershallbesubjecttoasuperimposedloadequaltotwicethedesignliveloadplusone
halfofthedeadload.Thisloadshallbemaintainedforaperiodof24hours.If,duringthetestoruponremoval
oftheload,themembershowsevidenceoffailure,suchchangesormodificationsasarenecessarytomakethe
structureadequatefortheratedcapacityshallbemade;orwherepossible,alowerratingshallbeestablished.A
flexural member shall be considered to have passed the test if the maximum deflection at the end of the 24
hourperiodneitherexceeds0.005
l
nor0.00025
l
2
t
andthebeamandslabsshowarecoveryofatleast75per
centoftheobserveddeflectionwithin24hoursafterremovaloftheload.
7.3.11 ReuseofMasonryUnits
Masonryunitsmaybereusedwhenclean,unbrokenandconformstotherequirementsofPart5.Allstructural
propertiesofmasonryofreclaimedunits,especiallyadhesionbond,shallbedeterminedbyapprovedtest.The
allowable working stress shall not exceed 50 per cent of that permitted for new masonry units of the same
properties.
7.4 BASICDESIGNREQUIREMENTS
7.4.1 General
Masonrystructuresshallbedesignedaccordingtotheprovisionsofthissection.Therequireddesignstrengths
ofmasonrymaterialsandanyspecialrequirementsshallbespecifiedintheplansubmittedforapproval.
7.4.2 DesignConsiderations
7.4.2.1 Masonry structures shall be designed based on working stress and linear stressstrain distribution.
Requirements for working stress design of unreinforced and reinforced masonry structures are
providedinSec4.5and4.6respectively.Inlieuoftheworkingstressdesignmethod,slenderwallsand
shearwallsmaybedesignedbythestrengthdesignmethodspecifiedinSec7.7.
The structure shall be proportioned such that eccentricity of loading on the members is as small as
possible.Eccentricloadingshallpreferablybeavoidedbyproviding:
(a) adequatebearingoffloor/roofonthewalls
(b) adequatestiffnessinslabs,and
(c) fixityatthesupports.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6376 Vol.2
7.4.2.2 EffectiveHeight
(a) Wall : The effective height of a wall shall be taken as the clear height between the lateral
supports at top and bottom in a direction normal to the axis considered. For members not
supportedatthetopnormaltotheaxisconsidered,theeffectiveheightistwicetheheightof
the member above the support. Effective height less than the clear height may be used if
justified.
(b) Column:Effectiveheightofthecolumnshallbetakenasactualheightforthedirectionitis
laterallysupported and twice the actual height for the direction it is not laterally supported
atthetopnormaltotheaxisconsidered.
(c) OpeninginWall:Whenopeningsoccurinawallsuchthatmasonrybetweentheopeningsis
bydefinitionacolumn,effectiveheightofmasonrybetweentheopeningsshallbeobtained
asfollows:
i) When wall has full restraint at the top, effective height for the direction
perpendicular to the plane of wall equals 0.75H plus 0.25H', where H is the
distance between supports and H' is the height of the taller opening; and
effectiveheightforthedirectionparalleltothewallequalsH.
ii) When wall has partial restraint at the top and bottom, effective height for the
direction perpendicular to the plane of wall equals H when height of neither
openingexceeds0.5Handitisequalto2Hwhenheightofanyopeningexceeds
0.5H; and effective height for the direction parallel to the plane of the wall
equals2H.
7.4.2.3 EffectiveLength
EffectivelengthofawallfordifferentsupportconditionsshallbeasgiveninTable6.7.8.
7.4.2.4 EffectiveThickness
The effective thickness of walls and columns for use in the calculation of slenderness ratio, shall be
definedasfollows:
(a) Solid Walls: The effective thickness of solid walls, faced walls or grouted walls shall be the
specifiedthicknessofthewall.
(b) Solid Walls with Raked Mortar Joints: The effective thickness of solid walls with raked
mortarjointsshallbetheminimumthicknessmeasuredatthejoint.
(c) Cavity Walls: When both limbs of a cavity wall are axially loaded, each limb shall be
consideredindependentlyandtheeffectivethicknessofeachlimbshallbedeterminedasin
(a)or(b)above.Ifoneofthelimbsisaxiallyloaded,theeffectivethicknessofthecavitywall
shall be taken as the square root of the sum of the squares of the effective thicknesses of
thelimbs.
(d) WallsStiffenedbyPilasters:Whensolidorcavitywallsarestiffenedbypilastersatintervals,
the effective thickness to be used for the calculation of h'/t ratio shall be determined as
follows:
i) Solid Walls: For stiffened solid walls the effective thickness shall be the specified
thicknessmultipliedbythestiffeningcoefficient,k,valuesofwhicharegivenbelow:

p p
w l

StiffeningCoefficient,k*
w p
t t
1 2 3
6 1.0 1.4 2.0
8 1.0 1.3 1.7
10 1.0 1.2 1.4
15 1.0 1.1 1.2
20ormore 1.0 1.0 1.0
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6377
*Linearinterpolationispermittedforobtainingintermediatevaluesofk
where,

l
p
= centretocentrespacingofpilasters
t
p
= thicknessofpilasterincludingthewall
t
w
= specifiedthicknessofmainwall
w
p
= widthofpilasterinthedirectionofwall
ii) Cavity Walls: When one or both limbs of a cavity wall are adequately bonded into
pilasters at intervals, the effective thickness of each limb shall be determined
separatelyasin(a),(b)ord(i)aboveandtheeffectivethicknessofthestiffenedcavity
wallshallbedeterminedinaccordancewith(c)above.
Where slenderness ratio of the wall is based on the effective length, the effective
thicknessshallbethesameasthatwithoutpilasters.
(e) Columns: The effective thickness for rectangular columns in the direction considered is the
actualthicknessprovidedinthatdirection.Theeffectivethicknessfornonrectangularcolumns
is the thickness of a square column with the same moment of inertia about its axis as that
abouttheaxisconsideredintheactualcolumn.
Table6.7.8:EffectiveLengthofWalls
SupportCondition EffectiveLength
Whereawalliscontinuousandissupportedbycrosswallandthere
isnoopeningwithinadistanceofH/8fromthefaceofcrosswall,
Or
Whereawalliscontinuousandissupportedbypier/buttresses
conformingtoSec7.4.3.3(c)(ii).

0.8L
Whereawallissupportedbycrosswallatoneendandcontinuous
withcrosswallatotherend,
Or
Whereawallissupportedbypier/buttressesatoneendand
continuouswithpier/buttressesatotherendconformingto
Sec7.4.3.3(c)(ii).

0.9L
Whereawallissupportedateachendbycrosswall,
Or
Whereawallissupportedateachendbypier/buttresses
conformingtoSec7.4.3.3(c)(ii).

1.0L
Whereawallisfreeatoneendandcontinuouswithacrosswallat
theotherend,
Or
Whereawallisfreeatoneendandcontinuouswitha
pier/buttressesattheotherendconformingtoSec7.4.3.3(c)(ii).

1.5L
Whereawallisfreeatoneendandsupportedattheotherendby
acrosswall,
Or
Whereawallisfreeatoneendandsupportedattheotherendbya
pier/buttressesconformingtoSec7.4.3.3(c)(ii).

2.0L
Part6
StructuralDesign

6378 Vol.2
7.4.2.5 SlendernessRatio
(a) Walls: For a wall, slenderness ratio shall be the ratio of effective height to effective
thickness or effective length to effective thickness whichever less is. In case of a load
bearingwall,slendernessratioshallnotexceed20.
(b) Column: For a column, slenderness ratio shall be taken to be the greater of the ratio of
effective heights to the respective effective thickness in the two principal directions.
Slendernessratioforaloadbearingcolumnshallnotexceed12.
7.4.2.6 EffectiveArea
Theeffectivecrosssectionalareashallbebasedontheminimumbeddedareaofthehollowunits,or
the gross area of solid units plus any grouted area. If hollow units are used perpendicular to the
direction of stress, the effective area shall be lesser of the minimum bedded area or the minimum
crosssectional area. If bed joints are raked, the effective area shall be correspondingly reduced.
Effectiveareasforcavitywallsshallbethatoftheloadedwythes.
7.4.2.7 FlexuralResistanceofCavityWalls
For computing the flexural resistance, lateral loads perpendicular to the plane of the wall shall be
distributedtothewythesaccordingtotheirrespectiveflexuralrigidities.
7.4.2.8 EffectiveWidthofIntersectingWalls
Whereashearwallisanchoredtoanintersectingwallorwalls,thewidthoftheoverhangingflange
formedbytheintersectedwallsoneithersideoftheshearwallshallnotexceed6timesthethickness
of the intersected wall. Limits of the effective flange may be waived if justified. Only the effective
areaofthewallparalleltotheshearforcesmaybeassumedtocarryhorizontalshear.
7.4.3 Supports
7.4.3.1 VerticalSupport
Structural members providing vertical support of masonry shall provide a bearing surface on which
theinitialbedjointshallnotbelessthan6mmormorethan25mmandshallbeofnoncombustible
materials,exceptwheremasonryisanonstructuraldecorativefeatureorwearingsurface.
7.4.3.2 VerticalDeflection
Elements supporting masonry shall be designed so that their vertical deflection does not exceed
1/600oftheclearspanundertotalloads.Lintelsshallbesupportedoneachendsuchthatallowable
stressesinthesupportingmasonryarenotexceeded.Theminimumbearinglengthshallbe100mm.
7.4.3.3 LateralSupport
(a) Lateralsupportofmasonrymaybeprovidedbycrosswalls,columns,piers,counterfortsor
buttresses when spanning horizontally or by floors, beams or roofs when spanning
vertically.
(b) Lateral supports for a masonry element such as load bearing wall or column shall be
providedto
i) limit the slenderness of a masonry element so as to prevent or reduce possibility of
bucklingofthememberduetoverticalloads;and
ii) resist the horizontal components of forces so as to ensure stability of a structure
againstoverturning.
(c) From consideration of slenderness (i.e. requirement b(i) above), masonry elements may be
consideredtobelaterallysupportedif
i) in case of a wall, where slenderness ratio is based on effective height, floor/roof slab
(orbeamsandslab)irrespectiveofthedirectionofspan,bearsonthesupportedwall
aswellascrosswalls,totheextentofatleast100mm;
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6379
ii) in case of a wall, when slenderness ratio is based on its effective length, a cross
wall/pier/buttress of thickness equal to or more than half the thickness of the
supported wall or 125 mm, whichever is more and average length equal to or more
thanonefifthoftheheightofthewall,isbuiltatrightangletothewallandproperly
bonded;
iii) in case of a column, an RC or timber beam/R S joist/roof truss, is supported on the
column.Inthiscase,thecolumnwillnotbeconsideredtobelaterallysupportedinthe
directionatrightangletoit;and
iv) in case of a column, an RC beam forming a part of beam and slab construction, is
supported on the column, and the slab adequately bears on stiffening walls. This
construction will provide lateral support to the column, in the direction of both
horizontalaxes.
7.4.4 Stability
A wall or column subject to vertical and lateral loads may be considered to provide adequate lateral support
from consideration of stability, if the construction providing the support is capable of resisting the following
forces:
(a) Simplestaticreactionsatthepointoflateralsupporttoallthelateralloads;plus
(b) A lateral load equal to 2.5% of the total vertical load that the wall or column is
designatedtocarryatthepointoflateralsupport.
7.4.4.1 Incaseofloadbearingbuildingsuptofivestoreys,stabilityrequirementsmaybeconsideredtohave
beensatisfiedifthefollowingconditionsaremet.
(a) Heighttowidthratioofbuildingdoesnotexceed2.
(b) Crosswallsactingasstiffeningwallscontinuousfromouterwalltoouterwallorouterwalltoa
loadbearinginnerwall,andofthicknessandspacingasgiveninTable6.7.9areprovided.
Note:Ifstiffeningwallorwallsthatareinaline,areinterruptedbyopenings,lengthofsolidwallorwallsinthezoneofthe
wallthatistobestiffenedshallbeatleastonefifthoftheheightoftheopening.
(c) Floorsandroofeitherbearoncrosswallsorareproperlyanchoredtothosewallssuchthatall
lateralloadsaresafelytransmittedtothosewallsandthroughthemtothefoundation.
(d) Cross walls are built jointly with the bearing walls and jointly mortared, or interconnected by
toothing.
Note:Cross walls may be anchored to walls to be supported by ties of noncorrosive metal of minimum section 6 x 35 mm and
length60mmwithendsbentatleast50mm,maximumverticalspacingoftiesbeing1.2m.
Table6.7.9:ThicknessandSpacingofStiffeningWalls
StiffeningWall*
Thicknessof
Load
BearingWallto
be
StoreyHeight
not
toExceed
Thicknessnotlessthan Maximum
spacing
Stiffened
(mm)

(m)
1to3
storeys
(mm)
4and5
storeys
(mm)

(m)
100
200
300
above300
3.2
3.2
3.4
5.0
100
100
100
100

200
200
200
4.5
6.0
8.0
8.0
*Storeyheightandmaximumspacingasgivenarecentretocentredimensions.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6380 Vol.2
7.4.4.2 In case of walls exceeding 8.0 m in length, safety and adequacy of lateral supports shall always be
checkedbystructuralanalysis.
7.4.4.3 Atrussedroofingmaynotprovidelateralsupportunlessspecialmeasuresareadoptedtobraceand
anchor the roofing. However, in case of residential and similar buildings of conventional design with
trussedroofinghavingcrosswalls,itmaybeassumedthatstabilityrequirementsaremetbythecross
wallsandstructuralanalysisforstabilitymaybedispensedwith.
7.4.4.4 In case of walls exceeding 8.0 m in length, safety and adequacy of lateral supports shall always be
checkedbystructuralanalysis.
7.4.4.5 Atrussedroofingmaynotprovidelateralsupportunlessspecialmeasuresareadoptedtobraceand
anchor the roofing. However, in case of residential and similar buildings of conventional design with
trussedroofinghavingcrosswalls,itmaybeassumedthatstabilityrequirementsaremetbythecross
wallsandstructuralanalysisforstabilitymaybedispensedwith.
7.4.4.6 In case of external walls of basement and plinth, stability requirements of Sec 7.4.4 may be
consideredtobesatisfiedif:
(a) Bricksusedinbasementandplinthhaveaminimumcrushingstrengthof5N/mm
2
andmortar
usedinmasonryisofTypeM
3
orbetter,
(b) Clearheightofceilinginbasementdoesnotexceed2.6m,
(c) In the zone of action of soil pressure on basement walls, traffic load excluding any surcharge
duetoadjoiningbuildingsdoesnotexceed5kN/m
2
,
(d) MinimumthicknessofbasementwallsisinaccordancewithTable6.7.10.
In case there is surcharge on basement walls from adjoining buildings, thickness of basement walls
shallbebasedonstructuralanalysis.
Table6.7.10:MinimumThicknessofBasementWall
MinimumThicknessof
BasementWall
(Nominal),mm
HeightoftheGroundaboveBasement
FloorLevelwithWallLoading
(PermanentLoad),m
Lessthan50kN/m Morethan50kN/m
375
250
2.0
1.4
2.5
1.8

7.4.4.7 FreeStandingWall
Free standing walls, subject to wind pressure or seismic forces shall be designed on the basis of
permissible tensile stress in masonry or stability consideration. However in Seismic Zones 1 and 2,
free standing walls may be proportioned without making any design calculations with the help of
Table6.7.11providedthemortarusedisoftypenotleanerthanM3.ForparapetwallseeSec7.4.9.4.
7.4.5 StructuralContinuity
Intersectingstructuralelementsintendedtoactasaunitshallbeanchoredtogethertoresistthedesignforces.
Wallsshallbeanchoredtogethertoallfloors,roofsorotherelementswhichprovidelateralsupportforthewall.
Where floorsor roofs are designed to transmit horizontal forces to walls, the anchorages to the walls shall be
designedtoresistthehorizontalforces.
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6381
Table6.7.11:HeighttoThicknessRatioofFreeStandingWall
DesignWindPressure,N/m
2
HeighttoThicknessRatio
Upto300
600
900
1100
10
7
5
4
Note: Heightistobetakenfrom150mmbelowgroundlevelortopoffooting/foundation
block,whicheverishigher,anduptothetopedgeofthewall.
7.4.5.1 MultiwytheWalls
All wythes shall be bonded by grout or tied together by corrosion resistant wall ties or joint
reinforcementasfollows:
(a) Wall Ties in Cavity Wall Construction: Wall ties shall be of sufficient length to engage all
wythes. The portion of the wall ties within the wythe shall be completely embedded in
mortar or grout. The ends of the wall ties shall be bent to 90 degree angles with an
extensionnotlessthan50mmlong.Walltiesnotcompletelyembeddedinmortarorgrout
betweenwythesshallbeasinglepiecewitheachendengagedineachwythe.
Thereshallbeatleastone6mmdiameterwalltieforeach0.45m
2
ofwallarea.Forcavity
wallsinwhichthewidthofthecavityisgreaterthan75mm,butnotmorethan115mm,at
leastone6mmdiameterwalltieforeach0.3m
2
ofwallareashallbeprovided.
Ties in alternate courses shall be staggered. The vertical distance between ties shall not
exceed600mm.Thehorizontaldistancebetweentiesshallnotexceed900mm.
Additional ties spaced not more than 900 mm apart shall be provided around and within
300mmoftheopening.
Wall ties of different size and spacing may be used if they provide equivalent strength
betweenwythes.

(b) WallTiesforGroutedMultiwytheConstruction:Thetwowythesshallbebondedtogether
with at least 6 mm diameter steel wall ties for each 0.20 m
2
of area. Wall ties of different
sizeandspacingmaybeusediftheyprovideequivalentstrengthbetweenwythes.
(c) Joint Reinforcement: Prefabricated joint reinforcement for masonry walls shall have a
minimumofonecrosswireofatleast3mmdiametersteelforeach0.2m
2
ofwallarea.The
verticalspacingofthejointreinforcementshallnotexceed400mm.Thelongitudinalwires
shallbethoroughlyembeddedinthebedjointmortar.Thejointreinforcementshallengage
allwythes.
Wherethespacebetweentiedwythesisfilledwithgroutormortar,theallowablestresses
and other provisions for masonry bonded walls shall apply. Where the space is not filled,
tiedwallsshallconformtotheallowablestress,lateralsupport,thickness(excludingcavity),
heightandtierequirementsofcavitywalls.
7.4.6 JointReinforcementandProtectionofTies
The minimum mortar cover between ties or joint reinforcement and any exposed face shall be 15 mm. The
thicknessofgroutormortarbetweenmasonryunitsandjointreinforcementshallnotbelessthan6mm,except
thatsmallerdiameterreinforcementorboltsmaybeplacedinbedjointswhichareatleasttwiceasthickasthe
diameterofthereinforcement.
7.4.7 PipesandConduits
Pipeorconduitshallnotbeembeddedinanymasonrysoastoreducethecapacitytolessthanthatnecessary
forrequiredstabilityorrequiredfireprotection,exceptthefollowing:
(a) Rigid electrical conduit may be embedded in structural masonry when their location has been
detailedontheapprovedplan.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6382 Vol.2
(b) Anypipeorconduitmaypassverticallyorhorizontallythroughanymasonrybymeansofasleeve
atleastlargeenoughtopassanyhuborcouplingonthepipeline.Suchsleevesshallnotbeplaced
closer than three diameters, centre to centre, nor shall they unduly impair the strength of
construction.
(c) Placementofpipesorconduitsinunfilledcoresofhollowunitmasonryshallnotbeconsideredas
embedment.
7.4.8 LoadsandLoadCombination
7.4.8.1 DesignLoads
All design loads and other forces to be taken for the design of masonry structures shall conform to
Chapter2,Loads.
7.4.8.2 LoadDispersion
Theangleofdispersionofverticalloadonwallsshallbetakenasnotmorethan30
o
fromthevertical.
7.4.8.3 DistributionofConcentratedVerticalLoadsinWalls
The length of wall, laid up in running bond, which may be considered capable of working at the
maximum allowable compressive stresses to resist vertical concentrated loads, shall not exceed the
centretocentredistancebetweensuchloads,northewidthofbearingareaplusfourtimesthewall
thickness. Concentrated vertical loads shall not be assumed distributed across continuous vertical
mortar or control joints unless elements designed to distribute the concentrated vertical loads are
employed.
7.4.8.4 LoadsonNonbearingWall
Masonrywallsusedasinteriorpartitionorasexteriorsurfacesofbuildingwhichdonotcarryvertical
loadsimposedbyotherelementsofthebuildingshallbedesignedtocarrytheirownweightplusany
superimposedfinishandlateralforces.Bondingoranchorageofnonbearingwallsshallbeadequate
tosupportthewallsandtotransferlateralforcestothesupportingstructures.
7.4.8.5 LoadCombinations
LoadcombinationfordesignofmasonrystructuresshallconformtotherequirementsofSec2.7.5.1.
7.4.9 MinimumDesignDimensions
7.4.9.1 MinimumThicknessofLoadBearingWalls
Thenominalthicknessofmasonrybearingwallsinbuildingshallnotbelessthan250mm.
Exception:
Stiffenedsolidmasonrybearingwallsinonestoreybuildingsmayhaveaminimumeffectivethicknessof165mmwhennot
over3minheight,providedthatwhengableconstructionisusedanadditional1.5mheightmaybepermittedatthepeakof
thegable.
7.4.9.2 VariationinThickness
Whenachangeinthicknessduetominimumthicknessrequirementsoccursbetweenfloorlevels,the
greaterthicknessshallbecarrieduptothehigherfloorlevel.
7.4.9.3 DecreaseinThickness
Whenwallsofmasonryofhollowunitsormasonrybondedhollowwallsaredecreasedinthickness,a
courseorcoursesofsolidmasonryshallbeconstructedbetweenthewallsbelowandthethinnerwall
above, or special units or construction shall be used to transmit the loads from wythes to the walls
below.
7.4.9.4 ParapetWall
Parapet walls shall be at least 200 mm thick and height shall not exceed 4 times the thickness. The
parapetwallshallnotbethinnerthanthewallbelow.
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6383
7.5 DESIGNOFUNREINFORCEDMASONRY
7.5.1 General
The requirements of this section are applicable to unreinforced masonry in addition to the requirements of
Sec7.4.
7.5.2 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoAxialCompression
The stresses due to compressive forces applied at the centroid of any load bearing wall, column and pilaster
maybecomputedbyEq(7.5.1)belowassuminguniformdistributionovertheeffectivearea.

e
a
A
P
f =
7.5.1
7.5.3
DesignofMembersSubjectedtoCombinedBendingandAxialCompression
(a) Compressive stresses due to combined bending and axial load shall satisfy the requirements of
Sec7.3.5.
(b) Resultant tensile stress due to combined bending and axial load shall not exceed the allowable
flexuraltensilestress,FtasspecifiedinSec7.3.
7.5.4 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoFlexure
StressesduetoflexurecalculatedbyEq(7.5.2)belowshallnotexceedthevaluesgiveninSec7.3.5.
I
Mc
f
b
=
7.5.2
7.5.5 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoShear
ShearcalculationsinflexuralmembersandshearwallsshallbebasedonEq(7.5.3)below.
e
v
A
V
f =
7.5.3
7.5.6 DesignofArches
Geometrical form and the crosssectional dimensions of masonry arch shall be selected such that the line of
thrustatanysectionofthearchiskeptwithinthemiddlethirdofthesectionofthearchrib.Theelastictheory
of arches shall be permitted for the analysis of unreinforced masonry arches. All supports of arches shall be
capableofdevelopingtherequiredhorizontalthrustwithoutsufferingunacceptabledisplacements.Everyarch
mustbedesignedtoresistthestressesduetothefollowingloads:
(a) GravityLoads:
i. Deadloadsshallbeplacedinconformitywiththeiractualdistribution.
ii. Liveloadsshallbepositionedtocoverentirespanorpartofthespanasnecessaryto
produce the maximum stresses at the crown, springing and all other sections of the
archrib.
(b) Loadsduetotemperaturechange.
(c) Shrinkageloadduetosettingandhardening.
(d) Shorteningofarchribunderthrustcausedbyloads.
7.5.7 FootingsandCorbels
Theslopeoffootingandcorbelling(measuredfromthehorizontaltothefaceofthecorbelledsurface)shallnot
belessthan60degrees.
The maximum horizontal projection of corbelling from the plane of the wall shall be such that stress at any
sectiondoesnotexceedtheallowablevalue.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6384 Vol.2
7.6 DESIGNOFREINFORCEDMASONRY
7.6.1 General
The requirements of this section are in addition to those specified in Sec 7.4 and are applicable to reinforced
masonry.Plainbarslargerthan6mmindiametershallnotbeused.
7.6.1.1 Assumptions
Thefollowingassumptionsshallbeapplicableforthissection.
(a) Masonrycarriesnotensilestress.
(b) Reinforcementiscompletelysurroundedbyandbondedtomasonrymaterialsothattheywork
togetherasahomogeneousmaterialwithintherangeofworkingstresses.
7.6.2 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoAxialCompression
Stresses due to compressive forces applied at the centroid of load bearing wall, column and pilaster may be
computed assuming uniform distribution over the effective area. Stress shall be calculated from Eq(7.6.1)
below:
e
a
A
P
f =
7.6.1
7.6.3 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoCombinedBendingandAxialCompression
Stress due to combined bending and axial loads shall satisfy the requirements of Sec 7.3.5. Columns and walls
subjectedtobendingwithorwithoutaxialloadsshallmeetallapplicablerequirementsforflexuraldesign.
The design of walls with an (h
/
/t) ratiolarger than 30shall be basedon forcesand moments determinedfrom
analysis of structure. Such analysis shall take into account influence of axial loads and variable moment of
inertia on member stiffness and fixed end moments, effect of deflections on moments and forces, and the
effectsofdurationofloads.
7.6.4 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoShearForce
Shearingstressesinflexuralmembersandshearwallsshallbecomputedby
bjd
V
f
v
=
7.6.2
When the computed shear stress exceeds the allowable value, web reinforcement shall be provided and
designedtocarrythetotalshearforce.Bothverticalandhorizontalshearstressesshallbeconsidered.Thearea
requiredforshearreinforcementplacedperpendiculartothelongitudinalreinforcementshallbecomputedby
Eq(7.6.3)below:
d F
sV
A
s
v
=
7.6.3
Spacing of vertical shear reinforcement shall not exceed d/2, nor 600 mm. Inclined shear reinforcement shall
have a maximum spacing of 0.375 d (1+ cot ), but not greater than 600 mm, where is the acute angle
betweeninclinedbarandthehorizontal.
7.6.5 DesignofMembersSubjectedtoFlexuralStress
7.6.5.1 RectangularElements
Rectangularflexuralelementsshallbedesignedinaccordancewiththefollowingequationsorother
methodsbasedonthesimplifiedassumptions.
(a) Compressivestressinthemasonry:

=
jk bd
M
f
b
2
2 7.6.4
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6385
(b) Tensilestressinthelongitudinalreinforcement:
jd A
M
f
s
s
=
7.6.5
(c) Designcoefficients:
( ) [ ] np np np k + =
2 / 1
2
2
7.6.6
or
b
s
nf
f
k
+
=
1
1
7.6.7
3
1
k
j =
7.6.8
7.6.5.2 NonrectangularSections
Flexural elements of nonrectangular crosssection shall be designed in accordance with the
assumptionsgiveninSec7.4.2.1and7.6.1.1.
7.6.5.3 LateralSupport
The clear distance between lateral supports of a beam shall not exceed 32 times the least depth of
compressionarea.
7.6.5.4 EffectiveWidth
Incomputingflexural stresses in walls wherereinforcement occurs,the effective width assumed for
running bond masonry shall not exceed 6 times the nominal wall thickness or the centre to centre
distancebetweenreinforcement.Wherestackbondisused,theeffectivewidthshallnotexceed3
times the nominal wall thickness or the centre to centre distance between reinforcement or the
lengthofoneunit,unlessgroutedsolidusingopenendedjoints.
7.6.5.5 Bond
In flexural members in which tensile reinforcement is parallel to the compressive face, the bond
stressshallbecomputedbytheformula:

=
jd
V
u
o
7.6.9
7.6.6 ReinforcementRequirementsandDetails
7.6.6.1 ColumnReinforcement
(a) Vertical Reinforcement: The area of vertical reinforcement shall not be less than 0.005 A
e

andnotmorethan0.04A
e
.Atleastfour10mm barsshallbeprovided.
(b) Lateral Ties: All longitudinal bars for columns shall be enclosed by lateral ties. Lateral
supportshallbeprovidedtothelongitudinalbarsbythecornerofacompletetiehavingan
included angle of not more than 135 degrees or by a hook at the end of a tie. The corner
bars shall have such support provided by a complete tie enclosing the longitudinal bars.
Alternatelongitudinalbarsshallhavesuchlateralsupportprovidedbytiesandnobarshall
befartherthan150mmfromsuchalaterallysupportedbar.
Lateral ties and longitudinal bars shall be placed not less than 40 mm and not more than
125mm,fromthesurfaceofthecolumn.Lateraltiesmaybeagainstthelongitudinalbarsor
placed in the horizontal bed joint if the requirements of Sec 4.4.6 are met. Spacing of ties
shallnotbemorethan16timeslongitudinalbardiameter,48timestiebardiameterorthe
leastdimensionofthecolumnbutnotmorethan450mm.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6386 Vol.2
Tiesshallbeatleast6mmindiameterfor22mmdiameterorsmallerlongitudinalbarsand
10 mm in diameter for larger longitudinal bars. Ties less than 10 mm in diameter may be
usedforlongitudinalbarslargerthan22mmindiameter,providedthetotalcrosssectional
area of such smaller ties crossing a longitudinal plane is equal to that of the larger ties at
theirrequiredspacing.
(c) AnchorBoltTies:Additionaltiesshallbeprovidedaroundanchorboltswhicharesetinthe
top of the column. Such ties shall engage at least four bolts or, alternatively at least four
vertical column bars or a combination of bolts and bars totaling four in number. Such ties
shall be located within the top 125 mm of the column and shall provide a total of 250
square millimeters or more in crosssectional area. The upper most ties shall be within 50
mmofthetopofthecolumn.
7.6.6.2 MaximumReinforcementSize
Themaximumsizeofreinforcingbarsshallbe35mm.Maximumsteelareaincellshallbe6percent
ofthecellareawithoutsplicesand12percentofcellareawithsplices.
7.6.6.3 SpacingofLongitudinalReinforcement
The clear distance between parallel bars, except in columns, shall not be less than the nominal
diameter of the bars or 25 mm, except that bars in a splice may be in contact. This clear distance
requirement applies to the clear distance between a contact splice and adjacent splices or bars. The
minimum clear distance between parallel bars in columns shall be two and onehalf times the bar
diameter.
The clear distance between the surface of a bar and any surface of a masonry unit shall not be less
than 6 mm for fine grout and 12 mm for coarse grout. Cross webs of hollow units may be used as
supportforhorizontalreinforcement.
All reinforcing bars, except joint reinforcing, shall be completely embedded in mortar or grout and
haveaminimumcover,includingthemasonryunit,asspecifiedbelow:
(a) 20mmwhennotexposedtoweather
(b) 40mmwhenexposedtoweather
(c) 50mmwhenexposedtosoil

7.6.6.4 AnchorageofFlexuralReinforcement
(a) The tension or compression in any bar at any section must be developed on each side of
that section by the required development length. The development length of the bar may
be achieved by a combination of an embedment length, anchorage or, for tension only,
hooks.
Therequireddevelopmentlengthfordeformedbarsordeformedwiresshallbecalculated
by:
s b d
f d 29 . 0 = l
forbarsintension

(7.6.10)
s b d
f d 22 . 0 = l

forbarsincompression (7.6.11)
Developmentlengthforplainbarsshallbe2.0timesthelengthcalculatedbyEq(7.6.10).

(b) Exceptatsupports,oratthefreeendofcantilevers,everyreinforcingbarshallbeextended
beyondthepointatwhichitisnolongerneededtoresisttensilestressforadistanceequal
to12bardiametersorthedepthoftheflexuralmember,whicheverisgreater.Noflexural
barsshallbeterminatedinatensilezoneunlessoneofthefollowingconditionsissatisfied:
i) The shear is not over onehalf of that permitted, including allowance for shear
reinforcement,ifany.
ii) Additional shear reinforcement in excess of that required is provided each way
fromthecutoffadistanceequaltothedepthofthebeam.Theshearreinforcement
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6387
spacingshallnotexceedd/8r
b
,wherer
b
istheratiooftheareaofbarscutofftothe
totalareaofbarsatthesection.
iii) The continuing bars provide double the area required for flexure at that point or
doubletheperimeterrequiredforreinforcingbond.
(c) Atleastonethirdofthetotalreinforcementprovidedfornegativemomentatthesupport
shall be extended beyond the extreme position of the point of inflection a distance
sufficient to develop one half the allowable stress in the bar, one sixteenth of the clear
span,orthedepthdofthemember,whicheverisgreater.
(d) Tensile reinforcement of negative moment in any span of a continuous restrained or
cantilever beam, or in any member of a rigid frame, shall be adequately anchored by
reinforcingbond,hooksormechanicalanchorsinorthroughthesupportingmember.
(e) Atleastonethirdoftherequiredpositivemomentreinforcementinsimplebeamsoratthe
freely supported end of continuous beams shall extend along the same face of the beam
into the support at least 150 mm. At least one fourth of the required positive moment
reinforcementatthecontinuousendofcontinuousbeamsshallextendalongthesameface
ofthebeamintothesupportatleast150mm.
(f) Compression reinforcement in flexural members shall be anchored by ties or stirrups not
less than 6 mm in diameter, spaced not farther apart than 16 bar diameters or 48 tie
diameterswhicheverissmaller.Suchtiesorstirrupsshallbeusedthroughoutthedistance
wherecompressionsteelisrequired.
(g) Inregionsofmomentwherethedesigntensilestressesinthesteelaregreaterthan80per
centoftheallowablesteeltensilestress(F
s
),thelaplengthofsplicesshallbeincreasednot
less than 50 per cent of the minimum required length. Other equivalent means of stress
transfertoaccomplishthesame50percentincreasemaybeused.
7.6.6.5 AnchorageofShearReinforcement
(a) Singleseparatebarsusedasshearreinforcementshallbeanchoredateachendbyoneofthe
followingmethods:
i) Hookingtightlyaroundthelongitudinalreinforcementthrough180degrees.
ii) Embedment above or below the middepth of the beam on the compression side a
distancesufficienttodevelopthestressinthebarforplaneordeformedbars.
iii) Byastandardhook(seeSec4.6.6.6)consideredasdeveloping50N/mm
2
,plusembedment
sufficient to develop the remainder of the stress to which the bars are subject. The
effectiveembeddedlengthshallnotbeassumedtoexceedthedistancebetweenthemid
depthofthebeamandthetangentofthehook.
(b) The ends of bars forming single U or multiple U stirrups shall be anchored by one of the
methods specified above or shall be bent through an angle of at least 90 degrees tightly
aroundalongitudinalreinforcingbarnotlessindiameterthanthestirrupbar,andshallproject
beyondthebendatleast12diametersofthestirrup.
(c) TheloopsorclosedendsofsingleUormultipleUstirrupsshallbeanchoredbybendingaround
thelongitudinalreinforcementthroughanangleofatleast90degreesandprojectbeyondthe
endofthebendatleast12diametersofthestirrup.
7.6.6.6 Hooks
(a) Theterm"standardhook"shallmeanoneofthefollowing:
i. A 180 degree turn plus an extension of at least 4 bar diameters but not less than 65
mmatthefreeendofthebar.
ii. 90 degree turn plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free end of the
bar.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6388 Vol.2
iii. For stirrup and tie anchorage only either a 90 degree or a 135 degree turn, plus an
extension of at least 6 bar diameters but not less than 65 mm at the free end of the
bar.
(b) The diameter of bend measuredonthe insideof the barother thanstirrupsand ties, shall
notbelessthanthatsetforthinTable6.4.12.
(c) Inside diameter of bend for 12 mm diameter or smaller stirrups and ties shall not be less
than4bardiameters.Insidediameterofbendfor16mmdiameterorlargerstirrupsandties
shallnotbelessthanthatgiveninTable6.4.12.
(d) Hooks shall not be permitted in the tension portion of any beam, except at the ends of
simple or cantilever beams or at the freely supported ends of continuous or restrained
beams.
Table6.4.12:MinimumDiameterofBend
BarDiameter MinimumDiameterofBend
1 6mmthrough25mm
2 8mm through35mm
6bardiameters
8bardiameters
(e) Hooksshallnotbeassumedtocarryaloadwhichwouldproduceatensilestressinthebar
greaterthan50N/mm
2
.
(f) Hooksshallnotbeconsideredeffectiveinaddingtothecompressiveresistanceofbars.
(g) Anymechanicaldevicecapableofdevelopingthestrengthofthebarwithoutdamagetothe
masonry may be used in lieu of a hook. Data must be presented to show the adequacy of
suchdevices.
7.6.6.7 Splices
The amount of lap of lapped splices shall be sufficient to transfer the allowable stress of the
reinforcement as in Sec 4.6.6.4. In no case shall the length of the lapped splice be less than 30 bar
diametersforcompressionand40bardiametersfortension.
Welded or mechanical connections shall develop 125 per cent of the specified yield strength of the
barintension,exceptforconnectionsofcompressionbarsincolumnsthatarenotpartoftheseismic
systemandarenotsubjecttoflexure,wherethecompressivestrengthonlyneedbedeveloped.
When adjacent splices in grouted masonry are separated by 75 mm or less, the lap length shall be
increasedby30percentorthesplicemaybestaggeredatleast24bardiameterswithnoincreasein
laplength.
7.7 StrengthDesignofSlenderWallsandShearWalls
7.7.1 DesignofSlenderWalls
In lieu of the procedure set forth in Sec 4.6, the procedures prescribed in this section, which consider the
slenderness of walls by representing effects of axial forces and deflection in calculation of moments, may be
usedwhentheverticalloadstressatthelocationofmaximummomentcomputedbyEq(7.7.1)doesnotexceed

0.04 f
m
.Thevalueof
f
m
shallnotexceed40N/mm2.
m
g
f w
f
A
P P

+
04 . 0
7.7.1
Slendermasonrywallsshallhaveaminimumnominalthicknessof150mm.
7.7.1.1 SlenderWallDesignProcedure
(a) Maximum Reinforcement: The reinforcement ratio shall not exceed 0.5
b
, where
b
is the
balancedsteelratio.
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6389
(b) Moment and Deflection Calculation: All moments and deflections of slender walls shall be
calculatedbasedonsimplesupportconditionsattopandbottom.Forothersupportandfixity
conditions, moments and deflections shall be calculated using established principles of
mechanics.
7.7.1.2 StrengthDesign
(a) Loads:FactoredloadsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithChapter2,Loads.

(b) RequiredMoment:Requiredmomentandaxialforceshallbedeterminedatthemidheight
ofthewallandshallbeusedfordesign.Thefactoredmoment,M
u
,atthemidheightofthe
wallshallbedeterminedbyEq(7.7.2).

( )
u uf uw u
u
u
P P
e
P
h w
M + + + =
2 8
2

(7.7.2)
where:

u
= horizontal deflection at midheight under factored load; P Delta effects shall be included
indeflectioncalculation.
e = eccentricityofP
u

P
u
= axialloadatmidheightofwall,includingtributarywallweight.
=
uf uw
P P +

(c) DesignStrength:Designstrengthinflexureisthenominalmomentstrength,M
n
,multiplied
bythestrengthreductionfactor,andshallequalorexceedthefactoredmoment,M
u
.
n u
M M
7.7.3
where:
M
n
= nominalmomentstrength
= ( ) 2 a d f A
y se

A
se
= effectiveareaofsteel
=
,
y
u y s
f
P f A +
and
a = depthofstressblockduetofactoredloads.
=
b f
f A P
m
y s u

+
85 . 0

Thestrengthreductionfactorforflexureshallbe0.80.
(d) Design Assumptions: The following are the design assumptions for calculation of nominal
strength.
i) Nominal strength of singly reinforced masonry wall crosssections subject to
combined flexure and axial load shall be based on applicable conditions of
equilibriumandcompatibilityofstrains.
ii) Straininreinforcementandmasonrywallsshallbeassumeddirectlyproportionalto
thedistancefromtheneutralaxis.
iii) Maximum usable strain at extreme masonry compression fibre shall be assumed
equalto0.003.
iv) Stressinreinforcementbelowspecifiedyieldstrengthf
y
shallbetakenasE
s
timessteel
strain. For strains greater than that corresponding to f
y
, stress in reinforcement shall
beconsideredindependentofstrainandequaltof
y
.
v) Tensilestrengthofmasonrywallsshallbeneglectedinflexuralcalculationsofstrength,
exceptfordeflectioncalculation.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6390 Vol.2
vi) Relationship between masonry compressive stress and masonry strain may be
assumedtoberectangularasdefinedbythefollowing:
1. Masonry stress of 0.85
f
m
shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an
equivalent compression zone bounded by edges of the crosssection and a
straightlinelocatedparalleltotheneutralaxisatadistancea=0.85cfromthe
fibreofmaximumcompressivestrain.
2. Distancecfromfibreofmaximumstraintotheneutralaxisshallbemeasured
inadirectionperpendiculartothataxis.
7.7.1.3 DeflectionCalculation
The midheight deflection,
s
, under service lateral and vertical loads (without load factors) shall be
limitedto:

s
0.007h 7.7.4
Themidheightdeflectionshallbecomputedby:

g m
s
s
I E
h M
48
5
2
=

whenM
ser
M
cr
(7.7.5)

( )
cr m
cr ser
g m
cr
s
I E
h M M
I E
h M
48
5
48
5
2 2

+ =

when n ser cr
M M M < <

(7.7.6)
ThecrackingmomentstrengthofthewallM
cr
shallbedeterminedby:

M
cr
= Sf
r
7.7.7
Themodulusofrupture,f
r
,shallbedeterminedformTable6.7.13.
Table6.7.13:ValuesoftheModulusofRupture,r
TypeofMasonry FullyGrouted PartiallyGrouted
SolidMasonry

HollowUnitMasonry

65 . 0 17 . 0
m
f
N/mm
2

2 . 1 33 . 0
m
f
N/mm
2

Notallowed

65 . 0 21 . 0
m
f
N/mm
2

7.7.2 DesignofShearWalls
Based on ultimate strength design, the procedures described below may be used as an alternative to the
procedure specified in Sec 4.6 for the design of reinforced hollow unit masonry shear walls. Provisions for
qualitycontrolduringconstructionoftheshearwallarespecifiedinSec7.3.4
7.7.2.1 RequiredStrength
The required strength to resist different combinations of loads shall be determined in accordance
withSec2.7.5.1.
7.7.2.2 DesignStrength
Shearwallsshallbeproportionedsuchthatthedesignstrengthexceedstherequiredstrength.Design
strength in terms of axial force, shear force and moment provided by the shear wall shall be
computedasthenominalstrengthmultipliedbythestrengthreductionfactor.
Strengthreductionfactorshallbeasfollows:
(a) =0.65foraxialloadandaxialloadwithflexure
Formemberswithf
y
lessthan410N/mm
2
andwithsymmetricalreinforcement,may
beincreasedlinearlyto0.85asP
n
decreasesfrom

0.10 f
m
A
e
or0.25Pbtozero.
ForsolidgroutedwallsP
b
maybecalculatedby
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6391
b m b
ba f P = 85 . 0
7.7.8

where
( ) [ ]d a
s y mu mu
b
E f e e + = 85 . 0
(b) =0.60forshear
The shear strength reduction factor may be 0.80 for any shear wall when its nominal
shearstrengthexceedstheshearcorrespondingtodevelopmentofitsnominalflexural
strengthforthefactoredloadcombination.
7.7.2.3 DesignAssumptionsforNominalStrength
(a) Nominal strength of shear wall crosssections shall be based on assumptions specified in
Sec7.7.1.2(d).
(b) Themaximumusablestraine
mu
,attheextrememasonrycompressionfibreshallnotexceed
0.003.
(c)
f
m
shallnotbelessthan7N/mm
2
orgreaterthan20N/mm
2
.
7.7.2.4 AxialStrength
ThenominalaxialstrengthofshearwallssupportingaxialloadsonlyshallbecalculatedbyEq(7.7.9)
( )
s y s e m o
A f A A f P + = 85 . 0
(7.7.9)
TheshearwallshallbedesignedfortheaxialstrengthP
u
,suchthat
( )
o u
P P 80 . 0
7.7.10
7.7.2.5 ShearStrength
(a) Thenominalshearstrengthshallbedeterminedbytheprovisionsasspecifiedin(b)or
(c)below.ThemaximumnominalshearstrengthvaluesaregiveninTable6.7.14.
Table6.7.14:MaximumNominalShearStrengthValues
Vd
M
*
m e
f A
n

0.25
1.00
72.0
48.0
* MisthemaximumbendingmomentthatoccurssimultaneouslywiththeshearloadVatthe
sectionunderconsideration.InterpolationmaybebystraightlineforM/Vdvaluesbetween0.25
and1.00.
(b) Thenominalshearstrengthofshearwallsexceptforshearwallsspecifiedin(c)below
shallbedeterminedbyEq(7.7.11).

s m n
V V V + =

(7.7.11)
where:

( )
m mv d m
f A C V = 083 . 0
(7.7.12)
ThevalueofC
d
inEq(7.7.12)isgivenas:
25 . 0 for 4 . 2 =
Vd
M
C
d

0 . 1 for 2 . 1 =
Vd
M

and
Part6
StructuralDesign

6392 Vol.2
y n mv s
f A V =
(7.7.13)
(c) For a shear wall whose nominal shear strength exceeds the shear corresponding to
developmentofitsnominalflexuralstrength,twoshearregionsexist.
i) For all crosssections within the region defined by the base of the shear wall
and a plane at a distance L
w
above the base of the shear wall, the nominal
shearstrengthshallbedeterminedbyEq(7.7.14)
y n mv n
f A V =
(7.7.14)
The required shear strength for this region shall be calculated at a distance
L
w
/2 above the base of the shear wall but not to exceed onehalf storey
height.
ii) For the other region, the nominal shear strength of the shear wall shall be
determinedbyEq(7.7.11).
7.7.2.6 Reinforcement
Reinforcementshallbeinaccordancewiththefollowing:
(a) MinimumreinforcementshallbeprovidedinaccordancewithSec7.8.5.1forallseismicareas
usingthismethodofanalysis.
(b) Whentheshearwallfailuremodeisinflexure,thenominalflexuralstrengthoftheshearwall
shallbeatleast1.8timesthecrackingmomentstrengthofafullygroutedwallor3.0timesthe
crackingmomentstrengthofapartiallygroutedwallasobtainedfromEq(7.7.7).
(c) AllcontinuousreinforcementshallbeanchoredorsplicedinaccordancewithSec7.6.6.4with
f
s
=0.5f
y

(d) Verticalreinforcementshallnotbelessthan50percentofthehorizontalreinforcement.
(e) SpacingofhorizontalreinforcementwithintheregiondefinedinSec7.7.2.5(c)shallnotexceed
threetimesthenominalwallthicknessor600mm,whicheverissmaller.
7.7.2.7 BoundaryMember
Boundarymembersshallbeasfollows:
(a) The need for boundary members at boundaries of shear wall shall be determined using the
provisionssetforthin(b)or(c)below.
(b) Boundary members shall be provided when the failure mode is flexure and the maximum
extreme fibre stress exceeds 0.2
f
m
. The boundary members may be discontinued where the
calculated compressive stresses are less than 0.15
f
m
. Stresses may be calculated for the
factoredforcesusingalinearlyelasticmodelandgrosssectionproperties.
(c) When the failure mode is flexure, boundary member shall be provided to confine all vertical
reinforcementwhosecorrespondingmasonrycompressivestressexceeds0.4
f
m
.

(d) Theminimumlengthoftheboundarymembershallbe3timesthethicknessofthewall.
(e) Boundarymembersshallbeconfinedwithminimumof10mmdiameterbarsatamaximumof
200mmspacingorequivalentwithinthegroutedcoreandwithintheregiondefinedbythebase
oftheshearwallandaplaneatadistanceL
w
abovethebaseoftheshearwall.
7.8 EarthquakeResistantDesign
7.8.1 General
All masonry structures constructed in the Seismic Zones 2, 3 and 4 shown in Fig 2.5.1 shall be designed in
accordancewiththeprovisionsofthisSection.
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6393
7.8.2 Loads
Seismic forces on masonry structures shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Sec 2.5 of this
Part.
7.8.3 Materials
(a) Well burnt clay bricks and concrete hollow blocks having a crushing strength not less than
12N/mm
2
shallbeused.
(b) MortarnotleanerthanM
3
shallbeusedformasonryconstructions.
7.8.4 ProvisionsforSeismicZone2and3
7.8.4.1 WallReinforcement
Verticalreinforcementofatleast12mm shallbeprovidedcontinuouslyfromsupporttosupportat
each corner, at each side of each opening, at the ends of walls and at a maximum spacing of 1.2 m
horizontallythroughoutthewall.Horizontalreinforcementnotlessthan12mmshallbeprovided:
(a) at the bottom and top of wall openings and shall extend at least 40 bar diameters, with a
minimumof600mm,pasttheopening,
(b) continuouslyatstructurallyconnectedroofandfloorlevelsandatthetopofwalls,
(c) atthebottomofthewallorinthetopofthefoundationswhendowelledtothewall,
(d) at maximum spacing of 3.0 m unless uniformly distributed joint reinforcement is provided.
Reinforcementatthetopandbottomofopeningswhencontinuousinthewallmaybeusedin
determiningthemaximumspacingspecifiedinitem(a)above.
7.8.4.2 StackBond
Where stack bond is used, the minimum horizontal reinforcement ratio shall be 0.0007bt. This ratio
shallbesatisfiedbyuniformlydistributedjointreinforcementorbyhorizontalreinforcementspaced
notmorethan1.2mandfullyembeddedingroutormortar.
7.8.4.3 Columns
ColumnsshallbereinforcedasspecifiedinSec7.6.6.1.
7.8.5 ProvisionsforSeismicZone4
All masonry structures built in Seismic Zone 4 shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
requirementsforSeismicZone2andwiththefollowingadditionalrequirementsandlimitations.
Reinforcedhollowunitstackbondconstructionwhichispartoftheseismicresistingsystemshalluseopenend
unitssothatallheadjointsaremadesolid,shallusebondbeamunitstofacilitatetheflowofgroutandshallbe
groutedsolid.
7.8.5.1 WallReinforcement
Reinforced masonry walls shall be reinforced with both vertical and horizontal reinforcement. The
sumoftheareasofhorizontalandverticalreinforcementshallbeatleast0.002timesthegrosscross
sectional area of the wall and the area of reinforcement in either direction shall not be less than
0.0007timesthegrosscrosssectionalareaofthewall.Thespacingofreinforcementshallnotexceed
1.20m.Thediameterofreinforcingbarshallnotbelessthan10mmexceptthatjointreinforcement
may be considered as part of all of the requirements for minimum reinforcement. Reinforcement
shall be continuous around wall corners and through intersections. Only reinforcement which is
continuous in the wall or element shall be considered in computing the minimum area of
reinforcement. Reinforcement with splices conforming to Sec 7.6.6.7 shall be considered as
continuousreinforcement.
7.8.5.2 ColumnReinforcement
Thespacingofcolumntiesshallbenotmorethan225mmforthefullheightofcolumnsstressedby
tensileorcompressiveaxialoverturningforcesduetotheseismicloads,and225mmforthetopsand
Part6
StructuralDesign

6394 Vol.2
bottomsofallothercolumnsforadistanceofonesixthoftheclearcolumnheight,butnotlessthan
450 mm or maximum column dimension. Tie spacing for the remaining column height shall be not
morethan16bardiameters,48tiediametersortheleastcolumndimension,butnotmorethan450
mm.
7.8.5.3 StackBond
Wherestackbondisused,theminimumhorizontalreinforcementratioshallbe0.0015bt.Ifopenend
unitsareusedandgroutedsolid,theminimumhorizontalreinforcementratioshallbe0.0007bt.
7.8.5.4 MinimumDimension
(a) BearingWalls:Thenominalthicknessofreinforcedmasonrybearingwallsshallbenotlessthan
150mm except that nominal 100 mm thick load bearing reinforced hollow clay unit masonry
wallsmaybeused,providednetareaunitstrengthexceeds55N/mm
2
,unitsarelaidinrunning
bond, bar sizes do not exceed 12 mm with no more than two bars or one splice in a cell, and
jointsareflushcut,concaveoraprotrudingVsection.
(b) Columns: The least nominal dimension of a reinforced masonry column shall be 375 mm
exceptthatiftheallowablestressesarereducedto50percentofthevaluesgiveninSec4.3,
theminimumnominaldimensionshallbe250mm.
7.8.5.5 ShearWall
(a) When calculating shear or diagonal tension stresses, shear walls which resist seismic forces
shallbedesignedtoresist1.5timestheforcesspecifiedinChapter2,Loads.
(b) The portion of the reinforcement required to resist shear shall be uniformly distributed and
shall be joint reinforcing, deformed bars, or a combination thereof. The maximum spacing of
reinforcement in each direction shall be not less than the smaller of onehalf the length or
heightoftheelementormorethan1.20m.
Joint reinforcement used in exterior walls and considered in the determination of the shear
strength of the membershall conform to the requirement "Joint Reinforcement for Masonry"
(UBC Standard No. 2415) or "Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement",(ASTM,A82).
Reinforcement required to resist inplane shear shall be terminated with a standard hook or
with an extension of proper embedment length beyond the reinforcing at the end of the wall
section. The hook or extension may be turned up, down or horizontally. Provisions shall be
made not to obstruct grout placement. Wall reinforcement terminating in columns or beams
shallbefullyanchoredintotheseelements.
(c) Multiwythegroutedmasonryshearwallsshallbedesignedwithconsiderationoftheadhesion
bond strength between the grout and masonry units. When bond strengths are not known
fromprevioustests,thebondstrengthshallbedeterminedbytest.
7.8.5.6 Hook
Thestandardhookfortieanchorageshallhaveaminimumturnof135degreesplusanextensionof
at least 6 bar diameters, but not less than 100 mm at the free end of the bar. Where the ties are
placedinthehorizontalbedjoints,thehookshallconsistofa90degreebendhavingaradiusofnot
lessthan4tiediametersplusanextensionof32tiediameters.
7.8.5.7 MortarJointsBetweenMasonryandConcrete
Concreteabuttingstructuralmasonrysuchasatstartercoursesoratwallintersectionsnotdesigned
astrueseparationjointsshallberoughenedtoafullamplitudeof`1.5mmandshallbebondedtothe
masonryaspertherequirementsofthissectionasifitweremasonry.
7.8.6 AdditionalRequirements
7.8.6.1 OpeninginBearingWalls
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6395
(a) Tops of all openings in a storey shall preferably be at the same level so that a continuous
bandcouldbeprovidedoverthem,includingthelintelsthroughoutthebuilding.
(b) The total width of the openings shall not be more than half of the length of the walls
betweentheadjacentcrosswalls,exceptasprovidedin(f)below.
(c) Theopeningshallpreferablybelocatedawayfromthecornerbyacleardistanceequaltoat
leastoneeighthoftheheightoftheopeningforSeismicZone2and3andonefourthofthe
heightforSeismicZone4.
(d) Thehorizontaldistancebetweentwoopeningsshallnotbelessthanonefourthoftheheight
oftheshorteropeningforSeismicZone2and3andonehalfoftheheightforSeismicZone4.
(e) Theverticaldistancebetweenopeningsoneabovetheothershallbenotlessthan600mm.
(f) Where openings do not comply with the requirements of (b) and (c) above, they shall be
strengthenedinaccordancewithSec7.8.6.5.
(g) Ifawindoworventilatoristobeprojectedout,theprojectionshallbeinreinforcedmasonry
orconcreteandwellanchored.
(h) Ifanopeningistallsay,forthefullheightofwall,dividingthewallintotwoportions,these
portions shall be reinforced with horizontal reinforcement of 6 mm diameter bars at not
more than 600 mm intervals, one on inner and one on outer face, properly tied to vertical
steelatjambsandcornersorjunctionsofwallswhereused.
(i) The use of arches to span over the openings is a source of weakness and shall be avoided
unlesssteeltiesareprovided.
7.8.6.2 StrengtheningArrangements
AllmasonrybuildingsshallbestrengthenedbythemethodsspecifiedinTable6.7.15.
Table6.7.15:StrengtheningofMasonryBuildingsforEarthquake
SeismicZones No.of
Storey
StrengtheningArrangementstobe
Provided.
1 Upto4 a)MasonrymortarshallnotbeleanerthanM3

2 Upto2with
pitchedroof
a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than
M3
b) Bylintelandroofband(Sec7.8.6.3)
c) By vertical reinforcement at corners and
junctionsofwalls(Sec7.8.6.4)
d) Bracinginplanattielevelforpitchedroof*

3to4 a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than

M3
b) Bylintelandroofband(Sec7.8.6.3)
c) By vertical reinforcement at corners and
junctionsofwalls(Sec7.8.6.4)
d) Verticalreinforcementatjambsofopenings
(Sec7.8.6.5)
e) Bracinginplanattielevelforpitchedroof*

Part6
StructuralDesign

6396 Vol.2
3 Upto4

a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than

M3
b) Bylintelandroofband(Sec7.8.6.3)
c) By vertical reinforcement at corners and
junctionsofwalls(Sec7.8.6.4)
d) Verticalreinforcementatjambsofopenings
(Sec7.8.6.5)
e) Bracinginplanattielevelforpitchedroof*
Attielevelallthetrussesandthegableendshallbeprovidedwithdiagonal
bracinginplansoastotransmitthelateralshearduetoearthquakeforceto
thegablewallsactingasshearwallsattheends.
7.8.6.3 Bands
Roof band need not be provided underneath reinforced concrete or brickwork slabs resting on
bearing walls, provided the slabs are continuous over parts between crumple sections, if any, and
coverthewidthofendwallsfully.
The band shall be made of reinforced concrete with

f
c
not less than 20 N/mm
2
or reinforced
brickworkincementmortarnotleanerthan1:4.Thebandsshallbetothefullwidthofthewalland
not less than 75 mm in depth and shall be reinforced as indicated in Table 6.7.16. In case of
reinforced brickwork, the thickness of joints containing steel bars shall be increased so as to have a
minimum mortar cover of 6 mm around the bar. In bands of reinforced brickwork, the area of steel
providedshallbeequaltothatspecifiedaboveforreinforcedconcretebands.
Table6.7.16:BandReinforcement
Reinforcement
Seismic
Zones
PlainMildSteel
Bars
HighStrength
DeformedBars
Links
2 212mm,oneon
eachfaceofthewall
withsuitablecover
210mm,oneoneach
faceofthewallwith
suitablecover

6mmdia,
150mmc/c
3 216mm,oneon
eachfaceofthewall
withsuitablecover
212mm,oneoneach
faceofthewallwith
suitablecover
6mmdia,
150mmc/c
7.8.6.4 StrengtheningofCornerandJunctions
Vertical steel at corners and junctions of walls which are up to one and a half bricks thick shall be
provided either with mild steel or high strength deformed bars as specified in Table 6.7.17. For
thicker walls, reinforcement shall be increased proportionately. The reinforcement shall be properly
embeddedintheplinthmasonryoffoundationsandroofslaborroofbandsoastodevelopitstensile
strengthinbondandpassingthroughthelintelbandsinallstoreys.Barsindifferentstoreysmaybe
weldedorsuitablylapped.
(a) Typicaldetailsofverticalsteelinbrickworkandhollowblockatcorners,Tjunctionsandjambs
ofopeningareshowninFig6.7.1andFig6.7.2.
(b) Details of vertical reinforcement given in Table 6.7.17 are applicable to brick masonry and
hollowblockmasonry.

MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6397

Fig.6.7.1:Typicaldetailsofverticalreinforcementinbrickmasonry

Part6
StructuralDesign

6398 Vol.2

Fig.6.7.2:Typicaldetailsofverticalreinforcementinhollowblockmasonry
Table6.7.17:VerticalReinforcementforBrickandHollowBlockMasonry

No.of
Storeys

Storeys
DiameterofSingleBar
orEquivalentAreaofPlain
MildSteelBartobe
Provided
DiameterofSingleBar
orEquivalentAreaofHigh
StrengthDeformedBarto
beProvided
Zone2&3
(mm)
Zone4
(mm)
Zone2&3
(mm)
Zone4
(mm)
1 nil 12 nil 10

2 Top
Bottom
nil
nil
12
16
nil
nil
10
12

Top
Middle
Bottom
12
12
16
12
16
16
10
10
12
10
12
12

4 Top
Third
Second
Bottom
12
12
16
16
12
16
20
25
10
10
12
12
10
12
16
20

7.8.6.5 StrengtheningofJambsofOpenings
Openings in bearing walls shall be strengthened, where necessary, by providing reinforced concrete
membersorreinforcingthebrickworkaroundthemasshowninFig6.7.3.
7.8.6.6 WallsAdjoiningStructuralFraming
Wherewallsaredependentonthestructuralframeforlateralsupporttheyshallbeanchoredtothe
structural members with metal ties orkeyed to the structural members. Horizontal tiesshall consist
of6mmdiameterUbarsspacedatamaximumof450mmoncentreandembeddedatleast250mm
intothemasonryandproperlytiedtotheverticalsteelofthesamemember.

MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6399

Fig.6.7.3:MinimumreinforcementinwallsandaroundopeningsinSeismicZones2,3and4
7.9 PROVISIONSFORHIGHWINDREGIONS
7.9.1 General
Theprovisionsofthissectionshallapplytomasonrystructureslocatedatregionswherethebasicwindspeedis
greaterthan200km/h.
7.9.2 Materials
MaterialsformasonrystructuresshallgenerallycomplywiththeprovisionsofPart5;however,therearesome
specialrequirementsformasonryconstructioninhighwindregions,whicharegivenbelow:
(a) Burntclaybricksshallhaveacompressivestrengthnotlessthan15N/mm
2
,
(b) Groutshallhaveaminimumcompressivestrengthof12.5N/mm
2
,
(c)
MortarforexteriorwallsandinteriorshearwallsshallbetypeM
1
orM
2
,

(d) Unburntclaymasonryunitsshallnotbeused.
7.9.3 ConstructionRequirements
MasonryconstructionshallcomplywiththeprovisionsofSec7.10.
2&3
4)
Part6
StructuralDesign

6400 Vol.2

7.9.4 Foundation
Footingsshallhaveathicknessofnotlessthan375mmandshallbeextended450mmbelowtheundisturbed
groundsurface.Foundationstemwallshallhavethesamewidthandreinforcementasthewallitsupports.
7.9.5 Drainage
Wallsretainingmorethan1mofearthandenclosinginteriorspacesorfloorsbelowgradeshallhaveminimum
100mmdiameterfootingdrain.Aslopeof1:50awayfromthebuildingshallbeprovidedaroundthebuilding.
7.9.6 WallConstruction
7.9.6.1 MinimumthicknessofdifferenttypesofwallshallbeasgiveninTable6.7.18.
Table6.7.18:MinimumthicknessofWallsinHighWindRegion
TypeofWall MinimumThickness
(mm)
Unreinforcedgroutedbrickwall
Reinforcedexteriorbearingwall
Unreinforcedhollowandsolidmasonrywall
Interiornonbearingwall
250
200
200
150
7.9.6.2 All walls shall be laterally supported at the top and bottom. The maximum unsupported height of
bearingwallsorothermasonrywallsshallbe3.5m.Gableendwallsmaybe4.5mhighattheirpeak.
7.9.6.3 The span of lintels over openings shall not exceed 3.5 m. All lintels shall be reinforced and the
reinforcement bars shall extend not less than 600 mm beyond the edge of opening and into lintel
supports.
7.9.6.4 Wallsshallbeadequatelyreinforced.
7.9.6.5 Anchors between walls and floors or roofs shall be embedded in grouted cells or cavities and shall
conformtoSec7.9.7below.
7.9.7 FloorandRoofSystems
Floorsandroofsofallmasonrystructuresshallbeadequatelyanchoredwiththewallitsupportstoresistlateral
andupliftforcesduetowindspecifiedinSec2.4ofthisPart.
7.9.8 LateralForceResistance
7.9.8.1 Strapping, approved framing anchors and mechanical fasteners, bond beams and vertical
reinforcement shall be installed to provide a continuous tie from the roof to foundation system as
showninFig6.7.4.Inaddition,roofandfloorsystems,masonryshearwalls,ormasonryorwoodcross
wallsshallbeprovidedforlateralstability.
7.9.8.2 Floor and roof diaphragms shall be properly connected to masonry walls. Gable and sloped roof
membersnotsupportedattheridgeshallbetiedbytheceilingjoistorequivalentlateraltieslocated
asclosetowheretheroofmembersbearonthewallaspracticallypossibleandnotatmorethan1.2
moncenters.Collartiesshallnotbeusedfortheselateralties.
7.9.8.3 Masonry walls shall be provided around all sides of floor and roof systems in accordance with
Fig6.7.5.Thecumulativelengthofexteriormasonrywallsalongeachsideofthefloororroofsystems
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6401
shall be at least 20 per cent of the parallel dimension. Required elements shall be without openings
andshallnotbelessthat1.25minwidth.
Interiorcrosswallsatrightanglestobearingwallsshallbeprovidedwhenthelengthofthebuilding
perpendiculartothespanofthefloorofroofframingexceedstwicethedistancebetweenshearwalls
or10m,whicheverisgreater.
7.9.8.4 When required interior cross wall shall be at least 1.8 m long and reinforced with 2 mm wire joint
reinforcementspacednotmorethan400mmoncentre.

Fig.6.7.4:Continuoustiefromrooftofoundationofmasonrystructure

Fig.6.7.5:Masonrywallsrequiredinhighwindregions
Part6
StructuralDesign

6402 Vol.2
7.10 CONSTRUCTION
7.10.1 General
Masonryshallbeconstructedaccordingtotheprovisionsofthissection.
7.10.2 StorageandPreparationofConstructionMaterials
Storage,handlingandpreparationatthesiteshallconformtothefollowing:
(a) Masonrymaterialsshallbestoredinsuchawaythatatthetimeofusethematerialsareclean
andstructurallysuitablefortheintendeduse.
(b) b) Allmetalreinforcementshallbefreefromlooserustandothercoatingsthatwouldinhibit
reinforcingbond.
(c) Burnt clay units shall have a rate of absorption per minute not exceeding one litre per square
metre at the time of lying. In the absorption test the surface of the unit shall be held 3 mm
belowthesurfaceofthewater.
(d) Burntclayunitsshallbethoroughlywettedbeforeplacing.Concretemasonryunitsshallnotbe
wettedunlessotherwiseapproved.
(e) Materialsshallbestoredinsuchamannerthatdeteriorationorintrusionofforeignmaterialsis
preventedandatthetimeofmixingthematerialconformstotheapplicablerequirements.
(f) The method of measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that proportions of the
materialscanbeeasilycontrolled.
(g) Mortarorgroutmixedatthejobsiteshallbemixedforaperiodoftimenotlessthan3minutes
or more than 10 minutes in a mechanical mixer with the amount of water required to provide
the desired workability. Hand mixing of small amounts of mortar is permitted. Mortar may be
retempered. Mortar or grout which has hardened or stiffened due to hydration of the cement
shall not be used, but under no case shall mortar be used two and onehalf hours, nor grout
used one and onehalf hours, after the initial mixing water has been added to the dry
ingredientsatthejobsite.
7.10.3 PlacingMasonryUnits
(a) The mortar shall be sufficiently plastic and units shall be placed with sufficient pressure to
extrude mortar from the joint and produce a tight joint. Deep furrowing which produces
voidsshallnotbeused.
Theinitialbedjointthicknessshallnotbelessthan5mmormorethan25mm;subsequent
bedjointsshallbenotlessthan5mmormorethan15mminthickness.
(b) Allsurfacesincontactwithmortarorgroutshallbecleanandfreeofdeleteriousmaterials.
(c) Solidmasonryunitsshallhavefullheadandbedjoints.
(d) Allheadandbedjointsshallbefilledsolidlywithmortarforadistancefromthefaceofthe
unitnotlessthanthethicknessoftheshell.
Head joints of openend units with beveled ends need not be mortared. The beveled ends
shallformagroutkeywhichpermitsgroutwithin16mmofthefaceof theunit.Theunits
shallbetightlybuttedtopreventleakageofgrout.
7.10.4 VerticalityandAlignment
All masonry shall be built true and plumb within the tolerances prescribed below. Care shall be taken to keep
theperpendsproperlyaligned.
(a) Deviationfromverticalwithinastoreyshallnotexceed6mmper3mheight.
(b) Deviation in verticality in total height of any wall of a building more than one storey in
heightshallnotexceed12mm.
(c) Deviationfrompositionshownonplanofanybrickworkshallnotexceed12mm.
(d) Relative displacement between load bearing walls in adjacent storeys intended to be in
verticalalignmentshallnotexceed6mm.
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6403
(e) Deviationofbedjointfromhorizontalinalengthof12mshallnotexceed6mmsubjecttoa
maximumdeviationof12mm.
(f) Deviation from the specified thickness of bed joints, cross joints and perpends shall not
exceedonefifthofthespecifiedthickness.
7.10.5 ReinforcementPlacing
Reinforcing details shall conform to the requirements of Sec 4.6.6. Metal reinforcement shall be located in
accordance with the plans and specifications. Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement prior to
groutingbywirepositionersorothersuitabledevicesatintervalsnotexceeding20bardiameters.
Tolerancesfortheplacementofsteelinwallsandflexuralelementsshallbe12mmford200mm,25mm
for200mmd600mmand30mmford>600mm.Toleranceforlongitudinallocationofreinforcement
shallbe50mm.
7.10.6 GroutedMasonry
Groutedmasonryshallbeconstructedinsuchamannerthatallelementsacttogetherasastructuralelement.
Space to be filled with grout shall be clean and shall not contain any foreign materials. Grout materials and
watercontentshallbecontrolledtoprovideadequateworkabilityandshallbemixedthoroughly.Thegrouting
ofanysectionofwallshallbecompletedinonedaywithnointerruptionsgreaterthanonehour.
SizeandheightlimitationsofthegroutspaceorcellshallnotbelessthanthoseshowninTable6.7.19.Higher
groutpoursorsmallercavitywidthsorcellsizethanshowninTable6.7.19maybeusedwhenapproved,ifitcan
bedemonstratedthatgroutspacesareproperlyfilled.
Cleanoutsarerequiredforallgroutpoursover1.5minheight.Whenrequired,cleanoutsshallbeprovidedin
thebottomcourseateveryverticalbarbutshallnotbespacedmorethan800mmoncentreforsolidlygrouted
masonry. When cleanouts are required, they shall be sealed after inspection and before grouting. When
cleanoutsarenotprovided,specialprovisionsmustbemadetokeepthebottomandsidesofthegroutspaces,
aswellastheminimumtotalclearareaasrequiredbyTable6.7.19,cleanandclearpriortogrouting.
Table6.7.19:GroutingLimitations

GroutType
Groutpour
Maximum
Height(m)
MinimumDimensionsoftheTotalClear
AreaswithinGroutSpacesandCells
Multiwythe
Masonry(mm)
HollowUnit
Masonry
(mm)
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
0.30
1.50
2.40
3.65
7.30
20
40
40
40
50
40 50
40 50
40 75
45 75
75 75

Coarse
Coarse
Coarse
Coarse
Coarse
0.30
1.50
2.40
3.65
7.30
40
50
50
60
75
40 75
60 75
75 75
75 75
75 100
7.10.7 Chases,RecessesandHoles
(a) Chases,recessesand holes maybepermitted in masonry providedeither they are considered
in the structural design or they are not cut into walls made of hollow or perforated units, or
verticalchasesareplannedinsteadofhorizontalchases.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6404 Vol.2
(b) Depth of vertical and horizontal chases in load bearing walls shall not exceed onethird and
onesixthofthewallthicknessrespectively.
(c) Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2 m in any stretch of wall and shall not be located
within350mmofanopeningorwithin230mmofacrosswallthatservesasstiffeningwallfor
stability.Widthofaverticalchaseshallnotexceedthethicknessofwallinwhichitoccurs.
(d) Horizontal chases shall be located in the upper or lower middle third height of wall at a
distance not less than 600 mm from lateral support. No horizontal chase shall exceed one
metre in length and there shall not be more than 2 chases in any one wall. Horizontal chases
shall have minimum mutual separation distance of 500 mm. Sum of lengths of all chases and
recessesinanyhorizontalplaneshallnotexceedonefourththelengthofthewall.
(e) Lintel shall not be used to support masonry directly above a recess or a hole wider than 300
mm.No lintel however, isnecessary in case of a circularrecess or hole exceeding 300mm in
diameterprovidedupperhalfof therecessorholeisbuiltasasemicirculararchofadequate
thickness and there is adequate length of masonry on the sides of openings to resist the
horizontalthrust.
(f) Recesses and holes in masonry shall be kept at the time of construction so as to avoid
subsequent cutting. If cutting is necessary, it shall be done using sharp tools without causing
heavyimpactanddamagetothesurroundingareas.
(g) No chase, recess or hole shall be provided in halfbrick load bearing wall, excepting the
minimumnumberofholesneededforscaffolding.
7.11 CONFINEDMASONRY
7.11.1 General
Confinedmasonryconstructionconsistsofmasonrywalls(madeeitherofclaybrickorconcreteblockunits)and
horizontalandverticalRCconfiningmembersbuiltonallfoursidesofamasonrywallpanel.Verticalmembers,
calledtiecolumnsorpracticalcolumns,resemblecolumnsinRCframeconstructionexceptthattheytendtobe
of far smaller crosssection. Horizontal elements, called tiebeams, resemble beams in RC frame construction.
Toemphasizethatconfiningelementsarenotbeamsandcolumns,alternativetermshorizontaltiesandvertical
tiescouldbeusedinsteadoftiebeamsandtiecolumns.
Theconfiningmembersareeffectivein
(a) Enhancing the stability and integrity of masonry walls for inplane and outofplane earthquake loads
(confiningmemberscaneffectivelycontaindamagedmasonrywalls),
(b) Enhancingthestrength(resistance)ofmasonrywallsunderlateralearthquakeloads,and
(c) Reducing the brittleness of masonry walls under earthquake loads and hence improving their
earthquakeperformance.
Thestructuralcomponentsofaconfinedmasonrybuildingare(seeFigure6.7.6):
(a) Masonrywallstransmitthegravityloadfromtheslab(s)abovedowntothefoundation.Thewallsact
as bracing panels, which resist horizontal earthquake forces. The walls must be confined by concrete
tiebeamsandtiecolumnstoensuresatisfactoryearthquakeperformance.
(b) Confiningelements(tiecolumnsandtiebeams)providerestrainttomasonrywallsandprotectthem
fromcompletedisintegrationeveninmajorearthquakes.
These elements resist gravity loads and have important role in ensuring vertical stability of a building in an
earthquake.
(a) Floor and roof slabs transmit both gravity and lateral loads to the walls. In an earthquake, slabs
behavelikehorizontalbeamsandarecalleddiaphragms.
(b) Plinth band transmits the load from the walls down to the foundation. It also protects the ground
floorwallsfromexcessivesettlementinsoftsoilconditions.
(c) Foundationtransmitstheloadsfromthestructuretotheground.
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6405
The design of confined masonry members shall be based on similar assumptions to those set out for
unreinforced and for reinforced masonry members. Confined masonry shall be constructed according to the
provisionsofthissection.

Fig.6.7.6:Atypicalconfinedmasonrybuilding
7.11.2 DifferenceofConfinedMasonryfromRCFrameConstruction
TheappearanceofafinishedconfinedmasonryconstructionandaRCframeconstructionwithmasonryinfills
may look alike, however these two construction systems are substantially different. The main differences are
related to the construction sequence, as well as to the manner in which these structures resist gravity and
lateralloads.ThesedifferencesaresummarizedinTable6.7.20andareillustratedbydiagramsinFigure6.7.7.
Inconfinedmasonryconstruction,confiningelementsarenotdesignedtoactasamomentresistingframe;asa
result, detailing of reinforcement is simple. In general, confining elements have smaller crosssectional
dimensionsthanthecorrespondingbeamsandcolumnsinaRCframebuilding.Itshouldbenotedthatthemost
importantdifferencebetweentheconfinedmasonrywallsandinfillwallsisthatinfillwallsarenotloadbearing
walls,whilethewallsinaconfinedmasonrybuildingare.
AtransitionfromRCframetoconfinedmasonryconstructioninmostcasesleadstosavingsrelatedtoconcrete
cost,sinceconfiningelementsaresmallerinsizethanthecorrespondingRCframemembers.
Table6.7.20.AcomparisonbetweentheconfinedmasonryandRCframeconstruction

Confined masonry RC frame construction
Gravityand
lateralload
resisting
system
Masonrywallsarethemain
loadbearingelementsandare
expectedtoresistbothgravity
andlateralloads.Confining
elements(tiebeamsandtie
columns)aresignificantly
smaller in size than RC beams
RCframesresistboth
gravityandlateralloads
throughtheirrelatively
largebeams,columns,and
theirconnections.
Masonryinfillsarenotload
bearing walls
Foundation
construction
Stripfootingbeneaththewall
andtheRCplinthband
Isolatedfootingbeneath
eachcolumn
Part
Stru
7.1
A c
sho
con
ear
crac
ear
sim
The
t6
ucturalDesign

11.3 Mecha
confined maso
own in Figure
ncrete confini
thquake force
ckingisconce
thquakegrou
milartotheone
efollowingfai
(a) Shea
(b) Flex

Superstructur
construction
sequence
Fig.6.7.7:RC
anismofRe
onry building
6.7.8 (left). M
ing members
es. This mode
entratedatth
ndshaking,th
eobservedin
luremodesar
arfailuremod
uralfailurem
Confin
re 1.Masonry
constructed
2.Subseque
arecastinp
3.Finally,tie
constructed
walls,simult
floor/roofsl
Cframeconstru
esistingEar
subjected to
Masonry walls
s act in tens
el is appropria
egroundfloo
hecollapseof
RCframeswit
recharacterist
de,and
ode.
ned masonry
wallsare
dfirst.
ently,tiecolumn
place.
ebeamsare
dontopofthe
taneouslywitht
labconstruction
ction(top)and
rthquakeE
earthquake g
s act as diago
sion and/or c
ate before th
orlevelandsig
f confinedmas
thmasonryin
ticofconfined
RC fram
ns
the
n.
1.Thefram
constructe
2.Masonr
constructe
stageand
bondedto
members;
nonstructu
confinedmason
ffects
ground shakin
onal struts su
compression,
e cracking in
gnificantlater
sonrybuilding
nfills,asshow
dmasonrywa
me constructio
meis
edfirst.
rywallsare
edatalater
arenot
otheframe
thesewallsare
ural,thatis,non

nryconstruction
ng can be mo
bjected to co
depending o
the walls tak
raldeformatio
gsmaytakep
ninFigure6.7
lls:
n
n
n(bottom)
odeled as a ve
ompression, w
on the direc
kes place. Sub
onstakeplace
laceduetoso
7.8(right).
ertical truss,
while reinforce
ction of later
bsequently, th
e.Underseve
oftstoreyeffe
as
ed
ral
he
re
ect
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6407
Note that, in confined masonry structures, shear failure mode develops due to inplane seismic loads (acting
alongintheplaneofthewall),whereasflexuralfailuremodemaydevelopeitherduetoinplaneoroutofplane
loads(actingperpendiculartothewallplane).

Fig.6.7.8:Confinedmasonrybuilding:verticaltrussmodel
(left)andcollapseatthegroundfloorlevel(right)
Shearfailuremodeischaracterizedbydistributeddiagonalcrackinginthewall.Thesecrackspropagateintothe
tiecolumns at higher load levels, as shown in Figure 6.7.9. Initially, a masonry wall panel resists the effects of
lateral earthquake loads by itself while the confining elements (tiecolumns) do not play a significant role.
However, once the cracking takes place, the wall pushes the tiecolumns sideways. At that stage, vertical
reinforcement in tiecolumns becomes engaged in resisting tension and compression stresses. Damage in the
tiecolumnsattheultimateloadlevelisconcentratedatthetopandthebottomofthepanel.Theselocations,
characterized by extensive crushing of concrete and yielding of steel reinforcement, are called plastic hinges
(Figure 6.7.10). Note that the term plastic hinge has a different meaning in the context of confined masonry
componentsthanthatreferredtoinrelationtoRCbeamsandcolumns,wherethesehingesformduetoflexure
andaxialloads.Inconfinedmasonryconstruction,tiebeamsandtiecolumnsresistaxialloads.Shearfailurecan
leadtoseveredamageinthemasonrywallandthetopandbottomofthetiecolumns.

Fig.6.7.9:Shearfailureofconfinedmasonrywalls

Fig.6.7.10:Plastichingedevelopedinaconfinedmasonrywall
Flexuralfailurecausedbyinplanelateralloadsischaracterizedbyhorizontalcrackinginthemortarbedjoints
on the tension side of the wall, as shown in Figure 6.7.11. Extensive horizontal cracking, which usually takes
placeintiecolumns,aswellasshearcrackingcanbeobserved.

Part6
StructuralDesign

6408 Vol.2

Fig.6.7.11:Flexuralfailureofconfinedmasonrywalls
Irrespectiveofthefailuremechanism,tiecolumnsresistthemajorportionofgravityloadwhenmasonrywalls
suffer severe damage (this is due to their high axial stiffness and load resistance). The failure of a tie column
usually takes place when cracks propagate from the masonry wall into the tiecolumn and shear it off.
Subsequently, the vertical stability of the entire wall is compromised. Vertical strains in the confined masonry
walls decrease at an increased damage level, thereby indicating that a major portion of the gravity load is
resisted by tiecolumns. This finding confirms the notion that tie columns have a critical role in resisting the
gravityloadindamagedconfinedmasonrybuildingsandensuringtheirverticalstability.
7.11.4 KeyFactorsInfluencingSeismicResistance
7.11.4.1 WallDensity
Wall density is believed to be one of the key parameters influencing the seismic performance of
confined masonry buildings. It can be determined as the transverse area of walls in each principal
directiondividedbythetotalfloorareaofthebuilding.
7.11.4.2 MasonryUnitsandMortar
The lateral load resistance of confined masonry walls strongly depends on the strength of the
masonry units and the mortar used. The walls built using lowstrength bricks or un grouted hollow
block units had the lowest strength while the ones built using grouted or solid units had the largest
strength. However, the use of grouted and solid units results in an increase both in wall mass and
seismic loads. Also, the weaker the mortar the lower the masonry strength (due to the unitmortar
interaction, the masonry strength is always lower than the unit strength). There is no significant
difference in strength between unreinforced and confined masonry wall specimens with the same
geometryandmaterialproperties.
7.11.4.3 TieColumns
Tiecolumns significantly influence the ductility and stability of cracked confined masonry walls. The
provisionofcloselyspacedtransversereinforcement(ties)atthetopandbottomendsoftiecolumns
resultsinimprovedwallstabilityandductilityinthepostcrackingstage.
7.11.4.4 HorizontalWallReinforcement
Horizontal reinforcement has a beneficial effect on wall ductility. Specimens with horizontal
reinforcement showed a more uniform distribution of inclined shear cracks than the unreinforced
specimens. Horizontal re bars should be anchored into the tiecolumns; the anchorage should be
provided with 90
0
hooks at the far end of the tiecolumn (see Figure 6.7.12). The hooks should be
embedded in the concrete within the tiecolumn (note that the tiecolumn reinforcement was
omitted from the figure). The bar diameter should be larger than 3.5 mm and less than the joint
thickness.
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6409

Fig.6.7.12:Horizontalreinforcementinconfinedmasonrywalls
7.11.4.5 Openings
When the opening area is less than approximately 10% of the total wall area, the wall lateral load
resistance is not significantly reduced as compared to a solid wall (i.e. wall without openings). The
walls with larger openings develop diagonal cracks (same as solid walls), except that the cracks are
formedinthepiersbetweentheopenings;thus,diagonalstrutsforminthepiers,asshowninFigure
6.7.13.

Fig.6.7.13:Failuremodesintheconfinedmasonrywallswithopenings
7.11.5 VerificationofMembers
7.11.5.1 In the verification of confined masonry members subjected to bending and/or axial loading, the
assumptionsforreinforcedmasonrymembersshouldbeadopted.Indeterminingthedesignvalueof
themomentofresistanceofasectionarectangularstressdistributionmaybeassumed,basedonthe
strengthofthemasonry,only.Reinforcementincompressionshouldalsobeignored.
7.11.5.2 In the verification of confined masonry members subjected to shear loading the shear resistance of
themembershouldbetakenasthesumoftheshearresistanceofthemasonryandoftheconcreteof
theconfiningelements.Incalculatingtheshearresistanceof themasonrytherulesforunreinforced
masonry walls subjected to shear loading should be used, considering the length of the masonry
element.Reinforcementofconfiningelementsshouldnotbetakenintoaccount.
7.11.5.3 Intheverificationofconfinedmasonrymemberssubjectedtolateralloading,theassumptionssetout
forunreinforcedandreinforcedmasonrywallsshouldbeused.Thecontributionofthereinforcement
oftheconfiningelementsshouldbeconsidered.
7.11.6 ConfinedMasonryMembers
7.11.6.1 Confined masonry members shall not exhibit flexural cracking nor deflect excessively under
serviceabilityloadingconditions.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6410 Vol.2
7.11.6.2 Theverificationofconfinedmasonrymembersattheserviceabilitylimitstatesshallbebasedonthe
assumptionsgivenforunreinforcedmasonrymembers.
7.11.7 ArchitecturalGuideline
7.11.7.1 BuildingLayout
(a) The building should not be excessively long relative to its width; ideally, the lengthtowidth
ratioshouldnotexceed4.
(b) Thewallsshouldbecontinuousupthebuildingheight.
(c) Openings(doorsandwindows)shouldbeplacedinthesamepositionupthebuildingheight.
7.11.7.2 Walls
(a) Atleasttwofullyconfinedwallsshouldbeprovidedineachdirection.
(b) For Seismic Zone 1 and 2, wall density of at least 2% in each of two orthogonal directions is
requiredtoensuregoodearthquakeperformanceofconfinedmasonryconstruction.Thewall
densityforSeismicZones3and4shouldbeatleast4%and5%respectively.Walldensitycan
bedefinedasthetotalcrosssectionalareaofallwallsinonedirectiondividedbythesumof
thefloorplanareasforallfloorsinabuilding.
7.11.7.3 BuildingHeight
Confinedmasonryissuitableforlowtomediumrisebuildingconstruction.Confinedmasonrybuildingswillbe
subjecttothefollowingheightrestrictions:
(a) Upto4storeyhighforSeismicZone1and2
(b) Upto3storeyhighforSeismicZone3
(c) Upto2storeyhighforSeismicZone4
7.11.8 ConfinedMasonryDetails
7.11.8.1 Confined masonry walls shall be provided with vertical and horizontal reinforced concrete or
reinforcedmasonryconfiningelementssothattheyacttogetherasasinglestructuralmember.
7.11.8.2 Top and sides confining elements shall be cast after the masonry has been built so that they will be
dulyanchoredtogether.
7.11.8.3 Verticalconfiningelementsshouldbeplaced:
(a) atthefreeedgesofeachstructuralwallelement;
(b) atbothsidesofanywallopeningwithanareaofmorethan1.5m
2
;
(c) within the wall if necessary in order not to exceed a spacing of 5 m between the confining
elements;
(d) attheintersectionsofstructuralwalls,wherevertheconfiningelementsimposedbytheabove
rulesareatadistancelargerthan1.5m.
7.11.8.4 Horizontal confining elements shall be placed in the plane of the wall at every floor level and in any
casewithaverticalspacingofnotmorethan4m.
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6411
7.11.8.5 Confining elements should have a crosssectional area not less than 0.02 m2, with a minimum
dimensionof150mmintheplanofthewall.Indoubleleafwallsthethicknessofconfiningelements
shouldassuretheconnectionofthetwoleavesandtheireffectiveconfinement.
7.11.8.6 The longitudinal reinforcement of confining elements may not have a crosssectional area less than
300 mm2, nor than 1% of the crosssectional area of the confining element. The detailing of the
reinforcementsshouldbeinaccordancewithChapter8.
7.11.8.7 Stirrups not less than 6 mm in diameter and spaced not more than 300 mm should be provided
around the longitudinal reinforcement. Column ties should preferably have 135 hooks the use of
90hooksisnotrecommended.Ataminimum,6mmtiesat200mmspacing(6mm@200mm)should
beprovided.Itisrecommendedtouse6mmtiesat100mmspacing(6mm@100mm)inthecolumn
endzones(topandbottom).
7.11.8.8 Toensuretheeffectivenessoftiebeamsinresistingearthquakeloads,longitudinalbarsshouldhavea
90 hooked anchorage at the intersections, as shown in Figure 6.7.14. The hook length should be at
least500mm.

a)

b)
Fig.6.4.14:Tiebeamconstruction:a)wallintersections;
b)hookedanchoragetolongitudinalreinforcement
7.11.8.9 Proper detailing of the tiebeamtotiecolumn connections is a must for satisfactory earthquake
performanceoftheentirebuilding.Reinforcingbarsmustbeproperlyanchored.Atypicalconnection
detailattherooflevelisshowninFigure6.7.15.Notethatthetiecolumnreinforcementneedstobe
extended into the tiebeam asmuch as possible, preferably up to the underside of the top tiebeam
reinforcement.Ahookedanchorageneedstobeprovided(90hooks)bothforthetiecolumnandtie
beamreinforcement.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6412 Vol.2

Fig.6.7.15:Detailingrequirementforthetiebeamtotiecolumn
connection
7.11.8.10 Special lintel beams may be required across larger openings having a width exceeding 1.5 m.
Additionalreinforcementbarsneedtobeprovided.Lintelbeamscanbeintegratedwiththetiebeams
atthefloorlevel.
7.11.8.11 Lap splices may not be less than 60 bar diametersor500mm in length. Splicingshould take place at
columnmidheight,exceptforthegroundfloorlevel(wheresplicingisnotpermitted).
7.11.8.12 Theminimumwallthicknessshouldnotbelessthan100mm.Thewallheight/thicknessratioshould
notexceed30.
7.11.8.13 Toothededgesshouldbeleftoneachsideofthewall,asshowninFigure6.7.16a.Toothededgesare
essential for adequate wall confinement, which contributes to satisfactory earthquake performance.
Alternatively, when the interface between the masonry wall and the concrete tiecolumn needs to
remainsmoothforappearancessake,steeldowelsshouldbeprovidedinmortarbedjointstoensure
interactionbetweenthemasonryandtheconcreteduringanearthquake(Figure6.7.16b).

a) b)
Fig. 6.7.16: a) Toothed wall construction; b) horizontal dowels at the
walltocolumninterface
7.11.8.14 Concrete in the tiecolumns can be poured once the desired wall height has been reached. The
masonry walls provide formwork for the tiecolumns on two sides; however the formwork must be
placedontheremainingtwosides.
7.11.9 FoundationandPlinthConstruction
Thefoundationshouldbeconstructedasintraditionalbrickmasonryconstruction.Eitheranuncoursedrandom
rubblestonemasonryfootingoraRCstripfootingcanbeused.ARCplinthbandshouldbeconstructedontop
MasonryStructures Chapter7

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6413
ofthefoundation.Inconfinedmasonryconstruction,plinthbandisessentialforpreventingbuildingsettlements
insoftsoilareas.AnalternativefoundationsolutionwithRCstripfootingisalsoillustratedinFigure6.7.17.

a) b)
Fig.6.7.17:Foundationconstruction:a)RCplinthbandandstone
masonryfoundation;b)RCstripfooting

Part6
StructuralDesign 61
Chapter 8
Betailing of Reinfoicment in Conciete Stiuctuies
8.1 Scope
Provisions of Sec. 8.1 and 8.2 of Chapter 8 shall apply for detailing of reinforcement in reinforced concrete
members, in general. For reinforced concrete structures, subject to earthquake loadings in seismic design
categoriesB,CandD,specialprovisionscontainedinSec.8.3ofthischaptershallapply.FornotationsusedinSec.
8.1and8.2andnotexplainedtherein,see6.1.1.1.
8.1.1 StandardHooks
Theterm"standardhook"asusedinthisCodeshallmeanoneofthefollowing:
(a) 180
o
bendplusanextensionofatleast4bardiameters,butnotlessthan65mmatthefreeendof
thebar.
(b) 90
o
bendplusanextensionofatleast12bardiametersatthefreeendofthebar.
(c) Forstirrupandtieanchorage
i. For16mm barandsmaller,a90
o
bendplusanextensionofatleast6bardiametersatthefree
endofthebar,
ii. For19mmto25mmbars,a90
o
bendplusanextensionofatleast12bardiametersatthefree
endofthebar,
iii. For 25 mm bar and smaller, a 135
o
bend plus an extension of at least 6 bar diameters at the
freeendofthebar,
iv. For closed ties and continuously wound ties, a 135
o
bend plus an extension of at least 6 bar
diameters,butnotlessthan75mm.
(d) Seismichooksasdefinedin2.2.
8.1.2 MinimumBendDiameters
8.1.2.1 The minimum diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar, for standard hooks other than for
stirrups and ties in sizes 10 mm through 16 mm , shall not be less than the values shown in Table
8.1.1.
Table8.1.1MinimumDiametersofBend
BarSize MinimumDiameterofBend
10mmd
b
25mm
25mm<d
b
40mm
40mm<d
b
57mm
6d
b

8d
b

10d
b

8.1.2.2 Forstirrupsandtiehooks,insidediameterofbendshallnotbelessthan4bardiametersfor16mm
barandsmaller.Forbarslargerthan16mm,diameterofbendshallbeinaccordancewithTable8.1.1.
8.1.2.3 Insidediameterofbendinweldedwirereinforcementforstirrupsandtiesshallnotbelessthan4bar
diameters for deformed wire larger than MD40 and 2 bar diameters for all other wires. Bends with
insidediameteroflessthan8bardiametersshallnotbelessthan4bardiametersfromnearestwelded
intersection.
Part6
StructuralDesign
62 Vol.2
8.1.S Bending
8.1.3.1 Unlessotherwisepermittedbytheengineer,allreinforcementshallbebentcold.
8.1.3.2 Reinforcement partially embedded in concrete shall not be bent in place, except as permitted by the
engineerorasshowninthedesigndrawings.
8.1.4 SurfaceConditionsofReinforcement
8.1.4.1 Whenconcreteisplaced,metalreinforcementshallbefreefrommud,oil,orothernonmetalliccoatings
that decrease bond. Epoxycoating of steel reinforcement in accordance with standards referenced in
thiscodeshallbepermitted.
8.1.4.2 Metal reinforcement with rust, mill scale, or a combination of both, shall be considered satisfactory,
provided the minimum dimensions (including height of deformations) and weight of a handwire
brushedtestspecimenarenotlessthanapplicableASTMspecificationrequirements.
8.1.S PlacingofReinforcement
8.1.5.1 Reinforcementshallbeaccuratelyplacedandadequatelysupportedbeforeconcreteisplaced,andshall
besecuredagainstdisplacementwithintolerancespermittedin8.1.5.2below.
8.1.5.2 Reinforcement shall be placed within the following tolerances unless otherwise specified by the
engineer:
(a) Tolerances for depth d, and minimum concrete cover in flexural members, walls and compression
membersshallbeassetforthinTable8.1.2.
Table8.1.2TolerancesforPlacingReinforcement
Toleranceford ToleranceforMinimum
ConcreteCover
d200mm
d>200mm
10mm
13mm
10mm
13mm

(b) Notwithstandingtheprovisionof(a)above,toleranceforthecleardistancetoformedsoffitsshallbe
minus 6 mm and tolerance for cover shall not exceed minus 1/3 the minimum concrete cover
specifiedinthedesigndrawingsorspecifications.
(c) Tolerance forlongitudinal location of bends and endsof reinforcementshall be 50 mm,exceptat
discontinuousendsofbracketsandcorbels,wheretoleranceshallbe13mmandatdiscontinuous
ends of other members, where tolerance shall be 25 mm. The tolerance for concrete cover of
8.1.5.2ashallalsoapplyatdiscontinuousendsofmembers.
8.1.5.3 Welded wire reinforcement (with wire size not greater than MW30 or MD30) used in slabs not
exceeding 3 m in span shall be permitted to be curved from a point near the top of slab over the
support to a point near the bottom of slab at midspan, provided such reinforcement is either
continuousover,orsecurelyanchoredatsupport.
8.1.5.4 Weldingofcrossingbarsshallnotbepermittedforassemblyofreinforcementunlessauthorizedbythe
engineer.
8.1.6 SpacingofReinforcement
8.1.6.1 Theminimumclearspacingbetweenparallelbarsinalayershallbeequaltoonebardiameter,butnot
lessthan25mm,or4/3themaximumnominalsizeofcoarseaggregate,whicheverislarger.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 63

8.1.6.2 Where parallel reinforcement is placed in two or more layers, bars in the upper layers shall be placed
directlyabovethoseinthebottomlayerwithcleardistancebetweenlayersnotlessthan25mm.
8.1.6.3 For compression members, the clear distance between longitudinal bars shall be not less than 1.5 bar
diametersnor40mmnor4/3themaximumnominalsizeofcoarseaggregate.
8.1.6.4 Clear distance limitation between bars shall apply also to the clear distance between a contact lap
spliceandadjacentsplicesorbars.
8.1.6.5 Inwallsandonewayslabsthemaximumbarspacingshallnotbemorethanthreetimesthewallorslab
thicknesshnor450mm.
8.1.6.6 For twoway slabs, maximum spacing of bars shall not exceed two times the slab thickness h nor 450
mm.
8.1.6.7 Fortemperaturesteelonly,maximumspacingshallnotexceedfive timestheslabthicknesshnor450
mm.
8.1.6.8 BundledBars
(a) Groupsofparallelreinforcingbarsbundledincontacttoactasaunitshallbelimitedtofourinany
onebundle.
(b) Bundledbarsshallbeenclosedwithinstirrupsorties.
(c) Barslargerthan32mmshallnotbebundledinbeams.
(d) Individualbarswithinabundleterminatedwithinthespanofflexuralmembersshallterminateat
differentpointswithatleast40d
b
stagger.
(e) Wherespacinglimitationsandminimumconcretecoverarebasedonbardiameterd
b
,aunitof
bundledbarsshallbetreatedasasinglebarofadiameterderivedfromtheequivalenttotalarea.
8.1.7 ExposureConditionandCovertoReinforcement
8.1.7.1 The nominal concrete cover to all reinforcement (including links), maximum free watercement ratio
and minimum cement content required for various minimum concrete strengths used in different
exposureconditionsshallbeasspecifiedinTable8.1.3.However,formildenvironment,theminimum
concretecoverspecifiedin8.1.7.2and8.1.7.3forvariousstructuralelementsmaybeused.
8.1.7.2 CastinplaceConcrete:
(a)Minimumconcretecoverforconcretecastagainstandpermanentlyexposedtoearthshallbe75mm.
(b)Concreteexposedtoearthorweather:
Minimumcover,mm
19mmthrough57mm 50
16mmbarandsmaller 40
(c)Thefollowingminimumconcretecovermaybeprovidedforreinforcementforconcretesurfacesnotexposed
toweatherorincontactwithground:
Minimumcover,mm
Slabs,Walls:
40mm to57mm 40
36mm barandsmaller 20
Part6
StructuralDesign
64 Vol.2
Minimumcover,mm
Beams,Columns:
Primaryreinforcement, Ties,
stirrups,spirals
40
Shells,foldedplatemembers:
19mmbarandlarger 20
16mm barandsmaller 16
Table8.1.3*ConcreteCoverandotherRequirementsforVariousExposureConditions
8.1.7.3 PrecastConcrete(manufacturedunderplantcontrolconditions):
(a)Concreteexposedtoearthorweather:
Minimumcover,mm
WallPanels:
40mmto57mm 40
36mmbarandsmaller 20
OtherMembers:
40mmto57mm 50
19mm through36mm 40
16mmbarandsmaller 30
Environment ExposureConditions Minimumf
c
N/mm
2

N
o
m
i
n
a
l

c
o
v
e
r

(
m
m
)

20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Mild Concretesurfacesprotectedagainst
weatheroraggressiveconditions
30 25 20 20 20** 20** 20**
Moderate Concretesurfaceawayfromsevererain
Concretesubjecttocondensation
Concretesurfacescontinuouslyunder
water
Concreteincontactwithnonaggressive
soil
40 35 30 25 20 20 20
Severe Concretesurfacesexposedtosevere
rain,alternatewettinganddryingor
severecondensation
45 40 30 25 25 20
Verysevere Concretesurfacesexposedtoseawater
spray,corrosivefumes
50 40 30 30 25
Extreme Concretesurfacesexposedtoabrasive
action,e.g.seawatercarryingsolidsor
flowingwaterwithpH<4.5ormachinery
orvehicles
60 50 40 30
Maximumwater/cementratio 0.65 0.65 0.60 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.42
Minimumcementcontent,(kg/m
3
) 315 325 350 375 400 410 420
*Thistablerelatestoaggregateof20mmnominalmaximumsize.
**Maybereducedto15mmprovidedthenominalmaximumaggregatesizedoesnotexceed15mm.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 65

(b)Concretenotexposedtoweatherorincontactwithground:
Minimumcover,mm
Slabs,Walls:
4ommto57mm 30
36mmbarandsmaller 16
Beams,columns:
Primaryreinforcement 20J
b
40
Ties,stirrups,spiral 15
Shells,foldedplatemembers:
19mmbarandlarger 16
16mmbarandsmaller 10
8.1.7.4 For concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth, minimum cover shall be 75 mm. If,
concretecoverspecifiedin8.1.7.1(Table8.1.3)conflictswiththosespecifiedin8.1.7.2or8.1.7.3,the
largervalueshallbetaken.
8.1.7.5 Bundled Bars : Minimum concrete cover shall be equal to the equivalent diameter of the bundle, but
neednotbegreaterthan50mm.
8.1.7.6 Future Extension : Exposed reinforcement, inserts, and plates intended for bonding with future
extensionsshallbeprotectedfromcorrosion.
8.1.7.7 FireProtection:Ifathicknessofcoverforfireprotectiongreaterthantheconcretecoversspecifiedin
8.1.7.1through8.1.7.6isrequired,suchgreaterthicknessesshallbespecified.
8.1.7.8 Corrosive Environments: If a thickness of cover for corrosive environment or other severe exposure
conditionsgreaterthantheconcretecoversspecifiedin8.1.7.1through8.1.7.6isrequired,suchgreater
thicknesses shall be specified. For corrosion protection, a specified concrete cover for reinforcement
notlessthan50mmforwallsandslabsandnotlessthan65mmforothermembersmaybeused.For
precastconcretemembersaspecifiedconcretecovernotlessthan40mmforwallsandslabsandnot
lessthan50mmforothermembersmaybeused.
8.1.8 ReinforcementDetailsforColumns
8.1.8.1 OffsetBars:Offsetbentlongitudinalbarsshallconformtothefollowing:
(a) Themaximumslopeofinclinedportionofanoffsetbarwithaxisofcolumnshallnotexceed1in6.
(b) Portionsofbaraboveandbelowanoffsetshallbeparalleltotheaxisofcolumn.
(c) Horizontalsupportatoffsetbendsshallbeprovidedbylateralties,spirals,orpartsofthefloor
construction.Horizontalsupportprovidedshallbedesignedtoresist1.5timesthehorizontal
componentofthecomputedforceintheinclinedportionoftheoffsetbars.Lateraltiesorspirals,if
used,shallbeplacednotmorethan150mmawayfrompointsofbend.
(d) Offsetbarsshallbebentbeforeplacementintheforms(see8.1.3).
(e) Wherethefaceofthecolumnaboveisoffset75mmormorefromthefaceofthecolumnbelow,
longitudinalbarsshallnotbepermittedtobeoffsetbent.Thelongitudinalbarsadjacenttotheoffset
columnfacesshallbelapsplicedusingseparatedowels.Lapsplicesshallconformto8.2.14.
8.1.8.2 Steel Cores: Load transfer in structural steel cores of composite compression members shall be
providedbythefollowing:
(a) Endsofstructuralsteelcoresshallbeaccuratelyfinishedtobearatendbearingsplices,withpositive
provisionforalignmentofonecoreabovetheotherinconcentriccontact.
Part6
StructuralDesign
66 Vol.2
(b) Atendbearingsplices,bearingshallbeconsideredeffectivetotransfernotmorethan50percentof
thetotalcompressivestressinthesteelcore.
(c) Transferofstressbetweencolumnbaseandfootingshallbedesignedinaccordancewith6.8.8.
(d) Baseofstructuralsteelsectionshallbedesignedtotransferthetotalloadfromtheentirecomposite
membertothefooting;or,thebaseshallbedesignedtotransfertheloadfromthesteelcoreonly,
providedampleconcretesectionisavailablefortransferoftheportionofthetotalloadcarriedby
thereinforcedconcretesectiontothefootingbycompressionintheconcreteandbyreinforcement.
8.1.9 LateralReinforcementforColumns
8.1.9.1 Lateralreinforcementforcompressionmembersshallconformto theprovisionsof8.1.9.3and8.1.9.4
belowandwhereshearortorsionreinforcementisrequired,shallalsoconformtoprovisionsofSec6.4.
8.1.9.2 Lateralreinforcementrequirementsforcompositecolumnsshallconformto6.3.13.7and6.3.13.8.
8.1.9.3 Spirals:Spiralreinforcementforcolumnsshallconformto6.3.9.3andtothefollowing:
(a) Spiralsshallconsistofevenlyspacedcontinuousbarorwireofsuchsizeandsoassembledasto
permithandlingandplacingwithoutdistortionfromdesigneddimensions.
(b) Sizeofspiralsshallnotbelessthan10mmdiameterforcastinplaceconstruction.
(c) Theminimumandmaximumclearspacingbetweenspiralsshallbe25mmand75mmrespectively.
(d) Anchorageofspiralreinforcementshallbeprovidedby1.5extraturnsofspiralbarorwireateach
endofaspiralunit.
(e) Splicesinspiralreinforcementshallbelapsplicesof48spiraldiameterfordeformeduncoatedbaror
wireand72spiraldiameterforothercases,butnotlessthan300mm.
(f) Spiralsshallextendfromthetopoffootingorslabinanystoreytothelevelofthelowesthorizontal
reinforcementinmemberssupportedabove.
(g) Spiralsshallextendaboveterminationofspiraltobottomofslabordroppanel,wherebeamsor
bracketsdonotframeintoallsidesofacolumn.
(h) Spiralsshallextendtoalevelatwhichthediameterorwidthofcapitalis2timesthatofthecolumn,
incaseofcolumnswithcapitals.
(i) Spiralsshallbeheldfirmlyinplaceandtruetoline.
8.1.9.4 Ties:Tiereinforcementforcompressionmembersshallconformtothefollowing:
(a) Allbarsshallbeenclosedbylateralties,atleast10mminsizeforlongitudinalbars32mmor
smaller,andatleast12mminsizefor36mmto57mmandbundledlongitudinalbars.
(b) Verticalspacingoftiesshallnotexceed16longitudinalbardiametersor48tiediameters,ortheleast
dimensionofthecompressionmembers.
(c) Tiesshallbearrangedsuchthateverycornerandalternatelongitudinalbarshallhavelateralsupport
providedbythecornerofatiewithanincludedanglenotmorethan135deg.Noverticalbarshallbe
fartherthan150mmclearoneachsidealongthetiefromsuchalaterallysupportedbar.Where
longitudinalbarsarelocatedaroundtheperimeterofacircle,acompletecirculartieisallowed.
(d) Thelowesttieinanystoreyshallbeplacedwithinonehalftherequiredtiespacingfromthetop
mosthorizontalreinforcementintheslaborfootingbelow.Theuppermosttieinanystoreyshallbe
withinonehalftherequiredtiespacingfromthelowesthorizontalreinforcementintheslabordrop
panelabove.
(e) Wherebeamsorbracketsprovideconcreteconfinementatthetopofthecolumnonall(four)sides,
thetoptieshallbewithin75mmofthelowesthorizontalreinforcementintheshallowestofsuch
beamsorbrackets.
(f) Whereanchorboltsareplacedinthetopofcolumnsorpedestals,theboltsshallbeenclosedby
lateralreinforcementthatalsosurroundsatleastfourverticalbarsofthecolumnorpedestal.The
lateralreinforcementshallbedistributedwithin125mmofthetopofthecolumnorpedestal,and
shallconsistofatleasttwo12mm barsorthree10mmbars.
(g) Wherelongitudinalbarsarearrangedinacircularpattern,individualcirculartiesperspecified
spacingmaybeused.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 67

8.1.1u LateralReinforcementforBeams
8.1.10.1 Compressionreinforcementinbeamsshallbeenclosedbytiesorstirrupssatisfyingthesizeandspacing
limitations in 8.1.9.4 above. Such ties or stirrups shall be provided throughout the distance where
compressionreinforcementisrequired.
8.1.10.2 Lateralreinforcementforflexuralframingmemberssubjecttostressreversalsortotorsionatsupports
shallconsistofclosedties,closedstirrups,orspiralsextendingaroundtheflexuralreinforcement.
8.1.10.3 Closed ties or stirrups shall be formed in one piece by overlapping standard stirrup or tie end hooks
aroundalongitudinalbar,orformedinoneortwopieceslapsplicedwithaClassBsplice(lapof

1. 3l
d
)
oranchoredinaccordancewith8.2.10.
8.1.11 ShrinkageandTemperatureReinforcement
8.1.11.1 Where the flexural reinforcement extends in one direction only, reinforcement for shrinkage and
temperature stresses shall be provided perpendicular to flexural reinforcement in structural slabs.
Shrinkageandtemperaturereinforcementshallbeprovidedinaccordancewith8.1.11.2below.
8.1.11.2 Deformedreinforcementconformingto5.3.2shallbeprovidedinaccordancewiththefollowing:
a) Areaofshrinkageandtemperaturereinforcementshallprovideatleastthefollowingratiosof
reinforcementareatogrossconcretearea:
0.0020 forslabswherereinforcementwith

=275N/mm
2
or350N/mm
2
areused,
0.0018 forslabswherereinforcementwith

=420N/mm
2
areused,
u.uu18 _
42u

_ orslabswherereinforcementwith

exceeding420N/mm
2
areused.
Inanycase,thereinforcementratioshallnotbelessthan0.0014.
b) Areaofshrinkageandtemperaturereinforcementforbrickaggregateconcreteshallbeatleast1.5times
thatprovidedin(a)above.
c) Shrinkageandtemperaturereinforcementshallbespacednotfartherapartthan5timestheslab
thickness,nor450mm.
d) Atallsectionswhererequired,reinforcementforshrinkageandtemperaturestressesshalldevelopthe
specifiedyieldstrength

intensioninaccordancewithSec8.2.
8.1.12 RequirementsforStructuralIntegrity
8.1.12.1 In the detailing of reinforcement and connections, members of a structure shall be effectively tied
togethertoimproveintegrityoftheoverallstructure.
8.1.12.2 Theminimumrequirementsforcastinplaceconstructionshallbe:
(a) Inonewayslabconstruction,atleastonebottombarshallbecontinuousorshallbesplicedoverthe
supportwithaClassAtensionsplice.Atnoncontinuoussupports,thebarsmaybeterminatedwitha
standardhook.
(b) Beams at the perimeter of the structure shall have at least onesixth of the tension reinforcement
required for negative moment at the support, but not less than two bars and onequarter of the
positive moment reinforcement required at midspan, but not less than two bars made continuous
over the span length passing through the region bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the
column around the perimeter and tied with closed stirrups. Closed stirrups need not be extended
throughanyjoints.Therequiredcontinuitymaybeprovidedwithtopreinforcementsplicedatmid
spanandbottomreinforcementsplicedatornearthesupportwithClassBtensionsplices.
(c) When closed stirrups are not provided, in other than perimeter beams, at least onequarter of the
positivemomentreinforcementrequiredatmidspan,butnotlessthantwobarsshallpassthrough
theregionboundedbythelongitudinalreinforcementofthecolumnandshallbecontinuousorshall
Part6
StructuralDesign
68 Vol.2
besplicedoverthesupportwithaClassBtensionsplice.Atnoncontinuoussupportsthebarsshall
beanchoredtodevelop

atthefaceofthesupportusingastandardhook.
8.1.12.3 To effectivelytie elements together, tension ties shall be provided in the transverse, longitudinal, and
verticaldirectionsandaroundtheperimeterofthestructureforprecastconcreteconstruction.
8.1.1S Connections
8.1.13.1 Enclosure shall be provided for splices of continuing reinforcement and for anchorage of terminating
reinforcementatconnectionsofprincipalframingelements(suchasbeamsandcolumns),
8.1.13.2 Externalconcreteorinternalclosedties,spirals,orstirrupsshallbeusedasenclosuresatconnections.
8.2 DEVELOPMENTANDSPLICESOFREINFORCEMENT
8.2.1 DevelopmentofReinforcementGeneral
Calculatedtensionorcompressionstressinreinforcementateach sectionofreinforcedconcretemembersshall
be developed on each side of that section by embedment length, hook or mechanical device, or a combination
thereof.Hooksmaybeusedindevelopingbarsintensiononly.
8.2.2 ScopeandLimitation
Thevaluesof
c
i
usedinSec8.2shallnotexceed8.3MPa.Inadditiontorequirementsstatedherethataffect
detailingofreinforcement,structuralintegrityrequirementsof8.1.12shallbesatisfied.
8.2.S DevelopmentofDeformedBarsandDeformedWiresinTension
8.2.3.1 Development length for deformed bars and deformed wire in tension, l
d
shall be determined from
either 8.2.3.2 or 8.2.3.3 and applicable modification factors of 8.2.3.4 and 8.2.3.5, but l
d
shall not be
lessthan300mm.
8.2.3.2 Fordeformedbarsordeformedwire,l
d
shallbeasfollows:
Spacingandcover 19mmandsmallerbars
anddeformedwires
20mmandlargerbars
Clear spacing of bars or wires being
developed or spliced not less than
J
b
, clear cover not less than J
b
, and
stirrupsortiesthroughoutl
d
notless
thantheCodeminimum
or
Clear spacing of bars or wires being
developed or spliced not less than
2J
b
andclearcovernotlessthanJ
b

_

y

e
2. 12
c
i
_d
h
_

y

e
1. 72
c
i
_d
h

Othercases
_

y

e
1. 42
c
i
_d
h
_

y

e
1. 12
c
i
_d
h

8.2.3.3 Fordeformedbarsordeformedwire,l
d
shallbe
|
d
= _

y
1.12
c
|

t

x
_
c
h
+K
tr
d
h
]
_d
h
8.2.1
inwhichtheconfinementterm(c
b
+K
t
) J
b
shallnotbetakengreaterthan2.5,and
K
tr
=
4A
tr
xn
8.2.2
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 69

where n is the number of bars or wires being spliced or developed along the plane of splitting. It shall be
permittedtouseK
t
= uasadesignsimplificationeveniftransversereinforcementispresent.
8.2.3.4 Thefactorsusedintheexpressionsfordevelopmentofdeformedbarsanddeformedwiresintensionin
8.2.3areasfollows:
(a) Wherehorizontalreinforcementisplacedsuchthatmorethan300mmoffreshconcreteiscast
belowthedevelopmentlengthorsplice,
t
= 1.S.Forothersituations,
t
= 1.u.
(b) ForepoxycoatedbarsorwireswithcoverlessthanSJ
b
,orclearspacinglessthan6J
b
,
c
= 1.S.For
allotherepoxycoatedbarsorwires,
c
= 1.2.Foruncoatedandzinccoated(galvanized)
reinforcement,
c
= 1.u.However,theproduct
t

c
neednotbegreaterthan1.7.
(c) For19mm andsmallerbarsanddeformedwires,
s
=0.8.For20mm andlargerbars,
s
= 1.u.
(d) Wherelightweightconcreteisused,zshallnotexceed0.75unless
ct
isspecified(see6.1.8.1).
Wherenormalweightconcreteisused,z = 1.u.
8.2.3.5 Excess Reinforcement : Development length may be reduced by the factor _
A
s,rcquircd
A
s,Prcidcd
_ where
reinforcementinaflexuralmemberisinexcessofthatrequiredbyanalysisexceptwhereanchorageor
development for

is specifically required or the reinforcement is designed under the provisions of

8.3.3.1(c).
8.2.4 DevelopmentofDeformedBarsandDeformedWiresinCompression
8.2.4.1 Development length for deformed bars and deformed wire in compression, l
dc
, shall be determined
from8.2.4.2andapplicablemodificationfactorsof8.2.4.3,butl
dc
shallnotbelessthan200mm.
8.2.4.2 For deformed bars and deformed wire, l
dc
shall be taken as the larger of (u.24

z
c
i
)J
b
and
(. 43
y
)d
h
,withzasgivenin8.2.3.4(d)andtheconstant0.043carriestheunitofmm
2
/N.
8.2.4.3 Lengthl
dc
in8.2.4.2shallbepermittedtobemultipliedbytheapplicablefactorsfor:
(a) Reinforcementinexcessofthatrequiredbyanalysis .._
A
s,rcquircd
A
s,Prcidcd
_
(b) Reinforcementenclosedwithinspiralreinforcementnotlessthan6mmdiameterandnotmorethan100
mm pitch or within 12 mm ties in conformance with 8.1.9.4 and spaced at not more than 100 mm on
center ...0.75
8.2.S DevelopmentofBundledBars
8.2.5.1 Developmentlengthofindividualbarswithinabundle,intensionorcompression,shallbethatforthe
individualbar,increased20percentfor3barbundlesand33percentfor4barbundles.
8.2.5.2 For determining the appropriate spacing and cover values in 8.2.3.2, the confinement term in 8.2.3.3,
and the
c
factor in 8.2.3.4(b), a unit of bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar of a diameter
derived from the equivalent total area and having a centroid that coincides with that of the bundled
bars.
8.2.6 DevelopmentofStandardHooksinTension
8.2.6.1 Developmentlengthl
dh
fordeformedbarsintensionterminatinginastandardhookshallbecomputed
as the product of the basic development length for deformed bars, l
dh
of 8.2.6.2 below and the
applicablemodificationfactororfactorsof8.2.6.3,butl
dh
shallbenotlessthan8J
b
norlessthan150
mm.
Part6
StructuralDesign
610 Vol.2
8.2.6.2 For deformed bars, l
dh
shall be (u.24
c

z
c
i
)J
b
with
c
taken as 1.2 for epoxycoated
reinforcement,andztakenas0.75forlightweightconcrete.Forothercases,
c
andzshallbetakenas
1.0.
8.2.6.3 Lengthl
dh
in8.2.6.2shallbepermittedtobemultipliedbythefollowingapplicablefactors:
(a) For36mm barandsmallerhookswithsidecover(normaltoplaneofhook)not
less than 65 mm, and for 90degree hook with cover on bar extension beyond
hooknotlessthan50mm
0.7
(b) For 90degree hooks of 36 mm bar and smaller bars that are either enclosed
within ties or stirrups perpendicular to the bar being developed, spaced not
greater than SJ
b
along l
dh
; or enclosed within ties or stirrups parallel to the bar
being developed, spaced not greater than SJ
b
along the length of the tail
extensionofthehookplusbend
0.8
(c) For 180degree hooks of 36 mm bar and smaller bars that are enclosed within
tiesorstirrupsperpendiculartothebarbeingdeveloped,spacednotgreaterthan
SJ
b
alongl
dh

0.8
(d) Whereanchorageordevelopmentfor

isnotspecificallyrequired,reinforcement
inexcessofthatrequiredbyanalysis
_
A
s,rcquircd
A
s,Prcidcd
_
In 8.2.6.3(b) and 8.2.6.3(c), J
b
is the diameter of the hooked bar, and the first tie or stirrup shall
enclosethebentportionofthehook,within2J
b
oftheoutsideofthebend.
8.2.6.4 For bars being developed by a standard hook at discontinuous ends of members with both side cover
andtop(orbottom)coveroverhooklessthan65mm,thehookedbarshallbeenclosedwithintiesor
stirrupsperpendiculartothebarbeingdeveloped,spacednotgreaterthanSJ
b
alongl
dh
.Thefirsttie
orstirrupshallenclosethebentportionofthehook,within2J
b
oftheoutsideofthebend,whereJ
b
is
thediameterofthehookedbar.Forthiscase,thefactorsof8.2.6.3(b)and(c)shallnotapply.
8.2.6.5 Hooksshallnotbeconsideredeffectiveindevelopingbarsincompression.
8.2.7 DevelopmentofFlexuralReinforcementGeneral
8.2.7.1 Tension reinforcement may be developed by bending across the web to be anchored or made
continuouswithreinforcementontheoppositefaceofmember.
8.2.7.2 Criticalsectionsfordevelopmentofreinforcementinflexuralmembersareatpointsofmaximumstress
and at points within the span where adjacent reinforcement terminates, or is bent. In addition, the
provisionsof8.2.8.3shallalsobesatisfied.
8.2.7.3 Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point at which it is no longer required to resist flexure for a
distance not less than J nor less than 12J
b
, except at supports of simple spans and at free end of
cantilevers.
8.2.7.4 Continuing reinforcement shall have an embedment length not less than the development length l
d

beyond the point where the bent or terminated tension reinforcement is no longer needed to resist
bending.
8.2.7.5 Noflexuralbarshallbeterminatedinatensionzoneunlessoneofthefollowingconditionsissatisfied:
(a) I
u
atthelocationofterminationisnotovertwothirdsofI
n
.
(b) Stirrupareainexcessofthatnormallyrequiredforshearandtorsionisprovidedoveradistance
alongeachterminatedbarorwireequalto0.75dfromthepointofcutoff.ExcessstirrupareaA
v

shallbenotlessthan
0.41b
w
s
]
jt
.Spacingsshallnotexceed
d
8[
b
,where[
b
istheratioofareaof
reinforcementcutofftototalareaoftensionreinforcementatthesection.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 611

(c) For36mm barandsmaller,thecontinuingbarsprovidetwicethearearequiredforflexureatthe

cutoffpointandtheshearI
u
doesnotexceedthreequarterofI
n
.
8.2.7.6 Wherethereinforcementstressisnotdirectlyproportionaltomoment,suchasinsloped,stepped,or
taperedfootings,brackets,deepflexuralmembers,ormembersinwhichtensionreinforcementisnot
paralleltothecompressionface,adequateanchorageshallbeprovidedforthetensionreinforcement.
See8.2.8.4and8.2.9.4fordeepflexuralmembers.
8.2.8 DevelopmentofPositiveMomentReinforcement
8.2.8.1 At least onethird of the positive moment reinforcement in simple members and onefourth of the
positive moment reinforcement in continuous members shall extend along the same face of member
intothesupport.Inbeams,suchreinforcementshallextendintothesupportatleast150mm.
8.2.8.2 When the flexural member is a part of the primary lateral load resisting system, positive moment
reinforcement extended into the support by 8.2.8.1 above shall be anchored to develop the specified
yieldstrength

intensionatthefaceofsupport.
8.2.8.3 Atsimplesupportsandatpointsofinflection,positivemomenttensionreinforcementshallbelimited
toadiametersuchthatl
d
computedfor

by8.2.3satisfiesEq(8.2.3),exceptthatEq(8.2.3)neednot
besatisfiedforreinforcementterminatingbeyondthecentrelineofsimplesupportsbyastandardhook
oramechanicalanchorageatleastequivalenttoastandardhook.
l

l
d

M
n
v
u
+ l
u
(8.2.3)
where

H
n
= nominalmomentstrengthassumingallreinforcementatsectiontobestressedto

.
I
u
= factoredshearforceatsection
l
u
= atasupport,embeddedlengthofbarbeyondcentreofsupport;atpointofzeromoment,shall
belimitedtodor12 J
b
,whicheverisgreater.
The value of H
n
I
u

may be increased 30 per cent when the ends of reinforcement are confined by a
compressivereaction.
8.2.8.4 At simple supports of deep beams, positive moment tension reinforcement shall be anchored to
develop

in tension at the face of the support except that if design is carried out using Appendix A,
the positive moment tension reinforcement shall be anchored in accordance with A.4.3. At interior
supportsofdeepbeams,positivemomenttensionreinforcementshallbecontinuousorbesplicedwith
thatoftheadjacentspans.
8.2.9 DevelopmentofNegativeMomentReinforcement
8.2.9.1 Negativemomentreinforcementinacontinuous,restrained,orcantilevermember,orinanymember
ofarigidframe,shallbeanchoredinorthroughthesupportingmemberbyembedmentlength,hooks
ormechanicalanchorage.
8.2.9.2 Negative moment reinforcement shall have an embedment length into the span as required by 8.2.1,
8.2.2.and8.2.7.3.
8.2.9.3 Atleastonethirdofthetotaltensionreinforcementprovidedfornegativemomentatthesupportshall
be extended beyond the point of inflection a distance not less than J, l
n
16 , or 12J
b
, whichever is
greater.
Part6
StructuralDesign
612 Vol.2
8.2.9.4 At interior supports of deep flexural members, negative moment tension reinforcement shall be
continuouswiththatoftheadjacentspans.
8.2.1u DevelopmentofShearReinforcement
8.2.10.1 Shearreinforcementshallbecarriedasclosetocompressionandtensionsurfacesofmemberascover
requirementsandproximityofotherreinforcementpermits.
8.2.10.2 The ends of single leg, simple U, or multiple Ustirrups shall be anchored by one of the following
means:
(a) ByastandardhookaroundlongitudinalreinforcementforMD200wires,and16mmbarsand
smallerandfor19mm through25mm barswith
t
28u

N/mm
2
.
(b) For19mm through25mm stirrupswith
t
greaterthan280N/mm
2
,astandardstirruphook
aroundalongitudinalbarplusanembedmentbetweenmidheightofthememberandtheoutside
endofthehookequaltoorgreaterthan
0.17d
b
]
jt
x]
c
|
.
(c) ForeachlegofweldedplainwirereinforcementformingsimpleUstirrups,either:(i)Two
longitudinalwiresspacedata50mmspacingalongthememberatthetopoftheU;or(ii)One
longitudinalwirelocatednotmorethanJ4fromthecompressionfaceandasecondwirecloserto
thecompressionfaceandspacednotlessthan50mmfromthefirstwire.Thesecondwireshallbe
permittedtobelocatedonthestirruplegbeyondabend,oronabendwithaninsidediameterof
bendnotlessthan8J
b
.
(d) Foreachendofasinglelegstirrupofweldedwirereinforcement,twolongitudinalwiresata
minimumspacingof50mmandwiththeinnerwireatleastthegreaterofJ4or50mmfromJ2.
Outerlongitudinalwireattensionfaceshallnotbefartherfromthefacethantheportionofprimary
flexuralreinforcementclosesttotheface.
(e) Injoistconstruction,for13mmbarandMD130wireandsmaller,astandardhook.
8.2.10.3 Each bend in the continuous portion of a simple Ustirrup or multiple Ustirrup shall enclose a
longitudinalbarbetweenanchoredends.
8.2.10.4 If extended into the region of tension, longitudinal bars bent to act as shear reinforcement shall be
continuous with longitudinal reinforcement and, if extended into a region of compression, shall be
anchored beyond middepth J2 as specified for development length in 8.2.3 for that part of
t

requiredtosatisfyEq(6.4.12).
8.2.10.5 PairsofUstirrupsortiessoplacedastoformaclosedunitshallbeconsideredproperlysplicedwhen
lengthoflapsare1.Sl
d
.Inmembersatleast450mmdeep,suchspliceswithA
b

t
notmorethan40
kNperlegshallbeconsideredadequateifstirruplegsextendthefullavailabledepthofmember.
8.2.11 DevelopmentofPlainBars
Forplainbars,theminimumdevelopmentlengthshallbetwicethatofdeformedbarsspecifiedin8.2.1through
8.2.10above.
8.2.12 SplicesofReinforcementGeneral
8.2.12.1 Splices of reinforcement shall be made only as required or permitted on design drawings, or in
specifications,orasauthorizedbytheengineer.
8.2.12.2 LapSplices
(a) Lapsplicesshallnotbeusedfor36mm barsandlarger,exceptasprovidedin8.2.14.2&6.8.8.2.3.
(b) Lapsplicesofbundledbarsshallbebasedonthelapsplicelengthrequiredforindividualbarswithin
thebundle,increasedinaccordancewith8.2.5.Individualbarspliceswithinabundleshallnot
overlap.Entirebundlesshallnotbelapspliced.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 613

(c) Barssplicedbynoncontactlapsplicesinflexuralmembersshallnotbespacedtransverselyfarther
apartthanonefifththerequiredlapsplicelength,nor150mm.
8.2.12.3 WeldedSplicesandMechanicalConnections
(a) Weldedsplicesandothermechanicalconnectionsareallowed.
(b) ExceptasprovidedinthisCode,allweldingshallconformto"StructuralWeldingCodeReinforcing
Steel"(AWSD1.4).
(c) Weldedsplicesshallbebuttedandweldedtodevelopintensionatleast125percentofspecified
yieldstrength

ofthebar.
(d) Afullmechanicalconnectionshalldevelopintensionorcompression,asrequired,atleast125per
centofspecifiedyieldstrength

ofthebar.
(e) Weldedsplicesandmechanicalconnectionsnotmeetingtherequirementsof(c)or(d)aboveare
allowedonlyfor16mm barsorsmallerandinaccordancewith8.2.13.4.
8.2.1S SplicesofDeformedBarsandDeformedWireinTension
8.2.13.1 TheminimumlengthoflapfortensionsplicesshallbeasrequiredforClassAorBsplice,butnotless
than300mm,wheretheclassificationshallbeasfollows:
ClassAsplice1.u l
d

ClassBsplice1.S l
d

Where l
d
is calculated in accordance with 8.2.3 to develop

, but without the 300 mm minimum of

8.2.3.1andwithoutthemodificationfactorof8.2.3.5.
8.2.13.2 Lap splices of deformed bars and deformed wire in tension shall be class B splices except that Class A
splicesareallowedwhentheareaofreinforcementprovidedisatleasttwicethatrequiredbyanalysis
overtheentirelengthofthesplice,andonehalforlessofthetotalreinforcementissplicedwithinthe
requiredlaplength.
8.2.13.3 Where area of reinforcement provided is less than twice that required by analysis, welded splices or
mechanicalconnectionsusedshallmeettherequirementsof8.2.12.3(c)or8.2.12.3(d)above.
8.2.13.4 Welded splices or mechanical connections not meeting the requirements of 8.2.12.3(c) or 8.2.12.3(d)
shallbepermittedfor16mm barsorsmallerifthefollowingrequirementsaremet:
(a) Splicesshallbestaggeredatleast600mmandinsuchmannerastodevelopateverysectionatleast
twicethecalculatedtensileforceatthesectionbutnotlessthan140N/mm
2
fortotalareaof
reinforcementprovided.
(b) Splicedreinforcementstressshallbetakenasthespecifiedsplicestrength,incomputingtensileforce
developedateachsection,butnottoexceed

.Unsplicedreinforcementstressshallbetakenasa
fractionof

definedbytheratiooftheshortestactualdevelopmentlengthprovidedbeyondthe
sectionto

l
d
butnottobetakengreaterthan

.
8.2.13.5 Whenbarsofdifferentsizearelapsplicedintension,splicelengthshallbethelargerofl
d
oflargerbar
andtensionlapsplicelengthofsmallerbar.
8.2.13.6 Splicesintensiontiemembersshallbemadewithafullweldedspliceorfullmechanicalconnectionin
accordance with 8.2.12.3(c) or 8.2.12.3(d) and splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered at least 750
mm.
8.2.14 SplicesofDeformedBarsinCompression
8.2.14.1 Theminimumlengthoflapforcompressionspliceshallbeu.u71

J
b
for

equalto420N/mm
2
orless
or (u.1S

- 24)J
b
for

greater than 420 N/mm

2
, but not less than 300 mm. For
c
i
less than 21
N/mm
2
,lengthoflapshallbeincreasedbyonethird.
Part6
StructuralDesign
614 Vol.2
8.2.14.2 Whenbarsofdifferentdiametersarelapsplicedincompression,thesplicelengthshallbethelargerof
thedevelopmentlength,l
dc
ofthelargerbar,andthecompressionsplicelengthofthesmallerbar.Lap
splices of 40 mm , 43 mm , 50 mm and 57 mm bars to 36 mm and smaller bars shall be
permitted.
8.2.14.3 Welded splices or mechanical connections used in compression shall satisfy the requirements of
8.2.12.3(c)or8.2.12.3(d).
8.2.14.4 EndBearingSplices
(a) Compressionsplicesforbarsrequiredtotransmitcompressivestressonlymayconsistofendbearing
ofsquarecutendsheldinconcentriccontactbyasuitabledevice.
(b) Barendsshallterminateinflatsurfaceswithin1.5degreesofarightangletotheaxisofthebars,and
shallbefittedwithin3degreesoffullbearingafterassembly.
(c) Endbearingsplicesshallbeusedonlyinmemberscontainingclosedties,closedstirrupsorspirals.
8.2.1S SpecialSpliceRequirementsforColumns
8.2.15.1 Lapsplices,buttweldedsplices,mechanicalconnections,orendbearingsplicesshallbeusedwiththe
limitations of 8.2.15.2 through 8.2.15.4 below. A splice shall satisfy the requirements for all load
combinationsforthecolumn.
8.2.15.2 LapSplicesinColumns
(a) Lapsplicesshallconformto8.2.14.1,8.2.14.2,andwhereapplicableto8.2.15.2(d)or8.2.15.2(e)
below,wherethebarstressduetofactoredloadsiscompressive.
(b) Wherethebarstressduetofactoredloadsistensileanddoesnotexceedu.S

intension,lap
splicesshallbeClassBtensionlapsplicesifmorethanonehalfofthebarsaresplicedatanysection,
orClassAtensionlapsplicesifhalforfewerofthebarsaresplicedatanysectionandalternatelap
splicesarestaggeredbyl
d
.
(c) Wherethebarstressduetofactoredloadsisgreaterthanu.S

intension,lapsplicesshallbeClass
Btensionlapsplices.
(d) Intiedreinforcedcompressionmembers,ifthroughoutlapsplicelengthtieshaveaneffectivearea
ofatleastu.uu1S bsinbothdirections,lapsplicelengthispermittedtobemultipliedby0.83,but
laplengthshallnotbelessthan300mm.Tielegsperpendiculartodimensionbshallbeusedin
determiningeffectivearea.
(e) Forspirallyreinforcedcompressionmembers,lapsplicelengthofbarswithinaspiralispermittedto
bemultipliedby0.75,butlaplengthshallnotbelessthan300mm.
8.2.15.3 Welded Splices or Mechanical Connectors in Columns: Welded splices or mechanical connectors in
columnsshallmeettherequirementsof8.2.12.3(c)or8.2.12.3(d).
8.2.15.4 EndBearingSplicesinColumns:Endbearingsplicescomplyingwith8.2.14.4maybeusedforcolumn
barsstressedincompressionprovidedthesplicesarestaggeredoradditionalbarsareprovidedatsplice
locations. Thecontinuing barsin each face of the columnshall have a tensile strength at least u.2S

timestheareaoftheverticalreinforcementinthatface.
8.2.16 SplicesofPlainBars
Forplainbars,theminimumlengthoflapshallbetwicethatofdeformedbarsspecifiedin8.2.12through8.2.15
above.
8.2.17 Developmentofheadedandmechanicallyanchoreddeformedbarsintension
8.2.17.1 Developmentlengthforheadeddeformedbarsintension,l
dt
l,shallbedeterminedfrom8.2.17.2.Use
ofheadstodevelopdeformedbarsintensionshallbelimitedtoconditionssatisfying(a)through(f):
(a) Bar

shallnotexceed420MPa;
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 615

(b) Barsizeshallnotexceed36mm;
(c) Concreteshallbenormalweight;
(d) NetbearingareaofheadA
bg
shallnotbelessthan4A
b
;
(e) Clearcoverforbarshallnotbelessthan2J
b
;and
(f) Clearspacingbetweenbarsshallnotbelessthan4J
b
.
8.2.17.2 Forheadeddeformedbars,developmentlengthintensionl
dt
shallbe(u.19
c

c
i
)J
b
,wherethe
valueof
c
i

usedtocalculatel
dt
shallnotexceed40MPa,andfactor
c
shallbetakenas1.2forepoxy
coated reinforcement and 1.0 for other cases. Where reinforcement provided is in excess of that
requiredbyanalysis,exceptwheredevelopmentof

isspecificallyrequired,afactorof(A
s,cqucd
)
(A
s,podcd
)maybeappliedtotheexpressionforl
dt
.Lengthl
dt
shallnotbelessthanthelargerof8J
b

and150mm.
8.2.17.3 Headsshallnotbeconsideredeffectiveindevelopingbarsincompression.
8.2.17.4 Any mechanical attachment or device capable of developing

of reinforcement is allowed, provided

that test results showing the adequacy of such attachment or device are approved by the Engineer.
Developmentofreinforcementshallbepermittedtoconsistofacombinationofmechanicalanchorage
plus additional embedment length of reinforcement between the critical section and the mechanical
attachmentordevice.
8.2.18 Developmentofweldeddeformedwirereinforcementintension
8.2.18.1 Developmentlengthforweldeddeformedwirereinforcementintension,l
d
,measuredfromthepoint
of critical section to the end of wire shall be computed as the product of l
d
ld, from 8.2.3.2 or 8.2.3.3,
timesweldeddeformedwirereinforcementfactor,
w
,from8.2.18.2or8.2.18.3.Itshallbepermitted
toreducel
d
inaccordancewith8.2.3.5whenapplicable,butl
d
shallnotbelessthan200mmexceptin
computation of lap splices by 8.2.20. When using
w
from 8.2.18.2, it shall be permitted to use an
epoxycoating factor
c
of 1.0 for epoxycoated welded deformed wire reinforcement in 8.2.3.2 and
8.2.3.3.
8.2.18.2 Forweldeddeformedwirereinforcementwithatleastonecrosswirewithinl
d
andnotlessthan50mm
fromthepointofthecriticalsection,
w
shallbethegreaterof
_

y
-24

y
]
And
[
5d
h
x

butnotgreaterthan1.0,wheresisthespacingbetweenthewirestobedeveloped.
8.2.18.3 Forweldeddeformedwirereinforcementwithnocrosswireswithin l
d
orwithasinglecrosswireless
than50mmfromthepointofthecriticalsection,
w
shallbetakenas1.0,andl
d
shallbedetermined
asfordeformedwire.
8.2.18.4 Where any plain wires, or deformed wires larger than D31, are present in the welded deformed wire
reinforcement in the direction of the development length, the reinforcement shall be developed in
accordancewith8.2.19.
8.2.19 Developmentofweldedplainwirereinforcementintension
Yield strength of welded plain wire reinforcement shall be considered developed by embedment of two cross
wireswiththeclosercrosswirenotlessthan50mmfromthepointofthecriticalsection.However,l
d
lshallnot
belessthan
Part6
StructuralDesign
616 Vol.2
|
d
= 3. 3
A
h
x

y
2
c
|
(8.2.4)
wherel
d
ismeasuredfromthepointofthecriticalsectiontotheoutermostcrosswire,sisthespacingbetween
the wires to be developed, and z as given in 8.2.3.4(d). Where reinforcement provided is in excess of that
required, l
d
may be reduced in accordance with 8.2.3.5. Length, l
d
, shall not be less than 150 mm except in
computationoflapsplicesby8.2.21.
8.2.2u Splicesofweldeddeformedwirereinforcementintension
8.2.20.1 Minimum lap splice length of welded deformed wire reinforcement measured between the ends of
each reinforcement sheet shall be not less than the larger of 1.Sl
d
and 200 mm, and the overlap
measured between outermost cross wires of each reinforcement sheet shall be not less than 50 mm,
wherel
d
iscalculatedinaccordancewith8.2.18todevelop

.
8.2.20.2 Lap splices of welded deformed wire reinforcement, with no cross wires within the lap splice length,
shallbedeterminedasfordeformedwire.
8.2.20.3 Whereanyplainwires,ordeformedwireslargerthanMD200,arepresentintheweldeddeformedwire
reinforcement in the direction of the lap splice or where welded deformed wire reinforcement is lap
spliced to welded plain wire reinforcement, the reinforcement shall be lap spliced in accordance with
8.2.21.
8.2.21 Splicesofweldedplainwirereinforcementintension
Minimumlengthoflapforlapsplicesofweldedplainwirereinforcementshallbeinaccordancewith8.2.21.1and
8.2.21.2.
8.2.21.1 Where A
s
provided is less than twice that required by analysis at splice location, length of overlap
measuredbetweenoutermostcrosswiresofeachreinforcementsheetshallbenotlessthanthelargest
ofonespacingofcrosswiresplus50mm,1.S l
d
,and150mm,wherel
d
iscalculatedinaccordancewith
8.2.19todevelop

.
8.2.21.2 Where A
s
provided is at least twice that required by analysis at splice location, length of overlap
measuredbetweenoutermostcrosswiresofeachreinforcementsheetshallnotbelessthanthelarger
of1.S l
d
,and50mm,wherel
d
iscalculatedinaccordancewith8.2.19todevelop

.
8.3 EARTHQUAKERESISTANTDESIGNPROVISIONS
8.S.1 Notation
A
ch
= crosssectionalareaofastructuralmembermeasuredouttooutoftransversereinforcement,mm
2

A
cp
= areaofconcretesectionresistingshearofanindividualpierorhorizontalwallsegment,mm
2

A
c
= net area of concrete section bounded by web thickness and length of section in the direction of
shearforceconsidered,mm
2

A
g
= grossareaofsection,mm
2

A
]
= effectivecrosssectionalareawithinajoint,see8.3.7.3,inaplaneparalleltoplaneofreinforcement
generating shear in the joint. The joint depth shall be the overall depth of the column. Where a
beam frames into a support of larger width, the effective width of the joint shall not exceed the
smallerof:
a) Beamwidthplusthejointdepth
b) twice the smaller perpendicular distance from the longitudinal axis of the
beamtothecolumnside(See8.3.7.3)
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 617

A
sh
= total crosssectional area of transverse reinforcement (including cross ties) within spacing s and
perpendiculartodimensionb
c

b = effectivecompressiveflangewidthofastructuralmember,mm
b
w
= webwidthordiameterofcircularsection,mm
J
b
= bardiameter,mm
E = loadeffectsofearthquakeorrelatedinternalmomentsandforces

c
i
= specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete

= specifiedyieldstrengthofreinforcement

t
= specifiedyieldstrengthoftransversereinforcement
b
c
= crosssectionaldimensionofcolumncoremeasuredcentretocentreofconfiningreinforcement
b
w
= heightofentirewall(diaphragm)orofthesegmentofwall(diaphragm)considered
l
d
= developmentlengthforastraightbar
l
dh
= developmentlengthforabarwithastandardhook
l
o
= minimumlength,measuredfromjointfacealongaxisofstructuralmember,overwhichtransverse
reinforcementmustbeprovided,mm
l
w
= length of entire wall (diaphragm) or of segment of wall (diaphragm) considered in the direction of
shearforce
H
p
= probable flexural moment strength of members, with or without axial load, determined using the
propertiesofthememberatthejointfacesassumingatensilestrengthinthelongitudinalbarsofat
least1.2S

andastrengthreductionfactorof1.0
H
s
= portionofslabmomentbalancedbysupportmoment
s = spacingoftransversereinforcementmeasuredalongthelongitudinalaxisofthestructuralmember,
mm
s
o
= maximumspacingoftransversereinforcement,mm
I
c
= nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyconcrete
I
c
= designshearforce
I
n
= nominalshearstrength
I
u
= factoredshearforceatsection
o
c
= coefficientdefiningtherelativecontributionofconcretestrengthtowallstrength
p = ratiooftensionreinforcement=A
s
bJ
p
g
= ratiooftotalreinforcementareatocrosssectionalareaofcolumn
p
n
= ratioofdistributedshearreinforcementonaplaneperpendiculartoplaneofA
c

p
s
= ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to the core volume confined by the spiral reinforcement
(measuredouttoout)
p

= A
s
A
c
;whereA
s
istheprojectiononA
c
ofareaofdistributedshearreinforcementcrossingthe
planeofA
c

= strengthreductionfactor.
8.S.2 Definitions
BASEOFSTRUCTURE : The level at which earthquake motions are assumed to be imparted to a structure. This
leveldoesnotnecessarilycoincidewiththegroundlevel.
Part6
StructuralDesign
618 Vol.2
BOUNDARY MEMBERS : Members along wall and diaphragm edges strengthened by longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement.Thesemembersdonotnecessarilyrequireanincreaseinthethicknessofthewallordiaphragm.If
required,edgesofopeningswithinwallsanddiaphragmsshallbeprovidedwithboundarymembers.
COLLECTORELEMENTS:Elementsthatareusedtotransmittheinertialforceswithinthediaphragmstomembers
ofthelateralforceresistingsystems.
CROSS TIE : A continuous bar having a hook not less than 135 deg with at least a six diameter extension at one
endbutnotlessthan75mm,andahooknotlessthan90degwithatleastasixdiameterextensionattheother
end.Thehooksshallengageperipherallongitudinalbars.The90deghooksoftwosuccessivecrosstiesengaging
thesamelongitudinalbarsshallbealternatedendforend.
DEVELOPMENTLENGTHFORABARWITHASTANDARDHOOK:Theshortestdistancebetweenthecriticalsection
andatangenttotheouteredgeofthe90deghook.
HOOP : A hoop is a closed tie or continuously round tie. A closed tie can be made up of several reinforcing
elements with 135 deg hooks having a six diameter extension at each end (but not less than 75 mm). A
continuously round tie shall have at each end a 135 deg hook with a six diameter extension that engages the
longitudinalreinforcementbutnotlessthan75mm.
LATERAL FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM : That portion of the structure composed of members designed to resist
forcesrelatedtoearthquakeeffects.
SHELLCONCRETE:Concreteoutsidethetransversereinforcementconfiningtheconcrete
STRUCTURAL DIAPHRAGMS : Structuralmembers,such as floor and roof slabs, which transmit inertial forces to
lateralforceresistingmembers.
STRUCTURAL WALLS : Walls designed to resist combinations of shears, moments, and axial forces induced by
earthquakemotions.Ashearwallisastructuralwall.
STRUT:Anelementofastructuraldiaphragmusedtoprovidecontinuityaroundanopeninginthediaphragm.
TIEELEMENTS:Elementsusedtotransmitinertialforcesandpreventseparationofbuildingcomponents.
8.S.S GeneralRequirements
8.3.3.1 Scope
(a) Thissectioncontainsspecialrequirementsfordesignandconstructionofreinforcedconcrete
membersofastructureforwhichthedesignforces,relatedtoearthquakemotions,havebeen
determinedonthebasisofenergydissipationinthenonlinearrangeofresponse.
(b) TheprovisionsofChapter6,shallapplyexceptasmodifiedbytheprovisionsofthissection.
(c) StructuresassignedtoseismicdesigncategorySDCD(seeChapter2),allreinforcedconcrete
structuresshallsatisfytherequirementsofspecialmomentframesasgivenin8.3.3through8.3.8in
additiontotherequirementsofChapter6.
(d) StructuresassignedtoSDCC(seeChapter2),allreinforcedconcretestructuresshallbebuiltto
satisfytherequirementsofintermediatemomentframesasgivenin8.3.10inadditiontothe
requirementsofChapter6.
(e) StructuresassignedtoSDCB(seeChapter2),allreinforcedconcretestructuresshallbebuiltto
satisfytherequirementsofordinarymomentframesasgivenin8.3.9inadditiontotherequirements
ofChapter6.
(f) StructuresinlowerSDCsarepermittedtodesignwithdetailingprovisionsofhigherSDCstotake
advantageoflowerdesignforcelevels.
8.3.3.2 AnalysisandProportioningofStructuralMembers
(a) Theinteractionofallstructuralandnonstructuralmembersshallbeconsideredintheanalysis.
(b) Rigidmemberswhicharenotapartofthelateralforceresistingsystemareallowedprovidedtheir
effectontheresponseofthesystemisconsideredandaccommodatedinthestructuraldesign.
Consequencesoffailureofstructuralandnonstructuralmemberswhicharenotapartofthelateral
forceresistingsystemshallalsobeconsidered.
(c) Structuralmembersbelowbaseofstructurerequiredtotransmitforcesresultingfromearthquake
effectstothefoundationshallalsocomplywiththerequirementsofthissection.
(d) Allstructuralmemberswhicharenotapartofthelateralforceresistingsystemshallconformto
8.3.9.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 619

8.3.3.3 StrengthReductionFactors
Strengthreductionfactorsshallbeinaccordancewith6.2.3.2to6.2.3.4.
8.3.3.4 ConcreteinSpecialMomentFramesandSpecialStructuralWalls
Compressivestrength
c
i
oftheconcreteshallbenotlessthan21N/mm
2
.Specifiedcompressivestrengthoflight
weightconcrete,
c
i
,shallnotexceed35MPaunlessdemonstratedbyexperimentalevidence.Modificationfactor
forlightweightconcreteinSec8.3shallbeinaccordancewith6.1.8unlessnotedotherwise.
8.3.3.5 ReinforcementinSpecialMomentFramesandSpecialStructuralWalls
Reinforcementresistingearthquakeinducedflexuralandaxialforcesinframesandwallboundarymembersshall
complywithASTMA706M,ASTMA615MandBDSISO69352:2007(E).Reinforcementwith

=275N/mm
2
and

=420N/mm
2
areallowedinthesemembersif(a)theactualyieldstrengthbasedonmilltestsdoesnotexceed
the specified yield strength by more than 125 N/mm
2
(retests shall not exceed this value by more than an
additional20N/mm
2
),and(b)theratiooftheactualultimatetensilestrengthtotheactualtensileyieldstrength
is not less than 1.25. The value of
t
used to compute the amount of confinement reinforcement shall not
exceed700MPa.Thevalueof

or
t
usedinthedesignofshearreinforcementshallconformto6.4.3.2.
8.3.3.6 Welding
Reinforcement required by factored load combinations which include earthquake effect shall not be welded
except as specified in 8.3.4.2(d) and 8.3.5.3(b). In addition, welding shall not be permitted on stirrups, ties,
inserts,orothersimilarelementstolongitudinalreinforcementrequiredbydesign.
8.S.4 FlexuralMembersofSpecialMomentFrames
8.3.4.1 Scope
Requirements of this section shall apply to special moment frame members; (i) resisting earthquake induced
forces, and (ii) proportioned primarily to resist flexure. These frame members shall also satisfy the following
conditions:
(a) Factoredaxialcompressiveforceonframemembershallnotexceedu.1A
g

c
i
.
(b) Clearspanforthemember,l
n
shallnotbelessthanfourtimesitseffectivedepth.
(c) Thewidthtodepthratioshallbeatleast0.3.
(d) Thewidthshallnotbe(i)lessthan250mmand(ii)morethanthewidthofthesupportingmember
(measuredonaplaneperpendiculartothelongitudinalaxisoftheflexuralmember)plusdistances
oneachsideofthesupportingmembernotexceedingthreefourthsofthedepthoftheflexural
member.
TheserequirementsareshowninFig.8.3.1.
8.3.4.2 LongitudinalReinforcement
(a) Atanysectionofaflexuralmemberandforthetopaswellasforthebottomreinforcement,the
amountofreinforcementshallbenotlessthan1.4b
w
J

andthereinforcementratio,pshallnot
exceed0.025(Fig.8.3.2).Atleasttwobarsshallbeprovidedcontinuouslybothtopandbottom.
(b) Thepositivemomentstrengthatthefaceofthejointshallbenotlessthanonehalfofthenegative
momentstrengthprovidedatthatfaceasshowninFig.8.3.2.Neitherthenegativenorthepositive
momentstrengthatanysectionalongthememberlengthshallbelessthanonefourththemaximum
momentstrengthprovidedatthefaceofeitherjoint.
(c) Lapsplicesofflexuralreinforcementshallbepermittedonlyifhooporspiralreinforcementis
providedoverthelaplength.Maximumspacingofthetransversereinforcementenclosingthelapped
barsshallnotexceedJ4nor100mm.Lapsplicesshallnotbeused(i)withinthejoints,(ii)withina
distanceoftwicethememberdepthfromthefaceofthejoint,and(iii)atlocationswhereanalysis
indicatesflexuralyieldingcausedbyinelasticlateraldisplacementsoftheframe.Theserequirements
areshowninFig.8.3.3.
(d) Weldedsplicesandmechanicalconnectionsconformingto8.2.12.3(a)through8.2.12.3(d)are
allowedforsplicingprovidednotmorethanalternatebarsineachlayeroflongitudinal
reinforcementaresplicedatasectionandthecentretocentredistancebetweensplicesofadjacent
barsis600mmormoremeasuredalongthelongitudinalaxisoftheframemember.Weldedsplices
Part6
StructuralDesign
620 Vol.2
andmechanicalconnections(Type1)shallnotbeusedwithinadistanceequaltotwicethemember
depthfromthecolumnorbeamfacesforspecialmomentframesorfromsectionswhereyieldingof
thereinforcementislikelytooccurasaresultofinelasticlateraldisplacement.
8.3.4.3 TransverseReinforcement
(a) Hoopsshallbeprovidedinthefollowingregionsofframemembers:
i. Atbothendsoftheflexuralmember,overalengthequaltotwicethememberdepth
measuredfromthefaceofthesupportingmembertowardmidspan(Fig.8.3.4).
ii. Overlengthsequaltotwicethememberdepth(Fig.8.3.4),onbothsidesofasectionwhere
flexuralyieldingislikelytooccurinconnectionwithinelasticlateraldisplacementsofthe
frame.
(b) Thefirsthoopshallbelocatednotmorethan50mmfromthefaceofthesupportingmember(Fig.
8.3.4).Maximumspacingofthehoopsshallnotexceed(i)J4,(ii)eighttimesthediameterofthe
smallestlongitudinalbars,(iii)24timesthediameterofthehoopbars,and(iv)300mm.
(c) Wherehoopsarerequired,longitudinalbarsontheperimetershallhavelateralsupportconforming
to8.1.9.4(c),andwherehoopsarenotrequired,stirrupswithseismichooksshallbespacednot
morethanJ2throughoutthelengthofthemember(Fig.8.3.4).
(d) Hoopsinflexuralmembersareallowedtobemadeupoftwopiecesofreinforcementconsistingofa
Ustirruphavinghooksnotlessthan135degwith6diameterbutnotlessthan75mmextension
anchoredintheconfinedcoreandacrosstietomakeaclosedhoop(Fig.8.3.5).Consecutivecross
tiesengagingthesamelongitudinalbarshallhavetheir90deghooksatoppositesidesoftheflexural
member.Ifthelongitudinalreinforcingbarssecuredbythecrosstiesareconfinedbyaslabonlyon
onesideoftheflexuralframemember,the90deghooksofthecrosstiesshallallbeplacedonthat
side.

Fig.8.3.1.GeneralrequirementforFlexuralMembersofSpecialMomentFrames
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 621

8.S.S SpecialMomentFrameMembersSubjectedtoBendingandAxialLoad
8.3.5.1 Scope
The requirements of this section shall apply to columns and other frame members serving to resist earthquake
forcesandhavingafactoredaxialforceexceedingu.1A
g

c
i
.Theseframemembersshallalsosatisfythefollowing
conditions:
(a) Theshortestcrosssectionaldimensionshallnotbelessthan300mm.
(b) Theratiooftheshortestcrosssectionaldimensiontotheperpendiculardimensionshallnotbeless
than0.4.
TheserequirementsareshowninFig.8.3.6.

Fig.8.3.2FlexuralRequirementsforFlexuralMembersofSpecialMomentFrames

Fig.8.3.3LapSpliceRequirementsforFlexuralMembersofSpecialMomentFrames
8.3.5.2 MinimumFlexuralStrengthofColumns
Part6
StructuralDesign
622 Vol.2
(a) Flexuralstrengthofanycolumndesignedtoresistafactoredaxialcompressiveforceexceeding
u.1A
g

c
i
shallsatisfy(b)or(c)below.Lateralstrengthandstiffnessofcolumnsnotsatisfying(b)
belowshallbeignoredincalculatingthestrengthandstiffnessofthestructurebutshallconformto
8.3.9.
(b) Theflexuralstrengthofthecolumnsshallsatisfythefollowingrelation:
H
c
1.2 H
g
(8.3.1)
where
H
c
= sum of moments, at the centre of the joint, corresponding to the design flexural
strength of the columns framing into that joint. The lowest flexural strength of the columns,
calculated for the factored axial force, consistent with the direction of the lateral forces
considered,shallbeused.
H
g
= sum of moments, at the centre of the joint, corresponding to the design flexural
strengthsofthegirdersframingintothatjoint.
Flexuralstrengthsshallbesummedsuchthatthecolumnmomentsopposethebeammoments.
Eq (8.3.1) shall be satisfied for beam moments acting in both directions in the vertical plane of
theframeconsidered.
(c) Iftherequirementsof(b)aboveisnotsatisfiedatajoint,columnssupportingreactionsfromthat
jointshallbeprovidedwithtransversereinforcementasspecifiedin8.3.5.4overtheirentireheight.

Fig. 8.3.4 Transverse Reinforcement Requirements for Flexural Members of Special Moment
Frames
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 623

Fig.8.3.5HoopReinforcementRequirementsforFlexuralMembersofSpecialMomentFrames

Fig.8.3.6GeneralRequirementsforframessubjectedtobendingandaxialload

8.3.5.3 LongitudinalReinforcement
(a) Thereinforcementratio,p
g
,shallnotbelessthan0.01andshallnotexceed0.06.
(b) Lapsplicesarepermittedonlywithinthecentrehalfofthememberlengthandshallbedesignedas
tension splices. Welded splices and mechanical connections conforming to 8.2.12.3(a) through
8.2.12.3(d) are allowed for splicing the reinforcement at any section provided not more than
alternate longitudinal bars are spliced at a section and the distance between splices is 600 mm or
morealongthelongitudinalaxisofthereinforcement.
TheseprovisionsareshowninFig.8.3.7.
Part6
StructuralDesign
624 Vol.2
8.3.5.4 TransverseReinforcement
(a) TransversereinforcementshallbeprovidedasspecifiedbelowandshowninFig.8.3.8andFig.8.3.9
unlessalargeramountisrequiredby8.3.8.
i) The volumetric ratio of spiral or circular hoop reinforcement, p
s
shall not be less than that
indicatedbythefollowingequation:
p
s
=
0.12]
c
|
]
jt
(8.3.2)
andshallnotbelessthanthatrequiredbyEq(6.3.6).
ii) Thetotalcrosssectionalareaofrectangularhoopreinforcementshallnotbe lessthanthat
givenbythefollowingequations:
A
sh
= u.S(sb
c

c
i

t
)|(A
g
A
ch
) - 1] (8.3.3)
A
sh
=
0.09sh
c
]
c
|
]
jt
(8.3.4)
iii) Transversereinforcementshallbeprovidedbyeithersingleoroverlappinghoopsorcross
tiesofthesamebarsizeandspacing.Eachendofthecrosstiesshallengageaperipheral
longitudinal reinforcing bar. Consecutive cross ties shall be alternated end for end along
thelongitudinalreinforcement.
iv) If the design strength of member core satisfies the requirements of the specified loading
combinationsincludingearthquakeeffect,Eq(8.3.3)and(6.3.6)neednotbesatisfied.

Fig.8.3.7LongitudinalReinforcementRequirements
(b) Transverse reinforcement shall not be spaced more than onequarter of the minimum member
dimensionnor100mm.
(c) Spacing of cross ties or legs of overlapping hoops shall not be more than 350 mm on centre in the
directionperpendiculartothelongitudinalaxisofthemember.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 625

(d) The volume of transverse reinforcement in amount specified in (a) through (c) above shall be
provided over a length l
o
from each joint face and on both sides of any section where flexural
yieldingislikelytooccurinconnectionwithinelasticlateraldisplacementsoftheframe.Thelengthl
o

shall not be less than (i) the depth of the member at the joint face or at the section where flexural
yieldingislikelytooccur,(ii)onesixthoftheclearspanofthemember,and(iii)450mm.
(e) Ifthefactoredaxialforceincolumnssupportingreactionsfromdiscontinuedstiffmembers,suchas
walls, exceeds u.1A
g

c
i
they shall be provided with transverse reinforcement as specified in (a)
through (c) above over their full height beneath the level at which the discontinuity occurs.
Transverse reinforcement shall extend into the discontinued member for at least the development
lengthofthelargestlongitudinalreinforcementinthecolumninaccordancewith8.3.7.4.Ifthelower
end of the column terminates on a wall, transverse reinforcement as specified above shall extend
into the wall for at least the development length of the largest longitudinal reinforcement in the
column at the point of termination. If the column terminates on a footing or mat, transverse
reinforcementasspecifiedinaboveshallextendatleast300mmintothefootingormat.
(f) Wheretransversereinforcementasspecifiedin(a)through(c)above,isnotprovidedthroughoutthe
full length of the column, the remainder of the column length shall contain spiral or hoop
reinforcementwithcentretocentrespacingnotexceedingthesmallerof6timesthediameterofthe
longitudinalcolumnbarsor150mm.
Part6
StructuralDesign
626 Vol.2

Fig.8.3.8TransverseReinforcementRequirementsRectangularHoop
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 627

Fig.8.3.9TransverseReinforcementRequirementsSpiralHoop
8.S.6 SpecialStructuralWallsandDiaphragms
8.3.6.1 Scope
The requirements of this section apply to structural walls serving as parts of the earthquake force resisting
systems as well as to diaphragms, struts, ties, chords and collector members which transmit forces induced by
earthquake.
8.3.6.2 Reinforcement
(a) Thereinforcementratio,p

forstructuralwallsshallnotbelessthan0.0025alongthelongitudinal
andtransversedirections.Reinforcementspacingeachwayshallnotexceed450mm.Reinforcement
providedforshearstrengthshallbecontinuousandshallbedistributedacrosstheshearplane.Ifthe
designshearforcedoesnotexceedu.u8SA
c
z
c
i
,theshearreinforcementmayconformto6.6.3.
(b) Atleasttwolayersofreinforcementshallbeusedinawalliftheinplanefactoredshearforce
assignedtothewallexceedsu.17A
c
z
c
i
.
(c) Structuraltrussmembers,struts,ties,andcollectormemberswithcompressivestressesexceeding
u.2
c
i
shallhavespecialtransversereinforcement,asspecifiedin8.3.5.4overthetotallengthofthe
member.Thespecialtransversereinforcementisallowedtobediscontinuedatasectionwherethe
calculatedcompressivestressislessthan

u.1S
c
i
.Stressesshallbecalculatedforthefactoredforces
usingalinearelasticmodelandgrosssectionpropertiesofthemembersconsidered.
a) Allcontinuousreinforcementinstructuralwalls,diaphragms,trusses,struts,ties,chords,and
collectormembersshallbeanchoredorsplicedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsforreinforcement
intensionasspecifiedin8.3.7.4.
8.3.6.3 BoundaryMembersforStructuralWallsandDiaphragms
(a) Boundarymembersshallbeprovidedatboundariesandedgesaroundopeningsofstructuralwalls
anddiaphragmsforwhichthemaximumextremefibrestressexceedsu.2
c
i
unlesstheentirewallor
diaphragmmemberisreinforcedtosatisfy8.3.5.4(a)through8.3.5.4(c).Theboundarymembersmay
bediscontinuedwherethecalculatedcompressivestressislessthanu.1S
c
i
.Stressesshallbe
calculatedforthefactoredforcesusingalinearlyelasticmodelandgrosssectionproperties.
(b) Whererequired,boundarymembersshallhavetransversereinforcementasspecifiedin8.3.5.4(a)
through8.3.5.4(c).
(c) Boundarymembersofstructuralwallsshallbedesignedtocarryallfactoredgravityloadsonthe
wall,includingtributaryloadsandselfweight,aswellastheverticalforcerequiredtoresist
overturningmomentcalculatedfromfactoredforcesrelatedtoearthquakeeffect.
(d) Boundarymembersofstructuraldiaphragmsshallbeproportionedtoresistthesumofthefactored
axialforceactingintheplaneofthediaphragmandtheforceobtainedfromdividingthefactored
momentatthesectionbythedistancebetweentheedgesofthediaphragmatthatsection.
(e) Transversereinforcementinwallswithboundarymembersshallbeanchoredwithintheconfined
coreoftheboundarymembertodevelopthetensileyieldstress.
(f) Transversereinforcementterminatingattheedgesofstructuralwallswithoutboundaryelements
shallhaveastandardhookengagingtheedgereinforcementortheedgereinforcementshallbe
Part6
StructuralDesign
628 Vol.2
enclosedintheUstirrupshavingthesamesizeandspacingas,andsplicedto,thetransverse
reinforcement,exceptwhenI
u
Vuintheplaneofthewallislessthanu.u8SA
c
z
c
i
.
8.3.6.4 ConstructionJoints
Allconstructionjointsinwallsanddiaphragmsshallconformto5.16.4andcontactsurfacesshallberoughenedas
specifiedin6.4.5.9.
8.3.6.5 DiscontinuousWalls
Columnssupportingdiscontinuouswallsshallbereinforcedinaccordancewith8.3.5.4(e).
8.S.7 JointsofSpecialMomentFrames
8.3.7.1 GeneralRequirements
(a) Forces in longitudinal beam reinforcement at the faces of joints of reinforced concrete frames shall
bedeterminedforastressof1.2S

inthereinforcement.
(b) Jointstrengthshallbecalculatedbytheappropriatestrengthreductionfactorsspecifiedin6.2.3.1.
(c) Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminated in a column shall be extended to the far face of the
confined column core and anchored in tension according to 8.3.7.4 below and in compression
accordingtoSec8.2.
8.3.7.2 TransverseReinforcement
(a) As specified in 8.3.5.4, transverse hoop reinforcement shall be provided within the joint, unless the
jointisconfinedbystructuralmembersasspecifiedin(b)below.
(b) Withinthedepthoftheshallowestframingmember,transversereinforcementequaltoatleastone
halftheamountrequiredby8.3.5.4(a)shallbeprovidedwheremembersframeintoallfoursidesof
the joint and where each member width is at least threefourths the column width. At these
locations,thespacingspecifiedin8.3.5.4(b)maybeincreasedto150mm.
(c) As required by 8.3.5.4, transverse reinforcement shall be provided through the joint to provide
confinementforlongitudinalbeamreinforcementoutsidethecolumncoreifsuchconfinementisnot
providedbyabeamframingintothejoint.
TheseprovisionsareshowninFig.8.3.10andFig.8.3.11.

Fig.8.3.10GeneralRequirementsandTransverseReinforcementRequirementsforJointsnotconfinedbyStructural
member
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 629

Fig.8.3.11TransverseReinforcementRequirementsforJointsConfinedbyStructuralmember

8.3.7.3 ShearStrength
Thenominalshearstrengthforthejointshallbetakennotgreaterthantheforcesspecifiedbelow:
1.7
c
i
A
]
forjointsconfinedonallfourfaces
1.2
c
i
A
]
forjointsconfinedonthreefacesorontwooppositefaces
1.u
c
i
A
]
forothers
A member that frames intoa face is considered to provide confinement to the joint if at least threequarters of
the face of the joint is covered by the framing member. A joint is considered to be confined if such confining
membersframeintoallfacesofthejoint.
8.3.7.4 DevelopmentLengthofBarsinTension
(a) Thedevelopmentlength,l
dh
,forabarwithastandard90
o
hookshallbenotlessthan(i)8J
b
,(ii)
150mm,and(iii)thelengthrequiredbyEq(8.3.5).
l
dh
=
]
j
d
b
5.4]
c
|
(8.3.5)
forbarsizes10mm through36mm.
Part6
StructuralDesign
630 Vol.2
(b) Forbarsizes10mm through36mm,thedevelopmentlength,l
d
,forastraightbarshallbenot
lessthan(i)2.5timesthelengthrequiredby(a)above,ifthedepthoftheconcretecastinonelift
beneaththebardoesnotexceed300mm,and(ii)3.5timesthelengthrequiredby(a)above,ifthe
depthoftheconcretecastinoneliftbeneaththebarexceeds300mm.
(c) Straightbarsterminatedatajointshallpassthroughtheconfinedcoreofacolumnorofaboundary
member.Anyportionofthestraightembedmentlengthnotwithintheconfinedcoreshallbe
increasedbyafactorof1.6.
8.S.8 ShearStrengthRequirements
8.3.8.1 DesignForces
(a) FrameMembersSubjectedPrimarilytoBending:ThedesignshearforceI
c
shallbedeterminedfrom
considerationofthestaticalforcesontheportionofthememberbetweenfacesofthejoints.Itshall
beassumedthatmomentsofoppositesigncorrespondingtoprobablestrengthH
p
actatthejoint
faces,andthatthememberisloadedwiththefactoredtributarygravityloadalongitsspan.
(b) FrameMembersSubjectedtoCombinedBendingandAxialLoad:ThedesignshearforceI
c
shallbe
determinedfromconsiderationofthemaximumforcesthatcanbegeneratedatthefacesofthe
jointsateachendofthemember.Thesejointforcesshallbedeterminedusingthemaximum
probablemomentstrengthsH
p
ofthememberassociatedwiththerangeoffactoredaxialloadson
themember.Themembershearsneednotexceedthosedeterminedfromjointstrengthsbasedon
theprobablemomentstrengthH
p
ofthetransversemembersframingintothejoint.Innocase,I
c

shallbelessthanthefactoredsheardeterminedbytheanalysisofthestructure.
(c) StructuralWallsandDiaphragms:ThedesignshearforceI
c
shallbeobtainedfromthelateralload
analysisinaccordancewiththefactoredloadsandcombinationsspecifiedinChapter2,loads.
8.3.8.2 TransverseReinforcementinFrameMembers
(a) Fordeterminingtherequiredtransversereinforcementinframemembers,thequantityI
c
shallbe
assumedtobezeroifthefactoredaxialcompressiveforceincludingearthquakeeffectsislessthan
u.uSA
g

c
i
whentheearthquakeinducedshearforces,calculatedinaccordancewith8.3.8.1(a),
representsonehalformoreoftotaldesignshear.
(b) Stirrupsortiesrequiredtoresistshearshallbeclosedhoopsoverlengthsofmembersasspecifiedin
8.3.4.3,8.3.5.4and8.3.7.2.
8.3.8.3 ShearStrengthofSpecialStructuralWallsandDiaphragms
(a) Nominalshearstrengthofstructuralwallsanddiaphragmsshallbedeterminedusingeither(b)or(c)
below.
(b) Nominalshearstrength,I
n
ofstructuralwallsanddiaphragmsshallbeassumednottoexceedthe
shearforcecalculatedfrom
I
n
= A
c
(u.17z
c
i
+ p
n

) (8.3.6)
(c) Forwallsandwallsegmentshavingaratioof(b
w
l
w
)lessthan2.0,nominalshearstrengthofwall
anddiaphragmshallbedeterminedfrom
I
n
= A
c
(o
c
z
c
i
+ p
n

) (8.3.7)
wherethecoefficiento
c
varieslinearlyfrom0.25for(b
w
l
w
) = 1.Sto0.17for(b
w
l
w
) = 2.u.
For(b
w
l
w
) 1.S,o
c
= u.2S.
(d) Valueofratio(b
w
l
w
) usedin(c)abovefordeterminingI
n
forsegmentsofawallordiaphragmshall
bethelargeroftheratiosfortheentirewall(diaphragm)andthesegmentofwall(diaphragm)
considered.
(e) Wallsanddiaphragmsshallhavedistributedshearreinforcementprovidingresistanceintwo
orthogonaldirectionsintheplaneofthewall.Iftheratio(b
w
l
w
)doesnotexceed2.0,
reinforcementratio,p

shallnotbelessthanreinforcementratiop
n
.
(f) Nominalshearstrengthofallwallpierssharingacommonlateralforceshallnotbeassumedto
exceedu.67A
c

c
i
,whereA
c
isthetotalcrosssectionalarea,andthenominalshearstrengthof
anyoneoftheindividualwallpiersshallnotbeassumedtoexceedu.8SA
cp

c
i
whereA
cp

representsthecrosssectionalareaofthepierconsidered.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 631

(g) Nominalshearstrengthofhorizontalwallsegmentsshallbeassumednottoexceedu.8SA
cp

c
i
,
whereA
cp
representsthecrosssectionalareaofahorizontalwallsegment.
8.S.9 Ordinary Moment Frame Members not Proportioned to Resist Forces Induced by
EarthquakeMotion
8.3.9.1 Inducedmoments
Frame members assumed not to contribute to lateral resistance shall be detailed according to (a) or (b) below
depending on the magnitude of moments induced in those members when subjected to twice the lateral
displacementunderthefactoredlateralforces.
(a) Memberswithfactoredgravityaxialforcesnotexceedingu.1A
g

c
i
shallsatisfy8.3.4.2(a)and
8.3.8.1(a)andmemberswithfactoredgravityaxialforcesexceedingu.1A
g

c
i
shallsatisfy8.3.5.4,
8.3.7.2(a)and8.3.8.1(b)whentheinducedmomentexceedsthedesignmomentstrengthofthe
framemember.
(b) Themembershallsatisfy8.3.4.2(a)whentheinducedmomentdoesnotexceedthedesignmoment
strengthoftheframemembers.
8.3.9.2 Tierequirements
All frame members with factored axial compressive forces exceeding u.1A
g

c
i
shall satisfy the following special
requirementsunlesstheycomplywith8.3.5.4.
(a) Tiesshallhavehooksnotlessthan135
o
withextensionsnotlessthan6tiebardiameteror60mm.
Crosstiesasdefinedin8.3.2areallowed.
(b) Themaximumtiespacingshallbes
o
overalengthl
o
measuredfromthejointface.Thespacings
o

shallbenotmorethan(i)eightdiametersofthesmallestlongitudinalbarenclosed,(ii)24tiebar
diameters,and(iii)onehalftheleastcrosssectionaldimensionofthecolumn.Thelengthl
o
shallnot
belessthan(i)onesixthoftheclearheightofthecolumn,(ii)themaximumcrosssectional
dimensionofthecolumn,and(iii)450mm.
(c) Thefirsttieshallbewithinadistanceequaltou.S s
o
fromthefaceofthejoint.
(d) Thetiespacingshallnotexceed2 s
o
inanypartofthecolumn.
8.S.1u RequirementsforIntermediateMomentFrames
8.3.10.1 Scope
ForstructuresassignedtoSDCC,structuralframesproportionedtoresistforcesinducedbyearthquakemotions
shallsatisfytherequirementsof8.3.10inadditiontothoseofChapter6.
8.3.10.2 ReinforcementRequirements
Reinforcement details in a frame member shall satisfy 8.3.10.4 below if the factored compressive axial load for
the member does not exceed u.1A
g

c
i
. If the factored compressive axial load is larger, frame reinforcement
details shall satisfy 8.3.10.5 below unlessthe memberhasspiralreinforcement according to Eq(6.3.6). If a two
wayslabsystemwithoutbeamsistreatedaspartofaframeresistingearthquakeeffect,reinforcementdetailsin
anyspanresistingmomentscausedbylateralforceshallsatisfy8.3.10.6below.
8.3.10.3 Shearrequirements
Design shear strength of beams, columns, and twoway slabs resisting earthquake effect shall not be less than
either (a) the sum of the shear associated with development of nominal moment strengths of the member at
each restrained end of the clear span and the shear calculated for factored gravity loads, or (b) the maximum
shearobtainedfromdesignloadcombinationswhichincludeearthquakeeffect.
8.3.10.4 Beams
(a) Thepositivemomentstrengthatthefaceofthejointshallnotbelessthanonethirdthenegative
momentstrengthprovidedatthatface(Fig.8.3.12).Neitherthenegativenorpositivemoment
strengthatanysectionalongthelengthofthemembershallbelessthanonefifthofthemaximum
momentstrengthprovidedatthefaceofeitherjoint.
Part6
StructuralDesign
632 Vol.2
(b) Atbothendsofthemember,stirrupsshallbeprovidedoverlengthsequaltotwicethemember
depthmeasuredfromthefaceofthesupportingmembertowardmidspan(Fig.8.3.13).Thefirst
stirrupshallbelocatednotmorethan50mmfromthefaceofthesupportingmember.Maximum
stirrupspacingshallnotexceed(a)J4,(b)8timesthediameterofthesmallestlongitudinalbar
enclosed,(c)24timesthediameterofthestirrupbar,and(d)300mm.
(c) StirrupsshallbeplacedatnotmorethanJ2throughoutthelengthofthemember.

Fig.8.3.12FlexuralRequirementsforBeams

Fig.8.3.13TransversereinforcementRequirementsforBeams
8.3.10.5 Columns
(a) Maximumtiespacingshallnotexceeds
o
sooveralengthl
o
measuredfromthejointface.The
spacings
o
soshallnotexceed(i)8timesthediameterofthesmallestlongitudinalbarenclosed,(ii)24
timesthediameterofthetiebar,(iii)onehalfofthesmallestcrosssectionaldimensionoftheframe
member,and(iv)300mm.Thelengthl
o
shallnotbelessthan(i)onesixthoftheclearspanofthe
member,(ii)maximumcrosssectionaldimensionofthemember,and(iii)450mm.
(b) Thefirsttieshallbelocatednotmorethans
o
2fromthejointface.
(c) Jointreinforcementshallconformto6.4.9.
Chapter1
UltimateStrengthDesignofReinforcedConcreteStructures
BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 633

(d) Tiespacingshallnotexceed2s
o
throughoutthelengthofthemember.
TheserequirementsareshowninFig.8.3.14.

Fig.8.3.14TransverseReinforcementRequirementsforColumns
8.3.10.6 TwowaySlabswithoutBeams
(a) Thefactoredslabmomentatthesupportsrelatingtoearthquakeeffectshallbedeterminedforload
combinationsspecifiedinChapter2,Loads.Allreinforcementprovidedtoresisttheportionofslab
momentbalancedbysupportmomentshallbeplacedwithinthecolumnstripdefinedin6.5.2.1
(Fig.8.3.15).
(b) Thefractionalpartofthecolumnstripmomentshallberesistedbyreinforcementplacedwithinthe
effectivewidth(Fig.8.3.15)specifiedin6.5.5.3.2.
(c) Notlessthanonehalfofthetotalreinforcementinthecolumnstripatthesupportshallbeplaced
withintheeffectiveslabwidth(Fig.8.3.15)specifiedin6.5.5.3.2.
(d) Notlessthanonequarterofthetopsteelatthesupportinthecolumnstripshallbecontinuous
throughoutthespan(Fig.8.3.16).
(e) Continuousbottomreinforcementinthecolumnstripshallbenotlessthanonethirdofthetop
reinforcementatthesupportinthecolumnstrip.
(f) Notlessthanonehalfofallbottomreinforcementatmidspanshallbecontinuousandshalldevelop
itsyieldstrengthatthefaceofsupport(Fig.8.3.17).
Part6
StructuralDesign
634 Vol.2
(g) Atdiscontinuousedgesoftheslaballtopandbottomreinforcementatthesupportshallbe
developedatthefaceofthesupport(Fig.8.3.16andFig.8.3.17).

Fig.8.3.15ReinforcementDetailsatSupportofTwowaySlabswithoutbeams

Fig.8.3.16ReinforcementDetailsinTwowaySlabswithoutbeams:ColumnStrip

Fig.8.3.17ReinforcementDetailsinTwowaySlabswithoutbeams:MiddleStrip

Part6
StructuralDesign 6449
Chapter 9
PRESTRESSEDCONCRETESTRUCTURES
PartADesign
9.1 Scope
9.1.1 Provisionsofthischaptershallapplytomembersprestressedwithwires,strands,orbarsconformingto
thespecificationsofprestressingtendonsgiveninArticle9.5.1.3.
9.1.2 Allprovisionsofthiscodenotspecificallyexcluded,andnotinconflictwithprovisionsofthisChapter9,
shallapplytoprestressedconcrete.
9.2 Definitions
ACTION: Mechanical force or environmental effect to which the structure (or structural component) is
subjected.
AERODYNAMIC SHAPE FACTOR: Factor to account for the effect of geometry of structure on the surface
pressureduetowind.
ANALYSIS (ASSESSMENT): Acceptable methods of evaluating the performance indices or verifying the
complianceofspecificcriteria.
ANCHORAGE: In posttensioning, a mechanical device used to anchor the tendon to the concrete; in
pretensioning, a device used to anchor the tendon until the concrete has reached a predetermined strength,
andtheprestressingforcehasbeentransferredtotheconcrete;forreinforcingbars,alengthofreinforcement,
oramechanicalanchororhook,orcombinationthereofattheendofabarneededtotransfertheforcecarried
bythebarintotheconcrete.
ANCHORAGE BLISTER: A buildup area on the web, flange, or flangeweb junction for the incorporation of
tendonanchoragefittings.
ANCHORAGE ZONE: The portion of the structure in which the prestressing force is transferred from the
anchoragedeviceontothelocalzoneoftheconcrete,andthendistributedmorewidelyinthegeneralzoneof
thestructure.
ATJACKING:Atthetimeoftensioningtheprestressingtendons.
AT LOADING:The maturity of the concrete when loads are applied.Such loads include prestressing forcesand
permanentloadsbutgenerallynotliveloads.
ATTRANSFER:Immediatelyafterthetransferofprestressingforcetotheconcrete.
AUTOGENEOUS SHRINKAGE: Volume decrease due to loss of water in the hydration process causing negative
porepressureinconcrete.
BIOLOGICAL DEGRADATION: The physical or chemical degradation of concrete due to the effect of organic
matterssuchasbacteria,lichens,fungi,moss,etc.
BLEEDING: Segregation between water and the other ingredients in concrete causing water to rise up to the
surfaceofthefreshlyplacedconcrete.
BONDEDMEMBER:Aprestressedconcretememberinwhichtendonsarebondedtotheconcreteeitherdirectly
orthroughgrouting.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6450 Vol.2
BONDED POSTTENSIONING: Posttensioned construction in which the annular space around the tendons is
groutedafterstressing,therebybondingthetendontotheconcretesection.
BONDEDTENDON:Prestressingtendonthatisbondedtoconcreteeitherdirectlyorthroughgrouting.
BURSTING FORCE: Tensile forces in the concrete in the vicinity of the transfer or anchorage of prestressing
forces.
CARBONATION:Actioncausedbychemicalreactionbetweencalciumhydroxideinconcreteandcarbondioxide
intheenvironment,resultinginadensersurfaceforthecarbonatedconcreteandreductionofalkalinityinthe
carbonatedportion.
CASTINPLACECONCRETE:Concreteplacedinitsfinalpositioninthestructurewhilestillinaplasticstate.
CHARACTERISTICSTRENGTH:Unlessotherwisestatedinthiscode,thecharacteristicstrengthofmaterialrefers
tothevalueofthestrengthbelowwhichnoneofthetestresultsshouldfallbelowbymorethan15%or3.5MPa
for35MPaconcrete,and10%or3.5MPafor35Mpaconcrete,whicheverislarger.
CHEMICAL ADMIXTUREs: Admixtures which are usually used in small quantities typically in the form of liquid
and can be added to the concrete both at the time of mixing and before placing to improve various concrete
propertiessuchasworkability,aircontentanddurability,etc.
CLOSELY SPACED ANCHORAGES: Anchorage devices are defined as closely spaced if their centre to centre
spacingdoesnotexceed1.5timesthewidthoftheanchoragedevicesinthedirectionconsidered.
CLOSURE: A placement of castinplace concrete used to connect two or more previously cast portions of a
structure.
COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION: Concrete components or concrete and steel components interconnected to
respondtoforceeffectsasaunit.
COMPRESSIONCONTROLLED SECTION: A crosssection in which the net tensile strain in the extreme tension
steelatnominalresistanceislessthanorequaltothecompressioncontrolledstrainlimit.
COMPRESSIONCONTROLLEDSTRAINLIMIT:Thenettensilestrainintheextremetensionsteelatbalancedstrain
conditions.
CONCRETECOVER:Thespecifiedminimumdistancebetweenthesurfaceofthereinforcingbars,strands,post
tensioningducts,anchorages,orotherembeddeditems,andthesurfaceoftheconcrete.
CONFINEMENT: A condition where the disintegration of the concrete under compression is prevented by the
developmentoflateraland/orcircumferential forcessuchasmaybeprovidedbyappropriatereinforcingsteel
orcompositetubes,orsimilardevices.
CONFINEMENT ANCHORAGE: Anchorage for a posttensioning tendon that functions on the basis of
containmentoftheconcreteintheanchoragezonebyspecialreinforcement.
CREEP:Timedependentdeformationofconcreteunderpermanentload.
CREEPCOEFFICIENT:Theratioofcreepstraintoelasticstraininconcrete.
CREEPINCONCRETE:Increaseinstrainwithtimeinconcretesubjectedtosustainedstress.
CURVATUREFRICTION:Frictionresultingfrombendsorcurvesinthespecifiedprestressingtendstageatwhich
thecompressivestressesonprofile.
DAMAGECONTROL:Ameanstoensurethat thelimitstaterequirementismetforrestorabilityorrepairability
ofastructure.
DECOMPRESSION:Thestageatwhichthecompressivestresses,inducedprestress,areovercomebythetensile
stresses.
DEEPCOMPONENT:componentsinwhichthedistancefromthepointof0.0sheartothefaceofthesupportis
lessthan2dorcomponentsinwhichaloadcausingmorethanonethirdoftheshearatasupportiscloserthan
2dfromthefaceofthesupport.
DEFORMABILITY:Atermexpressingtheabilityofconcretetodeform.
DEGREE OF DETERIORATION: The extent to which the performance of a structure is degraded or the extent to
which the deterioration has progressed from the time of construction, as a result of its exposure to the
environment.
DESIGN LIFE: Assumed period for which the structure is to be used satisfactorily for its intended purpose or
functionwithanticipatedmaintenancebutwithoutsubstantialrepairbeingnecessary.
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6451
DETERIRATIONFACTOR:Thefactoraffectingthedeteriorationprocess.
DETERIRATIONINDEX:Anindexselectedforestimatingandevaluatingtheextentofthedeteriorationprocess.
DETERIORATION PREDICTION: Prediction of the future rate of deterioration of a structure based on results of
inspectionandrelevantrecordsmadeduringthedesignandconstructionstages.
DEVIATION SADDLE: A concrete block buildout in web, flange, or webflange junction used to control the
geometryofortoprovideameansforchangingdirectionof,externaltendons.
DRYING SHRINKAGE: Volume decrease due to loss of moisture from concrete in the hardened state which is
usuallyseriousinhotanddryenvironment.
DURABILITYDESIGN:Designtoensurethat thestructurecanmaintainitsrequiredfunctionsduringservicelife
underenvironmentalactions.
DURABILITY GRADE: The extent of durability to which the structure shall be maintained in order to satisfy the
requiredperformanceduringitsdesignlife.Thisaffectsthedegreeandfrequencyoftheremedialactionstobe
carriedoutduringthatlife.
DURABILITYLIMITSTATE:Themaximumdegreeofdeteriorationallowedforthestructureduringitsdesignlife.
DURABILITYPREDICTION:Predictionofthefuturedegreeofdeteriorationofthestructurebasedondatausedin
itsdesign.
DYNAMICAPPROACH:Anapproachbasedondynamicanalysistoassesstheoverallforcesonastructureliable
tohavearesonantresponsetowindaction.
DYNAMICRESPONSEFACTOR:Factortoaccountfortheeffectsofcorrelationandresonantresponse.
EARLYAGESTATE:Thestateofconcretefromfinalsettinguntiltheachievementoftherequiredcharacteristic
strength.
EFFECTIVEPRESTRESS:Stressremaininginprestressingtendonsafteralllosseshaveoccurred,excludingeffects
ofdeadloadandsuperimposedload.
ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIONS: An assembly of physical, chemical or biological influences which may cause
deterioration to the materials making up the structure, which in turn may adversely affect its serviceability,
restorabilityandsafety.
FATIGUE LOADS: Repetitive loads causing fatigue in the material which reduces its strength, stiffness and
deformability.
FINALPRESTRESS:Stresswhichexistsaftersubstantiallyalllosseshaveoccurred.
FINALTENSION:Thetensioninthesteelcorrespondingtothestateofthefinalprestress.
FORMWORK: Total system of support for freshly placed concrete including the mould or sheathing, all
supportingmembers,hardwareandnecessarybracings.
FRESHSTATEOFCONCRETE:Thestateofconcreteaftermixinguntilthecompletionofplacing.
FUNCTION:Thetaskwhichastructureisrequiredtoperform.
GENERALZONE:Regionadjacenttoaposttensionedanchoragewithinwhichtheprestressingforcespreadsout
toanessentiallylinearstressdistributionoverthecrosssectionofthecomponent.
GROUT:Amixtureofcementitiousmaterialandwaterwithorwithoutadmixtures.
HARDENEDSTATEOFCONCRETE:Thestateofconcreteafterachievingtherequiredstrength.
IMPORTANCE: rank assigned to a structure according to the likely overall impact caused by its failure, due to
deterioration,tosatisfactorilyperformitsfunctionsasdeterminedatthetimeofdesign.
INITIALPRESTRESS:Theprestressintheconcreteattransfer.
INITIALTENSION:Themaximumstressinducedintheprestressingtendonatthetimeofstressingoperation.
IRREGULAR STRUCTURES: Structures having unusual shapes such as open structures, structures with large
overhangsorotherprojections,andanybuildingwithacomplexshape.
JACKINGFORCE:Temporaryforceexertedbydevicethatintroducestensionintoprestressingtendons.
LIMITSTATE:Acriticalstatespecifiedusingaperformanceindex,beyondwhichthestructurenolongersatisfies
thedesignperformancerequirements.
LIMITSOFDISPLACEMENT:Allowabledeformationofstructureintermsofsuchparametersasinterstoreydrift
andrelativehorizontaldisplacement,tocontrolexcessivedeflection,crackingandvibration.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6452 Vol.2
Longterm performance index: Index defining the remaining capacity of a structure in performing its design
functionsduringthedesignlife.
LOCAL ZONE: The volume of concrete that surrounds and is immediately ahead of the anchorage device and
thatissubjectedtohighcompressivestresses.
MAINTENANCE: A set of activities taken to ensure that the structure continues to perform its functions
satisfactorilyduringthedesignlife.
MECHANICALFORCES:Anassemblyofconcentratedordistributedforcesactingonastructure,ordeformations
imposedonit.
MODEL: Mathematical description or experimental setup simulating the actions, material properties and
behaviorofastructure.
MONITORING:Continuousrecordingofdatapertainingtodeteriorationand/orperformanceofstructureusing
appropriateequipment.
NOMINALSTRENGTHOFMATERIAL:Thecharacteristicvaluesofthestrengthofmaterialsusedforcalculation,in
absenceoftheavailablestatisticaldata.
NORMALCONCRETE:Concretewhichiscommonlyusedinconstruction;itdoesnotincludespecialconstituent
materials other than Portland cement, water, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and common mineral and
chemicaladmixtures;itdoesnotrequireanyspecialpracticeforitsmanufacturingandhandling.
OVERALLPERFORMANCEINDEX:Indexindicatingtheoverallperformanceofthestructure.
specialpracticeforitsmanufacturingandhandling.
PARTIALPERFORMANCEINDEX:Indexindicatingapartialperformanceofthestructure.
PARTIALSAFETYFACTORFORMATERIAL:Foranalysispurposes,thedesignstrengthofamaterialisdetermined
asthecharacteristicstrengthdividedbyapartialsafetyfactor.
PERFORMANCE:Ability(orefficiency)ofastructuretoperformitsdesignfunctions.
PERFORMANCEINDEX:Indexindicatingstructuralperformancequantitatively.
PERMANENTACTIONS:Selfweightsofstructuresinclusiveofpermanentattachments,fixturesandfittings.
PLASTIC SHRINKAGE: Shrinkage arising from loss of water from the exposed surface of concrete during the
plasticstate,leadingtocrackingattheexposedsurface.
PLSTICSTATE:Thestateofconcretefromjustafterplacinguntilthefinalsettingofconcrete.
POSTTENSIONING:Methodofprestressinginwhichtendonsaretensionedafterconcretehashardened.
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE : Reinforced concrete in which internal stresses have been introduced to reduce
potentialtensilestressesinconcreteresultingfromloads.
PRETENSIONING:Methodofprestressinginwhichtendonsaretensionedbeforeconcreteisplaced.
SHRINKAGELOSS:Thelossofstressintheprestressingsteelresultingfromtheshrinkageofconcrete.
RELIABILITY:Abilityofastructuretofulfillspecifiedrequirementsduringitsdesignlife.
REMAINING SERVICE LIFE: Period from the point of inspection to the time when the structure is no longer
useable,ordoesnotsatisfactorilyperformthefunctionsdeterminedatthetimeofdesign.
REMEDIAL ACTION: Maintenance action carried out with the objective of arresting or slowing down the
deteriorationprocess,restoringorimprovingtheperformanceofastructure,orreducingthedangerofdamage
orinjurytotheusersoranythirdparty.
REPAIR:Remedialactiontakenwiththeobjectiveofarrestingorslowingdownthedeteriorationofastructure,
orreducingthepossibilityofdamagetotheusersorthirdparty.
RESTORABILTY (OR REPAIRABILIY): Ability of a structure to be repaired physically and economically when
damagedundertheeffectsofconsideredactions.
ROBUSTNESS (OR STRUCTURAL INSENSITIVITY): Ability of a structure to withstand damage by events like fire,
explosion,impact,instabilityorconsequencesofhumanerrors.
SAFETY: Ability ofastructure to ensure that no harmwould come to the usersandtopeople in thevicinityof
thestructureunderanyaction.
SEGREGATION:Separationofoneormoreconstituentmaterialsfromtherestoftheconcrete,suchasbleeding,
aggregateblocking,etc.
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6453
SERVICE LIFE:The length of time from the completion of a structureuntil the time when it is no longer usable
becauseofitsfailuretoadequatelyperformitsdesignfunctions.
SERVICEABILITY: Ability of a structure to provide adequate services or functionality in use under the effects of
consideredactions.
SETTLEMENTOFCONCRETE:Sinkingoftheconcretesurfaceafterplacingduetobleedingand/orescapingofthe
entrappedandentrainedairintheconcrete.
SPECIAL CONCRETE: Concrete other than normal concrete including light weight concrete, roller compacted
concrete,selfcompactingconcrete,fiberreinforcedconcrete,antiwashoutunderwaterconcrete,etc.
STIFFANDFLEXIBLESTRUCURES:Stiffstructuresrefertothosethatarenotsensitivetodynamiceffectsofwind,
whileflexibleonesarethosethataresensitivetosucheffects.
STRENGTHENING: Remedial action applied to a structure with the objective of restoring or improving its load
bearingcapacitytoalevelwhichisequalto,orhigherthan,theoriginaldesignlevel.
STRESS AT TRANSFER : The stress in both the prestressing tendon and the concrete at the stage when the
prestressingtendonisreleasedfromtheprestressingmechanism.
SURFACE FINISHING: Action, such as troweling, applied to the exposed portion of concrete to obtain a neat
surface.
TEMPERATURECRACKING:Crackingcausedbythermalstresswhicharisesfromdifferentialtemperaturesinthe
concretemass.
TENDON :Steelelement such as wire, cable, bar,rod,or strand, ora bundle of suchelements, used to impart
prestresstoconcrete.
THRESHOLDLEVELOFPERFORMANCE:Minimumacceptablelevelofperformanceofastructure.
TRANSFER: Act of transferring stress in prestressing tendons from jacks or pretensioning bed to concrete
member.
TRIBUTARYAREA:Areaofbuildingsurfacecontributingtotheforcebeingconsidered,duetowindactions,and
projectedonaverticalplanenormaltothewinddirection.
TRANSMISSION LENGTH : The distance required at the end of a pretensioned tendon for developing the
maximumtendonstressbybond.
ULTIMATELIMITSTATE:Limitstateforsafety.
VARIABLE ACTION: Action due to a moving object on the structure as well as any load whose intensity is
variable,includingtrafficload,waveload,waterpressure,andloadinducedbytemperaturevariation.
WOBBLE FRICTION: Friction caused by unintended deviation of prestressing sheath or duct from its specified
profile.
WORKABILITY:Thetermexpressingtheeasewithwhichconcretecanbeplaced,compactedandfilled.
9.3 Notations

a =
depthofequivalentrectangularstressblock,mm
A =
area of the part of crosssection between flexural tension face and centre
ofgravityofgrosssection,mm
2

Aps =
areaofprestressedreinforcementintensionzone,mm
2

As =
areaofnonprestressedtensionreinforcement,mm
2

A's =
areaofcompressionreinforcement,mm
2

b =
widthofcompressionfaceofmember,mm
d =
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of nonprestressed
tensionreinforcement,mm
d

=
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of compression
reinforcement,mm
Part6
StructuralDesign

6454 Vol.2
b
d

=
nominaldiameterofbar,wire,orprestressingstrand,mm
p
d

=
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed
reinforcement,mm
D =
deadloads,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces
e =
baseofNapierianlogarithm
c
f

=
specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete,N/mm
2

ci
f

=
compressivestrengthofconcreteattransferofprestress,N/mm
2

f
d
=
stress due to unfactored dead load, at extreme fiber of section where
tensilestressiscausedbyexternallyappliedloads,N/mm2
f
pe
=
compressivestressinconcreteduetoeffectiveprestressforcesonly(after
allowanceforallprestresslosses)atextremefiberofsectionwheretensile
stressiscausedbyexternallyappliedloads,N/mm
2

f
pc

=
averagecompressivestressinconcreteduetoeffectiveprestressforceonly
(afterallowanceforallprestresslosses),N/mm
2

f
ps
=
stressinprestressedreinforcementatnominalstrength,N/mm2
f
pu
=
specifiedtensilestrengthofprestressingtendons,N/mm2
f
py
=
specifiedyieldstrengthofprestressingtendons,N/mm2
f
r
=
modulusofruptureofconcrete,N/mm2
f
se

=
effective stress in prestressed reinforcement (after allowance for all
prestress
f
y
=
specifiedyieldstrengthofnonprestressedreinforcement,N/mm2
h =
overallthicknessofmember,mm

h
f

=
overallthicknessofflangeofflangedsection,mm
I =
moment of inertia of crosssection resisting externally applied factored
loads,mm
4

k =
wobblefrictioncoefficientpermeterofprestressingtendon

l
=
length of span of twoway flat plates in direction parallel to that of the
reinforcementbeingdetermined,mm

l
x =
length of prestressing tendon element from jacking end to any point x,
metre
L =
liveloads,orrelatedinternalmomentsandforces
M
cr
=
momentcausingflexuralcrackingatsectionduetoexternallyappliedloads,
kNm
M
max
=
maximum factored moment at section due to externally applied loads,
kNm
M
u
=
factoredmomentatsection,kNm
N
c
=
tensileforceinconcreteduetounfactoreddeadloadplusliveload(D+L),
kN
P
j
=
prestressingtendonforceatjackingend,kN
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6455
PI
P
=
Inherentorpossessedperformanceindex
PI
R
=
Inherentorpossessedperformanceindex
P
x
=
prestressingtendonforceatanypointx
s =
spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction parallel to
longitudinalreinforcement,mm
V
c
=
nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyconcrete,kN
V
ci
=
nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking
resultsfromcombinedshearandmoment,kN
V
cw
=
nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking
resultsfromexcessiveprincipaltensilestressinweb,kN
V
d
=
shearforceatsectionduetounfactoreddeadload,kN

V
i

=
factored shear force at section due to externally applied loads occurring
simultaneouslywithMmax,kN
V
n
=
nominalshearstrength,kN
V
p
=
verticalcomponentofeffectiveprestressforceatsection,kN
V
s
=
nominalshearstrengthprovidedbyshearreinforcement,kN
V
u
=
factoredshearforceatsection,kN
x =
shorteroveralldimensionofrectangularpartofcrosssection

=
totalangularchangeofprestressingtendonprofileinradiansfromtendon
jackingendtoanypointx
y =
longeroveralldimensionofrectangularpartofcrosssection
y
t
=
distancefromcentroidalaxisofgrosssection,neglectingreinforcement,to
extremefibreintension
1

=
factordefinedinSec9.5.5(c)
p

=
factorfortypeofprestressingtendon
=
0.55for
pu py
f f
notlessthan0.80
=
0.40for
pu py
f f
notlessthan0.85
=
0.28for
pu py
f f
notlessthan0.90

=
curvaturefrictioncoefficient

= ratioofnonprestressedtensionreinforcement= bd A
s

= ratioofcompressionreinforcement= bd A
s

p
= ratioofprestressedreinforcement=
p ps
bd A

=
strengthreductionfactor

=
c y
f f

=
c y
f f

p
=
c ps p
f f

Part6
StructuralDesign

6456 Vol.2
w pw w
, ,

=
reinforcement indices for flanged sections computed for w, w
p,
and w'
except that b shall be the web width, and reinforcement area shall be
thatrequiredtodevelopcompressivestrengthofwebonly.

For other symbols and units of quantities, reference shall be made to
Chapter6.
9.4 Analysisanddesign
9.4.1 Requirement
9.4.1.1 General
(a) Prestressed members shall be designed for adequate strength in accordance with the
provisionsofthischapter.
(b) Unless specifically excluded or superseded by the provisions of this chapter, all other
relevantprovisionsofthiscodeshallapplytoprestressedconcrete.
(c) Designofprestressedmembersshallbebasedonstrengthandonthebehavioratservice
conditions at all critical load stages during the life of the structure from the time of
prestressisfirstapplied.
(d) Stressconcentrationsduetoprestressingshallbeconsideredindesign.
(e) Provisions shall be made for effects on adjoining construction of elastic and plastic
deformations, deflections, changes in length and rotations due to prestressing. Effects of
temperatureandshrinkageshallalsobeconsidered.
(f) Thepossibilityofbucklinginamemberbetweenpointswherethereisintermittentcontact
between prestressing steel and an oversized duct and buckling in thin webs and flanges
shallbeconsidered.
(g) Incomputingsectionpropertiesbeforebondingofprestressingsteel,effectoflossofarea
duetoopenductsshallbeconsidered.
(h) Thermalgradientanddifferentialshrinkageshallbeconsideredincompositeconstruction
usingprestressedconcretemembers.
(i) Inevaluatingtheslendernesseffectsduringliftingofslenderbeams,considerationshallbe
given to beam geometry, location of lifting points, method of lifting and tolerances in
construction. All beams which are lifted on vertical or inclined slings shall be checked for
lateralstabilityandlateralmomentonaccountoftiltingofbeam.Referencemaybemade
tospecialistliteratureinthisregard.
9.4.1.2 DesignAssumptions
(a) Strength design of prestressed members for flexure and axial loads shall be based on
assumptions given in Sec 9.4.1.2 b. to g. and shall satisfy the applicable conditions of
equilibriumandcompatibilityofstrains.
(b) Strains in steel and concrete shall be assumed to be directly proportional to the distance
fromtheneutralaxisexceptforDeepBeams.
(c) Stress in nonprestressed reinforcement (if used) below f
y
, shall be taken as Es times steel
strain. For strains greater than that corresponding to f
y
, stress in reinforcement shall be
consideredindependentofstrainandequaltof
y
.
(d) Maximum usable strain at extreme concrete compression fiber shall be assumed to be
0.003.
(e) The relationship between concrete compressive stress distribution and concrete strain
shallbeassumedtoberectangular,trapezoidal,parabolic,oranyothershapethatresults
inpredictionofstrengthinsubstantialagreementwithresultsofcomprehensivetests
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6457
c t
f f 62 . 0
c t c
f f f 0 . 1 62 . 0
c t
f f > 0 . 1
c t
f f 50 . 0
(f) Requirements of 9.4.1.2e. are satisfied by an equivalent rectangular concrete stress
distributiondefinedbythefollowing:
i) Concrete stress of 0.85f
c
shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an
equivalentcompressionzoneboundedbyedgesofthecrosssectionandastraight
linelocatedparalleltotheneutralaxis at a distance a =
1
c from the fiber of
maximumcompressivestrain.
ii) Distance from the fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis, c, measured in a
directionperpendiculartotheneutralaxis.
iii) Forfc'between17.5and28MPa,
1
shallbetakenas0.85.Forfc'above28MPa,

1
shallbereducedlinearlyatarateof0.05foreach7MPaofstrengthinexcess
of28MPa,but
1
shallnotbetakenlessthan0.65.
(g) Forinvestigationofstressesattransferofprestress,atserviceloads,andatcrackingloads,
elastictheoryshallbeusedwiththefollowingassumptions:
i) Strainsvarylinearlywithdepththroughtheentireloadrange.
ii) Atcrackedsections,concreteresistsnotension.
9.4.1.3 Classificationofprestressedconcretemembers
PrestressedconcreteflexuralmembersshallbeclassifiedasClassU(uncracked),ClassT(transition)andClassC
(cracked)basedonextremefiberstressintensionintheprecompressedtensilezoneasfollows:
(a) ClassU:Permissibleflexuraltensilestresses
(b) ClassT:
(c) ClassC:
(d) d. Prestressedtwowayslabsystemsshallbedesignedas
9.4.1.4 Shapesofbeamsandgirders
Forprestressedconcretenoncompositebeams/girders,thefrequentlyusedshapesare:
(a) SymmetricalIsection,(b)UnsymmetricalIsection,(c)Tsection,
(d)InvertedTsection,(e)Boxsection,(f)solidrectangularsection.
Commentary:
The suitability of selecting a particular shape will depend on the specific design requirement and
economyofconstruction.Ingeneral,toachieveeconomyinsteelandconcrete,itisbesttoputthe
concrete nearthe extreme fibers ofthe compression flange. Tosuit this condition,Isection is the
mostnaturalchoice.TheinvertedTsectionmayonlybeselectedforcompositeconstructionwhen
tensionflangeisprecastandthecompressionflangeispouredinplace.
Inchoosingbeam/girdershapes,dueconsiderationshouldbegiventothesimplicityof formwork.
Whenformworkistobeusedonce,itmayconstitutethemajorcostofbeam/girder.Anyirregular
shape of beam/girder is generally unjustifiable on this ground. Rectangular solid sections are an
obvious choice for flat slabs for floor and roof. Precast Tee or double Tee sections with a light
concretetappingmaybemoreeconomicalchoiceforfloorconstructionofmultistoriedresidential,
commercialandfactorybuildingswithmoderatecolumnspacing.
9.4.2 Materialpropertiesfordesign
9.4.2.1 Concrete
(a) Class
TheClassofconcreteisdefinedbythecharacteristicstrengthofconcreteincylinderat28days,
f'c. For example, Class 10 concrete indicates concrete with f
c
' = 10 N/mm
2
. The classes of
concretecommonlyusedare:Class10,15,20,25,30,35,40,45and50,althoughconcretein
betweentheseclassesmayalsobeused.
(b) Modulusofelasticity,Ec
Part6
StructuralDesign

6458 Vol.2
Modulus of elasticity, Ec for concrete shall be permitted to be taken as wc
1.5
0.043(f
c
')
0.5
(in
N/mm
2
)forvaluesofw
c
between1440and2560kg/m
3
.Fornormalweightconcrete,Ecmaybe
permittedtobetakenas4700(f
c
')
0.5
.
9.4.2.2 Reinforcingsteel
a. Modulusofelasticity,Es
Whereitisnotpossibletoascertainthemodulusofelasticityofreinforcing steel by test and
fromthemanufacturerofsteel,themodulusofelasticityof reinforcing steel may be permitted
tobetakenasEs=200,000N/mm
2
.
9.4.2.3 Prestressingsteel
(a) Modulusofelasticity,Es
Whereitisnotpossibletoascertainthemodulusofelasticityofreinforcingandprestressing steel
bytestandfromthemanufacturerofsteel,thevaluesofEs giveninTable9.4.1maybeused:
Table9.4.1 Modulusofelasticityofprestressingsteelandcolddrawnwire
Typeofsteel Modulusofelasticity,Es
(kN/mm
2
)
Plain/indentedcolddrawnwire 200
Hightensilesteelbarsrolledorheattreated 205
Strands 195
9.4.3 Nominalstrengthsofbondedreinforcementandofconcreteattransfer
9.4.3.1 Bondedreinforcement
(a) Tensilestressatnominalstrengthofbondedreinforcementislimitedtofyfornonprestressed
reinforcementandtof
py
forprestressedreinforcement.Tensilestressatnominalstrengthof
unbondedprestressedreinforcementforresistingtensileforcesintheanchoragezoneshallbe
limitedtof
ps
=f
se
+70.
(b) Exceptforconcreteconfinedwithinspiralsorhoopsprovidingconfinementequivalenttothat
corresponding to Eq. (9.4.31), compressive strength in concrete in the general zone shall be
limitedto0.7f
ci
.
Commentary:
Eq.(9.4.31)isgivenbelow.

yt
c
ch
g
s
f
f
A
A
'
) 1 ( 45 . 0 =
(9.4.31)
wherethevalueof
yt
f usedinEq.(9.4.31)shallnotexceed700N/mm
2
.For
yt
f greaterthan
420N/mm
2
normallapsplicesasshowninChapter6shallnotbeapplied.
9.4.3.2 Concretestrengthattransfer
Compressive strength of concrete at time of posttensioning shall be specified in the contract
documents. Unless oversize anchorage devices are sized to compensate for the lower compressive
strength or the prestressing steel is stressed to no more than 50 percent of the final prestressing
force, prestressing steel shall not be stresseduntil compressivestrength ofconcrete as indicated by
tests consistent with the curing of the member, is at least 28 N/mm
2
for multistrand tendons or at
least17N/mm
2
forsinglestrandorbartendons.
9.4.4 ServiceabilityRequirementsFlexuralMembers
9.4.4.1 Stressesinconcreteimmediatelyafterprestresstransfer
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6459
Stresses in concrete immediately after prestress transfer (before timedependent prestress losses
occur)areasfollows:
(a) Extremefiberstressincompressionexceptas
permittedin(b)shallnotexceed................0.60f
ci

(b) Extremefiberstressincompressionatendsof
simplysupportmembersshallnotexceed...0.70f
ci

(c) Where computed concrete tensile strength, f

t
, exceeds
c
f 5 . 0 at ends of simply
supportedmembers,or
c
f 25 . 0 atotherlocations,additionalbondedreinforcementshall
beprovidedinthetensilezonetoresistthe totaltensileforceinconcretecomputedwiththe
assumptionofanuncrackedsection.
9.4.4.1.1 Stressesinconcreteatserviceloadsandreinforcementspacing
9.4.4.1.2 Allowablestressesinconcrete
For Class U and Class T prestressed flexural members, stresses in concrete at service loads (based
on uncracked section properties and after allowance for all prestress losses) shall not exceed the
following:
(a) Extremefiberstressincompressiondue
toprestressplussustainedload....................0.45f
c

(b) Extremefiberstressincompressiondue
toprestressplustotalload.............................0.60f
c

(c) Permissiblestressesin9.4.3.2and9.4.4.1shallbepermittedtobeexceededif shown by test

oranalysisthatperformancewillnotbeimpaired.
9.4.4.1.3 Reinforcementspacing
(a) For Class C prestressed flexural members not subject to fatigue or to aggressive exposure, the
spacingofbondedreinforcementnearesttheextremetensionfaceshallnotexceedthatfornormal
ReinforcedConcrete,asgivenbelow:
s380280/fs2.5cc (9.4.41)
but not greater than 300 (280/f
s
), where c
c
is the least distance from the surface of
reinforcementorprestressingsteeltothetensionface.Ifthereisonlyonebarorwirenearest
totheextremetensionface,susedintheaboveequationisthewidthoftheextremetension
face.
(b) Calculatedstressfsinreinforcementclosesttothetensionfaceatserviceloadsshallbecomputed
basedontheunfactoredmoment.Itshallbepermittedtotakefsas2/3f
y
.
(c) For structures subject to fatigue or exposed to corrosive environments, investigations, judgment
andprecautionsarerequired.
(d) Thespacingrequirementsshallbemetbynonprestressedreinforcementandbondedtendons.The
spacing of bonded tendons shall not exceed 2/3rd of the maximum spacing permitted for
nonprestressedreinforcement.
(e) Where both reinforcement and bonded tendons are used to meet the spacing requirement, the
spacingbetweenabarandatendonshallnotexceed5/6ofthatpermittedby9.4.3.2.2a.,b.andc.
(f) In applying Eq. 9.4.41 to prestressing tendons, f
ps
shall be substituted for f
s
, where f
ps
shall be
taken as the calculated stress in the prestressing steel at service loads based on a cracked section
analysisminus thedecompression stressf
dc
.Itshall be permittedtotakef
dc
equaltotheeffective
stressintheprestressingsteelf
se
.Seealso9.4.4.2.2g.below.
(g) InapplyingEq.(9.4.41)toprestressingtendons,themagnitudeoff
ps
shallnotexceed250N/mm
2
.
Whenf
ps
islessthanorequalto140N/mm
2
,thespacingrequirementsof9.4.4.2.2a.andb.shall
notapply.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6460 Vol.2
(h) Where h of a beam exceeds 900 mm, the area of longitudinal skin reinforcement consisting of
untensioned reinforcing steel or bonded tendons shall be uniformly distributed along both side
faces of the member. Skin reinforcement shall extend for a distance of h/2 from the tension face.
Thespacingsshallbeasprovidedin9.4.4.2.2,wherec
c
istheleastdistancefromthesurfaceofthe
skin reinforcement or prestressing steel to the side face. It shall be permitted to include such
reinforcement or prestressing steel to the side face. It shall be permitted to include such
reinforcement in strength computations if a strain compatibility analysis is made to determine
stressintheindividualbarsorwires.
9.4.5 Permissiblestressesinprestressingsteel
Tensilestressinprestressingtendonsshallnotexceedthefollowing:
(a) Duetoprestressingsteeljackingforce......0.94f
py

but not greater than the lesser of 0.80f

pu
and the maximum value recommended by the
manufacturerofprestressingsteeloranchoragedevices.
(b) Immediatelyafterprestresstransfer........0.82f
py
butnotgreaterthan0.74f
pu
.
(c) Posttensioningtendons,atanchoragedevicesand
couplers,immediatelyafterforcetransfer.......0.70f
pu

9.4.6 Lossesofprestress
To determine effective stress in the prestressing steel, f
se
, allowance for the following sources of
lossofprestressshallbeconsidered:
9.4.6.1 Immediatelosses
(a) Lossduetoelasticshorteningofconcrete;
(b) Lossduetoprestressingsteelseatingattransfer(Anchorageslip);
(c) Lossduetofriction(forposttensionedconcreteonly).
9.4.6.2 Longtermlosses
(a) Lossduetorelaxationofprestressingsteelstress;
(b) Lossduetocreepofconcrete;
(c) Lossduetoshrinkageofconcrete.
Unless otherwise determined by actual tests, allowance for these losses shall be made in
accordancewiththeprovisionsofSec9.4.6.3through9.4.6.8.
9.4.6.3 Lossduetoelasticshorteningofconcrete
(a) Thelossofprestressduetoimmediateelasticshorteningofadjacentconcreteupontransferof
initial prestress shall be calculated as specified in this section. For pretensioning, the loss of
prestressinthetendonsattransfershallbecalculatedonamodularratiobasisusingthestress
intheadjacentconcrete.
(b) For members with posttensioned tendons which are not stressed simultaneously, there is a
progressivelossofprestressduringtransferduetothegradualapplicationofthe prestressing
forces.Thislossofprestressshallbecalculatedonthebasisofhalftheproductofthestressin
the concrete adjacent to the tendons averaged along their lengths and the modular ratio.
Alternatively, the loss of prestress may be exactly computed based on the sequence of
tensioning.
9.4.6.4 LossDuetoprestressingsteelseatingattransfer(Anchorageslip)
a. Anylossofprestresswhichmayoccurduetoslipofwireorstrandduring anchoring or due
tostrainingoftheanchorageshallbeallowedforinthedesign. Necessary additional elongation
maybeprovidedforatthetimeoftensioningto compensateforthisloss.
9.4.6.5 Lossduetofriction(forposttensionedtendonsonly)
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6461
(a) Thedesignshalltakeintoconsiderationalllossesinprestressthatmayoccurduringtensioning
due to friction between the posttensioning tendons and the surrounding concrete or any
fixtureattachedtothesteelorconcrete.
(b) The value of prestressing force P
x
ata distance
x
l metres from the jacking endand acting in
thedirectionofthetangenttothecurveofthecable,shallbecalculatedfromtherelation:

( ) +
=
x
K
j x
e P P
l
9.4.51
When(klx+)isgreaterthan0.3,P
x
maybecomputedfrom

+ +
=
x
j
x
Kl
P
P
1
9.4.52
For use in Eq. (9.4.51) and Eq. (9.4.52), the values of wobble friction coefficient K and
curvature friction coefficient shall be experimentally determined or obtained from the
tendonmanufacturer,andverifiedduringtendonstressingoperations.
(c) In absence of test results or manufacturer's recommendation, the following values of

and
K showninTable9.4.2maybetakenasaguide:
Table9.4.2FrictionCoefficients(K&)forposttensionedtendons




coefficient,Kper
meter
Curvaturecoefficient,per
radian
G
r
o
u
t
e
d

T
e
n
d
o
n
s

i
n

m
e
t
a
l

s
h
e
a
t
h
i
n
g

Wiretendons 0.00330.0049 0.150.25

Highstrengthbars 0.00030.0020 0.080.30
7wirestrand 0.00160.0066 0.150.25
U
n
b
o
n
d
e
d

t
e
n
d
o
n
s

M
a
s
t
i
c

c
o
a
t
e
d

Wiretendons 0.00330.0066 0.050.15

7wirestrand 0.00330.0066 0.050.15
P
r
e

g
r
e
a
s
e
d

Wiretendons 0.0010.0066 0.050.15

7wirestrand 0.0010.0066 0.050.15
Values of wobble and curvature friction coefficients used in design shall be shown on design
drawings.
(e) The effect of reverse friction shall be taken into consideration in such cases where the initial
tension applied to a prestressing tendon is partially released and action of friction in the
reverse direction causes significant alteration in the distribution of stress along the length of
thetendon.
(f) Where loss of prestress in a member occurs due to connection of member to adjoining
construction,suchlossofprestressshallbeallowedforindesign.
9.4.6.6 Lossduetorelaxationofpretressingsteelstress
(a) The relaxation losses in prestressing steel shall be determined from experiments. When
experimental values are not available, the relaxation losses, considering normal relaxation
steel,maybeassumedasgiveninTable9.4.3.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6462 Vol.2
Table9.4.3RelaxationLossesforprestressingsteelat1000hoursat27
o
C
InitialStress RelaxationLoss
N/mm2
0.5fpu 0
0.6fpu 35
0.7fpu 70
0.8fpu 90
For tendons at higher temperature or subject to large lateral loads, greater relaxation losses may
beallowed,subjecttotheadviceofthemetallurgyspecialist.
(b) No reduction in the value of the relaxation losses should be made for a tendon with a load
equaltoorgreaterthantherelevantjackingforcethathas been applied for a short
durationpriortotheanchoringofthetendon.
9.4.6.7 Lossduetocreepofconcrete
(a)Creep occurs due to superimposed permanent dead load added to the member after it has
beenprestressed.Creepofconcretemaybeassumedtobeproportionaltothestressprovided
thestressinconcretedoesnotexceed40percentofitscompressivestrength.
(b) In the absence of test data, the ultimate creep strain may be estimated from the following
valuesofcreepcoefficient,whichistheratiooftheultimatecreepstraintotheelasticstrainat
theageofloading.Table9.4.4showsthevaluesatdifferentdays.
Table9.4.4Creepcoefficientofconcrete
AgeatLoading Creepcoefficient
7days 2.2
28days 1.6
1year 1.1
(c) The ultimate creep strain estimated as above does not include the elastic strain.
For the calculation of deformation at some stage before the total creep is reached, it may be
assumed that 50 per cent of the total creep takes place in the first month after loading and
about75percentofthetotalcreeptakesplace in the first six months after loading. For post
tensioningthecreep coefficientsshallbetakenas80%ofthosegivenhere.
(d) The loss of prestress due to creep of concrete shall be determined for all the permanently
appliedloadsincludingtheprestress.Lossduetostressesofshortdurationincludingliveload
anderectionstressesmaybeignored.
(e) Thelossofprestressduetocreepofconcreteshallbeobtainedastheproductofthemodulus
of elasticity of the prestressing steel and the ultimate creep strain of the concrete fiber
integratedalongthecentrelineoftheprestressingsteeloveritsentirelength.
(f) Thetotalcreepstrainduringanyspecificperiodshallbeassumedtobethecreepstraindueto
sustainedstressequaltotheaverageofthestressesatthebeginningandendoftheperiod.
9.4.6.8 Lossduetoshrinkageofconcrete
(a) In the absence of test data, the approximate value of shrinkage strain in concrete for design
purposesshallbeassumedasfollows:
Forpretensioning : 0.0003
Forposttensioning :
( ) 2 t
000 0 2
+
10
log
.

where,t=ageofconcreteattransferindays.
(b) For the calculation of deformation of concrete at some stage before the maximum shrinkage
occursitmaybeassumedthat50percentoftheshrinkagetakesplaceduringthefirstmonth
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6463
andabout75percentoftheshrinkage takes place in the first six months after drying of
concretestarts.
(c) The loss of prestress due to shrinkage of concrete shall be obtained as the product of the
modulusofelasticityofsteelandtheshrinkagestrainofconcrete.
9.4.7 ControlofDeflection
9.4.7.1 For prestressed concrete flexural members, designed in accordance with the provisions of this
chapter,immediatedeflectionshallbecomputedbyusualmethodsorformulasforelasticdeflections,
and the moment of inertia of gross concrete section, Ig, shall be permitted to be used for Class U
flexuralmembers.
9.4.7.2 For Class C and Class T flexural members, deflection calculations shall be based on cracked
transformed section analysis. It shall be permitted to base calculations on an effective moment of
inertia,IeasgiveninEq.9.4.71.

cr
a
cr
g
a
cr
I
M
M
I
M
M
Ie

=
3 3
1
9.4.71
Where,
t
g r
cr
y
I f
M = and ' 62 . 0
c r
f f =
Deflectioncomputedinaccordancewith9.4.7.1shallnotexceedthelimitsstipulatedin6.5.9.4.
9.4.7.3 Additional longterm deflection of prestressed concrete members shall be computed taking into
account stresses in concrete and steel under sustained load and including effects of creep and
shrinkageofconcreteandrelaxationofsteel.
9.4.8 FlexuralStrength
9.4.8.1 Design moment strength of flexural members shall be computed by the strength methods of the
Code.Forprestressingsteel,f
ps
shallbesubstitutedforf
y
instrengthcomputations.
9.4.8.2 Asanalternativetoamoreaccuratedeterminationoff
ps
basedonstraincompatibility,thefollowing
approximatevaluesoffpsshallbepermittedtobeusediff
se
isnotlessthan0.5f
pu
.
(a) Formemberswithbondedtendons

= ) (
1
1

p
d
d
c
f
pu
f
p
p
pu
f
ps
f (9.4.81)
whereisf
y
/fc,isf
y
/fc,and
p
is0.55forfpy/f
pu
notlessthan0.80; 0.40 for f
py
/f
pu
not
lessthan0.85;and0.28forf
py
/fpunotlessthan0.90.
If any compression reinforcement is taken into account when calculating f
ps
by Eq. (9.4.81), the
termshallbetakennotlessthan0.17andd'shallbenogreaterthand
p
.

) (
p
d
d
c
f
pu
f
p

(b) Formemberswithunbondedtendonsandwithaspantodepthratioof35orless:

p
c
se ps
f
f f
100
70
'
+ + =
(9.4.72)
but f
ps
in Eq. (9.4.7.2) shall not be taken greater than the lesser of f
py
and (f
se
+ 420).
Part6
StructuralDesign

6464 Vol.2
c. Formemberswithunbondedtendonsandwithaspantodepthratiogreaterthan35:

p
c
se ps
f
f f
300
70
'
+ + =
(9.4.73)
butf
ps
inEq.(9.4.7.3)shallnotbetakengreaterthanthelesseroff
py
and(f
se
+210)
9.4.8.3 Nonprestressed reinforcement conforming to 9.4.4.2.2, if used with prestressing steel, shall be
permittedtobeconsideredtocontributetothetensileforceandtobeincludedinmomentstrength
computations at a stress equal to f
y
. Other nonprestressed reinforcement shall be permitted to be
included in strength computations only if a strain compatibility analysis is performed to determine
stressesinsuchreinforcement.
9.4.9 Limitsforflexuralreinforcement
9.4.9.1 Prestressed concrete sections shall be classified as either tensioncontrolled, transition, or
compressioncontrolledsections,inaccordancewitha.andb.below.
(a) Sections are compressioncontrolled if the net tensile strain in the extreme tension fiber
t
, is
equaltoorlessthanthecompressioncontrolledstrainlimitwhentheconcreteincompression
reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003. The compressioncontrolled strain limit is the net
tensilestraininthereinforcementatbalancedstrainconditions.ForGrade420reinforcement,
and for all prestressed reinforcement, it shall be permitted to set the compressioncontrolled
strainlimitto0.002.
(b) Sectionsaretensioncontrolledifthenettensilestrainintheextremetensionsteel,
t
,isequal
toorgreaterthan0.005whentheconcreteincompression reaches its assumed strain limit of
0.003.Sectionswith
t
betweenthecompressioncontrolledstrainlimitand0.005constitutea
tension region between the compressioncontrolled and tensioncontrolled sections.
Appropriatestrengthreductionfactor, ,from 9.4.9.2shallapply.
9.4.9.2 Theappropriatestrengthreductionfactor,,shallapplyasgivenina.tof.below.
(a) Tensioncontrolledsections 0.90
(b) Forcompressioncontrolledsections
i. Memberswithspiralreinforcementas
definedin9.4.9.4 0.75
ii. Otherreinforcedmembers 0.65
(c) Shearandtorsion 0.75
(d) Posttensionedanchoragezones 0.85
(e) Strutandtiemodels 0.75
(f) Flexuralsectionsinpretensioned
memberswherestrandembedmentlengthisless
thanthedevelopmentlength
i. Fromtheendofthemember
totheendofthetransferlength 0.75
ii. Fromtheendofthetransferlength
totheendofthedevelopment
length,shallbetakenas 0.75to0.90
Wherebondingofthestranddoesnotextendtotheendofthemember,strandembedmentshall
beassumedtobeginattheendofthedebondedlength.
9.4.9.3 Totalamountofprestressedandnonprestressedreinforcementinmemberswithbondedprestressed
reinforcement shall be adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2 times the cracking load
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6465
computed on the basis of the modulus of rupture f
r
, as given in 9.4.6.2. This provision shall be
permitted to be waived for flexural members with shear and flexural strength at least twice that
requiredby9.4.8.
9.4.9.4 Volumetricspiralreinforcementratio,
s
,shallbenotlessthanthevaluegivenby

yt
c
ch
g
s
f
f
A
A
'
1 45 . 0

=
(9.4.91)
where the value of
yt
f in Eq. (9.4.91) shall not exceed 700 N/mm
2
. For
yt
f greater than 420
N/mm
2
wherelapsplicesshallnotexceedinaccordancewith9.4.9.4a.thisshallnotbeused.
(a) Spiralreinforcementshallbespliced,ifneeded,byanyoneofthefollowingmethods:
Lapsplicesnotlessthanthelargerof300mmandthelengthindicatedinoneof(1)through(5)
below:
i) deformeduncoatedbarorwire 48d
b

ii) plainuncoatedbarorwire 72d

b

iii) epoxycoateddeformedbarorwire 72d

b

iv) plainuncoatedbarorwirewithastandard
stirruportiehookinaccordancewith
9.4.8.5c.atendsoflappedspiralreinforcement.
(b) Thetermstandardhookasusedinthiscodeshallmeanoneofthefollowing:
i) 180degreebendplus4d
b
extension,butnotlessthan65mmatfreeend ofbar.
ii) 90degreebendplus12d
b
extensionatfreeendofbar.
(c) Forstirrupandtiehooks
i) No.16barandsmaller,90degreebendplus6d
b
extensionatfreeendof bar;or
ii) No.19,No.22barandNo.25bar,90degreebendplus12d
b
extensionat free end of
bar;or
iii) No.25barandsmaller,135degreebendplus6d
b
extensionatfreeend ofbar.
9.4.9.5 Part or all of the bonded reinforcement consisting of bars or tendons shall be provided as close as
practicable to the tension face in prestressed flexural members. In members prestressed with
unbondedtendons,theminimumbondedreinforcementconsistingofbarsortendonsshallbe
asrequiredby9.4.10.
9.4.10 Minimumbondedreinforcement
9.4.10.1 A minimumarea of bonded reinforcement shallbe provided in all flexural members with unbonded
tendonsasrequiredby9.4.10.2and9.4.10.3.
9.4.10.2 Exceptasprovidedin9.4.10.1,minimumareaofbondedreinforcementshallbecomputedby
A
s
=0.004A
ct
(9.4.101)
where A
ct
is area of that part of cross section between the flexural tension face and center of
gravityofgrosssection.
(a) Bonded reinforcement required by Eq. (9.4.101) shall be uniformly distributed over pre
compressedtensilezoneascloseaspracticabletoextremetensionfiber.
(b) Bondedreinforcementshallberequiredregardlessofserviceloadstress conditions.
9.4.10.3 For twoway flat slab systems, minimum area and distribution of bonded reinforcement shall be as
requiredina.,b.,andcbelow.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6466 Vol.2
(a) Bondedreinforcementshallnotberequiredinpositivemomentareaswhereft, the
extremefibrestressintensionintheprecompressedtensilezoneatservice loads (after
allowanceforallprestresslosses),doesnotexceed0.17f
c
.
(b) Inpositivemomentareaswherecomputedtensilestressinconcreteatservice load exceeds
0.17f'
c
minimumareaofbondedreinforcementshallbe computedby
AsNc/0.5fy (9.4.102)
wherethevalueoff
y
usedinEq.(9.4.102)shallnotexceed420MPa. Bonded reinforcement
shallbeuniformlydistributedoverprecompressedtensile zone as close as practicable to the
extremetensionfiber.
(c) Innegativemomentareasatcolumnsupports,theminimumareaofbonded reinforcement
A
s
inthetopoftheslabineachdirectionshallbecomputedby
As0.00075Acf (9.4.103)

where, A
cf
is the larger gross crosssectional area of the slabbeam strips in two orthogonal
equivalentframesintersectingatacolumninatwowayslab.
9.4.10.4 Bonded reinforcement required by Eq. (9.4.103) shall be distributed between lines that are outside
oppositefacesofthecolumnsupport.Atleastfourbarsorwiresshallbeprovidedineachdirection.
Spacingofbondedreinforcementshallnotexceed300mm.
9.4.10.5 Minimum length of bonded reinforcement required by 9.4.10.2 and 9.4.10.3 shall be as required in
9.4.10.5a.,b.,andc.
(a) Inpositivemomentareas,minimumlengthofbondedreinforcementshallbe onethird the
clearspanlength,l
n
,andcenteredinpositivemomentarea.
(b) Innegativemomentareas,bondedreinforcementshallextendonesixththe clear span, l
n
,
oneachsideofsupport.
(c) WherebondedreinforcementisprovidedforM
n
inaccordancewith9.4.7.8,or for tensile
stressconditionsinaccordancewith9.4.9.3b.,minimumlengthalso shall conform to
provisionsofChapter6.
9.4.11 Staticallyindeterminatestructures
9.4.11.1 Frames and continuous construction of prestressed concrete shall be designed for satisfactory
performanceatserviceloadconditionsandforadequatestrength.
9.4.11.2 Performanceatserviceloadconditionsshallbedeterminedbyelasticanalysis,consideringreactions,
moments, shears, and axial forces induced by prestressing, creep, shrinkage, temperature change,
axialdeformation,restraintofattachedstructuralelements,andfoundationsettlement.
9.4.11.3 Moments used to compute required strength shall be the sum of the moments due to reactions
induced by prestressing (with a load factor of 1.0) and the moments due to factored loads.
Adjustmentofthesumofthesemomentsshallbepermittedasallowedin9.4.11.4.
9.4.11.4 Redistributionofmomentsincontinuousprestressedflexuralmembersshallbeas follows:
(a) Where bonded reinforcement is provided at supports in accordance with 9.4.11, it shall be
permitted to decrease negative or positive moments calculated by elastic theory for any
assumedloading,inaccordancewith9.4.11.4b.,c.andd.below.
(b) Except where approximate values for moments are used, it shall be permitted to decrease
factored moments calculated by elastic theory at sections of maximum negative or maximum
positive moment in any span of continuous flexural members for any assumed loading
arrangementbynotmorethan1000
t
percent,withamaximumof20percent.
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6467
(c) Redistributionofmomentshallbemadeonlywhen
t
isequaltoorgreaterthan0.0075atthe
sectionatwhichmomentisreduced.
(d) Thereducedmomentshallbeusedforcalculatingredistributedmomentsatallothersections
within the spans. Static equilibrium shall be maintained after redistribution of moments for
eachloadingarrangement.
9.4.12 CompressionmembersCombinedflexureandaxialload
9.4.12.1 Prestressed concrete members subject to combined flexure and axial load, with or without non
prestressedreinforcement,shallbeproportionedbythestrengthdesignmethodsofthisCode.Effects
ofprestress,creep,shrinkage,andtemperaturechangeshallbeincluded.
9.4.12.2 Limitsforreinforcementofprestressedcompressionmembersshallbeasfollows:
(a) Members with average compressive stress in concrete less than 1.6 N/mm
2
, due to effective
prestressforceonly,shallhaveminimumreinforcementinaccordancewithChapter6.
(b) Except for walls, members with average compressive stress in concrete due to effective
prestress force only, equal to or greater than 1.6 N/mm
2
shall have all tendons enclosed by
spiralsorlateraltiesinaccordancewithc.throughg.
(c) SpiralsshallconformtoChapter6.
(d) LateraltiesshallbeatleastNo.10insizeorweldedwirereinforcementofequivalentarea,and
shallbespacedverticallynottoexceed48tiebarorwirediameters,ortheleastdimensionof
thecompressionmember.
(e) Tiesshallbelocatedverticallynotmorethanhalfatie spacingabovetop of footingorslabin
any story, and not more than half a tie spacing below the lowest horizontal reinforcement in
memberssupportedabove.
(f) Where beams or brackets frame into all sides of a column, ties shall be terminated not more
than75mmbelowlowestreinforcementinsuchbeamsorbrackets.
(g) For walls with average compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress force only
equal to or greater than 1.6 N/mm
2
, minimum reinforcement required by Chapter 6 shall not
applywherestructuralanalysisshowsadequatestrengthandstability.

9.4.13 Slabsystems
9.4.13.1 Factoredmomentsandshearsinprestressedslabsystemsreinforcedforflexureinmorethanone
direction shall be determined in accordance with provisions of 6.5 or by more detailed design
procedures.
9.4.13.2 M
n
of prestressed slabs with loads and load combinations required by Chapter 2 and 6 at every
section shall be greater than or equal to M
u
considering 9.4.11.3 and 9.4.11.4. V
n
of prestressed
slabsatcolumnsrequiredbyChapter6shallbegreaterthanorequaltoVu.
9.4.13.3 At service load conditions, all serviceability limitations, including limits on deflections, shall be met,
withappropriateconsiderationofthefactorslistedin9.4.11.2.
9.4.13.4 Foruniformlydistributedloads,spacingoftendonsorgroupsoftendonsinatleastonedirectionshall
not exceed the smaller of eight times the slab thickness and 1.5 m. Spacing of tendons also shall
provide a minimum average effective prestress of 0.9 N/mm
2
on the slab section tributary to the
tendon or tendon group. For slabs with varying cross section along the slab span, either parallel or
perpendicular to the tendon or tendon group, the minimum average effective prestress of 0.9
N/mm
2
MPaisrequiredateverycrosssectiontributarytothetendonortendongroupalongthespan.
Concentratedloadsandopeninginslabsshallbeconsideredwhendeterminingtendonspacing.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6468 Vol.2
9.4.13.5 Inslabswithunbondedtendons,bondedreinforcementshallbeprovidedinaccordancewith9.4.9.3
and9.4.9.5.
Except as permitted in 9.4.13.6, in slabs with unbonded tendons, a minimum of two 12.7 mm
diameter or larger, sevenwire posttensioned strands shall be provided in each direction at
columns,eitherpassingthroughoranchoredwithintheregionboundedbythelongitudinal
reinforcement of the column. Outside column and shear cap faces, these two structural integrity
tendons shall pass under any orthogonal tendons in adjacent spans. Where the two structural
integritytendonsareanchoredwithintheregionboundedbythelongitudinalreinforcementofthe
column,theanchorageshallbelocatedbeyondthecolumncentroidandawayfromtheanchored
span.
9.4.13.6 Prestressed slabs not satisfying 9.4.13.5 shall be permitted provided they contain bottom
reinforcementineachdirectionpassingwithintheregionboundedbythelongitudinalreinforcement
of the column and anchored at exterior supports as required by bar detailing requirement of slabs
giveninChapter6.Theareaofbottomreinforcementineachdirectionshallbenotlessthan1.5times
thatrequiredbyEq.(9.4.131)asgivenbelow.

d b
f
f
As
w
y
c
' 25 . 0
min , =
(9.4.131)
and not less than 2.1b
w
d/f
y
, where b
w
is the width of the column face through which the
reinforcement passes. Minimum extension of these bars beyond the column or shear cap face shall
beequaltoorgreaterthanthebardevelopmentlengthrequiredbyChapter6.
9.4.13.7 Inliftslabs,bondedbottomreinforcementshallbedetailedinaccordancewith9.4.13.8.

9.4.13.8 In slabs with shear heads and in lift slab construction where it is not practical to pass to pass the
bottombars,requiredbybardetailingrequirementofChapter6,atleasttwobondedbarsorwiresin
eachdirectionshallpassthroughtheshearheadorliftingcollarasclosetothecolumnaspracticable
andbecontinuousorsplicedwithaClassAsplice.Attheexteriorcolumns,thereinforcementshallbe
anchoredthespearheadorliftingcollar.
9.4.14 Posttensionedtendonanchoragezones
9.4.14.1 Divisionintozones
Theanchoragezoneshallbeconsideredascomposedoftwozonesasdescribedbelowandshownin
Fig.9.4.141.
(a) Thelocalzoneistherectangularprism(orequivalentrectangularprismforcircularoroval
anchorages)ofconcreteimmediatelysurroundingtheanchoragedeviceandanyconfining
reinforcement;
(b) Thegeneralzoneistheanchoragezonebeyondthelocalzone.
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6469
Fig.9.4.141 Anchoragezones
9.4.14.2 Localzone
(a) Design of local zones shall be based upon the factored prestressing force, Ppu, and the
requirementsof9.4.14.2b.andc.below.
(b) For posttensioned anchorage zone design, a load factor of 1.2 shall be applied to the
maximumsteeljackingforce.
(c) Whiledesignstrengthprovidedbyamember,itsconnectionstoothermembers,anditscross
sections in terms of flexure, axial load, shear and torsion, shall be taken as the nominal
strengthcalculatedin accordance with requirements andassumptions of this code, multiplied
bythestrengthreductionfactor, ,forposttensionedanchoragezonethisshall betakenas
0.85.
(d) Localzone reinforcement shall be provided where required for proper functioning of the
anchoragedevice.
9.4.14.3 Generalzone
(a) Design of general zones shall be based upon the factored prestressing force, P
pu
, and the
requirementsof9.4.14.3b.andc.
(b) Generalzone reinforcement shall be provided where required to resist bursting, spalling, and
longitudinal edge tension forces induced by anchorage devices. Effects of abrupt change in
sectionshallbeconsidered.
(c) Thegeneralzonerequirementsof9.4.14.3b.aresatisfiedby9.4.3,9.4.14.4,and9.4.14.5and
whicheveroneof9.4.15.2or9.4.15.3or9.4.16.3isapplicable.
9.4.14.4 Designmethods
Part6
StructuralDesign

6470 Vol.2
The following methods shall be permitted for the design of the general zones of the prestressed
componentsprovidedthatthespecificproceduresusedresultinpredictionofstrengthinsubstantial
agreementwithresultsofcomprehensivetests:
a. Equilibriumbasedplasticitymodels(strutandtiemodels);
b. Linearstressanalysis(includingfiniteelementanalysisorequivalent);or
c. Simplifiedequationswhereapplicable.
d. Simplified equations shall not be used where member cross sections are nonrectangular, where
discontinuitiesinornearthegeneralzonecausedeviationsintheforceflowpath,whereminimum
edge distance is less than 11/2 times the anchorage device lateral dimension in that direction, or
wheremultipleanchoragedevicesareusedinotherthanonecloselyspacedgroup.
e. Thestressingsequenceshallbeconsideredinthedesignandspecifiedonthedesign drawings.
f. Threedimensional effects shall be considered in design and analyzed using threedimensional
proceduresorapproximatedbyconsideringthesummationofeffectsfortwoorthogonalplanes.
g. For anchorage devices located away from the end of the member, bonded reinforcement shall be
provided to transfer at least 0.35A
ps
f
pu
into the concrete section behind the anchor. Such
reinforcement shall be placed symmetrically around the anchorage devices and shall be fully
developedbothbehindandaheadoftheanchoragedevices.
h. Where tendons are curved in the general zone, except for monostrand tendons in slabs or where
analysisshowsreinforcementisnotrequired,bondedreinforcement shall be provided to resist
radialandsplittingforces.
i. Except for monostrand tendons in slabs or where analysis shows reinforcement is not required,
minimum reinforcement with a nominal tensile strength equal to 2 percent of each factored
prestressing force shall be provided in orthogonal directions parallel to the back face of all
anchoragezonestolimitspalling.
j. Tensilestrengthofconcreteshallbeneglectedincalculationsofreinforcementrequirements.
9.4.14.5 Detailingrequirements
Selection of reinforcement sizes, spacing, cover, and other details for anchorage zones shall make
allowancesfortolerancesonthebending,fabrication,andplacementofreinforcement,forthesizeof
aggregate,andforadequateplacementandconsolidationoftheconcrete.
9.4.15 Designofanchoragezonesformonostrandorsingle16mmbartendons
9.4.15.1 Localzonedesign
Monostrand or single 16 mm or smaller diameter bar anchorage devices and local zone
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of ACI 423.7 or the special anchorage device
requirementsof9.4.16.2.
9.4.15.2 Generalzonedesignforslabtendons
(a) Foranchoragedevicesof 12.7mmorsmallerdiameterstrandsinnormalweightconcrete
slabs, minimum reinforcement meeting the requirements of 9.4.15.2 b. and c. shall be
provided unless a detailed analysis satisfying 9.4.14.4 shows such reinforcement is not
required.
(b) TwohorizontalbarsatleastNo.13insizeshallbeprovidedparalleltotheslabedge.Theyshall
bepermittedtobeincontactwiththefrontfaceoftheanchoragedeviceandshallbewithina
distanceofh/2aheadofeachdevice.Thosebarsshallextendatleast150mmeithersideofthe
outeredgesofeachdevice.
(c) Ifthecentertocenterspacingofanchoragedevicesis300mmorless,theanchoragedevices
shallbeconsideredasagroup.Foreachgroupofsixormoreanchoragedevices,n+1hairpin
bars or closed stirrups at least No. 10 in size shall be provided, where n is the number of
anchorage devices. One hairpin bar or stirrupshall be placed betweeneachanchorage device
and one on each side of the group. The hairpin bars or stirrups shall be placed with the legs
extending into the slab perpendicular to the edge. The center portion of the hairpin bars or
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6471
stirrups shall be placed perpendicular to the plane of the slab from 3h/8 to h/2 ahead of the
anchoragedevices.
(d) For anchorage devices not conforming to 9.4.15.1, minimum reinforcement shall be based
uponadetailedanalysissatisfying9.4.14.4.
9.4.15.3 Generalzonedesignforgroupsofmonostrandtendonsinbeamsandgirders
Design of general zones for groups of monostrand tendons in beams and girders shall meet the
requirementsof9.4.13.3,9.4.14.2or9.4.14.3or9.4.15.3.
9.4.16 Designofanchoragezonesformultistrandtendons
9.4.16.1 Localandgeneralzonedesign
Basicmultistrandanchoragedevicesandtherelatedlocalandgeneralzonereinforcementshallmeet
the requirements of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (SI), 2007, Articles 5.10.9.6,
ApproximateStressAnalysisandDesign,and5.10.9.7,DesignofLocalZones.
9.4.16.2 Specialanchoragedevices
(a) AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (SI), 2007, Articles 5.10.9.7.3, Special Anchorage
Devicesrequiresthatspecialanchoragedevicesthatdonotsatisfythe requirements specified
in9.4.16.1,theyhavebeentestedbyanindependenttesting agency acceptable to the
EngineerandhavemettheacceptancecriteriaspecifiedinArticles10.3.2and 10.3.2.3.10 of
AASHTOLRFDBridgeConstruction Specifications.
(b) Where special anchorage devices are to be used, supplemental skin reinforcement shall be
furnished in the corresponding regions of the anchorage zone, in addition to the confining
reinforcement specified for the anchorage device. This supplemental reinforcement shall be
similar in configuration and at least equivalent in volumetric ratio to any supplementary skin
reinforcementusedinthequalifyingacceptancetestsoftheanchoragedevice.
9.4.17 ColdDrawnLowCarbonWirePrestressedConcrete(CWPC)
CWPC(Colddrawnwireprestressedconcrete)istermedasprestressedconcretetechnologyofchinesepattern.
This technology is a modification of conventional prestressed concrete. In the conventional prestressed
concretehighstrengthwireisusedasreinforcementwhileinChinesepatterncolddrawnlowcarbonmildsteel
wireisusedassuchthistechnologyisnamedascolddrawnwireprestressedconcrete.Inshortitistermedas
CWPC. CWPC technology is a process whereby cold drawn low carbon steel wire has been adopted as
reinforcement for prefabricated prestressed concrete members of medium and small sizeasproduced bypre
tensioningmethod.Intheotherhandlargesizesstructuralmembersareproducedbyconventionalprestressed
concrete.
ThemainfeaturesandadvantagesofCWPCtechnologycanbesummarisedasfollows:
(a) Availability (Availability of materials): The raw material of cold drawn wire is made from low carbon
mild steel which can be supplied by the local mills. The tensioning process of colddrawn wire and
productionofprecastmembersarealsosimpleandveryeasytohandle.
(b) Simplicity (Simplicity of equipment and devices for production): The cold process of low carbon mild
steel and prefabrication process of members are done using simple equipments and devices. The
precise and large sized equipments are not necessary. The production techniques of manufacturing
membersarerathersimple.
(c) Quality(Goodinquality):Thememberssomanufacturedhavehighcrackresistanceandstiffness.After
pretensioning no crack would occur under the service load, thus the wires within the concrete
membersarewellprotected.InContrasttoconventionalreinforcedconcretemembersunderthesame
serviceconditions,theyhavecomparativelyhighdurabilitytoensurelongtermquality.
(d) Economy (Low cost): The cold drawn low carbon steel wire used for prestressing is made of ordinary
hotrolledcarbonsteelcoilrod.Thisisprocessedatroomtemperaturethroughaspecialwiredrawing
die. The low carbon coil rods are manufactured by the steel mills; the wires are processed at the
construction site or in a prefabrication plant; or are supplied by the cold drown wire plants as ready
madeproducts.Bycolddrawingthelowcarbonrodintowiresthestrengthisenhancedabouttwiceas
Part6
StructuralDesign

6472 Vol.2
much as that of the coil rod. This reduces the amount of steel required in prefabricating prestressed
concretemembers.
(e) Therefore,incomparisonwithconventionalreinforcedconcretereinforcedwithcommoncarbonsteel,
a prestressed concrete member reinforced with cold drawn wire would have saving of steel
consumption by 3050%. Furthermore, since prestressed concrete members have high stiffness a
reductionofcrosssectionofmembersispossible.Aconsiderableamountofconcretecanalsobesaved
andhenceworkincludingtransportation,handlinganderectioncanbereduced.
(f) Light weightedness (Light in weight): As already mentioned that the stiffness of prestressed concrete
members may be enhanced, the dimension of it's crosssection can be reduced crosspondingly. These
resultnotonlyreductionofconcretevolumebutalsoitsdeadweightwhichisestimatedas1030%.
9.4.17.1 Materials
BasicallythematerialsusedinCWPCtechnologyaresteelandconcrete.
(a) Steel:steelusedforCWPCisobtainedbycolddrawing.Colddrawingasalreadymentionedis
aprocessofreducingthediameterofthecoilrodbyforcingittopassthroughaconicaldie.
Bythisprocess,thesteelcanbestrengthenedby100%.
(b) Concrete: The requirement of concrete in CWPC is same as that of ordinary reinforced
concrete.
9.4.17.2 Design
Similar to other reinforced concrete structures, CWPC structures have a complete set of design
specificationandcomputationalapproachesbywhichvariousmembersoftheCWPCcanbe designed.In
thedesignofprestressedmembersthefunctionofprestressingforceandprestressinglossesshouldbe
calculated. CWPC members should be checked for its strength, stability and cracking resistance
respectively at different stages including service, manufacturing, erection and construction. In designing
membersconformitytolocalspecificationsshouldbeconsidered.
Cold drawn low carbon wire conforming to ASTM A615 or equivalent may be permitted for
prestressingprovidedthemechanicalrequirementsshowninTable9.4.5aresatisfied.
Table9.4.5TensileStrengthandElongationofColdDrawnWire
Diameterofwire
(mm)
Minimumtensilestrength
(N/mm
2
)
Minimumelongation
(percent)
3
4
5
650
600
550
2.0
2.5
3.0
9.4.18 Externalposttensioning
9.4.18.1 Posttensioningtendonsshallbepermittedtobe externaltoanyconcretesectionofamember.The
strength and serviceability design methods of this Code shall be used in evaluating the effects of
externaltendonforcesontheconcretestructure.
9.4.18.2 External tendons shall be consideredasunbonded tendons when computing flexuralstrengthunless
provisionsaremadetoeffectivelybondtheexternaltendonstotheconcretesectionalongitsentire
length.
9.4.18.3 External tendons shall be attached to the concrete member in a manner that maintains the desired
eccentricitybetweenthetendonsandtheconcretecentroidthroughoutthefullrangeofanticipated
memberdeflection.
9.4.18.4 Externaltendonsandtendonanchorageregionsshallbeprotectedagainstcorrosion,andthedetails
oftheprotectionmethodshallbeindicatedonthedrawingsorintheprojectspecifications.
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6473

9.4.19 Performancerequirementofprestressedconcretedesign
9.4.19.1 Classificationofperformancerequirement
Afterthe outlineof thememberdimensionsaredeterminedandthemostsuitablekindandtypeof
prestressing options are selected at the structural planning stage, the prestressed concrete
noncomposite and composite structuresand members shall satisfy allof the required performances
such as safety, serviceability, restorability, durability, reparability, societal and environmental
compatibility,etc.ateverystageofdesign,constructionandmaintenancethroughoutthedesignlife
ofthestructure.
Table 9.4.8 gives the performance requirement of prestressed concrete structures and components
andrelatedperformanceitems.
9.4.19.2 Performanceverificationmethod
(a) Performanceverificationshallbebasedonthepartialfactormethodonthebasis of
reliabilitytheoryandasastandarddesignprocedure,itshallbebasedonthe limit state
method.
(b) Ingeneralverificationshallbebasedondesignresponsestodesignactions, designlimitsas
determinedbydesignmaterialstrengths,andindividualpartial factors. The performance
ofthestructureshall,ingeneral,beverifiedusingEquations9.4.191and9.4.192:
Table9.4.8 Classificationofperformancerequirementforprestressedconcretestructures
Performance
requirements
Performance item
Examples of check items Example of verification
index
Safety Structuralsafety Resistanceofwholestructure,
components,stability,
deformationperformance
Stressresultant,stress
Publicsafety Injurytousersandthirdparties
Serviceability Liveloadoperating
performance
Soundnessandrigidityof
structures/membersunder
usualconditions
Floorflatness,deformationof
maingirder
Usercomfort Usercomfortunderwalking
inducedvibrations
Naturalfrequencyofmain
girders
Restorability Restorabilityafter
earthquake,
cyclone,tidalbore,
fire,etc.
Levelofdamage(easeof
restoration)
Responsevalue(damagelevel)/
limitvalueofperformance
(damagelevel)
Durability Fatigueresistance Fatiguedurabilityagainst
variableactions
Equivalentstress
range/allowablestressrange
Corrosion
resistance
Rustpreventionandcorrosion
protectionperformanceofsteel
material
Corrosionenvironmentand
surfacefinish,paint
specification
Resistanceto
material
deterioration
Concretedeterioration Watercementratio,coverof
concrete
Maintainability Easeofmaintenance
(inspection,easeofrepair,etc.)
andeaseofrestoration

Socialand Socialcompatibilty Appropriatenessofpartialfactor Partialfactor,structuralfactor,

Part6
StructuralDesign

6474 Vol.2
Performance
requirements
Performance item
Examples of check items Example of verification
index
environmental
compatibility
(considerationofsocial
importanceofstructure)
etc.
Economic
rationality
Socialutilityduringlifecycleof
structure
Lifecyclecost(LCC),lifecycle
utility(LTU)
Environmental
compatibility
Noise,vibration,environmental
impact,aesthetics,etc.
Noiseandvibrationlevelsfor
surroundingresidents,
aestheticreactiontostructural
shapeandcolor,monumental
aspect,etc.
Constructability/
workability
Safetyduring
construction
Safetyduringconstruction Stressresultant,stress,
deformation
Initialsoundness Materialquality,welding
quality,etc.
Materialproperties,
workmanship
Easeofconstruction Easeoffabricationand
constructionwork
Userfriendlyconstruction
methodologyconceivedat
designstage
0 . 1
d
d
i
R
S

(9.14.191)
0 . 1
) / (
) . ( .

m k
k f a
i
f R
F S

(9.14.192)
where, R
d
:designresistance
f
k
:characteristicvalueofmaterialstrength

m
:materialfactor

b
:structuralmemberfactor
R() :functionforcalculatinglimitvalueofstructurefrommaterial strength
S
d
:designresponse
F
k
:individualcharacteristicvalueofaction

a
:structuralanalysisfactor

f
:actionfactorcorrespondingtoeachaction(loadfactor)
S() :functionforcalculatingresponsevalueofstructurefromaction

i
:structuralfactor
(a) During design, a verification shall be carried out for every limit state that can be
considered.
(b) TheflowchartexplainingtheconceptofverificationofsafetyisgiveninFig.9.4.19.

Design resistance R

Design action effect
Characteristicvalueofmaterialstrength:f
k

Characteristicvalueofaction:F
k

f

Designvalueofmaterialstrength:f
d
=f
k
/
m
Designvalueofaction:F
d
=
f
F
k

PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6475
Resistance:R(f
d
)

b

Actioneffect:S(F
d
)

a

Designresistance: R
d
=R(f
d
)/
b

Designactioneffect:S
d
=
a
S(F
d
)

Verification: 0 . 1
Rd
Sd
i


9.4.19.3 Partialfactors
(a) Partialfactorsshallbedeterminedontheconceptgiveni.andii.below.
i) The material factor, structural member factor, structural analysis factor, and action factor
shall be determined in consideration of (i) unfavorabledeviations from characteristic
values,(ii)uncertaintiesincomputationalaccuracy,and(iii)discrepanciesbetweendesign
andpracticewithrespecttoactionsorstructuresandmaterials.
Table9.4.9showsthe standardvaluesofpartialfactors.
ii) Thestructuralfactor
i
shallbedeterminedaccordingtostructuralimportanceandalsothe
socialandeconomicalimpactofthestructurereachingitslimitstate.
Table9.4.10showsthestandardvaluesofstructuralfactor
i
fordifferentperformanceitems.
Table9.4.9Standardvaluesofpartialfactors
Performanceitem Actionfactor

Structuralanalysis
factor
a

Materialfactor

Structuralmember
Factor
b

Structuralsafety 1.0

1.6 1.0

1.1 1.0

1.05 1.0

1.3
Serviceability(user
comfort)
1.0 1.0 1.0

1.05 1.0
Durability(fatigue
resistance)
1.0

1.1 1.0 1.0 1.0

1.1
Table9.4.10Standardvaluesofstructuralfactors

Performanceitem Structuralfactor
i

Structuralsafety 1.0

1.2
Serviceability(Usercomfort) 1.0
Durability(fatigueresistance) 1.0
Part6
StructuralDesign

6476 Vol.2

PartBMaterialandConstruction
9.5 MaterialandConstruction
9.5.1 Materials
9.5.1.1 ConcreteingredientsandapplicableASTMstandards
Table9.5.1showsthelistofcommonlyapplicablestandardsforcement,coarseandfineaggregates,
admixturesandmixingwater.
Table9.5.1Cement,coarseandfineaggregates,admixtures,waterandapplicablestandards
Material
Designationofthe
Standard
TitleoftheStandard
Concrete ASTMC39 Compressiontestingofcylindricalconcretespecimens
Cement BDSEN1971,issued
April2003
Part1:Composition,specificationsandconformitycriteriaforcommon
cements
Fine&coarseaggregates ASTMC13606

ASTMC4004

ASTMC142
ASTMC127
ASTMC128
ASTMC131

ASTMC29
ASTMC70

ASTMC88

ASTMC227

ASTMC1260

ASTMD2419

Standardtestmethodforsieveanalysisoffineandcoarseaggregates
Standardtestmethodfororganicimpuritiesinfineaggregatesfor
concrete
Claylumpsandfriableparticles
Specificgravityandabsorptionofcoarseaggregate
Specificgravityandabsorptionoffineaggregate
DegradationofsmallsizecoarseaggregatebyL.A.abrasiontest
Unitweightsandvoidsinaggregates
SurfacemoistureinfineaggregateSoundnessofaggregatesbyuseof
sodiumsulfateormagnesiumsulfate
Soundnessofaggregatesbyuseofsodiumsulfateormagnesiumsulfate
Alkalireactivity,potentialofcementaggregatecombinations
Potentialalkalireactivityofaggregates(Mortarbarmethod)
Sandequivalentvalueofsoilsandfineaggregate
Admixtures ASTMC494

TypeAWaterreducing
TypeBRetarding
TypeCAccelerating
TypeDWaterreducingandretarding
TypeEWaterreducingandaccelerating
TypeFWaterreducing,highrange
TypeGWaterreducing,highrangeandretarding
TypeSSpecificperformanceadmixture
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6477
Material
Designationofthe
Standard
TitleoftheStandard
Mixing
Water
ASTMC1602/
C1602M06
Standardspecificationformixingwaterusedin the
productionofhydrauliccementconcrete
T

9.5.1.2 Reinforcingsteelandapplicablestandards
Table 9.5.2 shows the types of reinforcing steel with the ASTM and BDS Designation standard
specifications.
Table9.5.2ListofStandardsforthereinforcingsteel
Material DesignationoftheStandard TitleoftheStandard
ReinforcingSteel ASTMA615/A615M04a Standardspecificationsfor
deformedandplaincarbonsteel
barsforconcretereinforcement
ASTMA706/A706M04a Standardspecificationsforlow
alloysteeldeformedandplain
carbonsteelbarsforconcrete
reinforcement
BDSISO69352:2009/ISO69352:
2007
Bangladeshstandard,Steelfor
thereinforcementofconcrete,
Part2:Ribbedbars(1
st
revision)
9.5.1.3 PrestressingsteelandapplicableASTMstandards
Table 9.5.3 shows the types of high tensile prestressing steel and cold drawn wires used for
prestressing,withtheASTMDesignationstandardspecifications.
Table9.5.3ListofStandardsforthepretressingsteel
Material Designationofthe
Standard
TitleoftheStandard
Prestressing
Steel
ASTMA416416M02 Standardspecificationforsteel,wire,harddrawnforprestressing
concretepipe
ASTMA64804a

Standardspecificationforuncoatedhighstrengthsteelbarsfor
prestressingconcrete
9.5.2 Constructionofprestressedconcretestructures
9.5.2.1 Posttensioningducts
9.5.2.1.1 Corrosionprotectionforunbondedtendons
(a) Unbondedprestressingsteelshallbeencasedwithsheathing.Theprestressing steel shall be
completelycoatedandthesheathingaroundtheprestressingsteelfilled with suitable material
toinhibitcorrosion.
(b) Sheathingshallbewatertightandcontinuousoverentirelengthtobeunbonded.
(c) Forapplicationsincorrosiveenvironments,thesheathingshallbeconnectedtoall stressing,
intermediateandfixedanchoragesinawatertightfashion.
(d) Unbondedsinglestrandtendonsshallbeprotectedagainstcorrosionin accordance with
ACI423.7.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6478 Vol.2
9.5.2.2 Posttensioningducts
(a) Ductsforgroutedtendonsshallbemortartightandnonreactivewith concrete, prestressing
steel,grout,andcorrosioninhibitor.
(b) Ductsforgroutedsinglewire,singlestrand,orsinglebartendonsshallhaveaninsidediameter
atleast6mmlargerthantheprestressingsteeldiameter.
(c) Ductsforgroutedmultiplewire,multiplestrand,ormultiplebartendonsshall have an inside
crosssectionalareaatleasttwotimesthecrosssectional area oftheprestressingsteel.
(d) Ductsshallbemaintainedfreeofpondedwaterifmemberstobegroutedare exposed to
temperaturesbelowfreezingpriortogrouting.
9.5.2.3 Groutforbondedtendons
9.5.2.3.1 Materialsforgrouts
(a) GroutshallconsistofPortlandcementandwater;orPortlandcement,sand,andwater.
(b) Materialsforgroutshallconformto9.5.2.2.1c.,d.,e.andf.below.
(c) Portlandcementshallconformto9.5.1.1.
(d) Watershallconformto9.5.1.1.
(e) Sand,ifused,shallconformto9.5.1.1exceptthatgradationshallbepermittedtobemodified
asnecessarytoobtainsatisfactoryworkability.
(f) Admixtures conforming to 9.5.1.1 and known to have no injurious effects on grout, steel, or
concreteshallbepermitted.Calciumchlorideshallnotbeused.
9.5.2.3.2 Selectionofgroutproportions
Proportionsofmaterialsforgroutshallbebasedoneithera.orb.below.
(a) Resultsoftestsonfreshandhardenedgroutpriortobeginninggrouting operations;or
(b) Prior documented experience with similar materials and equipment and under comparable
fieldconditions.
(c) CementusedintheWorkshallcorrespondtothatonwhichselectionofgroutproportionswas
based.
(d) Water content shall be minimum necessary for proper pumping of grout; however, water
cementratioshallnotexceed0.45byweight.
(e) Watershallnotbeaddedtoincreasegroutflowabilitythathasbeendecreasedbydelayeduse
ofthegrout.
9.5.2.3.3 Mixingandpumpingofgrout
(a) Groutshallbemixedinequipmentcapableofcontinuousmechanicalmixingandagitationthat
will produce uniform distribution of materials, passed through screens, and pumped in a
mannerthatwillcompletelyfilltheducts.
(b) Temperatureofmembersattimeofgroutingshallbeabove2Candshallbemaintainedabove
2C until fieldcured 50 mm cubes of grout reach a minimum compressive strength of 5.5
N/mm
2
.
(c) Grouttemperaturesshallnotbeabove32Cduringmixingandpumping.
9.5.2.4 Protectionforprestressingsteelduringwelding
Burning or welding operations in the vicinity of prestressing steel shall be performed so that
prestressingsteelisnotsubjecttoexcessivetemperatures,weldingsparks,orgroundcurrents.
9.5.2.5 Applicationandmeasurementofprestressingforce
9.5.2.5.1 Prestressingforceshallbedeterminedbybothof(a)and(b):
(a) Measurementofsteelelongation.Requiredelongationshallbedeterminedfromaverageload
elongationcurvesfortheprestressingsteelused;
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6479
(b) Observation of jacking force on a calibrated gage or load cell or by use of a calibrated
dynamometer.
9.5.2.5.2 Causeofanydifferenceinforcedeterminationbetween9.5.2.4.1(a)and(b)thatexceeds5
percent for pretensioned elements or 7 percent for posttensioned construction shall be
ascertainedandcorrected.
9.5.2.5.3 Where the transfer of force from the bulk heads of pretensioning bed to the concrete is
accomplished by flame cutting prestressing steel, cutting points and cutting sequence shall be
predeterminedtoavoidundesiredtemporarystresses.
9.5.2.5.4 Longlengthsof exposed pretensioned strand shallbe cut near the member tominimize shock
toconcrete.
9.5.2.5.5 Totallossofprestressduetounreplacedbrokenprestressingsteelshallnotexceed2percentof
totalprestress.
9.5.2.6 Posttensioninganchoragesandcouplers
9.5.2.6.1 Anchoragesandcouplersforbondedandunbondedtendonsshalldevelopatleast95percentof
the fpu when tested in an unbonded condition, without exceeding anticipated set. For bonded
tendons,anchoragesandcouplersshallbelocatedsothat100percentoffpushallbedeveloped
atcriticalsectionsaftertheprestressingsteelisbondedinthemember.
9.5.2.6.2 Couplersshallbeplacedinareasapprovedbythelicenseddesignprofessionalandenclosedin
housinglongenoughtopermitnecessarymovements.
9.5.2.6.3 Inunbondedconstructionsubjecttorepetitiveloads,attentionshallbegiventothepossibility
offatigueinanchoragesandcouplers.
9.5.2.6.4 Anchorages,couplers,andendfittingsshallbepermanentlyprotectedagainstcorrosion.
9.5.3 Performancerequirementofmaterial
9.5.3.1 Performancerequirementofmaterial
(a) Thefundamentalperformancerequirementofmaterialsformingthestructureisthattheyshould
beabletoresistactionssuchasthevariousloadingstowhichthestructureisexposed.
(b) Materials forming the structure should not reach unexpected limit states as a result of
deteriorationphenomenaduringtheworkinglifeofthestructure.
(c) Materialsrelated energy consumption and CO
2
discharges should be minimized, while
recyclabilityshouldbehigh.
(d) Any materials that escape into the surrounding environment during construction and service
shouldnothaveastrongimpactonhumanbeings,animalsandplants.
Commentary:
Corresponding to design requirements, the materials should be evaluated to ensure that their
properties are suitable with respect to strength (tensile, compressive and shear),deformation (e.g.
elasticmodulus),heatresistanceandwatertightness.
The characteristic values obtained from the tests, complying appropriate BDS, ASTM, BS, or
equivalentstandards,onsuchspecimensshouldbeconvertedtosuitthedesigncalculationmodels
usingappropriateconversionfactorsorfunctions.
Thecharacteristicvalueofmaterialstrengthf
k
iscalculatedfromtestresultsusingEq.9.5.31.
fkfmk 9.5.31
wheref
m
:meanoftestvalues,:standarddeviationoftestvalues,and

k: coefficient of variance.
The coefficient k is determined from the probability of obtaining a test value less than the
characteristic value and the probability distribution of test results. The 5% fractile value is often
taken as the characteristic value. In this case, the value of k is 1.64 if the normal distribution is
assumedforthetestvalues.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6480 Vol.2
Atthestructuraldesignstage,verificationshallbeperformedsothatresponsevalueislessthanor
equaltothelimitvalueofperformancethroughoutbothconstructionperiodandworkinglife.Atthe
end of construction stage, just completed structure shall fulfill the all required performances
consideredinitsdesign.


PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6481
PartCMaintenance
9.6 Maintenance
9.6.1 General
Iftheprestressedconcretestructureisdesignedandconstructedinaccordancewiththeappropriateconcepts
describedinPartIandIIofthisChapter,basedonwhichthedurabilityischeckedbyverifyingtheperformance
requirements of the concrete and its constituent materials, it is not likely that structural deterioration would
become so significant as to degrade the performance of the structure. On the other hand it is not easy to
estimate the performance degradation process of the structure during its service life accurately. Also, it is
difficulttocompletelyavoidconstructiondefectsatallconstructionstages.Therefore,thenewstructureshould
be appropriately maintained by routine and regular inspections, based on an adequate maintenance plan
formulatedatthedesignstage.
For existing structures, deterioration may be evident in some cases, with the performance having been
degraded.Thedefectsofsuchstructuresshouldbeaccuratelyassessedandidentifiedasinitialdefects,damage,
ordeteriorations.Majorcausesforsuchdefectsshouldbeidentifiedsubsequentlysothatappropriateremedial
actionscanbeselected.Theinitialdefectsanddamageshouldbetreatedpromptlyandappropriatelyincluding
emergency treatments. When the deterioration that would degrade the performance is evident, the
deterioration mechanisms should be identified and appropriate maintenance, carried out based on the results
ofdeteriorationpredictionandperformancedegradationevaluation.
9.6.2 ClassificationofMaintenanceAction
Maintenanceactionsshallbeclassifiedintodifferentcategoriesdependingonsuchfactorsastheimportanceof
thestructure,designlife,impactonathirdparty,environmentalconditions,easeofmaintenance,andcost.
Intheviewoftheabove,fourcategoriesarerecommendedfortheclassificationsofthemaintenanceactions:
CategoryAPreventivemaintenance
Maintenancetopreventdeteriorationwhichwouldotherwiseleadtounsatisfactorystructuralperformance.
CategoryAstructuresarethose
- forwhichremedialactionsaredifficulttotakeafterdeteriorationbecomesapparent;
- ofwhichdeteriorationmustnotbeapparent;
- havingalongdesignlife.
Structuresinthiscategorygenerallyhaveahighdegreeofimportancewhichinmanycasesrequiremonitoring.
CategoryBCorrectivemaintenance
Maintenance to restore the performance level and/or to reduce the rate of deterioration so as to maintain
satisfactorystructuralperformance.
CategoryBstructuresarethoseforwhich
- remedialmeasurescanbetakenafterdeteriorationbecomesapparent;
- apparentdeteriorationcausesnoappreciableinconvenience.
CategoryCObservationalmaintenance
Maintenanceinwhichvisualinspectionisnecessarywithoutanyremedial action regardless of the
deteriorationlevel.
CategoryCstructuresarethose
- foruseaslongastheyareusable;
- forwhichensuringsafetyfromthreatsposedtothirdpartiesistheonlyrequirement.
CategoryDIndirectmaintenance
Maintenanceinwhichnodirectinspectionisnecessaryorpossible.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6482 Vol.2
Category D structures are those for which direct inspection is extremely difficult. For these reasons, non
inspection maintenance after the initial inspection is carried out not as routine or regular inspection, but as
extraordinaryinspectionfollowingnaturaldisasters,accidents,etc.
9.6.3 MaintenanceRecord
Records, drawings and related documents prepared during the time of planning, design and construction shall
be referred to and made use of while developing an appropriate methodology for maintenance covering
inspectionandrepairs.
Commentary:
A thorough study of the planning, design and construction related documents often provide insights into the
inherent weaknesses of the structure which in turn often serve as pointers for further detailed inspection
and/orrepairs.
Furthermore, a clear record should be kept of the difficulties encountered, remedial actions taken and any
deviation from the design drawings. These record also serve as a valuable reference in the design and
constructionofsimilarstructuresandtheirsubsequentinspections.
9.6.4 Inspection
9.6.4.1 General
Onthebasisofthemethodsusedinthefrequencyandtiming,inspectionshallbeclassifiedasinitial
inspection, routine inspection, regular inspection, detailed inspection, extraordinary inspection, and
monitoring.
9.6.4.2 Initialinspection
Initial inspection is intended to examine whether the structure is adequately constructed. It also
allowsthecollectionofbasicdataforinitiatingamaintenanceprogram.Initialinspectionshallalsobe
carriedoutjustafterthecompletionofremedialactions.
Initialinspectionshouldcovertheexternalappearanceofthestructure,variationofconcretequality,
existence of construction defects, construction errors on reinforcing and pretsressing bar
arrangement,andsoon.
9.6.4.3 Routineinspections
It shall be carried out on a routine basis at certain intervals without making any specific effort to
identify signs of deterioration, if any, and the time of their first appearance. The exact tools to be
usedandthefrequencyofsuchinspectionsmaybedecidedonthebasisofsuchfactorsasthelikely
mechanisms of such deterioration, environmental conditions, importance of the structure, and the
maintenanceactionclassification.
Aroutineinspectionshouldcovertheexternalappearanceofthestructureincludingcracks,spalling,
delamination,colorchanges,ruststainfromreinforcement,andisolationoffreelimefromconcrete.
9.6.4.4 Regularinspection
Itshallbecarriedoutatregularintervalsusingappropriatetoolstoidentifysignsofdeteriorationand
the time of their first appearance. Efforts shall be made during a regular inspection to observe the
structurecloselytoobtaindetailswhichwillbedifficulttogatherduringaroutineinspection.
Visualinspectionand/orhammeringinspectionarecarriedoutmainlytoobtainmoredetailsonthe
itemsinspectedinaroutineinspection.Inaddition,inspectionsbyusingappropriatenondestructive
testsortakingconcretecoresetc.canbeeffectivelycombinedwiththevisualinspection.
9.6.4.5 Detailedinspection
Detailedinspectionshallbedonewhen
(a) somesignsofdeteriorationorachangeintheperformancelevelareobservedduringaroutine
and/orregularinspection;
(b) it is difficult to obtain reliable and accurate information during a routine and/or regular
inspection;
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6483
(c) itisfoundthatthestructuralintegrityofthestructurehasbeenadverselyaffectedbytheextent
ofthedeterioration;
(d) more detailed information is required before deciding on the necessity and scope for
undertakingamajorrepair,rehabilitationorstrengtheningwork.
9.6.4.6 Extraordinaryinspection
Itshallbecarriedoutafterastructurehasbeensubjectedtoanaccidentalloadtoassesstheextent
ofthedamageandtheneedforremedialactions.Suchaccidentalloadsmayincludethosecausedby
anearthquake,storm,flood,fire,explosion,etc.
9.6.5 Monitoring
The deterioration and/or performance of the concerned structure as determined in 9.6.2, shall be monitored,
throughcontinuousrecordingoftheappropriatedata,togetherwithroutineandregularinspections,sothatthe
appropriateremedialactionscanbetakenbeforethedeteriorationbecomesdetrimentaltotheappearanceand
otherperformanceofthestructure.
9.6.6 DeteriorationMechanismandPrediction
9.6.6.1 General
Theprevailingstateoftheconcernedstructureshallbeevaluatedasproperlyaspossibleaccordingto
the inspection results, design and construction records, environmental conditions, and any other
relevantinformation.Thenwhenanydeteriorationisfound,thepossiblecausesofthedeterioration
andthecorrespondingmechanismcanbeappropriatelyestimated.
9.6.6.2 Identificationofdeteriorationmechanisms
Deterioration of a structure is caused by the environmental actions and loading conditions.
Environmentoriented deterioration includes carbonationinduced deterioration, chlorideinduced
deterioration, chemical attack, alkaliaggregate reaction, etc. On the other hand external force
orienteddeteriorationincludesfatigue,excessiveloading,anddifferentialsettlementofthesupport.
9.6.6.3 Deteriorationfactors
Deteriorationfactorsmaybeclassifiedintothose
(a) external to structures such as temperature, humidity and any other environmental
characteristics;and
(b) internaltothestructuresuchasdesignparametersandqualitycontrolduringconstruction.
Commentary:
Designfactorsincludethegeometryofthemembers/segments, crackwidthspecifications,concrete
covertoreinforcingbarandpretressingsteel/ducts,anddesignstrength.Constructionfactorsinclude
materialselection,mixproportions,transportation,placement,andcuringmethods.
9.6.6.4 Determinationofdeteriorationlevelsandrates
The level of deterioration and/or performance shall be determined based on the results of
inspectionsandsimulationsusingappropriatemodelsforthemechanismsofdeterioration.
The following features appearing on the surface of the structure may be used for evaluating the
degreeofdeteriorationandthelevelofperformance:
(a) crackpattern,lengthandwidth;
(b) theextentofdelamination,peelingandspallingofconcretecover,andscalinganddegradation
areas;
(c) abnormalhammertappingsoundandtheextentofabnormality;
(d) presenceanddegreeofexudationofrustandefflorescenceandwaterleakage.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6484 Vol.2
9.6.7 EvaluationandDecisionMaking
9.6.7.1 General
Ingeneral,thedeteriorationandperformancedegradationofastructureprogressmonotonically.The
decision, therefore, should be made based on the evaluation outcome of the performance of the
structureatthetimeofinspectionandattheendofitsdesignlife.
9.6.7.2 Thresholdlevel
Thethresholdlevelofthestructuresdegradedperformanceshallbespecifiedinaccordancewiththe
requirementsofsafety,functionality,appearance,societalfriendlinessandsuchotherfactors,taking
into consideration the type, importance and maintenance level of the structure and the
environmentalconditions.
9.6.7.3 Evaluationofinspectionresults
The results from routine and regular inspections shall be evaluated and a decision shall be made
whetheradetailedinspectionisrequiredorotherwise.
Theresultsfromthedetailedand/orextraordinaryinspectionsshallbeevaluatedandadecisionshall
bemadewhetheraremedialactionisrequiredorotherwise.
Immediate remedial actions shall be taken in cases where deterioration, damage and/or initial
defectsarefoundtobehazardoustothirdparties.
9.6.8 RemedialAction
9.6.8.1 General
A remedial action on a deteriorated structure shall be taken on the basis of the inspection results,
importance of the structure, maintenance classification, and the threshold level of deterioration
and/orperformance.
Commentary:
Repairandstrengtheningarethemaintechniquesofremedialactionsofwhichdetailsaredescribed
in9.6.8.3and9.6.8.4respectively.Thefollowingmeasuresarealsoincludedintheremedialactions.
Intensified inspection: inspection may be carried out by suitably increasing one or more of the
following:frequencyofinspection,numberofinspectionitems,andthelocationsforinspection.
Usage restriction: suitable restriction shall be imposed on the maximum live load that the structure
maycarry,dependingonthelevelofdeteriorationobserved.
Functionalimprovementorrestoration:thismayincludeanappearanceimprovementthatbeautifies
astructurewithsuitablypaintingorplacingadditionalconcrete,andsoon.
Dismantlingandremoval:inacasewhenthedeteriorationofastructureistooseverefor its
structural performance to be sufficiently restored, and dismantling or the removal is one of the
choicesastheremedialmeasures.
Special care for emergency: when a deteriorated structure poses an immediate threat to the
environment,itsusers,orthirdparties,suitableemergencyactionshallbetakenimmediately.
9.6.8.2 Selectionofremedialaction
Selectionofmethodsandmaterialssuitablefortherelevantdeteriorationmechanismanddegreeof
performancedegradationisparticularlyimportantformeasuresforwhichwidevarietiesofmethods
and materials are available. Care should be taken as the method of restoring the performance may
varydependingonthedeteriorationmechanism,venifthelevelofperformanceisthesame.
9.6.8.3 Repair
9.6.8.3.1 General
Repair of a structure refers to the remedial action taken to prevent or slow down its further
deteriorationandreducethepossibilityofdamagetoitsusersorthirdparties.
PrestressedConcreteStructuresChapter9

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6485
Types of repair include (i) repair of defects such as cracking and peeling; (ii) removal of concrete
damaged by deterioration due to carbonation and such like; (iii) surface coating to prevent re
intrusionofhazardoussubstances.
9.6.8.3.2 Preparationandexecution
Acompleteplanfortherepairworkincludingmethodsofrepair,materialstobeused,andteststo
ensurethequalityofwork,shallbedevelopedbeforetherepairworkcommences.
Repair works shall be carried out with minimum disturbances to the surrounding environment.
Necessaryteststoensurethequalityoftherepairworkshallbecarriedout.Detailedrecordofthe
repairworkshallbemaintainedforfuturereference.
9.6.8.3.3 Methodsandmaterials
Somecurrentrepairmethodsandassociatedmaterialsare
- crackrepairbyinjectingepoxy;
- sectionrepairincludingpatchingusingpolymercementmortar;
- surfaceprotectionbyresinormortar;
- cathodicprotection;
- realkalization;
- desalinationwhereverrequired.
Commentary:
Development of a repair plan comprises the selection of a repair method suitable for the
deterioration mechanism, establishment of the required repair level, and decisions on the repair
policy, specifications for the repair materials, sectional dimensions after repair, and execution
methods.
9.6.8.4 Strengthening
9.6.8.4.1 General
Strengtheningofastructurereferstotheremedialactiontakentorestoreorimproveitsstructural
properties including load carrying capacity and stiffness, to a level which is equal to or higher than
thatoftheoriginaldesign.
Commentary:
Strengthening methods include (i) replacement of members; (ii) an increase in the crosssectional
area of concrete; (iii) addition of members; (iv) an increase of the support points; (v) addition of
strengtheningmembers;(vi)externalprestressing,etc.
9.6.8.4.2 Preparationandexecution
Strengthening of a structure shall be preceded by a thorough investigation of its deterioration
consideringsuchfactorsastheremainingdesignlife,deteriorationmechanism,possiblecausesand
extentofdeterioration,theremaininganddesiredloadcarryingcapacityorstiffness,importanceof
thestructure,maintenanceclassification,andanyremedialactionstakenpreviously.
A complete plan for the strengthening work including design calculations, methods of
strengthening, materials to be used, and tests to ensure quality of the work, shall be developed
beforeworkcommences.
Strengtheningworkshallbecarriedoutwithminimumdisturbancetothesurroundingenvironment
andtheserviceconditionofthestructure.
9.6.8.4.3 Methodsandmaterials
Somecurrentmethodsandassociatedmaterialsforstrengtheningare
- external bonding viz plate or sheet bonding and over or underlaying using steel or carbon
sheets;
Part6
StructuralDesign

6486 Vol.2
- externalprestressingusingadditionaltensioncables;
- additionofgirders,bracesand/orsupports;
- replacementofmembers;
- seismicisolation.
Commentary:
When selecting a strengthening method, it is necessary to consider effects of strengthening,
constructability, costeffectiveness, and impact on the community/environment during execution.
It is also important to consider the ease of maintenance after strengthening and any influence on
thelandscape.
9.6.8.5 Record
9.6.8.5.1 General
Records shall be kept and preserved for future reference. Such records shall include details
concerning the design, inspection and evaluation procedures, plans and execution of any repair
and/orstrengtheningworkundertaken,andothersuchinformation.
9.6.8.5.2 Preservation
Themaintenancerecordsofastructureshallbepreservedwhilethestructureremainsinservice.It
isalsodesirablethatsuchrecordsbepreservedforanindefiniteperiodasausefulreferenceforthe
constructionandmaintenanceofothersimilarstructures.
Commentary:
It is important to devise a format that makes it easy to understand the history of a structure by
simplyreferringtorecords.Therecordsshouldbemadeaccessibleatalltimes.
9.6.8.5.3 Methodanditemofrecording
Recordsshallbekeptinaneasytounderstandformat.
Theitemstoberecordedshallincludereferencestoconcernedagencies,drawings,immediateand
nearby environment, classification of structure, results of deterioration rate estimation, results of
anyinspectionscarriedout,evaluationofthestructure,anddetailsoftheplanandactualexecution
ofremedialandotheractions.

Part6
StructuralDesign 6487
Chapter 10
STEEL STR0CT0RES
10.1 GeneralProvisionsforStructuralSteelBuildingsandStructures
This section states the scope of the Specification, summarizes referenced specification, code, and standard
documents,andprovidesrequirementsformaterialsandcontractdocuments.
10.1.1 Scope
Thespecificationcontainedinchapter10ofPart6ofthiscodesetsforthcriteriaforthedesign,fabrication,and
erection of structural steel buildings and other structures, where other steelstructures are defined as those
structuresdesigned,fabricated,anderectedinamannersimilartosteelbuildings,withbuildinglikeverticaland
lateralloadresistingelements.Whereconditionsarenotcoveredbythisspecification,designsarepermittedto
bebasedontestsoranalysis,subjecttotheapprovaloftheauthorityhavingjurisdiction.Alternatemethodsof
analysis and design shall be permitted, provided such alternate methods or criteria are acceptable to the
authorityhavingjurisdiction.
10.1.1.1 LowSeismic Applications: When the seismic response modification coefficient, R, (as specified in
Chapter2ofPart6)istakenequaltoorlessthan3,thedesign,fabrication,anderectionofstructural
steelframedbuildingsandothersteelstructuresshallcomplywiththisspecificationexceptthatsuch
structuresneednottocomplywiththespecificationssetforthinSection10.20SeismicProvisions.
10.1.1.2 HighSeismic Applications: When the seismic response modification coefficient, R, (as specified in
Chapter2ofPart6)istakengreaterthan3,thedesign,fabricationanderectionofstructuralsteel
framed buildings and other structures shall comply with the requirements in the Section 10.20
Seismic Provisions, in addition to the provisions of other sections (whichever applicable) this
specification.
10.1.2 ReferencedSpecifications,CodesandStandards
Thefollowingspecifications,codesandstandardsarereferencedinthisSpecification:
ACIInternational(ACI)
ACI31802BuildingCodeRequirementsforStructuralConcreteandCommentary
ACI318M02MetricBuildingCodeRequirementsforStructuralConcreteandCommentary
AmericanInstituteofSteelConstruction,Inc.(AISC)
AISC30305CodeofStandardPracticeforSteelBuildingsandBridges
ANSI/AISC34105SeismicProvisionsforStructuralSteelBuildings
ANSI/AISC N6901994(R2004) Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel SafetyRelated
StructuresforNuclearFacilities,includingSupplementNo.2
ANSI/AISC N690L03 Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel SafetyRelated Structures for
NuclearFacilities
AmericanSocietyofCivilEngineers(ASCE)
SEI/ASCE702MinimumDesignLoadsforBuildingsandOtherStructures
ASCE/SFPE2999StandardCalculationMethodsforStructuralFireProtection
AmericanSocietyofMechanicalEngineers(ASME)
ASMEB18.2.696FastenersforUseinStructuralApplications
ASMEB46.195SurfaceTexture,SurfaceRoughness,Waviness,andLay
Part6
StructuralDesign

6488 Vol.2
AmericanIronandSteelInstitute(AISI)
NorthAmericanSpecificationfortheDesignofColdFormedSteelStructuralMembers(AISI/COS/NASPEC2001).
CodeofStandardPracticeforColdFormedSteelStructuralFraming,2005
ASTMInternational(ASTM)
A6/A6M04a Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes,
andSheetPiling
A36/A36M04StandardSpecificationforCarbonStructuralSteel
A53/A53M02StandardSpecificationforPipe,Steel,BlackandHotDipped,ZincCoated,WeldedandSeamless
A193/A193M04a Standard Specification for AlloySteel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High
TemperatureService
A194/A194M04 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High
TemperatureService,orBoth
A216/A216M93(2003) Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High
TemperatureService
A242/A242M04StandardSpecificationforHighStrengthLowAlloyStructuralSteel
A283/A283M03StandardSpecificationforLowandIntermediateTensileStrengthCarbonSteelPlates
A30703StandardSpecificationforCarbonSteelBoltsandStuds,60,000PSITensileStrength
A32504StandardSpecificationforStructuralBolts,Steel,HeatTreated,120/105ksiMinimumTensileStrength
A325M04StandardSpecificationforHighStrengthBoltsforStructuralSteelJoints(Metric)
A35403a Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally
ThreadedFasteners
A37003aStandardTestMethodsandDefinitionsforMechanicalTestingofSteelProducts
A44904StandardSpecificationforQuenchedandTemperedSteelBoltsandStuds
A49004StandardSpecificationforHeatTreatedSteelStructuralBolts,150ksiMinimumTensileStrength
A490M04 Standard Specification for HighStrength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel
Joints(Metric)
A50003a Standard Specification for ColdFormed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
RoundsandShapes
A50101StandardSpecificationforHotFormedWeldedandSeamlessCarbonSteelStructuralTubing
A50203StandardSpecificationforSteelStructuralRivets
A514/A514M00a Standard Specification for HighYield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate,
SuitableforWelding
A529/A529M04StandardSpecificationforHighStrengthCarbonManganeseSteelofStructuralQuality
A56304StandardSpecificationforCarbonandAlloySteelNuts
A563M03StandardSpecificationforCarbonandAlloySteelNuts[Metric]
A568/A568M03 StandardSpecification forSteel,Sheet,Carbon,andHigh Strength, LowAlloy,HotRolled and
ColdRolled,GeneralRequirementsfor
A572/A572M04Standard Specification for HighStrength LowAlloy ColumbiumVanadium Structural
Steel
A588/A588M04 Standard Specification for HighStrength LowAlloy Structural Steel with 345 MPa Minimum
YieldPointto100mmThick
A60604StandardSpecificationforSteel,SheetandStrip,HighStrength,LowAlloy,HotRolledandColdRolled,
withImprovedAtmosphericCorrosionResistance
A618/A618M04 Standard Specification for HotFormed Welded and Seamless HighStrength LowAlloy
StructuralTubing
A673/A673M04StandardSpecificationforSamplingProcedureforImpactTestingofStructuralSteel
A668/A668M04StandardSpecificationforSteelForgings,CarbonandAlloy,forGeneralIndustrialUse
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6489
A709/A709M04StandardSpecificationforCarbonandHighStrengthLowAlloyStructuralSteelShapes,Plates,
andBarsandQuenchedandTemperedAlloyStructuralSteelPlatesforBridges
A75101StandardTestMethods,Practices,andTerminologyforChemicalAnalysisofSteelProducts
A84799a(2003) Standard Specification for ColdFormed Welded and Seamless HighStrength, LowAlloy
StructuralTubingwithImprovedAtmosphericCorrosionResistance
A852/A852M03 Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered LowAlloy Structural Steel Plate with 485
MPaMinimumYieldStrengthto100mmThick
A913/A913M04StandardSpecificationforHighStrengthLowAlloySteelShapesofStructuralQuality,Produced
byQuenchingandSelfTemperingProcess(QST)
A992/A992M04StandardSpecificationforStructuralSteelShapes
A1011/A1011M04 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, HotRolled, Carbon, Structural, High
StrengthLowAlloyandHighStrengthLowAlloywithImprovedFormability
C3303StandardSpecificationforConcreteAggregates
C33004StandardSpecificationforLightweightAggregatesforStructuralConcrete
E11900aStandardTestMethodsforFireTestsofBuildingConstructionand
Materials
E70901StandardGuideforMagneticParticleExamination
F43603StandardSpecificationforHardenedSteelWashers
F95902 Standard Specification for CompressibleWasherType Direct Tension Indicators forUse with Structural
Fasteners
F155499StandardSpecificationforAnchorBolts,Steel,36,55,and105ksiYieldStrength
F185204 Standard Specification for TwistOff Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies,
Steel,HeatTreated,120/105ksiMinimumTensileStrength
AmericanWeldingSociety(AWS)
AWSD1.1/D1.1M2004StructuralWeldingCodeSteel
AWSA5.12004SpecificationforCarbonSteelElectrodesforShieldedMetalArcWelding
AWSA5.596SpecificationforLowAlloySteelElectrodesforShieldedMetalArcWelding
AWSA5.17/A5.17M97SpecificationforCarbonSteelElectrodesandFluxesforSubmergedArcWelding
AWSA5.18:2001SpecificationforCarbonSteelElectrodesandRodsforGasShieldedArcWelding
AWSA5.2095SpecificationforCarbonSteelElectrodesforFluxCoredArcWelding
AWSA5.23/A5.23M97SpecificationforLowAlloySteelElectrodesandFluxesforSubmergedArcWelding
AWS A5.25/A5.25M97 Specification for Carbon and LowAlloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Electroslag
Welding
AWSA5.26/A5.26M97SpecificationforCarbonandLowAlloySteelElectrodesforElectrogasWelding
AWSA5.2896SpecificationforLowAlloySteelElectrodesandRodsforGasShieldedArcWelding
AWSA5.29:1998SpecificationforLowAlloySteelElectrodesforFluxCoredArcWelding
ResearchCouncilonStructuralConnections(RCSC)
SpecificationforStructuralJointsUsingASTMA325orA490Bolts,2004
BangladeshStandardsandTestingInstitute(BangladeshStandardsorBDS)
10.1.3 Material
10.1.3.1 StructuralSteelMaterials
a) Regular Structural Steel: Material test reports from an acceptable testing laboratory shall constitute
sufficientevidenceofconformitywithoneoftheabovelistedASTMstandards.Forhotrolledstructural
shapes, plates, and bars, such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M; for sheets, such
tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM A568/A568M; for tubing and pipe, such tests shall be
made in accordance with the requirements of the applicable ASTM standards listed above for those
Part6
StructuralDesign

6490 Vol.2
product forms. If requested, the fabricator shall provide an affidavit stating that the structural steel
furnishedmeetstherequirementsofthegradespecified.
Structural steel material conforming to one of the following specifications is approved for use under this
Specification:
(i)Hotrolledstructuralshapes
ASTM A36/A36M, ASTM A529/A529M, ASTM A572/A572M, ASTM A588/A588M, ASTM
A709/A709M,ASTMA913/A913M,ASTMA992/A992M
(ii)Structuraltubing
ASTMA500,ASTMA501,ASTMA618,ASTMA847,BDS1031:2006
(iii)Pipe
ASTMA53/A53M,Gr.B,BDS1031:2006
(iv)Plates
ASTM A36/A36M, ASTM A242/A242M, ASTM A283/A283M, ASTM A514/A514M, ASTM
A529/A529M, ASTM A572/A572M, ASTM A588/A588M, ASTM A709/A709M, ASTM A852/A852M,
ASTMA1011/A1011M,BDS1122:1987Reaffirmed2007
(v)Bars
ASTM A36/A36M, ASTM A529/A529M, ASTM A572/A572M, ASTM A709/A709M, BDS ISO 6935
1:2006,BDSISO69352:2006
(vi)Sheets
ASTMA606,A1011/A1011MSS,HSLAS,ANDHSLASF,BDS1122:1987Reaffirmed2007
b) UnidentifiedSteel:Unidentifiedsteelfreeofinjuriousdefectsispermitted tobeusedforunimportant
membersordetails,wheretheprecisephysicalpropertiesandweldabilityofthesteelwouldnotaffect
thestrengthofthestructure.
c) RolledHeavyShapes:ASTMA6/A6Mhotrolledshapeswithaflangethicknessexceeding50mm,used
as members subject to primary (computed) tensile forces due to tension or flexure and spliced using
completejointpenetration groove welds that fuse through the thickness of the member, shall be
specifiedasfollows.ThecontractdocumentsshallrequirethatsuchshapesbesuppliedwithCharpyV
Notch (CVN) impact test results in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement S30,
CharpyVNotchImpactTestforStructuralShapesAlternateCoreLocation.Theimpacttestshallmeet
aminimumaveragevalueof27Jabsorbedenergyat+21
0
C.
The above requirements do not apply if the splices and connections are made by bolting. The above
requirements do not apply to hotrolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 50 mm that have
shapes with flange or web elements less than 50 mm thick welded with completejointpenetration
grooveweldstothefaceoftheshapeswiththickerelements.
d) BuiltUp Heavy Shapes: Builtup crosssections consisting of plates with a thickness exceeding 50 mm,
usedasmemberssubjecttoprimary(computed)tensileforcesduetotensionorflexureandsplicedor
connected to other members using completejoint penetration groove welds that fuse through the
thicknessoftheplates,shallbespecifiedasfollows.Thecontractdocumentsshallrequirethatthesteel
besuppliedwithCharpyVNotchimpacttestresultsinaccordancewithASTMA6/A6M,Supplementary
Requirement S5, Charpy VNotch Impact Test. The impact test shall be conducted in accordance with
ASTMA673/A673M,FrequencyP,andshallmeetaminimumaveragevalueof27Jabsorbedenergyat
+21
0
C.
Theaboverequirementsalsoapplytobuiltupcrosssectionsconsistingofplatesexceeding50mmthat
areweldedwithcompletejointpenetrationgrooveweldstothefaceofothersections.
e) ColdFormSections:Specificationsforcoldformshapesregardingtheiruseasstructuralmembersisnot
covered in Section 10. For such type of structural steel, AISI standard (AISI/COS/NASPEC 2001) or
equivalentmaybefollowed.
10.1.3.2 Steel Castings and Forgings: Cast steel shall conform to ASTM A216/A216M, Gr. WCB with
Supplementary Requirement S11. Steel forgings shall conform to ASTM A668/A668M. Test reports
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6491
produced in accordance with the above reference standards shall constitute sufficient evidence of
conformitywithsuchstandards.
10.1.3.3 Bolts, Washers and Nuts: Bolt, washer, and nut material conforming to one of the following ASTM
specificationsisapprovedforuseunderthisSpecification:
(1)Bolts:ASTMA307,ASTMA325,ASTMA325M,ASTMA449,ASTMA490,ASTMA490M,ASTMF1852
(2)Nuts:ASTMA194/A194M,ASTMA563,ASTMA563M
(3)Washers:ASTMF436,ASTMF436M
(4)CompressibleWasherTypeDirectTensionIndicators:ASTMF959,ASTMF959M
10.1.3.4 Anchor rods and Threaded rods: Anchor rod and threaded rod material conforming to one of the
followingASTMspecificationsisapprovedforuseunderthisSpecification:
ASTMA36/A36M,ASTMA193/A193M,ASTMA354,ASTMA449,ASTMA572/A572M,ASTMA588/A588M,
ASTMF1554
A449materialisacceptableforhighstrengthanchorrodsandthreadedrodsofanydiameter.
Threads on anchor rods and threaded rods shall conform to the Unified Standard Series of ASME
B18.2.6andshallhaveClass2Atolerances.
10.1.3.5 Filler metal and Flux for Welding: Filler metals and fluxes shall conform to one of the following
specifications of the American Welding Society: AWS A5.1, AWS A5.5, AWS A5.17/A5.17M, AWS
A5.18, AWS A5.20, AWS A5.23/A5.23M, AWS A5.25/A5.25M, AWS A5.26/A5.26M, AWS A5.28, AWS
A5.29,AWSA5.32/A5.32M
10.1.3.6 Stud Shear Connectors: Steel stud shear connectors shall conform to the requirements of Structural
WeldingCodeSteel,AWSD1.1.
10.1.4 StructuralDesignDrawingsandSpecifications
Thedesigndrawingsandspecificationsshallmeettherequirementsspecifiedinthisspecification(Sections10.1
through10.20)andshallbepreparedandpresentedinaninternationallyapprovedstandardinaccordancewith
the provisions of Section 10.13, except for deviations specifically identified in the design drawings and/or
specificationsandapprovedbyanappropriateauthority.
10.2 GeneralDesignRequirements
Thegeneralrequirementsfortheanalysisanddesignofsteelbuildingsandstructuresthatareapplicabletoall
sectionsofChapter10ofPart6aregiveninthissection.
10.2.1 GeneralProvisions
The design of members and connections shall be consistent with the intended behavior of the framing system
and the assumptions made in the structural analysis. Unless restricted by the applicable code, lateral load
resistanceandstabilitymaybeprovidedbyanycombinationofmembersandconnections.
10.2.2 LoadsandLoadCombinations
TheloadsandloadcombinationsshallbeasstipulatedinChapter2ofPart6ofthiscode.Fordesignpurposes,
thenominalloadsshallbetakenastheloadsstipulatedintheChapter2
10.2.3 DesignBasis
Designs shall be made according to the provisions for Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) or to the
provisionsforAllowableStrengthDesign(ASD).
10.2.3.1 RequiredStrength:Therequiredstrengthofstructuralmembersandconnectionsshallbedetermined
by structural analysis for the appropriate load combinations as stipulated in Chapter 2 of Part 6.
Design by elastic,inelasticor plastic analysis is permitted. Provisions for inelasticand plasticanalysis
Part6
StructuralDesign

6492 Vol.2
are as stipulated in Section 10.15, Inelastic Analysis and Design. The provisions for moment
redistributionincontinuousbeamsinSection10.15.3arepermittedforelasticanalysisonly.
10.2.3.2 LimitStates:Design shall be based on the principle that no applicable strength orserviceability limit
stateshallbeexceededwhenthestructureissubjectedtoallappropriateloadcombinations.
10.2.3.3 Design for Strength Using Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD): Design according to the
provisions for Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) satisfies the requirements of this
Specificationwhenthedesignstrengthofeachstructuralcomponentequalsorexceedstherequired
strengthdeterminedonthebasisoftheLRFDloadcombinationsasspecifiedinChapter2ofPart6.All
provisionsofthisSpecification,exceptforthoseinSection10.2.3.4,shallapply.
DesignshallbeperformedinaccordancewithEquation10.2.1:
(10.2.1)
where
R
u
=requiredstrength(LRFD)
R
n
=nominalstrength,specifiedinSections10.2through10.20
=resistancefactor,specifiedinSections10.2through10.20
R
n
=designstrength
10.2.3.4 Design for Strength Using Allowable Strength Design (ASD): Design according to the provisions for
Allowable Strength Design (ASD) satisfies the requirements of this Specification when the allowable
strength of each structural component equals or exceeds the required strength determined on the
basis of the ASD load combinations as specified in Chapter 2 of Part 6. All provisions of this
Specification,exceptthoseofSection10.2.3.3,shallapply.
DesignshallbeperformedinaccordancewithEquation10.2.2:
(10.2.2)
where
R
u
=requiredstrength(ASD)
R
n
=nominalstrength,specifiedinSections10.2through10.20
=safetyfactor,specifiedinSections10.2through10.20
R
n
=allowablestrength
10.2.3.5 DesignforStability:Stabilityofthestructureanditselementsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewith
Section10.3.
10.2.3.6 Design for Connection: Connection elements shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of
Section 10.10 and 10.11. The forces and deformations used in design shall be consistent with the
intendedperformanceoftheconnectionandtheassumptionsusedinthestructuralanalysis.
10.2.3.6.1 Simple Connection: A simple connection transmits a negligible moment across the
connection. In the analysis of the structure, simple connections may be assumed to allow
unrestrained relative rotation between the framing elements being connected. A simple connection
shall have sufficient rotation capacity to accommodate the required rotation determined by the
analysisofthestructure.Inelasticrotationoftheconnectionispermitted.
10.2.3.6.2MomentConnection:Amomentconnectiontransmitsmomentacrosstheconnection.Two
typesofmomentconnections,FRandPR,arepermitted,asspecifiedbelow.
a) FullyRestrained (FR) Moment Connections: A fullyrestrained (FR) moment connection transfers
moment with a negligible relative rotation between the connected members. In the analysis of
the structure, the connection may be assumed to allow no relative rotation. An FR connection
shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to maintain the angle between the connected
membersatthestrengthlimitstates.
b) PartiallyRestrained (PR) Moment Connections: Partiallyrestrained (PR) moment connections
transfermoments,buttherelativerotationbetweenconnectedmembersisnotnegligible.Inthe
analysis of the structure, the forcedeformation response characteristics of the connection shall
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6493
beincluded.TheresponsecharacteristicsofaPRconnectionshallbedocumentedinthetechnical
literature or established by analytical or experimental means. The component elements of a PR
connectionshallhavesufficientstrength,stiffness,anddeformationcapacityatthestrengthlimit
states.
10.2.3.7 DesignforConnection:Theoverallstructureandtheindividualmembers,connectionsandconnectors
shall be checked for serviceability. Performance requirements for serviceability design are given in
Section10.12.
10.2.3.8 Design for Ponding: The roof system shall be investigated through structural analysis to assure
adequate strength and stability under ponding conditions, unless the roof surface is provided with a
slope of 20 mm per meter or greater toward points of free drainage or an adequate system of
drainageisprovidedtopreventtheaccumulationofwater.Methodsofcheckingpondingaregivenin
section10.16.
10.2.3.9 Design forFatigue: Fatigueshallbe considered in accordance with Section 10.17,Design forFatigue,
for members and their connections subject to repeated loading. Fatigue need not be considered for
seismiceffectsorfortheeffectsofwindloadingonnormalbuildinglateralloadresistingsystemsand
buildingenclosurecomponents.
10.2.3.10 Design for Fire Conditions: Two methods of design for fire conditions are provided in Section 10.18,
StructuralDesignforFireConditions:QualificationTestingandEngineeringAnalysis.Compliancewith
the fire protection requirements in Part 4 of this code shall be required in addition to satisfying the
requirementsofSection10.18.
10.2.3.11 DesignforCorrosionEffects:Wherecorrosionmayimpairthestrengthorserviceabilityofastructure,
structuralcomponentsshallbedesignedtotoleratecorrosionorshallbeprotectedagainstcorrosion.
10.2.3.12 DesignWallThicknessforHSS:Thedesignwallthickness,t,shallbeusedincalculationsinvolvingthe
wallthicknessofhollowstructuralsections(HSS).Thedesignwallthickness,t,shallbetakenequalto
0.93 times the nominal wall thickness for electricresistancewelded (ERW) HSS and equal to the
nominalthicknessforsubmergedarcwelded(SAW)HSS.
10.2.3.13 GrossandNetAreaDetermination
10.2.3.13.1GrossArea:Thegrossarea,A
g
,ofamemberisthetotalcrosssectionalarea.
10.2.3.13.2 Net Area: The net area, A
n
of a member is the sum of the products of the thickness and the net
widthofeachelementcomputedasfollows:
Incomputingnetareafortensionandshear,thewidthofaboltholeshallbetakenas2mmgreaterthanthe
nominaldimensionofthehole.
For a chain of holes extending across a part in any diagonal or zigzag line, the net width of the part shall be
obtainedbydeductingfromthegrosswidththesumofthediametersorslotdimensionsasprovidedinSection
10.10.3.2,ofallholesinthechain,andadding,foreachgagespaceinthechain,thequantitys
2
/(4g)
where
s=longitudinalcentertocenterspacing(pitch)ofanytwoconsecutiveholes,mm.
g=transversecentertocenterspacing(gage)betweenfastenergagelines,mm.
Forangles,thegageforholesinoppositeadjacentlegsshallbethesumofthegagesfromthebackoftheangles
lessthethickness.
ForslottedHSSweldedtoagussetplate,thenetarea,A
n
,isthegrossareatheproductofthethicknessandthe
totalwidthofmaterialthatisremovedtoformtheslot.
In determining the net area across plugorslot welds, the weld metal shall not be consideredas adding to the
netarea.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6494 Vol.2
10.2.4 ClassificationofSectionsforLocalBuckling
Sectionsareclassifiedascompact,noncompact,orslenderelementsections.Forasectiontoqualifyascompact
its flanges must be continuously connected to the web or webs and the widththickness ratios of its
compression elementsmust not exceed the limiting widththickness ratios z
p
from Table 10.2. 1.If the width
thickness ratio of one or more compression elements exceeds z
p
, but does not exceed z

from Table 10.2.1,

thesectionisnoncompact.Ifthewidththicknessratioofanyelementexceedsz

,thesectionisreferredtoasa
slenderelementsection.
10.2.4.1 Unstiffened Elements: For unstiffened elements supported along only one edge parallel to the
directionofthecompressionforce,thewidthshallbetakenasfollows:
(a)ForflangesofIshapedmembersandtees,thewidthbisonehalfthefullflangewidth,b
]
.
(b)Forlegsofanglesandflangesofchannelsandzees,thewidthbisthefullnominaldimension.
(c)Forplates,thewidthbisthedistancefromthefreeedgetothefirstrowoffastenersorlineof
welds.
(d)Forstemsoftees,distakenasthefullnominaldepthofthesection.
10.2.4.2 StiffenedElements:Forstiffenedelementssupportedalongtwoedgesparalleltothedirectionofthe
compressionforce,thewidthshallbetakenasfollows:
a) For webs of rolled or formed sections, h is the clear distance between flanges less the fillet or
cornerradiusat each flange; h
c
is twice the distance from the centroid to theinsideface of the
compressionflangelessthefilletorcornerradius.
b) For webs of builtup sections, h is the distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear
distancebetweenflangeswhenweldsareused,andh
c
istwicethedistancefromthecentroidto
the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression
flangewhenweldsareused;h
p
istwicethedistancefromtheplasticneutralaxistothenearest
line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression flange when
weldsareused.
c) Forflangeordiaphragmplatesinbuiltupsections,thewidthbisthedistancebetweenadjacent
linesoffastenersorlinesofwelds.
d) For flanges of rectangular hollow structural sections (HSS), the width b is the clear distance
between webs less the inside corner radius on each side. For webs of rectangular HSS, h is the
cleardistancebetweentheflangeslesstheinsidecornerradiusoneachside.Ifthecornerradius
is not known, b and h shall be taken as the corresponding outside dimension minus three times
thethickness.Thethickness,t,shallbetakenasthedesignwallthickness,perSection10.2.3.12.
e) For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the thickness is the nominal value halfway between the
freeedgeandthecorrespondingfaceoftheweb.
10.2.5 Fabrication,ErectionandQuality
Shopdrawings,fabrication,shoppainting,erection,andqualitycontrolshallmeet therequirementsstipulated
inSection10.13,Fabrication,Erection,andQualityControl.
10.3 StabilityAnalysisandDesign
Thissectionaddressesgeneralrequirementsforthestabilityanalysisanddesignofmembersandframesofsteel
buildingsandstructures.
10.3.1 StabilityDesignRequirements
GeneralRequirements:Stabilityshallbeprovidedforthestructureasawholeandforeachofitselements.Any
method that considers theinfluence of secondordereffects (including P and P effects), flexural, shear and
axial deformations, geometric imperfections, and member stiffness reduction due to residual stresses on the
stability of the structure and its elements is permitted. The methods prescribed in this Section and Section
10.14: Direct Analysis Method, satisfy these requirements. All component and connection deformations that
contributetothelateraldisplacementsshallbeconsideredinthestabilityanalysis.

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6495

Part6
StructuralDesign

6496 Vol.2

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6497

In structures designed by elastic analysis, individual member stability and stability of the structure as a whole
areprovidedjointlyby:
a) Calculationoftherequiredstrengthsformembers,connectionsandotherelementsusingoneof
themethodsspecifiedinSection10.3.2.2,and
f) Satisfactionofthememberandconnectiondesignrequirementsinthisspecificationbasedupon
thoserequiredstrengths.
Instructuresdesignedbyinelasticanalysis,theprovisionsofSection10.15shallbesatisfied.
10.3.1.1 Member Stability Design Requirements: Individual member stability is provided by satisfying the
provisions of Section 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, 10.10 and 10.11 etc. Where elements are designed to
functionasbracestodefinetheunbracedlengthofcolumnsandbeams,thebracingsystemshallhave
sufficient stiffness and strength to control member movement at the braced points. Methods of
satisfyingthisrequirementareprovidedinSection10.19.
10.3.1.2 SystemStabilityDesignRequirements
Lateral stability shall be provided by moment frames, braced frames, shear walls, and/or other equivalent
lateral load resisting systems. The overturning effects of drift and the destabilizing influence of gravity loads
shall be considered. Force transfer and load sharing between elements of the framing systems shall be
considered. Bracedframe and shearwall systems, moment frames, gravity framing systems, and combined
systemsshallsatisfythefollowingspecificrequirements:
10.3.1.3.1 BracedFrame and ShearWall Systems: In structures where lateral stability is provided solely by
diagonalbracing,shearwalls,orequivalentmeans,theeffectivelengthfactor,K,forcompressionmembersshall
betakenas1.0,unlessstructuralanalysisindicatesthatasmallervalueisappropriate.Inbracedframesystems,
it is permitted to design the columns, beams, and diagonal members as a vertically cantilevered, simply
connectedtruss.
10.3.1.3.2 Moment Frame Systems: In frames where lateral stability is provided by the flexural stiffness of
connected beams and columns, the effective length factor K or elastic critical buckling stress, F
c
, for columns
andbeamcolumnsshallbedeterminedasspecifiedinSection10.3.2.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6498 Vol.2
10.3.1.3.3GravityFramingSystems:Columnsingravityframingsystemsshallbedesignedbasedontheiractual
length (K = 1.0)unlessanalysis shows that a smallervaluemay beused. The lateralstability of gravity framing
systemsshallbeprovidedbymomentframes,bracedframes,shearwalls,and/orotherequivalentlateralload
resistingsystems.Peffectsduetoloadonthegravitycolumnsshallbetransferredtothelateralloadresisting
systemsandshallbeconsideredinthecalculationoftherequiredstrengthsofthelateralloadresistingsystems.
10.3.1.3.4CombinedSystems:Theanalysisanddesignofmembers,connectionsandotherelementsincombined
systemsofmomentframes,bracedframes,and/orshearwallsandgravityframesshallmeettherequirementsof
theirrespectivesystems.
10.3.2 CalculationofRequiredStrengths
ExceptaspermittedinSection10.3.2.2.2,requiredstrengthsshallbedeterminedusingasecondorderanalysis
as specified in Section 10.3.2.1. Design by either second order or firstorder analysis shall meet the
requirementsspecifiedinSection10.3.2.2.
10.3.2.1 Methods of Secondorder Analysis: Secondorder analysis shall conform to the requirements in this
Section.
10.3.2.1.1GeneralSecondOrderElasticAnalysis
Any secondorder elastic analysis method that considers both P and P effects may be used. The Amplified
FirstOrderElasticAnalysisMethoddefinedinSection10.3.2.1.2isanacceptedmethodforsecondorderelastic
analysisofbraced,moment,andcombinedframingsystems.
10.3.2.1.2SecondOrderAnalysisbyAmplifiedfirstOrderElasticAnalysis
Thefollowingisanapproximatesecondorderanalysisprocedureforcalculatingtherequiredflexuralandaxial
strengths in members of lateral load resisting systems. The required secondorder flexural strength, M
r
, and
axialstrength,P
r
,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
lt nt r
M B M B M
2 1
+ =
(10.3.2.1a)
lt nt r
P B P P
2
+ =
(10.3.2.1b)
Where,
1
1
1
1

=
e r
m
P P
C
B

(10.3.2.2)
Formemberssubjectedtoaxialcompression,B
1
maybecalculatedbasedonthefirstorderestimateP
r
=P
nt
+
P
lt
.
Formembersin which B
1
1.05, it is conservative to amplify the sum of the nonsway and sway moments (as
obtained,forinstance,byafirstorderelasticanalysis)bytheB
2
amplifier,inotherwords,M
r
=B
2
(M
nt
+M
lt
).
1
1
1
2
2

e
nt
P
P
B

(10.3.2.3)
And
o = 1.uu(LRFD) = 1.6u(ASD)
M
r
=requiredsecondorderflexuralstrengthusingLRFDorASDloadcombinations,Nmm
M
nt
=firstordermomentusingLRFDorASDloadcombinations,assumingthereisnolateraltranslationofthe
frame,Nmm
M
lt
=firstordermomentusingLRFDorASDloadcombinationscausedbylateraltranslationoftheframeonly,
Nmm
P
r
=requiredsecondorderaxialstrengthusingLRFDorASDloadcombinations,N
P
nt
=firstorderaxialforceusingLRFDorASDloadcombinations,assumingthereisnolateraltranslationofthe
frame,N
P
nt
=totalverticalloadsupportedbythestoryusingLRFDorASDloadcombinations,includinggravitycolumn
loads,N
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6499
P
lt
=firstorderaxialforceusingLRFDorASDloadcombinationscausedbylateraltranslationoftheframeonly,
N
C
m
=acoefficientassumingnolateraltranslationoftheframewhosevalueshallbetakenasfollows:
Forbeamcolumnsnotsubjecttotransverseloadingbetweensupportsintheplaneofbending,
( )
2 1
4 0 6 0 M M C
m
. . =
(10.3.2.4)
where M
1
and M
2
, calculated from a firstorder analysis, are the smaller and larger moments, respectively, at
the ends of that portion of the member unbraced in the plane of bending under consideration. M
1
/ M
2
is
positivewhenthememberisbentinreversecurvature,negativewhenbentinsinglecurvature.
For beamcolumns subjected to transverse loading between supports, the value of C
m
shall be determined
eitherbyanalysisorconservativelytakenas1.0forallcases.
P
e1
= elastic critical buckling resistance of the member in the plane of bending, calculated based on the
assumptionofzerosidesway,N
( )
2
1
2
1
L K
EI
P
e

=
(10.3.2.5)
P
c2
=elasticcriticalbucklingresistanceforthestorydeterminedbysidewaybucklinganalysis,N
For moment frames, where sidesway buckling effective length factors K
2
are determined for the columns, it is
permittedtocalculatetheelasticstorysideswaybucklingresistanceas
( )

=
2
2
2
2
L K
EI
P
e


(10.3.2.6a)
Foralltypesoflateralloadresistingsystems,itispermittedtouse
H
M e
HL
R P

=

2

(10.3.2.6b)
where
E=modulusofelasticityofsteel=200000MPa
R
M
=1.0forbracedframesystems;
=0.85formomentframeandcombinedsystems,unlessalargervalueisjustifiedbyanalysis
I=momentofinertiaintheplaneofbending,mm
4

L=storyheight,mm
K
1
=effectivelengthfactorintheplaneofbending,calculatedbasedontheassumptionofnolateraltranslation,
setequalto1.0unlessanalysisindicatesthatasmallervaluemaybeused
K
2
=effectivelengthfactorintheplaneofbending,calculatedbasedonasidewaybucklinganalysis

H
=firstorderinterstorydriftduetolateralforces,mm.Where
H
variesovertheplanareaofthestructure,

H
shallbetheaveragedriftweightedinproportiontoverticalloador,alternatively,themaximumdrift.
E=storyshearproducedbythelateralforcesusedtocompute
H
,N
10.3.2.2DesignRequirements
These requirements apply to all types of braced, moment, and combined framing systems. Where the ratio of
secondorderdrifttofirstorderdriftisequaltoorlessthan1.5,therequiredstrengthsofmembers,connections
andotherelementsshallbedeterminedbyoneofthemethodsspecifiedinSections10.3.2.2.1or10.3.2.2.2,or
by the Direct Analysis Method of Section 10.14. Where the ratio of secondorder drift to firstorder drift is
greaterthan1.5,therequiredstrengthsshallbedeterminedbytheDirectAnalysisMethodofSection10.14.
ForthemethodsspecifiedinSections10.3.2.2.1or10.3.2.2.2:
Analyses shall be conducted according to the design and loading requirements specified in either Section
10.2.3.3(LRFD)orSection10.2.3.4(ASD).
Thestructureshallbeanalyzedusingthenominalgeometryandthenominalelasticstiffnessforallelements.
10.3.2.2.1DesignBySecondOrderAnalysis
Part6
StructuralDesign

6500 Vol.2
Whererequiredstrengthsaredeterminedbyasecondorderanalysis:
TheprovisionsofSection10.3.2.1shallbesatisfied.
FordesignbyASD,analysesshallbecarriedoutunder1.6timestheASDloadcombinationsandtheresultsshall
bedividedby1.6toobtaintherequiredstrengths.
Allgravityonlyloadcombinationsshallincludeaminimumlateralloadappliedateachlevelofthestructureof
0.002Y
i
, where Y
i
is the design gravity load applied at level i. This minimum lateral load shall be considered
independentlyintwoorthogonaldirections.
Wheretheratioofsecondorderdrifttofirstorderdriftislessthanorequalto1.1,membersarepermittedto
bedesignedusingK=1.0.Otherwise,columnsandbeamcolumnsinmomentframesshallbedesignedusingaK
factor or column buckling stress, F
e
, determined from a sidesway buckling analysis of the structure. Stiffness
reduction adjustment due to column inelasticity is permitted in the determination of the K factor. For braced
frames, K for compression members shall be taken as 1.0, unless structural analysis indicates a smaller value
maybeused.
10.3.2.2.2DesignRequirements
Requiredstrengthsarepermittedtobedeterminedbyafirstorderanalysis,withallmembersdesignedusingK
=1.0,providedthat
The required compressive strengths of all members whose flexural stiffnesses are considered to contribute to
thelateralstabilityofthestructuresatisfythefollowinglimitation:
y r
P P 5 0.

(10.3.2.7)

Where,
o = 1.u(LRFD) = 1.6(ASD)
P
r
=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthunderLRFDorASDloadcombinations
P
y
=memberyieldstrength(=AF
y
),N.
All load combinations include an additional lateral load, N
i
, applied in combination with other loads at each
levelofthestructure,where
( )
i i i
Y Y L N 0042 0 1 2 . . =
(10.3.2.8)
Y
i
=gravityloadfromtheLRFDloadcombinationor1.6timestheASDloadcombinationappliedatleveli,N

/L=themaximumratiooftoLforallstoriesinthestructure

=firstorderinterstorydriftduetothedesignloads,mm.Wherevariesovertheplanareaofthestructure,
shallbetheaveragedriftweightedinproportiontoverticalloador,alternatively,themaximumdrift.
L=storyheight,mm
Thisadditionallateralloadshallbeconsideredindependentlyintwoorthogonaldirections.
The nonsway amplification of beamcolumn moments is considered by applying the B
1
amplifier of Section
10.3.2.1tothetotalmembermoments.
10.4 DesignofMembersforTension
This Section applies to steel members subject to axial tension caused by static forces acting through the centroidal
axis.
10.4.1 SlendernessLimitations
The maximum slenderness (KL/r) limit for design of structural members (except cables and hanger rods) in
tension shall be 300 unless it is justified by a comprehensive dynamic analysis (including 2
nd
order effects if
applicable)thatahigherslendernessratioissatisfactory.
Here,
L=laterallyunbracedlengthofthemember,mm
r=governingradiusofgyration,mm
K=theeffectivelengthfactordeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.3.2.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6501
10.4.2 TensileStrength
The design tensile strength,
t
P
n
, and the allowable tensile strength, P
n

t
, of tension members, shallbe the
lowervalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesoftensileyieldinginthegrosssectionandtensilerupturein
thenetsection.
a) Fortensileyieldinginthegrosssection:
P
n
=F
y
A
g
(10.4.2.1)

t
=0.90(LRFD)
t
=1.67(ASD)
g) Fortensileruptureinthenetsection:
P
n
=F
u
A
e
(10.4.2.2)

t
=0.75(LRFD)
t
=2.00(ASD)
where
A
e
=effectivenetarea,mm
2

A
g
=grossareaofmember,mm
2

F
y
=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthetypeofsteelbeingused,MPa
F
u
=specifiedminimumtensilestrengthofthetypeofsteelbeingused,MPa
Whenmemberswithoutholesarefullyconnectedbywelds,theeffectivenetareausedinEquation
10.4.2.2 shall be as defined in Section 10.4.3. When holes are present in a member with welded
end connections, or at the welded connection in the case of plug or slot welds, the effective net
areathroughtheholesshallbeusedinEquation10.4.2.2.
10.4.3 AreaDetermination
10.4.3.1 GrossArea:Thegrossarea,A
g
,ofamemberisthetotalcrosssectionalarea.
10.4.3.2 NetArea:Thenetarea,A
n
,ofamemberisthesumoftheproductsofthethicknessandthenetwidth
ofeachelementcomputedasfollows:
Incomputingnetareafortensionandshear,thewidthofaboltholeshallbetakenas2mmgreater
thanthenominaldimensionofthehole.
For a chain of holes extending across a part in any diagonal or zigzag line, the net width of the part
shall beobtained bydeductingfrom thegross widththe sum of the diameters or slot dimensions as
providedinSection10.10.3.2,ofallholesinthechain,andadding,foreachgagespaceinthechain,
thequantitys
2
/(4g)
where
s=longitudinalcentertocenterspacing(pitch)ofanytwoconsecutiveholes,mm.
g=transversecentertocenterspacing(gage)betweenfastenergagelines,mm.
Forangles,thegageforholesinoppositeadjacentlegsshallbethesumofthegagesfromthebackof
theangleslessthethickness.
ForslottedHSSweldedtoagussetplate,thenetarea,A
n
,isthegrossareaminustheproductofthe
thicknessandthetotalwidthofmaterialthatisremovedtoformtheslot.
Indeterminingthenetareaacrossplugorslotwelds,theweldmetalshallnotbeconsideredasadding
tothenetarea.
10.4.3.3 EffectiveNetArea:Theeffectiveareaoftensionmembersshallbedeterminedasfollows:
A
e
=A
n
U (10.4.3.1)
whereU,theshearlagfactor,isdeterminedasshowninTable10.4.3.1.
Members such as single angles, double angles and WT sections shall have connections proportioned
such that U is equal to or greater than 0.60. Alternatively, a lesser value of U is permitted if these
tension members are designed for the effect of eccentricity in accordance with Sections 10.8.1.2 or
10.8.2.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6502 Vol.2

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6503
10.4.4 BuiltUpMembers
Forlimitationsonthelongitudinalspacingofconnectorsbetweenelementsincontinuouscontactconsistingof
aplateandashapeortwoplates,seeSection10.10.3.5.
Eitherperforatedcoverplatesortieplateswithoutlacingarepermittedtobeusedontheopensidesofbuiltup
tensionmembers.Tieplatesshallhavealengthnotlessthantwothirdsthedistancebetweenthelinesofwelds
or fasteners connecting them to the components of the member. The thickness of such tie plates shall not be
less than onefiftieth of the distance between these lines. The longitudinal spacing of intermittent welds or
fastenersattieplatesshallnotexceed150mm.
10.4.5 PinConnectedMembers
10.4.5.1 TensileStrength:Thedesigntensilestrength,
t
P
n
andtheallowabletensilestrength,P
n

t
,ofpin
connectedmembers,shallbethelowervalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesoftensilerupture,
shearrupture,bearing,andyielding.
a) Fortensileruptureontheneteffectivearea:
P
n
=2tb
eff
F
u
(10.4.5.1)

t
=0.75(LRFD)
t
=2.00(ASD)
h) Forshearruptureontheeffectivearea:
P
n
=0.6F
u
A
sf
(10.4.5.2)

sf
=0.75(LRFD)
sf
=2.00(ASD)
where
A
sf
=2t(a+d/2),mm
2

a=shortestdistancefromedgeofthepinholetotheedgeofthemembermeasuredparallel
tothedirectionoftheforce,mm
b
eff
= 2t + 16, mm but not more than the actual distance from the edge of the hole to the
edgeofthepartmeasuredinthedirectionnormaltotheappliedforce
d=pindiameter,mm
t=thicknessofplate,mm
i) Forbearingontheprojectedareaofthepin,seeSection10.10.7.
j) Foryieldingonthegrosssection,useEquation10.4.2.1.
10.4.5.2 DimensionalRequirements:Thepinholeshallbelocatedmidwaybetweentheedgesofthemember
in the direction normal to the applied force. When the pin is expected to provide for relative
movement between connected parts whileunder full load, the diameter of the pinhole shall not be
morethan1mmgreaterthanthediameterofthepin.
Thewidthof theplateatthepinholeshallnotbelessthan2b
eff
+dandtheminimumextension,a,
beyondthebearingendofthepinhole,paralleltotheaxisofthemember,shallnotbelessthan1.33
b
eff
.
Thecornersbeyondthepinholearepermitted tobe cutat45
0
totheaxisofthemember,provided
thenetareabeyondthepinhole,onaplaneperpendiculartothecut,isnotlessthanthatrequired
beyondthepinholeparalleltotheaxisofthemember.
10.4.6 Eyebars
10.4.6.1 Tensile Strength: The available tensile strength of eyebars shall be determined in accordance with
Section10.4.2,withA
g
takenasthecrosssectionalareaofthebody.
For calculation purposes, the width of the body of the eyebars shall not exceed eight times its
thickness.
10.4.6.2 Dimensional Requirements: Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness, without reinforcement at the pin
holes,andhavecircularheadswiththeperipheryconcentricwiththepinhole.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6504 Vol.2
Theradiusoftransitionbetweenthecircularheadandtheeyebarbodyshallnotbelessthanthehead
diameter.
Thepindiametershallnotbelessthanseveneighthstimestheeyebarbodywidth,andthepinhole
diametershallnotbemorethan1mmgreaterthanthepindiameter.
For steels having F
y
greater than 485 MPa, the hole diameter shall not exceed five times the plate
thicknessandthewidthoftheeyebarbodyshallbereducedaccordingly.
A thickness of less than 13 mm is permissible only if external nuts are provided to tighten pin plates and
filler plates into snug contact. The width from the hole edge to the plate edge perpendicular to the
directionofappliedloadshallbegreaterthantwothirdsand,forthepurposeofcalculation,notmorethan
threefourthstimestheeyebarbodywidth.
10.5 DesignofMembersforCompression
ThisSectionaddressesmemberssubjecttoaxialcompressionthroughthecentroidalaxis.
10.5.1 GeneralProvisions
The design compressive strength, c Pn, and the allowable compressive strength, Pn /c , are determined as
follows:
The nominal compressive strength, Pn , shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of
flexuralbuckling,torsionalbucklingandflexuraltorsionalbuckling.
Fordoublysymmetricandsinglysymmetricmembersthelimitstateofflexuralbucklingisapplicable.
Forsinglysymmetricandunsymmetricmembers,andcertaindoublysymmetricmembers,suchascruciformor
builtupcolumns,thelimitstatesoftorsionalorflexuraltorsionalbucklingarealsoapplicable.
c=0.90(LRFD)c=1.67(ASD)
10.5.2 SlendernessLimitationsandeffectiveLength
The effective length factor, K, for calculation of column slenderness, KL /r, shall be determined in accordance
withSection10.3,
where
L=laterallyunbracedlengthofthemember,mm
r=governingradiusofgyration,mm
K=theeffectivelengthfactordeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.3.2.
Themaximumlimitofslenderness,KL/r,forcompressionmembersshallbe150unlessacomprehensiveanalysis
includingsecondordereffects(includingdynamiceffectsifany)showsthatahighervalueisjustified.
10.5.3 Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling of Members without Slender
elements
This section applies to compression members with compact and noncompact sections, as defined in Section
10.2.4,foruniformlycompressedelements.
Thenominalcompressivestrength,Pn,shallbedeterminedbasedonthelimitstateofflexuralbuckling.
Pn=FcrAg (10.5.3.1)
Theflexuralbucklingstress,Fcr,isdeterminedasfollows:
(a)When
KL

4.71
_
L
P
j
(orFe0.44Fy)
= |0.658

] (10.5.3.2)
(b)When
KL

> 4.71
_
L
P
j
(orFe<0.44Fy)
= 0.877 (10.5.3.3)
where
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6505
Fe=elasticcriticalbucklingstressdeterminedaccordingtoEquation10.5.3.4,Section10.5.4,ortheprovisions
ofSection10.3.2,asapplicable,
=

2

2
(10.5.3.4)
10.5.4 Compressive Strength for Torsional and FlexuralTorsional Buckling of
MemberswithoutSlenderelements
This section applies to singly symmetric and unsymmetric members, and certain doubly symmetric members,
such ascruciform or builtup columns with compact and noncompact sections, as defined in Section 10.2.4 for
uniformly compressed elements. These provisions are not required for single angles, which are covered in
Section10.5.5.
The nominal compressive strength, P
n
, shall be determined based on the limit states of flexuraltorsional and
torsionalbuckling,asfollows:
P
n
=F
cr
A
g
(10.5.4.1)
Fordoubleangleandteeshapedcompressionmembers:
= [
+
2
_1 - _1 -
4
(+)
2
_ (10.5.4.2)
whereF
cry
istakenasF
cr
fromEquation10.5.3.2or10.5.3.3,forflexuralbuckling
abouttheyaxisofsymmetryand
KL

=
KL

j
,and
=

0
2
(10.5.4.3)
For all other cases, F
cr
shall be determined according to Equation 10.5.3.2 or 10.5.3.3, using the torsional or
flexuraltorsionalelasticbucklingstress,F
e
,determinedasfollows:
Fordoublysymmetricmembers:
= j

2

()
2
+[
1
+
(10.5.4.4)
Forsinglysymmetricmemberswhereyistheaxisofsymmetry:
= [
+
2
_1 - _1 -
4
(+)
2
_ (10.5.4.5)
Forunsymmetricmembers,F
e
isthelowestrootofthecubicequation:
(-)(- )(- ) -
2
(-) [

2
-
2
(- ) [

2
= 0 (10.5.4.6)
where
A
g
=grossareaofmember,mm
2

C
w
=warpingconstant,mm
6

0
2
=
0
2
+
0
2
+
+

(10.5.4.7)
= 1 -

0
2
+
0
2

0
2
(10.5.4.8)
=

2

2
(10.5.4.9)
=

2

2
(10.5.4.10)
= [

2

()
2
+
1

0
2
(10.5.4.11)
G =shearmodulusofelasticityofsteel=77200MPa
I
x
,I
y
=momentofinertiaabouttheprincipalaxes,mm
4

J =torsionalconstant,mm
4

K
z
=effectivelengthfactorfortorsionalbuckling
x
o
,y
o
=coordinatesofshearcenterwithrespecttothecentroid,mm
Part6
StructuralDesign

6506 Vol.2
r
0
=polarradiusofgyrationabouttheshearcenter,mm
r
y
=radiusofgyrationaboutyaxis,mm
10.5.5 SingleAngleCompressionMembers
Thenominalcompressivestrength,Pn,ofsingleanglemembersshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSection
10.5.3orSection10.5.7,asappropriate,foraxiallyloadedmembers,aswellasthosesubjecttotheslenderness
modificationofSection10.5.5(a)or10.5.5(b),providedthemembersmeetthecriteriaimposed.
The effects of eccentricity on single angle members are permitted to be neglected when the members are
evaluatedasaxiallyloadedcompressionmembersusingoneoftheeffectiveslendernessratiosspecifiedbelow,
providedthat:(1)membersareloadedattheendsincompressionthroughthesameoneleg;(2)membersare
attachedbyweldingorbyminimumtwoboltconnections;and(3)therearenointermediatetransverseloads.
a) Forequalleganglesorunequalleganglesconnectedthroughthelongerlegthatareindividual
membersorarewebmembersofplanartrusseswithadjacentwebmembersattachedtothe
samesideofthegussetplateorchord:
(i)Whenu
L

x
8u

= 72 + 0.75

(10.5.5.1)
(ii)When
L

x
> 8u

= 32 + 1.25

200 (10.5.5.2)
Forunequalleg angles with leg lengthratiosless than 1.7 and connected through the shorter
leg,KL/rfromEquations10.5.5.1and10.5.5.2shallbeincreasedbyadding4[(bl/bs)21],but
KL/rofthemembersshallnotbelessthan0.95L/rz.
k) Forequalleganglesorunequalleganglesconnectedthroughthelongerlegthatareweb
membersofboxorspacetrusseswithadjacentwebmembersattachedtothesamesideofthe
gussetplateorchord:
(i)Whenu
L

x
7S

= 60 + 0.8

(10.5.5.3)
(ii)When
L

x
> 7S

= 45 +

200 (10.5.5.4)
Forunequalleg angles with leg length ratiosless than 1.7 and connected through the shorter
leg,KL/rfromEquations10.5.5.3and10.5.5.4shallbeincreasedbyadding6[(bl/bs)21],but
KL/rofthemembersshallnotbelessthan0.82L/rz.
where
L=lengthofmemberbetweenworkpointsattrusschordcenterlines,mm
bl=longerlegofangle,mm
bs=shorterlegofangle,mm
rx=radiusofgyrationaboutgeometricaxisparalleltoconnectedleg,mm
rz=radiusofgyrationfortheminorprincipalaxis,mm
Single angle members with different end conditions from those described in Section 10.5.5(a)
or(b),withleglengthratiosgreaterthan1.7,orwithtransverseloadingshallbeevaluatedfor
combined axial load and flexure using the provisions of Section 10.8. End connection to
differentlegsoneachendortobothlegs,theuseofsingleboltsortheattachmentofadjacent
web members to opposite sides of the gusset plate or chord shall constitute different end
conditionsrequiringtheuseofSection10.8provisions.
10.5.6 BuiltupMembers
10.5.6.1 CompressiveStrength
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6507
a) Thenominalcompressivestrengthofbuiltupmemberscomposedoftwoormoreshapesthatare
interconnectedbyboltsorweldsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSections10.5.3,10.5.4,
or10.5.7subjecttothefollowingmodification.Inlieuofmoreaccurateanalysis,ifthebuckling
modeinvolvesrelativedeformationsthatproduceshearforcesintheconnectorsbetween
individualshapes,KL/risreplacedby(KL/r)mdeterminedasfollows:
(i)Forintermediateconnectorsthataresnugtightbolted:
[

= _[

0
2
+ [

2
(10.5.6.1)
(ii)Forintermediateconnectorsthatareweldedorpretensionedbolted:
[

= _[

0
2
+ 0.82

2
(1+
2
)
[

2
(10.5.6.2)
Where
[
KL

m
=modifiedcolumnslendernessofbuiltupmember
[
KL

0
= column slenderness of builtup member acting as a unit in the buckling direction being
considered
a=distancebetweenconnectors,mm
ri=minimumradiusofgyrationofindividualcomponent,mm
rib=radiusofgyrationofindividualcomponentrelativetoitscentroidalaxisparalleltomember
axisofbuckling,mm
=separationratio=h/2rib
h = distance between centroids of individual components perpendicular to the member axis of
buckling,mm
l) Thenominalcompressivestrengthofbuiltupmemberscomposedoftwoormoreshapesor
plateswithatleastoneopensideinterconnectedbyperforatedcoverplatesorlacingwithtie
platesshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithSections10.5.3,10.5.4,or10.5.7subjecttothe
modificationgiveninSection10.5.6.1(a).
10.5.6.2 DimensionalRequirements
Individual components of compression members composed of two or more shapes shall be connected to one
another at intervals, a, such that the effective slenderness ratio Ka/ri of each of the component shapes,
between the fasteners, does not exceed threefourths times the governing slenderness ratio of the builtup
member. Theleast radius of gyration,ri, shall be used in computing the slendernessratio of each component
part.TheendconnectionshallbeweldedorpretensionedboltedwithClassAorBfayingsurfaces.
At the ends of builtup compression members bearing on base plates or milled surfaces, all components in
contactwithoneanothershallbeconnectedbyaweldhavingalengthnotlessthanthemaximumwidthofthe
memberorbyboltsspacedlongitudinallynotmorethanfourdiametersapartforadistanceequalto1
2
1
times
themaximumwidthofthemember.
Along the length of builtup compression members between the end connections required above,longitudinal
spacingforintermittentweldsorboltsshallbeadequatetoprovideforthetransferoftherequiredforces.For
limitationsonthelongitudinalspacingoffastenersbetweenelementsincontinuouscontactconsistingofaplate
and a shape or two plates, see Section 10.10.3.5. Where a component of a builtup compression member
consists of an outside plate, the maximum spacing shall not exceed the thickness of the thinner outside plate
times u.7SE F

,nor305mm,whenintermittent weldsareprovidedalongtheedgesofthecomponentsor
when fasteners are provided on all gage lines at each section. When fasteners are staggered, the maximum
spacingoneachgagelineshallnotexceedthethicknessofthethinneroutsideplatetimes1.12E F

nor460
mm.
Open sides of compression members built up from plates or shapes shall be provided with continuous cover
plates perforated with a succession of access holes. The unsupported width of such plates at access holes, as
defined in Section 10.2.4, is assumed to contribute to the available strength provided the following
requirementsaremet:
Part6
StructuralDesign

6508 Vol.2
ThewidththicknessratioshallconformtothelimitationsofSection10.2.4.
Theratiooflength(indirectionofstress)towidthofholeshallnotexceedtwo.
The clear distance between holes in the direction of stress shall be not less than the transverse distance
betweennearestlinesofconnectingfastenersorwelds.
Theperipheryoftheholesatallpointsshallhaveaminimumradiusof38mm.
Asanalternativetoperforatedcoverplates,lacingwithtieplatesispermittedateachendandatintermediate
points if the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates shall be as near the ends as practicable. In members providing
available strength, the end tie plates shall have a length of not less than the distance between the lines of
fasteners or welds connecting them to the components of the member. Intermediate tie plates shall have a
lengthnotlessthanonehalfofthisdistance.Thethicknessoftieplatesshallbenotlessthanonefiftiethofthe
distance between lines of welds or fasteners connecting them to the segments of the members. In welded
construction,theweldingoneachlineconnectingatieplateshalltotalnotlessthanonethirdthelengthofthe
plate. In bolted construction, the spacing in the direction of stress in tie plates shall be not more than six
diametersandthetieplatesshallbeconnectedtoeachsegmentbyatleastthreefasteners.
Lacing,includingflatbars,angles,channels,orothershapesemployedaslacing,shallbesospacedthattheL/r
ratio of the flange included between their connections shall not exceed threefourths times the governing
slenderness ratio for the member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to provide a shearing strength
normaltotheaxisofthememberequalto2percentoftheavailablecompressivestrengthofthemember.The
L/r ratio for lacing bars arranged in single systems shall not exceed 140. For double lacing this ratio shall not
exceed200.Doublelacingbarsshallbejoinedattheintersections.Forlacingbarsincompression,Lispermitted
to be taken as the unsupported length of the lacing bar between welds or fasteners connecting it to the
componentsofthebuiltupmemberforsinglelacing,and70percentofthatdistancefordoublelacing.
Foradditionalspacingrequirements,seeSection10.10.3.5.
10.5.7 MemberswithSlenderElements
This section applies to compression members with slender sections, as defined in Section 10.2.4 for uniformly
compressedelements.
The nominal compressive strength, P
n
, shall be determined based on the limit states of flexural, torsional and
flexuraltorsionalbuckling.
P
n
=F
cr
A
g
(10.5.7.1)
a) When
KL

4.71
_
L
P
j
(orF
c
u.44 F

)
= |0.658

] (10.5.7.2)
m) When
KL

> 4.71
_
L
P
j
(orF
c
< u.44 F

)
= 0.877 (10.5.7.3)
Where
F
e
= elastic critical buckling stress, calculated using Equations 10.5.3.4 and 10.5.4.4 for doubly symmetric
members, Equations 10.5.3.4 and 10.5.4.5 for singly symmetric members, and Equation 10.5.4.6 for
unsymmetricmembers,exceptforsingleangleswhereF
e
iscalculatedusingEquation10.5.3.4.
Q = 1.0 for members with compact and noncompact sections, as defined in Section 10.2.4, for uniformly
compressedelements
= Q
s
Q
a
for members with slenderelement sections, as defined in Section 10.2.4, for uniformly compressed
elements.
10.5.7.1 SlenderUnstiffenedElements,Q
x

ThereductionfactorQ
s
forslenderunstiffenedelementsisdefinedasfollows:
Forflanges,angles,andplatesprojectingfromrolledcolumnsorothercompressionmembers:
When
b
t
u.S6
_
L
P
j

= 1.0 (10.5.7.4)
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6509
Whenu.S6E F

< b t < 1.uSE F

= 1.415 -0.74 [

(10.5.7.5)
Whenb t 1.uSE F

=
0.69
[

2
(10.5.7.6)
Forflanges,angles,andplatesprojectingfrombuiltupcolumnsorothercompressionmembers:
When
b
t
u.64
_
Lk
c
P
j

= 1.0 (10.5.7.7)
Whenu.64
_
Lk
c
P
j
< b t 1.17
_
Lk
c
P
j

= 1.415 -0.65 [

(10.5.7.8)
when
b
t
> 1.17
_
Lk
c
P
j

=
0.90
[

2
(10.5.7.9)
Wherek
c
=
4
h t
w

,andshallnotbetakenlessthan0.35norgreaterthan0.76forcalculationpurposes.
Forsingleangles
When
b
t
u.4S
_
L
P
j

= 1.0 (10.5.7.10)
Whenu.4SE F

< b t u.91E F

= 1.34 - 0.76 [

(10.5.7.11)
Whenb t > u.91E F

=
0.53
[

2
(10.5.7.12)
Where
b=fullwidthoflongestangleleg,mm
Forstemsoftees
When
d
t
u.7S
_
L
P
j

= 1.0 (10.5.7.13)
Whenu.7S
_
L
P
j
< J t 1.uS
_
L
P
j

= 1.908 -1.22 [

(10.5.7.14)
WhenJ t > 1.uS
_
L
P
j

=
0.69
[

2
(10.5.7.15)
Where
b=widthofunstiffenedcompressionelement,asdefinedinSection10.2.4,mm
d=thefullnominaldepthoftee,mm
t=thicknessofelement,mm
Part6
StructuralDesign

6510 Vol.2
10.5.7.2 SlenderUnstiffenedElements,Q
x

Thereductionfactor,Qa,forslenderstiffenedelementsisdefinedasfollows:
=

(10.5.7.16)
A =totalcrosssectionalareaofmember,mm2
Aeff=summationoftheeffectiveareasofthecrosssectionbasedonthereducedeffectivewidth,
be,mm2
Thereducedeffectivewidth,be,isdeterminedasfollows:
For uniformly compressed slender elements, with
b
t
1.49_
L
]
, except flanges of square and rectangular
sectionsofuniformthickness:
= 1.92
_

_1 -
0.34
( )
_

_ (10.5.7.17)
Where
fistakenasFcrwithFcrcalculatedbasedonQ=1.0.
Forflangesofsquareandrectangularslenderelementsectionsofuniformthicknesswith
b
t
1.4u_
L
]

= 1.92
_

_1 -
0.38
( )
_

_ (10.5.7.18)
Where = P
n
A
c]]

Foraxiallyloadedcircularsections:
Whenu.11
L
P
j
<

t
< u.4S
L
P
j

= =
0.038
( )
+
2
3
(10.5.7.19)
Where
D=outsidediameter,mm
t=wallthickness,mm
10.6 DesignofMembersforFlexure
This section applies to members subject to simple bending about one principal axis. For simple bending, the
member is loaded in a plane parallel to a principal axis that passes through the shear center or is restrained
againsttwistingatloadpointsandsupports.
10.6.1 GeneralProvisions
Thedesignflexuralstrength,
b
H
n
,andtheallowableflexuralstrength, H
n

b
,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
a) ForallprovisionsinthisSection10.6

b
=0.90(LRFD)
b
=1.67(ASD)
and the nominal flexural strength, M
n
, shall be determined according to Sections 10.6.2
through10.6.12.
n) Theprovisionsinthischapterarebasedontheassumptionthatpointsofsupportforbeamsand
girdersarerestrainedagainstrotationabouttheirlongitudinalaxis.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6511

Thefollowingtermsarecommontotheequationsinthischapterexceptwherenoted:
C
b
= lateraltorsional buckling modification factor for nonuniform moment diagrams when
bothendsoftheunsupportedsegmentarebraced
C
b
=
12.SH
max
2.SH
max
+ SH
A
+ 4H
B
+SH
C
R
m
S.u
(10.6.1.1)
Where
M
max
=absolutevalueofmaximummomentintheunbracedsegment,Nmm
M
A
=absolutevalueofmomentatquarterpointoftheunbracedsegment,Nmm
Part6
StructuralDesign

6512 Vol.2
M
B
=absolutevalueofmomentatcenterlineoftheunbracedsegment,Nmm

M
C
=absolutevalueofmomentatthreequarterpointoftheunbracedsegment,Nmm
R
m
=crosssectionmonosymmetryparameter
=1.0,doublysymmetricmembers
=1.0,singlysymmetricmemberssubjectedtosinglecurvaturebending
= u.S + 2_
I
jc
I
j
]
2
,singlysymmetricmemberssubjectedtoreversecurvaturebending
I
y
=momentofinertiaabouttheprincipalyaxis,mm
4
I
yc
= moment of inertia about yaxis referred to the compression flange, or if reverse
curvaturebending,referredtothesmallerflange,mm
4

In singly symmetric members subjected to reverse curvature bending, the lateral torsional
buckling strength shall be checked for both flanges. The available flexural strength shall be
greaterthanorequaltothemaximumrequiredmomentcausingcompressionwithintheflange
underconsideration.
C
b
is permitted to be conservatively taken as 1.0 for all cases. For cantilevers or overhangs
wherethefreeendisunbraced,C
b
=1.0.
10.6.2 Doubly Symmetric Compact IShaped Members and Channels Bent about Their
MajorAxis
This section applies to doubly symmetric Ishaped members and channels bent about their major axis, having
compactwebsandcompactflangesasdefinedinSection10.2.4.
The nominal flexural strength, M
n
, shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of yielding
(plasticmoment)andlateraltorsionalbuckling.
10.6.2.1Yielding
M
n
=M
p
=F
y
Z
x
(10.6.2.1)
where
F
y
=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthetypeofsteelbeingused,MPa
Z
x
=plasticsectionmodulusaboutthexaxis,mm
3

10.6.2.2LateralTorsionalBuckling
a) WhenL
b
L
p
,thelimitstateoflateraltorsionalbucklingdoesnotapply.
o) WhenL
p
<L
b
L
r

H
n
= C
b
_H
p
- (H
p
- u.7F

S
x
) _
I
b
- I
p
I

- I
p
__ H
p

(10.6.2.2)
p)
WhenL
b
>L
r
H
n
= F
c
S
x
H
p
(10.6.2.3)
Where
L
b
=lengthbetweenpointsthatareeitherbracedagainstlateraldisplacementofcompressionflangeorbraced
againsttwistofthecrosssection,mm
F
c
=
C
b
n
2
E
[
I
b
r
ts

2
_
1 +u.u78
[c
S
x
b
0
_
I
b
r
ts
]
2

(10.6.2.4)
andwhere
E=modulusofelasticityofsteel=200000MPa
J=torsionalconstant,mm
4

S
x
=elasticsectionmodulustakenaboutthexaxis,mm
3

ThelimitinglengthsL
p
andL
r
aredeterminedasfollows:
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6513
I
p
= 1.76r

_
E
F

(10.6.2.5)
I

= 1.9Sr
ts
E
u.7F

_
[c
S
x
b
o
_
1 +
_
1 + 6.76_
u.7F

E
S
x
b
o
[c
]
2

(10.6.2.6)
where
r
ts
2
=

I

C
w
S
x

(10.6.2.7)
and
ForadoublysymmetricIshape:c=1 (10.6.2.8a)
Forachannel:c =
h
c
2
_
I
j
C
w
(10.6.2.8b)
Where
h
o
=distancebetweentheflangecentroids,mm
10.6.3 Doubly Symmetric IShaped Members with Compact Webs and Noncompact or
SlenderFlangesBentaboutTheirMajorAxis
This section applies to doubly symmetric Ishaped members bent about their major axis having compact webs
andnoncompactorslenderflangesasdefinedinSection10.2.4.
The nominal flexural strength, M
n
, shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of lateral
torsionalbucklingandcompressionflangelocalbuckling.
10.6.3.1LateralTorsionalBuckling
Forlateraltorsionalbuckling,theprovisionsofSection10.6.2.2shallapply.
10.6.3.2CompressionFlangeLocalBuckling
a) Forsectionswithnoncompactflanges
H
n
= _H
p
- (H
p
-u.7F

S
x
) _
z -z
p]
z
]
- z
p]
__ (10.6.3.1)
q) Forsectionswithslenderflanges
H
n
=
u.9Ek
c
S
x
z
2

(10.6.3.2)
Where
z =
b
]
2t
]

z
p]
= z
p
isthelimitingslendernessforacompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
z
]
= z

isthelimitingslendernessforanoncompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
k
c
=
4
h t
w

andshallnotbetakenlessthan0.35norgreaterthan0.76forcalculationpurposes
10.6.4 Other IShaped Members with Compact or Noncompact Webs Bent about Their
MajorAxis
This section applies to: (a) doubly symmetric Ishaped members bent about their major axis with noncompact
webs; and (b) singly symmetric Ishaped members with webs attached to the midwidth of the flanges, bent
abouttheirmajoraxis,withcompactornoncompactwebs,asdefinedinSectionB4.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6514 Vol.2
The nominal flexural strength, M
n
, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of
compression flange yielding, lateraltorsional buckling, compression flange local buckling and tension flange
yielding.
10.6.4.1CompressionFlangeYielding
H
n
= R
pc
H
c
= R
pc
F

S
xc
(10.6.4.1)
10.6.4.2LateralTorsionalBuckling
a) WhenL
b
L
p
,thelimitstateoflateraltorsionalbucklingdoesnotapply.
r) WhenL
p
<L
b
L
r

H
n
= C
b
_R
pc
H
c
-(R
pc
H
c
-F
L
S
xc
) _
I
b
-I
p
I

-I
p
__ R
pc
H
c
(10.6.4.2)
s)
WhenL
b
>L
r
H
n
= F
c
S
xc
R
pc
H
c
(10.6.4.3)
Where
H
c
= F

S
xc
(10.6.4.4)
F
c
=
C
b
n
2
E
[
I
b
r
t

2
_
1 +u.u78
[
S
xc
b
0
_
I
b
r
t
]
2

(10.6.4.5)
For
I
jc
I
j
u.2S, Jshallbetakenaszero.
Thestress,F
L
,isdeterminedasfollows:
For
S
xt
S
xc
u.7
F
L
= u.7F

(10.6.4.6a)
For
S
xt
S
xc
< u.7
F
L
= F

S
xt
S
xc
u.SF

(10.6.4.6b)
Thelimitinglaterallyunbracedlengthforthelimitstateofyielding,I
p
is,
I
p
= 1.1r
t
_
E
F

(10.6.4.7)
Thelimitingunbracedlengthforthelimitstateofinelasticlateraltorsionalbuckling,L
r
,is
I

= 1.9Sr
t
E
F
L
_
[
S
xc
b
0
_
1 +
_
1 +6.76 _
F
L
E
S
xc
b
0
[
]
2

(10.6.4.8)
Thewebplastificationfactor,R
pc
,isdeterminedasfollows:
For
h
c
t
w
z
pw

R
pc
=
H
p
H
c
(10.6.4.9a)
For
h
c
t
w
> z
pw

R
pc
= _
H
p
H
c
-_
H
p
H
c
-1__
z -z
pw
z
w
-z
pw
__
H
p
H
c
(10.6.4.9b)
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6515
Where
H
p
= Z
x
F

1.6S
xc
F

S
xc
, S
xt
=elasticsectionmodulusreferredtotensionandcompressionflanges,respectively,mm
3

z =
h
c
t
w

z
pw
= z
p
limitingslendernessforacompactweb,Table10.2.4.1
z
w
= z

limitingslendernessforanoncompactweb,Table10.2.4.1
Theeffectiveradiusofgyrationforlateraltorsionalbuckling,r
t
,isdeterminedasfollows:
ForIshapeswitharectangularcompressionflange:
r
t
=
b
]c
_12_
b
0
J
+
1
6
o
w
b
2
b
0
J
]

(10.6.4.10)
Where
o
w
=
b
c
t
w
b
]c
t
]c
(10.6.4.11)
b
]c
=compressionflangewidth,mm
t
]c
=compressionflangethickness,mm
ForIshapeswithchannelcapsorcoverplatesattachedtothecompressionflange:
r
t
= radius of gyration of the flange components in flexural compression plus onethird of the web area in
compressionduetoapplicationofmajoraxisbendingmomentalone,mm
a
w
=theratiooftwotimesthewebareaincompressionduetoapplicationofmajoraxisbendingmomentalone
totheareaofthecompressionflangecomponents.
10.6.4.1 CompressionFlangeLocalBuckling
a) Forsectionswithcompactflanges,thelimitstateoflocalbucklingdoesnotapply.
t) Forsectionswithnoncompactflanges
H
n
= _R
pc
H
c
- (R
pc
H
c
-F
L
S
xc
) _
z - z
p]
z
]
-z
p]
__
(10.6.4.12)
u) Forsectionswithslenderflanges
H
n
=
u.9Ek
c
S
xc
z
2

(10.6.4.13)
Where
F
L
isdefinedinEquations10.6.4.6aand10.6.4.6b
R
pc
=isthewebplastificationfactor,determinedbyEquations10.6.4.9
k
c
=
4
h t
w

andshallnotbetakenlessthan0.35norgreaterthan0.76forcalculationpurposes
z =
b
]c
2t
]c

z
p]
= z
p
limitingslendernessforacompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
z
]
= z

limitingslendernessforanoncompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
10.6.4.4TensionFlangeYielding
a) WhenS
xt
S
xc
,thelimitstateoftensionflangeyieldingdoesnotapply.
v) WhenS
xt
<S
xc

H
n
= R
pt
H
t
(10.6.4.14)
Where
H
t
= F

S
xt

Part6
StructuralDesign

6516 Vol.2
The web plastification factor corresponding to the tension flange yielding limit state, R
pt
, is determined as
follows:
Foi
h
c
t
w
z
pw

R
pt
=
H
p
H
t
(10.6.4.15a)
Foi
h
c
t
w
> z
pw

R
pt
= _
H
p
H
t
- _
H
p
H
t
-1_ _
z -z
pw
z
w
-z
pw
__
H
p
H
t
(10.6.4.15b)
Where
z =
h
c
t
w

z
pw
= z
p
,thelimitingslendernessforacompactweb,definedinTable10.2.4.1
z
w
= z

,thelimitingslendernessforanoncompactweb,definedinTable10.2.4.1
10.6.5 Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric IShaped Members with Slender Webs
BentaboutTheirMajorAxis
ThissectionappliestodoublysymmetricandsinglysymmetricIshapedmemberswithslenderwebsattachedto
themidwidthoftheflanges,bentabouttheirmajoraxis,asdefinedinSection10.2.4.
The nominal flexural strength, M
n
, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of
compression flange yielding, lateraltorsional buckling, compression flange local buckling and tension flange
yielding.
10.6.5.1CompressionFlangeYielding
H
n
= R
pg
F

S
xc
(10.6.5.1)
10.6.5.2LateralTorsionalBuckling
H
n
= R
pg
F
c
S
xc
(10.6.5.2)
a) WhenL
b
L
p
,thelimitstateoflateraltorsionalbucklingdoesnotapply.
w)
WhenL
p
<L
b
L
r
F
c
= C
b
_F

- (u.SF

) _
I
b
- I
p
I

-I
p
__ F

(10.6.5.3)
x)
WhenL
b
>L
r
F
c
=
C
b
n
2
E
[
I
b
r
t

2
F

(10.6.5.4)
where
L
p
isdefinedbyEquation10.6.4.7
I

= nr
t
_
E
u.7F

(10.6.5.5)
R
pg
isthebendingstrengthreductionfactor:
R
pg
= 1 -
o
w
12uu +Suuo
w
_
b
c
t
w
-S.7_
E
F

_ 1.u
(10.6.5.6)
a
w
isdefinedbyEquation10.6.4.11butshallnotexceed10and
r
t
istheeffectiveradiusofgyrationforlateralbucklingasdefinedinSection10.6.4.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6517
10.6.5.3CompressionFlangeLocalBuckling
H
n
= R
pg
F
c
S
xc
(10.6.5.7)
a) Forsectionswithcompactflanges,thelimitstateofcompressionflangelocalbucklingdoesnot
apply.
y) Forsectionswithnoncompactflanges
F
c
= _F

- (u.SF

) _
z -z
p]
z
]
- z
p]
__
(10.6.5.8)
z) Forsectionswithslenderflanges
F
c
=
u.9Ek
c
_
b
]
2t
]
]
2

(10.6.5.9)
Where
k
c
=
4
h t
w

andshallnotbetakenlessthan0.35norgreaterthan0.76forcalculationpurposes
z =
b
]c
2t
]c

z
p]
= z
p
,thelimitingslendernessforacompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
z
]
= z

,thelimitingslendernessforanoncompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
10.6.5.4TensionFlangeYielding
(a)WhenS
xt
S
xc
,thelimitstateoftensionflangeyieldingdoesnotapply.
(b)WhenS
xt
<S
xc

M
n
=F
y
S
xt
(10.6.5.10)
10.6.6 IShapedMembersandChannelsBentaboutTheirMinorAxis
ThissectionappliestoIshapedmembersandchannelsbentabouttheirminoraxis.
The nominal flexural strength, M
n
, shallbe the lower value obtained according tothe limit states ofyielding (
plasticmoment)andflangelocalbuckling.
10.6.6.1 Yielding
M
n
=M
p
=F
y
Z
y
1.6F
y
S
y
(10.6.6.1)
10.6.6.2 FlangeLocalBuckling
a) Forsectionswithcompactflangesthelimitstateofyieldingshallapply.
aa) Forsectionswithnoncompactflanges
H
n
= _H
p
- (H
p
-u.7F

) _
z -z
p]
z
]
- z
p]
__
(10.6.6.2)
bb) Forsectionswithslenderflanges
M
n
=F
cr
S
y

(10.6.6.3)
where
F
c
=
u.69E
_
b
]
2t
]
]
2

(10.6.6.4)
z =
b
t

z
p]
= z
p
,thelimitingslendernessforacompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
z
]
= z

,thelimitingslendernessforanoncompactflange,Table10.2.4.1
Part6
StructuralDesign

6518 Vol.2
S
y
forachannelshallbetakenastheminimumsectionmodulus
10.6.7 SquareandRectangularHSSandBoxShapedMembers
This section applies to square and rectangular HSS, and doubly symmetric boxshaped members bent about
either axis, having compact or noncompact webs and compact, noncompact or slender flanges as defined in
Section10.2.4.
The nominal flexural strength, M
n
, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of yielding
(plasticmoment),flangelocalbucklingandweblocalbucklingunderpureflexure.
10.6.7.1 Yielding
M
n
=M
p
=F
y
Z

(10.6.7.1)
Where
Z=plasticsectionmodulusabouttheaxisofbending,mm
3

10.6.7.2 FlangeLocalBuckling
a) Forcompactsections,thelimitstateofflangelocalbucklingdoesnotapply.(b)Forsectionswith
noncompactflanges
H
n
= H
p
- (H
p
-F

S) _S.S7
b
t
_
F

E
- 4.u_ H
p

(10.6.7.2)
cc) Forsectionswithslenderflanges
M
n
=F
y
S
eff

(10.6.7.3)
where
S
eff
istheeffectivesectionmodulusdeterminedwiththeeffectivewidthofthecompressionflangetakenas:
b
c
= 1.92t_
E
F

_1 -
u.S8
b t
_
E
F

_ b
(10.6.7.4)
10.6.7.3 WebLocalBuckling
a) Forcompactsections,thelimitstateofweblocalbucklingdoesnotapply.
dd) Forsectionswithnoncompactwebs
H
n
= H
p
- (H
p
-F

S
x
) _u.SuS
b
t
w
_
F

E
-u.7S8_ H
p
(10.6.7.5)
10.6.8 RoundHSS
ThissectionappliestoroundHSShavingD/tratiosoflessthan
0.45L
P
j

The nominal flexural strength, M
n
, shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of yielding
(plasticmoment)andlocalbuckling.
10.6.8.1Yielding
M
n
=M
p
=F
y
Z

(10.6.8.1)
10.6.8.2LocalBuckling
a) Forcompactsections,thelimitstateofflangelocalbucklingdoesnotapply.(b)Fornoncompact
sections
H
n
= _
u.u21E

t
+ F

_S
(10.6.8.2)
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6519
ee) Forsectionswithslenderwalls
M
n
=F
cr
S
(10.6.8.3)
where
F
c
=
u.SSE

t

(10.6.8.4)
S=elasticsectionmodulus,mm
3

10.6.9 TeesandDoubleAnglesLoadedinthePlaneofSymmetry
Thissectionappliestoteesanddoubleanglesloadedintheplaneofsymmetry.Thenominalflexuralstrength,
M
n
,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofyielding(plasticmoment),lateraltorsional
bucklingandflangelocalbuckling.
10.6.9.1 Yielding
M
n
=M
p

(10.6.9.1)
Where
M
p
=F
y
Z
x
1.6M
y
forstemsintension (10.6.9.2)
M
y
forstemsincompression (10.6.9.3)
10.6.9.2 LateralTorsionalBuckling
H
n
= H
c
=
n

EI

0[
I
b
jB + 1 +B
2
[
(10.6.9.4)
Where
B = _2.S_
J
I
b
] _
I

[

(10.6.9.5)
The plus sign for B applies when the stem is in tension and the minus sign applies when the stem is in
compression.Ifthetipofthestemisincompressionanywherealongtheunbracedlength,thenegativevalueof
Bshallbeused.
10.6.9.3 FlangeLocalBucklingofTees
M
n
=F
cr
S
xc
(10.6.9.6)
S
xc
istheelasticsectionmodulusreferredtothecompressionflange.
F
cr
isdeterminedasfollows:
Forcompactsections,thelimitstateofflangelocalbucklingdoesnotapply.
Fornoncompactsections
F
c
= F

_1.19 - u.Su _
b
]
2t
]
_
_
F

E
_
(10.6.9.7)
Forslendersections
F
c
=
u.69E
_
b
]
2t
]
]
2

(10.6.9.8)
10.6.10 SingleAngle
Thissectionappliestosingleangleswithandwithoutcontinuouslateralrestraintalongtheirlength.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6520 Vol.2
Single angles with continuous lateraltorsional restraint along the length shall be permitted to be designed on
thebasisofgeometricaxis(x,y)bending.Singleangleswithoutcontinuouslateraltorsionalrestraintalongthe
lengthshallbedesignedusingtheprovisionsforprincipalaxisbendingexceptwheretheprovisionforbending
aboutageometricaxisispermitted.
The nominal flexural strength, M
n
, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of yielding
(plasticmoment),lateraltorsionalbucklingandleglocalbuckling.
10.6.10.1 Yielding
M
n
=1.5M
y

(10.6.10.1)
where
M
y
=yieldmomentabouttheaxisofbending,Nmm
10.6.10.2 LateralTorsionalBuckling
Forsingleangleswithoutcontinuouslateraltorsionalrestraintalongthelength
WhenM
e
M
y

H
n
= _u.92 -
u.17H
c
H

_H
c

(10.6.10.2)
WhenM
e
>M
y

H
n
= _1.92 - 1.17_
H

H
c
_H

1.SH

(10.6.10.3)
Where
M
e
,theelasticlateraltorsionalbucklingmoment,isdeterminedasfollows:
Forbendingaboutoneofthegeometricaxesofanequalleganglewithnolateraltorsionalrestraint
Withmaximumcompressionatthetoe
H
c
=
u.66Eb
4
tC
b
I
2
_
_
1 +u.78 _
It
b
2
]
2
- 1_
(10.6.10.4a)
Withmaximumtensionatthetoe
H
c
=
u.66Eb
4
tC
b
I
2
_
_
1 +u.78 _
It
b
2
]
2
+ 1_
(10.6.10.4b)
M
y
shallbetakenas0.80timestheyieldmomentcalculatedusingthegeometricsectionmodulus.
Forbendingaboutoneofthegeometricaxesofanequalleganglewithlateraltorsionalrestraintatthepointof
maximummomentonly

M
e
shallbetakenas1.25timesM
e
computedusingEquation10.6.10.4aor10.6.10.4b.
M
y
shallbetakenastheyieldmomentcalculatedusingthegeometricsectionmodulus.
Forbendingaboutthemajorprincipalaxisofequallegangles:
H
c
=
u.46Eb
2
t
2
C
b
I

(10.6.10.5)
Forbendingaboutthemajorprincipalaxisofunequallegangles:
H
c
=
4.9EI
z
C
b
I
2
_
_
[
w
2
+ u.uS2_
It
r
z
]
2
+ [
w
_
(10.6.10.6)
Where
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6521
C
b
iscomputedusingEquation10.6.1.1withamaximumvalueof1.5.
L=laterallyunbracedlengthofamember,mm
I
z
=minorprincipalaxismomentofinertia,mm
4

r
z
=radiusofgyrationfortheminorprincipalaxis,mm
t =anglelegthickness,mm
[
w
=asectionpropertyforunequallegangles,positiveforshortlegsincompressionandnegativeforlonglegs
in compression. If the long leg is in compression anywhere along the unbraced length of the member, the
negativevalueof
w
shallbeused.
10.6.10.3 LegLocalBuckling
Thelimitstateofleglocalbucklingapplieswhenthetoeofthelegisincompression.
a) Forcompactsections,thelimitstateofleglocalbucklingdoesnotapply.
ff) Forsectionswithnoncompactlegs
H
n
= F

S
c
_2.4S -1.72_
b
t
]
_
F

E
_
(10.6.10.7)
Forsectionswithslenderlegs
H
n
= F
c
S
c
(10.6.10.8)
Where
F
c
=
u.71E
[
b
t

2

(10.6.10.9)
b=outsidewidthoflegincompression,mm
S
c
=elasticsectionmodulustothetoeincompressionrelativetotheaxisofbending,mm
3
.Forbendingabout
one of the geometric axes of an equalleg angle with no lateraltorsional restraint, S
c
shall be 0.80 of the
geometricaxissectionmodulus.
10.6.11 RectangularBarsandRounds
Thissectionappliestorectangularbarsbentabouteithergeometricaxisandrounds.
The nominal flexural strength, M
n
,shallbe the lower value obtained according to thelimit states of yielding (
plasticmoment)andlateraltorsionalbuckling,asrequired.
10.6.11.1 Yielding
Forrectangular bars with
L
b
d
t
2

0.08L
P
j
bent about their major axis, rectangular bars bent about their minoraxis
androunds:
H
n
= H
p
= F

Z 1.6H

(10.6.11.1)
10.6.11.2 LateralTorsionalBuckling
a) Forrectangularbarswith
0.08L
P
j
<
L
b
d
t
2

1.9L
P
j
bentabouttheirmajoraxis:
H
n
= C
b
_1.S2 -u.274_
I
b
J
t
2
]
F

E
_ H

H
P

(10.6.11.2)
gg) Forrectangularbarswith
L
b
d
t
2
>
1.9L
P
j
bentabouttheirmajoraxis:
H
n
= F
c
S
x
H
P
(10.6.11.3)
Where
Part6
StructuralDesign

6522 Vol.2
F
c
=
1.9EC
b
I
b
J
t
2

(10.6.11.4)
t=widthofrectangularbarparalleltoaxisofbending,mm
d=depthofrectangularbar,mm
L
b
= length between points that are either braced against lateral displace ment of the compression region or
bracedagainsttwistofthecrosssection,mm
(c)Forroundsandrectangularbarsbentabouttheirminoraxis,thelimitstateoflateraltorsionalbucklingneed
notbeconsidered.
10.6.12 UnsymmetricalShapes
Thissectionappliestoallunsymmetricalshapes,exceptsingleangles.
The nominal flexural strength, M
n
, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of yielding
(yieldmoment),lateraltorsionalbucklingandlocalbucklingwhere
H
n
= F
n
S (10.6.12.1)
Where
S=lowestelasticsectionmodulusrelativetotheaxisofbending,mm
3

10.6.12.1Yielding
F
n
= F

(10.6.12.2)
10.6.12.2LateralTorsionalBuckling
F
n
= F
c
F

(10.6.12.3)
Where
F
cr
=bucklingstressforthesectionasdeterminedbyanalysis,MPa
10.6.12.3LocalBuckling
F
n
= F
c
F

(10.6.12.4)
Where
F
cr
=bucklingstressforthesectionasdeterminedbyanalysis,MPa
10.6.13 ProportionsofBeamsandGirders
10.6.13.1 Holereductions
This section applies to rolled or builtup shapes, and coverplated beams with holes, proportioned on the basis of
flexuralstrengthofthegrosssection.
In addition to the limit states specified in other sections of this Chapter, the nominal flexural strength, M
n
, shall be
limitedaccordingtothelimitstateoftensileruptureofthetensionflange.
ForF
u
A
fn
Y
t
F
y
A
fg
,thelimitstateoftensilerupturedoesnotapply.
ForF
u
A
fn
<Y
t
F
y
A
fg
,thenominalflexuralstrength,M
n
,atthelocationoftheholesinthetensionflangeshallnotbe
takengreaterthan:
H
n
=
F
u
A
]n
A
]g
S
x

(10.6.13.1)
Where
A
fg
=grosstensionflangearea,calculatedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSection10.4.3.1,mm
2

A
fn
=nettensionflangearea,calculatedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSection10.4.3.2,mm
2

Y
t
=1.0forF
y
/F
u
0.8
=1.1otherwise
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6523
10.6.13.2 ProportioningLimitsforIShapedMembers
SinglysymmetricIshapedmembersshallsatisfythefollowinglimit:
u.1
I
c
I

u.9
(10.6.13.2)
Ishapedmemberswithslenderwebsshallalsosatisfythefollowinglimits:
For
u
h
1.S
_
b
t
w
]
mux
= 11.7_
E
F

(10.6.13.3)
For
u
h
> 1.S
_
b
t
w
]
mux
=
u.42E
F

(10.3.13.4)
Where
a=cleardistancebetweentransversestiffeners,mm
Inunstiffenedgirdersh/t
w
shallnotexceed260.Theratioofthewebareatothecompressionflangeareashallnot
exceed10.
10.6.13.3 CoverPlates
Flangesofweldedbeamsorgirdersmaybevariedinthicknessorwidthbysplicingaseriesofplatesorbythe
useofcoverplates.
The total crosssectional area of cover plates of bolted girders shall not exceed 70 percent of the total flange
area.
Highstrengthboltsorweldsconnectingflangetoweb,orcoverplatetoflange,shallbeproportionedtoresist
thetotalhorizontalshearresultingfromthebendingforcesonthegirder.Thelongitudinaldistributionofthese
boltsorintermittentweldsshallbeinproportiontotheintensityoftheshear.
However, the longitudinal spacing shall not exceed the maximum permitted for compression or tension
members in Section 10.5.6 or 10.4.4, respectively. Bolts or welds connecting flange to web shall also be
proportioned to transmit to the web any loads applied directly to the flange, unless provision is made to
transmitsuchloadsbydirectbearing.
Partiallengthcoverplatesshallbeextendedbeyondthetheoreticalcutoffpointandtheextendedportionshall
be attached to the beam or girder by highstrength bolts in a slipcritical connection or fillet welds. The
attachment shall be adequate, at the applicable strength given in Sections 10.10.2.2, 10.10.3.8, or 10.2.3.9 to
developthecoverplatesportionoftheflexuralstrengthinthebeamorgirderatthetheoreticalcutoffpoint.
For welded cover plates, the welds connecting the cover plate termination to the beam or girder shall have
continuousweldsalongbothedgesofthecoverplateinthelengtha,definedbelow,andshallbeadequateto
develop the cover plates portion of the strength of the beam or girder at the distance a from the end of the
coverplate.
Whenthereisacontinuousweldequaltoorlargerthanthreefourthsoftheplatethicknessacrosstheendof
theplate
o = w (10.6.13.5)
Where
w=widthofcoverplate,mm.
Whenthereisacontinuousweldsmallerthanthreefourthsoftheplatethicknessacrosstheendoftheplate
o = 1.Sw (10.6.13.6)
Whenthereisnoweldacrosstheendoftheplate
o = 2w (10.6.13.7)
Part6
StructuralDesign

6524 Vol.2
10.6.13.4 BuiltUpBeams
Where two or more beams or channels are used sidebyside to form a flexural member, they shall be
connected togetherincompliancewithSection10.5.6.2.Whenconcentratedloadsarecarriedfromonebeam
toanother,ordistributedbetweenthebeams,diaphragmshavingsufficientstiffnesstodistributetheloadshall
beweldedorboltedbetweenthebeams.
10.7 DesignofMembersforShear
This section addresses webs of singly or doubly symmetric members subject to shear in the plane of the web,
singleanglesandHSSsections,andshearintheweakdirectionofsinglyordoublysymmetricshapes.
10.7.1 GeneralProvisions
Twomethodsofcalculatingshearstrengtharepresentedbelow.ThemethodpresentedinSection10.7.2does
not utilize the post buckling strength of the member (tension field action). The method presented in Section
10.7.3utilizestensionfieldaction.
Thedesignshearstrength,

I
n
andtheallowableshearstrength,I
n

,shallbedeterminedasfollows.
ForallprovisionsinthissectionexceptSection10.7.2.1a:

=0.90(LRFD)

= 1.67(ASD)
10.7.2 MemberswithUnstiffenedorStiffenedWebs
10.7.2.1 NominalShearStrength
Thissectionappliestowebsofsinglyordoublysymmetricmembersandchannelssubjecttoshearintheplane
oftheweb.
Thenominalshearstrength,V
n
,ofunstiffenedorstiffenedwebs,accordingtothelimitstatesofshearyielding
andshearbuckling,is
I
n
= u.6F

A
w
C
w
(10.7.2.1)
ForwebsofrolledIshapedmemberswithb t
w
2.24E F

=1.00(LRFD)

= 1.Su(ASD)
And
C

= 1.u (10.7.2.2)
For webs of all other doubly symmetric shapes and singly symmetric shapes and channels, except round HSS,
thewebshearcoefficient,C
v
,isdeterminedasfollows:
Forb t
w
1.1uk

E F


C

= 1.u (10.7.2.3)
For1.1uk

E F

< b t
w
1.S7k

E F


C

=
1.1uk

E F

b t
w

(10.7.2.4)
Forb t
w
> 1.S7k

E F


C

=
1.S1Ek

(b t
w
)
2
F

(10.7.2.5)
Where
A
w
=theoveralldepthtimesthewebthickness,dt
w
,mm
2

Thewebplatebucklingcoefficient,k
v
,isdeterminedasfollows:
Forunstiffenedwebswithb t
w
< 26u, k

= S exceptforthestemofteeshapeswherek
v
=1.2.
Forstiffenedwebs,
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6525
k

= S +
S
(o b )
2

= S when o b > S.u oi o b > j

260
(h t
w
)
[
2

Where
a=cleardistancebetweentransversestiffeners,mm
h=forrolledshapes,thecleardistancebetweenflangeslessthefilletorcornerradii,mm
=forbuiltupweldedsections,thecleardistancebetweenflanges,mm
=forbuiltupboltedsections,thedistancebetweenfastenerlines,mm
=fortees,theoveralldepth,mm.
10.7.2.2 TransverseStiffeners
Transversestiffenersarenotrequiredwhereb t
w
2.46E F

,orwheretherequiredshearstrengthisless
thanorequaltotheavailableshearstrengthprovidedinaccordancewithSection10.7.2.1fork
v
=5.
Transverse stiffeners used to develop the available web shear strength, as provided in Section 10.7.2.1, shall
haveamomentofinertiaaboutanaxisinthewebcenterforstiffenerpairsoraboutthefaceincontactwiththe
webplateforsinglestiffeners,whichshallnotbelessthanot
w
3
] ,where
] =
2.S
(o b )
2
- 2 u.S (10.7.2.6)
Transversestiffenersarepermittedtobestoppedshortofthetensionflange,providedbearingisnotneededto
transmitaconcentratedloadorreaction.Theweldbywhichtransversestiffenersareattachedtothewebshall
beterminatednotlessthanfourtimesnormorethansixtimesthewebthicknessfromtheneartoetotheweb
toflangeweld.Whensinglestiffenersareused,theyshallbeattachedtothecompressionflange,ifitconsistsof
arectangularplate,toresistanyuplifttendencyduetotorsionintheflange.Whenlateralbracingisattachedto
a stiffener, or a pair of stiffeners, these, in turn, shall be connected to the compression flange to transmit 1
percentofthetotalflangeforce,unlesstheflangeiscomposedonlyofangles.
Boltsconnectingstiffenerstothegirderwebshallbespacednotmorethan305mmoncenter.Ifintermittent
filletweldsareused,thecleardistancebetweenweldsshallnotbe morethan16timesthewebthicknessnor
morethan250mm.
10.7.3 TensionFieldAction
10.7.3.1 LimitsontheUseofTensionFieldAction
Consideration of tension field action is permitted for flanged members when the web plate is supported on all four
sidesbyflangesorstiffeners.Considerationoftensionfieldactionisnotpermittedfor:
endpanelsinallmemberswithtransversestiffeners;
memberswhena/hexceeds3.0or|26u (b t
w
)]
2
;
2A
w
(A
]c
+A
]t
) > 2.S; oi
b b
]c
oi b b
]t
> 6.u
where
A
fc
=areaofcompressionflange,mm
2

A
ft
=areaoftensionflange,mm
2

b
fc
=widthofcompressionflange,mm
b
ft
=widthoftensionflange,mm
Inthesecases,thenominalshearstrength,V
n
,shallbedeterminedaccordingtotheprovisionsofSection10.7.2.
10.7.3.2 NominalShearStrengthwithTensionFieldAction
When tension field action is permitted according to Section 10.7.3.1, the nominal shear strength, V
n
, with tension
fieldaction,accordingtothelimitstateoftensionfieldyielding,shallbe
Forb t
w
1.1uk

E F


Part6
StructuralDesign

6526 Vol.2
I
n
= u.6F

A
w
(10.7.3.1)
Forb t
w
> 1.1uk

E F


I
n
= u.6F

A
w
_C

+
1 - C

1.1S1 + (o b )
2
_ (10.7.3.2)
Where
k
v
andC
v
areasdefinedinSection10.7.2.1.
10.7.3.3 TransverseStiffeners
TransversestiffenerssubjecttotensionfieldactionshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.7.2.2andthefollowing
limitations:
(b t )
st
u.S6_
E
F
st

A
st
>
F

F
st
_u.1S
s
bt
w
(1 - C

)
I

I
c
-18t
w
2
_ u
(10.7.3.3)
Where
(b/t)
st
=thewidththicknessratioofthestiffener
F
yst
=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthestiffenermaterial,MPa
C
v
=coefficientdefinedinSection10.7.2.1
D
s
=1.0forstiffenersinpairs
=1.8forsingleanglestiffeners
=2.4forsingleplatestiffeners
V
r
=requiredshearstrengthatthelocationofthestiffener,N
V
c
=availableshearstrength;

, I
n
(LRFD)orI
n

(ASD)withV
n
asdefinedinSection10.7.3.2,N
10.7.4 SingleAngles
Thenominalshearstrength,V
n
,ofasingleanglelegshallbedeterminedusingEquation10.7.2.1withC
v
=1.0,
A
w
=btwhereb=widthofthelegresistingtheshearforce,mmandk
v
=1.2.
10.7.5 RectangularHSSandBoxMembers
Thenominalshearstrength,V
n
,ofrectangularHSSandboxmembersshallbedeterminedusingtheprovisions
of Section 10.7.2.1 with A
w
= 2ht where h for the width resisting the shear force shall be taken as the clear
distance between the flanges less the inside corner radius on each side and t
w
= t and k
v
= 5. If the corner
radiusisnotknown,hshallbetakenasthecorrespondingoutsidedimensionminusthreetimesthethickness.
10.7.6 RoundHSS
Thenominalshearstrength,V
n
,ofroundHSS,accordingtothelimitstatesof
shearyieldingandshearbuckling,is
I
n
= F
c
A
g
2 (10.7.6.1)
Where
F
c
shallbethelargerof
F
c
=
1.6uE
_
I

S
4

(10.7.6.2a)
and
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6527
F
c
=
u.78E
[

3
2

(10.7.6.2b)
butshallnotexceed0.6F
y

A
g
=grossareaofsectionbasedondesignwallthickness,mm
2

D=outsidediameter,mm
L
v
=thedistancefrommaximumtozeroshearforce,mm
T=designwallthickness,equalto0.93timesthenominalwallthicknessforERWHSSandequaltothenominal
thicknessforSAWHSS,mm
10.7.7 WeakAxisShearinSinglyandDoublySymmetricShapes
Forsinglyanddoublysymmetricshapesloadedintheweakaxiswithouttorsion,thenominalshearstrength,V
n

,foreachshearresistingelementshallbedeterminedusingEquation10.7.2.1andSection10.7.2.1bwithA
w
=
b
f
t
f
andk
v
=1.2.
10.7.8 BeamsandgirderswithWebOpenings
Theeffectofallwebopeningsonthenominalshearstrengthofsteelandcompositebeamsshallbedetermined.
Adequate reinforcement shall be provided when the required strength exceeds the available strength of the
memberattheopening.
10.8 DesignofMembersforCombinedForcesandTorsion
This section addresses members subject to axial force and flexure about one or both axes, with or without
torsion,andtomemberssubjecttotorsiononly.
10.8.1 DoublyandSinglySymmetricMembersSubjecttoFlexureandAxialForce
10.8.1.1 DoublyandSinglySymmetricMembersinFlexureandCompression
The interaction of flexure and compression in doubly symmetric members and singly symmetric members for
which0.1(Iyc/Iy)0.9,thatareconstrainedtobendaboutageometricaxis(xand/ory)shallbelimitedby
Equations 10.8.1.1a and 10.8.1.1b, where Iyc is the moment of inertia about the yaxis referred to the
compressionflange,mm4.
For
P
r
P
c
u.2
P

P
c
+
8
9
_
H
x
H
cx
+
H

H
c
_ 1.u
(10.8.1.1a)
For
P
r
P
c
< u.2
P

2P
c
+ _
H
x
H
cx
+
H

H
c
_ 1.u
(10.8.1.1b)
Where
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrength,N
Pc=availableaxialcompressivestrength,N
Mr=requiredflexuralstrength,Nmm
Mc=availableflexuralstrength,Nmm
x =subscriptrelatingsymboltostrongaxisbending
y =subscriptrelatingsymboltoweakaxisbending
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
Part6
StructuralDesign

6528 Vol.2
Pc=cPn=designaxialcompressivestrength,determinedinaccordancewithSection10.5,N
Mr=requiredflexuralstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm
Mc=bMn=designflexuralstrengthdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
c=resistancefactorforcompression=0.90
b=resistancefactorforflexure=0.90
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
Pc=Pn/c=allowableaxialcompressivestrength,determinedinaccordancewithSection10.5,N
Mr=requiredflexuralstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,Nmm
Mc=Mn/b=allowableflexuralstrengthdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
c=safetyfactorforcompression=1.67
b=safetyfactorforflexure=1.67
10.8.1.2 DoublyandSinglySymmetricMembersinFlexureandTension
The interaction of flexure and tension in doubly symmetric members and singly symmetric members
constrainedtobendaboutageometricaxis(xand/ory)shallbelimitedbyEquations10.8.1.1aand10.8.1.1b,
Where
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
Pr=requiredtensilestrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
Pc=tPn=designtensilestrength,determinedinaccordancewithSection10.4.2,N
Mr=requiredflexuralstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm
Mc=bMn=designflexuralstrengthdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
t=resistancefactorfortension(seeSection10.4.2)
b=resistancefactorforflexure=0.90
For doubly symmetric members, Cb in Section 10.6 may be increased by
_
1 +
P
u
P
cj
for axial tension that acts
concurrentlywithflexure,
Where
P
c
=
n
2
EI

I
b
2

FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
Pr=requiredtensilestrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
Pc=Pn/t=allowabletensilestrength,determinedinaccordancewithSection10.4.2,N
Mr=requiredflexuralstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,Nmm
Mc=Mn/b=allowableflexuralstrengthdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
t=safetyfactorfortension(seeSection10.4.2)
b=safetyfactorforflexure=1.67
Fordoublysymmetricmembers,CbinSection10.6maybeincreasedby
_
1 +
1.5P
c
P
cj
foraxialtensionthatacts
concurrentlywithflexure
Where
P
c
=
n
2
EI

I
b
2

AmoredetailedanalysisoftheinteractionofflexureandtensionispermittedinlieuofEquations10.8.1.1aand
10.8.1.1b.
10.8.1.3 DoublySymmetricMembersinSingleAxisFlexureandCompression
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6529
For doubly symmetric members in flexure and compression with moments primarily in one plane, it is
permissible to consider the two independent limit states, inplane instability and outofplane buckling or
flexuraltorsionalbuckling,separatelyinlieuofthecombinedapproachprovidedinSection10.8.1.1.
a) Forthelimitstateofinplaneinstability,Equations10.8.1.1shallbeusedwithPc,Mr,andMc
determinedintheplaneofbending.
hh) Forthelimitstateofoutofplanebuckling
P

P
co
+ _
H

H
cx
]
2
1.u
(10.8.1.2)
Where
P
co
=availablecompressivestrengthoutoftheplaneofbending,N
H
cx
=availableflexuraltorsionalstrengthforstrongaxisflexuredeterminedfromSection10.6,Nmm
Ifbendingoccursonlyabouttheweakaxis,themomentratioinEquation10.8.1.2shallbeneglected.
For members with significant biaxial moments (Mr/Mc 0.05 in both directions), the provisions of Section
10.8.1.1shallbefollowed.
10.8.2 UnsymmetricandOtherMembersSubjecttoFlexureandAxialForce
This section addresses the interaction of flexure and axial stress for shapes not covered in Section 10.8.1. It is
permittedtousetheprovisionsofthisSectionforanyshapeinlieuoftheprovisionsofSection10.8.1.
_

u
F
u
+

bw
F
bw
+

bz
F
bz
_ 1.u
(10.8.2.1)
Where
f
a
=requiredaxialstressatthepointofconsideration,MPa
F
a
=availableaxialstressatthepointofconsideration,MPa
f
bw
,f
bz
=requiredflexuralstressatthepointofconsideration,MPa
F
bw
,F
bz
=availableflexuralstressatthepointofconsideration,MPa
w =subscriptrelatingsymboltomajorprincipalaxisbending
z =subscriptrelatingsymboltominorprincipalaxisbending
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
f
a
=requiredaxialstressusingLRFDloadcombinations,MPa
F
a
=
c
F
cr
=designaxialstress,determinedinaccordancewithSection10.5forcompressionorSection10.4.2
fortension,MPa
f
bw
,f
bz
=requiredflexuralstressatthespecificlocationinthecrosssectionusingLRFDloadcombinations,MPa
F
bw
, F
bz
=

b
M
n
S
= design flexural stress determined in accordance with Section 10.6, MPa. Use the section
modulusforthespecificlocationinthecrosssectionandconsiderthesignofthestress.

c
=resistancefactorforcompression=0.90

t
=resistancefactorfortension(Section10.4.2)

b
=resistancefactorforflexure=0.90
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
f
a
=requiredaxialstressusingASDloadcombinations,MPa
F
u
=
P
cr
H
c
=allowableaxialstressdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.5forcompression,orSection10.4.2
fortension,MPa
f
bw
,f
bz
=requiredflexuralstressatthespecificlocationinthecrosssectionusingASDloadcombinations,MPa
F
bw
, F
bz
=
M
n
H
b
S
= allowable flexural stress determined in accordance with Section 10.6, MPa. Use the section
modulusforthespecificlocationinthecrosssectionandconsiderthesignofthestress.

c
=safetyfactorforcompression=1.67
Part6
StructuralDesign

6530 Vol.2

t
=safetyfactorfortension(Section10.4.2)

b
=safetyfactorforflexure=1.67
Equation 10.8.2.1 shall be evaluated using the principal bending axes by considering the sense of the flexural
stressesatthecriticalpointsofthecrosssection.Theflexuraltermsareeitheraddedtoorsubtractedfromthe
axialtermasappropriate.Whentheaxialforceiscompression,secondordereffectsshallbeincludedaccording
totheprovisionsofSection10.3.
AmoredetailedanalysisoftheinteractionofflexureandtensionispermittedinlieuofEquation10.8.2.1.
10.8.3 Members under Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or Axial
Force
10.8.3.1 TorsionalStrengthofRoundandRectangularHSS
The design torsional strength,
1
I
n
and the allowable torsional strength, I
n

1
, for round and rectangular
HSSshallbedeterminedasfollows:

1
=0.90(LRFD)
1
=1.67(ASD)
Thenominaltorsionalstrength,Tn,accordingtothelimitstatesoftorsionalyieldingandtorsionalbucklingis:
I
n
= F
c
C (10.8.3.1)
Where
CistheHSStorsionalconstant
Fcrshallbedeterminedasfollows:
ForroundHSS,Fcrshallbethelargerof
F
c
=
1.2SE
_
I

S
4

(10.8.3.2a)
and
F
c
=
u.6uE
[

3
2

(10.8.3.2b)
butshallnotexceed0.6F
y
,
where
L=lengthofthemember,mm
D=outsidediameter,mm
ForrectangularHSS
Forb t 2.4SE F

F
c
= u.6F

(10.8.3.3)
For2.4SE F

< b t S.u7
E F

F
c
= u.6F

_2.4S_E F

] (b t ) ,
(10.8.3.4)
For3.07E F

< b t 26u
F
c
= u.4S8n
2
E(b t )
2
(10.8.3.5)
10.8.3.2 HSSSubjecttoCombinedTorsion,Shear,FlexureandAxialForce
Whentherequiredtorsionalstrength,T
r
,islessthanorequalto20percentoftheavailabletorsionalstrength,
T
c
,theinteractionoftorsion,shear,flexureand/oraxialforceforHSSshallbedeterminedbySection10.8.1and
the torsional effects shall be neglected. When T
r
exceeds 20 percent of T
c
, the interaction of torsion, shear,
flexureand/oraxialforceshallbelimitedby
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6531
_
P

P
c
+
H

H
c
] +_
I

I
c
+
I

I
c
]
2
1.u
(10.8.3.6)
Where
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
P
r
=requiredaxialstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
P
c
=P
n
,designtensileorcompressivestrengthinaccordancewithSection10.4or10.5,N
M
r
=requiredflexuralstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm
M
c
=
b
H
n
,designflexuralstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
V
r
=requiredshearstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
V
c
=

I
n
,designshearstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.7,N
T
r
=requiredtorsionalstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm
T
c
=
1
I
n
,designtorsionalstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.8.3.1,Nmm
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
P
r
=requiredaxialstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
P
c
=P
n
/,allowabletensileorcompressivestrengthinaccordancewithSection10.4or10.5,N
M
r
=requiredflexuralstrengthusingASDloadcombinationsdeterminedinaccordancewithSection10.2.5,N
mm
M
c
=M
n
/
b
,allowableflexuralstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.6,Nmm
V
r
=requiredshearstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
V
c
=V
n
/

,allowableshearstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.7,N
T
r
=requiredtorsionalstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,Nmm
T
c
=T
n
/
1
,allowabletorsionalstrengthinaccordancewithSection10.8.3.1,Nmm
10.8.3.3StrengthofNonHSSMembersunderTorsionandCombinedStress
Thedesigntorsionalstrength,
1
F
n
,andtheallowabletorsionalstrength,F
n

1
,fornonHSSmembersshallbe
the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of yielding under normal stress, shear yielding under
shearstress,orbuckling,determinedasfollows:

1
=0.90(LRFD)
1
=1.67(ASD)
a) Forthelimitstateofyieldingundernormalstress
F
n
=F
y
(10.8.3.7)
ii) Forthelimitstateofshearyieldingundershearstress
F
n
=0.6F
y
(10.8.3.8)
jj) Forthelimitstateofbuckling
F
n
=F
cr
(10.8.3.9)
where
F
cr
=bucklingstressforthesectionasdeterminedbyanalysis,MPa
Someconstrainedlocalyieldingispermittedadjacenttoareasthatremainelastic.
10.9 EVALUATIONOFEXISTINGSTRUCTURES
Thissectionappliestotheevaluationofthestrengthandstiffnessunderstaticvertical(gravity)loadsofexisting
structuresby structuralanalysis,by load tests, or by a combination of structural analysis and load tests when
specifiedbytheengineerofrecordor in the contractdocuments.For suchevaluation, the steelgradesarenot
limited to those listed in Section 10.1.3.1. This sectiondoes not addressload testingfor the effects of seismic
loadsormovingloads(vibrations).
10.9.1 GENERALPROVISIONS
These provisions shall be applicable when the evaluation of an existing steel structure is specified for (a)
verificationof a specific set of design loadings or(b)determinationoftheavailablestrengthofaloadresisting
Part6
StructuralDesign

6532 Vol.2
member or system. The evaluation shall be performed by structural analysis (Section 10.9.3), by load tests
(Section 10.9.4), or by a combination of structural analysis and load tests, as specified in the contract
documents. Where load tests are used, the engineer ofrecordshallfirstanalyze thestructure,prepareatesting
plan, anddevelopawritten procedure to prevent excessive permanent deformation or catastrophic collapse
duringtesting.
10.9.2 MATERIALPROPERTIES

Determination of Required Tests: The engineer of record shall determine the specific tests that are required
fromSection 10.9.2.2through10.9.2.6andspecifythe locationswherethey arerequired.Whereavailable,the
useofapplicableprojectrecordsshallbepermittedtoreduceoreliminatetheneedfortesting.
10.9.2.1 TensileProperties

Tensile properties of members shall be considered in evaluation by structuralanalysis (Section 10.9.3) or load
tests (Section 10.9.4). Such properties shall include the yield stress, tensile strength and percent elongation.
Whereavailable, certified mill test reports or certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or a testing
laboratory in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M or A568/A568M, as applicable, shall be permitted for this
purpose. Otherwise, tensile tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM A370 from samples cut from
componentsofthestructure.
10.9.2.2 ChemicalComposition

Where welding is anticipated for repair or modificationof existing structures,thechemicalcompositionofthe

steelshallbedeterminedforuseinpreparingawelding procedurespecification(WPS).Whereavailable, results
from certified mill test reports or certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or a testing laboratory in
accordancewithASTMproceduresshallbepermittedforthispurpose.Otherwise,analysesshallbeconductedin
accordancewithASTMA751fromthesamplesusedtodeterminetensileproperties,orfromsamplestakenfrom
thesamelocations.
10.9.2.3 BaseMetalNotchToughness

Where welded tension splices in heavy shapes and plates as defined in Section 10.1.3.1d are critical to the
performance of the structure, the Charpy VNotch toughness shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions of Section 10.1.3.1d. If thenotchtoughnesssodetermined doesnotmeettheprovisionsofSection
10.1.3.1d,theengineerofrecordshalldetermineifremedialactionsarerequired.
10.9.2.4 WeldMetal

Wherestructuralperformanceisdependentonexistingweldedconnections,representativesamplesofweldmetal
shall be obtained. Chemical analysis and mechanical tests shall be made to characterize the weld metal. A
determinationshall be madeofthemagnitudeandconsequencesofimperfections.Iftherequirementsof AWS
D1.1arenotmet,theengineerofrecordshalldetermineifremedialactionsarerequired.
10.9.2.5 BoltsandRivets

Representative samples of bolts shall be inspected to determine markings and classifications. Where bolts
cannotbeproperlyidentifiedvisually,representativesamples shallberemovedandtestedtodeterminetensile
strength in accordance with ASTM F606 or ASTM F606M and the bolt classifiedaccordingly. Alternatively, the
assumptionthattheboltsareASTMA307shallbepermitted.RivetsshallbeassumedtobeASTMA502,Grade1,
unlessahighergradeisestablishedthroughdocumentationortesting.
10.9.3 EVALUATIONBYSTRUCTURALANALYSIS
10.9.3.1 DimensionalData

Alldimensionsusedin theevaluation,suchasspans,columnheights,memberspacings,bracinglocations,cross
sectiondimensions, thicknesses andconnection details, shall be determined from a field survey. Alternatively,
when available, it shall be permitted to determine such dimensions from applicable project design or shop
drawingswithfieldverificationofcriticalvalues.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6533
10.9.3.2 StrengthEvaluation
Forces (load effects) in members and connections shall be determined by structural analysisapplicableto the
typeofstructureevaluated.Theloadeffectsshallbe determinedfor the loads and factored load combinations
stipulatedinSection10.2.2.
Theavailablestrength of membersand connectionsshallbe determinedfromapplicableprovisionsofSections
10.2through10.19ofthisSpecification.
10.9.3.3 ServiceabilityEvaluation
Whererequired,thedeformationsatserviceloadsshallbecalculatedandreported.
10.9.4 EVALUATIONBYLOADTESTS
10.9.4.1 DeterminationofLoadRatingbyTesting
To determine the load rating of an existing floor or roof structure by testing, a test load shall be applied
incrementally in accordance with the engineer of records plan. The structure shall be visually inspected for
signs of distress or imminentfailureateachloadlevel.Appropriatemeasuresshallbetakeniftheseoranyother
unusualconditionsareencountered.
Thetestedstrengthofthestructureshallbetakenasthemaximumappliedtestloadplustheinsitudeadload.
The live load rating of a floorstructure shall be determined by setting the tested strength equal to 1.2D +
1.6L, where D isthe nominal dead load and L is the nominal live load rating for the structure.Thenominal
liveloadratingofthefloorstructureshallnotexceedthatwhichcanbecalculatedusingapplicableprovisionsof
thespecification.Forroofstructures, L
r
, S, or R as defined in the Symbols, shall be substituted for L. More
severeloadcombinationsshallbeusedifrequiredbyspecificationsofChapter2ofPart6.
Periodic unloading shall be considered once the service load level is attained and after the onset of inelastic
structuralbehaviorisidentifiedtodocumenttheamount of permanent set and the magnitude of the inelastic
deformations. Deformations of the structure, such as member deflections, shall be monitored at critical
locations during the test, referenced to the initial position before loading. It shall be demonstrated, while
maintainingmaximumtestloadforonehourthatthedeformation of the structure does not increaseby more
than 10 percent above that at the beginning of the holding period. It is permissible to repeat the sequence if
necessarytodemonstratecompliance.
Deformationsofthestructureshallalsoberecorded24hoursafterthetestloadingis removed to determinethe
amountof permanentset.Becausethe amountofacceptable permanentdeformationdependson the specific
structure, no limit is specifiedforpermanentdeformationatmaximumloading.Whereitisnotfeasible to load
test the entire structure, a segment or zone of not less than one complete bay, representative of the most
criticalconditions,shallbeselected.
10.9.4.2 ServiceabilityEvaluation
When load tests are prescribed, the structure shall be loaded incrementally to the service load level.
Deformations shall be monitored for a period of one hour. The structure shall then be unloaded and the
deformationrecorded.
10.9.5 EVALUATIONREPORT
After the evaluation of an existing structurehas been completed,the engineerofrecordshallprepareareport
documenting the evaluation. The report shall indicate whether the evaluation was performed by structural
analysis,byloadtestingorbyacombinationofstructuralanalysisandloadtesting.Furthermore,whentestingis
performed, the reportshallincludethe loadsand load combination used and the loaddeformation and time
deformationrelationshipsobserved.Allrelevantinformationobtainedfromdesigndrawings,milltestreportsand
auxiliarymaterialtestingshallalsobereported.Finally,thereportshallindicatewhetherthestructure,including
allmembersandconnections,isadequatetowithstandtheloadeffects.
10.10 Connections
Thissectionaddressesconnectingelements,connectors,andtheaffectedelementsoftheconnectedmembers
notsubjecttofatigueloads.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6534 Vol.2
10.10.1 GeneralProvisions
10.10.1.1 DesignBasis
Thedesignstrength,R
n
,andtheallowablestrengthR
n
/,ofconnectionsshallbedeterminedinaccordance
withtheprovisionsofthissectionandtheprovisionsofSection10.2.
The required strength of the connections shall be determined by structural analysis for the specified design
loads,consistentwiththetypeofconstructionspecified,orshallbeaproportionoftherequiredstrengthofthe
connectedmemberswhensospecifiedherein.
Where the gravity axes of intersecting axially loaded members do not intersect at one point, the effects of
eccentricityshallbeconsidered.
10.10.1.2 SimpleConnection
Simple connections of beams, girders, or trusses shall be designed as flexible and are permitted to be
proportioned for the reaction shears only, except as otherwise indicated in the design documents. Flexible
beam connections shall accommodate end rotations of simple beams. Some inelastic, but selflimiting
deformationintheconnectionispermittedtoaccommodatetheendrotationofasimplebeam.
10.10.1.3 MomentConnection
End connections of restrained beams, girders, and trusses shall be designed for the combined effect of forces
resulting from moment and shear induced by the rigidity of the connections. Response criteria for moment
connectionsareprovidedinSection10.2.6.3.2.
10.10.1.4 CompressionMemberswithBearingJoints
a) Whencolumnsbearonbearingplatesorarefinishedtobearatsplices,thereshallbesufficient
connectorstoholdallpartssecurelyinplace.
b) Whencompressionmembersotherthancolumnsarefinishedtobear,thesplicematerialandits
connectorsshallbearrangedtoholdallpartsinlineandshallbeproportionedforeither(i)or(ii)
below.Itispermissibletousethelesssevereofthetwoconditions:
(i)Anaxialtensileforceof50percentoftherequiredcompressivestrengthofthemember;or
(ii)Themomentandshearresultingfromatransverseloadequalto2percentoftherequired
compressive strength of the member. The transverse load shall be applied at the location of
the splice exclusive of other loads that act on the member. The member shall be taken as
pinnedforthedeterminationoftheshearsandmomentsatthesplice.
10.10.1.5 SplicesinHeavySections
Whentensileforcesduetoappliedtensionorflexurearetobetransmittedthroughsplicesinheavysections,as
defined in Section 10.1.3.1c and 10.1.3.1d, by complete jointpenetration groove (CJP) welds, material notch
toughnessrequirementsasgiveninSection10.1.3.1cand10.1.3.1d,weldaccessholedetailsasgiveninSection
10.10.1.6 and thermal cut surface preparation and inspection requirements as given in 10.1.3.2.2 shall apply.
The foregoing provision is not applicable to splices of elements of builtup shapes that are welded prior to
assemblingtheshape.
10.10.1.6 BeamCopesandWeldAccessHoles
All weld access holes required to facilitate welding operations shall have a length from the toe of the weld
preparation not less than 1
2
1
times the thickness of the material in which the hole is made. The height of the
accessholeshallbe1
2
1
timesthethicknessofthematerialwiththeaccesshole,t
w
,butnotlessthan25mmnor
doesitneedtoexceed50mm.Theaccessholeshallbedetailedtoprovideroomforweldbackingasneeded.
Forsectionsthatarerolledorweldedpriortocutting,theedgeofthewebshallbeslopedorcurvedfromthe
surfaceoftheflangetothereentrantsurfaceoftheaccesshole.Inhotrolledshapes,andbuiltupshapeswith
CJPgrooveweldsthatjointhewebtoflange,allbeamcopesandweldaccessholesshallbefreeofnotchesand
sharpreentrantcorners.Noarcoftheweldaccessholeshallhavearadiuslessthan10mm.
In builtup shapes with fillet or partialjointpenetration groove welds that join the webtoflange, all beam
copes and weld access holes shall be free of notches and sharp reentrant corners. The access hole shall be
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6535
permittedtoterminateperpendiculartotheflange,providingtheweldisterminatedatleastadistanceequalto
theweldsizeawayfromtheaccesshole.
For heavy sections as defined in 10.1.3.1c and 10.1.3.1d, the thermally cut surfaces of beam copes and weld
access holes shall be ground to bright metal and inspected by either magnetic particle or dye penetrant
methods prior to deposition of splice welds. If the curved transition portion of weld access holes and beam
copes are formed by predrilled or sawed holes, that portion of the access hole or cope need not be ground.
Weld access holes and beam copes in other shapes need not be ground nor inspected by dye penetrant or
magneticparticlemethods.
10.10.1.7 PlacementofWeldsandBolts
Groupsofweldsorboltsattheendsofanymemberwhichtransmitaxialforceintothatmembershallbesized
sothatthecenterofgravityofthegroupcoincideswiththecenterofgravityofthemember,unlessprovisionis
madefortheeccentricity.Theforegoingprovisionisnotapplicabletoendconnectionsofstaticallyloadedsingle
angle,doubleangle,andsimilarmembers.
10.10.1.8 BoltsinCombinationwithWelds
Boltsshallnotbeconsideredassharingtheloadincombinationwithwelds,exceptthatshearconnectionswith
any grade of bolts permitted by Section 10.1.3.3 installed in standard holes or short slots transverse to the
directionoftheloadarepermittedtobeconsideredtosharetheloadwithlongitudinallyloadedfilletwelds.In
such connections the available strength of the bolts shall not be taken as greater than 50 percent of the
availablestrengthofbearingtypeboltsintheconnection.
Inmakingweldedalterationstostructures,existingrivetsandhighstrengthboltstightenedtotherequirements
forslipcriticalconnectionsarepermittedtobeutilizedforcarryingloadspresentatthe timeofalterationand
theweldingneedonlyprovidetheadditionalrequiredstrength.
10.10.1.9 HighStrengthBoltsinCombinationwithRivets
In both new work and alterations, in connections designed as slipcritical connections in accordance with the
provisions of Section 10.10.3, highstrength bolts are permitted to be considered as sharing the load with
existingrivets.
10.10.1.10 LimitationsonBoltedandWeldedConnections
Pretensionedjoints,slipcriticaljointsorweldsshallbeusedforthefollowingconnections:
Columnsplicesinallmultistorystructuresover38minheight
Connections of all beams and girders to columns and any other beams and girders on which the bracing of
columnsisdependentinstructuresover38minheight
Inallstructurescarryingcranesofover50kNcapacity:rooftrusssplicesandconnectionsoftrussestocolumns,
columnsplices,columnbracing,kneebraces,andcranesupports
Connectionsforthesupportofmachineryandotherliveloadsthatproduceimpactorreversalofload
SnugtightenedjointsorjointswithASTMA307boltsshallbepermittedexceptwhereotherwisespecified.
10.10.2 Welds
All provisions of AWS D1.1 apply under this Specification, with the exception that the provisions of the listed
sectionsapplyunderthisspecificationinlieuofthecitedAWSprovisionsasfollows:
Section10.10.1.6inlieuofAWSD1.1Section5.17.1
Section10.10.2.2.1inlieuofAWSD1.1Section2.3.2
Table10.10.2.2inlieuofAWSD1.1Table2.1
Table10.10.2.5inlieuofAWSD1.1Table2.3
Table10.17.1.1inlieuofAWSD1.1Table2.4
Section10.2.3.9andSection10.17inlieuofAWSD1.1Section2,PartC
Section10.13.2.2inlieuofAWSD1.1Sections5.15.4.3and5.15.4.4
10.10.2.1 GrooveWelds
Part6
StructuralDesign

6536 Vol.2
10.10.2.1.1EffectiveArea
The effective area of groove welds shall be considered as the length of the weld times the effective throat
thickness.
The effective throat thickness of a completejointpenetration (CJP) groove weld shall be the thickness of the
thinnerpartjoined.
Table10.10.2.1:EffectiveThroatofPartialJointPenetrationGrooveWelds
WeldingProcess WeldingPositionF(flat),H
(horiz.),V(vert.),OH
(overhead)
GrooveType(AWS
D1.1,Figure3.3)
EffectiveThroat
ShieldedMetalArc(SMAW) All JorUGroove
60
0
V

DepthofGroove GasMetalArc(GMAW)
FluxCoredArc(FCAW)
All
SubmergedArc(SAW) F JorUGroove
60
0
BevelorV
GasMetalArc(GMAW)
FluxCoredArc(FCAW)
F,H 45
0
Bevel DepthofGroove
ShieldedMetalArc(SMAW) All 45
0
Bevel DepthofGroove
Minus3mm
GasMetalArc(GMAW)
FluxCoredArc(FCAW)
V,OH 45
0
Bevel DepthofGroove
Minus3mm
The effective throat thickness of a partialjointpenetration (PJP) groove weld shall be as shown in Table
10.10.2.1.
The effectiveweld size forflaregroovewelds, whenfilled flush to the surface ofaround bar,a 90
0
bend in a
formed section, or rectangular HSS shall be as shown in Table 10.10.2.2, unless other effective throats are
demonstratedbytests.TheeffectivesizeofflaregrooveweldsfilledlessthanflushshallbeasshowninTable
10.10.2.2,lessthegreatestperpendiculardimensionmeasuredfromalineflushtothebasemetalsurfacetothe
weldsurface.
TABLE10.10.2.2:EffectiveWeldSizesofFlareGrooveWelds
WeldingProcess FlareBevelGroove
[a]
FlareVGroove
GMAWandFCAWG
5/
8R
3/
4R
SMAWandFCAWS
5/
16 R
5/
8R
SAW
5/
16R
1/
2R
[a]ForFlareBevelGroovewithR<10mmuseonlyreinforcingfilletweldonfilledflushjoint.GeneralNote:R=radius
ofjointsurface(canbeassumedtobe2tforHSS),mm
Larger effective throat thicknesses than those in Table 10.10.2.2 are permitted, provided the fabricator can
establishbyqualificationtheconsistentproductionofsuchlargereffectivethroatthicknesses.Qualificationshall
consistofsectioningtheweldnormaltoitsaxis,atmidlengthandterminalends.Suchsectioningshallbemade
onanumberofcombinationsofmaterialsizesrepresentativeoftherangetobeusedinthefabrication.
10.10.2.1.2Limitations
Theminimumeffectivethroatthicknessofapartialjointpenetrationgrooveweldshallnotbelessthanthesize
requiredtotransmitcalculatedforcesnorthesizeshowninTable10.10.2.3.Minimumweldsizeisdetermined
bythethinnerofthetwopartsjoined.

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6537
TABLE10.10.2.3:MinimumEffectiveThroatThicknessofPartialJointPenetrationGrooveWelds
MaterialThicknessofThinnerPartJoined,mm MinimumEffectiveThroatThickness,
[a]
mm
To6inclusive
Over6to13
Over13to19
Over19to38
Over38to57
Over57to150
3
5
6
8
10
13
[a]SeeTable10.10.2.1.
10.10.2.2 FilletWelds
10.10.2.2.1EffectiveArea
The effective area of a fillet weld shall be the effective length multiplied by the effective throat. The effective
throat of a fillet weld shall be the shortest distance from the root to the face of the diagrammatic weld. An
increase in effective throat is permitted if consistent penetration beyond the root of thediagrammaticweldis
demonstratedbytestsusingtheproductionprocessandprocedurevariables.
Forfilletweldsinholesandslots,theeffectivelengthshallbethelengthofthecenterlineoftheweldalongthe
centeroftheplanethroughthethroat.Inthecaseofoverlappingfillets,theeffectiveareashallnotexceedthe
nominalcrosssectionalareaoftheholeorslot,intheplaneofthefayingsurface.
10.10.2.2.2Limitations
Theminimumsizeoffilletweldsshallbenotlessthanthesizerequiredtotransmitcalculatedforcesnorthesize
asshowninTable10.10.2.4.Theseprovisionsdonotapplytofilletweldreinforcementsofpartialorcomplete
jointpenetrationgroovewelds.
TABLE10.10.2.4:MinimumSizeofFilletWelds
MaterialThicknessofThinner
d
MinimumSizeofFillet
ld
[a]
To6inclusive
Over6to13
Over13to19
3
5
6
[a]Legdimensionoffilletwelds.Singlepassweldsmustbeused.
Themaximumsizeoffilletweldsofconnectedpartsshallbe:
Alongedgesofmateriallessthan6mmthick,notgreaterthanthethicknessofthematerial.
Alongedgesofmaterial6mmormoreinthickness,notgreaterthanthethicknessofthematerialminus2mm,
unlesstheweldisespeciallydesignatedonthedrawingstobebuiltouttoobtainfullthroatthickness.Intheas
weldedcondition,thedistancebetweentheedgeofthebasemetalandthetoeoftheweldispermittedtobe
lessthan2mmprovidedtheweldsizeisclearlyverifiable.
Theminimumeffectivelengthoffilletweldsdesignedonthebasisofstrengthshallbenotlessthanfourtimes
the nominal size, or else the size of the weld shall be considered not to exceed 1 /4 of its effective length. If
longitudinalfilletweldsareusedaloneinendconnectionsofflatbartensionmembers,thelengthofeachfillet
weld shall be not less than the perpendicular distance between them. For the effect of longitudinal fillet weld
lengthinendconnectionsupontheeffectiveareaoftheconnectedmember,seeSection10.4.3.3.
Forendloadedfilletweldswithalengthupto100timesthelegdimension,itispermittedtotaketheeffective
length equal to the actual length. When the length of the endloaded fillet weld exceeds 100 times the weld
size,theeffectivelengthshallbedeterminedbymultiplyingtheactuallengthbythereductionfactor,,
[ = 1.2 - u.uu2(I w ) 1.u (10.10.2.1)
where
Part6
StructuralDesign

6538 Vol.2
I=actuallengthofendloadedweld,mm
w=weldlegsize,mm
Whenthelengthoftheweldexceeds300timesthelegsize,thevalueof[shallbetakenas0.60.
Intermittent fillet welds are permitted to be used to transfer calculated stress across a joint or faying surfaces
whentherequiredstrengthislessthanthatdevelopedbyacontinuousfilletweldofthesmallestpermittedsize,
andtojoincomponentsofbuiltupmembers.Theeffectivelengthofanysegmentofintermittentfilletwelding
shallbenotlessthanfourtimestheweldsize,withaminimumof38mm.
Inlapjoints,theminimumamountoflapshallbefivetimesthethicknessofthethinnerpartjoined,butnotless
than25mm.Lapjointsjoiningplatesorbarssubjectedtoaxialstressthatutilizetransversefilletweldsonlyshall
be fillet welded along the end of both lapped parts, except where the deflection of the lapped parts is
sufficientlyrestrainedtopreventopeningofthejointundermaximumloading.
Filletweldterminationsarepermittedto bestoppedshortorextendtotheendsorsidesofpartsorbeboxed
exceptaslimitedbythefollowing:
Forlapjointsinwhichoneconnectedpartextendsbeyondanedgeofanotherconnectedpartthatissubjectto
calculatedtensilestress,filletweldsshallterminatenotlessthanthesizeoftheweldfromthatedge.
Forconnectionswhereflexibilityoftheoutstandingelementsisrequired,whenendreturnsareused,thelength
ofthereturnshallnotexceedfourtimesthenominalsizeoftheweldnorhalfthewidthofthepart.
Fillet welds joining transverse stiffeners to plate girder webs 19 mm thick or less shall end not less than four
times nor more than six times the thickness of the web from the web toe of the webtoflange welds, except
wheretheendsofstiffenersareweldedtotheflange.
Filletweldsthatoccuronoppositesidesofacommonplaneshallbeinterruptedatthecornercommontoboth
welds.
Filletweldsinholesorslotsarepermittedtobeusedtotransmitshearinlapjointsortopreventthebucklingor
separationoflappedpartsandtojoincomponentsofbuiltupmembers.Suchfilletweldsmayoverlap,subject
totheprovisionsofSection10.10.2.Filletweldsinholesorslotsarenottobeconsideredplugorslotwelds.
10.10.2.3 PlugandSlotWelds
10.10.2.3.1EffectiveArea
Theeffectiveshearingareaofplugandslotweldsshallbeconsideredasthenominalcrosssectionalareaofthe
holeorslotintheplaneofthefayingsurface.
10.10.2.3.2Limitations
Plugorslotweldsarepermittedtobeusedtotransmitshearinlapjointsortopreventbucklingoflappedparts
andtojoincomponentpartsofbuiltupmembers.
Thediameteroftheholesforaplugweldshallnotbelessthanthethicknessofthepartcontainingitplus8mm,
rounded to the next largeroddeven mm, nor greaterthan the minimum diameterplus 3 mm or2
4
1
times the
thicknessoftheweld.
Theminimumcentertocenterspacingofplugweldsshallbefourtimesthediameterofthehole.
Thelengthofslotforaslotweldshallnotexceed10timesthethicknessoftheweld.Thewidthoftheslotshall
benotlessthanthethicknessofthepartcontainingitplus8mmroundedtothenextlargeroddevenmm,nor
shallitbelargerthan2
4
1
timesthethicknessoftheweld.Theendsoftheslotshallbesemicircularorshallhave
thecornersroundedtoaradiusofnotlessthanthethicknessofthepartcontainingit,exceptthoseendswhich
extendtotheedgeofthepart.
Theminimumspacingoflinesofslotweldsinadirectiontransversetotheirlengthshallbefourtimesthewidth
oftheslot.Theminimumcentertocenterspacinginalongitudinaldirectiononanylineshallbetwotimesthe
lengthoftheslot.
Thethicknessofplugorslotweldsinmaterial16mmorlessinthicknessshallbeequaltothethicknessofthe
material.Inmaterialover16mmthick,thethicknessoftheweldshallbeatleastonehalfthethicknessofthe
materialbutnotlessthan16mm.
10.10.2.4 Strength
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6539
The design strength, R
n
and the allowable strength, R
n
/ , of welds shall be the lower value of the base
materialandtheweldmetalstrengthdeterminedaccordingtothelimitstatesoftensilerupture,shearrupture
oryieldingasfollows:
TABLE10.10.2.5:AvailableStrengthofWeldedJoints,N
LoadTypeandDirection
RelativetoWeldAxis
Pertine
nt
Metal

and

Nominal
Strength
(F
BM
or
F
w
)
Effective
Area
(A
BM
orA
w
)mm
2

RequiredFillerMetalStrength
Level
[a][b]

COMPLETEJOINTPENETRATIONGROOVEWELDS
Tension
Normaltoweldaxis
Strengthofthejointiscontrolledbythebasemetal
Matchingfillermetalshallbeused.
ForTandcornerjointswithbacking
leftinplace,notchtoughfillermetal
isrequired.SeeSection10.10.2.6.
Compression
Normaltoweldaxis
Strengthofthejointiscontrolledbythebasemetal
Fillermetalwithastrengthlevel
equaltooronestrengthlevelless
thanmatchingfillermetalis
permitted.
TensionorCompression
Paralleltoweldaxis
Tensionorcompressioninpartsjoinedparalleltoaweld
neednotbeconsideredindesignofweldsjoiningthe
parts.
Fillermetalwithastrengthlevel
equaltoorlessthanmatchingfiller
metalispermitted.
Shear
Strengthofthejointiscontrolledbythebasemetal
Matchingfillermetalshallbe
used.
[c]

PARTIALJOINTPENETRATIONGROOVEWELDSINCLUDINGFLAREVEEGROOVEANDFLAREBEVELGROOVEWELDS
Tension
Normaltoweldaxis
=0.90 See

Fillermetalwithastrengthlevel
equaltoorlessthanmatchingfiller
metalispermitted.
=0.80 See
CompressionColumnto
BasePlateandcolumn
splicesdesignedper
10.10.1.4(a)

Compressivestressneednotbeconsideredindesignof
weldsjoiningtheparts.
CompressionConnections
ofmembersdesignedto
bearother
thancolumnsasdescribed
in10.10.1.4(b)
Base =0.90
=1.67
Fy See
10.10.4

Weld
=0.80
=1.88
0.60
F
EXX

See
10.10.2.1.1
CompressionConnections
notfinishedtobear
=0.90 See
=0.80 See
TensionorCompression
Paralleltoweldaxis
Tensionorcompressioninpartsjoinedparalleltoaweld
neednotbeconsideredindesignofweldsjoiningthe

Shear
Base Governedby10.10.4
= 0.60F
EXX
See

Part6
StructuralDesign

6540 Vol.2
TABLE10.10.2.5(Contd..):AvailableStrengthofWeldedJoints,N
Load Type and Direction Relative to Weld
Axis
Pertinent
Metal

and
Nominal
Strength
Effective
Area
RequiredFillerMetal
StrengthLevel
[a][b]

FILLETWELDSINCLUDINGFILLETSINHOLESANDSLOTSANDSKEWEDTJOINTS

Shear
Base Governedby10.10.4
Fillermetalwithastrengthlevelequaltoor
lessthanmatchingfillermetalispermitted.

Weld
=
0..75
=
2.00

u.6uF
LXX
|d]

See
10.10.2.2.1
TensionorCompression
Paralleltoweldaxis
Tensionorcompressioninpartsjoinedparallel
toaweldneednotbeconsideredindesignof
weldsjoiningtheparts.
PLUGANDSLOTWELDS
ShearParalleltofaying
surfaceontheeffective
Base Governedby10.10.4 Fillermetalwithastrengthlevelequaltoor
lessthanmatchingfillermetalispermitted. = u.6uF
LXX
|d]

FormatchingweldmetalseeAWSD1.1,Section3.3.
Fillermetalwithastrengthlevelonestrengthlevelgreaterthanmatchingispermitted.
Fillermetalswithastrengthlevellessthanmatchingmaybeusedforgrooveweldsbetweenthewebsandflangesofbuilt
up sections transferring shear loads, or in applications where high restraint is a concern. In these applications, the weld
jointshallbedetailedandtheweldshallbedesignedusingthethicknessofthematerialastheeffectivethroat,=0.80,=
1.88and0.60F
EXX
asthenominalstrength.

Forthebasemetal
R
n
= F
BM
A
BM
(10.10.2.2)
Fortheweldmetal
R
n
= F
w
A
w
(10.10.2.3)
Where
F
BM
=nominalstrengthofthebasemetalperunitarea,MPa
F
w
=nominalstrengthoftheweldmetalperunitarea,MPa
A
BM
=crosssectionalareaofthebasemetal,mm
2

A
w
=effectiveareaoftheweld,mm
2

Thevaluesof,,F
BM
,andF
w
andlimitationsthereonaregiveninTable10.10.2.5.
Alternatively, for fillet welds loaded inplane the design strength, R
n
and the allowable strength, R
n
/ , of
weldsispermittedtobedeterminedasfollows:
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
Foralinearweldgrouploadedinplanethroughthecenterofgravity
R
n
= F
w
A
w
(10.10.2.4)
where
F
w
= u.6uF
LXX
(1.u +u.Susin
1.5
) (10.10.2.5)
And
F
LXX
=electrodeclassificationnumber,MPa
=angleofloadingmeasuredfromtheweldlongitudinalaxis,degrees
A
w
=effectiveareaoftheweld,mm
2

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6541
Forweldelementswithinaweldgroupthatareloadedinplaneandanalyzedusinganinstantaneouscenterof
rotation method, the components of the nominal strength, R
nx
and R
ny
, are permitted to be determined as
follows:
R
nx
= F
wx
A
w
R
n
= F
w
A
w

(10.10.2.6)
where
A
wi
=effectiveareaofweldthroatofanyithweldelement,mm
2

F
w
= u.6uF
LXX
(1.u +u.Susin
1.5
)(p) (10.10.2.7)
(p) = |p(1.9 - u.9p)]
0.3
(10.10.2.8)
F
wi
=nominalstressinanyithweldelement,MPa
F
wix
=xcomponentofstress,F
wi

F
wiy
=ycomponentofstress,F
wi

p =
i
/
m
,ratioofelementideformationtoitsdeformationatmaximumstress
w =weldlegsize,mm
r
crit
=distancefrominstantaneouscenterofrotationtoweldelementwithminimum
u
/r
i
ratio,mm

I
= deformation of weld elements at intermediate stress levels, linearly proportioned to the critical
deformationbasedondistancefromtheinstantaneouscenterofrotation,r
i
,mm=r
i

u
/r
crit

m
=0.209(+2)
0.32
w,deformationofweldelementatmaximumstress,mm

u
=1.087(+6)
0.65
w0.17w,deformationofweldelementatultimatestress(fracture),usuallyinelement
furthestfrominstantaneouscenterofrotation,mm
Forfilletweldgroupsconcentricallyloadedandconsistingofelementsthat
areorientedbothlongitudinallyandtransverselytothedirectionofappliedload,thecombinedstrength,R
n
,of
thefilletweldgroupshallbedeterminedasthegreaterof
R
n
= R
wI
+ R
wt
(10.10.2.9a)
or
R
n
= u.8SR
wI
+ 1.SR
wt
(10.10.2.9b)
where
R
wI
= the total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded fillet welds, as determined in accordance with Table
10.10.2.5,N
R
wt
= the total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet welds, as determined in accordance with Table
10.10.2.5withoutthealternateinSection10.10.2.4(a),N
10.10.2.5 CombinationofWelds
Iftwoormoreofthegeneraltypesofwelds(groove,fillet,plug,slot)arecombinedinasinglejoint,thestrength
ofeachshallbeseparatelycomputedwithreferencetotheaxisofthegroupinordertodeterminethestrength
ofthecombination.
10.10.2.6 FillerMetalRequirements
The choice of electrode for use with completejointpenetration groove welds subject to tension normal to the
effectiveareashallcomplywiththerequirementsformatchingfillermetalsgiveninAWSD1.1.
Filler metal with a specified Charpy VNotch (CVN) toughness of 27.12 Nm (27 J) at 4
0
C shall be used in the
followingjoints:
CompletejointpenetrationgrooveweldedTandcornerjointswithsteelbackingleftinplace,subjecttotension
normaltotheeffectivearea,unlessthejointsaredesignedusingthenominalstrengthandresistancefactoror
safetyfactorasapplicableforaPJPweld.
Completejointpenetration groove welded splices subject to tension normal to the effective area in heavy
sectionsasdefinedin10.1.3.1cand10.1.3.1d.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6542 Vol.2
10.10.2.7 MixedWeldMetal
WhenCharpyVNotchtoughnessisspecified,theprocessconsumablesforallweldmetal,tackwelds,rootpass
andsubsequentpassesdepositedinajointshallbecompatibletoensurenotchtoughcompositeweldmetal.
10.10.3 BoltsandThreadedParts
10.10.3.1 HighStrengthBolts
Use of highstrength bolts shall conform to the provisions of the Specification for Structural Joints UsingASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts, hereafter referred to as the RCSC Specification, as approved by the Research Council on
StructuralConnections,exceptasotherwiseprovidedinthisSpecification.
Whenassembled,alljointsurfaces,includingthoseadjacenttothewashers,shallbefreeofscale,excepttight
millscale.AllASTMA325orA325MandA490orA490Mboltsshallbetightenedtoabolttensionnotlessthan
thatgiveninTable10.10.3.1,exceptasnotedbelow.Exceptaspermittedbelow,installationshallbeassuredby
any of the following methods: turnofnut method, a direct tension indicator, calibrated wrench or alternative
designbolt.
Boltsarepermittedtobeinstalledtoonlythesnugtightconditionwhenusedin
bearingtypeconnections.
tension or combined shear and tension applications, for ASTM A325 or A325M bolts only, where loosening or
fatigueduetovibrationorloadfluctuationsarenotdesignconsiderations.
TABLE10.10.3.1:MinimumBoltPretension,kN

BoltSize,mm A325MBolts A490MBolts

M16
M20
M22
M24
M27
91
142
176
205
267
114
179
221
257
334

Equal to0.70timestheminimumtensilestrengthofbolts,roundedofftonearestkN,asspecifiedinASTM
Thesnugtightconditionisdefinedasthetightnessattainedbyeitherafewimpactsofanimpactwrenchorthe
fulleffortofaworkerwithanordinaryspudwrenchthatbringstheconnectedpliesintofirmcontact.Boltsto
betightenedonlytothesnugtightconditionshallbeclearlyidentifiedonthedesignanderectiondrawings.
When ASTM A490 or A490M bolts over 25 mm in diameter are used in slotted or oversized holes in external
plies,asinglehardenedwasherconformingtoASTMF436,exceptwith8mmminimumthickness,shallbeused
inlieuofthestandardwasher.
In slipcritical connections in which the direction of loading is toward an edge of a connected part, adequate
availablebearingstrengthshallbeprovidedbasedupontheapplicablerequirementsofSection10.10.3.10.
When bolt requirements cannot be provided by ASTM A325 and A325M, F1852, or A490 and A490M bolts
becauseofrequirementsforlengthsexceeding12diametersordiametersexceeding38mm,boltsorthreaded
rodsconformingtoASTMA354Gr.BC,A354Gr.BD,orA449arepermittedtobe usedinaccordancewiththe
provisionsforthreadedrodsinTable10.10.3.2.
WhenASTMA354Gr.BC,A354Gr.BD,orA449boltsandthreadedrodsareusedinslipcriticalconnections,the
bolt geometry including the head and nut(s) shall be equal to or (if larger in diameter) proportional to that
provided by ASTM A325 and A325M, or ASTM A490 and A490M bolts. Installation shall comply with all
applicable requirements of the RCSC Specification with modifications as required for the increased diameter
and/orlengthtoprovidethedesignpretension.
10.10.3.2 SizeandUseofHoles
The maximum sizes of holes for bolts are given in Table 10.10.3.3, except that larger holes, required for
toleranceonlocationofanchorrodsinconcretefoundations,arepermittedincolumnbasedetails.
Standardholesorshortslottedholestransversetothedirectionoftheloadshallbeprovidedinaccordancewith
the provisions of this specification, unless oversized holes, shortslotted holes parallel to the load or long
slotted holes are approved by the engineer of record. Finger shims up to 6 mm are permitted in slipcritical
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6543
connections designed on the basis of standard holes without reducing the nominal shear strength of the
fastenertothatspecifiedforslottedholes.
Oversized holes are permitted in any or all plies of slipcritical connections, but they shall not be used in
bearingtypeconnections.Hardenedwashersshallbeinstalledoveroversizedholesinanouterply.
Shortslotted holes are permitted in any or all plies of slipcritical or bearingtype connections. The slots are
permitted without regard to direction of loading in slip critical connections, but the length shall be normal to
the direction of the load in bearingtypeconnections.Washers shall be installed over shortslotted holes in an
outerply;whenhighstrengthboltsareused,suchwashersshallbehardened.
Longslotted holes are permitted in only one of the connected parts of either a slipcritical or bearingtype
connection at an individual faying surface. Long slotted holes are permitted without regard to direction of
loading in slipcritical connections, but shall be normal to the direction of load in bearingtype connections.
Where longslotted holes are used in an outer ply, plate washers, or a continuous bar with standard holes,
havingasizesufficienttocompletelycovertheslotafterinstallation,shallbeprovided.Inhighstrengthbolted
connections,suchplatewashersorcontinuousbarsshallbenotlessthan8mmthickandshallbeofstructural
gradematerial,butneednotbehardened.Ifhardenedwashersarerequiredforuseofhighstrengthbolts,the
hardenedwashersshallbeplacedovertheoutersurfaceoftheplatewasherorbar.
10.10.3.3 MinimumSpacing
The distance between centers of standard, oversized, or slotted holes, shall not be less than 2
3
2
times the
nominaldiameter,d,ofthefastener;adistanceof3dispreferred.
10.10.3.4 MinimumEdgeDistance
Thedistancefromthecenterofastandardholetoanedgeofaconnectedpartinanydirectionshallnotbeless
than either the applicable value from Table 10.10.3.4, or as required in Section 10.10.3.10. The distance from
thecenterofanoversizedorslottedholetoanedgeofaconnectedpartshallbenotlessthanthatrequiredfor
astandardholetoanedgeofaconnectedpartplustheapplicableincrementC
2
fromTable10.10.3.5.

TABLE10.10.3.2:NominalStressofFastenersandThreadedParts,MPa
DescriptionofFasteners NominalTensile
Stress,F
nt
,MPa
NominalShearStressinBearingType
Connections,F
nv
,MPa
A307bolts 310
[a][b]
165
[b][c][f]

A325orA325Mbolts,whenthreads
arenotexcludedfromshearplanes
620
[e]
330
[f]

A325orA325Mbolts,whenthreads
areexcludedfromshearplanes
620
[e]
414
[f]

A490orA490Mbolts,whenthreads
arenotexcludedfromshearplanes
780
[e]
414
[f]

A490orA490Mbolts,whenthreads
areexcludedfromshearplanes
780
[e]
520
[f]

Threadedpartsmeetingthe
requirementsofSection10.1.3.4,
whenthreadsarenotexcludedfrom
shearplanes
0.75 Fu
[a][d]
0.40Fu
Threadedpartsmeetingthe
requirementsofSection10.1.3.4,
whenthreadsareexcludedfrom
shearplanes
0.75 Fu
[a][d]
0.50Fu
Part
Stru
B
[a
[b
[c
do
t6
ucturalDesign
[a]Subjectto
[b]ForA307b
grip.
[c]Threadspe
[d]Thenomin
majorthread

Bolt
Diame
M16
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
[a]Clearan

TABLE10.1
BoltDiameter
16
20
22
24
27
a]Lesseredged
b]Foroversized
c]Alledgedista
oesnotexceed2

therequiremen
boltsthetabulat
ermittedinshea
naltensilestreng
diameter,AD,w
t
eter
Stan
(D
6
0
2
4
7
0
1
2
2
2
3
3
ceprovidedallo
10.3.4:Minimum
(mm) At
distancesareper
dorslottedholes
ncesinthiscolu
25percentofth
ntsofSection10
tedvaluesshall
arplanes.
gthofthethrea
whichshallbela
TAB
ndard
ia.)
Ov
18
22
24
7
[a]

30
33
owstheuseofa
mEdgeDistanc
ShearedEdge
28
34
38
[d]

42
[d]

48
rmittedtobeus
s,seeTable10.1
umnarepermitte
hemaximumstre
0.17.
bereducedby1
dedportionofa
argerthanthen
BLE10.10.3.3:N
versize(Dia.)
20
24
28
30
35
38
25mm.boltifde
ce,
[a]
mm,from
es
P
edprovidedpro
10.3.5.
edtobereduce
engthintheelem
1percentforeac
anupsetrod,bas
ominalbodyare
NominalHoleD
HoleDimensio
Sho
(Width
18
22
24
27
30
33
esirable.
mCenterofStan
lates,Shapeso
ovisionsofSectio
d3mmwhenth
ment.
ch2mmover5
seduponthecro
eaoftherodbef
imensions,mm
ons
rtSlot
Length)
22
26
30

32
37
40
dardHole
[b]
to
AtRolledEdg
orBars,orThe
22
26
28
30
34
on10.10.3.10,a
heholeisatapo
diametersoflen
osssectionalare
foreupsettingti
m
LongSlo
(WidthLe
18 40
22 50
24 55
27 60
30 67
33 75
oEdgeofConne
gesof
ermallyCutEd
sappropriate,
ointwhererequ
ngthinthe
eaatits
mesFy.
ot
ength)
0
0
5

0
7
5
ectedPart
dges[c]
aresatisfied.
iredstrength

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6545
10.10.3.5 MaximumSpacingandEdgeDistance
The maximum distance from the center of any bolt orrivet to the nearestedge of partsin contact shall be 12
times the thickness of the connected part underconsideration, but shall not exceed 150mm. The longitudinal
spacingoffastenersbetweenelementsincontinuouscontactconsistingofaplateanda
Forpaintedmembersorunpaintedmembersnotsubjecttocorrosion,thespacingshallnotexceed24timesthe
thicknessofthethinnerplateor305mm.
For unpainted members of weathering steel subject to atmospheric corrosion, the spacing shall not exceed 14
timesthethicknessofthethinnerplateor180mm.
10.10.3.6 TensionandShearStrengthofBoltsandThreadedParts
Thedesigntensionorshearstrength,R
n
andtheallowabletensionorshearstrength,R
n
/,ofasnugtightened
orpretensionedhighstrengthboltorthreadedpartshallbedeterminedaccordingtothelimitstatesoftensile
ruptureandshearruptureasfollows:
R
n
= F
n
A
b
(10.10.3.1)
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
where
F
n
=nominaltensilestressF
nt
,orshearstress,F
nv
fromTable10.10.3.2,MPa
A
b
= nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or threaded part (for upset rods, see footnote d, Table 10.10.3.2,
mm
2

Therequiredtensilestrengthshallincludeanytensionresultingfrompryingactionproducedbydeformationof
theconnectedparts.
10.10.3.7CombinedTensionandShearinBearingTypeConnection
Theavailabletensilestrengthofaboltsubjectedtocombinedtensionandshearshallbedeterminedaccording
tothelimitstatesoftensionandshearruptureasfollows:
R
n
= F
nt
i
A
b
(10.10.3.2)
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
where
F
nt
i
=nominaltensilestressmodifiedtoincludetheeffectsofshearingstress,MPa
F
nt
i
= 1.SF
nt
-
F
nt
F
n

F
nt
(LRFB) (10.10.3.3a)
F
nt
i
= 1.SF
nt
-
F
nt
F
n

F
nt
(ASB) (10.10.3.3b)
F
nt
=nominaltensilestressfromTable10.10.3.2,MPa
F
nv
=nominalshearstressfromTable10.10.3.2,MPa
f
v
=therequiredshearstress,MPa
Theavailableshearstressofthefastenershallequalorexceedtherequiredshearstrengthperunitarea,f
v
.
10.10.3.7 HighStrengthBoltsinSlipCriticalConnections
Highstrength bolts in slipcritical connections are permitted to be designed to prevent slip either as a
serviceabilitylimitstateorattherequiredstrengthlimitstate.Theconnectionmustalsobecheckedforshear
strengthinaccordancewithSections10.10.3.6and10.10.3.7andbearingstrengthinaccordancewithSections
10.10.3.1and10.10.3.10.
Slipcritical connections shall be designed as follows, unless otherwise designated by the engineer of record.
Connectionswithstandardholesorslotstransversetothedirectionoftheloadshallbedesignedforslipasa
serviceabilitylimitstate.Connectionswithoversizedholesorslotsparalleltothe directionof theloadshallbe
designedtopreventslipattherequiredstrengthlevel.
Thedesignslipresistance,R
n
andtheallowableslipresistance,R
n
/,shallbedeterminedforthelimitstate
ofslipasfollows:
Part6
StructuralDesign

6546 Vol.2
R
n
=
u
b
sc
I
b
N
s
(10.10.3.4)
Forconnectionsinwhichpreventionofslipisaserviceabilitylimitstate
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
Forconnectionsdesignedtopreventslipattherequiredstrengthlevel
=0.85(LRFD) =1.76(ASD)
Where
=meanslipcoefficientforClassAorBsurfaces,asapplicable,orasestablishedbytests
= 0.35 for Class A surfaces (unpainted clean mill scale steel surfaces or surfaces with Class A coatings on
blastcleanedsteelandhotdippedgalvanizedandroughenedsurfaces)
=0.50forClassBsurfaces(unpaintedblastcleanedsteelsurfacesorsurfaceswithClassBcoatingsonblast
cleanedsteel)
D
u
=1.13;amultiplierthatreflectstheratioofthemeaninstalledboltpretensiontothespecifiedminimumbolt
pretension.Theuseofothervaluesmaybeapprovedbytheengineerofrecord.
h
sc
=holefactordeterminedasfollows:
a) Forstandardsizeholes h
sc
= 1.00
c) Foroversizedandshortslottedholes h
sc
= 0.85
d) Forlongslottedholes h
sc
= 0.70
N
s
=numberofslipplanes
T
b
=minimumfastenertensiongiveninTable10.10.3.1,kN
10.10.3.8 CombinedTensionandShearinSlipCriticalConnections
When a slipcritical connection is subjected to an applied tension that reduces the net clamping force, the
availableslipresistanceperbolt,fromSection10.10.3.8,shallbemultipliedbythefactor,k
s
,asfollows:
k
s
= 1 -
I
u

u
I
b
N
b
(LRFB) (10.10.3.5a)
k
s
= 1 -
1.SI
u

u
I
b
N
b
(ASB) (10.10.3.5b)
where
N
b
=numberofboltscarryingtheappliedtension
T
a
=tensionforceduetoASDloadcombinations,kN
T
b
=minimumfastenertensiongiveninTable10.10.3.1,kN
T
u
=tensionforceduetoLRFDloadcombinations,kN
10.10.3.10BearingStrengthatBoltHoles
Theavailablebearingstrength,R
n
andR
n
/,atboltholesshallbedeterminedforthelimitstateofbearingas
follows:
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
For a bolt in a connection with standard, oversized, and shortslotted holes, independent of the direction of
loading,oralongslottedholewiththeslotparalleltothedirectionofthebearingforce:
a) Whendeformationattheboltholeatserviceloadisadesignconsideration
R
n
= 1.2I
c
tF
u
2.4JtF
u
(10.10.3.6a)
e) Whendeformationattheboltholeatserviceloadisnotadesignconsideration
R
n
= 1.SI
c
tF
u
S.uJtF
u
(10.10.3.6b)
Foraboltinaconnectionwithlongslottedholeswiththeslotperpendiculartothedirectionofforce:
R
n
= 1.uI
c
tF
u
2.uJtF
u
(10.10.3.6c)
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6547
ForconnectionsmadeusingboltsthatpasscompletelythroughanunstiffenedboxmemberorHSSseeSection
10.10.7andEquation10.10.7.1,
where
d=nominalboltdiameter,mm
F
u
=specifiedminimumtensilestrengthoftheconnectedmaterial,MPa
L
c
=cleardistance,inthedirectionoftheforce,betweentheedgeoftheholeandtheedgeoftheadjacenthole
oredgeofthematerial,mm
t=thicknessofconnectedmaterial,mm
For connections, the bearing resistance shall be taken as the sum of the bearing resistances of the individual
bolts.
Bearingstrengthshallbecheckedforbothbearingtypeandslipcriticalconnections.Theuseofoversizedholes
andshortandlongslottedholesparalleltothelineofforceisrestrictedtoslipcriticalconnectionsperSection
10.10.3.2.
10.10.3.9 SpecialFasteners
ThenominalstrengthofspecialfastenersotherthantheboltspresentedinTable10.10.3.2shallbeverifiedby
tests.
10.10.3.10 TensionFasteners
WhenboltsorotherfastenersintensionareattachedtoanunstiffenedboxorHSSwall,thestrengthofthewall
shallbedeterminedbyrationalanalysis.
10.10.4 AffectedElementsofMembersandConnectingElements
This section applies to elements of members at connections and connecting elements, such as plates, gussets,
angles,andbrackets.
10.10.4.1 StrengthofElementsinTension
The design strength, R
n
and the allowable strength, R
n
/ , of affected and connecting elements loaded in
tensionshallbethelowervalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesoftensileyieldingandtensilerupture.
Fortensileyieldingofconnectingelements:
R
n
= F

A
g
(10.10.4.1)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
Fortensileruptureofconnectingelements:
R
n
= F
u
A
c
(10.10.4.2)
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
where
A
e
=effectivenetareaasdefinedinSection10.4.3.3,mm
2
;forbolted
spliceplates,A
e
=A
n
0.85A
g
10.10.4.2 StrengthofElementsinShear
The available shear yield strength of affected and connecting elements in shear shall be the lower value
obtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofshearyieldingandshearrupture:
Forshearyieldingoftheelement:
R
n
= u.6uF

A
g
(10.10.4.3)
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
Forshearruptureoftheelement:
R
n
= u.6uF
u
A
n
(10.10.4.4)
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
Part6
StructuralDesign

6548 Vol.2
where
A
nv
=netareasubjecttoshear,mm
2

10.10.4.3BlockShearStrength
The available strength for the limit state of block shear rupture along a shear failure path or path(s) and a
perpendiculartensionfailurepathshallbetakenas
R
n
= u.6uF
u
A
n
+ u
bs
F
u
A
nt
u.6F

A
g
+u
bs
F
u
A
nt
(10.10.4.5)
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
where
A
gv
=grossareasubjecttoshear,mm
2

A
nt
=netareasubjecttotension,mm
2

A
nv
=netareasubjecttoshear,mm
2

Wherethetensionstressisuniform,U
bs
=1;wherethetensionstressisnonuniform,U
bs
=0.5.
10.10.4.3 StrengthofElementsinCompression
Theavailablestrengthofconnectingelementsincompressionforthelimitstatesofyieldingandbucklingshall
bedeterminedasfollows.
ForKI r 2S
P
n
= F

A
g
(10.10.4.6)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
ForKI r > 2StheprovisionsofSection10.5apply.
10.10.5 Fillers
In welded construction, any filler 6 mm or more in thickness shall extend beyond theedges of the splice plate
andshallbeweldedtothepartonwhichitisfittedwithsufficientweldtotransmitthespliceplateload,applied
atthesurfaceofthefiller.Theweldsjoiningthespliceplatetothefillershallbesufficienttotransmitthesplice
plateloadandshallbelongenoughtoavoidoverloadingthefilleralongthetoeoftheweld.Anyfillerlessthan
6mmthickshallhaveitsedgesmadeflushwiththeedgesofthespliceplateandtheweldsizeshallbethesum
ofthesizenecessarytocarrythespliceplusthethicknessofthefillerplate.
Whenaboltthatcarriesloadpassesthroughfillersthatareequaltoorlessthan6mmthick,theshearstrength
shallbeusedwithoutreduction.Whenaboltthatcarriesloadpassesthroughfillersthataregreaterthan6mm
thick,oneofthefollowingrequirementsshallapply:
Forfillersthatareequaltoorlessthan19mmthick,theshearstrengthoftheboltsshallbemultipliedbythe
factor[10.0154(t6)],wheretisthetotalthicknessofthefillersupto19mm;
The fillers shall be extended beyond the joint and the filler extension shall be secured with enough bolts to
uniformlydistributethetotalforceintheconnectedelementoverthecombinedcrosssectionoftheconnected
elementandthefillers;
Thesizeofthejointshallbeincreasedtoaccommodateanumberofboltsthatisequivalenttothetotalnumber
requiredin(2)above;or
ThejointshallbedesignedtopreventslipatrequiredstrengthlevelsinaccordancewithSection10.10.3.8.
10.10.6 Splices
Groovewelded splices in plate girders and beams shall develop the nominal strength of the smaller spliced
section.Othertypesofsplicesincrosssectionsofplategirdersandbeamsshalldevelopthestrengthrequired
bytheforcesatthepointofthesplice.
10.10.7 BearingStrength
The design bearing strength, R
n
and the allowable bearing strength, R
n
/ , of surfaces in contact shall be
determinedforthelimitstateofbearing(localcompressiveyielding)asfollows:
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6549
Thenominalbearingstrength,R
n
,isdefinedasfollowsforthevarioustypesofbearing:
Formilledsurfaces,pinsinreamed,drilled,orboredholes,andendsoffittedbearingstiffeners:
R
n
= 1.8F

A
Pb
(10.10.7.1)
where
F
y
=specifiedminimumyieldstress,MPa
A
pb
=projectedbearingarea,mm
2

Forexpansionrollersandrockers:
Ifd635mm
R
n
= 1.2(F

- 9u)lJ2u (10.10.7.2)
Ifd>635mm
R
n
= Su.2(F

- 9u)lJ2u (10.10.7.3)
where
d=diameter,mm
l=lengthofbearing,mm
10.10.8 ColumnBasesandBearingonConcrete
Properprovisionshallbemadetotransferthecolumnloadsandmomentstothefootingsandfoundations.
In the absence of code regulations, the design bearing strength,
c
P
p
, and the allowable bearing strength, P
p
/
c
,forthelimitstateofconcretecrushingarepermittedtobetakenasfollows:

c
=0.60(LRFD)
c
=2.50(ASD)
Thenominalbearingstrength,P
p
,isdeterminedasfollows:
Onthefullareaofaconcretesupport:
P
P
= u.8
c
i
A
1
(10.10.8.1)
Onlessthanthefullareaofaconcretesupport:
P
P
= u.8
c
i
A
1
A
2
A
1
1.7
c
i
A
1

(10.10.8.2)
where
A
1
=areaofsteelconcentricallybearingonaconcretesupport,mm
2

A
2
=maximumareaoftheportionofthesupportingsurfacethatisgeometricallysimilartoandconcentricwith
theloadedarea,mm
2

10.10.9 AnchorRodsandEmbedments
Anchor rods shall be designed to provide the required resistance to loads on the completed structure at the
base of columns including the net tensile components of any bending moment that may result from load
combinations stipulated in Section 10.2.2. The anchor rods shall be designed in accordance with the
requirementsforthreadedpartsinTable10.10.3.2.
Largeroversizedandslottedholesarepermittedinbaseplateswhenadequatebearingisprovidedforthenut
byusingstructuralorplatewasherstobridgethehole.
Whenhorizontalforcesarepresentatcolumnbases,theseforcesshould,wherepossible,beresistedbybearing
against concrete elements or by shear friction between the column base plate and the foundation. When
anchor rods are designed to resist horizontal force the base plate hole size, the anchor rod setting tolerance,
andthehorizontalmovementofthecolumnshallbeconsideredinthedesign.
10.10.10 FlangesandWebswithConcentratedForces
This section applies to single and doubleconcentrated forces applied normal to the flange(s) of wide flange
sectionsandsimilarbuiltupshapes.Asingleconcentratedforcecanbeeithertensileorcompressive.Double
Part6
StructuralDesign

6550 Vol.2
concentrated forces are one tensile and one compressive and form a couple on the same side of the loaded
member.
When the required strength exceeds the available strength as determined for the limit states listed in this
section,stiffenersand/ordoublersshallbeprovidedandshallbesizedforthedifferencebetweentherequired
strength and the available strength for the applicable limit state. Stiffeners shall also meet the design
requirementsinSection10.10.10.8.DoublersshallalsomeetthedesignrequirementinSection10.10.10.9.
StiffenersarerequiredatunframedendsofbeamsinaccordancewiththerequirementsofSection10.10.10.7.
10.10.10.1 FlangeLocalBending
This section applies to tensile singleconcentrated forces and the tensile component of doubleconcentrated
forces.
Thedesignstrength,R
n
andtheallowablestrength,R
n
/,forthelimitstateofflangelocalbendingshallbe
determinedasfollows:
R
n
= 6.2St
]
2
F
]
(10.10.10.1)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
where
F
yf
=specifiedminimumyieldstressoftheflange,MPa
t
f
=thicknessoftheloadedflange,mm
If the length of loading across the member flange is less than 0.15b
f
, where b
f
is the member flange width,
Equation10.10.10.1neednotbechecked.
Whentheconcentratedforcetoberesistedisappliedatadistancefromthememberendthatislessthan10t
f
,
R
n
shallbereducedby50percent.
Whenrequired,apairoftransversestiffenersshallbeprovided.
10.10.10.2 WebLocalYielding
Thissectionappliestosingleconcentratedforcesandbothcomponentsofdoubleconcentratedforces.
Theavailablestrengthforthelimitstateofweblocalyieldingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
Thenominalstrength,R
n
,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
Whentheconcentratedforcetoberesistedisappliedatadistancefromthememberendthatisgreaterthan
thedepthofthememberd,
R
n
= (Sk + N)F
w
t
w
(10.10.10.2)
When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the member end that is less than or
equaltothedepthofthememberd,
R
n
= (2.Sk + N)F
w
t
w
(10.10.10.3)
where
k=distancefromouterfaceoftheflangetothewebtoeofthefillet,mm
F
yw
=specifiedminimumyieldstressoftheweb,MPa
N =lengthofbearing(notlessthankforendbeamreactions),mm
t
w
=webthickness,mm
Whenrequired,apairoftransversestiffenersoradoublerplateshallbeprovided.
10.10.10.3 WebCrippling
This section applies to compressive singleconcentrated forces or the compressive component of double
concentratedforces.
Theavailablestrengthforthelimitstateofweblocalcripplingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
Thenominalstrength,R
n
,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6551
Whentheconcentratedcompressiveforcetoberesistedisappliedatadistancefromthememberendthatis
greaterthanorequaltod/2:
R
n
= u.8ut
w
2
_1 +S _
N
J
] _
t
w
t
]
_
1.5
_ _
EF
w
t
]
t
w

(10.10.10.4)
Whentheconcentratedcompressiveforcetoberesistedisappliedatadistancefromthememberendthatis
lessthand/2:
ForN/d0.2
R
n
= u.4ut
w
2
_1 +S _
N
J
] _
t
w
t
]
_
1.5
_ _
EF
w
t
]
t
w

(10.10.10.5a)
ForN/d>0.2
R
n
= u.4ut
w
2
_1 +_
4N
J
- u.2] _
t
w
t
]
_
1.5
_ _
EF
w
t
]
t
w

(10.10.10.5b)
where
d=overalldepthofthemember,mm
t
f
=flangethickness,mm
Whenrequired,atransversestiffenerorpairoftransversestiffeners,oradoublerplateextendingatleastone
halfthedepthofthewebshallbeprovided.
10.10.10.4 WebSideswayBuckling
This Section applies only to compressive singleconcentrated forces applied to members where relative lateral
movement between the loaded compression flange and the tension flange is not restrained at the point of
applicationoftheconcentratedforce.
Theavailablestrengthofthewebshallbedeterminedasfollows:
=0.85(LRFD) =1.76(ASD)
Thenominalstrength,R
n
,forthelimitstateofwebsideswaybucklingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
Ifthecompressionflangeisrestrainedagainstrotation:
For(b t
w
)(l b
]
) 2.S
R
n
=
C

t
w
3
t
]
b
2
_1 + u.4 _
b t
w

l b
]

_
3
_ (10.10.10.6)
For(b t
w
)(l b
]
) > 2.S,thelimitstateofwebsideswaybucklingdoesnotapply.
Whentherequiredstrengthofthewebexceedstheavailablestrength,locallateralbracingshallbeprovidedat
thetensionflangeoreitherapairoftransversestiffenersoradoublerplateshallbeprovided.
Ifthecompressionflangeisnotrestrainedagainstrotation
For(b t
w
)(l b
]
) 1.7
R
n
=
C

t
w
3
t
]
b
2
_u.4_
b t
w

l b
]

_
3
_ (10.10.10.7)
For(b t
w
)(l b
]
) > 1.7thelimitstateofwebsideswaybucklingdoesnotapply.
Whentherequiredstrengthofthewebexceedstheavailablestrength,locallateralbracingshallbeprovidedat
bothflangesatthepointofapplicationoftheconcentratedforces.
InEquations10.10.10.6and10.10.10.7,thefollowingdefinitionsapply:
b
f
=flangewidth,mm
C
r
=6.6210
6
MPawhenM
u
<M
y
(LRFD)or1.5M
a
<M
y
(ASD)atthelocationoftheforce
Part6
StructuralDesign

6552 Vol.2
=3.3110
6
MPawhenM
u
M
y
(LRFD)or1.5M
a
M
y
(ASD)atthelocationoftheforce
h=cleardistancebetweenflangeslessthefilletorcornerradiusforrolledshapes;distancebetweenadjacent
linesoffastenersorthecleardistancebetweenflangeswhenweldsareusedforbuiltupshapes,mm
l =largestlaterallyunbracedlengthalongeitherflangeatthepointofload,mm
t
f
=flangethickness,mm
t
w
=webthickness,mm
10.10.10.5 WebCompressionBuckling
ThisSectionappliestoapairofcompressivesingleconcentratedforcesorthecompressivecomponentsinapair
ofdoubleconcentratedforces,appliedatbothflangesofamemberatthesamelocation.
Theavailablestrengthforthelimitstateofweblocalbucklingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
R
n
=
24t
w
3

EF
w
b

(10.10.10.8)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
Whenthepairofconcentratedcompressiveforcestoberesistedisappliedatadistancefromthememberend
thatislessthand/2,R
n
shallbereducedby50percent.
Whenrequired,asingletransversestiffener,apairoftransversestiffeners,oradoublerplateextendingthefull
depthofthewebshallbeprovided.
10.10.10.6 WebPanelZoneShear
This section applies to doubleconcentrated forces applied to one or both flanges of a member at the same
location.
Theavailablestrengthofthewebpanelzoneforthelimitstateofshearyieldingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
Thenominalstrength,R
n
,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
Whentheeffectofpanelzonedeformationonframestabilityisnotconsideredintheanalysis:
ForP

u.4P
c

R
n
= u.6uF

J
c
t
w
(10.10.10.9)
ForP

> u.4P
c

R
n
= u.6uF

J
c
t
w
_1.4 -
P

P
c
] (10.10.10.10)
Whenframestability,includingplasticpanelzonedeformation,isconsideredintheanalysis:
For P

u.7SP
c

R
n
= u.6uF

J
c
t
w
_1 +
Sb
c]
t
c]
2
J
b
J
c
t
w
_ (10.10.10.11)
ForP

> u.7SP
c

R
n
= u.6uF

J
c
t
w
_1 +
Sb
c]
t
c]
2
J
b
J
c
t
w
__1.9 -
1.2P

P
c
] (10.10.10.12)
InEquations10.10.10.9through10.10.10.12,thefollowingdefinitionsapply:
A=columncrosssectionalarea,mm
2

b
cf
=widthofcolumnflange,mm
d
b
=beamdepth,mm
d
c
=columndepth,mm
F
y
=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthecolumnweb,MPa
P
c
=P
y
,N(LRFD)
P
c
=0.6P
y
,N(ASD)
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6553
P
r
=requiredstrength,N
P
y
=F
y
A,axialyieldstrengthofthecolumn,N
t
cf
=thicknessofthecolumnflange,mm
t
w
=columnwebthickness,mm
When required, doubler plate(s) ora pair of diagonal stiffeners shall be provided within the boundaries of the
rigidconnectionwhosewebslieinacommonplane.
SeeSection10.10.10.9fordoublerplatedesignrequirements.
10.10.10.7 UnframedEndsofBeamsandGirders
Atunframedendsofbeamsandgirdersnototherwiserestrainedagainstrotationabouttheirlongitudinalaxes,
apairoftransversestiffeners,extendingthefulldepthoftheweb,shallbeprovided.
10.10.10.8 AdditionalStiffenersRequirementsforConcentratedForces
Stiffenersrequired toresist tensile concentrated forcesshall be designed inaccordancewith the requirements
of Section 10.4 and welded to the loaded flange and the web. The welds to the flange shall be sized for the
differencebetweentherequiredstrengthandavailablelimitstatestrength.Thestiffenertowebweldsshallbe
sizedtotransfertothewebthealgebraicdifferenceintensileforceattheendsofthestiffener.
Stiffeners required to resist compressive concentrated forces shall be designed in accordance with the
requirementsinSections10.5.6.2and10.10.4.4andshalleitherbearonorbeweldedtotheloadedflangeand
weldedtotheweb.Theweldstotheflangeshallbesizedforthedifferencebetweentherequiredstrengthand
the applicable limit state strength. The weld to the web shall be sized to transfer to the web the algebraic
differenceincompressionforceattheendsofthestiffener.Forfittedbearingstiffeners,seeSection10.10.7.
Transversefulldepthbearingstiffenersforcompressiveforcesappliedtoabeamorplategirderflange(s)shall
bedesignedasaxiallycompressedmembers(columns)inaccordancewiththerequirementsofSections10.5.6.2
and10.10.4.4.
Thememberpropertiesshallbedeterminedusinganeffectivelengthof0.75handacrosssectioncomposedof
two stiffeners and a strip of the web having a width of 25t
w
at interior stiffeners and 12t
w
at the ends of
members.Theweldconnectingfulldepthbearingstiffenerstothewebshallbesizedtotransmitthedifference
incompressiveforceateachofthestiffenerstotheweb.
Transverseanddiagonalstiffenersshallcomplywiththefollowingadditionalcriteria:
Thewidthofeachstiffenerplusonehalfthethicknessofthecolumnwebshallnotbelessthanonethirdofthe
widthoftheflangeormomentconnectionplatedeliveringtheconcentratedforce.
The thickness of a stiffener shall not be less than onehalf the thickness of the flange or moment connection
platedeliveringtheconcentratedload,andgreaterthanorequaltothewidthdividedby15.
Transverse stiffeners shall extend a minimum of onehalf the depth of the member except as required in
10.10.10.5and10.10.10.7.
10.10.10.9AdditionaldoublerPlateRequirementsforConcentratedForces
Doubler plates required for compression strength shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of
Section10.5.
Doubler plates required for tensile strength shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of Section
10.4.
Doubler plates required for shear strength (see Section 10.10.10.6) shall be designed in accordance with the
provisionsofSection10.7.
Inaddition,doublerplatesshallcomplywiththefollowingcriteria:
Thethicknessandextentofthedoublerplateshallprovidetheadditionalmaterialnecessarytoequalorexceed
thestrengthrequirements.
Thedoublerplateshallbeweldedtodeveloptheproportionofthetotalforcetransmittedtothedoublerplate.

Part6
StructuralDesign
6554 Vol.2
10.11 DesignofHSSandBoxMemberConnections
ThissectioncoversmemberstrengthdesignconsiderationspertainingtoconnectionstoHSSmembersandbox
sectionsofuniformwallthickness.SeealsoSection10.10foradditionalrequirementsforboltingtoHSS.
10.11.1 ConcentratedForcesonHSS
10.11.1.1 DefinitionsofParameters
B=overallwidthofrectangularHSSmember,measured90degreestotheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
B
p
=widthofplate,measured90degreestotheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
D=outsidediameterofroundHSSmember,mm.
F
y
=specifiedminimumyieldstressofHSSmembermaterial,MPa.
F
yp
=specifiedminimumyieldstressofplate,MPa.
F
u
=specifiedminimumtensilestrengthofHSSmaterial,MPa.
H=overallheightofrectangularHSSmember,measuredintheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
N=bearinglengthoftheload,measuredparalleltotheaxisoftheHSSmember,(ormeasuredacrossthe
widthoftheHSSinthecaseofloadedcapplates),mm.
t =designwallthicknessofHSSmember,mm.
t
p
=thicknessofplate,mm.
10.11.1.2 LimitsofApplicability
The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection configuration is within the following limits of
applicability:
Strength:Fy360MPa.forHSS
Ductility:Fy/Fu0.8forHSS
Otherlimitsapplyforspecificcriteria
10.11.1.3 ConcentratedForceDistributedTransversely
10.11.1.3.1CriterionforRoundHSS
WhenaconcentratedforceisdistributedtransverselytotheaxisoftheHSSthedesignstrength,R
n
andthe
allowablestrength,R
n
/,forthelimitstateoflocalyieldingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
R
n
= F

t
2
|S.S(1 -u.81B
P
)]
]
(1u.11.1.1)
= u.9u(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
whereQ
f
isgivenbyEquation10.11.2.1.Additionallimitsofapplicabilityare
0.2<B
p
/D1.0
D/t50forTconnectionsandD/t40forcrossconnections
10.11.1.3.2CriterionforRectangularHSS
When a concentrated force is distributed transversely to theaxis of the HSS thedesignstrength, Rn and the
allowablestrength,Rn/,shallbethelowestvalueaccordingtothelimitstatesoflocalyieldingduetouneven
loaddistribution,shearyielding(punching)andsidewallstrength.
Additionallimitsofapplicabilityare
0.25<Bp/B1.0
B/tfortheloadedHSSwall35
Forthelimitstateoflocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistributionintheloadedplate,
R
n
= |1uF

t(Bt)]B
P
F
P
t
P
B
P
(1u.11.1.2)
= u.9S(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
Forthelimitstateofshearyielding(punching),
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6555
R
n
= u.6F

t|2t
P
+2B
cp
] (1u.11.1.S)
= u.9S(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
Where
B
cp
= 1uB
p
(Bt) B
p

ThislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhenBp>(B2t),norwhenBp<0.85B.
For the limit state of sidewall under tension loading, the available strength shall be taken as the strength for
sidewall local yielding. For the limit state of sidewall under compression loading, available strength shall be
takenasthelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofsidewalllocalyielding,sidewalllocalcrippling
andsidewalllocalbuckling.
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedunlessthechordmemberandbranchmember(connectingelement)have
thesamewidth(=1.0).
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalyielding,
R
n
= 2F

t|Sk +N] (1u.11.1.4)

= 1.u(LRFD)=1.50(ASD)
where
k=outsidecornerradiusoftheHSS,whichispermittedtobetakenas1.5tifunknown,mm.
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalcrippling,inTconnections,
R
n
= 1.6t
2
|1 + SN(E - St)](EF

)
0.5

]
(1u.11.1.S)
= u.7S(LRFD)=2.0(ASD)
whereQfisgivenbyEquation10.11.2.10.
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalbucklingincrossconnections,
R
n
= |48t
3
(E -St)](EF

)
0.5

]
(1u.11.1.6)
= u.9u(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
whereQfisgivenbyEquation10.11.2.10
The nonuniformity of load transfer along the line of weld, due to the flexibility of the HSS wall in a transverse
platetoHSSconnection,shallbeconsideredinproportioningsuchwelds.Thisrequirementcanbesatisfiedby
limitingthetotaleffectiveweldlength,Le,ofgrooveandfilletweldstorectangularHSSasfollows:
I
c
= 2|1u(Bt)]|(F
t
t)(F
p
t
p
)]B
p
2B
p
(1u.11.1.7)
where
Le=totaleffectiveweldlengthforweldsonbothsidesofthetransverseplate,mm.
InlieuofEquation10.11.17,thisrequirementmaybesatisfiedbyotherrationalapproaches.
10.11.1.4 Concentrated Force Distributed Longitudinally at the Center of the HSS Diameter or Width and
ActingPerpendiculartotheHSSAxis
When a concentrated force is distributed longitudinally along the axis of the HSS at the center of the HSS
diameter or width, and also acts perpendicular to the axis direction of the HSS (or has a component
perpendicular to the axis direction of the HSS), the design strength, R
n
and the allowable strength, R
n
/ ,
perpendiculartotheHSSaxisshallbedeterminedforthelimitstateofchordplastificationasfollows.
10.11.1.4.1CriterionforRoundHSS
Anadditionallimitofapplicabilityis:
D/t50forTconnectionsandD/t40forcrossconnections
R
n
= S.SF

t
2
(1 +u.2SN)
]
(1u.11.1.8)
= u.9u(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
whereQ
f
isgivenbyEquation10.11.2.1.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6556 Vol.2
10.11.1.4.2CriterionforRectangularHSS
Anadditionallimitofapplicabilityis:
B/tfortheloadedHSSwall40
R
n
= |F

t
2
(1 - t
P
B )]|2NB +4(1 -t
P
B)
0.5

]
] (1u.11.1.9)
= 1.uu(LRFD)=1.50(ASD)
where
Q
f
=(1U
2
)
0.5

UisgivenbyEquation10.11.2.12
10.11.1.5 ConcentratedForceDistributedLongitudinallyattheCenteroftheHSSWidthandActingParallelto
theHSSAxis
WhenaconcentratedforceisdistributedlongitudinallyalongtheaxisofarectangularHSSandalsoactsparallel
buteccentrictotheaxisdirectionofthemember,theconnectionshallbeverifiedasfollows:
F
P
t
P
F
u
t (1u.11.1.1u)
10.11.1.6 ConcentratedAxialForceontheEndofaRectangularHSSwithaCapPlate
WhenaconcentratedforceactsontheendofacappedHSSandtheforceisinthedirectionoftheHSSaxis,the
design strength, R
n
and the allowable strength, R
n
/ , shall be determined for the limit states of wall local
yielding (due to tensile or compressive forces) and wall local crippling (due to compressive forces only), with
considerationforshearlag,asfollows.
If(5t
p
+N)B,theavailablestrengthoftheHSSiscomputedbysummingthecontributionsofallfourHSSwalls.
If(5t
p
+N)<B,theavailablestrengthoftheHSSiscomputedbysummingthecontributionsofthetwowallsinto
whichtheloadisdistributed.
Forthelimitstateofwalllocalyielding,foronewall,
R
n
= F

t|St
P
+ N] BF

t (1u.11.1.11)
= 1.uu(LRFD)=1.50(ASD)
Forthelimitstateofwalllocalcrippling,foronewall,
R
n
= u.8t
2
|1 + (6NB)(tt
P
)
1.5
]|EF

t
P
t]
0.5
(1u.11.1.12)
= u.7S(LRFD)=2.00(ASD)

10.11.2 HSSToHSSTrussConnections
HSStoHSStrussconnectionsaredefinedasconnectionsthatconsistofoneormorebranchmembersthatare
directlyweldedtoacontinuouschordthatpassesthroughtheconnectionandshallbeclassifiedasfollows:
a) Whenthepunchingload(P
r
sin)inabranchmemberisequilibratedbybeamshearinthe
chordmember,theconnectionshallbeclassifiedasaTconnectionwhenthebranchis
perpendiculartothechordandaYconnectionotherwise.
b) Whenthepunchingload(P
r
sin)inabranchmemberisessentiallyequilibrated(within20
percent)byloadsinotherbranchmember(s)onthesamesideoftheconnection,the
connectionshallbeclassifiedasaKconnection.Therelevantgapisbetweentheprimary
branchmemberswhoseloadsequilibrate.AnNconnectioncanbeconsideredasatypeofK
connection.
c) Whenthepunchingload(P
r
sin)istransmittedthroughthechordmemberandisequilibrated
bybranchmember(s)ontheoppositeside,theconnectionshallbeclassifiedasacross
connection.
d) Whenaconnectionhasmorethantwoprimarybranchmembersorbranchmembersinmore
thanoneplane,theconnectionshallbeclassifiedasageneralormultiplanarconnection.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6557
e) WhenbranchmemberstransmitpartoftheirloadasKconnectionsandpartoftheirloadasT,
Y,orcrossconnections,thenominalstrengthshallbedeterminedbyinterpolationonthe
proportionofeachintotal.
For the purposes of this Specification, the centerlines of branch members and chord members shall lie in a
common plane. Rectangular HSS connections are further limited to have all members oriented with walls
parallel to the plane. For trusses that are made with HSS that are connected by welding branch members to
chord members, eccentricities within the limits of applicability are permitted without consideration of the
resultingmomentsforthedesignoftheconnection.
10.11.2.1 DefinitionsofParameters
B=overallwidthofrectangularHSSmainmember,measured90degreestotheplaneoftheconnection,
mm.
B
b
= overall width of rectangular HSS branch member, measured 90 degrees to the plane of the
connection,mm.
D=outsidediameterofroundHSSmainmember,mm.
D
b
=outsidediameterofroundHSSbranchmember,mm.
E=eccentricityinatrussconnection,positivebeingawayfromthebranches,mm.
F
y
=specifiedminimumyieldstressofHSSmainmembermaterial,MPa.
F
yb
=specifiedminimumyieldstressofHSSbranchmembermaterial,MPa.
F
u
=specifiedminimumtensilestrengthofHSSmaterial,MPa.
G=gapbetweentoesofbranchmembersinagappedKconnection,neglectingthewelds,mm.
H=overallheightofrectangularHSSmainmember,measuredintheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
H
b
=overallheightofrectangularHSSbranchmember,measuredintheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
t =designwallthicknessofHSSmainmember,mm.
t
b
=designwallthicknessofHSSbranchmember,mm.
=thewidthratio;theratioofbranchdiametertochorddiameter=D
b
/DforroundHSS;theratioof
overallbranchwidthtochordwidth=B
b
/BforrectangularHSS

eff
= the effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters of the two branch members in a Kconnection
dividedbyeighttimesthechordwidth
y=thechordslendernessratio;theratioofonehalfthediametertothewallthickness=D/(2t)forround
HSS;theratioofonehalfthewidthtowallthickness=B/(2t)forrectangularHSS
=theloadlengthparameter,applicableonlytorectangularHSS;theratioofthelengthofcontactofthe
branchwiththechordintheplaneoftheconnectiontothechordwidth=N/B,whereN=H
b
/sin
=acuteanglebetweenthebranchandchord(degrees)
=thegapratio;theratioofthegapbetweenthebranchesofagappedKconnectiontothewidthofthe
chord=g/BforrectangularHSS
10.11.2.2 CriteriaforRoundHSS
The interaction of stress due to chord member forces and local branch connection forces shall be
incorporatedthroughthechordstressinteractionparameterQ
f
.
Whenthechordisintension,

]
= 1
Whenthechordisincompression,

]
= 1.u -u.Su(1 + u) (1u.11.2.1)
whereUistheutilizationratiogivenby
u = |P

(A
g
F
c
) + H

(SF
c
)| (1u.11.2.2)
and
Part6
StructuralDesign
6558 Vol.2
P
r
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,N;forKconnections,P
r
istobedeterminedonthesideofthejointthat
hasthelowercompressionstress(lowerU)
M
r
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,Nmm.
A
g
=chordgrossarea,mm
2

F
c
=availablestress,MPa.
S=chordelasticsectionmodulus,mm
3

FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD):
P
r
=P
u
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,usingLRFDloadcombinations,N
M
r
=M
u
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
F
c
=F
y
,MPa.
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD):
P
r
=P
a
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,usingASDloadcombinations,N
M
r
=M
a
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
F
c
=0.6F
y
,MPa.
10.11.2.2.1LimitsofApplicability
The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection configuration is within the following limits of
applicability:
Jointeccentricity:0.55De0.25D,whereDisthechorddiameterandeispositiveawayfromthebranches
Branchangle:030
0

Chordwallslenderness:ratioofdiametertowallthicknesslessthanorequalto50forT,YandKconnections;
lessthanorequalto40forcrossconnections
Tensionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofdiametertowallthicknesslessthanorequalto50
Compressionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofdiametertowallthicknesslessthanorequalto0.05E/F
y

Widthratio:0.2<D
b
/D1.0ingeneral,and0.4D
b
/D1.0forgappedKconnections
Ifagapconnection:ggreaterthanorequaltothesumofthebranchwallthicknesses
If an overlap connection: 25% O
v
100%, where O
v
= (q / p) 100%. P is the projected length of the
overlapping branch on the chord; q is the overlap length measured along the connecting face of the chord
beneath the two branches. For overlap connections, the larger (or if equal diameter, the thicker) branch is a
thrumemberconnecteddirectlytothechord.
Branchthicknessratioforoverlapconnections:thicknessofoverlappingbranchtobelessthanorequaltothe
thicknessoftheoverlappedbranch
Strength:F
y
360MPa.forchordandbranches
Ductility:F
y
/F
u
0.8
10.11.2.2.2BrancheswithAxialLoadsinT,YandCrossConnections
ForTandYconnections,thedesignstrengthofthebranchP
n
ortheallowablestrengthofthebranch,P
n
/
, shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of chord plastification and shear yielding
(punching).
ForthelimitstateofchordplastificationinTandYconnections,
P
n
sin = F

t
2
|S.1 +1S.6
2
]y
0.2

]
(1u.11.2.S)
= u.9u(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
Forthelimitstateofshearyielding(punching),
P
n
= u.6F

tn
b
|(1 +sin)2sin
2
] (1u.11.2.4)
= u.9S(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen>(11/y).
Forthelimitstateofchordplastificationincrossconnections,
P
n
sin = F

t
2
|S.7(1 -u.81)]
]
(1u.11.2.S)
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6559
= u.9u(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
10.11.2.2.3BrancheswithAxialLoadsinKConnections
ForKconnections,thedesignstrengthofthebranch,P
n
andtheallowablestrengthofthebranch,P
n
/,shall
be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of chord plastification for gapped and overlapped
connectionsandshearyielding(punching)forgappedconnectionsonly.
Forthelimitstateofchordplastification,
=0.90(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
Forthecompressionbranch:
P
n
sin = F

t
2
|2.u + 11.SS
b
]
g

]
(1u.11.2.6)
whereD
b
referstothecompressionbranchonly,and

g
= y
0.2
_1 +
u.u24y
1.2
c
(
0.Sg
t
-1.33)
+1
_
(1u.11.2.7)
In gapped connections, g (measured along the crown of the chord neglecting weld dimensions) is positive. In
overlappedconnections,gisnegativeandequalsq.
Forthetensionbranch,
P
n
sin = (P
n
sin)
comprcssIon branch
(1u.11.2.8)
Forthelimitstateofshearyielding(punching)ingappedKconnections,
P
n
= u.6F

tn
b
|(1 +sin )2sin
2
] (1u.11.2.9)
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
10.11.2.3 CriteriaforRectangularHSS
Theinteractionofstressduetochordmemberforcesandlocalbranchconnectionforcesshallbeincorporated
throughthechordstressinteractionparameterQ
f
.
Whenthechordisintension,
Q
f
=1
WhenthechordisincompressioninT,Y,andcrossconnections,

]
= 1.S -u.4u 1 (1u.11.2.1u)
WhenthechordisincompressioningappedKconnections,

]
= 1.S -u.4u
c]]
1 (1u.11.2.11)
whereUistheutilizationratiogivenby
u = |P

(A
g
F
c
) + H

(SF
c
)| (1u.11.2.12)
and
P
r
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,N.ForgappedKconnections,P
r
istobedeterminedonthesideofthe
jointthathasthehighercompressionstress(higherU).
M
r
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,Nmm.
A
g
=chordgrossarea,mm
2

F
c
=availablestress,MPa.
S=chordelasticsectionmodulus,mm
3

FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD):
P
r
=P
u
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,usingLRFDloadcombinations,N
M
r
=M
u
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
F
c
=F
y,
MPa.
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD):
P
r
=P
a
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,usingASDloadcombinations,N.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6560 Vol.2
M
r
=M
a
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
F
c
=0.6F
y
,MPa.
10.11.2.3.1LimitsofApplicability
Thecriteriahereinareapplicableonlywhentheconnectionconfigurationiswithinthefollowinglimits:
Jointeccentricity:0.55He0.25H,whereHisthechorddepthandeispositiveawayfromthebranches
Branchangle:30
0

Chord wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall width to thickness less than or equal to 35 for gapped K
connectionsandT,Yandcrossconnections;lessthanorequalto30foroverlappedKconnections
Tensionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofoverallwallwidthtothicknesslessthanorequalto35
Compressionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofoverallwallwidthtothicknesslessthanorequalto1.25(E/F
yb
)
0.5

and also less than 35 for gapped Kconnections and T, Y and crossconnections; less than or equal to
1.1(E/F
yb
)
0.5
foroverlappedKconnections
Widthratio:ratioofoverallwallwidthofbranchtooverallwallwidthofchordgreaterthanorequalto0.25for
T,Y,crossandoverlappedKconnections;greaterthanorequalto0.35forgappedKconnections
Aspectratio:0.5ratioofdepthtowidth2.0
Overlap:25%O
v
100%,whereO
v
=(q/p)100%.pistheprojectedlengthoftheoverlappingbranchon
thechord;qistheoverlaplengthmeasuredalongtheconnectingfaceofthechordbeneaththetwobranches.
Foroverlapconnections,thelarger(orifequalwidth,thethicker)branchisathrumemberconnecteddirectly
tothechord
Branch width ratio for overlap connections: ratio of overall wall width of overlapping branch to overall wall
widthofoverlappedbranchgreaterthanorequalto0.75
Branchthicknessratioforoverlapconnections:thicknessofoverlappingbranchtobelessthanorequaltothe
thicknessoftheoverlappedbranch
Strength:F
y
360MPa.forchordandbranches
Ductility:F
y
/F
u
0.8
Otherlimitsapplyforspecificcriteria
10.11.2.3.2BrancheswithAxialLoadsinT,YandCrossConnections
For T, Y and crossconnections, the design strength of the branch, P
n
or the allowable strength of the
branch,P
n
/,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothelimitstatesofchordwallplastification,shear
yielding(punching),sidewallstrengthandlocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistribution.Inadditiontothelimits
ofapplicabilityinSection10.11.2.3a,shallnotbelessthan0.25.
Forthelimitstateofchordwallplastification,
P
n
sin = F

t
2
|2(1 -) +4(1 -)
0.5
]
]
(1u.11.2.1S)
=1.00(LRFD)=1.50(ASD)
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen>0.85.
Forthelimitstateofshearyielding(punching),
P
n
sin = u.6F

tB|2 +2
coP
] (1u.11.2.14)
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
InEquation10.11.2.14,theeffectiveoutsidepunchingparameter
eop
=5/shallnotexceed.
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen>(11/ ),norwhen<0.85andB/t10.
For the limit state of sidewall strength, the available strength for branches in tension shall be taken as the
available strength for sidewall local yielding. For the limit state of sidewall strength, the available strength for
branchesincompressionshallbetakenasthelowerofthestrengthsforsidewalllocalyieldingandsidewalllocal
crippling.Forcrossconnectionswithabranchanglelessthan90degrees,anadditionalcheckforchordsidewall
shearfailuremustbemadeinaccordancewithSection10.7.5.
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedunlessthechordmemberandbranchmemberhavethesamewidth(=
1.0)
Forthelimitstateoflocalyielding,
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6561
P
n
sin = 2F

t|Sk + N] (1u.11.2.1S)
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
where
k=outsidecornerradiusoftheHSS,whichispermittedtobetakenas1.5tifunknown,mm.
N=bearinglengthoftheload,paralleltotheaxisoftheHSSmainmember,H
b
/sin,mm.
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalcrippling,inTandYconnections,
P
n
sin = 1.6t
2
|1 + SN(E -St)](EF

)
0.5

]
(1u.11.2.16)
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalcripplingincrossconnections,
P
n
sin = |48t
3
(E -St)](EF

)
0.5

]
(1u.11.2.17)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
Forthelimitstateoflocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistribution,
P
n
= F
b
t
b
|2E
b
+2b
co
-4t
b
] (1u.11.2.18)
=0.95(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
where
b
co
= |1u(Bt)]|F

t(F
b
t
b
)]B
b
B
b
(1u.11.2.19)
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen<0.85.
10.11.2.3.3BrancheswithAxialLoadsinGappedKConnections
ForgappedKconnections,thedesignstrengthofthebranch,P
n
ortheallowablestrengthofthebranch,P
n
/,
shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of chord wall plastification, shear yielding
(punching), shear yielding and local yielding due to uneven load distribution. In addition to the limits of
applicabilityinSection10.11.2.3a,thefollowinglimitsshallapply:
a) B
b
/B0.1+y/50
b)
eff
0.35
c) 0.5(1
eff
)
d) Gap:ggreaterthanorequaltothesumofthebranchwallthicknesses
e) ThesmallerB
b
>0.63timesthelargerB
b
Forthelimitstateofchordwallplastification,
P
n
sin = F

t
2
|9.8
c]]
y
0.5
]
]
(1u.11.2.2u)
=0.90(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
Forthelimitstateofshearyielding(punching),
P
n
sin = u.6F

tB|2 + +
cop
] (1u.11.2.21)
=0.95(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
Intheaboveequation,theeffectiveoutsidepunchingparameter
eop
=5/shallnotexceed.
ThislimitstateneedonlybecheckedifB
b
<(B2t)orthebranchisnotsquare.
For the limit state of shear yielding of the chord in the gap, available strength shall be checked in accordance
withSection10.7.Thislimitstateneedonlybecheckedifthechordisnotsquare.
Forthelimitstateoflocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistribution,
P
n
= F
b
t
b
|2E
b
+B
b
+b
co
-4t
b
] (1u.11.2.22)
=0.95(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
where
b
co
= |1u(Bt)]|F

t(F
b
t
b
)]B
b
B
b
(1u.11.2.2S)
Part6
StructuralDesign
6562 Vol.2
ThislimitstateneedonlybecheckedifthebranchisnotsquareorB/t<15.
10.11.2.3.4BrancheswithAxialLoadsinOverlappedKConnections
ForoverlappedKconnections,thedesignstrengthofthebranch,P
n
ortheallowablestrengthofthebranch,
P
n
/shallbedeterminedfromthelimitstateoflocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistribution,
=0.95(LRFD)=1.58(ASD)
Fortheoverlappingbranchandforoverlap25%O
v
50%measuredwithrespecttotheoverlappingbranch,
P
n
= F
b
t
b
|(0

Su)(2E
b
- 4t
b
) + b
co
+b
co
] (1u.11.2.24)
Fortheoverlappingbranch,andforoverlap50%O
v
<80%measuredwithrespecttotheoverlappingbranch,
P
n
= F
b
t
b
|2E
b
-4t
b
+ b
co
+b
co
] (1u.11.2.2S)
Fortheoverlappingbranchandforoverlap80%O
v
100%measuredwithrespecttotheoverlappingbranch,
P
n
= F
b
t
b
|2E
b
-4t
b
+ B
b
+b
co
] (1u.11.2.26)
where
b
eoi
istheeffectivewidthofthebranchfaceweldedtothechord,
b
co
= |1u(Bt)]|(F

t)(F
b
t
b
)]B
b
B
b
(1u.11.2.27)
b
eov
istheeffectivewidthofthebranchfaceweldedtotheoverlappedbrace,
b
co
= |1u(B
b]
t
b]
)]|(F
b]
t
b]
)(F
b
t
b
)]B
b
B
b
(1u.11.2.28)
B
bi
=overallbranchwidthoftheoverlappingbranch,mm.
B
bj
=overallbranchwidthoftheoverlappedbranch,mm.
F
ybi
=specifiedminimumyieldstressoftheoverlappingbranchmaterial,MPa.
F
ybj
=specifiedminimumyieldstressoftheoverlappedbranchmaterial,MPa.
H
bi
=overalldepthoftheoverlappingbranch,mm.
T
bi
=thicknessoftheoverlappingbranch,mm.
t
bj
=thicknessoftheoverlappedbranch,mm.
For the overlapped branch, P
n
shall not exceed P
n
of the overlapping branch, calculated using Equation
10.11.2.24,10.11.2.25,or10.11.2.26,asapplicable,multipliedbythefactor(A
bj
F
ybj
/A
bi
F
ybi
),
where
A
bi
=crosssectionalareaoftheoverlappingbranch
A
bj
=crosssectionalareaoftheoverlappedbranch
10.11.2.3.5WeldstoBranches
Thenonuniformityofloadtransferalongthelineofweld,duetodifferencesinrelativeflexibilityofHSSwallsin
HSStoHSSconnections,shallbeconsideredinproportioningsuchwelds.Thiscanbeconsideredbylimitingthe
totaleffectiveweldlength,L
e
,ofgrooveandfilletweldstorectangularHSSasfollows:
InT,Yandcrossconnections,
for50degrees
I
c
=
2(E
b
- 1.2t
b
)
sin
+ (B
b
-1.2t
b
)
(1u.11.2.29)
for60degrees
I
c
=
2(E
b
- 1.2t
b
)
sin

(1u.11.2.Su)
LinearinterpolationshallbeusedtodetermineL
e
forvaluesofbetween50and60degrees.
IngappedKconnections,aroundeachbranch,
for50degrees
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6563
I
c
=
2(E
b
-1.2t
b
)
sin
+2(B
b
- 1.2t
b
)
(1u.11.2.S1)
for60degrees
I
c
=
2(E
b
-1.2t
b
)
sin
+(B
b
- 1.2t
b
)
(1u.11.2.S2)
LinearinterpolationshallbeusedtodetermineL
e
forvaluesofbetween50and60degrees.
InlieuoftheabovecriteriainEquations10.11.2.29to10.11.2.32,otherrationalcriteriaarepermitted.
10.11.3 HSSToHSSMomentConnections
HSStoHSSmomentconnectionsaredefinedasconnectionsthatconsistofoneortwobranchmembersthatare
directlyweldedtoacontinuouschordthatpassesthroughtheconnection,withthebranchorbranchesloaded
bybendingmoments.Aconnectionshallbeclassified
As a Tconnection when there is one branch and it is perpendicular to the chord and as a Yconnection when
thereisonebranchbutnotperpendiculartothechord.
Asacrossconnectionwhenthereisabranchoneach(opposite)sideofthechord.
ForthepurposesofthisSpecification,thecenterlinesofthebranchmember(s)andthechordmembershalllie
inacommonplane.
10.11.3.1 DefinitionsofParameters
B=overallwidthofrectangularHSSmainmember,measured90degreestotheplaneoftheconnection,
mm.
B
b
= overall width of rectangular HSS branch member, measured 90 degrees to the plane of the
connection,mm.
D=outsidediameterofroundHSSmainmember,mm.
D
b
=outsidediameterofroundHSSbranchmember,mm.
F
y
=specifiedminimumyieldstressofHSSmainmember,MPa.
F
yb
=specifiedminimumyieldstressofHSSbranchmember,MPa.
F
u
=ultimatestrengthofHSSmember,MPa.
H=overallheightofrectangularHSSmainmember,measuredintheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
H
b
=overallheightofrectangularHSSbranchmember,measuredintheplaneoftheconnection,mm.
t =designwallthicknessofHSSmainmember,mm.
t
b
=designwallthicknessofHSSbranchmember,mm.
= the width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter = D
b
/ D for round HSS; the ratio of
overallbranchwidthtochordwidth=B
b
/BforrectangularHSS
y =thechordslendernessratio;theratioofonehalfthediametertothewallthickness=D/(2t)forround
HSS;theratioofonehalfthewidthtowallthickness=B/(2t)forrectangularHSS
=theloadlengthparameter,applicableonlytorectangularHSS;theratioofthelengthofcontactofthe
branchwiththechordintheplaneoftheconnectiontothechordwidth=N/B,whereN=H
b
/sin
=acuteanglebetweenthebranchandchord(degrees)
10.11.3.2 CriteriaforRoundHSS
The interaction ofstress due to chord member forces and local branch connectionforcesshall be incorporated
throughthechordstressinteractionparameterQ
f
.
Whenthechordisintension,
Q
f
=1
Whenthechordisincompression,

]
= 1.u -u.Su(1 +u) (1u.11.S.1)
whereUistheutilizationratiogivenby
Part6
StructuralDesign
6564 Vol.2
u = |P

A
g
F
c
+H

SF
c
| (1u.11.S.2)
and
P
r
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,N.
M
r
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,Nmm.
A
g
=chordgrossarea,mm
2

F
c
=availablestress,MPa.
S=chordelasticsectionmodulus,mm
3

FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD):
P
r
=P
u
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,usingLRFDloadcombinations,N
M
r
=M
u
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
F
c
=F
y
,MPa.
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD):
P
r
=P
a
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,usingASDloadcombinations,N
M
r
=M
a
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
F
c
=0.6F
y
,MPa.
10.11.3.2.1LimitsofApplicability
The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection configuration is within the following limits of
applicability:
Branchangle:30
0

Chord wall slenderness: ratio of diameter to wall thickness less than or equal to 50 for T and Yconnections;
lessthanorequalto40forcrossconnections
Tensionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofdiametertowallthicknesslessthanorequalto50
Compressionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofdiametertowallthicknesslessthanorequalto0.05E/F
y

Widthratio:0.2<D
b
/D1.0
Strength:F
y
360MPa.forchordandbranches
Ductility:F
y
/F
u
0.8
10.11.3.2.2BrancheswithInPlaneBendingMomentsinT,YandCrossConnections
Thedesignstrength,M
n
andtheallowablestrength,M
n
/,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothe
limitstatesofchordplastificationandshearyielding(punching).
Forthelimitstateofchordplastification,
H
n
sin = S.S9F

t
2
y
0.5

]
(1u.11.S.S)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
Forthelimitstateofshearyielding(punching),
H
n
= u.6F

t
b
2
|(1 +Ssin)4sin
2
] (1u.11.S.4)
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen>(11/y).
10.11.3.2.3BrancheswithOutofPlaneBendingMomentsinT,YandCrossConnections
Thedesignstrength,M
n
andtheallowablestrength,M
n
/,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothe
limitstatesofchordplastificationandshearyielding(punching).
Forthelimitstateofchordplastification,
H
n
sin = F

t
2

b
|S.u(1 - u.81)]
]
(1u.11.S.S)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
Forthelimitstateofshearyielding(punching),
H
n
= u.6F

t
b
2
|(S +sin)4sin
2
]
]
(1u.11.S.6)
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6565
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen>(11/y).
10.11.3.2.4BrancheswithCombinedBendingMomentandAxialForceinT,YandCrossConnections
Connections subject to branch axial load, branch inplane bending moment, and branch outofplane bending
moment,oranycombinationoftheseloadeffects,shouldsatisfythefollowing.
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD):
(P

P
n
) +(H
-P
H
n-P
)
2
+(H
-oP
H
n-oP
) 1.u (1u.11.S.7)
where
P
r
=P
u
=requiredaxialstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,N
P
n
=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.2.2.2
M
rip
=requiredinplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
M
nip
=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.2.2
M
rop
=requiredoutofplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
M
nop
=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.2.3
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD):
(P

(P
n
)) + (H
-P
(H
n-P
))
2
+(H
-oP
(H
n-oP
)) 1.u (1u.11.S.8)
where
P
r
=P
a
=requiredaxialstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,N
P
n
/ =allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.2.2.2
M
rip
=requiredinplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
M
nip
/=allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.2.2
M
rop
=requiredoutofplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
M
nop
/=allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.2.3
10.11.3.3 CriteriaforRectangularHSS
The interaction of stress due to chordmember forcesand localbranch connectionforcesshall be incorporated
throughthechordstressinteractionparameterQ
f
.
Whenthechordisintension,
Q
f
=1
Whenthechordisincompression,

]
= (1.S -u.4u) 1 (1u.11.S.9)
whereUistheutilizationratiogivenby
u = |P

A
g
F
c
+ H

SF
c
| (1u.11.S.1u)
and
P
r
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,N.
M
r
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,Nmm.
A
g
=chordgrossarea,mm
2

F
c
=availablestress,MPa.
S=chordelasticsectionmodulus,mm
3
.
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD):
P
r
=P
u
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,usingLRFDloadcombinations,N
M
r
=M
u
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
F
c
=F
y
,MPa.
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD):
P
r
=P
a
=requiredaxialstrengthinchord,usingASDloadcombinations,N
Part6
StructuralDesign
6566 Vol.2
M
r
=M
a
=requiredflexuralstrengthinchord,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
F
c
=0.6F
y
,MPa.
10.11.3.3.1LimitsofApplicability
Thecriteriahereinareapplicableonlywhentheconnectionconfigurationiswithinthefollowinglimits:
Branchangleisapproximately90
0

Chordwallslenderness:ratioofoverallwallwidthtothicknesslessthanorequalto35
Tensionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofoverallwallwidthtothicknesslessthanorequalto35
Compressionbranchwallslenderness:ratioofoverallwallwidthtothicknesslessthanorequalto1.25(E/F
yb
)
0.5

andalsolessthan35
Widthratio:ratioofoverallwallwidthofbranchtooverallwallwidthofchordgreaterthanorequalto0.25
Aspectratio:0.5ratioofdepthtowidth2.0
Strength:F
y
360MPa.forchordandbranches
Ductility:F
y
/F
u
0.8
Otherlimitsapplyforspecificcriteria
10.11.3.3.2BrancheswithInPlaneBendingMomentsinTandCrossConnections
Thedesignstrength,M
n
andtheallowablestrength,M
n
/,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothe
limitstatesofchordwallplastification,sidewalllocalyieldingandlocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistribution.
Forthelimitstateofchordwallplastification,
H
n
= F

t
2
E
b
|(12) +2(1 - )
0.5
+(1 - )]
]
(1u.11.S.11)
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen>0.85.
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalyielding,
H
n
= u.SF

-
t(E
b
+St)
2
(1u.11.S.12)
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
where
F

-
=F
y
forTconnections
F

-
=0.8F
y
forcrossconnections
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen<0.85.
Forthelimitstateoflocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistribution,
H
n
= F
b
|Z
b
-(1 - b
co
B
b
)B
b
E
b
t
b
] (1u.11.S.1S)
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
Where
b
co
= |1u(Bt)]|F

t(F
b
t
b
)]B
b
B
b
(1u.11.S.14)
Z
b
=branchplasticsectionmodulusabouttheaxisofbending,mm
3
.
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen<0.85.
10.11.3.3.3BrancheswithOutofPlaneBendingMomentsinTandCrossConnections
Thedesignstrength,M
n
andtheallowablestrength,M
n
/,shallbethelowestvalueobtainedaccordingtothe
limitstatesofchordwallplastification,sidewalllocalyielding,localyieldingduetounevenloaddistributionand
chorddistortionalfailure.
Forthelimitstateofchordwallplastification,
H
n
= F

t
2
|u.SE
b
(1 +)(1 -) + |2BB
b
(1 +)(1 - )]
0.5
]
]
(1u.11.S.1S)
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen>0.85.
Forthelimitstateofsidewalllocalyielding,
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6567
H
n
= F

-
t(B -t)(E
b
+St) (1u.11.S.16)
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
where
F

-
=F
y
forTconnections
F

-
=0.8F
y
forcrossconnections
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen<0.85.
Forthelimitstateoflocalyieldingduetounevenloaddistribution,
H
n
= F
b
|Z
b
- u.S(1 -b
co
B
b
)
2
B
b
2
t
b
] (1u.11.S.17)
=0.95(LRFD) =1.58(ASD)
where
b
co
= |1u(Bt)]|F

t(F
b
t
b
)]B
b
B
b
(1u.11.S.18)
Z
b
=branchplasticsectionmodulusabouttheaxisofbending,mm
3
.
Thislimitstateneednotbecheckedwhen<0.85.
Forthelimitstateofchorddistortionalfailure,
H
n
= 2F

t|E
b
t + |BEt(B +E)]
0.5
] (1u.11.S.19)
=1.00(LRFD) =1.50(ASD)
This limit state need not be checked for crossconnections or for Tconnections if chord distortional failure is
preventedbyothermeans.
10.11.3.3.4BrancheswithCombinedBendingMomentandAxialForceinTandCrossConnections
Connections subject to branch axial load, branch inplane bending moment and branch outofplane bending
moment,oranycombinationoftheseloadeffects,shouldsatisfy
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
(P

P
n
) +(H
-P
H
n-P
) +(H
-oP
H
n-oP
) 1.u (1u.11.S.2u)
where
P
r
=P
u
=requiredaxialstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,N
P
n
=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.2.3.2
M
rip
=requiredinplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
M
nip
=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.3.2
M
rop=
requiredoutofplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm.
M
nop
=designstrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.3.3
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
(P

(P
n
)) +(H
-P
(H
n-P
)) +(H
-oP
(H
n-oP
)) 1.u (1u.11.S.21)
where
P
r
=P
a
=requiredaxialstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,N
P
n
/ =allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.2.3.2
M
rip
=requiredinplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
M
nip
/=allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.3.2
M
rop
=requiredoutofplaneflexuralstrengthinbranch,usingASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
M
nop
/=allowablestrengthobtainedfromSection10.11.3.3.3

Part6
StructuralDesign
6568 Vol.2
10.12 DesignforServiceability
Thischapteraddressesserviceabilityperformancedesignrequirements.
10.12.1 GeneralProvisions
Serviceability is a state in which the function of a building, its appearance, maintainability, durability, and
comfort of its occupants are preserved under normal usage. Limiting values of structural behavior for
serviceability (for example, maximum deflections, accelerations) shall be chosen with due regard to the
intendedfunctionofthestructure.Serviceabilityshallbeevaluatedusingappropriateloadcombinationsforthe
serviceabilitylimitstatesidentified.
10.12.2 Camber
Where camber is used to achieve proper position and location of the structure, the magnitude, direction and
locationofcambershallbespecifiedinthestructuraldrawingsinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofChapter1.
10.12.3 Deflections
Deflectionsinstructuralmembersandstructuralsystemsunderappropriateserviceloadcombinationsshallnot
impairtheserviceabilityofthestructure.Limitingvaluesofdeflectionsofvariousstructuralmembersshallbein
accordancewiththosespecifiedinSection1.4ofChapter1.
10.12.4 Drift
Driftofastructureshallbeevaluatedunderserviceloadstoprovideforserviceabilityofthestructure,including
theintegrityofinteriorpartitionsandexteriorcladding.Driftunderstrengthloadcombinationsshallnotcause
collisionwithadjacentstructuresorexceedthelimitingvaluesspecifiedinSection1.5.6ofChapter1.
10.12.5 Vibration
The effect of vibration on the comfort of the occupants and the function of the structure shall be considered.
Sourcesofvibrationtobeconsideredincludepedestrianloading,vibratingmachineryandothersidentifiedfor
the structure. It must be shown by any rational method of analysis that the vibrations induced by any source
including the above mentioned ones is within tolerable limit and shall not cause any adverse effect on the
safety,stabilityanddurabilityofthestructure.
10.12.6 WindInducedMotion
The effect of windinduced motion of buildings on the comfort of occupants shall be considered. For flexible
building and structures as defined in Sec. 2.4.2, it must be shown by a rational dynamic analysis that wind
inducedvibrationdoesnotcauseanydiscomforttooccupantsaswellasthewindinduceddynamiceffectdoes
notcauseanyadverseeffectonthesafety,stabilityanddurabilityofthestructure.
10.12.7 ExpansionandContraction
Theeffectsofthermalexpansionandcontractionofabuildingshallbeconsidered.Damagetobuildingcladding
cancausewaterpenetrationandmayleadtocorrosion.
10.12.8 ConnectionSlip
The effects of connection slip shall be included in the design where slip at bolted connections may cause
deformations that impair the serviceability of the structure. Where appropriate, the connection shall be
designedtoprecludeslip.ForthedesignofslipcriticalconnectionsseeSections10.10.3.8and10.10.3.9.
10.13 Fabrication,ErectionandQualityControl
This chapter addresses requirements for design and shop drawings, fabrication, shop painting, erection and
qualitycontrol.
10.13.1 DESIGNDRAWINGSANDSPECIFICATIONS
StructuralDesignDrawingsandSpecifications
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6569
Unless otherwise indicated in the contract documents, the structural design drawings shall be based upon
consideration of the design loads and forces to be resisted by the structural steel frame in the completed
project.
Thestructuraldesigndrawingsshallclearlyshowtheworkthatistobeperformedandshallgivethefollowing
informationwithsufficientdimensionstoaccuratelyconveythequantityandnatureofthestructuralsteeltobe
fabricated:
a) Thesize,section,materialgradeandlocationofallmembers;
b) Allgeometryandworkingpointsnecessaryforlayout;
c) Floorelevations;
d) Columncentersandoffsets;
e) Thecamberrequirementsformembers;
f) Joiningrequirementsbetweenelementsofbuiltupmembers;and,
g) TheinformationthatisrequiredinSections10.13.1.1.1through10.13.1.1.6.
Thestructuralsteelspecificationsshallincludeanyspecialrequirementsforthefabricationanderectionofthe
structuralsteel.
The structural design drawings, specifications and addenda shall be numbered and dated for the purposes of
identification.
10.13.1.1 DetailingofComponents
Permanentbracing,columnstiffeners,columnwebdoublerplates,bearingstiffenersinbeamsandgirders,
web reinforcement, openings for other trades and other special details, where required, shall be shown in
sufficientdetailinthestructuraldesigndrawingssothatthequantity,detailingandfabricationrequirementsfor
theseitemscanbereadilyunderstood.
10.13.1.2 Designer'sResponsibility
The owners designated representative for design shall indicate one of the following options for each
connection:
(1)Thecompleteconnectiondesignshallbeshowninthestructuraldesigndrawings;
(2)Inthestructuraldesigndrawingsorspecifications,theconnectionshallbedesignatedtobeselectedor
completedbyanexperiencedsteeldetailer;or,
(3)Inthestructuraldesigndrawingsorspecifications,theconnectionshallbedesignatedtobedesignedby
alicensedprofessionalengineerworkingforthefabricator.
Inalloftheaboveoptions,
(a)TherequirementsofSection10.13.1.1shallapply;and,
(b)TheapprovalsprocessinSection10.13.2.4shallbefollowed.
Whenoption(2)aboveisspecified:
Theexperiencedsteeldetailershallutilizetablesorschematicinformationprovidedinthestructuraldesign
drawings in the selection or completion of the connections. When such information is not provided, standard
referenceinformationasapprovedbytheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesign,shallbeused.
Whenoption(2)or(3)aboveisspecified
Theownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesignshallprovidethefollowinginformationinthestructural
designdrawingsandspecifications:
a) Anyrestrictionsonthetypesofconnectionsthatarepermitted;
b) Dataconcerningtheloads,includingshears,moments,axialforcesandtransferforces,thatare
toberesistedbytheindividualmembersandtheirconnections,sufficienttoallowthe
selection,completion,ordesignoftheconnectiondetailswhilepreparingtheshopand
erectiondrawings;
c) Whetherthedatarequiredin(b)isgivenattheserviceloadlevelorthefactoredloadlevel;
d) WhetherLRFDorASDistobeusedintheselection,completion,ordesignofconnection
details;and,
e) Whatsubstantiatingconnectioninformation,ifany,istobeprovidedwiththeshopand
erectiondrawingstotheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesign.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6570 Vol.2
Whenoption(3)aboveisspecified:
a) Thefabricatorshallsubmitinatimelymannerrepresentativesamplesoftherequired
substantiatingconnectioninformationtotheownersdesignatedrepresentativesfor
designandconstruction.Theownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesignshallconfirmin
writinginatimelymannerthattheserepresentativesamplesareconsistentwiththe
requirementsinthecontractdocuments,orshalladvisewhatmodificationsarerequiredto
bringtherepresentativesamplesintocompliancewiththerequirementsinthecontract
documents.ThisinitialsubmittalandreviewisinadditiontotherequirementsinSection
10.13.2.4.
b) Thelicensedprofessionalengineerinresponsiblechargeoftheconnectiondesignshallreview
andconfirminwritingaspartofthesubstantiatingconnectioninformation,thattheshopand
erectiondrawingsproperlyincorporatetheconnectiondesigns.However,thisreviewbythe
licensedprofessionalengineerinresponsiblechargeoftheconnectiondesigndoesnotreplace
theapprovalprocessoftheshopanderectiondrawingsbytheownersdesignated
representativefordesigninSection10.13.2.4.
c) Thefabricatorshallprovideameansbywhichthesubstantiatingconnectioninformationis
referencedtotherelatedconnectionsontheshopanderectiondrawingsforthepurposeof
review.
10.13.1.2.1 LevellingPlates
When leveling plates are to be furnished as part of the contract requirements, their locations and required
thicknessandsizesshallbespecifiedinthecontractdocuments.
10.13.1.2.2 NonStructuralElements
Whenthestructuralsteelframe,inthecompletelyerectedandfullyconnectedstate,requiresinteractionwith
nonstructural steel elements (see Section 2) for strength and/or stability, those nonstructural steel elements
shallbeidentifiedinthecontractdocumentsasrequiredinSection10.13.5.10.
10.13.1.2.3 Camber
When camber is required, the magnitude, direction and location of camber shall be specified in the structural
designdrawings.
10.13.1.2.4 PaintingInformation
Specific members or portions thereof that are to be left unpainted shall be identified in the contract
documents. When shop painting is required, the painting requirements shall be specified in the contract
documents,includingthefollowinginformation:
a) Theidentificationofspecificmembersorportionsthereoftobepainted;
b) Thesurfacepreparationthatisrequiredforthesemembers;
c) Thepaintspecificationsandmanufacturersproductidentificationthatarerequiredforthese
members;and,
d) Theminimumdryfilmshopcoatthicknessthatisrequiredforthesemembers.
10.13.1.3 Architectural,ElectricalandMechanicalDesignDrawingsandSpecifications
All requirements for the quantities, sizes and locations of structural steel shall be shown or noted in the
structural design drawings. The use of architectural, electrical and/or mechanical design drawings as a
supplementtothestructuraldesigndrawingsispermittedforthepurposesofdefiningdetailconfigurationsand
constructioninformation.
10.13.1.4 Discrepancies
When discrepancies exist between the design drawings and specifications, the design drawings shall govern.
Whendiscrepanciesexistbetweenscaledimensionsinthedesigndrawingsandthefigureswritteninthem,the
figures shall govern. When discrepancies exist between the structural design drawings and the architectural,
electrical or mechanical design drawings or design drawings for other trades, the structural design drawings
shallgovern.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6571
When a discrepancy is discovered in the contract documents in the course of the fabricators work, the
fabricatorshallpromptlynotifytheownersdesignatedrepresentativeforconstructionsothatthediscrepancy
canberesolvedbytheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesign.Suchresolutionshallbetimelysoasnotto
delaythefabricatorswork.SeeSections10.13.1.5and10.13.7.3.
10.13.1.5 LegibilityofDesignDrawings
Designdrawingsshallbeclearlylegibleanddrawntoanidentifiedscalethatisappropriatetoclearlyconveythe
information.
10.13.1.6 RevisionstotheDesignDrawingsandSpecifications
Revisions to the design drawings and specifications shall be made either by issuing new design drawings and
specifications or by reissuing the existing design drawings and specifications. In either case, all revisions,
includingrevisionsthatarecommunicatedthroughresponsestoRFIsortheannotationofshopand/orerection
drawings (see Section 10.13.2.4.2), shall be clearly and individually indicated in the contract documents. The
contract documents shall be dated and identified by revision number. Eachdesign drawings shall be identified
bythesamedrawingnumberthroughoutthedurationoftheproject,regardlessoftherevision.SeealsoSection
10.13.7.3.
10.13.2 ShopandErectionDrawings
Shop drawings shall be prepared in advance of fabrication and give complete information necessary for the
fabrication of the component parts of the structure, including the location, type and size of welds and bolts.
Erection drawings shall be prepared in advance of erection and give information necessary for erection of the
structure.Shopanderectiondrawingsshallclearlydistinguishbetweenshopandfieldweldsandboltsandshall
clearlyidentifypretensionedandslipcriticalhighstrengthboltedconnections.Shopanderectiondrawingsshall
bemadewithdueregardtospeedandeconomyinfabricationanderection.
10.13.2.1 OwnerResponsibility
Theownershallfurnish,inatimelymannerandinaccordancewiththecontractdocuments,completestructural
design drawings and specifications that have been released for construction. Unless otherwise noted, design
drawingsthatareprovidedaspartofacontractbidpackageshallconstituteauthorizationbytheownerthatthe
designdrawingsarereleasedforconstruction.
Records of the meetings should be written and distributed to all parties. Subsequent meetings to
discussprogressandissuesthatariseduringconstructionalsocanbehelpful,particularlywhentheyare
heldonaregularschedule.
10.13.2.2 FabricatorResponsibility
ExceptasprovidedinSection10.13.2.5,thefabricatorshallproduceshopanderectiondrawingsforthe
fabricationanderectionofthestructuralsteelandisresponsibleforthefollowing:
(a) The transfer of information from the contract documents into accurate and complete shop and erection
drawings;and,
(b)Thedevelopmentofaccurate,detaileddimensionalinformationtoprovideforthefitupofpartsinthefield.

Eachshopanderectiondrawingshallbeidentifiedbythesamedrawingnumberthroughoutthedurationofthe
projectandshallbeidentifiedbyrevisionnumberanddate,witheachspecificrevisionclearlyidentified.
When the fabricator submits a request to change connection details that are described in the contract
documents, the fabricator shall notify the owners designated representatives for design and construction in
writinginadvanceofthesubmissionoftheshopanderectiondrawings.Theownersdesignatedrepresentative
fordesignshallreviewandapproveorrejecttherequestinatimelymanner.
When requested to do so by the owners designated representative for design, the fabricator shall provide to
the owners designated representatives for design and construction its schedule for the submittal of shop and
erectiondrawingssoastofacilitatethetimelyflowofinformationbetweenallparties.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6572 Vol.2
10.13.2.3 UseofCADFilesand/orCopiesofDesignDrawings
The fabricator shall neither use nor reproduce any part of the design drawings as part of the shop or erection
drawingswithoutthewrittenpermissionoftheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesign.WhenCADfilesor
copies of the design drawings are made available for the fabricators use, the fabricator shall accept this
informationunderthefollowingconditions:
a) AllinformationcontainedintheCADfilesorcopiesofthedesigndrawingsshallbeconsidered
instrumentsofserviceoftheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesignandshallnotbe
usedforotherprojects,additionstotheprojectorthecompletionoftheprojectbyothers.
CADfilesandcopiesofthedesigndrawingsshallremainthepropertyoftheowners
designatedrepresentativefordesignandinnocaseshallthetransferoftheseCADfilesor
copiesofthedesigndrawingsbeconsideredasale.
b) TheCADfilesorcopiesofthedesigndrawingsshallnotbeconsideredtobecontract
documents.IntheeventofaconflictbetweenthedesigndrawingsandtheCADfilesorcopies
thereof,thedesigndrawingsshallgovern;
c) TheuseofCADfilesorcopiesofthedesigndrawingsshallnotinanywayobviatethe
fabricatorsresponsibilityforpropercheckingandcoordinationofdimensions,details,member
sizesandfitupandquantitiesofmaterialsasrequiredtofacilitatethepreparationofshopand
erectiondrawingsthatarecompleteandaccurateasrequiredinSection4.2;and,
d) Thefabricatorshallremoveinformationthatisnotrequiredforthefabricationorerectionof
thestructuralsteelfromtheCADfilesorcopiesofthedesigndrawings.
10.13.2.4 Approval
Except as provided in Section 10.13.2.5, the shop and erection drawings shall be submitted to the owners
designated representatives for design and construction for review and approval. The shop and erection
drawingsshallbereturnedtothefabricatorwithin14calendardays.
Finalsubstantiatingconnectioninformation,ifany,shallalsobesubmittedwiththeshopanderectiondrawings.
Theownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesignisthefinalauthorityintheeventofadisagreementbetween
partiesregardingconnectiondesign.
Approvedshopanderectiondrawingsshallbeindividuallyannotatedbytheownersdesignatedrepresentatives
fordesignandconstructionaseitherapprovedorapprovedsubjecttocorrectionsnoted.Whensorequired,the
fabricatorshall subsequently make the corrections noted and furnish corrected shop and erection drawingsto
theownersdesignatedrepresentativesfordesignandconstruction.
10.13.2.4.1 ConstituentsofApproval
Approval of the shop and erection drawings, approval subject to corrections noted and similar approvals shall
constitutethefollowing:
a) Confirmationthatthefabricatorhascorrectlyinterpretedthecontractdocumentsinthe
preparationofthosesubmittals;
b) Confirmationthattheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesignhasreviewedand
approvedtheconnectiondetailsshownontheshopanderectiondrawingsandsubmittedin
accordancewithSections10.13.1and10.13.2,ifapplicable;and,
c) Releasebytheownersdesignatedrepresentativesfordesignandconstructionforthe
fabricatortobeginfabricationusingtheapprovedsubmittals.
Such approval shall not relieve the fabricator of the responsibility for either the accuracy of the detailed
dimensionsintheshopanderectiondrawingsorthegeneralfitupofpartsthataretobeassembledinthefield.
Thefabricatorshalldeterminethefabricationschedulethatisnecessarytomeettherequirementsof
thecontract.
10.13.2.4.2 AuthorizationbyOwner
Unless otherwise noted, any additions, deletions or revisions that are indicated in responses to RFIs or on the
approvedshopanderectiondrawingsshallconstitute authorization bytheownerthat theadditions,deletions
or revisions are released for construction. The fabricator and the erector shall promptly notify the owners
designatedrepresentativeforconstructionwhenanydirectionornotation inresponsestoRFIsorontheshop
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6573
orerectiondrawingsorotherinformationwillresultinanadditionalcostand/oradelay.SeeSections10.13.1.5
and10.13.7.3.
10.13.2.5 Shopand/orErectionDrawingsNotFurnishedbytheFabricator
Whentheshopanderectiondrawingsarenotpreparedbythefabricator,butarefurnishedbyothers,theyshall
bedeliveredtothefabricatorinatimelymanner.Theseshopanderectiondrawingsshallbeprepared,insofar
asispractical,inaccordancewiththeshopfabricationanddetailingstandardsofthefabricator.Thefabricator
shall neitherbe responsible forthe completeness or accuracy of shop and erection drawingsso furnished, nor
forthegeneralfitupofthemembersthatarefabricatedfromthem.
10.13.2.6 TheRFIProcess
Whenrequestsforinformation(RFIs)areissued,theprocessshallincludethemaintenanceofawrittenrecord
of inquiries and responses related to interpretation and implementation of the contract documents, including
theclarificationsand/orrevisionstothecontractdocumentsthatresult,ifany.RFIsshallnotbeusedforthe
incremental release for construction of design drawings. When RFIs involve discrepancies or revisions, see
Sections10.13.1.3,10.13.1.5,and10.13.2.4.2.
10.13.2.7 ErectionDrawings
Erectiondrawingsshallbeprovidedtotheerectorinatimelymannersoastoallowtheerectortoproperlyplan
andperformthework.
10.13.3 MATERIALS
10.13.3.1 MillMaterials
Unlessotherwisenotedinthecontractdocuments,thefabricatorispermittedtoorderthematerialsthatare
necessary for fabrication when the fabricator receives contract documents that have been released for
construction.
Unless otherwise specified by means of special testing requirements in the contract documents, mill
testingshallbelimitedtothoseteststhatarerequiredforthematerialintheASTMspecificationsindicatedin
the contract documents. Materials ordered to special material requirements shall be marked by the
supplierasspecifiedinASTMA6/A6MSection12priortodeliverytothefabricatorsshoporotherpointofuse.
Suchmaterialnotsomarkedbythesupplier,shallnotbeuseduntil:
a) ItsidentificationisestablishedbymeansoftestinginaccordancewiththeapplicableASTM
specifications;and,
b) Afabricatorsidentificationmark,asdescribedinSection10.13.2hasbeenapplied.
WhenmillmaterialdoesnotsatisfyASTMA6/A6Mtolerancesforcamber,profile,flatnessor
sweep,thefabricatorshallbepermittedtoperformcorrectiveprocedures,includingtheuseof
controlledheatingand/ormechanicalstraightening,subjecttothelimitationsintheAISC
Specification.
10.13.3.2 StockMaterials
Ifusedforstructuralpurposes,materialsthataretakenfromstockbythefabricatorshallbeofaquality
thatisatleastequaltothatrequiredintheASTMspecificationsindicatedinthecontractdocuments.
Material test reports shall be accepted as sufficient record of the quality of materials taken from stock by the
fabricator. The fabricator shall review and retain the material test reports that cover such stock materials.
However, the fabricator need not maintain records that identify individual pieces of stock material against
individual material test reports, provided the fabricator purchases stock materialsthat meet the requirements
formaterialgradeandqualityintheapplicableASTMspecifications.
Stock materials that are purchased under no particular specification, under a specification that is lessrigorous
than the applicable ASTM specifications or without material test reports or other recognized test reports shall
notbeusedwithouttheapprovaloftheownersdesignatedrepresentativefordesign.
10.13.4 Fabrication
10.13.4.1 Cambering,CurvingandStraightening
Part6
StructuralDesign
6574 Vol.2
Localapplicationofheatormechanicalmeansispermittedtobeusedtointroduceorcorrectcamber,curvature
andstraightness.Thetemperatureofheatedareas,asmeasuredbyapprovedmethods,shallnotexceed593
0
C
forA514/A514MandA852/A852Msteelnor1,200
0
F(649
0
C)forothersteels.
10.13.4.2 ThermalCutting
ThermallycutedgesshallmeettherequirementsofAWSD1.1,Sections5.15.1.2,5.15.4.3and5.15.4.4withthe
exception that thermally cut free edges that will be subject to calculated static tensile stress shall be free of
roundbottom gouges greater than 5 mm deep and sharp Vshaped notches. Gouges deeper than 5 mm and
notchesshallberemovedbygrindingorrepairedbywelding.
Reentrantcorners,exceptreentrantcornersofbeamcopesandweldaccessholes,shallmeettherequirements
of AWS D1.1, Section A5.16. If another specified contour is required it must be shown on the contract
documents.
Beam copes and weld access holes shall meet the geometrical requirements of Section 10.10.1.6. Beam copes
andweldaccessholesinshapesthataretobegalvanizedshallbeground.Forshapeswithaflangethicknessnot
exceeding50mmtheroughnessofthermallycutsurfacesofcopesshallbenogreaterthanasurfaceroughness
value of 50 m as defined in ASME B46.1 Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay). For beam
copesandweldaccessholesinwhichthecurvedpartoftheaccessholeisthermallycutinASTMA6/A6Mhot
rolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 50 mm and welded builtup shapes with material thickness
greaterthan50mm,apreheattemperatureofnotlessthan66
0
Cshallbeappliedpriortothermalcutting.The
thermally cut surface of access holes in ASTM A6/A6M hotrolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 50
mmandbuiltupshapeswithamaterialthicknessgreaterthan50mmshallbegroundandinspectedforcracks
usingmagneticparticleinspection inaccordancewithASTME709.Anycrackisunacceptableregardlessofsize
orlocation.
10.13.4.3 PlaningofEdges
Planingorfinishingofshearedorthermallycutedgesofplatesorshapesisnotrequiredunlessspecificallycalled
forinthecontractdocumentsorincludedinastipulatededgepreparationforwelding.
10.13.4.4 WeldedConstruction
The technique of welding, the workmanship, appearance and quality of welds, and the methods used in
correctingnonconformingworkshallbeinaccordancewithAWSD1.1exceptasmodifiedinSectionJ2.
10.13.4.5 BoltedConstruction
Partsofboltedmembersshallbepinnedorboltedandrigidlyheldtogetherduringassembly.Useofadriftpinin
boltholesduringassemblyshallnotdistortthemetalorenlargetheholes.Poormatchingofholesshallbecause
forrejection.
Bolt holes shall comply with the provisions of the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or
A490Bolts,Section10.13.3.3exceptthatthermallycutholesshallbepermittedwithasurfaceroughnessprofile
notexceeding25masdefinedinASMEB46.1.Gougesshallnotexceedadepthof2mm.
Fullyinsertedfingershims,withatotalthicknessofnotmorethan6mmwithinajointarepermittedinjoints
without changing the strength (based upon hole type) for the design of connections. The orientation of such
shimsisindependentofthedirectionofapplicationoftheload.
TheuseofhighstrengthboltsshallconformtotherequirementsoftheRCSCSpecificationforStructuralJoints
UsingASTMA325orA490Bolts,exceptasmodifiedinSection10.10.3.
10.13.4.6 CompressionJoints
Compressionjointsthatdependoncontactbearingaspartofthesplicestrengthshallhavethebearingsurfaces
ofindividualfabricatedpiecespreparedbymilling,sawing,orothersuitablemeans.
10.13.4.7 DimensionalTolerances
DimensionaltolerancesshallbeinaccordancewithASTMA6/A6M.
10.13.4.8 FinishofColumnBases
Columnbasesandbaseplatesshallbefinishedinaccordancewiththefollowingrequirements:
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6575
(1)Steelbearingplates50mmorlessinthicknessarepermittedwithoutmilling,providedasatisfactorycontact
bearing is obtained. Steel bearing plates over 50 mm but not over 100 mm in thickness are permitted to be
straightened by pressing or, if presses are not available, by milling for bearing surfaces (except as noted in
subparagraphs 2 and 3 of this section), to obtain a satisfactory contact bearing. Steel bearing plates over 100
mminthicknessshallbemilledforbearingsurfaces(exceptasnotedinsubparagraphs2and3ofthissection).
(2) Bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column bases that are grouted to ensure full bearing contact on
foundationsneednotbemilled.
(3) Top surfaces of bearing plates need not be milled when completejoint penetration groove welds are
providedbetweenthecolumnandthebearingplate.
10.13.4.9 HolesforAnchorRods
Holes for anchor rods shall be permitted to be thermally cut in accordance with the provisions of Section
10.13.2.2.
10.13.4.10 DrainHoles
When water can collect inside HSS or box members, either during construction or during service, the member
shallbesealed,providedwithadrainholeatthebase,orprotectedbyothersuitablemeans.
10.13.4.11 RequirementsforGalvanizedMembers
Membersandpartstobegalvanizedshallbedesigned,detailedandfabricatedtoprovideforflowanddrainage
ofpicklingfluidsandzincandtopreventpressurebuildupinenclosedparts.

10.13.5 ShopPainting
10.13.5.1 GeneralRequirements
Shoppaintisnotrequiredunlessspecifiedbythecontractdocuments.
10.13.5.2 InaccessibleSurfaces
Except for contact surfaces, surfaces inaccessible after shop assembly shall be cleaned and painted prior to
assembly,ifrequiredbythedesigndocuments.
10.13.5.3 ContactSurfaces
Paint is permitted in bearingtype connections. For slipcritical connections, the faying surface requirements
shallbeinaccordancewiththeRCSCSpecificationforStructuralJointsUsingASTMA325orA490Bolts,Section
3.2.2(b).
10.13.5.4 FinishedSurfaces
Machinefinishedsurfacesshallbeprotectedagainstcorrosionbyarustinhibitivecoatingthatcanberemoved
priortoerection,orwhichhascharacteristicsthatmakeremovalpriortoerectionunnecessary.
10.13.5.5 SurfacesAdjacenttoFieldWelds
Unless otherwise specified in the design documents, surfaces within 50 mm of any field weldlocationshall be
freeofmaterialsthatwouldpreventproperweldingorproduceobjectionablefumesduringwelding.
10.13.6 Erection
10.13.6.1 AlignmentofColumnBases
Columnbasesshallbesetlevelandtocorrectelevationwithfullbearingonconcreteormasonry.
10.13.6.2 Bracing
Theframeofsteelskeletonbuildingsshallbecarrieduptrueandplumb.Temporarybracingshallbeprovided,
wherevernecessarytosupporttheloadstowhichthestructuremaybesubjected,includingequipmentandthe
operationofsame.Suchbracingshallbeleftinplaceaslongasrequiredforsafety.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6576 Vol.2
10.13.6.3 Alignment
Nopermanentboltingorweldingshallbeperformeduntiltheadjacentaffectedportionsofthestructurehave
beenproperlyaligned.
10.13.6.4 FitofColumnCompressionJointsandBasePlates
Lack of contact bearing not exceeding a gap of 2 mm, regardless of the type of splice used ( partialjoint
penetration groove welded or bolted), is permitted. If the gap exceeds 2 mm, but is less than 6 mm, and if an
engineering investigation shows that sufficient contact area does not exist, the gap shall be packed out with
nontaperedsteelshims.Shimsneednotbeotherthanmildsteel,regardlessofthegradeofthemainmaterial.
10.13.6.5 FieldWelding
Shop paint on surfaces adjacent to joints to be field welded shall be wire brushed if necessary to assure weld
quality.
Fieldweldingofattachmentstoinstalledembedmentsincontactwithconcreteshallbedoneinsuchamanner
as to avoid excessive thermal expansion of the embedment which could result in spalling or cracking of the
concreteorexcessivestressintheembedmentanchors.
10.13.6.6 FieldPainting
Responsibilityfortouchuppainting,cleaningandfieldpaintingshallbeallocated inaccordancewithaccepted
localpractices,andthisallocationshallbesetforthexplicitlyinthedesigndocuments.
10.13.6.7 Connections
Aserectionprogresses,thestructureshallbesecurelyboltedorweldedtosupportthedead,windanderection
loads.
10.13.7 QualityControl
The fabricator shall provide quality control procedures to the extent that the fabricator deems necessary to
assure that the work is performed in accordance with this Specification. In addition to the fabricators quality
controlprocedures,materialandworkmanshipatalltimesmaybesubjecttoinspectionbyqualifiedinspectors
representingthepurchaser.Ifsuchinspectionbyrepresentativesofthepurchaserwillberequired,itshallbeso
statedinthedesigndocuments.
10.13.7.1 Cooperation
Asfaraspossible,theinspectionbyrepresentativesofthepurchasershallbemadeatthefabricatorsplant.The
fabricatorshallcooperatewiththeinspector,permittingaccessforinspectiontoallplaceswhereworkisbeing
done.Thepurchasersinspectorshallschedulethisworkforminimuminterruptiontotheworkofthefabricator.
10.13.7.2 Rejections
Material or workmanship not in conformance with the provisions of this Specification may be rejected at any
timeduringtheprogressofthework.
Thefabricatorshallreceivecopiesofallreportsfurnishedtothepurchaserbytheinspectionagency.
10.13.7.3 InspectionofWelding
TheinspectionofweldingshallbeperformedinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofAWSD1.1exceptasmodified
inSection10.10.2.
WhenvisualinspectionisrequiredtobeperformedbyAWScertifiedweldinginspectors,itshallbesospecified
inthedesigndocuments.
When nondestructive testing is required, the process, extent and standards of acceptance shall be clearly
definedinthedesigndocuments.
10.13.7.4 InspectionofSlipCriticalHighStrengthBoltedConnections
Theinspectionofslipcriticalhighstrengthboltedconnectionsshallbeinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofthe
RCSCSpecificationforStructuralJointsUsingASTMA325orA490Bolts.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6577
10.13.7.5 IdentificationofSteel
Thefabricatorshallbeabletodemonstratebyawrittenprocedureandbyactualpracticeamethodofmaterial
identification,visibleatleastthroughthe fitup operation,forthe mainstructuralelementsofeachshipping
piece.
10.14 DirectAnalysisMethod
This section addresses the direct analysis method for structural systems comprised of moment frames, braced
frames,shearwalls,orcombinationsthereof.
10.14.1 GeneralRequirements
MembersshallsatisfytheprovisionsofSection10.8.1withthenominalcolumnstrengths,P
n
,determinedusing
K = 1.0. The required strengths for members, connections and other structural elements shall be determined
using a secondorder elastic analysis with the constraints presented in Section 10.14.3. All component and
connectiondeformationsthatcontributetothelateraldisplacementofthestructureshallbeconsideredinthe
analysis.
10.14.2 NotionalLoads

Notional loads shall be applied to the lateral framing system to account for the effects of geometric
imperfections, inelasticity, or both. Notional loads are lateral loads that are applied at each framing level and
specifiedintermsofthegravityloadsappliedatthatlevel.Thegravityloadusedtodeterminethenotionalload
shall be equal to or greater than the gravity load associated with the load combination being evaluated.
Notional loads shall be applied in the direction that adds to the destabilizing effects under the specified load
combination.
10.14.3 NotionalLoads
(1)Thesecondorderanalysisshallconsiderboth Pand Peffects.Itispermittedtoperformtheanalysisusing
anygeneral secondorder analysis method, or by the amplified firstorder analysis method of Section 10.3.2,
provided that the B
1

and B
2

factors are based on the reduced stiffnesses defined in Equations 10.14.3.2 and
10.14.3.3. Analyses shall be conducted according to the design and loading requirements specified in either
Section10.2.3.3(LRFD)orSection10.2.3.4 (ASD). ForASD,thesecondorderanalysisshallbecarriedoutunder
1.6timestheASDloadcombinationsandtheresultsshallbedividedby1.6toobtaintherequiredstrengths.
MethodsofanalysisthatneglecttheeffectsofPonthelateraldisplacementofthestructurearepermitted
where the axial loads in all members whose flexural stiffnesses are considered to contribute to the lateral
stabilityofthestructuresatisfythefollowinglimit:
oP

< u.1S P
cL
(1u.14.S.1)
where
Pi =requiredaxialcompressivestrengthunderLRFDorASDloadcombinations,N
PeL =
2
EIL
2
,evaluatedintheplaneofbending
And=1.0(LRFD)=1.6(ASD)
(2)Anotionalload,N
i
=0.002Y
i
,appliedindependentlyintwoorthogonaldirections,shallbeappliedasalateral
loadinallloadcombinations.Thisloadshallbeinadditiontootherlateralloads,ifany,
where
Ni =notionallateralloadappliedatleveli,N
Yi=gravityloadfromtheLRFDloadcombinationor1.6timestheASDloadcombinationappliedatleveli,N
The notional load coefficient of 0.002 is based on an assumed initial story outofplumbness ratio of 1/500.
Where a smaller assumed outofplumbness is justified, the notional load coefficient may be adjusted
proportionally.
Forframeswheretheratioofsecondorderdrifttofirstorderdriftisequaltoorlessthan1.5,itispermissible
to apply the notional load, N
i
, as a minimum lateral load for the gravityonly load combinations and not in
combinationwithotherlateralloads.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6578 Vol.2
Forallcases,itispermissibletousetheassumedoutofplumbnessgeometryintheanalysisofthestructurein
lieuofapplyinganotionalloadoraminimumlateralloadasdefinedabove.
(3)Areducedflexuralstiffness,EI*,
EI
-
= u.u8
b
EI (1u.14.S.2)
shall beused for all members whoseflexural stiffness is considered to contribute to the lateral stability of the
structure,
where
I=momentofinertiaabouttheaxisofbending,mm
4

B
=1.0forP
r
/P
y
0.5
=4|Pi Py (1- Pi Py )] foi Pi Py>0.5
P
r
=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthunderLRFDorASDloadcombinations,N
P
y
=AF
y
,memberyieldstrength,N
And=1.0(LRFD)=1.6(ASD)
In lieu of using
b
< 1.0 where P
r
/P
y
> 0.5,
b
= 1.0 may be used for all members, provided that an additive
notionalloadof0.001Y
i
isaddedtothenotionalloadrequiredin(2).
(4)Areducedflexuralstiffness,EA*,
EA
-
= u.8 EA (1u.14.S.S)
shall be used for members whose axial stiffness is considered to contribute to the lateral stability of the
structure,whereAisthecrosssectionalmemberarea.
10.15 InelasticAnalysisandDesign
10.15.1 GeneralProvisions
InelasticanalysisispermittedfordesignaccordingtotheprovisionsofSection10.2.3.3(LRFD).Inelasticanalysis
is not permitted for design according to the provisions of Section 10.2.3.4 (ASD) except as provided in Section
10.15.3.
10.15.2 Materials
Membersundergoingplastichingingshallhaveaspecifiedminimumyieldstressnotexceeding450MPa.
10.15.3 MomentRedistribution
Beams and girders composed of compact sections as defined in Section 10.2.4 and satisfying the unbraced
lengthrequirementsofSection10.15.7,includingcompositemembers,maybeproportionedforninetenthsof
the negative moments at points of support, produced by the gravity loading computed by an elastic analysis,
providedthatthemaximumpositivemomentisincreasedbyonetenthoftheaveragenegativemoments.This
reductionisnotpermittedformomentsproducedbyloadingoncantileversandfordesignaccordingtoSections
10.15.4through10.15.8ofthissection.
If the negative moment is resisted by a column rigidly framed to the beam or girder, the onetenth reduction
may be used in proportioning the column for combined axial force and flexure, provided that the axial force
doesnotexceedu.1Sc Fy Ag forLRFDoru.1SFy Agc forASD,
where
Ag=grossareaofmember,mm
2

Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthecompressionflange,MPa.
c=resistancefactorforcompression=0.90
c=safetyfactorforcompression=1.67
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6579
10.15.4 LocalBuckling
Flangesandwebsofmemberssubjecttoplastichingingincombinedflexureandaxialcompressionshallbe
compactwithwidththicknessratioslessthanorequaltothelimiting
p
definedinTable10.2.4.1orasmodified
asfollows:
a) ForwebsofdoublysymmetricwideflangemembersandrectangularHSSincombinedflexure
andcompression
(i)ForP
u
(
b
P

) u.12S
btw S.76_
E
F

_1 -
2.7S P
u

b
P

_
(1u.1S.4.1)
(ii)ForP
u

b
P

> u.12S
btw 1.12_
E
F

_2.SS -
P
u

b
P

_ 1.49_
E
F

(1u.1S.4.2)
where
E =modulusofelasticityofsteel200000MPa.
Fy=specifiedminimumyieldstressofthetypeofsteelbeingused,MPa.
h=asdefinedinSection10.2.4.2,mm.
Pu=requiredaxialstrengthincompression,N.
Py =memberyieldstrength,N.
tw=webthickness,mm.
b=resistancefactorforflexure=0.90
b) Forflangesofrectangularboxandhollowstructuralsectionsofuniformthicknesssubjectto
bendingorcompression,flangecoverplates,anddiaphragmplatesbetweenlinesoffasteners
orwelds
b t u.94_E F

(1u.1S.4.S)
where
b=asdefinedinSection10.2.4.2,mm.
t=asdefinedinSection10.2.4.2,mm.
(c)Forcircularhollowsectionsinflexure
t u.u4S E F

(1u.1S.4.4)
where
D=outsidediameterofroundHSSmember,mm.
10.15.5 StabilityandSecondOrderEffects
Continuous beams not subjected to axial loads and that do not contribute to lateral stability of framed
structuresmaybedesignedbasedonafirstorderinelasticanalysisoraplasticmechanismanalysis.
Braced frames and moment frames may be designed based on a firstorder inelastic analysis or a plastic
mechanismanalysisprovidedthatstabilityandsecondordereffectsaretakenintoaccount.
Structures may be designed on the basis of a secondorder inelastic analysis. For beamcolumns, connections
and connected members, the required strengths shall be determined from a secondorder inelastic analysis,
where equilibrium is satisfied on the deformed geometry, taking into account the change in stiffness due to
yielding
10.15.5.1BracedFrames
Inbracedframesdesignedonthebasisofinelasticanalysis,bracesshallbedesignedtoremainelasticunderthe
designloads.Therequiredaxialstrengthforcolumnsandcompressionbracesshallnotexceedc (u.8S Fy Ag),
Part6
StructuralDesign
6580 Vol.2
where
c=0.90(LRFD)
10.15.5.2MomentFrames
In moment frames designed on the basis of inelastic analysis, the required axial strength of columns shall not
exceedc (u.7S Fy Ag)
where
c =0.90(LRFD)

10.15.6 ColumnsandOtherCompressionMembers
InadditiontothelimitssetinSections10.15.5.1and10.15.5.2,therequiredaxialstrengthofcolumnsdesigned
on the basis of inelastic analysis shall not exceed the design strength, c Pn , determined according to the
provisionsofSection10.5.3.
Designbyinelasticanalysisispermittedifthecolumnslendernessratio,L/r,doesnotexceed4.71E F

,
where
L=laterallyunbracedlengthofamember,mm.
r=governingradiusofgyration,mm.

10.15.7 BeamsandOtherFlexuralMembers
The required moment strength, Nu, of beams designed on the basis of inelastic analysis shall not exceed the
designstrength,Nn,where

H
n
= H
p
= F
y
Z < 1.6F
y
S (1u.1S.7.1)

c
= u.9u (IRF)
a) FordoublysymmetricandsinglysymmetricIshapedmemberswiththecompressionflange
equaltoorlargerthanthetensionflangeloadedintheplaneoftheweb:
I
pd = _u.12 +u.u76 _
H
1
H
2
]_ _
E
F

_ r

(1u.1S.7.2)
where
N1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced length of beam, N-mm
N2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length of beam, N-mm
r
y
= radius of gyration about minor axis, mm
(N1 / N2) is positive when moments cause reverse curvature and negative for single curvature.
b) Forsolidrectangularbarsandsymmetricboxbeams:
I
pd = _u.17 +u.1u _
H
1
H
2
]_ _
E
F

_ r

u.1u _
E
F

_ r

(1u.1S.7.S)
There is no limit on L
b
for members with circular or square cross sections or for any beam bent about its minor axis.
10.15.8 BeamsandOtherFlexuralMembers
When inelastic analysis is used for symmetric members subject to bending and axial force, the provisions in
Section10.8.1apply.
Inelastic analysis is not permitted for members subject to torsion and combined torsion, flexure, shear and/or
axialforce.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6581
10.15.9 Connections
Connectionsadjacenttoplastichingingregionsofconnectedmembersshallbedesignedwithsufficientstrength
andductilitytosustaintheforcesanddeformationsimposedundertherequiredloads.
10.16 DesignforPonding
This section provides methods for determining whether a roof system has adequate strength and stiffness to
resistponding.
10.16.1 SimplifiedDesignforPonding
The roof system shall be considered stable for ponding and no further investigation is needed if both of the
followingtwoconditionsaremet:
C
p
+ u.9 C
s
u.2S (1u.16.1.1)
I
d
S94u S
4
(1u.16.1.2)
where
C
p
=
Su4 I
s
I
p
4
I
p


C
s
=
Su4 SI
s
4
I
s

Lp=columnspacingindirectionofgirder(lengthofprimarymembers),m.
Ls=columnspacingperpendiculartodirectionofgirder(lengthofsecondarymembers),m.
S=spacingofsecondarymembers,m.
Ip=momentofinertiaofprimarymembers,mm4.
Is=momentofinertiaofsecondarymembers,mm4
Id=momentofinertiaofthesteeldecksupportedonsecondarymembers,mm4perm.
For trusses and steel joists, the moment of inertia Is shall be decreased 15 percent when used in the above
equation. A steel deck shall be considered a secondary member when it is directly supported by the primary
members.
10.16.2 ImprovedDesignforPonding
The provisions given below are permitted to be used when a more exact determination of framing stiffness is
neededthanthatgiveninSection10.16.1.
Forprimarymembers,thestressindexshallbe
u
p
= _
u.8F

-
o

o
_
p
(1u.16.2.1)
Forsecondarymembers,thestressindexshallbe
u
s
= _
u.8F

-
o

o
_
s
(1u.16.2.2)
where
f
o
=stressduetotheloadcombination(D+R)
D=nominaldeadload
R=nominalloadduetorainwaterorsnow,exclusiveofthepondingcontribution,MPa.
Forroofframingconsistingofprimaryandsecondarymembers,thecombinedstiffnessshallbeevaluatedas
follows: enter Figure 10.16.1 at the level of the computed stress index U
p
determined for the primary
beam; move horizontally to the computed C
s
value of the secondary beams and then downward to the
Part6
StructuralDesign
6582 Vol.2
abscissascale.Thecombinedstiffnessoftheprimaryandsecondaryframingissufficienttopreventponding
if the flexibility constant read from this latter scale is more than the value of C
p
computed for the given
primarymember;ifnot,astifferprimaryorsecondarybeam,orcombinationofboth,isrequired.

Fig.10.16.1. Limitingflexibilitycoefficientfortheprimarysystems

Fig.10.16.2.Limitingflexibilitycoefficientforthesecondarysystems.

AsimilarproceduremustbefollowedusingFigure10.16.2.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6583
Forroofframingconsistingofaseriesofequallyspacedwallbearingbeams,thestiffnessshallbeevaluatedas
follows.Thebeamsareconsideredassecondarymemberssupportedonaninfinitelystiffprimarymember.For
thiscase,enterFigure10.16.2withthecomputedstressindexUs.ThelimitingvalueofCsisdeterminedbythe
interceptofahorizontallinerepresentingtheUsvalueandthecurveforCp=0.
Forroofframingconsistingofmetaldeckspanningbetweenbeamssupportedoncolumns,thestiffnessshallbe
evaluatedasfollows.EmployFigure10.16.1or10.16.2usingasCstheflexibilityconstantfora1mwidthofthe
roofdeck(S=1.0).
10.17 DesignforFatigue
This section applies to members and connections subject to high cyclic loading within the elastic range of
stresses of frequency and magnitude sufficient to initiate cracking and progressive failure, which defines the
limitstateoffatigue
10.17.1 General
TheprovisionsofthisSectionapplytostressescalculatedonthebasisofserviceloads.Themaximumpermitted
stressduetounfactoredloadsis0.66Fy.
Stressrangeisdefinedasthemagnitudeofthechangeinstressduetotheapplicationorremovaloftheservice
liveload.Inthecaseofastressreversal,thestressrangeshallbecomputedasthenumericalsumofmaximum
repeated tensile and compressive stresses or the numerical sum of maximum shearing stresses of opposite
directionatthepointofprobablecrackinitiation.
Inthecaseofcompletejointpenetrationbuttwelds,themaximumdesignstressrangecalculatedbyEquation
10.17.3.1appliesonlytoweldswithinternalsoundnessmeetingtheacceptancerequirementsofSection6.12.2
or6.13.2ofAWSD1.1.
Noevaluationoffatigueresistanceisrequirediftheliveloadstressrangeislessthanthethresholdstressrange,
FTH.SeeTable10.17.1.
No evaluation of fatigue resistance is required if the number of cycles of application of live load is less than
20,000.
The cyclic load resistance determined by the provisions of this Section is applicable to structures with suitable
corrosionprotectionorsubjectonlytomildlycorrosiveatmospheres,suchasnormalatmosphericconditions.
ThecyclicloadresistancedeterminedbytheprovisionsofthisSectionisapplicableonlytostructuressubjectto
temperaturesnotexceeding150oC.
The engineer of record shall provide either complete details including weld sizes or shall specify the planned
cyclelifeandthemaximumrangeofmoments,shearsandreactionsfortheconnections.
10.17.2 CalculationofMaximumStressesandStressRanges
Calculatedstressesshallbebaseduponelasticanalysis.Stressesshallnotbeamplifiedbystressconcentration
factorsforgeometricaldiscontinuities.
For bolts and threaded rods subject to axial tension, the calculated stresses shall include the effects of prying
action, if any. In the case of axial stress combined with bending, the maximum stresses, of each kind, shall be
thosedeterminedforconcurrentarrangementsoftheappliedload.
For members having symmetric cross sections, the fasteners and welds shall be arranged symmetrically about
the axis of the member, or the total stresses including those due to eccentricity shall be included in the
calculationofthestressrange.
Foraxiallyloadedanglememberswherethecenterofgravityoftheconnectingweldsliesbetweenthelineof
the center of gravity ofthe angle crosssectionand the center ofthe connected leg, the effects ofeccentricity
shall be ignored. If the center of gravity of the connecting welds lies outside this zone, the total stresses,
includingthoseduetojointeccentricity,shallbeincludedinthecalculationofstressrange.
10.17.3 DesignStressRange
Therangeofstressatserviceloadsshallnotexceedthedesignstressrangecomputedasfollows.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6584 Vol.2
(a) For stress categories A, B, B, C, D, E and E (see table 10.17.1) the design stress range, F
SR
, shall be
determinedbyEquation10.17.3.1or10.17.3.2.
F
SR
= _
C
]
S29
N
]
0.333
F
1H

(1u.17.S.1)
where
FSR=designstressrange,MPa.
Cf
=constantfromTable10.17.1forthecategory
N =numberofstressrangefluctuationsindesignlife
=numberofstressrangefluctuationsperday365yearsofdesignlife
FTB=thresholdfatiguestressrange,maximumstressrangeforindefinitedesignlifefromTable10.17.1,MPa.
(b)ForstresscategoryF,thedesignstressrange,F
SR
,shallbedeterminedbyEquation10.17.3.2.

F
SR
= _
C
]
11 1u
4
N
_
0.167
F
1H
(1u.17.S.2)

(c) For tensionloaded plate elements connected at their end by cruciform, T, or corner details with complete
jointpenetration (CJP) groove welds or partial jointpenetration (PJP) groove welds, fillet welds, or
combinationsofthepreceding,transversetothedirectionofstress,thedesignstressrangeonthecrosssection
ofthetensionloadedplateelementatthetoeoftheweldshallbedeterminedasfollows:
(i) Based upon crack initiation from the toe of the weld on the tension loaded plate element the design
stressrange,F
SR
,shallbedeterminedbyEquation10.17.3.3forstresscategoryCwhichisequalto
F
SR
= _
14.4 1u
11
N
_
0.333
68.9
(1u.17.S.S)
(ii)Baseduponcrackinitiationfromtherootoftheweldthedesignstressrange,F
SR
,onthetensionloaded
plateelementusingtransversePJPgroovewelds,withorwithoutreinforcingorcontouringfilletwelds,the
designstressrangeonthe crosssectionatthetoeof theweldshallbedeterminedbyEquation10.17.3.4,
stresscategoryCasfollows:
F
SR
= R
P]P
_
14.4 1u
11
N
_
0.333
(1u.17.S.8)
where
R
PJP
is the reduction factor for reinforced or nonreinforced transverse PJP groove welds determined as
follows:
R
P]P
= _
1.12 -1.u1 _
2o
t
p
] + 1.24 _
w
t
p
]
t
p
0.167
_ 1.u
(1u.17.S.9)
IfR
PJP
=1.0,usestresscategoryC.
2a = the length of the nonwelded root face in the direction of the thickness of the tensionloaded plate,
mm.
W=thelegsizeofthereinforcingorcontouringfillet,ifany,inthedirectionofthethicknessofthetension
loadedplate,mm.
t
p
=thicknessoftensionloadedplate,mm.

(iii) Based upon crack initiation from the roots of a pair of transverse fillet welds on opposite sides of the
tensionloadedplateelementthedesignstressrange,F
SR
,onthecrosssectionatthetoeoftheweldsshall
bedeterminedbyEquation10.17.3.5,stresscategoryCasfollows:
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6585

F
SR
= R
PIL
_
14.4 1u
11
N
_
0.333
(1u.17.S.1u)
where
R
FIL
isthereductionfactorforjointsusingapairoftransversefilletweldsonly.
R
PIL
= _
u.1u +1.24(w t
p
)
t
p
0.167
_ 1.u
(1u.17.S.11)
IfRFIL =1.0,usestresscategoryC.

10.17.4 BoltsandThreadedParts
Therangeofstressatserviceloadsshallnotexceedthestressrangecomputedasfollows.
a) Formechanicallyfastenedconnectionsloadedinshear,themaximumrangeofstressinthe
connectedmaterialatserviceloadsshallnotexceedthedesignstressrangecomputedusing
Equation10.17.3.1whereCfandFTHaretakenfromSection2ofTable10.17.1.
b) Forhighstrengthbolts,commonbolts,andthreadedanchorrodswithcut,groundorrolled
threads,themaximumrangeoftensilestressonthenettensileareafromappliedaxialload
andmomentplusloadduetopryingactionshallnotexceedthedesignstressrangecomputed
usingEquation10.17.3.1.ThefactorCfshallbetakenas3.9108(asforstresscategoryE).
Thethresholdstress,FTHshallbetakenas48MPa(asforstresscategoryD).Thenettensile
areaisgivenbyEquation10.17.4.1.

A
t
=
n
4
(J
b
- u.9S82P)
2 (1u.17.4.1)
where
P=pitch,mmperthread
db=thenominaldiameter(bodyorshankdiameter),mm.
n=threadspermm.
For joints in which the material within the grip is not limited to steel or joints which are not tensioned to the
requirementsofTable10.10.3.1,allaxialloadandmomentappliedtothejointpluseffectsofanypryingaction
shallbeassumedtobecarriedexclusivelybytheboltsorrods.
Forjointsinwhichthematerialwithinthegripislimitedtosteelandwhicharetensionedtotherequirementsof
Table 10.10.3.1, an analysis of the relative stiffness of the connected parts and bolts shall be permitted to be
used to determine the tensile stress range in the pretensioned bolts due to the total service live load and
moment plus effects of any prying action. Alternatively, the stress range in the bolts shall be assumed to be
equaltothestressonthenettensileareadueto20percentoftheabsolutevalueoftheserviceloadaxialload
andmomentfromdead,liveandotherloads.

10.17.5 SpecialFabricationandErectionRequirements
Longitudinal backing bars are permitted to remain in place, and if used, shall be continuous. If splicing is
necessary for long joints, the bar shall be joined with complete penetration butt joints and the reinforcement
groundpriortoassemblyinthejoint.
In transverse joints subject to tension, backing bars, if used, shall be removed and the joint back gouged and
welded.
IntransversecompletejointpenetrationTandcornerjoints,areinforcingfilletweld,notlessthan6mminsize
shallbeaddedatreentrantcorners.
The surface roughness of flame cut edges subject to significant cyclic tensile stress ranges shall not exceed 25
m,whereASMEB46.1isthereferencestandard.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6586 Vol.2
Reentrantcornersatcuts,copesandweldaccessholesshallformaradiusofnotlessthan10mmbypredrilling
orsubpunchingandreamingahole,orbythermalcuttingtoformtheradiusofthecut.Iftheradiusportionis
formedbythermalcutting,thecutsurfaceshallbegroundtoabrightmetalsurface.
Fortransversebuttjointsinregionsofhightensilestress,runofftabsshallbeusedtoprovideforcascadingthe
weldterminationoutsidethefinishedjoint.Enddamsshallnotbeused.Runofftabsshallberemovedandthe
endoftheweldfinishedflushwiththeedgeofthemember.
SeeSection10.10.2.2forrequirementsforendreturnsoncertainfilletweldssubjecttocyclicserviceloading.

TABLE 10 17 1 F ti D i P t

Description
Stress
Category
Constant
Cf
Threshold
FTH(MPa)
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
SECTION 1 PLAIN MATERIAL AWAY FROM ANY WELDING
1.1 Base metal, except non coated
weathering steel, with rolled or
cleaned surface. Flamecut edges with
surface roughness value of 25 m or less,
butwithoutreentrantcorners.
A 250 10
8
165

Away from all welds or
structural connections
1.2 Non-coated weathering steel base
metal with rolled or cleaned surface.
Flame-cut edges with surface roughness
value of 25 m or less, but without reentrant
corners.
B 120 10
8
110 Away from all welds or
structural connections
1.3 Member with drilled or reamed
holes. Member with re- entrant corners at
copes, cuts, block-outs or other geometrical
discontinuities made to requirements of
Section 10.17.3.5, except weld access
holes.
B 120 10
8
110 At any external edge or at hole
perimeter
1.4 Rolled cross sections with weld access
holes made to re- quirements of Section
10.10.1.6 and Section 10.17.3.5. Members
with drilled or reamed holes con- taining
bolts for attachment of light bracing where
there is a small longitudinal component of
brace force.
C 44 10
8
69 At reentrant corner of weld
access hole or at any small hole
(may contain bolt for minor
connections)
SECTION 2 CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
2.1 Gross area of base metal in lap joints
connected by high strength bolts in
jointssatisfying all requirementsfor slip
criticalconnections.
B 120 10
8
110 Throughgrosssectionnear
hole
2.2 Base metal at net section of high
strength bolted joints, de signed on the
basis of bearing resistance, but fabricated
and installed to all requirements for slip
criticalconnections.
B 120 10
8
110 Innet sectionoriginatingat
sideofhole
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6587
2.3 Basemetalatthenetsection ofother
mechanically fas tened joints except eye
barsandpinplates.
D 22 10
8
48 Innet sectionoriginatingat
sideofhole
2.4 Base metal at net section of eyebar
headorpinplate.
E 11 10
8
31 Innet sectionoriginatingat
sideofhole

Part6
StructuralDesign
6588 Vol.2

TABLE 10 17 1 (cont ) Fatigue Design Parameters

Description
Stress
Category
Constant
Cf
Threshold
FTH(MPa)
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
SECTION 3 WELDED JOINTS JOINING COMPONENTS OF BUILT-UP MEMBERS
3.1Base metal and weldmetalin members
withoutattachmentsbuiltup ofplatesor
shapesconnectedbycontinuous longitudinal
completejointpenetrationgroovewelds, back
gougedand weldedfromsecondside,orby
B 120 10
8
110 Fromsurfaceorinternal
discontinuitiesinweldawayfrom
endofweld
3.2Base metal and weldmetalin members
withoutattachmentsbuiltup of platesor
shapes,connectedbycontinuous longitudinal
completejointpenetrationgroovewelds with
backingbars not removed, orbycontinuous
B 61 10
8
83 Fromsurfaceorinternal
discontinuitiesinweld,including
weldattachingbackingbars
3.3Basemetalandweldmetaltermination of
longitudinal welds atweldaccess holes in
t d b ilt b
D 22 10
8
48 Fromtheweldtermination into
the web orflange
3.4 Base metal at endsoflongitudinal
intermittentfilletweldsegments.
E 11 10
8
31 Inconnectedmaterialatstartand
stoplocationsofanywelddeposit
3.5 Base metal at endsofpartiallength
weldedcoverplatesnarrowerthantheflange
havingsquareortaperedends,with orwithout
welds acrosstheendsofcoverplateswiderthan
the flangewithweldsacrosstheends.
Flangethickness 20mm
Flangethickness> 20mm


















Inflange at toe ofendweldorin
flangeatterminationof
longitudinalweldorinedgeof
flangewithwidecoverplates
3.6 Basemetalatendsof partiallength welded
coverplates widerthantheflange without
ld th d
E 3.9 10
8
18 Inedgeofflangeatendof
coverplateweld
SECTION 4 LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDED END CONNECTIONS
4.1 Base metal at junction of axially loaded
memberswithlongitudinallyweldedend
connections.Welds shallbe on each side of
theaxisofthemembertobalanceweldstresses.
t 20mm

t > 20mm

11 10
8

3.9 10
8

31

18
Initiatingfrom endofanyweld
terminationextendingintothe
basemetal

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6589

Part6
StructuralDesign
6590 Vol.2

TABLE10.17.1 (cont.):FatigueDesign Parameters

Description
Stress
Category
Constant
Cf
Threshold
FTH(MPa)
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
SECTION 5 WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
5.1Basemetalandweldmetalinoradjacent
tocompletejointpenetrationgroovewelded
splicesinrolledorweldedcrosssectionswith
weldsgroundessentiallyparalleltothedirection
ofstress.
B 120108 110
Frominternaldiscon
tinuitiesinfillermetalor
alongthefusionboundary
5.2Basemetalandweldmetalinoradjacent
tocompletejointpenetrationgroovewelded
spliceswithweldsgroundessentiallyparallelto
thedirectionofstressattransitionsinthickness
orwidthmadeonaslopenogreaterthan
8to20%.
Fy<620MPa
Fy620MPa

B
B

120108
61108

110
83
Frominternaldisconti
nuitiesinfillermetaloralong
fusionboundaryoratstartof
transitionwhenFy620
MPa
5.3BasemetalwithFyequaltoorgreater
than620MPaandweldmetalinoradjacentto
completejointpenetrationgroovewelded
spliceswithweldsgroundessentiallyparallelto
thedirectionofstressattransitionsinwidth
madeonaradiusofnotlessthan600mmwith
thepointoftangencyattheendofthegroove
weld.
B 120108 110
Frominternaldiscon
tinuitiesinfillermetalor
discontinuitiesalongthe
fusionboundary
5.4Basemetalandweldmetalinoradjacentto
thetoeofcompletejointpenetrationTorcorner
jointsorsplices,withorwithouttransitionsin
thicknesshavingslopesnogreaterthan8to20%,
whenweldreinforcementisnotremoved.
C 44108 69
Fromsurfacediscontinuity
attoeofweldextendinginto
basemetaloralongfusion
boundary.
5.5Basemetalandweldmetalattransverse
endconnectionsoftensionloadedplate
elementsusingpartialjointpenetrationbuttorT
orcornerjoints,withreinforcingorcontouring
fillets,FSRshallbethesmallerofthetoecrackor
rootcrackstressrange.
Crackinitiatingfromweldtoe:Crackinitiating
fromweldroot:

44108

Eqn.
10.17.3.4

69

None
provided
Initiatingfromgeometrical
discontinuityattoeofweld
extendingintobasemetalor,
initiatingatweldroot
subjecttotensionextending
upandthenoutthrough
weld

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6591

Part6
StructuralDesign
6592 Vol.2

TABLE10.17.1(cont.):FatigueDesignParameters

Description
Stress
Category

Constant
Threshold
F
TH(MPa)
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
SECTION 5 WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS (contd)
5.6Base metal and fillermetalat
transverseendconnectionsoftension
loadedplateelementsusinga pair offillet
welds onopposite sidesoftheplate. FSR
shallbe the smaller ofthetoecrackor
rootcrackstressrange.

Crackinitiatingfromweldtoe:

44 10
8

Eqn.
10.17.3.5

69

None
provided
Initiatingfromgeometrical
discontinuityattoeofweld
extendingintobasemetalor,
initiatingatweldrootsubject
to tensionextendingupand
thenoutthroughweld
5.7Basemetaloftensionloadedplate
elementsand on girdersandrolledbeam
websorflangesattoeoftransversefillet
weldsadjacenttoweldedtransverse
stiffeners.
C 44 10
8
69 Fromgeometricaldis
continuity attoeoffillet
extendingintobasemetal
SECTION 6 BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS
6.1 Base metal at details attached
by complete-joint- penetration
groove welds subject to
longitudinal loading only when the detail
embodies a transition radius R with the
weld termination ground smooth.
R 600 mm

600 mm > R 150 mm

150 mm > R 50 mm

50 mm > R




B
C
D
E




120 10
8


44 10
8


22 10
8


11 10
8





110

69

48

31
Near point of tangency of
radius at edge of member

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6593

Part6
StructuralDesign
6594 Vol.2

TABLE 10.17.1 (cont.): Fatigue Design Parameters
Description Stress
Category
Constant
Cf
Threshold
FTH(MPa)
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
SECTION 6 BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS (contd)
6.2 Base metal atdetails ofequal
thicknessattachedbycompletejoint
penetrationgrooveweldssubjecttotrans
verse loadingwithor without
longitudinalloadingwhenthe detail
embodies a transitionradiusR withthe
weldterminationgroundsmooth:
When weld reinforcement isremoved:
R 600mm

600mm> R 150mm

150mm> R 50mm

50mm> R

When weld reinforcement isnotremoved:
R 600mm

600mm> R 150mm

150mm> R 50mm

50mm> R








B

C
D
E



C
C
D
E

120 10
8

44 10
8

2210
8

11 10
8

44 10
8

44 10
8

22 10
8

11 10
8








110

69

48

31

69

69

48

31

Nearpointsoftangency
ofradiusorintheweld
oratfusionboundaryor
memberorattachment






Attoeoftheweldeither
along edge of member
ortheattachment
6.3 Basemetalat detailsof unequal
thickness attachedby completejoint
penetrationgrooveweldssubjecttotrans
verse loadingwithorwithoutlongitudinal
loadingwhen thedetailembodiesa
transitionradius Rwiththeweld termina
tiongroundsmooth.
When weld reinforcementisremoved:
R> 50mm

R 50mm

When reinforcementisnotremoved:
Anyradius








D

E


E








22 10
8

11 10
8

11 10
8








48

31


31






At toe of weld along
edgeofthinnermaterial
In weldterminationin
smallradius


At toe of weld along
edgeofthinnermaterial
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6595

Part6
StructuralDesign
6596 Vol.2

TABLE 10 17 1 ( t ) F ti D i P t
Description
Stress
Category
Constant
Cf
Threshold
FTH(MPa)
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
SECTION 6 BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS (contd)
6.4Base metal subjecttolongitudinal stressat
transversemembers, withorwithouttransverse
stress,attachedbyfilletorpartialpenetrationgroove
weldsparallel todirection of stresswhenthe
detailembodiesatransitionradius, R,withweld
terminationgroundsmooth:
R> 50mm

R 50mm

D

E

22 10
8

11 10
8

In weld termination or from

the toe of the weld
extending into member

SECTION 7 BASE METAL AT SHORT ATTACHMENTS

1
7.1Basemetalsubjecttolongitudinalloadingat
detailsattachedby filletweldsparallelortrans
versetothedirectionofstresswherethedetail
embodies notransition radiusandwithdetaillength
indirectionofstress, a,andattachmentheight
normaltothesurfaceofthemember,b:
a< 50mm
50mm a 12b
or100mm
a> 12bor100mm
whenbis 25mm
a> 12bor100mm
whenbis> 25mm






C

E







44 10
8

22 10
8

11 10
8

3.9 10
8






69

48

31

18
In the member at theend
oftheweld
7.2Basemetalsubjecttolongitudinalstressatdetails
attachedbyfillet or partialjointpenetrationgroove
welds,withor withouttransverse load on detail,
whenthe detail embodiesatransitionradius, R,with
weld terminationgroundsmooth:
R> 50mm
R 50mm





D
E





22 10
8

11 10
8








Inweldterminationex
tendingintomember
1
Attachment asusedherein,isdefinedasanysteeldetailweldedtoamemberwhich,byitsmerepresenceand independentofitsloading,causesa
discontinuityinthestressflowinthememberandthusreducesthefatigueresistance.

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6597

Part6
StructuralDesign
6598 Vol.2

TABLE 10 17 1 (cont ): Fatigue Design Parameters

Description
Stress
Category
Constant
Cf
Threshold
F
TH(MPa)
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
SECTION 8 - MISCELLANEOUS
8.1 Base metal atstudtypeshear
connectorsattachedbyfilletorelectricstud
welding.
C 44 10
8
69 At toeofweldinbase
metal
8.2 Shearonthroatof continuousor
intermittentlongitudinalortransversefillet
welds.
F 150 10
10
(Eqn.
10.17.3.2)
55 Inthroatofweld
8.3Base metal at plugorslotwelds. E 11 10
8
31 Atendofweldinbase
metal
8.4Shearonplugorslotwelds. F 150 10
10
(Eqn.
10.17.3.2)
55 Atfayingsurface
8.5Notfullytightenedhighstrength bolts,
commonbolts,threadedanchorrods
andhangerrodswithcut,groundorrolled
threads. Stressrange ontensilestressarea
duetoliveloadpluspryingaction when
applicable.
E

3.9 10
8
48 At therootofthe
threadsextendinginto
thetensilestressarea

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6599
10.18 StructuralDesignforFireConditions
Thissectionprovidescriteriaforthedesignandevaluationofstructuralsteelcomponents,systemsandframesfor
fireconditions. Thesecriteriaprovideforthedeterminationoftheheatinput,thermalexpansionanddegradation
inmechanicalpropertiesofmaterialsatelevatedtemperaturesthatcauseprogressivedecreaseinstrengthand
stiffnessofstructuralcomponentsandsystemsatelevatedtemperatures.
10.18.1 GeneralProvisions
Themethodscontainedinthissectionprovideregulatoryevidenceofcomplianceinaccordancewiththedesign
applicationsoutlinedinthissection.
ThesectionusesthefollowingtermsinadditiontothetermsintheGlossary.
Activefireprotection:Buildingmaterialsandsystemsthatareactivatedbyafiretomitigateadverseeffectsor
tonotifypeopletotakesomeactiontomitigateadverseeffects.
Compartmentation:Theenclosureofabuildingspacewithelementsthathaveaspecificfireendurance.
Convectiveheattransfer:Thetransferofthermalenergyfromapointofhighertemperaturetoapointoflower
temperaturethroughthemotionofaninterveningmedium.
Designbasis fire: A set of conditions that define the development of a fire and the spread of combustion
productsthroughoutabuildingorportionthereof.
Elevated temperatures: Heating conditions experienced by building elements or structures as a result of fire,
whichareinexcessoftheanticipatedambientconditions.
Fire:Destructiveburning,asmanifestedbyanyorallofthefollowing:light,flame,heat,orsmoke.
Fire barrier: Element of construction formed of fireresisting materials and tested in accordance with ASTM
Standard E119, or other approved standard fire resistance test, to demonstrate compliance with the Building
Code.
Fire endurance: A measure of the elapsed time during which a material or assembly continues to exhibit fire
resistance.
Fireresistance:Thatpropertyofassembliesthatpreventsorretardsthepassageofexcessiveheat,hotgases
orflamesunderconditionsofuseandenablesthemtocontinuetoperformastipulatedfunction.
Fire resistance rating: The period of time a building element, component or assembly maintains the ability to
contain a fire, continues to perform a given structural function, or both, as determined by test or methods
basedontests.
Flashover: The rapid transitiontoastate of total surface involvement in a fire of combustible materials within
anenclosure.
Heatflux:Radiantenergyperunitsurfacearea.
Heatreleaserate:Therateatwhichthermalenergyisgeneratedbyaburningmaterial.
Passivefireprotection:Buildingmaterialsandsystemswhoseabilitytoresisttheeffectsoffiredoesnotrelyon
anyoutsideactivatingconditionormechanism.
Performancebased design: An engineering approach to structural design that is based on agreedupon
performance goals and objectives, engineering analysis and quantitative assessment of alternatives against
thosedesigngoalsandobjectivesusingacceptedengineeringtools,methodologiesandperformancecriteria.
Prescriptivedesign:Adesignmethodthatdocumentscompliancewithgeneralcriteriaestablishedinabuilding
code.
Restrainedconstruction:Floorandroofassembliesandindividualbeamsinbuildingswherethesurroundingor
supporting structure is capable of resisting substantial thermal expansion throughout the range of anticipated
elevatedtemperatures.
Unrestrainedconstruction:Floorandroofassembliesandindividualbeamsinbuildingsthatareassumedtobe
freetorotateandexpandthroughouttherangeofanticipatedelevatedtemperatures.
10.18.1.1 PerformanceObjective
Structural components, members and building frame systems shall be designed so as to maintain their load
bearing function during the designbasis fire and to satisfy other performance requirements specified for the
building occupancy. Deformation criteria shall be applied where the means of providing structural fire
Part6
StructuralDesign
6600 Vol.2
resistance,orthedesigncriteriaforfirebarriers,requiresconsiderationofthedeformationoftheloadcarrying
structure. Within the compartment of fire origin, forces and deformations from the design basis fire shall not
causeabreachofhorizontalorverticalcompartmentation.
10.18.1.2 DesignbyEngineeringAnalysis
TheanalysismethodsinSection10.18.2arepermittedtobeusedtodocumenttheanticipatedperformanceof
steel framing when subjected to designbasis fire scenarios. Methods in Section 10.18..2 provide evidence of
compliancewithperformanceobjectivesestablishedinSection10.18.1.1.
The analysis methods in Section 10.18.2 are permitted to be used to demonstrate an equivalency for an
alternativematerialormethod,aspermittedbythebuildingcode.
10.18.1.3 DesignbyQualificationTesting
ThequalificationtestingmethodsinSection10.18.3arepermittedtobeusedtodocumentthefireresistanceof
steelframingsubjecttothestandardizedfiretestingprotocolsrequiredbybuildingcodes.
10.18.1.4 LoadCombinationsandRequiredStrength
The required strength of the structure and its elements shall be determined from the following gravity load
combination:
|u.9 or 1.2]+I +u.SI +u.2S (1u.18.1.1)
where
B=nominaldeadload
L=nominaloccupancyliveload
S=nominalsnowload
T=nominalforcesanddeformationsduetothedesignbasisfiredefinedinSection4.2.1
A lateral notional load, N
i
= 0.002Y
i
, as defined in Section 10.20, where N
i
= notional lateral load applied at
framing level i and Y
i
= gravity load from combination 10.18.1.1 acting on framing level i, shall be applied in
combination with the loads stipulated in Equation 10.18.1.1. Unless otherwise stipulated by the authority
havingjurisdiction,D,LandSshallbethenominalloadsspecifiedinChapter2ofPart6ofthiscode.
10.18.2 StructuralDesignforFireConditionsByAnalysis
It is permitted to design structural members, components and building frames for elevated temperatures in
accordancewiththerequirementsofthissection.
10.18.2.1 DesignBasisFire
A designbasis fire shall be identified to describe the heating conditions for the structure. These heating
conditions shall relate to the fuel commodities and compartment characteristics present in the assumed fire
area.Thefuelloaddensitybasedontheoccupancyofthespaceshallbeconsideredwhendeterminingthetotal
fuel load. Heating conditions shall be specified either in terms of a heat flux or temperature of the upper gas
layercreatedbythefire.Thevariationoftheheatingconditionswithtimeshallbedeterminedfortheduration
ofthefire.
When the analysis methods in Section 10.18.2 are used to demonstrate an equivalency as an alternative
material or method as permitted by a building code, the designbasis fire shall be determined in accordance
withASTME119.
10.18.2.1.1LocalizedFire
Where the heat release rate from the fire is insufficient to cause flashover, a localized fire exposure shall be
assumed.Insuchcases,thefuelcomposition,arrangementofthefuelarrayandfloorareaoccupiedbythefuel
shallbeusedtodeterminetheradiantheatfluxfromtheflameandsmokeplumetothestructure.
10.18.2.1.2PostFlashoverCompartmentFires
Where the heat release rate from the fire is sufficient to cause flashover, a postflashover compartment fire
shallbeassumed.Thedeterminationofthetemperatureversustimeprofileresultingfromthefireshallinclude
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6601
fuel load, ventilation characteristics to the space (natural and mechanical), compartment dimensions and
thermalcharacteristicsofthecompartmentboundary.
10.18.2.1.3ExteriorFires
The exposure of exterior structure to flames projecting from windows or other wall openings as a result of a
postflashovercompartmentfireshallbeconsideredalongwiththeradiationfromtheinteriorfirethroughthe
opening.Theshapeandlengthoftheflameprojectionshallbeusedalongwiththedistancebetweentheflame
andtheexteriorsteelworktodeterminetheheatfluxtothesteel.ThemethodidentifiedinSection10.18.2.1.2
shallbeusedfordescribingthecharacteristicsoftheinteriorcompartmentfire.
10.18.2.1.4FireDuration
The fire duration in a particular area shall be determined by considering the total combustible mass, in other
words,fuelloadavailableinthespace.Inthecaseofeitheralocalizedfireorapostflashovercompartmentfire,
the time duration shall be determined as the total combustible mass divided by the mass loss rate, except
wheredeterminedfromSection10.18.2.1.2.
10.18.2.1.5ActiveFireProtectionSystems
Theeffectsofactivefireprotectionsystemsshallbeconsideredwhendescribingthedesignbasisfire.
Whereautomaticsmokeandheatventsareinstalledinnonsprinkleredspaces,theresultingsmoketemperature
shallbedeterminedfromcalculation.
10.18.2.2 TemperaturesinStructuralSystemsunderFireConditions
Temperatureswithinstructuralmembers,componentsandframesdueto theheatingconditionsposedbythe
designbasisfireshallbedeterminedbyaheattransferanalysis.

10.18.2.3 MaterialStrengthsatElevatedTemperatures
Materialpropertiesatelevatedtemperaturesshallbedeterminedfromtestdata.Intheabsenceofsuchdata,it
ispermittedtousethematerialpropertiesstipulatedinthissection.Theserelationshipsdonotapplyforsteels
withayieldstrengthinexcessof448MPaorconcreteswithspecifiedcompressionstrengthinexcessof55MPa.
10.18.2.3.1ThermalElongation
Thermal expansion of structural and reinforcing steels: For calculations at temperatures above 65
o
C, the
coefficientofthermalexpansionshallbe1.410
5
/
o
C.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6602 Vol.2
Thermalexpansionofnormalweightconcrete:Forcalculationsattemperaturesabove65
o
C,thecoefficientof
thermalexpansionshallbe1.810
5
/
o
C.
Thermal expansion of lightweight concrete: For calculations at temperatures above 65
o
C, the coefficient of
thermalexpansionshallbe7.910
6
/
o
C.
10.18.2.3.2MechanicalPropertiesatElevatedTemperatures
Thedeteriorationinstrengthandstiffnessofstructuralmembers,components,andsystemsshallbetakeninto
accountinthestructuralanalysisoftheframe.
ThevaluesFym, Fum, Em, fcm, Ecm andcu atelevatedtemperaturetobeusedinstructuralanalysis,expressedas
theratiowithrespecttothepropertyatambient,assumedtobe20
o
C,shallbedefinedasinTables10.18.2.1
and10.18.2.2.Itispermittedtointerpolatebetweenthesevalues.

10.18.2.4 StructuralDesignRequirements
10.18.2.4.1GeneralStructuralIntegrity
Thestructuralframeshallbecapableofprovidingadequatestrengthanddeformationcapacitytowithstand,as
a system, the structural actions developed during the fire within the prescribed limits of deformation. The
structural system shall be designed to sustain local damage with the structural system as a whole remaining
stable.
Continuous load paths shall be provided to transfer all forces from the ex posed region to the final point of
resistance. The foundation shall be designed to resist the forces and to accommodate the deformations
developedduringthedesignbasisfire.
10.18.2.4.2StrengthRequirementsandDeformationLimits
Conformance of the structural system to these requirements shall be demonstrated by constructing a
mathematicalmodelofthestructurebasedonprinciplesofstructuralmechanicsandevaluatingthismodelfor
theinternalforcesanddeformationsinthemembersofthestructuredevelopedbythetemperaturesfromthe
designbasisfire.
Individual members shall be provided with adequate strength to resist the shears, axial forces and moments
determinedinaccordancewiththeseprovisions.
Connections shall develop the strength of the connected members or the forces indicated above. Where the
means of providing fire resistance requires the consideration of deformation criteria, the deformation of the
structuralsystem,ormembersthereof,underthedesignbasisfireshallnotexceedtheprescribedlimits.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6603
10.18.2.4.3MethodsofAnalysis
10.18.2.4.3aAdvancedMethodsofAnalysis
The methods of analysis in this section are permitted for the design of all steel building structures for fire
conditions. The designbasis fire exposure shall be that determined in Section 10.18.2.1. The analysis shall
includebothathermalresponseandthemechanicalresponsetothedesignbasisfire.
Thethermalresponseshallproduceatemperaturefieldineachstructuralelementasaresultofthedesignbasis
fire and shall incorporate temperature dependent thermal properties of the structural elements and fire
resistivematerialsasperSection10.18.2.2.
The mechanical response results in forces and deflections in the structural sys tem subjected to the thermal
response calculated from the designbasis fire. The mechanical response shall take into account explicitly the
deteriorationinstrengthandstiffnesswithincreasingtemperature,theeffectsofthermalexpansionsandlarge
deformations. Boundary conditions and connection fixity must represent the proposed structural design.
MaterialpropertiesshallbedefinedasperSection10.18.2.3.
Theresultinganalysisshallconsiderallrelevantlimitstates,suchasexcessivedeflections,connectionfractures,
andoverallorlocalbuckling.
10.18.2.4.3aAdvancedMethodsofAnalysis
The methods of analysis in this section are applicable for the evaluation of the performance of individual
membersatelevatedtemperaturesduringexposuretofire.
The support and restraint conditions (forces, moments and boundary conditions) applicable at normal
temperaturesmaybeassumedtoremainunchangedthroughoutthefireexposure.
(1)Tensionmembers
It is permitted to model the thermal response of a tension element using a onedimensional heat transfer
equationwithheatinputasdirectedbythedesignbasisfiredefinedinSection10.18.2.1.
The design strength of a tension member shall be determined using the provisions of Section 10.4, with steel
propertiesasstipulatedin Section10.18.2.3andassumingauniformtemperatureoverthecrosssectionusing
thetemperatureequaltothemaximumsteeltemperature.
(2)Compressionmembers
Itispermittedtomodelthethermalresponseofacompressionelementusingaonedimensionalheattransfer
equationwithheatinputasdirectedbythedesignbasisfiredefinedinSection10.18.2.1.
The design strength of a compression member shall be determined using the provisions of Section 10.5 with
steelpropertiesasstipulatedinSection10.18.2.3.
(3)Flexuralmembers
It is permitted to model the thermal response of flexural elements using a onedimensional heat transfer
equation to calculate bottom flange temperature and to assume that this bottom flange temperature is
constantoverthedepthofthemember.Thedesignstrengthofaflexuralmembershallbedeterminedusingthe
provisionsofSection10.6withsteelpropertiesasstipulatedinSection10.18.2.3.
(4)Compositefloormembers
It is permitted to model the thermal response of flexural elements supporting a concrete slab using a one
dimensionalheattransferequationtocalculatebottomflangetemperature.Thattemperatureshallbetakenas
constantbetweenthebottomflangeandmiddepthofthewebandshalldecreaselinearlybynomorethan25
percentfromthemiddepthofthewebtothetopflangeofthebeam.
ThedesignstrengthofacompositeflexuralmembershallbedeterminedusingtheprovisionsofChapter13of
Part6ofthiscode,withreducedyieldstressesinthesteelconsistentwiththetemperaturevariationdescribed
underthermalresponse.
10.18.2.4.4DesignStrength
The design strength shall be determined as in Section 10.2.3.3. The nominal strength, R
n
, shall be calculated
usingmaterialproperties,asstipulatedinSection10.18.2.3,atthetemperaturedevelopedbythedesignbasis
fire.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6604 Vol.2
10.18.3 DesignByQualificationTesting
10.18.3.1 DesignStrength
Structural members and components in steel buildings shall be qualified for the rating period in conformance
with ASTM E119. It shall be permitted to demonstrate compliance with these requirements using the
proceduresspecifiedforsteelconstructioninSection5ofASCE/SFPE29.
10.18.3.2 RestrainedConstruction
For floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in buildings, a restrained condition exists when the
surroundingorsupportingstructureiscapableofresistingactionscausedbythermalexpansionthroughoutthe
rangeofanticipatedelevatedtemperatures.
Steel beams, girders and frames supporting concrete slabs that are welded or bolted to integral framing
members(inotherwords,columns,girders)shallbeconsideredrestrainedconstruction.
10.18.3.3 UnrestrainedConstruction
Steelbeams,girdersandframesthatdonotsupportaconcreteslabshallbeconsideredunrestrainedunlessthe
membersareboltedorweldedtosurroundingconstructionthathasbeenspecificallydesignedanddetailedto
resistactionscausedbythermalexpansion.
A steel member bearing on a wall in a single span or at the end span of multiple spans shall be considered
unrestrainedunlessthewallhasbeendesignedanddetailedtoresisteffectsofthermalexpansion.
10.19 StabilityBracingForColumnsandBeams
Thissectionaddressestheminimumbracestrengthandstiffnessnecessarytoprovidememberstrengthsbased
ontheunbracedlengthbetweenbraceswithaneffectivelengthfactor,K,equalto1.0.
10.19.1 GeneralProvisions
Bracingisassumedtobeperpendiculartothememberstobebraced;forinclinedordiagonalbracing,thebrace
strength (force or moment) and stiffness (force per unit displacement or moment per unit rotation) shall be
adjusted for the angle of inclination. The evaluation of the stiffness furnished by a brace shall include its
memberandgeometricproperties,aswellastheeffectsofconnectionsandanchoringdetails.
Two general types of bracing systems are considered, relative and nodal. A relative brace controls the
movementofthebracepointwithrespecttoadjacentbracedpoints.Anodalbracecontrolsthemovementat
thebracedpointwithoutdirectinteractionwithadjacentbracedpoints.Theavailablestrengthandstiffnessof
thebracingshallequalorexceedtherequiredlimitsunlessanalysisindicatesthatsmallervaluesarejustifiedby
analysis.
Asecondorderanalysisthatincludesaninitialoutofstraightnessofthemembertoobtainbracestrengthand
stiffnessispermittedinlieuoftherequirementsofthissection.
10.19.2 Columns

Itispermittedtobraceanindividualcolumnatendandintermediatepointsalongitslengthbyeitherrelativeor
nodalbracingsystems.Itisassumedthatnodalbracesareequallyspacedalongthecolumn.
10.19.2.1 RelativeBracing
Therequiredbracestrengthis
P
b
= u.uu4 P

(1u.19.2.1)
Therequiredbracestiffnessis
[
b
=
1

_
2P

I
b
] (IRF) [
b
= 0_
2P

I
b
] (AS)
(1u.19.2.2)
where
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6605

FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
10.19.2.2 NodalBracing
Therequiredbracestrengthis
P
b
= u.u1 P

(1u.19.2.S)
Therequiredbracestiffnessis
[
b
=
1

_
8P

I
b
] (IRF) [
b
= 0_
8P

I
b
] (AS)
(1u.19.2.4)
where
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
Pr=requiredaxialcompressivestrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
WhenLbislessthanLq,whereLqisthemaximumunbracedlengthfortherequiredcolumnforcewithKequal
to1.0,thenLbinEquation10.19.2.4ispermittedtobetakenequaltoLq.
10.19.3 Beams
Atpointsofsupportforbeams,girdersandtrusses,restraintagainstrotationabouttheirlongitudinalaxisshall
be provided. Beam bracing shall prevent the relative displacement of the top and bottom flanges, in other
words,twistofthesection.Lateralstabilityofbeamsshallbeprovidedbylateralbracing,torsionalbracingora
combination of the two. In members subjected to double curvature bending, the inflection point shall not be
consideredabracepoint.
10.19.3.1 LateralBracing
Bracingshallbeattachednearthecompressionflange,exceptforacantileveredmember,whereanendbrace
shall be attached near the top (tension) flange. Lateral bracing shall be attached to both flanges at the brace
point nearest the inflection point for beams subjected to double curvature bending along the length to be
braced.
a. RelativeBracing
Therequiredbracestrengthis
P
b
= u.uu8 H

C
d
b
o
(1u.19.S.1)
Therequiredbracestiffnessis
[
b
=
1
q
[
4M
r
C
d
L
b
h
c
(IRF) [
b
= 0[
4M
r
C
d
L
b
h
c
(AS)
(1u.19.S.2)
Where,
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
h
o
=distancebetweenflangecentroids,mm.
C
d
=1.0forbendinginsinglecurvature;2.0fordoublecurvature;C
d
=2.0onlyappliestothebraceclosesttothe
inflectionpoint.
L
b
=laterallyunbracedlength,mm.
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
Ni=requiredflexuralstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
Part6
StructuralDesign
6606 Vol.2
Ni=requiredflexuralstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,Nmm
b. NodalBracing
Therequiredbracestrengthis
P
b
= u.u2 H

C
d
b
o
(1u.19.S.S)
Therequiredbracestiffnessis
[
b
=
1
q
[
10M
r
C
d
L
b
h
c
(IRF) [
b
= 0[
10M
r
C
d
L
b
h
c
(AS)
(1u.19.S.4)
where
=0.75(LRFD) =2.00(ASD)
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
Ni =requiredflexuralstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
Ni =requiredflexuralstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,Nmm
WhenL
b
islessthanL
q
,themaximumunbracedlengthforM
r
,thenL
b
inEquation10.19.3.4shallbepermitted
tobetakenequaltoL
q
.
10.19.3.2 TorsionalBracing
Itispermittedtoprovideeithernodalorcontinuoustorsionalbracingalongthebeamlength.Itispermittedto
attachthe bracingat any crosssectionallocationanditneednotbeattachednearthecompressionflange.The
connectionbetweenatorsionalbraceandthebeamshallbeabletosupporttherequiredmomentgivenbelow.
a. NodalBracing
Therequiredbracingmomentis
H
b
=
u.u24 H

I
nC
b
I
b

(1u.19.S.S)
Therequiredcrossframeordiaphragmbracingstiffnessis
[
1b
=
[
1
_1 -
[
1
[
scc
]

(1u.19.S.6)
where
[
1
=
1
q
_
2.4LM
r
2
nLI
j
C
b
2
] (IRF) [
1
= 0_
2.4LM
r
2
nLI
j
C
b
2
] (AS)
(1u.19.S.7)
[
scc
=
S.S E
b
o
_
1.Sb
o
t
w
3
12
+
t
s
b
s
3
12
_
(1u.19.S.8)
where
=0.75(LRFD) =3.00(ASD)
L=spanlength,mm
n=numberofnodalbracedpointswithinthespan
E=modulusofelasticityofsteel200000MPa
Iy=outofplanemomentofinertia,mm4
Cb=modificationfactordefinedinSection10.6
tw=beamwebthickness,mm
ts=webstiffenerthickness,mm
bs=stiffenerwidthforonesidedstiffeners(usetwicetheindividualstiffenerwidthforpairsofstiffeners),mm.
T=bracestiffnessexcludingwebdistortion,Nmm/radian
sec=webdistortionalstiffness,includingtheeffectofwebtransversestiffeners,
ifany,Nmm/radian
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6607
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
Mr=requiredflexuralstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm
FordesignaccordingtoSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
Mr=requiredflexuralstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,Nmm
Ifsec<T,Equation10.19.3.6isnegative,whichindicatesthattorsionalbeambracingwillnotbeeffective
duetoinadequatewebdistortionalstiffness.
Whenrequired,thewebstiffenershallextendthefulldepthofthebracedmemberandshallbeattachedtothe
flange if the torsional brace is also attached to the flange. Alternatively, it shall be permissible to stop the
stiffener short by a distance equal to 4tw from anybeam flange that is not directly attached to the torsional
brace.WhenLbislessthanLq,thenLbinEquation10.19.3.5shallbepermittedtobetakenequaltoLq.

b. ContinuousTorsionalBracing
Forcontinuousbracing,useEquations10.19.3.5,10.19.3.6and10.19.3.8withL/ntakenas1.0andLbtakenas
Lq;thebracingmomentandstiffnessaregivenperunitspanlength.Thedistortionalstiffnessforanunstiffened
webis
[
scc
=
S.S Et
w
3
12b
o

(1u.19.S.9)
10.19.4 SlendernessLimitations
The slenderness ratio, L/r, of any stability bracing shall not exceed 180 unless a comprehensive analysis
includingsecondordereffectsjustifiesahighervalue.
10.20 SeismicProvisionsforStructuralSteelBuildings
10.20.1 Scope
TheSeismicProvisionsforStructuralSteelBuildings,hereinafterreferredtoastheseProvisionsasoutlineinthis
Section10.20, shall govern the design, fabrication and erection of structuralsteel members and connections
in the seismic load resisting systems (SLRS) and splices in columns that are not part of the SLRS, in
buildings and other structures, where other structures are defined as those structures designed, fabricated
anderectedinamannersimilartobuildings,withbuildinglikeverticalandlateralloadresistingelements.

These Provisions shall apply when the seismicresponsemodificationcoefficient,R,(asspecifiedinChapter2of

Part 6) is taken greater than 3, regardless of the seismic design category. When the seismic response
modificationcoefficient,R,istakenas3orless,thestructureisnotrequiredtosatisfytheProvisionsthisSection
10.20,unlessspecificallyrequiredbytheapplicableauthority

These Provisions shall be applied in conjunction with thespecification set forth in Sections 10.1 through 10.19
whicheverisapplicable.

Loads,loadcombinations,systemlimitationsandgeneraldesignrequirementsshallbethoseinChapter2ofPart
6ofthiscodeaswellasthosementionedinSection10.2.

10.20.2 ReferencedSpecifications,CodesandStandards
The documents referenced in these Provisions shall include those listed in Section 10.1.2 with the following
additionsandmodifications:

AmericanInstituteofSteelConstruction(AISC):
SpecificationforStructuralSteelBuildings,ANSI/AISC36005
Part6
StructuralDesign
6608 Vol.2
PrequalifiedConnectionsforSpecialandIntermediateSteelMomentFramesforSeismicApplications,ANSI/AISC
35805
AmericanSocietyforNondestructiveTesting(ASNT):
RecommendedPracticefortheTrainingandTestingofNondestructiveTestingPersonnel,ASNTSNTTC1a2001
StandardfortheQualificationandCertificationofNondestructiveTestingPersonnel,ANSI/ASNTCP1892001
AmericanWeldingSociety(AWS):
Standard Methods for Determination of the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic, and Ferritic
SteelWeldMetalProducedbyArcWelding,AWSA4.393R
StandardMethodsforMechanicalTestingofWeldsU.S.Customary,ANSI/AWSB4.098
StandardMethodsforMechanicalTestingofWeldsMetricOnly,ANSI/AWSB4.0M:2000
StandardfortheQualificationofWeldingInspectors,AWSB5.1:2003
OxygenCuttingSurfaceRoughnessGaugeandWallChartforCriteriaDescribingOxygenCutSurfaces,AWSC4.1
FederalEmergencyManagementAgency(FEMA)
RecommendedSeismicDesignCriteriaforNewSteelMomentFrameBuildings,FEMA350,July2000
Symbols
Symbolsusedinthissectionarelistedbelow.Numbersinparenthesesafterthedefinitionrefertothesectionin
theseProvisionsinwhichthesymbolisfirstused.
Symbol Description Section
A
b
Ciosssectional aiea of a hoiizontal bounuaiy element (BBE),

(mm
2
)
1u.2u.17.2.1
A
c
Ciosssectional aiea of a veitical bounuaiy element (vBE),

(mm
2
)
1u.2u.17.2.1
Af Flange aiea, (mm
2
) 1u.2u.8
Ag uioss aiea,

(mm
2
) 1u.2u.9
Asc Aiea of the yieluing segment of steel coie,

(mm
2
) 1u.2u.16
Ast Aiea of link stiffenei,

(mm
2
) 1u.2u.1S
Aw Link web aiea,

(mm
2
) 1u.2u.1S
C
a
Ratio of iequiieu stiength to available stiength Table 1u.2u.8.1
C
d
Coefficient ielating ielative biace stiffness anu cuivatuie 1u.2u.9
C
d
Beflection amplification factoi 1u.C.2
C
r
Paiametei useu foi ueteimining the appioximate
funuamental peiiou
1u.C.2
D Beau loau uue to the weight of the stiuctuial elements anu
peimanent featuies on the builuing, (N)
1u.2u.9
D 0utsiue uiametei of iounu BSS, (mm) Table 1u.2u.8.1
E Eaithquake loau 1u.2u.4
E Effect of hoiizontal anu veitical eaithquakeinuuceu loaus 1u.2u.9
E Nouulus of elasticity of steel, E= 2uu,uuu NPa 1u.2u.8
EI Flexuial elastic stiffness of the choiu membeis of the special
segment,

(Nmm
2
)
1u.2u.12
F
y
Specifieu minimum yielu stiess of the type of steel to be useu,
(NPa). As useu in the Specification, yielu stiess uenotes
eithei the minimum specifieu yielu point (foi those steels
that have a yielu point) oi the specifieu yielu stiength (foi
those steels that uo not have a yielu point)
1u.2u.6
F
yb
F
y
of a beam, (NPa) 1u.2u.9
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6609
Symbol Description Section
F
yc
F
y
of a column, (NPa) 1u.2u.9
F
ysc
Specifieu minimum yielu stiess of the steel coie, oi actual
yielu stiess of the steel coie as ueteimineu fiom a coupon
test, (NPa) .
1u.2u.16
F
u
Specifieu minimum tensile stiength, (NPa) 1u.2u.6
H Beight of stoiy, which may be taken as the uistance between
the centeiline of flooi fiaming at each of the levels above anu
below, oi the uistance between the top of flooi slabs at each
of the levels above anu below, (mm)
1u.2u.8
I Noment of ineitia, (mm
4
) 1u.2u.12
I
c
Noment of ineitia of a veitical bounuaiy element (vBE)
taken peipenuiculai to the uiiection of the web plate line,
(mm
4
)
1u.2u.17
K Effective length factoi foi piismatic membei 1u.2u.1S
L Span length of the tiuss, (mm) 1u.2u.12
L Bistance between vBE centeilines, (mm) 1u.2u.17
L
b
Length between points which aie eithei biaceu against
lateial uisplacement of compiession flange oi biaceu against
twist of the cioss section, (mm)
1u.2u.1S
L
b
Link length, (mm) 1u.2u.1S
L
cf
Cleai uistance between vBE flanges, (mm) 1u.2u.17
L
h
Bistance between plastic hinge locations, (mm) 1u.2u.9
L
p
Limiting lateially unbiaceu length foi full plastic flexuial
stiength, unifoim moment case, (mm)
1u.2u.12
L
pd
Limiting lateially unbiaceu length foi plastic analysis, (mm) 1u.2u.1S
L
s
Length of the special segment, (mm) 1u.2u.12
M
a
Requiieu flexuial stiength, using ASB loau combinations,
(Nmm)
1u.2u.9
M
av
Auuitional moment uue to sheai amplification fiom the
location of the plastic hinge to the column centeiline baseu
on ASB loau combinations, (Nmm)
1u.2u.9
M
n
Nominal flexuial stiength, (Nmm) 1u.2u.11
M
nc
Nominal flexuial stiength of the choiu membei of the special
segment, (Nmm)
1u.2u.12
M
p
Nominal plastic flexuial stiength, (Nmm) Table 1u.2u.8.1
M
pa
Nominal plastic flexuial stiength mouifieu by axial loau, (N
mm)
1u.2u.1S
M
pb
Nominal plastic flexuial stiength of the beam, (Nmm) 1u.2u.9
M
p,exp
Expecteu plastic moment, (Nmm) 1u.2u.9
M
pc
Nominal plastic flexuial stiength of the column, (Nmm) 1u.2u.8
M
r
Expecteu flexuial stiength, (Nmm) 1u.2u.9
M
uv
Auuitional moment uue to sheai amplification fiom the
location of the plastic hinge to the column centeiline baseu
on LRFB loau combinations, (Nmm)
1u.2u.9
M
u
Requiieu flexuial stiength, using LRFB loau combinations,
(Nmm)
1u.2u.9
M
u,exp
Expecteu iequiieu flexuial stiength, (Nmm) 1u.2u.1S
Part6
StructuralDesign
6610 Vol.2
Symbol Description Section
P
a
Requiieu axial stiength of a column using ASB loau
combinations, (N)

1u.2u.8
P
ac
Requiieu compiessive stiength using ASB loau combinations,
(N)
1u.2u.9
P
b
Requiieu stiength of lateial biace at enus of the link, (N) 1u.2u.1S
P
c
Available axial stiength of a column, (N) 1u.2u.9
P
n
Nominal axial stiength of a column, (N) 1u.2u.8
P
nc
Nominal axial compiessive stiength of uiagonal membeis of
the special segment, (N)
1u.2u.12
P
nt
Nominal axial tensile stiength of uiagonal membeis of the
special segment, (N)
1u.2u.12
P
r
Requiieu compiessive stiength, (N) 1u.2u.1S
P
rc
Requiieu compiessive stiength using ASB oi LRFB loau
combinations, (N)
1u.2u.9
P
u
Requiieu axial stiength of a column oi a link using LRFB loau
combinations, (N)
1u.2u.8
P
uc
Requiieu compiessive stiength using LRFB loau
combinations, (N)
1u.2u.9
P
y
Nominal axial yielu stiength of a membei, equal to F
y
A
g
, (N) Table 1u.2u.8.1
P
ysc
Axial yielu stiength of steel coie, (N) 1u.2u.16
Q
b
Naximum unbalanceu veitical loau effect applieu to a beam
by the biaces, (N)
1u.2u.1S
Q
1
Axial foices anu moments geneiateu by at least 1.2S times
the expecteu nominal sheai stiength of the link
1u.2u.1S
R Seismic iesponse mouification coefficient 1u.2u.1
R
n
Nominal stiength, (N) 1u.2u.6
R
t
Ratio of the expecteu tensile stiength to the specifieu
minimum tensile stiength F
u
, as ielateu to oveistiength in
mateiial yielu stiess R
y

1u.2u.6
R
u
Requiieu stiength 1u.2u.9
R
v
Panel zone nominal sheai stiength 1u.2u.9
R
y
Ratio of the expecteu yielu stiess to the specifieu minimum
yielu stiess, F
y

1u.2u.6
S Snow loau, (N) 1u.2u.9
V
a
Requiieu sheai stiength using ASB loau combinations, (N) 1u.2u.9
V
n
Nominal sheai stiength of a membei, (N) 1u.2u.1S
V
ne
Expecteu veitical sheai stiength of the special segment, (N) 1u.2u.12
V
p
Nominal sheai stiength of an active link, (N) Table 1u.2u.8.1
V
pa
Nominal sheai stiength of an active link mouifieu by the axial
loau magnituue, (N)
1u.2u.1S
V
u
Requiieu sheai stiength using LRFB loau combinations, (N) 1u.2u.1u
Z Plastic section mouulus of a membei, (mm
S
) 1u.2u.9
Zb Plastic section mouulus of the beam, (mm
S
) 1u.2u.9
Zc Plastic section mouulus of the column, (mm
S
) 1u.2u.9
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6611
Symbol Description Section
Z
x Plastic section mouulus xaxis, (mm
S
) 1u.2u.8
Z
RBS
Ninimum plastic section mouulus at the ieuuceu beam
section, (mm
S
)
1u.2u.9
a Angle that uiagonal membeis make with the hoiizontal 1u.2u.12
b Wiuth of compiession element as uefineu in Specification
Section 1u.2.4.1, (mm)
Table 1u.2u.8.1
b
cf
Wiuth of column flange, (mm) 1u.2u.9
b
f
Flange wiuth, (mm) 1u.2u.9
d Nominal fastenei uiametei, (mm) 1u.2u.7
d 0veiall beam uepth, (mm) 1u.2u.1S
d
c
0veiall column uepth, (mm) 1u.2u.9
d
z
0veiall panel zone uepth between continuity plates, (mm) 1u.2u.9
e EBF link length, (mm) 1u.2u.1S
h Cleai uistance between flanges less the fillet oi coinei iauius
foi iolleu shapes; anu foi builtup sections, the uistance
between aujacent lines of fasteneis oi the cleai uistance
between flanges when welus aie useu; foi tees, the oveiall
uepth; anu foi iectangulai BSS, the cleai uistance between
the flanges less the insiue coinei iauius on each siue, (mm)
Table 1u.2u.8.1
h Bistance between hoiizontal bounuaiy element centeilines,
(mm)
1u.2u.17
h
o
Bistance between flange centioius, (mm) 1u.2u.9
l 0nbiaceu length between stitches of builtup biacing
membeis, (mm) .
1u.2u.1S
l 0nbiaceu length of compiession oi biacing membei, (mm) 1u.2u.1S
r uoveining iauius of gyiation, (mm) 1u.2u.1S
r
y
Rauius of gyiation about yaxis, (mm) 1u.2u.9
t Thickness of connecteu pait, (mm) 1u.2u.7
t Thickness of element, (mm) Table 1u.2u.8.1
t Thickness of column web oi uoublei plate, (mm) 1u.2u.9
t
bf
Thickness of beam flange, (mm) 1u.2u.9
t
cf
Thickness of column flange, (mm) 1u.2u.9
t
f
Thickness of flange, (mm) 1u.2u.17
t
p
Thickness of panel zone incluuing uoublei plates, (mm) 1u.2u.9
t
w
Thickness of web, (mm) Table 1u.2u.8.1
w
z
Wiuth of panel zone between column flanges, (mm) 1u.2u.9
x Paiametei useu foi ueteimining the appioximate
funuamental peiiou
1u.C.2
z
b
Ninimum plastic section mouulus at the ieuuceu beam
section, (mm
S
)
1u.2u.9
M*
pc
Noment at beam anu column centeiline ueteimineu by
piojecting the sum of the nominal column plastic moment
stiength, ieuuceu by the axial stiess P
uc
A
g
, fiom the top anu
bottom of the beam moment connection
1u.2u.9
M*
pb
Noment at the inteisection of the beam anu column
centeilines ueteimineu by piojecting the beam maximum
1u.2u.9
Part6
StructuralDesign
6612 Vol.2
Symbol Description Section
uevelopeu moments fiom the column face. Naximum
uevelopeu moments shall be ueteimineu fiom test iesults
Compiession stiength aujustment factoi 1u.2u.16
Besign stoiy uiift 1u.2u.1S

b
Befoimation quantity useu to contiol loauing of test
specimen (total biace enu iotation foi the subassemblage
test specimen; total biace axial uefoimation foi the biace test
specimen)
1u.E.2

bm
value of uefoimation quantity,
b
, coiiesponuing to the
uesign stoiy uiift
1u.E.6

by
value of uefoimation quantity,
b
, at fiist significant yielu of
test specimen
1u.E.6
Safety factoi 1u.2u.6

b
Safety factoi foi flexuie = 1.67 1u.2u.8

c
Safety factoi foi compiession = 1.67 1u.2u.8

o
Boiizontal seismic oveistiength factoi 1u.2u.4

v
Safety factoi foi sheai stiength of panel zone of beamto
column connections
1u.2u.9
Angle of uiagonal membeis with the hoiizontal 1u.2u.12
Angle of web yieluing in iauians, as measuieu ielative to the
veitical
1u.2u.17
Befoimation quantity useu to contiol loauing of test
specimen
1u.B.6

y
value of uefoimation quantity at fiist significant yielu of
test specimen
1u.B.6
Ratio of iequiieu axial foice P
u
to iequiieu sheai stiength V
u
of a link
1u.2u.1S

p
,
ps
Limiting slenueiness paiametei foi compact element 1u.2u.8
Resistance factoi 1u.2u.6

b
Resistance factoi foi flexuie 1u.2u.8

c
Resistance factoi foi compiession 1u.2u.8

v
Resistance factoi foi sheai stiength of panel zone of beamto
column connections
1u.2u.9

v
Resistance factoi foi sheai 1u.2u.1S
Inteistoiy uiift angle, iauians 1u.B.S

total
Link iotation angle 1u.B.2
Stiain haiuening aujustment factoi 1u.2u.16

Glossary
Notes:
(1) Teims uesignateu with * aie usually qualifieu by the type of load effect, foi example, nominal tensile strength,
availablecompressivestrength, designflexuralstrength.
(2) Teims uesignateu with ** aie usually qualifieu by the type of component, foi example, web localbuckling, flange
localbending.

Adjustedbrace strength. Stiength of a biace in a bucklingrestrained bracedframeat uefoimations coiiesponuing
to 2.u times the designstorydrift.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6613
Allowablestrength*. Nominal stiength uiviueu by the safety factoi, R
n
.
Applicablebuildingcode(ABC).Builuing coue unuei which the stiuctuie is uesigneu.
Amplified seismic load. Boiizontal component of eaithquake loau E multiplieu by
o
, wheie E anu the hoiizontal
component of Eaie specifieu in the applicablebuildingcode.
Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). 0iganization, political subuivision, office oi inuiviuual chaigeu with the
iesponsibility of auministeiing anu enfoicing the piovisions of this stanuaiu.
Availablestrength*.Besign stiength oi allowable stiength, as appiopiiate.
ASD (Allowable Strength Design). Nethou of piopoitioning stiuctuial components such that the allowable strength
equals oi exceeus the requiredstrengthof the component unuei the action of the ASB loau combinations.
ASD load combination. Loau combination in the applicable building code intenueu foi allowable stiength uesign
(allowable stiess uesign).
Bucklingrestrained braced frame (BRBF). Biagonally biaceu fiame safisfying the iequiiements of Section 16
in which all membeis of the biacing system aie subjecteu piimaiily to axial foices anu in which the limit state of
compiession buckling of biaces is piecluueu at foices anu uefoimations coiiesponuing to 2.u times the design story
drift.
Bucklingrestraining system. System of iestiaints that limits buckling of the steel coie in BRBF. This system incluues
the casing on the steel coie anu stiuctuial elements aujoining its connections. The bucklingiestiaining system is
intenueu to peimit the tiansveise expansion anu longituuinal contiaction of the steel coie foi uefoimations
coiiesponuing to 2.u times the designstorydrift.
Casing. Element that iesists foices tiansveise to the axis of the biace theieby iestiaining buckling of the coie. The
casing iequiies a means of ueliveiing this foice to the iemainuei of the bucklingiestiaining system. The casing
iesists little oi no foice in the axis of the biace.
Columnbase. Assemblage of plates, connectois, bolts, anu ious at the base of a column useu to tiansmit foices between
the steel supeistiuctuie anu the founuation.
Continuityplates.Column stiffeneis at the top anu bottom of the panelzone; also known as tiansveise stiffeneis.
Contractor.Fabiicatoi oi eiectoi, as applicable.
Demandcriticalweld.Welu so uesignateu by these Provisions.
Designearthquake.The eaithquake iepiesenteu by the designresponsespectrumas specifieu in the applicable building
code.
Design story drift. Amplifieu stoiy uiift (uiift unuei the design earthquake, incluuing the effects of inelastic action),
ueteimineu as specifieu in the applicablebuildingcode.
Designstrength*.Resistancefactormultiplieu by the nominalstrength, R
n
.
Diagonal bracing. Inclineu stiuctuial membeis caiiying piimaiily axial loau that aie employeu to enable a
stiuctuial fiame to act as a tiuss to iesist lateial loaus.
Dual system. Stiuctuial system with the following featuies: (1) an essentially complete space fiame that pioviues
suppoit foi giavity loaus; (2) iesistance to lateial loau pioviueu by moment fiames (SNF, INF oi 0NF) that aie
capable of iesisting at least 2S peicent of the base sheai, anu conciete oi steel sheai walls, oi steel biaceu fiames
(EBF, SCBF oi 0CBF); anu (S) each system uesigneu to iesist the total lateial loau in piopoition to its ielative
iigiuity.
Ductile limit state. Buctile limit states incluue membei anu connection yieluing, beaiing uefoimation at bolt holes,
as well as buckling of membeis that confoim to the wiuth thickness limitations of Table I81. Fiactuie of a
membei oi of a connection, oi buckling of a connection element, is not a uuctile limit state.
Eccentrically braced frame (EBF). Biagonally biaceu fiame meeting the iequiiements of Section 1S that has at least
one enu of each biacing membei connecteu to a beam a shoit uistance fiom anothei beamtobiace connection oi a
beamtocolumn connection.
Exemptedcolumn.Column not meeting the iequiiements of Equation 9S foi SNF.
Expectedyieldstrength.Yielu stiength in tension of a membei, equal to the expecteu yielu stiess multiplieu by A
g
.
Expected tensile strength *. Tensile stiength of a membei, equal to the specifieu minimum tensile stiength, F
u
,
multiplieu by R
t
.
Expected yield stress.Yielu stiess of the mateiial, equal to the specifieu minimum yielu stiess, F
y
, multiplieu by R
y
.
Intermediate moment frame (IMF). Noment fiame system that meets the iequiiements of Section 1u.2u.1u
Interstorydriftangle.Inteistoiy uisplacement uiviueu by stoiy height, iauians.
InvertedVbracedframe.See Vbracedframe.
karea. The karea is the iegion of the web that extenus fiom the tangent point of the web anu the flangeweb fillet
(AISC k uimension) a uistance of S8 mm into the web beyonu the k uimension.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6614 Vol.2
Kbracedframe.A biacing configuiation in which biaces connect to a column at a location with no uiaphiagm oi othei
outofplane suppoit.
Lateral bracing member. Nembei that is uesigneu to inhibit lateial buckling oi lateial toisional buckling of
piimaiy fiaming membeis.
Link. In EBF, the segment of a beam that is locateu between the enus of two uiagonal biaces oi between the enu of a
uiagonal biace anu a column. The length of the linkis uefineu as the cleai uistance between the enus of two uiagonal
biaces oi between the uiagonal biace anu the column face.
Linkintermediatewebstiffeners.veitical web stiffeneis placeu within the link in EBF.
Linkrotationangle.Inelastic angle between the linkanu the beam outsiue of the link when the total stoiy uiift is equal
to the designstorydrift.
Link shear design strength. Lessei of the available sheai stiength of the link uevelopeu fiom the moment oi sheai
stiength of the link.
Lowest Anticipated Service Temperature (LAST). The lowest 1houi aveiage tempeiatuie with a 1uuyeai mean
iecuiience inteival.
LRFD (Load and Resistance Factor Design). Nethou of piopoitioning stiuctuial components such that the
design strength equals oi exceeus the required strength of the component unuei the action of the LRFD load
combinations.
LRFD Load Combination. Loau combination in the applicable building code intenueu foi stiength uesign (load and
resistancefactordesign).
Measuredflexuralresistance.Benuing moment measuieu in a beam at the face of the column, foi a beamtocolumn test
specimen testeu in accoiuance with Appenuix S.
Nominalload.Nagnituue of the loadspecifieu by the applicablebuildingcode.
Nominal strength*. Stiength of a stiuctuie oi component (without the resistance factor oi safety factor applieu) to
iesist the loau effects, as ueteimineu in accoiuance with this Specification.
Ordinaryconcentricallybracedframe(OCBF). Biagonally biaceu fiame meeting the iequiiements of Section 14 in
which all membeis of the biacing system aie subjecteu piimaiily to axial foices.
Ordinary moment frame (OMF). Noment fiame system that meets the iequiiements of Section 1u.2u.11.
Overstrengthfactor,
o
.Factoi specifieu by the applicablebuildingcodein oiuei to ueteimine the amplifieu seismic loau,
wheie iequiieu by these Provisions.
Prequalifiedconnection.Connection that complies with the iequiiements of Appenuix 1u.A
Protectedzone.Aiea of membeis in which limitations apply to fabiication anu attachments.
Prototype.The connection oi biace uesign that is to be useu in the builuing (SNF, INF, EBF, anu BRBF).
Qualityassuranceplan.Wiitten uesciiption of qualifications, pioceuuies, quality inspections, iesouices, anu iecoius to
be useu to pioviue assuiance that the stiuctuie complies with the engineeis quality iequiiements, specifications anu
contiact uocuments.
Reduced beam section. Reuuction in cioss section ovei a uisciete length that piomotes a zone of inelasticity in the
membei.
Required strength*. Foices, stiesses, anu uefoimations piouuceu in a stiuctuial component, ueteimineu by eithei
stiuctuial analysis, foi the LRFD oi ASD loadcombinations, as appiopiiate, oi as specifieu by the Specificationanu
these Provisions.
Resistancefactor, . Factoi that accounts foi unavoiuable ueviations of the nominalstrength
fiom the actual stiength anu foi the mannei anu consequences of failuie.
Safetyfactor,. Factoi that accounts foi ueviations of the actual stiength fiom the nominal stiength, ueviations of the
actual loau fiom the nominalload, unceitainties in the analysis that tiansfoims the loau into a loau effect, anu foi the
mannei anu consequences of failuie.
Seismic design category. Classification assigneu to a builuing by the applicable buildingcode baseu upon its seismic
use group anu the uesign spectial iesponse acceleiation coefficients.
Seismic load resisting system (SLRS). Assembly of stiuctuial elements in the builuing that iesists seismic loaus,
incluuing stiuts, collectois, choius, uiaphiagms anu tiusses.
Seismic response modification coefficient, R. Factoi that ieuuces seismic loau effects to stiength level as specifieu by
the applicablebuildingcode.
Seismicusegroup.Classification assigneu to a stiuctuie baseu on its use as specifieu by the applicablebuildingcode.
Special concentrically braced frame (SCBF). Biagonally biaceu fiame meeting the iequiiements of Section
1u. 2u. 1S in which all membeis of the biacing system aie subjecteu piimaiily to axial foices.
Specialmo me n t frame(SMF).Noment fiame system that meets the iequiiements of Section 1u.2u.9.
Special plate shear wall (SPSW). Plate sheai wall system that meets the iequiiements of Section 1u.2u.17.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6615
Special truss moment frame (STMF). Tiuss moment fiame system that meets the iequiiements of Section
1u.2u.12.
Static yield strength. Stiength of a stiuctuial membei oi connection ueteimineu on the basis of testing conuucteu
unuei slow monotonic loauing until failuie.
Steelcore. Axialfoiceiesisting element of biaces in BRBF. The steel coie contains a yieluing segment anu connections to
tiansfei its axial foice to aujoining elements; it may also contain piojections beyonu the casing anu tiansition
segments between the piojections anu yieluing segment.
Testedconnection.Connection that complies with the iequiiements of Appenuix 1u.B.
Vbraced frame. Concentiically biaceu fiame (SCBF, 0CBF oi BRBF) in which a paii of uiagonal biaces locateu eithei
above oi below a beam is connecteu to a single point within the cleai beam span. Wheie the uiagonal biaces aie below
the beam, the system is also iefeiieu to as an invertedVbracedframe.
Xbracedframe.Concentiically biaceu fiame (0CBF oi SCBF) in which a paii of uiagonal biaces ciosses neai the miu
length of the biaces.
Ybracedframe.Eccentricallybracedframe(EBF) in which the stem of the Y is the linkof the EBF system.
10.20.3 GeneralSeismicDesignRequirements
Therequiredstrengthandotherseismicprovisionsandthelimitationsonheightandirregularityarespecifiedin
Chapter2ofPart6ofthiscode.
ThedesignstorydriftshallbeinaccordancewiththerequirementssetforthinChapter2ofPart6ofthiscode.
10.20.4 Loads,LoadCombinations,andNominalStrengths
10.20.4.1 LoadsandLoadCombinations
The loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated in Chapter 2 of Part 6 of this code. Where amplified
seismic loads are required by these Provisions, the horizontal portion of the earthquake load E (as defined in
Chapter2ofPart6)shallbemultipliedbytheoverstrengthfactor,
o
,asapplicable.
10.20.4.2 NominalStrength
The nominal strength of syst ems, members and connections shall comply with the Specification, except as
modifiedthroughouttheseProvisions.
10.20.5 Structural Design Drawings and Specifications,Shop Drawings,and Erection
Drawings
10.20.5.1StructuralDesignDrawingsandSpecifications
Structural design drawings and specifications shall show the work to be performed, and include items
required by the Specification and the following, asapplicable:
(1)Designationoftheseismicloadresistingsystem(SLRS)
(2)DesignationofthemembersandconnectionsthatarepartoftheSLRS
(3) Configurationoftheconnections
(4)Connectionmaterialspecificationsandsizes
(5)Locationsofdemandcriticalwelds
(6) Lowest anticipated service temperature (LAST) of the steel structure, if the structure is not enclosed
andmaintainedatatemperatureof10Corhigher.
(7)Locationsanddimensionsofprotectedzones
(8)Locationswheregussetplatesaretobedetailedtoaccommodateinelasticrotation
(9)WeldingrequirementsasspecifiedinAppendix10.F,Section10.F.2.1.
ShopDrawings
ShopdrawingsshallincludeitemsrequiredbytheSpecificationandthefollowing,asapplicable:
(1)DesignationofthemembersandconnectionsthatarepartoftheSLRS
(2) Connectionmaterialspecifications
(3)Locationsofdemandcriticalshopwelds
Part6
StructuralDesign
6616 Vol.2
(4)Locationsanddimensionsofprotectedzones
(5)Gussetplatesdrawntoscalewhentheyaredetailedtoaccommodateinelasticrotation
WeldingrequirementsasspecifiedinAppendix10.F,Section10.F.2.2.
10.20.5.2ErectionDrawings
ErectiondrawingsshallincludeitemsrequiredbytheSpecificationandthefollowing,asapplicable:
(1)DesignationofthemembersandconnectionsthatarepartoftheSLRS
(2) Fieldconnectionmaterialspecificationsandsizes
(3)Locationsofdemandcriticalfieldwelds
(4)Locationsanddimensionsofprotectedzones
(5)Locationsofpretensionedbolts
(6)FieldweldingrequirementsasspecifiedinAppendix10.F,Section10.F.2.3
10.20.6 Materials
10.20.6.1 MaterialSpecifications
Structural steel used in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall meet the requirements of Section
10.1.3.1a, except as modified in present Section 10.20. The specified minimum yield stress of steel to be
used for members in which inelastic behavior is expected shall not exceed 345 MPa for systems defined in
Sections 10.20.9, 10.20.10, 10.20.12, 10.20.13, 10.20.15, 10.20.16, and 10.20.17 nor 380 MPa for systems
defined in Sections 10.20.11 and 10.20.14, unless the suitability of the material is determined by testing or
other rational criteria.This limitation does not applytocolumnsforwhichtheonlyexpectedinelasticbehavior
isyieldingatthecolumnbase.
The structural steel used in the SLRS described in Sections10.20.9through10.20.17shallmeetoneofthefollowing
ASTM Specifications: A36/ A36M, A53/A53M, A500 (Grade B or C), A501, A529/A529M, A572/A572M [Grade
290, 345 or 380], A588/A588M, A913/A913M [Grade 345, 415 or 450], A992/A992M, or A1011 HSLAS Grade
380. The structural steel used for column base plates shall meet one of the preceding ASTM specifications or
ASTMA283/A283MGradeD.
Other steels and nonsteel materials in bucklingrestrained braced frames arepermittedtobeusedsubjectto
therequirementsofSection10.20.16andAppendix10.E.
MaterialPropertiesforDeterminationofRequiredStrengthofMembersandConnections
Therequiredstrengthofanelement(amemberoraconnection)shallbedetermined from the expected yield
stress,R
y
F
y
,ofanadjoiningmember,whereF
y
isthespecifiedminimumyieldstressofthegradeofsteeltobe
used in the adjoining members and R
y
is the ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified minimum yield
stress,F
y
,ofthatmaterial.
The availablestrength of the element, R
n
for LRFD and R
n
/ forASD,shall beequalto or greaterthan the
requiredstrength,whereR
n
isthenominalstrengthoftheconnection.Theexpectedtensilestrength,R
t
F
u
,and
the expected yield stress, R
y
F
y
, are permitted to be used in lieu of F
u
and F
y
, respectively, in determining the
nominal strength, R
n
, of rupture and yielding limit states within the same member for which the required
strengthisdetermined.
ThevaluesofR
y
andR
t
forvarioussteelsaregiveninTable10.20.1.OthervaluesofR
y
andR
t
shallbepermittedif
thevaluesaredeterminedbytestingofspecimenssimilarinsizeandsourceconductedinaccordancewiththe
requirementsforthespecifiedgradeofsteel.
10.20.6.2 HeavySectionCVNRequirements
For structural steel in the SLRS, in addition to the requirements of Section 10.1.3.1c, hot rolled shapes with
flangethickness38 mm and thickershallhave a minimumCharpyVNotch toughness of 27 J at21C, tested in
the alternate core location as described inASTMA6 SupplementaryRequirementS30.Plates50mmthickand
thickershallhaveaminimumCharpyVNotchtoughnessof27Jat21C,measuredatanylocationpermittedby
ASTMA673,wheretheplateisusedinthefollowing:
1. Membersbuiltupfromplate
2. Connectionplateswhereinelasticstrainunderseismicloadingisexpected
3. Asthesteelcoreofbucklingrestrainedbraces
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6617
TABLE10.20.1:R
y
andR
t
ValuesforDifferentMemberTypes
Application R
y
R
t

Hot-rolled structural shapes and bars:

ASTM A36/A36M

ASTM A572/572M Grade 42 (290)

ASTM A572/572M Grade 50 (345) or 55 (380),

ASTM A913/A913M Grade 50 (345), 60 (415), or 65 (450),
ASTM A588/A588M,
ASTM A992/A992M, A1011 HSLAS Grade 55 (380)

ASTM A529 Grade 50 (345)

ASTM A529 Grade 55 (380)

1.5

1.3

1.1

1.2

1.1

1.2

1.1

1.1

1.2

1.2
Hollow structural sections (HSS):

ASTM A500 (Grade B or C), ASTM A501

1.4

1.3
Pipe:

ASTM A53/A53M

1.6

1.2
Plates:

ASTM A36/A36M

ASTM A572/A572M Grade 50

(345), ASTM A588/A588M

1.3

1.1

1.2

1.2

10.20.7 Connections,JointsandFasteners
10.20.7.1 Scope
Connections, joints and fasteners that are part of the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall comply with
Section10.10,andwiththeadditionalrequirementsofthisSection.
ThedesignofconnectionsforamemberthatisapartoftheSLRSshallbeconfigured such that a ductile limit
state in eithertheconnection or themembercontrolsthedesign.
10.20.7.2 BoltedJoints
All bolts shall be pretensioned high strength bolts and shall meet the requirements for slipcritical faying
surfacesinaccordancewithSection10.10.3.8withaClassAsurface.Boltsshallbeinstalledinstandardholesor
in shortslotted holes perpendicular to the applied load. For brace diagonals, oversized holes shall be
permitted when the connection is designed as a slipcritical joint, and the oversized hole is in one ply only.
Alternative hole types are permitted if determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with
Appendix 10.A, or ifdeterminedinaprogramofqualification testinginaccordancewithAppendix10.Dor 10.E.
The available shear strength of bolted joints using standard holes shall be calculated as that for bearingtype
joints in accordance with Sections 10.10.3.7 and 10.10.3.10, except that the nominal bearing strength at bolt
holesshallnotbetakengreaterthan2.4dtF
u
.
Exception:Thefayingsurfacesforendplatemomentconnectionsarepermittedtobecoatedwithcoatingsnot
testedforslipresistance,orwithcoatingswithaslipcoefficientlessthanthatofaClassAfayingsurface.
Boltsandweldsshallnotbedesignedtoshareforceinajointorthesameforcecomponentinaconnection.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6618 Vol.2
10.20.7.3 WeldedJoints
Welding shall be performed in accordance withAppendix 10.F. Welding shall beperformed in accordance with
a welding procedure specification (WPS) as required in AWS D1.1. The WPS variables shall be within the
parametersestablishedbythefillermetalmanufacturer.
GeneralRequirements
All welds used in members and connections in the SLRS shall be made with a filler metal that can produce
weldsthathaveaminimumCharpyVNotchtoughnessof27Jatminus18C,asdeterminedbytheappropriate
AWS A5 classification test method or manufacturer certification. This requirement for notch toughness shall
also apply in other cases as required in theseProvisions.
DemandCriticalWelds
Where welds are designated as demand critical, they shall be made with a filler metal capable of providing a
minimum Charpy VNotch (CVN) toughness of 27 J at 29 C as determined by the appropriate AWS
classification test method or manufacturer certification, and 54 J at 21 C as determined byAppendix 10.G or
otherapprovedmethod,whenthesteelframeisnormallyenclosedandmaintainedatatemperatureof10Cor
higher. For structures with service temperatures lower than 10 C, thequalificationtemperatureforAppendix
10.Gshallbe11Cabovethelowestanticipatedservicetemperature,oratalowertemperature.
SMAW electrodes classified in AWS A5.1 as E7018 or E7018X, SMAW electrodes classified in AWS A5.5 as
E7018C3L or E8018C3, and GMAW solidelectrodes are exempted from production lot testing when the CVN
toughnessof the electrode equals or exceeds 27 J at a temperature not exceeding29CasdeterminedbyAWS
classification test methods. The manufacturers certificate of compliance shall be considered sufficient
evidence ofmeetingthisrequirement.
ProtectedZone
WhereaprotectedzoneisdesignatedbytheseProvisions,itshallcomplywiththefollowing:
(1) Within the protected zone, discontinuities created by fabrication or erection operations, such as tack
welds, erection aids, airarc gouging and thermal cutting shall be repaired as required by the engineer of
record.
(2) Welded shear studs and decking attachments that penetrate the beam flange shall not be placed on
beam flanges within the protected zone. Decking arc spot welds as required to secure decking shall be
permitted.
(3)Welded,bolted,screwedorshotinattachmentsforperimeteredgeangles,exteriorfacades,partitions,
ductwork,pipingorotherconstructionshallnotbeplacedwithintheprotectedzone.
Exception:Weldedshearstudsandotherconnectionsshallbepermitted whendetermined in accordance with
a connection prequalification in accordance withAppendix10.A,orasdeterminedinaprogramofqualification
testinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
Outside theprotectedzone,calculationsbasedupontheexpectedmoment shallbe made to demonstrate the
adequacyofthemembernetsectionwhenconnectorsthatpenetratethememberareused.
ContinuityPlatesandStiffeners
Corners of continuity plates and stiffeners placed in the webs of rolled shapes shall be clipped as described
below.Alongtheweb,theclipshallbedetailedsothattheclipextendsadistanceofatleast38mmbeyondthe
publishedkdetaildimensionfortherolledshape.Alongtheflange,theclipshallbedetailedsothattheclipdoes
notexceedadistanceof 12mmbeyondthepublishedk
1
detaildimension.Theclipshallbedetailedtofacilitate
suitable weld terminations for both the flange weld and the web weld. If a curved clip is used, it shall have a
minimumradiusof12mm.
At the end of the weld adjacent to the column web/flange juncture, weld tabsfor continuity plates shall not
be used, except when permitted by the engineerofrecord.Unlessspecifiedbytheengineerofrecordthatthey
beremoved,weldtabsshallnotberemovedwhenusedinthislocation.
10.20.8 Members
10.20.8.1 Scope
Members in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall comply with the specifications of Sections 10.1
through10.11andSection10.20.8.ForcolumnsthatarenotpartoftheSLRS,seeSection10.20.8.4.2.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6619
10.20.8.2 ClassificationofSectionsforLocalBuckling
Compact
WhenrequiredbytheseProvisions,membersoftheSLRSshallhaveflangescontinuouslyconnectedtotheweb
orwebsandthewidththicknessratiosofitscompressionelementsshallnotexceedthelimitingwidththickness
ratios,
p
,fromSpecificationTableB4.1.
SeismicallyCompact
WhenrequiredbytheseProvisions,membersoftheSLRSmusthaveflangescontinuouslyconnectedtotheweb
orwebsandthewidththicknessratiosofitscompressionelementsshallnotexceedthelimitingwidththickness
ratios,
ps
,fromProvisionsTable10.2.4.1.
ColumnStrength
WhenP
u
/
c
P
n
(LRFD)>0.4or
c
P
a
/P
n
(ASD)>0.4,asappropriate,withoutconsiderationoftheamplifiedseismic
load,
where

c
=0.90(LRFD)
c
=1.67(ASD)
P
a
=requiredaxialstrengthofacolumnusingASDloadcombinations,N
P
n
=nominalaxialstrengthofacolumn,N
P
u
=requiredaxialstrengthofacolumnusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
Thefollowingrequirementsshallbemet:
The required axial compressive and tensile strength, considered in the absence of any applied moment, shall
be determined using the load combinations stipulated by the applicable building code including the amplified
seismicload.
Therequiredaxialcompressiveandtensilestrengthshallnotexceedeitherofthefollowing:
(a) The maximum load transferred to the column considering 1.1R
y
(LRFD) or (1.1/1.5)R
y
(ASD), as
appropriate,timesthenominalstrengthsoftheconnectingbeamorbraceelementsofthebuilding.
(b) Thelimitasdeterminedfromtheresistanceofthefoundationtooverturninguplift.
TABLE10.20.2:LimitingWidthThicknessRatiosforCompressionElements
Description of Element
Width- Thickness
Ratio
Limiting Width- Thickness Ratios

ps

(seismicallycompact)
U
n
s
t
i
f
f
e
n
e
d

E
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

Flexure in flanges of rolled or built-up

I-shaped sections [a], [c], [e], [g], [h]

b/t

0.30(E/F
y
)

Uniform compression in flanges of rolled
or built-up I-shaped sections [b], [h]

b/t

0.30(E/F
y
)
Uniform compression in flanges of rolled
or built-up I-shaped sections [d]

b/t

0.38(E/F
y
)
Uniform compression in flanges of
channels, outstanding legs of pairs of
angles in continuous contact, and braces
[c] [g]

b/t

0.30(E/F
y
)
Uniform compression in flanges of
H-pile sections

b/t

0.45(E/F
y
)
Flat bars [f] b/t 2.5
Uniform compression in legs of single
angles, legs of double angle members with
separators, or flanges of tees [g]

b/t

0.30(E/F
y
)
Uniform compression in stems of tees [g]
d/t

0.30(E/F
y
)
Note: See continued Table 10.20.2 for stiffened elements.

Part6
StructuralDesign
6620 Vol.2

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6621
10.20.8.3 ColumnSplices
General
The required strength of column splices in the seismic load resistingsystem(SLRS) shall equal the required
strength of the columns, including that determinedfromSections10.20.8.3,10.20.9.9,10.20.10.9,10.20.11.9,
10.20.13.5and10.20.16.5.2.
In addition, welded column splices that are subject to a calculated net tensile load effect determined using
the load combinations stipulated by the applicable building code including the amplified seismic load, shall
satisfybothofthefollowingrequirements:
(1) Theavailablestrengthofpartialjointpenetration(PJP)grooveweldedjoints,ifused,shallbeatleast
equalto200percentoftherequiredstrength.
(2) The available strength for each flange splice shall be at least equal to 0.5 R
y
F
y
A
f
(LRFD) or
(0.5/1.5)R
y
F
y
A
f
(ASD),asappropriate,whereR
y
F
y
istheexpectedyieldstressofthecolumnmaterialandA
f
istheflangeareaofthesmallercolumnconnected.
Beveled transitions are not required when changes in thickness and width of flanges and webs occur in
column splices where PJP groovewelded jointsareused.
Column web splices shall be either bolted or welded, or welded to one column and bolted to the other. In
momentframesusingboltedsplices,platesorchannelsshallbeusedonbothsidesofthecolumnweb.
The centerline of column splices made with fillet welds or partialjointpenetration groove welds shall be
located 1.2 m or more away from the beamtocolumn connections. When the column clear height between
beamtocolumnconnectionsislessthan2.4m,splicesshallbeathalftheclearheight.
ColumnsNotPartoftheSeismicLoadResistingSystem
SplicesofcolumnsthatarenotapartoftheSLRSshallsatisfythefollowing:
(1) Splices shall be located 1.2m or more away from the beamtocolumn connections. When the
column clear height between beamtocolumn connections is less than 2.4m, splices shall be at half the
clearheight.
(2)The required shear strength of column splices with respect to bothorthogonalaxesofthecolumn
shall be M
pc
/H (LRFD) or M
pc
/1.5H (ASD), as appropriate, where M
pc
is the lesser nominal plastic flexural
strengthofthecolumnsectionsforthedirectioninquestion,andHisthestoryheight.
10.20.8.4 ColumnBases
The required strength of column bases shall be calculated in accordance with Sections 10. 20. 8.5.1,
10. 20. 8.5.2, and 10. 20. 8.5.3. The available strength of anchor rods shall be determined in accordance
withSpecificationSection10.10.3.
The available strength of concrete elements at the column base, including anchor rod embedment and
reinforcing steel, shall be in accordancewith AppendixDofChapter6ofPart6ofthiscode.
Exception:ThespecialrequirementsinAppendixDofChapter6ofPart6ofthiscode,forregions ofmoderate
or high seismic risk, or for structures assigned to intermediate or high seismic performance or design
categoriesneednotbeapplied.
RequiredAxialStrength
The required axial strength of column bases, including their attachment to the foundation, shall be the
summation of the vertical components of the required strengths of the steel elements that are connected to
thecolumnbase.
RequiredShearStrength
The required shear strength of column bases, including their attachments to the foundations, shall be the
summationofthehorizontalcomponentoftherequiredstrengthsofthesteelelementsthatareconnected
tothecolumnbaseasfollows:
(1) For diagonal bracing, the horizontal component shall be determined from the required strength o f
bracingconnectionsfortheseismicloadresistingsystem(SLRS).
(2)Forcolumns,thehorizontalcomponentshallbeatleastequaltothelesserofthefollowing:
(a) 2R
y
F
y
Z
x
/H(LRFD)or(2/1.5)R
y
F
y
Z
x
/H(ASD),asappropriate,ofthecolumn

Part6
StructuralDesign
6622 Vol.2
where
H = height of story, which may be taken as the distance between the centerline of floor framing at
eachofthelevelsaboveandbelow,orthedistancebetweenthetopoffloorslabsateachofthelevels
aboveandbelow,mm.
(b) The shear calculated using the load combinations of theapplicablebuildingcode,includingthe
amplifiedseismicload.
RequiredFlexuralStrength
Therequired flexural strength of column bases, including theirattachmentto the foundation, shall be the
summationoftherequiredstrengthsofthesteelelementsthatareconnectedtothecolumnbaseasfollows:
(1) For diagonal bracing, the required flexural strength shall be at least equal to the required strength of bracing
connectionsfortheSLRS.
(2)For columns, the required flexural strength shall be at least equal tothelesserofthefollowing:
(a)1.1R
y
F
y
Z (LRFD) or (1.1/1.5)R
y
F
y
Z (ASD), as appropriate, ofthecolumnor
(b) the moment calculated using the load combinations of the applicable building code, including the
amplifiedseismicload.
10.20.8.5 HPiles
DesignofHPiles
DesignofHpilesshallcomplywiththeprovisionsoftheSpecification regarding design of members subjected
to combined loads. Hpilesshall meet therequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
BatteredHPiles
If battered (sloped) and vertical piles are used in a pile group, the vertical piles shall be designed to support
the combined effects of the dead andlive loadswithouttheparticipationofthebatteredpiles.
TensioninHPiles
Tension in each pile shall be transferred to the pile cap by mechanical meanssuch as shear keys, reinforcing
bars or studs welded to the embedded portionofthepile.Directlybelowthebottomofthepilecap,eachpile
shallbefreeofattachmentsandweldsforalengthatleastequaltothedepthofthepilecrosssection.
10.20.9 SpecialMomentFrames(SMF)
10.20.9.1 Scope
Specialmomentframes(SMF)areexpectedtowithstandsignificantinelasticdeformationswhensubjectedtothe
forcesresultingfromthemotionsofthedesignearthquake.SMFshallsatisfytherequirementsinthisSection.
10.20.9.2 BeamtoColumnConnections
Requirements
Beamtocolumn connections used in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall satisfy the following three
requirements:
(1)Theconnectionshallbecapableofsustaininganinterstorydriftangleofatleast0.04radians.
(2) The measured flexural resistance of the connection, determined at the column face, shall equal at least
0.80M
p
oftheconnectedbeamataninterstorydriftangleof0.04radians.
(3) The required shear strength of the connection shall be determined using the following quantity for the
earthquakeloadeffectE:
E = 2|1.1Ry Np]Lh (1u.2u.9.1)

where
R
y
= ratiooftheexpectedyieldstresstothespecifiedminimumyieldstress,F
y

M
p
= nominalplasticflexuralstrength,(Nmm)
L
h
= distancebetweenplastichingelocations,(mm)

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6623
WhenEasdefinedinEquation10.20.9.1isusedinASDloadcombinationsthat areadditivewithothertransient
loads and that are based on Chapter2(ofPart6), the 0.75combinationfactorfortransientloadsshallnotbe
appliedtoE.
Connections that accommodate the required interstory drift angle within the connection elements and
provide the measured flexural resistanceandshearstrengths specified above are permitted. In addition to
satisfying the requirements noted above, the design shall demonstrate that any additional drift due to
connection deformation can be accommodated by the structure. The design shall include analysis for stability
effectsoftheoverallframe,includingsecondordereffects.
ConformanceDemonstration
Beamtocolumn connectionsusedintheSLRSshallsatisfytherequirementsof Section 10.20.9.2.1 by one of the
following:
(a)UseofSMFconnectionsdesignedinaccordancewithANSI/AISC358.
(b) UseofaconnectionprequalifiedforSMFinaccordancewithAppendix10.A.
(c) ProvisionofqualifyingcyclictestresultsinaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
Results of at least two cyclic connection tests shall be provided andarepermittedtobebasedononeof
thefollowing:
(i) Testsreportedintheresearchliteratureordocumentedtestsperformedforotherprojects
thatrepresenttheprojectconditions,withinthelimitsspecifiedinAppendix10.D.
(ii) Tests that are conducted specifically for the project and are representative of project
member sizes, material strengths, connection configurations, and matching connection
processes,withinthelimitsspecifiedinAppendix10.D.
Welds
Unless otherwise designated by ANSI/AISC 358, or otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
accordance with Appendix 10.A, or as determined in a program of qualification testing in accordance with
Appendix 10.D, completejointpenetration groove welds of beam flanges, shear plates, and beam webs to
columnsshallbedemandcriticalweldsasdescribedinSection10.20.7.3.2.
ProtectedZones
The region ateach end of the beamsubject to inelastic strainingshall be designated as a protected zone, and
shallmeet therequirementsofSection 10.20.7.4.Theextent of the protected zone shall be as designated in
ANSI/AISC 358, or asotherwise determined in a connection prequalification in accordance withAppendix 10.A,
orasdeterminedinaprogramofqualification testinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
10.20.9.3 PanelZoneofBeamtoColumnConnections(beamwebparalleltocolumnweb)
ShearStrength
The required thickness of the panel zone shall be determined in accordance with the method used in
proportioning the panel zone of the tested or prequalified connection. As a minimum, the required shear
strength of the panel zone shallbe determined from the summation of the moments at the column faces as
determined by projecting the expected moments at the plastic hinge points to the column faces. The design
shearstrengthshallbe
v
R
v
andtheallowableshearstrengthshallbeR
v
/
v
where
v=1.0(LRFD) v=1.50(ASD)

and the nominal shear strength, R

v
, according to the limit state of shear yielding, is determined as specified in
SpecificationSection10.10.10.6.
PanelZoneThickness
The individual thicknesses, t, of column webs and doubler plates, if used, shall conform to the following
requirement:
t (uz + wz)9u (1u.2u.9.2)
where
t =thicknessofcolumnwebordoublerplate,mm
Part6
StructuralDesign
6624 Vol.2
d
z
= panelzonedepthbetweencontinuityplates,mm
w
z
= panelzonewidthbetweencolumnflanges,mm
Alternatively,whenlocalbucklingofthecolumnwebanddoublerplateisprevented by using plug welds joining
them, the total panel zone thickness shallsatisfyEquation10.20.9.2.
PanelZoneDoublerPlates
Doubler platesshallbeweldedtothecolumnflangesusingeithera completejointpenetrationgroovewelded
orfilletweldedjointthatdevelopstheavailableshearstrengthofthefulldoublerplatethickness.Whendoubler
platesareplacedagainstthecolumnweb,theyshallbeweldedacrossthetopandbottomedgestodevelopthe
proportion of the total force that is transmitted to the doubler plate. When doubler plates are placed away
fromthecolumnweb,theyshallbeplacedsymmetricallyinpairsandweldedtocontinuityplatestodevelopthe
proportionofthetotalforcethatistransmittedtothedoublerplate.
BeamandColumnLimitations
TherequirementsofSection10.20.8.1shallbesatisfied,inadditiontothefollowing.
WidthThicknessLimitations
Beam and column members shall meet the requirements of Section 10.20.8.2.2, unless otherwise qualified by
tests.
BeamFlanges
Abrupt changes in beam flangearea are notpermitted in plastic hinge regions.The drilling of flange holes or
trimming of beam flange width is permitted if testing or qualification demonstrates that the resulting
configuration can develop stable plastic hinges. The configuration shall be consistent with a prequalified
connection designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
accordancewithAppendix10.A,orinaprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
ContinuityPlates
Continuity plates shall be consistent with the prequalified connection designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as
otherwisedeterminedinaconnectionprequalificationin accordance withAppendix 10.A, or as determined in a
programofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
ColumnBeamMomentRatio
The following relationship shall be satisfied at beam-to-column connections:
0 1.
*
*
>

pb
pc
M
M
(1u.2u.9.S)

*
pc
M =thesumofthemomentsinthecolumnaboveandbelowthejointattheintersectionofthebeamand
columncenterlines.

*
pc
M isdeterminedbysummingtheprojectionsofthenominalflexuralstrengthsofthe
columns(includinghauncheswhereused)aboveandbelowthejointtothebeamcenterlinewithareductionfor
theaxialforceinthecolumn.Itispermittedtotake

*
pc
M =Z
c
(F
yc
P
uc
/A
g
)(LRFD)orZ
c
[(F
yc
/1.5)

P
ac
/A
g
]
(ASD),asappropriate.Whenthecenterlinesofopposingbeamsinthesamejointdonotcoincide,themidline
betweencenterlinesshallbeused.

*
pb
M =thesumofthemomentsinthebeamsattheintersectionofthebeamandcolumncenterlines.

*
pb
M
isdeterminedbysummingtheprojectionsoftheexpectedflexuralstrengthsofthebeamsattheplastichinge
locations to the column centerline. It is permitted to take

*
pb
M = (1.1R
y
F
yb
Z
b
+ M
uv
) (LRFD) or
[(1.1/1.5)R
y
F
yb
Z
b
+ M
av
] (ASD), as appropriate. Alternatively, it is permitted to determine

*
pb
M consistent
with a prequalified connection design as designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a
connection prequalification in accordance with Appendix 10.A, or in a program of qualification testing in
accordancewithAppendix10.D.Whenconnectionswithreducedbeamsectionsareused,itispermittedtotake

*
pb
M =(1.1R
y
F
yb
Z
RBS
+M
uv
)(LRFD)or[(1.1/1.5)R
y
F
yb
Z
RBS
+M
av
](ASD),asappropriate.
A
g
=grossareaofcolumn,mm
F
yc
=specifiedminimumyieldstressofcolumn,MPa
M
av
=theadditionalmomentduetoshearamplificationfromthelocationoftheplastichingetothecolumn
centerline,basedonASDloadcombinations,Nmm.
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6625
M
uv
=theadditionalmomentduetoshearamplificationfromthelocationoftheplastichingetothecolumn
centerline,basedonLRFDloadcombinations,Nmm
P
ac
=requiredcompressivestrengthusingASDloadcombinations,(positivenumber)N.
P
uc
=requiredcompressivestrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,(positivenumber)N
Z
b
=plasticsectionmodulusofthebeam,mm
3

Z
c
=plasticsectionmodulusofthecolumn,mm
3

Z
RBS
=minimumplasticsectionmodulusatthereducedbeamsection,mm
3

Exception:Thisrequirementdoesnotapplyifeitherofthefollowingtwoconditionsissatisfied:
(a) Columns with P
rc
< 0.3P
c
for all load combinations other thanthose determined using the amplified
seismic load that satisfy either of thefollowing:
(i)Columnsusedinaonestorybuildingorthetopstoryofamultistorybuilding.
(ii) Columns where: (1) the sum of the available shear strengths of all exempted columns in the story is
less than 20 percent of the sum of the available shear strengths of all moment frame columns in the story
acting in the same direction; and (2) the sum of the available shear strengths of all exempted columns on
eachmomentframecolumnlinewithin that story is less than 33 percent of the available shear strengthof all
moment frame columns on that column line. For the purpose of this exception, a column line is defined as a
single line of columns or parallel lines of columns located within 10 percent of the plan dimension
perpendiculartothelineofcolumns.
where
FordesignaccordingtoSpecificationSection10.2.3.3(LRFD),
P
c
=F
yc
A
g
,N
P
rc
= P
uc
, requiredcompressivestrength,usingLRFDloadcombinations,N
FordesignaccordingtoSpecificationSection10.2.3.4(ASD),
P
c
=F
yc
A
g
/1.5,N
P
rc
=P
ac
,requiredcompressivestrength,usingASDloadcombinations,N
(b)Columnsinanystorythathasaratioofavailableshearstrengthtorequiredshearstrengththatis50percent
greaterthanthestoryabove.
10.20.9.4 LateralBracingatBeamtoColumnConnections
BracedConnections
Column flanges at beamtocolumn connections require lateral bracing only atthe level of the top flanges of
the beams, when the webs of the beams and column are coplanar, and a column is shown to remain elastic
outside of the panel zone. It shall be permitted to assume that the column remains elastic when the ratio
calculatedusingEquation10.20.9.3isgreaterthan2.0.
Whenacolumncannotbeshowntoremainelasticoutsideofthepanelzone,thefollowingrequirementsshall
apply:
The column flanges shall be laterally braced at the levels of both the top and bottom beam flanges. Lateral
bracingshallbeeitherdirectorindirect.
Each columnflange lateral brace shall be designed for a required strength that is equal to 2 percent of the
available beam flangestrength F
y
b
f
t
bf
(LRFD)orF
y
b
f
t
bf
/1.5(ASD),asappropriate.
UnbracedConnections
Acolumncontainingabeamtocolumnconnectionwithnolateralbracingtransversetotheseismicframeatthe
connection shall be designed using the distance between adjacent lateral braces as the column height for
bucklingtransversetotheseismicframeandshallconformtoSpecificationSection10.8,exceptthat:
(1) Therequiredcolumnstrengthshallbedeterminedfromtheappropriateload combinations,exceptthatE
shallbetakenasthelesserof:
(a) Theamplifiedseismicload.
(b) 125percentoftheframeavailablestrengthbaseduponeitherthebeamavailableflexuralstrengthorpanel
zoneavailableshearstrength.

Part6
StructuralDesign
6626 Vol.2
(2)TheslendernessL/rforthecolumnshallnotexceed60.
Thecolumnrequiredflexuralstrengthtransversetotheseismicframeshallinclude that moment caused by the
application of the beam flange force specified in Section 10.20.9.7.1.(2) in addition to the secondorder
momentduetotheresultingcolumnflangedisplacement.
LateralBracingofBeams
Both flanges of beams shall be laterally braced, with a maximum spacing of L
b
= 0.086r
y
E/F
y
. Braces shall
meettheprovisionsofEquations10.19.3.3and10.19.3.4ofSection10.19,whereM
r
=M
u
=R
y
ZF
y
(LRFD)orM
r
=M
a
=Ry ZFy /1.5(ASD),asappropriate,ofthebeamandCd =1.0.
In addition, lateral braces shall be placed near concentrated forces, changes in crosssection, and other
locations where analysis indicates that a plastic hingewill form during inelastic deformations of the SMF. The
placement of lateral bracing shall be consistent with that documented for a prequalified connection
designated inANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with
Appendix10.A,orinaprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
TherequiredstrengthoflateralbracingprovidedadjacenttoplastichingesshallbeP
u
=0.06M
u
/h
o
(LRFD)orP
a
= 0.06M
a
/h
o
(ASD), as appropriate, where h
o
is the distance between flange centroids; and the required
stiffnessshallmeettheprovisionsofEquation10.19.3.4ofSection10.19.
ColumnSplices
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of Section 1 0 . 2 0 . 8.4.1.Wheregrooveweldsareused
to make the splice, they shall be completejointpenetration groove welds that meet the requirements of
Section 10. 20.7.3.2.Weld tabs shallberemoved.Whencolumnsplicesarenotmadewithgroovewelds,they
shallhavearequiredflexuralstrengththatisatleastequaltoR
y
F
y
Z
x
(LRFD)orR
y
F
y
Z
x
/1.5(ASD),asappropriate,of
thesmallercolumn.TherequiredshearstrengthofcolumnwebsplicesshallbeatleastequaltoM
pc
/H(LRFD)
or M
pc
/1.5H (ASD), as appropriate, where M
pc
is the sum of the nominal plastic flexural strengths of the
columnsaboveandbelowthesplice.
Exception: The required strength of the column splice considering appropriate stress concentration factors or
fracture mechanics stress intensity factors neednotexceedthatdeterminedbyinelasticanalyses.
10.20.10 IntermediateMomentFrames(IMF)
10.20.10.1 Scope
Intermediatemomentframes(IMF)areexpectedtowithstandlimited inelasticdeformations in their members
and connections when subjected to the forcesresultingfromthemotionsofthedesignearthquake.IMFshall
meettherequirementsinthisSection.
10.20.10.2 BeamtoColumnConnections
Requirements
Beamtocolumn connections used in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall satisfy the requirements of
Section10.20.9.2.1,withthefollowingexceptions:
(1)Therequiredinterstorydriftangleshallbeaminimumof0.02radian.
(2)The required strength in shear shallbe determined asspecified in Section10.20.9.2.1, except that a lesser
value of V
u
or V
a
, as appropriate, is permitted if justified by analysis. The required shear strength need not
exceed the shear resulting from the application of appropriate load combinations using the amplified
seismicload.
ConformanceDemonstration
ConformancedemonstrationshallbeasdescribedinSection10.20.9.2.2tosatisfy therequirementsofSection
10.20.10.2.1 for IMF, except that a connection prequalified for IMF in accordance with ANSI/AISC 358, or as
otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with Appendix 10.A, or as determined in
aprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
Welds
Unless otherwise designated by ANSI/AISC 358, or otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
accordance with Appendix 10.A, or as determined in a program of qualification testing in accordance with
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6627
Appendix 10.D, complete joint penetration groove welds of beam flanges, shear plates, and beam webs to
columnsshallbedemandcriticalweldsasdescribedinSection10.20.7.3.2.
ProtectedZone
Theregionateachendofthebeamsubjecttoinelasticstrainingshallbetreatedas a protected zone, and shall
meet the requirements of Section 10.20.7.4. The extent of the protected zone shall be as designated in
ANSI/AISC 358, or as other wise determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with Appendix
10.A,orasdeterminedinaprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
PanelZoneofBeamtoColumnConnections(beamwebparalleltocolumnweb)
NoadditionalrequirementsbeyondtheSpecification.
BeamandColumnLimitations
TherequirementsofSection10.20.8.1shallbesatisfied,inadditiontothefollowing.
WidthThicknessLimitations
Beam and column members shall meet the requirements of Section 10.20.8.2.1, unless otherwise qualified by
tests.
BeamFlanges
Abrupt changes in beam flange area are not permitted in plastic hinge regions. Drilling of flange holes or
trimming of beam flange width is permitted if testing or qualification demonstrates that the resulting
configuration can develop stable plastic hinges. The configuration shall be consistent with a prequalified
connectiondesignated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in accordance
with Appendix 10.A, or in a program of qualification testing in accordance with Appendix 10.D.
ContinuityPlates
Continuity plates shall be provided to beconsistent with the prequalified connections designated inANSI/AISC
358, or as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with Appendix 10.A, or as
determinedinaprogramofqualificationtestinginaccordancewithAppendix10.D.
ColumnBeamMomentRatio
NoadditionalrequirementsbeyondtheSpecification.
LateralBracingatBeamtoColumnConnections
No auuitional iequiiements beyonu the Specification.
LateralBracingofBeams
Bothflangesshallbelaterallybraceddirectlyorindirectly.Theunbracedlengthbetweenlateralbracesshallnot
exceed 0.17r
y
E/F
y
. Braces shall meet the provisions of Equations 10.19.3.3 and 10.19.3.4 of Section 10.19,
whereM
r
=M
u
=R
y
ZF
y
(LRFD)orM
r
=M
a
=R
y
ZF
y
/1.5(ASD),asappropriate,ofthebeam,andC
d
=1.0.
In addition, lateral braces shall be placed near concentrated loads, changes in crosssection and other
locations where analysis indicates that a plastic hinge will form during inelastic deformations of the IMF.
Where the design is baseduponassembliestestedinaccordancewithAppendix10.D,theplacementoflateral
bracing for the beams shall be consistent with that used in the tests or as required for prequalification in
Appendix 10.A.The requiredstrength oflateral bracingprovidedadjacenttoplastichingesshallbeP
u
=0.06M
u
/h
o
(LRFD)orP
a
= 0.06M
a
/ h
o
(ASD), as appropriate, where h
o
= distance between flange centroids; and the
requiredstiffnessshallmeettheprovisionsofEquation10.19.3.4ofSection10.19.
ColumnSplices
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of Section10.20.8.4.1. Wheregrooveweldsareusedto
make the splice, they shall be completejointpenetrationgrooveweldsthatmeettherequirementsofSection
10.20.7.3.2.
10.20.11 OrdinaryMomentFrames(OMF)
10.20.11.1 Scope
Ordinary moment frames (OMF) are expected to withstand minimalinelasticdeformations in their members
and connections when subjected to the forcesresulting from the motions of the design earthquake.OMF
shall meet the requirements of this Section. Connections in conformance with Sections 10. 20. 9.2.1 and
Part6
StructuralDesign
6628 Vol.2
10.20.9.5 or Sections 10.20.10.2.1 and 10.20.10.5 shall be permitted for use in OMF without meeting the
requirementsofSections10.20.11.2.1,10.20.11.2.3,and10.20.11.5
10.20.11.2 BeamtoColumnConnections
Beamtocolumn connections shall be made with welds and/or highstrength bolts. Connections are
permittedtobefullyrestrained(FR)orpartiallyrestrained(PR)momentconnectionsasfollows.
RequirementsforFRMomentConnections
FRmomentconnectionsthatarepartoftheseismicloadresistingsystem(SLRS)shallbedesignedforarequired
flexuralstrengththatisequalto1.1R
y
M
p
(LRFD)or(1.1/1.5)R
y
M
p
(ASD),asappropriate,ofthebeamorgirder,or
themaximummomentthatcanbedevelopedbythesystem,whicheverisless.
FRconnectionsshallmeetthefollowingrequirements.
(1) Where steel backing is used in connections with completejointpenetration (CJP) beam flange groove
welds, steel backing and tabs shall be removed, except that topflange backing attached to the column by a
continuousfilletweldontheedgebelowtheCJPgrooveweldneednotberemoved.Removalofsteelbackingand
tabsshallbeasfollows:
(i) Following the removal of backing, the root pass shall be backgouged to sound weld metal and
backweldedwithareinforcingfillet.Thereinforcingfilletshallhaveaminimumlegsizeof8mm.
(ii) Weldtabremovalshallextendtowithin3mmofthebasemetalsurface,exceptatcontinuityplateswhere
removaltowithin6mmoftheplateedgeisacceptable.Edgesoftheweldtabshallbefinishedtoasurface
roughnessvalueof13morbetter.Grindingtoaflushconditionisnotrequired.Gougesandnotchesare
not permitted. The transitional slope of any area where gouges andnotches havebeenremoved shall not
exceed 1:5. Material removed by grinding that extends more than 2 mm below the surface of the base
metalshallbefilledwithweldmetal.Thecontouroftheweldattheendsshallprovideasmoothtransition,
freeofnotchesandsharpcorners.
(2) Where weld accessholes are provided, they shallbe as shown in Figure 10.20.11.1. The weld access hole
shallhaveasurfaceroughnessvaluenottoexceed13m,andshallbefreeofnotchesandgouges.Notchesand
gouges shall be repaired as required by the engineer of record. Weld access holes are prohibited in the beam
webadjacenttotheendplateinboltedmomentendplateconnections.
(3) The required strength of doublesided partialjointpenetration groove welds and doublesided fillet
welds that resist tensile forces in connections shall be 1.1R
y
F
y
A
g
(LRFD) or (1.1/1.5)R
y
F
y
A
g
(ASD), as
appropriate, of the connected element or part. Singlesiueu paitialjointpenetiation gioove welus anu
singlesiueu fillet welus shall not be useu to iesist tensile foices in the connections.
(4)ForFRmomentconnections,therequiredshearstrength,V
u
orV
a
,asappropriate, of the connection shall be
determinedusingthefollowingquantityfortheearthquakeloadeffectE:
E = 2|1.1R
y
N
p
]L
h
(1u.2u.11.1)

WherethisEisusedinASDloadcombinationsthatareadditivewithothertransient loads and that are based

on Chapter2(ofPart6), the 0.75 combinationfactorfortransientloadsshallnotbeappliedtoE.
Alternatively,alesservalueofV
u
orV
a
ispermittedifjustifiedbyanalysis.Therequiredshearstrengthneednot
exceedtheshearresultingfromtheapplicationofappropriateloadcombinationsintheapplicablebuildingcode
usingtheamplifiedseismicload
RequirementsforPRMomentConnections
PRmomentconnectionsarepermittedwhenthefollowingrequirementsaremet:
(1)SuchconnectionsshallbedesignedfortherequiredstrengthasspecifiedinSection10.20.11.2.1above.
(2)Thenominalflexuralstrengthoftheconnection,M
n
,shallbenolessthan50percentofM
p
oftheconnected
beamorcolumn,whicheverisless.
(3)The stiffness and strength of the PR moment connections shall be consideredinthedesign,includingthe
effectonoverallframestability.
(4) For PR moment connections, V
u
or V
a
, as appropriate, shall be determined from the load combination
above plus the shear resulting from the maximumendmomentthattheconnectioniscapableofresisting.
SteelStructu

Notes:1.
2.Largerof
3.t
bf
tot
b
4.10mmm
5.3t
bf
(13
Tolerances s
Welds
Complete
demandcr
PanelZone
Noadditio
Beamand
Norequire
Continuity
When FR
plates dir
Specificati
t
cf
<0.54(
orwhen,
t
cf
<b
f
/6
Whereco
For onesi
flange.
For twosi
flanges.
The welde
penetratio
welds, or
ures
Bevelasrequire
t
bf
or13mm(p
bf
,19mmminim
minimumradius(
3mm)
shall not accum
jointpenetra
riticalweldsa
eofBeamto
onalrequirem
dColumnLimi
ementsbeyon
yPlates
moment con
ectly to colu
ion.Continuity
b
f
t
bf
F
yb
/F
yc
)
1
ntinuityplate
ided connecti
ided connecti
ed joints of th
on groove we
twosided fill
edforselectedg
lust
bf
,ormin
mum(6mm)
(plusnotlimited
mulate to the ext
ation groove w
sdescribedin
ColumnConn
entsbeyondt
itations
ndSection10.
nnections are
mn flanges,
yplatesshalla
/2
sarerequired
ions, continui
ons the conti
he continuity
elds, twoside
et welds. Th
Fig.10.20.11
grooveweld.
ust
bf
)
,minus0)
tent that the an
welds of beam
nSection10.20
nections(beam
theSpecificati
20.8.1.
e made by m
continuity pla
alsoberequir
d,thethickne
ty plate thick
nuity plates s
plates to the
ed partialjoi
e required st
1.1.Weldaccess
ngle of the acces
m flanges, she
0.7.3.2.
mwebparallel
ion.
means of weld
ates shall be
edwhen:
ssoftheplate
kness shall be
shall be at lea
e column flan
ntpenetratio
trength of the
sholedetail(FE
ss hole cut to th
ear plates, an
ltocolumnwe
ds of beam f
provided in a
esshallbede
e at least one
ast equal in th
nges shall be
n groove wel
ese joints sh

MA350)
he flangesurfac
d beam webs
eb)
flanges or be
accordance w
terminedasf
e half of the t
hickness to th
made with e
ds combined
all not be le
C
ceexceeds25.
s to columns
amflange co
ith Section J1
ollows:
thickness of th
e thicker of t
either comple
with reinforc
ess than thea
Chapter10
shall be
nnection
10 of the
he beam
he beam
etejoint
cing fillet
available
Part6
StructuralDesign
6630 Vol.2
strength of the contact area of the plate with the column flange.Therequiredstrengthoftheweldedjointsof
thecontinuityplatestothecolumnwebshallbetheleastofthefollowing:
Thesumoftheavailablestrengthsattheconnectionsofthecontinuityplatetothecolumnflanges.
Theavailableshearstrengthofthecontactareaoftheplatewiththecolumnweb.
Theweldavailablestrengththatdevelopstheavailableshearstrengthofthecolumnpanelzone.
Theactualforcetransmittedbythestiffener.
ColumnBeamMomentRatio
Norequirements.
LateralBracingatBeamtoColumnConnections
NoadditionalrequirementsbeyondtheSpecification.
LateralBracingofBeams
NoadditionalrequirementsbeyondtheSpecification.
ColumnSplices
ColumnsplicesshallcomplywiththerequirementsofSection10.20.8.4.1.
10.20.12 SpecialTrussMomentFrames(STMF)
10.20.12.1 Scope
Special truss moment frames (STMF) are expected to withstand significant inelastic deformation within a
specially designed segment of the truss when subjected to the forces from the motions of the design
earthquake. STMF shall belimitedtospanlengthsbetweencolumnsnottoexceed20mandoveralldepthnot
toexceed 1.8 m.The columns and truss segments outside of thespecialsegmentsshallbedesignedtoremain
elasticundertheforcesthatcanbe generatedbythefullyyieldedandstrainhardenedspecialsegment.STMF
shallmeettherequirementsinthisSection.
10.20.12.2 SpecialSegment
Eachhorizontaltrussthatispartoftheseismicloadresistingsystem(SLRS)shall have a special segment that is
located between the quarter points of the span of the truss. The length of the special segment shall be
between0.1and0.5timesthetrussspanlength.Thelengthtodepthratioofanypanelinthespecialsegment
shallneitherexceed1.5norbelessthan0.67.
Panels within a special segment shall either be all Vierendeel panels or all Xbraced panels; neither a
combinationthereofnortheuseofothertrussdiagonalconfigurations is permitted. Where diagonal members
are usedin the specialsegment, they shall be arranged in an X pattern separated by vertical members.Such
diagonal members shall be interconnected at points where they cross. The interconnection shall have a
required strength equal to 0.25 times the nominal tensile strength of the diagonal member. Bolted
connections shall not be usedforwebmemberswithinthespecialsegment.Diagonalwebmemberswithinthe
specialsegmentshallbemadeofflatbarsofidenticalsections.
Splicingofchordmembersisnotpermittedwithinthespecialsegment,norwithinonehalfthepanellengthfrom
the ends of the special segment. The required axial strength of the diagonal web members in the special
segment due to dead and live loads within the special segment shall not exceed 0.03F
y
A
g
(LRFD) or
(0.03/1.5)F
y
A
g
(ASD),asappropriate.
The special segment shall be a protected zone meeting therequirementsofSection 10.20.7.4.
StrengthofSpecialSegmentMembers
The available shear strength of the special segment shall be calculated as the sum of the available shear
strength of the chord members through flexure, andthe shear strength corresponding to the available tensile
strengthand0.3timestheavailablecompressivestrengthofthediagonalmembers,whentheyareused.Thetop
andbottomchordmembersinthespecialsegmentshallbemadeofidenticalsectionsandshallprovideatleast
25 percent of the required vertical shear strength. The required axial strength in the chord members,
determined according to the limit state of tensile yielding, shall not exceed 0.45 times P
n
(LRFD) or P
n
/
(ASD),asappropriate,
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
where,
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6631
P
n
=F
y
A
g

The end connection of diagonal web members in the special segment shall have a required strength that is at
leastequaltotheexpectedyieldstrength,intension,ofthewebmember,R
y
F
y
A
g
(LRFD)orR
y
F
y
A
g
/1.5(ASD),as
appropriate.
StrengthofNonSpecialSegmentMembers
MembersandconnectionsofSTMF,exceptthoseinthespecialsegmentspecified in Section 10. 20. 12.2, shall
have a required strength based on theappropriateloadcombinationsintheapplicablebuildingcode,replacing
theearthquakeloadterm E with the lateral loads necessary to develop the expected vertical shearstrengthof
thespecialsegmentV
ne
(LRFD)orV
ne
/1.5(ASD),asappropriate,atmidlength,givenas:
sin ) 3 . 0 ( 075 . 0
75 . 3
3 nc nt y
s
s
s
nc y
ne
P P R
L
L L
EI
L
M R
V + +

+ =
(1u.2u.12.1)
where
M
nc
=nominalflexuralstrengthofachordmemberofthespecialsegment,Nmm
EI=flexural elastic stiffness of a chord member of the special segment,Nmm
2

L=spanlengthofthetruss,mm
L
s
=lengthofthespecialsegment,mm
P
nt
=nominal tensile strength of a diagonal member of the specialsegment,N
P
nc
=nominal compressive strength of a diagonal member of the specialsegment,N
=angleofdiagonalmemberswiththehorizontal
WidthThicknessLimitations
Chord members and diagonal web members within the special segment shall meet the requirements of
Section10.20.8.2.2.
LateralBracing
The top and bottom chords of the trusses shall be laterally braced at the ends of the special segment, and at
intervals not to exceed L
p
according to Specification Section 10.6 along the entire length of the truss. The
required strength of eachlateralbraceattheendsofandwithinthespecialsegmentshallbe
P
u
=0.06R
y
P
nc
(LRFD)or
P
a
=(0.06/1.5)R
y
P
nc
(ASD),asappropriate,
wheie P
nc
is the nominal compressive strength of the special segment choiu membei. Lateial biaces
outsiue of the special segment shall have a iequiieu stiength of
P
u
=0.02R
y
P
nc
(LRFD)or
P
a
=(0.02/1.5)R
y
P
nc
(ASD),asappropriate.
The required brace stiffness shall meet the provisions of Equation 10.19.2.4ofSection 10.19, where
P
r
=P
u
=R
y
P
nc
(LRFD)or
P
r
=P
a
=R
y
P
nc
/1.5(ASD),asappropriate.
10.20.13 SpecialConcentricallyBracedFrames(SCBF)
10.20.13.1 Scope
Specialconcentricallybracedframes(SCBF)areexpectedtowithstandsignificant inelastic deformations when
subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. SCBF shall meet the
requirements in thisSection.
10.20.13.2 MembersSlenderness
BracingmembersshallhaveKl/r4(E/F
y
).
Exception: Braces with 4(E/F
y
) < Kl/r 200 are permitted in frames in which the available strength of the
column is at least equal to the maximum load transferred to the column considering R
y
(LRFD) or (1/1.5)R
y

(ASD), as appropriate, times the nominal strengths of the connecting brace elements of the building. Column
Part6
StructuralDesign
6632 Vol.2
forces need not exceed those determined by inelastic analysis, nor the maximum load effects that can be
developedbythesystem.
RequiredStrength
Wheretheeffectivenetareaofbracingmembersislessthanthegrossarea,therequiredtensilestrengthofthe
bracebaseduponthelimitstateoffractureinthenetsectionshallbegreaterthanthelesserofthefollowing:
(a) Theexpectedyieldstrength,intension,ofthebracingmember,determinedasR
y
F
y
A
g
(LRFD)orR
y
F
y
A
g
/1.5
(ASD),asappropriate.
(b)Themaximumloadeffect,indicatedbyanalysisthatcanbetransferredtothebracebythesystem.
LateralForceDistribution
Alonganylineofbracing,bracesshallbedeployedinalternatedirectionssuchthat,foreitherdirectionofforce
parallel to the bracing, at least 30 percent butnomorethan70percentofthetotalhorizontalforcealongthat
lineisresistedby braces in tension, unless the available strength of each brace in compression is larger than
the required strength resulting from the application of the appropriate load combinations stipulated by the
applicable building code including the amplified seismic load. For the purposes of this provision, a line of
bracing is defined as a single line or parallel lines with a plan offset of 10 percent or less of the building
dimensionperpendiculartothelineofbracing.
WidthThicknessLimitations
ColumnandbracemembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
BuiltupMembers
The spacing of stitches shall be such that the slendernessratio l/r of individual elements between the stitches
doesnotexceed0.4timesthegoverningslendernessratioofthebuiltupmember.
Thesumoftheavailableshearstrengthsofthestitchesshallequalorexceedtheavailable tensile strength of each element.
The spacing of stitches shall be uniform.Notlessthantwostitchesshallbeusedinabuiltupmember.Boltedstitchesshall
notbelocatedwithinthemiddleonefourthoftheclearbracelength.
Exception:Where the buckling of braces about their critical bucking axis doesnot cause shear in the stitches, the spacing
of the stitches shall be such that the slenderness ratio l/r of the individual elements between the stitches does not
exceed0.75timesthegoverningslendernessratioofthebuiltupmember.
RequiredStrengthofBracingConnections
RequiredTensileStrength
The required tensile strength of bracing connections (including beamtocolumn connections if part of the
bracingsystem)shallbethelesserofthefollowing:
(a) Theexpectedyieldstrength,intension,ofthebracingmember,determinedasR
y
F
y
A
g
(LRFD)orR
y
F
y
A
g
/1.5
(ASD),asappropriate.
(b)Themaximumloadeffect,indicatedbyanalysisthatcanbetransferredtothebracebythesystem.
RequiredFlexuralStrength
The requiredflexuralstrengthofbracingconnectionsshallbeequalto1.1R
y
M
p
(LRFD) or (1.1/1.5)R
y
M
p
(ASD),
asappropriate,ofthebraceaboutthecriticalbucklingaxis.
Exception: Brace connections that meet the requirements of Section 10.20.13.3.1 and can accommodate the
inelastic rotations associated with bracepostbucklingdeformationsneednotmeetthisrequirement.
RequiredCompressiveStrength
Bracingconnectionsshallbedesignedforarequiredcompressivestrengthbasedonbucklinglimitstatesthatisat
least equal to 1.1R
y
P
n
(LRFD) or (1.1/1.5)R
y
P
n
(ASD), as appropriate, where P
n
is the nominal compressive
strength of thebrace.
SpecialBracingConfigurationRequirements
VTypeandInvertedVTypeBracing
VtypeandinvertedVtypeSCBFshallmeetthefollowingrequirements:
(1) Therequiredstrengthofbeamsintersectedbybraces,theirconnections,and supportingmembers shall be
determinedbasedontheloadcombinationsofthe applicable building code assuming that the braces provide
no support for dead and live loads. For load combinations that include earthquake effects, the earthquake
effect,E,onthebeamshallbedeterminedasfollows:

SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6633
(a) The forces in all braces in tension shall be assumed to be equaltoR
y
F
y
A
g
.
(b) Theforcesinalladjoiningbracesincompressionshallbeassumedtobeequalto0.3P
n
.
(2) Beams shall be continuous between columns. Both flanges of beams shall be laterally braced, with a
maximum spacing of L
b
= L
pd
, as specified byEquation10.15.7.2and10.15.7.3ofSection10.15.Lateralbraces
shallmeettheprovisionsofEquations10.19.3.3and10.19.3.4ofSection10.19,whereM
r
=M
u
=R
y
ZF
y
(LRFD)
orM
r
=M
a
=R
y
ZF
y
/1.5(ASD),asappropriate,ofthebeamandC
d
=1.0.
Asaminimum,onesetoflateralbracesisrequiredatthepointof intersectionoftheVtype(orinvertedVtype)
bracing,unlessthebeamhassufficientoutofplanestrengthandstiffnesstoensurestabilitybetweenadjacent
bracepoints.
KTypeBracing
KtypebracedframesarenotpermittedforSCBF.
ColumnSplices
In addition to meeting the requirements in Section 10.20.8.4, column splices in SCBF shall be designed to
develop 50 percent of the lesser available flexural strength of the connected members. The required shear
strength shall be M
pc
/H (LRFD) or M
pc
/1.5H (ASD), as appropriate, where M
pc
is the sum of the nominal
plasticflexuralstrengthsofthecolumnsaboveandbelowthesplice.
ProtectedZone
TheprotectedzoneofbracingmembersinSCBFshallincludethecenter onequarterofthebracelength,anda
zoneadjacenttoeachconnectionequaltothebracedepthintheplaneofbuckling.TheprotectedzoneofSCBF
shall includeelementsthatconnectbracestobeamsandcolumnsandshallsatisfytherequirementsofSection
10.20.7.4.
10.20.14 OrdinaryConcentricallyBracedFrames(OCBF)
10.20.14.1 Scope
Ordinaryconcentricallybraced frames (OCBF)are expected to withstand limited inelastic deformations in their
members and connections when subjected to theforcesresultingfromthemotionsofthedesignearthquake.
OCBF shall meet the requirements in this Section. OCBF above the isolation system in seismically isolated
structures shall meet the requirements of Sections 10. 20. 14.4 and 10. 20. 14.5 and need not meet the
requirementsofSections10.20.14.2and10.20.14.3.
10.20.14.2 BracingMembers
Biacing membeis shall meet the iequiiements of Section 1u.2u.8.2.2.
Exception: BSS biaces that aie filleu with conciete neeu not comply with this piovision.
Biacing membeis in K, v, oi inveiteuv configuiations shall have KL/r 4(E/Fy).
SpecialBracingConfigurationRequirements
Beams in Vtype and inverted Vtype OCBF and columns in Ktype OCBF shall be continuous at bracing
connectionsawayfromthebeamcolumnconnectionandshallmeetthefollowingrequirements:
(1) Therequiredstrengthshallbedeterminedbasedontheloadcombinationsof theapplicablebuildingcode
assuming that the braces provide no support of dead and live loads. For load combinations that include
earthquakeeffects,theearthquakeeffect,E,onthemembershallbedeterminedasfollows:
(a) The forces in braces intension shall be assumed to be equal toR
y
F
y
A
g
. ForVtypeandinvertedVtype
OCBF, the forces in braces in tension need not exceed the maximum force that can be developed by the
system.
(b) The forces in braces in compression shall be assumed to be equal to0.3P
n
.
(2)Both flanges shall be laterally braced, with a maximum spacing ofL
b
= L
pd
, asspecifiedbyEquations
10.15.7.2 and10.15.7.3 ofSection10.15.. Lateral braces shall meet the provisions of Equations 10.19.3.3and
10.19.3.4 of Section10.19,whereM
r
= M
u
= R
y
ZF
y
(LRFD) or M
r
= M
a
= R
y
ZF
y
/1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, of the
beam and C
d
= 1.0. As a minimum, one set of lateral braces is required at the point of intersection of the
bracing, unless the member has sufficient outofplane strength and stiffness to ensure stability between
adjacentbracepoints.

Part6
StructuralDesign
6634 Vol.2
BracingConnections
Therequiredstrengthofbracingconnectionsshallbedeterminedasfollows.
(1) For the limit state of bolt slip, the required strength of bracing connections shall be that determined
usingtheloadcombinationsstipulatedbytheapplicablebuildingcode,notincludingtheamplifiedseismicload.
(2) For other limit states, the required strength of bracing connections is the expected yield strength, in
tension, of the brace, determined asR
y
F
y
A
g
(LRFD)orR
y
F
y
A
g
/1.5(ASD),asappropriate.
Exception:Therequiredstrengthofthebraceconnectionneednotexceedeitherofthefollowing:
(a)Themaximumforcethatcanbedevelopedbythesystem
(b)Aloadeffectbaseduponusingtheamplifiedseismicload
OCBFaboveSeismicIsolationSystems
BracingMembers
BracingmembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2andshallhave
KL/r4(E/F
y
).
KTypeBracing
Ktypebracedframesarenotpermitted.
VTypeandInvertedVTypeBracing
Beamsin Vtype and inverted Vtype bracing shall be continuousbetweencolumns.
10.20.15 EccentricallyBracedFrames(EBF)
10.20.15.1 Scope
Eccentrically braced frames (EBFs) are expected to withstand significant inelastic deformations in the links
when subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. The diagonal braces,
columns, and beamsegments outside of the links shall be designed toremain essentially elasticunderthe
maximumforcesthatcanbegeneratedbythefullyyieldedandstrainhardened links, except where permitted
in this Section. In buildings exceedingfive stories in height, the upper story of an EBF system is permitted to
be designed as an OCBF or a SCBFand still be considered to be part of an EBFsystemforthepurposesof
determiningsystemfactorsintheapplicablebuildingcode.EBFshallmeettherequirementsinthisSection.
10.20.15.2 Links
Limitations
LinksshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
The web of a link shall be single thickness. Doublerplate reinforcement and web penetrations are not
permitted.
ShearStrength
Exceptaslimitedbelow,thelinkdesignshearstrength,
v
V
n
,andtheallowableshearstrength,V
n
/
v
,according
tothelimitstateofshearyieldingshallbedeterminedasfollows:
V
n
= nominalshearstrengthofthelink,equaltothelesserofV
p
or2M
p
/e,N

v
=0.90(LRFD)
v
=1.67(ASD)
where
M
p
=F
y
Z,Nmm
V
p
=0.6F
y
A
w
,N
e=linklength,mm
A
w
=(d2t
f
)t
w

Theeffectofaxialforceonthelinkavailableshearstrengthneednotbeconsideredif
P
u
0.15P
y
(LRFD)orP
a
(0.15/1.5)P
y
(ASD),asappropriate.
Where,
P
u
=requiredaxialstrengthusingLRFDloadcombinations,N
P
a
=requiredaxialstrengthusingASDloadcombinations,N
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6635
P
y
=nominalaxialyieldstrength=F
y
A
g
,N

If P
u
> 0.15P
y
(LRFD)orP
a
> (0.15/1.5)P
y
(ASD), as appropriate, the following additional requirements
shallbemet:

(1)Theavailableshearstrengthofthelinkshallbethelesserof

v
V
pa
and2
v
M
pa
/e(LRFD)
or
V
pa
/
v
and2(M
pa
/e)/
v
(ASD),asappropriate,where

v
=0.90(LRFD),
v
=1.67(ASD)
2
) / ( 1 (
c r P pa
P P V V = (10.20.15.1)
)j ( | .
c r p pa
P P M M = 1 18 1 (10.20.15.2)
P
r
=P
u
(LRFD)orP
a
(ASD),asappropriate
P
c
=P
y
(LRFD)orP
y
/1.5(ASD),asappropriate
(2)Thelengthofthelinkshallnotexceed:
(a)[1.150.5(A
w
/A
g
)]1.6M
p
/V
p
when(A
w
/A
g
)0.3 (10.20.15.3)
Nor,
(b)1.6M
p
/V
p
when(A
w
/A
g
)<0.3 (10.20.15.4)
Where,
A
w
=(d2t
f
)t
w

=P
r
/V
r

andwhere,
V
r
=V
u
(LRFD)orV
a
(ASD),asappropriate
V
u
=requiredshearstrengthbasedonLRFDloadcombinations.
V
a
=requiredshearstrengthbasedonASDloadcombinations.
LinkRotationAngle
The link rotation angle is the inelastic angle between the link andthe beam outside of the link when the total
storydriftisequaltothedesignstorydrift,.Thelinkrotationangleshallnotexceedthefollowingvalues:

(a)0.08radiansforlinksoflength1.6M
p
/V
p
orless.

(b)0.02radiansforlinksoflength2.6M
p
/V
p
orgreater.

(c) The value determined by linear interpolation between the above values for links of length between
1.6M
p
/V
p
and2.6M
p
/V
p
.
LinkStiffeners
Fulldepthwebstiffenersshallbeprovidedonbothsidesofthelinkwebatthediagonalbraceendsofthelink.
Thesestiffenersshallhaveacombinedwidthnotlessthan(b
f
2t
w
)andathicknessnotlessthan0.75t
w
or10
mm,whichever is larger, where b
f
and t
w
are the link flangewidth and linkwebthickness,respectively.
Linksshallbeprovidedwithintermediatewebstiffenersasfollows:
(a)Linksoflengths1.6M
p
/V
p
orlessshallbeprovidedwithintermediatewebstiffeners spaced at intervals not
exceeding (30t
w
d/5) for a link rotation angle of 0.08 radian or (52t
w
d/5) for link rotation angles of 0.02
radianorless. Linear interpolation shall be usedfor values between 0.08 and 0.02radian.
(b)Linksoflengthgreaterthan2.6M
p
/V
p
andlessthan5M
p
/V
p
shallbeprovidedwithintermediateweb
stiffenersplacedatadistanceof1.5timesb
f
fromeachendofthelink.
(c) Links of length between 1.6M
p
/V
p
and 2.6M
p
/V
p
shall be provided with intermediate web stiffeners
meetingtherequirementsof(a)and(b)above.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6636 Vol.2
(d)Intermediatewebstiffenersarenotrequiredinlinksoflengthsgreaterthan5M
p
/V
p
.
(e) Intermediatewebstiffenersshallbefulldepth.Forlinksthatareless than635mmindepth,stiffenersare
requiredononlyonesideofthelink web. The thickness of onesided stiffeners shall not be less than t
w
or 10
mm,whicheverislarger,andthewidthshall be notlessthan(b
f
/2) t
w
. For links that are 635 mm in depth or
greater,similarintermediatestiffenersarerequiredonbothsidesoftheweb.
Therequiredstrengthoffilletweldsconnectingalinkstiffenertothelink webisA
st
F
y
(LRFD) orA
st
F
y
/1.5(ASD),
as appropriate, where A
st
is the area of the stiffener. The required strength of fillet welds connecting the
stiffenertothelinkflangesisA
st
F
y
/4(LRFD)orA
st
F
y
/4(1.5)(ASD).
LinktoColumnConnections
Linktocolumn connections must be capable of sustaining the maximum link rotation angle based on the
lengthofthelink,asspecifiedinSection10.20.15.2.3.Thestrength of the connection measured at the column
face shall equal at least the nominal shear strength of the link, V
n
, as specified in Section 10.20.15.2.2 at the
maximumlinkrotationangle.
Linktocolumnconnectionsshallsatisfytheaboverequirementsbyoneofthefollowing:
(a)UseaconnectionprequalifiedforEBFinaccordancewithAppendix10.A.
(b) Provide qualifying cyclic test results in accordance with Appendix 10.D. Results of at least two cyclic
connectiontestsshallbeprovidedandarepermittedtobebasedononeofthefollowing:
(i) Tests reported in research literature or documented tests performed for other projects
thatarerepresentativeofprojectconditions,withinthelimitsspecifiedinAppendix10.D.
(ii) Tests that are conducted specifically for the project and are representative of project
member sizes, material strengths, connection configurations, and matching connection
processes,withinthelimitsspecifiedinAppendix10.D.
Exception: Where reinforcement at the beamtocolumn connection at the link end precludes yielding of the
beam over the reinforced length, the link is permitted to be the beam segment from the end of the
reinforcement to the brace connection. Where such links are used and the link length does not exceed
1.6M
p
/V
p
, cyclic testing of the reinforcedconnection is not required ifthe available strength of the reinforced
sectionandtheconnectionequalsorexceedstherequiredstrengthcalculatedbaseduponthestrainhardened
linkasdescribedinSection10.20.15.6.FulldepthstiffenersasrequiredinSection10.20.15.3shallbeplacedat
thelinktoreinforcementinterface.
LateralBracingofLink
Lateral bracingshallbeprovidedatboth thetopandbottomlinkflangesat theends of the link. The required
strength of each lateral brace at the ends of the link shall be P
b
= 0.06 M
r
/h
o
, where h
o
is the distance
betweenflangecentroidsinmm.
FordesignaccordingtoSpecificationSection10.2.3.3(LRFD)
M
r
=M
u,exp
=R
y
ZF
y
FordesignaccordingtoSpecificationSection10.2.3.4(ASD)
M
r
=M
u,exp
/1.5
The required brace stiffness shall meet the provisions of Equation 10.19.3.4 of Section 10.19, where M
r
is
definedabove,C
d
=1,andL
b
isthelinklength.
10.20.15.3 DiagonalBraceandBeamOutsideofLink
DiagonalBrace
The required combined axial and flexural strength of the diagonal brace shall be determined based on load
combinationsstipulatedbytheapplicablebuildingcode.Forloadcombinationsincludingseismiceffects,aload
Q
1
shallbesubstitutedforthetermE,whereQ
1
isdefinedastheaxialforcesandmomentsgenerated byat
least 1.25 times the expected nominal shear strength of the link R
y
V
n
, where V
n
is as defined in Section
10.20.15.2.2. The available strength of the diagonalbraceshallcomplywithSpecificationSection10.10.Brace
membersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.1.
BeamOutsideLink
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6637
The required combined axial and flexural strength of the beam outside of thelinkshallbedeterminedbased
on load combinations stipulated by the applicable building code. For load combinations including seismic
effects,aloadQ
1
shallbesubstitutedforthetermEwhereQ
1
isdefinedastheforcesgeneratedbyatleast
1.1 times the expected nominal shear strength of the link, R
y
V
n
, where V
n
is as defined in Section
10.20.15.2.2. The available strength of the beam outside of the link shall be determined by the Specification,
multipliedbyR
y
.
At the connection between the diagonal brace and the beam at the link end ofthe brace, the intersection of
thebraceandbeamcenterlinesshallbeattheendofthelinkorinthelink.
BracingConnections
The required strength of the diagonal brace connections, at both ends ofthebrace, shall be at least equal
to the required strength of the diagonal brace, as defined in Section 10.20.15.6.1. The diagonal brace
connectionsshallalsosatisfytherequirementsofSection10.20.13.3.3.
No part of the diagonal brace connection at the link end of the brace shall extend over the link length. If the
brace is designed to resist a portion of the link end moment, then the diagonal brace connection at the link
endofthebraceshallbedesignedasafullyrestrainedmomentconnection.
BeamtoColumnConnections
If the EBF system factors in the applicable building code require moment resisting connections away from the
link, then the beamtocolumn connections away from the link shall meet the requirements for beamto
columnconnectionsforOMFspecifiedinSections10.20.11.2and10.20.11.5.
If the EBF system factors in the applicable building code do not require moment resisting connections away
from the link, then the beamtocolumn connectionsawayfromthelinkarepermittedtobedesignedaspinned
intheplaneoftheweb.
RequiredStrengthofColumns
In addition to the requirements in Section 10.20.8.3, the required strength of columns shall be determined
from load combinations as stipulated bythe applicablebuilding code, except that the seismic load E shall be
the forces generated by 1.1 times the expected nominal shear strength of all links above the level under
consideration. The expected nominal shear strength of a link is R
y
V
n
, where V
n
is as defined in Section
10.20.15.2.2.ColumnmembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
ProtectedZone
Links in EBFs are a protected zone, and shall satisfy the requirements of Section 10.20.7.4. Welding on links is
permittedforattachmentoflinkstiffeners,asrequiredinSection10.20.15.3.
DemandCriticalWelds
Completejointpenetrationgrooveweldsattachingthelinkflangesandthelinkwebtothecolumnaredemand
criticalwelds,andshallsatisfytherequirementsofSection10.20.7.3.2.
10.20.16 BucklingRestrainedBracedFrames(BRBF)
10.20.16.1 Scope
Bucklingrestrained braced frames (BRBF) are expected to withstand significant inelastic deformations when
subjectedtotheforcesresultingfromthemotionsofthedesignearthquake.BRBFshallmeettherequirementsin
thisSection.WheretheapplicablebuildingcodedoesnotcontaindesigncoefficientsforBRBF,theprovisionsof
Appendix10.Cshallapply.
10.20.16.2 BracingMembers
Bracing members shall be composed of a structural steel core and a system that restrains the steel core from
buckling.
SteelCore
Thesteelcoreshallbedesignedtoresisttheentireaxialforceinthebrace.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6638 Vol.2
The brace design axial strength, P
ysc
(LRFD), and the brace allowable axial strength, P
ysc
/ (ASD), in tension
andcompression,accordingtothelimitstateofyielding,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
P
ysc
= F
ysc
A
sc
(1u.2u.16.1)
=0.90(LRFD) =1.67(ASD)
where
F
ysc
= specified minimum yield stress of the steel core, or actual yield stress of the steel core as determined
fromacoupontest,MPa
A=netareaofsteelcore,mm
2

Plates used in the steel core that are 50 mm thick or greater shall satisfy the minimum notch toughness
requirementsofSection10.20.6.3.
Splicesinthesteelcorearenotpermitted.
BucklingRestrainingSystem
The bucklingrestraining system shall consist of the casing for the steel core. In stability calculations, beams,
columns,andgussetsconnectingthecoreshallbeconsideredpartsofthissystem.
The bucklingrestraining system shall limit local and overall buckling of the steel core for deformations
correspondingto2.0timesthedesignstorydrift.Thebucklingrestrainingsystemshallnotbepermittedtobuckle
withindeformationscorrespondingto2.0timesthedesignstorydrift.
Testing
Thedesignofbracesshallbebaseduponresultsfromqualifyingcyclictestsinaccordancewiththeprocedures
andacceptancecriteriaofAppendix10.E.Qualifyingtestresultsshallconsistofatleasttwosuccessfulcyclictests:
one is required to be a test of a brace subassemblage that includes brace connection rotational demands
complying withAppendix10.E, Section10.E.4 and the other shall be either a uniaxial or a subassemblage test
complying with Appendix 10.E, Section 10.E.5. Both test types are permitted to be based upon one of the
following:
(a) Tests reported in research or documented tests performed forotherprojects.
(b)Teststhatareconductedspecificallyfortheproject.
Interpolation or extrapolation of test results for different member sizes shall be justified by rational analysis
that demonstrates stress distributions and magnitudes of internal strains consistent with or less severe than
thetested assembliesandthatconsiderstheadverseeffectsofvariationsinmaterialproperties.Extrapolation
of test results shall be based upon similar combinations of steel core and bucklingrestraining system sizes.
TestsshallbepermittedtoqualifyadesignwhentheprovisionsofAppendix10.Earemet.
AdjustedBraceStrength
Where required by these Provisions, bracing connections and adjoining members shall be designed to resist
forces calculated based on the adjusted bracestrength.
The adjusted brace strengthincompressionshallbeR
y
P
ysc
.Theadjustedbracestrengthintensionshallbe
R
y
P
ysc
.
Exception:ThefactorR
y
neednotbeappliedifP
ysc
isestablishedusingyieldstressdeterminedfromacoupon
test.
The compression strength adjustment factor, , shall be calculated as the ratio of the maximum compression
force to the maximum tension force of the test specimen measured from the qualification tests specified in
Appendix10.E,Section10.E.6.3fortherangeofdeformationscorrespondingto2.0timesthedesignstorydrift.
Thelargervalueoffromthetworequiredbracequalificationtestsshallbeused.Innocaseshallbetakenas
lessthan1.0.Thestrainhardeningadjustmentfactor,,shallbecalculatedastheratioofthemaximumtension
force measured from the qualification tests specified in Appendix 10.E, Section 10.E.6.3 (for the range of
deformationscorrespondingto2.0timesthedesignstorydrift)toF
ysc
ofthetestspecimen.Thelargervalueof
fromthetworequiredqualificationtestsshallbeused.Wherethetestedsteelcorematerialdoesnotmatch
thatoftheprototype,shallbebasedoncoupontestingoftheprototypematerial.
10.20.16.3 BracingConnections
RequiredStrength
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6639
The required strength of bracing connections in tension and compression (including beamtocolumn
connectionsifpartofthebracingsystem)shallbe1.1times the adjusted brace strength in compression (LRFD)
or1.1/1.5timestheadjustedbracestrengthincompression(ASD).
GussetPlates
Thedesignofconnectionsshallincludeconsiderationsoflocalandoverallbuckling.Bracingconsistentwiththat
usedinthetestsuponwhichthedesignisbasedisrequired.
SpecialRequirementsRelatedtoBracingConfiguration
VtypeandinvertedVtype braced frames shall meet thefollowingrequirements:
(1) Therequiredstrengthofbeamsintersectedbybraces,theirconnections,andsupportingmembersshallbe
determinedbasedontheloadcombinationsofthe applicable building code assuming that the braces provide
no support for dead and live loads. For load combinations that include earthquake effects, the vertical and
horizontal earthquake effect, E, onthe beamshall bedeterminedfromtheadjustedbracestrengthsintension
andcompression.
(2) Beams shall be continuous between columns. Both flanges of beams shall be laterally braced. Lateral
braces shall meet the provisions of Equations10.19.3.3 and 10.19.3.4 of Section10.19,where M
r
= M
u
=R
y
ZF
y
(LRFD)orM
r
=M
a
=R
y
ZF
y
/1.5(ASD),asappropriate,ofthebeamandC
d
=1.0.Asaminimum,onesetoflateral
bracesisrequiredatthepoint of intersection of the Vtype (or inverted Vtype) bracing, unless the beam has
sufficientoutofplanestrengthandstiffnesstoensurestabilitybetweenadjacentbracepoints.
Forpurposesofbracedesignandtesting,thecalculatedmaximumdeformationof bracesshall be increased by
includingtheeffectoftheverticaldeflectionofthebeamundertheloadingdefinedinSection10.20.16.4(1).
KtypebracedframesarenotpermittedforBRBF.
BeamsandColumns
BeamsandcolumnsinBRBFshallmeetthefollowingrequirements.
WidthThicknessLimitations
BeamandcolumnmembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
RequiredStrength
TherequiredstrengthofbeamsandcolumnsinBRBFshallbedeterminedfromloadcombinationsasstipulated
intheapplicablebuildingcode.Forloadcombinationsthatincludeearthquakeeffects,theearthquakeeffect,E,
shallbedeterminedfromtheadjustedbracestrengthsintensionandcompression.
The required strength of beams and columns need not exceed themaximumforcethatcanbedevelopedby
thesystem.
Splices
In addition to meeting the requirements in Section 10.20.8.4, column splices in BRBF shall be designed to
develop 50 percent of the lesser available flexural strength of the connected members, determined based on
the limit state of yielding. The required shear strength shall be M
pc
/H (LRFD) or M
pc
/1.5H (ASD), as
appropriate,whereM
pc
isthesumofthenominalplasticflexuralstrengthsofthecolumns aboveandbelowthe
splice.
ProtectedZone
Theprotectedzoneshallincludethesteelcoreofbracingmembersandelementsthat connect the steel core to
beamsandcolumns,andshallsatisfytherequirementsofSection10.20.7.4.
10.20.17 SpecialPlateShearWalls(SPSW)
10.20.17.1 Scope
Specialplateshearwalls(SPSW)areexpectedtowithstandsignificantinelasticdeformationsinthewebswhen
subjectedtotheforcesresultingfromthemotionsofthedesignearthquake.Thehorizontalboundaryelements
(HBEs) and vertical boundary elements (VBEs) adjacent to the webs shall be designed to remain essentially
elasticunderthemaximumforcesthatcanbegeneratedbythefullyyieldedwebs,exceptthatplastichingingat
theendsofHBEsispermitted.SPSWshallmeettherequirementsofthisSection.Wheretheapplicablebuilding
codedoesnotcontaindesigncoefficientsforSPSW,theprovisionsofAppendix10.Cshallapply.
Part6
StructuralDesign
6640 Vol.2
10.20.17.2 Webs
ShearStrength
The panel design shear strength, V
n
(LRFD), and the allowable shear strength, V
n
/ (ASD), according to the
limitstateofshearyielding,shallbedeterminedasfollows:
2 42 0 sin .
cf w y n
L t F V =
(1u.2u.17.1)
=0.90(LRFD)=1.67(ASD)
where
t
w
=thicknessoftheweb,mm.
L
cf
=cleardistancebetweenVBEflanges,mm
istheangleofwebyieldinginradians,asmeasuredrelativetothevertical,anditisgivenby:

+ +
+
=
L I
h
A
h t
A
L t
c b
w
c
w
360
1
1
2
1
3
4
tan
(1u.2u.17.2)
h =distancebetweenHBEcenterlines,mm
A
b
=crosssectionalareaofaHBE,mm
2

A
c
=crosssectionalareaofaVBE,mm
2

I
c
=momentofinertiaofaVBEtakenperpendiculartothedirectionofthewebplateline,mm
4

L =distancebetweenVBEcenterlines,mm
PanelAspectRatio
Theratioofpanellengthtoheight,L/h,shallbelimitedto0.8<L/h2.5.
OpeningsinWebs
Openings in webs shall be bounded on all sides by HBE and VBE extending the full width and height of the
panel,respectively,unlessotherwisejustifiedbytestingandanalysis.
ConnectionsofWebstoBoundaryElements
The required strength of web connections to the surrounding HBE and VBE shall equal the expected yield
strength,intension,ofthewebcalculatedatanangle,definedbyEquation10.20.17.2.
10.20.17.3 HorizontalandVerticalBoundaryElements
RequiredStrength
In additiontotherequirementsofSection10.20.8.3,therequiredstrengthofVBEshallbebasedupontheforces
correspondingtotheexpectedyieldstrength,intension,ofthewebcalculatedatanangle.
TherequiredstrengthofHBEshallbethegreateroftheforces correspondingtotheexpectedyieldstrength,in
tension, of the web calculated at an angle or that determined from the load combinations in the applicable
buildingcodeassumingthewebprovidesnosupportforgravityloads.
The beamcolumn moment ratio provisions in Section 10.20.9.6 shall be met for all HBE/VBE intersections
withoutconsiderationoftheeffectsofthewebs.
HBEtoVBEConnections
HBEtoVBE connections shall satisfy the requirements of Section 10. 20. 11.2. The required shear strength,
V
u
, of a HBEtoVBE connection shall bedetermined in accordance with the provisions of Section 10.20. 11.2,
except that the required shear strength shall not be less than the shear corresponding to moments at each
endequalto1.1R
y
M
p
(LRFD)or(1.1/1.5)R
y
M
p
(ASD),asappropriate,togetherwiththeshearresultingfromthe
expectedyieldstrengthintensionofthewebsyieldingatanangle.
WidthThicknessLimitations
HBEandVBEmembersshallmeettherequirementsofSection10.20.8.2.2.
LateralBracing
SteelStructures Chapter10

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6641
HBE shall be laterally braced at all intersections with VBE and at aspacingnot to exceed 0.086r
y
E/F
y
. Both
flanges of HBE shall be braced either directlyor indirectly. The required strength of lateral bracing shall be at
least 2 percentof the HBE flange nominal strength, F
y
b
f
t
f
. The required stiffness of all lateralbracingshallbe
determinedinaccordancewithEquation10.19.3.4ofSection10.19.Intheseequations,M
r
shallbecomputedas
R
y
ZF
y
(LRFD)orM
r
shallbecomputedasR
y
ZF
y
/1.5(ASD),asappropriate,andC
d
=1.0.
VBESplices
VBEsplicesshallcomplywiththerequirementsofSection10.20.8.4.
PanelZones
TheVBE panel zone next to the top and base HBE of the SPSW shall complywiththerequirementsinSection
10.20.9.3.
StiffnessofVerticalBoundaryElements
TheVBEshall have momentsof inertia about an axis taken perpendicular to the plane of the web, I
c
, not less
than0.00307t
w
h
4
/L.
10.20.18 QualityAssurancePlan
Scope
When required by the applicable building code or the engineer of record, a quality assurance plan shall be
provided.ThequalityassuranceplanshallincludetherequirementsofAppendix10.B.

Part6
StructuralDesign 6643
Chapter 11
TIMBER
11.1 SCOPE
11.1.1 This Section relates to the use of structural timber in structures or elements of structures connected
togetherbyfasteners/fasteningtechniques.
11.1.2 This shall not be interpreted to prevent the use of material or methods of design or construction not
specifically mentioned herein;and themethods ofdesign may be based on analytical andengineering
principles,orreliabletestdata,orboth,thatdemonstratethesafetyandserviceabilityoftheresulting
structure.Noristheclassificationoftimberintostrengthgroupstobeinterpretedaspreventingtheuse
ofdesigndatadesiredforaparticulartimberorgradeoftimberonthebasisofreliabletests.
11.2 TERMINOLOGY
11.2.1 This section provides an alphabetical list of the terms used in this chapter of the Code. In case of any
conflict or contradiction between a definition given in this section and that in Part 1, the meaning
providedinthissectionshallgovernforinterpretationoftheprovisionsofthischapter.
11.2.2 StructuralPurposeDefinitions
11.2.2.1 Beam,BuiltUpLaminated
A beam made by joining layers of timber together with mechanical fastenings, so that the grain of all layers is
essentiallyparallel.
11.2.2.2 Beam,GluedLaminated
A beam made by bonding layers of veneers or timber with an adhesive, so that grain of all laminations is
essentiallyparallel.
11.2.2.3 Diaphragm,Structural
Astructuralelementoflargeextentplacedinabuildingasawall,orroof,andmadeuseoftoresisthorizontal
forcessuchaswindorearthquakesactingparalleltoitsownplane.
11.2.2.4 DurationofLoad
Periodduringwhichamemberoracompletestructureisstressedasaconsequenceoftheloadsapplied.
11.2.2.5 EdgeDistance
Thedistancemeasuredperpendiculartograinfromthecentreoftheconnectortotheedgeofthemember.
11.2.2.6 EndDistance
Thedistancemeasuredparalleltograinofthememberfromthecentreoftheconnectortotheclosestendof
timber.
11.2.2.7 FingerJoint
Jointproducedbyconnectingtimbermembersendtoendbycuttingprofiles(taperedprojections)intheform
of Vshaped grooves to the ends of timber planks or scantlings to be joined, gluing the interfaces and then
matingthetwoendstogetherunderpressure.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6644 Vol.2
11.2.2.8 FundamentalorUltimateStress
Thestresswhichisdeterminedonsmallclearspecimenoftimber,inaccordancewithgoodpractice;anddoes
nottakeintoaccounttheeffectofnaturallyoccurringcharacteristicsandotherfactors.
11.2.2.9 InsideLocation
Positioninbuildingsinwhichtimberremainscontinuouslydryorprotectedfromweather.
11.2.2.10 LaminatedVeneerLumber
A structural composite made by laminating veneers, 1.5 mm to 4.2 mm thick, with suitable adhesive and with
thegrainofveneersinsuccessivelayersalignedalongthelongitudinal(length)dimensionofthecomposite.
11.2.2.11 LoadedEdgeDistance
Thedistancemeasuredfromthecentretotheedgetowardswhichtheloadinducedbytheconnectoracts,and
theunloadededgedistanceistheoneoppositetotheloadededge.
11.2.2.12 Location
Atermgenerallyreferredtoasexactplacewhereatimberisusedinbuilding.
11.2.2.13 OutsideLocation
Position in buildings in which timbers are occasionally subjected to wetting and drying as in the case of open
shedsandoutdoorexposedstructures.
11.2.2.14 PermissibleStress
Stressobtainedbyapplyingfactorofsafetytotheultimatestress.
11.2.2.15 Sandwich,Structural
A layered construction comprising a combination or relatively highstrength facing material intimately bonded
toandactingintegrallywithalowdensitycorematerial.
11.2.2.16 SpacedColumn
Twocolumnsectionsadequatelyconnectedtogetherbyglue,bolts,screwsorotherwise.
11.2.2.17 Structure,Permanent
Structural units in timber which are constructed for a long duration and wherein adequate protection and
designmeasureshaveinitiallybeenincorporatedtorenderthestructureserviceablefortherequiredlife.
11.2.2.18 Structure,Temporary
Structureswhichareerectedforashortperiod,suchashutmentsatprojectsites,forrehabilitation,temporary
defenceconstructions,exhibitionstructures,etc.
11.2.2.19 StructuralElement
Thecomponenttimbermembersandjointswhichmakeuparesultingstructuralassembly.
11.2.2.20 StructuralGrades
Grades defining the maximum size of strength reducing natural characteristics (knots, sloping grain, etc)
deemedpermissibleinanypieceofstructuraltimberwithindesignatedstructuralgradeclassification.
11.2.2.21 StructuralTimber
Timber in which strength is related to the anticipated inservice use as a controlling factor in grading and
selectionand/orstiffness.
11.2.2.22 Termite
An insect of the order Isopteran which may burrow in the wood or wood products of a building for food or
shelter.
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6645
11.2.2.23 WetLocation
Positioninbuildingsinwhichtimbersarealmostcontinuouslydamporwetincontactwiththeearthorwater,
suchaspilesandtimberfoundations.
11.2.3 DefinitionsofDefectsinTimber
11.2.3.1 Check
Aseparationoffibresextendingalongthegrainwhichisconfinedtoonefaceofapieceofwood.
11.2.3.2 CompressionWood
Abnormal wood which is formed on the lower sides of branches and inclined stems of coniferous trees. It is
darkerandharderthannormalwoodbutrelativelylowinstrengthforitsweight.Itcanbeusuallyidentifiedby
wideeccentricgrowthringswithabnormallyhighproportionofgrowthlatewood.
11.2.3.3 DeadKnot
Aknotinwhichthelayersofannualgrowtharenotcompletelyintergrownwiththoseoftheadjacentwood.Itis
surroundedbypitchorbark.Theencasementmaybepartialorcomplete.
11.2.3.4 DecayorRot
Disintegrationofwoodtissuecausedbyfungi(wooddestroying)orothermicroorganisms.
11.2.3.5 DecayedKnot
Aknotsofterthanthesurroundingwoodandcontainingdecay.
11.2.3.6 DiameterofKnot
Themaximumdistancebetweenthetwopointsfarthestapartontheperipheryofaroundknot,onthefaceon
which it becomes visible. In the case of a spike or a splay knot, the maximum width of the knot visible on the
faceonwhichitappearsshallbetakenasitsdiameter.
11.2.3.7 Discoloration
Achangefromthenormalcolourofthewoodwhichdoesnotimpairthestrengthofthewood.
11.2.3.8 Knot
Abranchbaseorlimbembeddedinthetreeortimberbynaturalgrowth.
11.2.3.9 KnotHole
Aholeleftasaresultoftheremovalofaknot.
11.2.3.10 LiveKnot
A knot free from decay and other defects, in which the fibres are firmly intergrown with those of the
surroundingwood.Syn.Integrownknot;cf.DeadKnot.
11.2.3.11 LooseGrain(LoosenedGrain)
Adefectona6flatsawnsurfacecausedbytheseparationorraisingofwoodfibresalongthegrowthrings;C$
RaisedGrain.
11.2.3.12 LooseKnot
Aknotthatisnotheldfirmlyinplacebygrowthorposition,andthatcannotbereliedupontoremaininplace;
cfTightKnot.
11.2.3.13 Mould
A soft vegetative growth that forms on wood in damp, stagnant atmosphere. It is the least harmful type of
fungus,usuallyconfinedtothesurfaceofthewood.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6646 Vol.2
11.2.3.14 PitchPocket
Accumulationofresinbetweengrowthringsofconiferouswoodasseenonthecrosssection.
11.2.3.15 SapStain
Discolorationofthesapwoodmainlyduetofungi.
11.2.3.16 Sapwood
Theouterlayeroflog,whichinthegrowingtreecontainlivingcellsandfoodmaterial.Thesapwoodisusually
lighterincolourandisreadilyattackedbyinsectsandfungi.
11.2.3.17 Shake
Apartialorcompleteseparationbetweenadjoininglayersoftissuesasseeninendsurfaces.
11.2.3.18 SlopeofGrain
Theinclinationofthefibrestothelongitudinalaxisofthemember.
11.2.3.19 SoundKnot
Atightknotfreefromdecay,whichissolidacrossitsface,andatleastashardasthesurroundingwood.
11.2.3.20 Split
Acrackextendingfromonefaceofapieceofwoodtoanotherandmnsalongthegrainofthepiece.
11.2.3.21 TightKnot
Aknotsoheldbygrowthorpositionastoremainfirminpositioninthepieceofwood;C$LooseKnot.
11.2.3.22 Wane
Theoriginalroundedsurfaceofatreeremainingonapieceofconvertedtimber.
11.2.3.23 Warp
Adeviationinsawntimberfromatrueplanesurfaceordistortionduetostressescausingdeparturefromatrue
plane.
11.2.3.24 WarmHoles
Cavitiescausedbyworms.
11.3 SYMBOLS
11.3.1 For the purpose of this Section, the following letter symbols shall have the meaning indicated against
each:
a=Projectedareaofboltinmainmember(tXd
3
),mm
2

B=Widthofthebeam,mm
C=Concentratedload,N
D=Depthofbeam,mm
D
1
=Depthofbeamatthenotch,mm
D
2
=Depthofnotch,mm
d=Dimensionofleastsideofcolumn,mm
d
1
=Leastoverallwidthofboxcolumn,mm
d
2
=Leastoveralldimensionofcoreinboxcolumn,mm
d
3
=Diameterofbolt,mm
d
f
=Boltdiameterfactor
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6647
e=Lengthofthenotchmeasuredalongthebeamspanfromtheinneredgeofthesupporttothefarthestedge
ofthenotch,mm
E=Modulusofelasticityinbending,N/mm
2

F=Loadactingonaboltatanangletograin,N
f
ab
=Calculatedbendingstressinextremefibre,N/mm
2

f
ac
=Calculatedaverageaxialcompressivestress,N/mm
2

f
at
=Calculatedaxialtensilestress,N/mm
2

f
b
=Permissiblebendingstressontheextremefibre,N/mm
2

f
c
=Permissiblestressinaxialcompression,N/mm
2

f
cn
=Permissiblestressincompressionnormal(perpendicular)tograin,N/mm
2

f
cp
=Permissiblestressincompressionparalleltograin,N/mm
2

f
c

=Permissiblecompre~sivestressinthedirectionofthelineofactionoftheload,N/mm
2

f
t
=Permissiblestressintensionparalleltograin,N/mm
2

H=Horizontalshearstress,N/mm
2

I=Momentofinertiaofasection,mm
4

K=Coefficientindeflectiondependingupontypeandcriticalityofloadingonbeam
K
1
=Modificationfactorforchangeinslopeofgrain
K
2
=Modificationfactorforchangeindurationofloadings
=

6
, 5
, 4
, 3
K
and
K
K
K
Formfactors
K
7
=Modificationfactorforbearingstress
K
8
=Constantequalto
cp
f
E
584 . 0
K
9
=Constantequalto
cp
qf
UE
5 2

K
10
=Constantequalto
cp
f
E 5 . 2
584 . 0
L=Spanofabeamortruss,mm
M=MaximumbendingmomentinbeamN/mm
2

N=Totalnumberofboltsinthejoint
n=Shankdiameterofthenail,mm
P=Loadonboltparalleltograin,N
P
1
=Ratioofthethicknessofthecompressionflangetothedepthofthebeam
Q=Staticalmomentofareaaboveorbelowtheneutralaxisaboutneutralaxis,mm
3

q=Constantforparticularthicknessofplank
q
1
=Ratioofthetotalthicknessofweborwebstotheoverallwidthofthebeam
R=Loadonboltperpendicular(normal)tograin,N
S=Unsupportedoveralllengthofcolumn,mm
t=Nominalthicknessofplanksusedinformingboxtypecolumn,mm
Part6
StructuralDesign

6648 Vol.2
t=Thicknessofmainmember,mm
U=Constantforaparticularthicknessoftheplank
V=Verticalendreactionorshearatasection,N
W=Totaluniformload,N
x=Distancefromreactiontoload,mm
=AfactordeterminingthevalueofformfactorK
4

=Deflectionatmiddleofbeam,mm
=Angleofloadtograindirection
Z=Sectionmodulusofbeam,mm3

1
=Percentagefactorfort/d
3
ratio,paralleltograin

2
=Percentagefactorfort/d
3
ratio,perpendiculartograin
11.4 MATERIALS
11.4.1 SpeciesofTimber
ThespeciesoftimberrecommendedforstructuralpurposesaregiveninTable11.4.1.
11.4.1.1 Grouping
Speciesoftimberrecommendedforconstructionalpurposesareclassifiedinthreegroupsonthebasisoftheir
strengthproperties,namely,modulusofelasticity(E)andextremefibrestressinbendingandtension(f
b
).
Thecharacteristicsofthesegroupsareasgivenbelow:
GroupAEabove12.6x103N/mm
2
andf
b
above18.0N/mm
2
.
Group B E above 9.8 x 103 N/mm
2
and up to 12.6 x 10
3
N/mm
2
and f
b
above 12.0 N/mm
2
and up to 18.0
N/mm
2
.
Group C E above 5.6 x 103 N/mm
2
and up to 9.8 x 103 N/mm
2
and f
b
above 8.5 N/mm
2
and up to 12.0
N/mm
2
.
NOTE Modulus of elasticity given above is applicable for all locations and extreme fibre stress in bending is
forinsidelocation.
11.4.2
ThegeneralcharacteristicslikedurabilityandtreatabilityofthespeciesarealsogiveninTable11.4.1.
Species of timber other than those recommended in Table 11.4.1 may be used, provided the basic strength
propertiesaredeterminedandfoundinaccordancewith11.5.1.
NOTE For obtaining basic stress figures of the unlisted species, reference may be made to the Forest
ResearchInstitute,DebraDun.
11.4.3
Thepermissiblelateralstrength(indoubleshear)ofmildsteelwireshallbeasgiveninTable11.4.2andTable
11.4.3fordifferentspeciesoftimber.
11.4.4
MoistureContent in Timber The permissible moisture content of timber forvarious positions in buildings shall
beasgiveninTable11.4.4.

Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6649
Table11.4.1SafePermissibleStressesfortheSpeciesofTimber
Species Average
Densityat12
percent
Content
Kg/m
3

Modulusof
Elasticityx
10
3
N/mm
2

PermissibleStressinN/mm
2
forGradeI PreservativeCharacters
BotanicalName Trade
Name
Bendingand
TensionAlong
Grains,Extreme
FibreStress
Shearall
Location
Compression
ParalleltoGrain
Compression
Perpendicularto
Grain
Durability
Class
Treatability
Grade
Refracterinesto
AllSeasoning
I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

H
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

A
l
o
n
g

G
r
a
i
n

I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Acacianilotica Babla 797 _ _ 12.9 10.3 1.4 2.1 8.9 7.9 6.4 5.2 4.0 3.3 I b B
Aglaia odulis Aglaia 815 12.56 18.2 15.2 12.1 1.4 2.0 10.1 8.9 7.3 4.4 3.4 2.8 _ _ A
Ailantahus grandis Gokul 404 7.94 8.3 6.9 5.5 0.6 0.8 5.3 4.7 3.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 III _ C
Altingia excelsa

Jutili 795 11.37 17.1 14.3 11.4 1.2 1.8 11.0 9.8 8.0 6.8 5.3 4.4 II e A
Amoora rehituka

Pitraj 668 8.98 12.3 10.2 8.2 1.1 1.5 8.0 7.1 5.8 4.0 3.1 2.6 I _ B
Amoorawallichii Lali 583 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Amooraspp. Arnari 625 1.05 13.4 1.1 9.2 0.9 1.3 8.4 7.4 6.0 3.7 2.9 2.4 II d B
Anisopleraglabra Boilam 573 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ III b _
Aphenamixispolystachya Pitraj 583 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ III e B
Arlocarpuschaplasha Chapalish 515 9.11 13.2 11.0 8.8 0.9 1.2 8.5 7.5 6.2 3.6 2.8 2.3 III d B
Artocarpusintegrifolia Kanthal 537 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ III c B
Azadirachtaindica Neem 836 8.52 14.6 12.1 9.7 1.3 1.8 10.0 8.9 7.3 5.0 3.9 3.2 _ _ _
Betula lnoides Birch 625 9.23 9.6 8.0 6.4 0.8 1.1 5.7 5.0 4.1 2.2 1.7 1.4 _ _ B
Bischofiajavanica Bhadi 769 8.84 9.6 8.2 6.5 0.8 1.1 5.9 5.3 4.3 3.6 2.8 2.3 III _ A
Bruguieraconjugata Kankra 879 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ A
Part6
StructuralDesign

6650 Vol.2
Species Average
Densityat12
percent
Content
Kg/m
3

Modulusof
Elasticityx
10
3
N/mm
2

PermissibleStressinN/mm
2
forGradeI PreservativeCharacters
BotanicalName Trade
Name
Bendingand
TensionAlong
Grains,Extreme
FibreStress
Shearall
Location
Compression
ParalleltoGrain
Compression
Perpendicularto
Grain
Durability
Class
Treatability
Grade
Refracterinesto
AllSeasoning
I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

H
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

A
l
o
n
g

G
r
a
i
n

I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Bucklandiapopulnea Plpli 672 9.89 12.8 10.7 8.6 1.1 1.5 7.9 7.0 5.7 3.5 2.7 2.2 III e C
Canarium strictum Whitedhup 569 10.54 10.1 8.4 6.7 0.7 1.1 6.2 5.5 4.5 2.1 1.6 1.3 III _ C
Cassiafistula Sonalu 865 11.80 19.2 16.0 12.8 1.4 2.0 12.3 10.9 8.9 7.2 5.6 4.6 I _ A
Castanopsis hystrix Chestanut 624 9.85 10.6 8.8 7.0 0.8 1.2 6.4 5.7 4.6 2.7 2.1 1.7 II b B
Carallia lucida Maniawaga 748 12.60 18.4 15.3 12.3 1.2 1.7 11.4 10.1 8.3 5.9 4.6 3.8 _ _ _
Cassiasiamea Minjiri 695 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Chukrasiatabularis Chickrassy 666 8.35 11.8 9.8 7.9 1.1 1.5 7.1 6.3 5.2 3.9 3.1 2.5 II c B
Dalbergiasissoo Sissoo 808 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ B
Dillemiaindica Dillenia 617 8.61 12.1 10.0 8.0 0.8 1.2 7.3 6.5 5.3 2.7 2.1 1.7 III a B
Dilleniapentagyne Dillenia 622 7.56 11.8 9.9 7.9 0.9 1.3 7.1 6.3 5.2 3.5 2.7 2.2 III d B
Dipterocarpusalatus Garjan 721 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ III a B
Dipterocarpus rnacrocarpus Hollong

726 13.34 14.5 12.0 9.6 0.8 1.1 8.8 7.9 6.4 3.5 2.7 2.2 III a B
Duabangasonneratioides Banderhol 485 8.38 9.8 8.2 6.5 0.6 0.9 6.4 5.7 4.7 1.8 1.4 1.1 III c C
Garugapiannata Garuga 571 7.58 11.7 9.7 7.8 1.0 1.5 7.2 6.4 5.3 3.4 2.6 2.1 I e B
Geriopsroxbarghiana Goran 869 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
gGmelinearborea Garnar 501 7.02 9.8 8.2 6.6 0.8 1.4 5.7 5.0 4.1 4.2 3.2 2.7 I e B
Grewiaveslita Dhaman 758 12.00 15.4 12.6 10.3 1.4 2.0 9.1 8.1 6.6 4.1 3.2 2.6 III d B
Heritieraspp. Sundri 872 13.37 17.9 14.9 11.9 1.3 1.8 11.0 9.8 8.0 6.5 5.0 4.1 I _ A
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6651
Species Average
Densityat12
percent
Content
Kg/m
3

Modulusof
Elasticityx
10
3
N/mm
2

PermissibleStressinN/mm
2
forGradeI PreservativeCharacters
BotanicalName Trade
Name
Bendingand
TensionAlong
Grains,Extreme
FibreStress
Shearall
Location
Compression
ParalleltoGrain
Compression
Perpendicularto
Grain
Durability
Class
Treatability
Grade
Refracterinesto
AllSeasoning
I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

H
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

A
l
o
n
g

G
r
a
i
n

I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Hopeaodorata Telsur 711 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ III a B
Kayeafloribund Karal 813 10.88 16.8 14.0 1.1 1.1 1.6 10.1 9.0 7.3 4.4 3.4 2.8 III _ _
Lagerstrocmiaspp. Jarul 654 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ III e B
Machilusmacrantha Machilus 692 10.00 12.4 10.3 8.3 1.0 1.5 8.2 7.3 6.0 3.5 2.7 2.2 III e B/C
Manglietiainsignia 449 10.37 10.9 9.1 7.3 0.7 1.4 8.0 7.1 5.8 3.4 2.6 2.1 _ _ _
Manilota polyandra Ping 903 13.20 19.1 15.9 12.7 1.3 1.8 1.2 10.0 8.5 5.7 4.4 3.6 III b A
Mesua assamica Keyea 842 12.83 17.4 14.5 11.6 1.0 1.4 11.7 10.4 8.5 5.3 4.1 3.3 II e _
Mesua ferrea Mesua 965 16.30 23.3 19.4 15.5 1.2 1.8 15.5 13.8 11.3 5.9 4.6 3.7 I _ A
Micheliachampaca Champa 644 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ B
Michelia montana Champ 512 8.25 10.9 9.1 7.3 0.7 1.0 6.6 5.9 4.8 2.8 2.2 1.8 I _ B
Michelia excelsa
Champ

513 10.12 9.8 8.2 6.5 0.7 1.0 6.1 5.5 4.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 II e B
Mitragynapervifolia Dakroom 651 7.82 12.6 10.5 8.4 1.0 1.5 7.9 7.0 5.7 3.7 2.9 2.4 III b B
Palaquiumpolyanthum Tali 734 11.24 14.9 12.4 10.0 1.1 1.6 9.9 8.8 7.2 4.7 3.7 3.0 _ _ B
Phoebe hainesiana Bonsum 566 9.5 13.2 11.0 8.8 0.8 1.2 8.8 7.8 6.4 2.8 2.1 1.8 II c B
Phoebe goalperansis Bonsum 511 7.65 9.7 8.1 6.5 0.7 1.0 6.6 5.9 4.8 2.2 1.7 1.4 II c B
Plerygotaalata Narikel 593 10.95 13.4 11.8 8.9 0.8 1.2 8.2 7.3 6.0 2.7 2.1 1.7 III _ C
Prunus napeulensis Arupati 548 9.41 4.4 8.7 69.6 0.9 1.2 6.7 6.0 4.9 2.4 1.9 1.6 _ _ _
Pterespermum acerifolium Hattipaila 607 9.55 13.5 11.3 9.0 0.9 1.2 8.7 7.7 6.3 3.2 2.5 2.0 III C B
Part6
StructuralDesign

6652 Vol.2
Species Average
Densityat12
percent
Content
Kg/m
3

Modulusof
Elasticityx
10
3
N/mm
2

PermissibleStressinN/mm
2
forGradeI PreservativeCharacters
BotanicalName Trade
Name
Bendingand
TensionAlong
Grains,Extreme
FibreStress
Shearall
Location
Compression
ParalleltoGrain
Compression
Perpendicularto
Grain
Durability
Class
Treatability
Grade
Refracterinesto
AllSeasoning
I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

H
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

A
l
o
n
g

G
r
a
i
n

I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

I
n
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

o
u
t
s
i
d
e

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

w
e
t

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Quercuslineate Oak 874 12.63 15.2 12.7 10.1 1.2 1.7 9.6 8.6 7.0 5.3 4.1 3.4 II c A
Quercuslamellosa Oak 87 12.44 14.5 12.1 9.7 1.2 1.7 8.7 7.8 6.4 3.8 2.9 2.4 II c A
Schima wallichii Chilauni 693 9.57 11.1 9.3 7.4 0.9 1.3 6.6 5.9 4.8 2.3 1.8 1.4 III d B
Seritierafomes Sundri 1073 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ III b B
Shotea assamica Makai 548 9.27 11.1 9.2 7.4 0.9 1.3 7.1 6.3 5.2 2.9 2.2 1.8 III c B
Shorearobusta Sal 889 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ III e B
Sonneralia apetale Keora 617 8.63 12.8 10.7 8.5 0.9 1.3 7.4 6.6 5.4 4.8 3.7 3.0 II _ B
Swintoniafloribunda Civit 665 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ III a C
Syzygiumcumini Jamun 841 10.55 14.8 12.4 9.9 1.1 1.6 9.0 8.0 6.5 6.9 5.4 4.4 II e A
Syzygiumspp. Jam 823 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ III e A
Taxus buccata Yew 705 7.79 14.3 11.9 9.5 1.2 1.7 8.7 7.8 6.4 4.7 3.7 3.0 _ _ _
Tectonagrandis Teak 660 9.97 15.5 12.9 10.3 1.2 1.6 9.4 8.3 6.8 4.5 3.5 2.8 I e B
Toenaciliata Toon 487 6.40 8.7 7.3 5.8 0.7 1.0 5.4 4.8 3.9 2.4 1.8 1.5 II c B
Terminalia citrna 755 11.89 17.1 14.3 11.4 1.1 1.6 10.8 9.6 7.9 5.0 3.9 3.2 _ _ _
Terminalia myriocarpa Hollock 615 9.62 11.9 9.9 8.0 0.9 1.2 7.6 6.7 5.5 2.9 2.2 1.8 III a B
Xyliadolabriformis Lohakat 1007 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Xylocarpusrolloensis Passur 757 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ B
Zanthoxylum budranga
Mullilam

587 10.65 14.7 12.2 9.8 0.9 1.2 9.5 8.4 6.9 3.4 2.6 2.1 I e B
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6653

Classificationforpreservationbasedondurabilitytests,etc.
Class
IAveragelifemorethan120months;
IIAveragelife60monthsorabovebutlessthan120months;and
IIIAveragelifelessthan60months.

TreatabilityGrades
aHeartwoodeasilytreatable;
bHeartwoodtreatable,butcompletepenetrationnotalwaysobtained;incasewheretheleastdimensionismorethan60mm;
cHeartwoodonlypartiallytreatable;
dHeartwoodrefractorytotreatment;and
eHeartwoodveryrefractorytotreatment,penetrationofpreservativebeingpracticallynilevenfromtheends.

Databasedonstrengthpropertiesatthreeyearsofageoftree.

Classificationsbasedonseasoningbehavioroftimberandrefractorinessw.r.t.cracking,splittinganddryingrate.
AHighlyrefractory(slowanddifficultytoseasonfreefromsurfaceandendcracking);
BModeratelyrefractory(maybeseasonedfreefromsurfaceandendcrackingwithinreasonablyshortperiods,givenalittleprotectionagainstrapiddryingconditions);and
CNonrefractory(mayberapidlyseasonedfreefromsurfaceandendcrackingevenintheopenairandsun.Ifnotrapidlydried,theydevelopbluestainandmouldonthesurface.
Part6
StructuralDesign 6654
Table11.4.2PermissibleLateralStrengths(inDoubleShear)ofNails3.55mmDia,80mmLong
Sl
No.
SpeciesofWood ForPermanentConstruction
StrengthperNail
ForTemporary
StructuresStrength
perNail(forBoth
LengtheningJointsand
NodeJoints)Nx10
2

BotanicalName

Tradename

Lengthening
Joints
Nx10
2

NodeJoints
Nx10
2

1 2 3 4 5 6
Acacianilotica Babla 15 11 34
Aphenamixispolystachya Pitraj 19 9 19
Canarium strictum White dhup 9 8 10.5
Castanopsis hystrix Chestanut 18 10.5 23.5
Chukrasiatabularis Chickrassy 24 8 27
Dilleniapentagyne Dillenia 16.5 12 16
Dipterocarpus rnacrocarpus Hollong 17 7 20
Grewiaveslita Dhaman 13 5 24
Hopeaodorata Telsur 31.5 13 28.5
Lagerstrocmiaspp. Jarul 24.5 21.5 22.5
Maniltoa polyandra Ping 26 23.5 32
Mesua ferrea Mesua 26 8 41
Michelia excelsa Champ 13 9 20
Phoebe hainesiana Bonsum 12 6 13
Shorearobusta Sal 23 15.5 19.5
Syzygiumspp. Jam 15 12 25
Tectonagrandis Teak 14 8 13
Terminalia myriocarpa Hollock 13 10 19
Toonaciliata Toon 16 9 21
NOTES
1. Nailsof3.55mmdiameteraremostcommonlyused.Theabovevaluescanalsobeusedfor4mmdiameter100mmlong
nails.
2. ThevaluesinNareapproximateconvertedvaluesfromkgf.Forexactconversionthevalueis1kgf=9.80665N.
11.4.4.1 Tolerances
Permissibletolerancesinmeasurementsofcutsizesofstructuraltimbershallbeasfollows:
a)Forwidthandthickness:
1)Uptoandincluding100mm
0
3

+
mm
2)Above100mm
3
6

+
mm
b)Forlength
0
10

+
mm
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6655
11.4.5 GradingofStructuralTimber
11.4.5.1 Cutsizesofstructuraltimbershallbegraded,afterseasoning,intothreegradesbasedon
permissibledefectsgiveninTable11.4.8:
a) SelectGrade
b) GradeI
c) GradeII
Table11.4.3PermissibleLateralStrengths(inDoubleShear)ofNails5.00mmDia,125mmand150mmLong
SpeciesofWood ForPermanentConstruction
StrengthperNail
ForTemporaryStructures
StrengthperNail(for
BothLengtheningJoints
andNodeJoints)Nx10
2

BotanicalName Tradename Lengthening

Joints
Nx10
2

Node
Joints
Nx10
2

2 3 4 5 6
Acacianilotica Babla 27 13.5 53
Dalbergiasissoo Sissoo 17 15 43
Mesua ferrea Mesua 24 15.5 57.5
Michelia excelsa Champ 26 12.5 39
Phoebe hainesiana Bonsum 20 7.5 30
Shorearobusta Sal 19.5 17 37
Syzygiumspp. Jam 18 14.5 38.5
Tectonagrandis Teak 28 13 30
Terminalia myriocarpa Hollock 27.5 9 41
Table11.4.4PermissiblePercentageMoistureContentValues
Sl
No.
Use Zones(seeNote)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Structuralelements 12 14 17 20
ii) Doorsandwindows
50mmandaboveinthickness
Thinnerthan50mm

10
8

12
10

14
12

16
14
iii) Flooringstripsforgeneralpurposes 8 10 10 12
NOTEThecountryhasbeenbroadlydividedintothefollowingfourzonesbasedonthehumidityvariationsinthecountry:
ZoneIAverageannualrelativehumiditylessthan40percent.
ZoneIIAverageannualrelativehumidity40to50percent.
ZoneIIIAverageannualrelativehumidity50to67percent.
ZoneIVAverageannualrelativehumiditymorethan67percent.
Fordetailedzonalclassification,tolerances,etcreferencemaybemadetogoodpractice[63A(4)].

Part6
StructuralDesign

6656 Vol.2
11.4.6 SawnTimber
11.4.6.1 Sizes
PreferredcutsizesoftimberforuseinstructuralcomponentsshallbeasgiveninTables11.4.5to11.4.7.
Table11.4.5PreferredCutSizesofStructuralTimbersforRoofTrusses(Spanfrom3mto20m)
Thickness
mm
Width
mm
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
20 40 50 60 80 100 _ _ _
25 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 180
30 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 180
35 _ _ 60 80 100 120 160 180
40 _ _ 60 80 100 120 160 180
50 _ _ 60 80 100 120 160 180
60 _ _ _ 80 100 120 160 180
80 _ _ _ _ 100 120 160 180
NOTES
1 For truss spans marginally above 20 m, preferred cut sizes of structural timber may be allowed.
2 Preferred lengths of timhec 1, 1.5,2,2.5 and 3 m.
Table11.4.6PreferredCutSizesofStructuralTimberforRoofPurlins,Rafters,FloorBeams,Etc
Thickness
mm
Width
mm
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
50 80 100 120 140 _ _ _
60 80 100 120 140 160 _ _
80 _ 100 120 140 160 _ _
100 _ _ _ 140 160 180 200
NOTE Preferred lengths of timber: 1.5,2,2.5 and 3 m.
Table11.4.7PreferredCutSizesofStructuralTimbersforPartitionFramingandCovering,andforCentering
Thickness
mm
Width
mm
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 40 50 60 80 _ _ _ _ _
15 40 50 60 80 100 _ _ _ _
20 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 _
25 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 240
30 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 240
40 40 _ 60 80 100 120 160 200 240
50 _ 50 _ 80 100 120 160 200 240
60 _ _ 60 80 100 120 160 200 240
80 _ _ _ 80 100 120 160 200 240

Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6657
Table11.4.8PermissibleDefectsforCutSizesofTimberforStructuralUse
Sl
No.
Defects SelectGrade Grade I

Grade II
1 2 3
4 5
i) Wane

Shallbepermissibleatitsdeepest
portionuptoalimitof1/8ofthe
widthofthesurfaceonwhichit
occurs

Shallbepermissibleatitsdeepest
portionuptoalimitof1/6ofthe
widthofthesurfaceonwhichit
occurs

Shallbepermissibleatits
deepest
portionuptoalimitof1/4of
the
widthofthesurfaceon
whichit
occurs
ii) Wormholes

Otherthanthoseduetopowder
postbeetlesarepermissible

Otherthanthoseduetopowder
postbeetlesarepermissible

Otherthanthosedueto
powderpost
beetlesarepermissible
iii) Slopeofgrain

Shallnotbemorethan1in20

Shallnotbemorethan1in15

Shallnotbemorethan1in
12
iv) Live knots:
WidthofWide
Faces ofCut
Sizes
of Timber
Permissible Maximum Size of Live
Knot on
Permissible Maximum Size of
Live Knot on
Permissible Maximum Size
of Live Knot on
Max Narrowfaces
and
1/4ofthe
width
facecloseto
edgesofcut
size
oftimber
Remaining
centralhalfof
thewidthofthe
widefaces
Narrowfaces
and
1/4ofthe
width
facecloseto
edgesofcut
size
oftimber
Remaining
centralhalfof
thewidthofthe
widefaces
Narrow
facesand
1Aofthe
width
faceclose
to
edgesofcut
size
oftimber
Remaining
central
halfofthe
width
ofthewide
faces
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
75
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
10
13
19
22
25
27
29
32
33
35
36
38
10
13
19
25
29
38
41
44
47
50
52
53
19
25
38
44
50
54
57
63
66
69
72
75
19
25
38
50
57
75
81
87
93
100
103
106
29
38
57
66
66
81
87
96
99
105
108
114
30
39
57
75
87
114
123
132
141
150
156
159
v) Checksand
shakes:

Part6
StructuralDesign

6658 Vol.2
Widthofthe
Faceof
theTimber
Max
PermissibleDepth
Max

PermissibleDepth
Max

PermissibleDepth
Max

1 2 3 4
75
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
12
18
25
33
40
50
57
66
76
83
90
100
25
35
50
65
81
100
115
131
150
165
181
200
36
54
75
99
120
150
171
198
225
249
270
300
11.4.6.2 Theprohibiteddefectsgivenin4.6.2.1andpermissibledefectsgivenin4.6.2.2shallapplytostructural
timber.
11.4.6.2.1 Prohibiteddefects
Loosegrains,splits,compressionwoodinconiferousspecies,heartwoodrot,saprot,crookedness,wormholes
madebypowderpostbeetlesandpitchpocketsshallnotbepermittedinallthethreegrades.
11.4.6.2.2 DefectstotheextentspecifiedinTable11.4.8shallbepermissible.
NOTE Wanes are permitted provided they are not combined with knots and the reduction in strength on
accountofthewanesisnotmorethanthereductionwithmaximumallowableknots.
11.4.6.3 LocationofDefects
Theinfluenceofdefectsintimberisdifferentfordifferentlocationsinthestructuralelement.Therefore,these
should be placed during construction in such a way so that they do not have any adverse effect on the
members.
11.4.7 Suitability
11.4.7.1 SuitabilityinRespectofDurabilityandTreatabilityforPermanentStructures
Therearetwochoicesasgivenin11.4.7.1.1and11.4.7.1.2.
11.4.7.1.1 Firstchoice
Thespeciesshallbeanyoneofthefollowing:
a) Untreatedheartwoodofhighdurability.Heartwoodifcontainingmorethan15percentsap
wood,mayneedchemicaltreatmentforprotection;
b) Treatedheartwoodofmoderateandlowdurabilityandclassaandclassbtreatability;
c) Heartwoodofmoderatedurabilityandclassctreatabilityafterpressureimpregnation,and
d) Sapwoodofallclassesofdurabilityafterthoroughtreatmentwithpreservative.
11.4.7.1.2 Secondchoice
Thespeciesoftimbershallbeheartwoodofmoderatedurabilityandclassdtreatability.
11.4.7.2 Choiceofloadbetingtemporarystructuresorsemistructuralcomponentsatconstructionsite
a) Heartwoodoflowdurabilityandclassetreatability;or
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6659
b) Thespecieswhosedurabilityand/ortreatabilityareyettobeestablished,aslistedinTable
11.4.1.
11.4.8 Fastenings
All structural members shall be framed, anchored, tied and braced to develop the strength and rigidity
necessaryforthepurposesforwhichtheyareused.
Allowable stresses or loads on joints and fasteners shall be determined in accordance with recognized
principles.Commonmechanicalfasteningsareofbartypesuchasnailsandspikes,woodscrewsandbolts,and
timber connectors including metallic rings or wooden discdowels. Chemical fastenings include synthetic
adhesivesforstructuralapplications.
11.5 PERMISSIBLESTRESSES
11.5.1 ThepermissiblestressesforGroupsA,BandCfordifferentlocationsapplicabletoGradeIstructural
timbershallbeasgiveninTable11.5.1providedthatthefollowingconditionsaresatisfied:
a) Thetimbersshouldbeofhighormoderatedurabilityandbegiventhesuitabletreatment
wherenecessary.
b) Timberoflowdurabilityshallbeusedafterproperpreservativetreatmentand
c) Theloadsshouldbecontinuousandpermanentandnotofimpacttype.
Table11.5.1MinimumPermissibleStressLimits(N/mm2)inThreeGroupsofStructuralTimbers(forGradeI
Material)
Sl
No.
StrengthCharacter LocationofUse Group
A
Group
B
Group
C
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Bendingandtensionalonggrain Inside
1)
18.0 12.0 8.5
ii) Shear
2)

Horizontal
Alonggrain
Alllocations

Alllocations
1.05

15
0.64

0.91
0.49

0.70
iii) Compressionpe4rpendiculartograin Inside
1)
11.7 7.8 4.9
iv) Compressionperpendiculartograin Inside
1)
4.0 2.5 1.1
v) Modulusofelasticity(103N/mm
2
) Alllocationsand
grade
12.6 9.8 5.6
1) Forworkingstressesforotherlocationsofuse,thatis,outsideandwet,generallyfactorsof5/6and2/3areapplied.
2) Thevaluesofhorizontalsheartobeusedonlyforbeams.Inallothercasesshearalonggraintobeused.

11.5.2 Thepermissiblestresses(exceptingE)giveninTable11.5.1shallbemultipliedbythefollowing
factorstoobtainthepermissiblestressesforothergradesprovidedthattheconditionslaiddownin
5.2aresatisfied:
a) ForSelectGradeTimber1.16
b) ForGradeIITimber0.84
When low durability timbers are to be used [see 5.2(b)] on outside locations, the permissible stresses for all
gradesoftimber,arrivedatby5.2and5.3shallbemultipliedby0.80.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6660 Vol.2
11.5.3 ModificationFactorsforPermissibleStresses
11.5.3.1 DuetoChangeinSlopeofGrain
Whenthetimberhasnotbeengradedandhasmajordefectslikeslopeofgrain,knotsandchecksorshakesbut
not beyond permissible value, the permissible stress given in Table 11.4.1 shall be multiplied by modification
factorK1fordifferentslopesofgrainasgiveninTable11.5.2.
Table11.5.2ModificationsFactorK1toAllowforChangeinSlopeofGrain
slope

ModificationFactorK
1

StrengthofBeams,
JoistsandTies

Strengthof
PostsorColumns

1 2 3
1in10

0.80

0.74
1in12

0.90 0.82
1in14

0.98 0.8
1in15andfla~

1.00 1.00
NOTEForintermediaryslopesofgrains,valuesofmodificationfactormaybeobtainedbyinterpolation.

11.5.3.2 DuetoDurationofLoad
For different durations of design load, the permissible stresses given in Table 1 shall be multiplied by the
modificationfactorK
2
giveninTable11.5.3.
Table11.5.3ModificationsFactorK
2
,forChangeinDuratiouofLoading

DurationofLoading

ModificationFactorK
2

1 2
Continuous(Normal) 1.0
Twomonths 1.15
Sevendays 1.25
Windandearthquake 1.33
Instantaneousorimpact 2.00
NOTEThestrengthpropertiesoftimberunderloadaretimedependent.
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6661
11.5.3.2.1 The factor K2 is applicable to modulus of elasticity when used to design timber columns,
otherwisetheydonotapplythereto.
11.5.3.2.2 If there are several duration of loads (in addition to the continuous) to be considered, the
modification factor shall be based on the shortest duration load in the combination, that is, the
one yielding the largest increase in the permissible stresses, provided the designed section is
foundadequateforacombinationofotherlargerdurationloads.
[Explanation: In any structural timber design for dead loads, snow loads and wind or earthquake
forces, members may be designed on the basis of total of stresses due to dead, snow and wind
loadsusingK
2
=1.33,factorforthepermissiblestress(ofTable11.4.1)toaccommodatethewind
load, that is, the shortest of duration and giving the largest increase in the permissible stresses.
The section thus found is checked to meet the requirements based on dead loads alone with
modificationK
2
=1.00].
11.5.3.2.3 ModificationfactorK2shallalsobeappliedtoallowableloadsformechanicalfastenersindesign
ofjoints,whenthewoodandnotthestrengthofmetaldeterminetheloadcapacity.
11.6 DESIGNCONSIDERATIONS
11.6.1 Allstructuralmembers,assembliesorframeworkinabuilding,incombinationwiththefloors,wallsand
otherstructuralpartsofthebuildingshallbecapableofsustaining,withduestabilityandstiffnessthe
wholedeadandimposedloadingsasperPart6StructuralDesign,Section1Loads,ForcesandEffects,
withoutexceedingthelimitsofrelevantstressesspecifiedinthisSection.
11.6.2 Buildings shall be designed for all dead and imposed loads or forces assumed to come upon them
duringconstructionoruse,includingupliftsorhorizontalforcesfromwindandforcesfromearthquakes
orotherloadings.Structuralmembersandtheirconnectionsshallbeproportionedtoprovideasound
and stable structure with adequate strength and stiffness. Wooden components in construction
generally include panels for sheathing and diaphragms, siding, beams, girder, columns, light framings,
masonry wall and joist construction, heavyframes, glued laminated structural members, structural
sandwiches,prefabricatedpanels,lamellaarches,portalframesandotherauxiliaryconstructions.
11.6.3 NetSection
11.6.3.1 Thenetsectionisobtainedbydeductingfromthegrosssectionalareaoftimbertheprojectedareaof
allmaterialremovedbyboring,groovingorothermeansatcriticalplane.Incaseofnailing,theareaof
thepreboredholeshallnotbetakenintoaccountforthispurpose.
11.6.3.2 The net section used in calculating load carrying capacity of a member shall be at least net section
determined as above by passing a plane or a series of connected planes transversely through the
members.
11.6.3.3 Notchesshallbeinnocaseremovemorethanonequarterofthesection.
11.6.3.4 In the design of an intermediate or a long column, gross section shall be used in calculating load
carryingcapacityofthecolumn.
11.6.4 Loads
11.6.4.1 The loads shall conform to those given in Part 6 Structural Design, Chapter 2 Loads onBuildings and
Structures.
11.6.4.2 Theworstcombinationandlocationofloadsshallbeconsideredfordesign.Windandseismicforces
shallnotbeconsideredtoactsimultaneously.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6662 Vol.2
11.6.5 FlexuralMembers
11.6.5.1 Suchstructuralmembersshallbeinvestigatedforthefollowing:
a) Bendingstrength,
b) Maximumhorizontalshear,
c) Stressatthebearings,and
d) Deflection.
11.6.5.2 EffectiveSpan
The effective span of beams and other flexural members shall be taken as the distance from face of supports
plusonehalfoftherequiredlengthofbearingateachendexceptthatforcontinuousbeamsandjoiststhespan
maybemeasuredfromcentreofbearingatthosesupportsoverwhichthebeamiscontinuous.
11.6.5.3 Usualformulaforflexuralstrengthshallapplyindesign:
b ab
f
Z
M
f

11.6.5.4 FormFactorsforFlexuralMembers
Thefollowingformfactorsshallbeappliedtothebendingstress:
a) RectangularSectionForrectangularsections,fordifferentdepthsofbeams,theformfactor
K
3
shallbetakenas:

+
+
=
55000
89400
81 . 0
2
2
3
D
D
K

NOTEFormfactor(K
3
)shallnotbeappliedforbeamshavingdepthlessthanorequalto300mm.
b) BoxBeamsandIBeamsForboxbeamsandIbeams,theformfactorKAobtainedbyusing
theformula:

+
+
+ =
55000
1 89400
8 . 0 8 . 0
2
2
4
D
D
y K

where
1 1
2
1 1
2
1
) 1 )( 3 8 6 ( q q p p p y + + + =

c) SolidCircularCrossSectionsForsolidcircularcrosssectionstheformfactorKSshallbetaken
as1.18.
d) SquareCrossSectionsForsquarecrosssectionswheretheloadisinthedirectionof
diagonal,theformfactorKGshallbetakenas1.414.
11.6.5.5 Width
The minimum width of the beam or any flexural member shall not be less than 50 mm or 1/50 of the span,
whicheverisgreater.
11.6.5.6 Depth
Thedepthofbeamoranyflexuralmembershallnotbetakenmorethanthreetimesofitswidthwithoutlateral
stiffening.
11.6.5.6.1 Stiffening
Allflexuralmembershavingadepthexceedingthreetimesitswidthoraspanexceeding50timesitswidthor
both shall be laterally restrained from twisting or buckling and the distance between such restraints shall not
exceed50timesitswidth.
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6663
11.6.5.7 Shear
11.6.5.7.1 Thefollowingformulaeshallapply:
a) Themaximumhorizontalshear,whentheloadonabeammovesfromthesupporttowardsthe
centreofthespan,andtheloadisatadistanceofthreetofourtimesthedepthofthebeam
fromthesupport,shallbecalculatedfromthefollowinggeneralformula:
Ib
VQ
H =

b) Forrectangularbeams:
bD
V
H
2
3
=

c) Fornotchedbeams,withtensionnotchatsupports:
2
1
2
3
bD
VD
H =

d) Fornotchedatupper(compression)face,wheree>D:
1
2
3
bD
V
H =

e) Fornotchedatupper(compression)face,wheree<D

=
e
D
D
D b
V
H
2
2
3

11.6.5.7.2 Forconcentratedloads:

[ ]
2
2
) / ( 2 9
) / )( ( 10
D x I
D x x I C
V
+

andforuniformlydistributedloads,
D
1
D
(BOTTM SIDE NOTCHED)
SQUARE NOTCH
D
D
D
e
(UPPER SIDE NOTCHED)
SPLAYED NOTCH
2
1
Part6
StructuralDesign

6664 Vol.2

=
I
D W
V
2
1
2

AfterarrivingatthevalueofV,itsvaluewillbesubstitutedintheformula:

Ib
VQ
H =

11.6.5.7.3 Indeterminingtheverticalreactionfollowingdeductionsinloadsmaybemade:
a) Considerationshallbegiventothepossibledistributionofloadtoadjacentparallelbeams,if
any;
b) Alluniformlydistributedloadswithinadistanceequaltothedepthofthebeamfromtheedge
oftheearnestsupportmaybeneglectedexceptincaseofbeamhangingdownwardsfroma
particularsupport,and
c) Allconcentratedloadsinthevicinityofthesupportsmaybereducedbythereductionfactor
applicableaccordingtoTable11.6.1.
Table11.6.1ReductionFactorforConcentratedLoadsintheVicinityofSupports
DistanceofLoadfrom
theNearestSupport
LSDorLess 2D 2.5D 3DorMore
1 2 3 4 5
Reductionfactor 0.6 0.4 0.2 NoReduction
NOTEForintermediatedistances,factormaybeobtainedbylinearinterpolation.
11.6.5.7.4 Unless the local stress is calculated and found to be within the permissible stress, flexural
membershallnotbecut,notchedorboredexceptasfollows:
a)Notchesmaybecutinthetoporbottomneitherdeeperthanonefifthofthedepthofthebeamnorfarther
fromtheedgeofthesupportthanonesixthofthespan;
b)Holesnotlargerindiameterthanonequarterofthedepthmaybeboredinthemiddlethirdofthedepthand
length;and
c)Ifholesornotchesoccuratadistancegreaterthanthreetimesthedepthofthememberfromtheedgeofthe
nearestsupport,thenetremainingdepthshallbeusedindeterminingthebendingstrength.

Fig.11.6.1NotchedBeams
11.6.5.8 Bearing
11.6.5.8.1 The ends of flexural membersshall be supported in recesses which provide adequate ventilation
to prevent dry rot and shall not be enclosed. Flexural members except roof timbers which are
supporteddirectlyonmasonryorconcreteshallhavealengthofbearingofnotlessthan75mm.
Memberssupportedoncorbels,offsetsandrooftimbersonawallshallbearimmediatelyonand
befixedtowallplatenotlessthan75mmx40mm.
11.6.5.8.2 Timber joists or floor planks shall not be supported on the top flange of steel beams unless the
bearingstress,calculatedonthenetbearingasshapedtofitthebeam,islessthanthepermissible
compressivestressperpendiculartothegrain.
NOTCHED AT MIDDLE
Net
Depth
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6665
11.6.5.8.3 Bearingstress
Lengthandpositionofbearing
a) Atanybearingonthesidegrainoftimber,thepermissiblestressincompressionperpendicular
tothegrain,f
cn
,isdependentonthelengthandpositionofthebearing.
b) ThepermissiblestressesgiveninTable11.4.1forcompressionperpendiculartothegrainare
alsothepermissiblestressesforanylengthattheendsofamemberandforbearings150mm
ormoreinlengthatanyotherposition.
c) Forbearingslessthan150mminlengthlocated75mmormorefromtheendofamemberas
showninFig.11.6.2,thepermissiblestressmaybemultipliedbythemodificationfactorK
7

giveninTable11.6.2.
d) Noallowanceneedbemadeforthedifferenceinintensityofthebearingstressduetobending
ofabeam.
e) Thebearingareashouldbecalculatedasthenetareaafterallowancefortheamountofwane.
f) Forbearingsstressunderawasherorasmallplate,thesamecoefficientspecifiedinTable
11.6.2maybetakenforabearingwithalengthequaltothediameterofthewasherorthe
widthofthesmallplate.
g) Whenthedirectionofstressisatangletothedirectionofthegraininanystructuralmember,
thenthepermissiblebearingstressinthatmembershallbecalculatedbythefollowing
formula:

2 2
cos sin
cn cp
cn cp
c
f f
f f
f
+

Table11.6.2:ModificationfactorK
7
forbearingstresses
Lengthofbearinginmm
15 25 40 50 75 100 150ormore
ModificationfactorK
7
1.67 1.40 1.25 1.20 1.13 1.10 1.00

Fig.11.6.2PositionOfEndBearings
11.6.5.9 Deflection
The deflection in the case ofall flexural members supporting brittle materials like gypsum ceilings, slates, tiles
and asbestos sheets shall not exceed 1/360 of the span. The deflection in the case of other flexural members
shallnotexceed1/240ofthespanand1/150ofthefreelyhanginglengthinthecaseofcantilevers.
11.6.5.9.1
Usualformulafordeflectionshallapply:
EI
KWL
3
=
(ignoringdeflectionduetoshearstrain)
75mm
min
150 mm max
Bearing
Part6
StructuralDesign

6666 Vol.2
Kvalues= 1/3forcantileverswithloadatfreeend,
1/8forcantileverswithuniformlydistributedload,
1/48forbeamssupportedatbothendswithpointloadatcentre,and
5/384forbeamssupportedatbothendswithuniformlydistributedload.
11.6.5.9.2 InordertoallowtheeffectoflongdurationloadingonE,forcheckingdeflectionincaseofbeams
andjoiststheeffectiveloadsshallbetwicethedeadloadiftimberisinitiallydry.
11.6.5.9.3 Selfweightofbeamshallbeconsideredindesign.
11.6.6 Columns
NOTETheformulaegivenareforcolumnswithpinendconditionsandthelengthshallbemodifiedsuitably
withotherendconditions.
11.6.6.1 SolidColumns
Solid columns shall be classified into short, intermediate and long columns depending upon their slenderness
ratio(S/d)asfollows:

a) ShortcolumnswhereS/ddoesnotexceed11.
b) IntermediatecolumnswhereS/disbetween11andK
g
,and
c) LongcolumnswhereS/disgreaterthanK
g
.
11.6.6.1.1 Forshortcolumns,thepermissiblecompressivestressshallbecalculatedasfollows:

cp c
f f =

11.6.6.1.2 Forintermediatecolumns,thepermissiblecompressivestressiscalculatedbyusingthefollowing
formula:

=
4
3
1
1
d K
S
f f
g
cp c

11.6.6.1.3 For long columns, the permissible compressive stress shall be calculated by using the following
formula:
2
) / (
329 . 0
d S
E
f
c
=

11.6.6.1.4 Incaseofsolidcolumnsoftimber,S/dratioshallnotexceed50.
11.6.6.1.5 The permissible load on a column of circular crosssection shall not exceed that permitted for a
squarecolumnofanequivalentcrosssectionalarea.
11.6.6.1.6 FordeterminingS/dratioofataperedcolumn,itsleastdimensionshallbetakenasthesumofthe
corresponding least dimensions at the small end of the column and onethird of the difference
betweenthisleastdimensionatthesmallendandthecorrespondingleastdimensionatthelarge
end,butinnocaseshalltheleastdimensionforthecolumnbetakenasmorethanoneandahalf
times the least dimension at the small end. The induced stress at the small end of the tapered
columnshallnotexceedthepermissiblecompressivestressinthedirectionofgrain.
11.6.6.2 BuiltupColumns
11.6.6.2.1 Boxcolumn
Boxcolumnsshallbeclassifiedintoshort,intermediateandlongcolumnsasfollows:
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6667
a) Shortcolumnswhere
2
2
2
1
d d
S
+
islessthan8;
b) Intermediatecolumnswhere
2
2
2
1
d d
S
+
isbetween8andK
9
;and
c) Longcolumnswhere
2
2
2
1
d d
S
+
isgreaterthanK
9
.
11.6.6.2.2 Forshortcolumns,thepermissiblecompressivestressshallbecalculatedasfollows:
cp c
qf f =

11.6.6.2.3 For intermediate columns, the permissible compressive stress shall be obtained using the
followingformula

+
=
4
2
1
2
1
3
1
1
d d
S
qf f
cp c

11.6.6.2.4 For long columns, the permissible compressive stress shall be calculated by using the following
formula:

2
2
2
2
1
329 . 0

+
=
d d
S
UE
f
c

11.6.6.2.5 The followingvalues of U and q, depending uponplank thickness (t)in 11.6.6.2.3and 11.6.6.2.4,
shallbeused:
t(mm) U q
25 0.80 1.00
30 0.60 1.00
11.6.6.3 SpacedColumns
11.6.6.3.1 The formulae for solid columns as specified in 6.6.1 are applicable to spaced columns with a
restraintfactorof2.5or3,dependingupondistancesofendconnectorsinthecolumn.
NOTEArestrainedfactorof2.5forlocationofcentroidgroupoffastenersatS/20fromendand
3forlocationatS/10toS/20fromendshallbetaken.
11.6.6.3.2 Forintermediatespacedcolumn,thepermissiblecompressivestressshallbe:

=
4
10
3
1
1
d k
S
f f
cp c

11.6.6.3.3 Forlongspacedcolumns,theformulashallbe:

2
) / (
5 . 2 329 . 0
d S
E
f
c

Part6
StructuralDesign

6668 Vol.2
11.6.6.3.4 Forindividualmembersofspacedcolumns,S/dratioshallnotexceed80.
11.6.6.4 Compression members shall not be notched. When it is necessary to pass services through such a
member, this shall be effected by means of a bored hole provided that the local stress is calculated
andfoundtobewithinthepermissiblestressspecified.Thedistancefromtheedgeoftheholetothe
edgeofthemembershallnotbelessthanonequarterofwidthoftheface.
11.6.7 StructuralMembersSubjecttoBendingandAxialStresses
11.6.7.1 Structural members subjected both to bending and axial compression shall be designed to comply
withthefollowingformula:

b
ab
c
ac
f
f
f
f
+

11.6.7.2 Structuralmemberssubjectedbothtobendingandaxialtensionshallbedesignedtocomplywiththe
followingformula:
b
ab
t
at
f
f
f
f
+

11.7 DESIGNOFCOMMONSTEELWIRENAILJOINTS
11.7.1 General
Nailjointedtimberconstructionissuitableforlightandmediumtimberframings(trusses,etc)upto15mspans.
With the facilities of readily available materials and simpler workmanship in monochord and split chord
constructions,thistypeoffabricationhasalargescope.
11.7.2 DimensionsofMembers
11.7.2.1 Thedimensionofartindividualpieceoftimber(thatis,anysinglemember)shallbewithintherange
givenbelow:
a) Theminimumthicknessofthemainmembersinmonochordconstructionshallbe30mm.
b) Theminimumthicknessofanindividualpieceofmembersinsplitchordconstructionshall
c) Thespacebetweentwoadjacentpiecesoftimbershallberestrictedtoamaximumof3times
thethicknessoftheindividualpieceoftimberofthechordmember.Incaseofwebmembers,
itmaybegreaterforjoiningfacilities.
11.7.3 No lengthening joint shall preferably be located at a panel point. Generally not more than two, but
preferablyone,lengtheningjointshallbepermittedbetweenthetwopanelpointsofthemembers.
11.7.4 SpecificationandDiameterofNails
11.7.4.1 ThenailsusedfortimberjointsshallconformtoPart5BuildingMaterials.Thenailsshallbediamond
pointed.
11.7.4.2 The diameter of nail shall be within the limits of oneeleventh to onesixth of the least thickness of
membersbeingconnected.
11.7.4.3 Wherethenailsareexposedtobesalineconditions,commonwirenailsshallbegalvanized.
11.7.5 ArrangementofNailsintheJoints
The end distances, edge distances and spacings of nails in a nailed joint should be such as to avoid undue
splittingofthewoodandshallnotbelessthanthosegivenin11.7.5.1and11.7.5.2.
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6669
11.7.5.1 LengtheningJoints
Therequirementofspacingofnailsinalengtheningjointshallbeasfollows(seealsoFig.11.7.1):
Sl.
No.
SpacingofNails TypeofStressinthe
Joint
Requirement
Min
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Enddistance Tension 12n
Compression 10n
ii) Indirectionofgrain Tension 10n
Compression 5n
iii) Edgedistance 5n
iv) Betweenrowofnails
perpendiculartothegrain
5n
Notes:
1. nisshankdiameterofnails
2. The5ndistancebetweentherowsofnailsperpendiculartothegrainmay
beincreasedsubjecttotheavailabilityofwidthofthememberkeeping
edgedistanceconstant.

11.7.5.2 NodeJoints
TherequirementforspacingofnailsinnodejointsshallbeasspecifiedinFig.11.7.2wherethemembersareat
right angle and as in Fig. 11.7.3 where the members are inclined to one another at angles other than 90 and
subjectedtoeitherpurecompressionorpuretension.
11.7.6 PenetrationofNails
11.7.6.1 For a lap joint when the nails are driven from the side of the thinner member, the length of
penetrationofnailsinthethickermembershallbeoneandahalftimesthethicknessofthethinner
membersubjecttomaximumofthethicknessofthethickermember.
11.7.6.2 Forbuttjointsthenailsshallbedriventhroughtheentirethicknessofthejoint.
11.7.7 DesignConsiderations
11.7.7.1 Whereanumberofnailsareusedinajoint,theallowableloadinlateralresistanceshallbethesumof
theallowableloadsfortheindividualnails,providedthatthecentroidofthegroupofthesenailslies
ontheaxisofthememberandthespacingsconformto7.5.Wherealargenumberofnailsaretobe
providedatajoint,theyshouldbesoarrangedthattherearemoreofrowsratherthanmorenumber
ofnailsinarow.
11.7.7.2 Nailsshall,asfaraspracticable,bearrangedsothatthelineofforceinamemberpassesthroughthe
centroid of the group of nails. Where this is not practicable, allowance shall be made for any
eccentricity in computing the maximum load on the fixing nails as well as the loads and bending
momentinthemember.
11.7.7.3 Adjacentnailsshallpreferablybedrivenfromoppositefaces,thatis,thenailsaredrivenalternatively
fromeitherfaceofjoint.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6670 Vol.2
Effective end
Distance, 10n min
5n
10n
5n
10n
5n
5n
5n
5n
5n min
5n min
5n min
12n min
10n 12n 10n
12n min
Effective end
Distance, 5n min
n = SHANK DIAMETER OF NAIL
2B MONOCHORD TYPE BUTT JOINT SUBJECT TO TENSION
2A MONOCHORD TYPE BUTT JOINT SUBJECT TO COMPRESSION
11.7.7.4 Forarigidjoint,aminimumof2nailsfornodaljointsand4nailsforlengtheningjointshallbedriven.
11.7.7.5 Twonailsinahorizontalrowarebetterthanusingthesamenumberofnailsinaverticalrow.
11.7.8 SpecialConsiderationinNailJointedTrussConstruction
11.7.8.1 The initial upward camber provided at the centre of the lower chord of nailjointed timber trusses
shall be not less than 1/200 of the effective span for timber structures using seasoned wood and
1/100forunseasonedorpartiallyseasonedwood.
11.7.8.2 Thetotalcombinedthicknessofthegussetorspliceplatesoneithersideofthejointinamonochord
type construction shall not be less than one and a half times the thickness of the main members
subjecttoaminimumthicknessof25mmofindividualgussetplate.

Fig.11.7.1SpacingofNailsInALenghtheningJointContinued
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6671

Fig.11.7.1SpacingofNailsInALenghtheningJoint

Effective end
Distance, 10n min
5n 10n
5n
10n min
5n min
5n min
2C SPLIT - CHORD TYPE BUTT JOINT SUBJECT TO COMPRESSION
5n min
5n min
5n min
5n min
5n min
5n min
5n min
10n min
12n min 10n min
Effective end
Distance, 5n min
Effective end
Distance, 12n min
Effective end
Distance, 5n min
n = SHANK DIAMETER OF NAIL
2C SPLIT - CHORD TYPE BUTT JOINT SUBJECT TO TENSION
12n min
Part6
StructuralDesign

6672 Vol.2

Fig.11.7.2SpacingOfNailsWhereMembersAreAtRightAnglesToOneAnother

5n
5n
5n
10n
5n min
10n
5n
5n
5n
5n min
5n
Unloaded
Edge
Loaded
Edge
3A 3B
10n
5n
5n
10n
5n min
n = SHANK DIAMETER OF NAIL
*5n MAY BE INCREASED TO 10n, IF THE DESIGNED WIDTH OF
CORD MEMBER PERMITS. OTHERWISE THE END OF THE LOADED
WEB MEMBER MAY BE EXTENDED BY 5n min
3C
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6673

Fig.11.7.3SpacingOfNailsAtNodeWhereMembersAreInclinedToOneAnother

10
n
5
n
1
0n
5
n
5
n
1
0n
1
0n
5n 5n 5n 5n
5n
10n
10n
5n
5n
Timber fish
Plate
Bottom
Chord
Web
Members
*5n MAY BE INCREASED TO 10n, IF THE DESIGNED WIDTH OF CHORD MEMBER PERMITS.
OTHERWISE THE END OF THE LOADED WEB MEMBER MAY BE EXTENDED BY 5n min
4C
n = SHANK DIAMETER OF NAIL
1
0
n
5
n
5
n
5
n
5n
Unloaded
Edge
Loaded
Edge
4A
1
0n
5n
5
n
5n
5n
Loaded
Edge
Uploaded
Edge
4B
*
5
n
Part6
StructuralDesign

6674 Vol.2
11.7.8.3 Thetotalcombinedthicknessofallspacerblocksorplatesorbothincludingouterspliceplates,atany
jointinasplitchordtypeconstructionshallnotbelessthanoneandahalftimesthetotalthicknessof
allthemainmembersatthatjoint.
11.8 DESIGNOFNAILLAMINATEDTIMBERBEAMS
11.8.1 MethodofArrangement
11.8.1.1 The beam is made up of 20 mm to 30 mm thick planks placed vertically with joints staggered in the
adjoiningplankswithaminimumdistanceof300mm.Theplanksarelaminatedwiththehelpofwire
nails at regular intervals to take up horizontal shear developed in the beam besides keeping the
planksinposition(seeFig.11.8.1).
11.8.1.2 The advantage in laminations lies in dimensional stability, dispersal of defects and better structural
performance.
11.8.2 SizesofPlanksandBeams
11.8.2.1 Theplankthicknessforfabricationofnailedlaminatedbeamsrecommendedare20,25and30mm.
11.8.2.2 Incaseofnailedlaminatedtimberbeamthemaximumdepthandlengthofplanksshallbelimitedto
250mmand2000mm,respectively.
11.8.2.3 Inordertoobtaintheoverallwidthofthebeam,thenumberandthicknessofplankstoformvertical
nailedlaminatedbeams,andalsotypeandsizeofwirenailshallbeasmentionedinTable10.8.1.The
protrudingportionofthenailshallbecutofforclenchedacrossthegrains.
11.8.3 DesignConsiderations
11.8.3.1 Naillaminatedbeamsshallbedesignedinaccordancewith11.6.
Table10.8.1:Numberandsizeofplanksandnailsfornailedlaminatedbeams
Sl.
No.
OverallWidth
ofBeam
(mm)
No.of
Planks
Thicknessof
eachPlank
(mm)
No.andSizeof
Nailtobeused
(mm)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 50 2 25 80long3.55dia
ii) 60 3 20 do
iii) 70 3 (2x25)
(1x20)
do
iv) 80 4 20 100long4.0dia
v) 90 3 30 do
vi) 100 4 25 125long5.0dia
vii) 110 4 (3x30)
(1x20)
do
viii) 120 4 30 do
ix) 150 5 30 150long5.0dia
Notes:Anumberofcombinationsofdifferentthicknessofplanksmaybe
adoptedaslongastheminimumandmaximumthicknessoftheplanksare
adheredto.
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2011 6675
11.8.3.1.1 The deflection in the case of nailed laminated timber beams, joists, purlins, battens and other
flexuralmemberssupportingbrittlematerialslikegypsum,ceilingslates,tilesandasbestossheets
shall not exceed 1/480 of the span. The deflection in case of other flexural members shall not
exceed1/360ofthespaninthecaseofbeamsandjoists,and1/225ofthefreelyhanginglengthin
caseofcantilevers.
11.8.3.2 Permissible lateral strength of mildsteelwire nailsshall be asgivenin Table 11.4.2 and Table 11.4.3
forIndianSpeciesoftimber,whichshallapplytonailsthathavetheirpointscutflushwiththefaces.
Fornailsclenchedacrossthegrainsthestrengthmaybeincreasedby20percentoverthevaluesfor
nailswithpointscutflush.
11.8.3.3 ArrangementofNails
11.8.3.3.1 Aminimumnumberoffournailsinaverticalrowatregularintervalnotexceeding75mmtotake
up horizontalshear as wellas to keep the planks in position shall be used.Near the joints of the
planksthisdistancemay,however,belimitedto5cminsteadof75mm.
11.8.3.3.2 Shearshallbecalculatedatvariouspointsofthebeamand[henumberofnailsrequiredshallbe
accommodatedwithinthedistanceequaltothedepthofthebeam,withaminimumof4nailsina
rowatastandardspacingasshowninFig.11.8.2.
11.8.3.3.3 Ifthedepthofthebeamismore,thentheverticalintermediatespacingofnailsmaybeincreased
proportionately.
11.8.3.3.4 If the nails required at a point are more than that can be accommodated in a row, then these
shall he provided lengthwise of the beam within the distance equal to the depth of the beam at
standardlengthwisespacing.
11.8.3.3.5 Fornailedlaminatedbeamminimumdepthof100mmfor3.55mmand4mmdiameternails,and
125mmfor5mmdiameternailsshallbeprovided.
11.9 DESIGNOFBOLTEDCONSTRUCTIONJOINTS
11.9.1 General
Boltedjointssuittherequirementsofprefabricationinsmallandmediumspantimberstructuresforspeedand
economy in construction. Bolt jointed construction units offer better facilities as regards to workshop ease,
massproductionofcomponents,transportconvenienceandreassemblyatsiteofworkparticularlyindefence
sectorforhighaltitudesandfaroffsituations.
Designingismainlyinfluencedbythespecies,sizeofbolts,moistureconditionsandtheinclinationofloadingsto
thegrains.Inprincipleboltedjointsfollowthepatternofrivettedjointsinsteelstructures.
11.9.2 DesignConsiderations
11.9.2.1 Boltedtimberconstructionshallbedesignedinaccordancewith6.Theconceptofcriticalsection,that
is, the net section obtained by deducting the projected area of boltholes from the crosssectional
areaofmemberisveryimportantforthesuccessfuldesignandeconomyintimber.
11.9.2.2 BoltBearingStrengthofWood
The allowable loadfor a boltin a joint consisting of two members (single shear) shall betakenas onehalf the
allowableloadscalculatedforathreememberjoint(doubleshear)forthesamet/d3ratio.Thepercentageof
safe working compressive stress of timber on bolted joints for different t/d3 ratios shall be as given in Table
11.9.1.

Part6
StructuralDesign

6676 Vol.2

Fig.11.8.1PlanAndElevationOfATypicalNailedLaminatedTimberBeam
1
0
0
4000
1600
1200
800
400
1600
1600
1600
1600
1600
1600
1200
800
400
4 @ 75mm = 300mm
25mm THICK TIMBER PLANKS
25
175
25
50
25 CAMBER
All dimensions in millimetres.
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6677

FIG.11.8.2StandardLengthwiseSpacingInNailedLaminatedBeam
11.9.2.2.1
Whereanumberofboltsareusedinajoint,theallowableloadsshallbethesumoftheallowableloadsforthe
individualbolts.
11.9.2.2.2
he factors for different bolt diameter used in calculating safe bearing stress perpendicular to grain in the joint
shallbeasgiveninTable11.9.2.
11.9.2.3 DimensionsofMembers
a) Theminimumthicknessofthemainmemberinmonochordconstructionshallbe40mm.
b) Theminimumthicknessofsidemembersshallbe20mmandshallbehalfthethicknessofmain
members.
c) Theminimumindividualthicknessofspacedmemberinsplitchordconstructionshallbe20mm
and25mmforwebsandchordmembersrespectively.
11.9.2.4 BoltsandBolting
a) Thediameterofboltinthemainmembershallbesochosentogivelargerslenderness(t/d3)
ratioofbolt.
b) Thereshallbemorenumberofsmalldiameterboltsratherthansmallnumberoflargediameter
boltsinajoint.
c) Aminimumoftwoboltsfornodaljointsandfourboltsforlengtheningjointsshallbeprovided.
d) Thereshallbemorenumberofrowsratherthanmoreboltsinarow.
e) Theboltholesshallbeofsuchdiameterthattheboltcanbedriveneasily.
f) Washersshallbeusedbetweentheheadofboltandwoodsurfaceasalsobetweenthenutand
wood.
11.9.3 ArrangementofBolts
11.9.3.1 Thefollowingspacinginboltedjointsshallbefollowed(seeFig.11.9.1):
75 75 50
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
1
0
0
6A FOR 3.55 mm AND 4 mm DIAMETER NAILS
75 75 50
2
5
2
5
2
5
2
5
2
5
1
2
5
6B FOR 5 mm DIAMETER NAILS
All dimensions in millimetres.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6678 Vol.2
a) SpacingofBoltsinaRowForparallelandperpendiculartograinloading=4d3

b) SpacingBetweenRowsofBolts
Table11.9.1:Percentageofsafeworkingcompressivestressoftimberforboltedjointsindoubleshear
t
/
/d
3
ratio StressPercentage
Parallelto
Grain
Perpendicularto
Grain

1

2

(1) (2) (3)

1.0 100 100
1.5 100 96
2.0 100 88
2.5 100 80
3.0 100 72
3.5 100 66
4.0 96 60
4.5 90 56
5.0 80 52
5.5 72 49
6.0 65 46
6.5 58 43
7.0 52 40
7.5 46 39
8.0 40 38
8.5 36 36
9.0 34 34
9.5 32 33
10.0 30 31
10.5 31
11.0 30
11.5 30
12.0 28
1) Forperpendiculartograinloading2.5d3,to5d3(2.5d3,fort/d3,ratioof2and5d3fort/d3ratioof6or
more.Forratiosbetween2to6thespacingshallbeobtainedbyinterpolation.

2) For parallel to grain loading At least (N 4) d3, with a minimum of 2.5 d3. Also governed by net area at
criticalsectionwhichshouldbe80percentofthetotalareainbearingunderallbolts.

c) EndDistance7d3forsoftwoodsintension,5d3forhardwoodsintensionand4d3forall
speciesincompression.

d) EdgeDistance
1) Forparalleltograinloading1.5d3orhalfthedistancebetweenrowsofbolts,whicheverisgreater.
2) Forperpendiculartograinloading,(loadededgedistance)shallbeatleast4d3.
11.9.3.2 Forinclinedmembers,thespacinggivenaboveforperpendicularandparalleltograinofwoodmaybe
usedasaguideandboltsarrangedatthejointwithrespecttoloadingdirection.
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6679
11.9.3.3 Theboltsshallbearrangedinsuchamannersoastopassthecentreofresistanceofboltsthroughthe
intersectionofthegravityaxisofthemembers.
11.9.3.4 Staggering of bolts shall be avoided as far as possible in case of members loaded parallel to grain of
wood.Forloadsactingperpendiculartograinofwood,staggeringispreferabletoavoidsplittingdueto
weathereffects.
Table11.9.2:Boltdiameterfactor
Sl.No. DiameterofBolt
(mm)
DiameterFactor
(d
r
)
(1) (2) (3)
i) 6 5.70
ii) 10 3.60
iii) 12 3.35
iv) 16 3.15
v) 20 3.05
vi) 22 3.00
vii) 25 2.90
11.9.3.5 Bolting
Theboltholesshallbeboredordrilledperpendiculartothesurfaceinvolved.Forcibledrivingoftheboltsshallbe
avoidedwhichmaycausecrackingorsplittingofmembers.Aboltholeof1.0mmoversizemaybeusedasaguide
forpreboring.
11.9.3.5.1 Boltsshallbetightenedafteroneyearofcompletionofstructureandsubsequentlyatanintervalof
twotothreeyears.
11.9.4 OutlineforDesignofBoltedJoints
Allowable load on one bolt (unit bearing stress) in a joint with wooden splice plates shall not be greater than
valueofP,R,Fasdeterminedbyoneofthefollowingequations:
a) ForLoadsParalleltoGrain

1
a f P
cp
=

b) ForLoadsPerpendiculartoGrain

f cp
d a f R
2
=

c) ForLoadsatanAngletoGrain

2 2
cos sin R P
PR
F
+
=

11.10 DESIGNOFTIMBERCONNECTORJOINTS
11.10.1
Inlargespanstructures,themembershavetotransmitveryheavystressesrequiringstrongerjointingtechniques
with metallic rings or wooden discdowels. Improvised metallic ring connector is a split circular band of steel
madefrommildsteelpipes.Thisisplacedinthegroovescutintothecontactfacesofthetimbermemberstobe
joined,theassemblybeingheldtogetherbymeansofaconnectingbolt.
11.10.1.1 Dimensions of Members Variation of thickness of central (main) and side members affect the load
carryingcapacityofthejoint.

Part6
StructuralDesign

6680 Vol.2

Fig.11.9.1TypicalSpacingOfBoltsInStructuralJoints
Thethicknessofmainmembershallbeatleast57mmandthatofsidemember38mmwithlengthand
widthfmembersgovernedbyplacementofconnectoratjoint.
Themetallicconnectorshallbesoplacedthattheloadededgedistanceisnotlessthanthediameterof
theconnectorandtheenddistancenotlessthan1.75timesthediameterontheloadedside.
t
7B SPACING OF BOLTS AT NODE JOINTS
2.5 d for t/d ratio 2
5 d for t/d ratio 6
1.5d min 1.5d min
2d min.
UNLOADED
EDGE
4d
4d
LOADED
EDGE
2.5 d for t/d RATIO 2
5 d for t/d RATIO 6
1.5d min 1.5d min
UNLOADED
EDGE
LOADED
EDGE
4d
4d
2d min.
3
3
3
3 3
3 3
3 3
3
3
3
3 3
3 3
3 3
NUT
WASHER
d
3
HEAD
HEXAGONAL
4d
3
4d
3
B
A
B
7d
3
4d
3
7d
3
7A SPACING OF BOLTS IN LENTHENING JOINTS
(JOINTS LOADED PARALLEL TO GRAIN)
B
A
B
L
E
N
G
T
H
O
F
B
O
L
T
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6681
11.10.1.2 DesignConsiderations
Figure 11.10.1 illustrates the primary stresses in a split ring connector joint under tension. The shaded areas
representthepartofwoodinshear,compressionandtension.RelatedformulaeforthesameareindicatedinFig.
11.10.1.
For fabrication of structural members, a hole of the required size of the bolt is drilled into the member and a
grooveismadeonthecontactfacesofthejoint.

Fig.11.10.1StressDistributionInASplitRingConnector
11.10.2 WoodenDiscDowel
11.10.2.1 It is a circular hardwood disc general] y tapered each way from the middle so as to form a double
conicalfrustum.Suchadiscismadetofitintopreformedholes(recesses),halfinonememberandthe
otherhalfinanother,theassemblybeingheldbyonemildsteelboltthroughthecentreofthediscto
actasacouplingforkeepingthejointedwoodenmembersfromspreadingapart.
11.10.2.2 DimensionsofMembers
Thethicknessofdowelmayvaryfrom25mmto35mmantidiameterfrom50mmto150mm.Thediameterof
dowelshallbe3.25to3.50timesthethickness.
Theedgeclearanceshallrangefrom12mmto20mmasperthesizeofthedowel.Theendclearanceshallbeat
least equal to the diameter of dowel for joints subjected to tension and threefourth the diameter for
compressionjoints.Discdowelshallbeturnedfromquartersawnplanksofseasonedmaterial.
SPLIT RING CONNECTOR
W
b
a/
d
2
d
1
d
2
t
2
t
2
e t
1
2 t
1
- a a/2
Part6
StructuralDesign

6682 Vol.2
11.10.2.3 ChoiceofSpecies
Woodusedformakingdowelsshallbefairlystraightgrained,freefromexcessiveliabilitytoshrinkandwarp,and
retainshapewellafterseasoningspeciesrecommendedinclude:
Babul
Sissoo
Pyinkado
Yon
NOTE Data on the above species as per Table 11.4.1 except for the species Pyinkado, which is not an
indigenousspecies.
11.10.2.4 DesignConsiderations
Figure 11.10.2 illustrates the forces on dowel in a lap joint and butt joint. Dowel is subjected to shearing at the
midsection, and compression along the grain at the bearing surfaces. For equal strength in both the forces,
formulaequationsaregiveninFig.11.10.2todeterminethesizeofdowel.
Themakingofwoodendiscsmaypresentsomeproblemsinthefield,buttheymaybemadeinsmallworkshopto
the specifications of the designer. This is also economically important. Once the wood fittings are shop tailored
andmade,theconstructionprocessinthefieldisgreatlysimplified.
Theoreticalsafeloadsindesignshallbeconfirmedthroughsampletests.
11.11 GLUEDLAMINATEDCONSTRUCTIONANDFINGERJOINTS
11.11.1 Developments in the field of synthetic adhesive have brought glueing techniques within the range of
engineering practice. Timber members of larger crosssections and long lengths can be fabricated from
smallsizedplanksbytheprocessofgluelam.Thetermgluedlaminatedtimberconstructionasappliedto
structuralmembersreferstovariouslaminationsgluedtogether,eitherinstraightorcurvedform,having
grainofalllaminationsessentiallyparalleltothelengthsofthemember.
11.11.1.1 ChoiceofGlue
Theadhesiveusedforgluedlaminatedassemblyaregapfillingtype.Afillerinpowderformisintroducedinthe
adhesive. Structural adhesives are supplied either in powder form to which water is added or in resin form to
which a hardener or catalyst is added. However, it is important that only boiling water proof (BWP) grade
adhesivesshallbeusedforfabricationofgluelamintropical,highhumidclimateslikeIndia.
11.11.1.2 ManufacturingSchedule
In absence of a systematic flowline in a factory, provisions of intermediate technology shall be created for
manufacturingstructuralelements.Thescheduleinvolvessteps:
a) Dryingofplanks;
b) Planning;
c) Endjointingbyscarfsorfingers;
d) Machiningoflaminations;
e) Settingupdryassemblyofstructuralunit;
f) Applicationofglue;
g) Assemblyandpressingthelaminations;
h) Curingthegluelines,asspecified;and
i) Finishing,protectionandstorage.
11.11.2
Fingerjointsaregluedjointsconnectingtimbermembersendtoend(Fig.11.11.1).Suchjointsshallbeproduced
bycuttingprofiles(taperedprojections)intheformofVshapedgroovestotheendsoftimberplanksorscantling
tobejoined,glueingtheinterfacesandthenmeetingthetwoendstogetherunderpressure.Fingerjointsprovide
long lengths of timber, ideal for upgrading timber by permitting removal of defects, minimizing warping and
reducingwastagebyavoidingshortoffcuts.

Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6683
DOWEL
LAPJOINT
BUTT JOINT

LapJoint:Boltinsimpletensionduetoclockwiseturningmomentondowel:
ButtJoint:Notiltingmomentindowelduetobalancingeffect[dowelsareinshear(nobending,shearing
andtensilestressonbolts)]
Sizeofdowelforequalstrengthinbothshearingandbearing.
c
t
d S
d
=
2 4
2

Where
d=Middiameterofthedowel
t=Thicknessofdowel
s=Safeworkingstressinshearalonggrain,and
c=Safecompressivestressalonggrain.
NOTESymbolsareexclusiveinthisfigure.
Fig.11.10.2DistributionOfForcesInDoewlJoint
11.11.2.1 Infingerjointsthegluedsurfacesareonthesidegrainratherthanontheendgrainandthegluelineis
stressedinshearratherintension.
11.11.2.1.1 The figures can be cut from edgetoedge or from facetoface. The difference is mainly in
appearance, although bending strength increases if several fingers share the load. Thus a joist is
slightly stronger with edgetoedge finger joints and a plank is stronger with facetoface finger
joint.
11.11.2.1.2 For structural finger jointed members for interior dry locations, adhesives based on melamine
formaldehyde cross linked polyvinyl acetate (PVA) are suited. For high humid and exterior
conditions, phenol formaldehyde and resorcinol formaldehyde type adhesives are recommended.
Properadhesivesshouldbeselectedinconsultationwiththedesignerandadhesivemanufacturers.
11.11.2.2 ManufacturingProcess
In the absence of sophisticated machinery, the finger joints shall be manufactured through intermediate
technologywiththefollowingsteps:
Part6
StructuralDesign

6684 Vol.2
a) Dryingofwood,
b) Removalofknotsandotherdefects,
c) Squaringtheendsofthelaminatingplanks,
d) Cuttingtheprofileoffingerjointintheendgrain,
e) Applyingadhesivesonthefingerinterfaces,
f) Pressingthejointtogetheratspecifiedpressure,
g) Curingofadhesivelineatspecifiedtemperature,and
h) Planningoffingerjointedplanksforsmoothsurface.
11.11.2.3 Strength
Strengthoffingerjointsdependsuponthegeometryoftheprofileforstructuralpurpose;thisisgenerally50mm
long,12mmpitch.
11.11.2.3.1 End joints shall be scattered in adjacent laminations, which shall not be located in very highly
stressedouterlaminations.
11.11.2.4 Tipthicknesswillbeassmallaspracticallypossible.

Fig.11.11.1TypicalFingerJointGeometry
ORIENTATION OF FINGER JOINTS
L = FINGER LENGTH
P = PITCH
t = TIP THICKNESS
e = 6
TIP GAP
p
t
L
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6685
11.12 LAMINATEDVENEERLUMBER
11.12.1 Certain reconstituted lignocellulosic products with fibre oriented along a specific direction have been
developed and are being adopted for load bearing applications. Laminated veneer lumber is one such
product developed as a result of researches in plantation grown species of wood. Density of laminated
veneerlumberrangesfrom0.6to0.75.
11.12.1.1 Dimensions
Sizes of laminated veneer lumber composite shall be inclusive of margin for dressing and finishing unless
manufactured to order. The margin for dressing and finishing shall not exceed 3mm in the width and thickness
and12mminthelength.
11.12.1.2 PermissibleDefects
Jointing gaps Not more than 3 mm wide, provided they are well staggered in their spacing and position
betweenthesuccessiveplies.
SlopeofgrainNotexceeding1in10inthefacelayers.
Tight knot Three numbers up to 25 mm diameter in one square metre provided they are spaced 300 mm or
moreapart.
WarpNotexceeding1.5mmpermetrelength.
11.12.1.3 StrengthRequirements
ThestrengthrequirementsforlaminatedveneerlumbershallbeasperTable11.12.1.
Table11.12.1:Requirementsoflaminatedveneerlumber
Sl.No. Properties Requirement
(1) (2) (3)
i) Modulusofrupture(N/mm
2
),Min 50
ii) Modulusofelasticity(N/mm
2
),Min 7500
iii) Compressivestrength:
a) Paralleltograin(N/mm
2
),Min 35
b) Perpendiculartograin(N/mm
2
),Min 50
iv) Horizontalshear:
a) Paralleltolaminac(N/mm
2
),Min 6
b) Perpendiculartolaminac(N/mm
2
),Min 8
v) Tensilestrengthparalleltograin(N/mm
2
),Min 55
vi) Screwholdingpower:
a) Edge(N),Min 2300
b) Face(N),Min 2700
vii) Thicknessswellingin2hwatersoaking(percent),Max 3
11.13 DESIGNOFGLUEDLAMINATEDBEAMS
11.13.1 General
Glued laminated structural members shall be fabricated only where there are adequate facilities for accurate
sizing and surfacing of planks, uniform application of glue, prompt assembly, and application of adequate
pressure and prescribed temperature for setting and curing of the glue. Design and fabrication shall be in
accordance with established engineering principles and good practice. A glued laminated beam is a straight
membermadefromanumberoflaminationsassembledbothwayseitherhorizontallyorvertically.Whilevertical
Part6
StructuralDesign

6686 Vol.2
PLYWOOD
WEB
PLYWOOD
WEB
PLYWOOD
WOODEN FLANGE
(TYPICAL)
BOX
DOUBLE - I I - SECTION
laminations have limitations in restricting the crosssection of a beam by width of the plank, horizontally
laminatedsectionofferswiderscopetothedesignerincreatingeventhecurvedmembers.
Simple straight beams and joists are used for many structures from small domestic rafters or ridges to the light
industrialstructures.
11.13.2 Design
Thedesignofgluelaminatedwoodelementsshallbeinaccordancewithgoodengineeringpracticeandshalltake
intoconsiderationthespeciesandgradeoftimberused,presenceofdefects,locationofendjointsinlaminations,
depthofbeamsandmoisturecontentsexpectedwhileinservice.Beamsoflargespansshallbedesignedwith a
suitable camber to assist in achieving the most cost effective section where deflection governs the design. The
strengthandstiffnessoflaminatedbeamsisoftengovernedbythequalityofouterlaminations.Gluedlaminated
beams can be tapered to follow specific roof slopes across a building and/or to commensurate with the varying
bendingmoments.
11.13.3 Material
Laminatingboardsshallnotcontaindecay,knotsorotherstrengthreducingcharacteristicsinexcessofthosesizes
oramountspermittedbyspecifications.Themoisturecontentshallapproachthatexpectedinserviceandshallin
no case exceed 15 percent at the time of glueing. The moisture content of individual laminations in a structural
member shall not differ by more than 3 percent at the time of glueing. Glue shall be of type suitable for the
intendedserviceofastructuralmember.
11.13.4 Fabrication/Manufacture
Inordertoassureawellbondedandwellfinishedmemberoftrueshapeandsize,allequipments,endJointing,
glue spread, assembly, pressing, curing or any other operation in connection with the manufacture of glued
structural members shall be in accordance with the available good practices and as per glue manufacturers
instructionsasapplicable.
11.14 STRUCTURALUSEOFPLYWOOD
Unlike sawn timber, plywood is a layered panel product comprising veneers of wood bonded together with
adjacent layers usually at right angles. As wood is strongest when stressed parallel to grain, and weak
perpendicular to grain, the lay up or arrangement of veneers in the panel determines its properties. When the
face grain of the plywood is parallel to the direction of stress, veneers parallel to the face grain carry almost all
theload.Someinformation/guidelinesforstructuraluseofplywoodaregivenin11.14.1to11.14.3.
11.14.1 Theplywoodhasahighstrengthtoweightratio,andisdimensionallystablematerialavailableinsheets
ofanumberofthicknessesandconstruction.Plywoodcanbesawn,drilledandnailedwithordinarywood
workingtools.Thegluesusedtobondtheseveneerstogetherarederivedfromsyntheticresinswhichare
setandcuredbyheating.Thepropertiesofadhesivescandeterminethedurabilityofplywood.
11.14.2 Ingluedplywoodconstruction,structuralplywoodisgluedtotimberresultinginhighlyefficientandlight
structural components like web beams (I and box sections), (Fig. 11.15.1 and Fig. 11.15.2) stressed skin
panels(Fig.11.15.3)usedforflooringandwallingandprefabricatedhouses,cabins,etc.

Fig.11.15.1TypicalCrossSectionOfWebBeams
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6687
Glueingcanbecarriedoutbynailglueingtechniqueswithspecialclamps.Highshearstrengthofplywood
incombinationwithhighflexuralstrengthandstiffnessofwoodresultinstructurescharacterizedbyhigh
stiffness for even medium spares. Plywood can act as web transmitting shear stress in web bearing or
stressed skin or sandwich construction. The effective moment of inertia of web beam and stressed skin
constructiondependsonmodularratiothatis,EofwoodtoEofplywood.
11.14.3 Structuralplywoodisalsoveryefficientascladdingmaterialinwoodframeconstruction,suchashouses.
This type of sheathing is capable of resisting racking due to wind and quack forces. Structural plywood
hasbeenwidelyusedasdiaphragm(horizontal)asinroofingandflooringintimberframeconstruction.It
hasbeenestablishedthat6mmthickplywoodcanbeusedforsheathingandevenforwebandstressed
skin construction, 912 mm thick plywood is suitable for beams, flooring diaphragms, etc. Phenol
formaldehyde(PF)andPRFadhesivearesuitableforfabricationofgluedplywoodcomponents.6mm12
mm thick structural plywood can be very well used as nailed or bolded gussets in fixing members of
trussesorlatticegridersortrussedrafters.
Normally, scarf joints are used for fixing plywood to required length and timber can be joined by using
eitherfingerorscarfjoints.Archpanels,foldedplates,shelvesareotherpossibilitieswiththistechnique.
11.15 TRUSSEDRAFTER
11.15.1 General
A roof truss is essentially a plane structure which is very stiff in the plane of the members, that is, the plane in
which it is expected to carry loads, but very flexible in every other direction. Thus it can virtually be seen as a
deep, narrow girder liable to buckling and twisting under loads. In order, therefore, to reduce this effect,
eccentricity of loading and promote prefabrication for economy, lowpitched trussed rafters are designed with
boltply/nailplyjoints.Plywoodasgussets,besidesbeingsimplehaveinherentconstructionaladvantageofgrain
over solid wood for joints, and a better balance is achievable between the joint strength and the member
strength.
Trussedraftersarelightweighttrussunitsspacedatclosecentresforlimitedspanstocarrydifferenttypesofroof
loads. They are made from timber members of uniform thickness fastened together in one plane. The plywood
gussets maybe nailed or glued to the timber to form the joints. Conceptually a trussedrafteris a triangularpin
jointedsystem,traditionallymeanttocarrythecombinedroofweight,claddingservicesandwindloads.Thereis
considerable scope for saving timber by minimizing the sections through proper design without affecting
structuralandfunctionalrequirements.
Trussedraftersrequiretobesupportedonlyattheirendssothatthereisnoneedtoprovideloadbearinginternal
walls, Purlins, etc are dispensed with and in comparison with traditional methods of construction they use less
timber and considerably reduces of site labour, Mass production or reliable units can be carried out under
workshopcontrols.
11.15.2 Design
Trussed rafter shall be designed to sustain the dead and imposed loads specified in Part 6 Structural Design:
Chapter2LoadsonBuildingsandStructuresandthecombinationsexpectedtooccur.Extrastresses/deflections
during handling, transportation and erection shall be taken care of. Structural analysis, use of loadslip and
moment,rotationcharacteristicsoftheindividualjointsmaybeusediffeasible.Alternativelythemaximumdirect
forceinamembermaybeassessedtobegivenbyanidealizedpinjointedframework,fullyloadedwithmaximum
deadandimposedloadinthecombinationinwhichtheymayreasonablybeexpectedtooccur.
11.15.3 Timber
The species of timber including plantation grown species which can be used for trussed rafter construction and
permissible stresses thereof shall be in accordance with Table 11.4.1. Moisture contents to be as per zonal
requirementsinaccordancewith11.4.4.
11.15.4 Plywood
Boilingwaterresistant(BWR)gradepreservativetreatedplywoodshallbeused.Introductionofaplywoodgusset
simplifies the jointing and in addition provides rigidity to the joint. Preservation of plywood and other panel
Part6
StructuralDesign

6688 Vol.2
products shall be done in accordance with good practice prescribed by Bangladesh Forest Research Institute,
Chittagong.

Fig.11.15.2WebBeamConfigurations

Fig.11.15.3StressedSkinPanelConstruction(SingleSkinOrDoubleSkin)
SPAN UPTO 9m
DOUBLE TAPERD
SPAN UPTO 9m
HAUNCHED
SPAN UPTO 6 - 9m
STRAIGHT
SECTION XX
X
X
PLYWOOD
STIFFNER WOODEN
FLANGE
LOWER SKIN
BLOCKING
WEBS
UPPER SKIN
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6689
11.16 STRUCTURALSANDWICHES
11.16.1 General
Sandwichconstructionsarecompositesofdifferentmaterialsincludingwoodbasedmaterialsformedbybonding
two thin facings of high strength material to a light weight core which provides a combination of desirable
properties that are not attainable with the individual constituent materials (Fig. 11.16.1). The thin facings are
usuallyofstrongdensematerialsincethataretheprincipalloadcarryingmembersoftheconstruction.Thecore
mustbestiffenoughtoensurethefacesremainatthecorrectdistanceapart.Thesandwichesusedasstructural
elementsinbuildingconstructionshallbeadequatelydesignedfortheirintendedservicesandshallbefabricated
onlywherethereareadequatefacilitiesforglueingorotherwisebondingcorestofacingstoensureastrongand
durableproduct.Theentireassemblyprovidesastructuralelementofhighstrengthandstiffnessinproportionto
itsmass.
Nonstructural advantages can also be derived by proper selection of facing and core material for example, an
impermeable facings can be used to serve as a moisture barrier for walls and roof panels and core may also be
selectedtoprovidethermaland/oracousticinsulation,fireresistance,etc,besidesthedimensionalstability.

Fig.11.16.1:Sandwitchconstructioninstructuralapplications
11.16.2 Cores
Sandwichcoresshallbeofsuchcharacteristicsastogivetotherequiredlateralsupporttothestressedfacingsto
sustain or transmit the assumed loads or stresses. Core generally carries shearing loads and to support the thin
facingsduetocompressiveloads.Coreshallmaintainthestrengthanddurabilityundertheconditionsofservice
forwhichtheiruseisrecommended.AmaterialwithlowEandsmallshearmodulusmaybesuitable.
11.16.3 Facings
Facingsshallhavesufficientstrengthandrigiditytoresiststressesthatmaycomeuponthemwhenfabricatedinto
a sandwich construction. They shall be thick enough to carry compressive and tensile stresses and to resist
punctureordentingthatmaybeexpectedinnormalusages.
FACE SHEETS
ADHESIVE
C
O
R
E

M
A
T
E
R
I
A
L
Part6
StructuralDesign

6690 Vol.2
11.16.4 Designing
Structural designing may be comparable to the design of Ibeams, the facings of the sandwich represent the
flangesoftheIbeamandthesandwichcoreIbeamweb.
11.16.5 Tests
Testsshallinclude,asapplicable,oneormoreofthefollowing:
a) Flexuralstrengtldstiffness,
b) Edgewisecompressions,
c) Flatwisecompression,
d) Shearinflatwiseplane,
e) Flatwisetensions,
f) Flexuralcreep(creepbehaviourofadhesive),
g) Cantilevervibrations(dynamicproperty),and
h) Weatheringfordimensionalstability.
11.17 LAMELLAROOFING
11.17.1 General
The Lamella roofing offers an excellent architectural edifice in timber, amenable to prefabrication, light weight
structure with high central clearance. It is essentially an arched structure formed by a system of intersecting
skewedarchesbuiltupofrelativelyshorttimberplanksofuniformlengthandcrosssection.Roofisdesignedasa
two hinged arch with a depth equal to the depth of an individual lamella and width equal to the span of the
building. The curved lamellas (planks) are bevelled and bored at the ends and bolted together at an angle,
forming a network (grid) pattern of mutually braced and stiffened members (Fig. 11.17.1). The design shall be
basedonthebalancedorunbalancedassumedloaddistributionusedforroofarches.Effectofdeformationorslip
ofjointsunderloadontheinducedstressesshallbeconsideredindesign.Thrustcomponentsinbothtransverse
andlongitudinaldirectionsofthebuildingduetoskewnessofthelamellaarchshallbeadequatelyresisted.Thrust
at lamella joints shall be resisted by the moment of inertia in the continuous lamella and roof sheathening
(decking)oflamellaroofing.Theinteractionofarchesintwodirectionsaddstothestrengthandstabilityagainst
horizontal forces. For design calculations several assumption tested and observed derivations, longduration
loadingfactors,seasoningadvantagesandeffectsofdefectsaretakenintoaccount.
11.17.2 Lamellas
Planking shall be of a grade of timber that is adequate in strength and stiffness to sustain the assumed loads,
forces,thrustandbendingmomentsgeneratedinLamellaroofing.Lamellaplanksshallbeseasonedtoamoisture
content approximating that they will attain in service. Lamella joints shall be proportioned so that allowable
stresses at bearings of the noncontinuous lamellas on the continuous Iamellas or bearings under the head or
washerofboltsarenotexceeded.
11.17.3 Construction
DesignandconstructionoflamellaroofsinIndiaassumestheroofsurfacestobecylindricalwitheveryindividual
lamella an elliptic segment of an elliptical arch of constant curved length but of different curvature. Lamella
constructionisthusmoreofanartthanscienceasthereisnoanalyticalmethodavailablefortruegenerationof
schedule of cutting lengths and curvature of curved members forming the lamella grid. Dependence of an
engineeronthepracticalingenuityofmastercarpenterisalmostfinal.Allthelamellajointsshallbeaccuratelycut
andfittedtogivefullbearingwithoutexcessivedeformationorslip.Boltsatlamellasplicesshallbeadequateto
hold the members in their proper position and shall not be over tightened to cause bending of the lamellas or
mashing of wood under the bolt heads. Connection of lamellas to the end arches shall be adequate to transmit
thethrustoranyotherforce.Sufficientfalseworkorslidingjigshallbeprovidedforthesupportoflamellaroof
duringactualconstruction/erection.
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6691
Fig.11.17.1:TypicalarrangementofLamellaroofing

H
H
r
V
R
R
r
V
r
WIND BLOCK
LAMELLA
NODAL JOINT
BRESSUMMER
LAMELLS GRID
MIDDLE LAMELLA
OUTER LAMELLA
38 to 42
OUTER
BOLT
LAMELLA
LAMELLA NODAL JOINT
LOAD REACTION DIAGRAM
LAMELLA GRID
I
Part6
StructuralDesign

6692 Vol.2
11.18 NAILANDSCREWHOLDINGPOWEROFTIMBER
11.18.1 General
One of the most common ways of joining timber pieces to one another is by means of common wire nails and
wood screws. Timber is used for structural and nonstructural purposes inform of scantlings, rafters, joists,
boarding, crating and packing cases, etc needing suitablemethods ofjoining them.Nevertheless it is the timber
which holds the nails or screws and as such pulling of the nails/screws is the chief factor which come into play
predominantly.Instructuralnailedjoints,nailsareessentiallyloadedlaterally,thedesigndataforwhichisalready
availableasstandardcodeofpractice.Dataonholdingpowerofnails/screwsindifferentspeciesisalsousefulfor
common commercial purposes. The resistance of mechanical fastenings is a function of the specific gravity of
wood, direction of penetration with respect to the grain direction, depth of penetration and the diameter of
fastenerassumingthatthespacingoffastenersshouldbeadequatetoprecludesplittingofwood.
11.18.2 Nails
Nailsareprobablythemostcommonandfamiliarfastener.Theyareofmanytypesandsizesinaccordancewith
theacceptedstandards[63A(16)].
Ingeneralnailsgivestrongerjointswhendrivenintothesidegrainofwoodthanintotheendgrain.Nailsperform
bestwhenloadedlaterallyascomparedtoaxialwithdrawalsothenailedjointsshouldbedesignedforlateralnail
bearinginstructuraldesign.Informationonwithdrawalresistanceofnailsisavailableandjointsmaybedesigned
forthatkindofloadingasandwhennecessary.
11.18.3 Screw
Next to the hammer driven nails, the wood screw may be the most commonly used fastener. Wood screws are
seldom used in structural work because of their primary advantage is in withdrawal resistance, for example, for
fixing of ceiling boards to joists, purlin cleats, besides the door hinges etc. They are of considerable structural
importanceinfixturedesignandmanufacture.Woodscrewsaregenerallyfinishedinavarietyofheadshapesand
manufacturedinvariouslengthsfordifferentscrewdiametersorgauges.
Thewithdrawalresistanceofwoodscrewsisafunctionofscrewdiameter,lengthofengagementofthethreaded
portion into the member, and the specific gravity of the species of wood. Withdrawal load capacity of wood
screwsareavailableforsomespeciesandjointsmaybedesignedaccordingly.Endgrainloadonwoodscrewsare
unreliableandwoodscrewsshallnotbeusedforthatpurpose.
11.19 PROTECTIONAGAINSTTERMITEATTACKINBUILDINGS
11.19.1 Two groups of organisms which affect the mechanical and aesthetic properties of wood in houses are
fungiandinsects.Themostimportantwooddestroyinginsectsbelongtotermitesandbeetles.Ofabout
250speciesofwooddestroyingtermitesrecordedinIndia,notmorethanadozenspeciesattackbuilding
causingabout90percentofthedamagetotimberandothercellulosicmaterials.Subterraneantermites
are the most destructive of the insects that infest wood in houses justifying prevention measures to be
incorporatedinthedesignandconstructionofbuildings.
11.19.1.1 Control measures consist in isolating or sealing off the building from termites by chemical and non
chemical construction techniques. It is recognized that 95 percent damage is due to internal travel of
the termites from ground upwards rather than external entry through entrance thus calling upon for
appropriatecontrolmeasuresinaccordancewithgoodpractices[63A(18)].
11.19.2 ChemicalMethods
Termitesliveinsoilinlargecoloniesanddamagethewoodenstructureinthebuildingsbyeatingupthewoodor
buildingnestsinthewood.Poisoningthesoilunderandaroundthebuildingisanormalrecommendedpractice.
Spraying of chemical solution in the trenches of foundations in and around walls, areas under floors before and
afterfillingofearth,etc.Inalreadyconstructedbuildingthetreatmentcanbegivenbydiggingtrenchesallaround
thebuildingandthengivingaliberaldoseofchemicalsandthenclosingthetrenches.
Timber Chapter11

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6693
11.19.3 WoodPreservatives
Natural resistance against organisms of quite a few wood species provides durability of timber without special
protection measure. It is a property of heartwood while sapwood is normally always susceptible to attack by
organisms.Preservativesshouldbewellappliedwithsufficientpenetrationintotimber.Forengineers,architects
andbuilders,thefollowingareprimeconsiderationsforchoiceofpreservatives:
a) Inflammabilityoftreatedtimberisnotincreasedandmechanicalpropertiesarenotdecreased;
b) Compatibilitywiththeglueinlaminatedwood,plywoodandboardmaterial;
c) Waterrepellenteffectispreferred;
d) Possiblesuitabilityforprimingcoat;
e) Possibilityofpaintingandotherfinishes;
f) Noncorrosivenaturefasteners;and
g) Influenceonplastics,incaseofmetalrubber,tilesandconcrete.
11.19.4 ConstructionalMethod
Protection against potential problem of termite attack can simply be carried out by ordinary good construction
whichpreventsacolonyfromgainingaccessby:
a) periodicvisualobservationsontermitegalleriestobebrokenoff;
b) speciallyformedandproperlyinstalledmetalshieldatplinthlevel;and
c) continuousfloorslabs,apronfloorsandtermitegroovesonperipheryofbuildings.
Part6
StructuralDesign 6695
Chapter 12
FerrocementStructures
12.1 SCOPE
This chapter covers selection, standards and testing of ferrocement materials, design criteria and approaches,
constructionmethods,andmaintenanceandrepairproceduresofferrocementstructures.Theprovisionsofthis
chapter are consistent with those of Chapter 6, except for the special requirements of ferrocement, such as
reinforcementcoverandlimitsondeflection.
12.2 TERMINOLOGY
12.2.1 ReinforcementParameters
Forthepurposeofthischapter,thefollowingparameterscharacterizingthereinforcementinferrocementshall
havethedefinitionsgiven:
VOLUME FRACTION OF REINFORCEMENT (V
f
): Volume fraction of reinforcement is the total volume of
reinforcementdividedbythevolumeofcomposite(reinforcementandmatrix).Foracompositereinforcedwith
meshes with square openings, V
f
shall be equally divided into V
fl
and V
ft
for the longitudinal and transverse
directions,respectively.Forothertypesofreinforcement,suchasexpandedmetal,V
fl
andV
ft
maybeunequal.
ProceduresforcomputationofV
f
areshowninAppendix6.12.A.
SPECIFICSURFACEOFREINFORCEMENT(S
r
):S
r
isthetotalbondedareaofreinforcement(interfaceareaorarea
ofthesteelthatcomesincontactwiththemortar)dividedbythevolumeofthecomposite.
Foraferrocementplateofwidthbanddepthh,thespecificsurfaceofreinforcementcanbecomputedfrom

S
r
=
o
bh
12.2.1
inwhich

o isthetotalsurfaceareaofbondedreinforcementperunitlength.
TherelationbetweenS
r
andV
f
whensquaregridwiremeshesareusedis

S
r
=
4V
f
d
b
12.2.2
whered
b
isthediameterofthewire.Forothertypesofreinforcement,suchasexpandedmetal,S
rl
andS
rt
may
beunequal.
EFFECTIVE MODULUS OF THE REINFORCEMENT: For welded steel meshes, effective modulus of the
reinforcingsystem,E
r
shallbetakenequaltotheelasticmodulusofthesteelwires.Forothermeshes,E
r
shallbe
determinedfromtensiletestsontheferrocementcompositeasspecifiedinSec12.8.
12.2.2 Notation
A
c
= crosssectionalareaofferrocementcomposite
A
s
= totaleffectivecrosssectionalareaofreinforcementinthedirectionconsidered

A
s
= A
si
i =1
N

A
si
= effective crosssectional area of reinforcement of mesh layer i in the direction
considered
b = widthofferrocementsection
c = distancefromextremecompressionfibretoneutralaxis
Part6
StructuralDesign

6696 Vol.2
C
c
= resultantofthecompressivestressblockinferrocement
C
si
= compressiveforceinferrocementlayeri
d
c
= clearcoverofmortaroverfirstlayerofmesh
d
b
= diameterorequivalentdiameterofreinforcementused
d
i
= distancefromextremecompressionfibretocentroidofreinforcinglayeri
E
c
= elasticmodulusofmortarmatrix
E
r
= effectivemodulusofthereinforcingsystem

f
c
= specifiedcompressivestrengthofferrocementmortar
f
y
= yieldstrengthofmeshreinforcementorreinforcingbars
h = thicknessofferrocementsection
M
n
= nominalmomentstrength
N
n
= nominaltensilestrength
N = numberoflayersofmesh;nominalresistance
n
r
= modularratioofreinforcement
s = meshopeningorsize
S
r
= specificsurfaceofreinforcement
S
rl
= specificsurfaceofreinforcementinthelongitudinaldirection
S
rt
= specificsurfaceofreinforcementinthetransversedirection
T
si
= tensileforceintheferrocementlayeri
V
f
= volumefractionofreinforcement
U = minimumrequireddesignstrength
V
fi
= volumefractionofreinforcementformeshlayeri
Vfl = volumefractionofreinforcementinthelongitudinaldirection
V
ft
= volumefractionofreinforcementinthetransversedirection

1
= factordefiningdepthofrectangularstressblock
= global efficiency factor of embedded reinforcement in resisting tension or tensile
bendingloads

l = value of when the load or stress is applied along the longitudinal direction of the
meshsystemorrodreinforcement

t
= valueofwhentheloadorstressisappliedalongthetransversedirectionofthemesh
reinforcementsystemorrodreinforcement

= value of when the load or stress is applied along a direction forming an angle with
thelongitudinaldirection

si
= strainofmeshreinforcementatlayeri

y
= nominalyieldstrainofmeshreinforcement=

f
y
E
r

o = totalsurfaceareaofbondedreinforcementperunitlength

= strengthreductionfactor.
12.2.3 Definitions
ARMATURE:Thetotalreinforcementsystemorskeletalreinforcementandmeshforaferrocementelement.
LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION: The roll direction (longer direction) of the mesh as produced in plant (see Fig
12.2.1).
SKELETAL REINFORCEMENT: A planar framework or widely spaced tied steel bars that provides shape and
supportforlayersofmeshorfabricattachedtoeitherside.
SPRITZING:Sprayingorsquirtingamortarontoasurface.
FerrocementStructures Chapter12

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6697
TRANSVERSEDIRECTION:Directionofmeshnormaltoitslongitudinaldirection;alsowidthdirectionofmeshas
producedinplant(seeFig12.2.1)

Fig.12.2.1AssumedLongitudinalandTransverseDirectionsofReinforcement
12.3 MATERIALS
ThematerialusedinferrocementconsistsprimarilyofmortarmadewithPortlandcement,waterandaggregate
andthereinforcingmesh.
12.3.1 Cement
ThecementshallcomplywithASTMC15085a,ASTMC59585,oranequivalentstandard.Thecementshallbe
fresh,ofuniformconsistency,andfreeoflumpsandforeignmatter.Itshallbestoredunderdryconditionsfor
asshortadurationaspossible.
Thechoiceofaparticularcementshalldependontheserviceconditions.Serviceconditionscanbeclassifiedas
electrochemicallypassiveoractive.Landbasedstructuressuchasferrocementsilos,bins,andwatertankscan
beconsideredaspassivestructures,exceptwhenincontactwithsulphatebearingsoils,inwhichcasetheuseof
sulphateresistantcement,suchasASTMTypeIIorTypeV,maybenecessary.
Blended hydraulic cement conforming to ASTM C59585 Type 1 (PM), IS, 1 (SM), ISA, IP, or IPA can also be
used.
Mineraladmixtures,suchasflyash,silicafumes,orblastfurnaceslag,maybeusedtomaintainahighvolume
fractionoffinefillermaterial.Whenused,mineraladmixturesshallcomplywithASTMC61885andC98985a.
In addition to the possible improvement of flow ability, these materials also benefit long term strength gain,
lowermortarpermeability,andinsomecasesimprovedresistancetosulphatesandchlorides.
12.3.2 Aggregates
Aggregateusedinferrocementshallbenormalweightfineaggregate(sand).ItshallcomplywithASTMC3386
requirements(forfineaggregate)oranequivalentstandard.Itshallbeclean,inert,freeoforganicmatterand
deleterioussubstances,andrelativelyfreeofsiltandclay.
ThegradingoffineaggregateshallbeinaccordancewiththeguidelinesofTable12.3.1.However,themaximum
particle size shall be controlled by construction constraints such as mesh size and distance between layers. A
maximumparticlesizepassingsieveNo.16(1.18mm)maybeconsideredappropriateinmostapplications.The
sandshallbeuniformlygradedunlesstrialtestingofmortarworkabilitypermitstheuseofagapgradedsand.
Aggregatesthatreactwiththealkalisincementshallbeavoided.Whenaggregatesmaybereactive,theyshall
betestedinaccordancewithASTMC22781.Ifprovenreactive,theuseofapozzolantosuppressthereactivity
shallbeconsideredandevaluatedinaccordancewithASTMC44181.

Square Mesh Bar Expanded Mesh Hexagonal Mesh

Transverse Direction
L
o
n
g
i
t
u
d
i
n
a
l
D
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
Part6
StructuralDesign

6698 Vol.2
Table12.3.1GuidelinesforGradingofSand
SieveSize
U.S.StandardSquareMesh
PercentPassingbyWeight
No.8(2.36mm)
No.16(1.18mm)
No.30(0.60mm)
No.50(0.30mm)
No.100(0.15mm)
80100
5085
2560
1030
210
12.3.3 Water
Themixingwatershallbefresh,clean,andpotable.Thewatershallberelativelyfreefromorganicmatter,silt,
oil, sugar, chloride, and acidic material. It shall have a pH 7 to minimize the reduction in pH of the mortar
slurry.Saltwaterisnotacceptable,butchlorinateddrinkingwatercanbeused.
12.3.4 Admixtures
Conventional and high range water reducing admixtures (super plasticizers) shall conform to ASTM C49486.
Waterreducingadmixturesmaybeusedtoachieveanincreaseinsandcontentforthesamedesignstrengthor
adecreaseinwatercontentforthesameworkability.Decreasesinwatercontentresultinlowershrinkageand
less surface crazing. Retarders may be used in large time consuming plastering projects, especially in hot
weatherconditions.
Ifwatertightnessisimportant,suchasinwaterorliquidretainingstructures,specialprecautionsshallbetaken.
Toachievewatertightness,thewatercementratioshallpreferablybekeptbelow0.4,crackwidthslimited(see
Sec12.4)and,ifnecessary,waterproofingcoatingsapplied(seeSec12.6.3).
Mineral admixtures such as fly ash (ASTM C61885) can be added to the cement to increase workability and
durability. Normally, 15 per cent of the cement can be replaced with mineral admixtures without appreciably
reducing the strength. Pozzolanic admixtures may be added to replace part of the fine aggregates to improve
plasticity.Thetendencyforsomenaturalpozzolanstoabsorbwaterandthusadverselyaffecthydrationofthe
cementphaseshallbecheckedbymeasuringthewaterofabsorption.
A quality matrix can be obtained without using any admixtures if experience has shown its applicability.
AdmixturesnotcoveredinASTMstandardsshallnotbeused.
12.3.5 MixProportioning
Therangesofmixproportionsforcommonferrocementapplicationsshallbesandcementratiobyweight,1.5
to 2.5, and water cement ratio by weight, 0.35 to 0.5. The higher the sand content, the higher the required
water content to maintain the same workability. Fineness modulus of the sand, water cement ratio, and sand
cementratioshall be determined from trial batches to ensurea mix that can infiltrate (encapsulate) the mesh
anddevelopastronganddensematrix.
The moisture content of the aggregate shall be considered in the calculation of required water. Quantities of
materialsshallpreferablybedeterminedbyweight.
The mix shall be as stiff as possible, provided it does not prevent full penetration of the mesh. Normally the
slumpoffreshmortarshallnotexceed50mm.Formostapplications,the28daycompressivestrengthof75by
150mmmoistcuredcylindersshallnotbelessthan35N/mm2.
12.3.6 Reinforcement
Thereinforcementshallbecleanandfreefromdeleteriousmaterialssuchasdust,looserust,coatingofpaint,
oil,orsimilarsubstances.
Wire mesh with closely spaced wires is the most commonly used reinforcement in ferrocement. Expanded
metal, welded wire fabric, wires or rods, prestressing tendons, and discontinuous fibers may also be used in
specialapplicationsorforreasonsofperformanceoreconomy.
FerrocementStructures Chapter12

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6699
12.3.6.1 WireMesh:
Reinforcingmeshesforuseinferrocementshallbeevaluatedfortheirsusceptibilitytotakeandholdshapeas
wellasfortheirstrengthperformanceinthecompositesystem.Commontypesandsizesofsteelmeshesthat
maybeusedinferrocementareprovidedinAppendix6.12.B.
12.3.6.2 WeldedWireFabric:
Welded wire fabric may be used in combination with wire mesh to minimize the cost of reinforcement. The
fabric shall conform to ASTM A49685 and A49786. The minimum yield strength of the wire measured at a
strainof0.035shallbe410N/mm2.Weldedwirefabricnormallycontainslargerdiameterwires(2mmormore)
spacedat25mmormore.
12.3.6.3 ExpandedMetalMeshReinforcement:
Expandedmeshreinforcement(metallath),formedbyslittingthingaugesteelsheetsandexpandingthemina
direction perpendicular to the slits, may be used in ferrocement. Punched or otherwise perforated sheet
productsmayalsobeused.Expandedmeshissuitablefortanksifproperconstructionproceduresareadopted.
12.3.6.4 Bars,WiresandPrestressingStrands:
Reinforcing bars and prestressing wires or strands may be used in combination with wire meshes in relatively
thickferrocementelementsorintheribsofribbedorTshapedelements.
Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A61586, A61686 or A61784. Reinforcing bars shall be steel with a
minimum yield strength of 410 N/mm
2
and a tensile strength of about 615 N/mm
2
. Prestressing wires and
strands,whetherprestressedornotshallconformtoASTMA42180andA41686,respectively.
12.3.6.5 DiscontinuousFibresandNonmetallicReinforcement:
Fibrereinforcementconsistingofirregularlyarrangedcontinuousfilamentsofsyntheticornaturalorganicfibres
such as jute and bamboo may be used in ferrocement. If organic materials are used, care shall be taken to
conductappropriateinvestigationstoensurethestrengthanddurabilityofthefinishedferrocementproduct.
12.4 DESIGN
12.4.1 GeneralPrinciplesandRequirements
12.4.1.1 The analysis of a ferrocement crosssection subject to either bending, or to bending and axial load,
whether based on strength or working stresses, is similar to the analysis of a reinforced concrete
beamorcolumnhavingseverallayersofsteel(Fig12.4.1).

Fig.12.4.1StrainandForceDistributionatUltimateinaFerrocementSectionUnderBending
Part6
StructuralDesign

6700 Vol.2
12.4.1.2 In the design of ferrocement structures, members shall be proportioned for adequate strength in
accordance with the provisions of this chapter using load factors and strength reduction factors
specifiedinChapter6.
12.4.1.3 Ferrocementmembersmayalternativelybedesignedusingserviceloadsandpermissibleserviceload
stressesinaccordancewiththeprovisionsofSec12.4.3.
12.4.1.4 All membersshall also be designed to satisfy serviceability criteria in accordancewith the provisions
ofSec12.4.4.
12.4.2 StrengthRequirements
Ferrocementstructuresandstructuralmembersshallhaveadesignstrengthatallsectionsatleastequaltothe
required strengths for the factored load and load combinations stipulated in Chapter 1, General Design
Requirements.RequiredstrengthUtoresistdeadloadDandliveloadLshallbedeterminedinaccordancewith
Chapter2,Sec2.7.5.1.
Designstrengthprovidedbyamemberorcrosssectionintermsofaxialload,bendingmoment,shearforce,or
stress shall be taken as the nominal strength calculated in accordance with requirements and assumptions of
Chapter6,Sec6.1.4multipliedbythestrengthreductionfactor

tosatisfythegeneralrelationship.

N U
12.4.1
where U is the factored load equal to the minimum required design strength, N is the nominal
resistance,and

isastrengthreductionfactordefinedinSec6.2.3.1.
Design strength for the mesh reinforcement shall be based on the yield strength f
y
of the reinforcement but
shallnotexceed690N/mm
2
.Designyieldstrengthsofvariousmeshreinforcementshallbeinaccordancewith
Table12.4.1.Theseshallbeusedfordesignonlywhentestdataarenotavailable.Whentestsfordetermination
ofyieldstrengthareneeded,theyshallbeconductedinaccordancewithSec12.8.2.3and12.8.2.4.
Table 12.4.1 Minimum Values of Yield Strength and Effective Modulus for Steel Meshes and Bars
RecommendedforDesign
Woven
Square
Mesh
Welded
Square
Mesh
Hexa
Gonal
Mesh
Expanded
Metal
Mesh
Longitu
dinal
Bars
Yield
Strength
f
y
N/mm
2

450 450 310 310 410

Effective
Modulus
(E
r
)
long
.
(N/mm
2
)
138000 200000 104000 138000 200000
(E
r
)
tran.

(N/mm
2
)
165000 200000 69000 69000
12.4.2.1 Flexure:
The strain distribution at nominal moment resistance shall be assumed to be linear, and a rectangular stress
blockshallbeusedincomputingtheresultantcompressiveforceactingontheconcrete.
a) AssumptionsStrengthdesignofferrocementmembersforflexureandaxialloadsshallbe
basedonthefollowingassumptionsandonsatisfactionofequilibriumandcompatibilityof
strains.
i) Straininreinforcementandmortar(concrete)shallbeassumeddirectlyproportionaltothe
distancefromtheneutralaxis.
ii) Maximumstrainatextrememortar(concrete)compressionfibreshallbeassumedequalto
0.003.
iii) Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strength f
y
shall be taken as E
r
times steel
strain. For strains greater than that corresponding to f
y
, stress in reinforcement shall be
consideredindependentofstrainandequaltof
y
.
FerrocementStructures Chapter12

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6701
iv) Tensilestrengthofmortar(concrete)shallbeneglectedinflexuralstrengthcalculations.
v) Relationshipbetweenmortar(concrete)compressivestressdistributionandmortar
(concrete) strain may be considered satisfied by the use of the equivalent rectangular
concretestressdistribution.
b) EffectiveareaofreinforcementTheareaofreinforcementperlayerofmeshconsidered
effectivetoresisttensilestressesinacrackedferrocementsectionshallbedeterminedas
follows:

A
si
= V
fi
A
c
12.4.2
where
A
si
= effectiveareaofreinforcementformeshlayeri
= globalefficiencyfactorofmeshreinforcementintheloadingdirectionconsidered
V
fi
= volumefractionofreinforcementformeshlayeri
A
c
= grosscrosssectionalareaofmortar(concrete)section.
The global efficiency factor when multiplied by the volume fraction of reinforcement, gives the equivalent
volumefraction(orequivalentreinforcementratio)intheloadingdirectionconsidered.Ineffect,itleadstoan
equivalent(effective)areaofreinforcementperlayerofmeshinthatloadingdirection.Forsquaremeshes, =
0.5 when loading is appliedin one of the principal directions. For a reinforcing barloaded along its axis, =
1.0.
In the absence ofvalues derived from tests for a particular meshsystem, the values of given inTable 12.4.2
forcommontypesofmeshandloadingdirectionmaybeused.Theglobalefficiencyfactorshallapplywhether
thereinforcementisinthetensionzoneorinthecompressionzone.
The value of = 0.2 for expanded metal mesh (Table 12.4.2) may not always be conservative, particularly in
thickersectionsinflexurewiththemeshorientedintheshortwaydiamond.ThevaluesinTable12.4.2shallbe
usedforsections50mmorlessinthickness,andtestsconductedforglobalefficiencyvaluesforsectionsmore
than50mminthickness.
Table12.4.2RecommendedDesignValuesoftheGlobalEfficiencyFactorofReinforcementforaMember
inUniaxialTensionorBending
Woven
Square
Mesh
Welded
Square
Mesh
Hexa
gonal
Mesh
Expanded
Metal
Mesh
Longi
tudinal
Bars
Global
efficiency
factor
Longitudina, l

Transverse t

At45
45 =

0.50

0.50

0.35
0.50

0.50

0.35
0.45

0.30

0.30
0.65

0.20

0.30
1

0.70
12.4.2.2 Tension:
Thenominalresistanceofcrackedferrocementelementssubjecttopuretensileloadingshallbeapproximated
by the load carrying capacity of the mesh reinforcement alone in the direction of loading by the following
equation:

N
n
= A
s
f
y
12.4.3
where
N
n
= nominaltensileloadresistanceindirectionconsidered
A
s
= effectivecrosssectionalareaofreinforcementindirectionconsidered
f
y
= yieldstressofmeshreinforcement
ThevalueofAsisgivenby

A
s
= A
si
i =1
N

12.4.4
Part6
StructuralDesign

6702 Vol.2
where
N = numberofmeshlayers
A
si
= effectiveareaofreinforcementformeshlayeri(Eq12.4.2)
12.4.2.3 Compression:
Asafirstapproximation,thenominalresistanceofferrocementsectionssubjecttouniaxialcompressionshallbe
derivedfromtheloadcarryingcapacityoftheunreinforcedmortar(concrete)matrixassumingauniformstress
distributionof

0. 85 f
c
where
f
c
isthedesigncompressivestrengthofthemortarmatrix.However,thetransverse
component of the reinforcement can contribute additional strength when square or rectangular wire meshes
are used. Expanded mesh contributes virtually no strengthening beyond that achieved by the mortar alone.
Slendernesseffectsofthinsections,whichcanreducetheloadcarryingcapacitybelowthatbasedonthedesign
compressivestrengthshallbeconsidered.
12.4.3 ServiceLoadDesign
12.4.3.1 Flexure:
For investigation of stresses at service loads, straight line theory (for flexure) shall be used with the following
assumptions.
a) Strainsvarylinearlywithdistancefromtheneutralaxis.
b) Stressstrainrelationshipsofmortar(concrete)andreinforcementarelinearforstresseslessthanorequal
topermissibleserviceloadstresses.
c) Mortar(concrete)resistsnotension.
d) Perfectbondexistsbetweensteelandmortar(concrete).
Tocomputestressesandstrainsforagivenloading,thecrackedtransformedsectionshallbeused.Theeffective
areaofeachlayerofmeshreinforcementshallbedeterminedfromEq(12.4.2).Thesamevalueofmodularratio
n
r
=E
r
/E
c
,maybeusedforbothtensileandcompressivereinforcement.RecommendeddesignvaluesofE
r
are
giveninTable12.4.1.Oncetheneutralaxisisdetermined,theanalysisshallproceedasforreinforcedconcrete
beamsorcolumnshavingseverallayersofsteelandsubjecttopurebending.
12.4.3.2 AllowableTensileStress:
Theallowabletensilestressinthemeshreinforcementunderserviceconditionsshallbetakenas0.60f
y
where
f
y
istheyieldstrength.Forliquidretainingandsanitarystructures,theallowabletensilestressshallbelimitedto
200N/mm
2
.Considerationshallbegiventoincreasetheallowabletensilestressesifcrackwidthmeasurements
onamodeltestindicatethatahigherstresswillnotimpairperformance.
12.4.3.3 AllowableCompressiveStress:
Theallowablecompressivestressineitherthemortar(concrete)ortheferrocementcompositeshallbetakenas
whereisthespecifiedcompressivestrengthofthemortar.Measurementsofthemortarcompressivestrength
shallbeobtainedfromtestson75mmx150mmcylinders.
12.4.4 ServiceabilityRequirements
FerrocementstructuresshallgenerallysatisfytheintentoftheserviceabilityrequirementsofChapter6except
fortheconcretecover.
12.4.4.1 CrackWidthLimitations:
The maximum value of crack width under service load conditions shall be less than 0.10 mm for noncorrosive
environmentsand0.05mmforcorrosiveenvironmentsand/orwaterretainingstructures.
12.4.4.2 FatigueStressRange:
For ferrocement structures to sustain a minimum fatigue life of two million cycles, the stress range in the
reinforcementshallbelimitedto200N/mm
2
.Astressrangeof350N/mm
2
shallbeusedforonemillioncycles.
Highervaluesmaybeconsideredifjustifiedbytests.
FerrocementStructures Chapter12

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6703
12.4.4.3 CorrosionDurability:
Particular care shall be taken to ensure a durable mortar matrix and optimize the parameters that reduce the
riskofcorrosion.
12.4.4.4 DeflectionLimitation:
Since ferrocement in thin sections is very flexible and its design is very likely to be controlled by criteria other
thandeflection,noparticulardeflectionlimitationisrecommended.
12.4.5 ParticularDesignParameters
12.4.5.1 The cover of the reinforcement shall be about twice the diameter of the mesh wire or thickness of
otherreinforcementused.Asmallercoverisacceptableprovidedthereinforcementisnotsusceptible
torapidcorrosion, the surface is protected byan appropriate coating, and the crack width is limited
to 0.05 mm. For ferrocement elements of thickness less than 25 mm, a cover of the order of 2 mm
shallbeprovided.
12.4.5.2 Foragivenferrocementcrosssectionoftotalthicknessh,themeshopeningshallnotbelargerthan
h.
12.4.5.3 Fornonprestressedwaterretainingstructuresthetotalvolumefractionofreinforcementshallnotbe
less than 3.5 per cent and the total specific surface of reinforcement shall not be less than 0.16
mm
2
/mm
3
.
12.4.5.4 Incomputingthespecificsurfaceofthereinforcement,thecontributionoffibresaddedtothematrix
shallbeconsidered,whilethefibrecontributionmaybeignoredincomputingthevolumefractionof
reinforcement.
12.4.5.5 Ifskeletalreinforcementisused,theskeletalreinforcementshallnotoccupymorethan50percentof
thethicknessoftheferrocementcomposite.
12.4.5.6 For a given volume fraction of reinforcement, better performance in terms of crack widths, water
tightness,andductilitymaybeachievedbyuniformdistributionofthereinforcementthroughoutthe
thicknessandbyincreasingitsspecificsurface.Aminimumoftwolayersofmeshshallbeacceptable,
butmorethantwolayersofreinforcementarepreferable.
12.4.6 DesignAids
The following nondimensional equation can be used to predict the nominal moment strength of ferrocement
beamssubjectedtopurebending:

M
n
f
c
bh
2

= 0. 005+ 0. 422 V
f
f
y
/ f
c ( )0.0772 V
f
f
y
/ f
c ( )
2
12.4.5
AdesigngraphrepresentingEq(12.4.5)isgiveninFig12.4.2.
12.5 FABRICATION
12.5.1 GeneralRequirements
This section specifies the requirements for the mixing, placing, and handling of materials used in ferrocement
construction.
12.5.1.1 Planning:
Plasteringforfabricationwithferrocementshallbecontinuousthroughthecompletionofthejob.Thisrequires
alargenumberofworkersinvolvedinplasteringandinmaintainingaconstantsupplyofmaterialsduringwork,
Part6
StructuralDesign

6704 Vol.2
mostofteninconfinedworkspaces.Adequatebondatcoldjointsmaybeachievedthroughsurfaceroughness
or treatment with bonding agents. Retarders may be useful in large time consuming plastering projects,
especiallyinhotweatherconditions.Planningforthejobshalltakeintoaccountalltheserequirements.
Fig.12.4.2ChartforStrengthDesignofFerrocementinBending
12.5.1.2 Mixing:
Anymethod,includinghandmixing,whichassuresahomogeneousmixtureofingredientsshallbesatisfactory.
Mixing may be accomplished in a mortar mixer with a spiral blade or paddles inside a stationary drum or in a
pan type mixer. The use of rotating drum mixers with fins affixed to the sides shall not be permitted. Mix
ingredientsshallbecarefullybatchedbyweight,includingthewater,andaddedorchargedinthemixersothat
thereisnocaking.Mixwatershallbeaccuratelyweighedsothatthewatercementratioiscontrolled.Thewater
cement ratio shall be as low as possible but the sand cement ratio shall be adjusted to provide a fluid mix for
initial penetration of the armature followed by a stiffer more heavily sanded mix at thefinish. Mortar shallbe
mixed in batches so that mortar is plastered within an hour after mixing. Retempering of the mortar shall be
prohibited.
12.5.1.3 MortarPlacement:
Mortar shall generally be placed by hand plastering. In this process, the mortar is forced through the mesh.
Alternatively,themortarmaybeshotthroughaspraygundevice.
12.5.1.4 Finishing:
Surfaces shall be finished to assure proper cover to the last mesh layer. The surface finish shall be slightly
roughenedifasurfacecoatingistobebondedlater.
Surfaces that are too smooth shall be mechanically abraded by sandblasting or other means of mechanical
abrasion. Alternatively, such surfaces may be etched with phosphoric acid, provided the residue left by it will
not interfere with specified finishes. Mild solutions of muriatic acid may be applied with proper attention to
corrosionpotential.Additionalcareshallbetakenwhenplasteringaroundopenings.
12.5.1.5 Curing:
Moist or wet curing is essential for ferrocement concrete construction. The low water cement ratio and high
cement factors create a demand for large quantities of free water in the hydration process, and the amount
permitted to evaporate into the air shall be kept to an absolute minimum. The use of fogging devices under a
moistureretainingenclosureisdesirable.Adoublelayerofsoakedburlapcoveredwithpolyethyleneorasoaker
hose may also be used. Continuous wetting of the surface or of wet burlap or the like shall be maintained to
avoiddryspots.Curingshallstartwithinareasonabletimeafterapplicationofthefinishinglayer.
12.5.2 ConstructionMethods
Allmethodsshallhavehighlevelqualitycontrolcriteriatoachievethecompleteencapsulationofseverallayers
ofreinforcingmeshbyawellcompactedmortarorconcretematrixwithaminimumofentrappedair.Themost
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
Y = 0.005+0.422X-0.077X
2
Y
=
M
/
1
'
b
h
?
2
.
c
n
X =
f y c
V
f
/
f'
FerrocementStructures Chapter12

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6705
appropriate fabrication technique shall be decided on the basis of the nature of the particular ferrocement
application,theavailabilityofmixing,handling,andplacingmachinery,andtheskillandcostofavailablelabour.
Severalrecommendedconstructionmethodsareoutlinedinthefollowingsubsections.
12.5.2.1 ArmatureSystem:
Thearmaturesystemisaframeworkoftiedreinforcingbars(skeletalsteel)towhichlayersofreinforcingmesh
are attached on each side. Mortar is then applied from one side and forced through the mesh layers towards
theotherside,asshowninFig12.5.1.
The skeletal steel can assume any shape. Diameter of the steel bars depends on the size of the structure.
Skeletalsteelshallbecuttospecifiedlengths,benttotheproperprofile,andtiedinpropersequence.Sufficient
embedmentlengthsshallbeprovidedtoensurecontinuity.Forbarsizes6mmorless,laplengthsfrom230to
300mmmaybesufficient.Therequirednumberoflayersofmeshshallbetiedtoeachsideoftheskeletalsteel
frame.
12.5.2.2 ClosedmouldSystem:
The mortar is applied from one side through several layers of mesh or mesh and rod combinations that have
beenstapledorotherwiseheldinpositionagainstthesurfaceofaclosedmould,i.e.amalemouldorafemale
mould. The mould may remain as a permanent part of the finished ferrocement structure. If removed,
treatment with release agents may be needed. The use of the closed mould system represented in Fig 12.5.2
tendstoeliminatetheuseofrodsorbars,thuspermittinganessentiallyallmeshreinforcement.Itrequiresthat
plasteringbedonefromonesideonly.
12.5.2.3 IntegralmouldSystem:
An integral mould is first constructed by application of mortar from one or two sides onto a semirigid
framework made with a minimum number of mesh layers. This forms, after mortar setting, a rigid but low
quality ferrocement mould onto which further layer of reinforcing mesh and mortar shall be applied on both
sides. Alternatively, the integral mould may be formed using rigid insulation materials, such as polystyrene or
polyurethane,asthecore.AschematicdescriptionofthissystemisgiveninFig12.5.3.
12.5.2.4 OpenmouldSystem:
Intheopenmouldsystem,mortarisappliedfromonesidethroughlayersofmeshormeshandrodsattached
toanopenmouldmadeofalatticeofwoodstrips.Theform,showninFig12.5.4,iscoatedwithareleaseagent
or entirely covered with polyethylene sheeting (thereby forming aclosed but nonrigid and transparent mould)
tofacilitatemouldremovalandtopermitobservationand/orrepairduringthemortarapplicationprocess.
Thissystemissimilartotheclosedmouldsysteminwhichthemortarisappliedfromoneside,atleastuntilthe
mouldcanberemoved.Itenablesatleastpartoftheundersideofthemouldtobeviewedandrepaired,where
necessary,toensurecompleteandthoroughimpregnationofthemesh.
12.6 MAINTENANCE
12.6.1 General
Terrestrialstructuresaresusceptibletodeteriorationfrompollutantsingroundwaterandthosethatprecipitate
from the air (acid rain). Environmental temperature and humidity variations also affect ferrocement durability
andmaintenanceprocedures.
Maintenanceshallinvolvedetectingandfillingvoids,replacingspalledcover,providingprotectivecoatings,and
cosmetictreatmentofsurfaceblemishes.Duetothethincoverinferrocement,muriaticacid(hydrochloricacid)
shall be used with extreme caution. Phosphoric acid and other nonchloride cleaners shall be the specified
alternative(seeSec12.5.1.4).
Repairs not involvinglargequantities of materials shall be accomplished by hand. Emphasis shall be placed on
the ability of the repair material to penetrate the mesh cage, to fully coat the reinforcing to inhibit corrosion,
andtobondtothesubstrate.Rapidsetandstrengthgainshallbetheoverridingconsiderationsforemergency
repairs. Protective coatings shall bond well and be alkali tolerant, thermally compatible, and resistant to
environmentalpollutantsandultravioletradiation,ifexposed.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6706 Vol.2
12.6.2 BlemishandStainRemoval
12.6.2.1 General:
Since ferrocement is usually less porous than conventional concrete, stains do not penetrate very deep in the
mortar matrix. Care shall be taken when preparing the surface not to diminish the thin cover of mortar over
ferrocementreinforcement.
12.6.2.2 ConstructionBlemishes:
Constructionblemishesareoftencausedbyimproperselectionoruseofmaterials,faultyworkmanship,uneven
evaporation, and uneven curing. Care shall be exercised to minimize these and the following causes of
blemishesinferrocement.

Fig.12.5.1ArmatureSystem

Fig.12.5.2ClosedmouldSystem
FerrocementStructures Chapter12

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6707

Fig.12.5.3IntegralmouldSystem

Fig.12.5.4OpenmouldSystem
a) Cementfromdifferentmillswillcausecolourvariation,althoughmostofthecolourinmortaris
duetothesandcomponent.Whereappearanceiscritical,careshallbetakentoobtainsand
fromasinglesourceandhaveitthoroughlywashed.
b) Mottlingresultsfromtheuseofcalciumchlorideorhighalkalicementcombinedwithuneven
curing.
c) Theuseofpolyethylenesheetmaterialtocoversurfacespromotesunevencuring.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6708 Vol.2
d) Thewatercementratioaffectstoneandsurfaceappearance.Lowwatercementratiowill
resultinadarkerappearance.
e) Hardsteeltowelingdensifiesthesurface,causingmorerapiddryingandalsoleavinga
darkenedsurface.
12.6.2.3 StainRemoval:
Treatmentofstainsshallbedonepromptlyafterdiscolorationappears.Thoroughflushingandbrushingwitha
stiffbristlebrushanddetergentisthefirstapproach.Ifthisisineffective,adilute(aboutthreepercent)solution
of phosphoric or acetic acid shall be applied. Another chemical treatment that may be considered safe and
effectiveisa20to30percentsolutionofdiammoniumcitrate,amildacidthatattackscalciumcarbonatesand
calciumhydroxides.Thistreatmentmakesthesurfacemoreporousandpromoteshydration.
When a stain has penetrated too deeply to be removed by surface chemical application and scrubbing, a
poultice or a bandage may be needed. A poultice is intended to dissolve the stain and absorb it into the
poultice.Thepoulticeismadebymixingoneormorechemicalssuchasasolutionofphosphoricacidwithafine
inertpowersuchastalc,whiting,hydratedlime,ordiatomaceousearthtoformapaste.Thepasteisspreadina
thicklayeroverthestainandallowedtodry.Abandagemayconsistofafewlayersofclothorpapertoweling
soakedinachemicalsolution.Morethanoneapplicationofapoulticeorbandagemaybeneededforstubborn
stains.
Caution:
Most of the chemicals used to remove stains are toxic and require safeguards against skin contact and
inhalation.Wheneveracidsareused,surfacesshallfirstbesaturatedwithwaterorthedissolvedstainmaterial
maymigratedeeperintotheconcreteandreappearatalaterdateasefflorescence.
12.6.2.4 Efflorescence:
Efflorescenceiscausedbydepositionofsaltsonthesurfaceduetotheevaporationofmigratingwaterbearing
saltsfromwithinferrocement;itistypicallyassociatedwithaporousferrocement.Watercementratioshallbe
limited to within 0.4 and the mortar well compacted to minimize efflorescence. Voids, if present, may be
treatedbybreakingintowithahammerandreplastering.Alternatively,voidsmaybedrilledintowithamasonry
bitandrepairedbyinjectinganonshrinkingcementgrout.
12.6.3 ProtectiveSurfaceTreatments
12.6.3.1 General:
Good quality mortar has excellent resistance to weathering. The application of protective surface treatments
canimprovetheperformanceofferrocementandextenditsusefulservicelife.Surfacetreatmentsshallbeused
toimproveappearance,hardenthesurface,andreducepermeability,thusguardingagainstthecorrosiveaction
ofacids,alkalinesalts,andorganicsubstances.
12.6.3.2 Hardeners:
Hardeners may be used to protect the ferrocement surface or to seal and prepare it for application of paints.
When a sodium silicate hardener is used, it shall be diluted with water. The actual proportion of water to be
usedshalldependonthemanufacturer'srecommendation.Thehardenershallbeappliedinmultiplecoatswith
the first coat being more dilute than the subsequent ones. Each coat must be completely dry before the next
coatisapplied.
Otherhardenersthatsealandpreparethesurfaceforapplicationofoilbasepaintsaremagnesiumfluorosilicate
andzincfluorosilicate.Thetreatmentshallconsistoftwoormoreapplications.Asolutioncontainingabout1kg
offluorosilicatecrystalsper10litresofwatershallbeusedforthefirstapplication;andasolutioncontaining2.4
kg per 10 litres of water shall be used for subsequent applications. After the last application has dried, the
surfaceshallbebrushedandwashedwithwatertoremoveanycrystalsthatmayhaveformed.
12.6.3.3 Coatings:
When resistance to abrasion is desired, ferrocement surfaces may be coated with polyurethanes, especially
those furnished in two part mixtures. Coatings formulated from acrylics may be used to provide resistance to
sunlightandweathering.Waterbasedacryliclatexhousepaintsmaybeusedforapplicationtodampsurfaces.
FerrocementStructures Chapter12

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6709
Foranysurfaceoppositeasurfacesealedwithanimpermeablecoating,anacryliccoatingformulatedtoallow
theescapeofwatervapourshallbespecified.
12.7 DAMAGEREPAIR
12.7.1 CommonTypesofDamage
Ferrocement structures shall be inspected, as part of a regular maintenance programme, to detect any of the
followingtypesofdamage.Appropriaterepairmeasuresshallthenbetaken.
12.7.1.1 Delaminations:
Delaminationsoccurwhenferrocementsplitsbetweenlayersinlaminatedconstructionsdueto springingback
or bridging of the mesh during construction. Delamination sometimes occurs at ornear the neutral axis under
impact or flexure when there are many voids in the interior layers. Such areas give off a hollow sound when
tappedwithahammerorstrokedwithasteelbar.
12.7.1.2 Spalls:
A spall is defined as a depression resulting when a fragment is detached from a larger massby a blow, by the
actionofweather,bypressure,orbyexpansionwithinthemass.Spallsshallbeconsideredlargewhentheirsize
exceedsapproximately20mmindepthor150mminanydimension,andshallberepairedbyreplastering.
Spalls are usually caused by corrosion of steel, which causes an expansive pressure within the ferrocement.
Chlorides in the concrete greatly increase the potential for corrosion of the steel. Under such conditions,
continued spalling is likely and the repair of local spall areas may even promote the deterioration of the
concretebecauseofthepresenceofdissimilarmaterials.
An area of steel corrosion and chloride contaminated concrete may be considerably larger than the area of
spalledconcrete,andthefullareaofcontaminationratherthanthespallitselfshallbebrokenandreplastered.
12.7.1.3 FireDamage:
Ferrocementmaybemoresusceptibletofiredamagethanconventionalconcretebecauseofthethincover.
If the fire were intense enough to release the amount of chemically bound water in the cement, destroy the
bondbetweenthecement andtheaggregate,oroxidizethereinforcement,thesurfacewouldbecharredand
spalledsothatthedamagecouldbeeasilyidentified.Fullscaleremovalandrepairshallthenberequired.
12.7.1.4 CracksandLocalFractures:
Hairline cracks and crazing due to temperature changes or drying shrinkage in the cover coat do not require
repair.Continuouswetcuringwillcauseautogenoushealing,andaflexiblecoatingwillconcealthecrackfrom
view.Ifcracksarecausedbycontinuingoverloadsorareduetostructuralsettlementandthecausecannotbe
removed, replacement or a structural overlay shall be required. Cracks due to occasional impact or overload
may be repaired. Local fractures are cracks in which displacement of the section has occurred as a result of
impact.
12.7.2 EvaluationofDamage
12.7.2.1 Evaluation of damage shall take into consideration its extent, cause, and likelihood of the cause still
beingactive.Themethodofrepairshallbedictatedbythetypeofdamage,theavailabilityofspecial
equipmentandrepairmaterials,andthelevelofskilloftheworkersemployed.Economicfactorsmay
influencethedecisionastowhethertherepairshallbeextensiveandpermanent,orlimitedinscope
inresponsetoanimmediateproblem.
12.7.2.2 Repairmaterialsshallbondtotheoriginalstructure,resistpollutantsinthesurroundingsoil,wateror
air, and respond the same way to changes in temperature, moisture, and loads. Removal of
deteriorated or chloride contaminated mortar trapped within the reinforcing mesh requires a large
amountofhandlabour,soitmaybeeconomical(andbetterforlongtermdurability)toreconstructor
Part6
StructuralDesign

6710 Vol.2
replaceanentireareausingtheoriginalstructureasaformthatcanbeleftinplaceorremovedafter
the overlaid structure has cured. Complete reconstruction shall be undertaken when chloride
contamination,meshcorrosion,anddeteriorationofthemortarareextensive.
12.7.2.3 Testing for damage in ferrocement may be done by tapping with a hammer to break into any voids
underthesurface,orbydrawingametalbaroverthesurfaceandlisteningforsoundsindicatingvoids
orthepresenceofdeterioratedconcrete.Ahighqualityferrocementshouldproduceabelllikesound
andresistmoderatelyseverehammerblowswithoutdamage.
12.7.3 SurfacePreparationforRepairofDamage
12.7.3.1 General:
Theprimaryobjectiveistoremoveanydeterioratedmortarormortarcontaminatedwithcorrosiveagentsand
toprovideasurfacetowhichtherepairmaterialscanbebondedproperly.Therougherthesurface,thegreater
istheareaavailableforbonding.
12.7.3.2 RemovalofDeterioratedConcrete:
As a first step in any repair all disintegrated, unsound, and contaminated mortar shall be removed. Saws and
chippinghammersusedforconventionalconcreteshallnotbeusedforferrocementunlesslargesectionsareto
becompletelyremoved.
Smallareasshallbepreparedbyhandhammeringjusthardenoughtopulverizedeterioratedorcrackedmortar,
butnottothepointofdamagingthereinforcingmesh.
Apneumaticneedlegunmaybeusedforcleaningoutbrokenferrocement,openingoutcracks,androughening
thesurface.
Particlesofsoundmortarembeddedinthemeshneednotberemovedprovidedtheyaresmallenoughnotto
interferewiththepenetrationofnewmortarandtheywillnotprojectfromthefinishedsurface.
12.7.3.3 Reinforcement:
Anyloose,scalycorrosionrevealedoncleaningoutthemortarshallberemovedbysandblasting,waterjet,air
blasting,orvacuummethods.
An alternative method for removing rust is to brush naval jelly or spray dilute phosphoric acid over the repair
areaandflushthoroughly.
Where the mesh cage has been displaced but is still intact, it may be pushed or jacked back in place and
supported securely to withstand the pressure of applying the repair material. Where the reinforcement has
beentorn,theoldmeshshallbelacedbacktoclosetheopening.
Whenrodssupportingthemeshcagearetorntheyshallbesplicedbya15diameteroverlapofthepartnerrod
oranchoredbyhooks.
12.7.3.4 Cleaning:
Looseparticlesanddustresiduefromhammeringorsandblastingshallbeairjettedorvacuumcleanedifepoxy
ormethymethacrylate(MMA)istherepairmaterial.Waterjettingmaybeusediftherepairistobemadewith
hydrauliccementorlatexmodifiedmortar.
Ifanairjetisused,thecompressorshallbeequippedwithanoiltraptopreventcontaminationofthesurface.
Surfaceoilordirtshallberemovedbytrisodiumphosphateorotherstrongdetergents.
12.7.3.5 Cracks:
Cracks may be cleaned by hammering out the mortar on each side of the crack and replastered with latex
mortar.
Ifopeningthecrackisnotfeasible,epoxyorMMAinjectionsystemsshallbeattemptedinaccordancewiththe
productdirections.Thecrackshallbecleanedfirstwithoilfreecompressedair,andsmall(about2to3mm)drill
holesshallbemadeatthehighestandlowestpointsinthecrack.Thesurfacebetweentheholesshallbesealed
with strong coatings or a pressure pad. Catalyzed epoxy or MMA shall be injected at the lower hole until it
comesoutattheupperhole.
FerrocementStructures Chapter12

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6711
Wherelatexcementgroutistobeused,theinteriorofthecrackshallbethoroughlysaturatedwithwaterand
allowedtodrain.
12.7.4 RepairMaterials
12.7.4.1 PortlandCementandSand:
PortlandcementusedforrepairshallconformtotherequirementsofSec12.3.1.
Sand which matches that used in the original construction may be used unless the need for the repair arose
because of reactive or contaminated sand. Neat Portland or blended cement paste shall be used to fill small
cracks,andamortarwithfinesandshallbeusedtofilllargercracksorvoids.Bothshallbeusedincombination
with latex for thin patches and overlays. Larger cracks shall be coated with neat cement slurry, and then dry
packedwithaverylowwatercementratiomortar.
The addition of latex to Portland cement mortar markedly improves bond to the substrate and the tensile
strength of the patch. Of the synthetic latexes, polyvinyl acetate and polyvinylidene are unsuitable for wet
environments.Acrylicsmaybeusedasadmixturestoimprovebondingandascuringcompounds.Acryliclatexin
concentratedformshallbedilutedto10to20percentsolidsandthenusedasthemixingwaterforthemortar.
Latexmortarsmaybeappliedtoadampsurface,butthepatchshallbeallowedtodrythoroughlybeforebeing
immersedinwater.
12.7.4.2 PolymerMortars:
Nonlatex polymer mortars shall require the use of surface dried and, preferably, oven dried sand. The
monomers have very low viscosity and so shall be mixed with thickening agents to be placed in any area that
cannotbesealedtightly.Epoxyresinsthataremoisturetolerantmaybeusedondampsurfaces.
Careshallbeexercisedinapplyingpolymersorthepromotersandhardenersusedwiththemwhicharetoxic.
12.7.4.3 Admixture:
Accelerators may be employed where cement alone is the repair material. Since chloride compounds may
promotecorrosion,nonchlorideacceleratorsshallbepreferredforallferrocement.Emergencyrepairsofsmall
areas below the waterline with hot plug, which is neat cement moistened to a putty consistency with a
concentrated solution of calcium chloride may be permitted. The hot plug may be carried in the hand or in a
plasticbagtothesiteoftheleak,pressedintothehole,andheldafewminutesuntilset.Permanentrepairshall
beaccomplishedassoonaspossibleusingmaterialswithoutchlorides.
12.7.5 RepairProcedure
12.7.5.1 Mixing:
Small quantities of materials required for ferrocement repairs may be hand mixed on flat surface or in a tray
using premixed dry ingredients. For large quantities, a plaster or pan mixer rather than a rotating drum type
mixer shall be used. For machine mixing water shall be put in first; then the cement, to form slurry; then the
pozzolan,ifused;andfinally,enoughsandtobringthemortartothedesireddegreeofworkability.
The consistency of the mortar shall be selected according to the nature of the repair. A slurry of cream
consistency shall be used first to paint the moistened edges of the repair area, fill cracks or small voids, and
thoroughly coat all the interior mesh and rods. After this, more sand shall be added until the mortar is stiff
enoughtoholditsshapewhenbroughtoutflushwiththefinishedsurface.
To avoid excessive amounts of entrained air, mortars containing acrylics or epoxies shall not be mixed longer
thantwominutes.Theyshallbeappliedwithinthirtyminutesofmixing.
12.7.5.2 FullDepthRepair:
When both faces are accessible, a fluid mortar shall be pushed through the mesh cage from one side until an
excessappearsontheoppositeface.Thisexcessshallthenbepushedbackandfinishedflush.Avibratingfloat
ortrowelmaybeusedtoplaceandfinishaverystiffmortar.Penciltypevibratorsshallnotbeused.
12.7.5.3 PartialDepthPatches:
Part6
StructuralDesign

6712 Vol.2
Theareatobepatchedshallfirstbesaturatedwithwater,thenairblownorblottedfreeofstandingwateruntil
onlysurfacemoist.Cementslurryofnotmorethan0.4watercementratioandofpaintlikeconsistencyshallbe
brushedoverthewholeareaandintoanyopeningsinthemesh.Thisshallbeimmediatelyfollowedbyaheavily
sandedmortarofthesamewatercementratio,whichshallbevibratedortampedintothepatchandfinished
flush.
12.7.5.4 Overlays:
The substrate shall be prepared in the manner prescribed in Sec 12.7.5.3 for patches. The old surface shall be
thoroughly cleaned or scarified by mechanical means and the repair materials shall match the thermal
characteristicsofthesubstrate.
Chemical etching shall be followed by mechanical abrasion, unless the surface is flushed with high pressure
waterjetequipment.
Forthinoverlays,velocityplacementsuchasspritzingorcastingbyhand,andshotcreting,shallbeused.
12.7.5.5 Shotcrete:
Shotcrete may be used in ferrocement repair when a large area is involved. Small, low cost portable plaster
pumpsoperatingontheMoynoprogressivecavityprinciplewitharotorinsideastatortubeshallbeadequate
forbothoriginalferrocementconstructionandrepair.
Shotcreteorplasteringequipmentmaybeusedforlargeoverlaysincorporatingadditionallayersofreinforcing
mesh by laminating techniques. Existing surfaces shall be scarified or sandblasted, then saturated with water
and allowed to damp dry just before the shotcrete or mortar spray is applied. An initial application of cement
slurry is not needed with shotcrete but a latex or wet to dry epoxy bonding compound may be used to
advantagewithrepairsmadewithplasteringequipment.
12.7.5.6 Curing:
AllPortlandcementpatchesandoverlaysshallbethoroughlycuredunlesslatexcompoundsareusedtosealthe
surface and furnish water for hydration. Curing shall be instituted immediately for thin patches and overlays.
Several layers of paper or cloth soaked in water and covered with a plastic sheet that is well secured at the
edges may be used on patches. A full plastic film covering overlays may be used but it may produce
discolorationwhereittouchesthesurface.
12.8 TESTING
12.8.1 TestRequirement
Testsandobservationsthatarecommonlymadeduringthedesign,construction,andsubsequentservicelifeof
concretestructuresshallalsobeapplicabletoferrocementstructures.Thetestprogrammeshallinclude
a) testsonphysical,chemicalandmechanicalpropertiesoftheferrocementingredients,suchas
waterpurity,sieveanalysis,meshstrengthetc.,
b) controltestsforfreshmortarmix,suchasslump,aircontentetc.,
c) testsonthemechanicalpropertiesofthehardenedferrocement,suchasbending,crackingand
fatiguestrengths,permeabilityetc.,and
d) inserviceconditiontests,suchaspotentialforcorrosion,cracking,durabilityetc.
For predicting the mechanical properties of ferrocement, the tests specified in Sec 12.8.2.1 through 12.8.2.4
shallbeconducted.
12.8.2 TestMethods
12.8.2.1 CompressiveStrengthandStaticModulusofElasticityofMortar:
Thecompressivestrengthandstaticmodulusofelasticityofthemortarusedforthefabricationofferrocement
shall be determined from 75 mm x 150 mm cylinders tested in accordance with ASTM C3986 and C46983,
respectively.
12.8.2.2 FlexuralStrengthofFerrocement:
FerrocementStructures Chapter12

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6713
Ferrocementspecimensshallbetestedasasimplysupportedbeamwiththirdpointloading.Thespantodepth
ratio of the beam specimen shall not be less than 20 and its width shall not be less than six times the mesh
openingorwirespacingmeasuredatrightanglestothespandirection.
12.8.2.3 TensilePropertiesoftheMeshReinforcement:
Squareorrectangularmeshesmaybetesteddirectlyintension;hexagonalmeshesandexpandedmetalmeshes
shall be tested only whileencapsulated in mortar.In the latter case the tensile test shall be performed on the
ferrocementmaterialasdescribedinSec12.8.2.4below.
For square and rectangular meshes, the yield strength, elastic modulus, and ultimate tensile strength shall be
obtained from direct tensile tests on samples of wires or flat coupons cut from the mesh. The test shall be in
accordancewiththefollowingguidelines(seealsoFig12.8.1).
1. The test specimen shall be prepared by embedding both ends of a rectangular coupon of mesh in mortar
over a length at least equal to the width of the sample. The mortar embedded ends shall serve as pads for
gripping.Thefree(notembedded)portionofthemeshshallrepresentthetestsample.
2. Thewidthofthetestsampleshallbenotlessthansixtimesthemeshopeningorwirespacingmeasuredat
rightanglestotheloadingdirection.
3. Thelengthofthetestsampleshallbenotlessthanthreetimesitswidthor150mm,whicheverislarger.
4. Measurements of elongations (from which strains are to be computed) shall be recorded over half the
lengthofthemeshsample.
5. Yieldstrainofmeshreinforcementshallbetakenasthestrainattheintersectionofthebeststraightlinefit
of the initial portion of the stress strain curve and the best straight line fit of the yielded portion of the stress
straincurve,asshowninFig12.8.1.Theyieldstressshallbetakenasthestresspointontheoriginalstressstrain
curveattheyieldstrainfoundabove.TheprocedureisdemonstratedinFig12.8.1.

Fig.12.8.1SchematicDescriptionofMeshTensileTestSampleandCorrespondingStressStrainCurve
12.8.2.4 TensileTestofFerrocement:
Direct tensile tests of ferrocement elements shall be made using rectangular specimens satisfying the same
minimumsizerequirementasthosesetinSec12.8.2.3forthemeshreinforcement.Thetestspecimensshallbe
additionally reinforced at their ends for gripping. The middle half of the nongripped (free) portion of the test
specimenshallbeinstrumentedtorecordelongations.Aplotoftheloadelongationcurveuptofailureshallbe
Part6
StructuralDesign

6714 Vol.2
usedtoestimatetheeffectivemodulusofthemeshsystemaswellasitsyieldstrength,ultimatestrength,and
efficiency factor. The yield strain and corresponding stress shall be determined in accordance with the
proceduredescribedinSec12.8.2.3.
RelatedAppendices
Appendix6.12.ACalculationofVolumeFractionofReinforcement
Appendix6.12.BCommonTypesandSizesofSteelMeshesUsedinFerrocement
13.1
This sectio
document
forcompo
13.1.1 S
The guide
composite
columnsc
and steel
together t
encased b
concretec
13.1.2 R
Thedocum
followinga
American
ASCE391
American
AWSD1.1
AWSD1.4
Canadian
CSAS160
13.1.3 M
Concretea
a)
b)
Higherma
13.1.4 G
In determ
considerat
detailing
constructi
theprovis
c
Steel
GeneralP
on states the
ts and provide
ositesectionsa
cope
elines included
emembersfre
composedofr
beams suppo
to resist ben
beams, constr
compositeme
Referenced
mentsreferen
additionsand
SocietyofCiv
Standardfor
WeldingSocie
04Structural
98Structural
StandardsAss
01DesignofSt
MaterialLim
andsteelreinf
) Forthedet
notlesstha
normoret
) Thespecifie
strengthof
aterialstrengt
GeneralPro
mining load ef
tionshallbeg
and materia
on shall comp
ionsinPart6
c
Concre
Provisions
scope of the
erequirement
andshearcon
d in chapter 1
equentlyused
rolledorbuilt
orting a reinf
ding. Simple
ructed with o
embersareals
Specificati
ncedinthese
modifications
vilEngineers
theStructura
ety
lWeldingCod
lWeldingCod
sociation
teelStructures
mitations
forcingbarsin
terminationof
an21MPano
han42MPaf
edminimumy
facomposite
hsarepermitt
ovisions
ffects in mem
giventothee
l properties
ply with the r
Chapter5.
eteCom
forSteelC
e specification
ts for materia
nnectorsarea
13 of part 6 o
dinmediumto
upstructural
forced concre
and continuo
or without te
soprovided.
ions,Codes
provisionssha
s:
alDesignofCo
deSteel
deReinforcing
s
ncompositesy
ftheavailable
rmorethan7
orlightweight
yieldstressof
columnshalln
tedwhenthei
mbers and co
effectivesectio
related to t
reinforced con
mposit
ConcreteCo
n, summarizes
als for steelco
lsoincluded.
of this code p
ohighrisebu
lsteelshapes
ete slab so in
ous composit
emporary sho
sandStand
allincludetho
ompositeSlabs
Steel
ystemsshallb
estrength,co
70MPaforno
tconcrete.
structuralste
notexceed52
iruseisjustifi
nnections of
onsatthetim
the concrete
ncrete and re
teStru
ompositeSt
s referenced
oncrete comp
presents the d
ildings.Thisc
orHSS,ands
nterconnected
e beams wit
ores, are inclu
dards
oselistedinP
s
besubjecttot
ncreteshallha
rmalweightc
elandreinfor
25MPa.
edbytesting
a structure t
meeachincrem
and reinforc
einforcing bar
uctural
tructuralM
specifications
posite membe
design guidelin
haptermainly
structuralcon
d that the bea
h shear conn
uded. Seismic
art6Chapter
hefollowingl
aveacompre
oncreteandn
rcingbarsused
oranalysis.
that includes
mentofloadi
cing steel po
design specif
Chapt
Memb
Members
s, codes and s
ers. General p
nes for steel
yaddressesco
ncreteactingt
ams and the
nectors and c
c provisions f
10Section2
imitations.
ssivestrength
notlessthan2
dincalculatin
composite m
isapplied.The
ortions of co
fications stipu
ter 13
bers
standard
rovisions
concrete
omposite
together,
slab act
concrete
for steel
withthe
h of
21MPa
gthe
members,
edesign,
omposite
ulated by
Part
Stru
13.
The
acc
13.
Two
dist
The
com
13.
For
com
com
per
con
13.
For
max
and
13.
She
hot
con
req
13.
This
com
13
13.2
This
(1)
(2)
(3)
spir
(4)

sr

Wh
A
g

t6
ucturalDesign
1.4.1 Resista
efactoredresi
ordancewith
1.4.2 Nomin
o methods ar
tributionmeth
e tensile stre
mpositememb
1.4.2.1 Plast
the plastic
mponents hav
mpression hav
rmitted to be
nfinement.
1.4.2.2 Stra
thestraincom
ximum concre
dconcretesha
1.4.2.3 Shea
ear connectors
trolled steel c
nnectors shall
uirementsof
.2 Desi
s section stat
mpositecolum
.2.1 Encase
2.1.1 Scope
ssectionappl
thesteelshap
thecrosssect
concrete enc
rals.Theminim
Theminimum
,shallbe0.00

here
=areaofcon
=grossarea
ancePriortoC
istanceofthe
Chapter10of
nalStrengtho
re provided f
hodandthest
ngth of the
bers.
ticStressDist
stress distrib
ve reached a
ve reached a
used for conc
inCompatibil
mpatibilityme
ete compress
allbeobtained
arConnectors
s shall be hea
channels. She
conform to t
Section13.3.2
ignofCom
es the design
mnsandconcre
edComposi
iestodoubly
peisacompac
tionalareaof
casement of t
mumtransver
mreinforceme
04,where
sr

sr
=
ntinuousreinf
ofcomposite
CompositeAc
steelmembe
fPart6.
fCompositeS
for determini
traincompati
concrete sha
ributionMeth
bution metho
a stress of F
y
stress of 0.8
crete compon
ityMethod
ethod,alinea
ive strain equ
dfromtestso
s
aded steel stu
ear stud desig
the requireme
2.4(4).
positeAxia
n guidelines fo
etefilledhollo
iteColumn
symmetricste
ctornoncom
thesteelcore
the steel core
rsereinforcem
ntratioforco
isgivenby:
g
sr
A
A
=

forcingbars,m
member,mm
ction
erpriortothe
Sections
ng the nomin
bilitymethod
ll be neglect
hod
d, the nomin
y
in either te
85 f
c
. For ro
nents in unifo
rdistribution
ual to 0.003 m
rfrompublish
uds not less th
gn values shal
ents of Sectio
alMembers
or two types
owstructural
ns
eelcolumnse
mpactsection;
ecomprisesat
e is reinforced
mentshallbea
ontinuouslong
mm
2

m
2

attainmento
nal strength
.
ed in the de
nal strength
ension or com
ound HSS fille
rm compressi
ofstrainsacr
mm/mm (in/in
hedresultsfor
han four stud
ll be taken as
n 13.3.2.4(3)
s
of composite
sections.
ncasedincon

tleast1perce
d with contin
tleast6mm
2
gitudinalreinf
ofcompositea
of composite
etermination
shall be com
mpression an
ed with concr
ion to accoun
ossthesectio
n). The stress
rsimilarmate
d diameters in
s per Sections
Channel conn
axial membe
crete,provide
entofthetota
uous longitud
permmoftie
forcing,
actionshallbe
sections: the
of the nomin
mputed assum
nd concrete c
ete, a stress
nt for the effe
onshallbeass
strain relation
rials.
n length after
s 13.2.1.7 and
nectors shall c
ers. These inc
edthat
lcompositec
dinal bars and
espacing.
13.2.1
edetermined
e plastic stre
nal strength
ming that ste
components
of 0.95 f
c

ects of concre
umed,withth
nships for ste
installation, o
d 13.3.2.4. Stu
conform to th
lude encase
rosssection.
d lateral ties o
in
ss
of
eel
in
is
te
he
eel
or
ud
he
ed
or
SteelConcre

f

13.2.1.2
Thedesign
composite
follows:
andwhere
A
s
=area
A
c
=area
A
sr
=area
E
c
=mod
E
s
=mod
=spe
F
y
=spec
F
yr
=spec
I
c
=mom
I
s
=mom
I
sr
=mom
K=the
L=late
w
c
=weig
Where
EI
eff
=effec
eteCompositeS
Compressive
ncompressive
ecolumnssha

c
=0.75(LR

(a) When
e
P

(b) When
e
P

Where

e
aofthesteels
aofconcrete,
aofcontinuou
dulusofelasti
dulusofelasti
ecifiedcompre
cifiedminimum
cifiedminimu
mentofinertia
mentofinerti
mentofinerti
effectiveleng
rallyunbraced
ghtofconcret
ctivestiffness
EIeff=EsIs
Where
2 1 . 0
1
+ = C
StructuralMemb
Strength
estrength,
c
P
llbedetermin
RFD)
o e
P P 44 . 0

=
o n
P P 0
o e
P P 44 . 0 <

n
P 87 . 0 =

y s o
F A P =

2
(E
P
e

=
section,mm
2

,mm
2

usreinforcing
cityofconcre
cityofsteel=
essivestrengt
myieldstress
myieldstress
aoftheconcr
aofsteelshap
aofreinforcin
gthfactordete
dlengthofthe
teperunitvol
ofcomposite
+0.5EsIsr+
2

+
s c
s
A A
A
bers
P
n
,andallowa
nedforthelim

c
=2.00(A

e
o
P
P
658 . 0
e
P 77
yr sr y
F A + + 0
( )
2
)
KL
EI
eff
bars,mm
2

ete 0.043 w
210MPa
hofconcrete,
ofsteelsectio
sofreinforcing
retesection,m
pe,mm
4

ngbars,mm
4
erminedinacc
emember,mm
lume1500w
esection,Nm
C1EcIc
3 . 0

ablecompress
mitstateof fl
ASD)
c c
f A 85 . 0
c c
f w
5 . 1
MPa
,MPa
on,MPa
gbars,MPa
mm
4

cordancewith
m
w
c
2500kg/
m
2

sivestrength,
lexuralbucklin
13
13
13
13
hChapter10P
m
3

13
13
c n
P ,fora
ngbasedonc
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
Part6
3.2.6
3.2.7
C
axiallyloaded
columnslende
Chapter13
encased
ernessas
Part
Stru
13.2
The
bed
13.2
The
spe
oft
13.2
Loa
ina
Wh
V=
A
s

P
o
=
Wh
tran
13.2
13.2
The
aro
The
t6
ucturalDesign
2.1.3 Tensile
edesigntensil
determinedfo
n
A P =
2.1.4 ShearS
eavailableshe
ecifiedinSecti
thereinforced
2.1.5 LoadT
adsappliedto
accordancewi
a) Whe
totr
= V V
here
=requiredshe
=areaofstee
=nominalaxia
hentheextern
nsfertherequ
= V V
b) Whe
bear
Pp=
Whe

B
=
wher
A
B
=
2.1.6 Detaili
2.1.6.1 Long
e concrete en
undthestruc
elongitudinal
a) Bec
b) Have
c) Belo
d) Spac
com
eStrength
lestrength,
t
orthelimitsta
y sr y s
F A F A +
0.90(LRFD)
Strength
earstrengths
on10.7plust
dconcretepor
Transfer
axiallyloaded
ththefollowi
entheexterna
ransferthereq

y s
P
F A
V 1
earforceintro
lcrosssection
alcompressive
nalforceisap
uiredshearfor

o
y s
P
F A
V

enloadisapp
ringstrength,
1.7fAB
re
0.65(LRFD)
e
loadedareaof
ngRequireme
gitudinalBars
ncasement sh
turalsteelcor
barsshall
continuousatf
eanareanot
ocatedateach
cedonallside
mpositesection
c
t
P
n
,andallo
ateofyielding
yr

shallbecalcula
theshearstre
rtionalone.
dencasedcom
ngrequireme
alforceisapp
quiredshearf

o
P

oducedtocolu
n,mm
2

estrengthwith
pplieddirectly
rce, ,asfo
liedtothecon

B
P
p
,andth

B
=
fconcrete,mm
ents
hall be reinfo
re.Theclearc
framedlevels
lessthan0.01
hcorner;and
esnotfurther
n.
wabletensile
gas
1.67(ASD)
atedbasedon
engthprovided
mpositecolum
ents:
lieddirectlyto
force,V,asf
umn,N
houtconsider
totheconcre
ollows:
ncreteofane
eallowablebe

2.31(ASD)
m
2

rced with lon

covershallnot
whenconside
1timesthetot

apartthan52
strength,P
n
/
neitherthesh
dbytiereinfo
mnsshallbetr
othesteelsec
follows:
rationoflengt
eteencaseme
ncasedcompo
earingstrengt

ngitudinal ba
tbelessthan
eredtocarryl
talgrosscross
25t/fytimeson
/
t
,forencas
13.2.8
hearstrength
orcement,ifp
ansferredbet
ction,shearco
13.2.9
theffects,N
ent,shearcon
13.2.10
ositecolumn
th,P
p
/
B
,of
13.2.11
rs and latera
40mm.
load;
ssectionalare
nehalfthelea
sedcomposite
ofthesteels
resent,orthe
tweenthestee
onnectorsshal
nnectorsshall
bydirectbear
theconcrete
al ties extend
ea;
astdimension
ecolumnssha
sectionalone
eshearstrengt
elandconcre
llbeprovided
beprovidedt
ringthedesign
shallbe:
ing complete
ofthe
all
as
th
te

to
n
ely
SteelConcre

13.2.1.6.2
Thelatera
a)
b)
Wherereq
thememb
HSSbotha
13.2.1.6.3
Shearcon
connector
encasedc
405 mm.
configurat
13.2.1.6.4
If the com
interconne
shapesdu
13.2.1.7
Thenomin
where
=cro
=spe
13.2.2 C
13.2.2.1
Section 13
withconcr
a)
b)
c)
d)
13.2.2.2
The design
composite
thefollow
eteCompositeS
Lateralties
ltiesshall
) Be15Mba
exceeds50
) Haveavert
i)
ii)
iii)
quired,shear
beratleastad
aboveandbel
ShearConn
nectorsshall
rsshallbedist
ompositecolu
Connectors t
tionsymmetri
Columnsw
mposite cross
ected with la
etoloadsapp
StrengthofSt
nalstrengthof
sc n
A Q = 5 . 0
osssectionala
ecifiedminimu
oncreteFil
Scope
3.2.2 applies
rete,provided
) Thecrosss
crosssectio
) Thewidth
y
F 1350
) Theoutside
28000/F
y

) Theconcre
MPaforco
Compressive
n compressive
e columns sha
wingmodificat
StructuralMemb
s
rs,excepttha
00mm;and
ticalspacingn
Twothirdso
16longitudin
500mm.
connectorstr
distanceof2.5
lowtheloadt
nectors
beprovidedt
tributedalong
umnabovean
to transfer ax
calaboutthe
withMultipleB
s section is b
acing, tie plate
pliedpriortoh
tudShearCon
fonestudshe
sc c c c
A E f
reaofstudsh
umtensilestre
lledHollow
to composite
dthat
sectionalarea
on.
tothicknessr

ediameterto
etestrengthis
olumnssubject
Strength
e strength,
c
all be determi
ions:
bers
t10Mbarsm
notexceeding
oftheleastsid
nalbardiamet
ransferringthe
5timesthew
transferregion
totransferthe
gthelengthof
ndbelowthel
xial load sha
steelshapea
BuiltupShape
built up from
es, batten pla
hardeningoft
nnectors
earconnector
u c
F

hearconnecto
engthofastu
wStructura
e members co
ofthesteelH
ratioofthewa
othicknessrat
between20a
tedtoaxialco
c
P
n
and allo
ined for the l
aybeusedwh
theleastofth
dedimensiono
ters;or
erequiredshe
idthofarecta
n.Themaximu
erequiredshe
fthemember
loadtransfer
ll be placed
xes.
es
m two or mo
ates or simila
theconcrete.
embeddedin
r,mm
2

dshearconne
alSection
onsisting of st
HSSshallcomp
allsofrectang
tionofcircular
and80MPafo
ompressionan
wable compre
imit state of f
hennosidedi
hefollowing:
ofthecrossse
earforceshal
angularHSSo
umconnector
earforceSect
ratleastadis
region.Them
on at least t
ore encased s
r component
nsolidconcret
13
ector,MPa

teel hollow st
priseatleast1
ularhollowst
rhollowstruc
oraxiallyload
ndbending.
essive strengt
flexural buckl
imensionofth
ection;
llbedistribute
r2.5timesth
rspacingshall
tionspecified
stanceof2.5t
maximumconn
two faces of
steel shapes,
s to prevent
teis:
3.2.12
tructural sect
1percentofth
tructuralsectio
turalsections
edcolumnsan
th, P
n
/
c
, fo
ling based on
C
hecomposite
edalongthel
ediameterof
be405mm.
in13.2.2.5.T
timesthedep
nectorspacing
the steel sha
the shapes
buckling of in
tions complet
hetotalcomp
onsdoesnote
doesnotexce
ndbetween2
or axially load
Section 13.2
Chapter13
section
lengthof
faround
Theshear
thofthe
gshallbe
ape in a
shall be
ndividual
ely filled
osite
exceed
eed
20and40
ded filled
.1.2 with
Part6
StructuralDesign

6720 Vol.2
c c yr sr y s o
f A C F A F A P + + =
2

13.2.13
C
2
=0.85forrectangularsectionsand0.95forcircularsections
c c sr s s s eff
I E C I E I E EI
3
+ + =

13.2.14
9 . 0 2 6 . 0
3

+
+ =
s c
s
A A
A
C

13.2.15
13.2.2.3 TensileStrength
Thedesigntensilestrength,
t
P
n
,andallowabletensilestrength,P
n
/
t
,forfilledcompositecolumnsshallbe
determinedforthelimitstateofyieldingas:
yr sr y s n
F A F A P + =

13.2.16

t
=0.90(LRFD)
t
=1.67(ASD)

13.2.2.4 ShearStrength
Theavailableshearstrengthshallbecalculatedbasedoneithertheshearstrengthofthesteelsectionaloneas
specified in Chapter 10 or the shear strength of the reinforced concrete portion alone. The shear strength of
reinforcedconcreteportionmaybedeterminedaccordingtoChapter6ofPart6.
13.2.2.5 LoadTransfer
Loads applied to filled composite columns shall be transferred between the steel and concrete. When the
external force is applied either to the steel section or to the concrete infill, transfer of force from the steel
section to the concrete core is required from direct bond interaction, shear connection or direct bearing. The
forcetransfermechanismprovidingthelargestnominalstrengthmaybeused.Theseforcetransfermechanisms
shallnotbesuperimposed.
When load is applied to the concrete of an encased or filled composite column by direct bearing the design
bearingstrength,
B
P
p
,andtheallowablebearingstrength,P
p
/
B
,oftheconcreteshallbe:
E c p
A f P = 7 . 1

13.2.17

B
=0.65(LRFD)
B
=2.31(ASD)
where
A
B
istheloadedarea,mm
2

13.2.2.6 DetailingRequirements
Whererequired,shearconnectorstransferringtherequiredshearforceshallbedistributedalongthelengthof
thememberatleastadistanceof2.5timesthewidthofarectangularHSSor2.5timesthediameterofaround
HSSbothaboveandbelowtheloadtransferregion.Themaximumconnectorspacingshallbe405mm.
13.3 DesignofCompositeFlexuralMembers
This section applies to composite beams consisting of steel sections interconnected with either a reinforced
concreteslaborasteeldeckwithaconcretecoverslab.Thesteelbeamsandthereinforcedconcreteslabareso
interconnected that the beams and the slab act together to resist bending. Simple and continuous composite
beamswithshearconnectorsandconcreteencasedbeams,constructedwithorwithouttemporaryshores,are
included.Designphilosophyforcompositecolumnssubjectedtobendingmomentsisalsostated.
SteelConcreteCompositeStructuralMembers Chapter13

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6721
13.3.1 General
13.3.1.1 Deflections
Calculation of deflections shall take into account the effects of creep of concrete, shrinkage of concrete, and
increased flexibility resulting from partial shear connection and from interfacial slip. These effects shall be
established by test or analysis, where practicable. Consideration shall also be given to the effects of full or
partialcontinuityinthesteelbeamsandconcreteslabsinreducingcalculateddeflections.
Inlieuoftestsoranalysis,theeffectsofpartialshearconnectionandinterfacialslip,creep,andshrinkagemay
beassessedasfollows:
a) Forincreasedflexibilityresultingfrompartialshearconnectionandinterfacialslip,thedeflections
shallbecalculatedusinganeffectivemomentofinertiagivenby

) (
25 . 0
85 . 0
s
I
t
I p
s
l
e
l + =

13.3.1
Where
I
s
=moment of inertia of a steel beam, or of a steel joist or truss adjusted to include the effect of
sheardeformations,whichmaybetakenintoaccountbydecreasingthemomentofinertiabasedon
thecrosssectionalareasofthetopandbottomchordsby15%orbyamoredetailedanalysis
P=fractionoffullshearconnection
=1.00forfullshearconnection
I
t
=transformedmomentofinertiaofcompositebeambasedonthemodularrationn=E/E
c

b) Forcreep,elasticdeflectionscausedbydeadloadsandlongtermliveloads,ascalculatedinItem
(a),needtobeincreasedby15%and
c) Forshrinkageofconcrete,usingaselectedfreeshrinkagestrain,straincompatibilitybetweenthe
steelandconcrete,andanageadjustedeffectivemodulusofelasticityofconcreteasitshrinksand
creeps,thedeflectionofasimplysupportedcompositebeam,joist,ortrussshallbecalculatedas
follows:

es
l
s
n
y
c
A
f
c
L L
s

8
2
8
2
= =

13.3.2
Where
L=spanofthebeam,joist,ortruss
=curvaturealonglengthofthebeam,joist,ortrussduetoshrinkageofconcrete
c=empiricalcoefficientusedtomatchtheorywithtestresults(accountingforcrackingofconcrete
intension,thenonlinearstressstrainrelationshipofconcrete,andotherfactors)
=freeshrinkagestrainofconcrete
A
c
=effectiveareaofconcreteslab
Y = distance from centroid of effective of effective area of concrete slab to centroidal axis of the
compositebeam,joist,ortruss
n
s
=modularration,E/E
c

where
) 1 (
'
+ =
c
E
c
E
13.3.3
=ageadjustedeffectivemodulusofelasticityofconcrete
Where
=agingcoefficientofconcrete
=creepcoefficientofconcrete
( )
s
I
ts
I p
s
I
es
I + =
25 . 0
85 . 0
13.3.4
Part
Stru
13.3
The
eac
13.3
The
pro
of c
sect
long
13.3
Wh
tos
flex
13
13.3
The
det

13.3
The
det
Alte
the
t6
ucturalDesign

W
I
3.1.2 Design
eeffectivewid
chofwhichsh
a) one
b) one
c) thed
3.1.3 ShearS
e available she
pertiesofthe
concreteencas
tion alone in a
gitudinalsteel
3.1.4 Streng
hentemporary
supportallloa
xuralstrength
.3.2 Streng
3.2.1 Positiv
e design posit
erminedfort
=0.90(LRFD)
a) For
M
n
s
sectio
b) For
M
n
sh
theli
3.2.2 Negati
e design nega
erminedfort
ernatively,the
compositese

b
=0
provi
a) The
b) Shea
c) The
deve
=effective
Where
ts
=transforme
nEffectiveWid
dthofthecon
allnotexceed
eighthofthe
halfthedista
distancetoth
Strength
ear strength o
steelsectiona
sed and filled
accordance wit
reinforcement
gthduringCon
yshoresaren
adsappliedpr
ofthesteelse
gthofComp
veFlexuralStr
tive flexural s
helimitstate

b
=
E
w
t
h
76 . 3
hallbedeterm
onforthelimit
E
w
t
h
76 . 3 >
hallbedeterm
mitstateofyie
iveFlexuralSt
ative flexural s
hesteelsectio
eavailableneg
ection,forthe
0.90(LRFD)
dedthat:
steelbeamis
arconnectors
slabreinforce
eloped.
emomentofin
edmomentof
dthofConcre
creteslabist
d:
beamspan,c
ancetothecen
eedgeofthe
of composite
aloneinaccord
composite m
th Part 6 Chap
t.
nstruction
notuseddurin
riortothecon
ectionshallbe
positeBeam
rength
strength,
b
M
ofyieldingas
=1.67(ASD)
y
F
E

minedfromthe
tstateofyieldi
y
F
E

minedfromthe
elding(yieldm
trength
strength,
b
M
onalone,inac
gativeflexura
limitstateof

b
=1.67
compactand
connectthes
ementparalle
c
nertiaofcomp
inertiabasedo
ete
thesumofthe
centertocent
nterlineofthe
slab.
beams with s
dancewithPar
members shall
pter 10 Section
ngconstructio
ncreteattainin
edetermined
mswithShe
M
n
and the a
follows:
plasticstressd
ing(plasticmo
esuperposition
moment).
M
n
, and the
ccordancewit
lstrengthsha
yielding(plas
(ASD)
isadequately
slabtotheste
ltothesteelb
positebeam,tr
onthemodula
eeffectivewid
terofsupport
eadjacentbea
shear connect
rt6Chapter10
be determine
n 10.7 or base
on,thesteelse
ng75percent
accordingto
earConnec
allowable pos
distributionon
oment).
nofelasticstre
allowable neg
ththerequire
allbedetermi
ticmoment),
ybracedaccor
elbeaminthe
beam,withint
uss,orjoistba
rration
s

dthsforeach
s;
am;or
tors shall be
0Section10.7
ed based upon
ed upon the pr
ectionalones
ofitsspecifie
Part6Chapte
ctors
sitive flexural
nthecomposit
esses,consider
gative flexura
mentsofPart
nedfromthe
with
rdingtoSectio
enegativemo
theeffectivew
asedonthemo
sideofthebe
determined b
7.Theavailable
n the propert
roperties of th
shallhaveade
edstrength
r10Section1
strength, M
n
te
ringtheeffect
al strength, M
6Chapter10
plasticstress
on10.6.
omentregion.
widthofthesl
odularration
s
eamcenterlin
based upon th
eshearstrengt
ies of the ste
he concrete an
equatestrengt
.Theavailab
10.6.
n
/
b
, shall b
tsofshoring,f
M
n
/
b
, shall b
Section10.6.
distributiono

lab,isproperly

e,
he
th
el
nd
th
ble
be
or
be

on
y
SteelConcreteCompositeStructuralMembers Chapter13

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6723
13.3.2.3 StrengthofCompositeBeamswithFormedSteelDeck
(1)General
The available flexural strength of composite construction consisting of concrete slabs on formed steel deck
connectedtosteelbeamsshallbedeterminedbytheapplicableportionsofSection13.3.2.1and13.3.2.2,with
thefollowingrequirements:
a) Thissectionisapplicabletodeckswithnominalribheightnotgreaterthan75mm.Theaverage
widthofconcreteriborhaunch,w
r
,shallbenotlessthan50mm,butshallnotbetakenin
calculationsasmorethantheminimumclearwidthnearthetopofthesteeldeck.
b) Theconcreteslabshallbeconnectedtothesteelbeamwithweldedstudshearconnectors19mm
orlessindiameter(AWSD1.1).Studsshallbeweldedeitherthroughthedeckordirectlytothe
steelcrosssection.Studshearconnectors,afterinstallation,shallextendnotlessthan38mm
abovethetopofthesteeldeckandthereshallbeatleast13mmofconcretecoverabovethetop
oftheinstalledstuds.
c) Theslabthicknessabovethesteeldeckshallbenotlessthan50mm.
d) Steeldeckshallbeanchoredtoallsupportingmembersataspacingnottoexceed460mm.Such
anchorageshallbeprovidedbystudconnectors,acombinationofstudconnectorsandarcspot
(puddle)welds,orotherdevicesspecifiedbythedesigner.

(2)DeckRibsOrientedPerpendiculartoSteelBeam
Concretebelowthetopofthesteeldeckshallbeneglectedindeterminingcompositesectionpropertiesandin
calculatingA
c
fordeckribsorientedperpendiculartothesteelbeams.

(3)DeckRibsOrientedParalleltoSteelBeam
Concretebelowthetopofthesteeldeckmaybeincludedindeterminingcompositesectionpropertiesandshall
beincludedincalculatingA
c
.
Formed steel deck ribs over supporting beams may be split longitudinally and separated to form a concrete
haunch.
Whenthenominaldepthofsteeldeckis38mmorgreater,theaveragewidth,w
r
,ofthesupportedhaunchor
rib shall be not less than 50 mm for the first stud in the transverse row plus four stud diameters for each
additionalstud.
13.3.2.4 ShearConnectors
(1)LoadTransferforPositiveMoment
Theentirehorizontalshearattheinterfacebetweenthesteelbeamandtheconcreteslabshallbeassumedto
be transferred by shear connectors, except for concreteencased beams as defined in Section 10.9.3.3. For
composite action with concrete subject to flexural compression, the total horizontal shear force, V , between
the point of maximum positive moment and the point of zero moment shall be taken as the lowest value
according to the limit states of concretecrushing, tensile yielding of the steel section, or strength of the shear
connectors:
Concretecrushing
c c
A f V = 85 . 0

13.3.5a
Tensileyieldingofthesteelsection
s y
A F V =

13.3.5b
Strengthofshearconnectors

=
n
Q V

13.3.5c
where
A
c
=areaofconcreteslabwithineffectivewidth,mm
2

Part
Stru
A
s

Q
poi
(2)
In
con
max
limi
whe
r
A
slab
yr
F
(3)
The
whe

(b)
row
tor

(b)
ave

sha
hav

ht

ina

mm
e
mid
and
sup
w
c

t6
ucturalDesign
=areaofste
n
Q =sumofno
ntofzeromo
LoadTransfer
continuous c
nsidered to ac
ximum negati
itstatesofyie
a) Tens
V =
ere
= area of a
b,mm
2

r
=specified
b) Stre

= V
StrengthofSt
enominalstre
n
Q =
ere
=crosssect
=moduluso
=specifiedm
=1.0;(a)fo
foranynumb
wthroughstee
ribdepth1.5
=0.85;(a)fo
foronestudw
erageribwidth
=0.7forthr
pe
= 1.0 for s
vingahaunch
=0.75;(a)fo
50mm;(b)f
acompositesla
=0.6for
m
dht
= distance
dintheloadb
pportedbeam
=weighto
eelcrosssecti
ominalstreng
ment,N
rforNegative
composite bea
ct composite
ive moment a
eldingofthest
sileyieldingof
yr
F
r
A

adequately de
minimumyiel
ngthofshear
n
Q

tudShearCon
engthofonest
c
E
c
f
sc
A = 5 . 0
tionalareaofs
ofelasticityof
minimumtens
oronestudw
berofstudsw
eldeckwithth
5
ortwostudsw
weldedthroug
htoribdepth
reeormores
studs welded
detailwithno
orstudsweld
forstudsweld
abwiththede
studswelded
e from the ed
bearingdirecti
),mm
fconcretepe
ion,mm
2

gthsofshearc
Moment
ams where l
ly with the s
and the point
teelreinforce
ftheslabrein
eveloped long
ldstressofthe
connectors
nnectors
tudshearcon
sc
A
p
R
g
R
c

studshearcon
fconcrete= 0
silestrengtho
weldedinaste
weldedinarow
hedeckorien
weldedinast
ghsteeldeckw
<1.5
studswelded
directly to th
otmorethan5
edinacompo
dedthroughst
eckorientedp
inacomposit
dge of stud sh
ionofthestu
runitvolume
connectorsbe
ongitudinal r
teel beam, th
of zero mom
mentinthesl
forcement
gitudinal reinf
ereinforcings
nectorembed
u
F

nnector,mm
2
0.043
c c
f w
5 . 1
ofastudshear
eeldeckribw
wdirectlytot
tedparallelto
teeldeckribw
withthedeck
inasteeldec
e steel shape
50percentof
ositeslabwith
teeldeck,ors
paralleltothe
teslabwithd
hank to the st
d(inotherwo
(1500w
c

etweenthepo
reinforcing st
he total horiz
ment shall be t
lab,orstrengt
forcing steel w
steel,MPa
ddedinsolidc
c
f ,MPa
rconnector
iththedecko
hesteelshap
othesteelsha
withthedecko
orientedpara
ckribwiththe
(in other wo
thetopflange
hthedeckorie
steelsheetus
beam
eckorientedp
eel deck web
ords,inthedi
2500kg/m
3
)
ointofmaximu
eel in the n
zontal shear f
taken as the l
thoftheshea
13.3.6a
within the effe
13.3.6b
concreteorin
13.3.7
orientedperp
e;(c)forany
apeandther
orientedperp
alleltotheste
edeckoriente
ords, not throu
ecoveredbyd
entedperpen
sedasgirderf
perpendicular
, measured at
irectionofma
umpositivem
egative mom
force betwee
ower value a
rconnectors:
fective width o

acomposites
endiculartot
numberofstu
atiooftheav
pendiculartot
eelshapeand
edperpendicu
ugh steel dec
deckorsheet
diculartothe
fillermaterial
rtothebeam
t midheight o
aximummome
momentandth
ment regions
en the point
ccording to th
of the concre
slabis
thesteelshap
udsweldedin
verageribwidt
thesteelshap
theratioofth
ulartotheste
k or sheet) an
steelclosures
beamande
m
andembedde
ande
midht
<5
of the deck ri
entforasimp
he
is
of
he
te
pe;
na
th
pe;
he
eel
nd
s
mid
ed
50
b,
ply
SteelConcre

(4)Strengt
Thenomin
where
=flan
=web
=leng
Thestreng
forceequa
(5)Requir
The numb
negative,a
Sections 1
fromSecti
(6)ShearC
Shear con
be distrib
specified.
point of z
point.
Shearcon
of formed
whichthe
shall be s
transverse
decksorie
in any dire
totalslabt
13.3.3 S
13.3.3.1
Slabs sha
composite
requiredb
13.3.3.2
Reinforcem
shallbean
continuou
specialatt
benotless
13.3.3.3
Unlessitis
section is
additional
strength o
areabeing
eteCompositeS
thofChannel
nalstrengthof
f
t
n
Q = ( 3 . 0
ngethicknesso
bthicknessof
gthofchanne
gthofthecha
alto ,cons
edNumberof
ber of shear
andtheadjac
10.9.3.2d(1) a
ion10.9.3.2d(
ConnectorPla
nectors requi
buted uniform
However, the
ero moment
nectorsshall
d steel decks. T
yarewelded,
six diameters
etothelongit
entedperpend
ection. The m
thicknessnor
labReinfor
General
ll be adequat
ebeamspana
bythespecifie
Parallelreinfo
mentparallel
nchoredbyem
us over the en
tention.Reinf
sthantwo15
Transversere
sknownfrom
unlikely, ad
reinforcemen
of the reinforc
greinforceda
StructuralMemb
ShearConnec
fonechannel
f
c
L
w
t + ) 5 . 0
ofchannelshe
fchannelshea
lshearconne
nnelshearco
sideringeccen
fShearConne
connectors re
entsectionof
nd 10.9.3.2d(
(3)orSection
acementandS
ired on each s
mly between
e number of
shall be suffic
haveatleast
The diameter
,unlesslocate
along the lo
udinalaxisof
diculartothe
maximum cent
900mm.
rcement
tely reinforce
andlongitudin
edfireresistan
orcement
tothespano
mbedmentin
nd support of
orcementatt
Mbarsorequ
einforcement
mexperiencet
ditional trans
nt shall be pla
cement. The a
ndshallbeun
bers
ctors
shearconnec
c
E
c
f

earconnector
arconnector,m
ctor,mm
nnectorshall
ntricityonthe
ectors
equired betw
fzeromomen
2) divided by
10.9.3.2d(4).
Spacing
side of the po
that point a
shear connec
cient to devel
25mmoflate
of studs shal
edoverthew
ongitudinal a
thesupportin
steelbeamt
tertocenter
ed to suppor
nalcrackingov
ncedesignoft
ofthebeamin
concretetha
f steel section
theendsofbe
uivalent.
concreteslab
hatlongitudin
sverse reinfor
aced in the lo
area of suchr
niformlydistrib
ctorembedde
r,mm
mm
bedeveloped
econnector.
ween the sect
ntshallbeequ
the nominal
oint of maxim
nd the adjac
ctors placed b
lop the maxim
eralconcrete
ll not be great
eb.Theminim
xis of the su
ngcomposite
heminimum
spacing of sh
t all loads an
verthesteels
theassembly.
nregionsofne
tisincompre
ns or joists fitt
eamssupport
bonmetalde
nalcrackingca
rcement or o
owerpart of t
reinforcement
buted.
edinasolidco
1
dbyweldingth
tion of maxim
ualtothehori
strength of o
um bending m
cent points o
between any c
mum moment
cover,except
ter than 2.5 t
mumcenterto
upporting com
beam,except
centertocen
ear connecto
nd to contro
section.Reinfo
.
egativebendi
ession.There
ted with flexi
tingribbedsla
ck
ausedbycom
other effectiv
he slab and a
t shallbe not
oncreteslabis
13.3.8
hechannelto
mum bending
izontalshearf
one shear con
moment, posi
f zero mome
concentrated
t required at t
tforconnecto
times the thic
ocenterspaci
mposite beam
thatwithinth
nterspacingsh
rs shall not e
l both cracki
orcementshal
ngmomento
inforcemento
ble end conn
absperpendic
positeaction
ve means sha
anchored so a
less than 0.00
C

thebeamfla
moment, po
forceasdeter
nnector as det
itive or negat
ent, unless o
load and the
the concentra
orsinstalledin
kness of the f
ingofstudco
m and four d
heribsofform
hallbefourd
xceed eight t
ing transverse
llnotbelesst
fthecompos
ofslabsthata
ections shall
ulartothebe
directlyover
all be provide
s to develop t
02 timesthe
Chapter13
ngefora
ositive or
minedin
termined
ive, shall
therwise
e nearest
ated load
ntheribs
flange to
nnectors
iameters
medsteel
iameters
imes the
e to the
thanthat
itebeam
aretobe
be given
eamshall
thesteel
ed. Such
the yield
concrete
Part6
StructuralDesign

6726 Vol.2
13.3.3.4 TransversereinforcementRibbedslabs
a) Wheretheribsareparalleltothebeamspan,theareaoftransversereinforcementshallbenot
lessthan0.002timestheconcretecoverslabareabeingreinforcedandshallbeuniformly
distributed.
b) Wheretheribsareperpendiculartothebeamspan,theareaoftransversereinforcementshallbe
notlessthan0.001timestheconcretecoverslabareabeingreinforcedandshallbeuniformly
distributed.
13.3.4 FlexuralStrengthofConcreteEncasedandFilledMembers
The nominal flexural strength of concreteencased and filled members shall be determined using one of the
followingmethods:
a) Thesuperpositionofelasticstressesonthecompositesection,consideringtheeffectsofshoring,
forthelimitstateofyielding(yieldmoment),where

b
=0.90(LRFD)
b
=1.67(ASD)
b) Theplasticstressdistributiononthesteelsectionalone,forthelimitstateofyielding(plastic
moment),where

b
=0.90(LRFD)
b
=1.67(ASD)
c) IfshearconnectorsareprovidedandtheconcretemeetstherequirementsofSection10.9.1.2,the
nominalflexuralstrengthshallbecomputedbasedupontheplasticstressdistributiononthe
compositesectionorfromthestraincompatibilitymethod,where

b
=0.85(LRFD)
b
=1.76(ASD)
13.3.5 CombinedAxialForceandFlexure
Theinteractionbetweenaxialforcesandflexureincompositemembersshallaccountforstabilityasrequiredby
ChapterC.Thedesigncompressivestrength,
c
P
n
,andallowablecompressivestrength,P
n
/
c
andthedesign
flexuralstrength,
b
M
n
andallowableflexuralstrength,M
n
/
b
,aredeterminedasfollows:

c
=0.75(LRFD)
c
=2.00(ASD)

b
=0.90(LRFD)
b
=1.67(ASD)
(1)Thenominalstrengthofthecrosssectionofacompositemembersubjectedtocombinedaxialcompression
and flexure shall be determined using either the plastic stress distribution method or the straincompatibility
method.
(2)Toaccountfortheinfluenceoflengtheffectsontheaxialstrengthofthemember,thenominalaxialstrength
of the member shall be determined by Section 10.9 with P
o
taken as the nominal axial strength of the cross
sectiondeterminedinSection10.9.4(13)above.
13.3.6 SpecialCases
When composite construction does not conform to the requirements of Section 13.2 and Section 13.3, the
strengthofshearconnectorsanddetailsofconstructionshallbeestablishedbytesting.
13.4 CompositeConnections
ThisSectionisapplicabletoconnectionsinbuildingsthatutilizecompositeordualsteelandconcretesystems.
Composite connections shall be demonstrated to have Design Strength, ductility and toughness that is
comparable to that exhibited by similar structural steel or reinforced concrete connections that meet the
requirementsinPart6Chapter10andChapter5,respectively.Methodsforcalculatingtheconnectionstrength
shallmeettherequirementsinthisSection.
SteelConcreteCompositeStructuralMembers Chapter13

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6727
13.4.1 General
Connections shall have adequate deformation capacity to resist the critical Required Strengths at the Design
Story Drift. Additionally, connections that are required for the lateral stability of the building under seismic
forces shall meet the requirements in Section 13.5 based upon the specific system in which the connection is
used.WhentheRequiredStrengthisbaseduponnominalmaterialstrengthsandnominalmemberdimensions,
thedeterminationoftherequiredconnectionstrengthshallaccountforanyeffectsthatresultfromtheincrease
intheactualNominalStrengthoftheconnectedmember.
13.4.2 NominalStrengthofConnections
The Nominal Strength of connections in composite Structural Systems shall be determined on the basis of
rational models that satisfy both equilibrium of internal forces and the strength limitation of component
materials and elements based upon potential limit states. Unless the connection strength is determined by
analysisandtesting,themodelsusedforanalysisofconnectionsshallmeetthefollowingrequirements:
(1) When required, force shall be transferred between structural steel and reinforced concrete through direct
bearingofheadedshearstudsorsuitablealternativedevices,byothermechanicalmeans,byshearfrictionwith
the necessary clamping force provided by reinforcement normal to the plane of shear transfer, or by a
combination of these means. Any potential bond strength between structural steel and reinforced concrete
shallbeignoredforthepurposeoftheconnectionforcetransfermechanism.
(2) The nominal bearing and shearfriction strengths shall meet the requirements in Part 6 Chapter 6 and 10,
except that the strength reduction (resistance) factors shall be as given in Part 6 Chapter6. Unless a higher
strengthissubstantiatedbycyclictesting,thenominalbearingandshearfrictionstrengthsshallbereducedby
25percentforthecompositeseismicsystems.
(3) The Design Strengths of structural steel components in composite connections, as determined in Section
13.2andSection13.3andtheLRFDSpecification,shallequalorexceedtheRequiredStrengths.Structuralsteel
elementsthatareencasedinconfinedreinforcedconcretearepermittedtobeconsideredtobebracedagainst
out of plane buckling. Face Bearing Plates consisting of stiffeners between the flanges of steel beams are
requiredwhenbeamsareembeddedinreinforcedconcretecolumnsorwalls.
(4) The nominal shear strength of reinforcedconcreteencased steel Panel Zones in beamtocolumn
connections shall be calculated as the sum of the Nominal Strengths of the structural steel and confined
reinforcedconcreteshearelementsasdeterminedinPart6Chapter10andPart6Chapter5,respectively.The
strengthreduction(resistance)factorsforreinforcedconcreteshallbeasgiveninPart6Chapter6.
(5) Reinforcement shall be provided to resist all tensile forces in reinforced concrete components of the
connections.Additionally,theconcreteshallbeconfinedwithtransversereinforcement.Allreinforcementshall
befullydevelopedintensionorcompression,asappropriate,beyondthepointatwhichitisnolongerrequired
toresisttheforces.DevelopmentlengthsshallbedeterminedinaccordancewithPart6Chapter6.Connections
shallmeetthefollowingadditionalrequirements:
(a)Whentheslabtransfershorizontaldiaphragmforces,theslabreinforcementshallbedesignedandanchored
to carry the inplane tensile forces at all critical sections in the slab, including connections to collector beams,
columns,bracesandwalls.
(b) For connections between structural steel or Composite Beams and reinforced concrete or Reinforced
ConcreteEncased Composite Columns, transverse hoop reinforcement shall be provided in the connection
regiontomeettherequirementsinChapter6ofPart6exceptforthefollowingmodifications:
(i) Structural steel sections framing into the connections are considered to provide confinement over a width
equaltothatoffacebearingstiffenerplatesweldedtothebeamsbetweentheflanges.
(ii) Lap splices are permitted for perimeter ties when confinement of the splice is provided by Face Bearing
Platesorothermeansthatpreventsspallingoftheconcretecover.
(c) The longitudinal bar sizes and layout in reinforced concrete and Composite Columns shall be detailed to
minimize slippage of the bars through the beamtocolumn connection due to high force transfer associated
withthechangeincolumnmomentsovertheheightoftheconnection.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6728 Vol.2
13.5 SeismicProvisionsforCompositeStructuralSystems
These Provisions are intended for the design and construction of composite structural steel and reinforced
concrete members and connections in the Seismic Load Resisting Systems in buildings for which the design
forces resulting from earthquake motions have been determined on the basis of various levels of energy
dissipationintheinelasticrangeofresponse.
13.5.1 Scope
ProvisionsshallbeappliedinconjunctionwiththeAISCLoadandResistanceFactorDesign(LRFD)Specification
forStructuralSteelBuildings,hereinafterreferredtoastheLRFDSpecification.Allmembersandconnectionsin
the Seismic Load Resisting System shall have a Design Strength as required in the LRFD Specification and shall
meettherequirementsintheseProvisions.TheapplicablerequirementsinPart6Chapter10shallbeusedfor
the design of structural steel components in composite systems. Reinforcedconcrete members subjected to
seismicforcesshallmeettherequirementsinChapter5and10ofPart6exceptasmodifiedintheseprovisions.
When the design is based upon elastic analysis, the stiffness properties of the component members of
compositesystemsshallreflecttheirconditionattheonsetofsignificantyieldingofthebuilding.
13.5.2 SeismicDesignCategories
The Required Strength and other seismic provisions for Seismic Design Categories, Seismic Use Groups or
SeismicZonesandthelimitationsonheightandirregularityshallbeasstipulatedinthePart6Chapter10.
13.5.3 Loads,LoadCombinations,andNominalStrengths
The loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated by the Applicable Building Code. Where Amplified
Seismic Loads arerequiredby these provisions, the horizontal earthquake load E(as defined in Part 6Chapter
10)shallbemultipliedbytheoverstrengthfactor
o
prescribedbythePart6Chapter10.
13.5.4 Materials
13.5.4.1 StructuralSteel
StructuralsteelusedincompositeSeismicLoadResistingSystemsshallmeettherequirementsinSection10.20
ofPart6inadditionSection13.1ofPart6.Thestructuralsteelsthatareexplicitlypermittedforuseinseismic
design have been selected based upon their inelastic properties and weld ability. In general, they meet the
following characteristics: (1) a ratio of yield stress to tensile stress not greater than 0.85; (2) a pronounced
stressstrainplateauattheyieldstress;(3)alargeinelasticstraincapability(forexample,tensileelongation of
20percentorgreaterina2in.(50mm)gagelength);and(4)goodweldability.Othersteelsshouldnotbeused
withoutevidencethattheabovecriteriaaremet.
13.5.4.2 ConcreteandSteelReinforcement
Concrete and steel reinforcement used in composite Seismic Load Resisting Systems shall meet the
requirementsinPart6Chapter5,andthefollowingrequirements:
(1) The specified minimum compressive strength of concrete in composite members shall equal or exceed 2.5
ksi(17MPa).
(2) For the purposes of determining the Nominal Strength of composite members, f
c
shall not be taken as
greaterthan10ksi(69MPa)fornormalweightconcretenor4ksi(28MPa)forlightweightconcrete.
Concrete and steel reinforcement used in the composite Seismic Load Resisting Systems described shall also
meettherequirementsinPart6Chapter6.
13.5.5 CompositeMembers
13.5.5.1 CompositeFloorandRoofSlabs
The design of composite floor and roof slabs shall meet the requirements of ASCE 391. Composite slab
diaphragmsshallmeettherequirementsinthisSection.
DetailsshallbedesignedtotransferforcesbetweenthediaphragmandBoundaryMembers,CollectorElements,
andelementsofthehorizontalframingsystem.
SteelConcreteCompositeStructuralMembers Chapter13

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6729
The nominal shearstrength of composite diaphragms and concretefilled steeldeck diaphragmsshall be taken
asthenominalshearstrengthofthereinforcedconcreteabovethetopofthesteeldeckribsinaccordancewith
Part6Chapter5.Alternatively,thecompositediaphragmdesignshearstrengthshallbedeterminedbyinplane
sheartestsofconcretefilleddiaphragms.
13.5.5.2 CompositeBeams
Composite Beams shall meet the requirements in Section 13.3. Composite Beams that are part of CSMF shall
alsomeetthefollowingrequirements:
(1)Thedistancefromthemaximumconcretecompressionfibertotheplasticneutralaxisshallnotexceed:

+
+
s
E
y
F
b
d
con
Y
1700
1

13.5.1
where
Y
con
=distancefromthetopofthesteelbeamtothetopofconcrete,mm
d
b
=depthofthesteelbeam,mm
F
y
=specifiedminimumyieldstrengthofthesteelbeam,MPa
E
s
=modulusofelasticityofthesteelbeam,MPa
(2) Beam flanges shall meet the requirements in Part 6 Section 10.20.9.4.2, except when fully reinforced
concreteencased compression elements have a reinforced concrete cover of at least 2 in. (50 mm) and
confinement is provided by hoop reinforcement in regions where plastic hinges are expected to occur under
seismicdeformations.HoopreinforcementshallmeettherequirementsinPart6Chapter6.
13.5.5.3 ReinforcedConcreteEncasedCompositeColumns
This Section is applicable to columns that: (1) consist of reinforcedconcrete encased structural steel sections
with a structuralsteel areathat comprises at least 4 percent of the total compositecolumn crosssection;and
(2) meet the additional limitations in Section 13.2.2.1. Such columns shall meet the requirements in Section
13.2.2, except as modified in this Section. Additional requirements, as specified for intermediate and special
seismicsystemsinSections13.5.5.3.2and13.5.5.3.3,shallapplyasrequired.
Columns that consist of reinforcedconcreteencased structural steel sections with a structural steel area that
comprises less than 4 percent of the total composite column crosssection shall meet the requirements for
reinforcedconcretecolumnsinPart6Chapter5exceptasmodifiedfor:
(1)ThesteelshapeshearconnectorsinSection13.5.4.3.1(2).
(2)Thecontributionofthereinforcedconcreteencasedstructuralsteelsectiontothestrengthofthecolumnas
providedinPart6Chapter6.
(3) The seismic requirements for reinforced concrete columns as specified in the description of the composite
seismicsystemsinSections13.5.5.3.1through13.5.5.3.3.
13.5.5.3.1 OrdinarySeismicSystemRequirements
The following requirements for ReinforcedConcreteEncased Composite Columns are applicable to all
compositesystems:
(1) The nominal shear strength of the column shall be determined as the nominal shear strength of the
structural shape plus the nominal shear strength that is provided by the tie reinforcement in the reinforced
concrete encasement. The nominal shear strength of the structural steel section shall be determined in
accordance with Section 10.20 of Chapter 6. The nominal shear strength of the tie reinforcement shall be
determinedinaccordancewithPart6Chapter5.InPart6Chapter5,thedimensionb
w
shallequalthewidthof
theconcretecrosssectionminusthewidthofthestructuralshapemeasuredperpendiculartothedirectionof
shear. The nominal shear strength shall be multiplied by
v
equal to 0.75 to determine the design shear
strength.
(2) Composite Columns that are designed to share the applied loads between the structural steel section and
reinforcedconcreteshallhaveshearconnectorsthatmeetthefollowingrequirements:
Part6
StructuralDesign

6730 Vol.2
(a) If an external member is framed directly to the structural steel section to transfer a vertical reaction V
u
,
shear connectors shall be provided to transfer the force V
u
(1 A
s
F
y
/P
n
) between the structural steel section
and the reinforced concrete, where As is the area of the structural steel section, F
y
is the specified minimum
yield strength of the structural steel section, and P
n
is the nominal compressive strength of the Composite
Column.
(b)Ifanexternalmemberisframeddirectlyto thereinforcedconcretetotransferaverticalreactionV
u
,shear
connectors shall be provided to transfer the force V
u
A
s
F
y
/P
n
between the structural steel section and the
reinforcedconcrete,whereA
s
,F
y
andP
n
areasdefinedabove.
(c)Themaximumspacingofshearconnectorsshallbe16in.(406mm)withattachmentalongtheoutsideflange
facesoftheembeddedshape.
(3)Themaximumspacingoftransversetiesshallbetheleastofthefollowing:
(a)onehalftheleastdimensionofthesection
(b)16longitudinalbardiameters
(c)48tiediameters
Transversetiesshallbelocatedverticallywithinonehalfthetiespacingabovethetopofthefootingorlowest
beam or slab in any story and shall be spaced as provided herein within onehalf the tie spacing below the
lowestbeamorslabframingintothecolumn.
Transverse bars shall have a diameter that is not less than onefiftieth of greatest side dimension of the
compositemember,exceptthattiesshallnotbesmallerthanNo.3barsandneednotbelargerthanNo.5bars.
Alternatively, welded wire fabric of equivalent area is permitted as transverse reinforcement except when
prohibitedforintermediateandspecialsystems.
(4)AllLoadCarryingReinforcementshallmeetthedetailingandsplicerequirementsinPart6Chapter5.Load
CarryingReinforcementshallbeprovidedateverycornerofarectangularcrosssection.Themaximumspacing
ofotherloadcarryingorrestraininglongitudinalreinforcementshallbeonehalfoftheleastsidedimensionof
thecompositemember.
(5) Splices and end bearing details for reinforcedconcreteencased structural steel sections shall meet the
requirementsinChapter5ofPart6.Ifadversebehavioraleffectsduetotheabruptchangeinmemberstiffness
and nominal tensile strength occur when reinforcedconcrete encasement of a structural steel section is
terminated, either at a transition to a pure reinforced concrete column or at the Column Base, they shall be
consideredinthedesign.
13.5.5.3.2 IntermediateSeismicSystemRequirements
ReinforcedConcreteEncased Composite Columns in intermediate seismic systems shall meet the following
requirementsinadditiontothoseinSection13.5.5.3.1:
(1)Themaximumspacingoftransversebarsatthetopandbottomshallbetheleastofthefollowing:
a) onehalftheleastdimensionofthesection
b) 8longitudinalbardiameters
c) 24tiebardiameters
d) 12in.(305mm)
These spacings shall be maintained over a vertical distance equal to the greatest of the following lengths,
measuredfromeachjointfaceandonbothsidesofanysectionwhereflexuralyieldingisexpectedtooccur:
a) onesixththeverticalclearheightofthecolumn
b) themaximumcrosssectionaldimension
c) 18in.(457mm)
(2)Tiespacingovertheremainingcolumnlengthshallnotexceedtwicethespacingdefinedabove.
(3)Weldedwirefabricisnotpermittedastransversereinforcementinintermediateseismicsystems.
13.5.5.3.3 SpecialSeismicSystemRequirements
Reinforcedconcreteencased columns for special seismic systems shall meet the following requirements in
additiontothoseinSections13.5.4.3.2andSections13.5.4.4.3:
(1) The required axial strength for ReinforcedConcreteEncased Composite Columns and splice details shall
meettherequirementsinSection13.2.
SteelConcreteCompositeStructuralMembers Chapter13

BangladeshNationalBuildingCode2012 6731
(2)LongitudinalLoadCarryingReinforcementshallmeettherequirementsinPart6Chapter6.
(3) Transverse reinforcement shall be hoop reinforcement as defined in Part 6 Chapter 6 and shall meet the
followingrequirements:
a) TheminimumareaoftiereinforcementA
sh
shallmeetthefollowingrequirement:

=
yh
F
c
f
n
P
s
A
y
F
s
cc
h
sh
A
'
1 09 . 0

13.5.2
where
h
cc
= crosssectional dimension of the confined core measured centertocenter of the tie reinforcement,
mm
s=spacingoftransversereinforcementmeasuredalongthelongitudinalaxisofthestructuralmember,mm
F
y
=specifiedminimumyieldstrengthofthestructuralsteelcore,MPa
A
s
=crosssectionalareaofthestructuralcore,mm
2

P
n
= nominal axial compressive strength of the Composite Column calculated in accordance with the LRFD
Specification,N
f
c

=specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete,MPa
F
yh
=specifiedminimumyieldstrengthoftheties,MPa
Equation13.5.2neednotbesatisfiediftheNominalStrengthofthereinforcedconcreteencasedstructural
steelsectionaloneisgreaterthan1.0D+0.5L.
b) Themaximumspacingoftransversereinforcementalongthelengthofthecolumnshallbethe
lesserof6longitudinalloadcarryingbardiametersand152mm(6in.).
c) WhenspecifiedinSections13.5.5.3.3(4),(5)or(6),themaximumspacingoftransverse
reinforcementshallbethelesserofonefourththeleastmemberdimensionand102mm(4in.).
Forthisreinforcement,crossties,legsofoverlappinghoops,andotherconfiningreinforcement
shallbespacednotmorethan355mm(14in.)oncenterinthetransversedirection.
(4) ReinforcedConcreteEncased Composite Columns in Braced Frames with axial compression forces that are
largerthan0.2timesPoshallhavetransversereinforcementasspecifiedinSection13.5.5.3.3(3),overthetotal
element length. This requirement need not be satisfied if the Nominal Strength of the reinforcedconcrete
encasedsteelsectionaloneisgreaterthan1.0D+0.5L.
(5)CompositeColumnssupportingreactionsfromdiscontinuedstiffmembers,suchaswallsorBracedFrames,
shallhavetransversereinforcementasspecifiedinSection13.5.5.3.3(3)(c)overthefulllengthbeneaththelevel
atwhichthediscontinuityoccursiftheaxialcompressionforceexceeds0.1timesP
o
.Transversereinforcement
shall extend into the discontinued member for at least the length required to develop full yielding in the
reinforcedconcreteencasedstructuralsteelsectionandlongitudinalreinforcement.Thisrequirementneednot
besatisfiediftheNominalStrengthofthereinforcedconcreteencasedstructuralsteelsectionaloneisgreater
than1.0D+0.5L.
(6) ReinforcedConcreteEncased Composite Columns that are used in CSMF shall meet the following
requirements:
a) Transversereinforcementshallmeettherequirementsin13.5.5.3.3(3)(c)atthetopandbottomof
thecolumnovertheregionspecifiedinSection6.4b.
b) Thestrongcolumn/weakbeamdesignrequirementsinshallbesatisfied.ColumnBasesshallbe
detailedtosustaininelasticflexuralhinging.
c) TheminimumrequiredshearstrengthofthecolumnshallmeettherequirementsinPart6Chapter
5.
(7) When the column terminates on a footing or mat foundation, the transverse reinforcement as specified in
thissectionshallextendintothefootingormatatleast305mm(12in.).Whenthecolumnterminatesonawall,
thetransversereinforcementshallextendintothewallforatleastthelengthrequiredtodevelopfullyieldingin
thereinforcedconcreteencasedstructuralsteelsectionandlongitudinalreinforcement.
(8)Weldedwirefabricisnotpermittedastransversereinforcementforspecialseismicsystems.
Part6
StructuralDesign

6732 Vol.2
13.5.5.4 ConcreteFilledCompositeColumns
This Section is applicable to columns that: (1) consist of concretefilled steel rectangular or circular hollow
structural sections (HSS) with a structural steel area that comprises at least 4 percent of the total composite
columncrosssection;and(2)meettheadditionallimitationsinSection13.2.Suchcolumnsshallbedesignedto
meettherequirementsinSection13.2,exceptasmodifiedinthisSection.
The design shear strength of the Composite Column shall be the design shear strength of the structural steel
sectionalone.
Inthespecialseismicsystemsdescribedin,membersandcolumnsplicesforConcreteFilledCompositeColumns
shallalsomeettherequirementsinPart6Section10.20.
ConcreteFilledCompositeColumnsusedinCSMFshallmeetthefollowingadditionalrequirements:
(1)TheminimumrequiredshearstrengthofthecolumnshallmeettherequirementsinPart6Chapter5.
(2)Thestrongcolumn/weakbeamdesignrequirementsshallbemet.ColumnBasesshallbedesignedtosustain
inelasticflexuralhinging.
(3)TheminimumwallthicknessofconcretefilledrectangularHSSshallequal ( )
s
E
y
F b 2 / fortheflatwidthb
ofeachface,wherebisasdefinedinPart6Chapter10Table10.2.1.
13.5.6 CompositeSteelPlateShearWalls(CSPW)
13.5.6.1 Scope
This Section is applicable to structural walls consisting of steel plates with reinforced concrete encasement on
one or both sides of the plate and structural steel or composite Boundary Members. CSPW shall meet the
requirementsofthissection.
13.5.6.2 WallElements
13.5.6.2.1 NominalShearStrength
The nominal shear strength of CSPW with a stiffened plate conforming to Section 13.5.4.2.2 shall be
determinedas:
y
F
sp
A
ns
V 6 . 0 =

13.5.3
where
V
ns
=nominalshearstrengthofthesteelplate,N
A
sp
=horizontalareaofstiffenedsteelplate,mm
2

F
y
=specifiedminimumyieldstrengthoftheplate,MPa
The nominal shear strength of CSPW with a plate that does not meet the stiffening requirements in Section
13.5.4.2.2shallbebaseduponthestrengthoftheplate,excludingthestrengthofthereinforcedconcrete,and
meettherequirementsinthePart6Chapter10,includingtheeffectsofbucklingoftheplate.
13.5.6.2.2 DetailingRequirements
The steelplate shall be adequately stiffened by encasement orattachment to the reinforced concrete if it can
bedemonstratedwithanelasticplatebucklinganalysisthatthecompositewallcanresistanominalshearforce
equal to V
ns
. The concrete thickness shall be a minimum of 102 mm (4 in.) on each side when concrete is
providedonbothsidesofthesteelplateand200mm(8in.)whenconcreteisprovidedononesideofthesteel
plate.Headedshearstudconnectorsorothermechanicalconnectorsshallbeprovidedtopreventlocalbuckling
andseparationoftheplateandreinforcedconcrete.Horizontalandverticalreinforcementshallbeprovidedin
the concrete encasement to meet the detailing requirements in Part 6 Chapter 5. The reinforcement ratio in
bothdirectionsshallnotbelessthan0.0025;themaximumspacingbetweenbarsshallnotexceed455mm(18
in.).
ThesteelplateshallbecontinuouslyconnectedonalledgestostructuralsteelframingandBoundaryMembers
withweldsand/orslipcriticalhighstrengthboltstodevelopthenominalshearstrengthoftheplate.TheDesign
StrengthofweldedandboltedconnectorsshallmeettheadditionalrequirementsinPart6Chapter10.